2013 Scion FR-S Repair Manual

AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: COMPONENTS (2013 ...
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/...
Last Modified: 8-1-2012
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZR01CX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:23 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: INSTALLATION (2013...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZQ01TX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 3 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 3 clamps and install the No. 3 antenna cord sub-assembly.
2. INSTALL AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the amplifier antenna assembly.
(b) Place the amplifier antenna cord in the amplifier antenna

cutout.
(c) Install the amplifier antenna assembly with the nut.

Torque: 4.5 Nm (46 kgfcm, 40inlbf)
Text in Illustration
*1
Nut
*2
Amplifier Antenna Cord
3. INSTALL ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

4. INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:24 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZS01UX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

3. REMOVE AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the connector.
(b) Remove the nut.
(c) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the amplifier antenna

assembly.
4. REMOVE NO. 3 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 3 clamps and remove the No. 3 antenna cord
sub-assembly.
8/5/2012 1:24 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
2 of 2
8/5/2012 1:24 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCA...
1 of 2
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012A606KX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 1:25 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCA...
2 of 2
8/5/2012 1:25 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DI...
1 of 2
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012AB0ADX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
8/5/2012 1:25 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DI...
2 of 2
8/5/2012 1:25 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: COMPONENTS (201...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZ301FX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:26 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSPECTION (2013 ...
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020Q204DX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY
(a) With the speaker installed, check that there is no looseness or other abnormalities.
(b) Check that there is no foreign matter in the speaker, no tears on the speaker cone or other
abnormalities.
(c) Measure the resistance of the speaker.
Standard Resistance:
TESTER CONNECTION CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
Always
2.6 to 3.2
If the result is not as specified, replace the speaker.

*a
1 of 1
Component without harness connected

(Front No. 1 Speaker Assembly)
8/5/2012 1:27 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSTALLATION (201...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZ201QX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the RH and LH sides.
1. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the front No. 1 speaker assembly with the 3 screws.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the speaker cone.
(b) Connect the connector.
2. INSTALL FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

3. INSTALL DOOR ARMREST COVER
4. INITIALIZE POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM
5. INSPECT POWER WINDOW OPERATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:27 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZ401QX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE DOOR ARMREST COVER

2. REMOVE FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 3 screws and front No. 1 speaker assembly.

NOTICE:
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:27 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003AW400VX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:33 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers)...
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VEM01UX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
(a) Check that there is no foreign matter in the front No. 2 speaker assembly, no tears on the front No. 4
speaker assembly cone or other abnormalities.
(b) Measure the resistance of the front No. 2 speaker assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 (+) - 2 (+)
Always
2.8 to 3.8
3 (-) - 4 (-)
Always
2.8 to 3.8
If the result is not as specified, replace the front No. 2

speaker assembly.
*a
1 of 1

(Front No. 2 speaker assembly)
8/5/2012 1:34 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VEL02GX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

(a) Engage the 3 claws to install the front No. 2 speaker assembly to the No. 1 instrument panel speaker
panel sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the cone part of the speaker.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:34 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VEO02CX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Disengage the 3 claws and remove the front No. 2 speaker
assembly from the No. 1 instrument speaker panel
sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:34 PM
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003AW400WX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 8 Speakers): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:35 PM
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VEM01VX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 8 Speakers): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
(a) Check that there is no foreign matter in the front No. 3 speaker assembly, no tears on the front No. 3
speaker assembly cone or other abnormalities.
(b) Measure the resistance of the front No. 3 speaker assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
Always
3.7 to 4.7
If the result is not as specified, replace the front No. 3

speaker assembly.
*a
1 of 1

(Front No. 3 speaker assembly)
8/5/2012 1:36 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VEL02HX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 8 Speakers): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

(a) Connect the connector.
(b) Install the front No. 3 speaker assembly with the 2 bolts.
NOTICE:
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:37 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VEO02DX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 8 Speakers): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the front No. 3 speaker assembly.
NOTICE:
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:36 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
1 of 1
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Q0002AX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 1:37 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZZ03CX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL MICROPHONE COVER
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the microphone cover.
2. INSTALL TELEPHONE MICROPHONE ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the telephone microphone assembly.
8/5/2012 1:38 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Q0103CX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE TELEPHONE MICROPHONE ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the telephone microphone

assembly.
3. REMOVE MICROPHONE COVER
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the microphone cover.
8/5/2012 1:38 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
1 of 1
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004O0U001X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 1:39 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1 of 1
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ZDZ019X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NOISE FILTER
(a) Measure the resistance of the noise filter according to the
value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
Always
10 k or higher
1-4
Always
Below 1
*a

(Noise Filter)
8/5/2012 1:40 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042IC00MX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NOISE FILTER
(a) Engage the guide and install the noise filter.
(b) Engage the 2 clamps.
(c) Connect the connector.
2. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY

3. INSTALL NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL LH
8/5/2012 1:40 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042IE00LX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL LH
2. REMOVE NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE NOISE FILTER
(b) Disengage the 2 clamps.
(c) Disengage the guide and remove the noise filter.
8/5/2012 1:39 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: COMPONENTS (2...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004MZ8007X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:42 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: INSPECTION (201...
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004O9Y003X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY
(a) With the rear speaker assembly installed, check that there is no looseness or other abnormalities.
(b) Check that there is no foreign matter in the rear speaker assembly, no tears on the rear speaker
assembly cone or other abnormalities.
(c) Measure the resistance of the rear speaker assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
Always
3.7 to 4.7
If the result is not as specified, replace the rear speaker

assembly.
*a
1 of 1

(Rear speaker assembly)
8/5/2012 1:43 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: INSTALLATION (...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004MZ700AX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the rear speaker assembly with the 2 screws.
NOTICE:
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER

3. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER
4. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY
5. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE
6. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:43 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: REMOVAL (2013 ...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004MZ900AX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. SEPARATE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP

HINT:
Separate the front door opening trim weatherstrip to the extent that allows the removal of the luggage
compartment trim cover.
2. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE

3. REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY
4. SEPARATE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER
5. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER
6. REMOVE REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 2 screws and the rear speaker assembly.

NOTICE:
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:42 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: COMPONENTS (201...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZU02AX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 2
8/5/2012 1:46 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: COMPONENTS (201...
2 of 2
8/5/2012 1:46 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: INSTALLATION (20...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000024DA09GX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Align the locating tape of the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly as shown in the illustration, and then
engage the 8 clamps.
*1
No. 2 Antenna Cord Sub-assembly
*a
End of Roof Headlining Assembly
Adhesive Tape
*2
-
Marking Line
-
Locating Tape
(b) Fix the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly on the roof headlining assembly with adhesive tape as shown
in the illustration.
HINT:
Fix the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly in the order shown in the illustration.
When applying the 2nd tape, remove the looseness of the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly by pulling
it in the direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration.
3. INSTALL ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 10 clamps and install the antenna cord sub-assembly.
(c) Install the floor mat.
4. INSTALL AIR CONDITIONING UNIT ASSEMBLY
1 of 2
8/5/2012 1:47 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: INSTALLATION (20...
2 of 2
8/5/2012 1:47 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OGD05KX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Peel back the floor carpet LH side.
(b) Disconnect the connector.
(c) Disengage the 10 clamps and remove the antenna cord sub-assembly.

(a) Remove the 2 adhesive tapes.
(b) Disengage the 8 clamps and remove the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly from the roof headlining.
1 of 2
8/5/2012 1:47 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
Adhesive Tape
2 of 2
8/5/2012 1:47 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: COMPONENTS (201...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004MZB002X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:49 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: INSTALLATION (201...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004MZA008X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the roof antenna pole sub-assembly in the direction

indicated by the arrow in the illustration to install it.
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:50 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004MZC008X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the roof antenna pole sub-assembly in the direction

indicated by the arrow in the illustration to remove it.
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:50 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: COMPO...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZF01DX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:50 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: INSTALL...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZE01OX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 1 amplifier bracket with the 4 screws.
(b) Install the stereo component amplifier assembly with bracket with the 3 nuts.
(c) Connect the 2 connectors to the stereo component amplifier assembly with bracket.
(d) Engage the clamp and connect the wire harness to the stereo component amplifier cover.
(e) Install the clip and connect the rear seat back cover.
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT

(a) Install the luggage compartment floor mat.
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:51 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: REMOVA...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PZG01OX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT
(a) Remove the luggage compartment floor mat.
2. REMOVE STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clip and separate the rear seat back cover.
(b) Disconnect the clamp and the wire harness from the stereo
component amplifier cover.
(c) Disconnect the 2 connectors from the stereo component

amplifier.
(d) Remove the 3 nuts and the stereo component amplifier.
1 of 2
8/5/2012 1:50 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: REMOVA...
(e) Remove the 4 screws and No. 1 amplifier bracket.

2 of 2
*a
LH Side
*b
RH Side
8/5/2012 1:50 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: COM...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TAC01LX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:51 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: INST...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TAB01YX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 1 STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the No. 1 stereo jack adapter assembly.
2. INSTALL FRONT CONSOLE BOX COVER
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:51 PM
AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: REM...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TAD01YX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE FRONT CONSOLE BOX COVER
2. REMOVE NO. 1 STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the No. 1 stereo jack
adapter assembly.
1 of 1
8/5/2012 1:51 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
1 of 2
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIF02EX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 1:54 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2 of 2
8/5/2012 1:54 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIH02BX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE CYLINDER BOOT
(a) Remove the 2 cylinder boots.
NOTICE:
To prevent damage to the front disc brake piston, remove
the boot by hand, and not using a screwdriver or the like.
*1
Cylinder Boot
*2
Front Disc Brake Piston
2. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE PISTON
(a) Place a wooden block between the front disc brake piston
and disc cylinder.
*1
Wooden Block
*a
30 mm (1.811 in.)
(b) Slowly apply compressed air to remove the 2 front disc brake pistons from the cylinder.
CAUTION:
Do not place your fingers in front of the front disc brake piston when applying compressed air.
NOTICE:
Do not spatter the brake fluid.
HINT:
If the front disc brake piston has been damaged, replace it with a new one.
(c) Remove the wooden block.
3. REMOVE PISTON SEAL

(a) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape,
remove the 2 piston seals from the disc brake cylinder.
8/5/2012 1:55 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
2 of 2
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not damage the inner surface or piston seal groove of
the cylinder.
4. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG CAP

(a) Remove the front disc brake bleeder plug cap from the front disc brake bleeder plug.
5. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG

(a) Remove the front disc brake bleeder plug.
8/5/2012 1:55 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1 of 2
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010KR014X
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. CHECK BRAKE CYLINDER AND PISTON
(a) Check the cylinder bore and piston for rust and scoring. If necessary, replace the disc brake cylinder
and piston.
2. CHECK PAD LINING THICKNESS
(a) Using a ruler, measure the pad lining thickness.

Minimum thickness:
11.0 mm (0.4331 in.)
Standard thickness:
1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
If the pad lining thickness is lower/under the minimum,
replace the pad.
3. CHECK DISC THICKNESS
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the disc thickness.

Minimum Thickness:
22.0 mm (0.866 in.)
Standard Thickness:
24.0 mm (0.945 in.)
4. CHECK DISC RUNOUT
(a) Check the bearing play in the axial direction and check the
axle hub runout
(b) Tighten the disc with the 5 nuts.

Torque: 120 Nm (1224 kgfcm, 89ftlbf)
(c) Using a dial indicator, measure the disc runout 10 mm (0.394 in.) away from the outer edge of the
front disc.
8/5/2012 1:55 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
2 of 2
*1
Dial Indicator
Maximum disc runout:

0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not bring the magnetic base near the axle hub and speed sensor.
Set the magnetic base on the shock absorber.
If the runout exceeds the maximum value, change the installation positions of the disc and axle to
make the minimum runout. If the runout exceeds the maximum even when the installation positions
are changed, replace the front disc.
(d) Remove the 5 hub nuts and front disc.
8/5/2012 1:55 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
1 of 5
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIE02MX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
Use the same procedure for RH and LH sides.
The procedure listed below is for LH side.
1. INSTALL FRONT DISC

(a) When reusing the disc
(1) Align the matchmarks placed when removing, and install the front disc to the axle hub.
(b) When replacing the front disc
(1) Install a new front disc to the axle hub and measure the disc runout
(c) Temporarily tighten the hub nut and fix the front disc to the axle hub.
2. INSTALL CARRIER
(a) Install the carrier with the 2 new bolts.

3. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE BUSH

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the inner face of the 2 new front disc brake
cylinder slide bushes as shown in the illustration.
Lithium Soap Base Glycol Grease
8/5/2012 1:56 PM
2 of 5
4. INSTALL BUSH
(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the contact surface of the No. 2 front disc
brake cylinder slide pin with a new bush.
(b) Install the bush to the No. 2 front disc brake cylinder slide pin.
5. INSTALL NO. 2 FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of the No. 2 front disc
brake cylinder slide pin, as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the No. 2 front disc brake cylinder slide pin to the carrier.
6. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of the front disc brake
cylinder slide pin, as shown in the illustration.
8/5/2012 1:56 PM
3 of 5
(b) Install the front disc brake cylinder slide pin to the carrier.
(c) Apply a light of MP grease to contact section of the front disc brake pad support plate with the carrier.
7. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE (LOWER)

(a) Apply MP grease to the front disc brake pad support plate (lower) as shown in the illustration.
MP Grease
8. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE (UPPER)

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the front disc brake pad support plate (lower).
9. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD

(a) for 15 inch Front Brake
(1) Apply disc brake grease to both sides of the shim.
8/5/2012 1:56 PM
4 of 5
Disc Brake Grease
(2) Install the covers (shim) and shims to each front disc brake pad.
(3) Install the front disc brake pads to the carrier.

*1
Cover (Shim)
*3
Front Disc Brake Pad
*2
-
Shim
-
(b) for 16 inch Front Brake
8/5/2012 1:56 PM
5 of 5
(1) Install the front disc brake pads to the carrier.
10. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the front disc brake cylinder assembly LH to the

carrier with the 2 bolts.
11. CONNECT NO. 1 FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE

(a) Install the No. 1 front flexible hose to the disc brake cylinder assembly with 2 new gaskets and the
new union bolt.
12. ADD BRAKE FLUID

13. BLEED BRAKE LINE
14. INSPECT FLUID LEAK
15. INSPECT FLUID LEVEL
16. INSTALL FRONT WHEEL
8/5/2012 1:56 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIJ02DX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG
(a) Temporarily install the front disc brake bleeder plug to the front disc brake cylinder assembly LH.
2. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG CAP

(a) Install the front disc brake bleeder plug cap on the front disc brake bleeder plug.
3. INSTALL PISTON SEAL

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of 2 new piston seals.
(b) Securely install the 2 piston seals into the grooves of the disc brake cylinder.
NOTICE:
Securely install the piston seal into the groove of the disc brake cylinder.
4. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE PISTON

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of a new cylinder boot
as shown in the illustration.
8/5/2012 1:55 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
2 of 2
*1
Cylinder Boot
*2
(b) Securely install the cylinder boot into the grooves of the front disc brake piston.
(c) Apply a light of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of the 2 front disc brake
pistons and install them to the front disc brake cylinder LH.
NOTICE:
Do not install the piston forcibly in the disc brake cylinder.
5. INSTALL CYLINDER BOOT

(a) Securely install the cylinder boot into the groove of the front disc brake cylinder LH.
*1
Cylinder Boot
*3
*2
-
Front Disc Brake Cylinder Assembly LH

-
8/5/2012 1:55 PM
BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
1 of 4
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIG02JX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
The procedure listed below is for the LH side.
1. REMOVE FRONT WHEEL

2. DRAIN BRAKE FLUID
NOTICE:
Immediately wash off any brake fluid that comes into contact with any painted surfaces.
3. DISCONNECT NO. 1 FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE
(a) Remove the union bolt, 2 gaskets and disconnect the No. 1
front flexible hose from the disc brake cylinder assembly LH.
4. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and front disc brake cylinder

sub-assembly.
5. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD

(a) for 16 inch Front Brake
8/5/2012 1:54 PM
2 of 4
(1) Remove the front disc brake pads from the carrier.
*1
(b) for 15 inch Front Brake.
(1) Remove the front disc brake pads from the carrier.
(2) Remove the covers (shims) and shims from each pad.
*1
Cover (shim)
*3
*2
-
Shim
-
6. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE (UPPER)
(a) Remove the front disc brake pad support plate (upper) from
the carrier.
8/5/2012 1:54 PM
3 of 4
7. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE (LOWER)
(a) Remove the front disc brake pad support plate (lower) from
the carrier.
8. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Remove the front disc brake cylinder slide pin from the
carrier.
9. REMOVE NO. 2 FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN
(a) Remove the No. 2 front disc brake cylinder slide pin from the
carrier.
10. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE BUSH
(a) Remove the 2 front disc brake cylinder slide bushes from the
carrier.
8/5/2012 1:54 PM
4 of 4
11. REMOVE BUSH

remove the bush from the pin (B).
*1
Protective Tape
12. REMOVE CARRIER
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and carrier.
13. REMOVE FRONT DISC
(a) Place matchmarks on the front disc and front axle hub.
HINT:
It is not necessary when replacing the disc.
*a
Matchmark
(b) Remove the front disc.
8/5/2012 1:54 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: COMPONENT...
1 of 2
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIW01CX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 2:54 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: COMPONENT...
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:54 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: INSTALLATI...
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIV017X
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR LEFT FLEXIBLE HOSE

(a) Connect the rear left flexible hose with a new clip.
NOTICE:
Securely install the clip.
(b) Hold the rear left flexible hose with a wrench and connect the brake tube to the rear left flexible hose
using a union nut wrench.
NOTICE:
Do not bend or damage the brake tube.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt and dust to enter the brake tube from the connecting
position.
Use the formula to calculate special torque wrench is combined with a torque wrench
(c) Connect the rear left flexible hose to the rear carrier LH with the bolt.
(d) Connect the rear left flexible hose to the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH with a new 2 gaskets
and the new union bolt.
2. ADD BRAKE FLUID

3. BLEED BRAKE LINE
4. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEAK
6. INSTALL REAR WHEEL
8/5/2012 2:54 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: REMOVAL (2...
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIX015X
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE REAR WHEEL

3. REMOVE REAR LEFT FLEXIBLE HOSE
(a) Remove the union bolt and 2 gaskets, and disconnect the
rear left flexible hose from the rear disc brake cylinder LH.
*A
Solid Disc Brake
*B
Ventilated Disc Brake
(b) Remove the bolt and separate the rear left flexible hose from
the rear carrier LH.
(c) Hold the rear left flexible hose with a wrench and disconnect
the brake tube using a union nut wrench.
NOTICE:
Do not bend or damage the brake tube.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt and dust to
enter the brake tube from the connecting position.
8/5/2012 2:54 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: REMOVAL (2...
2 of 2
(d) Remove the clip.

(e) Remove the rear left flexible hose.
8/5/2012 2:54 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
1 of 4
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIL015X
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 1:58 PM
2 of 4
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 1:58 PM
3 of 4
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 1:58 PM
4 of 4
8/5/2012 1:58 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIN00YX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE PISTON
(a) Place a wooden block between the rear disc brake piston and
disc brake cylinder.
*1
Wooden Block
*a
30 mm (1.1811 in.)
(b) Slowly apply compressed air to remove the disc brake piston.
CAUTION:
Do not place your fingers in front of the piston when using compressed air.
NOTICE:
Do not spatter brake fluid.
2. REMOVE CYLINDER BOOT

remove the cylinder boot from the disc brake cylinder.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the inner surface or groove of the cylinder.
*1
Protective Tape
3. REMOVE PISTON SEAL

remove the piston seal.
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not damage the inner surface or piston seal groove of
the cylinder.
8/5/2012 1:59 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
2 of 2
4. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG CAP

(a) Remove the rear disc brake bleeder plug cap from the rear disc brake bleeder plug.
5. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG

(a) Remove the rear disc brake bleeder plug from the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH.
8/5/2012 1:59 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1 of 2
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ED100LX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. CHECK BRAKE CYLINDER AND PISTON
(a) Check the cylinder bore and piston for rust and scoring.
2. INSPECT PAD LINING THICKNESS
(a) Using a ruler, measure the pad lining thickness.

SPECIFICATION MINIMUM THICKNESS STANDARD THICKNESS
Solid Type
1.5 mm (0.059 in.)
Ventilated Type 1.5 mm (0.059 in.)
9.0 mm (0.354 in.)

11.0 mm (0.433 in.)
3. INSPECT DISC THICKNESS
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the disc thickness.

SPECIFICATION MINIMUM THICKNESS STANDARD THICKNESS
Solid Type
8.5 mm (0.3346 in.)
10.0 mm (0.3937 in.)
Ventilated Type 16.5 mm (0.6496 in.) 18.0 mm (0.7087 in.)
4. INSPECT DISC RUNOUT
(a) Check the bearing play in the axial direction and check for
the axle hub runout
(b) Tighten the disc with the 5 nuts.

(c) Using a dial indicator, measure the disc runout 10 mm (0.394 in.) away from the outer edge of the
rear disc.
8/5/2012 2:02 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
2 of 2
*1
Dial Indicator
Maximum disc runout:

0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
NOTICE:
If the runout exceeds the maximum value, change the installation positions of the disc and axle to
make the minimum runout. If the runout exceeds the maximum even when the installation positions
are changed, replace the front disc.
(d) Remove the 5 hub nuts and rear disc.
8/5/2012 2:02 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
1 of 4
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIK01IX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE BUSH

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the inner face of a new rear disc brake cylinder
slide bush.
HINT:
Apply at least 0.3 g (0.01 oz.) of lithium soap base glycol grease to each rear disc brake cylinder slide bush.
(b) Install the 2 rear disc brake cylinder slide bushes to the caliper support bracket.
2. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE REAR CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the contact face between a new bush and rear
disc brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin.
*1
rear disc brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin
*2
Bush
8/5/2012 2:03 PM
2 of 4
(b) Install the new bush to the rear disc brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin.
(c) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to entire circumference of the rear disc brake rear
cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin and fitting part.
(d) Install the rear disc brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin to the caliper support bracket.
3. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to entire circumference of the rear disc brake
cylinder slide pin and fitting part.
(b) Install the rear disc brake cylinder slide pin to the caliper support bracket.
4. INSTALL REAR DISC

(a) Align the matchmarks placed when removing, install the rear disc to the axle hub.
HINT:
When using a new rear disc, install it so that rear disc runout is minimum.
5. ADJUST PARKING BRAKE

6. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING HOLE PLUG
(a) Install the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug to the rear disc.
7. INSTALL CALIPER SUPPORT BRACKET

(a) Install the caliper support bracket with the 2 new bolts.
(b) Apply a light of lithium soap base glycol grease to contact section of the rear disc brake pad support
plate with the rear disc brake pad.
8/5/2012 2:03 PM
3 of 4
8. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE

(a) Apply a light of lithium soap base glycol grease to contact section of the rear disc brake pad support
plate with the rear disc brake pad.
(b) Install the rear disc brake pad support plate to the caliper support bracket.
9. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE ANTI SQUEAL SHIM KIT

(a) Apply disc brake grease to the rear disc brake anti squeal shim kit.
8/5/2012 2:03 PM
4 of 4
*A
Solid Disc Brake
*B
*1
Rear Disc Brake Pad Kit
*2
Rear Disc Brake Anti Squeal Shim Kit

Disc Brake Grease
(b) Put the rear disc anti squeal shim kit to each rear disc brake pad.
10. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE PAD KIT

(a) Install the rear disc brake pad kit to the caliper support bracket.
11. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Apply the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH to the caliper support bracket.
12. CONNECT REAR FLEXIBLE HOSE LH

(a) Connect the rear left flexible hose with 2 new gaskets and the new union bolt.
13. ADD BRAKE FLUID

14. BLEED BRAKE LINE
15. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEAK
8/5/2012 2:03 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIP00YX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG
(a) Temporarily install the rear disc brake bleeder plug to the rear disc brake cylinder LH.
2. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG CAP

(a) Install the rear disc brake bleeder plug cap to the rear disc brake bleeder plug.
3. INSTALL PISTON SEAL

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of a new piston seal
and install it into the groove of the disc brake cylinder.
4. INSTALL CYLINDER BOOT

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to a new cylinder boot, and put it on the disc
brake piston as shown in the illustration.
1 of 2
8/5/2012 1:59 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
*1
Piston
*2
Cylinder Boot
Lithium soap base glycol grease
5. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE PISTON
(a) Fit the seal section of the cylinder boot into the groove of the
rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH.
*1
Cylinder Boot
*2
Rear disc Brake Piston
*3
Rear disc Brake Cylinder Assembly LH
NOTICE:
Securely fit the seal section of the cylinder boot.
(b) Push in the piston by hand and fit the seal section of the boot into the groove of the rear disc brake
piston.
NOTICE:
Securely fit the seal section of the cylinder boot.
2 of 2
8/5/2012 1:59 PM
BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CIM01AX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

NOTICE:
Immediately wash off any brake fluid that comes into contact with any painted surfaces.
3. DISCONNECT REAR FLEXIBLE HOSE LH
(a) Remove the union bolt and 2 gaskets and disconnect the
rear left flexible hose from the rear disc brake cylinder
assembly LH.
*A
Solid Disc Brake
*B
4. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and rear disc brake cylinder LH.
5. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE PAD KIT

(a) Remove the rear disc brake pad kit from the caliper support
1 of 4
8/5/2012 1:58 PM
bracket.
*A
Solid Disc Brake
*B
6. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE ANTI SQUEAL SHIM KIT
(a) Remove the rear disc brake anti squeal shim kit from each
rear disc brake pad.
*A
Solid Disc Brake
*B
*1
Rear Disc Brake Pad
*2
Rear Disc Brake Anti Squeal Shim Kit
7. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE
(a) Remove the 2 rear disc brake pad support plates.
8. REMOVE CALIPER SUPPORT BRACKET
2 of 4
8/5/2012 1:58 PM
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and caliper support bracket.
9. REMOVE REAR DISC
(a) Place matchmarks on the rear disc and rear axle hub.
*a
Matchmark
HINT:
It is not necessary when replacing the rear disc.
(b) Release the parking brake and remove the rear disc.
HINT:
If it is difficult to remove the rear disc, insert a screwdriver
through the hole of rear disc and turn the adjusting screw to
contract it.
*a
Contract
*b
Expand
10. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING HOLE PLUG

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug from the rear from the rear disc.
11. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN
(a) Remove the rear disc brake cylinder slide pin from the
caliper support bracket.
12. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE REAR CYLINDER SLIDE PIN
3 of 4
8/5/2012 1:58 PM
(a) Remove the rear disc brake rear cylinder slide pin from the
(b) Remove the bush from the rear disc brake rear cylinder slide
pin.
13. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE BUSH
(a) Remove the 2 rear disc brake cylinder slide bushes from the
4 of 4
8/5/2012 1:58 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: COMPONENTS ...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HJC00SX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 3
8/5/2012 2:28 PM
ILLUSTRATION
2 of 3
8/5/2012 2:28 PM
3 of 3
8/5/2012 2:28 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: INSPECTION (2...
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004A0W005X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE
(a) Slide the 2 clamps and remove the vacuum tube connector hose.
(b) Using a vacuum pump, check that there is ventilation from
the booster to the engine, and no ventilation from the engine
to the booster.
*a
Brake Booster Assembly Side
*b
Engine Assembly Side

If the result is not as specified, replace the vacuum tube
connector hose.
(c) Connect the engine side of the vacuum hose with the engine
stamp facing outside of the vehicle.
*1
Paint Mark
*a
Engine Assembly Side
*b
Brake Booster Assembly Side
(d) Connect the vacuum hose to the booster assembly with the paint mark facing front side of the vehicle.
HINT:
If the paint mark has been disappeared, check the ventilation and connect the hose so that there is
ventilation from the booster to the engine, and no ventilation from the engine to the booster.
(e) Slide the 2 clamps and install the vacuum hose connector hose.
1 of 1
8/5/2012 2:28 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: INSTALLATION...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HJB01YX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BRAKE BOOSTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Temporarily install the lock nut and push rod clevis to the brake booster assembly.
(b) Set the push rod length as shown in the illustration.
*1
Lock Nut
*2
Push Rod Clevis
*a
Push Rod Length
Push rod length:

155.2 mm (6.11 in.)
(c) Tighten the lock nut.
(d) Install the 4 nuts to the brake booster assembly.
2. INSTALL FRONT NO. 2 BRAKE TUBE

(a) Connect 2 clips and install the front No. 2 brake tube.
(b) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, connect the front No. 2 brake tube from the brake actuator.
NOTICE:
Do not bend or damage the brake lines.
Do not allow brake lines to twist and interfere with other parts or vehicle body during tightening.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter the brake lines.
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for situations where the union nut wrench is
combined with a torque wrench
3. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 BRAKE TUBE

(a) Connect 2 clips and install the front No. 1 brake tube.
(b) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, connect the front No. 1 brake tube from the brake actuator.
NOTICE:
Do not allow brake lines to twist and interfere with other parts or vehicle body during tightening.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter the brake lines.
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for situations where the union nut wrench is
4. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE

5. INSTALL PUSH ROD PIN
1 of 2
8/5/2012 2:28 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: INSTALLATION...
6. INSTALL BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. CHECK AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL
8. INSTALL TCM (for Automatic Transmission)

HINT:
Use the same procedure for the LH side as for the RH side
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:28 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: REMOVAL (201...
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HJD01QX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

3. REMOVE TCM (for Automatic Transmission)
4. REMOVE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
5. DISCONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE

(a) Slide the clip and disconnect the vacuum tube connector hose from the brake booster assembly.
6. REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 BRAKE TUBE
(a) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, disconnect the front No. 1
brake tube from the brake actuator.
(b) Disconnect 2 clips and remove the front No. 1 brake tube.
7. REMOVE FRONT NO. 2 BRAKE TUBE
(a) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, disconnect the front No. 2
brake tube from the brake actuator.
8/5/2012 2:28 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: REMOVAL (201...
2 of 2
(b) Disconnect 2 clips and remove the front No. 2 brake tube.
8. REMOVE BRAKE BOOSTER ASSEMBLY

(a) Loosen the push rod clevis lock nut.
(b) Remove the 4 nuts.
(c) Remove the push rod clevis pin.
(d) Remove the brake booster assembly.
8/5/2012 2:28 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: BLEEDING (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WYV00DX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: BLEEDING (2013 FR-S)
BLEEDING
NOTICE:
Move the shift lever to P and apply the parking brake before bleeding the brakes (for automatic
transmission).
Apply the parking brake before bleeding the brakes (for manual transmission).
Add brake fluid to keep the level between the MIN and MAX lines of the reservoir while bleeding the
brakes.
If brake fluid leaks onto any painted surface, immediately wash it off.
Do not operate the brake actuator assembly while air is in the brake system or in the brake master
cylinder sub-assembly. Doing so may cause air to enter the brake actuator assembly.
If bleeding the brake actuator assembly is difficult due to air in the brake actuator assembly, replace it
with a new one.
HINT:
If any work is done on the brake system or if air in the brake lines is suspected, bleed the air from the
system.
1. FILL RESERVOIR WITH BRAKE FLUID

2. BLEED BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
HINT:
If the master cylinder has been disassembled or if the reservoir becomes empty, bleed the air from the
master cylinder.
(a) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, separate the 2 brake

tubes from the master cylinder.
(b) Slowly depress the brake pedal and hold it there (Step A).
(c) Block the outer holes with your fingers, and release the
brake pedal (Step B).
1 of 2
8/5/2012 2:36 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: BLEEDING (2013 FR-S)
(d) Repeat Steps A and B 3 or 4 times.

(e) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, install the 2 brake tubes
into the master cylinder.
NOTICE:
Do not allow brake lines to twist and interfere with other
parts or vehicle body during tightening.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter
the brake lines.
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for
situations where a union nut wrench is combined with a
torque wrench
3. BLEED BRAKE LINE

4. INSPECT FOR BRAKE FLUID LEAK
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:36 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: ON-VEHICLE INS...
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000SRG03NX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL IN RESERVOIR
(a) Check the fluid level.
*a
MAX Line
*b
MIN Line
If brake fluid level is lower than the MIN line, check for leaks
and inspect the disc brake pads. If necessary, refill the
reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX line after repair or
replacement.
Brake Fluid:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
NOTICE:
If using a dropper to adjust the fluid amount, make sure
that the dropper has not been used with mineral oils, water
or deteriorated brake fluid. Sealed areas may deteriorate
and lead to fluid leaks, or the fluid may deteriorate and lead
to decreased efficiency.
1 of 1
8/5/2012 2:36 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: REPLACEMENT (20...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XY202KX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
NOTICE:
Move the shift lever to P and apply the parking brake before replacing the brake fluid (for automatic
transmission).
Add brake fluid to keep the level between the MIN and MAX lines of the reservoir while replacing the
brake fluid.
If brake fluid leaks onto any painted surface, immediately wash it off.
HINT:
If any work is performed on the brake system or if air in the brake lines is suspected, bleed the brake
system.
1. FILL RESERVOIR WITH BRAKE FLUID

(a) Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir filler cap.
(b) Fill the reservoir with brake fluid.
Brake Fluid:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
NOTICE:
Make sure that there is sufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
2. BLEED BRAKE LINE

NOTICE:
Bleed the brake line of the wheel farthest from the master
cylinder first.
Add brake fluid to keep the level between the MIN and MAX
lines of the reservoir while bleeding the brake lines.
(a) Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder plug.
(b) Depress the brake pedal several times, and then loosen the
bleeder plug with the pedal depressed.*1
(c) When fluid stops coming out, tighten the bleeder plug and
release the brake pedal.*2
(d) Repeat steps *1 and *2 until all the air in the brake fluid is
completely bled out and a new brake fluid comes out.
(e) Tighten the bleeder plug completely.
(f) Repeat the above steps to replace the brake fluid of the
brake lines for each wheel.
3. INSPECT FOR BRAKE FLUID LEAK

4. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL IN RESERVOIR
1 of 1
8/5/2012 2:36 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE LINE: PRECAUTION (2013 ...
1 of 2
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000SRD092X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE LINE: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. TROUBLESHOOTING PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
Since the brake lines are classified as critical safety related parts, be sure to disassemble and inspect
the components if a brake fluid leak is found. If any abnormality is found, replace the component with
a new one.
When removing brake components, cover the brake line connections to prevent foreign matter, such as
dust or dirt, from entering the lines.
Do not damage or deform the brake lines when removing or installing them.
Do not deform the bracket and the body when connecting a brake line and flexible hose.
When installing a brake tube grommet to the body, make sure that the brake line passes through the
center of the grommet.
When installing a brake line or flexible hose, make sure that it is free from twists or bends.
If the cap of a flexible hose does not match the groove on the bracket, twist the hose slightly to insert
it.
Flexible hoses must be free from shock absorber oil, grease, etc.
When installing a brake line to a plastic clamp, make sure that the brake line is not loose or pinched.
Do not reuse any clips or plastic clamps removed from a flexible hose or brake line.
After installing a brake line or flexible hose, make sure that it does not interfere with any other
components.
Do not allow brake fluid to adhere to any painted surface such as the vehicle body. If brake fluid leaks
onto any painted surface, immediately wash it off.
When disconnecting and connecting a flexible hose and brake line:
*1
Union Nut Wrench
*2
Clip
*a
Disconnecting
*b
Connecting
8/5/2012 2:35 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE LINE: PRECAUTION (2013 ...
2 of 2
a. Hold the flexible hose with a wrench and disconnect the brake line with a union nut wrench
without deforming the line.
b. Remove the clip.
c. Install a new clip.
d. Hold the flexible hose with a wrench and connect the brake line with a union nut wrench
without deforming the line.
Torque:
15 N*m (153 kgf*cm, 11 ft.*lbf)
When connecting a brake line and way:
a. Support the way to prevent deformation of the brake tube and connect the brake tube to
the way with a union nut wrench.
Torque:
15 N*m (153 kgf*cm, 11 ft.*lbf)
b. Support the way to prevent deformation of the brake tube and install the bolt to fix the way
to the body.
Torque:
18 N*m (184 kgf*cm, 13 ft.*lbf)
8/5/2012 2:35 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE LINE: SYSTEM DIAGRAM ...
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003D8B02EX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE LINE: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1 of 1
8/5/2012 2:35 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: CO...
1 of 1
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HK8013X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 2:38 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: INS...
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HK602QX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SEAL
(a) Install a new seal to the brake master cylinder sub-assembly.
2. INSTALL BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the brake master cylinder sub-assembly to the brake booster assembly with the 2 nuts.
(b) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, install the 2 brake tubes to the brake master cylinder sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Use the formula to calculate the special torque values for situations where a union nut wrench is
.
(c) Connect the brake fluid level switch connector.
3. BLEED BRAKE SYSTEM
4. INSTALL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER TO COWL BRACE SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
5. INSTALL FRONT WHEEL LH

8/5/2012 2:38 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: RE...
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HK902FX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
Make sure to release the vacuum from the brake booster assembly before removing the brake master
cylinder sub-assembly from the brake booster assembly.
1. REMOVE FRONT WHEEL LH

NOTICE:
If brake fluid leaks onto any painted surface, wash it off immediately.
3. REMOVE FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER TO COWL BRACE SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
4. REMOVE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Release the vacuum from the booster by depressing the brake pedal several times.
(b) Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
(c) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, disconnect the 2 brake

tubes from the brake master cylinder sub-assembly.
(d) Remove the 2 nuts and the brake master cylinder

sub-assembly from the brake booster assembly.
NOTICE:
Because of the way the master cylinder sub-assembly is
designed, the piston can easily fall out, and so do not hold
the master cylinder sub-assembly by the piston or pull the
piston out. If the piston has been removed from the master
cylinder sub-assembly by accident, there is a danger that the
performance of the master cylinder sub-assembly will be
degraded, and so it cannot be reused and must be replaced
with a new master cylinder sub-assembly.
The master cylinder requires careful handling. Do not allow
the master cylinder to receive any impact, such as from
being dropped. Do not reuse a master cylinder that has been
dropped.
Do not strike or pinch the master cylinder piston, and do not
cause any damage to the master cylinder piston by any other
means.
When installing the master cylinder to the brake booster or
8/5/2012 2:38 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: RE...
2 of 2
removing the master cylinder from the brake booster, make

sure that the master cylinder is kept horizontal or with its tip
facing downward (the piston faces upward) to prevent the
master cylinder piston from falling out.
Do not allow any foreign objects to contaminate the master
cylinder piston. If a foreign object gets on the piston, remove
it by using a piece of cloth, and then apply an even layer of
lithium soap base glycol grease around the circumference
(sliding part) of the piston.
Do not use any other type of grease or fluid.
Be careful not to damage the brake tubes.
5. REMOVE SEAL
(a) Remove the seal.
8/5/2012 2:38 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Trans...
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HJ3019X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. CHECK AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT
(a) Check the pedal height.

*1
Clevis Lock Nut
*2
Floor mat
*a
Pedal Height
Standard Pedal Height from floor mat:
150mm (5.906in.)
(b) Adjust the pedal height.

(1) Remove the instrument side panel LH.
(2) Remove the No. 1 instrument panel under cover sub-assembly.
(3) Disconnect the connector from the stop light switch assembly.
(4) Remove the stop light switch assembly.
(5) Loosen the push rod clevis lock nut.
(6) Adjust the pedal height by turning the push rod.
150mm (5.906in.)
(7) Tighten the push rod clevis lock nut.
(8) Install the stop light switch
(9) Connect the connector to the stop light switch assembly.

(10) Check that the stop light does not illuminate when the brake pedal is not stepped.
2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY
(a) Stop the engine. Depress the pedal several times until there
is no vacuum in the booster. Then release the pedal.
1 of 2
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
(b) Depress the pedal until resistance is felt.

(c) Check the pedal free play by measuring the distance between the position in the previous step and the
pedal released position.
Standard pedal free play:
0.5 to 2.0mm (0.020 to 0.079in.)
*a
Pedal Free Play
HINT:
If the pedal free play distance 1mm (0.039in.) or less, adjust the stop light switch assembly.
3. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE

(a) Release the brake pedal. Start the engine, and when the pressure in the brake booster reaches 66.7
kPa (500 mmHg, 19.6 in.Hg), proceed with the next step.
(b) Depress the pedal and check the pedal reserve distance.
*1
Floor Mat
*a
Pedal Reserve Distance
Standard Pedal Reserve Distance from the floor mat at 490 N

(50 kgf, 110.2 lbf):
More than 55 mm (2.165 in.)
If the distance is not as specified, troubleshoot the brake
system.
HINT:
Check the brake pedal reserve distance at the same location as
that used when checking the brake pedal height.
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003D8800HX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 2
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002W9103JX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL PAD
(a) Remove the brake pedal pad from the brake pedal support
assembly.
2. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL
(a) Remove the bolt and nut from the brake pedal support
assembly.
HINT:
Hold the bolt in place and loosen the nut.
3. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN SPRING

(a) Remove the brake pedal return spring.
4. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL SHAFT COLLAR

(a) Remove the brake pedal shaft collar.
5. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL BUSH

(a) Remove the 2 brake pedal bushes.
1 of 1
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002W9203WX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL BUSH
(a) Install the 2 brake pedal bushes to the brake pedal.

*1
Brake Pedal Bush
*2
Brake Pedal
2. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of the brake pedal
return spring and brake pedal shaft collar.
(b) Install the brake pedal return spring and brake pedal shaft collar to the brake pedal.
(c) Install the brake pedal to the brake pedal bracket support
assembly.
1 of 2
*1
Brake Pedal
*2
Brake Pedal Support Assembly
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
(d) Install the bolt and nut to the brake pedal support assembly.
HINT:
Hold the bolt in place and tighten the nut.
3. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL PAD

(a) Install the brake pedal pad to the brake pedal.
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002W9004UX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

3. REMOVE TCM
4. REMOVE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

5. REMOVE STOP LIGHT SWITCH MOUNTING ADJUSTER
(a) Disengage the 2 clamps and remove the stop light switch
mounting adjuster from the brake pedal support assembly.
6. REMOVE PUSH ROD PIN
(a) Remove the clip and the push rod pin from the push rod
clevis.
7. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts from the brake pedal support assembly.
1 of 2
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
(b) Remove the 4 nuts and the brake pedal support assembly.
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:40 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmis...
1 of 2
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. CHECK AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT
(a) Check the pedal height.

*1
Clevis Lock Nut
*2
Floor mat
*a
Pedal Height
145mm
(5.709in.)
(b) Adjust the pedal height.

(1) Remove the instrument side panel LH.
(2) Remove the No. 1 instrument panel under cover sub-assembly.
(3) Disconnect the connector from the stop light switch assembly.
(4) Remove the stop light switch assembly.
(5) Loosen the push rod clevis lock nut.
(6) Adjust the pedal height by turning the push rod.
145mm
(5.709in.)
(7) Tighten the push rod clevis lock nut.
(8) Install the stop light switch assembly
(9) Connect the connector to the stop light switch assembly.

(10) Check that the stop light does not illuminate when the brake pedal is not stepped.
2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY
(a) Stop the engine. Depress the pedal several times until there
is no vacuum in the booster. Then release the pedal.
8/5/2012 2:43 PM
2 of 2
(b) Depress the pedal until resistance is felt.

(c) Check the pedal free play by measuring the distance between the position in the previous step and the
pedal released position.
Standard pedal free play:
0.5 to 2.0mm
(0.020 to 0.079in.)
*a
Pedal Free Play
HINT:
Check the brake pedal free play at the same location as that used when checking the brake pedal height.
3. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE

(a) Release the brake pedal. Start the engine, and when the pressure in the brake booster reaches 66.7
kPa (500 mmHg, 19.6 in.Hg), proceed with the next step.
(b) Depress the pedal and check the pedal reserve distance.
*1
Floor Mat
*a
Pedal Reserve Distance
Standard Pedal Reserve Distance from the floor mat at 490 N

(50 kgf, 110.2 lbf):
If the distance is not as specified, troubleshoot the brake
system.
HINT:
Check the brake pedal reserve distance at the same location as
that used when checking the brake pedal height.
8/5/2012 2:43 PM
1 of 1
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HJ500QX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 2:43 PM
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002W9103KX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL PAD
(a) Remove the brake pedal pad from the brake pedal support
assembly.
2. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL
(a) Remove the bolt.
(b) Remove the clutch master cylinder bracket and the brake
pedal from the brake pedal support assembly.
*1
Clutch Master Cylinder Bracket
*2
Brake Pedal
*3
Brake Pedal Support Assembly
3. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN SPRING

(a) Remove the brake pedal return spring from the clutch master cylinder bracket.
4. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL BUSH

(a) Remove the 2 brake pedal bushes from the brake pedal.
8/5/2012 2:43 PM
2 of 2
*1
Brake Pedal Bush
*2
Brake Pedal
8/5/2012 2:43 PM
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HJ401BX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL STOP LIGHT SWITCH MOUNTING ADJUSTER
(a) Engage the 2 clamps and install the stop light switch mounting adjuster.
2. INSPECT AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL
3. INSTALL STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

4. INSTALL CLUTCH PEDAL SUB-ASSEMBLY
8/5/2012 2:44 PM
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002W9203XX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL BUSH
(a) Install the 2 brake pedal bushes to the brake pedal.

*1
Brake Pedal Bush
*2
Brake Pedal
2. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL

(a) Apply lithium soap base glycol grease to the brake pedal return spring and the clutch master cylinder
bracket.
*1
Brake Pedal Return Spring
*2
(b) Install the clutch master cylinder bracket and the brake
pedal to the brake pedal support sub-assembly.
*1
*2
Brake Pedal
8/5/2012 2:43 PM
2 of 2
*3
Brake Pedal Support Sub-assembly
(c) Install the bolt.

3. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL PAD

(a) Install the brake pedal pad to the brake pedal.
8/5/2012 2:43 PM
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL SUB-ASSEMBLY

3. REMOVE STOP LIGHT SWITCH MOUNTING ADJUSTER
(a) Disengage the 2 clamps and remove the stop light switch
mounting adjuster from the brake pedal support
sub-assembly.
8/5/2012 2:43 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (20...
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HJ901XX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
Take extra care to replace each part properly. Improper installation or repair could affect the
performance of the brake system and cause a driving hazard.
It is very important to keep the brake system parts and the work area clean when repairing the brake
system.
If the vehicle is equipped with a mobile communication system, refer to the Precautions in the
Introduction section.
Care must be taken when using magnets as they could affect the performance of the speed sensors.
Since the brake line is one of the critical safety-related parts, be sure to disassemble the components if
a brake fluid leak is found. If any abnormality is found, replace the component with a new one.
When removing brake components, cover the brake tube connections to prevent foreign matter such as
dust or dirt from entering the tubes.
Do not damage or deform the brake tubes when removing or installing them.
Do not deform the bracket and the body when connecting a brake line and flexible hose.
When installing a brake tube grommet to the body, make sure that the brake tube passes through the
center of the grommet.
When installing a brake tube or flexible hose, make sure that it is not twisted or bent.
If the fitting of the flexible hose does not match the groove on the bracket, twist the hose slightly to
insert it.
Flexible hoses must be free from absorber oil, grease, etc.
When installing a brake tube to a plastic clamp, make sure that the brake tube is not loose or being
pinched.
Do not reuse a clip or plastic clamp removed from a flexible hose.
After installing a brake tube and flexible hose, make sure that they do not interfere with any other
components.
Do not allow brake fluid to adhere to any painted surface such as the vehicle body. If brake fluid leaks
onto any painted surface, immediately wash it off.
1 of 1
8/5/2012 2:46 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYM...
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HJA01YX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

HINT:
Use the table below to help determine the cause of problem symptoms. If multiple suspected areas are
listed, the potential causes of the symptoms are listed in order of probability in the "Suspected Area"
column of the table. Check each symptom by checking the suspected areas in the order they are listed.
Replace parts as necessary.
Brake System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
Fluid leaks in brake system
SEE PAGE
-
Air in brake system

Low pedal or spongy pedal
Front brake piston seals (worn or damaged)

Rear brake piston seals (worn or damaged)
Brake master cylinder (faulty)
Booster push rod (adjustment necessary)
Brake pedal free play (minimum)
Parking brake lever travel (adjustment necessary)
Parking brake cable (sticking)
Parking brake shoe clearance (adjustment necessary)
Front brake pad (cracked or distorted)
Brake drag
Rear brake pad (cracked or distorted)

Parking brake lining (cracked or distorted)
Front brake piston (stuck or seized)
Rear brake piston (stuck or seized)
Parking brake shoe return tension spring
Vacuum leaks in booster system
Brake master cylinder (faulty)
Front brake piston (stuck or seized)
Rear brake piston (stuck or seized)
Front brake pad (oily, cracked or distorted)
Brake pull
Rear brake pad (oily, cracked or distorted)

Parking brake lining (oily, cracked or distorted)
Front brake disc (scored)
Rear brake disc (scored)
Hard pedal but braking inefficient Fluid leaks in brake system
1 of 2
8/5/2012 2:46 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYM...
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Air in brake system

Front brake pad (worn, cracked, distorted, oily or glazed)
Rear brake pad (worn, cracked, distorted, oily or glazed)
Parking brake lining (worn, cracked, distorted, oily or glazed)
Vacuum leaks in booster system
Front brake pad (cracked, distorted, dirty or glazed)
Rear brake pad (cracked, distorted, dirty or glazed)
Front disc brake pad clip (worn)
Rear disc brake pad clip (worn)
Front brake installation bolt (loose)
Noise from brakes
Rear brake installation bolt (loose)

Front brake anti-squeal shim (damaged)
Rear brake anti-squeal shim (damaged)
Parking brake shoe hold-down spring (damaged)
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:46 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: COMPONENTS (2...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002I8900HX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 1
8/5/2012 2:55 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: INSTALLATION (...
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000159A017X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, and install it.
(b) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the
illustration.
*a Edge of Groove
*b 2.0 to 4.0 mm (0.078 to 0.158 in.) in Diameter
*c 1.0mm or Less
NOTICE:
Clean and degrease the contact surface.
Install the vacuum pump assembly within 5 minutes of
applying seal packing.
HINT:
When replace the vacuum pump assembly on the vehicle, apply
seal packing to the vacuum pump assembly.
(c) Install the vacuum pump assembly while aligning the

grooves of the vacuum pump assembly with the claws of the
intake camshaft RH.
*a
Groove of the Vacuum Pump Assembly
*b
Claw of the Intake Camshaft
NOTICE:
Make sure that the O-ring is not pinched.
(d) Install the 3 bolts.

2. INSTALL VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE

(a) Install the vacuum tube connector hose.
3. INSTALL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER TO COWL BRACE SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
8/5/2012 2:56 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: ON-VEHICLE IN...
1 of 1
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000159D016X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY OPERATION
(a) Move the clamp and disconnect the vacuum tube connector
hose from the vacuum pump assembly.
(b) Connect the hose of a vacuum gauge to the vacuum pump

assembly.
*1
Vacuum Gauge
(c) Start the engine and warm it up for more than 2 minutes.
(d) With the engine idling, check the vacuum of the vacuum pump assembly.
Standard pressure:
More than 93 kPa (698 mmHg, 27 in.Hg) of vacuum
If the is not as specified, disassemble the vacuum pump assembly and inspect or replace it
HINT:
After disassembling and checking the vacuum pump assembly, check the vacuum pump assembly function.
(e) Remove the vacuum gauge from the vacuum pump assembly.
(f) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose to the vacuum pump and move the clamp back into position.
8/5/2012 2:56 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 ...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000159C017X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE
(a) Change the locations of the front hood stay from A to B, and
support the hood sub-assembly with the location B.
(b) Disconnect the vacuum tube connector hose from the

vacuum pump assembly.
2. REMOVE FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER TO COWL BRACE SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
3. REMOVE VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and vacuum pump assembly.
1 of 2
8/5/2012 2:56 PM
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 ...
(b) Remove the O-ring.
(c) Remove the seal packing from the vacuum pump assembly and the engine.
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:56 PM
BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE...
1 of 2
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034UW00EX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 2:05 PM
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:05 PM
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058JE000X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 3 nuts and remove the brake actuator assembly
from the brake actuator bracket assembly.
2. REMOVE BRAKE ACTUATOR DAMPER
(a) Remove the 3 brake actuator actuator damper from the

brake actuator bracket assembly.
8/5/2012 2:05 PM
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034UV01BX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY WITH BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET
(a) Install the brake actuator assembly with brake actuator bracket using the 4 bolts.
(b) Connect the brake actuator connector to the brake actuator.
(c) Turn the locking lever downwards, and engage the wire
harness connector locking claw to lock the connector.
*a
Turn
NOTICE:
Make sure that the actuator connector can be connected
smoothly. Do not allow water, oil or dirt to enter.
Make sure that the connector is locked securely.
(d) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, tighten 2 brake tubes.

NOTICE:
Use the formula to calculate the special torque values for
situations where the union nut wrench is combined with a
torque wrench
.
(e) Using a union nut wrench 10 mm, tighten the 4 brake tubes.
NOTICE:
Use the formula to calculate the special torque values for
situations where the union nut wrench is combined with a
.
torque wrench
(f) Connect the front speed sensor LH harness clamp to the brake actuator bracket assembly.
(g) Connect the cooler pipe to the clamp.
(h) Connect the 2 harness clamp to the brake actuator bracket.
2. ADD BRAKE FLUID

3. BLEED BRAKE SYSTEM
8/5/2012 2:05 PM
2 of 2
4. INSPECT FLUID LEAK

5. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
6. INSTALL FRONT FENDER LINER LH
8. VSC SENSOR NEUTRAL MEMORIZATION
9. INSPECT SPEED SENSOR
8/5/2012 2:05 PM
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058JF000X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR DAMPER
(a) Install the 3 new brake actuator dampers (A and B) to the

brake actuator bracket assembly.
2. INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the brake actuator bracket assembly to the brake
actuator assembly with the 3 new nuts and 3 new washers.
NOTICE:
Do not remove the hole plugs of a new brake actuator
assembly before connecting the brake lines because the
brake actuator assembly is filled with brake fluid.
8/5/2012 2:05 PM
BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: FRONT ...
1 of 2
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VKW00YX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: FRONT SPEED SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 2:20 PM
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:20 PM
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WET03BX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: FRONT SPEED SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
The procedures listed below are for the LH side.
Use the same procedures for the RH and LH sides.
1. INSTALL FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH

(a) Install the front speed sensor LH with the bolt.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter between the steering knuckle and the
front disc brake dust cover.
(b) Connect the 6 front speed sensor clamps.

NOTICE:
Securely connect the connector.

4. INSPECT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
8/5/2012 2:20 PM
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WEU02RX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: FRONT SPEED SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. REMOVE FRONT FENDER LINER LH
3. REMOVE FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH
(a) Disconnect the front speed sensor connector.
(b) Disconnect the 6 clamps.
(c) Remove the bolt and front speed sensor LH from the steering
knuckle.
NOTICE:
Clean the speed sensor installation hole and the contact
surfaces every time the front speed sensor is removed.
8/5/2012 2:21 PM
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:21 PM
BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: REAR S...
1 of 1
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000SS0011X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: REAR SPEED SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 2:24 PM
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000SRY02NX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: REAR SPEED SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR SPEED SENSOR LH

(a) Install the rear speed sensor LH with the 3 bolts.
NOTICE:
Prevent foreign matter from attaching to the rear speed sensor LH tip, installation surface and sensor
body.
(b) Connect the 2 harness clamps.

NOTICE:
Do not twist the wire harness for the rear speed sensor LH when installing it.
(c) Pull the rear speed sensor LH grommet out from vehicle interior.
NOTICE:
Do not pull the rear speed sensor LH wire harness.
Do not fix the pass-through grommet at an angle.
(d) Connect the rear speed sensor LH connector.
(e) Install the luggage compartment floor mat.
2. INSTALL REAR WHEEL LH

3. INSPECT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
8/5/2012 2:25 PM
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000SS1028X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: REAR SPEED SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE REAR WHEEL LH

2. REMOVE REAR SPEED SENSOR LH
(a) Remove the luggage compartment floor mat.
(b) Disconnect the rear speed sensor LH connector.
(c) Disconnect the rear speed sensor LH grommet and 2 harness clamps from the rear wheel house.
Text in illustration
Rear Speed Sensor LH Grommet
(d) Remove the 2 bolts from the bracket.
8/5/2012 2:25 PM
2 of 2
(e) Remove the bolt and the rear speed sensor LH.
NOTICE:
Clean the speed sensor installation hole and the contact
surfaces every time the rear speed sensor is removed.
8/5/2012 2:25 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: COMPONEN...
1 of 2
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000006NP00LX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 2:58 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: COMPONEN...
2 of 2
8/5/2012 2:58 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMB...
1 of 5
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000006NR00OX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

2. SEPARATE REAR DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the rear disc brake caliper
assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Hang the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH with wire or
equivalent.
3. REMOVE REAR DISC
(a) Put matchmarks on the rear disc and the rear axle hub.
*a
Matchmark
HINT:
If the disc cannot be removed easily, use a screwdriver to turn the shoe adjuster as shown in the
illustration in order to contract the parking brake shoes.
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
2 of 5
*a
Expand
*b
Contract
4. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Front Side)
(a) Using SST, remove the parking brake shoe return tension
spring.
SST: 09921-00011
5. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
spring.
SST: 09921-00011
6. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT COMPRESSION SPRING
(a) Using SST, remove the parking brake shoe strut

compression spring.
SST: 09921-00011
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
3 of 5
7. FIX PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Front Side)
(a) Using SST, remove the brake shoe hold down compression
spring.
SST: 09718-00011
HINT:
Hold the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin with your
finger.
8. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Front Side)
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for front side).
9. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT LH

(a) Pull the parking brake shoe towards the front of the vehicle by hand as shown in the illustration.
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe strut LH.

*1
Parking brake shoe strut LH
10. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN

COMPRESSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
spring (for rear side).
SST: 09718-00011
HINT:
Use the service hole to hold the parking brake shoe hold down
spring pin with your finger.
11. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Rear Side)
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for rear side).
12. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING SCREW SET
(a) Expand the parking brake shoe outward by hand and pull
downward to separate them from the parking brake plate.
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
4 of 5
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting screw set.
13. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE KIT
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe kit.
14. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe return tension spring.
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
5 of 5
15. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE LEVER LH
(a) Using needle-nose pliers, remove the parking brake shoe

lever LH from the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly as
shown in the illustration.
16. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE TYPE C WASHER
(a) Widen and remove the parking brake shoe type C washer
from the parking brake shoe as shown in the illustration.
17. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE WAVE WASHER

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe wave washer.
18. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE PIN

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe pin.
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
1 of 5
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000006NR00OX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

2. SEPARATE REAR DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the rear disc brake caliper
assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Hang the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH with wire or
equivalent.
3. REMOVE REAR DISC
(a) Put matchmarks on the rear disc and the rear axle hub.
*a
Matchmark
HINT:
If the disc cannot be removed easily, use a screwdriver to turn the shoe adjuster as shown in the
illustration in order to contract the parking brake shoes.
8/5/2012 3:09 PM
2 of 5
*a
Expand
*b
Contract
4. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Front Side)
spring.
SST: 09921-00011
5. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
spring.
SST: 09921-00011
6. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT COMPRESSION SPRING
(a) Using SST, remove the parking brake shoe strut

compression spring.
SST: 09921-00011
8/5/2012 3:09 PM
3 of 5
7. FIX PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Front Side)
spring.
SST: 09718-00011
HINT:
Hold the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin with your
finger.
8. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Front Side)
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for front side).
9. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT LH

(a) Pull the parking brake shoe towards the front of the vehicle by hand as shown in the illustration.
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe strut LH.

*1
Parking brake shoe strut LH
10. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN

COMPRESSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
spring (for rear side).
SST: 09718-00011
HINT:
Use the service hole to hold the parking brake shoe hold down
spring pin with your finger.
11. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Rear Side)
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for rear side).
12. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING SCREW SET
(a) Expand the parking brake shoe outward by hand and pull
downward to separate them from the parking brake plate.
8/5/2012 3:09 PM
4 of 5
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting screw set.
13. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE KIT
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe kit.
14. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe return tension spring.
8/5/2012 3:09 PM
5 of 5
15. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE LEVER LH
(a) Using needle-nose pliers, remove the parking brake shoe

lever LH from the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly as
16. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE TYPE C WASHER
(a) Widen and remove the parking brake shoe type C washer
from the parking brake shoe as shown in the illustration.
17. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE WAVE WASHER

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe wave washer.
18. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE PIN

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe pin.
8/5/2012 3:09 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION...
1 of 1
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000V6G04TX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BRAKE DISC INSIDE DIAMETER
(a) Using a brake drum gauge or an equivalent tool, measure
the inside diameter of the disc.
Standard inside diameter:
190 mm (7.48 in.)
Maximum inside diameter:
191 mm (7.52 in.)
If the inside diameter is more than the maximum, replace
the rear disc.
2. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SHOE LINING THICKNESS

(a) Using a ruler, measure the thickness of the parking brake
shoe lining.
Standard thickness:
3.5 mm (0.1378 in.)
Minimum thickness:
1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
If the lining thickness is less than the minimum, or if there is
severe or uneven wear, replace the parking brake shoe
assembly.
NOTICE:
Always replace both right and left parking brake shoes
together.
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION...
1 of 1
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000V6G04TX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BRAKE DISC INSIDE DIAMETER
(a) Using a brake drum gauge or an equivalent tool, measure
the inside diameter of the disc.
190 mm (7.48 in.)
Maximum inside diameter:
191 mm (7.52 in.)
If the inside diameter is more than the maximum, replace
the rear disc.
2. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SHOE LINING THICKNESS

(a) Using a ruler, measure the thickness of the parking brake
shoe lining.
Standard thickness:
3.5 mm (0.1378 in.)
Minimum thickness:
1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
If the lining thickness is less than the minimum, or if there is
severe or uneven wear, replace the parking brake shoe
assembly.
NOTICE:
Always replace both right and left parking brake shoes
together.
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBL...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000006NT00RX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. APPLY DISC BRAKE GREASE

(a) Apply a light coat of disc brake grease to the areas of the backing plate which make contact with the
shoe as shown in the illustration.
Disc Brake Grease
2. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE PIN

(a) Install the parking brake shoe pin.
3. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE LEVER LH

(a) Apply a light coat of disc brake grease to the areas of the parking brake shoe lever LH which make
contact with the parking brake shoe pin.
(b) Install the parking brake shoe lever LH to the parking brake shoe.
4. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE WAVE WASHER

(a) Install the wave washer.
5. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE TYPE C WASHER

(a) Install a new parking brake shoe type C washer.
(b) Using a pair of pliers, squeeze together the ends of the

parking brake shoe type C washer.
1 of 6
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
6. INSTALL NO. 3 PARKING BRAKE CABLE ASSEMBLY

(a) Using needle-nose pliers, connect the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the parking brake shoe
lever LH.
7. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring to the
parking brake shoe.
8. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE KIT
(a) Install the parking brake shoe to the parking brake shoe
return tension spring.
9. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING SCREW SET
(a) Apply disc brake grease to the parking brake shoe adjusting
screw set as shown in the illustration.
2 of 6
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
(b) Install the parking brake shoe adjusting screw set to the parking brake shoes.
NOTICE:
Take care to install the correct parking brake shoe adjusting screw set because the direction of the
parking brake shoe adjusting screw set is different between the left and right sides.
Disc Brake Grease
For front side (LH Side)

For rear side (RH Side)
(c) Expand the parking brake shoes outward by hand and fit
them to the parking brake plate.
10. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Rear Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for rear side) to the parking brake plate.
11. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
(a) Using SST, install the parking brake shoe hold down
3 of 6
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
compression spring (for rear side) as shown in the

illustration.
SST: 09718-00011
12. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT LH

(a) Apply a light coat of disc brake grease to the areas of the parking brake shoe strut LH which make
contact with the parking brake shoe kit.
(b) Pull the parking brake shoe towards the front of the vehicle by hand as shown in the illustration.
(c) Install the parking brake shoe strut LH.
(d) Install the parking brake shoe.

*1 Parking brake shoe strut LH
13. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Front Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for Front side) to the parking brake plate.
14. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Front Side)
compression spring (for Front Side) as shown in the
illustration.
SST: 09718-00011
15. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT COMPRESSION SPRING

(a) Install the parking brake shoe strut compression spring to the shoe strut.
16. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring (for rear side).
17. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Front Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring (for front side).
18. CHECK PARKING BRAKE INSTALLATION

(a) Make sure that all the parts are installed properly. If necessary, remove and reinstall the parts.
4 of 6
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
*a
LH Side
*b
Front of the Vehicle
RH Side
-

(a) Align the matchmarks of the rear disc and rear axle hub, and
install the rear disc.
*a
Matchmark
HINT:
When replacing the disc with a new one, select the installation
position where the rear disc has minimal runout.
20. ADJUST PARKING BRAKE SHOW CLEARANCE AND PARKING BRAKE LEVER TRAVEL
(a) Temporarily install the hub nuts to the hub bolts.
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.
(c) Turn the shoe adjuster and expand the shoes until the disc locks.
5 of 6
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
*a
Expand
*b
Contract
(d) Turn and contract the shoe adjuster until the disc can rotate smoothly.
Standard:
Returns 10 notches.
(e) Check that the parking brake does not drag.
(f) Remove the hub nuts from the hub bolts.
21. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear disc brake caliper assembly LH with the new 2 bolts.
22. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE LEVER TRAVEL
23. ADJUST PARKING BRAKE LEVER TRAVEL

6 of 6
8/5/2012 2:59 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000006NT00RX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. APPLY DISC BRAKE GREASE

(a) Apply a light coat of disc brake grease to the areas of the backing plate which make contact with the
shoe as shown in the illustration.
Disc Brake Grease
2. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE PIN

(a) Install the parking brake shoe pin.
3. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE LEVER LH

(a) Apply a light coat of disc brake grease to the areas of the parking brake shoe lever LH which make
contact with the parking brake shoe pin.
(b) Install the parking brake shoe lever LH to the parking brake shoe.
4. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE WAVE WASHER

(a) Install the wave washer.
5. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE TYPE C WASHER

(a) Install a new parking brake shoe type C washer.
(b) Using a pair of pliers, squeeze together the ends of the

parking brake shoe type C washer.
1 of 6
8/5/2012 3:08 PM

(a) Using needle-nose pliers, connect the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the parking brake shoe
lever LH.
7. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring to the
parking brake shoe.
8. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE KIT
(a) Install the parking brake shoe to the parking brake shoe
return tension spring.
9. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING SCREW SET
(a) Apply disc brake grease to the parking brake shoe adjusting
screw set as shown in the illustration.
2 of 6
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
(b) Install the parking brake shoe adjusting screw set to the parking brake shoes.
NOTICE:
Take care to install the correct parking brake shoe adjusting screw set because the direction of the
parking brake shoe adjusting screw set is different between the left and right sides.
Disc Brake Grease
For front side (LH Side)

For rear side (RH Side)
(c) Expand the parking brake shoes outward by hand and fit
them to the parking brake plate.
10. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Rear Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for rear side) to the parking brake plate.
11. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
3 of 6
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
compression spring (for rear side) as shown in the

illustration.
SST: 09718-00011
12. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT LH

(a) Apply a light coat of disc brake grease to the areas of the parking brake shoe strut LH which make
contact with the parking brake shoe kit.
(b) Pull the parking brake shoe towards the front of the vehicle by hand as shown in the illustration.
(c) Install the parking brake shoe strut LH.
(d) Install the parking brake shoe.

*1 Parking brake shoe strut LH
13. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Front Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for Front side) to the parking brake plate.
14. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Front Side)
compression spring (for Front Side) as shown in the
illustration.
SST: 09718-00011
15. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT COMPRESSION SPRING

(a) Install the parking brake shoe strut compression spring to the shoe strut.
16. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring (for rear side).
17. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Front Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring (for front side).
18. CHECK PARKING BRAKE INSTALLATION

(a) Make sure that all the parts are installed properly. If necessary, remove and reinstall the parts.
4 of 6
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
*a
LH Side
*b
RH Side
-

(a) Align the matchmarks of the rear disc and rear axle hub, and
install the rear disc.
*a
Matchmark
HINT:
When replacing the disc with a new one, select the installation
position where the rear disc has minimal runout.
20. ADJUST PARKING BRAKE SHOW CLEARANCE AND PARKING BRAKE LEVER TRAVEL
(a) Temporarily install the hub nuts to the hub bolts.
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.
(c) Turn the shoe adjuster and expand the shoes until the disc locks.
5 of 6
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
*a
Expand
*b
Contract
(d) Turn and contract the shoe adjuster until the disc can rotate smoothly.
Standard:
Returns 10 notches.
(e) Check that the parking brake does not drag.
(f) Remove the hub nuts from the hub bolts.
21. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear disc brake caliper assembly LH with the new 2 bolts.

6 of 6
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: COMPONENTS (...
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KG2009X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
1 of 2
8/5/2012 3:00 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: COMPONENTS (...
2 of 2
8/5/2012 3:00 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: INSTALLATION (...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Install the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the parking brake plate with the clamp.
(b) Install the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the body with the 4 bolts.

HINT:
Use the same procedure for the No. 2 parking brake cable assembly as for the No. 3 parking brake cable
assembly.
3. INSTALL PROPELLER WITH CENTER BEARING SHAFT ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL CENTER EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the center exhaust pipe assembly with the cushion rubber.
(b) Install the new gasket and the center exhaust pipe assembly with the 2 new nuts and the 2 bolts to
tail exhaust pipe assembly.
HINT:
Do not reuse the gaskets.
Do not reuse the nuts.
(c) Install the new gasket and the front exhaust pipe assembly with the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts and the 2
compression springs to the center exhaust pipe assembly.
HINT:
5. INSTALL NO. 3 FUEL TANK PROTECTOR

6. INSTALL LOWER CASING BRACKET
(a) Install the lower casing bracket of the body with the 2 bolts.
7. INSTALL CLAMP H/B

(a) Install the clamp H/B of the casing lower bracket with the 2 nuts.
8. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY
1 of 2
8/5/2012 3:01 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: INSTALLATION (...
10. INSTALL CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY
2 of 2
8/5/2012 3:01 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: REMOVAL (2013...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE NO. 1 PARKING BRAKE CABLE ASSEMBLY

3. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE CLAMP H/B
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and the clamp H/B.
5. REMOVE LOWER CASING BRACKET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the lower casing bracket.
6. REMOVE NO. 3 FUEL TANK PROTECTOR

7. REMOVE CENTER EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts and the 2 compression
spring and disconnect the center exhaust pipe assembly.
1 of 3
8/5/2012 3:00 PM
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts and disconnect the tail
exhaust pipe assembly.
(c) Remove the cushion rubber and the center exhaust pipe
assembly.
(d) Remove the gasket.
8. REMOVE PROPELLER WITH CENTER BEARING SHAFT ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 4 bolts and separate the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly from the vehicle.
2 of 3
8/5/2012 3:00 PM
Bolt
Vehicle of the Front Side
(b) Remove the clamp and remove the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly.

HINT:
Use the same No. 3 parking brake cable assembly as for the No. 2 parking brake cable assembly.
3 of 3
8/5/2012 3:00 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

3. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE CLAMP H/B
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and the clamp H/B.
5. REMOVE LOWER CASING BRACKET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the lower casing bracket.

(a) Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts and the 2 compression
spring and disconnect the center exhaust pipe assembly.
1 of 3
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts and disconnect the tail
(c) Remove the cushion rubber and the center exhaust pipe
assembly.
(d) Remove the gasket.

(a) Remove the 4 bolts and separate the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly from the vehicle.
2 of 3
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
Bolt
Vehicle of the Front Side
(b) Remove the clamp and remove the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly.

HINT:
Use the same No. 3 parking brake cable assembly as for the No. 2 parking brake cable assembly.
3 of 3
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: COMPONENTS (...
1 of 1
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026OG007X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 3:03 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: INSTALLATION (...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026OF008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the parking brake switch assembly with the screw.
2. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE LEVER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the parking brake lever assembly with the 3 bolts.
(b) Connect the parking brake switch assembly connector.

(a) Temporarily install the NO. 1 parking brake cable assembly to the parking brake lever with the new
adjusting nut.
(b) Install the NO. 2 parking brake cable assembly and NO. 3 to the NO. 1 parking brake cable assembly.

1 of 1
8/5/2012 3:03 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: REMOVAL (2013 ...
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026OH008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(a) Release the parking brake lever assembly.
(b) Remove the adjusting nut.
(c) Disconnect the NO. 2 parking brake cable assembly and NO.
3 parking brake cable assembly from the NO. 1 parking
brake cable assembly.
(d) Remove the NO. 1 parking brake cable assembly from the parking brake lever assembly.
3. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE LEVER ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the parking brake switch assembly connector.
(b) Remove the 3 bolts and parking brake lever assembly.
4. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the screw and parking brake switch assembly from
the parking brake lever assembly.
1 of 2
8/5/2012 3:03 PM
2 of 2
8/5/2012 3:03 PM
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026OH008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(a) Release the parking brake lever assembly.
(b) Remove the adjusting nut.
(c) Disconnect the NO. 2 parking brake cable assembly and NO.
3 parking brake cable assembly from the NO. 1 parking
brake cable assembly.
(d) Remove the NO. 1 parking brake cable assembly from the parking brake lever assembly.
3. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE LEVER ASSEMBLY

(b) Remove the 3 bolts and parking brake lever assembly.

(a) Remove the screw and parking brake switch assembly from
the parking brake lever assembly.
1 of 2
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
2 of 2
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: COMPONENTS ...
1 of 1
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026OU007X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 3:04 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: INSPECTION (2...
1 of 1
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026OT007X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the resistance.
(1) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals.
ON
OFF
Standard resistance:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 - Ground
Released (ON)
Below 1
1 - Ground
Pushed in (OFF)
10 k or higher
If the result is not as specified, replace the parking brake switch assembly.
8/5/2012 3:05 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: INSTALLATION...
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026OS008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the parking brake switch assembly with the screw.
(b) Connect the parking brake switch assembly connector.
8/5/2012 3:05 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: REMOVAL (201...
1 of 1
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026OV008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(b) Remove the screw and parking brake switch assembly.
8/5/2012 3:05 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM: ADJUSTMENT ...
1 of 2
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UVR057X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
(a) Fully pull the parking brake lever to engage the parking brake.
(b) Pull the lever again to disengage the parking brake.
(c) Slowly pull the parking brake lever using the specified force, and count the number of clicks.
Parking brake lever travel:
7 to 8 notches at 200 N (20 kgf, 45.0 lbf)
If the parking brake lever travel is not as specified, adjust the parking brake shoe clearance and
parking brake lever travel.

(a) Remove the front console box
(b) Completely release the parking brake lever.
(c) Loosen the adjusting nut to completely release the parking

brake cable.
*1
Adjusting nut
(d) Remove the rear wheels.

(e) Temporarily install the hub nuts to the hub bolts.
(f) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.
(g) Turn the shoe adjuster and expand the shoes until the disc locks.
8/5/2012 3:06 PM
2 of 2
*a
Expand
*b
Contract
(h) Turn and contract the shoe adjuster until the disc can rotate smoothly.
Standard:
Returns 10 notches.
(i) Check that there is no brake drag against the shoe.
(j) Install the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.
(k) Turn the adjusting nut until the parking brake lever travel is corrected to be within the specified range.
(l) Using a wrench or an equivalent tool, tighten the adjusting nut.
(m) Operate the parking brake lever 3 to 4 times, and check the parking brake lever travel.
(n) Check that the parking brake does not drag.
(o) Remove the hub nuts from the hub bolts.
(p) Install the rear wheels.
(q) Install the front console box
3. INSPECT BRAKE WARNING LIGHT

(a) When operating the parking brake lever, check that the brake warning light illuminates.
Standard:
The brake warning light always illuminates at the first click.
8/5/2012 3:06 PM
1 of 2
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UVR057X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
(a) Fully pull the parking brake lever to engage the parking brake.
(b) Pull the lever again to disengage the parking brake.
(c) Slowly pull the parking brake lever using the specified force, and count the number of clicks.
If the parking brake lever travel is not as specified, adjust the parking brake shoe clearance and
parking brake lever travel.

(a) Remove the front console box
(b) Completely release the parking brake lever.
(c) Loosen the adjusting nut to completely release the parking

brake cable.
*1
Adjusting nut
(d) Remove the rear wheels.

(e) Temporarily install the hub nuts to the hub bolts.
(f) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.
(g) Turn the shoe adjuster and expand the shoes until the disc locks.
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
2 of 2
*a
Expand
*b
Contract
(h) Turn and contract the shoe adjuster until the disc can rotate smoothly.
Standard:
Returns 10 notches.
(i) Check that there is no brake drag against the shoe.
(j) Install the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.
(k) Turn the adjusting nut until the parking brake lever travel is corrected to be within the specified range.
(l) Using a wrench or an equivalent tool, tighten the adjusting nut.
(m) Operate the parking brake lever 3 to 4 times, and check the parking brake lever travel.
(n) Check that the parking brake does not drag.
(o) Remove the hub nuts from the hub bolts.
(p) Install the rear wheels.
(q) Install the front console box
3. INSPECT BRAKE WARNING LIGHT

(a) When operating the parking brake lever, check that the brake warning light illuminates.
Standard:
The brake warning light always illuminates at the first click.
8/5/2012 3:08 PM
PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SY...
1 of 1
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KNR00AX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Parking brake lever travel (Out of adjustment)

Parking brake wire (Sticking) (No. 1 cable)
Brake drag

Parking brake shoe clearance (Out of adjustment)
Parking brake shoe lining (Cracked or distorted)
Tension or return spring (Damaged)
8/5/2012 3:06 PM
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMAT...
1 of 2
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000NR9022X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY:

COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 3:41 PM
2 of 2
8/5/2012 3:41 PM
1 of 6
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000NR8040X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY:

INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the splines of the input shaft and turbine runner.
(b) Engage the splines of the stator shaft and stator while
turning the torque converter assembly.
HINT:
If the stator shaft splines are difficult to engage with the stator
splines, move the torque converter back approximately 10 mm
(0.394 in.) and engage the splines while rotating the torque
converter assembly.
(c) Turn the torque converter assembly to engage the key of the
oil pump drive gear into the slot on the torque converter
assembly.
(d) Using a vernier caliper and straightedge, measure dimension

A between the transmission contact surface of the engine
and the torque converter contact surface of the drive plate.
(e) Using a vernier caliper and straightedge, measure dimension
8/5/2012 3:42 PM
2 of 6
B shown in the illustration and check that dimension B is

more than dimension A, which was measured in the first
step.
Standard::
B = A + 1 mm (0.0394 in.) or more
NOTICE:
Make sure to deduct the thickness of the straightedge.
If the transmission is installed to the engine with the torque
converter not sufficiently inserted, the torque converter may
be damaged.
2. INSTALL OIL COOLER TUBE

(a) Install the oil cooler tube with the bolt to the automatic transmission assembly.
(b) Connect the 2 new water by-pass hoses to the transmission oil cooler with the 4 hose clamps.
3. INSTALL WIRE HARNESS

(a) Install the wire harness to the automatic transmission
assembly with engage the 6 wire harness clamps.
(b) Connect the park/neutral position switch connector,
transmission wire connector and the transmission revolution
sensor connector.
HINT:
Push up the lever until the claw of the transmission wire
connector makes a connection sound.
4. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 ENGINE MOUNTING INSULATOR

(a) Install the rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator to the automatic transmission assembly with the 4
bolts.
5. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(a) Confirm that 2 knock pins are on the automatic transmission

assembly contact surface of the engine cylinder block before
automatic transmission assembly installation.
8/5/2012 3:42 PM
3 of 6
(b) Keeping the engine assembly and the automatic transmission assembly in a horizontal position, align
the knock pins with each hole on the automatic transmission assembly and install the 2 bolts and
2nuts.
*1
Knock Pin
Bolt
Nut

NOTICE:
Make sure not to pinch or damage any wire harness.
Make sure the knock pin is fully engaged with the knock pin hole.
Do not forcibly pry the automatic transmission assembly.
After installing the automatic transmission assembly, confirm that the torque converter assembly can
be rotated by hand.
6. INSTALL REAR NO. 2 ENGINE MOUNTING INSULATOR

(a) Install the rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator to the rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator with 2
washers and 2 nuts.
(b) Install the rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator to the body with the 4 bolts.
7. INSTALL EXHAUST PIPE BRACKET

(a) Install the exhaust pipe bracket with the 2 bolts.
8. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY
8/5/2012 3:42 PM
4 of 6
(a) Apply MP grease to the pin.

(b) Install the floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly to the transmission control shaft lever RH with the
pin and a clip.
(c) While pushing the shift lock release button, move the shift lever to N.
(d) Using tape, hold a 0.3 mm feeler gauge on the floor shift
control select lever.
(e) Using tape, attach the floor shift control select lever to the
console box assembly.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the feeler gauge is not on the area shown in
the illustration.
(f) Turn the transmission control shaft lever RH of the

park/neutral position switch assembly counterclockwise until
it stops, and turn it clockwise 2 notches to set it to the N
position.
(g) Temporarily install the floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly with the nut.
(h) Tighten the nut while lightly pushing the lever rearward.
NOTICE:
Do not push the lever too hard.
9. INSTALL TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (NT)

10. CONNECT OIL COOLER TUBE
(a) Fasten the oil cooler pipe with the oil cooler tube using 2 bolts.
11. INSTALL TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE

(a) Install the 2 new transmission oil cooler hoses to the transmission oil cooler with the 4 hose clamps.
12. INSTALL EXHAUST MANIFOLD
8/5/2012 3:42 PM
5 of 6
13. CONNECT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the 2 bolts to the automatic transmission assembly.
14. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE AND TORQUE CONVERTER SETTING BOLT

(a) Install the 6 drive plate and torque converter setting bolt.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the drive plate and torque converter setting bolts do not fall into the clutch housing.
Make sure not to damage the drive plate and torque converter setting bolts.
15. INSTALL FLYWHEEL HOUSING UNDER COVER

(a) Install the flywheel housing side cover.
16. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE

(a) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose with the 2 bolts.
17. CONNECT WIRE HARNESS

(a) Install the No. 2 engine hanger with the 2 bolts.
(b) Install the wire harness clamp bracket with the bolt.
(c) Engage the wire harness clamp.
(d) Connect the 3 connectors.

HINT:
Push down the lever until the claw of the connector (A) makes a
connection sound.
(e) Engage the 4 wire harness clamps.

(f) Install the ground cable to the automatic transmission assembly with the bolt
(g) Connect the 2 connectors.

HINT:
Push down the lever until the claw of the connector (A) makes a
connection sound.
8/5/2012 3:42 PM
6 of 6
18. INSTALL STARTER ASSEMBLY
19. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER BAR
21. INSTALL NO. 2 ENGINE UNDER COVER

23. CONNECT BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
24. ADD ENGINE COOLANT
25. ADD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
26. CHECK FOR ENGINE COOLANT LEAKS

27. INSPECT SHIFT LEVER POSITION
28. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAKS
29. RESET CHECK RESET MEMORY
8/5/2012 3:42 PM
1 of 5
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000013BU08VX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID: ADJUSTMENT

(2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
NOTICE:
This transmission requires Toyota Genuine ATF WS.
After servicing the transmission, you must follow the ATF adjustment procedure.
Maintain the vehicle in a horizontal position while adjusting the fluid level.
1. BEFORE FILLING TRANSMISSION

When you have replaced the entire automatic transmission, automatic transmission oil pan, drain
plug, transmission valve body and/or torque converter, proceed to the "TRANSMISSION FILL"
8/5/2012 3:46 PM
2 of 5
procedures.
When you have replaced the automatic transmission extension housing oil seal and/or repaired a
fluid leak, proceed to the "FLUID TEMPERATURE CHECK" procedures.
2. FILL TRANSMISSION PAN WITH FLUID

(a) Lift the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Set the vehicle on a lift so that the vehicle is kept level when it is lifted up (make sure that the tilt
angle from the front to rear of the vehicle is within +/- 1).
(b) Remove the No. 2 engine under cover
(c) Remove the refill plug with O-ring, overflow plug and gasket.
*1
Refill Plug
*2
Overflow Plug
*a
Refill Hole
(d) Fill the transmission through the refill hole until fluid begins
to trickle out of the overflow tube.
*1
Overflow Tube
*a
Specified Fluid Level
(e) Wait until the fluid flow slows and only drops come out.
(f) Temporarily install the overflow plug and gasket.
HINT:
Reuse the old gasket. The overflow plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
(g) Fill the transmission with the amount of fluid listed in the table below.
Reference Capacity:
PERFORMED REPAIR
Automatic transmission oil pan and drain plug removal/installation
FILL AMOUNT
2.0 liters (2.1 US qts, 1.8 Imp. qts)
8/5/2012 3:46 PM
3 of 5
PERFORMED REPAIR
FILL AMOUNT
Transmission valve body removal/installation
Torque converter removal/installation
HINT:
If you cannot fill the listed amount of fluid, perform the following:
(1) Temporarily install the refill plug with O-ring.

HINT:
Reuse the old O-ring. The refill plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
(2) Start the engine and idle it.

NOTICE:
Check that electrical systems such as the air conditioning system, audio system and lighting system
are off.
(3) Slowly move the shift lever from P to M. Then return the shift lever to P.
HINT:
Slowly move the shift lever to circulate the fluid through each part of the transmission.
(4) Wait for 30 seconds with the engine idling.

(5) Stop the engine.
(6) Remove the refill plug with O-ring.
(7) Fill the transmission with the remaining fluid until the amount in the table has been filled.
(h) Temporarily install the refill plug with O-ring.
HINT:
(i) Lower the vehicle.
3. FLUID TEMPERATURE CHECK

NOTICE:
The ATF temperature can be confirmed by using the Techstream.
(a) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

(b) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List / A/T Oil Temperature 1.
(e) Check the ATF temperature.
NOTICE:
If the ATF temperature is higher than 42C (108F), turn the ignition switch OFF and wait until the
fluid temperature drops to below 42C (108F).
4. FLUID LEVEL CHECK

CAUTION:
It is necessary to change to temperature detection mode in order to idle the vehicle appropriately.
The ATF temperature must be between 42 and 47C (108 and 117F) to accurately check the fluid
level.
8/5/2012 3:46 PM
4 of 5
(a) When using the Techstream:

Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Active Test / Connect the TC and TE1.
(b) When not using the Techstream:

Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of the
DLC3.
*a
Front view of DLC3
SST: 09843-18040
(c) Start the engine and idle it.
NOTICE:
Check that electrical systems such as the air conditioning system, audio system and lighting system
are off.
(d) Slowly move the shift lever from P to M. Then return the shift lever to P.
HINT:
(e) Move the shift lever to D, and then quickly move it back and
forth between N and D (once within 1.5 seconds) for at least
6 seconds. This will activate the fluid temperature detection
mode.
Standard condition:
When switching to the oil temperature detecting mode,
regardless of the shift position, the indicator lights [] and
[] turn on for 2 seconds, and then go off.
(f) When using the Techstream:

Return the shift lever to P and terminate the Active Test on the Techstream.
(g) When not using the Techstream:
Return the shift lever to P and disconnect SST from the DLC3.
(h) While watching the state of the indicator lights [] and [], idle the engine to rise the oil
temperature.
NOTICE:
If only the indicator light [] turns on or the indicator lights [] and [] turn on simultaneously,
stop the operation. And then, wait until the fluid temperature is lowered and only the indicator light
[] turns on in the oil temperature detecting mode.
(i) Allow the engine to idle until the fluid temperature reaches 42 to 47C (108 to 117F).
Indicator [D] Indication of ATF Temperature:
8/5/2012 3:46 PM
5 of 5
BELOW PROPER TEMPERATURE
PROPER TEMPERATURE
HIGHER THAN PROPER TEMPERATURE
Below 42C (108F)
42 to 47C (108 to 117F)
Higher than 48C (118F)
Indicator lights [] turns on
Indicator lights [] and [] turn on Indicator lights [] turns on
(j) Remove the overflow plug and gasket with the engine idling.
*1
Overflow Tube
*a
(k) Wait until the overflow slows to a trickle.

NOTICE:
If the fluid does not overflow, perform the following:
(1) Remove the refill plug with O-ring.

(2) Refill the transmission through the refill hole until fluid begins to trickle out of the overflow tube.
(3) Wait until the overflow slows to a trickle.
(l) Install the overflow plug and a new gasket.
(m) Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the refill plug.
(n) Install the refill plug with O-ring.
(o) Install the No. 2 engine under cover
(p) Lower the vehicle.
5. COMPLETE
(a) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(b) When using the Techstream:
Disconnect the Techstream from the DLC3.
(c) Inspect for automatic transmission fluid leak.
8/5/2012 3:46 PM
1 of 2
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004LXE008X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID: REPLACEMENT

(2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
1. REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
(a) Lift the vehicle. [*1]
NOTICE:
Set the vehicle on a lift so that the vehicle is kept level when it is lifted up (make sure that the tilt
angle from the front to rear of the vehicle is within +/- 1).
(b) Remove the No. 2 engine under cover
(c) Remove the drain plug and gasket, and drain the ATF. [*2]
(d) Temporarily install the drain plug and gasket. [*3]
HINT:
Reuse the old gasket. The drain plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
(e) Remove the refill plug with O-ring, overflow plug and gasket.
[*4]
*1
Refill Plug
*2
Overflow Plug
*a
Refill Hole
(f) Add fluid to the refill hole until it flows out of the overflow
tube. [*5]
*1
Overflow Tube
*a
NOTICE:
Use Toyota Genuine ATF WS.
(g) Wait until the fluid flow slows and only drops come out. [*6]
8/5/2012 3:46 PM
2 of 2
(h) Temporarily install the overflow plug and gasket. [*7]

HINT:
Reuse the old gasket. The overflow plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
(i) Add fluid to the refill hole using the amount of fluid specified for removal and installation of the oil pan.
[*8]
HINT:
Specified amount of fluid is 2.0 liters (2.1 US qts, 1.8 Imp. qts).
(j) Temporarily install the refill plug with O-ring. [*9]

HINT:
(k) Lower the vehicle. [*10]

(l) Start the engine. [*11]
NOTICE:
Make sure that the A/C switch is off.
(m) Slowly move the shift lever from P to M. Then return the shift lever to P. [*12]
HINT:
(n) Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds to warm it up. [*13]
(o) Turn the ignition switch off. [*14]
(p) Repeat steps [*1] to [*14].
(q) Repeat steps [*1] to [*2].
(r) Install the drain plug and a new gasket.
(s) Repeat steps [*4] to [*10].
(t) Adjust the fluid level
(u) Install the No. 2 engine under cover
(v) Lower the vehicle.

(w) Operation complete.
8/5/2012 3:46 PM
1 of 1
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W7I0MMX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DEFINITION

OF TERMS (2013 FR-S)
DEFINITION OF TERMS
TERM
DEFINITION
Monitor description
Description of what the TCM monitors and how it detects malfunctions (monitoring
purpose and its details).
Related DTCs
Diagnostic code
Typical enabling
condition
Sequence of operation
Required
sensor/components
Preconditions that allow the TCM to detect malfunctions.

With all preconditions satisfied, the TCM sets the DTC when the monitored value(s)
exceeds the malfunction threshold(s).
The priority order that is applied to monitoring, if multiple sensors and components
are used to detect the malfunction.
While another sensor is being monitored, the next sensor or component will not be
monitored until the previous monitoring has concluded.
The sensors and components that are used by the TCM to detect malfunctions.
The number of times that the TCM checks for malfunctions per driving cycle.
"Once per driving cycle" means that the TCM detects malfunction only one time
Frequency of operation during a single driving cycle.
"Continuous" means that the TCM detects malfunction every time when enabling
condition is met.
Duration
The minimum time that the TCM must sense a continuous deviation in the
monitored value(s) before setting a DTC. This timing begins after the "typical
enabling conditions" are met.
Malfunction thresholds
Beyond this value, the TCM will conclude that there is a malfunction and set a DTC.
MIL illumination timing after a defect is detected.
MIL operation
"Immediately" means that the TCM illuminates MIL the instant the TCM determines
that there is a malfunction.
"2 driving cycle" means that the TCM illuminates MIL if the same malfunction is
detected again in the 2nd driving cycle.
Component operating
range
Normal operation range of sensors and solenoids under normal driving conditions.
Use these ranges as a reference.
They cannot be used to judge if a sensor or solenoid is defective or not.
8/5/2012 3:48 PM
1 of 5
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W6Z0TVX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: HOW TO

PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING

HINT:
The TCM of this system is connected to the CAN and multiplex communication system. Therefore,
before starting troubleshooting, make sure to check that there is no trouble in the CAN and multiplex
communication systems.
*: Use Techstream.
1.
VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP
NEXT
2.
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS
NEXT
3.
INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before proceeding.
NEXT
4.
CONNECT TECHSTREAM TO DLC3*
NEXT
5.
CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS AND FREEZE FRAME DATA*
8/5/2012 3:50 PM
2 of 5
(a) Refer to the DTC CHECK/CLEAR
NEXT
6.
VISUAL INSPECTION
NEXT
7.
SETTING CHECK MODE DIAGNOSIS*
(a) Refer to the CHECK MODE PROCEDURE
NEXT
8.
PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
(a) Refer to the ROAD TEST
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Symptom does not occur
Symptom occurs
GO TO STEP 10
9.
SYMPTOM SIMULATION
(a) Refer to the ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NEXT
8/5/2012 3:50 PM
3 of 5
10.
DTC CHECK*
(a) Refer to the DTC CHECK / CLEAR
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
GO TO STEP 18
11.
BASIC INSPECTION
(a) Refer to the PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

(b) Refer to the SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
NG
GO TO STEP 21
OK
12.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST
(a) Refer to the MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST
NG
GO TO STEP 17
NG
GO TO STEP 17
OK
13.
HYDRAULIC TEST
(a) Refer to the HYDRAULIC TEST
8/5/2012 3:50 PM
4 of 5
OK
8/5/2012 3:50 PM
5 of 5
8/5/2012 3:50 PM
1 of 2
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W720GZX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: PARTS

LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
8/5/2012 3:48 PM
2 of 2
8/5/2012 3:48 PM
1 of 2
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000O7H0C0X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION

(2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transmission assembly,
engine assembly, transmission valve body assembly or TCM
.
HINT:
RESET MEMORY can not be completed by only disconnecting the battery cable.
1. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE PRECAUTIONS

(a) The automatic transmission is composed of highly precision-finished parts which need careful
inspection before reassembly. Even a small nick could cause fluid leakage or affect the performance.
The instructions here are organized so that you work on only one component group at a time. This will
help avoid confusion caused by similar-looking parts of different sub-assemblies being on your
workbench at the same time. The component groups are inspected and repaired from the converter
housing side. Complete the inspection, repair and reassembly before proceeding to the next component
group as much as possible. If a defect is found in a certain component group during reassembly,
inspect and repair this group immediately. If a component group cannot be assembled because some
parts are being ordered, be sure to keep all parts of the group in a separate container while proceeding
with disassembly, inspection, repair and reassembly of other component groups. Recommended:
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
(b) All disassembled parts should be washed clean and any fluid passages and holes should be blown
through with compressed air.
(c) Dry all parts with compressed air. Never use a shop rag or a piece of cloth to dry them.
(d) When using compressed air, always aim away from yourself to prevent accidentally spraying ATF or
kerosene in your face.
(e) Only recommended automatic transmission fluid or kerosene should be used for cleaning.
(f) After cleaning, the parts should be arranged in the correct order for efficient inspection, repair, and
reassembly.
(g) When disassembling a valve body, be sure to match each valve together with the corresponding
spring.
(h) New discs for the brakes and clutches that are to be used for replacement must be soaked in ATF for
at least 15 minutes before reassembly.
(i) All oil seal rings, clutch discs, clutch plates, rotating parts, and sliding surfaces should be coated with
ATF prior to reassembly.
(j) All gaskets and rubber O-rings should be replaced with new ones.
(k) Do not apply adhesive cements to gaskets and similar parts.
(l) Make sure that the ends of a snap ring are not aligned with one of the cutouts and are installed in the
groove correctly.
(m) When replacing a worn bushing, the sub-assembly containing the bushing must also be replaced.
(n) Check thrust bearings and races for wear or damage. Replace them as necessary.
(o) When working with FIPG material, you must observe the following:
Using a razor blade and a gasket scraper, remove all the old packing (FIPG) material from the
gasket surface.
8/5/2012 3:48 PM
2 of 2
Thoroughly clean all components to remove any loose material.

Clean both sealing surfaces with a non-residue solvent.
Parts must be reassembled within 10 minutes of application. Otherwise, the packing (FIPG)
material must be removed and reapplied.
8/5/2012 3:48 PM
1 of 1
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W790M5X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: ROAD TEST
(2013 FR-S)
ROAD TEST
1. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
(a) Based on the result of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms. If the problem
is that the transaxle does not shift up, shift down, or the shift point is too high or too low, conduct the
following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symptoms.
2. ROAD TEST
(a) Perform a road test.
CAUTION:
Check for safety before performing any tests.
NOTICE:
Be sure to inspect and adjust the engine before performing these tests.
Perform the road test with the engine coolant temperature between 60 and 90C (140 and 194F) and
the ATF temperature between 40 and 110C (104 and 230F).
Perform these tests with the air conditioning and cruise control off.
INSPECTION
PROCEDURE
With the vehicle stationary and the shift lever in D, move the shift lever to M and
Transmission
return it to D. Check that the meter display changes from D to the appropriate M
Control Switch Test
position and then back again.
M Position Test
With the vehicle stationary and the shift lever in M, move the shift lever to "+" and "-".
Check that the meter display changes between M position properly.
D Position Shift
Test
While driving the vehicle normally, check that the transmission shifts up and down
through each gear properly.
Lock-up Function
While driving on a level surface at a constant speed in the lock-up range (50 km/h (30
mph) or more) with the shift lever in D, lightly depress the accelerator pedal and
check that the engine speed does not change abruptly.
P Position Test
Stop the vehicle on an incline (approximately 5 or more). Then move the shift lever
to P and release the parking brake. Check that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle
in place.
Abnormal Noise
and Vibration
Check for abnormal noise and vibration while driving the vehicle forward and
backward, and during shift operations.
Fluid Leakage
After performing all other road test inspections, check for fluid leakage.
8/5/2012 3:49 PM
1 of 1
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W750LZX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) The ECT (Electronic controlled automatic transmission) is an automatic transmission that electronically
controls shift timing using the TCM. The TCM detects electrical signals that indicate engine and driving
conditions, and controls the shift point, based on driver habits and road conditions. As a result, fuel
efficiency and power transmission performance are improved.
Shift shock has been reduced by controlling the engine and transmission simultaneously.
In addition, the ECT has features such as follows:
Diagnostic function.
Fail-safe function when a malfunction occurs.
8/5/2012 3:49 PM
1 of 3
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W7D0GUX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: SYSTEM

DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
The configuration of the electronic control system in the A960E automatic transmission is as shown in the
following chart.
8/5/2012 3:49 PM
2 of 3
8/5/2012 3:49 PM
3 of 3
8/5/2012 3:49 PM
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: B1016: Shift
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKP016X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: B1016: Shift
Lock Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1016
Shift Lock Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When an IGN signal, P switch signal, and STP signal are input into the main body ECU (network gateway
ECU), a signal is output to the shift lock control unit assembly.
DTC
NO.
B1016
DTC DETECTION CONDITION

1.
2.
3.
4.
TROUBLE AREA
DIAGNOSIS CONDITION
MALFUNCTION STATUS
MALFUNCTION TIME
OTHER
1. Ignition switch is turned to ON

2. Shift lock circuit open, short to B+, or
short to ground
3. For 3 seconds or more
4. 1-trip detection logic
Shift lock control unit assembly

Wire harness or connector
Main body ECU (Network
Gateway ECU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKP016X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/5/12
1.
INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY
(a) Perform inspection of the shift lock control unit assembly
NG
REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT

ASSEMBLY
OK
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU - SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(b) Disconnect the D28 shift lock control unit assembly connector.
(c) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D5-20(SLS+) - D28-4(SLS+)
Always
Below 1
D5-20(SLS+) or D28-4(SLS+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
(d) Connect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(e) Connect the D28 shift lock control unit assembly connector.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY - BODY
GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D28 shift lock control unit assembly connector.
(b) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
2/3
8/5/12
TESTER CONNECTION
D28-5(SLS-) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
(c) Connect the D28 shift lock control unit assembly connector.
NG

CONNECTOR (SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT
ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)
OK
REPLACE MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK

GATEWAY ECU)
3/3
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: CHECK MOD
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W780NLX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: CHECK MODE
PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)
CHECK MODE PROCEDURE

HINT:
Check mode has a higher sensitivity to malfunctions and can detect malfunction that normal mode
cannot detect. Check mode can also detect all the malfunctions that normal mode can detect. In
check mode, DTCs are detected with 1-trip detection logic.
1. DTC CHECK (CHECK MODE)

HINT:
Techstream only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode is more sensitive for detecting
malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can
also be detected in the check mode.
(a) Procedure for Check Mode using the Techstream.

(1) Check the initial conditions.
Battery positive voltage 11 V or more
Throttle valve fully closed
Transmission in the P or N position
A/C switch is off
(2) Turn the ignition switch off.
(3) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(4) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the Techstream main switch on.
(5) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Utility / Check Mode.
NOTICE:
All DTCs and freeze frame data recorded will be erased if: 1) Techstream is used to change the
ECM from normal mode to check mode or vice-versa; or 2) during check mode, the ignition
switch is turned from the on to on (ACC) or turned OFF.
(6) Start the engine (the MIL goes off after the engine starts).
(7) Perform "MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN" for the ECT test
malfunction described by the customer.
, or simulate the conditions of the
NOTICE:
Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs, etc.
(8) After simulating malfunction conditions, use the Techstream diagnosis selector to check the
DTCs and freeze frame data, etc.
(9) When you use Techstream: Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes.
(10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit.
(11)
to confirm the details of the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W780NLX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: CHECK MOD
2. DTC CLEAR
(a) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the Techstream main switch on.
(c) When you use Techstream: Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes / Clear.
HINT:
When operating Techstream to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See
the Techstream instruction book for operating instructions.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W780NLX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DATA LIST /
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W7E0PNX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DATA LIST /
ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
Using the Techstream to read the Data List allows the values or states of switches, sensors, actuators
and other items to be read without removing any parts. This non-intrusive inspection can be very
useful because intermittent conditions or signals may be discovered before parts or wiring is
disturbed. Reading the Data List information early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic
time.
NOTICE:
In the table below, the values listed under "Normal Condition" are reference values. Do not
depend solely on these reference values when deciding whether a part is faulty or not.
(a) Warm up the engine.

(b) Turn the ignition switch off.
(c) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(e) Turn the Techstream on.
(f) Enter the following menus: "Powertrain / ECT / Data List" or "Body Electrical / Main Body / Data
List".
(g) According to the display on the Techstream, read the "Data List".
"Powertrain / ECT / Data List"
TESTER
DISPLAY
Vehicle
Speed
Engine
Speed
Coolant
Temp
MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Vehicle speed /
Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), Max.:
255 km/h (158 mph)
Actual vehicle speed
600 to 800 rpm: Idling
Engine speed /
Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383.75
rpm
Engine coolant temperature /

Min.: -40C (-40F), Max.:
140C (284F)
75 to 100C (167 to
212F): After warming
up
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W7E0PNX.html?sisuffix=ff
If value -40C
(-40F): sensor
circuit open
If value 215C
(419F): sensor
circuit shorted
1/13
8/5/12
Engine Run
Time
Engine run time /

Min.: 0 second,
Time after engine start
11 to 14 V: Idling
Max.: 65535 seconds

Battery
Voltage
Battery voltage /
Min.: 0, Max.: 65.535 V
Brake pedal is
Stop Light
Switch
A/C signal
ON:
Depressed
OFF:
Released
Stop light switch status/

ON or OFF
A/C signal status /
A/C switch is:
ON or OFF
ON : OFF
Ignition switch is:

Pushed: OFF
Sports Mode
Switch
Pattern select switch (SPORT)

status/
ON or OFF
Pattern select switch

(SPORT) is:
Pushed: ON

(SPORT) is:
Pushed: OFF
Sport Mode
Complete
Parts Monitor
Fuel System
Monitor
Misfire Test
Result
Sport mode status/
Sport mode is:
ON or OFF
ON : OFF
Comprehensive component
monitor/
Fuel system monitor/

Not Avl or Avail
Check mode result for misfire
monitor/
EGR/VVT
Monitor
EGR/VVT monitor/
O2S(A/FS)
Heater
O2S (A/FS) heater monitor/
Heater
Monitor
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Not Avl or Avail

EGR/VVT monitor/
O2S(A/FS)
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT
Monitor
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
Compl or Incmpl
Not Avl or Avail

Compl or Incmpl
2/13
8/5/12
O2S(A/FS)
O2S (A/FS) monitor/
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
O2S(A/FS)
Monitor
O2S (A/FS) monitor/
A/C Monitor
A/C Monitor
Compl or Incmpl
A/C monitor/
Not Avl or Avail
A/C monitor/
Compl or Incmpl
2nd Air
2nd air monitor/
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
2nd Air
2nd air monitor/
Monitor
Compl or Incmpl
EVAP Monitor
EVAP Monitor
Heated
Catalyst
Monitor
Heated
Catalyst
Monitor
EVAP monitor/
Not Avl or Avail
EVAP monitor/
Compl or Incmpl
Heated catalyst monitor/
Not Avl or Avail
Compl or Incmpl
Catalyst
Monitor
Catalyst monitor/
Catalyst
Monitor
Catalyst monitor/
Component
Monitor ENA
Not Avl or Avail
Compl or Incmpl
monitor/
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
Unable or Enable
Component
monitor/
Monitor CMPL
Compl or Incmpl
Fuel System
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
Fuel System
Monitor CMPL Compl or Incmpl

Misfire
Misfire monitor/
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
Misfire
Misfire monitor/
3/13
8/5/12
EGR/VVT
EGR monitor/
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
EGR/VVT
EGR monitor/

Heater
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
Heater

O2S(A/FS)
O2S (A/FS) monitor/
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
O2S(A/FS)
O2S (A/FS) monitor/

A/C Monitor
A/C monitor/
ENA
Unable or Enable
A/C Monitor
CMPL
A/C monitor/
2nd Air
2nd air monitor/
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
Compl or Incmpl
2nd Air
2nd air monitor/
EVAP Monitor EVAP monitor/
ENA
Unable or Enable
EVAP Monitor EVAP monitor/

CMPL
Compl or Incmpl
Heated Cat
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
Heated Cat

Catalyst
Catalyst monitor/
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
Catalyst
Catalyst monitor/

#Codes
(Include
History)
MIL
MIL ON Run
Distance
# of Codes /
Min.: 0, Max.: 255
MIL status/
ON or OFF
MIL ON run distance /
Min.: 0 km (0 mile),
Max.: 65535 km (40723 mile)
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
Distance after DTC

detected
Number of detected DTCs
4/13
8/5/12
Running Time
from MIL ON
Time after
DTC Cleared
Distance from
DTC Cleared
Warmup
Running time from MIL ON /

Min.: 0 minute,
Max.: 65535 minutes
Time after DTC cleared /
Min.: 0 minute,
Max.: 65535 minutes
Distance after DTC cleared /
Min.: 0 km (0 mile)
Max.: 65535 km (40723 mile)
Requirements
Number of
Emission DTC
TC and TE1
time after MIL ON
Equivalent to time
after DTCs cleared
Equivalent to time
after DTCs cleared
Warm-up cycle after DTC
Cycle Cleared cleared /

DTC
Min.: 0, Max.: 255
OBD
Equivalent to running
OBD requirement
Emissions-related DTCs
TC and TE1 terminals of DLC3 /
ON or OFF
OBD II (California ARB)

-
Number of warm-up cycles

after DTCs cleared
This is the number of

emissions-related DTCs.
Active Test support data
Model Code
Model code
Transmission
(Engine)
Transmission (Engine) type
Cylinder number
Transmission type
Destination
550 to 800 rpm: Idling
Type
Cylinder
Number
Transmission
Type
Destination
Model Year
System
Identification
Model year /
Min.: 1900, Max.: 2155
System identification
Engine
Engine speed /
Speed from
Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383.75
EFI
rpm
If value -40C
Coolant
Engine coolant temperature /
80 to 105C (176 to
Temp from
EFI
Min.: -40C (-40F), Max.:
221F): After warming

up
215C (419F)
(-40F): sensor
circuit open
If value 140C
(284F): sensor
circuit shorted
5/13
8/5/12
0%:
Accelerator
Throttle
Position from
EFI
pedal
released
Throttle sensor position /

Min.: 0%, Max.: 100%
64 to 96%:
Recognition value for throttle

opening angle on TCM
Accelerator
pedal fully
depressed
10 to 22%:
Accelerator
Accel Position
from EFI
pedal
Absolute Accelerator Pedal
released
Position /
54 to 86%:
Accelerator
Min.: 0%, Max.: 100%
pedal fully
depressed
Received MIL
MIL request status/
MIL request is:
from ECT
ON : OFF
ON : OFF
Shift lever position is

On D: 1st,
Shift Position
Sig from ECT
Received Shift Position Signal
2nd, 3rd,
4th, 5th or
from ECT
6th
1st,2nd,3rd,4th,5th,6th,7th,8th
On M: 1st,
2nd, 3rd,
4th, 5th or
6th
Lock-up is
ON (after
warming up
engine):
Input
turbine
speed (NT)
Input shaft speed/
SPD(NT)
Min.: 0 rpm
Max.: 12,750 rpm
is equal to
engine
speed
OFF (idling
with shift
Data is displayed in increments

of 50 rpm
lever on N):
Input
turbine
speed (NT)
is nearly
equal to
6/13
8/5/12
engine
speed
Output shaft speed/
SPD(SP2)
Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph)

Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
Vehicle stopped: 0
km/h (0 mph) (output
shaft speed is equal to
vehicle speed)
Shift lever is:
Shift SW
Status (P
Range)
PNP switch status/

ON or OFF
On P: ON
Not on P:
OFF
Shift lever is:
Shift SW
Status (R
Range)
PNP switch status/

ON or OFF
On R: ON
Not on R:
OFF
Shift lever is:
Shift SW
Status (N
Range)
PNP switch status/

ON or OFF
On N: ON
Not on N:
OFF
When shift lever position

displayed on the Techstream
differs from actual position,
adjustment of PNP switch or
shift cable may be incorrect
Continuously
shift to "+"
Sport Shift
Up SW
Sport shift up switch status/

ON or OFF
(upshift): ON
Release "+"
(up-shift):
OFF
Continuously
Sport Shift
Down SW
Sport shift down switch status/

ON or OFF
shift to "-"
(downshift): ON
Release "-"
(down-
shift): OFF
Shift lever position is:
Sports Mode
Selection SW
Sport mode select switch

status/
ON or OFF
M, "+" and "": ON

Not on M,
"+" and "-":
OFF
Ignition switch is:

Pushed: OFF
7/13
8/5/12
Snow Switch
Status
Pattern select switch (SNOW)

status/

(SNOW) is:
ON or OFF
Pushed: ON

(SNOW) is:
Pushed: OFF
Shift lever is:
Shift SW
Status (D
Range)
PNP switch status/

ON or OFF
On D or M:
ON

Not on D or
M: OFF

After stall
test: 50 to
A/T Oil
Temperature
1
100C (122
to 212F)
ATF temperature sensor No. 1

value/
If value is -40C (-40F) or

215C (419F), ATF
temperature sensor No. 1

Equal to
circuit is opened or short
ambient
temperature circuited
Min.: -40C (-40F)

Max.: 215C (419F)
while engine
is cold
Lock-up is
Operating:
Lock Up
Lock Up Status/
ON or OFF
ON
Not
operating:
OFF
Shift solenoid SLT is
ST Solenoid
Shift solenoid SLT status/
Status
ON or OFF
Operating:
ON
Not
operating:
OFF
Shift lever position is
Shift Status
TCM gear shift command/

1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
On D: 1st,
2nd, 3rd,
4th, 5th or
6th
On M: 1st,
2nd, 3rd,
4th, 5th or
6th
8/13
8/5/12
Shift solenoid SL is
Operating:
SL Solenoid
Status
Shift solenoid SL status/
ON
Not
ON or OFF
operating:
OFF
Shift
Indicator
Shift indicator light up shift

status/
Light (Up)
ON or OFF
Shift
Indicator
Shift indicator light down shift

status/
Light (Down)
ON or OFF
Shift indicator light is:

ON : OFF
Shift indicator light is:
ON : OFF
Ignition switch is:

ON : OFF
Snow or 2nd
Mode
Pattern select switch (SNOW)

status/
ON or OFF

is:
Pushed : ON

is:
Released : OFF
*1:
Avail: The monitor is available on the vehicle.
Not Avl: The monitor is not available on the vehicle.
Incmpl / Compl: The item changes from Incmpl to Compl if the monitor was completed at least once
at some time in the past. This item does not change when the ignition switch is turned off.
However, the item changes back to Incmpl when DTCs are cleared or the battery cable is
disconnected.
Monitor result (mode 06): The last judgment result is output. This is not cleared when the ignition
switch is turned off, but is cleared when DTCs are cleared.
*2:
Enable: The monitor is available on the vehicle.
Unable: The monitor is not available on the vehicle.
Incmpl / Compl: The item changes from Incmpl to Compl if the monitor was completed during the
current trip. The item changes back to Incmpl when the ignition switch is turned off.
Monitor result (mode 06): The last judgment result is output. This is not cleared when the ignition
switch is turned off, but is cleared when DTCs are cleared. Therefore, only when DTCs are cleared
at the beginning of a trip do the system monitor (Monitor Information 2) and monitor result (mode
06) match.
"Powertrain / ECT / Data List"
9/13
8/5/12
TESTER
DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Brake pedal is
Stop
Light
Stop light
Switch
ON or OFF
ON:
Depressed
switch status/
OFF:
Released
Shift lever is:
Shift P
Signal
IG Power
Supply
Voltage
PNP switch
On P: ON
status/
Not on P:
OFF
ON or OFF
IG Power
Supply Voltage /
Min.: 0, Max.:
When shift lever position displayed on the

Techstream differs from actual position, adjustment
of PNP switch or shift cable may be incorrect
11 to 14 V: Idling
21.4 V
Shift lock control unit
Shift Lock
Solenoid
Shift Lock
Control Unit
assembly is
Assembly
status/
ON or OFF
Operating:
ON
Not
operating:
OFF
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
Using Techstream to perform Active Test allows relays, VSVs, actuators and other items to be
operated without removing any parts. This non-intrusive functional inspection can be very useful
because intermittent operation may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed. Performing
Active Test early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be
displayed while performing Active Test.

(f) Enter the following menus: "Powertrain / ECT / Active Test" or "Body Electrical / Main Body / Active
Test".
(g) According to the display on the Techstream, perform the "Active Test".
"Powertrain / ECT / Active Test"
TESTER
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
10/13
8/5/12
DISPLAY
Connects and
Connect disconnects TC and TE1.
the TC
(transitions into the fluid
and TE1 temperature detection
ON or OFF
The MIL will not blink

when "Connect the
TC and TE1 / ON" is
selected.
mode)
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
the
Operate the shift
Solenoid solenoid valve SLU

(SLU)
ON or OFF
Engine
stopped
Shift lever
P or N
position
ON or OFF
Activate
Operate the shift
the
solenoid valve SLT and
Solenoid
raise line pressure
(SLT)*
[Vehicle Condition]
HINT:
OFF: Line pressure up (when Active
Test "Activate the Solenoid (SLT)" is
performed, TCM commands shift
solenoid valve SLT to turn OFF)
ON: No action (normal operation)
Vehicle
stopped
Engine:
idling
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine
the
Operate the shift
Solenoid solenoid valve S1
(S1)
ON or OFF
stopped
Shift lever
P or N
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
the
Operate the shift
(S2)
ON or OFF
Engine
stopped
Shift lever
P or N
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
the
Operate the shift
Solenoid
solenoid valve S3
(S3)
ON or OFF
Engine
stopped
Shift lever
P or N
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
the
Operate the shift
Engine
11/13
8/5/12
ON or OFF
(S4)
stopped
Shift lever
P or N
position
Possible to check
shift solenoid valve
SLU operation
[Vehicle Condition]
Throttle
Control shift solenoid
Activate
valve SLU to set
the Lock
automatic transmission
Up
to lock-up condition
ON or OFF
valve
opening
angle:
Less than
35%
Vehicle
speed: 50
km/h (30
mph) or
more
Control Operate shift solenoid

the Shift valve and set each shift
Position position by yourself
Press "" button: Shift up

Press "" button: Shift down
Possible to check
operation of shift
solenoid valves
[Vehicle Condition]
50 km/h (30 mph) or
less
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
the
Operate the shift
Solenoid solenoid valve SR
ON or OFF
(SR)
Engine
stopped
Shift lever
P or N
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
the
Operate the shift
Solenoid solenoid valve SL1
(SL1)
Engine
ON or OFF
stopped
Shift lever
P or N
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
the
Operate the shift
Solenoid solenoid valve SL2
(SL2)
ON or OFF
Engine
stopped
Shift lever
P or N
position
12/13
8/5/12
*: "Activate the Solenoid (SLT)" in the Active Test is performed to check the line pressure changes
by connecting the SST to the automatic transmission, which is used in the HYDRAULIC TEST
as well.
HINT:
The pressure values in Active Test and HYDRAULIC TEST are different from each other.
"Body Electrical / Main Body / Active Test"

TESTER DISPLAY
Shift Lock
TEST PART
Operate the Shift lock control unit assembly
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
ON or OFF
13/13
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W760ROX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS

SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. DESCRIPTION
When troubleshooting OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics) vehicles, an OBD II scan tool (complying with
SAE J1987) must be connected to the DLC3 (Data Link Connector 3) of the vehicle. Various data in
the vehicle TCM (Transmission Control Module) can be then read.
OBD II regulations require that the vehicle on-board computer illuminate the MIL (Malfunction
Indicator Lamp) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in:
a. The emission control system components.

b. The powertrain control components (which affect vehicle emissions).
c. The computer itself.
In addition, the applicable DTCs prescribed by SAE J2012 are recorded in the TCM memory. If the
malfunction does not recur in 3 consecutive trips, the MIL turns off automatically but the DTCs
remain recorded in the TCM memory.
To check for DTCs, connect the Techstream to the DLC3. The Techstream displays DTCs, freeze
frame data, and a variety of the engine data. The DTCs and freeze frame data can be cleared with
the Techstream. In order to enhance OBD function on vehicles and develop the off-board diagnosis
system, Controller Area Network (CAN) communication is used in this system. CAN is a network
which uses a pair of data transmission lines spanning multiple computers and sensors. It allows
for high speed communications between the systems and simplification of the wire harness
connections.
2. NORMAL MODE AND CHECK MODE

The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. In normal mode, 2 trip
detection logic is used to ensure accurate detection of malfunctions. Check mode is also available as an
option for technicians. In check mode, 1 trip detection logic is used for duplicating malfunction symptoms
and increasing the system's ability to detect malfunctions, including intermittent problems (the
Techstream only).
3. 2 TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the TCM memory (1st
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W760ROX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS
trip). If the same malfunction is detected during the subsequent driving cycle, the MIL is illuminated
(2nd trip).
4. FREEZE FRAME DATA

The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information as freeze frame data the moment a DTC
is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can be helpful in determining whether the
vehicle was running or stopped, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel
ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data recorded at the time of a malfunction.
5. DLC3 (Data Link Connector 3)

(a) Check the DLC3
6. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
If voltage is below 11 V, replace or recharge the battery before proceeding to the next step.
7. MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

(a) The MIL illuminates when the ignition switch is first turned on (the engine is not running).
(b) The MIL should turn off when the engine is started. If the MIL remains illuminated, the diagnosis
system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
HINT:
If the MIL does not illuminate when the ignition switch is first turned on, check the MIL circuit
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W760ROX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DTC CHECK /
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W770REX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DTC CHECK /
CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

NOTICE:
When the diagnosis system is changed from normal mode to check mode or vice versa, all DTCs
and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode are cleared. Before changing modes, always
check and make a note of DTCs and freeze frame data.
HINT:
DTCs which are stored in the ECM can be displayed on the Techstream. The Techstream can
display the current, pending and permanent DTCs.
If a malfunction is detected during the current driving cycle, current and permanent DTCs are
stored.
Some DTCs are not stored if the ECM does not detect the same malfunction again during a second
consecutive driving cycle. However, such malfunctions, detected on only one occasion, are stored
as pending DTCs.
Current and pending DTCs can be cleared by using the Techstream. However, permanent DTCs
cannot be cleared using either of these two methods.
After clearing current DTCs using the Techstream, permanent DTCs can be cleared when the
system is determined to be normal for the relevant DTCs and then the universal trip is performed.
2 Trip Detection Examples
Store
condition
Pending
DTC
Malfunction detected
System determined to be normal
Clear
condition
or
DTCs cleared using Techstream
or
Cable disconnected from negative battery terminal
Current
DTC
Store
condition
Clear
condition
Store
condition
Permanent
DTC
Clear
condition
ON
Malfunction detected (2nd trip)

No malfunctions in 40 driving cycles
or
One trip is confirmed with no abnormality after no malfunction is detected in 3
consecutive driving cycles
or
After DTCs cleared using Techstream, malfunction not detected when
universal trip driving performed
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W770REX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/5/12
MIL
OFF

or
2/5
8/5/12
1. CHECK DTC
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(c) Turn the Techstream on.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes.
(e) Check the DTC(s) and freeze frame data, and then write them down.
(f) Check the details of the DTC(s)
2. CLEAR DTC (Pending and Current DTC)

(e) Clear the DTCs.
3. CLEAR PERMANENT DTC

HINT:
3/5
8/5/12
Even if the following procedure is not performed, permanent DTCs are cleared if no malfunction are
detected during 3 consecutive driving cycles.

(e) Check if permanent DTCs are stored.
HINT:
If permanent DTCs are not output, it is not necessary to continue this procedure.
(f) Clear DTCs.

(g) Perform the universal trip.
1. Idle the engine for 30 seconds or more.
2. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes or more.
HINT:
It is possible to complete the drive pattern even if the vehicle decelerates to less
than 40 km/h (25 mph) during the driving cycle provided that the vehicle is driven
at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes.
When accelerating through the gears, make sure the vehicle is driven so all gears
are used in order and no gears are skipped.
3. Allow 10 minutes or more to elapse from the time the engine is started.
(h) Turn the ignition switch off.
(i) Wait 15 seconds.
(j) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
4/5
8/5/12
(k) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes.

(l) Check that the permanent DTCs have been cleared.
HINT:
If the permanent DTCs have not been cleared, perform the universal trip again.
The permanent DTCs are cleared when the universal trip is completed.
5/5
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE C
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000O8L0MHX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE

CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
1. FAIL-SAFE CHART
This function minimizes the loss of the ECT functions when any malfunction occurs in each sensor or
solenoid.
MALFUNCTION PART
DTC P0717:
Transmission
revolution sensor
(NT)
DTC P0722:
Transmission
revolution sensor
(SP2)
DTC P0711, P0712,
P0713:
ATF Temperature
Sensor
Shift Solenoid Valve
S1, S2, S3, S4 and
SR
FUNCTION
During a transmission revolution sensor (NT) malfunction, shift control is effected
through the transmission revolution sensor (SP2) signal.
During a transmission revolution sensor (NT) malfunction, up-shift to the 5th and
6th, AI-SHIFT *1 and flex lock-up clutch control are prohibited.
During a transmission revolution sensor (SP2) malfunction, shift control is
effected through the transmission revolution sensor (NT) signal.
During a transmission revolution sensor (SP2) malfunction, up-shift to the 5th
and 6th, AI-SHIFT *1 and flex lock-up clutch control are prohibited.
During an ATF temperature sensor malfunction, up-shift to the 5th and 6th and
flex lock-up clutch control are prohibited.
The current to the failed solenoid valve is cut off and control is effected by
operating the other solenoid valves.
Shift control is effected depending on the failed solenoid as described in the
table on the next page.
DTC P0776, P0961,

P0962, P0963,
P0965, P0966,
P0967:
During a solenoid valve SL1 or SL2 malfunction, up-shift to the 5th and 6th and
flex lock-up clutch control are prohibited.

SL1 and SL2
DTC P2757, P2758,
P2762, P2763,
P2764:
SLU
DTC P2714, P2719,
P2720, P2721:
SLT
During a solenoid valve SLU malfunction, the current to the solenoid valve is
stopped. This stops lock-up control and flex lock-up control, fuel economy
decreases.
During a solenoid valve SLT malfunction, the current to the solenoid valve is
stopped. This stops line pressure optimal control, the shift shock increases.
However, shifting is effected through normal clutch pressure control.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000O8L0MHX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/5/12
*: AI (Artificial Intelligence) -SHIFT control

In addition to the switching of the shift pattern through the pattern select switch, the AI-SHIFT control
enables the ECM to estimate the road conditions and the driver's intention in order to automatically
select the optimal shift pattern. As a result, a comfortable ride has been realized.
(a) Fail-safe operation for electronically malfunctioning shift solenoid valve (S1, S2, S3, S4 and SR):
HINT:
Fail-safe operation in the event of an electric system malfunction.
Fail safe function:
If either of the shift solenoid valve circuits has an open or short failure, the ECM turns the other shift
solenoid "ON" and "OFF" in order to shift into the gear positions shown in the table below.
In case of a short circuit, the ECM stops sending current to the short circuited solenoid.
Even if staring the engine again in the fail-safe mode, the gear position remains in the same position.
Operating Condition of Shift Solenoid Valves

SHIFT LEVER POSITION OR SHIFT RANGE
GEAR POSITION
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

S1
S2
S3
S4
SR SL1 SL2
SLU
Park
Off On On On On
Off
On
Off
R*
Reverse
Off On On On On
On
On
Off
Neutral
Off On On On On
On
On
Off
1st
Off On On Off On
Off
On
Off
2nd
On On On On On
Off
Off
On
3rd
On Off On Off On
Off
Off
On
4th*
On Off Off Off On
Off
On
On
5th*
On Off Off On Off
On
Off
On
6th*
On On Off On Off
On
Off
On
1st
Off On On Off On
Off
On
Off
2nd
On On On On On
Off
Off
On
3rd
On Off On Off On
Off
Off
On
4th*
On Off Off Off On
Off
On
On
5th*
On Off Off On Off
On
Off
On
1st
Off On On Off On
Off
On
Off
2nd
On On On On On
Off
Off
On
3rd
On Off On Off On
Off
Off
On
4th*
On Off Off Off On
Off
On
On
D, M6
M5
M4
2/3
8/5/12
M3
M2
M1
1st
Off On On Off On
Off
On
Off
2nd
On On On On On
Off
Off
Off
3rd*
On Off On Off On
Off
Off
Off
1st
Off On On Off On
Off
On
On
2nd*
On On On On On
Off
Off
Off
1st*
Off On On Off On
Off
Off
Off
HINT:
*: Engine braking occurs
(b) Fail-safe operation for mechanically malfunction:

HINT:
Fail-safe operation in the event of a mechanical system malfunction.
Fail safe function:
The ECM controls the gear position as shown in the table below when malfunctions occur.
Fail-safe chart for mechanical malfunction:

DTC
GEAR *1
CONDITION
P0751
P0762
Normal
1st
Shift solenoid valve S1:
1st
Stuck OFF malfunction
*2
Shift solenoid S3:

Stuck ON malfunction
Shift solenoid valve S4, Shift solenoid valve SL2 or Valve body
P0766 (Brake control valve):
2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th

2nd
3rd 3rd 3rd
1st
2nd
3rd 3rd 3rd
1st
2nd
3rd 3rd 3rd
2nd
3rd 3rd 3rd
2nd
4th 5th 5th
Malfunction
P0781
P0729
Valve body (1-2 shift valve):
1st
Malfunction
*2
Valve body (Sequence valve):

Malfunction
1st
HINT:
*1: Actual gear shift (gear position) under fail-safe operation
*2: Under engine braking, downshifting to 1st or 2nd gear is prohibited.
3/3
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: HYDRAULIC
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W7B0MWX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: HYDRAULIC

TEST (2013 FR-S)
HYDRAULIC TEST
1. PERFORM HYDRAULIC TEST
(a) Measure the line pressure.
*1
SST
*2
Test Plug
NOTICE:
Perform the test at the normal operating ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) temperature: 60 to
90C (140 to 194F)
The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the
conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is performing the test.
Be careful to prevent SST hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe.
This Check must be conducted after checking and adjusting engine.
Perform under condition that A/C is OFF.
When conducting stall test, do not continue more than 5 seconds.
(1) Warm up the ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W7B0MWX.html?sisuffix=f
1/3
8/5/12
(2) Lift the vehicle up.

(3) Remove the test plug on the transmission case center right side and connect SST.
SST: 09992-00095
09992-00231
09992-00271
(4) Lower the vehicle.
(5) Fully apply the parking brake and check the 4 wheels.
(7) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
(8) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List / Engine Speed.
(9) Start the engine and check idling speed.
(10) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal and shift into D position.
(11) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling.
(12) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when
engine speed reaches stall speed.
(13) In the same manner, do the test in R position.
Specified line pressure:
CONDITION
Idling
Stall test
D POSITION KPA (KGF / CM 2 , PSI)
R POSITION KPA (KGF / CM 2 , PSI)
350 to 430 kPa
760 to 950 kPa
(3.6 to 4.4 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to 62 psi)
(7.7 to 9.7 kgf/cm 2 , 110 to 138 psi)
1200 to 1380 kPa
1410 to 1630 kPa
(12.5 to 14.0 kgf/cm 2 , 174 to 200 psi)
(14.4 to 16.6 kgf/cm 2 , 204 to 236 psi)
Evaluation:
PROBLEM
If the measured values at all position are higher
If the measured values at all position are lower
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Shift solenoid valve SLT defective
Regulator valve defective
Shift solenoid valve SLT defective
Regulator valve defective
Oil pump defective
If pressure is low in the D position only
D position circuit fluid leak

Clutch No.1 (C 1 ) defective
R position circuit fluid leak

If pressure is low in the R position only
Clutch No.3 (C 3 ) defective

Brake No.4 (B 4 ) defective
2/3
8/5/12
3/3
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: INITIALIZATI
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W7F0KYX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM:

INITIALIZATION (2013 FR-S)
INITIALIZATION
1. RESET MEMORY
NOTICE:
Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transmission assembly,
valve body, engine assembly or TCM.
The RESET MEMORY can be performed only with the Techstream.
HINT:
The TCM memorizes the condition that the ECT controls the automatic transmission assembly and
engine assembly according to those characteristics. Therefore, when the automatic transmission
assembly, valve body, transmission wire, engine assembly, or TCM has been replaced, it is necessary
to reset the memory so that the TCM can memorize the new information.
Reset procedure is as follows.
(a) Turn the ignition switch off.

(d) Turn the Techstream main switch on.
(e) Enter the following menu: Powertrain / ECT / Utility / Reset Memory. Then, press "Next".
(f) Perform the reset memory procedure from the main menu.
CAUTION:
After performing the RESET MEMORY, be sure to perform the ROAD TEST
described earlier.
HINT:
The TCM is learned by performing the ROAD TEST.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W7F0KYX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MANUAL SHI
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W7C0Q5X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MANUAL

SHIFTING TEST (2013 FR-S)
MANUAL SHIFTING TEST

1. PERFORM MANUAL SHIFTING TEST
HINT:
With this test, it can be determined whether the trouble occurs in the electrical circuit or is a
mechanical problem in the transmission.
If any abnormalities are found in the following test, the problem is in the transmission itself.
(a) Disconnect the connector from the upper part of the

transmission as shown in the illustration.
(b) Drive with the transmission wire disconnected.

Shifting the shift lever to the D position to check whether the shifting condition changes the table
below.
SHIFT POSITION
D
SHIFTING CONDITION
No Shift (Not Change)
HINT:
When driving with the transmission wire disconnected, the gear position will be as follows:
When the shift lever is in the D position, the gear is held in the 4th position.
When the shift lever is in the R or the P position, the gear is also in the R or the P position
respectively.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W7C0Q5X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MANUAL SHI
(c) Connect the connector of the transmission wire.

(d) Clear the DTC
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W7C0Q5X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MECHANICA
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W7A0NMX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MECHANICAL

SYSTEM TESTS (2013 FR-S)
MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS

1. PERFORM MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS
(a) Measure the stall speed.
The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transmission and engine by
measuring the stall speeds in the D position.
NOTICE:
Driving test should be done on a paved road (a nonskid road).
Perform the test at the normal operating ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) temperature 60 to
90C (140 to 194F).
Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds.
To ensure safety, do this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction.
The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the conditions
of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.
Be sure to perform a road teat after inspecting and adjusting the engine.
(1) Check the 4 wheels.
(3) Fully apply the parking brake.
(4) Keep your left foot pressed firmly on the brake pedal.
(5) Start the engine.
(6) Shift into the D position. Press all the way down on the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
(7) Quickly read the stall speed at this time.
Stall speed:
2350 +- 250 rpm
Evaluation:
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Engine power output may be insufficient
Stator one-way clutch not operating properly
(a) Stall engine speed is low

HINT:
in D position
If the value is less than the specified value by 600 rpm or more, the
torque converter could be faulty.
(b) Stall engine speed is
Line pressure is too low

Clutch No. 1 (C 1 ) slipping
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W7A0NMX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/5/12
high in D position
One-way clutch No. 3 (F 3 ) not operating properly

One-way clutch No .4 (F 4 ) not operating properly
Improper fluid level
(b) Measure the time lag.

(1) When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or
lag before the shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the clutch, and
brake.
NOTICE:
Be sure to perform a road teat after inspecting and adjusting the engine.
Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.
Perform the test at the normal operating ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) temperature: 60 to
90C (140 to 194F).
Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests.
Perform the test three times, and measure the time lags. Calculate the average value of the three
time lags.
(3) Fully apply the parking brake.
(4) Start and warm up the engine and check idle speed.
Idle speed:
approx. 700 rpm (In N position and A/C OFF)
(5) Shift the lever from N to D position. Using a stop watch, measure the time from when the lever
is shifted until the shock is felt.
Time lag:
N D less than 1.2 seconds
(6) In the same way, measure the time lag for N R.
Time lag:
N R less than 1.5 seconds
Evaluation (If N D or N R time lag is longer than the specified):
PROBLEM
N D time lag is longer
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Clutch No.1 (C 1 ) worn

N R time lag is longer
Clutch No. 3 (C 3 ) worn

Brake No. 4 (B 4 ) worn
2/3
8/5/12
3/3
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MONITOR DR
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W7K0MRX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MONITOR

DRIVE PATTERN (2013 FR-S)
MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN

1. MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN FOR ECT TEST
(a) Perform this drive pattern as one method to simulate the detection conditions of the ECT
malfunctions. (The DTCs may not be detected due the actual driving conditions. And some codes
may not be detected through this drive pattern.)
HINT:
Preparation for driving
Warm up the engine sufficiently. (Engine coolant temperature is 60C (140F) or higher)
Notice in driving
Drive the vehicle through all gears.

Stop 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 6th (lock-up ON).
Perform engine brake test in the M position.
While driving in the 6(M) position and 6th gear lock-up, shift into the "-" position and downshift from 6th to 5th, 5th to 4th, 4th to 3rd, 3rd to 2nd, 2nd to 1st.
Check that the engine brake performs properly whenever down-shift takes place.
Repeat the above driving pattern three times or more.
NOTICE:
The monitor status can be checked using Techstream. When using Techstream, monitor status can
be found in the "Powertrain / ECT / Data List".
In the event that the drive pattern must be interrupted (possibly due to traffic conditions or other
factors), the drive pattern can be resumed and, in most cases, the monitor can be completed.
Perform this drive pattern on a level road as much as possible and strictly observe the posted
speed limits and traffic laws while driving.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W7K0MRX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MONITOR DR
HINT:
*1: Drive at such a speed in the uppermost gear, to engage lock-up. The vehicle can be driven at a
speed lower than that in the above diagram under the lock-up condition.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W7K0MRX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM S
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W730S7X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM

SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
If a normal code is displayed during the diagnostic trouble code check although the trouble still
occurs, check the electrical circuits for each symptom in the order given in the charts on the
following pages and proceed to the page given for troubleshooting.
The Matrix Chart is divided into 2 chapters.
Chapter 1:
Refer to the table below when the trouble cause is considered to be electrical.
If the instruction "Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart" is given in the flow chart
of each circuit, proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check.
If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits, check
and replace the TCM.
1. Chapter 1: Electronic Circuit Matrix Chart

SYMPTOM
No up-shift (1st -> 2nd)
No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd)
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
1. Shift solenoid valve S1 circuit *1

2. TCM
2. TCM
No up-shift (3rd -> 4th)
2. Engine coolant temperature sensor

circuit *1
3. TCM
2. Shift solenoid valve SR circuit *1
3. Shift solenoid valve SL) circuit *1
No up-shift (4th -> 5th)
4. Shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit *1

circuit *1
5. TCM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W730S7X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/5/12
1. Park/neutral position switch circuit *1

circuit *1
4. TCM
1. Park/neutral position switch circuit *1
No down-shift (6th -> 5th)

3. TCM
2. Shift solenoid valve SR circuit *1

5. TCM
No down-shift (4th -> 3rd)
No down-shift (3rd -> 2nd)
No down-shift (2nd -> 1st)

2. TCM
2. TCM
2. TCM
1. Shift solenoid valve SLU circuit *1
circuit *1
No lock-up or No lock-up off
3. Stop light switch circuit *1

4. Transmission revolution sensor (NT)
circuit *1
5. TCM
1. Shift solenoid valve SLT circuit *1
circuit *1
3. Transmission revolution sensor (SP2)
circuit *1
Shift point too high or too low
4. Throttle position sensor circuit *1

5. Pattern select SPORT switch circuit
6. ATF temperature sensor circuit *1
7. TCM
2/7
8/5/12
8. Park/Neutral position switch
Up-shift to 6th while engine is cold

circuit *1
2. TCM
1. Transmission control switch circuit
No gear change by shifting into "+" or "-" while the

shifting lever
2. Shift paddle switch circuit

3. TCM
Harsh engagement (N -> D)

3. TCM
circuit *1
Harsh engagement (Lock-up)
2. Transmission revolution sensor (SP2)

circuit *1
4. TCM
1. Throttle position sensor circuit *1
Harsh engagement (Any driving position)

circuit *1
7. TCM
Poor acceleration
2. Pattern select (SNOW) switch circuit

3. TCM
ECT SNOW does not operate
2. Pattern select (SNOW) switch circuit

3. TCM
ECT SPORT does not operate
2. Pattern select (SPORT) switch circuit

3. TCM
Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd -> 3rd -> 4th -> 5th) Shift solenoid valve SR circuit *1
Slip or shudder (5th -> 6th and 6th -> 5th)
Shift solenoid valve SR circuit *1

Shift solenoid valve SLT circuit *1
3/7
8/5/12
HINT:
*1: When the circuit is detective, a DTC may be output.
2. Chapter 2: On-Vehicle Repair and Off-Vehicle Repair

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
1. Transmission control rod

2. Manual valve
Vehicle does not move in any forward position and reverse
positions
3. Parking lock pawl

4. Rear planetary gear unit
5. Torque converter assembly
1. Transmission valve body
Vehicle does not move in R position
assembly
2. Brake No. 4 (B4)
assembly
No up-shift (1st -> 2nd)
2. Brake No. 3 (B3)

3. One-way clutch No. 1 (F1)
No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd)
assembly
2. Clutch No. 3 (C3)
No up-shift (3rd -> 4th)
assembly
assembly
2. Brake No. 1 (B1)
assembly
2. Brake No. 2 (B2)
No down-shift (4th -> 3rd)
Transmission valve body

assembly
assembly
assembly
4/7
8/5/12
No down-shift (3rd -> 2nd)

assembly
No down-shift (2nd -> 1st)

assembly
No lock-up or No lock-up off
assembly
assembly
2. C1 accumulator
Harsh engagement (N -> D)

Harsh engagement (Lock-up)
assembly
assembly
2. C3 accumulator
Harsh engagement (N -> R)

4. Brake No. 4 (B4)
Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd -> 3rd -> 4th -> 5th -> 6th)

assembly
assembly
2. B3 accumulator
Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd)
3. Brake No. 3 (B3)

assembly
Harsh engagement (2nd -> 3rd)
2. C3 accumulator
assembly
Harsh engagement (3rd -> 4th)
2. C2 accumulator
5/7
8/5/12

assembly
Harsh engagement (4th -> 5th)
2. B1 accumulator
3. Brake No. 1 (B1)
assembly
2. B2 accumulator
3. Brake No. 2 (B2)
assembly
2. C3 accumulator
assembly
2. Oil strainer
Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse: After warm-up)

Slip or shudder (Particular position: Just after engine starts) Torque converter assembly
1. Brake No. 4 (B4)
Slip or shudder (R position)

Slip or shudder (1st)

2. Brake No. 3 (B3)
Slip or shudder (2nd)

Slip or shudder (3rd)

6/7
8/5/12

Slip or shudder (4th)


3. Brake No. 1 (B1)

2. Brake No. 2 (B2)
No engine braking (1st +- 4th: S position)
Clutch No. 4 (C4)
No engine braking (1st: 1 position)

assembly
2. Brake No. 4 (B4)
No engine braking (2nd: 2 position)
assembly
2. Brake No. 2 (B2)
No engine braking (3rd: 3 position)

assembly
2. Brake No. 1 (B1)
No engine braking (4th: 4 position)

assembly
No kick-down

assembly
Shift point too high or too low

assembly
Poor acceleration (All positions)
assembly
1. Brake No. 2 (B2)
Poor acceleration (6th)

3. Front planetary gear unit
Engine stalls when starting off or stopping

assembly
7/7
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Shift Paddle
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001SM002VX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Shift Paddle
Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Shift Paddle Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the shift lever is in M, it is possible to change into any gear using the steering assembly
transmission shift switch assembly.
Additionally, when the vehicle is being driving with the shift lever in D, operating the steering assembly
transmission shift switch assembly changes to selection of gears with the shift lever in D, enabling
shifting to any gear.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001SM002VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/5/12
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM

(c) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.
OK
TESTER DISPLAY
Sport Shift Up SW
Sport Shift Down SW
CONDITION
STANDARD
Continuously shift to "+" (upshift): ON
Release "+" (up-shift): OFF

Continuously shift to "-" (down-shift): ON
Release "-" (down-shift): OFF
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

(TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY TCM)
OK
2.
CHECK INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY - TCM)
(a) Disconnect the TCM connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Pull continuously
A19-1(SFTD) - Body ground
Below 1
"+"
(Up shift)
Release "+" or "-"
10 k or higher
Pull continuously
A19-2(SFTU) - Body ground
Below 1
"-"
(Down shift)
Release "+" or "-"
10 k or higher
(c) Connect the TCM connector.
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL

CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)
2/4
8/5/12
OK
3.
REPLACE TCM
(a) Replace the TCM
NEXT
4.
PERFORM THE RESET MEMORY
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the spiral cable sub-assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
D51-7(ECC) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
(c) Connect the spiral cable sub-assembly connector.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY - TCM)
(a) Disconnect the TCM connector.

(b) Disconnect the spiral cable sub-assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
A19-1(SFTD) - D51-2(SDN)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
3/4
8/5/12
A19-2(SFTU) - D51-1(SUP)
Always
Below 1
A19-1(SFTD) or D51-2(SDN) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A19-2(SFTU) or D51-1(SUP) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
(d) Connect the TCM connector.

(e) Connect the spiral cable sub-assembly connector.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
6.
INSPECT TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the transmission shift switch assembly
NG
REPLACE TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH
OK
INSPECT SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
4/4
8/5/12
TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: TERMINALS
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W740IDX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: TERMINALS

OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. TCM
HINT:
Each TCM terminal's standard voltage is shown in the table below.
In the table, first follow the information under "Condition". Look under "Symbols (Terminal No.)" for
the terminals to inspected. The standard voltage between the terminals is shown under "Specific
Condition".
Use the illustration above as a reference for the TCM terminals.
TERMINALS
NO. (SYMBOLS)
A19-9(D) A18-33(E01)
WIRING
COLOR
BR - B-Y
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
D shift position switch

signal
A19-10(R) A18-33(E01)
R shift position switch

signal
V - B-Y
A19-1(SFTD) A18-33(E01)
BE - B-Y
Down shift switch

signal
A19-2(SFTU) A18-33(E02)
SB - B-Y
Up shift switch signal
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in D

and M
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON and shift lever

except in D and M
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in R
11 to 14 V

except in R
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in "-"

(Down shift)
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in

"+" (Up shift)
Below 1 V
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W740IDX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/7
8/5/12
A19-8(M) A18-33(E01)
M shift position switch

O-B - B-Y
signal
A19-3(P) A18-33(E01)
Park position switch

signal
BR - B-Y
A19-21(N) A18-33(E01)
Neutral position
B-G - B-Y
switch signal
A18-13(SLU+)
- A18-1(SLU-)
LG - LGY
A18-15(SR) A18-33(E01)
R-B - B-Y SR solenoid signal
A18-14(S4) A18-33(E01)
L-W - BY
S4 solenoid signal
L-Y - B-Y
S3 solenoid signal
A18-6(S3) A18-33(E01)
A18-17(S2) A18-33(E01)
A18-7(S1) A18-33(E01)
SLU solenoid signal
L-O - B-Y S2 solenoid signal
Y - B-Y
A18-5(SL2+) -
BR-A -
A18-11(SL2-)
BR-B
S1 solenoid signal
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in M
11 to 14 V

except in M
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in P
11 to 14 V

except in P
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in N
11 to 14 V

except in N
Below 1 V
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th gear (each

gear lock-up, M position)
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform
2)
1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear
11 to 14 V
5th or 6th gear
Below 1 V
2nd, 5th or 6th gear
11 to 14 V
1st, 3rd or 4th gear
Below 1 V
1st, 2nd or 3rd gear
11 to 14 V
4th, 5th or 6th gear
Below 1 V
1st, 2nd or 6th gear
11 to 14 V
3rd, 4th or 5th gear
Below 1 V
1st gear
Below 1 V
Except 1st gear
11 to 14 V
Pulse
generation
SL2 solenoid signal
Engine idle speed
(See
waveform
3)
Pulse
A18-16(SL1+) - BR - BRA18-12(SL1-)
Y
generation
SL1 solenoid signal
5th or 6th gear
(See
waveform
4)
A19-18(SP2+)
- A19-7(SP2-)
B-W
Transmission
revolution sensor
Pulse
generation
Vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph)
(SP2) signal
(See
waveform
6)
Pulse
2/7
8/5/12
A19-17(NT+) A19-28(NT-)
A18-4(SLT+) A18-9(SLT-)
A18-22(OIL) A18-23(EOIL)
A18-33(E01) Body ground
A18-3(E02) Body ground
G-L
L-R - RW
R - G-B
B-Y Body
Transmission
generation
revolution sensor (NT) Engine idle speed (P or N position)

signal
(See
waveform
5)
Pulse
generation
SLT solenoid signal
Engine idle speed
(See
waveform
1)
ATF temperature
ATF temperature: 115C (239F) or
sensor signal
more
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
Below 1 V
ground
B-Y Body
ground
Pulse
A18-29(CANH)
B-W - B-
CAN communication
- A18-33(E01)
line
generation
Ignition switch ON
(See
waveform
7)
A18-28(CANL)
- A18-33(E01)
L - B-Y
CAN communication
line
Pulse
generation
Ignition switch ON
(See
waveform
8)
A18-34(IG1) A18-33(E01)
P - B-Y
Starter signal
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
A18-35(IG2) A18-33(E01)
P - B-Y
Starter signal
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Always
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON and pattern select

switch pressed continuously (SPORT)
11 to 14 V
A18-26(BM) A18-33(E01)
Y-R - B-Y Battery
A19-13(SPORT)
L - B-Y
- Body ground
SPORT switch signal

switch released (SPORT)
A19-24(SNOW) W-R - B- Body ground
switch pressed continuously (SNOW)

SNOW switch signal

switch released (SNOW)
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
3/7
8/5/12
(a) Waveform 1
Reference:
A18-4(SLT) - A18-9(SLT-
Terminal
Tool setting
5 V/DIV., 1 ms./DIV.
Vehicle
Engine idle speed
condition
(b) Waveform 2
Reference:
Terminal
A18-13(SLU+) - A18-1(SLU-)
Tool setting
Vehicle
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th gear (each gear lock-
condition
up, M position)
(c) Waveform 3
Reference:
Terminal
Tool setting
Vehicle
condition
A18-5(SL2+) - A18-11(SL2)
Engine idle speed
(d) Waveform 4
Reference:
Terminal
A18-16(SL1+) - A18-12(SL1)
Tool setting
Vehicle
condition
5th or 6th gear
(e) Waveform 5
4/7
8/5/12
Reference:
Terminal
A19-17(NT+) - A19-28(NT-)
Tool setting
Vehicle
Engine idle speed (P or N
condition
position)
(f) Waveform 6
Reference:
Terminal
A19-18(SP2+) - A19-7(SP2-)
Tool setting
Vehicle
Vehicle speed 20 km/h (12
condition
mph)
(g) Waveform 7
Reference:
Terminal
A18-29(CANH) - A1833(E01)
Tool setting
1V/DIV., 10 ms./DIV.
Vehicle
condition
Ignition switch ON
(h) Waveform 8
Reference:
Terminal
A18-28(CANL) - A1833(E01)
Tool setting
1V/DIV., 10 ms./DIV.
Vehicle
condition
Ignition switch ON
2. Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)
5/7
8/5/12
*1 Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly
*2 Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)
HINT:
Each ECU terminal's standard voltage is shown in the table below.
In the table, first follow the information under "Condition". Look under "Symbols (Terminal No.)" for
the terminals to inspected. The standard voltage between the terminals is shown under "Specific
6/7
8/5/12
Condition".
Use the illustration above as a reference for the ECU terminals.
TERMINALS NO.
(SYMBOLS)
WIRING
COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON, Shift lever P

D5-20(SLS+) Body ground
3C-8 - Body
ground
3D-23 - Body
ground
WL
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
11 to 14 V
Shift lock control unit

assembly signal
position, and Stop light switch ON

Ignition switch ON, Shift lever P
position, and Stop light switch OFF
Below 1 V
Stop light switch
Stop light switch ON
11 to 14 V
signal
Stop light switch OFF
Below 1 V
Park position switch
Shift lever except P position
11 to 14 V
signal
Shift lever P position
Below 1 V
HINT:
*1: Voltage is input intermittently as this is an intermittent circuit. (Voltage varies between a peak of
7.5 to 14 V and a low of 0 to1.5 V.)
7/7
8/6/12
BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHE
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XHV0EHX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC
CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. DTC CHECK/CLEAR
(a) Check for DTCs.
(3) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(4) Turn the Techstream on.
(5) Read the DTCs following the prompts on the Techstream. Enter the following menus: Chassis /
ABS/VSC/TRAC / Trouble Codes.
(6) Check the details of the DTCs
(b) Clear the DTCs.

(5) Operate the Techstream to clear the codes. Enter the following menus: Chassis /
ABS/VSC/TRAC / Trouble Codes.
2. END OF DTC CHECK/CLEAR

(a) Start the engine.
(b) Check that the ABS warning and slip indicator lights go off within approximately 3 seconds after
starting the engine.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XHV0EHX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: CANCEL CODE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000005AY5000X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: CANCEL CODE (2013 FR-S)
CANCEL CODE
1. DESCRIPTION
The ECM stores cancellation of cruise control due to driver operation and system abnormality as a
"CANCEL CODE". In troubleshooting, the "CANCEL CODE" can be used to specify the cause of the
malfunction.
HINT:
The "CANCEL CODE" for canceled cruise control resulting from a driver operation is also stored.
Therefore, fault troubleshooting needs to determine whether the "CANCEL CODE" is due to a
driver operation or a system abnormality.
Storage of a "CANCEL CODE" due to the driver canceling cruise control is normal, and not a system
abnormality.
The "CANCEL CODE" is cleared by turning off the ignition switch. So, does not turn the ignition
switch off until the "CANCEL CODE" has been checked.
When the ECM detects the cruise control system malfunction or the cruise control main switch
malfunction, the ECM illuminates the cruise control indicator light in amber and stores "CANCEL
CODE" as the memory. This memory is not deleted by turning the ignition switch off.
2. READ CANCEL CODE

(d) Start the engine.
(e) Perform a cruise control road test, and recreate the driving conditions in which cruise control was
previously canceled.
(f) After cruise control is canceled, check the DATA LIST
(g) Check the stored "CANCEL CODE".

*: "(MEMORY)" displays the storage history of the "CANCEL CODE", and is not deleted by turning
the ignition switch off. When clearing, perform to clear the DTC
Cruise Cancel : Main Switch

TESTER
DISPLAY
Cruise control was canceled through a cruise control main

switch operation or cruise control main switch signal
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000005AY5000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
TROUBLE AREA
Operation of
cruise control
main switch
Cruise control
main switch
assembly
1/9
8/6/12
Cruise
Cancel :
Main Switch
abnormality. / ON or OFF
malfunction
Cruise control
main switch
circuit
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a cruise control main switch operation.
2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to "Cruise
Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : Stop/Brake Switch

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel :
TROUBLE AREA
Cruise control was canceled through a brake pedal
Brake pedal
operation
Stop light
switch
operation or stop light switch signal abnormality. / ON or

OFF
assembly
malfunction
Stop light
switch circuit
Stop/Brake
Switch
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a brake pedal operation.
2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to
"Stop Light Switch Circuit", and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : Clutch Switch

TESTER
TROUBLE AREA
DISPLAY
Clutch pedal
operation
Clutch switch
Cruise control was canceled through a clutch pedal
operation or clutch switch signal abnormality. / ON or OFF
assembly
malfunction
Clutch switch
circuit
Cruise Cancel :
Clutch Switch
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a clutch pedal operation.
2/9
8/6/12
"Clutch Switch Circuit", and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch

TESTER
DISPLAY
TROUBLE AREA
Shift lever
operation
Park/neutral
Cruise Cancel
: Neutral
Cruise control was canceled through a shift lever

operation or park/neutral start switch signal abnormality.
position switch
assembly
/ ON or OFF
malfunction
Park/neutral
position switch
circuit malfunction
Switch
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a shift lever operation.

"Transmission Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : Cancel Switch

TESTER
DISPLAY
TROUBLE AREA
CANCEL switch
operation
Cruise Cancel
Cruise control was canceled through a CANCEL switch
Cruise control
main switch
operation or CANCEL switch signal abnormality. / ON or

OFF
assembly
malfunction
Cruise control
main switch circuit
: Cancel
Switch
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a CANCEL switch operation.
2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to "Cruise
Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : IG Switch

TESTER
DISPLAY
TROUBLE AREA
Ignition switch
3/9
8/6/12
operation
ECM power
Cruise control was canceled through an ignition switch

operation or ECM power supply circuit abnormality. / ON or OFF
supply circuit
Cruise
Cancel : IG
malfunction
Switch
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been an ignition switch operation.
2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to "ECM
Power Source Circuit", and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 1

TESTER DISPLAY
TROUBLE AREA
Speed sensor malfunction
Cruise control was canceled through a vehicle

Cruise Cancel :
Vehicle Speed 1
speed signal abnormality. / ON or OFF
Skid control ECU (Brake

actuator assembly)
malfunction
ECM malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the VSC system DTC
Cruise Cancel : Engine Revolution

TESTER
TROUBLE AREA
DISPLAY
One of the following conditions is met:
Cruise Cancel
: Engine
Revolution
Cruise control was canceled through detection of
Shift lever
engine speed that is more than specified.

Cruise control was canceled through moving the shift
operation
Crankshaft
lever to 1st or Reverse position. (for Manual
position
Transmission)
sensor
Cruise control was canceled through moving the shift

lever to 1st range with the shift lever in M or R range.
malfunction
ECM
(for Automatic Transmission)
malfunction
/ ON or OFF
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a shift lever operation.
2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to DTC
P0335, and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : Out of Range
4/9
8/6/12
TESTER
TROUBLE AREA
DISPLAY

Cruise control was canceled through vehicle
speed dropping below minimum cruise
control speed.
Cruise control was canceled through
setting the cruise control outside permitted
vehicle speed.
Cruise Cancel
Cruise control was canceled through a
: Out of
RESUME operation with no recorded vehicle
Range
speed.
SET switch operation

RESUME switch
operation
Speed sensor
malfunction
Skid control ECU
(Brake actuator
assembly) malfunction
/ ON or OFF
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a SET or RESUME operation.
2. Perform a cruise control road test with a vehicle speed at 40km/h or more.
3. If the "CANCEL CODE" is stored again, check the VSC system DTC
Cruise Cancel : Accel Angle

TESTER
TROUBLE
DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel
: Accel Angle
AREA
Cruise control was canceled through an accelerator pedal operation
resulting in more than 10 minutes of set vehicle speed. / ON or OFF
Accelerator
pedal
operation
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been an accelerator pedal operation.
Cruise Cancel : Keeping Vehicle Speed

TESTER DISPLAY
TROUBLE AREA
Parking brake not
released
Cruise control was canceled through an inability

to maintain vehicle speed. / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
Insufficient tire
pressure
Road condition
(inclination, road
Keeping Vehicle
surface)
Speed
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm the road conditions (inclination, road surface) when the

"CANCEL CODE" was stored.
5/9
8/6/12
2. Check the vehicle status (parking brake, tire pressure).

Cruise Cancel : VSC/TRC Operation
TESTER DISPLAY
TROUBLE AREA
Cruise control was canceled through a VSC/TR(A)C
VSC/TR(A)C
Cruise Cancel : VSC/TRC
operation. / ON or OFF
operation
Operation
Troubleshooting:
-
Cruise Cancel : ABS/VSC Abnormal

TESTER DISPLAY
TROUBLE AREA
Cruise control was canceled through an ABS/VSC system ABS/VSC system

abnormality / ON or OFF
malfunction
Cruise Cancel :
Troubleshooting:
ABS/VSC Abnormal
Cruise Cancel : Meter Abnormal

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel :
Meter Abnormal
TROUBLE AREA
Cruise control was canceled through a combination
Combination meter
meter assembly abnormality. / ON or OFF
assembly malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the combination meter assembly
Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch Abnormal

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel : Brake

Switch Abnormal
Cruise control was canceled through a stop light
switch assembly abnormality. / ON or OFF
TROUBLE AREA
Stop light switch
Troubleshooting:
1. Refer to "Stop Light Switch Circuit", and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch Abnormal

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel :
Neutral Switch
TROUBLE AREA
Cruise control was canceled through a
Park/neutral position
park/neutral position switch abnormality. / ON or

OFF
switch assembly
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
6/9
8/6/12
Abnormal
1. Refer to "Transmission Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check

.
Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 2

TESTER DISPLAY
TROUBLE AREA
Cruise Cancel :
Cruise control was canceled through a vehicle

speed change abnormality. / ON or OFF

actuator assembly)
malfunction
Vehicle Speed 2
Troubleshooting:
Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel :
Engine Abnormal
TROUBLE AREA
Cruise control was canceled through an engine system Engine control system
abnormality. / ON or OFF
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the engine control system DTC
Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to Cruise Control

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel :
Switch Related to
Cruise Control
TROUBLE AREA
Cruise control was canceled through a cruise control
Cruise control main
main switch fixation (2 minutes or more continuous

input). / ON or OFF
switch assembly
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Refer to "Cruise Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check
Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch Abnormal(Memory)*

TESTER DISPLAY
"Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch Abnormal" is
detected. / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch

Abnormal(Memory)
TROUBLE AREA
Stop light switch
Troubleshooting:
1. Refer to "Stop Light Switch Circuit", and perform a check
.
Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch Abnormal(Memory)*

7/9
8/6/12
TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel : Neutral
TROUBLE AREA
"Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch
Park/neutral position switch
Abnormal" is detected. / ON or OFF
Troubleshooting:
Switch Abnormal(Memory)
1. Refer to "Transmission Control Switch Circuit", and perform a

check
Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 2(Memory)*

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel : Vehicle
TROUBLE AREA
actuator assembly)
"Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 2"

is detected. / ON or OFF
malfunction
Speed 2(Memory)
Troubleshooting:
Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal(Memory)*

TESTER DISPLAY
"Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal" is
detected. / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel : Engine

Abnormal(Memory)
TROUBLE AREA
Engine control system
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the engine control system DTC
Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to CCS(Memory)*

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel : Switch

Related to CCS(Memory)
TROUBLE AREA
"Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to Cruise
Cruise control main switch
Control" is detected. / ON or OFF
Troubleshooting:
1. Refer to "Cruise Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check
.
Cruise Cancel : ECT Abnormal

TESTER DISPLAY
Cruise Cancel :
Cruise control was canceled through an automatic
transmission system abnormality. / ON or OFF
TROUBLE AREA
Automatic transmission
system malfunction
8/9
8/6/12
ECT Abnormal
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the automatic transmission system DTC
9/9
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Clutch Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000ZAN031X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Clutch Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Clutch Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
Clutch switch circuit inspection is necessary for M/T vehicles.
When the clutch pedal is released, the ECM receives positive (+) battery voltage through the ECU IG2
fuse. While depressing the clutch pedal, the clutch switch sends a signal to terminal CLSW of the ECM.
The ECM cancels cruise control drive when terminal CLSW receives the signal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Clutch switch assembly conditions can be checked using the Techstream.
1. Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3. Turn the Techstream on.
4. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / All Data / Clutch Switch
Engine
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000ZAN031X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
CLUTCH PEDAL OPERATION
CLUTCH SWITCH
Depressed
ON
Released
OFF
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ECM (TERMINAL VOLTAGE)
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(b) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
Standard voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A33-15 (CLSW) - Body ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Clutch pedal depressed
Below 1 V
Clutch pedal released
11 to 14 V
*a
2.
Component with harness connected

(ECM)
NG
INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
PROCEED TO NEXT SUSPECTED AREA SHOWN

IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(a) Inspect the clutch switch assembly
NG
REPLACE CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY
2/3
8/6/12
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the clutch switch assembly connector.

(b) Disconnect the ECM connector.
Standard resistance (Check for open):
TESTER CONNECTION
A33-15 (CLSW) - A21-2
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
Standard resistance (Check for short):

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A33-15 (CLSW) or A21-2 - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG
CONNECTOR (ECM - CLUTCH SWITCH

ASSEMBLY)
OK
INSPECT ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
3/3
8/6/12
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000ZAN031X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Clutch Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Clutch Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
Clutch switch circuit inspection is necessary for M/T vehicles.
When the clutch pedal is released, the ECM receives positive (+) battery voltage through the ECU IG2
fuse. While depressing the clutch pedal, the clutch switch sends a signal to terminal CLSW of the ECM.
The ECM cancels cruise control drive when terminal CLSW receives the signal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Clutch switch assembly conditions can be checked using the Techstream.

4. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / All Data / Clutch Switch
Engine
1/3
8/6/12
CLUTCH PEDAL OPERATION
CLUTCH SWITCH
Depressed
ON
Released
OFF
PROCEDURE
1.
Standard voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A33-15 (CLSW) - Body ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Clutch pedal depressed
Below 1 V
Clutch pedal released
11 to 14 V
*a
2.

(ECM)
NG
OK

(a) Inspect the clutch switch assembly
NG
REPLACE CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY
2/3
8/6/12
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the clutch switch assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
A33-15 (CLSW) - A21-2
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A33-15 (CLSW) or A21-2 - Body ground
Always
NG
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR (ECM - CLUTCH SWITCH
ASSEMBLY)
OK
3/3
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise Control Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PLU0BDX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise Control Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Cruise Control Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The cruise control main switch is used to turn the cruise control system on and off, as well as operate 7
functions: SET, - (COAST), TAP-DOWN, RES (RESUME), + (ACCEL), TAP-UP and CANCEL. The SET, TAPDOWN and - (COAST) functions, and the RES (RESUME), TAP-UP and + (ACCEL) functions are operated
with the same switch. The cruise control main switch is an automatic return type switch which turns on
only while operating it in the direction of each arrow and turns off after releasing it. The internal contact
points of the cruise control main switch turn on with switch operation. Then the ECM reads the voltage
value that has been changed by the switch operation to control SET, - (COAST), RES (RESUME), +
(ACCEL), and CANCEL.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PLU0BDX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE ON TECHSTREAM

(d) Select the following menu items: Powertrain / Cruise
Control / Data List.
(e) Check the Data List to confirm proper functioning of the
cruise control main switch.
2/5
8/6/12
*a
ON-OFF
*b
-/SET
*c
+/RES
*d
CANCEL
Cruise Control
TESTER
MEASUREMENT
NORMAL
DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY
ITEM/RANGE
CONDITION
NOTE
ON: cruise
control main
Main SW
M-CPU
Cruise control
switch (ON-OFF
main switch signal button) pushed
(Main CPU) / ON
or OFF
OFF: cruise
control main
switch (ON-OFF
button) released
Cancel
Switch
CANCEL switch
ON: CANCEL
switch on
signal / ON or OFF OFF: CANCEL
switch off
SET/COAST
Switch
-/SET switch
ON: -/SET switch

on
signal / ON or OFF OFF: -/SET switch
off
RES/ACC
Switch
+/RES switch
ON: +/RES switch

on
signal / ON or OFF OFF: +/RES

switch off
OK:
When the cruise control main switch is operated, the
display changes as shown above.
2.
NG
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH
OK

ASSEMBLY
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the cruise control main switch assembly
3/5
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
CHECK CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH WIRE
(a) Disconnect the cruise control main switch assembly

connector.
(b) Disconnect the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly
connector.
(c) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the
table below.
Standard Resistance (Check for open):
TESTER CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Cruise control main switch side connector

terminal 3 (R) - z5-4
Cruise control main switch side connector
terminal 1 (B) - z5-3
Below 1
Below 1
*a
*b
Front view of wire harness connector

(to Spiral Cable with Sensor Sub-assembly)
(to Cruise Control Main Switch Assembly)
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN

SWITCH WIRE
OK
4/5
8/6/12
4.
INSPECT SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly
NG
REPLACE SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUBASSEMBLY
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY ECM AND BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the ECM connector.

(b) Disconnect the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-30 (CCS) - D51-11 (CCS)
Always
Below 1
A33-4 (EC) - D51-10 (ECC)
Always
Below 1
Standard Resistance (Check for short):

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-30 (CCS) or D51-11 (CCS) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A33-4 (EC) or D51-10 (ECC) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR

SUB-ASSEMBLY - ECM)
OK
REPLACE ECM
5/5
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PLV0B2X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ECM turns on the cruise control indicator light by sending indicator output demand signals
to the combination meter assembly using CAN communication.
The cruise control indicator light illuminates in green when the cruise control system has been
turned on using the ON-OFF switch. If a malfunction is detected, the cruise control indicator
light changes to amber.
The cruise control indicator light circuit uses CAN communication. If the cruise control indicator
light is not functioning correctly, check for CAN communication DTCs before troubleshooting
this circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PLV0B2X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
(d) Select the following menu items: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test.
(e) Check the cruise control indicator light by performing the Active Test.
Combination Meter
TESTER
DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Indicat. Lamp
Cruise
Cruise control
indicator light
Cruise control indicator light (illuminated in

green) ON / OFF
Cruise Warning
Cruise control
indicator light

amber) ON / OFF
OK:
The cruise control indicator light goes on or off.
NG
REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
OK

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PLV0B2X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise SET Indicator Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003TL901UX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise SET Indicator Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Cruise SET Indicator Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ECM turns on the SET indicator light by sending indicator output demand signals to the
combination meter assembly using CAN communication.
The cruise control SET indicator light illuminates when the cruise control system is controlling
vehicle speed.
The cruise control indicator light circuit uses CAN communication. If the cruise control indicator
light is not functioning correctly, check for CAN communication DTCs before troubleshooting
this circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit
PROCEDURE
1.

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test.
(e) Check the cruise control SET indicator light by performing the Active Test.
Combination Meter
TESTER
DISPLAY
Indicat. SET
TEST PART
Cruise control SET indicator

light
CONTROL RANGE
Cruise control SET indicator light ON /

OFF
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
-
OK:
The cruise control SET indicator light goes on or goes off.
NG
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003TL901UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise SET Indicator Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
OK

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003TL901UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PM3071X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. READ DATA LIST
HINT:
time.

(d) Select the following menu items: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Data List.
(e) Read the Data List according to the display on the Techstream.
[Powertrain / Cruise Control / Data List]
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
CCS Vehicle Spd
Vehicle speed / Min.: 0 km/h (0

mph), Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
CCS Mem Vehicle

Spd
Stored vehicle speed / Min.: 0 km/h

Actual stored vehicle speed
(0 mph), Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
Cruise Request
Torque
Required engine torque / Min.:

-32768 Nm, Max.: 32767 Nm
Cruise Control
Cruise control system active

condition / ON or OFF
CCS Indicator MCPU
Cruise control indicator light

illumination signal (Main CPU) / ON
or OFF
Cancel Switch
CANCEL switch signal / ON or OFF
SET/COAST Switch
-/SET switch signal / ON or OFF
Actual required engine torque

ON: Cruise control activated
OFF: Cruise control deactivated
ON: Cruise control indicator
light illuminated in green
OFF: Cruise control indicator
light not on
ON: CANCEL switch on
OFF: CANCEL switch off
ON: -/SET switch on
OFF: -/SET switch off
ON: +/RES switch on

RES/ACC Switch
+/RES switch signal / ON or OFF
OFF: +/RES switch off
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PM3071X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
Each time cruise control main

switch (ON-OFF button) is
pushed, ON/OFF changes
CCS Ready M-CPU
Cruise control system standby

condition (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF
Main SW M-CPU
cruise control main switch signal

(Main CPU) / ON or OFF
Stop Light Switch 1
Stop light switch signal1 / ON or

OFF
ON: Brake pedal depressed
Stop Light Switch 2

OFF
Cruise Cancel :
Main Switch
"CANCEL CODE" by cruise control

main switch operation / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by brake pedal
Stop/Brake Switch
operation / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
Clutch Switch
Cruise Cancel :
Neutral Switch
Cruise Cancel :
Cancel Switch
Cruise Cancel : IG
Switch
Cruise Cancel :
Vehicle Speed 1
ON: cruise control main switch

(ON-OFF button) pushed
OFF: cruise control main switch
(ON-OFF button) released
OFF: Brake pedal released

ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
detected
detected
"CANCEL CODE" by clutch pedal
operation (for Manual

Transmission) / ON or OFF
"CANCEL CODE" by shift lever
operation (for Automatic

"CANCEL CODE" by CANCEL switch

"CANCEL CODE" by ignition switch

"CANCEL CODE" by abnormal

vehicle speed signal / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by raising engine
Engine Revolution
speed / ON or OFF
detected
detected
detected
detected
detected
detected
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
2/5
8/6/12
Cruise Cancel :
Out of Range
"CANCEL CODE" by setting the
Refer to
cruise control outside permitted

vehicle speed / ON or OFF
"CANCEL
CODE"
detected
.
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by accelerator
Accel Angle
pedal operation / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
Keeping Vehicle
Speed
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by inability to

maintain vehicle speed / ON or OFF
"CANCEL CODE" by VSC/TR(A)C
VSC/TRC Operation operation / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by ABS/VSC
ABS/VSC Abnormal

detected
detected
detected
detected
"CANCEL CODE" by combination
meter assembly abnormality / ON

or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by stop light
Brake Switch
Abnormal
switch assembly abnormality / ON

or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by park/neutral
Neutral Switch
Abnormal
position switch abnormality / ON or OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not

OFF
detected
Cruise Cancel :
Vehicle Speed 2

vehicle speed change / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
Meter Abnormal
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by engine control
Engine Abnormal
system abnormality / ON or OFF
detected
detected

detected
detected
Cruise Cancel :
Switch Related to
main switch abnormality / ON or
Cruise Control
OFF
detected
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
3/5
8/6/12
Cruise Cancel :
"Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch
Refer to
Brake Switch
Abnormal" is detected / ON or OFF
"CANCEL
detected
CODE"
Abnormal(Memory)
.
Cruise Cancel :

Neutral Switch
Abnormal(Memory)
Cruise Cancel :
Vehicle Speed
2(Memory)
Cruise Cancel :
Engine
Abnormal(Memory)
Cruise Cancel :
Switch Related to
CCS(Memory)
Cruise Cancel :
ECT Abnormal
Brake Cancel
Switch

detected

is detected / ON or OFF
"Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal"

"Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to

CCS" is detected / ON or OFF
"CANCEL CODE" by automatic

transmission system / ON or OFF
Stop light switch signal / ON or OFF

detected

detected
detected
detected
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
-
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST

HINT:
Using the Techstream to perform Active Tests allows relays, VSVs, actuators and other items to be
Active Tests early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be
displayed while performing Active Tests.

(e) Perform "Active Test" according to the display on Techstream.
HINT:
The ignition switch must be turned on to proceed with the Active Test using the Techstream.
4/5
8/6/12
[Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test]

TESTER
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY
NOTE
Indicat. Lamp
Cruise control indicator
Cruise
light
green) ON / OFF
Indicat. SET
Cruise control SET

indicator light
Cruise control SET indicator light ON / OFF
Cruise
Warning
light
amber) ON / OFF
5/5
8/6/12
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PM3071X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. READ DATA LIST
HINT:
time.

(d) Select the following menu items: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Data List.
[Powertrain / Cruise Control / Data List]
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
CCS Vehicle Spd
Vehicle speed / Min.: 0 km/h (0

mph), Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
CCS Mem Vehicle

Spd
Stored vehicle speed / Min.: 0 km/h

Actual stored vehicle speed
(0 mph), Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
Cruise Request
Torque
Required engine torque / Min.:

-32768 Nm, Max.: 32767 Nm
Cruise Control
Cruise control system active

condition / ON or OFF
CCS Indicator MCPU
Cruise control indicator light

illumination signal (Main CPU) / ON
or OFF
Cancel Switch
CANCEL switch signal / ON or OFF
SET/COAST Switch
-/SET switch signal / ON or OFF
Actual required engine torque

ON: Cruise control activated
OFF: Cruise control deactivated
ON: Cruise control indicator
light illuminated in green
OFF: Cruise control indicator
light not on
ON: CANCEL switch on
OFF: CANCEL switch off
ON: -/SET switch on
OFF: -/SET switch off
ON: +/RES switch on

RES/ACC Switch
+/RES switch signal / ON or OFF
OFF: +/RES switch off
1/5
8/6/12
Each time cruise control main

switch (ON-OFF button) is
pushed, ON/OFF changes
CCS Ready M-CPU
Cruise control system standby

condition (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF
Main SW M-CPU
cruise control main switch signal

(Main CPU) / ON or OFF
Stop Light Switch 1

OFF
Stop Light Switch 2

OFF
Cruise Cancel :
Main Switch

main switch operation / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by brake pedal
Stop/Brake Switch
Cruise Cancel :
Clutch Switch
Cruise Cancel :
Neutral Switch
Cruise Cancel :
Cancel Switch
Cruise Cancel : IG
Switch
Cruise Cancel :
Vehicle Speed 1
ON: cruise control main switch

(ON-OFF button) pushed
OFF: cruise control main switch
(ON-OFF button) released

detected
detected
"CANCEL CODE" by clutch pedal
operation (for Manual

"CANCEL CODE" by shift lever
operation (for Automatic

"CANCEL CODE" by CANCEL switch

"CANCEL CODE" by ignition switch


vehicle speed signal / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by raising engine
Engine Revolution
speed / ON or OFF
detected
detected
detected
detected
detected
detected
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
2/5
8/6/12
Cruise Cancel :
Out of Range
"CANCEL CODE" by setting the
Refer to
cruise control outside permitted

vehicle speed / ON or OFF
"CANCEL
CODE"
detected
.
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by accelerator
Accel Angle
pedal operation / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
Keeping Vehicle
Speed
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by inability to

maintain vehicle speed / ON or OFF
"CANCEL CODE" by VSC/TR(A)C
VSC/TRC Operation operation / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by ABS/VSC
ABS/VSC Abnormal

detected
detected
detected
detected
"CANCEL CODE" by combination
meter assembly abnormality / ON

or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by stop light
Brake Switch
Abnormal
switch assembly abnormality / ON

or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by park/neutral
Neutral Switch
Abnormal
position switch abnormality / ON or OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not

OFF
detected
Cruise Cancel :
Vehicle Speed 2

vehicle speed change / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel :
Meter Abnormal
Cruise Cancel :
"CANCEL CODE" by engine control
Engine Abnormal
system abnormality / ON or OFF
detected
detected

detected
detected
Cruise Cancel :
Switch Related to
main switch abnormality / ON or
Cruise Control
OFF
detected
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
3/5
8/6/12
Cruise Cancel :
"Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch
Refer to
Brake Switch
"CANCEL
detected
CODE"
Abnormal(Memory)
.
Cruise Cancel :

Neutral Switch
Abnormal(Memory)
Cruise Cancel :
Vehicle Speed
2(Memory)
Cruise Cancel :
Engine
Abnormal(Memory)
Cruise Cancel :
Switch Related to
CCS(Memory)
Cruise Cancel :
ECT Abnormal
Brake Cancel
Switch

detected

"Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal"

"Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to

CCS" is detected / ON or OFF
"CANCEL CODE" by automatic

transmission system / ON or OFF
Stop light switch signal / ON or OFF

detected

detected
detected
detected
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
Refer to
"CANCEL
CODE"
.
-

HINT:

(e) Perform "Active Test" according to the display on Techstream.
HINT:
The ignition switch must be turned on to proceed with the Active Test using the Techstream.
4/5
8/6/12
[Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test]

TESTER
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY
NOTE
Indicat. Lamp
Cruise
light
green) ON / OFF
Indicat. SET
Cruise control SET

indicator light
Cruise control SET indicator light ON / OFF
Cruise
Warning
light
amber) ON / OFF
5/5
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PM107UX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. DTC CHECK
(d) Select the following menu items: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Trouble Codes.
(e) Check the details of the DTC(s)
2. DTC CLEAR
(e) Clear the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PM107UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PM107UX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. DTC CHECK
2. DTC CLEAR
(e) Clear the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PM107UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000ZRD07IX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction (2013 FRS)
DTC
P0500
Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0500 in SFI system
DTC NO.
P0500
TROUBLE AREA
DTC P0500 is detected in SFI system.
Speed sensor
Skid control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly)
ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0500 in SFI system
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC P0500 is output
GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING FOR DTC P0500
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000ZRD07IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000ZRD07IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Stop Light Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000057KI000X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Stop Light Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Stop Light Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the brake pedal is released, terminal STP of the ECM receives positive (+) battery voltage through
the ECU IG2 fuse. While depressing the brake pedal, the stop light switch sends a signal to terminals
STP and ST1- of the ECM. The ECM cancels cruise control drive when terminal STP receives the signal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Stop light switch assembly conditions can be checked using the Techstream.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.

Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Turn the Techstream on.
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Data List / Stop Light Switch 1 and Stop
Light Switch 2.
Cruise Control
BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION
STOP LIGHT SWITCH 1
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000057KI000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
STOP LIGHT SWITCH 2

1/8
8/6/12
Depressed
ON
ON
Released
OFF
OFF
PROCEDURE
1.
Standard voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A33-7 (STP) - Body ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Brake pedal released
11 to 14 V
Brake pedal depressed
Below 1 V
*a

(ECM)
NG
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE

OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
OK
2.
2/8
8/6/12
Standard voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A33-3 (ST1-) - Body ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
*a
3.

(ECM)
NG
OK
OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the stop light switch assembly connector.
Standard voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3/8
8/6/12
A22-3 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Stop Light Switch Assembly)
NG
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the stop light switch assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
A33-7 (STP) - A22-4
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A33-7 (STP) or A22-4 - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND
NG
CONNECTOR
OK
5.
INSPECT STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the stop light switch assembly
4/8
8/6/12
6.
NG
REPLACE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
Standard voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A22-1 - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Stop Light Switch Assembly)
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NOISE

FILTER - STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
OK
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the stop light switch assembly connector.
5/8
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
A33-3 (ST1-) - A22-2
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A33-3 (ST1-) or A22-2 - Body ground
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (STOP

LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY - NOISE FILTER)
NG
OK
8.
(a) Inspect the stop light switch assembly
9.
NG
REPLACE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NOISE FILTER - STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the noise filter connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
A22-1 - A13-2
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
A22-1 or A13-2 - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
6/8
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
NG
REPLACE NOISE FILTER
OK
OK
10.
INSPECT NOISE FILTER
(a) Inspect the noise filter
11.
CONNECTOR (NOISE FILTER - BATTERY)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY - NOISE FILTER)

TESTER CONNECTION
A22-2 - A13-1
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
A22-2 or A13-1 - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
NG
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR
OK
7/8
8/6/12
12.
INSPECT NOISE FILTER
(a) Inspect the noise filter
NG
REPLACE NOISE FILTER
OK
13.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - NOISE FILTER)

TESTER CONNECTION
A33-3 (ST1-) - A13-4
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A33-3 (ST1-) or A13-4 - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
8/8
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0P009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0P009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0P009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0O00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
When applying vacuum, the needle may waver but, as long as the needle returns to its initial
position immediately, it is not a malfunction.
(a) Visually check the charcoal canister assembly for cracks or damage.
If cracks or damage is found, replace the charcoal canister assembly.
(b) Check the air flow.
(1) Using a vacuum pump, check the air flow according to
the procedures below.
*1
Port A
*2
Port B
*3
Port C
OK:
MEASUREMENT CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Ports B and C closed, and vacuum applied to

port A (2 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.590 in.Hg))
No air leaks
Port C closed, and vacuum applied to port A

(2 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.590 in.Hg))
Air flows from

port B
Port C closed and air blown into port A (5 kPa
Air flows from

port B
(0.1 kgf/cm
, 0.725 psi))
Air blown into port A (5 kPa (0.1 kgf/cm 2 ,

0.725 psi))
Air flows from

ports B and C
If the result is not as specified, replace the charcoal

canister assembly.
2. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE

(a) Measure the resistance according to the value in the
table below.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0O00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-5
20C (68F)
25 to 30
1-5
60C (140F)
27 to 35
*a

(Canister Pump Module)
(b) Check the operation of the check valve.
(1) Install a clean hose to the purge

valve.
(2) Check that air flows from port A to port B.

*1
Port A
*2
Port B
2/5
8/6/12
(3) Connect the positive (+) lead of the battery to

terminal 5 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 1.
(4) Check that air does not flow from port A to port B.
*1
Port A
*2
Port B
*a


*a

(6) Check that the vacuum pump operates.

NOTICE:
Do not operate vacuum pump for 5 minutes or more.
3/5
8/6/12

*1
1.5 V
*2
4.8 to 5.2 V
*a

(8) Measure the voltage according to the value in the table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
7-8
25C (77F)
Approximately 3.5 V

*1
1.5 V
*2
4.8 to 5.2 V
*a

(10) Connect the positive (+) lead of the battery to terminal 3 and the negative (-) lead to terminal
4. Check that the voltage drops slightly from 3.5 volts.
4/5
8/6/12
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0N00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the canister base bracket to the charcoal canister assembly with 2 nuts.
(b) Install the charcoal canister assembly with canister base bracket with the 2 bolts and the nut.
Bolt - Torque: 7.5 Nm (76 kgfcm, 66inlbf)
Nut - Torque: 8.0 Nm (82 kgfcm, 71inlbf)
(c) Connect the drain hose D as indicated by the arrows, in

the order shown in the illustration.
(d) Connect the drain hose C as shown in the illustration.
2. INSTALL CANISTER PUMP MODULE

(a) Install the drain hose E.
(b) Connect the drain hose A and the drain hose B.
(c) Engage the clamp.
(d) Install the nuts and bracket B.
(e) Install the 2 nuts and bracket A.
(f) Engage the clip.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0N00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(g) Install the check valve with 3 bolts.

(h) Connect the evaporation hose to the fuel pipe assembly.
(i) Engage the clip.
(j) Connect the drain hose A to the fuel filler pipe.
(k) Connect the drain hose B to the charcoal canister assembly.
3. INSTALL REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0N00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0Q00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE CANISTER PUMP MODULE
(a) Disconnect the drain hose B as indicated by the arrows, in

(b) Disconnect the drain hose A as indicated by the arrows, in

(c) Disconnect the evaporation hose from the fuel filler pipe
assembly.
(d) Disengage the clip.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0Q00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
(e) Remove the 3 bolts and check valve.
(f) Disengage the clip.
(g) Disengage the clamp.
(h) Remove the nut and bracket B.
(i) Remove the 2 nuts and bracket A.
(j) Disconnect the drain hose A and drain hose B as indicated

by the arrows, in the order shown in the illustration.
*1
Drain hose A
*2
Drain hose B
2/4
8/6/12
(k) Disconnect the 2 quick connector as indicated by the

arrows, in the order shown in the illustration, and remove
the drain hose E.
4. REMOVE CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the drain hose D as indicated by the arrows,

in the order shown in the illustration.
(b) Disconnect the drain hose C as indicated by the arrows,

(c) Remove the nut.
3/4
8/6/12
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and charcoal canister assembly along

with the canister base bracket B.
(e) Remove the 2 nuts and canister base bracket.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0J009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK PURGE VALVE
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose (on the
canister side) of the fuel pipe.
*1
Fuel pipe
*2
No.2 fuel vapor feed hose

(c) Start the engine.
(d) Turn the Techstream on.
(e) Enter the following menus: Engine / Active Test / Activate the VSV for Evap Control.
(f) When the purge valve is operated using the tester, check whether the port of the purge valve
applies suction to your finger.
OK:
TESTER OPERATION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Check valve: OFF
Purge valve has no suction
Check valve: ON
Purge valve has suction
If the result is not as specified, check the valve
, wire harness and ECM.
(g) Connect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose (on the canister side) of the purge valve.
2. INSPECT FUEL CUT-OFF RPM

(a) Start and warm up the engine.
(b) Use a sound scope to check for injector operation noise.
(c) Increase the engine speed to at least 3000 rpm.
(d) Check that when the accelerator pedal is released, the injector operation noise stops momentarily
and then resumes.
Standard:
ITEM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0J009X.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
Fuel cut off rpm
2500 rpm or more
Fuel injection restart rpm
1400 rpm
If the result is not as specified, check the injector
, wire harness and ECM.
3. VISUALLY INSPECT HOSES, CONNECTIONS AND GASKETS EMISSION HOSE

(a) Check that there are no cracks, leaks or damage.
NOTICE:
Detachment or other problems with the engine oil dipstick,
filler cap, ventilation hose and other components may
cause the engine to run improperly.
Air suction caused by disconnections, looseness or cracks
in the parts of the air induction system between the
throttle with motor body assembly and cylinder head will
cause engine failure or engine malfunctions.
If the result is not as specified, replace parts as
necessary.
4. CHECK HOSES AND CONNECTORS

(a) Visually check for loose connections, sharp bends or damage.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0J009X.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0H009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0H009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0H009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0I009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
*1
ECM
*2
*3
Heated Oxygen Sensor
*a
to Charcoal Canister Assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0I009X.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor
1/3
8/6/12
*1
Fuel Tank Vent Valve
*2
Cut-off Valve
*3
Fuel Tank Assembly
*4
Fuel Tank Cap Assembly
*5
Purge Valve
*6
ECM
*7
Canister Pump Module
*8
Air Filter
2/3
8/6/12
*9
*11
*a
Vent Valve
*10
Pump Motor
Canister Pressure Sensor
*12
Charcoal Canister Assembly
to Intake Manifold
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: FUEL TANK CAP: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I3E009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: FUEL TANK CAP: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check if the cap and/or gasket are deformed or

damaged.
*1
Gasket
If necessary, replace the fuel tank cap assembly or

gasket.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I3E009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I3I00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I3I00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I3H00HX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install a clean hose to the PCV valve sub-assembly.
(b) Check the PCV valve sub-assembly operation.
(1) Blow air into the cylinder head side and check that air
passes through easily.
*1
Clean Hose
*a
Air
CAUTION:
Do not suck air through the valve. Petroleum
substances inside the valve are hazardous to your
health.
(2) Blow air into the intake manifold side and check that
air passes through with difficulty.
*1
Clean Hose
*a
Air
If the result is not as specified, replace the PCV valve
sub-assembly.
(c) Remove the clean hose from the PCV valve sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I3H00HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I3G00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads of the PCV valve subassembly.

Adhesive:
Three Bond 1141G or equivalent
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the PCV valve sub-assembly.
(c) Connect the ventilation hose.
2. INSTALL INTAKE MANIFOLD
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I3G00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I3J00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE INTAKE MANIFOLD
2. REMOVE PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the ventilation hose from the PCV valve subassembly.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the PCV

valve sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I3J00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0X00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0X00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0X00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0W00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PURGE VALVE
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value in the

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
21 to 27
(b) Check the operation of the purge valve.
(1) Install a clean hose to the purge valve.

(2) Check that air does not flow from port E to port F.
(3) Check that air flows from port E to port F.
*1
Port E
*2
Port F
*3
Clean Hose
Air
OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0W00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
Battery does not connect

Battery positive (+) Terminal 1
Battery negative (-) Terminal 2
Air does not flow from port E to port F

Air flows from port E to port F
If the result is not as specified, replace the purge valve.

(4) Remove the clean hose from the purge valve.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0W00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0V00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PURGE VALVE
(a) Connect the joint wire harness to the purge valve.
(b) Connect the No. 1 fuel vapor feed hose and No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose, and install the purge valve
with the joint wire harness.
(c) Connect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.
(d) Connect the purge valve connector.
(e) Install the nut and purge valve.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 ENGINE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0V00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003I0Y00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE NO. 1 ENGINE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE PURGE VALVE
(a) Remove the nut which holds the purge valve onto the
intake manifold.
(b) Disconnect the purge valve connector.
(c) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor

connector.
(d) Disconnect the No. 2 ventilation hose.

*1
air pressure sensor assembly connector
*2
No. 2 ventilation hose
(e) Disconnect the No. 1 fuel vapor feed hose and No. 2 fuel
vapor feed hose, and remove the purge valve with the
joint wire harness.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0Y00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
*1
No. 1 fuel vapor feed hose
*2
No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose
*3
Joint wire harness
*4
purge valve
(f) Remove the joint wire harness from the purge valve
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003I0Y00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002QU600LX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002QU600LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Avoid excessive force to the accelerator pedal assembly.
Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
(a) Install the accelerator pedal assembly with the 2 nuts.
(b) Connect the accelerator pedal assembly connector.
2. INSTALL ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD COVER

(a) Engage the new clip, and install the accelerator pedal rod cover.
3. INSTALL ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD STOPPER

(a) Install the accelerator pedal rod stopper.
4. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IHM006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
(d) Enter the following menus: Data List / Accel Sensor Out No. 1 and Accel Sensor Out No. 2.
(e) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.
Standard Voltage:
ACCELERATOR PEDAL OPERATION
ACCEL SENSOR OUT NO. 1
ACCEL SENSOR OUT NO. 2
Released
0.213 to 4.772 V
00.213 to 4.772 V
Depressed
0.213 to 4.772 V
0.213 to 4.772 V
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IHM006X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL
2. REMOVE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD STOPPER
(a) Remove the accelerator pedal rod stopper.
3. REMOVE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD COVER
(a) Disengage the clip, and remove the accelerator pedal rod
cover.
4. REMOVE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the accelerator pedal assembly connector.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the accelerator pedal assembly.
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BOE00FX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BOE00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MUG00UX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) the
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
1.98 to 2.64
1-4
Always
10 k or higher
*a

(Air Fuel Ratio Sensor)
If the result is not as specified, replace the air fuel ratio
sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MUG00UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MUF00WX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Using SST, install the air fuel ratio sensor onto the
exhaust manifold.
SST: 09224-00010
Without SST - Torque: 21 Nm (214 kgfcm, 16ftlbf)
With SST - Torque: 18 Nm (184 kgfcm, 13ftlbf)
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected to a
strong impact, replace it.
HINT:
This torque value is effective when SST is parallel to the
torque wrench.
The "with SST" torque value is effective when using SST
with a fulcrum length of 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The "with SST" torque value is effective when using a
torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 180 mm (7.087
in.).
If using a torque wrench with a different length, or
connecting the torque wrench and SST at an angle, refer
to the alternate torque values

(c) Connect the air fuel ratio sensor connector.
2. CONNECT BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL

3. INSPECT FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MUF00WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MUI00YX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. DISCONNECT BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
2. REMOVE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the air fuel ratio sensor connector.
(c) Using SST, remove the air fuel ratio sensor from the
exhaust manifold.
SST: 09224-00010
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MUI00YX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BO600QX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BO600QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IHH008X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
20C (68F)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
6.85 to 7.65
*a

(Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve)
If the result is not as specified, replace the camshaft
timing oil control valve.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IHH008X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BO500PX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (for Exhaust Side of Bank 2)
(a) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(b) Apply a light coat of engine oil to a new O-ring and install it to the camshaft timing oil control
valve.
(c) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve with the 2 bolts.
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected to a strong impact, replace it.
Make sure that the O-ring is not damaged or does not jump out of position during installation.
(d) Connect the camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
2. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (for Intake Side of Bank 2)
valve.
NOTICE:
3. INSTALL AIR CLEANER CAP WITH AIR CLEANER HOSE

valve.
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BO500PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
valve.
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BO500PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IHI00AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE
(b) Start the engine.
(d) Turn the A/C switch on.
(e) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side).
(1) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank 1).
(2) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve assembly (for
intake side) using the Techstream.
OK:
TESTER OPERATION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0 deg (CA)
Normal engine speed
36 deg (CA)
Engine idles roughly or stalls
If the operation is not as specified, check the camshaft timing oil control valve, wire harness
and ECM.
(3) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank 2).
intake side) using the Techstream.
OK:
TESTER OPERATION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0 deg (CA)
Normal engine speed
36 deg (CA)
and ECM.
(f) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust side).
(1) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust Linear
(Bank 1).
exhaust side) using the Techstream.
OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IHI00AX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
TESTER OPERATION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0 deg (CA)
Normal engine speed
51 deg (CA)
and ECM.
(3) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust Linear
(Bank 2).
exhaust side) using the Techstream.
OK:
TESTER OPERATION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0 deg (CA)
Normal engine speed
51 deg (CA)
and ECM.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IHI00AX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (for Intake Side of Bank 1)
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve

connector.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control
valve.
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
(d) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
3. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (for Exhaust Side of Bank 1)

connector.
1/3
8/6/12
valve.
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
4. REMOVE AIR CLEANER CAP WITH AIR CLEANER HOSE


connector.
valve.
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
2/3
8/6/12

connector.
valve.
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Q9U00HX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Q9U00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Q9U00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Q9T00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL VVT SENSOR (for Exhaust Side of Bank 2)
(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the new O-ring of the VVT sensor.
(b) Install the VVT sensor with the bolt.
(c) Connect the VVT sensor connector.

3. INSTALL VVT SENSOR (for Intake Side of Bank 2)
(c) Connect the VVT sensor connector


https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Q9T00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Q9V00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE VVT SENSOR (for Intake Side of Bank 1)
(a) Disconnect the VVT sensor connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor.

(c) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
3. REMOVE VVT SENSOR (for Exhaust Side of Bank 1)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Q9V00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)

5. REMOVE NO. 1 ENGINE UNDER COVER


https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Q9V00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Q9Y00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Q9Y00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002QA000KX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
Always
1836 to 2244
*a
Component without harness connected:

(Crankshaft Position Sensor)
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the crankshaft
position sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002QA000KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Q9X00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(a) Install the crankshaft position sensor with the bolt.
(b) Connect the crankshaft position sensor connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Q9X00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Q9Z00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and crankshaft position sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Q9Z00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000047VL005X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000047VL005X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000047VL005X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000047NH009X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ECM BRACKET
(a) Engage the 2 claws, and install a new ECM bracket to the ECM.
NOTICE:
After attaching the ECM bracket to the ECM, do not remove the ECM bracket.
If the ECM bracket is attached to the ECM, replace ECM bracket with a new one.
2. INSTALL ECM
NOTICE:
When replacing the ECM, do not use ECM with different specifications.
(a) Install the ECM with the 2 nuts.

(b) Connect the 4 connectors to the ECM.
NOTICE:
Be sure to securely connect the connectors.
3. INSTALL CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY

4. INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY
5. INSTALL INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL RH
7. PERFORM INITIALIZATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000047NH009X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000047NJ009X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
If the ECM or ECM bracket have been replaced, replace the ECM bracket with a new one.

2. REMOVE INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL RH
3. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVE ECM
(a) Disconnect the 4 connectors from the ECM.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the ECM.

NOTICE:
6. REMOVE ECM BRACKET
(a) Disengage the 2 claws, and remove the ECM bracket.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000047NJ009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003II1008X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003II1008X.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MTM00NX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
*1
Resistance
*2
*3
Acceptable
*a
(Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor)
Temperature
(a) Partially soak the sensor in the water and warm up the water.
TESTER CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Approximately. 20C (68F)
2.35 to 2.65 k
Approximately. 80C (176F)
0.305 to 0.331 k
NOTICE:
When checking the engine coolant temperature sensor in water, keep the terminals dry. After
the check, wipe the engine coolant temperature sensor dry.
If the result is not as specified, replace the engine coolant temperature sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTM00NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Install a new gasket to the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(b) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, install the engine coolant temperature sensor to the cylinder
head sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected a strong impact, replace it.
Use the torque value compensation formula to calculate the torque value for use when a torque
wrench is combined with a tool such as a union nut wrench
(c) Connect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector.
3. FILL ENGINE COOLANT

4. INSPECT COOLANT LEAK
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. DRAIN ENGINE COOLANT
3. REMOVE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor

connector.
(b) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, remove the engine

coolant temperature sensor.
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MTM00PX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
*a
Resistance
*b
*c
Acceptable
*d
Temperature
(Engine oil Temperature Sensor)
(a) Partially soak the sensor in the water and warm up the water.
TESTER CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Approximately 20C (68F)
2.25 to 2.65 k
Approximately 80C (176F)
0.305 to 0.331 k
NOTICE:
When checking the engine oil temperature sensor in water, keep the terminals dry. After the
check, wipe the engine oil temperature sensor dry.
If the result is not as specified, replace the engine oil temperature sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTM00PX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Install a new gasket to the engine oil temperature sensor.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil temperature sensor to the cylinder head
sub-assembly.
(c) Connect the engine oil temperature sensor connector.

1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor connector.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the engine

oil temperature sensor.
*1
19 mm Deep Socket Wrench
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BOD00FX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BOD00FX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BOD00FX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MUK00UX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68 F)
5.0 to 6.4
1-4
Always
10 k or higher
*a

(Heated Oxygen Sensor)
If the result is not as specified, replace the heated oxygen
sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MUK00UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MUJ00VX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(a) Using SST, install the heated oxygen sensor onto the
exhaust manifold assembly.
SST: 09224-00010
without SST - Torque: 21 Nm (214 kgfcm, 16ftlbf)
with SST - Torque: 18 Nm (184 kgfcm, 13ftlbf)
HINT:
This torque value is effective when SST is parallel to the
torque wrench.
The "with SST" torque value is effective when using SST
with a fulcrum length of 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The "with SST" torque value is effective when using a
torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 180 mm (7.087
in.).
If using a torque wrench with a different length, or
connecting the torque wrench and SST at an angle, refer
to the alternate torque values
(c) Connect the oxygen sensor connector.

3. INSTALL REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER RH
(a) Instal the 3 clips, and connect the engine under cover rear RH.

5. INSTALL FRONT TIRE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MUJ00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MUM00VX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE FRONT TIRE RH
3. DISCONNECT REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER RH
(a) Remove the 3 clips, and disconnect the rear engine under
cover RH.
4. REMOVE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MUM00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(c) Using SST, remove the oxygen sensor from the exhaust
manifold assembly.
SST: 09224-00010
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MUM00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002QV300OX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002QV300OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000053AP003X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SPARK PLUG (for Bank 1)
(a) Using the spark plug wrench 14 mm, tilt extension bar 35
mm and universal joint 54 mm, and install the 2 spark
plugs onto the cylinder head sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected a strong
impact, replace it.
2. INSTALL IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY (for Bank 1)

(a) Install the 2 ignition coils onto the cylinder head cover sub-assembly with the 2 bolts.
NOTICE:
(b) Connect the 2 ignition coil connectors to the ignition coil.
3. INSTALL INJECTOR DRIVER

mm and universal joint 54 mm, and install the 2 spark
plugs onto the cylinder head sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected a strong
impact, replace it.

(a) Install the 2 ignition coils onto the cylinder head cover sub-assembly with the 2 bolts.
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000053AP003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Connect the 2 ignition coil connectors to the ignition coil.
6. INSTALL INJECTOR COVER (for Bank 2)

(a) Install the injector cover with the 2 bolts.
(b) Engage the clamp, and install the fuel hoses.
7. REMOVE SST
(a) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
(b) Remove the SST.

SST: 09250-53011
(c) Install the 2 nuts.
(d) Remove the rope that is tying the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly to the front suspension cross
member sub-assembly.
8. REMOVE ENGINE HANGER

10. CONNECT ENGINE WIRE

(a) Engage the 2 clamps to connect the engine wire.
(b) Connect the engine wire with the wire harness clamp bracket mount bolt and 3 clamps.
(c) Engage the claw and connect the engine wire (for Manual Transmission).
(d) Connect the engine wire with the 4 clamps.

2/3
8/6/12

15. ADJUST SHIFT LEVER POSITION
17. SET HOOD SUB-ASSEMBLY
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002QV400RX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
6. DISCONNECT ENGINE WIRE
(a) Disengage the 4 clamps, and disconnect the engine wire.
(b) Disengage the 3 clamps and wire harness clamp bracket

mount bolt, and disconnect the engine wire.
(c) Disengage the claw and disconnect the engine wire (for
Manual Transmission).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002QV400RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
(d) Disengage 2 clamps and disconnect the engine wire.

*a
LH Side
*b
RH Side
7. REMOVE EXHAUST MANIFOLD
8. INSTALL ENGINE HANGER

9. SET SST
(a) Tie the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly onto the front
suspension cross member sub-assembly using rope.
HINT:
This operation is necessary in order to prevent the front
exhaust pipe sub-assembly from falling off.
2/5
8/6/12
(c) Install the engine hanger with the bolt.

(d) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
(e) Install the SST to between the engine mount and front.
SST: 09250-53011
NOTICE:
Make sure not to install SST in a wrong way.
HINT:
LH Side Part No. : 09250-53011L
RH Side Part No. : 09250-53011R
10. REMOVE INJECTOR COVER (for Bank 2)
(a) Disengage the clamp, and disconnect the fuel hoses.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover.
11. REMOVE IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY (for Bank 2)
(a) Disconnect the 2 ignition coil connectors from the ignition

3/5
8/6/12
coil assembly.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and remove the 2 ignition coils.
12. REMOVE SPARK PLUG (for Bank 2)
mm and universal joint 54 mm, and remove the 2 spark
plugs.
13. REMOVE INJECTOR DRIVER

(a) Disconnect the 2 ignition coil connectors from the ignition

coil assembly.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and remove the 2 ignition coils.
4/5
8/6/12
mm and universal joint 54 mm, and remove the 2 spark
plugs.
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IGF006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. PERFORM SPARK TEST
(a) Check for DTCs
NOTICE:
If any DTC is present, perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure for that DTC.
(b) Remove the 4 ignition coils and 4 spark plugs
(c) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
(d) Remove the SST.

SST: 09250-53011
(e) Install the 2 nuts.

(f) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover (for bank 1).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IGF006X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/8
8/6/12
(g) Disconnect the 2 fuel injector connectors.
(h) Install the injector cover (for bank 1).
(i) Install the injector driver with the 3 bolts.

HINT:
Do not connect the upper side 2 connectors.
(j) Disconnect the 2 fuel injector connectors.
(k) Connect the cable to the negative battery terminal.

(l) Install the air cleaner case sub-assembly with the hose.
(m) Install a spark plug to each ignition coil and connect the ignition coil connector.
(n) Ground the spark plug.
(o) Check that spark occurs while the engine is being cranked.
(p) Check whether sparks occur.
NOTICE:
Ground the spark plugs when checking them.
Do not crank the engine for more than 2 seconds.
Do not use an ignition coil and spark plug that has been dropped or subjected to a strong impact.
(q) If spark does not occur, perform the following procedure.
2/8
8/6/12
2. INSPECT IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG

(a) Perform the spark test in accordance with the following procedure.
(1) Check that the wire harness side connector of the ignition coil assembly is securely connected.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
Connect securely
OK
Go to next step
(2) Perform a spark test on each ignition coil assembly.

1. If there is a cylinder where sparks do not occur, replace its ignition coil with the
ignition coil of a cylinder where sparks occur normally.
2. Crank the engine and visually check that sparks occur at the cylinder with the
normally operating ignition coil.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
Replace ignition coil assembly
NG
Go to next step
(3) Perform a spark test on each spark plug.

1. If there is a cylinder where sparks do not occur, replace its spark plug with the spark
plug of a cylinder where sparks occur normally.
2. Crank the engine and visually check that sparks occur at the cylinder with the
normally operating spark plug.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
Replace spark plug
NG
Inspect the ignition system
(b) Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal.

(c) Remove the air cleaner case sub-assembly with hose.
(d) Remove the 3 bolts and the injector driver.
3/8
8/6/12
(e) Remove the 2 bolts and the injector cover (bank 1).
(f) Connect the 2 fuel injector connectors.
(g) Install the 2 bolts and the injector cover.

(h) Install the 3 bolts and the injector driver.
(i) Connect the 4 connectors to the injector driver. Move the lock levers in the direction indicated by
the arrow to lock the 3 connectors.
4/8
8/6/12
*1
Lock Lever
Connector with Lock Lever
Connector without Lock Lever
(j) Connect the 2 fuel injector connectors.
(k) Install the injector cover (bank 1) with the 2 bolts.

(l) Remove the 2 nuts.
(m) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
5/8
8/6/12
(n) Install the SST.

SST: 09250-53011
(o) Install the ignition coil assembly and spark plug

(p) Clear the DTCs
(q) Check for DTCs
HINT:
Reinstall the sensors, connectors, etc. and restore the previous vehicle conditions before rechecking
for DTCs.
3. INSPECT SPARK PLUG

NOTICE:
When replacing a spark plug, make sure to use the designated spark plug because an ion current
type misfire detection system is used for the spark plug.
Do not damage the platinum tip. If the spark plug has been dropped, make sure to replace it with
a designated new spark plug.
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
Do not attempt to adjust the electrode gap of a used spark plug.
Make sure to use SST to check gaps, preventing the platinum tip from being damaged.
If damaged, replace it with a designated new spark plug.
(a) Check the electrode using a megohmmeter:
*a
Ground
(1) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in

the table below.
Standard Insulation Resistance:
TESTER CONNECTION
Spark plug (terminal part) Body ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Always
10 M or higher
HINT:
6/8
8/6/12
If the result is not as specified, clean the spark plug with

a spark plug cleaner and measure the resistance again.
If a megohmmeter is not available, perform the following
simple inspection instead.
(b) Alternative inspection method:

(1) Quickly accelerate the engine to 4000 rpm 5 times.
(2) Remove the spark plug
(3) Visually check the spark plug.

If the electrode is dry, the spark plug is functioning
properly. If the electrode is damp, proceed to the next
step.
HINT:
If a megohmmeter is not available, perform the following
simple inspection instead.
(4) Install the spark plug
(c) Check the spark plug for any damage to its threads and insulator.
HINT:
If there is any damage, replace the spark plug.
Recommended Spark Plug:

MANUFACTURER
PRODUCT
DENSO made
ZXE27HBR8
(d) Reference:
(1) Using SST, check the spark plug electrode gap.
*a
Spark Plug Electrode Gap
7/8
8/6/12
SST: 09240-00020
Maximum electrode gap for a used spark plug:
1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
If the gap exceeds the maximum, replace the spark plug.
NOTICE:
Never attempt to adjust the gap of a used plug.
Electrode gap for a new spark plug:

0.7 to 0.8 mm (0.0276 to 0.0315 in.)
(e) Clean the spark plugs.
If the electrode has traces of wet carbon, clean the electrode with a spark plug cleaner and then
dry it.
Standard air pressure:
588 kPa (6.0 kgf/cm 2 , 85 psi)
Standard duration:
20 seconds or less
HINT:
Only use a spark plug cleaner when the electrode is free of oil. If the electrode has traces of oil, use
gasoline to clean off the oil before using the spark plug cleaner.
8/8
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BOZ00FX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BOZ00FX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IGE006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IGE006X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BO400JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BO400JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MTF00WX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
532 to 588 k
*a

(Knock Sensor)
If the result is not as specified, replace the knock sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTF00WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MTE00WX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL KNOCK SENSOR
(a) Install the 2 knock sensors onto the cylinder block with the 2 bolts as shown in the illustration.

*a
Bank 1
*b
Bank 2
Engine Front Side
(b) Connect the 2 knock sensors connectors.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTE00WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MTH00WX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE KNOCK SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the 2 knock sensor connectors.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 knock sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTH00WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Brake Override System (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004G8F0CEX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Brake Override System (2013 FR-S)
Brake Override System
DESCRIPTION
When the vehicle is being driven with the accelerator pedal depressed, depressing the brake pedal
without releasing the accelerator pedal will activate the brake override system to restrict driving torque.
The conditions for activating the brake override system as well as the items that are controlled are
explained below.
Activation Conditions:
Vehicle is running at or above the specified speed.
The accelerator pedal is depressed, and then the brake pedal is depressed.
NOTICE:
The vehicle may not enter the brake override system control due to the relation of the
accelerator pedal angle and the vehicle's speed.
Items Controlled:
Driving torque is restricted.
HINT:
During brake override system control, the value for the accelerator pedal angle (which is used for
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004G8F0CEX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
engine control) is forcibly reduced to a specified value. For this reason, the Data List value for
Accelerator Position will be replaced with a specified value regardless of the actual accelerator pedal
angle (Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt %, Accel Sens. No. 2 Volt %)
Deactivation Conditions:
When the Stop Light Switch turns OFF or the actual accelerator pedal angle increases or
decreases beyond the specified range.
Inspection Method
Drive at 10 km/h (6.25 mph), depress the accelerator pedal by 1/2 to 3/4 and keep it in that position.
Under these conditions, if the brake pedal is depressed, then the brake override system has been
activated.
CAUTION:
When carrying out the inspection, use a place where you are able to carry it out safely and also
pay close attention to your surroundings.
Also, when driving make absolutely sure that all road traffic laws, such as speed limits, are
observed.
HINT:
Under normal conditions, the Accelerator Position value changes in response to the Accel Sens. No.
1 Volt % value. For more information on the numerical values, refer to the Data List
.
If the Data List values of Accelerator Position and Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt % do not match, and the
value of Accelerator Position changes but the value of Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt % is constant, this
confirms that brake override system has activated. (Data can be captured relatively easily by using
the snapshot function in the Data List. Confirm the data after performing the drive test.)
NOTICE:
The brake override system restricts driving torque if the brake pedal is depressed when
driving with the accelerator pedal depressed. If a customer reports experiencing loss of torque
after the accelerator and brake pedals have both been intentionally depressed, explain to the
customer that this is not a malfunction, and that the customer should avoid depressing both the
accelerator and brake pedals at the same time.
Example: While operating the accelerator pedal, the customer uses their left foot to operate
the brake pedal.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT

(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
(c) Enter the following menus: System Select / Health Check.
(d) Check DTCs.
Result
2/6
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTCs are output
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (STOP LIGHT SWITCH AND and ST1)

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Stop Light Switch and ST1.
(d) Check the Data List indication when the brake pedal is depressed and released.
OK:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
Stop Light Switch
ST1
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
NG
OK
3.
INSPECT BRAKE PEDAL
(a) Inspect and adjust the brake pedal (for Manual Transmission)
(b) Inspect and adjust the brake pedal (for Automatic Transmission)
.
.
HINT:
3/6
8/6/12
If the stop light switch turns ON too late, the start of brake override system control may be delayed;
if it turns ON too soon, brake override system control may begin too early, so conduct inspection of
the brake pedal and stop light switch assembly.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (for Manual Transmission)
NG (for Automatic Transmission)
REPAIR OR REPLACE BRAKE PEDAL
REPAIR OR REPLACE BRAKE PEDAL
4.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR)

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt % and Accel
Sens. No. 2 Volt %.
(d) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.
OK:
TECHSTREAM
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DISPLAY
Accel Sens. No. 1
Volt %
Accel Sens. No. 2
Volt %
Accelerator Pedal
Released Depressed
Values smoothly change following accelerator

pedal operation
Released
HINT:
For numerical values of Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt % and Accel Sens. No. 2 Volt %, refer to the Data List
.
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR

4/6
8/6/12
NG
ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (VEHICLE SPEED)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Vehicle Speed.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Vehicle stopped, engine running
0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle running at constant speed between 16.1
No large fluctuations when driving
to 64.4 km/h (10 to 40 mph)
at a constant speed
DISPLAY
Vehicle Speed
CAUTION:
When performing the confirmation driving pattern, obey all speed limits and traffic laws.
HINT:
Data can be captured relatively easily by using the snapshot function in the Data List. Confirm the
data after performing the drive test.
NG
GO TO METER / GAUGE SYSTEM
OK
6.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FR, FL, RR, RL WHEEL SPEED)

5/6
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Data List / FR Wheel Speed, FL Wheel
Speed, RR Wheel Speed and RL Wheel Speed.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
FR Wheel
Speed
Vehicle stopped, engine running
0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle running at constant speed between 16.1
No large fluctuations when driving
to 64.4 km/h (10 to 40 mph)
at a constant speed
FL Wheel
Speed
RR Wheel
Speed
RL Wheel
Speed
CAUTION:
HINT:
Data can be captured relatively easily by using the snapshot function in the Data List. Confirm the
data after performing the drive test.
NG
INSPECT FRONT OR REAR SPEED SENSOR
OK
END
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: CHECK MODE PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDL0OBX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: CHECK MODE PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Compared to normal mode, check mode is more sensitive to malfunctions. Therefore, check mode
can detect malfunctions that cannot be detected in normal mode.
NOTICE:
All the stored DTCs and freeze frame data are cleared if: 1) the ECM is changed from normal
mode to check mode or vice versa; or 2) the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or off
while in check mode. Before changing modes, always check and note any DTCs and freeze
frame data.
1. CHECK MODE PROCEDURE

(a) Check and ensure the following conditions:
(1) Battery voltage is 11 V or higher.
(2) Throttle valve is fully closed.
(3) Shift lever is in P, N or neutral.
(4) A/C switch is off.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Check Mode.
(g) Switch the ECM from normal mode to check mode.
(h) Check that the MIL flashes as shown in the illustration.
(i) Start the engine.

(j) Check that the MIL turns off.
(k) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer.
(l) Check DTCs and freeze frame data using the Techstream.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDL0OBX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDJ0VLX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. DESCRIPTION
When troubleshooting OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics) vehicles, the Techstream (complying with
SAE J1987) must be connected to the DLC3 (Data Link Connector 3) of the vehicle. Various data in
the vehicle's ECM (Engine Control Module) can be then read.
OBD II regulations require that the vehicle's on-board computer illuminates the MIL (Malfunction
Indicator Lamp) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in:
a. The emission control system and components.

b. The powertrain control components (which affect vehicle emissions).
c. The computer itself.
In addition, the applicable DTCs prescribed by SAE J2012 are stored in the ECM memory. If the
malfunction does not recur in 3 consecutive trips, the MIL turns off automatically but the DTCs
remain stored in the ECM memory.
To check the DTCs, connect the Techstream to the DLC3. The Techstream displays output DTCs,
freeze frame data, and a variety of engine data. The DTCs and freeze frame data can be cleared
with the Techstream. In order to enhance OBD function on vehicles and develop the Off-Board
diagnosis system, Controller Area Network (CAN) communication is used in this system. CAN is a
network which uses a pair of data transmission lines spanning multiple computers and sensors. It
allows for high speed communications between the systems and simplification of the wire harness
connections.
2. NORMAL MODE AND CHECK MODE

The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. In normal mode, 2 trip
detection logic is used to ensure accurate detection of malfunctions. Check mode is also available as an
option for technicians. In check mode, 1 trip detection logic is used for duplicating malfunction symptoms
and increasing the system's ability to detect malfunctions, including intermittent problems (Techstream
only).
3. 2 TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st
trip). If the same malfunction is detected during the next subsequent drive cycle, the MIL is
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDJ0VLX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
illuminated (2nd trip).

(a) Check the DLC3

vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel
ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data stored at the time of a malfunction.
6. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If voltage is below 11 V, replace or recharge the battery.
7. MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

(a) The MIL is illuminated when the ignition switch is first turned to ON (the engine is not running).
(b) The MIL turns off when the engine is started. If the MIL remains illuminated, the diagnosis system
has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
HINT:
If the MIL is not illuminated when the ignition switch is first turned to ON, check the MIL circuit
8. ALL READINESS
HINT:
With "All Readiness", you can check whether or not the DTC judgment has been completed by
using the Techstream.
You should check "All Readiness" after simulating malfunction symptoms or for validation after
finishing repairs.
(d) Clear DTCs
(e) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
(g) Perform the DTC judgment driving pattern to run the DTC judgment.
(h) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(i) Input the DTCs to be confirmed.
(j) Check the DTC judgment result.
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
2/3
8/6/12
DTC judgment completed

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
DTC judgment not completed
Perform the driving pattern after confirming DTC enabling conditions
Unable to perform DTC judgment
N/A
Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has reached ECU
memory limit
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDF0FSX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART

HINT:
Factors such as instrument type may cause readings to differ slightly from stated values. If any DTCs
are output during a check mode DTC check, check the circuit for the DTCs listed in the table below.
For details of each DTC, refer to the "See page" below.
*: The MIL flashes when a catalyst damaging misfire is detected.
DTC
CODE
MIL
MEMORY
P000A Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slow Response Bank 1
Comes on
DTC
stored
P000B Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slow Response Bank 1
Comes on
DTC
stored
P000C Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slow Response Bank 2
Comes on
DTC
stored
P000D Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slow Response Bank 2
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0010 Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 1)
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0011
DETECTION ITEM
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Over-Advanced or System

Performance (Bank 1)
P0013 Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Bank 1)
P0014
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System

Comes on
DTC
stored
P0016
Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 1

Sensor A)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0017

Sensor B)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0018

Sensor A)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0019

Sensor B)
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0020 Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 2)

Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Over-Advanced or System
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDF0FSX.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE
PAGE
DTC
1/9
8/6/12
P0021 Performance (Bank 2)
Comes on
stored
P0023 Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Bank 2)
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0024
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System

P0030 A/F Sensor Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
P0031
Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1

Sensor 1)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0032
Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1

Sensor 1)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0037 Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0038 Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0068 MAP / MAF - Throttle Position Correlation
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0087 Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too Low
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0088 Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too High
Comes on
P0101 Mass Air Flow Circuit Range / Performance Problem
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input
Comes on
P0107
Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressure Circuit Low

Input
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Gradient Too High
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input
Comes on
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Circuit High Input
Comes on
P0108
P0116
Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressure Circuit High

Input
Comes on
DTC
Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range / Performance

Problem
Comes on
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
2/9
8/6/12
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0122 Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Low Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0123 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "A" Circuit High Input
Comes on
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0131 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0132 Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank1 Sensor1
Comes on
P0134 Oxygen Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0137 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0138 Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Comes on
P013A Oxygen Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 2
Comes on
P013B O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P013E O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P013F
Comes on
P0128
Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat

Regulating Temperature)
DTC
stored
O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
P0140 Oxygen Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Comes on
P0141 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Comes on
P014C A/F Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1
Comes on
DTC
stored
P014D A/F Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1
Comes on
DTC
stored
P015A A/F Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1
Comes on
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
3/9
8/6/12
DTC
P015B A/F Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1
Comes on
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1)
Comes on
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1)
Comes on
P0191 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range / Performance
Comes on
P0192 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0193 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (Range/Performance)
Comes on
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low
Comes on
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High
Comes on
P0201 Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1)
Comes on
Comes on
Comes on
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0222 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "B" Circuit Low Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0223 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "B" Circuit High Input
Comes on
P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit
Comes on
P0300 Random / Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
Comes
DTC
on/Blinks*
stored
Comes
DTC
on/Blinks*
stored
Comes
DTC
on/Blinks*
stored
Comes
on/Blinks*
DTC
stored
4/9
8/6/12
Comes
DTC
on/Blinks*
stored
DTC
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
Comes on
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
Comes on
P0332 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Low Input (Bank 2)
Comes on
P0333 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit High Input (Bank 2)
Comes on
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor Range / Performance
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction
Comes on
P0341
Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance

(Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit (Bank 2)
P0346
Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance

(Bank 2)
Comes on
Comes on
Comes on
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
P0351 Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
Comes on
P0352 Ignition Coil "B" Primary / Secondary Circuit
Comes on
P0353 Ignition Coil "C" Primary / Secondary Circuit
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0354 Ignition Coil "D" Primary / Secondary Circuit
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0365 Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 1)
Comes on
P0366
Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance

(Bank 1)
P0390 Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 2)
P0391
Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance

(Bank 2)
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)

Comes on
Comes on
Comes on
Comes on
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
5/9
8/6/12
P0441 Evaporative Emission Control System Incorrect Purge Flow
P0451
P0452
P0453
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Range /

Performance
Comes on
Comes on
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor / Switch

Low Input
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor / Switch
High Input
Comes on
Comes on
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
P0455
Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Gross

Leak)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0456
Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very

Small Leak)
Comes on
DTC
stored
DTC
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low
Comes on
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High
Comes on
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance
Comes on
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Low
Comes on
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit High
Comes on
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A"
Comes on
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower than Expected
Comes on
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher than Expected
Comes on
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance
Comes on
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0560 System Voltage
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error
Comes on
DTC
stored
P0606 ECM / PCM Processor
Comes on
DTC
stored
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
6/9
8/6/12
DTC
P060A Internal Control Module Monitoring Processor Performance
Comes on
P060B Internal Control Module A/D Processing Performance
Comes on
P0616 Starter Relay Circuit Low
Comes on
stored
P0617 Starter Relay Circuit High
Comes on
DTC
stored
P062D No. 1 Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Performance
Comes on
DTC
stored
P062F
Comes on
DTC
stored
Internal Control Module EEPROM Error
Comes on
P0851 Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low
Comes on
P0852 Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit High
Comes on
P1160 Throttle Valve Return Spring Malfunction
DTC
stored
DTC
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL Request)
P1109 Throttle Deposit Malfunction
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
Does not
DTC
come on
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
Does not
DTC
come on
stored
P117B Direct Injector Fuel Performance
Does not
come on
DTC
stored
P1235 High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit
Comes on
DTC
stored
P1261 DI Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1)
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
P1449 Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch Stuck ON
Comes on
DTC
stored
P1451 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Range/Performance
Comes on
DTC
stored
P1170 Port Injector Fuel Performance
7/9
8/6/12
P1603 Engine Stall History
Does not
come on
DTC
stored
P1604 Startability Malfunction
Does not
come on
DTC
stored
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2109
Does not
come on
DTC
stored
P2119 Throttle Actuator Control Throttle Body Range / Performance
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2122 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" Circuit Low Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2123 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" Circuit High Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2127 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "E" Circuit Low Input
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2128 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "E" Circuit High Input
Comes on
P2135
P2138
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor "A" Minimum Stop Performance
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "A" / "B" Voltage

Correlation
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" / "E" Voltage
Correlation
Comes on
Comes on
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
P2195 Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Comes on
P2196 Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Comes on
P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2401
Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Control

Circuit Low
P2402 Evaporative Emission Leak Detection Pump Stuck ON

stored
DTC
stored
8/9
8/6/12
P2404
Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Sense

Circuit Range / Performance
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2419
Evaporative Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit

Low
Comes on
DTC
stored
P2420 Evaporative Emission Pressure Switching Valve Stuck OFF
Comes on
P2610 ECM / PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance
Comes on
U0073 Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off
Comes on
U0101 Lost Communication with TCM
Comes on
U0122 Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
Comes on
U0140 Lost Communication with Body Control Module
Comes on
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
Comes on
DTC
stored
U0402 Invalid Data Received from TCM
Comes on
DTC
stored
U0416 Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
Comes on
DTC
stored
Invalid Data Received from Instrument Panel Cluster Control

Module
Comes on
DTC
stored
U0155
U0423
Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)

Control Module
DTC
stored
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDK0XMX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

NOTICE:
HINT:
stored.
as pending DTCs.
Current and pending DTCs can be cleared by using the Techstream or by disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal. However, permanent DTCs cannot be cleared using either of
these two methods.
After clearing current DTCs using the Techstream (or by disconnecting the cable from the negative
battery terminal), permanent DTCs can be cleared when the system is determined to be normal for
the relevant DTCs and then the universal trip is performed. The driving pattern to obtain a normal
judgment is described under the "Confirmation Driving Pattern" for the respective DTC.
Store
condition
Pending
DTC

Clear
condition
or
or
Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery terminal
Store
condition
Current
DTC

or
Clear
condition
or
Store
condition
Ignition switch turned to ON after normal judgment obtained in 3 consecutive
driving cycles
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDK0XMX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
or
Permanent
After DTCs cleared using Techstream or cable disconnected from negative (-)
DTC
Clear
battery terminal, normal judgment obtained and universal trip performed (not for
condition misfire and fuel system DTCs)
or
battery terminal, malfunction not detected when universal trip driving performed
(misfire and fuel system DTCs)
ON
driving cycles
MIL
OFF
or
or
2/5
8/6/12
HINT:
Obtaining a normal judgment and performing a universal trip driving pattern can be done in the
same driving cycle or in different driving cycles.
It is unnecessary to obtain a normal judgment if the DTCs are misfire or fuel system DTCs.
1. CHECK DTC
(e) Check DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.
(f) Check the details of the DTCs

3/5
8/6/12
(e) Clear DTCs.
3. CLEAR DTC (Pending and Current DTC without using Techstream)

(a) Perform either of the following operations:
NOTICE:
After turning ignition switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the
cable from the negative (-) battery terminal notices before proceeding with work
.
(1) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal for more than 1 minute.
(2) Remove the EFI (+B) fuse from the engine room relay block assembly located inside the engine
compartment for more than 1 minute.

HINT:
Even if the following procedure is not performed, permanent DTCs are cleared by obtaining a normal
judgment during 3 consecutive driving cycles.

HINT:
(f) Clear DTCs.

4/5
8/6/12
(g) Perform the respective confirmation driving patterns in order to obtain a normal judgment for the
output DTCs.
HINT:
Confirmation driving patterns do not need to be performed for misfire and fuel system DTCs.
For the confirmation driving pattern, refer to the procedures for the relevant DTC
(h) Perform the universal trip.

HINT:
The driving pattern to obtain a normal judgment and the universal trip driving can be performed
consecutively in the same driving cycle.

CAUTION:
When performing the confirmation driving pattern, obey all speed limits and
traffic laws.
HINT:
than 40 km/h (25 mph) during the driving cycle provided that the vehicle is driven at
40 km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(j) Check that the permanent DTCs have been cleared.
HINT:
5/5
8/6/12
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDK0XMX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

NOTICE:
HINT:
stored.
as pending DTCs.
Current and pending DTCs can be cleared by using the Techstream or by disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal. However, permanent DTCs cannot be cleared using either of
these two methods.
After clearing current DTCs using the Techstream (or by disconnecting the cable from the negative
battery terminal), permanent DTCs can be cleared when the system is determined to be normal for
the relevant DTCs and then the universal trip is performed. The driving pattern to obtain a normal
judgment is described under the "Confirmation Driving Pattern" for the respective DTC.
Store
condition
Pending
DTC

Clear
condition
or
or
Store
condition
Current
DTC

or
Clear
condition
or
Store
condition
driving cycles
1/5
8/6/12
or
Permanent
DTC
Clear
battery terminal, normal judgment obtained and universal trip performed (not for
condition misfire and fuel system DTCs)
or
battery terminal, malfunction not detected when universal trip driving performed
(misfire and fuel system DTCs)
ON
driving cycles
MIL
OFF
or
or
2/5
8/6/12
HINT:
Obtaining a normal judgment and performing a universal trip driving pattern can be done in the
same driving cycle or in different driving cycles.
It is unnecessary to obtain a normal judgment if the DTCs are misfire or fuel system DTCs.
1. CHECK DTC
(e) Check DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.
(f) Check the details of the DTCs

3/5
8/6/12
(e) Clear DTCs.
3. CLEAR DTC (Pending and Current DTC without using Techstream)

(a) Perform either of the following operations:
NOTICE:
.
(1) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal for more than 1 minute.
(2) Remove the EFI (+B) fuse from the engine room relay block assembly located inside the engine
compartment for more than 1 minute.

HINT:
Even if the following procedure is not performed, permanent DTCs are cleared by obtaining a normal
judgment during 3 consecutive driving cycles.

HINT:
(f) Clear DTCs.

4/5
8/6/12
(g) Perform the respective confirmation driving patterns in order to obtain a normal judgment for the
output DTCs.
HINT:
Confirmation driving patterns do not need to be performed for misfire and fuel system DTCs.
For the confirmation driving pattern, refer to the procedures for the relevant DTC
(h) Perform the universal trip.

HINT:
The driving pattern to obtain a normal judgment and the universal trip driving can be performed
consecutively in the same driving cycle.

CAUTION:
When performing the confirmation driving pattern, obey all speed limits and
traffic laws.
HINT:
than 40 km/h (25 mph) during the driving cycle provided that the vehicle is driven at
40 km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes.
(j) Check that the permanent DTCs have been cleared.
HINT:
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ECM Power Source Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F7102QX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ECM Power Source Circuit (2013 FR-S)
ECM Power Source Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the IGSW signal is input into the ECM. This turns the internal
transistor ON, causing the current to flow to the EFI MAIN1 relay coil, which closes the relay, supplying
power to the ECM +B and +B2 terminals.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F7102QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/8
8/6/12
Inspect the fuses for circuits related to this system before performing the following inspection
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT ECM (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)

(b) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A34-6 (+B) - A36-4

(E01)
Ignition switch
ON
12 to 14 V
A33-1 (+B2) - A36-4

(E01)
Ignition switch
ON
12 to 14 V
*a

(ECM)
NG
INSPECT ECM (SSHUT TERMINAL VOLTAGE)
OK
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - BODY GROUND)

TESTER CONNECTION
A36-4 (E01) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
2/8
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
INSPECT ECM (IGSW TERMINAL VOLTAGE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A33-27 (IGSW) - A36-4
Ignition switch
(E01)
ON
10 to 13 V
*a
4.

(ECM)
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IG2
OK
REPLACE ECM
RELAY - ECM)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
3/8
8/6/12
CONDITION
A35-13 (SSHUT) - A36-4
Ignition switch
(E01)
ON
CONDITION
approximately 0 V
*a

(ECM)
NG
NG
REPLACE RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
CONNECTOR
OK
5.
INSPECT RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
(a) Inspect the EFI MAIN1 relay
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (EFI MAIN1 RELAY - ECM)
(a) Remove the EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 1 - A35-13 (SSHUT)
Always
Below 1
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - A34-6 (+B)
Always
Below 1
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - A33-1 (+B2)
Always
Below 1
4/8
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 1 or A35-13 (SSHUT) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3, A34-6 (+B) or A33-1 (+B2) - Body

ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
7.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Remove the EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay
block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 2 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
Always
11 to 14 V
5/8
8/6/12
*1
Engine Room Relay Block Assembly
*2
EFI MAIN1 Relay Terminal
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IG2 RELAY - ECM)
(a) Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
IG2 relay terminal 3 - A33-27 (IGSW)
Always
Below 1
IG2 relay terminal 1 - Body ground
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
IG2 relay terminal 3 or A33-27 (IGSW) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
9.
INSPECT RELAY (IG2)
(a) Inspect the IG2 relay
6/8
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE RELAY (IG2)
OK
10.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (IG2 RELAY)
(a) Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room relay block
assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
*1
*2
IG2 Relay Terminal
NG

CONNECTOR
7/8
8/6/12
OK
11.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IG2 RELAY - IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH

ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the ignition or starter switch assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
IG2 relay terminal 2 - D55-6 (IG2)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
IG2 relay terminal 2 or D55-6 (IG2) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
12.
INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the ignition or starter switch assembly
NG
REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
OK

CONNECTOR
8/8
8/6/12
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F7102QX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ECM Power Source Circuit (2013 FR-S)
ECM Power Source Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the IGSW signal is input into the ECM. This turns the internal
transistor ON, causing the current to flow to the EFI MAIN1 relay coil, which closes the relay, supplying
power to the ECM +B and +B2 terminals.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1/8
8/6/12
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT ECM (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A34-6 (+B) - A36-4

(E01)
Ignition switch
ON
12 to 14 V
A33-1 (+B2) - A36-4

(E01)
Ignition switch
ON
12 to 14 V
*a

(ECM)
NG
OK
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - BODY GROUND)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
2/8
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
INSPECT ECM (IGSW TERMINAL VOLTAGE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A33-27 (IGSW) - A36-4
Ignition switch
(E01)
ON
10 to 13 V
*a
4.

(ECM)
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IG2
OK
REPLACE ECM
RELAY - ECM)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
3/8
8/6/12
CONDITION
A35-13 (SSHUT) - A36-4
Ignition switch
(E01)
ON
CONDITION
approximately 0 V
*a

(ECM)
NG
NG
CONNECTOR
OK
5.
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (EFI MAIN1 RELAY - ECM)
(a) Remove the EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 1 - A35-13 (SSHUT)
Always
Below 1
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - A34-6 (+B)
Always
Below 1
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - A33-1 (+B2)
Always
Below 1
4/8
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 1 or A35-13 (SSHUT) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3, A34-6 (+B) or A33-1 (+B2) - Body

ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
7.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Remove the EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay
block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
Always
11 to 14 V
5/8
8/6/12
*1
*2
EFI MAIN1 Relay Terminal
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IG2 RELAY - ECM)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
IG2 relay terminal 3 - A33-27 (IGSW)
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
IG2 relay terminal 3 or A33-27 (IGSW) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
9.
INSPECT RELAY (IG2)
(a) Inspect the IG2 relay
6/8
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE RELAY (IG2)
OK
10.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (IG2 RELAY)
(a) Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room relay block
assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
*1
*2
IG2 Relay Terminal
NG

CONNECTOR
7/8
8/6/12
OK
11.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IG2 RELAY - IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH

ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the ignition or starter switch assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
IG2 relay terminal 2 - D55-6 (IG2)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
IG2 relay terminal 2 or D55-6 (IG2) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
12.
NG

ASSEMBLY
OK

CONNECTOR
8/8
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011IO036X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: EVAP System (2013 FR-S)
EVAP System
RELATED DTCS
DTC
NO.
MONITORING ITEM
SEE
PAGE
P0441 Purge flow

P0451
Difference between canister pressure sensor (built into canister pump module) output value and
manifold absolute pressure sensor output value
P0452 Canister pressure sensor (built into canister pump module) voltage low
P0453 Canister pressure sensor (built into canister pump module) voltage high
P0455 EVAP gross leak
P0456 EVAP small leak
P0458 Purge valve voltage low
P0459 Purge valve voltage high
P1449 Air filter clogged (built into canister pump module)
P1451 Pipe clogged
P2404
Reference orifice high-flow (built into canister pump module)

Reference orifice low-flow (built into canister pump module)
P2401 Leak detection pump stuck OFF (built into canister pump module)
P2402 Leak detection pump stuck ON (built into canister pump module)
P2419 Vent valve stuck closed (built into canister pump module)
P2420 Vent valve stuck open (vent) (built into canister pump module)
P2610 Soak timer (built into ECM)
If any EVAP system DTCs are stored, the malfunctioning area can be determined using the table below.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011IO036X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/30
NOTICE:
If the reference pressure difference between the first and second checks is more than the specification,
all the DTCs relating to the reference pressure (P0455, P0456, P1451, P2404) will all be stored.
DESCRIPTION
2/30
*1 Purge Valve
*2 EVAP Hose (to Intake Manifold)
*3 EVAP Hose (from Charcoal Canister Assembly)
*4 Fuel Tank

- Canister Pressure Sensor
*5 - Leak Detection Pump
*6 Fuel Tank Cap Assembly
- Vent Valve
- Canister filter
*7 Air Inlet Port
*8 Charcoal Canister Assembly
*9 Purge Line
*a
Location of EVAP (Evaporative Emission) System
HINT:
The canister pressure sensor, the canister filter, the leak detection pump and the vent valve are built into the
canister pump module.
3/30
*1
Intake Manifold
*2
Throttle Valve
*3
Purge Valve
*4
Cut-off Valve
*5
Fuel Tank
*6
*7
Fuel Tank Vent Valve
*8
Charcoal Canister Assembly (Charcoal Filter)
*9
Canister Filter
*10
*11
ECM
*12
Soak Timer
*13
Air Cleaner
EVAP System Circuit
*a
NOTICE:
In the EVAP system of this vehicle, turning ON the vent valve does not seal off the EVAP system. To check
for leaks in the EVAP system, disconnect the air inlet drain hose and apply pressure from atmospheric
side of the charcoal canister assembly.
While the engine is running, if a predetermined condition (closed-loop, etc.) is met, the purge valve is opened by
the ECM and fuel vapors stored in the charcoal canister assembly are purged to the intake manifold. The ECM
changes the duty cycle ratio of the purge valve to control purge flow volume.
The purge flow volume is also determined by the intake manifold pressure. Atmospheric pressure is allowed into the
charcoal canister assembly through the vent valve to ensure that the purge flow is maintained when negative
pressure (vacuum) is applied to the charcoal canister assembly.
The following two monitors run to confirm appropriate EVAP system operation.
1. Purge flow monitor

The purge flow monitor consists of the 2 monitors. The 1st monitor is conducted every time and the 2nd monitor is
activated if necessary.
The 1st monitor
While the engine is running and the purge valve (Vacuum Switching Valve) is on (open), the ECM
monitors the purge flow by measuring the EVAP pressure change. If the variation in the pressure is
less than threshold, the ECM begins the 2nd monitor.
The 2nd monitor
The vent valve is turned ON (closed) and the EVAP pressure is then measured. If the variation in
the pressure is less than threshold, the ECM interprets this as the purge valve being stuck closed,
and illuminates the MIL and stores DTC P0441 (2 trip detection logic).
Atmospheric pressure check:
In order to ensure reliable malfunction detection, the variation between the atmospheric pressures,
before and after of the purge flow monitor, is measured by the ECM.
4/30
before and after of the purge flow monitor, is measured by the ECM.
*1
ECM
*2
Soak Timer
*3
Purge Valve (on)
*4
*5
Fuel Tank
*6
Canister Filter
*7
Leak Detection Pump (off)
*8
*9
*10
Vent Valve (off)
*12
Reference Orifice (0.02 inch)
*11
*a
EVAP Purge Flow
COMPONENT
Charcoal
Canister
Assembly
*b
to Intake Manifold
OPERATION
Contains activated charcoal to absorb EVAP (Evaporative Emissions) generated in fuel tank.
Cut-off
valve
Located in fuel tank. Valve closes by its own weight when vehicle overturns to prevent fuel from
spilling out.
Purge valve
(Vacuum
Switching
Opens or closes line between charcoal canister assembly and intake manifold. ECM uses purge
valve to control EVAP purge flow. In order to discharge EVAP absorbed by charcoal canister
assembly to intake manifold, ECM opens purge valve. EVAP discharge volume to intake manifold
Valve)
controlled by purge valve duty cycle (current-carrying time). (Open: on, Close: off)
Fuel tank
vent valve
Located in the fuel tank. Passes evaporative emissions occurring during fueling to the charcoal
canister assembly. Additionally, this mechanism also detects when the fuel tank is full.
Soak timer
Built into ECM. To ensure accurate EVAP monitor, measures 5 hours (+/-15 min) after ignition switch
is turned off. This allows fuel to cool down, stabilizing EVAP pressure. When approximately 5 hours
elapsed, ECM activates (refer to fig. 3).
Canister
pump
Consists of (a) to (d) below. Canister pump module cannot be disassembled.
5/30
pump
module
Consists of (a) to (d) below. Canister pump module cannot be disassembled.
(a) Vent
valve
Vents and closes EVAP system. When ECM turns valve on, EVAP system is closed. When ECM turns
valve off, EVAP system is vented. Negative pressure (vacuum) is created in EVAP system to check
for EVAP leaks by closing purge valve, turning on vent valve (closing it) and operating leak detection
pump (refer to fig. 1).
(b) Canister
pressure
sensor
Indicates pressure as voltages. ECM supplies regulated 5 V to pressure sensor, and uses feedback
from sensor to monitor EVAP system pressure (refer to fig. 2).
(c) Leak
detection
pump
Creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system for leak check.
(d)
Reference
orifice
Has opening with 0.02 inch diameter. Vacuum is produced through orifice by closing purge valve,
turning off vent valve and operating leak detection pump, to monitor reference pressure. Reference
pressure indicates a small leak of EVAP.
*1
Canister
*2
Reference Orifice (0.02 Inch)
6/30
*1
Canister
*2
Reference Orifice (0.02 Inch)
*3
*a
Canister Pump Module (fig. 1)
*b
Airflow
*c
Condition: Purge Flow
*d
Condition: Leak Check
*e
Vent Valve: off (vent)
*f
to Canister Filter (Atmosphere)
*g
Leak Detection Pump: off
*h
Vent Valve: on (closed)
*i
Leak Detection Pump: on
7/30
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0451
NOTICE:
Inspect the fuses for circuits related to this system before performing the following inspection procedure.
The Techstream is required to conduct the following diagnostic troubleshooting procedure.
HINT:
Using the Techstream monitor results enables the EVAP (Evaporative Emission) system to be confirmed.
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information as
freeze frame data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine
if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air fuel ratio was lean or
rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
1.
CONFIRM DTC
(a) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for 10 seconds.
(c) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for 10 seconds.
(d) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
8/30
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(g) Confirm DTCs and freeze frame data.
If any EVAP system DTCs are stored, the malfunctioning area can be determined using the table below.
9/30
NOTICE:
If the reference pressure difference between the first and second checks is more than the specification,
all the DTCs relating to the reference pressure (P0455, P0456, P1451, P2404) will all be stored.
NEXT
2.
PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (AUTOMATIC MODE)
NOTICE:
The Evaporative System Check (Automatic Mode) consists of 5 steps performed automatically by the
Techstream. It takes a maximum of approximately 24 minutes.
Do not perform the Evaporative System Check when the fuel tank is more than 90% full because the cut-off
valve may be closed, making the fuel tank leak check unavailable.
Do not run the engine during this operation.
When the temperature of the fuel is 35C (95F) or more, a large amount of vapor forms and any check
results become inaccurate. When performing the Evaporative System Check, keep the temperature below
35C (95F).

(d) Clear the DTCs
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check / Automatic Mode.
(f) After the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK is completed, check for pending DTCs by entering the following menus:
Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
HINT:
If no pending DTCs are displayed, perform the Confirmation Driving Pattern. After this confirmation, check for
pending DTCs. If no DTCs are displayed, the EVAP system is normal.
NEXT
10/30
NEXT
3.
PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (MANUAL MODE)
NOTICE:
In the Evaporative System Check (Manual Mode), the series of 5 Evaporative System Check steps are
performed manually using the Techstream.
results become inaccurate. When performing the Evaporative System Check, keep the temperature below
35C (95F).

11/30
(d) Clear the DTCs
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check / Manual Mode.
NEXT
4.
PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 1/5)
(a) Check the EVAP pressure in step 1/5.

Result
DTC
RESULT
SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA
*
P2404
PROCEED
TO
Virtually no variation in EVAP pressure
Not yet determined
EVAP pressure is less than -0.224 kPa(gauge) [2

mmHg(gauge)]
Leak detection pump stuck

OFF
*: These DTCs are already present in the ECM when the vehicle arrives and are confirmed in the "Confirm DTC"
procedure above.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (ACTIVATE

THE VACUUM PUMP)
12/30
5.
(a) Check the EVAP pressure in steps 2/5.

Result
DTC*
P2404
RESULT
EVAP pressure fluctuates by more than +/- 0.3 kPa (gauge) [2

mmHg (gauge)]
Not yet determined

Vent valve stuck
close
Reference orifice
high-flow
Reference orifice
low-flow
PROCEED
TO
A
procedure above.
HINT:
The first reference pressure is the value determined in step 2/5.
13/30
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (VENT VALVE

OPERATION)
6.

Result
DTC*
P2404
RESULT
EVAP pressure increases by 0.2 kPa (gauge) [2 mmHg (gauge)] or more

within 12 seconds.
EVAP pressure increases by less than 0.2 kPa (gauge) [2 mmHg
(gauge)] within 12 seconds.
SUSPECTED
TROUBLE AREA
PROCEED
TO
Not yet determined
Vent valve stuck

open
procedure above.
14/30
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (POWER SOURCE FOR

VENT VALVE)
7.

Result
DTC*
P1451
RESULT
SUSPECTED
TROUBLE AREA
PROCEED
TO
EVAP pressure is more than -5 kPa (gauge) [-38 mmHg (gauge)] within 900
seconds
Not yet
determined
EVAP pressure is reference pressure -0.9 kPa [- 7 mmHg] less then -5 kPa
(gauge) [-38 mmHg (gauge)] within 27 seconds
Pipe clogged
procedure above.
INSPECT EVAP HOSE (CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY -
15/30
INSPECT EVAP HOSE (CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY CANISTER PUMP MODULE)
8.

(b) Compare the EVAP pressure in step 4/5 and the reference pressure (step 5/5).
Result
DTC*
RESULT
EVAP pressure increases by 0.3 kPa (gauge) [2 mmHg (gauge)] or less

within 40 seconds.
SUSPECTED
TROUBLE AREA
PROCEED
TO
Not yet
determined
(no leakage from
EVAP system)
P2404 EVAP pressure increases by more than 0.3 kPa (gauge) [2 mmHg (gauge)]
within 40 seconds of proceeding from step 4/5 to 5/5
EVAP gross leak
EVAP pressure from step 4/5 higher than [reference pressure (step 4/5) x
0.377]
EVAP gross leak
P0455
16/30
0.377]
P0456 EVAP pressure from step 4/5 higher than reference pressure (step D)
EVAP small leak
procedure above.
9.
REPAIR OR REPLACE PARTS AND COMPONENTS INDICATED

BY OUTPUT DTCS
CHECK FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (ACTIVATE THE VACUUM PUMP)
(a) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Activate the Vacuum Pump.
*a

(to Canister Pump Module)
Result
TESTER
CONDITION TEST RESULT
CONNECTION
SUSPECTED
TROUBLE AREA
Approximately Power source wire

0 V when OFF harness of leak
and ON
detection pump
G8-4 - Body
ground
Leak
detection
pump on
and off
10 to 13 V
when OFF
and ON
(Active
Test ON
and OFF)
10 to 13 V
when OFF
Approximately
PROCEED
TO
Wire
harness
or
connector
between
B
leak
detection
pump
and ECM
ECM
Leak detection
pump
0 V when ON
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CANISTER PUMP

MODULE - ECM)
17/30
REPLACE CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
10.
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (POWER SOURCE FOR LEAK DETECTION PUMP)

(b) Disconnect the canister pump module connector.
(d) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
Result
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
G8-3 - Body
Ignition
ground
switch ON
11.
TEST
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
11 to 14
V
Canister pump module
Below 1 V
Wire harness or connector between canister pump

module and battery
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - ECM)

(c) Disconnect the ECM connector.
(d) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-8 (MPMP) - G8-4
Always
Below 1
A35-8 (MPMP) or G8-4 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
18/30
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
ECM
NG
Wire harness or connector between ECM and canister pump module
12.
REPLACE ECM
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (VENT VALVE OPERATION)

*a

(c) Apply the battery voltage to terminals G8-5 and G8-1 of the canister pump module.
(d) Touch the canister pump module to confirm the vent valve operation.
Result
CONDITION
TESTER
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
Wire harness or connector between vent valve

and ECM
Apply battery voltage to
terminals G8-5 and G8-1
Operating
Leak detection pump performance deteriorates

Leak detection pump circuit malfunctioning (large
resistance exists in the circuit)
ECM
Not
Vent valve
operating
19/30
13.

Standard Resistance (Check for Open):
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A35-1 (VPMP) - G8-1
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Standard Resistance (Check for Short):

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A35-1 (VPMP) or G8-1 - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
ECM
NG
Wire harness or connector between ECM and canister pump module
14.
REPLACE ECM
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (POWER SOURCE FOR VENT VALVE)
*a

20/30

Result
TESTER
CONNECTION
G8-5 - Body
ground
SWITCH
CONDITION
Ignition
switch ON
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Wire harness or connector between vent

valve and ECM
Vent valve
Charcoal canister assembly (charcoal filter
inside canister) clogged
ECM
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
Power source wire harness of vent valve
PROCEED
TO
15.
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (VENT VALVE OPERATION)

*a

(c) Apply the battery voltage to terminals G8-5 and G8-1 of the pump module.
(d) Touch the canister pump module to confirm the vent valve operation.
Result
CONDITION
TESTER
RESULT
Operating
Wire harness or connector between vent valve

and ECM
PROCEED
TO
21/30

Leak detection pump circuit malfunctioning (large
resistance exists in the circuit)
ECM
Operating
Apply battery voltage to

terminals G8-5 and G8-1
Not
operating
Vent valve
16.

Result
TESTER
CONNECTION
A35-1 (VPMP) G8-1
CONDITION
TEST
RESULT
Charcoal canister assembly (charcoal filter inside

canister) clogged
ECM
Below 1
Always
10 k or
higher
Wire harness or connector between ECM and charcoal

canister assembly pump module
PROCEED
TO
17.
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (CHARCOAL FILTER INSIDE CANISTER)
(a) Check for filter blockage in the charcoal canister assembly
OK:
No blockages in the charcoal canister assembly.
OK
REPLACE ECM
22/30
18.
OK
REPLACE ECM
NG
INSPECT EVAP HOSE (CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY - CANISTER PUMP MODULE)
(a) Check for blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and canister pump
module.
OK:
No blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and canister pump module.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE EVAP PURGE LINE (PURGE VALVE CANISTER)
OK
19.
INSPECT EVAP HOSE (CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY - FUEL TANK)
(a) Check for blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and fuel tank.
OK:
No blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and fuel tank.
20.
OK
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE EVAP PURGE LINE (PURGE VALVE CANISTER)
CHECK FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the fuel tank cap assembly is correctly installed and confirm that the fuel tank cap assembly
meets OEM specifications.
(b) Tighten the fuel tank cap assembly firmly (only one click sound could be heard).
Result
TEST RESULT
fuel tank cap assembly correctly

installed
fuel tank cap assembly loose
PROCEED
TO
A
fuel tank cap assembly improperly installed

Defective fuel tank cap assembly
fuel tank cap assembly does not meet OEM
specifications
B
23/30
specifications
Defective fuel tank cap assembly
No fuel tank cap assembly
CORRECTLY REINSTALL OR REPLACE FUEL TANK CAP

ASSEMBLY
REPLACE FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
21.
LOCATE EVAP LEAK PART
(a) Check for leakage from EVAP system (hose, disconnection, cracks, etc.).
(b) Repair or replace the leak point.
NEXT
22.
CORRECTLY REINSTALL OR REPLACE FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
HINT:
When reinstalling the fuel tank cap assembly, tighten it firmly (only one click sound could be head).
When replacing the fuel tank cap assembly, use a fuel tank cap assembly that meets OEM specifications, and
install it firmly.
NEXT
23.
REPLACE FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
HINT:
When installing the fuel tank cap assembly, tighten it firmly (only one click sound could be head).
NEXT
24.
(a) Replace the charcoal canister assembly

NOTICE:
24/30
NOTICE:
When replacing the charcoal canister assembly, check the canister pump module interior and related pipes for
water, fuel and other liquids. If liquids are present, check for disconnections and/or cracks in the following: 1)
the pipe from the air inlet port to the canister pump module; 2) the canister filter; and 3) the fuel tank vent
hose.
Check for filter blockage in the canister filter. If the canister filter has blockages, replace the canister pump
module.
*1
Fuel Tank Vent Hose
*2
Air Inlet Port
*3
Drain Hose
*4
Fuel Tank
*5
*a
Inspection Area
(check for disconnection and/or cracks)
25/30
NEXT
25.
NEXT
26.
REPAIR OR REPLACE EVAP PURGE LINE (PURGE VALVE - CANISTER)
NEXT
27.
REPAIR OR REPLACE PARTS AND COMPONENTS INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTCS
(a) Repair the malfunctioning areas indicated by the DTCs that had been confirmed when the vehicle was
brought in.
NEXT
28.
(a) Replace the canister pump module
NOTICE:
When replacing the charcoal canister assembly, check the canister pump module interior and related pipes for
water, fuel and other liquids. If liquids are present, check for disconnections and/or cracks in the following: 1)
the pipe from the air inlet port to the canister pump module; 2) the canister filter; and 3) the fuel tank vent
hose.
Check for filter blockage in the canister filter. If the canister filter has blockages, replace the canister filter.
26/30
*1
Fuel Tank Vent Hose
*2
Air Inlet Port
*3
Vent Hose
*4
Fuel Tank
*5
*a
Inspection Area
(check for disconnection and/or cracks)
NEXT
29.
27/30
NOTICE:
Do not run the engine in this step.
results become inaccurate. When performing an Evaporative System Check, keep the fuel temperature below
35C (95F).

(d) Clear the DTCs
(f) After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for pending DTCs by entering the following
menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
EVAP system DTCs are output
No DTCs output
(No pending DTCs output)
END
30.
REPLACE ECM
(a) Replace the ECM
NEXT
31.
28/30
NOTICE:
results become inaccurate. When performing an Evaporative System Check, keep the fuel temperature below
35C (95F).

(d) Clear the DTCs
(f) After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for pending DTCs by entering the following
menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
HINT:
If no pending DTCs are found, the repair has been successfully completed.
NEXT
END
CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

HINT:
After a repair, check Monitor Status by performing the Key-Off Monitor Confirmation and Purge Flow Monitor
Confirmation described below.
1. KEY-OFF MONITOR CONFIRMATION

(a) Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
The
The
The
The
The
vehicle has been driven at 48 km/h (30 mph) or more for a total of 10 minutes or more.
fuel tank is less than 90% full.
engine coolant temperature is between 5C and 45C (41F and 113F).
intake air temperature is between 5C and 50C (41F and 122F).
vehicle remains stationary (the vehicle speed is 0 km/h [0 mph]).
(b) Monitor Conditions

1. Allow the engine to idle for at least 5 minutes.
2. Turn the ignition switch off and wait for 6 hours (8 or 10.5 hours).
HINT:
Do not start the engine until checking Monitor Status. If the engine is started, the steps
described above must be repeated.
(c) Monitor Status

29/30
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Monitor / Current Monitor.
Check the Monitor Status displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
If Incomplete is displayed, the monitor did not complete. Make sure that the preconditions have
been met, and perform the Monitor Conditions again.
2. PURGE FLOW MONITOR CONFIRMATION (P0441)

HINT:
Perform this monitor confirmation after the Key-Off Monitor Confirmation shows Complete.
(a) Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
The vehicle has been driven at 60 km/h (40 mph) or more for 10 minutes or more.
The engine coolant temperature is 4.4C (40F) or higher.
The intake air temperature is 4.4C (40F) or higher.
(b) Monitor Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Release the pressure from the fuel tank by removing and reinstalling the fuel tank cap assembly.
Warm the engine up until the engine coolant temperature reaches more than 75C (167F).
Increase the engine speed to 3000 rpm once.
Allow the engine to idle and turn the A/C switch on for 1 minute.
(c) Monitor Status

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn the ignition switch off (if ON or if the engine is running).

Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Monitor / Current Monitor.
Check the Monitor Status displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
If Incomplete is displayed, the monitor did not complete. Make sure that the preconditions have
been met, and perform the Monitor Conditions again.
MONITOR RESULT
Refer to Checking Monitor Status
30/30
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDO0IEX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
If any of the following DTCs are stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode to allow the vehicle to be driven
temporarily or stops fuel injection.
DTC
CODE
FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
FAIL-SAFE DEACTIVATION
CONDITION
P000A
P000C
P0010
P0011
P0016
P0018 Fix intake VVT control at intermediate position
P0020
After recovery in normal

status, turn the ignition
switch to ON again
P0021
P0341
P0345
P0346
P000B
P000D
P0013
P0014
P0017
P0019
P0023
Fix exhaust VVT control at maximum retard angle
P0024

switch to ON again
P0365
P0366
P0390
P0391
P0031
P0032
P0131 Stop air fuel ratio feedback control
P0132

switch to ON again
P0134
P0037
P0137
P0138
P013A
P013B
P013E
Stop air fuel ratio feedback control
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDO0IEX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
Return to normal status

1/3
8/6/12
P013F
P0140
P0141
P0087
P0088
Stop fuel pump assembly drive (high pressure side)
P0191
Fix fuel pressure at 0.4 MPa (4.07 kgf/cm 2 , 57.9 psi).

Cut fuel at 1500 rpm or more

switch to ON again
Make the engine load the manifold absolute pressure converted

estimated value
Make the manifold absolute pressure value the mass air flow meter
converted estimated value
P0192
P0193
P1235
P0101
P0102
P0103
P0068
P0107
P0108
P0111
P0112 Fix inlet air temperature at 20C (68F)
P0113
P0116
P0117
Fix coolant temperature at 70C ( 158F)
P0118
Stop intake and exhaust VVT
P0125
P0172 Stop purge control
P0196
P0197 Fix engine oil temperature at 70C (158F)
P0198
P0201
P0202
P0203
P0204
P062D
P1261
Cut fuel at 1500 rpm or more

Cut fuel to abnormal cylinders

switch to ON again
P1262
P1263
P1264
P062F
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P0604
P0605
P0606
2/3
8/6/12
P060A Stop electronic throttle control, and fix the throttle valve opening
P060B angle (5 degrees)
P1160

switch to ON again
P2101
P2102
P2103
P2109
P2119
P2135
P0327
P0328
P0332 Maximum retard angle
P0333
P0451 Stop leak detection pump control
P0500 Fix ECU recognized vehicle speed at 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
P0851 Turn off the gear position display within the combination meter (for
P0852 Manual Transmission)
P1451
P2404
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138
Fix atmospheric pressure at 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg)
Accelerator pedal sensor assembly has 2 sensor circuits: Main and

Sub If either circuit malfunctions, substitute the normal accelerator
position sensor until the prescribed angle.

If both circuits malfunction, fix accelerator position at prescribed
angle (12%).

switch to ON again
Fix accelerator pedal angle

Stop electronic throttle control, and fix the throttle valve

opening angle
switch to ON again
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: FREEZE FRAME DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDS0SJX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: FREEZE FRAME DATA (2013 FR-S)
FREEZE FRAME DATA

1. DESCRIPTION
vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel
ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data recorded at the time of a malfunction.
Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system information, calculated load,
engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a
malfunction is detected.
HINT:
If it is impossible to duplicate the problem even though a DTC is output, check the freeze frame
data.
The ECM records engine conditions in the form of freeze frame data every 0.5 seconds. Using the
Techstream, 5 separate sets of freeze frame data can be checked.
3 data sets from before the DTC was stored

1 data set from when the DTC was stored
1 data set from after the DTC was stored
These data sets can be used to simulate the condition of the vehicle from around the time of the
occurrence of the malfunction. The data may assist in identifying the cause of the malfunction, and in
judging whether it was temporary or not.
2. LIST OF FREEZE FRAME DATA

Refer to "Data List / Active Test"
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDS0SJX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Fuel Injector Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000ZRM0EXX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Fuel Injector Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Fuel Injector Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The fuel injectors (for port injection) are attached to the intake manifold, and inject fuel into the intake
manifold based on the ECM signals.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000ZRM0EXX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly connectors.

(c) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C8-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C30-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C9-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C31-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Fuel Injector Assembly)
*b
No. 1 cylinder
*c
No. 2 cylinder
*d
No. 3 cylinder
*e
No. 4 cylinder
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL

INJECTOR ASSEMBLY - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
2/4
8/6/12
OK
2.
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (INJECTION AND VOLUME)
(a) Check the fuel injector injection and volume
NG
.
REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C8-2 - A36-12 (#10)
Always
Below 1
C30-2 - A36-22 (#20)
Always
Below 1
C9-2 - A36-32 (#30)
Always
Below 1
C31-2 - A36-13 (#40)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C1-2 or A36-12 (#10) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
3/4
8/6/12
OK
4.
REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly connector.

(b) Remove the EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C8-1 - EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C8-1 or EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Fuel Pump Control Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F70022X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Fuel Pump Control Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Fuel Pump Control Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The fuel pump circuit (low pressure side) is comprised of the ECM, fuel pump assembly (low pressure
side), and fuel pump control ECU assembly (which operates the fuel pump [low pressure side]). The ECM
judges the speed of the fuel pump assembly (low pressure side) based on the engine output. This speed
is converted into a loading signal, which is sent to the fuel pump control ECU assembly. The fuel pump
control ECU assembly adjusts the fuel pump operating speed (low pressure side), based on the signal
sent from the ECM.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F70022X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/11
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP/SPEED)

2/11
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump/Speed.
(e) Check whether the fuel pump operating sound occurs when performing the Active Test on the
Techstream.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Fuel pump operating sound does not occur
Fuel pump operating sound occurs
INSPECT FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY

(POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active
Test /Control the Fuel Pump Duty.
(e) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3 (FP+) - 4 (FP-)
FPC Duty: 25%
3.2 to 4.05 V
3 (FP+) - 4 (FP-)
FPC Duty: 80%
8.8 to 12.5 V
*a

(Fuel Pump Assembly)
3/11
8/6/12
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active

Test / Control the Fuel Pump/Speed.
(g) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
ON
3 (FP+) - 4 (FP-)
(FPC Duty:
9.0 to 14.0 V
25%)
HINT:
Be sure to measure the voltage with all the connectors
connected.
Before performing this inspection, check that the battery
voltage is between 11 and 14 V (not depleted).
NG
REPLACE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU

ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-19 (FPC) - G12-2 (FPC)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4/11
8/6/12
A35-19 (FPC) or G12-2 (FPC) - Body ground
NG
Always
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the fuel pump assembly
NEXT
5.
CHECK CONFIRM WHETHER MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY REPAIRED
(a) Check the fuel pump operation
OK:
Malfunction has been repaired successfully.
6.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END
REPLACE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the fuel pump control ECU assembly
NEXT
7.
5/11
8/6/12
OK:
8.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END
INSPECT FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU assembly

connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G12-1 (+B) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a
Front view of wire harness connector:

(to Fuel Pump Control ECU Assembly)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (C/OPEN
NG
RELAY - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU

ASSEMBLY)
OK
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL PUMP - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU
ASSEMBLY)
6/11
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G7-4 (FP-) - G12-5 (FP-)
Always
Below 1
G7-3 (FP+) - G12-6 (FP+)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G7-4 (FP-) or G12-5 (FP-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
G7-3 (FP+) or G12-6 (FP+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
NG
OK
10.
INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect fuel pump assembly
OK
11.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY - ECM)

7/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-19 (FPC) - G12-2 (FPC)
Always
Below 1
G12-4 (E)- Body ground
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
12.
REPLACE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the fuel pump control ECU assembly
NEXT
13.
OK:
14.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (C/OPEN RELAY - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU
ASSEMBLY)
8/11
8/6/12
(a) Remove the C/OPEN relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C/OPEN relay terminal 3 - G12-1 (+B)
Always
Below 1
C/OPEN relay terminal 1 - Body ground
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C/OPEN relay terminal 3 or G12-1 (+B) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
15.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (C/OPEN RELAY)
(a) Remove the C/OPEN relay from the engine room relay
block assembly.
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
9/11
8/6/12
C/OPEN relay terminal 5 - Body

ground
IG ON
11 to 14 V
*1
*2
C/OPEN Relay Terminal
NG
GO TO ECU POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
OK
16.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (C/OPEN RELAY - ECM - IG2 RELAY)

(b) Remove the C/OPEN relay and IG2 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C/OPEN relay terminal 2 - A33-27 (IGSW)
Always
Below 1
C/OPEN relay terminal 2 - IG2 relay terminal 3
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
C/OPEN relay terminal 2, A33-27 (IGSW) or IG2 relay terminal 3 -
Always
10 k or higher
Body ground
10/11
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: MIL Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WZ10ULX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: MIL Circuit (2013 FR-S)
MIL Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) is used to indicate vehicle malfunctions detected by the ECM. When
the ignition switch is turned to ON, power is supplied to the MIL circuit, which illuminates the MIL.
The MIL operation can be checked visually: When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the MIL should be
illuminated and should turn off after engine is started. If the MIL remains illuminated or is not illuminated,
conduct the following troubleshooting procedure using the Techstream.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK THAT MIL IS ILLUMINATED
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WZ10ULX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(a) Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the table below.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
MIL remains ON
MIL does not illuminate
MIL illuminates for several seconds, but turns off after engine is started
CHECK THAT ENGINE STARTS
2.
CHECK WHETHER MIL TURNS OFF

(e) Check if any DTCs have been detected. Note down any DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTC detected
Any DTCs detected
HINT:
Check for detected DTCs output from other ECUs which relate to the MIL.
3.
REPAIR CIRCUITS INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTCS
CHECK THAT ENGINE STARTS
2/3
8/6/12

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Engine starts
Engine does not start*
HINT:
*: The Techstream cannot communicate with the ECM.
GO TO VC OUTPUT CIRCUIT
REPLACE COMBINATION METER
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P000A,P000C,P0011,P0021: Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slo
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDU0OMX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P000A,P000C,P0011,P0021: Camshaft Position "A" - Timing
Slow Response Bank 1 (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P000A
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slow Response Bank 1
DTC
P000C
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slow Response Bank 2
DTC
P0011
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance (Bank

1)
DTC
P0021
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance (Bank

2)
DESCRIPTION
The Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system adjusts the intake valve timing to improve driveability. The engine
oil pressure turns the VVT controller to adjust the valve timing.
The camshaft timing oil control valve is a solenoid valve and switches the engine oil line. The valve moves
when the ECM applies 12 V to the solenoid. The ECM changes the energizing time to the solenoid (dutycycle) in accordance with the camshaft position, crankshaft position, throttle position, etc.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDU0OMX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/11
8/6/12
DTC
NO.
P000A
Integrated deviations in target intake valve timing and actual

intake valve timing per specified time exceed thresholds for 15
seconds (bank 1).
(2 trip detection logic)
Deviation in target intake valve timing and actual intake valve

P0011 timing exceeds thresholds (bank 1).
TROUBLE AREA
Valve timing
Camshaft timing oil
control valve (for
intake side of bank
1)
Oil control valve
filter
Camshaft timing
gear assembly (for
intake side of bank
1)
ECM
P000C
Integrated deviations in target intake valve timing and actual

intake valve timing per specified time exceed thresholds for 15
seconds (bank 2).
Valve timing
camshaft timing oil
control valve (for
intake side of bank
2)
2/11
8/6/12
Oil control valve

Deviation in target intake valve timing and actual intake valve
P0021 timing exceeds thresholds (bank 2).
filter
Camshaft timing
gear (for intake side
of bank 2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM optimizes the intake valve timing using the Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system to control
the intake camshaft. The VVT system includes the ECM, the camshaft timing oil control valve and
the VVT controller (camshaft timing gear assembly). The ECM sends a target duty-cycle control
signal to the camshaft timing oil control valve. This control signal regulates the oil pressure
supplied to the VVT controller. The VVT controller can advance or retard the intake camshaft.
If the difference between the target and actual intake valve timings is large, and changes in the
actual intake valve timing are small, the ECM interprets this as the VVT controller stuck malfunction
and stores a DTC.
These DTCs indicate that the VVT controller cannot operate properly due to camshaft timing oil
control valve malfunctions or the presence of foreign objects in the camshaft timing oil control
valve.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P000A: VVT intake method with mid-position start functional check
(Bank 1)
P000C: VVT intake method with mid-position start functional check
Related DTCs
(Bank 2)
P0011: VVT intake method with mid-position start functional check
(Bank 1)
P0021: VVT intake method with mid-position start functional check
(Bank 2)
Required Sensors/Components
Camshaft timing oil control valve
(Main)
Camshaft timing gear assembly
(Related)
Frequency of Operation
Crankshaft position sensor

VVT sensor
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Continuous
15 seconds: P000A, P000C
Duration
7 seconds: P0011, P0021 (Target error)

1 second: P0011, P0021 (Mid lock position)
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
Sequence of Operation
None
TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

3/11
8/6/12
All
Monitor runs whenever following
P0340, P0345 (Camshaft position sensor - intake with variable
DTCs not stored
valve timing (VVT))
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Engine speed
500 rpm or higher
Engine oil temperature
P000A, P000C
VVT feedback control
Active
Change of VVT target angle during 64 msec
Less than 3.84CA
VVT target position
More than 0CA
P0011, P0021 (Target error)

Active
P0011, P0021 (Mid lock position)

VVT command
Mid lock position
Elapsed time after engine start
More than 0.5 seconds
TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P000A, P000C
Sigma (VVT target position - VVT actual position)
More than 4000CA or less than -4000CA
P0011, P0021 (Target error)

VVT target position - VVT actual position
P0011, P0021 (Mid lock position)

MONITOR RESULT
Refer to detailed information in Checking Monitor Status
4/11
8/6/12

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
3. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC operation)
4. Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
6. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine oil temperature reaches 75C (167F) or
higher.
7. Perform the following the confirmation driving pattern.
CAUTION:
When performing the confirmation driving pattern, obey all speed limits and traffic
laws.
a. Idle the engine for 10 seconds or more [A].

b. Accelerate the vehicle to 97 km/h (60 mph) or more within 20 seconds [B].
c. Drive the vehicle at 97 km/h (60 mph) or more for 20 seconds or more [C].
d. Release the accelerator pedal to Decelerate until the vehicle speed decreases to
less than 64 km/h (40 mph) [D].
HINT:
Release the accelerator pedal fully to perform the fuel-cut.
e. Drive the vehicle at 60 km/h (40 mph) or less for 20 seconds or more [E].
f. Accelerate the vehicle to 97 km/h (60 mph) or more within 10 seconds [F].
g. Release the accelerator pedal and stop the vehicle [G].
8. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
9. Read pending DTCs.
HINT:
If a pending DTC is output, the system is malfunctioning.
If a pending DTC is not output, perform the following procedure.
10. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
11. Input the DTC: P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021.
12. Check the DTC judgment result.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
5/11
8/6/12
DISPLAY
NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

Perform driving pattern after confirming DTC enabling conditions
N/A
Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has

reached ECU memory limit
HINT:
If the judgment result shows NORMAL, the system is normal.
If the judgment result shows ABNORMAL, the system has a malfunction.
13. If the test result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no DTC is output, perform a universal trip and
check for permanent DTCs
HINT:
If a permanent DTC is output, the system is malfunctioning.
If no permanent DTC is output, the system is normal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0010
HINT:
If DTC P000A or P0011 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT system
(bank 1).
If DTC P000C or P0021 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT system
(bank 2).
Bank 1 refers to the bank that includes the No. 1 cylinder*.
*: The No. 1 cylinder is the cylinder which is farthest from transmission.
Bank 2 refers to the bank that does not include the No. 1 cylinder.
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition
information as freeze frame data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame
data can help determine if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or
not, if the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
6/11
8/6/12
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 OR
P0021)
1.

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 is output
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 and other DTCs are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (OPERATE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL

CONTROL VALVE)

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank 1),
Control the VVT Linear (Bank 2).
(f) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake
camshaft) using the Techstream.
OK:
7/11
8/6/12
TECHSTREAM OPERATION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0 deg (CA)
Normal engine speed
36 deg (CA)
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [VVT OCV Duty #1, VVT OCV Duty #2 and VVT Change Angle #1, VVT
Change Angle #2]
NG
CHECK VALVE TIMING (CHECK FOR LOOSE

TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
OK
3.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 OR P0021)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(g) Turn the Techstream on.
(h) Start the engine and warm it up.
(i) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(j) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(k) Read pending DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
HINT:
8/11
8/6/12
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught
in some parts of the system. The DTC will remain stored even if the system returns to normal after a
short time. These foreign objects may then be captured by the oil filter.
4.
CHECK VALVE TIMING (CHECK FOR LOOSE TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
(a) Check the valve timing
NG
ADJUST VALVE TIMING
OK
5.
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft)
NG
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL

VALVE (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
OK
6.
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing gear assembly
HINT:
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are
caught in some parts of the system. The DTC will remain stored even if the system returns to
normal after a short time. These foreign objects may then be captured by the oil filter.
9/11
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY

(FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
OK
7.
CLEAN LUBRICATION SYSTEM
(a) Replace the engine oil
(b) Warm up the engine for 5 minutes, and then stop the engine.
(c) Replace the engine oil and filter
NEXT
8.
WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 OR P0021)

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
10/11
8/6/12
DTC is not output
HINT:
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught
REPLACE ECM
END
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P000B,P000D,P0014,P0024: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slo
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XH80G0X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P000B,P000D,P0014,P0024: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing
Slow Response Bank 1 (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P000B
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slow Response Bank 1
DTC
P000D
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slow Response Bank 2
DTC
P0014
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance (Bank

1)
DTC
P0024
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance (Bank

2)
DESCRIPTION
The Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system adjusts the exhaust valve timing to improve driveability. The
engine oil pressure turns the VVT controller to adjust the valve timing.
The camshaft timing oil control valve is a solenoid valve and switches the engine oil line. The valve moves
when the ECM applies 12 V to the solenoid. The ECM changes the energizing time to the solenoid (dutycycle) in accordance with the camshaft position, crankshaft position, throttle position, etc.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XH80G0X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/10
8/6/12
DTC
NO.
P000B
Integrated deviations in target exhaust valve timing and actual

exhaust valve timing per specified time exceed threshold for 25
seconds (bank 1).
Deviation in target exhaust valve timing and actual exhaust

P0014 valve timing exceeds threshold for 8 seconds (bank 1).
TROUBLE AREA
Valve timing
Camshaft timing oil
control valve (for
exhaust side of
bank 1)
Camshaft oil control
valve filter (bank 1)
Camshaft timing
gear assembly (for
exhaust side of
bank 1)
ECM
P000D
Integrated deviations in target exhaust valve timing and actual

exhaust valve timing per specified time exceed threshold for 25
seconds (bank 2).
Valve timing
Camshaft timing oil
control valve (for
exhaust side of
bank 2)
2/10
8/6/12
Camshaft oil control

Deviation in target exhaust valve timing and actual exhaust
P0024 valve timing exceeds threshold for 8 seconds (bank 2).
valve filter (bank 2)

Camshaft timing
gear assembly (for
exhaust side of
bank 2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM optimizes the exhaust valve timing using the Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system to control the
exhaust camshaft. The VVT system includes the ECM, the camshaft timing oil control valve and the VVT
controller (camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly). The ECM sends a target duty-cycle control signal to
the camshaft timing oil control valve. This control signal regulates the oil pressure supplied to the VVT
controller. The VVT controller can advance or retard the exhaust camshaft.
If the difference between the target and actual exhaust valve timing is large, and changes in the actual
exhaust valve timing are small, the ECM interprets this as a VVT controller stuck malfunction and stores a
DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P000B: VVT exhaust method without mid-position start (Bank
1)
Related DTCs
P000D: VVT exhaust method without mid-position start (Bank

2)
P0014: VVT exhaust method without mid-position start (Bank
1)
P0024: VVT exhaust method without mid-position start (Bank
2)
Required Sensors/Components (Main)
(Related)
Duration

Camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly
VVT sensor
Continuous
25 seconds: P000B, P000D
8 seconds: P0014, P0024
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
P0365, P0390 (Camshaft position sensor - exhaust with
3/10
8/6/12
DTCs not stored
variable valve timing (VVT))
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Engine speed
500 rpm or higher
Engine oil temperature
Active
P000B, P000D
Change of VVT target angle during 64 msec
Less than 3.84CA
VVT target position
More than 0CA

P000B, P000D
Sigma (VVT target position - VVT actual position)
P0014, P0024
MONITOR RESULT

4/10
8/6/12

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
HINT:
11. Input the DTC: P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
5/10
8/6/12

HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0013
HINT:
If DTC P000B or P0014 is displayed, check the exhaust camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT
system (bank 1).
If DTC P000D or P0024 is displayed, check the exhaust camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT
system (bank 2).
DTC P0014 or P0024 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught in some
parts of the system. The DTC will remain stored even if the system returns to normal after a short
time. Those foreign objects may then be captured by the oil filter.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 OR
P0024)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 is output
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 and other DTCs are output
6/10
8/6/12
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART

CONTROL VALVE)
2.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust Linear
(Bank 1), Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank 2).
(f) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control (for exhaust camshaft)
using the Techstream.
OK:
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0 deg (CA)
Normal engine speed
51 deg (CA)
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [VVT Ex OCV Duty #1, VVT Ex OCV Duty #2 and VVT Ex Chg Angle #1,
VVT Ex Chg Angle #2]
NG
CHECK VALVE TIMING (CHECK FOR LOOSE

TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
OK
7/10
8/6/12
3.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 OR P0024)

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
HINT:
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught
4.
CHECK VALVE TIMING (CHECK FOR LOOSE TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
NG
ADJUST VALVE TIMING
8/10
8/6/12
OK
5.
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust camshaft)
NG

VALVE (FOR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
OK
6.
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly
HINT:
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are
caught in some parts of the system. The DTC will remain stored even if the system returns to
normal after a short time. These foreign objects may then be captured by the oil filter.
NG
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR

ASSEMBLY
OK
7.
NEXT
9/10
8/6/12
8.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 OR P0024)

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
HINT:
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught
REPLACE ECM
END
10/10
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0010,P0020: Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 1) (
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDW0MSX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0010,P0020: Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank
1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0010
Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 1)
DTC
P0020
Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
Refer to P000A
DTC
NO.
.
Oil control valve current is less than 0.306 A for

intake camshaft circuit for 2 seconds or more
P0010
(bank 1).

intake camshaft circuit for 2 seconds or more
P0020
(bank 2).
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in camshaft timing

oil control valve circuit (for intake
side of bank 1)
(for intake side of bank 1)
ECM
oil control valve circuit (for intake
side of bank 2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC is designed to detect open or short in the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft)
circuit. If the camshaft timing oil control valve's duty-cycle is excessively high while the engine is running,
the ECM will illuminate the MIL and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0010: Oil control valve for intake-VVT circuit continuity (Bank

1)
P0020: Oil control valve for intake-VVT circuit continuity (Bank
2)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDW0MSX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/8
8/6/12
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
2 second
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not present
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Camshaft timing oil control valve control duty
99.61% or more

Camshaft timing oil control valve control actual current
Less than 0.306 A

2/8
8/6/12
6. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature reaches 75C (167F)
or higher.
7. With the vehicle stationary, depress the accelerator pedal and maintain an engine speed of
between 2500 and 3000 rpm for 40 seconds or more [A].
8. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6.25 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [B].
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
12. Input the DTC: P0010 or P0020.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A

HINT:
HINT:
3/8
8/6/12
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0010 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT system (bank 1).
If DTC P0020 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT system (bank 2).
PROCEDURE
4/8
8/6/12
1.
READ DTC OUTPUT

(d) Clear the DTC after recording the freeze frame data and DTC.
(e) Turn the ignition switch off.
(f) Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(h) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0010 or P0020 is output
DTC is not output
2.
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft)
NG

VALVE (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
OK
3.
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL

VALVE)
5/8
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for

intake camshaft connector).

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C7-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C24-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*A
Bank 1
*B
Bank 2
*a

(to Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve)
NG
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft connector).
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
6/8
8/6/12
A36-17 (OC1) - C7-2
Always
Below 1
A36-16 (OC2) - C24-2
Always
Below 1
5.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-17 (OC1) or C7-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A36-16 (OC2) or C24-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
NG
(a) Inspect EFI MAIN1 relay
OK
6.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE EFI MAIN1 RELAY)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C7-1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
7/8
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C7-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8/8
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0013,P0023: Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Ba
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XH70FAX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0013,P0023: Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open
(Bank 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0013
Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Bank 1)
DTC
P0023
Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
Refer to P000B
DTC
NO.
.

exhaust camshaft circuit for 2 seconds or more
P0013
(bank 1).

exhaust camshaft circuit for 2 seconds or more
P0023
(bank 2).
TROUBLE AREA

oil control valve circuit (for
exhaust side of bank 1)
(for exhaust side of bank 1)
ECM
oil control valve circuit (for
exhaust side of bank 2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC is designed to detect open or short in the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust
camshaft) circuit. If the camshaft timing oil control valve's duty-cycle is excessively high while the engine
is running, the ECM will illuminate the MIL and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0013: Oil control valve for exhaust-VVT circuit continuity

(Bank 1)
P0023: Oil control valve for exhaust-VVT circuit continuity
(Bank 2)
Exhaust camshaft timing oil control valve
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XH70FAX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/8
8/6/12
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
2 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Camshaft timing oil control valve control duty
99.61% or more

Camshaft timing oil control valve control actual current
Less than 0.306 A

2/8
8/6/12
or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A

HINT:
HINT:
3/8
8/6/12
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0013 is displayed, check the exhaust camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT system (bank
1).
If DTC P0023 is displayed, check the exhaust camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT system (bank
2).
4/8
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
READ DTC OUTPUT

(d) Clear the DTC after recording the freeze frame data and DTC.
(f) Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.
(h) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
2.
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust camshaft)
NG

VALVE (FOR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
OK
5/8
8/6/12
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL

VALVE)
3.
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for

exhaust camshaft connector).

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C5-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C23-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*A
Bank 1
*B
Bank 2
*a

(to Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve)
NG
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE - ECM)
6/8
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust camshaft) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-7 (OE1) - C5-2
Always
Below 1
A36-5 (OE2) - C23-2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-7 (OE1) or C5-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A36-5 (OE2) or C23-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
5.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
NG
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE - EFI
MAIN1 RELAY)

7/8
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8/8
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0016-P0019: Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlati
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDV0M3X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0016-P0019: Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position
Correlation (Bank 1 Sensor A) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0016
Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 1 Sensor A)
DTC
P0017
Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 1 Sensor B)
DTC
P0018
Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 2 Sensor A)
DTC
P0019
Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 2 Sensor B)
DESCRIPTION
In the VVT (Variable Valve Timing) system, the appropriate intake and exhaust valve open and close
timing is controlled by the ECM. The ECM performs intake and exhaust valve control by performing the
following: 1) controlling the camshaft and camshaft timing oil control valve, and operating the camshaft
timing gear: and 2) changing the relative positions of the camshaft and crankshaft.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Valve timing
Intake camshaft position has slipped from the
P0016 threshold for 1 second (bank 1).
Exhaust camshaft position has slipped from the


Oil control valve filter (bank 1)
ECM
Valve timing
(for exhaust of bank 1)
ECM
Valve timing
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDV0M3X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
P0018
Intake camshaft position has slipped from the

threshold for 1 second (bank 2).
Exhaust camshaft position has slipped from the


ECM
Valve timing
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
To monitor the correlation of the intake camshaft position and crankshaft position, the ECM checks the
VVT learned value while the engine is idling. The VVT learned value is calibrated based on the camshaft
position and crankshaft position. If the VVT learned value is out of the specified range in consecutive
driving cycles, the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores DTC P0016 (bank 1) or P0018 (bank 2).
To monitor the correlation of the exhaust camshaft position and crankshaft position, the ECM checks the
VVT learned value while the engine is idling. The VVT learned value is calibrated based on the camshaft
position and crankshaft position. If the VVT learned value is out of the specified range in consecutive
driving cycles, the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores DTC P0017 (bank 1) or P0019 (bank 2).
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0016: Crankshaft / Camshaft correlation (intake) functional check
(Bank 1)
Related DTCs
P0017: Crankshaft / Camshaft correlation (exhaust) functional

check (Bank 1)
P0018: Crankshaft / Camshaft correlation (intake) functional check
(Bank 2)
P0019: Crankshaft / Camshaft correlation (exhaust) functional
check (Bank 2)
(Main)
(Related)
VVT sensor
Continuous
Duration
Camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly
1 second: P0016, P0018

5 seconds: P0017, P0019
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None
2/9
8/6/12

All
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
60 seconds or more
Engine coolant temperature
50C (122F) or higher
Not active
VVT target position
Less than 0.01CA
Learning experienced flag
Set
Duration of no power steering switch change
3 seconds or more
Duration of no neutral switch change
3 seconds or more
P0016, P0018
Engine speed
1400 to 3000 rpm
P0017, P0019
Engine speed
500 to 1700 rpm

P0016, P0018 (One tooth misalignment)
Actual angle of camshaft - Learning value of the base position
More than 10CA
P0016, P0018 (Two teeth misalignment)

Actual angle of camshaft
Less than 28CA or more than 87CA
P0017, P0019 (One tooth misalignment)

Actual angle of camshaft - Learning value of the base position
More than 10CA
P0017, P0019 (Two teeth misalignment)

Actual angle of camshaft
Less than 58CA or more than 117CA
3/9
8/6/12

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
12. Input the DTC: P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
4/9
8/6/12

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0010 for the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft) circuit
Refer to DTC P0013 for the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust camshaft) circuit
.
.
HINT:
If DTC P0016 or P0017 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT system
(bank 1).
If DTC P0018 or P0019 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT system
(bank 2).
PROCEDURE
5/9
8/6/12
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0016, P0017, P0018 OR
P0019)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019 is output
DTC P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019 and other DTCs are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.

CONTROL VALVE)
HINT:
If the VVT system can be operated through the Active Test, it can be assumed that the VVT system is
operating normally.

(c) Turn the A/C on.
(e) Warm up the engine.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank 1)
6/9
8/6/12
or Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank 1) / VVT Change Angle #1, VVT Ex Chg Angle #1, VVT
Change Angle #2, VVT Ex Chg Angle #2.
(g) Perform the Active Test. Check that the displacement angle varies.
OK:
Displacement angle varies.
NG
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL

VALVE (FOR INTAKE OR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
OK
3.
CHECK VALVE TIMING
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
4.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC
ADJUST VALVE TIMING
P0016, P0017, P0018 OR P0019)
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR INTAKE OR EXHAUST

CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake or exhaust camshaft)
NG

VALVE (FOR INTAKE OR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
OK
7/9
8/6/12
5.
INSPECT OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER AND OIL PIPE
(a) Check that the oil control valve filter and oil pipe are not clogged.
OK:
The oil control valve filter and oil pipe are not clogged.
NG
CLEAN OR REPLACE OIL CONTROL VALVE

FILTER AND OIL PIPE
OK
6.
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY (FOR INTAKE OR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing gear assembly (for intake camshaft or exhaust camshaft)
NG

(INTAKE OR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
OK
7.
NEXT
8.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0016, P0017, P0018 OR P0019)

8/9
8/6/12

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
REPLACE ECM
END
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0030-P0032: A/F Sensor Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Senso
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WC10PBX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0030-P0032: A/F Sensor Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1
Sensor 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0030
A/F Sensor Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC
P0031
Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC
P0032
Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P2195
HINT:
When any of these DTCs is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. The ECM turns off the air fuel
ratio sensor heater in fail-safe mode. Fail-safe mode continues until the ignition switch is turned
off.
Although the DTC titles say oxygen sensor, these DTCs relate to the air fuel ratio sensor.
Sensor 1 refers to the sensor mounted in front of the three-way catalytic converter and located
near the engine assembly.
The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust the current through the heater.
The air fuel ratio sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the +B side of the circuit.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Air fuel ratio sensor impedance is greater than 65 for

P0030 10 seconds or more.
Air fuel ratio sensor heater voltage is less than 1.2 V
P0031 for 1 second or more.
Open or short in air fuel

ratio sensor circuit
Air fuel ratio sensor
ECM
Air fuel ratio sensor heater voltage is 1.2 V or more for

P0032 2 seconds or more.
HINT:
Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.
Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WC10PBX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/10
8/6/12
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses information from the air fuel ratio sensor to regulate the air fuel ratio and keep it close to
the stoichiometric level. This maximizes the ability of the three-way catalytic converter to purify the
exhaust gases.
The air fuel ratio sensor detects oxygen levels in the exhaust gas and transmits the information to the
ECM. The inner surface of the sensor element is exposed to the outside air. The outer surface of the
sensor element is exposed to the exhaust gas. The sensor element is made of platinum-coated zirconia
and includes an integrated heating element.
The zirconia element generates a small voltage when there is a large difference in the oxygen
concentrations between the exhaust gas and outside air. The platinum coating amplifies this voltage
generation.
The air fuel ratio sensor is more efficient when heated. When the exhaust gas temperature is low, the
sensor cannot generate useful voltage signals without supplementary heating. The ECM regulates the
supplementary heating using a duty-cycle approach to adjust the average current in the sensor heater
element. If the heater current is outside the normal range, the signal transmitted by the air fuel ratio
sensor becomes inaccurate. As a result, the ECM is unable to regulate the air fuel ratio properly.
When the current in the air fuel ratio sensor heater is outside the normal operating range, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor heater and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0030: Primary oxygen sensor - Heater functional check
Related DTCs
P0031: Primary oxygen sensor - Heater circuit continuity

P0032: Primary oxygen sensor - Heater circuit continuity
Air fuel ratio sensor heater
Required Sensors/Components (Related)
Continuous
10 seconds: P0030
Duration
1 second: P0031
2 seconds: P0032
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles: P0030

Immediately: P0031, P0032
None

P0030
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 (Throttle position sensor)
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
2/10
8/6/12
P0606 (Control Module Processor)

Monitor runs whenever following DTCs
not stored
P1160 (Throttle return spring)

P2101, P2102 (Throttle actuator control motor)
P2109 (Throttle position sensor minimum stop)
P2119 (Throttle actuator control)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position
sensor (APPS) circuit)
P2135 (Throttle position sensor (TPS) correlation)
P2138 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS) correlation)
Battery voltage
More than 10.9 V
Heater energize continuously
Active
Elapsed time after fuel cut.
20 seconds or more
P0031
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Air fuel ratio sensor heater control duty
Less than 87.5%
P0032
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
More than 12.5%

P0030
Impedance of air fuel ratio sensor
Higher than 65
P0031
Air fuel ratio sensor heater ON voltage
Less than 1.2 V
P0032
Air fuel ratio sensor heater ON voltage
1.2 V or more
3/10
8/6/12

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
12. Input the DTC: P0030, P0031 or P0032.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
4/10
8/6/12

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
5/10
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [A/F Heater Duty #1]

Change the fuel injection volume using the Control the Injection Volume function provided in the
Active Test and monitor the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage
. If the sensor output
voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active Test, the sensor may be
6/10
8/6/12
malfunctioning.
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
(a) Inspect the air fuel ratio sensor
NG
REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
OK
2.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR)

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
C14-2 (+B) - Body ground
SWITCH CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Air Fuel Ratio Sensor)
NG
7/10
8/6/12
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR - ECM)

TESTER CONNECTION
A34-5 (HA1A) - C14-1(HA1A)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A34-5 (HA1A) or C14-1 (HA1A) - Body ground
Always
NG
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (P0030, P0031 OR P0032)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(h) Start the engine.
8/10
8/6/12
(i) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(j) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(k) Read DTCs.
Result
5.
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC P0030, P0031or P0032 is output
REPLACE ECM
(a) Check the EFI MAIN2 relay
NG
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR - EFI MAIN2 RELAY)

TESTER CONNECTION
EFI MAIN2 relay terminal 3 - C14-2 (+B)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
9/10
8/6/12
EFI MAIN2 relay terminal 3 or C14-2 (+B) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
10/10
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0037,P0038,P0141: Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit Lo
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PFA0P5X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0037,P0038,P0141: Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit
Low (Bank 1 Sensor 2) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0037
Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC
P0038
Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC
P0141
Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0137
DTC
NO.
.
TROUBLE AREA
Heated oxygen sensor heater voltage is less than

P0037 battery voltage X 0.3 V for 10 seconds or more.
Heated oxygen sensor heater voltage is battery voltage
P0038 X 0.2 V or more for 10 seconds or more.
Heated oxygen sensor heater voltage is less than
P0141 battery voltage X 0.88 V for 10 seconds or more.
Open or short in heated

oxygen sensor heater
circuit
Heated oxygen sensor
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The sensing portion of the heated oxygen sensor has a zirconia element which is used to detect the
oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas. If the zirconia element is at the appropriate temperature, and
the difference between the oxygen concentrations surrounding the inside and outside surfaces of the
sensor is large, the zirconia element generates voltage signals. In order to increase the oxygen
concentration detecting capacity of the zirconia element, the ECM supplements the heat from the
exhaust with heat from a heating element inside the sensor.
The ECM monitors the current applied to the heated oxygen sensor heater to check the heater for
malfunctions.
If the heater current is outside the normal range, the signal transmitted by the heated oxygen sensor
becomes inaccurate. When the current in the heated oxygen sensor heater is outside the normal
operating range, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor heater and stores a DTC.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PFA0P5X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/9
8/6/12
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0037: Secondary oxygen sensor - Heater circuit continuity
Related DTCs
P0038: Secondary oxygen sensor - Heater circuit continuity

P0141: Secondary oxygen sensor - Heater functional check
Heated oxygen sensor heater
Continuous
10 seconds (8 msec. X 1250 count): P0037
Duration
2.56 seconds (8 msec. X 320 count): P0038

10 seconds (4 msec. X 1250 count): P0141
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

P0037
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
1 second or more
Heated oxygen sensor heater control duty
Less than 75%
P0038
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
1 second or more
20% or more
P0141
None
Battery voltage
More than 10.9 V
1 second or more
60C (140 F) or higher
65 or less
Less than 70%
75% or less
2/9
8/6/12

P0037
Output voltage
Less than (battery voltage X 0.3)
P0038
Output voltage
More than (battery voltage X 0.2)
P0141
Judgement voltage
Less than (battery voltage X 0.88)
MONITOR RESULT

3/9
8/6/12
or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/9
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [O2 Heater B1S2 and O2 Heater Curr Val B1S2]
When the values for the Data List item O2 Heater Curr Val B1S2 is not 0 A, the heater is on.
Change the fuel injection volume using the Control the Injection Volume function provided in the
5/9
8/6/12
Active Test and monitor the heated oxygen sensor output voltage
. If the sensor output
voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active Test, the sensor may be
malfunctioning.
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
(a) Inspect the heated oxygen sensor
NG
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
OK
2.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Heated Oxygen Sensor)
NG
6/9
8/6/12
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR - ECM)

TESTER CONNECTION
A36-6 (HT1B) - C13-1 (HT1B)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A36-6 (HT1B) or C13-1 (HT1B)- Body ground
Always
NG
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0037 OR P0038)

(d) Clear the DTCs
7/9
8/6/12

Pattern.
Result
5.
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC P0037, P0038 or P0141 is output
REPLACE ECM
(a) Check the EFI MAIN2 relay
NG
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR - EFI MAIN2 RELAY)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
8/9
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0068: MAP / MAF - Throttle Position Correlation (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000U5B0MLX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0068: MAP / MAF - Throttle Position Correlation (2013 FRS)
DTC
P0068
MAP / MAF - Throttle Position Correlation
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0107
DTC
.
TROUBLE AREA
NO.
One of the following conditions is met (2 trip detection logic):
P0068
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage is less

than 1.25 V for 5 seconds or more when throttle
position is 10 or more.
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage is more
than 3.3 V for 10 seconds or more when throttle
position is less than 5.13.
Open or short in
manifold absolute
pressure sensor
circuit
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The manifold absolute pressure sensor is affixed to the intake manifold.
If the manifold absolute pressure is low in spite of driving conditions that would suggest this would be
high, or if this is high in spite of driving conditions that would suggest this would be low, then this DTC is
detected.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0068: Manifold absolute pressure sensor rationality check
Manifold absolute pressure sensor
Continuous
Duration
5 seconds: Low side monitor

10 seconds: High side monitor
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000U5B0MLX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/6/12
All
P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor)
P0111, P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor)
P0117, P0118 (Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
not stored

Low Side Monitor

60C (140F) or more
Engine speed
Less than 2800 rpm
Intake air
More than 0.36 g/rev
Throttle position
8% or more
High Side Monitor

60C (140F) or more
Engine speed
550 to 880 rpm
Intake air
Less than 0.35 g/rev
Throttle position
3.04% or less

Low Side Monitor
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage [Manifold absolute
pressure]
Less than 1.25 V [21.66 kPa (162

mmHg)]
High Side Monitor

pressure]
3.3 V [21.66 kPa (162 mmHg)] or

more

2/7
8/6/12


or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
HINT:
11. Input the DTC: P0068.
3/7
8/6/12
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to P0107
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
data can help determine if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not,
if the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0068)
4/7
8/6/12

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0068 is output
DTC P0068 and other DTCs are output
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
(a) Check the intake system for vacuum leaks
OK:
PCV valve and hose are connected correctly and are not damaged.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE INTAKE SYSTEM
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE
OK
3.
CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTIONS
(a) Check the PCV hose connections
OK:
No leaks from intake system.
5/7
8/6/12
OK
4.
REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
(a) Replace the manifold absolute pressure sensor
NEXT
5.
CONFIRM WHETHER MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY REPAIRED

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(j) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(k) Input the DTC: P0068.
(l) Check the DTC judgment.
Result:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
6/7
8/6/12
INCOMPLETE
N/A


memory limit
NEXT
END
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0087: Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too Low (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PG603AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0087: Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0087
Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too Low
DESCRIPTION
The high-pressure fuel system consists of the spill control valve, pump plunger and fuel pressure sensor.
The spill control valve opens and closes the low-pressure fuel line (from the fuel tank), the pump plunger
(operated by the camshaft) pressurizes fuel and the fuel pressure sensor located on the fuel delivery
pipe monitors fuel pressure.
The fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) is installed to the cylinder head cover (bank 2) and is driven
by the cam located at the intake camshaft.
The plunger moves up and down by the camshaft rotations, and produces a vacuum to suck fuel and
pressurizes the fuel. This fuel flows into the fuel delivery pipe. The ECM opens and closes the spill control
valve to regulate the fuel pressure to the target fuel pressure. In order to obtain and maintain the target
pressure, the ECM monitors the fuel pressure using the fuel pressure sensor and performs the feedback
control.
HINT:
The spill control valve, pump plunger are built into the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure).
DTC
NO.
DTC DETECTION
CONDITION
TROUBLE AREA
Leak of fuel
Fuel pipe (Fuel tank - Fuel pump assembly (for high
pressure) [bank 1 or bank 2])
Fuel pipe (Fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) - Fuel
injector assembly [for direct injection])
Fuel injector assembly (for direct injection)
Fuel pump assembly (for high pressure)
Injector driver (EDU)
Fuel pump assembly
ECM
Fuel pressure is lower than

P0087 the target value.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the fuel pressure decreases even after the ECM commands the high-pressure fuel pump to close the
spill control valve, a DTC is output.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0087: High pressure fuel system monitor functional check
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PG603AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/10
8/6/12
Related DTCs
(Pressure too low)
Required sensors/Components
(Main)
Fuel pressure sensor
(Related)
Frequency of operation
Continuous
Duration
10 seconds
MIL operation
Immediately
None

Monitor runs whenever following DTC not stored
None
10 seconds or more
Elapsed time after fuel cut
More than 2 seconds
Target fuel pressure change during 64 msec.
2.4 MPa (24.4 kgf/cm 2 , 348 psi) or less
Direct injection ratio
More than 0%

Actual fuel pressure - Target fuel pressure
-3.5 MPa (-35.7 kgf/cm 2 , -508 psi) or less

3. Record the Freeze Frame Data.
4. Clear the DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure)

7. Based on engine speed, engine load and other freeze frame data stored in the ECM,
reproduce the conditions present when the DTC was stored.
9. Read the DTC.
HINT:
If a DTC is output, the system is malfunctioning.
If a DTC is not output, perform the following procedure.
2/10
8/6/12
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE
N/A

reached ECU's memory limit
HINT:
If the judgment result shown ABNORMAL, the system has a malfunction.
HINT:
HINT:
data can be helpful in determining whether the vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine
was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data recorded at
the time of a malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FUEL LEAK (HIGH PRESSURE SIDE)
(a) Check around and beneath the car for fuel leaks, fumes, etc.
OK:
No fuel leaks present.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL LEAK POINT
3/10
8/6/12
OK
2.
CHECK OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0087)

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(d) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0087 is output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0087 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
3.
CHECK IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST
(a) Has the vehicle run out of fuel in the past?
NO
DTC CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
YES
4.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL PRESS)
4/10
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(e) Read Fuel Press when racing the engine.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Fuel Press value varies.
Fuel Press value does not increase.
Fuel Press value does not vary.
REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
5.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump / Speed.
(e) When performing the Active Test, check for an operating sound from the fuel pump.
NG
CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION
OK
6.
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
5/10
8/6/12
(a) Check the fuel pressure (low pressure side)
NG
.
REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
OK
7.

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(d) Check changes in the fuel pressure when the engine is stopped.
HINT:
Turn the ignition switch to ON immediately after turning the ignition switch off.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
The fuel pressure drops immediately after turning the ignition switch off.
The fuel pressure is nearly maintained, or with moderate variations.
6/10
8/6/12
REPLACE INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)
8.
INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)
(a) Inspect the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure)
NG
REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH

PRESSURE)
OK
9.
(a) Replace the fuel injector driver (EDU)
NEXT
10.
PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

(d) Clear the DTCs
(g) Start the engine and warm it up.
(h) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
7/10
8/6/12

(j) Read the DTC.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0087 is output
DTC is not output
END
11.
REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)
(a) Replace the fuel pump assembly (high pressure side)
HINT:
If the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) has been replaced in step 8, then proceed to step 13
without replacing the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure).
NEXT
12.

(d) Clear the DTCs
8/10
8/6/12
Pattern.
(j) Read the DTC.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0087 is output
DTC is not output
END
13.

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(d) Check changes in the fuel pressure when the engine is stopped.
HINT:
9/10
8/6/12
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
The fuel pressure drops immediately after turning the ignition off.
The fuel pressure is nearly maintained, or with moderate variations.
REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR

DIRECT INJECTION)
REPLACE ECM
10/10
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0088: Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too High (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PG7039X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0088: Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too High (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0088
Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too High
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0087
DTC
NO.
.
TROUBLE AREA
Fuel pressure is higher than the target value for 10

P0088 seconds or more.
Fuel pump assembly (for high

pressure)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the fuel pressure does not decrease even after the ECM commands the high-pressure fuel pump to
open the spill control valve, a DTC is output.
If there is minimal difference between the fuel pressure before and after the fuel relief valve operates, a
DTC is output.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0088: High pressure fuel system monitor functional check

(Pressure too high)
(Main)
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
10 seconds
MIL operation
Immediately
None

Monitor runs whenever following DTC not stored
None
10 seconds or more
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PG7039X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
Elapsed time after fuel cut
More than 2 seconds
Target fuel pressure change during 64 msec.
More than 0%

Actual fuel pressure - Target fuel pressure
More than 6 MPa (61.2 kgf/cm 2 , 871 psi)

4.
5.
6.
7.
Clear the DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure)
.
Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
Based on engine speed, engine load and other freeze frame data stored in the ECM,

9. Read the DTC.
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE
N/A

HINT:
2/5
8/6/12

HINT:
HINT:
data can be helpful in determining whether the vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine
was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data recorded at
the time of a malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0088)

(d) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0088 is output
HINT:
GO TO DTC CHART
3/5
8/6/12
2.

(b) Start the engine and turn the Techstream on.
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Target Fuel Pressure
/ Fuel Press.
(d) Check that the fuel pressure fluctuates when the target fuel pressure changes.
HINT:
The Active Test operation lowers the target fuel pressure by 12.5% or increase the target fuel
pressure by 24.8%.
OK:
Fuel pressure fluctuates.
NG
OK
3.
(a) Replace the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure)
NEXT
4.
CHECK IF DTC OUTPUT RECURS (SEE IF DTC P0088 IS OUTPUT AGAIN)

(b) Turn the Techstream on.
(c) Clear the DTCs
(d) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(f) Read the DTCs.
4/5
8/6/12
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0088 is output
DTC is not output
END
REPLACE ECM
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0101: Mass Air Flow Circuit Range / Performance Problem (20
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PF40ACX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0101: Mass Air Flow Circuit Range / Performance Problem
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0101
Mass Air Flow Circuit Range / Performance Problem
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0102
DTC
.
TROUBLE AREA
NO.
P0101
Mass air flow meter voltage is less than 1.13 V for 5 seconds
or more when throttle position is 16 or more with driving.
Mass air flow meter voltage is more than 1.88 V for 10
seconds or more when throttle position is less than 5.13.
Mass air
flow meter
Intake
system
PCV hose
connections
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The mass air flow meter is a sensor that measures the amount of air flowing through the throttle valve.
The ECM uses this information to determine the fuel injection time and to provide an appropriate air fuel
ratio. Inside the mass air flow meter, there is a heated platinum wire which is exposed to the flow of
intake air. By applying a specific electrical current to the wire, the ECM heats it to a specific temperature.
The flow of incoming air cools both the wire and an internal thermistor, affecting their resistance. To
maintain a constant current value, the ECM varies the voltage applied to the mass air flow meter. The
voltage level is proportional to the airflow through the sensor, and the ECM uses it to calculate the
intake air volume.
The ECM monitors the average engine load value ratio to check the mass air flow meter for malfunctions.
The average engine load value ratio is obtained by comparing the average engine load calculated from
the MAF meter output to the average engine load estimated from the driving conditions, such as the
engine speed and the throttle opening angle. If the average engine load value ratio is below the
threshold value, the ECM determines that the intake air volume is low, and if the average engine load
value ratio is above the threshold value, the ECM determines that the intake air volume is high.
If this is detected in 2 consecutive driving cycles, the MIL is illuminated and the DTC is stored.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0101: Mass air flow meter rationality check
Mass air flow meter

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PF40ACX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
VVT sensor
Throttle position sensor
Duration
Continuous
5 seconds: Low side monitor
10 seconds: High side monitor
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
P0068, P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor)
P0102, P0103 (Mass air flow (MAF) sensor)
P0117, P0118, P0125 (Engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor)
P0335, P0336 (Crankshaft position sensor)
P0340, P0345 (Camshaft position sensor - Intake with variable
valve timing (VVT))
DTCs not stored
P0506, P0507 (Idle speed control (ISC))

P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
Low Side Monitor

Engine speed
1500 rpm or higher
Throttle position
8% or more
Intake manifold pressure
53.32 kPa [400 mmHg] or higher
High Side Monitor
2/7
8/6/12
Engine speed
550 to 880 rpm
Throttle position
Less than 3.04%
Intake manifold pressure
Less than 53.32 kPa [400 mmHg]

Low Side Monitor
Mass air flow meter voltage [Mass air flow]
Less than 1.13 V [1.87 g/sec]
High Side Monitor

Mass air flow meter voltage (fuel system in rich) [Mass air flow]
1.88 V [10.6 g/sec] or more


or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

3/7
8/6/12

HINT:
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/7
8/6/12
Refer to DTC P0102
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0101 is output
HINT:
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
5/7
8/6/12
OK:
NG
OK
3.
OK:
NG
OK
4.
REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
(a) Replace the mass air flow meter
NEXT
5.

(d) Clear the DTCs
6/7
8/6/12

Pattern.
(k) Input the DTC: P0101.
Result
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
N/A
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
memory limit
NEXT
END
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0102,P0103: Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input (2013
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000U5B0MNX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0102,P0103: Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0102
Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input
DTC
P0103
Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
The mass air flow meter is a sensor that measures the amount of air flowing through the throttle valve.
The ECM uses this information to determine the fuel injection time and to provide the appropriate air fuel
ratio.
Inside the mass air flow meter, there is a heated platinum wire which is exposed to the flow of intake air.
By applying a specific electrical current to the wire, the ECM heats it to a given temperature. The flow of
incoming air cools both the wire and an internal thermistor, affecting their resistance. To maintain a
constant current value, the ECM varies the voltage applied to the wire and internal thermistor. The
voltage level is proportional to the airflow through the sensor, and the ECM uses it to calculate the
intake air volume.
The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and the temperature sensor create a bridge
circuit, and the power transistor is controlled so that the potentials of A and B remain equal to maintain
the predetermined temperature.
HINT:
When any of these DTCs is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the ignition
timing is calculated by the ECM, according to the engine speed and throttle valve position. Fail-safe
mode continues until a pass condition is detected.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000U5B0MNX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Mass air flow meter voltage is 0.127 V or less for 0.5

Open or short in mass air flow

meter circuit
Mass air flow meter
ECM

Mass air flow meter voltage is 4.723 V or more for 0.5
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the air-flow rate using the Techstream. Enter the following
menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF.
MASS AIR FLOW RATE (GM/SEC)
MALFUNCTION
Approximately 0.0
Open in mass air flow meter power source circuit

Open or short in VG circuit
160.0 or more
Open in E2G circuit
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If there is a defect in the mass air flow meter or an open or short circuit, the voltage level deviates from
the normal operating range. The ECM interprets this deviation as a malfunction in the mass air flow
meter circuit and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0102: Mass air flow meter circuit continuity (Low voltage)

P0103: Mass air flow meter circuit continuity (High voltage)
Mass air flow meter
Continuous
Duration
0.5 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None

2/9
8/6/12
P0102
Less than 0.127 V [0.0 g/sec]
P0103
4.723 V [248.1 g/sec] or more
COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

0.127 to 4.651 V [0.01 to 235.37 g/sec]

or higher.
3/9
8/6/12
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/9
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.
READ DTC OUTPUT

5/9
8/6/12

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0102 is output
DTC P0103 is output
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SENSOR

GROUND)
2.
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF MASS AIR FLOW METER)
(a) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector.

(c) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
C16-3 (+B) - Body

ground
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
CONDITION
Ignition switch
ON
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Mass Air Flow Meter)
NG
CHECK RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
OK
6/9
8/6/12
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER - ECM)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C33-22 (VG) - C16-5 (VG)
Always
Below 1
C33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C33-22 (VG) or C16-5 (VG) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
C33-29 (E2G) or C16-4 (E2G) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER
(a) Inspect the mass air flow meter, referring to the On-vehicle Inspection for Mass Air Flow Meter
.
(b) Inspect the mass air flow meter, referring to the Inspection for Mass Air Flow Meter
(c) Inspect the function of the mass air flow meter.

(4) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF.
7/9
8/6/12

(6) Check that the MAF value changes when the engine is raced.
OK:
The reading changes.
5.
NG
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SENSOR GROUND)

TESTER CONNECTION
C16-4 (E2G)- Body ground
6.
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR

FLOW METER - ECM)
OK

TESTER CONNECTION
A33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
A33-29 (E2G) or C16-4 (E2G) - Body-ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
8/9
8/6/12
7.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
NG
CHECK RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
OK
8.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0107,P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressur
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000U5B0MMX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0107,P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric
Pressure Circuit Low Input (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0107
Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input
DTC
P0108
Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
Manifold absolute pressure sensor uses a built-in sensor to detect the intake manifold pressure as a
voltage. Additionally, because this measures the absolute pressure as the pressure within the intake
manifold without detecting the atmospheric pressure as a standard value, this enables measurements
without being influenced by changes in atmospheric pressure from altitude or other causes.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage is 0.61 V

P0107 or less for 2 seconds or more.
Open or short in manifold

absolute pressure sensor
circuit
Manifold absolute pressure
sensor
ECM

Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage is 3.906
P0108 V or more for 2 seconds or more.
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the manifold absolute pressure using the Techstream.
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAP.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (KPA [MMHG])

Approximately 0 [0]
141 [1058] or more
MALFUNCTION
Short in MAP circuit
Short in VC circuit
Open in PIM circuit
Open in E1 circuit
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM calculates the manifold absolute pressure based upon the manifold absolute pressure sensor
output voltage. If the manifold absolute pressure output voltage is outside the normal range, there may
be an abnormality with the manifold absolute pressure, or an open or short in the circuit. In these cases,
the ECM will light the check engine warning light, and store the DTC.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000U5B0MMX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/8
8/6/12
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0107: Manifold absolute pressure sensor range check (Low

voltage)
P0108: Manifold absolute pressure sensor range check (High
voltage)
(Main)
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
2 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None

P0107
pressure]
Less than 0.61 V [0.35 kPa (3

mmHg)]
P0108
3.906 V [110.22 kPa (827 mmHg)] or
pressure]
more

Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage [Manifold
absolute pressure]
0.647 to 3.897 V [1.56 to 109.9 kPa (12 to

824 mmHg)]
2/8
8/6/12


or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
3/8
8/6/12

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/8
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MAP)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAP.
Standard:
Nearly equal to atmosphere pressure
Reference Value
CONDITION
MAP
Ignition switch ON
80 to 110 kPa
HINT:
Standard atmospheric pressure is 101 kPa (758 mmHg). For every 100 m (328 ft) increase in
altitude, pressure drops by 1 kPa. This varies by weather.
2.
NG
OK
OF MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR)
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE

SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor

connector.
5/8
8/6/12

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
CONDITION
C18-3 (VC) - C18-1
Ignition switch
(E2)
ON
C18-2 (PIM) - C18-1
Ignition switch
(E2)
ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
4.0 to 5.0 V
*a

(to Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor)
NG
(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR ECM)
OK
3.
NEXT
4.

6/8
8/6/12
(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(j) Read the DTC.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
5.
END
REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-19 (VC) - C18-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1
A34-20 (PIM) - C18-2 (PIM)
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C18-1(E2)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-19 (VC) or C18-3 (VC) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A34-20 (PIM) or C18-2 (PIM) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C18-1 (E2) or Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
7/8
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
8/8
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0111: Intake Air Temperature Sensor Gradient Too High (2013 F
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WPH06PX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0111: Intake Air Temperature Sensor Gradient Too High
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0111
Intake Air Temperature Sensor Gradient Too High
DESCRIPTION
The intake air temperature sensor, mounted on the mass air flow meter, monitors the intake air
temperature. The intake air temperature sensor has a built-in thermistor with a resistance that
varies according to the temperature of the intake air. When the intake air temperature is low, the
resistance of the thermistor increases. When the temperature is high, the resistance drops. These
variations in resistance are transmitted to the ECM as voltage changes.
The intake air temperature sensor is powered by a 5 V supply from the THA terminal of the ECM,
via resistor R.
Resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance
value of the intake air temperature sensor changes, according to changes in the intake air
temperature, the voltage at terminal THA also varies. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the
fuel injection volume when the engine is cold to improve driveability.
DTC
NO.
The difference between maximum and minimum values for inlet air temperature
P0111 sensor voltage is less than 0.02 V.
TROUBLE
AREA
Mass air flow
meter
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs OBD II monitoring based on the values from the intake air temperature sensor. If
there is no change of the sensor value within the normal range, the ECM will not be able to perform OBD
II monitoring or will misdiagnose that there is a malfunction in the sensor. The ECM detects when the
intake air temperature sensor value is stuck by performing monitoring after the ignition switch is turned
off or the engine is started (short soak or long soak).
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0111: Intake air temperature sensor rationality check
Intake air temperature sensor
Once per driving cycle
Duration
Immediately
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WPH06PX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
None

P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor)
sensor)
P0500 (Vehicle speed sensor (VSS))
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
not stored

Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Integrated amount of intake air
6500 g or more
Either of the following condition is met: A or B

A. All of the following conditions are
met:
(a), (b) and (c)
(a) Time period
10 seconds or more
(b) Vehicle speed
4 km/h (2.5 mph) or more
(c) Intake air mass per second
10 g/sec or more
B. All of the following conditions are

met:
(a) and (b)
(a) Time period
10 seconds or more
(b) Vehicle speed
Less than 40 km/h (24.9 mph)

Intake air temperature sensor maximum voltage - Intake air temperature sensor
Less than
minimum voltage
0.02 V
2/5
8/6/12

6. Check that engine coolant temperature is 30C (86F) or less.
7. Start the engine.
CAUTION:
laws.

b. Drive the vehicle at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more for 8 minutes or more [B].
c. Stop the vehicle and idle the engine for 30 seconds or more [C].
d. Drive the vehicle at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more for 30 seconds or more [D].
e. Stop the vehicle and idle the engine for 30 seconds or more [E].
f. Drive the vehicle at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more for 30 seconds or more [F].
g. Stop the vehicle and idle the engine for 30 seconds or more [G].
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
3/5
8/6/12
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System abnormal

N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to P0112
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
4/5
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0111 is output
HINT:
GO TO DTC CHART
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0112,P0113: Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input (2013 FR
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PF30NNX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0112,P0113: Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0112
Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input
DTC
P0113
Intake Air Temperature Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
The intake air temperature sensor, mounted on the mass air flow meter, monitors the intake air
temperature. The intake air temperature sensor has a built-in thermistor with a resistance that
varies according to the temperature of the intake air. When the intake air temperature is low, the
resistance of the thermistor increases. When the temperature is high, the resistance drops. These
variations in resistance are transmitted to the ECM as voltage changes.
The intake air temperature sensor is powered by a 5 V supply from the THA terminal of the ECM,
via resistor.
Resistor and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value
of the intake air temperature sensor changes, according to changes in the intake air temperature,
the voltage at terminal THA also varies. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection
volume when the engine is cold to improve driveability.
HINT:
When DTC P0112 or P0113 is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the
intake air temperature is estimated to be 20C (68F) by the ECM. Fail-safe mode continues
until a pass condition is detected.
DTC
NO.
Intake air temperature sensor voltage is less than

P0112 0.4 V for 0.5 seconds or more.
Intake air temperature sensor voltage is 4.707 V
P0113 or more for 0.5 seconds or more.
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in intake air

temperature sensor circuit
(built into mass air flow meter)
ECM

HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the intake air temperature using the Techstream. Enter
the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYED
MALFUNCTION
-40C (-40F)
Open circuit
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PF30NNX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/9
8/6/12
120C (248F)
Short circuit
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate the intake air temperature. When
the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the intake air temperature sensor circuit and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0112: Intake air temperature sensor range check (Low

voltage)
P0113: Intake air temperature sensor range check (High
voltage)
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
0.5 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None

P0112
Intake air temperature sensor voltage [Intake air
temperature]
Less than 0.4 V [Higher than 132.8C

(271F)]
P0113
4.707 V or more [Below -46.9C
temperature]
(-52.4F)]

0.435 to 4.698 V [-44.6 to 128.53C (-48.3 to
temperature]
263.4F)]
2/9
8/6/12

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
3/9
8/6/12
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/9
8/6/12
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
OK:
Same as actual intake air temperature.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
-40C (-40F)
120C (248F)
5/9
8/6/12
Same as actual intake air temperature
HINT:
If there is an open circuit, the Techstream indicates -40C (-40F).
If there is a short circuit, the Techstream indicates 215C (419F).
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR
SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS)
(b) Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the mass air flow meter connector on the wire harness side.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
6/9
8/6/12
(g) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.

Standard value:
120C (248F)
*1
Mass Air Flow Meter
*2
ECM
*a
3.

(to Mass Air Flow Meter)
NG

FLOW METER - ECM)
OK

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-12 (THA) - C16-1 (THA)
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C16-2 (E2)
Always
Below 1
4.
NG
OK
REPLACE ECM
CONNECTOR
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
7/9
8/6/12

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
(f) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.
Standard value:
-40C (-40F)
5.
*1
Mass Air Flow Meter
*2
ECM
NG

FLOW METER - ECM)
OK

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-12 (THA) or C16-1(THA) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C16-2 (E2) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
8/9
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0116: Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range / Performance
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PFB0PSX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0116: Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range /
Performance Problem (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0116
Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range / Performance Problem
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0117
DTC
.
TROUBLE AREA
NO.
The engine coolant temperature has not dropped completely 6

P0116 hours after ignition switch turned off.
Thermostat
Engine coolant
temperature
sensor
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the engine coolant temperature sensor value does not change after the warmed up engine is stopped
and then the next cold engine start is performed, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred. If this
is detected in 2 consecutive driving cycles, the MIL is illuminated and the DTC is stored.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0116: Engine coolant temperature sensor stuck rationality

check
(Related)
Duration
0.512 seconds
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

not stored
P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor)

P0462, P0463 (Fuel level sensor (FL))
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PFB0PSX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Soak time
6 hours or more
Elapsed time after electric circuit turned

on (ignition switch ON)
60 seconds or less
Engine coolant temperature at the end

of the previous driving cycle
70.2C (158.2F) or higher (varies with estimated ambient

temperature at previous ignition switch off)

Engine coolant temperature - Intake air temperature
Less than 15C (59F)

3. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.
or higher.
8. Turn the ignition switch off and leave the vehicle for 6 hours or more.
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

2/4
8/6/12

N/A
HINT:
HINT:
HINT:
If any of DTCs P0117, P0118 or P0125 are output simultaneously with DTC P0116, the engine
coolant temperature sensor may have an open or a short circuit. Troubleshoot those DTCs first.
When the DTC is output, check the engine coolant temperature using the Techstream. Enter the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp. If the Coolant Temp value is
lower than the actual engine coolant temperature, the engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the wire harnesses and connectors (and those
connections) between the ECM and the engine coolant temperature sensor first.
PROCEDURE
1.

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
3/4
8/6/12
DTC P0116 is output
HINT:
If any DTCs and other than P0116 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
INSPECT THERMOSTAT
(a) Inspect the thermostat (thermostat opening temperature)
NG
REPLACE THERMOSTAT
OK
REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

SENSOR
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0117,P0118: Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low Input (20
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PF50PIX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0117,P0118: Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low
Input (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0117
Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low Input
DTC
P0118
Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
A thermistor, whose resistance value varies according to the engine coolant temperature, is built into the
engine coolant temperature sensor. The structure of the sensor and its connection to the ECM are the
same as those of the intake air temperature sensor.
HINT:
When any of DTCs P0117 and P0118 is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode,
the engine coolant temperature is estimated to be 70C (158F) by the ECM. Fail-safe mode continues
until a pass condition is detected.
DTC
NO.
Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage is less than

Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage is more than

TROUBLE AREA
Short in engine coolant

Engine coolant
temperature sensor
ECM
Open in engine coolant
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the engine coolant temperature using the Techstream.
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYED
MALFUNCTION
-40C (-40F)
Open circuit
120C (248F)
Short circuit
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PF50PIX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/9
8/6/12
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to monitor the engine coolant temperature. The engine
coolant temperature sensor has a thermistor with a resistance that varies according to the temperature
of the engine coolant. When the coolant temperature is low, the resistance in the thermistor increases.
When the temperature is high, the resistance drops. These variations in resistance are reflected in the
output voltage from the sensor. The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate
the engine coolant temperature. When the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating
range, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the engine coolant temperature sensor circuit and stores a
DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0117: Engine coolant temperature sensor range check (Low

voltage)
P0118: Engine coolant temperature sensor range check (High
voltage)
(Main)
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
0.5 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None

P0117
Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage [Engine coolant
temperature]
Less than 0.47 V [Higher than 122.8C

(253F)]
P0118
Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage [Engine coolant
4.698 V or more [Below -46.2C
temperature]
(-51.2F)]

Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage [Engine
0.479 to 4.688 V [-43.85 to 121.85C (-46.9
2/9
8/6/12
coolant temperature]
to 251.3F)]


or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
3/9
8/6/12

TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/9
8/6/12
HINT:
If DTC P0117 is stored, check that the engine does not overheat (the DTC P0117 may be stored
due to engine overheating).
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.
Standard value:
Between 75 and 100C (167 and 212F) with warm engine.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
5/9
8/6/12
-40C (-40F)
120C (248F)
Between 75 and 100C (167 and 212F)
HINT:
If there is a short circuit, the Techstream indicates higher than 120C (248F).
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR
SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS)

connector.
(b) Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor connector on the wire
harness side.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.
6/9
8/6/12

Standard value:
*1
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
*2
ECM
*a
3.

(to Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor)
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ENGINE

COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - ECM)
OK

SENSOR
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-30 (THW) - C35-2 (THW)
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C35-1 (E2)
Always
Below 1
4.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
7/9
8/6/12

connector.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.
Standard value:
-40C (-40F)
*1
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
*2
ECM
5.
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ENGINE

COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - ECM)
OK

SENSOR

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-30 (THW) or C35-2 (THW) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
8/9
8/6/12
NG
CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0122,P0123,P0222,P0223,P2135: Throttle Position Sensor Circ
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PF60PBX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0122,P0123,P0222,P0223,P2135: Throttle Position Sensor
Circuit Low Input (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0122
Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Low Input
DTC
P0123
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "A" Circuit High Input
DTC
P0222
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "B" Circuit Low Input
DTC
P0223
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "B" Circuit High Input
DTC
P2135
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "A" / "B" Voltage Correlation
DESCRIPTION
HINT:
These DTCs relate to the throttle position sensor.
The throttle position sensor is mounted on the throttle with motor body assembly, and detects the
opening angle of the throttle valve. This sensor is a non-contact type sensor. It uses Hall-effect elements
in order to yield accurate signals even in extreme driving conditions, such as at high speeds as well as
very low speeds.
The throttle position sensor has 2 sensor circuits, each of which transmits a signal, VTA1 and VTA2. VTA1
is used to detect the throttle valve angle and VTA2 is used to detect malfunctions in VTA2. The sensor
signal voltages vary between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the throttle valve opening angle, and are
transmitted to the VTA1 and VTA2 terminals of the ECM.
As the valve closes, the sensor output voltage decreases and as the valve opens, the sensor output
voltage increases. The ECM calculates the throttle valve opening angle according to these signals and
controls the throttle actuator in response to driver inputs. These signals are also used in calculations
such as air fuel ratio correction, power increase correction and fuel-cut control.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PF60PBX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/10
8/6/12
DTC
TROUBLE AREA
NO.
Throttle position sensor (built into
The voltage of VTA1 is 0.273 V or less for 0.024
throttle with motor body assembly)

Short in VTA1 circuit
Open in VC circuit
ECM
The voltage of VTA1 is more than 4.736 V for

P0123 0.024 seconds or more.
Open in VTA1 circuit

Open in E1 circuit
Short between VC and VTA1
circuits
ECM
The voltage of VTA2 is 1.153 V or less for 0.024


Short in VTA2 circuit
Open in VC circuit
ECM
The voltage of VTA2 is 4.772 V or more for 0.024

Open in VTA2 circuit

Open in E1 circuit
Short between VC and VTA2
circuits
2/10
8/6/12
ECM
Short between VTA1 and VTA2

Deviation in voltages of VTA1 and VTA2 exceed
P2135 thresholds for 0.212 seconds or more.
circuits
ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the throttle valve opening angle using the Techstream.
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Throttle Position No. 1 and Throttle
Position No. 2.
Throttle Position No. 1 is the VTA1 signal, and Throttle Position No. 2 is the VTA2 signal.
Reference (Normal Condition):
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
ACCELERATOR PEDAL FULLY

RELEASED
Throttle Position No.

0.213 to 4.772 V
1
Throttle Position No.
2
0.213 to 4.772 V
ACCELERATOR PEDAL FULLY

DEPRESSED
0.213 to 4.772 V
0.213 to 4.772 V
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses the throttle position sensor to monitor the throttle valve opening angle. There are several
checks that the ECM performs to confirm the proper operation of the throttle position sensor.
A specific voltage difference is expected between the sensor terminals, VTA1 and VTA2, for
each throttle valve opening angle. If the difference between VTA1 and VTA2 is incorrect, the
ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor circuit, and stores a DTC.
VTA1 and VTA2 each have a specific voltage range. If VTA1 or VTA2 is outside the normal
operating range, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor circuit, and stores a
DTC.
VTA1 and VTA2 should never be close to the same voltage level. If VTA1 is within 0.02 V of
VTA2, the ECM determines that there is a short circuit in the sensor circuit, and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0122: Throttle position sensor circuit continuity (Low Voltage)
(Sensor 1)
P0123: Throttle position sensor circuit continuity (High Voltage)
(Sensor 1)
Related DTCs
P0222: Throttle position sensor circuit continuity (Low Voltage)

(Sensor 2)
P0223: Throttle position sensor circuit continuity (High Voltage)
(Sensor 2)
P2135: Throttle position sensor rationality check
3/10
8/6/12
(Main)
(Related)
Continuous
0.024 seconds: P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223
Duration
0.212 seconds: P2135
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None
Battery voltage
6 V or more

P0122
VTA1 voltage (Throttle position)
0.273 V (5.46%) or less
P0123
4.736 V (94.73%) or more
P0222
1.153 V (3.82%) or less
P0223
4.772 V (94.30%) or more
P2135
VTA2 - VTA1
3.79% (varies with VTA1) or more

0.382 to 4.504 V (7.64 to 90.09%)
1.262 to 4.696 V (6.54 to 92.41%)

4/10
8/6/12

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
12. Input the DTC: P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 or P2135.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
5/10
8/6/12
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
FAIL-SAFE
When any of these DTCs or other DTCs relating to Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) malfunctions
are stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the ECM cuts the current to the throttle
actuator, and the throttle valve is returned to a specified throttle angle by the return spring. The ECM
then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing,
in accordance with the accelerator pedal angle, to allow the vehicle to continue at a minimal speed. If the
accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and gently, the vehicle can be driven slowly.
Fail-safe mode continues until a pass condition is detected, and the ignition switch is then turned off.
WIRING DIAGRAM
6/10
8/6/12
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Throttle Position No. 1 and Throttle
Position No. 2.
(e) Read the values displayed on the Techstream.
Result
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
RELEASED
DEPRESSED
THROTTLE
THROTTLE
THROTTLE
TROUBLE AREA
PROCEED
TO
THROTTLE
POSITION NO. 1 POSITION NO. 2 POSITION NO. 1 POSITION NO. 2

(VTA1)
(VTA2)
(VTA1)
(VTA2)
7/10
8/6/12
0 to 0.213 V
0 to 0.213 V
0 to 0.213 V
0 to 0.213 V
VC circuit open
4.772 to 5.0 V
4.772 to 5.0 V
4.772 to 5.0 V
4.772 to 5.0 V
E2 circuit open
0.213 V to
VTA1 circuit open or
4.772 V
ground short
0 to 0.213 V,
or 4.772 to 5.0
V
0.213 V to
0.213 V to
4.772 V
0 to 0.213 V,
or 4.772 to 5.0
V
0 to 0.213 V,
4.772 V
or 4.772 to 5.0
V
0.213 to 4.772
V
0.213 V to
0 to 0.213 V,
VTA2 circuit open or
4.772 V
or 4.772 to 5.0
V
0.213 to 4.772
0.213 to 4.772
0.213 to 4.772
Throttle position
sensor circuit normal
ground short
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS

(THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTCS)
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the throttle with motor body assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-19 (VC) - C15-5 (VC)
Always
Below 1
A36-18 (VTA1) - C15-6 (VTA1)
Always
Below 1
A36-28 (VTA2) - C15-4 (VTA2)
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C15-3 (E2)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-19(VC) or C15-5 (VC) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A36-18 (VTA1) or C15-6 (VTA1) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
8/10
8/6/12
A36-29 (E1) or C15-4 (VTA2) - Body ground
Always
NG
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
INSPECT ECM (VC VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the throttle with motor body assembly

connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
C15-5 (VC) - C15-3 (E2)
SWITCH CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4.5 to 5.5 V
*a

(to Throttle with Motor Body Assembly)
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
9/10
8/6/12
4.
REPLACE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the throttle with motor body assembly
NEXT
5.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTCS)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(e) Start the engine.

(f) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(h) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 and/or P2135 are output
DTC is not output
END
REPLACE ECM
10/10
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0125: Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel C
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T9P0BWX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0125: Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop
Fuel Control (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0125
Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0117
DTC
.
TROUBLE AREA
NO.
Despite estimated engine coolant temperature is 20C (68 F) or more,

engine coolant temperature sensor value is less than 20C (68 F) for
P0125
300 seconds or more.
Cooling
system
Engine
coolant
temperature
sensor
Thermostat
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The diagnostic system monitors for a functional check of the engine coolant temperature sensor. If the
engine coolant temperature does not reach the temperature to enable the closed loop air/fuel ratio
control within a predetermined time after engine start, the diagnostic system determines a malfunction of
engine coolant temperature sensor and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0125: Engine coolant temperature sensor range check

Thermostat
Cooling system
(Related)

120 seconds: Closed loop temperature -10C (14F)
Duration
300 seconds: Closed loop temperature -10 to 20 C (14 to

68F)
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T9P0BWX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
DTCs are not present

P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APPS) circuit)
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Engine speed
500 rpm or higher
Diagnostic value(n)
[Diagnostic value(n-1) + 64 + 7.9 (varies with vehicle speed and

lowest engine coolant temperature)] or more

Less than 20C (68F)

2/5
8/6/12

or higher.
HINT:
Check the engine coolant temperature is 20C (68F) or less at engine started.

CAUTION:
laws.
a. Drive the vehicle at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more for 20 minutes or more [A].
b. Stop the vehicle.
c. Idle the engine for 1 minute or more [B].
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
N/A
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
HINT:
3/5
8/6/12
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0117
HINT:
If any of DTCs P0116, P0117 or P0118 are set simultaneously with DTC P0125, the engine coolant
temperature sensor may have an open or a short circuit. Troubleshoot those DTCs first.
PROCEDURE
1.

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0125 is output
HINT:
GO TO DTC CHART
4/5
8/6/12
2.
INSPECT THERMOSTAT
(a) Inspect the thermostat
NG
REPLACE THERMOSTAT
OK
3.
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM
(a) Check for defects in the cooling system that might cause the system to be too cold, such as
abnormal radiator fan operation or any modifications.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE COOLING SYSTEM
OK

SENSOR
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0128: Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temperature Below Therm
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TB3096X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0128: Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temperature Below
Thermostat Regulating Temperature) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0128
Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulating

Temperature)
DESCRIPTION
At the same time as using the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine coolant
temperature, the ECM estimates the engine coolant temperature. If the difference between the
estimated and actual engine coolant temperatures exceeds a predetermined value, then the DTC is
stored, notifying of a malfunction in the functioning of the thermostat.
DTC
NO.
P0128
TROUBLE AREA
Thermostat
Cooling system
sensor
ECM
Abnormal (open) thermostat functioning

detected.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM estimates the engine coolant temperature based on the starting temperature, engine loads,
and engine speeds. The ECM then compares the estimated temperature with the actual engine coolant
temperature. If the difference between the estimated engine coolant temperature and the actual engine
coolant temperature exceeds the specified value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the
thermostat or the engine cooling system and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0128: Thermostat functional check

Thermostat
Speed sensor
Duration
Immediately
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TB3096X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12

All
P0101, P0102, P0103 (Mass air flow (MAF) sensor)
sensor)
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
P0340, P0345 (Camshaft position sensor - Intake with variable
valve timing (VVT))
DTCs not stored

P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Ambient temperature
-7C (19.4F) or higher
Vehicle speed
Case 1
Modeled engine coolant temperature
Case 2
Modeled engine coolant
Higher than 70.2C (158.4F) (varies with ambient temperature at
temperature
engine start)
Case 3
Modeled engine coolant
temperature
47.1C (116.8F) or higher (varies with ambient temperature at

engine start)

Case 1
2/6
8/6/12
Actual engine coolant temperature
Less than 60C (140F)
Sigma (Modeled engine coolant temperature Actual engine coolant temperature)
Higher than 1731.6C (3148.9F) (varies with engine

coolant temperature at engine start)
Case 2
Actual engine coolant temperature

Less than 77.8C (172F) (varies with ambient

temperature at engine start)
Case 3
Modeled engine coolant temperature - Actual
engine coolant temperature
Higher than 11.1 C (52F)


or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.
3/6
8/6/12

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
HINT:
4/6
8/6/12
When the DTC is output, check the engine coolant temperature using the Techstream. Enter the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp. If the Coolant Temp value is
lower than the actual engine coolant temperature, the engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the wire harnesses and connectors (and those
connections) between the ECM and the engine coolant temperature sensor first.
PROCEDURE
1.

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0128 is output
HINT:
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM
(a) Check for defects in the cooling system that might cause the system to be too cold, such as
abnormal cooling fan operation or any modifications.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE COOLING SYSTEM
OK
5/6
8/6/12
3.
INSPECT THERMOSTAT
(a) Inspect the thermostat (thermostat opening temperature)
NG
REPLACE THERMOSTAT
OK
REPLACE ECM
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0131,P0132,P0134: Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000028K60CZX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0131,P0132,P0134: Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0131
Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC
P0132
Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank1 Sensor1
DTC
P0134
Oxygen Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P2195
HINT:
Sensor 1 refers to the sensor mounted in front of the three-way catalytic converter and
located near the engine assembly.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
One of the following conditions is met for 1 second or more (1 trip

detection logic):
P0131
The voltage of A1A+ is less than 0.4 V.

The voltage of A1A- is less than 0.4 V.
The difference between voltage of A1A+ and voltage of
A1A- is less than 0.1 V and the voltage of A1A- is more than
3.8 V and less than 4.7 V.
One of the following conditions is met for 1 second or more (1 trip
detection logic):
P0132
The voltage of A1A+ is more than 4.7 V.

The voltage of A1A- is more than 4.7 V.
Open or short
in air fuel
ratio sensor
circuit
Air fuel ratio
sensor
ECM
Air fuel ratio sensor impedance is 450 or more for 5 seconds or

P0134 more.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
These DTCs are output when there is an open or short in the air fuel ratio sensor circuit, or if the air fuel
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000028K60CZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
ratio sensor output drops. To detect these problems, the voltage of the air fuel ratio sensor is monitored
when turning the ignition switch to ON, and the admittance (admittance is an electrical term that
indicates the ease of flow of current) is checked while driving. If the voltage of the air fuel ratio sensor is
between 0.6 V and 4.5 V, it is considered normal. If the voltage is out of the specified range, or the
admittance is less than the standard value, the ECM determines that there is a malfunction in the air fuel
ratio sensor. If the same malfunction is detected in next driving cycle, the MIL is illuminated and a DTC is
stored.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0131: Primary oxygen sensor - ECM input voltage circuit
continuity
Related DTCs
P0132: Primary oxygen sensor - ECM input voltage circuit

continuity
P0134: Primary oxygen sensor - Output voltage circuit continuity
(Main)
(Sub)
Continuous
Duration
1 second: P0131, P0132

5 seconds: P0134
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

All
None
P0131, P0132
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
P0134
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Accumulated variation of front lambda sensor heater control duty per 70% or higher for 36 seconds or
0.128 sec.
more

P0131
2/7
8/6/12
Either of following conditions is met:
A, B, C or D
A. A1A+ terminal voltage
Less than 0.4 V
B. A1A- terminal voltage
Less than 0.4 V
C. Difference of A1A+ terminal voltage and A1A- terminal

voltage
Less than 0.1 V
D. A1A- terminal voltage
Less than 4.7 V and higher than 3.8

V
P0132
Either of following conditions is met:
A or B
A. A1A+ terminal voltage
More than 4.7 V
B. A1A- terminal voltage
More than 4.7 V
P0134
450 or higher

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.
3/7
8/6/12

HINT:
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
4/7
8/6/12
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0030
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [AFS Voltage B1S1]
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-19 (A1A+) - C14-3 (A1A+)
Always
Below 1
A34-18 (A1A-) - C14-4 (A1A-)
Always
Below 1
A34-5 (HA1A) - C14-1 (HA1A)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-19 (A1A+) or C14-3 (A1A+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A34-18 (A1A-) or C14-4 (A1A-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG
5/7
8/6/12
NG
CONNECTOR
OK
2.
(a) Replace the air fuel ratio sensor
NEXT
3.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0131, P0132 OR P0134)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(h) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(j) Input the DTC: P0131, P0132 or P0134.
(k) Check the DTC judgment.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NORMAL (DTC is not output)
ABNORMAL (DTC P0131, P0132 or P0134 is output)
6/7
8/6/12
REPLACE ECM
END
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P014C,P014D,P015A,P015B: A/F Sensor Slow Response - Rich
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WC20GWX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P014C,P014D,P015A,P015B: A/F Sensor Slow Response Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1 (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P014C
A/F Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1
DTC
P014D
A/F Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1
DTC
P015A
A/F Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1
DTC
P015B
A/F Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P2195
DTC
NO.
.
TROUBLE AREA
The "Rich to Lean response rate deterioration level*" value is

P014C standard or less for 70 seconds.
The "Lean to Rich response rate deterioration level*" value is
P014D standard or more for 70 seconds.
P015A
P015B
The "Rich to Lean delay level*" value is standard or more.
Air fuel ratio

sensor
Air fuel ratio
sensor heater
ECM

The "Lean to Rich delay level*" value is standard or more.
*: Calculated by ECM based on the air fuel ratio sensor output.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the time required for the A/F sensor output to change from Rich to Lean, or from Lean
to Rich. When "Rich to Lean response rate deterioration level" or "Rich to Lean delay level" exceeds the
threshold, the ECM stores a DTC and illuminates the MIL.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WC20GWX.html?sisuffix=f
1/9
8/6/12
MONITOR STRATEGY
P014C: Primary oxygen sensor response (Asymmetric slow
response Rich to Lean)
P014D: Primary oxygen sensor response (Asymmetric slow
response Lean to Rich)
P014C and P014D: Primary oxygen sensor response (Symmetric
slow response)
Related DTCs
P015A: Primary oxygen sensor response (Asymmetric delayed start

Rich to Lean)
P015B: Primary oxygen sensor response (Asymmetric delayed start
2/9
8/6/12
Lean to Rich)
P015A and P015B: Primary oxygen sensor response (Symmetric
delayed start)
(Main)
Speed sensor
(Related)

70 seconds: P014C, P014D
Duration
30 times: P015A, P015B (Asymmetric delayed start)

90 seconds: P015A, P015B (Symmetric delayed start)
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Fuel system
Closed loop
0 to 65
40 seconds or more
0C or higher
Engine speed
1000 rpm or higher
Intake air mass per second
10 g/sec or more
Elapsed time for fuel cut not active
3 seconds or more
Engine
Not idling
P015A, P015B (Symmetric delayed start)

Learning value of EVAP density during purge
Less than 0.2
Total time of canister purge
20 seconds or more
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine revolution

P014C (Asymmetric slow response)
Sum of DL (time of decreasing lambda) / Sum of total time
Less than 0.39

3/9
8/6/12
Average of time(m) (local minimum) - Average of time(n) (local maximum)
P014D (Asymmetric slow response)

Sum of DL (time of decreasing lambda) / Sum of total time
More than 0.63
Average of time(n) (local maximum) - Average of time(m) (local minimum)
P014C, P014D (Symmetric slow response)

Sum of lambda ({(lambda(n) - lambda(n-1)} -
Less than 7 (varies with accumulated value of
{(lambda(n-1) - lambda(n-2)})
lambda variation)
P015A (Asymmetric delayed start)

Average of time(m) (local minimum)
Average of time(m) (local minimum) - Average of time(n) (local maximum)
P015B (Asymmetric delayed start)

Average of time(n) (local minimum)
Average of time(n) (local maximum) - Average of time(m) (local minimum)
P015A, P015B (Symmetric delayed start)

Average of (maximum lambda - minimum lambda)
More than 0.08
MONITOR RESULT
4/9
8/6/12


or higher.
HINT:

CAUTION:
laws.
HINT:
11. Input the DTC: P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B.
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
5/9
8/6/12

HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0030
HINT:
A low air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions
that would cause the engine to run rich.
A high air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions
that would cause the engine to run lean.
data can be helpful in determining whether the vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the
engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data
recorded at the time of a malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P014C, P014D, P015A OR
P015B)

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
6/9
8/6/12
DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B is output
DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B and other DTCs are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
NG
OK
3.
NG

CONNECTOR (AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR - ECM)
OK
4.
CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Check that the proper air fuel ratio sensor is installed to the vehicle.
NG
SECURELY REINSTALL AIR FUEL RATIO

SENSOR
7/9
8/6/12
OK
5.
(a) Drive the vehicle according to the Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT
6.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P014C, P014D, P015A OR P015B)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
7.
NEXT
8/9
8/6/12
8.
(a) Drive the vehicle according to the Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT
9.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P014C, P014D, P014E, P014F, P015A,
P015B, P015C OR P015D)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
CHECK ENGINE TO DETERMINE CAUSE OF
EXTREMELY RICH OR LEAN ACTUAL AIR FUEL

RATIO
END
9/9
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WC30M6X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0171,P0172,P1170,P117B: System Too Lean (Bank 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0171
System Too Lean (Bank 1)
DTC
P0172
System Too Rich (Bank 1)
DTC
P1170
Port Injector Fuel Performance
DTC
P117B
Direct Injector Fuel Performance
DESCRIPTION
The fuel trim is related to the feedback compensation value, not to the basic injection time. The fuel trim consists of both the
short-term and the long-term fuel trim.
The short-term fuel trim is fuel compensation that is used to constantly maintain the air fuel ratio at stoichiometric levels. The
signal from the air fuel ratio sensor indicates whether the air fuel ratio is rich or lean compared to the stoichiometric ratio. This
triggers a reduction in the fuel injection volume if the air fuel ratio is rich and an increase in the fuel injection volume if it is lean.
Factors such as individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in operating environment cause short-term fuel trim
to vary from the ideal theoretical value. The long-term fuel trim controls overall fuel compensation. The long-term fuel trim
compensates for long term deviations of the fuel trim from the ideal theoretical value. These long term deviations result from the
corrections made by the short-term fuel trim.
If both the short-term fuel and long-term fuel trim are lean or rich beyond predetermined values, it is interpreted as a
malfunction, the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
DTC
NO.
With warm engine and stable air fuel ratio feedback, fuel trim considerably in
P0171 error to lean side.
TROUBLE AREA
Intake system
Fuel injector assembly
(for port injection)
(for direct injection)
Mass air flow meter
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Fuel pressure
Gas leaks from exhaust
system
PCV valve and hose
PCV hose connections
ECM
Wire harness or
connector
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WC30M6X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/23
Mass air flow meter

Engine coolant
temperature sensor
With warm engine and stable air fuel ratio feedback, fuel trim considerably in
P0172 error to rich side.

Ignition system
Fuel pressure
system

ECM
Wire harness or
connector
Although a DTC is stored for a rich or lean condition, the amount of fuel trim
P1170 during direct injection is normal for 9 seconds.
Although a DTC is stored for a rich or lean condition, the amount of fuel trim
P117B during port injection is normal for 9 seconds.

Fuel pressure
ECM
Fuel pressure
ECM
HINT:
When DTC P0171 is set, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the lean side. When DTC P0172 is set, the actual air-fuel ratio is on
the rich side.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air-fuel ratio is lean and DTC P0171 may be set. The MIL is then illuminated.
When DTC P1170 or P117B is output , it may not be possible to precisely determine whether the port injection or the
direct injection is malfunctioning, depending on the conditions. In this case, perform an Active Test (control the injection
way) to determine which injection system is malfunctioning.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Under closed loop fuel control, fuel injection volumes that deviate from those estimated by the ECM cause changes in the longterm fuel trim compensation value. The long-term fuel trim is adjusted when there are persistent deviations in the short-term
fuel trim values. Deviations from the ECM's estimated fuel injection volumes also affect the average fuel trim learning value,
which is a combination of the average short-term fuel trim (fuel feedback compensation value) and the average long-term fuel
trim (learning value of the air fuel ratio). If the average fuel trim learning value exceeds the malfunction threshold, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction in the fuel system and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0171: Fuel system main feedback control functional check (System too lean)
Related DTCs
P0172: Fuel system main feedback control functional check (System too rich)
P1170: Fuel system main feedback control functional check (Direct injection fail)
P117B: Fuel system main feedback control functional check (Port injection fail)
Fuel system
Mass air flow meter

Continuous
2/23
Duration
MIL Operation
Continuous
9 seconds X 3 times: P0171 and P0172
9 seconds: P1170 and P117B
2 driving cycles: P0171 and P0172
Immediately: P1170 and P117B
None

All
P0030 (Air fuel ratio sensor - heater)
P0068, P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor)
P0102, P0103 (Mass air flow (MAF) sensor)
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
P0458, P0459 (Solenoid valve for purge control)
P0461, P0462, P0463 (Fuel level sensor (FL))
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not
present
P0604 (RAM in ECM)

P0605 (ROM in ECM)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS)
circuit)
P2195, P2196 (Air fuel ratio sensor - output voltage)
P0171
Fuel system status
Closed loop
Intake air mass per revolution
0.12 g/rev or more (varies with engine speed)
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine rev.
0.02 g/rev or less
Oil attenuation
Not determined
P0172
Fuel system status
Closed loop
0.12 g/rev or more (varies with engine speed)
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine rev.
0.02 g/rev or less
Oil attenuation
Not determined
0.2 or less
Integrated time of canister purge after engine start
20 seconds or more
P1170
3/23
P1170
Enable condition to detect malfunction in P0171 or P0172
Satisfied
P0171 or P0172 malfunction
Detected
100%
P117B
Enable condition to detect malfunction in P0171 or P0172
Satisfied
P0171 or P0172 malfunction
Detected
Port injection ratio
100%

P0171
Diagnostic value [Air fuel ratio sensor short term fuel trim + air fuel ratio sensor long term 30% or higher (varies with intake
fuel trim + (measured lambda - target lambda)]
air mass per second)
P0172
Diagnostic value [Air fuel ratio sensor short term fuel trim + air fuel ratio sensor long
Less than -30% (varies with intake
term fuel trim + (measured lambda - target lambda)]
air mass per second)
P1170, P117B
Diagnostic value [Air fuel ratio sensor short term fuel trim + air fuel ratio sensor long term fuel trim + (measured
lambda - target lambda)]
-15 to
-15%

6. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature reaches 75C (167F) or higher.
HINT:

4/23
CAUTION:
HINT:
11. Input the DTC: P0171, P0172, P1170 or P117B.
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A
Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has reached ECU memory
limit
HINT:
13. If the test result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no DTC is output, perform a universal trip and check for permanent DTCs
.
HINT:
HINT:
Malfunctioning areas can be identified by performing the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor function provided in
the Active Test. The Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor function can help to determine whether the air fuel ratio
sensor, heated oxygen sensor and other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning.
The following instructions describe how to conduct the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor operation using the
Techstream.

5/23
4. Warm up the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
5. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor / Gas AF
Control / AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
6. Perform the Active Test operation with the engine idling (press the RIGHT or LEFT button to change the fuel injection
volume).
7. Monitor the output voltages of the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed
on the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12% to +12%.
Each sensor reacts in accordance with increases and decreases in the fuel injection volume.
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY (SENSOR)
INJECTION VOLUME
STATUS
VOLTAGE
AFS Voltage B1S1
+12%
Rich
Below 2.0 V
(Air fuel ratio)
-12%
Lean
Higher than 2.4 V
O2S B1S2
+12%
Rich
Higher than 0.55 V
(Heated oxygen)
-12%
Lean
Below 0.4 V
NOTICE:
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and the heated oxygen sensor has a maximum output
delay of approximately 20 seconds.
CASE
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (SENSOR 1) OUTPUT

VOLTAGE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (SENSOR 2) OUTPUT

VOLTAGE
MAIN SUSPECTED
TROUBLE AREA
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
heater
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
circuit
Heated
oxygen
sensor
Heated
oxygen
sensor
heater
Heated
oxygen
sensor
6/23
sensor
circuit
Fuel
injector
assembly
Fuel
pressure
Gas leak
from
exhaust
system
(Air fuel
ratio
extremely
rich or
lean)
Following the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor procedure enables technicians to check and graph the
voltage outputs of both the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors.
To display the graph, enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for
A/F Sensor / Gas AF Control / AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2; and then press the graph button on the Data List
view.
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information as freeze frame
data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can be helpful in determining whether the
vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich,
as well as other data recorded at the time of a malfunction.
A low air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the
engine to run rich.
A high air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the
engine to run lean.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0171, P0172, P1170 AND/OR P117B)

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
P0171, P0172, P1170 or P117B
P0171, P0172, P1170 and/or P117B and other DTCs
7/23
P0171, P0172, P1170 and/or P117B and other DTCs
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0171, P0172, P1170 or P117B are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME FOR A/F SENSOR)

(c) Turn Techstream on.
(d) Warm up the engine and run the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor / AFS
Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
(f) Perform the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor operation with the engine in an idling.
(g) Monitor the output voltages of the A/F and HO2 sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed on the
Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12% to 12%.
If the sensor output voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active Test, the sensor may be
malfunctioning.
INJECTION VOLUME
STATUS
VOLTAGE
AFS Voltage B1S1
12%
Rich
Less than 2.0 V
(A/F)
-12%
Lean
More than 2.4 V
O2S B1S2
12%
Rich
More than 0.55 V
(HO2)
-12%
Lean
Less than 0.4 V
Result:
STATUS
STATUS
A/F CONDITION AND
PROCEED TO
AFS VOLTAGE B1S1 O2S B1S2 A/F SENSOR CONDITION

Lean/Rich
Lean/Rich
Normal
Ventilation valve and hose

Ventilation hose connections
Injector for port injection
Lean
Lean
Actual air-fuel ratio lean
Gas leakage from exhaust system

Air induction system
Fuel pressure
8/23
Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
Ignition system
Rich
Rich
Actual air-fuel ratio rich
Fuel pressure
Mass air flow (MAF) meter
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Lean
Lean/Rich
A/F sensor malfunction
Rich
Lean/Rich
Lean: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage (AFS Voltage) is
consistently higher than 2.4 V, and the heated oxygen sensor output voltage (O2S) is consistently below 0.4 V.
Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the AFS Voltage is consistently below 2.0 V, and the
O2S is consistently higher than 0.55 V.
Lean/Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor
alternates correctly.
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2]
INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
3.
CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA
(a) Check freeze frame data, and understand the status of vehicles when abnormalities occur.
HINT:
The 5 separate sets of freeze frame data can be used to check the engine status before and after storing of the DTC.
Use freeze frame data to check if the engine was idling or running.
FREEZE FRAME DATA
Engine Speed
Fuel System Status #1
O2S B1S2
Calculate Load
Short FT #1
Evap Purge Flow
Vehicle Speed
Long FT #1
Shift Position Sig from ECT
MAF
AFS Voltage B1S1
Coolant Temp
NEXT
4.
CHECK VEHICLE CONDITION
9/23
4.
HINT:
When checking trouble during abnormal status, use the following procedure.
(a) Remove the EFI (+B) fuse, wait 60 seconds or more, and connect the fuse.
HINT:
Clear the ECM feedback learning value.
After clearing the DTC, initial diagnosis of the electronically controlled throttle is performed. Accordingly, engine start after
clearing DTC takes place 10 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch ON.

(d) Turn Techstream on.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume.
(f) Increase or decrease injection quantities by 1 step.
HINT:
This operation stops feedback compensation and feedback learning, enabling checking of trouble.
(g) Start the engine.

(h) Refer to the running state freeze frame data, reproduce the conditions in which the abnormality occurred, and check
the trouble.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Trouble can be confirmed.
Trouble cannot be confirmed.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (SHORT FT #1 AND LONG FT #1)
5.
(a) Specify the location of the trouble from the following, then conduct inspections and replacements.
NOTICE:
If only the check light is lit, and it is not possible to specify the location of the trouble, then go to step 3.
TROUBLE
AREA
SYMPTOM
Rough
idling
Mass air
flow meter
Pausing at
start-up
CAUSE
Deviation in
characteristic of the
mass air flow meter
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
10/23
MIL lights
mass air flow meter
up only.
Very long
unattended idle
time
MIL lights up only.
Fuel injector
assembly blockage
Refer to
injection.
for port
Refer to
injection.
for direct
Long running
distance
Long-term usage
of regular gasoline
From the vehicle usage
conditions above, there may
be a blockage in the fuel
injector assembly.
During driving, the MIL lights
up often.
Fuel
injector
Problem with oil-
assembly
(for port
injection or
tightness results in
a rich side
abnormality
direct
injection)
If a high
concentration of
HC within the
Engine
stalls when
the vehicle
stops
(restart is
possible).
MIL lights
up only.
Problem with oiltightness in fuel

injector assembly
Refer to
injection.
for port
Refer to
injection.
for direct
intake manifold
after the engine
stopped, this
results in a rich
side abnormality.
From scorching on
the spark plug,
there may be a
fuel system
abnormality.
DTC P0088 may
have been stored.
Fuel pump
assembly
malfunction
Low
pressure
Fuel pump
assembly
Engine stall
Poor
acceleration
side fuel
pressure
abnormality
Low
pressure
side fuel
Refer to
for fuel
pump control circuit (low
pressure side).
Refer to
for fuel
pressure (low pressure
side).
system
blockage
Air sucked in from the
intake manifold
gasket.
Intake
Rough
idling
Damage to
intake
Check intake manifold gasket

inspection.
Start the engine, and in idle

condition block off individual hoses
If air is being drawn into the

hose, the fuel compensation
11/23
system
MIL lights
up only.
system
connected to the intake manifold,
hoses
and check that the fuel
Continuous compensation quantity (total of
the purge
VSV stuck
on
Air fuel
ratio

malfunction
Rough idling
sensor
quantity (total of feedback

compensated value and
feedback learning value) is
feedback compensated value and

large, and this drops with a
feedback learning value) decreases. racing condition.
Refer to
Air fuel ratio sensor system

DTC may be stored.
(b) After the trouble area is repaired, Check that the trouble symptom is resolved.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Trouble symptom resolved
Trouble symptom not resolved
6.
CLEAR DTC

(d) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
7.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short #1, Long FT #1.
(f) Read the value Short #1 and Long FT #1.
Result:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
12/23
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Vehicle condition when the malfunction occurs (Idling or driving)
-20% to +20%
HINT:
If the trouble occurs during high speed driving, it is possible to take measurements at medium or low speeds by matching
the intake air volume to that at the time of the trouble by shifting down.
NG
OK
8.
(a) Check the diagnostic table and freeze frame data again, and if there is no abnormality, finish operations.
HINT:
In the event of running out of gas, the fuel compensation quantity will increase by +35% or more, and if this continues for
2 trips, this is a lean abnormality, and P0171 may be stored.
Repeated short trips (a short time between the ignition switch ON and turning it off or short distance driving) result in
gasoline vaporizing at subsequent engine warm-up, and P0172 as a result of increased blow-by gas may be stored.
NEXT
9.
END

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Port.
(e) Read the value Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
Idling
SPECIFIED CONDITION
-20% to +20%
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Direct.
(g) Read the value Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
Idling
SPECIFIED CONDITION
-20% to +20%
Result:
CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY
PROCEED TO
13/23
CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY

PORT
PROCEED TO
DIRECT
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
CHECK EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
10.
(a) Check the diagnostic table and freeze frame data again, and if there is no abnormality, finish operations.
HINT:
In the event of running out of gas, the fuel compensation quantity will increase by +35% or more, and if this continues for
2 trips, this is a lean abnormality, and P0171 may be stored.
Repeated short trips (a short time between turning the ignition switch ON and turning it off or short distance driving)
result in gasoline vaporizing at subsequent engine warm-up, and P0172 as a result of increased blow-by gas may be
stored.
NEXT
11.
END
CHECK EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
(a) Check emission control system
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
OK
12.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
OK:
No leaks in intake system.
NG
14/23
NG
OK
13.
INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Inspect the engine coolant temperature sensor
NG
.
REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK
14.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MAF)

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF.
(f) Read MAF with the engine speed at 3000 rpm.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
MAF
Engine speed at 3000 rpm
SPECIFIED CONDITION
8 to 13 gm/sec
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER

CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE IGNITION SYSTEM
OK
15.
CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM
(a) Check the ignition system
OK
15/23
16.
CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
(a) Check for exhaust gas leaks.

OK:
No gas leaks.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Abnormal
Normal
17.

REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST SYSTEM
NG
OK
18.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-19 (A1A+) - C14-3 (A1A+)
Always
Below 1
A34-18 (A1A-) - C14-4 (A1A-)
Always
Below 1
A34-5 (HA1A) - C14-1 (HA1A)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
16/23
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
19.
NEXT
20.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short FT #1, Long FT #1.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
Idling or racing
SPECIFIED CONDITION
-20% to +20%
HINT:
21.
NG
OK
END
.
17/23
22.
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
Fuel Press
CONDITION
Idling
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 436 to 725 psi)
HINT:
The A/C switch and all accessory switches should be off, and the shift lever should be in the N, P or neutral position, and
the engine should be fully warmed up.
If the result is other than the standard value, there may be a fuel system (high pressure side) abnormality.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM (HIGH PRESSURE SIDE)
OK
23.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Direct.
(e) Read the value Fuel Press Target Value, Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
FUEL PRESSURE TARGET VALUE
PROCEED TO
SHORT FT #1 + LONG FT #1
3 to 5 MPa (30.6 to 50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 436 to 725 psi)
5 MPa (50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 725 psi) or more
+20% or more
-20% or less
3 MPa (30.6 kgf/cm 2 , 436 psi) or less
+20% or more
Idling
C
C
18/23
3 MPa (30.6 kgf/cm 2 , 436 psi) or less
-20% or less
HINT:
REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
24.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY)

(e) Read the value Fuel Press Target Value, Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
FUEL PRESSURE TARGET VALUE
PROCEED TO
-25% or less
A
+30% or more
-25% to 25%
Idling
B
HINT:
25.
REPLACE ECM

19/23

Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
Fuel Press
CONDITION
Engine running Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Fuel Press value decrease moderately.
HINT:
After approximately 10 minutes, fuel pressure reaches 0 kPa.
Depending on the vehicle condition, after turning the ignition switch to ON, fuel pressure may rise moderately.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Fuel pressure rises or drops moderately.
Fuel pressure drops immediately after turning the ignition switch off.
20/23
26.
(a) Inspect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection)
27.
NG
REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
(a) Check the connection and terminal contact pressure of connectors and wire harness between the mass air flow meter
and ECM
.
HINT:
Repair any problems.
NEXT
28.
CLEAR DTC

(d) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
29.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short FT #1, Long FT #1
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
Vehicle condition when the malfunction occurs (Idling or driving)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
-20% to +20%
21/23
30.
NG
OK
END

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-22 (VG) - C16-5 (VG)
Always
Below 1
A33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-22 (VG) or C16-5 (VG) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A33-29 (E2G) or C16-4 (E2G) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
31.
HINT:
If the result of the inspection performed in step 8 indicated no problem, proceed to the next step without replacing the
mass air flow meter.
NEXT
32.
CLEAR DTC

(d) Clear the DTCs
22/23
(d) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
33.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short FT #1, Long FT #1.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
Idling or racing
SPECIFIED CONDITION
-20% to +20%
HINT:
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END
23/23
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0191-P0193: Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range / Perfor
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XH502XX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0191-P0193: Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range /
Performance (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0191
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range / Performance
DTC
P0192
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input
DTC
P0193
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
The fuel pressure sensor is installed on the delivery pipe. The sensor changes fuel pressure to an
electrical signal and sends the signal to the ECM. Then the ECM controls the pump discharge using this
feedback to maintain the fuel's target pressure. If the sensor output stops, the ECM will stop the high
pressure side fuel pump and supply fuel using the low pressure side fuel pump.
DTC
NO.
P0191
P0192
P0193
Fuel pressure is 19.2 MPa or more when 9.5 hours or more

elapsed after ignition switch turned off.
Fuel pressure is 1.9 MPa or less for 10 seconds or more
with engine running when 5 hours or more elapsed after
ignition switch turned off.
Fuel pressure sensor voltage is too low for 2.5 seconds or more.
Fuel pressure sensor voltage is too high for 2.5 seconds or more.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XH502XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short
in fuel
pressure
sensor circuit
Fuel pressure
sensor
ECM
Short in fuel
pressure
sensor circuit
Fuel pressure
sensor
ECM
Open in fuel
pressure
sensor circuit
Fuel pressure
sensor
ECM
1/11
8/6/12
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0192 or P0193, use the Techstream to confirm the fuel pressure in the delivery
pipe by entering the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
FUEL PRESSURE (KPA)
MALFUNCTION
Approximately 0
PR and/or E1 circuit short
Approximately 26000
PR and/or VC circuit short
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
These DTCs are set if the fuel pressure sensor output voltage is out of the standard range. The DTCs
stand for an open or short malfunction of the sensor circuit.
If these DTCs are set, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and limits the engine power. Fail-safe mode
continues until the ignition switch is turned off.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0191: Fuel pressure sensor rationality check
P0192: Fuel pressure sensor output range check (Low
Related DTCs
voltage)
P0193: Fuel pressure sensor output range check (High
voltage)

(Related)
Fuel Pressure Sensor

Once per driving cycle: P0191
Continuous: P0192, P0193
0.1 seconds: P0191 (Stuck high monitor)
Duration
10 seconds: P0191 (Stuck low monitor)

2.5 seconds: P0192, P0193
MIL Operation

None

All
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs are not present
None
P0191 (Stuck High Monitor)

2/11
8/6/12
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Soak time
9.5 hours or more
Elapsed time after ignition switch ON
0.1 seconds or more
High pressure fuel pump
Off
P0191 (Stuck Low Monitor)

Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Soak time
5 hours or more
Target fuel pressure
4 MPa (40.8 kgf/cm 2 , 581 psi) or higher
Engine speed
600 rpm or higher
Vehicle speed
Direct injection
Active
High pressure fuel pump
On

P0191 (Stuck High Monitor)
Fuel pressure sensor value
19.2 MPa (195.8 kgf/cm 2 , 2785 psi) or higher
P0191 (Stuck Low Monitor)

Fuel pressure sensor value
P0192
Fuel rail pressure sensor voltage [Fuel pressure]
Less than 0.208 V [0 MPa (0 kgf/cm 2 , 0 psi)]
P0193
Fuel rail pressure sensor voltage [Fuel
pressure]
4.78 V [26.75 MPa (272.8 kgf/cm 2 , 3880 psi)] or

more

Fuel rail pressure sensor voltage [Fuel
0.306 to 4.639 V [0.00 to 25.87 MPa (0 to 263.8 kgf/cm 2 , 0
pressure]
to 3752 psi)]

P0191
3/11
8/6/12


or higher.
between 2500 and 3000 rpm for 40 seconds or more.
8. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (18.75 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [A].
CAUTION:
laws.
9. Turn the ignition switch off and leave vehicle for 5 hours or more [B].
or higher.
13. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (18.75 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [C].
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
4/11
8/6/12
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
P0192, P0193
5/11
8/6/12

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
6/11
8/6/12
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
N/A

System normal

System abnormal
HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
7/11
8/6/12
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(e) Read the values.
Result:
FUEL PRESSURE (KPA)
PROCEED TO
26000 or more
Approximately 0
3000 to 5000*
HINT:
*: The value must change when the engine is moving or stationary.
2.
INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SOURCE)
8/11
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
C10-1 (VC) - Body ground
SWITCH CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4.5 to 5.5 V
*a

(to Fuel Pressure Sensor)
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
OK
3.
INSPECT ECM (PR VOLTAGE)
Standard Voltage:
9/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
A34-9 (PR) - A36-29 (E1)
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Idling with warm engine
1.0 to 1.7 V
*a

(ECM)
HINT:
The fuel pressure in the delivery pipe is 3 to 5 MPa.
4.
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the ECM connectors.

(b) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-9 (PR) - C10-3 (PR)
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C10-2 (E2)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-9 (PR) or C10-3 (PR) - body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A34-29 (E1) or C10-2 (E2) - body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
OK
10/11
8/6/12
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)

TESTER CONNECTION
A36-19 (VC) - C10-1 (VC)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A36-19 (VC) or C10-1 (VC) - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
OK
REPLACE ECM
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0196-P0198: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (Range/Performa
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PFB0PRX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0196-P0198: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
(Range/Performance) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0196
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (Range/Performance)
DTC
P0197
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low
DTC
P0198
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High
DESCRIPTION
The resistance of the thermistor within the oil temperature sensor changes in accordance with variations
in the oil temperature. The method for connecting the oil temperature sensor and the ECM is the same
as for the intake air temperature sensor.
HINT:
If any DTC is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During operation of fail-safe mode, the ECM sets
the engine oil temperature determined value at 70C (158F). Operation of fail-safe mode continues
until the ECM restores normal operation.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Despite estimated engine oil temperature is higher than 45C (113F),

P0196 engine oil temperature sensor value is lower than 45C (113F).
Engine oil temperature sensor voltage is less than 0.203 V for 0.5
Engine oil
temperature
sensor
ECM
Engine oil temperature sensor voltage is more than 4.698 V for 0.5
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
P0196
When a cold engine start is performed and then the engine is warmed up, if the Engine oil temperature
sensor value is less than specified value, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred. If this is
detected in 2 consecutive driving cycles, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the engine oil
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PFB0PRX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/9
8/6/12
temperature sensor and stores a DTC.
P0197, P0198
The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate the engine oil temperature. When
the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the engine oil temperature sensor circuit and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0196: Engine oil temperature sensor functional check
Related DTCs
P0197: Engine oil temperature sensor functional check (Low

voltage)
P0198: Engine oil temperature sensor functional check (High
voltage)
(Main)
Engine oil temperature sensor
(Related)
Duration
MIL Operation

250 to 550 seconds: P0196
0.5 seconds: P0197, P0198
Immediately: P0196
2 driving cycles: P0197, P0198
None

P0196
P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature
(IAT) sensor)
P0117, P0118, P0125 (Engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor)
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 (Throttle
position sensor)
P0197, P0198 (Engine oil temperature
(EOT) sensor)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)

P2101, P2102 (Throttle actuator control
motor)
P2109 (Throttle position sensor
2/9
8/6/12
minimum stop)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128
(Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APPS) circuit)
P2135 (Throttle position sensor (TPS)
correlation)
P2138 (Accelerator pedal position
sensor (APPS) correlation)
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Engine speed
500 rpm or higher
Diagnostic value (n) [Diagnostic value (n-1) + 64 + 3.0
1732125 - (39285 X Lowest engine oil
(varies with lowest engine oil temperature and vehicle

speed)]
coolant after engine start) or more
P0197, P0198
None

P0196
Actual engine oil temperature
Less than 45C (113F)
P0197
Engine oil temperature sensor voltage [Engine oil temperature]
0.203 V [165.54C (330F)] or less
P0198
Engine oil temperature sensor voltage [Engine oil temperature]
4.698 V [-46.24C (-51.2F)] or more

Engine oil temperature sensor voltage [Engine oil
0.210 to 4.688 V [163.70 to -43.85 C (326.7 to
temperature]
-46.9F)]
3/9
8/6/12

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
4/9
8/6/12

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
5/9
8/6/12
HINT:
When the DTC is output, check the engine oil temperature using the Techstream. Enter the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Oil Temperature. If the Engine Oil
Temperature value is lower than the actual engine oil temperature, the engine oil temperature
sensor circuit may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the wire harnesses and connectors (and
those connections) between the ECM and the engine oil temperature sensor first.
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Oil Temperature.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
-40C (-40F)
215C (419F)
HINT:
If there is a short circuit, the Techstream indicates higher than 215C (419F).
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE OIL

TEMPERATURE)
6/9
8/6/12
2.
(a) Disconnect the Engine oil temperature sensor connector.
(b) Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the Engine oil temperature sensor connector on the wire harness
side.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Oil Temperature.
Standard value:
215C (419F)
*1
*2
ECM
*a
3.

(to Engine oil temperature sensor)
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
OK
REPLACE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
7/9
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-20 (OT) - C21-2 (OT)
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C21-1 (E2)
Always
Below 1
4.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
(a) Disconnect the Engine oil temperature sensor connector.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Oil Temperature.
Standard Value:
-40C (-40F)
*1
*2
ECM
8/9
8/6/12
5.
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM -
OK
REPLACE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A36-20 (OT) or C21-2 (OT) - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0201-P0204: Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1) (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001O9K02AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0201-P0204: Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1) (2013
FR-S)
DTC
P0201
Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1)
DTC
P0202
DTC
P0203
DTC
P0204
DESCRIPTION
The D-4S system has two injection systems. One is the in-cylinder direct injection system that directly
injects pressurized fuel into the combustion chamber. The other is the intake port injection system. The
ECM determines the percentage of in-cylinder direct injection to the intake port injection systems in
accordance with the engine speed and load.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in fuel

injector (for port
Received diagnostic information (open circuit detected / GND
short / +B short or overheating) from the fuel injector IC
P0201
continuously 10 times or more (No. 1 cylinder).

P0202
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001O9K02AX.html?sisuffix=ff
injection) circuit (No.

1 cylinder)
INJ fuse
Fuel injector
assembly (for port
injection) (No. 1
cylinder)
ECM
injector (for port
2 cylinder)
INJ fuse
Fuel injector
assembly (for port
injection) (No. 2
1/9
8/6/12
cylinder)
ECM

P0203

P0204


injector (for port
3 cylinder)
INJ fuse
Fuel injector
assembly (for port
injection) (No. 3
cylinder)
ECM
injector (for port
4 cylinder)
INJ fuse
Fuel injector
assembly (for port
injection) (No. 4
cylinder)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the injection control of the port injector. If a malfunction is detected in the port injector
circuit, the ECM cancels the injection control for the corresponding cylinder and turns on the MIL.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0201: Fuel injector circuit continuity (Cylinder 1)
Related DTCs

Required sensors/Components (Main)
Fuel injector assembly (for port injection) (cylinder 1 to 4)
Required sensors/Components (Sub)
None
Continuous
Duration
2.5 seconds
MIL operation
Immediately
None

2/9
8/6/12
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
More than 1 second
Engine speed
Higher than 500 rpm
Injection time
Fuel cut
Not active

Signal of malfunction from fuel injector IC
On

or higher.
3/9
8/6/12
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/9
8/6/12
HINT:
If DTC P0201 is output, check the No. 1 fuel injector assembly (for port injection) (No. 1 cylinder)
circuit.
circuit.
circuit.
circuit.
5/9
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
P0201, P0202, P0203 and P0204 are output
P0201, P0202, P0203 or P0204 is output
P0201, P0202, P0203 or P0204 and other DTCs are output
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection)

connector.

6/9
8/6/12
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C8-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C30-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C9-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C31-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

*b
No. 1 cylinder
*c
No. 2 cylinder
*d
No. 3 cylinder
*e
No. 4 cylinder
NG
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT
INJECTION))

(b) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-12 (#10) - C8-2
Always
Below 1
A36-22 (#20) - C30-2
Always
Below 1
A36-32 (#30) - C9-2
Always
Below 1
A36-13 (#40) - C31-2
Always
Below 1
7/9
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-12 (#10) or C8-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
(a) Inspect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection)
5.
NG
OK
REPLACE ECM
NG
PORT INJECTION)
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (EFI MAIN1 RELAY - FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection) connector.
8/9
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
GO TO ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0230: Fuel Pump Primary Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T8X0C9X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0230: Fuel Pump Primary Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0230
Fuel Pump Primary Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When a malfunction in the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) is detected, DTC P0230 is stored.
The fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) consists of the ECM, fuel pump assembly and fuel pump
control ECU (which operates the fuel pump assembly). Based on the engine output, the ECM determines
the fuel pump speed. The speed is then converted to a duty signal and sent to the fuel pump control
ECU. Based on the signal sent from the ECM, the fuel pump control ECU adjusts the fuel pump assembly
operation speed among 3 settings. The fuel pump control ECU also has a self-diagnosis function. Based
on the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) condition, the fuel pump control ECU outputs a
diagnostic signal to the ECM, and the ECM determines if there is a malfunction in the fuel pump control
circuit (low pressure side).
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in fuel pump control circuit

(low pressure side)
C/OPEN relay
Fuel pump assembly
Fuel pump control ECU
ECM
Open or short in fuel pump circuit for 2.5

MONITOR DESCRIPTION
To monitor the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side), the ECM checks the fuel pump control signal
(FPC) and diagnostic signal (DI). The FPC voltage varies between approximately 0 V and approximately
12 V (duty signal). Based on the condition of the fuel pump control ECU malfunction, the DI voltage varies
between approximately 0 V and approximately 12 V. The ECM then compares the variation of the FPC
voltage and DI voltage, and determines if the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) is
malfunctioning. When the ECM determines that the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) is
malfunctioning, a DTC is stored immediately.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0230: Fuel pump control circuit continuity
Fuel pump control ECU
Required sensors/Components (Related)
Continuous
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T8X0C9X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/8
8/6/12
Duration
2.5 seconds
MIL operation
2 driving cycles
None

None
Battery voltage
8 V or more
Fuel level
15% or more
After engine starting
180 seconds or more
Fuel pump control
On

Fuel control ECU output diagnostic signal
Low

2/8
8/6/12
or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A

HINT:
HINT:
3/8
8/6/12
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to Fuel Pump Control Circuit
This troubleshooting procedure is based on the premise that the engine is started. If the engine is not
started, proceed to Problem Symptoms Table
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (+B OF FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU)
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU connector.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
G12-1 (+B) - Body ground
SWITCH CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Fuel Pump Control ECU)
NG
INSPECT RELAY (C/OPEN)
OK
4/8
8/6/12
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU - BODY GROUND)

TESTER CONNECTION
G12-4 (E) - Body ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
NG
Below 1

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU)

(b) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-10 (DI) - G12-3 (DI)
Always
Below 1
A35-19 (FPC) - G12-2 (FPC)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-10 (DI) or G12-3 (DI) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
5/8
8/6/12
OK
4.
(a) Inspect the fuel pump assembly
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL

PUMP CONTROL ECU - FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY)
OK
5.
REPLACE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU
(a) Replace the fuel pump control ECU
NEXT
6.
CONFIRM WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS

(c) Clear the DTCs
(d) Crank the engine for 15 seconds.

(e) Idle the engine for 1 minute.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / DTC.
(g) Read the DTCs.
Result
RESULT
No DTC output
PROCEED TO
A
6/8
8/6/12
DTC P0230 output
7.
REPLACE ECM
END
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU - FUEL PUMP
ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the fuel pump assembly connectors.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G12-5 (FP-) - G7-4 (FP-)
Always
Below 1
G12-6 (FP+) - G7-3 (FP+)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G12-5 (FP-) or G7-4 (FP-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
G12-6 (FP+) or G7-3 (FP+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
8.
NG
OK
NG
REPLACE RELAY (C/OPEN)
CONNECTOR
INSPECT RELAY (C/OPEN)
(a) Inspect the C/OPEN relay
OK
7/8
8/6/12
9.
INSPECT RELAY (C/OPEN RELAY OPERATION)
(a) Check the relay operation sound when the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Result:
ITEM
C/OPEN RELAY
CONDITION
STANDARD
Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
NG
Operation sound is heard.

CONNECTOR
OK
10.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (C/OPEN RELAY - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU)
(a) Remove the C/OPEN relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C/OPEN relay terminal 3 - G12-1
Always
Below 1
C/OPEN relay terminal 1 - Body ground
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
C/OPEN relay terminal 3 or G12-1 - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8/8
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0300-P0304: Random / Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected (2013
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XH30QQX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0300-P0304: Random / Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0300
Random / Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC
P0301
Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
DTC
P0302
DTC
P0303
DTC
P0304
DESCRIPTION
When the engine misfires, high concentrations of hydrocarbons (HC) enter the exhaust gas. Extremely
high hydrocarbon concentration levels can cause an increase in exhaust emission levels. Extremely high
concentrations of hydrocarbons can also cause increases in the three-way catalytic converter
temperature, which may cause damage to the three-way catalytic converter. To prevent this increase in
emissions and to limit the possibility of thermal damage, the ECM monitors the misfire count. When the
temperature of the three-way catalytic converter reaches the point of thermal degradation, the ECM
blinks the MIL. To monitor misfires, the ECM uses both the VVT sensor and the crankshaft position
sensor. The VVT sensor is used to identify any misfiring cylinders and the crankshaft position sensor is
used to measure variations in the crankshaft rotation speed. Misfires are counted when the crankshaft
rotation speed variations exceed predetermined thresholds. If the misfire count exceeds the threshold
levels, and could cause emission control system performance deterioration, the ECM illuminates the MIL
and stores a DTC.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XH30QQX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/19
8/6/12
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Simultaneous misfiring of several cylinders occurs and one of the

following conditions is met (2 trip detection logic):
P0300
A misfire occurs that may damage the three-way

catalytic converter (MIL blinks).
An emission deterioration misfire occurs (MIL
illuminates).
Misfiring of the No. 1 cylinder occurs and one of the following
conditions is met (2 trip detection logic):
P0301

illuminates).
P0302

illuminates).
P0303

Open or short in
engine wire
harness
Connector
connection
Vacuum hose
connections
Ignition system
Fuel injector
assembly (for port
injection)
Fuel injector
assembly (for
direct injection)
Fuel pressure (low
pressure side)
Fuel pressure (high
pressure side)
Mass air flow
meter
Engine coolant
temperature
sensor
Compression
pressure
Valve timing
2/19
8/6/12
illuminates).
PCV valve and

P0304

hose
PCV hose
connections
Intake system
ECM
illuminates).
When DTCs for misfiring cylinders are randomly stored, but DTC P0300 is not stored, it indicates that
misfires have been detected in different cylinders at different times. DTC P0300 is only stored when
several misfiring cylinders are detected at the same time.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM illuminates the MIL and stores a DTC when either one of the following conditions, which could
cause emission deterioration, is detected (2 trip detection logic).
Within the first 1000 crankshaft revolutions after the engine starts, an excessive number of
misfires (approximately 20 to 50 misfires per 1000 crankshaft revolutions) occurs once.
An excessive number of misfires (approximately 20 to 50 misfires per 1000 crankshaft
revolutions) occurs a total of 4 times.
The ECM flashes the MIL and stores a DTC when either one of the following conditions, which could
cause damage to the three-way catalytic converter, is detected (2 trip detection logic).
At a high engine speed, a sufficient amount of misfires to damage the catalyst occurring within
200 crankshaft revolutions is detected once.
At a normal engine speed, a sufficient amount of misfires to damage the catalyst occurring
within 200 crankshaft revolutions is detected 3 times.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0300: Multiple cylinder misfire
P0301: Cylinder 1 misfire (crankshaft speed fluctuation)
Related DTCs


VVT sensor

Mass air flow meter
Duration
MIL Operation
Continuous
1000 crankshaft revolutions (Emissions-related misfire)
200 crankshaft revolutions (Catalyst-damaging misfire)
2 driving cycles: Emission-related misfire
3/19
8/6/12
MIL flashes immediately: Catalyst-damaging misfire

None

P0011, P0021 (VVT intake method (A) with midposition start)
P0030, P0031, P0032 (Air fuel ratio sensor - heater)
P0068, P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure
(MAP) sensor)
P0111, P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature (IAT)
sensor)
P0117, P0118, P0125 (Engine coolant temperature
(ECT) sensor)
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 (Throttle position
sensor)
P0131, P0132 (Air fuel ratio sensor - ECM input
voltage)
P0134, P2195, P2196 (Air fuel ratio sensor - output
voltage)
P0171, P0172 (Fuel system main feedback control)
stored
P0340, P0345 (Camshaft position sensor - intake with

VVT)
P0365, P0390 (Camshaft position sensor - exhaust
with VVT)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
P0851, P0852 (Neutral position switch)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal
position sensor (APPS) circuit)
P2138 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS)
correlation)
Change of manifold absolute pressure (MAP)

during 1/2 engine rev.
Less than 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg)
Throttle position change during 16 ms
Less than 16.8%
Fuel cut
Not active
4/19
8/6/12
VSC or A/T torque control
Not active
EVAP system monitoring
Not active
Battery voltage
8 V or more
Engine speed
500 to 7450 rpm
Fuel level
15% or more
21.7 kPa (163 mmHg) or more (A/T) (varies with
engine speed)
MAP
20.9 kPa (157 mmHg) or more (M/T) (varies with

engine speed)

Monitor Period of Emission-related Misfire
Misfire percentage in 1000 rev.
More than 1.9%
Monitor Period of Catalyst-damaging Misfire (MIL Blinks)

Misfire percentage in 200 rev.
5% or more (varies with engine speed)
MONITOR RESULT

4. Record the DTC(s) and freeze frame data.
5. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the Clear DTC procedure)
6. Using the Techstream, switch the ECM from normal mode to check mode
.
.
7. Read the misfire counts of each cylinder, Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire
Count, with the engine idling. If any misfire count is displayed, skip the following confirmation
driving pattern.
8. Drive the vehicle so that the vehicle conditions displayed in Engine Speed and Calculate Load
of the Data List are the same as the freeze frame data. Perform this step several times.
HINT:
In order to store misfire DTCs, it is necessary to operate the vehicle for the period of time
shown in the table below, confirm the Misfire RPM and Misfire Load in the Data List.
ENGINE SPEED
DURATION
Idling
8.0 minutes or more
5/19
8/6/12
1000
4.5 minutes or more
2000
2.5 minutes or more
3000
1.5 minutes or more
9. Check whether misfires have occurred by checking DTCs and freeze frame data.
HINT:
Do not turn the ignition switch off until the output DTC(s) and freeze frame data have been
recorded. When the ECM returns to normal mode (default), the stored DTC(s), freeze frame
data and other data are cleared.
10. Record the DTC(s), freeze frame data and misfire counts.
12. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the Clear DTC procedure)
HINT:
If any DTCs other than misfire DTCs are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
If the misfire does not recur when the vehicle is brought to the workshop, reproduce the
conditions stored in the ECM as freeze frame data.
If the misfire still cannot be reproduced even though the conditions stored in the ECM as freeze
frame data have been reproduced, one of the following factors is considered to be a possible
cause of the problem:
a. There was insufficient fuel in the tank.
b. Improper fuel was used.
c. The spark plugs have been contaminated.
d. The problem requires further diagnosis.
After finishing repairs, check the misfire counts of the cylinders (Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to
Cylinder #4 Misfire Count).
Be sure to confirm that no misfiring cylinder DTCs are stored again by conducting the confirmation
driving pattern after finishing repairs.
When one of Short FT #1 or Long FT #1 in the freeze frame data is outside the range of +/-15%,
the air fuel ratio may be rich (-15% or less) or lean (+15% or more).
When Coolant Temp in the freeze frame data is below 75C (167F), the misfires have occurred
only while warming up the engine.
An extremely imbalanced drive wheel which causes body vibration may cause misfire DTCs to be
stored.
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
6/19
8/6/12
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO MISFIRE DTCS)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304 are output
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304 and other DTCs are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and P0304 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs
first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
OK:
PCV valve and hose are correctly connected and are not damaged.
NG
OK
3.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (PORT INJECTION)
7/19
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Port.
(e) Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.
(f) Read the Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire Count or DTCs displayed on the
Techstream.
Result
MISFIRE COUNT
PROCEED TO
Most misfires occur in only 1 or 2 cylinders
3 cylinders or more have equal misfire counts
There are no misfire counts
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CYLINDER

MISFIRE COUNT)
4.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (DIRECT INJECTION)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way /
Direct.
Techstream.
Result
MISFIRE COUNT
PROCEED
PORT
DIRECT
TO
A
8/19
8/6/12
3 cylinders or more have equal misfire

counts

counts
counts
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT

INJECTION)
5.
INSPECT SPARK PLUG
(a) Inspect the spark plug of the misfiring cylinder
NG
.
REPLACE SPARK PLUG
OK
6.
CHECK FOR SPARK (SPARK TEST)
(a) Perform a spark test
HINT:
If the result of the spark test is normal, proceed to the next step.
NEXT
9/19
8/6/12
7.
CHECK CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE
(a) Measure the cylinder compression pressure of the misfiring cylinder
8.
NG
CHECK ENGINE TO DETERMINE CAUSE OF LOW

COMPRESSION
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
OK:
NG
OK
9.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (COOLANT TEMP)

(e) Read the Coolant Temp twice, when the engine is both cold and warmed up.
Standard:
With cold engine
Same as ambient air temperature.
With warm engine
NG

SENSOR
OK
10/19
8/6/12
10.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF, Coolant Temp and Engine
Speed.
(f) Allow the engine to idle until Coolant Temp reaches 75C (167F) or higher.
(g) Read MAF with the engine speed at 3000 rpm.
Standard:
Between 13.0 gm/sec and 14.0 gm/sec (shift lever: N, A/C: Off).
NG

FLOW METER CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
OK
11.
CHECK VALVE TIMING
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL
NORMAL

ADJUST VALVE TIMING
11/19
8/6/12
12.
13.
NG
OK

PORT INJECTION)
NG
OK
GO TO FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT
14.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CYLINDER MISFIRE COUNT)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way /
Direct.
Techstream.
Result
MISFIRE COUNT
PROCEED TO
PORT
DIRECT
There are misfire counts
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CYLINDER

MISFIRE COUNT)
12/19
8/6/12
15.

DIRECT INJECTION)
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CYLINDER MISFIRE COUNT)

(b) Start the engine and turn the Techstream on.
(c) Clear DTCs (
).
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Misfire RPM, Misfire Load, Cylinder
#1 to #4 Misfire Count and Injection Way.
(e) Monitor all of the misfire count values or DTCs and Injection Way displayed on the Techstream.
Result
16.
MISFIRE COUNTS
INJECTION WAY
PROCEED TO
Either
3 cylinders or more have equal misfire counts
Either
There are misfire counts
Direct
INSPECT SPARK PLUG
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

DIRECT INJECTION)
INSPECT SPARK PLUG
(a) Inspect the spark plug of the misfiring cylinder
NG
.
REPLACE SPARK PLUG
OK
13/19
8/6/12
17.
HINT:
NEXT
18.
19.
NG

COMPRESSION
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
OK:
NG
OK
20.

14/19
8/6/12
Standard:
With cold engine
With warm engine
NG

SENSOR
OK
21.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF, Coolant Temp and Engine
Speed.
Standard:
NG

OK
22.
CHECK VALVE TIMING
15/19
8/6/12
NG
ADJUST VALVE TIMING
OK
23.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR

CONNECTION)
(a) Check the connection and terminal contact pressure of connectors and wire harnesses between
the mass air flow meter and ECM
.
HINT:
NEXT
24.

(d) Clear the DTCs
(i) Warm up the engine.
(j) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(k) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(l) Input the DTC: P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304.
(m) Check the DTC judgment result.
16/19
8/6/12
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL
(P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304 output)

NORMAL
(No DTC output)
END
25.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-12 (THA) - C16-1 (THA)
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C16-2 (E2)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-12 (THA) or C16-1 (THA) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
17/19
8/6/12
26.
HINT:
If the results of the inspections performed in steps 15 and 20 indicated no problem, proceed to the
next step without replacing the mass air flow meter.
NEXT
27.

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(l) Input the DTC: P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304.
Result
RESULT
NORMAL
(No DTC output)
ABNORMAL
(P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304 output)
PROCEED TO
A
18/19
8/6/12
REPLACE ECM
END
19/19
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0327,P0328,P0332,P0333: Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Input (
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000SVT0NQX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0327,P0328,P0332,P0333: Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low
Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0327
Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
DTC
P0328
Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
DTC
P0332
Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Low Input (Bank 2)
DTC
P0333
Knock Sensor 2 Circuit High Input (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
A flat-type knock sensor (non-resonant type) has a structure that can detect vibrations between
approximately 5 kHz and 15 kHz.
Knock sensor is fitted onto the engine block to detect engine knocking.
The knock sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes
deformed.
The voltage is generated when the engine block vibrates due to knocking. Any occurrence of engine
knocking can be suppressed by delaying the ignition timing.
DTC
NO.
Knock sensor voltage is less than 0.154 V for 1

P0327 second or more (bank 1).
Knock sensor voltage is more than 4.838 V for 1
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in knock sensor

circuit (bank 1)
Knock sensor (bank 1)
ECM

Knock sensor voltage is less than 0.154 V for 1
Knock sensor voltage is more than 4.838 V for 1
Open or short in knock sensor

circuit (bank 2)
Knock sensor (bank 2)
ECM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000SVT0NQX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
HINT:
When DTC P0327, P0328, P332 or P0333 is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe
mode, the ignition timing is delayed to its maximum retardation. Fail-safe mode continues until the
ignition switch is turned off.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the output voltage transmitted by the knock sensor remains low or high for more than 1 second, the
ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor circuit and the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0327: Knock sensor range check (Low voltage) (Bank 1)
Related DTCs
P0328: Knock sensor range check (High voltage) (Bank 1)

P0332: Knock sensor range check (Low voltage) (Bank 2)
P0333: Knock sensor range check (High voltage) (Bank 2)
Knock sensor
Continuous
Duration
1 second
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None

P0327, P0332
Knock sensor voltage
Less than 0.154 V
P0328, P0333
Knock sensor voltage
4.838 V or more
2/9
8/6/12


or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
3/9
8/6/12

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/9
8/6/12
HINT:
If DTC P0327 or P0332 is displayed, check the knock sensor circuit for the right bank (bank 1).
If DTC P0328 or P0333 is displayed, check the knock sensor circuit for the left bank (bank 2).
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (+B OF KNOCK SENSOR)
5/9
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C36-1 - C36-2
Ignition switch ON
2.4 to 2.6 V
C34-1 - C34-2
Ignition switch ON
2.4 to 2.6 V
*a

(to Knock Sensor)
*b
Bank 1
*c
Bank 2
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM KNOCK SENSOR)
NG
REPLACE KNOCK SENSOR
OK
2.
INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR
(a) Inspect the knock sensor
OK
6/9
8/6/12
3.

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(l) Input the DTC: P0327, P0328, P0332, or P0333.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NORMAL
(No DTC output)

ABNORMAL
(P0327, P0328, P0332, or P0333 output)
4.
REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - KNOCK SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.

7/9
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-28 (KNK1) - C36-2
Always
Below 1
A34-17 (KNK2) - C34-2
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C36-1
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C34-1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-28 (KNK1) or C36-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A34-17 (KNK2) or C34-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C36-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C34-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5.

(d) Clear the DTCs
8/9
8/6/12
Pattern.
(l) Input the DTC: P0327, P0328, P0332 or P0333.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NORMAL
(No DTC output)

ABNORMAL
(P0327, P0328, P0332, or P0333 output)
REPLACE ECM
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0335,P0336: Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TCW0R7X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0335,P0336: Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit (2013
FR-S)
DTC
P0335
Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit
DTC
P0336
Crankshaft Position Sensor Range / Performance
DESCRIPTION
The crankshaft position sensor system consists of a No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate and
Magnetoresistive Element (MRE) type sensor. The crankshaft angle sensor plate is installed on the
crankshaft. The crankshaft position sensor generates 30 signals per crankshaft revolution. The ECM uses
the camshaft position signal to distinguish between the cylinders, and uses the crankshaft position
signal to detect the crankshaft position and engine speed.
DTC
NO.
No crankshaft position sensor signal is sent to the ECM

P0335 while cranking for 3 seconds or more.
Crankshaft position sensor signal is not 30 counts per 1

P0336 revolution of crankshaft 10 times continuously.
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in
crankshaft position sensor
circuit
Crankshaft angle sensor
plate (crankshaft subassembly)
ECM
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If there is no signal from the crankshaft position sensor despite the crankshaft revolving, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor and the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0335: Crankshaft position sensor circuit continuity

P0336: Crankshaft position sensor rationality check
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TCW0R7X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/8
8/6/12
VVT sensor
Continuous
Duration
MIL operation
3 seconds: P0335
10 revolutions: P0336
Immediately: P335
None

P0335
None
Battery voltage
8 V or more
Starter switch
On
P0336
P0335 (Crankshaft position sensor)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
not present

Engine speed
Less than 4000 rpm
Battery voltage
8 V or more

P0335
Crankshaft position sensor signal
No signal
P0336
2/8
8/6/12
Crankshaft position sensor signal during 1 revolution
Not 30

HINT:
If the engine could not be started, crank engine for 10 seconds.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
N/A
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
HINT:
3/8
8/6/12
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If no problem is found by this diagnostic troubleshooting procedure, check for problems by
referring to the engine mechanical section.
The engine speed can be checked by using the Techstream. To perform the check, follow the
procedures below:
a. Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
b. Start the engine.
c. Turn the Techstream on.
d. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
The engine speed may be indicated as zero despite the engine running normally. This is
caused by a lack of NE signals from the crankshaft position sensor. Alternatively, the engine
speed may be indicated as lower than the actual engine speed if the crankshaft position
sensor output voltage is insufficient.
PROCEDURE
4/8
8/6/12
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE SPEED)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
(f) Read the values displayed on the Techstream while the engine is running.
OK:
Correct values are displayed.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
HINT:
To check the engine speed change, display the graph on the Techstream.
If the engine does not start, check the engine speed while cranking.
If the engine speed indicated on the Techstream remains zero (0), there may be an open or short
in the Crankshaft Position sensor circuit.
2.
INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(a) Inspect the crankshaft position sensor
NG
REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
OK
5/8
8/6/12
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR - ECM)

(b) Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+)
Always
Below 1
C34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C34-16 (NE+) or C33-1 (NE+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
C34-27 (NE-) or C33-2 (NE-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR)
(a) Check the crankshaft position sensor installation.

OK:
Sensor is installed correctly.
NG
SECURELY REINSTALL SENSOR
6/8
8/6/12
OK
5.
INSPECT CRANKSHAFT (TEETH OF SENSOR PLATE)
(a) Check the teeth of the No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate.
OK:
Sensor plate does not have any cracks or deformation.
REPLACE NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
NG
SENSOR PLATE
OK
6.
(a) Replace the crankshaft position sensor
NEXT
7.

(d) Clear the DTCs
(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the tester on.
Pattern.
7/8
8/6/12

(j) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTC is output
P0335 or P0336 is output
HINT:
If the engine does not start, replace the ECM.
REPLACE ECM
END
8/8
8/6/12
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TCW0R7X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0335,P0336: Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit (2013
FR-S)
DTC
P0335
Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit
DTC
P0336
Crankshaft Position Sensor Range / Performance
DESCRIPTION
The crankshaft position sensor system consists of a No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate and
Magnetoresistive Element (MRE) type sensor. The crankshaft angle sensor plate is installed on the
crankshaft. The crankshaft position sensor generates 30 signals per crankshaft revolution. The ECM uses
the camshaft position signal to distinguish between the cylinders, and uses the crankshaft position
signal to detect the crankshaft position and engine speed.
DTC
NO.
No crankshaft position sensor signal is sent to the ECM

P0335 while cranking for 3 seconds or more.
Crankshaft position sensor signal is not 30 counts per 1

P0336 revolution of crankshaft 10 times continuously.
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in
crankshaft position sensor
circuit
ECM
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If there is no signal from the crankshaft position sensor despite the crankshaft revolving, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor and the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0335: Crankshaft position sensor circuit continuity

P0336: Crankshaft position sensor rationality check
1/8
8/6/12
VVT sensor
Continuous
Duration
MIL operation
3 seconds: P0335
10 revolutions: P0336
Immediately: P335
None

P0335
None
Battery voltage
8 V or more
Starter switch
On
P0336
P0335 (Crankshaft position sensor)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
not present

Engine speed
Less than 4000 rpm
Battery voltage
8 V or more

P0335
Crankshaft position sensor signal
No signal
P0336
2/8
8/6/12
Crankshaft position sensor signal during 1 revolution
Not 30

HINT:
If the engine could not be started, crank engine for 10 seconds.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
N/A
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
HINT:
3/8
8/6/12
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If no problem is found by this diagnostic troubleshooting procedure, check for problems by
referring to the engine mechanical section.
The engine speed can be checked by using the Techstream. To perform the check, follow the
procedures below:
b. Start the engine.
d. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
The engine speed may be indicated as zero despite the engine running normally. This is
caused by a lack of NE signals from the crankshaft position sensor. Alternatively, the engine
speed may be indicated as lower than the actual engine speed if the crankshaft position
sensor output voltage is insufficient.
PROCEDURE
4/8
8/6/12
1.

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
(f) Read the values displayed on the Techstream while the engine is running.
OK:
Correct values are displayed.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
HINT:
To check the engine speed change, display the graph on the Techstream.
If the engine does not start, check the engine speed while cranking.
If the engine speed indicated on the Techstream remains zero (0), there may be an open or short
in the Crankshaft Position sensor circuit.
2.
INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(a) Inspect the crankshaft position sensor
NG
OK
5/8
8/6/12
3.

(b) Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+)
Always
Below 1
C34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C34-16 (NE+) or C33-1 (NE+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
C34-27 (NE-) or C33-2 (NE-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR)
(a) Check the crankshaft position sensor installation.

OK:
NG
6/8
8/6/12
OK
5.
INSPECT CRANKSHAFT (TEETH OF SENSOR PLATE)
(a) Check the teeth of the No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate.
OK:
Sensor plate does not have any cracks or deformation.
REPLACE NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
NG
SENSOR PLATE
OK
6.
NEXT
7.

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
7/8
8/6/12

(j) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTC is output
HINT:
REPLACE ECM
END
8/8
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0340,P0341,P0345,P0346: Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit M
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WBZ0JFX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0340,P0341,P0345,P0346: Camshaft Position Sensor
Circuit Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0340
Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC
P0341
Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance (Bank 1 or Single

Sensor)
DTC
P0345
Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit (Bank 2)
DTC
P0346
Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
The intake camshaft VVT sensors consist of a magnet and MRE (Magnetic Resistive Element).
The VVT camshaft drive gear has a sensor plate with 3 teeth on its outer circumference. When the gear
rotates, changes occur in the air gaps between the sensor plate and MRE, which affects the magnetic
field. As a result, the resistance of the MRE material fluctuates. The VVT sensor converts the gear
rotation data to pulse signals, uses the pulse signals to determine the camshaft angle, and sends it to
the ECM.
The crank angle sensor generates 30 signals for each engine speed. Based on combination of the VVT
sensor signals and crankshaft position sensor signals, the ECM detects the crankshaft angle. Then the
ECM uses this data to control fuel injection time and injection timing. Also, based on the crankshaft
position sensor signal, the ECM detects the engine speed.
DTC
NO.
One of the following conditions is met (1 trip detection

logic):
P0340
No VVT sensor for intake side signal input

during crankshaft 1.5 rotations (bank 1).
No VVT sensor for intake side signal is sent to
the ECM while cranking for 3 seconds or more
(bank 1).
VVT sensor for intake side signal is not 3 during

P0341 crankshaft 2 rotations (bank 1).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WBZ0JFX.html?sisuffix=ff
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in VVT

sensor circuit (for intake
side of bank 1)
VVT sensor (for intake
side of bank 1)
Camshaft timing gear
assembly (bank 1)
Jumped tooth of timing
chain for intake camshaft
(bank 1)
ECM
1/11
8/6/12

logic):
No VVT sensor for intake side signal input
during crankshaft 1.5 rotations (bank 2).
No VVT sensor for intake side signal is sent to
the ECM while cranking for 3 seconds or more
(bank 2).
P0345
VVT sensor for intake side signal is not 3 during

P0346 crankshaft 2 rotations (bank 2).
Open or short in VVT

sensor circuit (for intake
side of bank 2)
VVT sensor (for intake
side of bank 2)
Camshaft timing gear
assembly (bank 2)
Jumped tooth of timing
chain for intake camshaft
(bank 2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If no signal is transmitted by the VVT sensor despite the engine running, or the rotations of the camshaft
and the crankshaft are not synchronized, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0340: Camshaft position sensor - Intake with VVT circuit continuity
(Bank 1)
P0341: Camshaft position sensor - Intake with VVT rationality check
Related DTCs
(Bank 1)
P0345: Camshaft position sensor - Intake with VVT circuit continuity
(Bank 2)
P0346: Camshaft position sensor - Intake with VVT rationality check
(Bank 2)
(Main)
(Sub)
VVT sensor (Bank 1 and 2)

Once per driving cycle: P340, P0345 (First monitor)
Continuous: P0340, P0345 (Second monitor)

3 seconds: P0340, P0345 (First monitor)
Duration
7 revolutions: P0340, P0345 (Second monitor)

2 revolutions: P0341, P0346
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

All
2/11
8/6/12
None
Battery voltage
8 V or more
P0340, P0345 (First monitor)

Starter
On
0.2 seconds or more
P0341, P0346
0.2 seconds or more

P0340, P0345 (First monitor)
Intake VVT sensor signal
No signal
P0340, P0345 (Second monitor)

Intake VVT sensor signal during 1.5 revolutions
No signal
P0341, P0346
Intake VVT sensor signal during 2 revolutions
Not 3
3/11
8/6/12

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
4/11
8/6/12

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
5/11
8/6/12
HINT:
If DTC P0340 or P0341 is displayed, check the VVT sensor for intake side circuit for the right bank
(bank 1).
If DTC P0345 or P0346 is displayed, check the VVT sensor for intake side circuit for the left bank
(bank 2).
If no problem is found by this diagnostic troubleshooting procedure, troubleshoot the engine
6/11
8/6/12
mechanical system.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE (SENSOR POWER SOURCE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
CONDITION
C12-1 (VV1-) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
11 to 14 V
C26-1 (VV2-) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
11 to 14 V
*A
Bank 1
*B
Bank 2
*a

(to VVT Sensor for Intake Side)
NG
OK
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE - ECM)

(b) Disconnect the VVT sensor connector.
7/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-26 (VV1+) - C12-2 (VV1+)
Always
Below 1
A34-15 (VV2+) - C26-2 (VV2+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C12-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C26-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-26 (VV1+) or C12-2 (VV1+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
A34-34 (VCV) or C12-3 (VC) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE ECM)
OK
3.
CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE)
(a) Check the VVT sensor installation.

OK:
NG
SECURELY REINSTALL VVT SENSOR FOR

INTAKE SIDE
OK
8/11
8/6/12
4.
CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY (TEETH OF PLATE)
(a) Check the teeth of the sensor plate.

OK:
Sensor plate teeth do not have any cracks or deformation.
NG
NG
ADJUST VALVE TIMING
OK
5.
CHECK VALVE TIMING
OK
6.
REPLACE VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE
(a) Replace the VVT sensor
NEXT
7.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0340, P0341, P0345 AND/OR P0346)

(d) Clear the DTCs
9/11
8/6/12
(f) Start the engine.
(g) Turn the Techstream on
Pattern.
(j) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
HINT:
8.
REPLACE ECM
END
NG
OK
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE - EFI MAIN1
RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the VVT sensor for intake side connector.

10/11
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C12-1 (VV1-)
Always
Below 1
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C26-1 (VV2-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C12-1 (VV1-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C26-1 (VV2-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE ECM)
OK
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0351-P0354: Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit (2013
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XH40PUX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0351-P0354: Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0351
Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
DTC
P0352
Ignition Coil "B" Primary / Secondary Circuit
DTC
P0353
Ignition Coil "C" Primary / Secondary Circuit
DTC
P0354
Ignition Coil "D" Primary / Secondary Circuit
DESCRIPTION
A Direct Ignition System (DIS) is used on this vehicle.
The DIS is a 1-cylinder ignition system in which each cylinder is ignited by one ignition coil and one spark
plug is connected to the end of each secondary wiring. A powerful voltage, generated in the secondary
wiring, is applied directly to each spark plug. The spark of the spark plugs passes from the center
electrode to the ground electrodes.
The ECM determines the ignition timing and transmits the ignition (IGT) signals to each cylinder. Using
the IGT signal, the ECM turns the power transistor inside the igniter on and off. The power transistor, in
turn, switches on and off the current to the primary coil. When the current to the primary coil is cut off, a
powerful voltage is generated in the secondary coil. This voltage is applied to the spark plugs, causing
them to spark inside the cylinders.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XH40PUX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/10
8/6/12
DTC
NO.
P0351
Received diagnostic information (open circuit detected / GND short

/ +B short or overheating) from the ignition coil driver IC for No. 1
ignition coil assembly continuously 10 times or more.
P0352
P0353

Ignition system
Open or short in
IGT circuit (1 to
4) between
ignition coil and

ECM
Ignition coil (No.

P0354
TROUBLE AREA
1 to No. 4
cylinder)
ECM

2/10
8/6/12
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the ECM receives the malfunction signal from the ignition coil driver IC, it interprets this as a fault in the
igniter and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0351: Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
Related DTCs
P0352: Ignition Coil "B" Primary / Secondary Circuit

P0353: Ignition Coil "C" Primary / Secondary Circuit
P0354: Ignition Coil "D" Primary / Secondary Circuit
Igniter
Continuous
Duration
2.5 seconds (256 msec. X 10 counts)
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
More than 1 second
Engine speed
Higher than 500 rpm
Ignition dwell time
Ignition cut
Not active

Signal of malfunction from ignition coil driver IC
On
3/10
8/6/12

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
4/10
8/6/12

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
5/10
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
These DTCs indicate malfunctions relating to the primary circuit.
If DTC P0351 is output, check the No. 1 ignition coil (No. 1 cylinder) circuit.
6/10
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.

(d) Clear the DTCs
(f) Shuffle the arrangement of the ignition coils (among No. 1 to No. 4 cylinders).
NOTICE:
Do not change the location of the connectors.
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(h) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(i) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Same DTC output
Different ignition coil DTC output
REPLACE IGNITION COIL
2.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF IGNITION COIL)
7/10
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil connectors.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Ignition Coil)
*b
No. 1 cylinder
*c
No. 2 cylinder
*d
No. 3 cylinder
*e
No. 4 cylinder
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION COIL - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil connectors.

8/10
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C38-2 (GND) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION COIL - ECM)

(b) Disconnect the ignition coil connectors.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-21 (IGT1) - C38-3 (IGT1)
Always
Below 1
A36-10 (IGT2) - C28-3 (IGT2)
Always
Below 1
A36-31 (IGT3) - C39-3 (IGT3)
Always
Below 1
A36-8 (IGT4) - C27-3 (IGT4)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-21 (IGT1) or C38-3 (IGT1) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
A36-8 (IGT4) or- C27-3 (IGT4) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
9/10
8/6/12

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
10/10
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0365,P0366,P0390,P0391: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circui
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000YTB0FIX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0365,P0366,P0390,P0391: Camshaft Position Sensor "B"
Circuit (Bank 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0365
Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 1)
DTC
P0366
Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance (Bank 1)
DTC
P0390
Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 2)
DTC
P0391
Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
The exhaust camshaft VVT sensors consist of a magnet and MRE (Magnetic Resistive Element).
The exhaust camshaft has a sensor plate with 2 teeth on its outer circumference.
When the exhaust camshaft rotates, changes occur in the air gaps between the 2 teeth and MRE, which
affects the magnet. As a result, the resistance of the MRE material fluctuates. The VVT sensor converts
the exhaust camshaft rotation data to pulse signals, uses the pulse signals to determine the camshaft
angle, and sends it to the ECM.
The crank angle sensor generates 30 signals for each engine speed. Based on combination of the VVT
signals and NE signal, the ECM detects the crankshaft angle. Then the ECM uses this data to control fuel
injection time and injection timing. Also, based on the NE signal, the ECM detects the engine speed.
DTC
NO.
No VVT sensor for exhaust side signal input during

P0365 crankshaft 7.5 rotations (bank 1).
2 VVT sensor for exhaust side signals are not output

P0366 during crankshaft 2 rotations (bank 1).
No VVT sensor for exhaust side signal input during

P0390 crankshaft 7.5 rotations (bank 2).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YTB0FIX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in VVT sensor

circuit (for exhaust side of bank
1)
VVT sensor (for exhaust side of
bank 1)
Exhaust camshaft (bank 1)
Jumped tooth of timing chain
ECM
Open or short in VVT sensor
circuit (for exhaust side of bank
2)
1/10
8/6/12
2 VVT sensor for exhaust side signals are not output

P0391 during crankshaft 2 rotations (bank 2).
VVT sensor (for exhaust side of

bank 2)
Exhaust camshaft (bank 2)
Jumped tooth of timing chain
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If no signal is transmitted by the VVT sensor despite the engine running, or the rotations of the camshaft
and the crankshaft are not synchronized, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor and the
ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0365: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 1)
Related DTCs
P0366: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance

(Bank 1)
P0390: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 2)
P0391: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance
(Bank 2)
(Main)
(Related)
Duration
VVT sensor for exhaust side (bank 1 and 2)

Continuous
7.5 revolutions: P0365, P0390
2 revolutions: P0366, P0391
MIL operation
Immediately
None

None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
0.2 seconds or more

P0365, P0390
Exhaust VVT sensor signal
No signal
P0366, P0391
2/10
8/6/12
Exhaust VVT sensor signal during 2 revolutions
Not 2


or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
3/10
8/6/12

TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/10
8/6/12
HINT:
If DTC P0365 or P0366 is displayed, check the VVT sensor circuit for the right bank (bank 1).
If DTC P0390 or P0391 is displayed, check the VVT sensor circuit for the left bank (bank 2).
If no problem is found by this diagnostic troubleshooting procedure, troubleshoot the engine
mechanical system.
5/10
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE (SENSOR POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the VVT sensor for exhaust side connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C6-1 (EV1-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*A
Bank 1
*B
Bank 2
*a

(to VVT Sensor for Exhaust Side)
NG
OK
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE - ECM)
6/10
8/6/12

(b) Disconnect the VVT sensor connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-14 (EV1+) - C6-2 (EV1+)
Always
Below 1
A34-25 (EV2+) - C25-2 (EV2+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C6-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C25-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-14 (EV1+) or C6-2 (EV1+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG
CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST

SIDE - ECM)
OK
3.
CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE)
(a) Check the VVT sensor installation.

7/10
8/6/12
OK:
NG
SECURELY REINSTALL VVT SENSOR FOR

EXHAUST SIDE
OK
4.
CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY (TEETH OF PLATE)
(a) Check the teeth of the sensor plate.

OK:
Sensor plate teeth do not have any cracks or deformation.
NG
NG
ADJUST VALVE TIMING
OK
5.
CHECK VALVE TIMING
OK
6.
REPLACE VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE
8/10
8/6/12
(a) Replace the VVT sensor for exhaust side
NEXT
7.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0365, P0366, P0390 OR P0391)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(f) Start the engine.
Pattern.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(j) Read the DTC.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
HINT:
8.
REPLACE ECM
END
9/10
8/6/12
NG
OK
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE - EFI MAIN1
RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the VVT sensor for exhaust side connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C6-1 (EV1-)
Always
Below 1
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C25-1 (EV2-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C6-1 (EV1-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C25-1 (EV2-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST

SIDE - ECM)
OK
10/10
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) (2
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000220S035X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0420
Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses sensors mounted in front of and behind the Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) to
monitor its efficiency.
The first sensor, the air fuel ratio sensor, sends pre-catalyst information to the ECM. The second sensor,
the heated oxygen sensor, sends post-catalyst information to the ECM.
In order to detect any deterioration in the three-way catalytic converter, the ECM calculates the oxygen
storage capacity of the three-way catalytic converter. This calculation is based on the voltage output of
the heated oxygen sensor.
The ECM uses the oxygen storage capacity value to determine the state of the three-way catalytic
converter. If any deterioration has occurred, the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
This system determines the deterioration of the entire catalyst system (including the front and rear
catalysts), by using the oxygen storage capacity value of the front catalyst, that is more sensitive than
the rear catalyst, as the representative value. Therefore, be sure to replace the front and rear catalysts
together when catalyst replacement is necessary.
DTC
NO.
DTC DETECTION
CONDITION
TROUBLE AREA

Diagnostic value is more
P0420 than the standard value.

Front exhaust manifold assembly (TWC: Front catalyst)
and front exhaust pipe assembly (TWC: Rear catalyst)
CATALYST LOCATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000220S035X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/12
8/6/12
*1
TWC: Front Catalyst
*2
TWC: Rear Catalyst
*3
Exhaust Manifold
*4
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor
*5
*6
Front Exhaust Pipe Sub-Assembly
*7
Front Exhaust Pipe Assembly
*8
Center Exhaust Pipe Assembly
*9
Tail Exhaust pipe Assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses diagnostic values to determine deterioration of the catalyst. If the diagnostic value
exceeds a specified value, the catalyst is considered deteriorated, and the DTC is stored.
2/12
8/6/12
The diagnostic values are based upon the catalyst monitor value (CM) calculated by changes in the air
fuel ratio sensor lambda and changes in the heated oxygen sensor output voltage, and in the response
rate calculated from the heated oxygen sensor response time.
*: Diagnostic Value = CM X (1 + Response rate)
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0420: Catalyst monitor with sufficient sensor performance for other

monitors functional check
3/12
8/6/12
Required
Sensors/Components (Main)

Required
Mass air flow meter
Sensors/Components
(Related)

Duration
30 to 55 seconds
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

P0037, P0038 (Heated oxygen sensor - heater)
sensor)
sensor)
(ECT) sensor)
P0131, P0132 (Air fuel ratio sensor - ECM input voltage)
voltage)
P0137, P0138 (Heated oxygen sensor - a lack of circuit
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs are
not present
continuity)
P0140 (Heated oxygen sensor - output voltage)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
P2096, P2097 (Post catalyst fuel trim system)
correlation)
60C (140F) or more
4/12
8/6/12
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Fuel system status
Closed loop
5 to 30 g/sec
Estimated exhaust gas temperature in a

catalyst
440C (824F) or more
Elapsed time
1 second or more
(difference between actual and target

lambda < 0.15)
Vehicle speed
Higher than 70 km (43.4 mph)
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine

rev.
Heated oxygen sensor output change, lean

to rich after fuel cut
Evaporative system monitor
Experienced
Not active
Integrated time of canister purge after

engine start
Estimated temperature of secondary oxygen
sensor element
Integrated amount of intake air per second
Atmospheric pressure
35 seconds or more
0.2 or less
500C or higher
4800 g or more (varies with estimated ambient
temperature)
75.06 kPa [563 mmHg] or more

Diagnostic value*
10 or more
*: Refer to Monitor Description
MONITOR RESULT
5/12
8/6/12


or higher.
HINT:

CAUTION:
laws.
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DESCRIPTION

System normal
6/12
8/6/12
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
N/A

System abnormal

HINT:
HINT:
CONDITIONING FOR SENSOR TESTING
1. Connect the Techstream to the DLC3 [A].

2. Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessories switched off, until the engine coolant
temperature stabilizes [B].
3. Run the engine at an engine speed of between 2500 rpm and 3000 rpm for at least 3 minutes
[C].
4. While running the engine at 3000 rpm and 2000 rpm for 2 seconds, check the waveforms of
the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors using the Techstream [D].
HINT:
7/12
8/6/12
If either of the voltage outputs of either the air fuel ratio or heated oxygen sensor does not
fluctuate, or either of the sensors makes a noise, the sensor may be malfunctioning.
If the voltage outputs of both the sensors remain lean or rich, the air fuel ratio may be extremely
lean or rich. In such cases, enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control
the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor.
If the three-way catalytic converter has deteriorated, the heated oxygen sensor (located behind
the three-way catalytic converter) voltage output fluctuates up and down frequently, even under
normal driving conditions.
HINT:
If a malfunction cannot be found when troubleshooting DTC P0420, a lean or rich abnormality may
be the cause. Perform troubleshooting by following the inspection procedure for P0171 (System
Too Lean) and P0172 (System Too Rich).
PROCEDURE
1.
8/12
8/6/12

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0420 is output
HINT:
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (Control the Injection Volume)

(b) Start the engine and warm it up.
(d) Run the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume
(f) Perform the Active Test operation with the engine idling (press the RIGHT or LEFT button to
change the fuel injection volume).
(g) Monitor the voltage outputs of the air fuel ratio sensor and heated oxygen sensor (AFS Voltage
B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of - 12% to +12%.
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and the heated oxygen sensor has
9/12
8/6/12
a maximum output delay of approximately 20 seconds.

If the sensor output voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active
Test, the sensor may be malfunctioning.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
INJECTION VOLUME
STATUS
VOLTAGE
AFS Voltage B1S1
+12%
Rich
Below 2.0 V
(Air fuel ratio)
-12%
Lean
Higher than 2.4 V
O2S B1S2
+12%
Rich
Higher than 0.55 V
(Heated oxygen)
-12%
Lean
Below 0.4 V
(SENSOR)
Result:
STATUS
STATUS
AFS
VOLTAGE
O2S
B1S2
B1S1
A/F CONDITION AND

A/F AND
MISFIRE
MAIN SUSPECTED TROUBLE

AREAS
PROCEED
TO
HO2 SENSOR
CONDITIONS
Three-Way Catalytic
Lean/Rich
Lean/Rich
Lean
Lean/Rich
Rich
Lean/Rich
Lean/Rich
Lean
Normal

malfunction
malfunction
malfunction
Converter (TWC)
Gas leakage from
exhaust system

B

-
Gas leakage from

exhaust system
C
Lean/Rich
Rich

malfunction

-
Gas leakage from

exhaust system
Extremely rich or lean
Lean
Lean
Actual air-fuel ratio

lean
May
occur
actual air-fuel ratio

Gas leakage from
exhaust system
D
Extremely rich or lean
Actual air-fuel ratio

Rich
Rich
lean
actual air-fuel ratio

Gas leakage from
exhaust system
10/12
8/6/12
Lean: During Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor, the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage (AFS
Voltage B1S1) is consistently higher than 2.4 V, and the heated oxygen sensor output voltage (O2S
B1S2) is consistently below 0.4 V.
Rich: During Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor, the AFS Voltage B1S1 is consistently below 2.0
V, and the O2S B1S2 is consistently higher than 0.55 V.
Lean/Rich: During Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor of the Active Test, the output voltage of
the air fuel ratio sensor and heated oxygen sensor alternate correctly.
3.

OK:
No gas leaks.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST GAS LEAK

POINT
OK
4.
REPLACE EXHAUST MANIFOLD (TWC: FRONT CATALYST)
(a) Replace the exhaust manifold (TWC: front catalyst)
NEXT
.
REPLACE FRONT EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY
(TWC: REAR CATALYST)
11/12
8/6/12
5.

OK:
No gas leaks.
6.
NG

POINT
OK
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
NG

POINT
OK
CHECK CAUSE OF EXTREMELY RICH OR LEARN

ACTUAL AIR FUEL RATIO

OK:
No gas leaks.
12/12
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0441: Evaporative Emission Control System Incorrect Purge Fl
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000SWF0AFX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0441: Evaporative Emission Control System Incorrect Purge
Flow (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0441
Evaporative Emission Control System Incorrect Purge Flow
DTC SUMMARY
DTC
NO.
MONITORING
ITEM
MALFUNCTION DETECTION
CONDITION
TROUBLE AREA
DETECTION DETECTION
TIMING
LOGIC
While engine running, following

conditions successively met:
P0441 Purge flow
The pressure
difference between
non-purge and purge
is less than
threshold for 26
seconds or more.
Regardless of forced
vent valve on (close)
and purge being
carried out, the
pressure difference
between non-purge
and purge is less
than threshold for 21
seconds or more.
Purge valve
Purge line
Connector/wire
harness
While
(Purge valve - engine
ECM)
running
ECM
Leak from
EVAP system
2 trip
DESCRIPTION
The description can be found in EVAP (Evaporative Emission) System
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The purge flow monitor runs while the engine is running. The purge flow monitor consists of 2 monitors.
The 1st monitor is conducted every time and the 2nd monitor is activated if necessary.
The 1st monitor
While the engine is running and the purge valve is on (open), the ECM monitors the purge
flow by measuring the EVAP pressure change. If the variation in the pressure is less than
threshold, the ECM begins the 2nd monitor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000SWF0AFX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
The 2nd monitor

The vent valve is turned on (closed) and the EVAP pressure is then measured. If the
variation in the pressure is more than threshold, the ECM interprets this as the purge
valve being stuck closed, and illuminates the MIL and stores DTC P0441 (2 trip detection
logic).
MONITOR STRATEGY
2/9
8/6/12
MONITOR
STRATEGY
Related DTC
P0441: Incorrect purge flow in ELCM functional check

Purge valve
Duration
26 seconds: 1st stage

21 seconds: 2nd stage
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
None
1st Stage
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
75.06 kPa(abs) [563 mmHg(abs)] or higher
Less than 0.2
120 seconds or more
2nd Stage
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Engine speed
1050 rpm or higher
Vehicle speed
30 km/h (18.6 mph) or higher
120 seconds or more
Less than 0.2
Fuel system status
Closed loop
Lambda
0.76 to 1.25
Ambient temperature
-25.0C (-13F) or higher
Short-term fuel trim
Higher than 0.9

1st Stage
3/9
8/6/12
Pressure without purge - Pressure with purge
Less than 0.075 kPa(gauge) [1 mmHg(gauge)]
2nd Stage
Pressure without purge - Pressure with purge
Less than 0.666 kPa(gauge) [5 mmHg(gauge)]
MONITOR RESULT

3. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure)
7. Drive the vehicle at 60 km/h (40 mph) or more for 10 minute or more [A].
NOTICE:
When performing the confirmation driving pattern, Obey all speed limits and traffic
laws.

HINT:
10. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All readiness.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
4/9
8/6/12
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL

System normal
System abnormal
INCOMPLETE
You should perform driving pattern after confirming DTC enabling

conditions
N/A

HINT:
If the judgment result shows INCOMPLETE or N/A, perform the following procedure.
NOTICE:
The Evaporative System Check (Automatic Mode) consists of 5 steps performed
automatically by the Techstream. It takes a maximum of approximately 24 minutes.
Do not perform the Evaporative System Check when the fuel tank is more than 90% full
because the cut-off valve may be closed, making the fuel tank leak check unavailable.
When the temperature of the fuel is 35C (95F) or higher, a large amount of vapor forms
and any check results become inaccurate. When performing the Evaporative System
Check, keep the fuel temperature below 35C (95F).
16. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check / Automatic
Mode.
17. After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for All Readiness by entering the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
5/9
8/6/12
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A

HINT:
20. If the judgment result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no pending DTC is output, perform a universal
trip and check for permanent DTCs
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (ACTIVATE THE VSV FOR EVAP CONTROL)
(a) Connect a Techstream to the DLC3.

(b) Disconnect the vacuum hose (canister side) from the purge
valve.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active
Test / Activate the VSV for EVAP Control.
(f) When the purge valve is operated using the Techstream,
check whether the port of the purge valve applies suction to
your finger.
6/9
8/6/12
OK:
TESTER
TESTER OPERATION
OPERATION
VSV ON
Purge valve port applies suction to finger
VSV OFF
Purge valve port applies no suction to finger
*a
Purge valve ON
*b
Purge valve OFF
NG
REPLACE PURGE VALVE
OK
2.
INSPECT EVAP LEAK PART
(a) Check for leakage from EVAP system (hose, disconnection, cracks, etc.).
OK:
No leakages in the EVAP purge line
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE EVAP PURGE LINE
OK
3.
REPLACE PURGE VALVE
(a) Replace the purge valve
7/9
8/6/12
NEXT
4.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT (EVAP SYSTEM)
REPAIR OR REPLACE EVAP PURGE LINE
NEXT
5.

(d) Clear the DTCs

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
EVAP system DTCs are output
No DTCs output
(No pending DTCs output)
END
6.
REPLACE ECM
(a) Replace the ECM
NEXT
8/9
8/6/12
7.

(d) Clear the DTCs

HINT:
NEXT
END
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0451-P0453: Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure S
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012MC083X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0451-P0453: Evaporative Emission Control System
Pressure Sensor Range / Performance (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0451
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Range / Performance
DTC
P0452
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor / Switch Low Input
DTC
P0453
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor / Switch High Input
DTC SUMMARY
DTC
NO.
MONITORING
ITEM
Difference
between
canister
pressure
sensor output
P0451 value and
manifold
absolute
pressure
sensor output
value
MALFUNCTION
DETECTION
CONDITION
The difference
between the
canister pressure
sensor output
value and the
manifold absolute
pressure sensor
output value with
the ignition
switch ON is
large.
Canister
pressure
P0452
sensor low
input
EVAP pressure
sensor less than
0.973 V for 1
second.
Canister
pressure
P0453
sensor high
input
EVAP pressure
sensor more than
4.095 V for 1
second.
TROUBLE AREA
DETECTION TIMING
Canister pump Ignition switch off to

module
ON
Connector/wire
harness
DETECTION
LOGIC
2 trip
(Canister
pump module
- ECM)
EVAP system
hose (pipe
from air inlet
port to
canister pump
module,
canister filter,
fuel tank vent
hose)
ECM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012MC083X.html?sisuffix=ff&
Ignition
switch ON
EVAP
monitoring
(ignition
switch off)
1 trip
Ignition
switch ON
EVAP
monitoring
(ignition
switch off)
1 trip
1/13
8/6/12
HINT:
The canister pressure sensor is built into the canister pump module.
DESCRIPTION
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1. DTC P0451: Difference between canister pressure sensor output value and manifold absolute
pressure sensor output value
If the difference between the atmospheric pressure calculated using the canister
pressure sensor and that calculated using the MAP sensor exceeds the specified value,
then the ECM determines there is a canister pressure sensor abnormality. The ECM then
illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (2 trip detection logic).
2. DTC P0452: Canister pressure sensor voltage low
If the canister pressure sensor voltage output (pressure) is below 0.973 V: 51.71
kPa(abs) [388 mmHg(abs)], the ECM interprets this as an open or short circuit in the
canister pressure sensor or its circuit, and stops the EVAP system monitor. The ECM
then illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (1 trip detection logic).
3. DTC P0453: Canister pressure sensor voltage high
If the canister pressure sensor voltage output (pressure) is 4.095 V: 108.99 kPa(abs)
[818 mmHg(abs)] or more, the ECM interprets this as an open or short circuit in the
2/13
8/6/12
canister pressure sensor or its circuit, and stops the EVAP system monitor. The ECM
then illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (1 trip detection logic).
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0451: ELCM pressure sensor rationality
Related DTC
P0452: ELCM pressure sensor range check (Low voltage)

P0453: ELCM pressure sensor range check (High voltage)
Duration
MIL Operation

1 second: P0452, P0453
None

All
None
P0451
Ignition switch
On
Elapsed time after ignition switch ON
0.5 to 60 seconds
Soak time
60 seconds or more
ELCM vacuum pump
Not active
ELCM switching valve
Off (Open)
Purge control
Not active
P0452, P0453
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Either of the following conditions is met:
A or B
A. Ignition switch
On
B. Activated by soak timer
Satisfied

3/13
8/6/12
P0451
ELCM pressure at ignition switch ON - MAP at ignition switch ON
Higher than 4.7329 KPa (36 mmHg)
P0452
ELCM pressure sensor output voltage [ELCM pressure]
Less than 0.973 V [51.71 KPa (388 mmHg)]
P0453
ELCM pressure sensor output voltage [ELCM pressure]
4.095 V [108.99 KPa (818 mmHg)] or more

ELCM pressure sensor output voltage [ELCM
1.016 to 4.087 V [52.49 to 108.85 KPa (394 to 817
pressure]
mmHg)]
MONITOR RESULT

NOTICE:
The Evaporative System Check (Automatic Mode) consists of 5 steps performed automatically by
the Techstream. It takes a maximum of approximately 24 minutes.
Do not perform the Evaporative System Check when the fuel tank is more than 90% full because
the cut-off valve may be closed, making the fuel tank leak check unavailable.
When the temperature of the fuel is 35C (95F) or higher, a large amount of vapor forms and any
check results become inaccurate. When performing the Evaporative System Check, keep the fuel
temperature below 35C (95F).
3. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
4. Check that the intake air temperature is between 4.4 and 35C (40 and 95F).
8. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All readiness.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
4/13
8/6/12
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System abnormal

N/A

HINT:
11. If the judgment result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no pending DTC is output, perform a
universal trip and check for permanent DTCs
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
5/13
8/6/12
NOTICE:
When a vehicle is brought into the workshop, leave it as it is. Do not change the vehicle condition.
For example, do not tighten the fuel cap.
Do not disassemble the canister pump module.
The Techstream is required to conduct the following diagnostic troubleshooting procedure.
6/13
8/6/12
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CONFIRM DTC AND EVAP PRESSURE

(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON (do not start the engine).
(e) Read DTCs.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Vapor Pressure Pump.
(g) Read the EVAP (Evaporative Emission) pressure displayed on the Techstream.
Result
DISPLAY (DTC
TEST RESULT
OUTPUT)
P0451
P0452
PROCEED
TO
Canister pressure sensor

Wire harness/connector (ECM Canister pressure sensor)
Below 51.71 kPa(abs) [388

mmHg(abs)]
Short in ECM circuit
P0453
Higher than 108.99 kPa(abs)

[878 mmHg(abs)]

Open in ECM circuit
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CANISTER
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ATMOSPHERE

PRESSURE)
PUMP MODULE - ECM)
A
7/13
8/6/12
2.

Result
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
TO
Below 10
A35-20 (PPMP) Body ground
PROCEED
Short in canister pressure sensor

circuit
Always
Wire harness/connector (ECM -
10 k or
higher
Canister pressure sensor)

Short in ECM circuit
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ATMOSPHERE

PRESSURE)
3.
(a) Disconnect the canister pump module connector.

Result
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
10 k or
higher
Short in canister pressure sensor circuit
PROCEED
TO
A
A35-20 (PPMP) https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012MC083X.html?sisuffix=ff&
8/13
8/6/12
Body ground
4.
Always
Below 10
Short in wire harness/connector (ECM Canister pressure sensor)

(CANISTER PUMP MODULE - ECM)
REPLACE ECM
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
G8-8 - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
100 or less
*a


Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G8-6 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
G8-7 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
Result
9/13
8/6/12
TEST RESULT
Voltage and resistance within standard

Open in canister pressure sensor circuit
ranges
Voltage and/or resistance outside
standard ranges
Open in wire harness/connector (ECM - Canister

pressure sensor)
PROCEED
TO
REPLACE ECM
5.
REPLACE CANISTER PUMP MODULE
NEXT
6.
7.
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - ECM)
NEXT
NEXT
(AFTER REPAIR)
REPLACE ECM
(a) Replace the ECM
8.

(AFTER REPAIR)
(AFTER REPAIR)
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ATMOSPHERE PRESSURE)

10/13
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Atmosphere Pressure.
(e) Compares Atmosphere Pressure displayed with the Techstream to the actual atmosphere
pressure.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
Difference with the actual atmosphere pressure is less than 4.7 kPa (abs) [36 mmHg
(abs)].
Difference with the actual atmosphere pressure is 4.7 kPa (abs) [36 mmHg (abs)] or
more.
9.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MAP)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAP.
(e) Compares the MAP displayed with the Techstream to the actual atmosphere pressure.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
Difference with the actual atmosphere pressure is less than 4.7 kPa (abs) [36 mmHg
(abs)].
Difference with the actual atmosphere pressure is 4.7 kPa (abs) [36 mmHg (abs)] or
more.
REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE

SENSOR
11/13
8/6/12
10.
.
(AFTER REPAIR)
NEXT
11.
.
(AFTER REPAIR)
NEXT
12.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (AFTER REPAIR)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(h) Perform the Evaporative System Check using the Techstream, referring to the Confirmation
Driving Pattern.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(j) Input the DTC: P0451, P0452 or P0453.
(k) Check the DTC judgment result.
Result
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION

12/13
8/6/12
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
N/A
System normal

System abnormal
memory limit
NEXT
END
13/13
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0455,P0456,P1451,P2404: Evaporative Emission Control Syste
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000SWH09OX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0455,P0456,P1451,P2404: Evaporative Emission Control
System Leak Detected (Gross Leak) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0455
Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Gross Leak)
DTC
P0456
Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak)
DTC
P1451
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Range/Performance
DTC
P2404
Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Sense Circuit Range /

Performance
DTC SUMMARY
DTC
NO.
P0455
MONITORING
ITEM
EVAP gross
leak
CONDITION
TROUBLE AREA
Leak detection pump creates

negative pressure (vacuum) in
EVAP system and EVAP system
pressure is measured. Reference
pressure is measured at start and
end of leak check.
If stabilized pressure is higher
than [second reference pressure x
0.377], ECM determines that EVAP
system has a large leak.
P0456
EVAP small
leak
Leak detection pump creates

negative pressure (vacuum) in
EVAP system and EVAP system
pressure is measured. Reference
pressure measured at start and
end of leak check.
If stabilized pressure is higher
than second reference pressure,
ECM determines that EVAP system
has a small leak.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000SWH09OX.html?sisuffix=ff
DETECTION DETECTION
TIMING
LOGIC
Fuel cap
(loose)
Leakage
from
While
EVAP line ignition
(canister switch off
2 trip
- fuel
tank)
Leakage
from
EVAP line
(leak
detection
pump canister)
Leakage
from
canister While
pump
ignition
module
switch on
Leakage
from fuel
tank
2 trip
1/7
8/6/12
Leakage
from
canister
P1451
EVAP
clogged
A blockage in the EVAP system

pipe is detected.
Blockage
in EVAP
line
(canister
- fuel
tank)
Blockage
While
in EVAP
line (leak ignition
detection switch on
pump canister)
Blockage
in
canister
pump
module
2 trip
Leak detection pump ending

pressure is more than the
threshold.
P2404
EVAP
malfunction
The difference between the leak

detection pump highest pressure
and lowest pressure is the
threshold value or more.
Leak
While
detection ignition
pump
2 trip
switch on
The vent valve abnormality is

detected.
DESCRIPTION
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
5 hours*1 after the ignition switch is turned off, the leak detection pump creates negative pressure
(vacuum) in the EVAP (Evaporative Emission) system. The ECM monitors for leaks and actuator
malfunctions based on the EVAP pressure.
HINT:
*: If the enable conditions are not satisfied 5 hours after the ignition switch is turned off, the monitor
check starts 2 hours later. If the enable conditions are still not satisfied 7 hours after the ignition
switch is turned off, the monitor check starts 2.5 hours later.
SEQUENCE
A
OPERATION
Leak detection pump monitor
DURATION
300 seconds
2/7
8/6/12
First reference pressure measurement
40 seconds
Vent valve monitor
12 seconds
Pipe clogging monitor
Second reference pressure measurement
900 seconds
40 seconds
*: If only a small amount of fuel is in the fuel tank, it takes longer for the EVAP pressure to stabilize.
*1
Purge valve: OFF (closed)
*2
Purge valve: ON (open)
*3
Vent Valve: OFF (vent)
*4
Vent Valve: ON (closed)
*5
Leak Detection Pump: OFF
*6
Leak Detection Pump: ON
*7
Reference Orifice (0.02 inch)
*8
*9
Canister
*10
Fuel Tank
*12
Canister Filter
*11
*a
*c
Operation A:
Atmospheric Pressure Measurement
Operation C:
EVAP System Pressure Measurement
*b
*d
Operation B, E:
Reference Pressure Measurement
Atmospheric Pressure
3/7
8/6/12
*e
Negative Pressure
(a) P0455: EVAP (Evaporative Emission) gross leak

In operation D, the leak detection pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in the EVAP
system and the EVAP system pressure is measured. If the stabilized system pressure is
higher than [second reference pressure x 0.377] (near atmospheric pressure), the ECM
determines that the EVAP system has a large leak, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (2
trip detection logic).
(b) P0456: EVAP very small leak
In operation D, the leak detection pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in the EVAP
system and the EVAP system pressure is measured. If the stabilized system pressure is
higher than second reference pressure, the ECM determines that the EVAP system has a
small leak, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (2 trip detection logic).
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0455: Evaporative system functional check (0.040 inch leak)
P0456: Evaporative system functional check (0.020 inch leak)
Related DTC
P1451: Evaporative system functional check (Pipe clogging)

P2404: Evaporative system functional check (ELCM
performance)
Purge valve
4/7
8/6/12
(Related)
Once per driving cycle: P0455, P0456, P1451 and P2404
Duration
23 minutes
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
None
P0455, P0456, P1451, P2404

Soak time
5, 7 or 9.5 hours
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
4.4 to 45C (39.9 to 113F)
Intake air temperature
4.4C (39.9F) or higher

75.06 to 110 kPa(abs) [563 to 825
mmHg(abs)]
EVAP density learning during previous driving cycle

Learning value of EVAP density during purge in previous
driving cycle
Completed
0.2 or less
Integrated value of purge airflow during previous
3000 or higher (varies with engine coolant
driving cycle
temperature)
EVAP leak check diagnostic
Not completed

P0455
Tank pressure
[reference pressure x 0.377 - (-45.5)] or higher
P0456
Tank pressure
Less than (reference pressure x 0.377 - (-45.5))
P1451
Time it takes to become [reference pressure for functional check - 0.941 kPa or 4.9726
27 seconds or
kPa [7 mmHg or 37 mmHg]]
less
5/7
8/6/12
P2404
Either of following conditions met
A, B, C or D
A: Operation A ending pressure
Higher than -0.224 kPa [-2 mmHg]
B. Maximum pressure - minimum
Higher than 0.314 kPa [2 mmHg]
pressure at operation B and E

C. Ending pressure at operation B and E
D. Operation C ending pressure reference pressure for functional check
Less than -3.9717 kPa [-30 mmHg] or higher than -0.9419

kPa [-7 mmHg] (varies with atmospheric pressure)
Less than 0.224 kPa [2 mmHg]
MONITOR RESULT

NOTICE:
3. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure).
6. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check /
Automatic Mode.
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
6/7
8/6/12
INCOMPLETE
N/A


HINT:
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0455, P0456, P1451 or P2404 and other DTCs are output
GO TO DTC CHART
GO TO EVAP SYSTEM
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0458,P0459: Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valv
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VSO0FWX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0458,P0459: Evaporative Emission System Purge Control
Valve Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0458
Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low
DTC
P0459
Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
To reduce hydrocarbon emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through a charcoal
canister to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders.
The ECM changes the duty signals to the purge valve (Vacuum Switching Valve for Purge Control) so that
the intake amount of hydrocarbon emissions is appropriate for the driving conditions (engine load,
engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) after the engine is warmed up.
DTC
NO.
The voltage of purge valve circuit is low for 2.5 seconds

P0458 or more.
The voltage of purge valve circuit is high for 2.5
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in purge

valve circuit
Purge valve
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the output terminal voltage when the vacuum switching valve assembly is actuated.
By turning the FET in the ECM on and off, the purge valve assembly is subject to duty control. If the ECM
control value (drive signal) and the output terminal voltage duty cycle continue to not match, then the
ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the vacuum switching valve circuit, illuminates the MIL, and stores
the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0458: Solenoid valve for purge control functional check

P0459: Solenoid valve for purge control functional check
Purge valve
Continuous
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VSO0FWX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
Duration
2.5 seconds
MIL operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
None
P0458
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
1 second or more
Purge valve control duty ratio
Less than 75%
P0459
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
1 second or more
Purge valve control duty ratio
25% or more

P0458
Drain voltage of FET for purge valve
Battery voltage X 0.38 or less
P0459
Current of FET for purge valve
3.5 A or more
2/9
8/6/12

or higher.
HINT:

CAUTION:
laws.
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DESCRIPTION

System normal
3/9
8/6/12
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System abnormal

N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
4/9
8/6/12
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records the engine condition when
malfunctions are detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the
vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or
rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (ACTIVATE THE VSV FOR EVAP
CONTROL)
1.
(a) Connect a Techstream to the DLC3.
(b) Disconnect the vacuum hose (canister side) from the purge valve.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Activate the VSV for EVAP
Control.
(f) When the purge valve is operated using the Techstream, check whether the port of the purge
valve applies suction to your finger.
OK:
TESTER OPERATION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
VSV ON
Purge valve port applies suction to finger
VSV OFF
Purge valve port applies no suction to finger
*a
Purge valve ON
*b
Purge valve OFF
Result
5/9
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PURGE

VALVE - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
2.
INSPECT PURGE VALVE
(a) Inspect the purge valve
NG
REPLACE PURGE VALVE
OK
3.
INSPECT PURGE VALVE (POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the purge valve connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
d1-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
6/9
8/6/12
*a

(to Purge valve)
NG
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PURGE VALVE - ECM)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-11 (PRG) - d1-2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-11 (PRG) or d1-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5.

7/9
8/6/12

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(j) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTC is output
HINT:
6.
REPLACE ECM
NG
OK
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PURGE VALVE - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the purge valve connector.

8/9
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
d1-1 - EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
d1-1 or EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0461-P0463: Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performan
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PF60PCX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0461-P0463: Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Range /
DTC
P0461
Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance
DTC
P0462
Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Low
DTC
P0463
Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
The signal output from the sender gauge assembly installed in the fuel tank is converted to a CAN
communication signal using the combination meter assembly, and this signal is input into the ECM as a
remaining fuel signal.
DTC
NO.
Compared with the estimated fuel consumption, the actual variation

P0461 in the fuel sender gauge assembly signal is small.
Fuel sender gauge assembly voltage is less than 0.036 V for 2.5
Fuel sender gauge assembly voltage is higher than 11.383 V for 1
P0463 second or more.
TROUBLE AREA
Fuel sender
gauge
assembly
Fuel sender
gauge
assembly No. 2
Combination
meter
assembly
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses the fuel sender gauge to monitor the amount of furl. There are several checks that the
ECM performs to confirm the proper operation of the fuel sender gauge.
P0461
If the fuel sender gauge variation is lower than the estimated fuel consumption calculated from the
fuel injection quantity and the engine speed, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the fuel
sender gauge, and stores the DTC.
P0462, P0463
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PF60PCX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/7
8/6/12
If an open or short in the fuel sender gauge signal line is detected, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the fuel sender gauge, and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0461: Fuel level sensor rationality check
Related DTCs
P0462: Fuel level sensor range check (Low voltage)

P0463: Fuel level sensor range check (High voltage)
Fuel sender gauge assembly
Fuel sender gauge assembly No. 2
Combination meter assembly
Continuous
Immediately: P0461
Duration
2.5 seconds: P0462

1 second: P0463
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

P0461
sensor)
P0462, P0463 (Fuel level sensor (FL))
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
not stored

U0073, U0155, U0423 (CAN system)
5 seconds or more
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Fuel cut
Not active
2/7
8/6/12
Integrated amount of intake air mass
165375 g or more
P0462, P0463
U0073, U0155, U0423 (CAN system)
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
3 seconds or more

P0461
Maximum fuel level - Minimum fuel level
Less than 5.2%
P0462
Fuel sender gauge voltage (Resistance)
Less than 0.036 V (0.25 )
P0463
11.383 V (417.5 ) or more

0.398 to 7.051 V (12 to 416 )

P0461

or higher.
7. Drive the vehicle and consume more than 30 liters (31.7 US qts) of the fuel.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
3/7
8/6/12

TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
P0462, P0463
4/7
8/6/12

or higher .
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
5/7
8/6/12

NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
System normal

System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
6/7
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0461, P0462 or P0463 is output
DTC P0461, P0462 or P0463 and other DTCs are output
GO TO DTC CHART
GO TO FUEL GAUGE MALFUNCTION
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012ME0EVX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0500
Vehicle Speed Sensor "A"
DESCRIPTION
Vehicles, which are equipped with ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), detect the vehicle speed using the skid
control ECU (brake actuator assembly) and wheel speed sensor. The wheel speed sensor monitors the
wheel rotation speed and sends a signal to the skid control ECU. The skid control ECU converts the
wheel speed signal into a 4-pulse signal and transmits it to the ECM. The ECM determines the vehicle
speed based on the frequency of the pulse signal.
DTC
NO.
The vehicle speed signal from the driving wheels is 300

P0500 km/h or more for 2.5 seconds or more.
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in wheel

speed signal circuit
actuator assembly)
Speed sensor
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the driving wheel speed signal input from the skid control computer indicates speed of 300 km/h
(186.42 mph) or more, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the speed signal circuit. The ECM then
illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0500: Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) range check

Speed sensor
Combination meter
Skid control ECU
Continuous
Duration
2.5 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012ME0EVX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
U0073, U0122, U0416 (CAN system)
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
2 seconds

Vehicle speed


or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.
2/6
8/6/12

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
3/6
8/6/12
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Vehicle Speed.
(d) Drive the vehicle.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Values displayed on Techstream and speedometer display not equal
Values displayed on Techstream and speedometer display equal
4/6
8/6/12
2.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT (VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM)

(d) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Trouble Codes.
(e) Read DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTC is output
No DTCs are output
GO TO VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
3.

(d) Clear the DTCs
5/6
8/6/12

Pattern.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC P0500 is output
REPLACE ECM
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0506,P0507: Idle Air Control System RPM Lower than Expecte
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T8M0MVX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0506,P0507: Idle Air Control System RPM Lower than
Expected (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0506
Idle Air Control System RPM Lower than Expected
DTC
P0507
Idle Air Control System RPM Higher than Expected
DESCRIPTION
The idling speed is controlled by the ETCS (Electronic Throttle Control System). The ETCS is comprised of:
1) the one valve type throttle body; 2) the throttle actuator, which operates the throttle valve; 3) the
throttle position sensor, which detects the opening angle of the throttle valve; 4) the accelerator pedal
position sensor, which detects the accelerator pedal position; and 5) the ECM, which controls the ETCS.
Based on the target idling speed, the ECM controls the throttle actuator to provide the proper throttle
valve opening angle.
DTC
NO.
The engine speed is not close to the target engine speed for 30
seconds or more (Actual engine speed - target engine speed) =< -100
P0506
rpm).
The engine speed is not close to the target engine speed for 30
seconds or more (Actual engine speed - target engine speed) >= 200
P0507
rpm).
TROUBLE AREA
Electronic
throttle
control
system
Intake
system
PCV hose
connections
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the idling speed and idling air flow volume to conduct Idle Speed Control (ISC). The
ECM determines that the ISC system is malfunctioning if the difference between the target engine idling
speed and actual engine idling speed exceeds the threshold for 30 seconds or more.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0506: Idle speed control (ISC) functional check

P0507: Idle speed control (ISC) functional check
Electronic throttle control system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T8M0MVX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/6/12

Speed sensor
Continuous
Duration
30 seconds
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

P0068, P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure
(MAP) sensor)
(ECT) sensor)
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 (Throttle position
sensor)
P0131, P0132 (Air fuel ratio sensor - ECM input
voltage)
voltage)
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored P0500 (Vehicle speed sensor (VSS))
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
P0851, P0852 (Neutral position switch)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal
position sensor (APPS) circuit)
correlation)
Fuel level
15% or more
75.06 kPa [563 mmHg] or more
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
10.49 seconds or more
Closed control in ISC
Active
Lambda
0.81 to 1.1
2/7
8/6/12
Elapsed time after A/C switch OFF ON
Elapsed time after changing intake manifold

pressure =< 4 kPa (30 mmHg)
Vehicle speed
0 km/h (0 mph)
Elapsed time after neutral switch OFF ON

P0506
Actual engine speed - Target engine speed
-100 rpm or less
P0507
200 rpm or more

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.
a. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6.25 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [A].
3/7
8/6/12
c. Idle the engine for 10 minutes or more [B].

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
HINT:
The following conditions may also cause DTC DTC P0506 or P0507 to be stored:
a. The floor carpet overlapping slightly onto the accelerator pedal, causing the accelerator
pedal to be slightly depressed and therefore the throttle valve position to be slightly
open.
b. The accelerator pedal being not fully released.
4/7
8/6/12
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [Engine Speed, ISC Feedback Value and ISC Learning Value]
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0506 AND P0507)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P0506 or P0507 and other DTCs are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0506 or P0507 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
OK:
NG
5/7
8/6/12
OK
3.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
OK:
No leaks from the intake system.
NG
OK
4.
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (THROTTLE VALVE)
(a) Check the throttle with motor body assembly condition
OK:
Throttle valve is not contaminated with foreign objects and moves smoothly.
NG
REPLACE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY

ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
CONFIRM WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS

(d) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(e) Read DTCs.
Result
6/7
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTC is output
END
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P050A,P050B: Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance (
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BFY08MX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P050A,P050B: Cold Start Idle Air Control System
DTC
P050A
Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance
DTC
P050B
Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance
DESCRIPTION
Cold start emission reduction strategy (CSERS) is employed to shorten the time to catalyst light-off from
cold start. CSERS consists of retarded ignition timing and increased engine idle speed for a calibrated
period of time. This monitor detects malfunctions of the ECM commanded ignition timing and engine idle
speed not reaching the target values.
DTC
NO.
The engine speed does not achieve the target engine speed for 7
P050A seconds with engine cooled down.
The ignition timing is not retarded for 7 seconds, despite rapid

P050B warming control of the catalyst (to retard the ignition timing).
TROUBLE AREA
Throttle with
motor body
assembly
Mass air flow
meter
PCV system
Air cleaner
filter element
Intake system
VVT system
Wire harness
or connector
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs

(Related)
P050A: Cold start emission reduction strategy functional

check
P050B: Cold start emission reduction strategy functional
check
Throttle with motor body assembly
Mass air flow meter
Vacuum sensor assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BFY08MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/11
8/6/12
Duration
7 seconds
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Vehicle speed
2 km/h (1.2 mph) or less
Throttle position
Less than 0.296%
Elapsed time after gear position change N D
3 seconds or more
P050A
80C (176F) or less
Integrated amount of intake

air
Less than 800 g (varies with engine coolant temperature at engine

start)
Elapsed time after engine

start
2 seconds or more
P050B
80C (176F) or less
Integrated amount of intake air
Less than 800 g (varies with engine coolant temperature at

engine start)
Commanded ignition timing with

CSERS
3CA or less

P050A
Less than -300 rpm
P050B
Final commanded ignition timing - Commanded ignition timing with CSERS
More than 7CA
2/11
8/6/12

3. Check the coolant temperature recorded in the Freeze Frame Data.
7. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.
8. Check that the coolant temperature is the same as that recorded in the Freeze Frame Data.
HINT:
If the conditions are not met, then turn the ignition switch off, and wait until the conditions
are met.
or higher.
HINT:
13. Input the DTC: P050A or P50B.
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A

HINT:
3/11
8/6/12
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0102
HINT:
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P050A OR P050B)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P050A or P050B is output
DTC P050A or P050B and other DTCs are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P050A or P050B are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
4/11
8/6/12
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL TRIM)
HINT:
Calculate the total fuel trim values to check the characteristic deviation of the mass air flow meter.

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
(e) Read the values displayed on the Techstream at engine idle.
(f) Add together the Short FT #1 and Long FT #1 values to obtain the total fuel trim.
Standard:
Total of Short FT #1 and Long FT #1 values is between -20% and 20%.
NG
CHECK PCV SYSTEM
OK
3.
(a) Check that there are no deposits around the throttle valve and throttle valve condition.
OK:
No deposits around the throttle valve and throttle valve moves smoothly.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK

P050A OR P050B)
5/11
8/6/12
4.
.
(DTC P050A OR P050B)
NEXT
5.
CHECK PCV SYSTEM
OK:
NG
OK
6.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
OK:
No leaks from the intake system.
NG
OK
7.
CHECK AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check that the air cleaner filter element is not excessively contaminated with dirt or oil.
6/11
8/6/12
OK:
The air cleaner filter element is not excessively contaminated with dirt or oil.
NG
REPLACE AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUBASSEMBLY
OK
8.

CONTROL VALVE)
(a) Operate the VVT system through the Active test, and check if the VVT system is operating
normally.
(1) Perform the Active Test, referring to DTC P000A inspection procedure (VVT system for intake
camshaft)
.
(2) Perform the Active Test, referring to DTC P000B inspection procedure (VVT system for
exhaust camshaft)
.
NG
CHECK AND REPAIR VVT SYSTEM
OK
9.
10.
OK

P050A OR P050B)
NG

(a) Repair or replace the PCV valve or hose.
NEXT
7/11
8/6/12
11.
(a) Repair or replace the intake system.
NEXT
12.

REPLACE AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the air cleaner filter element sub-assembly
NEXT
13.
.
CHECK AND REPAIR VVT SYSTEM
(a) Check and repair the VVT system.

HINT:
Refer to DTC P000A Inspection Procedure (VVT system for intake camshaft)
Refer to DTC P000B Inspection Procedure (VVT system for exhaust camshaft)
.
.
NEXT
14.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P050A OR P050B)
NOTICE:
In this operation, the engine must be cold (approximately the same as the engine coolant
temperature recorded in the freeze frame data).

(d) Clear the DTCs
8/11
8/6/12
Pattern.
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(h) Input the DTC: P050A or P050B.
(i) Check the DTC judgment result.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P050A or P050B is output)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR

CONNECTION)
15.
(a) Check the connection and terminal contact pressure of connectors and wire harnesses between
the mass air flow meter and ECM
.
HINT:
NEXT
16.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P050A OR P050B)
NOTICE:

9/11
8/6/12
(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
END
17.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
18.
HINT:
If the results of the inspections performed in step 9 indicated no problem, proceed to the next step
without replacing the mass air flow meter.
10/11
8/6/12
NEXT
19.
NOTICE:

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
REPLACE ECM
END
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0560: System Voltage (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T8P0ZQX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0560: System Voltage (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0560
System Voltage
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The battery supplies electricity to the ECM even when the ignition switch is off. This power allows the
ECM to store data such as DTC history, freeze frame data and fuel trim values. If the battery voltage falls
below a minimum level, the memory is cleared and the ECM determines that there is a malfunction in the
power supply circuit. When the engine is next started, the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Open in back up
power source
circuit
Battery
Battery terminals
ECM
Back up power source terminal voltage is 3.5 V or less with the

P0560 engine running for 2.5 seconds or more.
HINT:
If DTC P0560 is stored, the ECM does not store other DTCs or the data stored in the ECM is partly
cleared.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0560: Back-up power supply for memory of ECM functional

check
ECM
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
2.5 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T8P0ZQX.html?sisuffix=ff&
None
1/6
8/6/12
Engine speed
500 rpm or more
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more

Voltage of back-up power
3.5 V or less

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

2/6
8/6/12

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
3/6
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
After turning ignition switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the cable from
the negative (-) battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable from
the negative (-) battery terminal notices before proceeding with work
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - BATTERY)
NOTICE:
.
(a) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal
(b) Disconnect the cable from the positive (+) battery terminal.
4/6
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-2 (BATT) - Battery positive (+) terminal
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-2 (BATT) or Battery positive (+) terminal - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
OK
2.
INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM
(a) Inspect the charging system
OK
3.

(d) Clear the DTCs
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
5/6
8/6/12

(i) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC P0560 is output
REPLACE ECM
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0604-P0606,P060A,P060B,P062F: Internal Control Module Ran
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W950HAX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0604-P0606,P060A,P060B,P062F: Internal Control Module
Random Access Memory (RAM) Error (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0604
Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error
DTC
P0605
Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error
DTC
P0606
ECM / PCM Processor
DTC
P060A
Internal Control Module Monitoring Processor Performance
DTC
P060B
Internal Control Module A/D Processing Performance
DTC
P062F
Internal Control Module EEPROM Error
DESCRIPTION
P0604
The ECM continuously monitors its internal memory status. This self-check ensures that the ECM
functioning properly. It is diagnosed by internal "mirroring" of the main CPU and sub CPU to detect the
Random Access Memory (RAM) errors. If outputs from these CPUs are different and deviate from the
standard, the ECM stores the DTC.
P0605
The ECM continuously monitors its internal memory status. This self-check ensures that the ECM
functioning properly. It is diagnosed by internal "mirroring" of the main CPU and sub CPU to detect the
Read Only Memory (ROM) errors. If outputs from these CPUs are different and deviate from the standard,
the ECM stores the DTC.
P0606
The ECM continuously monitors its main and sub CPUs. This self-check ensures that the ECM is
functioning properly. If outputs from the CPUs are different and deviate from the standard, the ECM
stores the DTC.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W950HAX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/6/12
P060A
The main CPU and sub CPU of the ECM perform data communication between each other. The main CPU
monitors the communications and WDC pulses from the sub CPU. If the malfunction is detected, the ECM
stores the DTC.
P060B
If a communication error occurs in the ECM, the ECM stores the DTC.
P062F
The ECM monitors its internal operation. If the ECM detects an internal malfunction, the ECM stores the
DTC.
DTC
P0604
P0605
P0606
P060A
P060B
P062F
DTC SETTING CONDITION

ECM internal error (RAM)
ECM internal error (ROM)
ECM internal error (Processor)
ECM internal error (Monitoring processor)
ECM internal error (A/D processor)
ECM internal error (EEPROM)
TROUBLE AREA
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0604: RAM in ECM functional check
P0605: ROM in ECM functional check
P0606: Control module processor functional check
Related DTCs
P060A: Internal control module monitoring processor performance

functional check
P060B: Internal control A/D processing performance functional check
P062F: Internal control EEPROM error functional check
(Main)
ECM
(Related)
Continuous: P0604, P0605, P0606, P060A, P060B

Once per driving cycle: P062F
2/7
8/6/12
0.512 seconds: P0604, P0605

2 times: P0606 (Instruction check) (Case 1)
0.512 seconds: P0606 (Instruction check) (Case 2)
0.504 seconds: P0606 (Software flow check)
0.048 seconds: P0606 (Software monitor check)
Duration
2.5 seconds: P0606 (Output driver communication check)

Immediately: P0606 (CAN register check)
0.024 seconds: P060A (Disable function observation IC)
0.016 seconds: P060A (Malfunction of observation IC calculation)
0.2 seconds: P060A (Observation IC resister monitoring)
0.2 seconds: P060B
2 driving cycles: P062F
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

All
None
P0604, P0605
Ignition switch
OFF to ON
P0606 (Instruction Check) (Case 1)

Ignition switch
OFF to ON

ETCS relay
On
Battery voltage
6.2 V or more
P0606 (Software Monitor Check)

ETCS relay
On
Battery voltage
6.2 V or more
P060A (Disable Function Observation IC)

Battery voltage
6 V or more
Main throttle sensor circuit continuity
No failure
Sub throttle sensor circuit continuity
No failure
3/7
8/6/12
Throttle sensor rationality check
No failure
Microcomputer disable
Off
Observation IC disable
On
P060A (Malfunction of Observation IC Calculation)

Battery voltage
6 V or more
Microcomputer disable
On
P060A (Observation IC Resister Monitoring)

Battery voltage
6 V or more
P060B
Battery voltage
6 V or more

P0604
Setting value can be written in all RAM area, and the values can be read correctly Fail to read correctly
P0605
Comparing Check sum data on ROM with Calculated sum data
Not equal

Instruction error
Detect

Calculated data through CPU and FPU (Floating point number Processing Unit) are compared
Not
with expectation
equal
P0606 (Software Flow Check)

Software flow error
Detect
P0606 (Output Driver Communication Check)

Driver IC communication
Malfunction
Port voltage of driver IC check
Low
P0606 (CAN Resister Check)

4/7
8/6/12
Comparison of data written to CAN register with data read from the CAN register
Not equal
P060A (Disable Function Observation IC)

Throttle angle - Memory throttle angle when monitoring
1.6% or more
P060A (Malfunction of Observation IC Calculation)

TAC disable request from observation IC
Not detected
P060A (Observation IC Resister Monitoring)

Comparison of data written to observation IC register with data read from the observation
Not
IC register
equal
P060B
A or B
A. A/D voltages for monitoring - 0 at target A/D voltages 0 V
More than 0.01953 V
B. 5 - A/D voltages for monitoring at target A/D voltages 5 V
More than 4.97925 V
P062F (Observation IC Resister Monitoring)

Fail writing to EEPROM
Yes

4. Turn the Techstream off.

5. Turn the ignition switch off.
6. Disconnect the Techstream.
7. Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and wait for 1 minute.
8. Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
11. Wait 16 seconds or more.
13. Read the pending DTCs.
HINT:
15. Input the DTC: P0604, P0605, P0606, P060A, P060B or P062F.
5/7
8/6/12
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A

HINT:
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information
as freeze frame data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help
determine if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air fuel ratio
was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
1.
READ DTC OUTPUT (DTC P0604, P0605, P0606, P060A, P060B AND/OR P062F)

(d) Clear the DTCs

6/7
8/6/12
(f) Turn the Techstream off.

(g) Disconnect the Techstream.
(h) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and wait for 1 minute.
(i) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
(j) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(k) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(l) Turn the Techstream on.
(m) Wait for 16 seconds or more.
(n) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(o) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC DTC P0604, P0605, P0606, P060A, P060B or P062F is output
REPLACE ECM
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0616,P0617: Starter Relay Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TA0123X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0616,P0617: Starter Relay Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0616
Starter Relay Circuit Low
DTC
P0617
Starter Relay Circuit High
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
While the engine is being cranked, battery voltage is applied to terminal STA of the ECM. If the ECM
detects the starter control (STA) signal after the engine is started, it determines that there is a
malfunction in the STA circuit. The ECM then illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
DTC NO.
P0616
P0617
No starter signal is input when engine started.

Starter signal remains input after engine started.

TROUBLE AREA
Starter system
ST relay circuit
ECM
Starter system
ST relay circuit
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
(Main)
(Related)
Duration
P0616: Starter switch circuit without push start system

functional check
P0617: Starter switch circuit without push start system
functional check
ST relay
Park/neutral position switch assembly
Ignition or starter switch assembly
Speed sensor
Continuous: P0617
Immediately: P0616
30 seconds: P0617
MIL Operation
Immediately
None
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TA0123X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12

P0616
Battery voltage
8 V or more
Engine condition
Stop to Run
Vehicle speed
Less than 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
P0617
Battery voltage
8 V or more
Engine condition
Run

P0616
Starter signal 1
Off
P0617
Starter signal 1
On

6. Idle the engine for 1 second or more.
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
2/6
8/6/12
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A
HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to Starter Signal Circuit
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
The following troubleshooting flowchart is based on the premise that the engine can be cranked
normally.
If the engine does not crank, proceed to Problem Symptoms Table
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (STARTER SIGNAL, STARTER SWITCH)
3/6
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Starter Signal and Starter Switch.
(e) Read the value displayed on the Techstream when the ignition switch is turned to ON and
cranking.
OK:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
CONDITION
Starter Signal
Starter Switch
NORMAL CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Cranking
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Cranking
ON
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
2.
INSPECT RELAY (ST)
(a) Inspect the ST relay
NG
REPLACE RELAY (ST)
OK
4/6
8/6/12
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ST RELAY - ECM)
(a) Remove the ST relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
ST relay terminal 3 - A33-17 (STSW2)
Always
Below 1
ST relay terminal 1 - A35-26 (STA)
Always
Below 1
4.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
ST relay terminal 3 or A33-17 (STSW2) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
ST relay terminal 1 or A35-26 (STA) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
CHECK STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
CONNECTOR

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(j) Read DTCs.
5/6
8/6/12
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTC is output
HINT:
REPLACE ECM
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P062D,P1261-P1264: No. 1 Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Performa
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XH6022X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P062D,P1261-P1264: No. 1 Fuel Injector Driver Circuit
DTC
P062D
No. 1 Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Performance
DTC
P1261
DI Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1)
DTC
P1262
DTC
P1263
DTC
P1264
DESCRIPTION
The D-4S system has two fuel injection methods. One is the in-cylinder direct injection method that
directly injects pressurized fuel into the combustion chamber. The other is the intake port injection
method. The ECM determines which fuel injection method to use in accordance with the engine
conditions. For the in-cylinder direction injection method, the injector driver (EDU) in the engine room
operates the fuel injectors (for direction injection) at high speeds. The EDU receives fuel injection request
signals from the ECM and converts the signals to high voltage / high current injector operation signals to
operate the fuel injectors (for direction injection).
The fuel injection sequence occurs in numerical order from No. 1 to No. 4.
The ECM monitors the EDU at all times. If drivers or fuel injectors are malfunctioning, the EDU sends fuel
injector operation condition signals (fail signals IJF1 to IJF2) to the ECM. When the ECM receives the
signals, the ECM stops the fuel injection control of the appropriate cylinders, cuts voltage to the
appropriate injector relay, and illuminates the MIL.
DTC
NO.
When injection is finished in all cylinders, the diagnostic signal

from the EDU does not change (open or short in the injector
P062D
or EDU circuit).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XH6022X.html?sisuffix=ff&
TROUBLE AREA
Open or short in
injector driver (EDU)
circuit
ECM
1/11
8/6/12
When the injection of No. 1 cylinder is finished, the diagnostic

signal from injector driver (EDU) does not change (open or
P1261
short in No. 1 cylinder injector circuit ).

P1262

injector (for direct
1 cylinder)
Fuel injector
assembly (for direct
injection) (No. 1
cylinder)
ECM

2 cylinder)
Fuel injector
injection) (No. 2
cylinder)
ECM
P1263

3 cylinder)


Fuel injector

injection) (No. 3
cylinder)
ECM
P1264

4 cylinder)


Fuel injector

injection) (No. 4
cylinder)
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
P062D: Fuel injector driver circuit functional check
2/11
8/6/12
Related DTCs
P1261: Direct fuel injector functional check (Cylinder 1)

Required Sensors/Components Fuel injector assembly (for direct injection)

(Main)
(Related)

Continuous
0.225 seconds or more (varies with engine speed): P062D
Duration
20 counts [0.33 seconds or more (varies with engine speed)]: P1261,

P1262, P1263, P1264
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None
Battery voltage
8.7 V or more
Engine speed
7450 rpm or less
Injection time
0.7 msec. or more

P062D
Falling edge for all injectors
Not detected
P1261, P1262, P1263, P1264

Falling edge of injector output signal from injector driver (EDU)
Not detected

9. Read the DTC.
3/11
8/6/12
HINT:
11. Input the DTC: P062D, P1261, P1262, P1263 or P1264.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
4/11
8/6/12
HINT:
If DTC P1261 is output, check the No. 1 fuel injector (for direct injection) (No. 1 cylinder) circuit.
5/11
8/6/12
If the current from the INJ relay is cut because DTC P062D is stored, DTC P1235 will be stored
even if the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) is normal.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
P1261, P1262, P1263 and/or P1264 are output
DTC P062D is output
CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (ECM INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU))
2.
(a) Disconnect the injector driver (EDU) connectors.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C3-2 (IJ1-) - C3-5 (IJ1+)
20C (68F)
1.74 to 2.04
C4-1 (IJ2-) - C4-4 (IJ2+)
20C (68F)
1.74 to 2.04
6/11
8/6/12
C3-1 (IJ3-) - C3-4 (IJ3+)
20C (68F)
1.74 to 2.04
C4-3 (IJ4-) - C4-6 (IJ4+)
20C (68F)
1.74 to 2.04
HINT:
The standard values shown are fuel injector assembly resistance values.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C3-2 (IJ1-) or C3-5 (IJ1+) - Body ground
20C (68F)
1 M or higher
20C (68F)
1 M or higher
20C (68F)
1 M or higher
20C (68F)
1 M or higher
NG
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR

DIRECT INJECTION)
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU))
(a) Disconnect the ECM connectors.

(b) Disconnect the injector driver (EDU) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-14 (#1) - C1-3 (IJT1)
Always
Below 1
A36-25 (#2) - C1-12 (IJT2)
Always
Below 1
A36-24 (#3) - C1-11 (IJT3)
Always
Below 1
A36-23 (#4) - C1-2 (IJT4)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
7/11
8/6/12
A36-14 (#1) or C1-3 (IJT1) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CLEAR DTC

(d) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
5.
CHECK ECM (ECM OUTPUT VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the injector driver (EDU) connector.
(b) Inspect the ECM using an oscilloscope.

(1) While cranking the engine, check waveform the
terminals of the ECM connector.
Standard:
8/11
8/6/12
Signal waveform appears as shown in the illustration.

A36-14 (#1) or A36-23 (#4) - Body
ground
ECM Terminal
Name
A36-25 (#2) or A36-24 (#3) - Body

ground
Tester Range
Condition
Cranking
*a
6.

(ECM)
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (ECM - INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU))

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-11 (IJF1) - C1-6 (IJF1)
Always
Below 1
A34-31 (IJF2) - C1-5 (IJF2)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-11 (IJF1) or C1-6 (IJF1) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A34-31 (IJF2) or C1-5 (IJF2) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
9/11
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
7.
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (ECM OUTPUT VOLTAGE)

(1) While start the engine, check waveform the terminals
of the ECM connector.
Standard:
ECM Terminal Name
A34-11 (IJF1) - Body ground

A34-31 (IJF2) - Body ground
Tester Range
Condition
Idling
*a
8.

(ECM)
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
(a) Inspect the resistance of the fuel injector (for direct injection)
NG
OK
DIRECT INJECTION)
10/11
8/6/12
CONNECTOR
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0700: Transmission Control System (MIL Request) (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002KQO09CX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0700: Transmission Control System (MIL Request) (2013
FR-S)
DTC
P0700
Transmission Control System (MIL Request)
DESCRIPTION
The ECM and TCM communicate with each other via the CAN communication line. If the TCM detects an
automatic transmission malfunction, the ECM receives this signal.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Automatic transmission system malfunction received from

P0700 the TCM
system
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0700: Transmission control system (MIL request) functional

check
ECM
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
2.5 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

U0073, U0101, U0402 (CAN system)
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more

MIL request flag from TCM
Set
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002KQO09CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
2/3
8/6/12
DTC is not output
DTC is output
GO TO AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
2.
READ OUTPUT DTC

(d) Clear the DTC
(i) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC P0700 is output
REPLACE ECM
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0851,P0852: Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XCT0QKX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0851,P0852: Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low (2013
FR-S)
DTC
P0851
Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low
DTC
P0852
Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
for Manual
Transmission
for Manual Transmission
P0851
No non-neutral position detected in shift change running state

(judged based on changes in the relationship between vehicle
speed and engine speed) (2 trip detection logic)
for Automatic Transmission

The CAN data received from the TCM is "P or N" position signal
while the park/neutral position switch assembly is not in P or
N position. (2 trip detection logic)
Open or short
in neutral
position switch
signal circuit
Neutral position
switch
ECM
for Automatic
Transmission
Open or short
in park/neutral
position switch
signal circuit
Park/neutral
position switch
assembly
ECM
TCM
for Manual
Transmission
Open or short
in neutral
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XCT0QKX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/11
8/6/12
position switch
signal circuit
Neutral position
switch
ECM
No neutral position detected in shift change running state

(judged based on changes in the relationship between vehicle
speed and engine speed) (2 trip detection logic)
P0852
for Automatic
Transmission
The CAN data received from the TCM is other than "P or N"
position signal while the park/neutral position switch
assembly is in P or N position. (2 trip detection logic)
Open or short
in park /
neutral position
switch signal
circuit
Park/neutral
position switch
assembly
ECM
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM detects the shift change status from the neutral position switch signal, and detects the
current selected gear from the engine speed and vehicle speed. If the neutral position switch
signal and the shift change status cannot be coordinated, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction,
illuminates the MIL, and stores the DTC.

If the ECM cannot coordinate the N, P or neutral information from the park/neutral position switch
signal with the shift information sent from the TCM through CAN communication, then the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction, illuminates the MIL, and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0851: Neutral position switch circuit continuity (Low

voltage)
P0852: Neutral position switch circuit continuity (High
voltage)
Park/neutral position switch assembly

Neutral position switch
(Related)
2/11
8/6/12
Duration
3 counts: for Manual transmission

6.4 seconds: for Automatic transmission
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

ST relay
Off
Starter
Off
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Driving condition change from the following condition A to B:
A. All of the following conditions are met:
(a) and (b)
(a) Vehicle speed
Less than 0 km/h (0 mph)
(b) Engine speed
550 to 880 rpm
B. All of the following conditions are met:
(a) and (b)
(a) Vehicle speed
(b) Engine speed
1600 to 2600 rpm

U0073, U0101, U0402 (CAN system)
ST relay
Off
Starter
Off
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Range switch on automatic transmission (TCM)
No failure
Engine speed
500 rpm or more

P0851 (for Manual Transmission)
Switch signal for manual transmission
P0852 (for Manual Transmission)

Switch signal for manual transmission
Battery voltage X 0.6 or more
3/11
8/6/12
P0851 (for Automatic Transmission)

Park/neutral position switch signal
Park/neutral position from TCM
On
P0852 (for Automatic Transmission)

Park/neutral position switch signal
Battery voltage X 0.6 or more
Park/neutral position from TCM
Off


or higher.
4/11
8/6/12
7. Change gear position 3 times or more during Accelerating vehicle to 64 km/h (40 mph) [A]. (for
Manual Transmission)
CAUTION:
laws.
8. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6.25 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [B]. (for Automatic
Transmission)
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
N/A

System normal
System abnormal
HINT:
HINT:
5/11
8/6/12
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
6/11
8/6/12
Stop light switch assembly conditions can be checked using the Techstream.
b. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
d. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Stop Light Switch and ST1.
e. Check the Data List indication when the brake pedal is depressed and released.
BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
ST1
Depressed
ON
ON
Released
OFF
OFF
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK VEHICLE TYPE
(a) Confirm the transmission.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE

OF PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
ASSEMBLY)
2.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH)
7/11
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the neutral position switch connector.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A54-1 - A54-2
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Neutral Position Switch)
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NEUTRAL

POSITION SWITCH - ECM)
OK
3.
INSPECT NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
(a) Inspect the neutral position switch
4.
NG
REPLACE NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH - ECM)

(b) Disconnect the neutral position switch connector.
8/11
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-16 (NSW) - A54-2
Always
Below 1
A33-4 (EC) - A54-1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-16 (NSW) or A54-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A33-4 (EC) or A54-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
5.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
L2-4 - L2-5
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly)
9/11
8/6/12
NG

(PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
ASSEMBLY - ECM - BODY GROUND)
OK
6.
INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the park/neutral position switch assembly
7.
NG
REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
OK
ASSEMBLY
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY ECM - BODY GROUND)

(b) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-16 (NSW) - L2-4
Always
Below 1
L2-5 - Body ground
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A33-16 (NSW) or L2-4 - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
10/11
8/6/12
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1109,P2109: Throttle Deposit Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043HM01EX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1109,P2109: Throttle Deposit Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P1109
Throttle Deposit Malfunction
DTC
P2109
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor "A" Minimum Stop Performance
DESCRIPTION
The idling speed is controlled by the Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS). The ETCS is comprised of
a throttle actuator, which operates the throttle valve, and a throttle position sensor, which detects the
opening amount of the throttle valve. The ECM controls the throttle actuator to adjust the throttle valve
opening amount so that the idling speed is maintained at the target idling speed.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
ISC learning value is 95% or more of the maximum learning ISC learning
Throttle with
P1109 value, and 50% or more deposit is accumulated for 10 seconds continuously. motor body
assembly
P2109
The throttle position sensor opening angle when learning the fullyThrottle with
closed position is less than 9.975or more than 20.025.
motor body
When the throttle actuator current is off, the difference between
assembly
the actual throttle position and the fully-closed position is less
than 1.162.
HINT:
The ISC learned value is the calculated intake air amount corresponding to the throttle opening
amount necessary to maintain the idling speed.
This malfunction is only detected once per trip. After it has been detected once, the system will not
monitor for the malfunction for the rest of the trip.
The system uses the throttle with motor body assembly and mass air flow meter assembly to
detect this malfunction.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If there are deposits in the throttle valve, a decrease in the ISC flow rate may cause engine stall or
unstable idling. Therefore, the necessary ISC flow rate for idling is maintained using the ISC learned
value and feedback. The ECM stores this DTC if the ISC learned value approaches its limit.
MONITOR STRATEGY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000043HM01EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
Related DTCs
P2109: Throttle position sensor minimum stop rationality

check
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
0.008 seconds: Case 1

0.08 seconds: Case 2
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None
Battery voltage
6 V or more

Case 1
Throttle minimum stop position
Less than -4.02% (0.399 V) or more than 4.02% (0.801 V)
Case 2
Throttle position at ignition switch OFF to ON - Throttle minimum stop
Less than 0.71% (0.035
position
V)

2/4
8/6/12

or higher.
7. Depress the accelerator pedal fully and release the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A

HINT:
HINT:
3/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Never clean the throttle with motor body assembly.
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records engine conditions when
a malfunction occurs. This information can be useful when troubleshooting.
Since a pending DTC is not stored for this DTC, it takes time to confirm whether the malfunction
has been successfully repaired by checking for this DTC. When confirming whether the malfunction
has been successfully repaired, compare "ISC Learning Value" recorded in the freeze frame data
with "ISC Learning Value" in the Data List after repairs have been made to save time.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO P2109)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:
GO TO DTC CHART

ASSEMBLY
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1160,P2119: Throttle Valve Return Spring Malfunction (2013 FR
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PFX0SWX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1160,P2119: Throttle Valve Return Spring Malfunction
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P1160
Throttle Valve Return Spring Malfunction
DTC
P2119
Throttle Actuator Control Throttle Body Range / Performance
DESCRIPTION
The electronic throttle control system is composed of the throttle actuator, throttle position sensor,
accelerator pedal position sensor, and ECM. The ECM operates the throttle actuator to regulate the
throttle valve in response to driver inputs. The throttle position sensor detects the opening angle of the
throttle valve, and provides the ECM with feedback so that the throttle valve can be appropriately
controlled by the ECM.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
After setting throttle valve opening angle at 40 in throttle actuator

control, the change in opening angle is less than 2 after throttle actuator Throttle with motor
P1160
has been off.
body assembly
The throttle valve opening angle continues to vary greatly from the target
P2119 opening angle.
Electronic
throttle
control
system
Wire
harness
or
connector
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
P1160
When the ECM cuts the power supply to the throttle actuator, the throttle valve returns to the fullyclosed position by the spring. If the throttle valve does not return with ETCS relay off, the ECM judges
throttle valve is stuck and then the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
P2119
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PFX0SWX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
The ECM determines the actual opening angle of the throttle valve from the throttle position sensor
signal. The actual opening angle is compared to the target opening angle commanded by the ECM. If the
difference between these two values is outside the standard range, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the electronic throttle control system. The ECM then illuminates the MIL and stores the
DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P1160: Throttle return spring functional check

P2119: Throttle actuator control functional check
Throttle actuator (throttle with motor body assembly)
(Related)
Continuous
Immediately: P1160
5 seconds: P2119 (Case 1 and Case 5)
Duration
2 seconds: P2119 (Case 2)

More than 248 msec (varies with throttle position): P2119
(Case 3)
1 second: P2119 (Case 4)
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

All
None
P1160
Ignition switch
Off
Time after ignition switch off
3.392 seconds
Throttle position sensor 1 circuit DTC
Not detected
Throttle position sensor 2 circuit DTC
Not detected
Throttle position sensor rationality DTC
Not detected
Battery voltage
6 V or more
P2119 (Case 1)
Battery voltage
6.2 V or more
ETCS relay
On
2/9
8/6/12
Engine speed
Less than 500 rpm
P2119 (Case 2)
Battery voltage
6.2 V or more
ETCS relay
On
Engine speed
500 rpm or higher
P2119 (Case 3)
ETCS relay
On
Engine speed
500 rpm or higher
Battery voltage
6.2 V or more
Throttle position sensor 1 value
More than target throttle position
P2119 (Case 4)
ETCS relay
On
Engine speed
500 rpm or higher
Battery voltage
6.2 V or more
Throttle position sensor 1 value
Less than target throttle position
P2119 (Case 5):

ETCS relay
On
Engine speed
Less than 300 rpm
Battery voltage
6.2 V or more

P1160
Throttle position sensor 1 at diagnosis start - throttle position sensor 1
Less than 1.6%
P2119 (Case 1 and Case 2)

Throttle motor control duty
95% or more
P2119 (Case 3, Case 4 and Case 5)

Target throttle position - throttle position sensor
More than 3.72% (varies with target throttle
position)
3/9
8/6/12

or higher.
8. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6.25 mph) or more for 1 minute or more.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE
N/A

HINT:
4/9
8/6/12
HINT:
FAIL-SAFE
When this DTC or other DTCs relating to Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) malfunctions are
stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the ECM cuts the current to the throttle
actuator, and the throttle valve is returned to a fully closed throttle angle by the return spring. The ECM
then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing,
in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle, to allow the vehicle to continue running at a
minimal speed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and gently, the vehicle can be driven slowly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P2101
NOTICE:
Never clean the throttle with motor body assembly.
procedure.
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [Throttle Position No. 1, Throttle Motor Position No. 2, Throttle
Position Command, Throttle Motor Duty (Open) and Throttle Motor Duty (Close)]
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P1160 OR P2119)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
5/9
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P1160 and/or P2119 is output
DTC P1160 and/or P2119 and other DTCs are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P1160 and/or P2119 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (THROTTLE POSITION)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Throttle Position No. 1 and Throttle
Position Command.
(h) Read the values displayed on the Techstream while fully depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal quickly.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Throttle Position No. 1 does not change
Throttle Position No. 1 changes even a little
HINT:
When a DTC is output, the system changes to fail-safe mode. Therefore, only use the data up until the
time the DTC is stored for confirmation.
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY

ASSEMBLY (VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE VALVE)
6/9
8/6/12
3.
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (RESISTANCE OF THROTTLE

ACTUATOR)
(a) Inspect the throttle with motor body assembly
NG
.
ASSEMBLY
OK
4.
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE

VALVE)
(a) Check for contamination between the throttle valve and housing. If necessary, clean the
throttle with motor body assembly. Also, check that the throttle valve moves smoothly.
OK:
Throttle valve is not contaminated with foreign objects and moves smoothly.
NG

ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (THROTTLE POSITION)

(d) Clear the DTCs
7/9
8/6/12
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Throttle Position No. 1, Throttle
Position No. 2 and Throttle Position Command.
(h) Read the values displayed on the Techstream while wiggling the ECM wire harness.
(j) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Value in Data List changes when wire harness is wiggled, or DTC is output
Other than above
6.
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (ECM - THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY

ASSEMBLY)
(a) As the DTC was stored due to a change in the contact resistance of the connector, repair or
replace the wire harness or connector.
NEXT
7.
END
NEXT
8.
8/9
8/6/12

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(j) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC P1160 and/or P2119 is output
REPLACE ECM
END
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1235: High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XCU02ZX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1235: High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P1235
High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) is attached to the insulator, which is attached to the cylinder
head cover. The pump activates according to the position of the cam on the intake side camshaft (bank
2).
The fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) increases the pressure of the fuel supplied from the fuel
pump in the fuel tank to the specified fuel pressure according to the operating condition, and it feeds the
fuel to the fuel delivery pipe.
DTC
NO.
When fuel pump for high pressure is operating, the diagnostic signal
from injector driver (EDU) does not change (open or short in the fuel
P1235
pump (for high pressure) circuit).
TROUBLE AREA
Open or
short in fuel
pump (for
high
pressure)
Fuel pump
assembly
(for high
pressure)
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P1235: High pressure fuel pump functional check
Fuel pump assembly (for high pressure)
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
20 counts [More than 0.1 seconds (varies with engine

speed)]
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XCU02ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
Monitor runs whenever these DTCs are not

present
None
Battery voltage
10.5 V or more
More than 5 seconds
Starter
Off
Active crank angle of high pressure fuel

pump
More than 7CA (varies with engine speed) and less

than 148CA

High pressure fuel pump output signal
No falling edge detected

9. Read the DTC.
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

2/9
8/6/12
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If the current from the INJ relay is cut because DTC P062D is stored, DTC P1235 will be stored
even if the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) is normal.
PROCEDURE
3/9
8/6/12
1.
INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)
(a) Inspect the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure)
REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH
NG
PRESSURE)
OK
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU) - FUEL PUMP

ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C2-3 (FP-) - C29-2
Always
Below 1
C2-4 (FP+) - C29-1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C2-3 (FP-) or C29-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
C2-4 (FP+) or C29-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU))
4/9
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-32 (FPD) - C1-8 (FPD)
Always
Below 1
A34-13 (FPF) - C1-7 (FPF)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-32 (FPD) or C1-8 (FPD) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A34-13 (FPF) or C1-7 (FPF) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
INSPECT ECM (FPD VOLTAGE)

(1) While idling the engine, check the waveform the

ECM Terminal Name
A34-32 (FPD) - Body ground
Tester Range
Condition
Idling
5/9
8/6/12
*a
(ECM)
*b
FPD Terminal Waveform Normal Waveform

Standard:
HINT:
The FPD terminal waveform is output only right after the
engine starts. If this DTC is stored when the engine is started
from ignition switch off, the system enters fail-safe mode and
the waveform is not output.
NG
OK
5.
INSPECT ECM (FPF VOLTAGE)

(1) While idling the engine, check the waveform the terminals of the ECM connector.
ECM Terminal Name
CH1: A34-32 (FPD) - Body ground

CH2: A34-13 (FPF) - Body ground
Tester Range
Condition
Idling
6/9
8/6/12
*a

(ECM)
*b
FPD Terminal and FPF Terminal Waveform Normal Waveform
*c
FPF Terminal Waveform NG Waveform 1
*d
FPF Terminal Waveform NG Waveform 2
HINT:
*: If the FPF terminal waveform is similar to the FPF terminal waveform NG waveform 1, stop the
7/9
8/6/12
engine and disconnect injector driver (EDU) connector. Then, while cranking the engine, check to see
if there is a difference between the FPF terminal waveform and the previous one.
Result:
FPD
FPF TERMINAL WAVEFORM
PROCEED
TERMINAL
WAVEFORM
TO
OK
OK
OK
NG
waveform
1*
Does not change from NG waveform 1 (FPF terminal waveform

remains at GND even after disconnecting the injector driver (EDU)
connector and cranking the engine)

Changes to NG waveform 2 (FPF terminal waveform rises from GND
after disconnecting the injector driver (EDU) connector and cranking
the engine)
OK
6.
NG waveform 2
REPLACE ECM

(c) Inspect the ECM using an oscilloscope.
(1) While cranking the engine, check the waveform the

ECM Terminal Name
A34-32 (FPD) - Body ground
Tester Range
Condition
Cranking
8/9
8/6/12
*a
*b

(ECM)
FPD Terminal Waveform Normal Waveform
Standard:
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1449: Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch Stuck O
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000005967000X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1449: Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch Stuck
ON (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P1449
Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch Stuck ON
DTC SUMMARY
DTC
NO.
P1449
MONITORING
ITEM
CONDITION
The canister pressure

Canister
sensor output value has
filter clogged
rapidly changed.
TROUBLE AREA
DETECTION DETECTION
TIMING
LOGIC
Clogged on
EVAP line (drain
hose, pipe and
tube)
Clogged on
EVAP line
(canister pump
module)
Clogged on
canister pump
module
While
ignition
switch off
2 trip
DESCRIPTION
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors for canister filter in the canister pump module. The pressure is checked every 5
seconds and if the pressure difference becomes more than threshold, stops the EVAP system monitor.
The ECM then illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (2 trip detection logic).
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTC
P1449: Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch Stuck

ON
Purge valve
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
6 seconds
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000005967000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Elapsed time after engine
20 seconds or more
ELCM vacuum pump
Not active
ELCM switching valve
Off (Open)
All of the following condition are met
A and B
A. Pressure difference in 0.064 seconds
0.66661 kPa [5 mmHg] or less
B. Period to satisfy above condition

Pressure difference in 5 seconds
Higher than 1.21 kPa [9 mmHg]
MONITOR RESULT

NOTICE:
3. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure).
Automatic Mode.
2/5
8/6/12
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT EVAP HOSE (DRAIN HOSE, PIPE AND TUBE)
(a) Check for filter blockage in the drain hose, pipe and tube.
OK:
OK: No blockages in the drain hose, pipe and tube.
NG
REPLACE EVAP HOSE (DRAIN HOSE, PIPE AND

TUBE)
OK
3/5
8/6/12
2.
INSPECT EVAP HOSE (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - DRAIN TUBE)
(a) Check for filter blockage in the EVAP purge line between the canister pump module and drain
tube.
OK:
No blockages in the EVAP purge line between the canister pump module and drain tube.
NG
REPLACE EVAP HOSE (CANISTER PUMP

MODULE - DRAIN TUBE)
OK
3.
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (CANISTER FILTER)
(a) Check for filter blockage in the canister pump module (canister filter).
OK:
No blockages in the canister filter.
NG
REPLACE CANISTER PUMP MODULE (CANISTER

FILTER)
OK
4.
NEXT
5.
REPLACE EVAP HOSE (DRAIN HOSE, PIPE AND TUBE)
NEXT
6.
PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM
PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM
REPLACE EVAP HOSE (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - DRAIN TUBE)
4/5
8/6/12
(a) Replace the clogged EVAP purge line.
NEXT
7.
PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM
REPLACE CANISTER PUMP MODULE (CANISTER FILTER)
NEXT
8.
PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM
NOTICE:
When the temperature of the fuel is 35C (95F) or more, a large amount of vapor forms and any
check results become inaccurate. When performing an Evaporative System Check, keep the fuel

(d) Clear the DTCs
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check /
Automatic Mode.
(f) After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for pending DTCs by entering the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
HINT:
NEXT
END
5/5
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000021150D5X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1604: Startability Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P1604
Startability Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
This DTC is stored when the engine does not start even though the starter signal is input or when the engine takes
a long time to start, and when the engine speed is low or the engine stalls just after the engine starts.
Using the Techstream, the conditions present when the DTC was stored can be confirmed by referring to the freeze
frame data. Freeze frame data records engine conditions when a malfunction occurs. This information can be useful
when troubleshooting.
It is necessary to check if the vehicle ran out of fuel before performing troubleshooting, as this DTC is also stored
when there is engine starting trouble due to running out of fuel.
DTC
NO.
P1604
The engine speed is less than 500 rpm with the starter signal on for
a certain amount of time (Depending on the engine coolant
temperature and atmospheric pressure).
After the engine starts (engine speed is 500 rpm or more), the
engine speed drops to 300 rpm or less immediately.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000021150D5X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
TROUBLE AREA
Engine
immobiliser
system
Engine
assembly
(excess friction,
compression
loss)
Starter
assembly
Crankshaft
position sensor
VVT sensor
Engine coolant
temperature
sensor
Fuel pump
assembly
Fuel pump
control circuit
(low pressure
side)
Fuel pipes
Fuel injector
assembly (for
port injection)
Throttle with
motor body
assembly
Pressure
regulator
1/76
regulator
Battery
Flywheel (for
Manual
Transmission)
Drive plate (for
Automatic
Transmission)
Spark plug
Ignition coil
circuit
Intake system
Camshaft timing
oil control valve
Mass air flow
meter
Air fuel ratio
sensor
Valve timing
Fuel
Purge valve
Intake valve
Exhaust valve
ECM
HINT:
In contrast to normal malfunction diagnosis for components, circuits and systems, DTC P1604 is used to
determine the malfunctioning area from the problem symptoms and freeze frame data when the user
mentions problems such as starting difficulty.
As these DTCs can be stored as a result of certain user actions, even if these DTCs are output, if the
customer makes no mention of problems, clear these DTCs without performing any troubleshooting and
return the vehicle to the customer.
If any other DTCs are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs first.
When the Data List item "Immobiliser Fuel Cut" is ON, the engine cannot be started.
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records engine conditions when a
malfunction occurs. This information can be useful when troubleshooting.
When confirming the freeze frame data, be sure to check all 5 sets of freeze frame data
.
When confirming freeze frame data, if there are multiple items related to the cause of the malfunction,
perform troubleshooting for all related items.
Try to start the vehicle under the conditions recorded in the freeze frame data which were present when the
malfunction occurred. Confirm the data at this time and compare it with the freeze frame data.
If the malfunction does not reoccur, carefully check the vehicle conditions from when the malfunction occurred
using freeze frame data.
When performing inspections, jiggle the relevant wire harnesses and connectors in an attempt to reproduce
malfunctions that do not always occur.
If the same inspection or replacement procedure appears 2 times when performing an inspection procedure,
it is not necessary to repeat the procedure the second time.
1. Malfunction Recurrence and Inspection Areas

(a) Freeze frame data exists, but the malfunction (starting difficulty) has not reoccurred and the malfunction
2/76
conditions are unknown.

(1) The engine speed recorded in the freeze frame data is 0 rpm (the engine does not crank).
HINT:
One of the following problems may be present: battery depletion, excess engine friction, a starter malfunction
or a crankshaft position sensor malfunction.
If the battery voltage is less than 9 V during cranking, there is a high probability that engine
friction is abnormal.
If the battery voltage drops to 5 V or less when starting the engine, the battery may be
malfunctioning.
If the battery voltage fluctuates while cranking the engine, it can be concluded that cranking is
being performed. When the engine speed is 0 rpm, the crankshaft position sensor and/or ECM
may be malfunctioning.
(2) All engine speeds recorded in the freeze frame data are between 100 and 250 rpm (the engine cranks
but there is no combustion).
HINT:
If the engine speed is between 100 and 250 rpm (no initial combustion), there may be a wiring problem or a
complete failure of an ignition or fuel system part.
Due to an engine coolant temperature sensor malfunction, the fuel injection volume is extremely
high or low and the engine may not be able to be started.
3/76
(3) The engine speed recorded in the freeze frame data is 250 rpm or higher (the initial combustion and
starter turnoff timing is too late).
HINT:
If the engine speed is 250 rpm or higher (combustion occurs but the initial combustion and starter turnoff
timing is too late), the fuel injection volume is often incorrect (too low or too high) and determining the cause
of the malfunction is often difficult.
Due to an engine coolant temperature sensor malfunction, the fuel injection volume is extremely
high or low and engine starting trouble may occur.
If Long FT is incorrect, there may be a fuel supply problem due to the injectors or fuel pump being
clogged, etc.
If the engine cranking speed is too high, compression loss may have occurred due to carbon
interfering with the valve operation.
4/76
(b) When the malfunction (starting difficulty) can be reproduced, or malfunction conditions are known, perform
the following inspections ("Problem Symptoms" and "Systems to Inspect").
(1) Problem Symptoms
1. The engine does not crank.
HINT:
The starter is normal if a noise that indicates the starter pinion gear is extending is heard.
The battery may be fully depleted or there may be excess engine friction.
2. The engine cranking speed is abnormal.

HINT:
If the engine cranking speed is too high (for example, 300 rpm or higher with no
combustion), compression loss may have occurred because carbon interfered with valve
operation, etc.
3. There is no initial combustion.

HINT:
If there is no initial combustion, there is probably a wiring problem or an ignition or fuel
system part malfunction.
4. The engine stalls after starter turnoff.

HINT:
5/76
If the engine stalls after starter turnoff, the air-fuel ratio may be incorrect or the VVT may
have a problem returning.
5. The initial combustion and starter turnoff occur late.

HINT:
If the initial combustion and starter turnoff occur late, the fuel injection volume is probably
incorrect (too low or too high).
HINT:
Causes of fuel system malfunctions according to conditions present at the time of the
malfunction.
When 2 to 3 minutes have elapsed after stopping the engine: Fuel pressure loss due to
the pressure regulator failing to maintain the fuel pressure.
When 15 to 120 minutes have elapsed after stopping the engine: Problem with injector
fuel seal.
When a long time has elapsed after stopping the engine: Pressure regulator is stuck
open.
(2) Systems to Inspect
1. Intake system
2. Ignition system
3. Fuel system
2. INSPECTION FLOW
(a) Freeze frame data exists, but the malfunction (starting difficulty) has not reoccurred and the malfunction
conditions are unknown.
FREEZE
FRAME DATA
ITEM
RESULT
0 rpm (no engine cranking at all)
SUSPECTED AREA
Battery fully depleted

Engine assembly
(excess friction)
Starter assembly
Engine immobiliser
PROCEDURE
4 to 9
system
Crankshaft position
sensor
ECM
Fuel pump control
circuit (Low pressure
Engine Speed
100 to 250 rpm (engine cranks but no initial
combustion*1)
side)
Ignition system
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Fuel injection system
10 to 14
Engine assembly
6/76
(compression loss)
Fuel pump control
circuit (low pressure
side)
250 rpm or higher (combustion occurs but initial

combustion and starter turnoff*2 occur late)
15 to 23
HINT:
*1: First combustion after cranking begins.
*2: Condition when engine speed increases and starter can be turned off.
(b) When the malfunction (starting difficulty) can be reproduced, or when malfunction conditions are known.
(1) Problem Symptoms
PROBLEM SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SUSPECTED COMPONENT
Battery malfunction
Starting system
Starter assembly (includes

pinion gear wear or tooth
damage)
Starting system
The engine does not crank
Cranking speed too low
Cranking speed too high
There is no initial
combustion
PROCEDURE
26 to 31
Engine immobiliser system
Engine assembly
Engine assembly (excess

friction)
Drive plate wear or tooth
damage
Battery malfunction
Starting system
Starter assembly
Engine assembly

friction)
Engine assembly
Engine assembly (compression

loss)
Fuel supply problem
Cannot maintain pressure due

to pressure regulator
malfunction
Fuel injector leak
Fuel leak from fuel line
Fuel pump control circuit (Low
pressure side)
Fuel pump assembly
32 to 34
35 to 49
7/76
Engine stalls after starter

turnoff
Ignition system
malfunction
Spark plug
Ignition coil assembly
Air suction
Intake system connections
Deposits in throttle body
Throttle with motor body

assembly
VVT valve does not return

properly
Mass air flow meter

malfunction
Mass air flow meter
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
malfunction
The initial combustion and

starter turnoff occur late
50 to 56

sensor
Mass air flow meter

malfunction
Mass air flow meter
Abnormal A/F learned

value
Deviation from fuel

injection characteristics
Fuel injector assembly (for port

injection)
Wet-fouled or dry-fouled
spark plug
Spark plug
Lack of fuel pressure
Pressure regulator
Fuel pump assembly
Fuel pump control circuit (low
pressure side)
57 to 71
(2) Systems to Inspect

TROUBLESHOOTING
BY SYSTEM
Fuel system
troubleshooting A
SUSPECTED AREA
SUSPECTED COMPONENT
Abnormal A/F learned value

injection)
Rough idling
PROCEDURE
87 to 94
95 to 102
Abnormal fuel pressure
Fuel
Fuel pump assembly
Pressure regulator
Purge valve system

8/76
Fuel system
troubleshooting B
Fuel system
troubleshooting C
Intake system
troubleshooting
Ignition system
troubleshooting
Abnormal concentration of HC in
surge tank

injection)
Intake valve
Injection signal system malfunction

injection)
VVT sensor
ECM
Difference between ISC target value

and opening angle when idling
Engine assembly (compression

loss)
Valve timing
sensor
ECM
Camshaft and/or crankshaft position

sensor signal malfunction

system (including sensor
installation)
VVT sensor system (including
sensor installation)
ECM
103 to 105
73 to 76
84 to 86
106 to 108
77 to 83
109 to 115
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT AND RECORD FREEZE FRAME DATA

(d) Read the DTCs and record the freeze frame data.
HINT:
This freeze frame data shows the actual engine conditions when
engine starting trouble occurred.
When confirming the freeze frame data, be sure to check all 5 data
sets of freeze frame data.
The fourth set of freeze frame data is the data recorded when the
DTC is stored.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Only DTC P1604 is output
DTCs other than P1604 are output
9/76
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
CHECK ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Immobiliser Fuel Cut.
OK:
Immobiliser Fuel Cut is OFF.
HINT:
After reconnecting the battery cable, if the engine is started immediately (without waiting 1.8 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to ON), the engine will stop (due to the key verification process). The engine can be
started after that.
NG
REPAIR ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM
OK
3.
CHECK MALFUNCTION CONDITION
(a) Confirm the problem symptoms.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
Freeze frame data exists, but the starting difficulty cannot be reproduced and it is unknown what kind
of starting difficulty occurred
The problem symptoms can be reproduced, or the malfunction conditions are known
10/76
CONFIRM PROBLEM SYMPTOM
4.

(c) Using the Techstream, confirm the vehicle conditions recorded in the freeze frame data which were
present when the DTC was stored
.
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM
ENGINE SPEED
SUSPECTED AREA
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Minimum voltage
is below 5 V
All 5 sets of freeze frame data are 0 rpm (no

engine cranking at all)
60 to 250 rpm (engine cranks but no initial

combustion)
PROCEED
TO
Starter malfunction
Crankshaft position
sensor system
Minimum voltage
is 5 V or higher
Excess engine
friction
Engine immobiliser
system
ECM
Fuel pump control

side)
Ignition system
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Engine immobiliser
system
Engine assembly
250 rpm or higher (combustion occurs but initial

combustion and starter turnoff occur late)

Fuel pump control
side)
HINT:
11/76
When DTC P1604 is stored, either "Engine Start Hesitation"*1 or "Low Rev for Eng Start"*2 in the freeze frame
data will be ON. If "Low Rev for Eng Start" is ON, proceed to E.
*1: This value turns ON when the engine speed does not reach a certain value for a certain period of time when
starting the engine.
*2: This value turns ON when the engine stalls immediately after starting the engine. If "Low Rev for Eng Start"
is ON, as there is a possibility that the low engine speed or engine stall was caused by the user, confirm the
following freeze frame data items.
Immobiliser Fuel Cut

Engine Speed (Starter Off)
Shift SW Status (R, D Range)
5.
CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY

.
Result
FREEZE FRAME
DATA ITEM
RESULT
Minimum voltage is 9 V or higher and voltage

fluctuates*2, *3
Battery Voltage
Minimum voltage is 9 V or higher and voltage

does not fluctuate*1
Minimum voltage is 5 to 9 V*4
SUSPECTED AREA
Crankshaft position
sensor system
ECM
Starter system
Excess engine friction

PROCEED
TO
HINT:
*1: The 5 sets of freeze frame data show approximately the same battery voltage.
12/76
*2: The 5 sets of freeze frame data show different battery voltages.
*3: If the voltage fluctuates, it can be determined that cranking is being performed. When the engine speed
is 0 rpm, the crankshaft position sensor system and/or the ECM may be malfunctioning.
*4: There may be excess engine friction. Make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly when turning it by
hand. Excess engine friction may have occurred temporarily. Remove the cylinder head cover and oil pan, and
check for foreign matter such as iron fragments. If there is a malfunction or signs of a malfunction present,
perform a detailed inspection by disassembling all the parts.
CHECK AND REPAIR ENGINE OR BATTERY
6.
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (SENSOR INSTALLATION)
(a) Check the tightening and installation condition of the crankshaft position sensor bolt.
(b) Check the connection of the crankshaft position sensor connector.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Normal
Abnormal
13/76
7.
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

(b) Check for oil on the connector terminals.
OK:
No oil on the terminals.
NG
OK
8.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+)
Always
Below 1
A34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-16 (NE+) or C33-1 (NE+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A34-27 (NE-) or C33-2 (NE-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
Jiggle the wire harness and connector to increase the likelihood of detecting malfunctions that do not always
occur.
Make sure there is not an excessive amount of force applied to the wire harness.
NG
OK
14/76
9.
(b) Check the engine start operation.

OK:
10.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR IS DEFECTIVE)

.
Result
COOLANT TEMP, AMBIENT TEMP
FOR A/C, INTAKE AIR
COOLANT TEMP, AMBIENT

TEMP FOR A/C
Coolant Temp is 125C or
higher, or below Ambient
Temp for A/C by 15C or more
Difference between Coolant

Temp, Ambient Temp for A/C and
Intake Air is 10C or more*1

Temp, Ambient Temp for A/C and
Intake Air is less than 10C*2
Other than above
SUSPECTED
AREA
FUEL PUMP DUTY
PROCEED
TO
Engine coolant
temperature
sensor
No sets of freeze
frame data are
0%
At least 1 of the 5
sets of freeze
frame data is 0%
Fuel pump
control circuit
(low pressure
side)
At least 1 of the 5
sets of freeze
frame data is 0%
Fuel pump
control circuit
(low pressure
side)
No sets of freeze
frame data are
0%
HINT:
*1: A long time had not elapsed after stopping the engine.
*2: A long time had elapsed after stopping the engine.
15/76
11.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL

THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED)
CHECK FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (LOW PRESSURE

SIDE)

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump / Speed.
(d) When performing the Active Test, check for an operating sound from the fuel pump.
OK:
CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED
SPECIFIED CONDITION
ON
Operating sound heard
OFF
Operating sound not heard
HINT:
occur.
NG
REPAIR FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (LOW PRESSURE

SIDE)
OK
12.
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (FUEL INJECTOR POWER SOURCE)
16/76

Standard Voltage:
CYLINDER
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
No. 1
C8-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 2
C30-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 3
C9-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 4
C31-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

*b
No. 1 cylinder
*c
No. 2 cylinder
*d
No. 3 cylinder
*e
No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
occur.
NG
REPAIR FUEL INJECTOR POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
OK
13.

(d) When performing the Active Test, check for fuel leakage from the fuel pipes.
Result
RESULT
Fuel leakage or signs of fuel leakage are present
PROCEED TO
A
17/76
No fuel leakage or signs of fuel leakage
HINT:
occur.
When performing the Active Test, if there is no operating noise from the fuel pump, the fuel pump system may
be malfunctioning.
Check if the vehicle ran out of fuel, as engine starting trouble due to running out of fuel is also detected.
14.
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL LINE
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM
(a) Check for foreign matter such as iron particles around the fuel pump assembly (fuel pump, fuel pump filter,
and inside the fuel tank), and for signs that the fuel pump was stuck.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
There is foreign matter or signs that fuel pump was stuck
There is no foreign matter and no signs that fuel pump was stuck
15.
PERFORM SIMULATION TEST
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM

.
Result
TEMP FOR A/C, INTAKE AIR

TEMP FOR A/C
Coolant Temp is 125C or
higher, or below Ambient
Temp for A/C by 15C or
SUSPECTED AREA
LONG FT
ENGINE
SPEED
Engine coolant
temperature
PROCEED
TO
A
18/76
more
sensor
Fuel
pump
control
circuit
-15% or
less, or
+15% or
more

Temp, Ambient Temp for A/C
and Intake Air is 10C or
more
Other than above
(low
pressure
side)
Fuel
injector
assembly
(for port
injection)
Minimum
speed is
300 rpm or
more*1
-15 to
+15%
Minimum
speed is
less than
300 rpm
-15% or
less, or
+15% or
more

Temp, Ambient Temp for A/C
and Intake Air is less than
10C
Minimum
speed is
300 rpm or
more*1
-15 to
+15%
Minimum
speed is
less than
300 rpm
Engine assembly
Fuel
system
Intake
air
system
Fuel
pump
control
circuit
(low
pressure
side)
Fuel
injector
assembly
(for port
injection)
Engine assembly
Fuel
system
Intake
air
system
HINT:
19/76
*1: Compression loss may have occurred in the engine assembly.
16.
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT

INJECTION)
CHECK AND REPAIR ENGINE
(a) Check that no carbon is stuck to the fuel injector assembly (for port injection).
OK:
No carbon present.
NG

INJECTION)
OK
17.
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM
(a) Check for foreign matter such as iron particles around the fuel pump assembly (fuel pump, fuel pump filter,
and inside the fuel tank), and for signs that the fuel pump was stuck.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
There is foreign matter or signs that fuel pump was stuck
There is no foreign matter and no signs that fuel pump was stuck
18.
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM

20/76

.
Result
Coolant Temp
RESULT
SUSPECTED AREA
PROCEED TO
Engine coolant temperature is 40C or less*1
Pressure regulator
Engine coolant temperature is 40 to 90C*2
Fuel injector
Engine coolant temperature is 90C or higher*3
Pressure regulator
HINT:
*1: If the engine coolant temperature is 40C or less (after stopping the engine and the vehicle has not been
driven for a long period of time), the pressure regulator may be stuck open. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and
check the ability of the system to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*2: If the engine coolant temperature is 40 to 90C (15 to 120 minutes have passed after stopping the engine),
there may be fuel leaking from a fuel injector.
*3: If the engine coolant temperature is 90C or more (2 to 5 minutes have passed after stopping the engine),
there may be a problem with the pressure regulator failing to maintain the fuel pressure. Attach a fuel pressure
gauge and check the ability of the pressure regulator to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
19.
HINT:
For the fuel pressure inspection, refer to the following procedures
(a) Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check the fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
Standard:
147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) or higher (5 minutes after stopping the engine)
HINT:
If the engine cannot be started, read the values after cranking the engine.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Abnormal
Normal
21/76
20.
REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Clean the inside of the surge tank with compressed air.
(b) After stopping the engine, measure the HC concentration inside the surge tank for 15 minutes.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
4000 ppm or more
Less than 4000 ppm
HINT:
If the concentration is 4000 ppm or more, a fuel injector assembly may have a sealing problem.
CHECK THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
21.
(a) Inspect the fuel injector assemblies (for port injection)
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Abnormal
Normal
22.

INJECTION)
22/76
(a) Check if carbon is in the airflow passage.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Carbon in passage
No carbon present
23.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
OK:
NG
OK
24.
(a) Check if the engine can be started.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Engine can be started
Engine cannot be started
25.
END
(a) Confirm the problem symptoms.

23/76
HINT:
The problem symptoms below can be determined by reading the freeze frame data.
Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
PROCEED
TO
The engine does not crank

Starter assembly (includes
pinion gear wear or tooth
damage)
Starter system
friction)
Flywheel wear or tooth
damage (for Manual
Transmission)
Drive plate wear or tooth
damage (for Automatic
Transmission)
Abnormal cranking speed

Starter assembly
friction, compression loss)
There is no initial combustion (combustion does not occur

even once)*1
Pressure regulator fuel

pressure maintenance
Fuel injector leak
pressure side)
Fuel pump assembly
Spark plug
system
Ignition coil system
The engine stalls after starter turnoff (engine stalls

immediately after the first time the engine speed
increases)*2
Intake system connections

Throttle with motor body
assembly
Camshaft timing oil control
valve
Mass air flow meter system

sensor
Mass air flow meter
24/76
The initial combustion and starter turnoff occur late*3
Fuel injector assembly (for

port injection)
Spark plug
Pressure regulator
Fuel pump assembly
pressure side)
HINT:
If there is hesitation (cranking speed is slow and combustion occurs before passing TDC) during the initial
cranking period, the battery charge may be insufficient or the starter may be malfunctioning.
*1: If there is no initial combustion, a wire harness may be malfunctioning, or the ignition or fuel system may
be malfunctioning.
*2: If the engine stalls after starter turnoff, the air-fuel ratio may be incorrect or the camshaft timing oil
control valve may have a problem returning.
*3: If the initial combustion and starter turnoff occur late, the fuel injection volume may be incorrect (too low
or too high).
26.
(a) When cranking the engine, check for a noise indicating that the starter pinion gear is extending, and
check that the starter pinion gear is not spinning freely.
Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM
A noise indicating that the starter pinion gear is extending is heard and
the starter pinion gear is not spinning freely*1
SUSPECTED AREA
Battery
Excess engine
friction
Starter assembly
PROCEED
TO
Fly wheel (for

Manual
25/76
A noise indicating that the starter pinion gear is extending is heard but
the starter pinion gear is spinning freely
A noise indicating that the starter pinion gear is extending is not heard
Transmission)
Drive plate (for
Automatic
Transmission)
Starter assembly
Battery
Starter assembly
Starter system
HINT:
*1: The battery may be fully depleted or there may be excess engine friction.
CHECK STARTER ASSEMBLY
INSPECT BATTERY
27.
INSPECT BATTERY
(a) Check the electrolyte quantity.

OK:
Electrolyte quantity is within the specified range.
26/76
(b) Inspect the specific gravity.

(1) Inspect the specific gravity of each cell.
Standard specific gravity:
1.25 to 1.29 (electrolyte is at 20C (68F))
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, recharge or replace the battery.
It is not necessary to inspect a maintenance-free battery.
(c) Inspect the battery voltage.

(1) Turn the ignition switch off and turn on the headlights for 20 to 30 seconds. This will remove the
surface charge from the battery.
(2) Measure the battery voltage.
Standard voltage:
12.5 to 12.9 V (electrolyte is at 20C (68F))
HINT:
(3) Measure the battery voltage when cranking the engine.

Standard:
Approximately 6 V or higher (0C (32F) or higher)
HINT:
When the battery is depleted, the horn becomes quieter.
NG
OK
28.
CHECK ENGINE ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the crankshaft rotates smoothly when rotating it by hand.
OK:
Crankshaft rotates smoothly.
HINT:
Excess engine friction may have occurred temporarily. Remove the cylinder head cover and oil pan, and check
for foreign matter such as iron fragments. If there is a malfunction or signs of a malfunction present, perform a
27/76
detailed inspection by disassembling all the parts.
29.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE ENGINE ASSEMBLY
OK
INSPECT STARTER ASSEMBLY
CHECK STARTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the starter assembly
(b) Check for starter pinion gear wear and damage.

OK:
There is no wear or damage.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Abnormal
Normal (for Manual Transmission)
Normal (for Automatic Transmission)
30.
REPLACE FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
REPLACE DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY
REPLACE STARTER ASSEMBLY
INSPECT BATTERY
28/76

OK:

HINT:

Standard voltage:
HINT:

Standard:
HINT:
NG
OK
29/76
31.
(a) Inspect the starter assembly
32.
NG
REPLACE STARTER ASSEMBLY
OK
(a) Check the cranking speed.

Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
Battery
Starter assembly
Excess engine friction
Cranking speed is slow (100 rpm or less)
Cranking speed is fast (300 rpm or more)*1
Engine compression loss
PROCEED TO
HINT:
*1: If the cranking speed is fast, there may be compression loss.
CHECK AND REPAIR ENGINE ASSEMBLY
33.
INSPECT BATTERY
30/76

OK:

HINT:

Standard voltage:
HINT:

Standard:
HINT:
NG
OK
31/76
34.
CHECK ENGINE ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the crankshaft rotates smoothly when rotating it by hand.
OK:
Crankshaft rotates smoothly.
HINT:
Excess engine friction may have occurred temporarily. Remove the cylinder head cover and oil pan, and check
for foreign matter such as iron fragments. If there is a malfunction or signs of a malfunction present, perform a
detailed inspection by disassembling all the parts.
35.
NG
OK
(a) Using a sound scope or screwdriver, check for fuel injector operating noise while cranking the engine.
OK:
Fuel injector operating noise is heard.
NG
OK
36.
(a) Inspect the fuel pressure
NG

OK
37.
CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK
32/76
(a) Check for sparks
NG
CHECK SPARK PLUG
OK
38.
CONFIRM VEHICLE CONDITION
(a) Confirm the conditions present when the malfunction occurred based on the customer problem analysis.
Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
PROCEED
TO
When the engine is stopped and a long time has passed, engine
starting trouble occurs*1
Pressure regulator is stuck

open
When the engine is stopped and approximately 15 to 120 minutes

have passed, engine starting trouble occurs*2
Fuel injector leak
When the engine is stopped and approximately 2 to 3 minutes have

passed, engine starting trouble occurs*3
Failure to maintain fuel

pressure by pressure regulator
Condition other than above, or there is an inconsistency in the

conditions present when engine starting trouble occurs
C*4
HINT:
*1: The pressure regulator may be stuck open. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check the ability of the system
to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*2: Fuel may be leaking from a fuel injector assembly.
*3: The pressure regulator may not be able to maintain the fuel pressure. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and
check the ability of the pressure regulator to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*4: From step 72, perform fuel system troubleshooting C (steps 73 to 76).
39.
33/76
HINT:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Below 147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) (5 minutes after stopping the engine)
B*1
HINT:
If the engine cannot be started, check the fuel pressure after cranking the engine.
40.
(a) After stopping the engine, measure the HC concentration inside the surge tank for 15 minutes.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
4000 ppm or more
Less than 4000 ppm
B*1
HINT:
41.

INJECTION)
CHECK SPARK PLUG
(a) Inspect the spark plugs
HINT:
34/76
Even if the spark plug of only one cylinder is malfunctioning, replace the spark plugs of all cylinders.
NG
REPLACE SPARK PLUG
OK
42.

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
(e) While running the engine, read the value of Engine Speed.
OK:
A value that matches the actual engine speed is constantly output.
HINT:
Check the engine speed using a line graph.
If the engine cannot be started, check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
If the engine speed is 0 rpm, the crankshaft position sensor may have an open or short circuit.
NG
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
OK
43.
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (IGNITION COIL POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil assembly connectors.

35/76
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C38-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C28-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C39-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C27-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Ignition Coil Assembly)
*b
No. 1 cylinder
*c
No. 2 cylinder
*d
No. 3 cylinder
*e
No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
occur.
NG
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
OK
44.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-21 (IGT1) - C38-3
Always
Below 1
A36-10 (IGT2) - C28-3
Always
Below 1
A36-31 (IGT3) - C39-3
Always
Below 1
A36-8 (IGT4) - C27-3
Always
Below 1
36/76

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-21 (IGT1) or C38-3 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
45.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C38-2 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
C28-2 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
C39-2 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
C27-2 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
HINT:
occur.
If the wire harness is normal, after replacing the ignition coil assembly, check if engine starting trouble occurs
again. If engine starting trouble occurs again, proceed to step 72 and perform troubleshooting for the ignition
system (steps 78 to 83).
NG
OK
REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY
37/76
46.

(d) When performing the Active Test, check for an operating sound from the fuel pump.
OK:
CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED
SPECIFIED CONDITION
ON
Operating sound heard
OFF
Operating sound not heard
HINT:
occur.
NG

SIDE)
OK
47.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:
occur.
38/76
If there are no fuel leaks, after inspecting the fuel pump control circuit, check if engine starting trouble occurs
again. If engine starting trouble occurs again, proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting C
(steps 73 to 77).
48.

SIDE)

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
(e) While running the engine, read the value of Engine Speed.
OK:
A value that matches the actual engine speed is constantly output.
HINT:
Check the engine speed using a line graph.
If the engine cannot be started, check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
If the engine speed is 0 rpm, the crankshaft position sensor may have an open or short circuit.
NG
OK
49.
39/76

Standard Voltage:
CYLINDER
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
No. 1
C8-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 2
C30-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 3
C9-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 4
C31-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

*b
No. 1 cylinder
*c
No. 2 cylinder
*d
No. 3 cylinder
*e
No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
occur.
NG
NG
OK
50.
(a) Inspect the mass air flow meter
OK
51.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
40/76
(a) Check for air leakage in the intake system [vacuum hose disconnection, cracks, damaged gaskets, etc.]
.
HINT:
If the accelerator pedal is released after racing the engine, the inspection is easier to perform because the
vacuum inside the intake manifold increases and the air suction noise becomes louder.
If Short FT and Long FT are largely different from the normal values (differ by more than 15%) when idling
(intake air volume is small) and almost the same as the normal values when racing the engine (for example,
when maintaining a speed of 3000 rpm) (intake air volume is high), air leakage may be present.
OK:
There is no air leakage.
NG
OK
52.

HINT:
When the connector is disconnected, the vehicle enters fail-safe mode.
(b) Crank the engine and check that it starts.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Engine starts
Engine does not start
(c) Connect the throttle with motor body assembly connector.

HINT:
When this inspection is performed, the MIL may illuminate. After finishing the inspection, check and clear DTCs
.

THE VVT LINEAR)
41/76
53.
(a) Check if carbon is in the airflow passage.

OK:
No carbon present.
NG
OK
54.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE VVT LINEAR)

(c) Warm up the engine.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank1) or Control
the VVT Linear (Bank2).
HINT:
When performing the Active Test, make sure the A/C is on and the shift lever is in P, N or neutral position.
(e) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve using the Techstream.
OK:
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0 deg (CA)
Normal engine speed
36 deg (CA)
HINT:
occur.
When the results of the inspection using the Active Test are normal but the valve operating noise is
abnormal, check the valve for any signs of problems.
If the camshaft timing oil control valve is stuck on, the valve overlap increases and combustion worsens due
to the internal EGR which may cause the engine to stall.
NG
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR

INTAKE SIDE)
OK
42/76
55.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE VVT EXHAUST LINEAR)

(c) Warm up the engine.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank1) or
Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank2).
HINT:
When performing the Active Test, make sure the A/C is on and the shift lever is in P, N or neutral position.
(e) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve using the Techstream.
OK*1:
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0 deg (CA)
Normal engine speed
51 deg (CA)
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
HINT:
*1: From step 72, perform intake system troubleshooting (steps 84 to 86). If engine starting trouble still
occurs, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 87 to 94).
occur.
When the results of the inspection using the Active Test are normal but the valve operating noise is
abnormal, check the valve for any signs of problems.
If the camshaft timing oil control valve is stuck on, the valve overlap increases and combustion worsens due
to the internal EGR which may cause the engine to stall.
56.
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR

EXHAUST SIDE)
43/76

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-22 (VG) - C16-5 (VG)
Always
Below 1
A33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
If the wire harness is normal, after replacing the mass air flow meter, check if engine starting trouble occurs
again. If engine starting trouble occurs again, proceed to step 72 and perform intake system troubleshooting
(steps 84 to 86). If engine starting trouble still occurs, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 87 to
94).
57.
NG
OK
HINT:
If the engine coolant temperature sensor is malfunctioning, after replacing it, check if engine starting trouble
occurs again. If engine starting trouble occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed
to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps
103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109
to 114), in that order.
NG
OK
44/76
58.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-30 (THW) - C35-2 (THW)
Always
Below 1
A36-29 (E1) - C35-1 (E2)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-30 (THW) or C35-2 (THW) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
If the wire harness or connector is malfunctioning, after replacing or repairing it, check if engine starting
trouble occurs again. If engine starting trouble occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs,
proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting
B (steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting
(steps 109 to 115), in that order.
NG
OK
59.
(a) Inspect the mass air flow meter
HINT:
If the mass air flow meter is malfunctioning, after replacing it, check if engine starting trouble occurs again. If
engine starting trouble occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and
perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105),
45/76
intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in
that order.
NG
OK
60.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-22 (VG) - C16-5 (VG)
Always
Below 1
A33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
If the wire harness or connector is malfunctioning, after replacing or repairing it, check if engine starting
trouble occurs again. If engine starting trouble occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs,
proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting
B (steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting
NG
OK
61.
46/76

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Atmospheric Pressure and Long FT.
Result
DATA LIST ITEM
RESULT
SUSPECTED AREA
Long FT
+25% or more or less than

-25%
Atmosphere Pressure
80 kPa or less (when elevation

is 0 m)
Both Data List items listed

above
Values are other than above

Mass air flow meter
injection)
ECM
-
PROCEED
TO
62.
(a) Remove the EFI MAIN and ETCS fuses from the engine room relay block assembly.
(b) After 60 seconds or more elapse, install the EFI MAIN and ETCS fuses.
(c) Check if the engine can be started.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Engine can be started
Engine cannot be started
47/76
63.

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel
System Status #1.
(e) Confirm that Fuel System Status #1 is CL.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / AF
Lambda B1S1.
(g) Confirm that AF Lambda B1S1 is both within the range of 0.95 to
1.05 when idling.
(h) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test /
Control the Injection Volume for A/F sensor.
(i) Read the output voltage from the air fuel ratio sensor when
increasing and decreasing the fuel injection volume.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
INJECTION
VOLUME
AFS Voltage
B1S1
SPECIFIED CONDITION
+12%
Air fuel ratio sensor output voltage is

below 2.0 V
-12%
Air fuel ratio sensor output voltage is

higher than 2.4 V
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Normal
Abnormal
HINT:
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and
the heated oxygen sensor has a maximum output delay of
approximately 20 seconds.
If the air fuel ratio sensor is malfunctioning, after replacing it, check if
engine starting trouble occurs again. If engine starting trouble
occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs,
proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps
95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake
system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system
troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in that order.
48/76
64.
(a) Check if the idling speed is stable after starting the engine.
OK:
Speed is stable.
HINT:
After replacing the fuel injector assembly or mass air flow meter, check if engine starting trouble occurs again.
If engine starting trouble occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and
perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105),
intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in
that order.
65.
NG

INJECTION)
OK
(a) Inspect the fuel pressure
NG

OK
66.
CHECK SPARK PLUG
(a) Inspect the spark plugs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
49/76
All cylinders are normal
One cylinder is abnormal*1
All cylinders are abnormal*2, *3
HINT:
*1: If one cylinder is abnormal, replace the spark plug of that cylinder and inspect the ignition and fuel system
for that cylinder. After performing repairs, check if engine starting trouble occurs again. If engine starting
trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel
system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition
system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in that order.
*2: If all cylinders are abnormal, replace the spark plugs of all cylinders and check if engine starting trouble
occurs again. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system
troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake system
troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in that order.
*3: Engine starting trouble may occur if the vehicle is driven extremely short distances repeatedly.
REPLACE SPARK PLUG (ABNORMAL CYLINDER)
REPLACE SPARK PLUG (ALL)
67.
CONFIRM VEHICLE CONDITION
(a) Confirm the conditions present when the malfunction occurred based on the customer problem analysis.
Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
PROCEED
TO
When the engine is stopped and a long time has passed, engine
starting trouble occurs*1
Pressure regulator is stuck

open
When the engine is stopped and approximately 15 to 120 minutes

have passed, engine starting trouble occurs*2
Fuel injector leak
When the engine is stopped and approximately 2 to 3 minutes have

passed, engine starting trouble occurs*3
Failure to maintain fuel

pressure by pressure regulator
Condition other than above, or there is an inconsistency in the

conditions present when engine starting trouble occurs
C*4
HINT:
*1: The pressure regulator may be stuck open. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check the ability of the system
to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*2: Fuel may be leaking from a fuel injector assembly.
50/76
*3: The pressure regulator may not be able to maintain the fuel pressure. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and
check the ability of the pressure regulator to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*4: From step 72, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B
(steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting
CHECK PURGE VALVE
68.
HINT:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
A
B*1
HINT:
If the engine cannot be started, check the fuel pressure after cranking the engine.
69.
CHECK PURGE VALVE
51/76
(a) Disconnect the purge hose (on the canister side) of the purge
valve.

(c) Idle the engine.
(d) Disconnect the connector of the purge valve.
(e) Check if air flows through the purge valve.
OK:
Air does not flow.
(f) Connect the connector of the purge valve.

(g) Connect the purge hose of the purge valve.
HINT:
.
NG
OK
70.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
4000 ppm or more
Less than 4000 ppm
B*1
HINT:
52/76
71.

INJECTION)

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:
occur.
If there are no fuel leaks, after inspecting the fuel pump control circuit, check if engine starting trouble occurs
again. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A
(steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps
106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 114), in that order.
72.

SIDE)
(a) If the malfunction could not be identified during the inspections in steps 38, 39, 40 and 47, perform fuel
system troubleshooting C (steps 73 to 76).
Result
PERFORMED STEP
Steps 38, 39, 40 and 47
TROUBLESHOOTING BY SYSTEM
Fuel system troubleshooting C
PROCEDURE
73 to 76
PROCEED TO
A
(b) If the malfunction could not be identified during the inspection in step 45, perform ignition system
53/76
troubleshooting (steps 77 to 83).

Result
PERFORMED STEP
Step 45
PROCEDURE
Ignition system troubleshooting
77 to 83
PROCEED TO
B
(c) If the malfunction could not be identified during the inspections in steps 55, 56 and 57, perform intake air
system troubleshooting (steps 84 to 86). If engine starting trouble still occurs, perform fuel system
troubleshooting A (steps 87 to 94).
Result
PERFORMED STEP
Step 55, 56, 57
PROCEDURE
Intake air system troubleshooting
84 to 86
Fuel system troubleshooting A
87 to 94
PROCEED TO
C
(d) If the malfunction could not be identified during the inspections in steps 58, 59, 60, 63, 64, 66, 67, 68, 70
and 71, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103
to 105), intake air system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps
109 to 115), in that order.
Result
PERFORMED STEP
PROCEDURE PROCEED TO
Fuel system troubleshooting A
95 to 102
Fuel system troubleshooting B
103 to 105
Intake air system troubleshooting
106 to 108
Ignition system troubleshooting
109 to 115
Steps 57, 58, 59, 60, 63, 64, 66, 67, 68, 70 and 71
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ISC LEARNING VALUE)
73.
(a) Inspect the fuel injector assemblies (for port injection)
NG

INJECTION)
54/76
OK
74.

Standard Voltage:
CYLINDER
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
No. 1
C8-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 2
C30-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 3
C9-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
No. 4
C31-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

*b
No. 1 cylinder
*c
No. 2 cylinder
*d
No. 3 cylinder
*e
No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
occur.
NG
55/76
OK
75.

OK:
76.
NG
CHECK VVT SENSOR
OK
CHECK VVT SENSOR

OK:
77.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END (VVT SENSOR IS DEFECTIVE)
OK:
NG
OK
78.
CHECK VVT SENSOR
56/76
(a) Check the tightening and installation condition of the VVT sensor bolt.
(b) Check the connection of the VVT sensor connector.
OK:
NG
OK
79.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+)
Always
Below 1
A34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
80.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR (INTAKE SIDE) - ECM)
57/76
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C12-1 (VV1-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*A
Bank 1
*B
Bank 2
*a

(to VVT Sensor (Intake Side))

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-26 (VV1+) - C12-2 (VV1+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C12-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1
A34-15 (VV2+) - C26-2 (VV2+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C26-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
58/76
occur.
NG
OK
81.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR (EXHAUST SIDE) - ECM)
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*A
Bank 1
*B
Bank 2
*a

(to VVT Sensor (Exhaust Side))

59/76
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-14 (EV1+) - C6-2 (EV1+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C6-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1
A34-25 (EV2+) - C25-2 (EV2+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C25-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
82.

OK:
83.
NG
CHECK VVT SENSOR
OK
CHECK VVT SENSOR
60/76

OK:
84.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK

(c) Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature stabilizes with the A/C switch and
all the accessory switches off.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / ISC Learning Value.
Result
DATA LIST ITEM
ISC Learning Value
RESULT
SUSPECTED AREA
Valve timing
Compression
(engine displacement (liters) x 0.9) or more
Less than (engine displacement (liters) x 0.9)
PROCEED TO
85.
(a) Inspect the compression
86.
NG
OK
ADJUST VALVE TIMING
61/76
NG
OK
87.
HINT:
(a) Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check the fuel pressure when cranking the engine and after stopping
the engine.
Result
VEHICLE STATE
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Cranking engine
304 to 343 kPa (3.1 to 3.5 kgf/cm 2 )
5 minutes after stopping engine
147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) or higher
NG

OK
88.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (LONG FT)

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Long FT.
Result
DATA LIST ITEM
Long FT
RESULT
-15 to +15%
+15% or more, or less than -15%
SUSPECTED AREA
Fuel
PROCEED TO
62/76

INJECTION)
89.
(a) Check if the idling speed is stable after starting the engine and if an unstable idling speed has ever
occurred in the past.
Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
PROCEED
TO
Current unstable idling speed or history of unstable idling

speed

system
All current and past idling speeds are stable
Fuel
HINT:
Through the customer problem analysis, confirm the fuel being used and the location at which the fuel was
added to check if the malfunction is caused by the fuel in the vehicle.
REPLACE FUEL
90.
OK:
NG
OK
63/76
91.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+)
Always
Below 1
A34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
92.

OK:
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
64/76
93.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:
occur.
be malfunctioning.
94.
HINT:
Make sure there is no foreign matter such as iron particles on the fuel pump assembly and no signs that the
fuel pump was stuck.
Make sure the internal connector is securely connected.
Make sure the fuel pump filter is not clogged.
95.
NG
OK
HINT:
65/76
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO

96.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (LONG FT)

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Long FT.
Result
DATA LIST ITEM
Long FT
RESULT
SUSPECTED AREA
PROCEED TO

Fuel
-15 to +15%
+15% or more, or less than -15%

INJECTION)
97.
(a) Check if the idling speed is stable after starting the engine and if an unstable idling speed has ever
occurred in the past.
Result
66/76
PROBLEM SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
PROCEED
TO
Current unstable idling speed or history of unstable idling

speed

system
All current and past idling speeds are stable
Fuel
HINT:
Through the customer problem analysis, confirm the fuel being used and the location at which the fuel was
added to check if the malfunction is caused by the fuel in the vehicle.
REPLACE FUEL
98.
OK:
NG
OK
99.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+)
Always
Below 1
A34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-)
Always
Below 1
67/76

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
100.

OK:
101.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:
68/76
occur.
be malfunctioning.
102.
HINT:
Make sure there is no foreign matter such as iron particles on the fuel pump assembly and no signs that the
fuel pump was stuck.
Make sure the internal connector is securely connected.
Make sure the fuel pump filter is not clogged.
NG
OK
103.
CHECK PURGE VALVE
(a) Disconnect the vacuum hose (on the canister side) of the purge
valve.

(c) Idle the engine.
69/76
(d) Disconnect the connector of the purge valve.

(e) Check if air flows through the purge valve.
OK:
Air does not flow
(f) Connect the connector of the purge valve.

(g) Connect the vacuum hose of the purge valve.
HINT:
.
NG
INSPECT PURGE VALVE
OK
104.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
4000 ppm or more
Less than 4000 ppm
HINT:
105.
CHECK INTAKE VALVE

INJECTION)
CHECK INTAKE VALVE
(a) Check if carbon is on the intake valves.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
70/76
Carbon present
No carbon present
106.
CLEAN INTAKE VALVE

(c) Start the engine, turn off all accessory switches and warm up the engine until the engine coolant
temperature stabilizes.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / ISC Learning Value.
Result
DATA LIST ITEM
ISC Learning Value
RESULT
SUSPECTED AREA
Valve timing
Compression
(engine displacement (liters) x 0.9) or more
Less than (engine displacement (liters) x 0.9)
PROCEED TO
107.
(a) Inspect the compression
108.
NG
OK
ADJUST VALVE TIMING
71/76
NG
OK
109.
OK:
NG
OK
110.
CHECK VVT SENSOR
(a) Check the tightening and installation condition of the VVT sensor bolt.
(b) Check the connection of the VVT sensor connector.
OK:
NG
OK
111.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
72/76
A34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+)
Always
Below 1
A34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
112.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR (INTAKE SIDE) - ECM)
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*A
Bank 1
*B
Bank 2
73/76
*a
(to VVT Sensor (Intake Side))

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-26 (VV1+) - C12-2 (VV1+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C12-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1
A34-15 (VV2+) - C26-2 (VV2+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C26-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
113.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR (EXHAUST SIDE) - ECM)
74/76
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*A
Bank 1
*B
Bank 2
*a

(to VVT Sensor (Exhaust Side))

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-14 (EV1+) - C6-2 (EV1+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C6-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1
A34-25 (EV2+) - C25-2 (EV2+)
Always
Below 1
A34-34 (VCV) - C25-3 (VC)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
75/76
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
114.

OK:
115.
NG
CHECK VVT SENSOR
OK
CHECK VVT SENSOR

OK:
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
76/76
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WC30M5X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2096,P2097: Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P2096
Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
DTC
P2097
Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
DESCRIPTION
The sub fuel trim is related to the feedback compensation value, not to the basic injection time. The sub fuel trim consists of
both the short-term and the long-term fuel trim between the front catalyst and rear catalyst.
The short-term fuel trim is fuel compensation that is used to constantly maintain the air fuel ratio at stoichiometric levels. The
signal from the air fuel ratio sensor indicates whether the air fuel ratio is rich or lean compared to the stoichiometric ratio. This
triggers a reduction in the fuel injection volume if the air fuel ratio is rich and an increase in the fuel injection volume if it is lean.
Factors such as individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in operating environment cause short-term fuel trim
to vary from the ideal theoretical value. The long-term fuel trim controls overall fuel compensation. The long-term fuel trim
compensates for long term deviations of the fuel trim from the ideal theoretical value. These long term deviations result from the
corrections made by the short-term fuel trim.
If both the short-term fuel and long-term fuel trim are lean or rich beyond predetermined values, it is interpreted as a
malfunction, the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
DTC
NO.
With warm engine and stable air fuel ratio feedback, sub fuel trim
P2096 considerably in error to lean side
With warm engine and stable air fuel ratio feedback, sub fuel trim
P2097 considerably in error to rich side
TROUBLE AREA
Intake system
port injection)
direct injection)
Mass air flow meter
sensor
Fuel pressure
system
Open or short in air fuel ratio
sensor circuit
PCV valve and hose
PCV hose connections
ECM
HINT:
When DTC P2096 is set, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the lean side. When DTC P2097 is set, the actual air-fuel ratio is on
the rich side.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air-fuel ratio is lean and DTC P2096 may be set. The MIL is then illuminated.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Under closed loop fuel control, fuel injection volumes that deviate from those estimated by the ECM cause changes in the longterm fuel trim compensation value. The long-term fuel trim is adjusted when there are persistent deviations in the short-term
1/18
term fuel trim compensation value. The long-term fuel trim is adjusted when there are persistent deviations in the short-term
fuel trim values. Deviations from the ECM's estimated fuel injection volumes also affect the average fuel trim learning value,
which is a combination of the average short-term fuel trim (fuel feedback compensation value) and the average long-term fuel
trim (learning value of the air fuel ratio). If the average fuel trim learning value exceeds the malfunction threshold, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction in the fuel system and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P2096: Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)

P2097: Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
Fuel system
Mass air flow meter

Continuous
Duration
1 second (1 time)
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

P0137, P0138 (Heated oxygen sensor - a lack of circuit continuity)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
present
P0605 (ROM in ECM)

P2102 (Throttle actuator control motor)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS)
circuit)
Post catalyst long term fuel trim system control
Active

P2096
Post catalyst long term fuel trim value
Less than -0.037
P2097
Post catalyst long term fuel trim value
0.028 or higher
2/18

6. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature reaches 75C (167F) or higher.
HINT:

CAUTION:
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
N/A
Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has reached ECU memory
limit
HINT:
3/18

13. If the test result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no DTC is output, perform a universal trip and check for permanent DTCs
.
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0030
HINT:
Malfunctioning areas can be identified by performing the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor function provided in
the Active Test. The Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor function can help to determine whether the air fuel ratio
sensor, heated oxygen sensor and other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning.
The following instructions describe how to conduct the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor operation using the
Techstream.

4. Warm up the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
5. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor / Gas AF
Control / AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
6. Perform the Active Test operation with the engine idling (press the RIGHT or LEFT button to change the fuel injection
volume).
7. Monitor the output voltages of the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed
on the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12% to +12%.
INJECTION VOLUME
STATUS
VOLTAGE
AFS Voltage B1S1
+12%
Rich
Below 2.0 V
(Air fuel ratio)
-12%
Lean
Higher than 2.4 V
O2S B1S2
+12%
Rich
Higher than 0.55 V
(Heated oxygen)
-12%
Lean
Below 0.4 V
NOTICE:
CASE
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (SENSOR 1) OUTPUT

VOLTAGE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (SENSOR 2) OUTPUT

VOLTAGE
MAIN SUSPECTED
TROUBLE AREA
4/18
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
Air fuel
ratio
2
sensor
heater
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
circuit
Heated
oxygen
sensor
Heated
oxygen
sensor
heater
Heated
oxygen
sensor
circuit
Fuel
injector
assembly
Fuel
pressure
Gas leak
from
exhaust
system
(Air fuel
ratio
extremely
rich or
lean)
Following the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor procedure enables technicians to check and graph the
voltage outputs of both the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors.
To display the graph, enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for
A/F Sensor / Gas AF Control / AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2; and then press the graph button on the Data List
view.
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information as freeze frame
data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can be helpful in determining whether the
vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich,
5/18

A low air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the
engine to run rich.
A high air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the
engine to run lean.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P2096 AND/OR P2097)

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
P2096 or P2097
P2096 and/or P2097 and other DTCs
HINT:
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
PERFORM SYSTEM CHECK (CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY)

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Port.
(f) Read the value Short #1 and Long FT #1.
OK:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 = Between -19% and +19%
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Direct.
(h) Read the value Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
OK:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 = Between -19% and +19%
Result:
6/18
ITEM
PROCEED TO
PORT
DIRECT
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
3.
CHECK IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST
NO
YES
4.
OK:
NG
OK
5.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
OK:
NG
7/18
OK
6.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME FOR A/F SENSOR)

(c) Turn Techstream on.
(d) Warm up the engine and run the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor / AFS
Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
(f) Perform the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor operation with the engine in an idling.
(g) Monitor the output voltages of the A/F and HO2 sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed on the
Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12% to 12%.
If the sensor output voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active Test, the sensor may be
malfunctioning.
INJECTION VOLUME
STATUS
VOLTAGE
AFS Voltage B1S1
12%
Rich
Less than 2.0 V
(A/F)
-12%
Lean
More than 2.4 V
12%
Rich
More than 0.55 V
-12%
Lean
Less than 0.4 V
O2S B1S2
(HO2)
Result:
STATUS
STATUS
A/F CONDITION AND
PROCEED TO
AFS VOLTAGE B1S1 O2S B1S2 A/F SENSOR CONDITION

Lean/Rich
Lean/Rich
Normal
Ventilation valve and hose

Ventilation hose connections
Lean
Lean
Actual air-fuel ratio lean

Air induction system
Fuel pressure
Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
Rich
Rich
Actual air-fuel ratio rich

Ignition system
Fuel pressure
Mass air flow meter
A
8/18
Mass air flow meter

ECT sensor
Lean
Lean/Rich
Rich
Lean/Rich
Lean: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage (AFS Voltage) is
consistently higher than 2.4 V, and the heated oxygen sensor output voltage (O2S) is consistently below 0.4 V.
Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the AFS Voltage is consistently below 2.0 V, and the
O2S is consistently higher than 0.55 V.
Lean/Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor
alternates correctly.
HINT:
7.

Standard:
With cold engine
With warm engine
NG
OK
8.

9/18

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF, Coolant Temp and Engine Speed.
Standard:
NG

OK
NG
OK
9.

OK:
No gas leaks.
10.
NG
OK
11.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A34-19 (A1A+) - C14-3 (A1A+)
Always
Below 1
A34-18 (A1A-) - C14-4 (A1A-)
Always
Below 1
10/18
A34-18 (A1A-) - C14-4 (A1A-)
Always
Below 1
A34-5 (HA1A) - C14-1 (HA1A)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
12.
NEXT
13.

(c) Clear the DTCs
(d) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
(f) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT
14.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P2096 AND/OR P2097)
(a) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.

(b) Read the pending DTCs.
Result:
11/18
RESULT
PROCEED TO
P2096 and/or P2097
DTC is not output
END
15.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK

16.
CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
NG
OK
17.
CHECK FUEL LEAK (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
(a) Check for fuel leaks (low pressure side).

OK:
No leaks.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
OK
CHECK AND REPLACE FUEL PUMP, PRESSURE REGULATOR, FUEL

LINE AND FILTER
12/18
OK
18.
LINE AND FILTER
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR

(f) While revving the engine, check that the fuel pressure fluctuates.
Standard:
Idling
3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 436 to 725 psi).
HINT:
NG
CHECK MISFIRE COUNT
OK
19.

HINT:
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Injection Switching Status and confirm Injection Switching
Status is OK.
(e) Read the value Short FT #1, Long FT #1 and Fuel Pump Duty.
Result:
ITEM
PROCEED TO
FUEL PUMP DUTY
10% to 40%
40% or more
-20% or less
10% or less
+20% or more
13/18
40% or more
+20% or more
10% or less
-20% or less
INSPECT INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)
REPLACE ECM
20.

HINT:
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Injection Switching Status and confirm Injection Switching
Status is OK.
(e) Read the value Short FT #1, Long FT #1 and Fuel Pump Duty.
Result:
ITEM
21.
PROCEED TO
FUEL PUMP DUTY
10% to 40%
-25% or less
10% to 40%
-25% to +25%
10% to 40%
+25% or more
CHECK MISFIRE COUNT

14/18

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active test / Control the Injection Way / Direct.
(f) Allow the engine to idle.
(g) Monitor all of the misfire count values that are displayed on the Techstream: Powertrain / Engine / Data List /
Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire Count.
If no misfire counts occur for any of the cylinders, perform the following procedure:
(1) Move the shift lever to D.

(2) Monitor all of the misfire rate values that are displayed on the Techstream.
Result:
MISFIRE COUNT
PROCEED TO
No misfire counts, or misfire counts occur randomly in all cylinders
Misfire counts occur in particular cylinder
22.
INSPECT INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)
(a) Replace the injector driver (EDU) with known good ones from another vehicle.
NOTICE:
Do not disconnect and reconnect the connectors with the ignition switch to ON, as the injector driver (EDU) may be
damaged.

(e) Clear the DTCs
(f) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
(g) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
(i) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving Pattern.
(k) Read the pending DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
P2096 and/or P2097
PROCEED TO
A
15/18
P2096 and/or P2097
DTC is not output
23.
END (INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU) IS DEFECTIVE)
(a) Check the injection volume (whether fuel volume is high or low, and whether injection pattern is poor).
24.
NG
REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
(a) Check the connection and terminal contact pressure of connectors and wire harness between the mass air flow meter
and ECM
.
HINT:
NEXT
25.

(c) Clear the DTCs
(f) Start the engine and warm it up.
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT
26.

16/18

Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
P2096 and/or P2097
DTC is not output
END
27.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C33-22 (VG) - C16-5 (VG)
Always
Below 1
C33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C33-22 (VG) or C16-5 (VG) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
28.
HINT:
If the result of the inspection performed in step 8 indicated no problem, proceed to the next step without replacing the
mass air flow meter.
NEXT
17/18
29.

(c) Clear the DTCs
(f) Start the engine and warm it up.
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT
30.

Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
P2096 and/or P2097
DTC is not output
END
REPLACE ECM
18/18
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2101-P2103: Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Perf
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PFU0P5X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2101-P2103: Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit
Range/Performance (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P2101
Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance
DTC
P2102
Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low
DTC
P2103
Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
The throttle actuator is operated by the ECM and opens and closes the throttle valve using gears.
The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor, which is mounted on
the throttle with motor body assembly. The throttle position sensor provides feedback to the ECM. This
feedback allows the ECM to appropriately control the throttle actuator and monitor the throttle opening
angle as the ECM responds to driver inputs.
HINT:
This Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) does not use a throttle cable.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA

P2101
Throttle actuator current is 8 A or more.

Internal temperature of throttle actuator driving
circuit is 175C (347F) or higher.
ECM is turning ETCS relay on but throttle actuator power

P2102 supply voltage is 5 V or less.
ECM is turning ETCS relay off but throttle actuator power

P2103 supply voltage is 5 V or more.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PFU0P5X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
Throttle with motor

body assembly
ECM
Open in throttle
actuator circuit
Throttle with motor
body assembly
ETCS relay
ECM
Short in throttle
actuator circuit
Throttle with motor
body assembly
ETCS relay
1/11
8/6/12
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the electrical current through the electronic actuator, and detects malfunctions and
open circuits in the throttle actuator based on this value. If the current is outside the standard range,
the ECM determines that there is a malfunction in the throttle actuator. In addition, if the throttle valve
does not function properly (for example, stuck on), the ECM determines that there is a malfunction. The
ECM then illuminates the MIL and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2101: Throttle actuator control motor circuit continuity
Related DTCs

Throttle actuator (throttle with motor body assembly)
Continuous
Duration

0.6 seconds: P2103
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

All
None
P2101
ETCS relay
On
CPU communication
No failure
Previous diagnosis result
No failure
Battery voltage
6.2 V or more
P2102
ETCS relay
On
Battery voltage
11 V or more
P2103
2/11
8/6/12
ETCS relay
Off
Battery voltage
6 V or more

P2101
Malfunction flag from throttle actuator operation IC
Set
P2102
Throttle actuator supply voltage
5 V or less
P2103
Throttle actuator supply voltage
5 V or more

or higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

3/11
8/6/12

HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE
DESCRIPTION

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
HINT:
FAIL-SAFE
When either of these DTCs or other DTCs relating to ETCS (Electronic Throttle Control System)
malfunctions are stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the ECM cuts the current
to the throttle actuator, and the throttle valve is returned to a fully closed throttle angle by the return
spring. The ECM then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut)
and ignition timing, in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle, to allow the vehicle to
continue running at a minimal speed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and gently, the vehicle
can be driven slowly.
4/11
8/6/12
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
The throttle actuator current (Throttle Motor Current) and the throttle actuator duty ratio (Throttle
Motor Duty (Open) / Throttle Motor Duty (Close)) can be read using the Techstream. However, the
ECM shuts off the throttle actuator current when the electronic throttle control system
5/11
8/6/12
malfunctions.
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY

ASSEMBLY)
(a) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
C35-7 (+BM) - Body
Ignition switch
ground
ON
11 to 14 V
*a

(ECM)
NG
INSPECT RELAY (ETCS)
OK
2.
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (RESISTANCE OF THROTTLE

ACTUATOR)
(a) Inspect the throttle with motor body assembly
NG
.
ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY - ECM)
6/11
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-2 (M+) - C15-2 (M+)
Always
Below 1
A36-1 (M-) - C15-1 (M-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-2 (M+) or C15-2 (M+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A36-1 (M-) or C15-1 (M-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE

VALVE)
(a) Check for foreign objects between the throttle valve and the housing.
OK:
No foreign objects between the throttle valve and housing.
NG
REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT
OK
5.
7/11
8/6/12
(a) Check if the throttle valve opens and closes smoothly.

OK:
Throttle valve opens and closes smoothly.
6.
NG
OK
REPLACE ECM
NG
REPLACE RELAY (ETCS)
ASSEMBLY
INSPECT RELAY (ETCS)
(a) Inspect the ETCS relay
OK
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ETCS RELAY - EFI MAIN1 RELAY - BATTERY)
(a) Remove the ETCS relay from the engine room relay block
assembly.
Standard Voltage:
8/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
5 (ETCS relay holder) - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
2 (ETCS relay holder) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Normal
ETCS relay terminal 5 is abnormal.
ETCS relay terminal 2 is abnormal.
*1
Engine room relay block assembly
*2
ETCS relay terminal
8.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ETCS RELAY)
(a) Remove the ETCS relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-17 (MCR) - ETCS relay terminal 1
Always
Below 1
A35-7 (+BM) - ETCS relay terminal 3
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
9/11
8/6/12
A35-17 (MCR) or ETCS relay terminal 1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A35-7 (+BM) or ETCS relay terminal 3 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
NG
OK
9.
OK
10.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ETCS RELAY - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Remove the ETCS relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - ETCS relay terminal 2
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or ETCS relay terminal 2 - Body ground Always
NG
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR
10/11
8/6/12
OK
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2195,P2196: Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 1
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WC40OFX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2195,P2196: Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank
1 Sensor 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P2195
Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC
P2196
Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DESCRIPTION
HINT:
Sensor 1 refers to the sensor mounted in front of the three-way catalytic converter and located
near the engine assembly.
The air fuel ratio sensor generates a voltage* that corresponds to the actual air fuel ratio. This sensor
voltage is used to provide the ECM with feedback so that it can control the air fuel ratio. The ECM
determines the deviation from the stoichiometric air fuel ratio level, and regulates the fuel injection time.
If the air fuel ratio sensor malfunctions, the ECM is unable to control the air fuel ratio accurately.
The air fuel ratio sensor is the planar type and is integrated with the heater, which heats the solid
electrolyte (zirconia element). This heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low
(the exhaust gas temperature is low), a current flows into the heater to heat the sensor, in order to
facilitate accurate oxygen concentration detection. In addition, the sensor and heater portions are the
narrow type. The heat generated by the heater is conducted to the solid electrolyte through the alumina,
and therefore the sensor activation is accelerated.
In order to obtain a high purification rate of the carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbon (HC) and nitrogen
oxide (NOx) components in the exhaust gas, a three-way catalytic converter is used. For the most
efficient use of the three-way catalytic converter, the air fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it
is always close to the stoichiometric level.
*: Value changes inside the ECM. Since the air fuel ratio sensor is a current output element, the current
is converted into a voltage inside the ECM. Any measurements taken at the air fuel ratio sensor or ECM
connectors will show a constant voltage.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WC40OFX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/15
8/6/12
DTC
TROUBLE AREA
NO.
Lambda is less than 0.85 for 10 seconds in air fuel
P2195 ratio feed back control
Open or short in air fuel ratio

sensor circuit
Intake system
Fuel pressure
Lambda is more than 1.15 for 10 seconds in air fuel

P2196 ratio feed back control

port injection)
direct injection)
ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs is stored, check the air fuel ratio sensor voltage output by entering the
following menus on the Techstream: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / AFS Voltage B1S1.
Short-term fuel trim values can also be read using the Techstream.
The ECM regulates the voltages at the A1A+ and A1A- terminals of the ECM to a constant level.
Therefore, the air fuel ratio sensor voltage output cannot be confirmed without using the
Techstream.
If an air fuel ratio sensor malfunction is detected, the ECM stores a DTC.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
ECM calculates lambda based on air fuel ratio sensor output voltage. If lambda is out of the thresholds
for 10 seconds or more, ECM judges the air fuel ratio sensor is stuck and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
2/15
8/6/12
Related DTCs
P2195: Primary oxygen sensor - Output voltage out of range

P2196: Primary oxygen sensor - Output voltage out of range
Required Sensors/Components (Related) Heated oxygen sensor

Continuous
Duration
10 seconds
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

P0030 (Air fuel ratio sensor - heater)
sensor)
sensor)
P0137, P0138 (Heated oxygen sensor - a lack of circuit
continuity)
stored
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)

P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
correlation)
Higher than 75.06 kPa(abs) [563 mmHg(abs)]
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Fuel system status
Closed loop
3/15
8/6/12
Change of intake air mass during 1/2

engine
Impedance of primary oxygen sensor
0 to 65
60 seconds or more
Vehicle speed
6 g/sec or more
Integrated time of canister purge after

engine start
Learning value of EVAP density during

purge
Less than 0.2
Target lambda load correction coefficient
-0.05 to 0.05
Either of following condition is met
A, B or C
A. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage

feedback target
Less than 0.1 V and Higher than -0.2 V
B. Heated oxygen sensor feedback adjust
On minimum limit
C. Heated oxygen sensor feedback adjust
On maximum limit

P2195
Output lambda
0.85 or less
P2196
Output lambda
1.15 or more
MONITOR RESULT
4/15
8/6/12

or higher.
HINT:

CAUTION:
laws.
HINT:
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
5/15
8/6/12
ABNORMAL
System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A
HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0030
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
A low air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions
that would cause the engine to run rich.
A high air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions
that would cause the engine to run lean.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO P2195 OR P2196)
6/15
8/6/12

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:
If any DTCs relating to the air fuel ratio sensor (DTCs for the air fuel ratio sensor heater or air fuel
ratio sensor admittance) are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST
NO
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (TEST

VALUE OF AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR)
YES
3.

7/15
8/6/12
(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(k) Input the DTC: P2195 or P2196.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P2195 or P2196 is output)
4.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (TEST VALUE OF AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(e) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Monitor Status / O2S(A/FS) Monitor CMPL.
(g) Check that the status of O2S(A/FS) Monitor CMPL is Complete.
If the status is still Incomplete, drive the vehicle according to the driving pattern again.
8/15
8/6/12
(h) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / AFS Current B1S1.
(i) Check the test value of the air fuel ratio sensor output current during fuel-cut.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Within normal range (0.7 mA or higher, and lower than 2.2 mA)
Outside normal range (lower than 0.7 mA, or 2.2 mA or higher)
5.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR)

(d) Warm up the air fuel ratio sensor at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for 90 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume.
(f) Perform the Control the Injection Volume operation with the engine idling.
(g) Monitor the output voltages of the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1
and O2S B1S2) displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12% to +12%. The injection volume can be
changed in fine gradations.
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and the heated oxygen sensor has
a maximum output delay of approximately 20 seconds.
If the sensor output voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active
Test, the sensor may be malfunctioning.
AFS Voltage B1S1
(Air fuel ratio)
AFS Voltage B1S1
(Air fuel ratio)
INJECTION VOLUME
STATUS
VOLTAGE
+12%
Rich
Below 2.0 V
-12%
Lean
Higher than 2.4 V
9/15
8/6/12
O2S B1S2
(Heated oxygen)
O2S B1S2
(Heated oxygen)
+12%
Rich
Higher than 0.55 V
-12%
Lean
Below 0.4 V
Result
STATUS OF AFS
STATUS OF O2S
AIR FUEL RATIO CONDITION AND AIR FUEL RATIO
PROCEED
VOLTAGE B1S1
B1S2
SENSOR CONDITION
TO
Lean
Lean
Actual air fuel ratio lean
Rich
Rich
Actual air fuel ratio rich
Lean
Lean/Rich
Air fuel ratio sensor malfunction
Rich
Lean/Rich
Air fuel ratio sensor malfunction
Lean/Rich
Lean/Rich
Normal
Lean: During the Control the Injection Volume Active Test, the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage
(AFS Voltage) is consistently higher than 2.4 V, and the heated oxygen sensor output voltage
(O2S) is consistently below 0.4 V.
Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume Active Test, the AFS Voltage is consistently below 2.0
V, and the O2S is consistently higher than 0.55 V.
Lean/Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume Active Test, the output voltage of the heated
oxygen sensor alternates correctly.
HINT:
6.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
OK:
No leaks in the intake system.
NG
OK
10/15
8/6/12
7.

OK:
No gas leaks.
NG
OK
8.
NG
.
CHECK FUEL LINE
OK
9.
(a) Check the fuel injector assembly (whether fuel volume is high or low, and whether injection
pattern is poor)
.
NG

PORT INJECTION)
OK
10.
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (HIGH PRESSURE SIDE)
11/15
8/6/12
(a) Check the fuel pressure (high pressure side)
NG
.
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM (HIGH
PRESSURE SIDE)
OK
11.
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
(a) Check the fuel injector assembly (for direct injection)
NG

DIRECT INJECTION)
OK
12.
NEXT
13.

(d) Clear the DTCs
12/15
8/6/12

Pattern.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
END
14.
REPLACE ECM
(a) Replace the ECM
NEXT
15.

(d) Clear the DTCs
13/15
8/6/12

Pattern.
Result
TECHSTREAM
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE
N/A

memory limit
NEXT
16.
END
NEXT
17.

14/15
8/6/12

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
Result
18.
RESULT
PROCEED TO
REPLACE ECM
END
CHECK FUEL LINE
(a) Check the fuel lines for leaks or blockage.
NG
OK
15/15
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P219A: Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004GKG00OX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P219A: Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P219A
Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance
DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0300
Refer to DTC P2195
DTC
TROUBLE AREA
NO.

logic):
P219A
Air fuel ratio sensor signal fluctuates in air fuel

ratio feedback control.
Crankshaft position sensor signal fluctuates in
air fuel ratio feedback control.

Intake system
system
Ignition system
Compression pressure
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Fuel System Air Fuel Ratio Cylinder Imbalance Monitor
The ECM uses the air fuel ratio sensor and crankshaft position sensor to monitor the difference in air fuel
ratios between the cylinders caused by differences in injection volumes between the cylinders, leakage
in the intake or exhaust system, etc.
When the air fuel ratios of the cylinders are lean or rich with respect to each other, the ECM determines
that a problem is present and stores a DTC.
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Monitoring Method

When the system detects a difference in air fuel ratios between the cylinders due to fluctuation in the air
fuel ratio sensor output over 1 engine cycle (2 crankshaft revolutions), the system determines that there
is a problem.
Crankshaft Position Sensor Monitoring Method

The system monitors the engine speed variation and when the variation becomes large, the system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004GKG00OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/11
8/6/12
determines that there is a difference in air fuel ratios between the cylinders, which it determines to be a
problem.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
(Related)
Duration
P219A: Fuel system air fuel ratio cylinder imbalance functional

check
Mass air flow meter
Speed sensor
200 revolutions: Air fuel ratio sensor monitoring method
400 revolutions: Crankshaft position sensor monitoring method
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
Monitor runs whenever the following DTCs are not stored
None

Estimated time after engine start
30 seconds or more
Engine speed
1600 to 3200 rpm
Fuel system status
Closed loop
0.55 to 0.8 g/rev (varies with engine speed)
Less than 0.1
20 seconds or more
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine revolution

Engine
Idling
Engine speed
500 rpm or higher
Estimated time after engine start
30 seconds or more
2/11
8/6/12
Fuel system status
Closed loop

Either following condition is met
A or B
A. The average of the positive gradient of air

fuel ratio sensor output
More than 0.001125 (varies with engine speed and

intake air mass per revolution)
B. The average of the negative gradient of air

fuel ratio sensor output
Less than 0.000975 (varies with engine speed and

intake air mass per revolution)

Either following condition is met
A or B
Higher than 30.7 rpm (for Automatic Transmission)
A. The average of the crankshaft speed

fluctuation at port fuel injection
(varies with engine speed)

Higher than 18.3 rpm (for Manual Transmission)
Higher than 25.5 rpm (for Automatic Transmission)
B. The average of the crankshaft speed

fluctuation at direct fuel injection

Higher than 16.5 rpm (for Manual Transmission)
MONITOR RESULT

3/11
8/6/12

or higher.
HINT:

CAUTION:
laws.
HINT:
11. Input the DTC: P219A.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
N/A

HINT:
4/11
8/6/12
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to P0030
Refer to P0335
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records the engine condition
when malfunctions are detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if
the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air fuel ratio was
lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
*: The No. 1 cylinder is the cylinder which is farthest from the transaxle.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P219A)

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P219A is output
DTC P219A and other DTCs are output
HINT:
5/11
8/6/12
If any DTCs other than P219A are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FREEZE FRAME DATA)

(c) Using the Techstream, confirm the vehicle conditions recorded in the freeze frame data which
were present when the DTC was stored
.
Freeze Frame Data Items for DTC P219A

Vehicle Speed
Engine Speed
Calculate Load
Accelerator Idle Position
Short FT #1
Long FT #1
Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire Count
HINT:
When the sum of Short FT and Long FT is positive, the engine is running lean, and when the sum is
negative, the engine is running rich.
DTC stored during
It is possible to conclude that the problem was detected due to a "lean
idling
imbalance" (detected using crankshaft speed variation).
DTC stored while

vehicle being driven
It is possible to conclude that the problem was detected due to a "rich

imbalance" (detected using the air fuel ratio sensor).
NEXT
3.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME)

6/11
8/6/12

(d) Warm up the engine.
HINT:
The A/C switch and all accessory switches should be off and the shift lever should be in P, N or
neutral position.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume /
Cylinder #1 to #4 Misfire Count.
HINT:
When the "Control the Injection Volume" Active Test is selected (injection volume is 0%), if a misfire
count increases, proceed to step 6 (Check Intake System).
(f) Perform the Control the Injection Volume operation with the engine idling.
(g) Check the misfire counts ("Cylinder #1 Misfire Count" to "Cylinder #4 Misfire Count") while
decreasing the injection volume in 5% increments.
NOTICE:
Do not decrease the injection volume by higher than 20%.
Result:
The cylinder whose misfire count has not increased can be assumed to be running rich. Therefore,
perform inspections while focusing on that cylinder.
NEXT
4.

OK:
No gas leaks.
NG
OK
5.
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
7/11
8/6/12
OK:
No leaks in the intake system.
NG
OK
6.
INSPECT SPARK PLUG
(a) Inspect the spark plug of the cylinder causing the imbalance
NG
REPLACE SPARK PLUG
OK
7.
HINT:
NEXT
8.
NG

COMPRESSION
OK
8/11
8/6/12
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection)

connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C8-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C30-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C9-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
C31-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a

*b
No. 1 cylinder
*c
No. 2 cylinder
*d
No. 3 cylinder
*e
No. 4 cylinder
NG
GO TO FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT
OK
9/11
8/6/12
10.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY - ECM)
(a) Check the harness and connector of fuel injector assembly (for port injection)
(b) Check the harness and connector of fuel injector assembly (for direct injection)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
11.
CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY OF CYLINDER CAUSING IMBALANCE
(a) Check the fuel injector assembly (for port injection) [whether fuel volume is high or low, and
whether injection pattern is poor]
.
(b) Check the fuel injector assembly (for direct injection) [whether fuel volume is high or low, and
whether injection pattern is poor]
.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
Fuel injector assembly (for port injection) is NG.
Fuel injector assembly (for direct injection) is NG.

INJECTION)

DIRECT INJECTION)
12.
CHECK FOR CAUSE OF FAILURE
10/11
8/6/12
(a) If the cause of the problem has not been found even after performing the troubleshooting
procedure, perform the inspection below.
(b) Check the intake valve for deposits.
HINT:
As the DTC may have been stored due to deposits on the intake valve, remove the cylinder head and
check the intake valve.
NEXT
13.

(d) Clear the DTCs
Pattern.
(j) Check for DTCs.
Result:
P219A is not output.
NEXT
END
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2401,P2402,P2419,P2420: Evaporative Emission System Leak
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002BHB05SX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2401,P2402,P2419,P2420: Evaporative Emission System
Leak Detection Pump Control Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P2401
Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Control Circuit Low
DTC
P2402
Evaporative Emission Leak Detection Pump Stuck ON
DTC
P2419
Evaporative Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit Low
DTC
P2420
Evaporative Emission Pressure Switching Valve Stuck OFF
DTC SUMMARY
DTC
NO.
MONITORING
ITEM
Leak
detection
P2401
pump stuck
OFF
CONDITION
ON
Vent valve
circuit low
P2420
Vent valve
circuit high
DETECTION DETECTION
TIMING
LOGIC
P2401, P2402, P2419 and

P2420 stored when one of
following conditions met
during EVAP monitor:
Leak
detection
P2402
pump stuck
P2419
TROUBLE AREA
Leak detection
pump OFF
malfunction
Leak detection
pump ON
malfunction
Vent valve ON
(closed)
malfunction
Vent valve OFF
(opened)
malfunction
Canister pump
module
Connector/wire
harness
(Canister
While EVAP
monitor
1 trip
pump module ECM)

ECM
DESCRIPTION
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002BHB05SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/6/12
While the ECM monitors the EVAP system, it also monitors the status of the leak detection pump and the
vent valve within the canister pump module. If the ECM detects an abnormality in the leak detection
pump or vent valve operational statuses, the ECM stores the DTC, and illuminates the MIL.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2401: Evaporative emission system leak detection pump circuit
continuity
Related DTC
P2402: Evaporative emission system leak detection pump circuit

continuity
P2419: Evaporative emission system switching valve circuit
continuity
P2420: Evaporative emission system switching valve circuit
continuity
(Main)
(Related)
Continuous
Duration
2.5 seconds
MIL Operation
Immediately
None

None
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
A or B
A. Ignition switch
On
B. Activated by soak timer
Satisfied

P2401
Drain voltage of FET for leak detection pump
Battery voltage X 0.38 V or less
Command signal from ECM
Off
P2402
Current of FET for leak detection pump
3.5 A or more
On
2/7
8/6/12
P2419
Drain voltage of FET for vent valve
Battery voltage X 0.38 V or less
Off
P2402
Current of FET for vent valve
3.5 A or more
On
MONITOR RESULT

NOTICE:

Automatic Mode.
7. After the "Evaporative System Check" is completed, check for All Readiness by entering the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All readiness.
TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
INCOMPLETE

System normal
System abnormal
3/7
8/6/12

N/A

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0451
NOTICE:
Do not disassemble the canister pump module.
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (POWER SOURCE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
G8-3 - Body ground Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
G8-5 - Body ground Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
4/7
8/6/12
*a

NG
OK
2.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-8 (MPMP) - G8-4
Always
Below 1
A35-1 (VPMP) - G8-1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-8 (MPMP) or G8-4 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A35-1 (VPMP) or G8-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE
5/7
8/6/12
(a) Inspect the canister pump module
4.
NG
OK
NG
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)

(b) Remove EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G8-3 - EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3
Always
Below 1
G8-5 - EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G8-3 or EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
G8-5 or EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
6/7
8/6/12
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2610: ECM / PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance (2013
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T6X0B4X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2610: ECM / PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
P2610
ECM / PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance
DTC SUMMARY
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE
AREA
Timer diagnosis
[(Engine ECU counter - soak timer IC counter) / Engine ECU counter] is
0.24 or more.
Full count diagnosis

P2610
ECM
Soak timer IC counter is not 1023.
Timer diagnosis
The setting time written to the soak timer IC is different to the value read.
Full count diagnosis during wake-up.
When the engine ECU counter is 1.636 seconds or less, the soak timer IC
counter is 1023.
DESCRIPTION
The soak timer operates after the ignition switch is turned off. When a certain amount of time has
elapsed after turning the ignition switch off, the soak timer activates the ECM to perform malfunction
checks which can only be performed after the engine is stopped. The soak timer is built into the ECM.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1. While the engine is running, the ECM monitors the synchronization of the soak timer and the
CPU clock. If these two are not synchronized, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction,
illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
2. If the soak timer activates the ECM even though only a short amount of time has elapsed
since the ignition switch was turned off, or if the soak timer does not activate the ECM even
though a considerable amount of time has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned off,
the ECM determines that the soak timer is malfunctioning, illuminates the MIL and stores a
DTC the next time the ignition switch is turned ON.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T6X0B4X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P2610: ECM engine off timer performance (soak timer IC)
Required
Sensors/Components
ECM
Required
Sensors/Components
Duration
0.128 seconds: Timer Diagnosis, Full Count Diagnosis and Timer Diagnosis
(Case 1)
Immediately: Timer Diagnosis (Case 2) and Wake-up Diagnosis
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles
None

All
None
Timer Diagnosis
Ignition switch
Off
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
10 minutes to 17.05 hours
Full Count Diagnosis

Ignition switch
Off
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
ECM timer
4 seconds or more
Timer Diagnosis (Case 1)

Ignition switch
Off
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more

Ignition switch
Off
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
2/5
8/6/12
Wake-up Diagnosis
Ignition switch
On
Soak time
1 hour or more

Timer Diagnosis
[(ECM counter) - (Soak timer IC counter)] / ECM counter
More than 0.24
Full Count Diagnosis

Soak timer IC counter
Not 1023 counts

Value commanded by ECM = Value received by soak timer IC
Yes

A or B
A. Soak timer IC counter when ECM timer is less than 1.636 seconds
1023 counts
B. Soak timer IC counter when ECM timer is more than 2.456 seconds
Not 1023 counts
Wake-up Diagnosis
Number of record wake-up counts is less than Number of record wake-up commands
Yes

7. Idle the engine for 10 minutes or more.
HINT:
3/5
8/6/12

TECHSTREAM
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NORMAL

System normal
ABNORMAL

System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

N/A
HINT:
13. If the test result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no pending DTC is output, perform a universal trip
and check for permanent DTCs
HINT:
HINT:
DTC P2610 is stored if an internal ECM problem is detected. Diagnostic procedures are not
required. ECM replacement is required.
PROCEDURE
1.
REPLACE ECM
(a) Replace the ECM
NEXT
4/5
8/6/12
2.
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (IN ADDITION TO DTC P2610)

(d) Clear the DTCs
(h) Start the engine and wait for 10 minutes or more.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(j) If no pending DTC is output, the repair has been successfully completed.
NEXT
END
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDG0O4X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use the table below to help determine the cause of problem symptoms. If multiple suspected
areas are listed, the potential causes of the symptoms are listed in order of probability in the
"Suspected Area" column of the table. Check each symptom by checking the suspected areas in
the order they are listed. Replace parts as necessary.
Inspect the fuses and relays related to this system before inspecting the suspected areas below.
SFI System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Battery
Starter
Engine does not crank (Does not start)
Park/neutral position switch assembly*1

Clutch start switch assembly*2
Starter signal circuit
ECM power source circuit
Ignition system
Fuel pump control circuit
Fuel pump
Fuel injector circuit
No initial combustion (Does not start)
Valve timing
VC output circuit (ECM 5 V output)
VVT sensor (for intake side)
VVT sensor (for exhaust side)
ECM
Fuel pump (for high pressure)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDG0O4X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12

Fuel injector assembly (for port injection)
Engine cranks normally but difficult to
start

Intake system
Ignition system
Spark plug
Compression
Fuel line
Ignition circuit
Ignition system
Incomplete intermittent combustion

occurs (Does not start)

VVT sensor (for intake side)
VVT sensor (for exhaust side)
Valve timing
Intake system
High engine idle speed
A/C signal circuit

PCV valve and hose
A/C signal circuit
2/5
8/6/12

Low engine idle speed (Poor idling)
Fuel pump
Intake system
PCV valve and hose
Compression
Ignition system
Spark plug
Rough idling
Fuel line
Intake system
Purge valve
PCV valve and hose
Mass air flow meter
Knock sensor
Intake system
Hunting (Poor idling)
PCV valve and hose

Mass air flow meter
Fuel line
Spark plug
Ignition system
3/5
8/6/12

Hesitation/poor acceleration

Knock sensor
Mass air flow meter
Intake system
Valve timing
Compression
Brake override system
Spark plug
Ignition system
Surging (Poor driveability)

Mass air flow meter
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system
Compression
Spark plug
Ignition system
Engine stalls soon after starting

Mass air flow meter
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system
4/5
8/6/12

Intake system
PCV valve and hose
Compression
Engine stalls only during A/C operation
Unable/difficult to refuel
A/C signal circuit

ECM
Fuel system (canister, refueling valve, fuel tank vent
valve, fuel tank, etc.)
*1: for Automatic Transmission

*2: for Manual Transmission
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Starter Signal Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XN20D5X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Starter Signal Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Starter Signal Circuit
DESCRIPTION
While the engine is being cranked, the current from the ST relay flows to the ECM STSW2 terminal. The
starter start signal flowing to the STSW2 terminal is mainly used to increase the fuel injection quantity
while the engine is starting.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XN20D5X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/11
8/6/12
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK WHETHER ENGINE CAN BE CRANKED
(a) Check if the engine can be cranked.

Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Engine cannot be cranked
Engine can be cranked
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ST SIGNAL)
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (STARTER SIGNAL)
(a) Connect the Techstream to DLC3.

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Starter Signal.
(e) Check the value displayed on the Techstream when the ignition switch is turned to the ON and
START positions.
OK
IGNITION SWITCH POSITION
STARTER SIGNAL
ON
Close (OFF)
START
Open (ON)
NG
INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
OK
2/11
8/6/12
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ST RELAY - STARTER ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the starter assembly connector.
(c) Remove the ST relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
B1-1 - A33-17 (STSW2)
Always
Below 1
B1-1 - ST relay terminal 3
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-17 (STSW2), ST relay terminal 3 or B1-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
NG
.
ASSEMBLY
OK
3/11
8/6/12
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY - ST

RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the ignition or starter switch assembly connector.

(b) Remove the ST relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D55-8 (ST2) - ST relay terminal 5
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D55-8 (ST2) or ST relay terminal 5 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
6.
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (+B OF IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the ignition or starter switch assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4/11
8/6/12
D55-2 (AM1) - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
D55-7 (AM2) - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Ignition or Starter Switch Assembly)
Result
7.
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK (for automatic transmission models)
OK (for manual transmission models)
INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the park/neutral position switch assembly
NG
REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
OK
8.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY INHIBITOR RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch assembly connector.

(b) Remove the INHIBITOR relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
5/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
L2-4 - INHIBITOR relay terminal 1
Always
Below 1
L2-5 - Body ground
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
L2-4 or INHIBITOR relay terminal 1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY INHIBITOR RELAY)

(b) Remove the INHIBITOR relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D55-1 (ST1) - INHIBITOR relay terminal 5
Always
Below 1
D55-1 (ST1) - INHIBITOR relay terminal 2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D55-1 (ST1), INHIBITOR relay terminal 2 or INHIBITOR relay terminal 5 Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
6/11
8/6/12

CONNECTOR
OK
10.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (INHIBITOR RELAY - ST RELAY)
(a) Remove the INHIBITOR relay and ST relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
INHIBITOR relay terminal 3 - ST relay terminal 2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
INHIBITOR relay terminal 3 or ST relay terminal 2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
11.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ST RELAY)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A35-26 (STA) - ST relay terminal 1
Always
Below 1
7/11
8/6/12
A33-17 (STSW2) - ST relay terminal 3
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A35-26 (STA), A33-17 (STSW2), ST relay terminal 1 or ST relay terminal 3

- Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
12.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK

INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the clutch start switch assembly
NG
REPLACE CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
13.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY CLUTCH START SWITCH)

(b) Disconnect the clutch start switch assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D55-1 (ST1) - A20-1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
8/11
8/6/12
D55-1 (ST1) or A20-1 - Body ground
Always
NG
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR
OK
14.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY - ST RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the clutch start switch assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A20-2 - ST relay terminal 2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A20-2 or ST relay terminal 2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
15.

9/11
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION

- Body ground
16.
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK

READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ST SIGNAL)
(a) Connect the Techstream to DLC3.

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Starter Signal.
(e) Check the value displayed on the Techstream when the ignition switch is turned to the ON and
START positions.
OK
IGNITION SWITCH POSITION
STARTER SIGNAL
ON
Close (OFF)
START
Open (ON)
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
10/11
8/6/12
PROCEED TO NEXT SUSPECTED AREA SHOWN IN

17.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION

- Body ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: U0073,U0101,U0122,U0140,U0155,U0402,U0416,U0423: Contro
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020H3028X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: U0073,U0101,U0122,U0140,U0155,U0402,U0416,U0423:

Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off (2013 FR-S)
DTC
U0073
Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off
DTC
U0101
Lost Communication with TCM
DTC
U0122
Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
DTC
U0140
Lost Communication with Body Control Module
DTC
U0155
Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Control Module
DTC
U0402
Invalid Data Received from TCM
DTC
U0416
Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
DTC
U0423
Invalid Data Received from Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module
DESCRIPTION
Refer to CAN communication system for system description
DTC
NO.
U0073
DTC DETECTION CONDITIONS
Bus off state for 0.436 seconds or more

No communication between ECM and TCM for 0.5 seconds

U0101 or more
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020H3028X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
TROUBLE AREAS
Wire harness (CANL and

CANH circuits)
ECM
CANH circuits)
ECM
1/5
8/6/12
TCM
No communication between ECM and skid control ECU for

U0122 0.5 seconds or more
No communication between ECM and combination meter

U0155 assembly for 0.5 seconds or more
U0402
Invalid data received from TCM for 2 seconds or more

Invalid data received from skid control ECU for 2 seconds

U0416 or more

CANH circuits)
ECM
actuator assembly)

CANH circuits)
ECM
Combination meter
assembly
CANH circuits)
ECM
TCM
CANH circuits)
ECM
actuator assembly)
Invalid data received from combination meter assembly for

U0423 2 seconds or more
CANH circuits)
ECM
Combination meter
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM, TCM, skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) and combination meter assembly
communicate with each other via the CAN communication line. If there is a problem in this communication,
the ECM stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
U0073: Control Module Communication Bus Off
U0101: Lost Communication with TCM
U0122: Lost Communication with Vehicle Stability Control Module
U0155: Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster Control
Related DTCs
Module (Combination Meter)

U0402: Invalid Data Received from TCM
U0416: Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Stability Control Module
U0423: Invalid Data Received from Instrument Panel Cluster Control
2/5
8/6/12
Module
Required
Sensors/Components (Main)
ECM
Required
Sensors/Components
TCM
(Related)
Continuous
Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)
0.436 seconds: U0073

Duration
0.5 seconds: U0101, U0122 and U0155

2 seconds: U0402, U0416 and U0423
MIL Operation
1 driving cycles
None

All
Battery voltage
10.9 V or more
Starter switch
Off
Engine
Running
U0073
U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416, U0423 (CAN
not present
system (ECM))
U0101
U0073, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416, U0423 (CAN
not present
system (ECM))
U0122
U0073, U0101, U0155, U0402, U0416, U0423 (CAN
not present
system (ECM))
U0155
not present
U0073, U0101, U0122, U0402, U0416, U0423 (CAN

system (ECM))
U0402
U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0416, U0423 (CAN
3/5
8/6/12
not present
system (ECM))
U0416
U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0423 (CAN
not present
system (ECM))
U0423
U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416 (CAN
not present
system (ECM))

U0073
State of Control module communication bus "A" OFF
On
U0101
State of lost communication with TCM
On
U0122
State of lost communication with skid control ECU
On
U0155
State of lost communication with combination meter assembly
On
U0402
Communication counter between ECM and TCM
Not count up
U0416
Communication counter between ECM and skid control ECU
Not count up
U0423
Communication counter between ECM and combination meter assembly
Not count up
Go to CAN communication system for troubleshooting
HINT:
4/5
8/6/12
When DTCs indicating a CAN communication system malfunction are output, repair the CAN
communication system before repairing each corresponding sensor.
not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
If the CAN communication malfunctions, there is no data output from the ECM. In this case, some
of the freeze frame data are not correct and not identical with the ECM data, but the ECM data are
correct.
PROCEDURE
1.

(e) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416 or U0423 is output
DTC U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416 or U0423 and other DTCs are output
GO TO DTC CHART
GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: VC Output Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001D6V0LTX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: VC Output Circuit (2013 FR-S)
VC Output Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ECM constantly generates 5 V power from the battery voltages supplied to the +B terminal and +B2
terminal to operate the microprocessor. The ECM also provides this power to the sensors through the VC
output circuit.
When the VC circuit is short-circuited, the microprocessor in the ECM and sensors that are supplied with
power through the VC circuit are deactivated because the power is not supplied from the VC circuit.
Under this condition, the system does not start up and the MIL does not illuminate even if the system
malfunctions.
HINT:
Under normal conditions, the MIL is illuminated when the ignition switch is turned to ON. The MIL goes
off when the engine is started.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001D6V0LTX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/8
8/6/12
2/8
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK MIL CONDITION
3/8
8/6/12
(a) Check that the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) lights up when turning the ignition switch to
ON.
OK:
MIL lights up.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK

2.
CHECK CONNECTION BETWEEN TECHSTREAM AND ECM

(d) Check for communication between the Techstream and ECM.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Communication is not possible
Communication is possible
GO TO MIL CIRCUIT
3.
CHECK MIL (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
4/8
8/6/12

(c) Check the MIL.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates

ASSEMBLY
4.
CHECK MIL (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.

(c) Check the MIL.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates
REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE

SENSOR
5.
CHECK MIL (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
5/8
8/6/12

(c) Check the MIL.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates
6.
CHECK MIL (ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the accelerator pedal sensor assembly connector.

(c) Check the MIL.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR

ASSEMBLY
7.
CHECK MIL (BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the battery current sensor assembly connector.

6/8
8/6/12

(c) Check the MIL.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates
REPLACE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY
8.
CHECK MIL (CANISTER PUMP MODULE)

(c) Check the MIL.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (EACH SENSOR - ECM)

(b) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.
(c) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector.
7/8
8/6/12
(d) Disconnect the accelerator pedal sensor assembly connector.

(e) Disconnect the battery current sensor assembly connector.
(f) Disconnect the canister pump module connector.
(g) Disconnect the ECM connectors.
(h) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A36-19 (VC) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A35-22 (VCP2) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A35-21 (VCPA) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
8/8
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BQK00HX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BQK00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BQK00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MTB00SX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
table below.
*a

(Throttle with Motor Body Assembly)
TESTER CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
20C (68F)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
0.3 to 10
If the result is not as specified, replace the throttle with

motor body assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTB00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MTA00VX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Install a new gasket to the intake manifold.
(b) Connect the 2 water by-pass hoses to the throttle with motor body assembly with the 2 clamps.
(c) Install the throttle with motor body assembly to the intake manifold with the 4 bolts.
(d) Connect the throttle with motor body assembly connector.

5. INSPECT FOR COOLANT LEAK
NOTICE:
Perform the following procedure after replacing the ECM, throttle with motor body assembly or
any throttle with motor body assembly components.
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON without operating the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
If the accelerator pedal is operated, perform the above steps again.
(b) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3 and clear the DTCs
(c) Start the engine and check that the MIL is not illuminated. After the engine is warmed up, check
that the idle speed is within the specified range when the A/C is switched off.
Standard:
CONDITION
ENGINE IDLE SPEED
A/C switched off
650 to 800 rpm
NOTICE:
Be sure to perform this step with all accessories off.
Make sure that the shift lever is in neutral (for manual transmission).
Make sure that the shift lever is in N or P (for automatic transmission).
(d) Enter the following menus: Data List / Throttle Sensor Volt%. Fully depress the accelerator pedal
and check that the value is 80 to 90%.
(e) Perform a road test and confirm that there are no abnormalities.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTA00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTA00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MTD00TX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. REMOVE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the throttle with motor body assembly

connector.
(b) Disconnect the 2 water by-pass hoses from the throttle

with motor body assembly.
(c) Remove the 4 bolts and the throttle with motor body
assembly from the intake manifold.
(d) Remove the gasket from the intake manifold.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MTD00TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BO600RX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BO600RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to a new O-ring and install it to the manifold absolute pressure
sensor.
(b) Install the manifold absolute pressure sensor with the bolt.
NOTICE:
(c) Connect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.

1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IHI00BX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON with the engine off.
(c) Inspect the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(1) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Atmosphere Pressure.
(2) Check the atmoshere pressure.
OK:
Almost the same as ambient pressure
HINT:
The standard atmospheric pressure is 101 kPa (1.03 kgf/cm2, 14.6 psi).
The atmospheric pressure decreases by 1 kPa (0.01 kgf/cm2, 0.1 psi) as the altitude increases by
100 m.
The atmospheric pressure varies depending on the weather.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IHI00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BO700RX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the manifold absolute pressure

sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BO700RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000056U8008X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000056U8008X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/9
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/9
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/9
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/9
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
5/9
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
6/9
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
7/9
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
8/9
8/6/12
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000056U700AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CAMSHAFT LH (for Bank 2)
(a) Apply engine oil to the journals of the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
(b) Set the intake camshaft LH and the exhaust camshaft LH

to the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
2. INSTALL CAMSHAFT CAP (for Bank 2)

(a) Apply the seal packing to the contact surface of the front camshaft cap LH, intake rear camshaft
cap LH and exhaust rear camshaft cap LH as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
*1
Intake Rear Camshaft Cap LH
*2
Exhaust Rear Camshaft Cap LH
*3
Front Camshaft Cap LH
*a
Within 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
*b
3.0 to 4.0 mm (0.1181 to 0.1575 in.)
*c
2.5 to 3.5 mm (0.0984 to 0.1378 in.)
*d
2.5 to 4.0 mm (0.0984 to 0.1575 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000056U700AX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
*e
1.5 to 2.5 mm (0.0591 to 0.0984 in.)
*f
Chamfer edge
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessively seal packing as it may cause excess seal packing to flow toward the cam
journal, resulting in engine seizure.
Do not apply seal packing to the intake center camshaft cap LH and exhaust center camshaft cap
LH.
Install the camshaft caps within 5 minutes of applying the seal packing.
(b) Apply engine oil to the journals of the camshaft caps, and place them on the camshaft housing
sub-assembly LH.
(c) Tighten the 13 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

to install the front camshaft cap LH, intake center
camshaft cap LH, intake rear camshaft cap LH, exhaust
center camshaft cap LH and exhaust rear camshaft cap
LH.
3. INSTALL CAMSHAFT RH (for Bank 1)

(a) Apply engine oil to the journals of the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
(b) Set the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH

to the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.

(a) Apply the seal packing to the contact surface of the front camshaft cap RH, intake rear camshaft
cap RH and exhaust rear camshaft cap RH as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
2/7
8/6/12
*1
Front Camshaft Cap RH
*2
Intake Rear Camshaft Cap RH
*3
Exhaust Rear Camshaft Cap RH
2.5 to 4.0 mm (0.0984 to 0.1575 in.)
Within 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
3.0 to 4.0 mm (0.1181 to 0.1575 in.)
1.5 to 2.5 mm (0.0591 to 0.0984 in.)
Chamfer edge
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessively seal packing as it may cause excess seal packing to flow toward the cam
journal, resulting in engine seizure.
Do not apply seal packing to the intake center camshaft cap RH and exhaust center camshaft cap
RH.
Install the camshaft caps within 5 minutes of applying the seal packing.
(b) Apply engine oil to the journals of the camshaft caps, and place them on the camshaft housing
sub-assembly RH.

to install the front camshaft cap RH, intake center
camshaft cap RH, intake rear camshaft cap RH, exhaust
center camshaft cap RH and exhaust rear camshaft cap
RH.
5. INSTALL CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

6. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
7. INSTALL CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
3/7
8/6/12
8. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

9. INSTALL INJECTOR DRIVER BRACKET
14. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
NOTICE:
Before installation, check that there is no foreign matter on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH and exhaust camshaft LH.
(a) Install the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH

while aligning the knock hole of the camshaft timing
exhaust gear assembly LH with the knock pin of the
exhaust camshaft LH.
*1
Knock Hole
*2
Knock Pin
(b) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing exhaust gear

assembly LH, and tighten the 3 bolts with a socket "TORX"
wrench E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
15. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY LH

NOTICE:
Before installation, check that there is no foreign matter on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly LH and intake camshaft LH.
(a) Install the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH

while aligning the knock hole of the camshaft timing intake
gear assembly LH with the knock pin of the intake
camshaft LH.
4/7
8/6/12
*1
Knock Hole
*2
Knock Pin
(b) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH, and tighten the 3 bolts with a socket "TORX" wrench
E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
16. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY RH

NOTICE:
Before installation, check that there is no foreign matter on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH and exhaust camshaft RH.
(a) Install the camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH while

aligning the knock hole of the camshaft timing exhaust
gear assembly RH with the knock pin of the exhaust
camshaft RH.
*1
Knock Hole
*2
Knock Pin
(b) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing exhaust gear

assembly RH, and tighten the 3 bolts with a socket
"TORX" wrench E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
17. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY RH

5/7
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Before installation, check that there is no foreign matter on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly RH and intake camshaft RH.
(a) Install the camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH while

aligning the knock hole of the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly RH with the knock pin of the intake camshaft RH.
*1
Knock Hole
*2
Knock Pin
(b) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
RH, and tighten the 3 bolts with a socket "TORX" wrench
E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
18. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET

19. INSTALL CHAIN SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 2)
21. INSTALL TIMING CHAIN OR BELT COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
23. INSTALL TIMING CHAIN OR BELT COVER OIL SEAL
24. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
25. INSTALL NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Manual Transmission)
26. INSTALL NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Automatic Transmission)
27. INSTALL REAR CYLINDER HEAD PLATE (for Manual Transmission)
28. INSTALL VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
29. INSTALL PUMP DRIVE CASE ASSEMBLY
30. INSTALL VALVE LIFTER
31. INSTALL FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
6/7
8/6/12
32. INSTALL NO. 2 FUEL DELIVERY PIPE

34. CONNECT VENTILATION HOSE
35. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
38. INSTALL V-RIBBED BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY
39. INSTALL NO. 2 IDLER PULLEY SUB-ASSEMBLY
40. INSTALL OIL LEVEL DIPSTICK GUIDE
41. INSTALL GENERATOR ASSEMBLY
42. INSTALL FAN AND GENERATOR V BELT
43. INSTALL BELT GENERATOR COVER
44. INSTALL GENERATOR COVER
46. REMOVE ENGINE STAND
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000056U900CX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. INSTALL ENGINE STAND

3. REMOVE GENERATOR COVER
4. REMOVE BELT GENERATOR COVER
5. REMOVE FAN AND GENERATOR V BELT
6. REMOVE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY
7. REMOVE OIL LEVEL DIPSTICK GUIDE
8. REMOVE NO. 2 IDLER PULLEY SUB-ASSEMBLY
9. REMOVE V-RIBBED BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY
12. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
13. SEPARATE VENTILATION HOSE
15. REMOVE NO. 2 FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
16. REMOVE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
17. REMOVE VALVE LIFTER
18. REMOVE PUMP DRIVE CASE ASSEMBLY
19. REMOVE VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
20. REMOVE REAR CYLINDER HEAD PLATE (for Manual Transmission)
21. REMOVE NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Automatic Transmission)
22. REMOVE NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Manual Transmission)
23. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
24. REMOVE TIMING CHAIN OR BELT COVER OIL SEAL
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000056U900CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12

26. REMOVE TIMING CHAIN OR BELT COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
27. REMOVE CHAIN SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 1)
29. ROTATE CRANKSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT
(a) Turn the crankshaft approximately 200 clockwise, and
align the alignment mark as shown in the illustration.
*a
Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
Do not turn the crankshaft counterclockwise except for
a slight adjustment to correctly align the alignment
mark. If not, the valves may come into contact with the
piston.
(b) Using SST, turn the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH approximately 180clockwise, and align the alignment
mark on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly LH to
the position (zero-lift position) shown in the illustration.
*a
Alignment Mark
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
NOTICE:
After this work, when the intake valve and exhaust
valve lift at the same time, the valve heads contact
each other, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid
this, do not turn the intake camshaft LH and the exhaust
camshaft LH more than the zero-lift range (the range
where the camshafts can be turned lightly by hand).
(c) Remove the pulley bolt.
30. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET

31. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
2/5
8/6/12
(a) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
RH and remove the 3 bolts with a "TORX" socket wrench
E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH.
32. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing exhaust gear

assembly RH and remove the 3 bolts with a "TORX" socket
wrench E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly RH.
33. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH and remove the 3 bolts with a "TORX" socket wrench
E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the camshaft timing intake gear assembly LH.
34. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing exhaust gear

3/5
8/6/12
assembly LH and remove the 3 bolts with a "TORX" socket

wrench E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH.

39. REMOVE INJECTOR DRIVER BRACKET
40. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
41. REMOVE CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
42. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
43. REMOVE CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
44. REMOVE CAMSHAFT CAP (for Bank 1)
(a) In several steps, uniformly loosen the 12 bolts in the

order shown in the illustration, and remove the front
camshaft cap RH, intake center camshaft cap RH, intake
rear camshaft cap RH, exhaust center camshaft cap RH,
and exhaust rear camshaft cap RH.
HINT:
Arrange the removed parts in the correct order.
45. REMOVE CAMSHAFT RH (for Bank 1)
4/5
8/6/12
(a) Remove the intake camshaft RH and exhaust camshaft RH

from the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
46. REMOVE CAMSHAFT CAP (for Bank 2)
(a) In several steps, uniformly loosen the 13 bolts in the

order shown in the illustration, and remove the front
camshaft cap LH, intake center camshaft cap LH, intake
rear camshaft cap LH, exhaust center camshaft cap LH
and exhaust rear camshaft cap LH.
HINT:
47. REMOVE CAMSHAFT LH (for Bank 2)
(a) Remove the intake camshaft LH and exhaust camshaft LH

from the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4V07IX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4V07IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4X087X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY WITH CONNECTING ROD
(a) Mark each connecting rod cap and piston with a cylinder number.
(b) Turn the crankshaft so that the connecting rod cap can be removed.
(c) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14, remove the 2

connecting rod cap bolts and connecting rod cap.
(d) Turn the crankshaft and separate the crank pin from the
connecting rod.
*1
Crank pin
*2
Connecting rod
HINT:
Turn the crankshaft clockwise when removing the No. 1 or No.
3 piston with connecting rod, and turn it counterclockwise
when removing the No. 2 or No. 4 piston with connecting rod.
(e) Push the connecting rod in the direction of the arrow, and
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4X087X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12
remove the piston with connecting rod from the cylinder

block.
2. REMOVE CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 1)

NOTICE:
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the cylinder block during servicing.
(a) Operate the engine stand so that the bank 1 side faces upward.
(b) Remove the 5 bolts.
(c) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 10 bolts in the

order as shown in the illustration.
(d) Remove the 10 bolts and cylinder block (for bank 1).
NOTICE:
Lift the cylinder block (for bank 1) slightly, and confirm that the crankshaft is remaining on the
cylinder block (for bank 2). If the cylinder block (for bank 1) is lifted carelessly when
separating, the crankshaft possibly having stuck to cylinder block (for bank 1) may fall off.
3. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT
2/6
8/6/12
(a) Remove the crankshaft from the cylinder block (for bank
2).
4. REMOVE REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL

(a) Remove the rear engine oil seal.
5. REMOVE O-RING
(a) Remove the O-ring from the cylinder block (for bank 2).
6. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT BEARING
(a) Remove the crankshaft bearings from the cylinder block

(for bank 1) and cylinder block (for bank 2).
*1
No. 1 and No. 3 Crankshaft Bearing
*2
No. 2 and No. 4 Crankshaft Bearing
*3
No. 5 Crankshaft Bearing
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
HINT:
Push the bearing at the opposite end to locking lip to
remove the bearing.
7. REMOVE OIL SEPARATOR COVER

3/6
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 7 bolts and oil separator cover from the
cylinder block (for bank 1).
8. REMOVE CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 2)

(a) Remove the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 2) from the engine stand.
9. REMOVE CYLINDER BLOCK PLATE
(a) Remove the 5 bolts and cylinder block plate from the
10. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT SENSOR HOLDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and crankshaft sensor holder

assembly from the cylinder block (for bank 2).
11. REMOVE NO. 1 CYLINDER BLOCK TIGHT PLUG
(a) Remove the 3 No. 1 cylinder block tight plugs from the
4/6
8/6/12
cylinder block (for bank 1) and cylinder block (for bank 2).
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
12. REMOVE CONNECTING ROD BEARING

(a) Remove the connecting rod bearings.
HINT:
13. REMOVE PISTON RING SET

HINT:
(a) Using a piston ring expander, remove the No. 1

compression ring and No. 2 compression ring in order.
(b) Remove the upper oil ring side rail, lower oil ring side rail and oil ring expander in order by hand.
14. REMOVE PISTON WITH PIN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective

tape, remove the piston pin hole snap ring on one end
from the piston.
5/6
8/6/12
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
Be careful not to damage the piston and piston pin by
wrapping the tip of the screwdriver with protective tape.
(b) Remove the piston pin from the piston.

(c) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the piston pin hole snap ring
on other end from the piston.
HINT:
Be careful not to damage the piston and piston pin by wrapping the tip of the screwdriver with
protective tape.
6/6
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XCV08HX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check that there are no cracks, scratches or other damage.
(b) Using a dye penetrant, check the important sections for fissures.
(c) Check that there are no signs of gas leak or water leak on gasket attachment surfaces.
(d) Check the oil passages for clogging.
2. INSPECT CYLINDER BLOCK FOR WARPAGE

(a) Using a precision straightedge and a feeler gauge, measure the surfaces that contact the cylinder head
for warpage.
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
Maximum warpage:
0.025 mm (0.00098 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XCV08HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/19
0.025 mm (0.00098 in.)

If the warpage is greater than the maximum, correct the surface by grinding it or replace the cylinder
block.
HINT:
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of 20C (68F).
Allowable minimum cylinder block height:

204.9 mm (8.067 in.)
Standard cylinder block height:
205.0 mm (8.071 in.)
3. INSPECT CYLINDER BORE

(a) Using a cylinder gauge, measure the cylinder bore diameter at positions shown in the illustration and
check for taper and out-of-round.
Standard
Inside diameter A
86.005 to 86.015 mm (3.38602 to 3.38641 in.)
Inside diameter B
85.995 to 86.005 mm (3.38562 to 3.38602 in.)
Maximum
Taper
0.030 mm (0.00118 in.)
Out-of-runout
0.010 mm (0.00039 in.)
Location
H1
10.0 mm (0.394 in.)
H2
45.0 mm (1.772 in.)
H3
80.0 mm (3.150 in.)
H4
115.0 mm (4.528 in.)
If the result is not as specified, perform boring and honing, or replace the cylinder block and piston as a
set.
2/19
set.
HINT:
Measure the inside diameter of each cylinder bore in both the thrust and piston pin directions at the
height shown in the illustration.
The cylinder bore size is stamped on the upper face of the cylinder block.
*a
Main journal size mark
*b
Cylinder block (for bank 1 / for bank 2) combination mark
*c
No. 1 cylinder bore size mark
*d
No. 2cylinder bore size mark
*e
*f
4. INSPECT PISTON DIAMETER

(a) Using a micrometer, measure the piston diameter at right angles
to the piston pin hole, and at a point 39.4 mm (1.551 in.) from the
top of the piston head.
Standard
A grade
B grade
85.985 to 85.995 mm (3.38523 to

3.38562 in.)
85.975 to 85.985 mm (3.38484 to
3.38523 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) over
86.225 to 86.245 mm (3.39468 to
size
3.39547 in.)
0.50 mm (0.0197 in.) over
86.475 to 86.495 mm (3.40452 to
size
3.40531 in.)
If the result is not as specified, replace the piston.

HINT:
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of 20C
(68F).
Measure the outer diameter of each piston in thrust direction at
3/19
Measure the outer diameter of each piston in thrust direction at

the height shown in the illustration.
Standard sized pistons are classified into 2 grades, "A" and "B".
These grades should be used as guide lines in selecting a
standard piston diameter.
If the piston is replaced, check the piston oil clearance, and select
a suitable sized piston diameter.
5. INSPECT PISTON OIL CLEARANCE

(a) Subtract the piston diameter measurement from the cylinder bore diameter measurement.
Standard oil clearance:
0.010 to 0.030 mm (0.00039 to 0.00118 in.)
HINT:
Oil clearance = maximum cylinder bore diameter - piston diameter
If the result is not as specified, perform boring and honing, or replace the cylinder block and piston as a
set.
6. REPAIR CYLINDER LINER

(a) If any of the inside diameter, taper, out-of-round or piston oil clearance is out of standard, or if there is
any damage on the cylinder liner, rebore it to replace with an oversized piston.
Allowable maximum cylinder liner diameter:
86.505 mm (3.40570 in.)
If the inside diameter of cylinder liner is more than the maximum after boring and honing, replace the
cylinder block and piston as a set.
HINT:
When any of the cylinder liner needs to be rebored, all other cylinder bores must be rebored at the same
time, and replaced with oversized pistons.
Immediately after reboring, the inside diameter of the cylinder liner may differ from its actual diameter due
to high temperature. Thus, when measuring the inside diameter of the cylinder liner, wait until it has
cooled to the normal temperature of 20C (68F).
7. INSPECT PISTON WITH PIN

(a) Check the piston and piston pin for wear or cracks.
(b) Check the piston pin hole snap ring for distortion or wear.
(c) Check the piston ring groove for damage.
(d) Check the piston pin hole snap ring groove for burr.
*1
Piston Pin Hole Snap Ring Groove

If any burr is found, remove the burr from the groove.
4/19
(e) Check if the piston pin can be pushed into the piston pin hole with your thumb.
HINT:
8. INSPECT CONNECTING ROD SMALL END BUSH

(a) Check the bushing at connecting rod small end bush for damage.
9. INSPECT PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE

(a) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the piston
pin hole.
HINT:
(68F).
Measure the inside diameter of the piston pin hole at the 4
locations shown in the illustration, and take the maximum value.
Record the measured value.
(b) Using a micrometer, measure the outer diameter of the piston

pin.
*a
10.0 mm (0.394 in.)
HINT:
(68F).
Measure the outer diameter of the piston pin at the 4 locations
shown in the illustration, and take the minimum value.
(c) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of bushing at

connecting rod small end.
HINT:
(68F).
Measure the inside diameter of the bushing at the 4 locations
5/19
(d) Calculate the clearance between the piston pin hole and piston pin.
0.004 to 0.008 mm (0.00016 to 0.00031 in.)
If the clearance between the piston pin and piston pin hole is more than the maximum, replace the piston
and piston pin as a set.
HINT:
Oil clearance = piston pin hole inside diameter - piston pin outer diameter
(e) Calculate the clearance between piston pin and bushing at connecting rod small end.
0.006 to 0.026 mm (0.00024 to 0.00102 in.)
If the clearance between the piston pin and bushing at connecting rod small end is more than the
maximum, replace the connecting rod and piston pin as a set.
HINT:
Oil clearance = connecting rod small end inside diameter - piston pin outer diameter
10. INSPECT PISTON RING

(a) Make sure that the piston ring is not broken or damaged.
If the piston ring is broken or damaged, replace it with a new one.
HINT:
Use a piston ring of the same size as the piston to be used.
11. INSPECT PISTON RING END GAP
(a) Using a piston, push the piston ring into the cylinder.
HINT:
Push the piston ring into the cylinder until the entire piston is
inserted into the cylinder.
*1
Piston ring
6/19
(b) Using a feeler gauge, measure the end gap.

Maximum end gap
No. 1
0.20 to 0.25 mm (0.00787 to 0.00984 in.)
No. 2
0.60 to 0.70 mm (0.02362 to 0.02756 in.)
Oil ring
0.10 to 0.35 mm (0.00394 to 0.01378 in.)
If the end gap is more than the maximum, replace the piston ring
with a new one.
HINT:
(68F).
Use a piston ring of the same size as the piston to be used.
12. INSPECT RING GROOVE CLEARANCE

(a) Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the piston
ring and the wall of the ring groove.
Maximum clearance
No. 1
0.030 to 0.080 mm (0.00118 to 0.00315 in.)
No. 2
0.030 to 0.070 mm (0.00118 to 0.00276 in.)
If the clearance is more than the maximum, replace the piston

ring with a new one.
HINT:
(68F).
Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston ring groove and
piston ring.
Use a same sized piston ring with the piston when replacing it.
13. INSPECT CONNECTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check that the large or small end thrust surface is not damaged.
(b) Check the connecting rod assembly bearing for scar, peeling, seizure, melting or wear, etc.
(c) Using a rod aligner and feeler gauge, check the connecting rod
sub-assembly for bend.
Maximum bend:
0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) per 100 mm (3.937 in.) in length
If the bend is more than the maximum, replace the connecting rod
7/19
sub-assembly with a new one.

HINT:
(d) Using a rod aligner and feeler gauge, check the connecting rod
sub-assembly for twist.
Maximum twist:
0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) per 100 mm (3.937 in.) in length
If the twist is more than the maximum, replace the connecting rod
sub-assembly with a new one.
HINT:
14. INSPECT CONNECTING ROD THRUST CLEARANCE

(a) Clean the connecting rod bearings and crank pins, and apply engine oil to the crank pins. <*1>
(b) Align the claw and attach the connecting rod bearing to the
connecting rod.
*a
Claw
(c) Check the matching symbols and set the connecting rod,
connecting rod cap and connecting rod cap bolts.
*1
Matching Symbol
8/19
HINT:
Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. Make sure that they are assembled correctly by checking
their matching symbol.
(e) Apply engine oil to the threads of the connecting rod cap bolts.
(f) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14, tighten the 2 connecting rod
cup bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
Securely hold the crankshaft during the operation.
Be sure not to damage the crankshaft when securing it.
(g) Retighten the 2 connecting rod cup bolts in the same order as above. <*2>
NOTICE:
(h) In the same procedures from <*1> to <*2>, install the No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 piston with connecting rods.
(i) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14 and an angle gauge, tighten
the connecting rod cup bolts for the No. 1 to No. 4 piston with
connecting rods by additional 92.5.
NOTICE:
(j) Using a feeler gauge, measure the thrust clearance for each
connecting rod.
9/19
connecting rod.
Standard thrust clearance:
0.070 to 0.330 mm (0.00276 to 0.01299 in.)
If the clearance is not within the standard, replace the connecting
rod.
HINT:
Measure the thrust clearance for each connecting rod at several
points, and replace the connecting rod if there is uneven wear.
15. INSPECT CONNECTING ROD OIL CLEARANCE

(a) Clean the connecting rod bearings and crank pins, and apply engine oil to the crank pins. <*1>
(b) Attach the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and connecting rod cap.
(c) Lay a strip of Plastigage across the crank pin, and set the
connecting rod and the connecting rod cap with the 2 connecting
rod cap bolts after checking the matching symbols.
*1
Matching Symbol
HINT:
(68F).
Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. Make sure that they
are assembled correctly by checking their matching symbol.
(d) Apply engine oil to the threads of the connecting rod cap bolts.
10/19
(e) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14, tighten the 2 connecting rod
cup bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
Do not turn the crankshaft.
(f) Retighten the 2 connecting rod cup bolts in the same order as above. <*2>
NOTICE:
Do not turn the crankshaft.
(g) In the same procedures from <*1> to <*2>, install the No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 piston with connecting rods.
(h) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14 and an angle gauge, tighten
the connecting rod cup bolts for the No. 1 to No. 4 piston with
connecting rods by additional 92.5.
(i) Remove the connecting rod cup and measure the Plastigage at its
widest point.
0.025 to 0.055 mm (0.00098 to 0.00217 in.)
NOTICE:
Completely remove the Plastigage after the inspection.
If the oil clearance is more than the maximum, replace the

bearings.
HINT:
11/19
HINT:
Measure the outer diameter of the crank pin using a micrometer, and
select a suitable size connecting rod bearing when replacing the
connecting rod bearing.
Standard
BEARING
BEARING SIZE
(THICKNESS AT CENTER)
1.492 to 1.508 mm
Standard
(0.05874 to 0.05937
in.)
OUTER DIAMETER OF
CRANK PIN
49.976 to 50.000 mm
(1.96756 to 1.96850 in.)
1.511 to 1.515 mm
0.03 mm (0.0012
(0.05949 to 0.05965
in.) Undersize
in.)
49.946 to 49.970 mm
(1.96637 to 1.96732 in.)
1.521 to 1.525 mm
0.05 mm (0.0020
(0.05988 to 0.06004
in.) Undersize
in.)
49.926 to 49.950 mm
(1.96559 to 1.96653 in.)
1.621 to 1.625 mm
0.25 mm (0.0098
(0.06382 to 0.06398
in.) Undersize
in.)
49.726 to 49.750 mm
(1.95771 to 1.95866 in.)
16. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT

(a) Using a dye penetrant, check the important sections for fissures.
(b) Using a dial indicator, measure the circle runout at the center
journal.
Maximum circle runout:
0.035 mm (0.00138 in.)
If the circle runout is more than the maximum, grind to correct or
replace the crankshaft.
HINT:
(68F).
If a suitable V-block is not available, using just the No. 1 and No.
5 crankshaft bearings on the cylinder block, position the
crankshaft on the cylinder block. Then, measure the crankshaft
runout using a dial indicator.
(c) Using a micrometer, check the outer diameter of the crankshaft

journal and crank pin for taper and out-of-round.
Maximum (Pin)
Taper
0.006 mm (0.00024 in.)
Out-of-runout
0.005 mm (0.00020 in.)
12/19
Maximum (Journal)
Taper
0.006 mm (0.00024 in.)
Out-of-runout
0.005 mm (0.00020 in.)
Allowable minimum diameter

Pin
47.726 mm (1.87897 in.)
Journal
67.735 mm (2.66673 in.)
If taper or out-of-round is more than the maximum, replace the

connecting rod bearing or crankshaft bearing, and grind to correct
or replace the crankshaft as required.
HINT:
(68F).
Select a suitable size connecting rod bearing or crankshaft
bearing when replacing the connecting rod bearing or crankshaft
bearing.
When grinding to correct the crank journal or crank pin, finish
them to the suitable dimensions as shown in the table below
according to the undersize bearing to be used.
Standard
BEARING
CONNECTING
CRANK
CRANKSHAFT
CRANKSHAFT
ROD
PIN
BEARING
JOURNAL
BEARING
THICKNESS
OUTER
DIAMETER
THICKNESS (AT
CENTER)
DIAMETER
(AT CENTER)
NO. 1 TO
NO. 5
NO. 4
Standard
1.492 to
1.508 mm
(0.05874 to
0.05937 in.)
0.03 mm
1.511 to
(0.0012
1.515 mm
in.)
(0.05949 to
Undersize 0.05965 in.)
0.05 mm
1.521 to
49.976 to 2.495 to
2.493 to
50.000
mm
2.513
mm
2.511
mm
(1.96756
(0.09823 (0.09815
to
1.96850
to
0.09894
to
0.09886
in.)
in.)
in.)
67.985 to
68.009 mm
(2.67657 to
2.67751 in.)
49.946 to 2.519 to
49.970
2.522
2.517 to
2.520
mm
mm
mm
1.96734
67.979 mm
(0.09917 (0.09909
(2.67539 to
to
to
2.67633 in.)
0.09929 0.09921
in.)
in.)
in.)
(1.96637
to
49.926 to 2.529 to
2.527 to
49.950
2.532
2.530
mm
mm
mm
67.955 to
67.935 to
13/19
(0.0020
in.)
1.525 mm
(0.05988 to
0.25 mm
1.621 to
(0.0098
1.625 mm
in.)
(0.06382 to
mm
(1.96559
to
1.96653
in.)
mm
mm
67.959 mm
(0.09957 (0.09949
(2.67460 to
to
to
2.67555 in.)
0.09968 0.09961
in.)
in.)
49.726 to 2.629 to
2.627 to
49.750
mm
2.632
mm
2.630
mm
(1.95771
(0.10350 (0.10342
to
1.95866
to
0.10362
to
0.10354
in.)
in.)
in.)
67.735 to
67.759 mm
(2.66673 to
2.66767 in.)
17. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT BEARING

(a) Inspect the crankshaft bearing for scar, peeling, seizure, melting or wear, etc.
18. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT THRUST CLEARANCE
(a) Using a feeler gauge, check the thrust clearance of the

crankshaft at No. 5 crankshaft bearing.
Standard clearance:
0.130 to 0.308 mm (0.00512 to 0.01213 in.)
If the thrust clearance is not within the standard, replace the No.
5 crankshaft bearing.
19. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT OIL CLEARANCE

(a) Remove the seal packing left on the cylinder block.
(b) Clean the crankshaft bearings and crankshaft journals.
(c) Attach the crankshaft bearings to the cylinder block.

NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the matching surface of the cylinder
block.
The shapes of the No. 1 and No. 3 bearings are different from
those of the No. 2 and No. 4 bearings. Be sure to attach them
correctly.
*1
No. 1 and No. 3 crankshaft bearings (with grooves)
*2
No. 2 and No. 4 crankshaft bearings (without grooves)
14/19
*3
No. 5 crankshaft bearings
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
(d) Place the crankshaft on the cylinder block.

(e) Lay a strip of Plastigage across each camshaft journal.
(f) Place the cylinder block (for bank 1) on the cylinder block (for bank 2).
(g) Apply engine oil to the washers and cylinder block bolt threads.
NOTICE:
To prevent engine oil from entering into the water jacket, do not apply a large amount.
(h) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 10 bolts in the order

NOTICE:
When tightening the bolts, hold the cylinder block (for bank 2)
while not holding the cylinder block (for bank 1) to ensure the
joint accuracy of the cylinder blocks.
(i) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 10 bolts by 180 in the

order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
When loosening the bolts, hold the cylinder block (for bank 2)
(j) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 10 bolts in the order

NOTICE:
15/19
(k) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 4 bolts by 180 in the

NOTICE:
(l) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 4 bolts in the order

NOTICE:
(m) Using a 12 mm socket wrench and an angle gauge, tighten the 4

bolts by additional 60 in the order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
(n) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 6 bolts by 180 in the

NOTICE:
16/19
(o) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 6 bolts in the order

NOTICE:
(p) Using a 12 mm socket wrench and an angle gauge, tighten the 6

bolts by additional 60 in the order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
(q) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 10 bolts in the order

(r) Remove the 10 bolts and cylinder block (for bank 1).
NOTICE:
Lift the cylinder block (for bank 1) slightly, and confirm that the crankshaft remains on the cylinder
block (for bank 2). If the cylinder block (for bank 1) is lifted carelessly when separating, the
crankshaft may fall off as it may have stuck to the cylinder block (for bank 1).
(s) Measure the Plastigage at its widest point.

Standard clearance:
0.013 to 0.031 mm (0.00051 to 0.00122 in.)
If the clearance is not within the standard, replace the crankshaft
bearing, and grind to correct or replace the crankshaft as
required.
17/19
NOTICE:
Completely remove the Plastigage after the inspection.
HINT:
Select the suitable size connecting rod bearing or crankshaft
bearing when replacing the connecting rod bearing or crankshaft
bearing.
When grinding to correct the crank journal or crank pin, finish
them to the suitable dimensions as shown in the table below
according to the undersize bearing to be used.
Standard
BEARING
CONNECTING
ROD
CRANK
PIN
CRANKSHAFT
BEARING
CRANKSHAFT
JOURNAL
BEARING
OUTER
THICKNESS (AT
DIAMETER
THICKNESS DIAMETER
(AT CENTER)
CENTER)
NO. 1 TO
NO. 5
NO. 4
Standard
1.492 to
1.508 mm
(0.05874 to
0.05937 in.)
0.03 mm
1.511 to
(0.0012
1.515 mm
in.)
(0.05949 to
0.05 mm
1.521 to
(0.0020
in.)
1.525 mm
(0.05988 to
0.25 mm
(0.0098
1.621 to
1.625 mm
in.)
(0.06382 to
49.976 to 2.495 to
2.493 to
50.000
2.511
mm
(1.96756
to
1.96850
in.)
2.513
67.985 to
mm
mm
68.009 mm
(0.09823 (0.09815
(2.67657 to
to
to
2.67751 in.)
0.09894 0.09886
in.)
in.)
49.946 to 2.519 to
49.970
2.522
2.517 to
2.520
mm
mm
mm
(1.96637
(0.09917 (0.09909
to
1.96734
to
0.09929
to
0.09921
in.)
in.)
in.)
67.955 to
67.979 mm
(2.67539 to
2.67633 in.)
49.926 to 2.529 to
2.527 to
49.950
2.532
2.530
1.96653
67.935 to
mm
mm
67.959 mm
(0.09957 (0.09949
(2.67460 to
to
to
2.67555 in.)
0.09968 0.09961
in.)
in.)
in.)
mm
(1.96559
to
49.726 to 2.629 to
2.627 to
49.750
mm
2.632
mm
2.630
mm
(1.95771
(0.10350 (0.10342
to
1.95866
to
0.10362
to
0.10354
in.)
in.)
in.)
67.735 to
67.759 mm
(2.66673 to
2.66767 in.)
18/19
19/19
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4Y0BEX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL NO. 1 CYLINDER BLOCK TIGHT PLUG
NOTICE:
Place wooden blocks wrapped in a cloth under the
cylinder block and stabilize the cylinder block during
servicing.
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the
cylinder block during servicing.
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
(a) Apply seal packing to the threaded portion of the No. 1

cylinder block tight plugs and install them to the cylinder
block (for bank 1) and cylinder block (for bank 2).
Seal packing:
Three Bond 1105 or equivalent
NOTICE:
Before applying seal packing, degrease the No. 1
cylinder block tight plugs and thread holes of the
cylinder block (for bank 1) and cylinder block (for bank
2).
2. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT SENSOR HOLDER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the crankshaft sensor holder assembly to the
cylinder block (for bank 2) with the 2 bolts.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4Y0BEX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/14
8/6/12
3. INSTALL CYLINDER BLOCK PLATE

(a) Install the cylinder block plate to the cylinder block (for
bank 2) with the 5 bolts.
4. INSTALL OIL SEPARATOR COVER

(a) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the
illustration.
Seal packing:
*a
3.0 to 5.0 mm (0.118 to 0.197 in.)
NOTICE:
Install the oil separator cover within 5 minutes of applying
seal packing.
(b) Tight the 7 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to

install the oil separator cover to the cylinder block (for
bank 1).
5. INSTALL O-RING
(a) Attach a new O-ring to the cylinder block (for bank 2).
2/14
8/6/12
6. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT BEARING

(a) Apply engine oil to the crankshaft bearing, and install
them to the cylinder block (for bank 1) and cylinder block
(for bank 2).
*1
No. 1 and No. 3 Bearings (with groove)
*2
No. 2 and No. 4 Bearings (without groove)
*3
No. 5 Bearing
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
NOTICE:
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the
cylinder block during servicing.
The shapes of the No. 1 and No. 3 bearings are different
from those of the No. 2 and No. 4 bearings. Be sure to
install them in the right locations.
7. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT
(a) Apply engine oil to the crankshaft journals and place the
crankshaft on the cylinder block (for bank 2).
8. INSTALL CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 1)

(a) Apply seal packing to the mating surface of the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 1) as shown
Seal packing:
3/14
8/6/12
*a
3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in.)
*b
0.5to 1.5 mm (0.0197 to 0.0591 in.)
*c
Range of A-A
*d
Within 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
*e
2.7 to 3.7 mm (0.106 to 0.146 in.)
*f
3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in.)
*g
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
*h Chamfer edge
*i
36.0 mm (1.417 in.)
*j
2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not let the seal packing overflow to the oil passage or crankshaft bearing because engine
seizure may result.
Install the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 1) within 5 minutes of applying seal packing.
(b) Place the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 1) to the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 2).
(c) Apply engine oil to the washers and cylinder block bolt threads.
NOTICE:
To prevent engine oil from entering into the water jacket, do not apply a large amount.
(d) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 10 bolts in the

NOTICE:
When tightening the bolts, hold the cylinder block subassembly (for bank 2) while not holding the cylinder
block sub-assembly (for bank 1) to ensure the joint
accuracy of the cylinder blocks.
4/14
8/6/12
(e) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 10 bolts by 180

NOTICE:
When loosening the bolts, hold the cylinder block subassembly (for bank 2) while not holding the cylinder
(f) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 10 bolts in the

NOTICE:
(g) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 4 bolts by 180

NOTICE:
(h) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 4 bolts in the

NOTICE:
(i) Using a 12 mm socket wrench and an angle gauge, tighten

the 4 bolts by additional 60 in the order shown in the
5/14
8/6/12
illustration.
NOTICE:
(j) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 6 bolts by 180

NOTICE:
(k) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 6 bolts in the

NOTICE:
(l) Using a 12 mm socket wrench and an angle gauge, tighten

the 6 bolts by additional 60 in the order shown in the
illustration.
NOTICE:
(m) Tighten the 5 bolts.

6/14
8/6/12
HINT:
After tightening, if the seal packing is squeezed out in the seal
surface area of the chain cover and oil pan sub-assembly,
completely remove it. Seal packing on the chamfer area,
however, should not be removed.
(n) Check that the crankshaft turns smoothly.
9. INSTALL REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL

(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to a new rear engine oil seal inner periphery and outer periphery.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the rear engine oil seal
uniformly to the position shown in the illustration.
SST: 09223-15030
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07150
Oil seal tap-in depth:
0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.039 in.) from the cylinder block surface
NOTICE:
Do not tap in the rear engine oil seal at an angle.
Remove the engine oil from the crankshaft.
Do not tap in the rear engine oil seal more than
necessary.
10. INSTALL CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Mount the cylinder block sub-assembly onto an engine stand.
11. INSTALL PISTON WITH PIN SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, install the piston pin hole snap ring on
one end of the piston.
7/14
8/6/12
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
Make sure that the piston pin hole snap ring is firmly attached into the piston pin hole snap ring
groove.
After installing the piston pin hole snap ring, rotate the piston pin hole snap ring so that its end
part and the cutout portion of the piston pin hole snap ring groove do not match.
*1
Piston Pin Hole Snap Ring
*a
Correct
*b
Incorrect
(b) Make sure the directions of the piston front mark and
connecting rod, and then set the piston to the connecting
rod.
*1
Front Mark
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
(c) Apply engine oil to the piston pin and install it to the piston.
(d) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, install the piston pin hole snap ring to
the piston.
8/14
8/6/12
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
Make sure the piston pin hole snap ring is firmly attached into the piston pin hole snap ring
groove.
After installing the piston pin hole snap ring, rotate the piston pin hole snap ring so that its end
part and the cutout portion of the piston pin hole snap ring groove do not match.
*1
Piston Pin Hole Snap Ring
*a
Correct
*b
Incorrect
12. INSTALL PISTON RING SET

(a) Install the oil ring expander, lower oil ring side rail and upper oil ring side rail in order by hand.
HINT:
The oil ring consists of the 2 oil ring side rails and oil ring expander.
(b) Set the oil ring expander ends at the location B in the illustration.
(c) Hook the stoppers at the both ends of the lower oil ring side rail into the oil return hole at the
coating cutout portion A and the oil ring expander as shown in the illustration.
9/14
8/6/12
*1
Lower Oil Ring Side Rail
*2
Oil Ring Expander
*3
Oil Return Hole
*4
Coating Cutout
*a
0 to 20
Coating part
(d) Align the rail ends of the upper oil ring side rail within the range C and hook the stopper into the
oil ring expander.
(e) Using a piston ring expander, install the No. 2 compression ring and No. 1 compression ring in
order.
(f) Set the No. 1 compression ring ends at the location A or B

HINT:
The No. 1 compression ring ends can be set either at A or B.
10/14
8/6/12
(g) Set the No. 2 compression ring ends at the location A or B, that is 180 opposite of those of the
No. 1 compression ring.
(h) Check that the piston rings and oil rings are correctly set.
13. INSTALL PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY WITH CONNECTING ROD

(a) Operate the engine stand so that the oil pan side faces upward.
(b) Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod

and connecting rod cap. <*1>
*a
Claw
(c) Check that the piston rings and oil rings are correctly set.
(d) Apply engine oil to the piston and inside the cylinder bore.
(e) Turn the crankshaft so that the crank pin is positioned at

TDC.
*1
Crank Pin
(f) Squeeze the piston rings with a piston ring compressor,

face the piston front mark toward the engine front side,
and insert the piston with connecting rod into the cylinder
block by lightly tapping on the piston top with a hammer
handle, etc.
NOTICE:
When inserting the piston with connecting rod, be careful
not to scratch the cylinder bore or crank pin by connecting
the rod edge.
Be careful not to apply too much impact when inserting to
prevent the connecting rod bearing from falling off.
(g) Apply engine oil to the seating face of the connecting rod cap and threads of the connecting rod
cap bolts.
(h) While pushing the piston top, turn the crankshaft to position the crankshaft pin and connecting
11/14
8/6/12
rod large end as shown in the illustration, and then attach the connecting rod cup with 2 new
connecting rod cap bolts.
*1
Connecting Rod
*2
Crankshaft Pin
HINT:
Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. Make sure that they are assembled correctly by
checking their matching symbols.
Use new connecting rod cap bolts.

Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise when installing the No. 1 or No. 3 piston with connecting rod,
and turn the crankshaft clockwise when installing the No. 2 or No. 4 piston with connecting rod.
12/14
8/6/12
*1
Matching Symbol
(i) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14, tighten the 2

connecting rod cup bolts in the order shown in the
illustration.
*a
No. 1 and No. 4
*b
No. 2 and No. 3
(j) Retighten the 2 connecting rod cup bolts in the same order as above. <*2>
(k) In the same procedures from <*1> to <*2>, install the No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 piston with
connecting rods.
(l) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14 and an angle gauge,

tighten the connecting rod cup bolts for the No. 1 to No. 4
piston with connecting rods by additional 92.5.
*a
No. 1 and No. 4
*b
No. 2 and No. 3
(m) Check that the crankshaft can be turned smoothly.

13/14
8/6/12
14/14
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000591R000X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000591R000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000591R000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000056U7008X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 2 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
(b) Clean the bolt holes in the cylinder block (bank 2).
NOTICE:
To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts, clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing with
compressed air to eliminate engine coolant, etc.
(c) Apply the seal packing to both sides of the No. 2 cylinder head gasket as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
*a
0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.039in.)
*b
2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
*c
Edge of the gasket
NOTICE:
Install the cylinder head sub-assembly LH within 5 minutes of applying the seal packing.
(d) Place the No. 2 cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block (bank 2).
2. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Clean the threads of the cylinder head bolts and apply sufficient engine oil to the washers and
threads of the bolts.
(b) Mount the cylinder head sub-assembly LH on the cylinder block (bank 2).
1/6
8/6/12
(c) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts in the order shown in

the illustration.
(d) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts further in the same order above.
NOTICE:
If the bolt makes a stick-slip sound during tightening, repeat the procedure from the cylinder
head gasket installation after cleaning and completely drying the bolt holes and contact
surfaces.
HINT:
In that case, the No. 2 cylinder head gasket can be reused.
(e) Loosen the 6 cylinder head bolts by 360 in the order

(f) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts in the order shown in the
illustration.
(g) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts further in the same order above.
(h) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts

another 100 in the order shown in the illustration.
2/6
8/6/12
HINT:
Temporarily install the appropriate bolt for angle gauge if
necessary.
*1
Temporary Bolt
(i) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 2 cylinder head bolts

(j) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 4 cylinder head bolts

4. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

(b) Clean the bolt holes in the cylinder block (bank 1).
NOTICE:
To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts, clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing with
compressed air to eliminate engine coolant, etc.
(c) Apply the seal packing to both sides of the cylinder head gasket as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
3/6
8/6/12
*a
0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.039in.)
*b
2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
*c
Edge of the gasket
NOTICE:
Install the cylinder head sub-assembly RH within 5 minutes of applying the seal packing.
(d) Place the cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block (bank 1).
5. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

(a) Clean the threads of the cylinder head bolts and apply sufficient engine oil to the washers and
threads of the bolts.
(b) Mount the cylinder head sub-assembly RH on the cylinder block (bank 1).
(c) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts in the order shown in

the illustration.
(d) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts further in the same order as above.
NOTICE:
If the bolt makes a stick-slip sound during tightening, repeat the procedure from the cylinder
head gasket installation after cleaning and completely drying the bolt holes and contact
surfaces.
HINT:
In that case, the cylinder head gasket can be reused.
4/6
8/6/12
(e) Loosen the 6 cylinder head bolts by 360 in the order

(f) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts in the order shown in the
illustration.
(g) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts further in the same order above.
(h) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts
HINT:
Temporarily install the appropriate bolt for angle gauge if
necessary.
*1
Temporary Bolt
(i) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 2 cylinder head bolts

5/6
8/6/12
(j) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 4 cylinder head bolts

6/6
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000056U900AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Loosen the 6 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
(b) Lightly tap the cylinder head sub-assembly RH to separate it from the cylinder block (bank 1).
(c) Remove the cylinder head sub-assembly RH.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of the cylinder head and cylinder block.
3. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

(a) Remove the cylinder head gasket.
5. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Loosen the 6 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
(b) Lightly tap the cylinder head sub-assembly LH to separate it from the cylinder block (bank 2).
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(c) Remove the cylinder head sub-assembly LH.

NOTICE:
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of the cylinder head and cylinder block.
6. REMOVE NO. 2 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

(a) Remove the No. 2 cylinder head gasket.
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4V07HX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4V07HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4X086X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE CHAIN COVER MOUNT BOLT

(a) Remove the chain cover mount bolt.
2. REMOVE STUD BOLT

HINT:
If any of the stud bolts is deformed or the threads are
damaged, replace it.
(a) Remove the 6 stud bolts from the cylinder heads.

*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
3. REMOVE INTAKE VALVE

NOTICE:
Place a cloth, etc. to avoid scratching the mating surface of the cylinder head during servicing.
HINT:
Mark each part to prevent confusion.
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Using SST, compress the spring and remove the valve
spring retainer locks.
SST: 09202-70020
09202-00010
09202-01010
09202-01020
(b) Remove the valve, valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat.
4. REMOVE EXHAUST VALVE

CAUTION:
The exhaust valve is encapsulated with metallic sodium. The metallic sodium is a strong alkaline
and prone to cause a serious chemical reaction. Therefore, extra caution is required when handling
or disposing the exhaust valve.
Never disassemble the exhaust valve. The metallic sodium may cause blindness if it gets into your
eyes, or cause burn injuries or chemical reactions resulting in fire if it comes into contact with your
skin or any heat source.
If the exhaust valve is damaged, after removing the valve, carry out processing of "Preparation for
disposal" and "Disposal".
Make sure to wear safety glasses and protective gloves when removing a damaged exhaust valve.
Do not intentionally damage the exhaust valve to remove the metallic sodium.
NOTICE:
When it is determined that disposal procedure is dissolving, this may be performed.
HINT:
The exhaust valve is encapsulated with metallic sodium. This is safe as long as it does not come
into contact with air.
The exhaust valve in which metallic sodium is encapsulated can be identified with the embossed
mark.
*a
Embossed mark (E2H is for FA20 Engine)
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Using SST, compress the spring and remove the valve
SST: 09202-70020
09202-00010
09202-01010
09202-01020
(b) Remove the valve, valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat.
5. REMOVE VALVE STEM OIL SEAL
(a) Remove the 8 valve stem oil seals.

NOTICE:
Place a cloth, etc. to avoid scratching the mating surface
of the cylinder head during servicing.
Be careful not to damage the valve guide bushes and
cylinder head.
6. DISPOSE OF EXHAUST VALVE

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
HINT:
The metallic sodium within the exhaust valve can be identified using the embossed mark.
3/4
8/6/12
*a
(a) Preparation for disposal

CAUTION:
Ensure a fire extinguisher is at hand.
Wear safety glasses.
Wear protective gloves.
(b) Disposal
(1) Wear protective gloves and then remove the damaged valve from the cylinder head.
(2) Place a large container (bucket or other container) in a well-ventilated area and fill it with
water (at least 10 liters).
(3) Place the damaged exhaust valve inside the container
in an upright position using large pliers or similar tool
to submerge it under water.
CAUTION:
Ensure the damaged exhaust valve is fully submerged in

water.
Keep any fire sparks or fire sources away from this
container because hydrogen gas will be emitted from the
chemical reaction.
Because of serious chemical reaction, step back at least 2
to 3 m from the container.
(4) After the chemical reaction has completed (approximately 4 to 5 hours), using large pliers or
similar tool, carefully remove the valve from the container, and then dispose of it according to
the same procedures that are provided for other parts.
CAUTION:
After the chemical reaction, be careful not to let used liquid (sodium hydrate) contact your skin.
Should it contact your skin, immediately rinse it with plenty of water.
After the chemical reaction, dispose of used liquid (sodium hydrate) according to all applicable
government and local regulations.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XCV08GX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check that there are no cracks, scratches or other damage.
(b) Using a dye penetrant, check the important sections for fissures.
(c) Check that there are no signs of gas leak or water leak on gasket attachment surfaces.
(d) Using a precision straightedge and a feeler gauge, measure the surfaces that contact the cylinder
block for warpage.
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
Maximum warpage:
0.035 mm (0.00138 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XCV08GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/11
8/6/12
Allowable minimum cylinder head height:

98.4 mm (3.874 in.)
Standard cylinder head height:
98.5 mm (3.878 in.)
If the warpage is more than the maximum, correct the surface by grinding it or replace the cylinder
head sub-assembly.
HINT:
If the cylinder head sub-assembly bolt tightening torques and tightening angles are uneven,
cylinder head sub-assembly warpage may occur. During installation, make sure that tightening
torques and tightening angles are correctly obtained.
If the cylinder head sub-assembly is replaced, hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive
compound.
2. INSPECT INTAKE VALVE

(a) Check the valve flange and valve stem for damage, wear or deformation.
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the overall length of the

valve.
Standard overall length:
103.3 mm (4.067 in.)
*a
Overall Length
(c) Using a vernier caliper, measure the valve head margin

thickness.
Standard margin thickness:
0.8 to 1.2 mm (0.0315 to 0.0472 in.)
*a
Margin thickness
If the margin thickness is not as specified, replace the
valve.
HINT:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake valve
and the exhaust valve by their overall length.
If the valve is replaced, hand-lap the valve and valve seat
with an abrasive compound.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the diameter of the valve

2/11
8/6/12
stem.
Standard valve stem diameter:
5.455 to 5.470 mm (0.2148 to 0.2154 in.)
If the valve stem diameter is not as specified, replace the
valve.
HINT:
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of
20C (68F).
Measure the valve stem diameter at the 6 locations as
3. INSPECT EXHAUST VALVE

(a) Check the valve flange and valve stem for damage, wear or deformation.
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the overall length of the

valve.
Standard overall length:
95.1 mm (3.744 in.)
*a
Overall Length
(c) Using a vernier caliper, measure the valve head margin

thickness.
Standard margin thickness:
1.0 to 1.4 mm (0.039 to 0.055 in.)
*a
Margin thickness
If the margin thickness is not as specified, replace the
valve.
HINT:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake valve
and the exhaust valve by their overall length.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the diameter of the valve

3/11
8/6/12
stem.
Standard valve stem diameter:
5.445 to 5.460 mm (0.21437 to 0.21496 in.)
If the valve stem diameter is not as specified, replace the
valve.
HINT:
20C (68F).
Measure the valve stem diameter at the 6 locations as
4. INSPECT VALVE GUIDE BUSH OIL CLEARANCE
(a) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the

valve guide bush.
Standard valve guide bush inside diameter:
5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to 0.21701 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the valve
guide bush.
HINT:
20C (68F).
Measure the inside diameter of the valve guide bush at
the 6 locations as shown in the illustration, and take the
maximum value.
(b) Calculate the clearance between the valve guide bush and valve stem.
Standard Oil Clearance:
ITEM
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Intake
0.030 to 0.057 mm (0.00118 to 0.00224 in.)
Exhaust
0.040 to 0.067 mm (0.00157 to 0.00264 in.)
If the clearance between valve guide bush and valve stem is more the standard, replace the valve
guide bush or valve, whichever shows the greater amount of wear or damage.
HINT:
4/11
8/6/12
Subtract the valve stem diameter measurement from the inside diameter measurement of the
valve guide bush.
If the valve is replaced, hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
5. INSPECT VALVE ADJUSTING SHIM CLEARANCE

(a) Visually check the valve adjusting shim for damage.
(b) Using a micrometer, measure the valve stem end
diameter.
Standard valve stem end diameter:
ITEM
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Intake
5.455 to 5.470 mm (0.21476 to 0.21535 in.)
Exhaust
5.445 to 5.460 mm (0.21437 to 0.21496 in.)
If the valve stem end diameter is not as specified, replace

the valve.
HINT:
20C (68F).
Measure the valve stem end diameter at the 2 locations
as shown in the illustration, and take the minimum value.
(c) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the

valve adjusting shim.
Standard valve adjusting shim inside diameter:
5.500 to 5.560 mm (0.21654 to 0.21890 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the valve
adjusting shim.
HINT:
20C (68F).
Measure the inside diameter of the valve adjusting shim
at the 2 locations as shown in the illustration, and take
the maximum value.
If the valve adjusting shim needs to be replaced, check
the valve clearance and select a suitable one.
(d) Calculate the clearance between the valve adjusting shim and valve stem end.
Standard Oil Clearance:
0.030 to 0.115 mm (0.00118 to 0.00453 in.)
5/11
8/6/12
If the clearance between valve adjusting shim and valve stem end exceeds the standard, replace
the valve adjusting shim or valve, whichever shows the greater amount of wear or damage.
HINT:
Subtract the valve stem end diameter measurement from the inside diameter measurement of the
valve adjusting shim.
If the valve is replaced, hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
If the valve adjusting shim needs to be replaced, check the valve clearance and select a suitable
one.
6. INSPECT INTAKE VALVE SEATS

(a) Visually check the valve seat for damage or deformation.
(b) Clean the valve and valve seat.
(c) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
light coat of Prussian blue uniformly to the valve face.
*a
Valve stem
*b
Valve face
(d) Insert the valve, and without rotating the valve, lightly press the valve face against the valve
seat, and then pull it out.
(e) Using a vernier caliper, measure the width of the contact face shown in the illustration.
6/11
8/6/12
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
Standard width (A):

0.8 to 1.6 mm (0.032 to 0.063 in.)
If the width is not as specified, repair the valve seat with a cutter.
HINT:
Measure the width of the Prussian blue adhering to the valve seat.
If the Prussian blue is not continually adhered on the valve seat, hand-lap the valve and valve
seat with an abrasive compound.
If the Prussian blue is still not continually adhered on the valve seat after lapping, repair the valve
seat with a cutter.
(f) Completely remove the Prussian blue from the valve and valve seat.
7/11
8/6/12
(g) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
light coat of Prussian blue uniformly to the valve seat
face.
*a
Valve stem
*b
Contact face
(h) Insert the valve, and without rotating the valve, lightly press the valve face against the valve
(i) Check the location of the contact face shown in the
illustration.
Standard contact face location:
Middle of the valve face at all circumference
*a
Contact face location

If the seat contact is not in the middle of the valve face,
repair the valve seat with a cutter.
HINT:
Check the location of the Prussian blue adhering to the valve
face.
(j) Completely remove the Prussian blue from the valve and valve seat.
7. INSPECT EXHAUST VALVE SEATS

(a) Visually check the valve seat for damage or deformation.
(b) Clean the valve and valve seat.
(c) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
light coat of Prussian blue uniformly to the valve face.
8/11
8/6/12
*a
Valve stem
*b
Valve face
(d) Insert the valve, and without rotating the valve, lightly press the valve face against the valve
(e) Using a vernier caliper, measure the width of the contact face shown in the illustration.
9/11
8/6/12
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
Standard width (A):

1.1 to 1.7 mm (0.043 to 0.067 in.)
If the width is not as specified, repair the valve seat with a cutter.
HINT:
Measure the width of the Prussian blue adhering to the valve seat.
If the Prussian blue is not continually adhered on the valve seat, hand-lap the valve and valve
seat with an abrasive compound.
If the Prussian blue is still not continually adhered on the valve seat after lapping, repair the valve
seat with a cutter.
(f) Completely remove the Prussian blue from the valve and valve seat.
(g) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
light coat of Prussian blue uniformly to the valve seat
face.
*a
Valve stem
*b
Contact face
(h) Insert the valve, and without rotating the valve, lightly press the valve face against the valve
(i) Check the location of the contact face shown in the
illustration.
Standard contact face location:
Middle of the valve face at all circumference
*a
Contact face location

If the seat contact is not in the middle of the valve face,
repair the valve seat with a cutter.
HINT:
Check the location of the Prussian blue adhering to the valve
face.
10/11
8/6/12
(j) Completely remove the Prussian blue from the valve and valve seat.
8. INSPECT VALVE SPRING

(a) Visually check the valve spring for damage or deformation.
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the free length of the
valve spring.
Standard free length:
41.06 mm (1.617 in.)
If the free length is not as specified, replace the spring.
HINT:
(68F).
(c) Using a steel square, measure the deviation of the valve

spring.
Maximum deviation:
Less than 1.8 mm (0.0710 in.)
Maximum angle:
2.5
*a
Deviation
If the result is not as specified, replace the valve spring.
HINT:
20C (68F).
To measure deviation of the valve spring, stand the valve
spring on a level surface and measure its deviation at the
top of the valve spring using a steel square.
11/11
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4Y0BDX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL INTAKE VALVE STEM OIL SEAL
(a) Apply engine oil to new valve stem oil seals.
*a
for Intake
*b
for Exhaust
*c
Gray
*d
Light green
NOTICE:
Pay close attention to the colors when installing the oil
seals.
Installing the intake oil seal into the exhaust side or
installing the exhaust oil seal to the intake side may
cause installation problems later.
(b) Using SST, push in the oil seals by hand.

SST: 09201-41020
*a
Correct
*b
Incorrect
NOTICE:
Place a cloth, etc. to avoid scratching the mating surface
of the cylinder head during servicing.
Do not tap SST with a plastic hummer to install the oil
seals as it may damage the oil seals. Push in the oil seals
by hand with SST.
Do not install the oil seals at an angle.
2. INSTALL EXHAUST VALVE STEM OIL SEAL

(a) Using SST, push in the oil seals by hand.
SST: 09201-41020
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4Y0BDX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
Use the same procedure as for the intake oil seals.
3. INSTALL INTAKE VALVE

NOTICE:
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the cylinder head during servicing.
(a) Set the valve spring seat, valve spring and retainer onto the cylinder head.
HINT:
Install the valve spring to the cylinder head with the narrow pitch end facing the valve spring seat.
(b) Apply engine oil to the valve stem and insert the valve into the valve guide bush.
NOTICE:
When inserting the valve into the valve guide bush, use special care not to damage the oil seal
lip.
(c) Apply engine oil to the valve spring retainer locks.
(d) Using SST, compress the valve spring and install the valve
SST: 09202-70020
09202-00010
09202-01010
09202-01020
(e) Using a plastic hammer, lightly tap the valve stem tip to
ensure a proper fit.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to tap the retainer.
4. INSTALL EXHAUST VALVE

NOTICE:
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the cylinder head during servicing.
(a) Set the valve spring seat, valve spring and retainer onto the cylinder head.
HINT:
Install the valve spring to the cylinder head with the narrow pitch end facing the valve spring seat.
(b) Apply engine oil to the valve stem and insert the valve into the valve guide bush.
2/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
When inserting the valve into the valve guide bush, use special care not to damage the oil seal
lip.
(c) Apply engine oil to the valve spring retainer locks.
(d) Using SST, compress the valve spring and install the valve
SST: 09202-70020
09202-00010
09202-01010
09202-01020
(e) Using a plastic hammer, lightly tap the valve stem tip to
ensure a proper fit.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to tap the retainer.
5. INSTALL STUD BOLT
(a) Install the 6 stud bolts to the cylinder heads.

*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
6. INSTALL CHAIN COVER MOUNT BOLT

3/4
8/6/12
(a) Install the chain cover mount bolt to the cylinder head
sub-assembly LH.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REPAIR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000035AU028X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REPAIR (2013 FR-S)
REPAIR
1. REPAIR INTAKE VALVE SEATS
NOTICE:
Repair the seat while checking the seating position.
Releasing the seat cutter pressure gradually helps to make the intake valve seat faces smoother.
(a) Using a 45 cutter, resurface the valve seat so that the

valve seat width is more than the specification.
(b) Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
(c) Check the valve seating position.
HINT:
This procedure is necessary to select a cutter to be used in the following steps.
(d) Using 30 or 75 cutters, correct the valve seat so that the contact condition between the valve
and valve seat is within the standard.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000035AU028X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
HINT:
Select an appropriate cutter by referring to the following chart.
CONTACT CUTTER TO BE SELECTED

POSITION
A in the
If the valve face position is high, use a 30 valve seat cutter in order to grind the surface
illustration so that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a standard value.
B in the
If the valve face position is low, use a 75 valve seat cutter in order to grind the surface so
illustration that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a standard value.
C in the
illustration
If the valve face position is centered, use a 30and 75 valve seat cutter in order to grind
the surface so that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a
standard value.
(e) Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
2. REPAIR EXHAUST VALVE SEATS

NOTICE:
2/5
8/6/12
(a) Using a 45 cutter, resurface the valve seat so that the

valve seat width is more than the specification.
(b) Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
(c) Check the valve seating position.
HINT:
This procedure is necessary to select a cutter to be used in the following steps.
(d) Using 30 or 60 cutters, correct the valve seat so that the contact condition between the valve
and valve seat is within the standard.
3/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
HINT:
Select an appropriate cutter by referring to the following chart.
CONTACT CUTTER TO BE SELECTED

POSITION
A in the
If the valve face position is high, use a 30 valve seat cutter in order to grind the surface
illustration so that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a standard value.
B in the
If the valve face position is low, use a 60 valve seat cutter in order to grind the surface so
illustration that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a standard value.
If the valve face position is centered, use a 30and 60 valve seat cutter in order to grind
C in the
the surface so that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a
illustration
standard value.
(e) Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
3. REPAIR VALVE
(a) Apply a light layer of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
small amount of an abrasive compound uniformly to the
valve face.
*a
Valve stem
*b
Valve face
HINT:
Do not apply the abrasive compound more than
necessary.
Do not apply the abrasive compound to the valve stem as
the valve stem may be affected.
(b) Slowly insert the valve stem into the valve guide bush and lap the valve and valve seat.
HINT:
Lift the valve and strike the valve on the valve seat 2 times, and slightly rotate the valve. Repeat
this set.
The contact surface between the valve and the valve seat may become larger than the standard
value, therefore, ensure that the valve is not continuously lapped by rotating while seated in the
valve seat.
While lapping, ensure that the valve is not removed from the valve guide bush by lifting too much.
(c) After lapping, completely remove the abrasive compound.
4/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Be sure to completely remove the abrasive compound as the remained compound could cause
engine troubles.
(d) Check the valve seating position and width.
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4Y0BCX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
1. REPLACE NO. 2 INTAKE VALVE GUIDE BUSH
(a) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing upward.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap out the No. 2 intake valve
guide bush.
SST: 09201-10000
09201-01050
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
cylinder head and stabilize the cylinder head during
servicing.
Use special care not to damage the cylinder head.
(c) Before installing the No. 2 intake valve guide bush, make sure that neither scratches nor damages
exist on the inner surface of cylinder head valve guide bush holes.
(d) Draw a reference line 7.6 mm (0.299 in.) below from the
top face on a new No. 2 intake valve guide bush using a
marker.
*a
Reference line
HINT:
Reference line is used as a guide when tapping-in the No. 2
intake valve guide bush.
(e) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing downward.
(f) Apply enough engine oil to the No. 2 intake valve guide bush, and set it on the cylinder head.
(g) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the No. 2 intake valve
guide bush to the reference line.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4Y0BCX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
SST: 09201-10000
09201-01050
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
servicing.
(h) While measuring the No. 2 intake valve guide bush

protrusion amount using a vernier caliper, tap in the No. 2
intake valve guide bush so that its height is within the
standard.
Standard protrusion height:
11.4 to 11.8 mm (0.449 to 0.466 in.)
NOTICE:
servicing.
HINT:
Use multiple small repetitions of tap-in and measurement in
order not to excessively tap in the No. 2 intake valve guide
bush.
*a
Protrusion height
(i) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing upward.
NOTICE:
Place wooden blocks wrapped in a cloth under the cylinder head and stabilize the cylinder head
during servicing.
(j) Using a reamer, ream the No. 2 intake valve guide bush to
obtain the standard clearance between the No. 2 intake
valve guide bush and valve stem.
2/5
8/6/12
5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to 0.21701 in.) at 20C

(68F)
NOTICE:
While gradually widening the reamer diameter, ream
the No. 2 intake valve guide bush uniformly so that the
oil clearance is within the standard.
HINT:
Apply engine oil to the reamer when reaming.
If the inner surface of No. 2 intake valve guide bush is
damaged, slightly grind the edge of the reamer with 400grit sandpaper.
If the inner surface of No. 2 intake valve guide bush
becomes lustrous and the reamer does not chip, use a
new reamer or correct the reamer.
(k) After reaming, remove chips and clean the No. 2 intake valve guide bush.
(l) Measure the inside diameter of the No. 2 intake valve guide bush and confirm the oil clearance.
(m) Check the contact condition between the valve and valve seat.
2. REPLACE NO. 2 EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE BUSH

(a) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing upward.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap out the No. 2 exhaust valve
guide bush.
SST: 09201-10000
09201-01050
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
servicing.
(c) Before installing the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush, make sure that neither scratches nor
damages exist on the inner surface of cylinder head valve guide bush holes.
(d) Draw a reference line 7.6 mm (0.299 in.) below from the
top face on a new No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush using a
marker.
3/5
8/6/12
*a
Reference line
HINT:
Reference line is used as a guide when tapping-in the No. 2
exhaust valve guide bush.
(e) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing downward.
(f) Apply enough engine oil to the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush, and set it on the cylinder head.
(g) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the No. 2 exhaust valve
guide bush to the reference line.
SST: 09201-10000
09201-01050
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
servicing.
(h) While measuring the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush

protrusion amount using a vernier caliper, tap in the No. 2
exhaust valve guide bush so that its height is within the
standard.
Standard protrusion height:
11.4 to 11.8 mm (0.449 to 0.466 in.)
NOTICE:
servicing.
HINT:
Use multiple small repetitions of tap-in and measurement in
order not to excessively tap in the No. 2 exhaust valve guide
bush.
4/5
8/6/12
*a
Protrusion height
(i) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing upward.
NOTICE:
Place wooden blocks wrapped in a cloth under the cylinder head and stabilize the cylinder head
during servicing.
(j) Using a reamer, ream the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush
to obtain the standard clearance between the No. 2
exhaust valve guide bush and valve stem.
5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to 0.21701 in.) at 20C
(68F)
NOTICE:
While gradually widening the reamer diameter, ream
the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush uniformly so that
the oil clearance is within the standard.
HINT:
Apply engine oil to the reamer when reaming.
If the inner surface of No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush is
damaged, slightly grind the edge of the reamer with 400grit sandpaper.
If the inner surface of No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush
becomes lustrous and the reamer does not chip, use a
new reamer or correct the reamer.
(k) After reaming, remove chips and clean the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush.
(l) Measure the inside diameter of the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush and confirm the oil clearance.
(m) Check the contact condition between the valve and valve seat.
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T3R03YX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T3R03YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TXU067X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Set the fan and generator V belt onto every part.
*1
Idler
*2
Generator
*3
Tensioner
*4
Water Pump
*5
Crankshaft
*6
A/C Compressor
(b) While turning the belt tensioner counterclockwise.

NOTICE:
Make sure that the fan and generator V belt is properly
installed to each pulley.
(c) Check that the fan and generator V belt fits properly in
the ribbed grooves.
HINT:
Make sure to check by hand that the fan and generator V belt
have not slipped out of the grooves on the bottom of the
pulley.

(a) Install the belt generator cover with the 2 blots.
(b) Engage the 2 wire harness clamps and install the wire harness to the belt generator cover.

(a) Install the generator cover with the 2 blots.

(a) Install the air cleaner cap with air cleaner hose with the 3 blots.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TXU067X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(b) Install the air cleaner cap with air cleaner hose with the 2 hose clamps.
(c) Connect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
(d) Connect the mass air flow meter connector.
(e) Engage the wire harness clamp and install the wire harness to the air cleaner cap.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TXU067X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000041LH006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT FAN AND GENERATOR V BELT
(a) Check the belt for wear, cracks or other signs of damage.
*a
INCORRECT
If any of the following defects is found, replace the fan

and generator V belt.
The
The
are
The
belt is cracked.
belt is worn out to the extent that the cords
exposed.
belt has chunks missing from the ribs.
(b) Check that the belt fits properly in the ribbed grooves.
*a
CORRECT
*b
INCORRECT
HINT:
Check with your hand to confirm that the belt has not slipped
out of the grooves on the bottom of the pulley. If it has
slipped out, replace the fan and generator V belt. Install the
new fan and generator V belt.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000041LH006X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TXV06BX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the No. 2

ventilation hose.
(b) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector.
(c) Disengage the clamp and separate the wire harness from the air cleaner cap.
(d) Loosen the 2 hose clamps.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TXV06BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(e) Remove the 3 bolts and the air cleaner cap with air
cleaner hose.
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and generator cover.

(a) Disengage the 2 clamps and separate the wire harness
from the belt generator cover.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and belt generator cover.
(a) While releasing the belt tension by turning the belt

tensioner counterclockwise, remove the fan and
generator V belt from the belt tensioner.
HINT:
The pulley bolt for the belt tensioner has a left-hand thread.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TXV06BX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IC9006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IC9006X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
5/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
6/7
8/6/12
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000N8101BX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET
(a) Install the 2 front engine mounting brackets with the 4 bolts.
2. REMOVE ENGINE STAND

(a) Attach an engine sling device and hang the engine with a chain block.
NOTICE:
With the exception of installing the engine assembly to an engine stand or removing the engine
assembly from an engine stand, do not perform any work on the engine while it is suspended,
as doing so is dangerous.
(b) Remove the engine stand from the engine.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE

4. INSTALL FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
5. INSTALL CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
6. INSTALL CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
7. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
8. INSTALL ENGINE ASSEMBLY

(a) Confirm that 2 knock pins are on the transmission contact
surface of the engine block before transmission
installation.
(b) Keeping the engine assembly and the transmission
assembly in a horizontal position, align the knock pins
with each hole on the transmission assembly and install
the bolt.

10. CONNECT FUEL HOSE
(a) Connect the fuel tube and No. 2 fuel tube to the fuel pipe
(b) Connect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose to the fuel pipe.
11. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE SETTING HEXAGON BOLT (for Automatic Transmission)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000N8101BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
12. INSTALL FLYWHEEL HOUSING UNDER COVER

13. INSTALL FRONT CROSS MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the front suspension crossmember sub-assembly with the 2 nuts.
14. INSTALL MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Install the 3 bolts and 2nuts.
15. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Install the 3 bolts and 2nuts.
16. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER BAR (for Automatic Transmission)
17. INSTALL EARTH CABLE

(a) Install the 2 grounded cables with the 2 bolts.
18. CONNECT RADIATOR OUTLET HOSE

(a) Install the clamp and connect the radiator outlet hose.
19. CONNECT NO. 3 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Connect the No. 3 transmission oil cooler hose.
21. CONNECT NO. 1 COOLER REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE HOSE

22. INSTALL SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the attached vinyl tape from the hose.
(b) Apply sufficient compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the compressor assembly
with pulley.
Compressor oil:
ND-OIL 8 or equivalent
(c) Install the O-ring onto the suction hose sub-assembly.
(d) Install the suction hose sub-assembly onto the compressor assembly with pulley with the bolt.
(e) Remove the vinyl tape from the pipe.
(f) Sufficiently apply compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the suction pipe subassembly.
Compressor oil:
2/6
8/6/12
(g) Connect the O-ring to the suction pipe sub-assembly.
(h) Connect the suction pipe sub-assembly.
(i) Rotate the hook connector in the direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration.
(j) Insert the pipe joint into the cooler expansion valve
securely and tighten the bolt.
(k) Install the suction pipe sub-assembly with the nut.

23. INSTALL NO. 1 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Connect the No. 1 transmission oil cooler hose.
24. CONNECT HEATER WATER HOSE

(a) Install the 2 hose clamps and connect 2 heater water hoses.
26. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose with the bolt.
(b) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose.
27. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose.

(a) Connect the generator connector and connect the clamp.
(b) Connect the generator wire with the nut.
(c) Install the terminal cap.
3/6
8/6/12
(d) Connect the 5 wire harness clamps.

(e) Install the 2 wire harness clamp brackets with the 2 bolts.
(f) Connect the 2 wire harness clamps to the 2 wire harness clamp brackets.
(g) Connect the wire harness clamp to the No. 2 engine hanger.
(h) Connect the connector (B).
(i) Connect the wire harness connector (A) and securely lock the connector.
(j) Install the wire harness clamp bracket to the No. 2 engine hanger with the bolt.
(k) for Automatic Transmission:
(1) Slide the connector in the direction shown in the

diagram, and connect the wire harness.
(2) Connect the 2 wire harness

clamps.
(3) Connect the wire harness connector (A) and securely lock the connector.
(4) Connect the connector (B).
4/6
8/6/12

31. INSTALL WATER FILLER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 2 clamps and connect the water filler sub-assembly.
(b) Install the water filler sub-assembly with 2 bolts.
32. INSTALL RADIATOR RESERVE TANK ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the stay with bolt to the body.
(b) Install the air cleaner assembly with hose with the 3 bolts.
(c) Install the hose clamp.
(d) Connect the clamp and wire harness to the air cleaner cap.
(e) Connect the mass air flow meter connector.
(f) Connect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
(g) Install the 2 bolts and the chamber duct with chamber.
(h) Connect the hose.

36. ADD ENGINE OIL
39. CHARGE WITH REFRIGERANT
40. CHECK FOR ENGINE COOLANT LEAK

41. CHECK FOR ENGINE OIL LEAK
42. CHECK FOR FUEL LEAK
43. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
44. INSPECT FOR REFRIGERANT LEAK
5/6
8/6/12

46. INSPECT IGNITION TIMING
47. INSPECT ENGINE IDLE SPEED
48. INSPECT CO/HC
49. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
50. INSPECT ENGINE OIL LEVEL
(a) Change the front hood stay position from B to A, and store the front hood stay.
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000N82013X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Change the front hood stay position from A to B, and support the hood sub-assembly at position
B.
2. RECOVER REFRIGERANT FROM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
3. DISCHARGE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000N82013X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/14
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the hose.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the chamber.
(c) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the No. 2

ventilation hose.
(d) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector.
(e) Disengage the clamp and separate the wire harness from the air cleaner cap.
2/14
8/6/12
(f) Loosen the hose clamp.
(g) Remove the 3 bolts and air cleaner cap with air cleaner
hose.
(h) Remove the bolt and stay from the body.
8. DRAIN ENGINE OIL

10. REMOVE RADIATOR RESERVE TANK ASSEMBLY
11. REMOVE WATER FILLER SUB-ASSEMBLY

3/14
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the water filler subassembly.
(b) Remove the 2 clamps and water filler sub-assembly.

HINT:
Fix the disconnected harness components with tape to keep them out of the way.
(a) Remove the bolt and wire harness clamp bracket from the
No. 2 engine hanger.
(b) Release the lock of connector (A) and disconnect the connector.
(c) Disconnect the connector (B).
(d) Disconnect the connector.
4/14
8/6/12
(e) Disconnect the wire harness clamp and wire harness from
the No. 2 engine hanger.
(f) Disconnect the 3 wire harness clamps.
(g) for Automatic Transmission:
(1) Release the lock of connector (A) and disconnect the

connector.
(2) Disconnect the connector (B).
(3) Slide the connector in the direction shown in the

illustration, and disconnect the wire harness.
5/14
8/6/12
(4) Disconnect the 3 wire harness

clamps.
(5) Remove the bolt and wire harness clamp bracket.
(h) Disconnect the terminal cap.
(i) Remove the nut and disconnect the wire harness from terminal B.
(j) Disconnect the generator connector and disengage the clamp.

15. DISCONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the vacuum tube
connector hose.
6/14
8/6/12
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the vacuum tube

connector hose.
(c) Loosen the hose clamp and remove the vacuum tube connector hose.
16. DISCONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the vacuum tube
connector hose from the intake manifold.
(b) Remove the bolt and disconnect the vacuum tube connector hose.
18. FIX FRONT EXHAUST PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Tie the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly to the front cross
member sub-assembly with rope.
19. DISCONNECT HEATER WATER HOSE
7/14
8/6/12
(a) Loosen the 2 hose clamps and disconnect the 2 heater

water hoses.
20. DISCONNECT NO. 1 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Loosen the clip and disconnect the No. 1 transmission oil
cooler hose.
21. REMOVE SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the suction hose subassembly from the compressor assembly with pulley.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the discharge hose sub-assembly.

NOTICE:
Seal the openings of the disconnected parts using vinyl tape to prevent entry of moisture and
foreign matter.
8/14
8/6/12
(c) Remove the bolt and slide the hook connector.
(d) Remove the nut and suction pipe sub-assembly.

(e) Remove the O-ring from the suction pipe sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
foreign matter.
22. DISCONNECT NO. 1 COOLER REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE HOSE

23. REMOVE STARTER ASSEMBLY
24. DISCONNECT NO. 3 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Loosen the clip and disconnect the No. 3 transmission oil
cooler hose.
25. DISCONNECT RADIATOR OUTLET HOSE
(a) Loosen the clip and disconnect the radiator outlet hose.
26. DISCONNECT GROUNDED CABLE

9/14
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the 2 grounded

cables.
27. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER BAR (for Automatic Transmission)
28. FIX FRONT EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Tie the front exhaust pipe assembly to the front cross
member sub-assembly with rope.
29. SEPARATE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
Bolt
Nut
10/14
8/6/12
NOTICE:
In order to prevent dropping, do not remove bolt B.
30. REMOVE MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
Bolt
Nut
NOTICE:
In order to prevent dropping, do not remove bolt B.
31. SEPARATE FRONT CROSS MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 nuts from the front cross member subassembly.
32. REMOVE FLYWHEEL HOUSING UNDER COVER

33. REMOVE DRIVE PLATE SETTING HEXAGON BOLT (for Automatic Transmission)
34. SEPARATE FUEL HOSE
11/14
8/6/12
(a) Using SST, disconnect the fuel tube and No. 2 fuel tube
from the fuel pipe
SST: SU003-03936
(b) Remove the clamp and disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor
feed hose from the fuel pipe.
(a) Install the engine hanger with the bolt, as shown in the
illustration.
*1
No. 1 Engine Hanger
*2
No. 2 Engine Hanger

No. 1 Engine Hanger
12281-38030
Bolt
90119-14120
(b) Use an engine sling device and a mini crane to hold the engine.
36. SUPPORT TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
12/14
8/6/12
(a) Support the transmission assembly clutch housing with a

jack.
NOTICE:
Support the transmission assembly until the installation
of the engine assembly is completed.
37. REMOVE ENGINE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt from the transmission assembly.

*A
*B
(b) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
38. REMOVE DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
39. REMOVE CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

40. REMOVE CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
41. REMOVE FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
42. REMOVE NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE
43. INSTALL ENGINE STAND
(a) Set the engine on an engine stand.
NOTICE:
With the exception of installing the engine assembly to an engine stand or removing the engine
assembly from an engine stand, do not perform any work on the engine while it is suspended,
as doing so is dangerous.
13/14
8/6/12
44. REMOVE FRONT ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and 2 front engine mounting

brackets.
14/14
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4V07GX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4V07GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
5/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
6/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
7/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
8/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
9/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
10/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
11/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
12/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
13/15
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
14/15
8/6/12
15/15
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000021ZT04OX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE OIL FILLER CAP ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the oil filler cap assembly.
2. REMOVE OIL FILTER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, remove the oil filter sub-assembly.

SST: 09228-22020
3. REMOVE OIL FILTER UNION
(a) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, remove the oil filter

union.
4. REMOVE E.F.I. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, remove the E.F.I.

engine coolant temperature sensor.
5. REMOVE KNOCK CONTROL SENSOR

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000021ZT04OX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/22
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and 2 knock control sensors.
6. REMOVE CRANK POSITION SENSOR
(a) Remove the bolt and crank position sensor.
7. REMOVE VVT SENSOR
(a) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor (for intake side of bank
1).
(b) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
(c) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank
1).
2/22
8/6/12
(d) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
(e) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor (for intake side of bank
2).
(f) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
(g) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank
2).
(h) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
8. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve
(for intake side of bank 1).
(b) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control
3/22
8/6/12
valve.
(c) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve
(for exhaust side of bank 1).
(e) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(f) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(g) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve
(for intake side of bank 2).
(h) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(i) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
4/22
8/6/12
(j) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve
(for exhaust side of bank 2).
(k) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(l) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
9. REMOVE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(a) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the
temperature sensor.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth or the like to prevent engine oil from
splashing.
*1
10. REMOVE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, remove the engine
oil pressure switch assembly.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth or the like to prevent engine oil from
splashing.
*1
24 mm deep socket wrench
11. REMOVE PCV HOSE CONNECTOR
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and PCV hose connector.

5/22
8/6/12
(b) Loosen the 2 clips and remove the No. 2 water by-pass hose from the PCV hose connector.
12. REMOVE VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

13. REMOVE REAR CYLINDER HEAD PLATE (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and rear cylinder head plate.
14. REMOVE WATER INLET PIPE
(a) Disconnect the No. 3 water by-pass hose.
(b) Remove the 4 bolts and water inlet pipe.
6/22
8/6/12
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings from the cylinder block.
15. REMOVE PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the PCV

valve sub-assembly.
(a) Remove the bolt, No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly and idler
pulley cover.
(a) Remove the bolt, No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly and idler
pulley cover.
18. REMOVE WATER PUMP PULLEY

7/22
8/6/12
(a) Using SST, hold the water pump pulley.

SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the 3 bolts and water pump pulley.

NOTICE:
Be careful not to let SST slip during the work.
19. REMOVE ENGINE WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 5 bolts, engine water pump assembly and

gasket.
20. REMOVE WATER OUTLET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and water outlet.
21. REMOVE THERMOSTAT

(a) Remove the thermostat.
(b) Remove the gasket from the thermostat.
NOTICE:
8/22
8/6/12
(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley and loosen the
crank pulley bolt.
NOTICE:
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
*a
Hold
*b
Turn
(b) Remove the crankshaft pulley.
(c) Remove the O-ring and crankshaft pulley spacer.

tape, pry out the timing chain or belt cover oil seal.
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
After the removal, check the crankshaft for damage. If
it is damaged, smooth the surface with 400-grit
sandpaper.
HINT:
Tape the screwdriver tip before use.

(a) Remove the 32 bolts.
9/22
8/6/12
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the timing chain or belt cover
sub-assembly by prying between the timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly and cylinder head or
cylinder block.
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the contact surfaces of the cylinder head, cylinder block or chain
cover.
(c) Remove the 4 O-rings.

10/22
8/6/12

(a) Temporarily install the crank pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(b) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment marks of the
crankshaft timing gear or sprocket, camshaft timing intake
gear assembly RH and camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH.
HINT:
The crankshaft key faces downward at this time.
*1
Alignment Mark
*2
Key
(c) Push down the chain tensioner slipper and retain the
plunger by inserting a 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) diameter
hexagonal wrench into the No. 1 chain tensioner
assembly through the stopper plate.
11/22
8/6/12
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(e) Remove the chain tensioner slipper.
(f) Using a 5 mm hexagonal wrench, remove the bolt and No.

1 chain vibration damper.
(g) Remove the chain sub- assembly (for bank 1).

NOTICE:
With the chain sub- assembly (for bank 1) removed, the valve heads may contact each other if the
camshafts are turned, causing the valve stems to bend.
To avoid this, do not turn the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH more than zero-lift
range (The range where camshafts can be turned lightly by hand).
HINT:
(a) Turn the crankshaft and position each alignment mark on

the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket, camshaft timing
intake gear assembly LH and camshaft timing exhaust
gear assembly LH as shown in the illustration.
12/22
8/6/12
*1
Key
*2
Alignment Mark
(b) Push the chain tensioner slipper and retain the plunger
by inserting an approximately 1 mm (0.039 in.) diameter
wire into the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly through the
stopper plate .
(c) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 2 chain tensioner assembly.
(d) Remove the chain tensioner slipper.
(e) Remove the O-ring from the cylinder block.
13/22
8/6/12
(f) Using a 5 mm socket hexagon wrench, remove the bolt

and No. 1 chain vibration damper.
(g) Remove the chain sub-assembly (for bank 2).

NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly (for bank 2) removed, the valve heads may contact each other if the
camshafts are turned, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not turn the exhaust
camshaft LH more than zero-lift rang (The range where the camshaft can be turned lightly by
hand).
At this time, No. 1 and No. 4 pistons are located near TDC. If the intake camshaft is turned, the
valves may come into contact with the piston, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do
not turn the intake camshaft LH.
HINT:
27. ROTATE CRANK SHAFT AND CAMSHAFT

28. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET
(a) Remove the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.

HINT:
Make sure the front-back direction and make a mark for
installation if necessary.
29. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY RH

30. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
31. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
32. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
33. REMOVE SPARK PLUG
(a) Using a 14 mm spark plug wrench, remove the 4 spark plugs.
14/22
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and injector driver bracket.

(c) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the cylinder head cover subassembly RH.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH, cam caps and cylinder head cover subassembly RH.
(d) Remove the cylinder head cover gasket.
(e) Remove the 2 spark plug tube gaskets.

NOTICE:
When removing the seal packing left on the camshaft
housing sub-assembly RH using a scraper, use special
care not to damage the camshafts.

NOTICE:
Do not remove the intake and exhaust camshafts first as it may cause a deformation of the
cylinder head sub-assembly.
15/22
8/6/12
(a) Loosen the 9 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

and remove them.
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the camshaft housing subassembly RH.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the cylinder head sub-assembly RH and camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings and 8 No. 1 valve rocker arm subassemblies from the cylinder head sub-assembly.
HINT:
(d) Remove the 8 valve adjusting shims and 8 roller rocker

arm pivots from the cylinder head sub-assembly.
HINT:
37. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

38. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
16/22
8/6/12
(c) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the cylinder head cover subassembly LH.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH, cam caps and cylinder head cover subassembly LH.
(d) Remove the cylinder head cover gasket.
(e) Remove the 2 spark plug tube gaskets.

NOTICE:
When removing the seal packing left on the camshaft
housing sub-assembly LH using a scraper, use special
care not to damage the camshafts.

NOTICE:
Do not remove the intake and exhaust camshafts first as it may cause a deformation of the
camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
(a) Loosen the 9 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

and remove them.
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the camshaft housing subassembly LH.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the cylinder head sub-assembly LH and camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
17/22
8/6/12
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings and 8 No. 1 valve rocker arm subassemblies from the cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
HINT:
(d) Remove the 8 valve adjusting shims and 8 roller rocker

arm pivots from the cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
HINT:
41. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

42. REMOVE NO. 2 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
43. REMOVE NO. 2 ENGINE HANGER

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 2 engine hanger from the
44. REMOVE NO. 2 OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the drain plug and gasket.
18/22
8/6/12
(c) Using an oil pan seal cutter, remove the No. 2 oil pan subassembly.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the contact surface and flange part of
the No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly.
(d) Remove the 2 seal rings from the No. 2 oil pan subassembly.
45. REMOVE OIL STRAINER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and oil strainer sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the O-ring.
46. REMOVE OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
19/22
8/6/12
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the oil pan sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the cylinder block and oil pan sub-assembly.
(c) Remove the 3 O-rings from the cylinder block.
(d) Remove the 4 bolts and baffle plate from the oil pan subassembly.
(e) Remove the 2 stud bolts from the oil pan sub-assembly.
47. REMOVE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP (for Bank 1)

48. REMOVE CAMSHAFT (for Bank 1)
49. REMOVE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER (for Bank 1)
20/22
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 2 oil control valve filters from the camshaft
housing sub-assembly RH.
50. REMOVE OIL SPACER RH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and oil spacer RH.
51. REMOVE CAMSHAFT OIL FEED PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the 2 union bolts, the bolt, camshaft oil feed pipe
sub-assembly and 2 gaskets from the camshaft housing
sub-assembly RH.
52. REMOVE HOLE PLUG (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the hole plug and gasket from the camshaft
53. REMOVE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP (for Bank 2)

21/22
8/6/12
54. REMOVE CAMSHAFT (for Bank 2)

55. REMOVE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER (for Bank 2)
(a) Remove the 2 oil control valve filters from the camshaft
housing sub-assembly LH.
56. REMOVE OIL SPACER LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and oil spacer LH.
22/22
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XCV08FX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NO. 1 VALVE ROCKER ARM SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the roller moves smoothly by rotating it by

hand.
Replace the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly if the
roller does not rotate smoothly.
2. INSPECT CHAIN SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the chain sub-assembly for deformation, cracks or other damages.
If the chain sub-assembly has any defects, replace it.
3. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR

(a) Check the camshaft timing gear teeth for abnormal wear and scratches.
If the camshaft timing gear has any defects, replace it.
4. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET

(a) Check the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket teeth for abnormal wear and scratches.
If necessary, replace it.
(b) Check that there is no play between the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket and the key.
If necessary, replace the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket or the key.
5. INSPECT CHAIN TENSIONER SLIPPER

(a) Check the chain tensioner slipper for deformation, cracks or other damages.
6. INSPECT NO. 1 CHAIN VIBRATION DAMPER

(a) Check the No. 1 chain vibration damper for deformation, cracks or other damages.
7. INSPECT CHAIN TENSIONER ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the chain tensioner assembly for deformation, cracks or other damages.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XCV08FX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
(b) Check that the plunger moves smoothly when it is

unlocked.
If the plunger does not move smoothly, replace the chain
tensioner assembly.
(c) Check that the plunger does not move when it is locked.
8. INSPECT CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Visually check the oil control valve filters, and if clogging is found, replace them with new ones.
(b) Check the camshaft housing sub-assembly journals for damage and wear. Replace the camshaft
housing sub-assembly if necessary.
9. INSPECT CAMSHAFT
(a) Check the camshaft journals for damage and wear.
Replace the camshaft if necessary.
(b) Check the cam face condition.
Replace the camshaft if uneven wear is found.
HINT:
Remove the minor faults by smoothing the surface with 400-grit sandpaper.
(c) Inspect for runout.

(1) Place the camshaft on V-blocks.
(2) Using a dial indicator, measure the circle runout at the
center journal.
Maximum circle runout:
0.020 mm (0.00079 in.)
If the circle runout is more than the maximum, replace
the camshaft.
HINT:
(68F).
(d) Inspect for cam height.

(1) Using a micrometer, measure the cam lobe height.
Standard height (Intake):
POSITION
STANDARD
2/5
8/6/12
40.82 to 40.92 mm (1.6083 to 1.6110 in.)
34.0 mm (1.3386 in.)

Standard height (Exhaust):
POSITION
STANDARD
40.72 to 40.82 mm (1.6031 to 1.6071 in.)
34.0 mm (1.3386 in.)

Standard height (For fuel pump):
POSITION
STANDARD
40.55 to 40.65
*a
For Valve
*b
For Fuel Pump

If the result is not as specified, replace the camshaft.
HINT:
(68F).
(e) Inspect for camshaft journals.

(1) Using a micrometer, measure the journal diameter.
Standard journal diameter:
25.946 to 25.963 mm (1.02149 to 1.02216 in.)
If the result is not as specified, check the oil clearance.
HINT:
(68F).
10. INSPECT CAMSHAFT OIL CLEARANCE
(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the thrust clearance while

moving the camshaft back and forth.
Standard thrust clearance:
0.0068 to 0.1160 mm (0.00027 to 0.00457 in.)
3/5
8/6/12
If the clearance is not as specified or if uneven wear is

found, replace each camshaft cap and camshaft housing
as a set. If necessary replace the camshaft.
HINT:
20C (68F).
Set the dial indicator at the end surface of the camshaft.
11. INSPECT CAMSHAFT OIL CLEARANCE

HINT:
(a) Remove the seal packing from camshaft housing and front camshaft cap, intake rear camshaft cap
and exhaust rear camshaft cap.
(b) Clean each camshaft cap and camshaft housing journal.
(c) Set the camshafts on the camshaft housing.
(d) Place a plastigauge across the camshaft journals and set the camshaft caps.
(e) Tighten the bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the front camshaft cap, intake
center camshaft cap, intake rear camshaft cap, exhaust center camshaft cap and exhaust rear
camshaft cap.
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2

(f) Using several steps, uniformly loosen the bolts in the order shown in the illustration, and remove
the front camshaft cap, intake center camshaft cap, intake rear camshaft cap, exhaust center
camshaft cap and exhaust rear camshaft cap.
4/5
8/6/12
*a
for Bank 1
*b
for Bank 2
(g) Measure the widest point of the plastigauge on each

journal.
0.037 to 0.072 mm (0.00146 to 0.00283 in.)
If the clearance is not as specified, replace each camshaft
cap and camshaft housing as a set. If necessary, replace
the camshaft.
(h) Completely remove the plastigauge.
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000N81019X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 4 ignition coils with the 4 bolts.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Install the No. 1 water by-pass pipe with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the water by-pass hose with the hose clamp.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Install the No. 1 water by-pass pipe with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the 2 water by-pass hoses with the 2 hose clamps.
4. CONNECT NO. 3 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Connect the No. 3 transmission oil cooler hose with the hose clamp.
5. INSTALL NO. 2 WATER BY-PASS HOSE
(a) Connect the No. 2 water by-pass hose with the clamp.
6. CONNECT NO. 2 VENTILATION HOSE

(a) Connect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
7. INSTALL ENGINE WIRE

(a) Connect the ground wire with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect each connector and each clamp to fix the engine wire as shown in the illustration, and
check that the engine wire is correctly installed.
1/4
8/6/12
*1
Ground Wire
*a
Upper side
*b
Front side
*c
Right side
*d
Left side

2/4
8/6/12
11. INSTALL FUEL INJECTOR SEAL

12. INSTALL FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
13. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE LH
14. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE RH
15. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
(a) Install 2 new gaskets to the intake manifold.
(b) Install the intake manifold with the 6 bolts.
(c) Engage the 2 clamps and connect the 4 connectors.
(d) Connect the fuel pump connector.
(e) Connect the No. 1 vacuum switching valve assembly connector.
(f) Connect the vacuum sensor connector.
(g) Connect the 2 water by-pass hoses to the throttle body assembly.
(h) Connect the throttle body assembly connector.

19. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the fuel pump assembly with a new gasket and the
union bolt.
(b) Connect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose.
(c) Install the bolt and connect the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.

(a) Install the injector cover to the intake manifold with the 2 bolts.

22. INSTALL COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH

3/4
8/6/12

(a) Install the generator assembly with the 2 bolts.

4/4
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4Y0BBX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL OIL SPACER LH
(a) Install the oil spacer LH with the 2 bolts.

2. INSTALL OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER (for Bank 2)
(a) Install 2 new oil control valve filters to the camshaft

housing sub-assembly LH as shown in the illustration.
*a
0 to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.0197 in.) from the face of the camshaft

housing sub-assembly LH
3. INSTALL CAMSHAFT (for Bank 2)

5. INSTALL HOLE PLUG (for Manual Transmission)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4Y0BBX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/39
8/6/12
(a) Install a new gasket and the hole plug to the camshaft
6. INSTALL CAMSHAFT OIL FEED PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Temporarily install 2 new gaskets and the camshaft oil feed pipe sub-assembly with the bolt and 2
union bolts.
(b) Tighten the 2 union bolts to the specified torque.

(c) Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.

7. INSTALL OIL SPACER RH
(a) Install the oil spacer RH with the 2 bolts.

8. INSTALL OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER (for Bank 1)
2/39
8/6/12
(a) Install 2 new oil control valve filters to the camshaft

housing sub-assembly RH as shown in the illustration.
*a
0 to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.0197 in.) from the face of the camshaft

housing sub-assembly RH
9. INSTALL CAMSHAFT (for Bank 1)

11. INSTALL OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 2 stud bolts to the oil pan sub-assembly.

Standard height (A):
70.0 mm (2.756 in.)
(b) Install the baffle plate to the oil pan sub-assembly with
the 4 bolts.
(c) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the

illustration.
3/39
8/6/12
Seal packing:
*a
Seal Packing
*b
4.0 to 6.0 mm (0.158 to 0.236 in.)
*c
1.5 mm (0.059 in.)
*d
Chamfer edge
NOTICE:
Install the oil pan sub-assembly within 5 minutes of
Apply seal packing 1.5 mm (0.0591 in.) away from the
outer side of the chamfer edge. However, it is allowed to
apply the seal packing on the chamfer around the bolt
hole.
(d) Install 3 new O-rings to the cylinder block.
(e) Tighten the 13 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the oil pan sub-assembly to the
cylinder block.
Bolt A
4/39
8/6/12
Bolt B
Length of bolt A:
25.0 mm (0.984 in.)
Length of bolt B:
75.0 mm (2.953 in.)
HINT:
After tightening the bolts, if the seal packing is squeezed out onto the seal surface of the chain
cover, completely remove it.
12. INSTALL OIL STRAINER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install a new O-ring.
(b) Install the oil strainer sub-assembly to the oil pan subassembly with the 2 bolts.
13. INSTALL NO. 2 OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install 2 new oil pan seal rings to the No. 2 oil pan subassembly.
(b) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the

illustration.
Seal packing:
NOTICE:
5/39
8/6/12
Install the No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly within 5 minutes of

*a
Seal Packing
*b
9.5 mm (0.374 in.)
*c
4.0 to 6.0 mm (0.158 to 0.236 in.)

to install the No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly.
(d) Install a new gasket and the drain plug.

14. INSTALL NO. 2 ENGINE HANGER
(a) Install the No. 2 engine hanger to the cylinder block (for
bank 1) with the 2 bolts.
15. INSTALL NO. 2 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

16. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
6/39
8/6/12
(a) Apply engine oil to the 8 valve adjusting shims and 8

roller rocker arm pivots, and then install them to the
cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
(b) Apply engine oil to 2 new O-rings and the 8 No. 1 valve
rocker arm sub-assemblies, and then install them to the
cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
(c) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the illustration.

Seal packing:
*a Chamfer edge
*b Range of B-B
*c within 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
*d 2.5 to 3.5 mm (0.098 to 0.138 in.)
*e -0.5 to 0.5 mm (-0.0197 to 0.0197 in.)
*f
18.0 mm (0.709 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessive seal packing.
7/39
8/6/12
Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH within 5 minutes of applying seal packing.
(d) Tighten the 9 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the camshaft housing subassembly LH.

HINT:
Set the intake camshaft LH and the exhaust camshaft LH to the zero-lift position.
(e) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180 in the order shown in the

illustration.
8/39
8/6/12
(f) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

(g) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180 in the order shown in the

illustration.
(h) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

(i) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180 in the order shown in the

illustration.
(j) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

HINT:
After tightening the bolts, if the seal packing is squeezed out
onto the seal surface of the chain cover, completely remove
it.
18. INSPECT VALVE CLEARANCE (for Bank 2)

9/39
8/6/12
NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly (for bank 2) removed, valve heads may contact each other if the
camshafts are turned, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not turn the intake
camshaft LH and exhaust camshaft LH more than the zero-lift rang (The range where the
camshafts can be turned lightly by hand).
(a) Using a feeler gauge, check the valve clearance between the cam base circle and the roller surface
of the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly.
Standard valve clearance (cold):

0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.) for intake
0.21 to 0.27 mm (0.0083 to 0.0106 in.) for exhaust
HINT:
Set the intake camshaft LH and the exhaust camshaft LH to the zero-lift position.
If the clearance is not as specified, take notes of the value in order to adjust the valve clearance
later on.
19. ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE (for Bank 2)

(a) Remove the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
(b) Remove the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assemblies.
(c) Remove the valve adjusting shims.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the valve

adjusting shims.
(e) Calculate the thickness of the valve adjusting shim so that the valve clearance comes within the
specified values.
Intake side:
A = B + (C - 0.13 mm (0.0051 in.) x 1.54
Exhaust side:
A = B + (C - 0.24 mm (0.0094 in.) x 1.69
A:
10/39
8/6/12
Required valve adjusting shim thickness

B:
Removed valve adjusting shim thickness
C:
Measured valve clearance
(f) Apply engine oil to the inner face of the valve adjusting shims and install them to the valves.
NOTICE:
Check if the shims can be rotated smoothly on the valves.
(g) Install the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assemblies.

(h) Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
(i) Check that the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assemblies are correctly installed.
(a) Apply a light layer of engine oil to 2 new spark plug tube
gaskets and install them to the spark plug tubes as
*a
Spark plug tube edge
(b) Install a new cylinder head cover gasket to the cylinder head cover sub-assembly LH.
(c) Apply seal packing to the mating surface of cylinder head
cover sub-assembly LH as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
AREA
APPLICATION LENGTH
10.0 mm (0.394 in.) or more
18.8 mm (0.740 in.) or more
63.0 mm (2.480 in.) or more
*a
Arch starting point
*b
2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
11/39
8/6/12
(d) Tighten the 8 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

and install the cylinder head cover sub-assembly LH.
21. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

22. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Apply engine oil to the 8 valve adjusting shims and 8

roller rocker arm pivots, and then install them to the
(b) Apply engine oil to 2 new O-rings and the 8 No. 1 valve
rocker arm sub-assemblies, and then install them to the
(c) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the illustration.

Seal packing:
12/39
8/6/12
*a Range of B-B
*b 0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.0394 in.)
*c 2.5 to 3.5 mm (0.098 to 0.138 in.)
*d -0.5 to 0.5 mm (-0.0197 to 0.0197 in.)
*e Chamfer edge
*f
18.0 mm (0.709 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessive seal packing.
Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH within 5 minutes of applying seal packing.
(d) Tighten the 9 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the camshaft housing subassembly RH.

HINT:
Set the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH to the zero-lift position.
13/39
8/6/12
(e) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180 in the order shown in the

illustration.

(g) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180 in the order shown in the

illustration.
14/39
8/6/12
(h) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

(i) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180 in the order shown in the

illustration.
(j) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

HINT:
After tightening the bolts, if the seal packing is squeezed out
onto the seal surface of the chain cover, completely remove
it.
24. INSPECT VALVE CLEARANCE (for Bank 1)

NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly (for bank 1) removed, valve heads may contact each other if the
camshafts are turned, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not turn the intake
camshaft RH and exhaust camshaft RH more than the zero-lift rang (The range where the
camshafts can be turned lightly by hand).
(a) Using a feeler gauge, check the valve clearance between the cam base circle and the roller surface
of the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly.
15/39
8/6/12
Standard valve clearance (cold):

0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.) for intake
0.21 to 0.27 mm (0.0083 to 0.0106 in.) for exhaust
HINT:
Set the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH to the zero-lift position.
If the clearance is not as specified, take notes of the value in order to adjust the valve clearance
later on.
25. ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE (for Bank 1)

(a) Remove the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the valve

adjusting shims.
specified values.
Intake side:
A = B + (C - 0.13 mm (0.0051 in.) x 1.54
Exhaust side:
A = B + (C - 0.24 mm (0.0094 in.) x 1.69
A:
B:
C:
(f) Apply engine oil to the inner face of the valve adjusting shims and install them to the valves.
16/39
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Check if the shims can be rotated smoothly on the valves.

(h) Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
(i) Check that the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assemblies are correctly installed.
(a) Apply a light layer of engine oil to 2 new spark plug tube
gaskets and install them to the spark plug tubes as
*a
Spark plug tube edge
(b) Install a new cylinder head cover gasket to the cylinder head cover sub-assembly RH.
(c) Apply seal packing to the mating surface of cylinder head
cover sub-assembly RH as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
AREA
APPLICATION LENGTH
10.0 mm (0.394 in.) or more
68.0 mm (2.677 in.) or more
70.7 mm (2.784 in.) or more
*a
Arch starting point
*b
2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
(d) Tighten the 8 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

and install the cylinder head cover sub-assembly RH.
17/39
8/6/12
(a) Install the injector driver bracket with the 2 bolts.

28. INSTALL SPARK PLUG

(a) Using a 14 mm spark plug wrench, install the 4 spark plugs.
29. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY LH

30. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
31. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
32. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
33. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET
(a) Install the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.

HINT:
The crankshaft timing gear or sprocket should be installed as
it was before.

NOTICE:
18/39
8/6/12
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere or to enter into the component parts during
installation.
HINT:
Apply engine oil to all component parts of the chain sub-assembly.
(a) Temporarily install the crank pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(b) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow in the
illustration to press in the plunger.
*1
Link Plate
*2
Plunger
(c) Insert an approximately 1 mm (0.0394 in.) diameter wire

or the like into the chain tensioner assembly through the
stopper pin hole, and hold the plunger.
*1
First notch of the plunger rack
*2
Stopper Tooth
HINT:
If the stopper pin hole on the link plate and the stopper pin
hole on the chain tensioner assembly are not aligned, check
that the first notch of the plunger rack is engaged with the
stopper tooth. If not engaged, retract the plunger a little so
stopper tooth.
(d) Check that the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket is

located at the position shown in the illustration. If not,
turn the crankshaft to align the crankshaft timing gear or
sprocket alignment mark as shown in the illustration.
*a
Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
Make sure to perform this operation to prevent the
valves and pistons from contacting each other.
19/39
8/6/12
(e) Using SST, turn the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH and align the alignment mark as shown in the
illustration.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
*a
Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
Do not turn the exhaust camshaft LH. If the exhaust
camshaft LH is turned, valve heads may come into
contact with each other, causing the valve stems to
bend.
(f) Remove the crank pulley bolt from the crankshaft.

(g) Temporarily install the crankshaft pulley spacer and crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft with the
crank pulley bolt.
HINT:
Put a mark on the crankshaft pulley to mark the position of the crankshaft timing gear key.
(h) Using SST, turn the crankshaft counterclockwise by 200

and align the crankshaft key as shown in the illustration.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
*1
Key
NOTICE:
Never turn the crankshaft clockwise because the valves
may come into contact with the piston. Turning the
crankshaft clockwise is only allowed when adjusting the
key position precisely.
(i) Remove the crank pulley bolt, crankshaft pulley and crankshaft pulley spacer.
(j) Align the alignment mark on the camshaft timing exhaust

*a
Alignment Mark
20/39
8/6/12
NOTICE:
To avoid damaging the valves, do not turn the camshaft
timing exhaust gear assembly LH more than the zerolift range (The range where camshaft timing exhaust
gear assembly LH can be turned lightly by hand).
(k) Align the chain mark plate (blue) with the alignment mark
on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
*a
Alignment mark
*b
Timing mark
*c
Mark plate (Blue)
*d
Mark plate (Pink)
(l) Align the chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH.
(m) Align the chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH.
(n) Using a 5 mm hexagon socket wrench, install the No. 1 chain vibration damper with the bolt.
HINT:
Apply engine oil to the bolt before install it.
(o) Install a new O-ring to the cylinder block (for bank 2).
21/39
8/6/12
(p) Install the chain tensioner slipper.
(q) Install the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly with the 2 bolts.
(r) Check that the chain is correctly installed.
*a
Alignment mark
*b
Timing mark
*c
Mark plate (Blue)
*d
Mark plate (Pink)

(1) Chain mark plate (blue) is aligned with the alignment
mark on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
(2) Chain mark plate (pink) is aligned with the timing mark
on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly LH.
on the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH.
(s) Pull out the wire or the like from the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly.
(t) Temporarily install the crank pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(u) Turn the crankshaft clockwise, and make sure that there are no abnormal conditions.
NOTICE:
Be sure to perform this confirmation.

NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere or to enter into the component parts during
installation.
HINT:
(a) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow in the
22/39
8/6/12

*1
Link Plate
*2
Plunger
(b) Insert a 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) diameter hexagon wrench into

the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly through the stopper
pin hole, and hold the plunger.
*1
*2
Stopper Tooth
HINT:
hole on the chain tensioner assembly are not aligned, check
stopper tooth. If not engaged, retract the plunger a little so
stopper tooth.
(c) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment marks of the
gear assembly LH and camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH as shown in the illustration.
*a
Alignment Mark
HINT:
When the marks are aligned as shown in the illustration,
crankshaft key faces directly underneath.
(d) Align the alignment marks of the camshaft timing intake

assembly RH as shown in the illustration.
23/39
8/6/12
*a
Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
timing intake gear assembly RH and camshaft timing
exhaust gear assembly RH more than the zero-lift range
(The range where the camshafts can be turned lightly
by hand).
(e) Align the chain mark plate (blue) with the alignment mark
on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
*a
Alignment mark
*b
Timing mark
*c
Mark plate (Blue)
*d
Mark plate (Pink)
(f) Align the chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
RH.
(g) Align the chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH.
(h) Using a 5 mm hexagon socket wrench, install the No. 1 chain vibration damper with the bolt.
HINT:
Apply engine oil to the bolt before install it.
(i) Install the chain tensioner slipper.
(j) Install the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly with the 2 bolts.
24/39
8/6/12

(k) Check that the chain is correctly installed.
*a
Alignment mark
*b
Timing mark
*c
Mark plate (Blue)
*d
Mark plate (Pink)

(1) Chain mark plate (blue) is aligned with the alignment
mark on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH.
on the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly RH.
(l) Pull out the hexagon wrench from the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(m) Turn the crankshaft clockwise, and make sure that there are no abnormal conditions.
NOTICE:
(n) Remove the crank pulley bolt.

(a) Apply a light layer of engine oil to 4 new O-rings and attach them to the engine.
(b) Clean and degrease the contact surface.
(c) If there are gaps at positions shown in the illustration, fill up with seal packing.
Seal packing:
25/39
8/6/12
(d) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the illustration.

Seal packing:
26/39
8/6/12
*a
Area A
*b
Boss (5 locations)
*c
Area B
*d
Other than ranges A and B
*e
3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in.)
*f
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
*g
12 mm (0.472 in.)
*h
2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
*i
0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)
NOTICE:
Install the chain cover within 5 minutes and tighten the bolts within 15 minutes of applying seal
packing.
Do not add engine oil within 30 minutes of installation.
Do not start the engine within 30 minutes of installation.
(e) Temporarily install the timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly with the 32 bolts.
(f) Securely tighten the 32 bolts in the order as shown in the illustration.
27/39
8/6/12
Bolt A
Bolt B
Bolt C
Bolt D
Bolt A and B - Torque: 10 Nm (102 kgfcm, 7ftlbf)

Bolt C and D - Torque: 25 Nm (255 kgfcm, 18ftlbf)
Bolt Length:
ITEM
LENGTH
ITEM
LENGTH
Bolt A
20 mm (0.787 in.)
Bolt B
25 mm (0.984 in.)
Bolt C
60 mm (2.362 in.)
Bolt D
50 mm (1.969 in.)
37. INSTALL TIMING CHAIN COVER OIL SEAL
(a) Apply engine oil to a new oil seal lip.

NOTICE:
28/39
8/6/12
Keep the lip free from foreign matter.

Do not apply engine oil to the dust seal section.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the new oil seal until its surface is flush with the timing chain or
belt cover sub-assembly edge.
SST: 09223-22010
NOTICE:
Do not tap the oil seal at an angle.
Do not deform the oil seal.
HINT:
Alternatively, the tapping depth of the timing chain cover oil seal can be 0 to -1.0 mm (0 to -0.0394
in.) from the timing chain cover end surface.

(a) Install the crankshaft pulley spacer.
(b) Install a new O-ring to the crankshaft pulley spacer.
(c) Install the crankshaft pulley while aligning the knock hole of the pulley with the knock pin on the
crankshaft pulley spacer.
(d) Apply engine oil to threads and seat sections of the crank pulley bolt.
(e) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley and tighten the
crank pulley bolt.
NOTICE:
*1
Knock Hole
*2
Knock Pin
*a
Hold
*b
Turn
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
29/39
8/6/12
(f) Using a marker, draw the reference line (A) on the crank
pulley bolt and also the reference line (B) on the crank
pulley according to the line engraved around the crank
pulley bolt head as shown in the illustration.
*a
Reference Line A
*b
Reference Line B
HINT:
There are carved lines on the crank pulley bolt head every
90.
(g) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the
crank pulley bolt by 90 until the reference lines A and B
are aligned.
NOTICE:
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
*a
Reference Line A
*b
Reference Line B
39. INSTALL THERMOSTAT

(a) Attach a new gasket to the thermostat.
40. INSTALL WATER OUTLET
(a) Install the thermostat and water outlet with the 2 bolts.
41. INSTALL ENGINE WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY

30/39
8/6/12
(a) Install a new gasket and the water pump assembly with
the 5 bolts.
42. INSTALL WATER PUMP PULLEY

(a) Temporarily install the water pump pulley with the 3 bolts.
(b) Using SST, hold the water pump pulley.

SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(c) Securely tighten the 3 bolts.

NOTICE:
(a) Install the idler pulley cover and No. 1 idler pulley subassembly with the bolt.
31/39
8/6/12
(a) Install the idler pulley cover and No. 1 idler pulley subassembly with the bolt.
45. INSTALL PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads of the PCV valve subassembly.

Adhesive:
*1
Adhesive 1141G
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the PCV valve

sub-assembly.
46. INSTALL WATER INLET PIPE
(a) Attach 2 new O-rings to the cylinder block.
32/39
8/6/12
(b) Install the water inlet pipe with the 4 bolts.

(c) Connect the No. 3 water by-pass hose with the clamp.
47. INSTALL REAR CYLINDER HEAD PLATE (for Manual Transmission)

illustration.
Seal packing:
*a
2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
*b
Within 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
*c
Chamfer edge
NOTICE:
Install the rear cylinder head plate within 5 minutes of
(b) Install the rear cylinder head plate with the 3 bolts.
48. INSTALL VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

49. INSTALL PCV HOSE CONNECTOR
33/39
8/6/12
(a) Connect the No. 2 water by-pass hose to the PCV hose
connector and water inlet pipe with the clips.
(b) Install the PCV hose connector with the 3 bolts.

50. INSTALL ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Clean and degrease the threads of the engine oil pressure switch assembly.
(b) Apply adhesive 1324 to the threads of the engine oil
pressure switch assembly.
Adhesive:
Toyota Genuine Adhesive 1324, Three Bond 1324 or
equivalent
*1
Adhesive 1324
NOTICE:
Keep the oil hole free from adhesive.
(c) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil

*1

NOTICE:
Do not start the engine for at least 1 hour after
installation.
51. INSTALL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(a) Attach a new gasket to the temperature sensor.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the

34/39
8/6/12
temperature sensor.
*1

52. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE
(a) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control
valve (for exhaust side of bank 2).
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up ring
(b) Install a new O-ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust side of bank 2).
(c) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(d) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust
side of bank 2) with the 2 bolts.
(e) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side of bank 2).
(f) Install a new O-ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side of bank 2).
(g) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(h) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake
35/39
8/6/12

(i) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust side of bank 1).
(j) Install a new O-ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust side of bank 1).
(k) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(l) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust
(m) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side of bank 1).
(n) Install a new O-ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side of bank 1).
(o) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(p) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake
53. INSTALL VVT SENSOR

(a) Install a new O-ring to the VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank 2).
(b) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
36/39
8/6/12
(c) Install the VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank 2) with
the bolt.
(d) Install a new O-ring to the VVT sensor (for intake side of bank 2).
(e) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(f) Install the VVT sensor (for intake side of bank 2) with the
bolt.
(g) Install a new O-ring to the VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank 1).
(h) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(i) Install the VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank 1) with
the bolt.
(j) Install a new O-ring to the VVT sensor (for intake side of bank 1).
(k) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(l) Install the VVT sensor (for intake side of bank 1) with the
37/39
8/6/12
bolt.
54. INSTALL CRANK POSITION SENSOR
(a) Install the crank position sensor with the bolt.

55. INSTALL KNOCK CONTROL SENSOR

(a) Install the 2 knock control sensors onto the cylinder block with the 2 bolts as shown in the
illustration.
38/39
8/6/12
Engine front
56. INSTALL E.F.I. WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, install a new gasket

and the E.F.I. water temperature sensor.
NOTICE:
situations where a union nut wrench is combined with a
torque wrench
.
57. INSTALL OIL FILTER UNION
(a) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, install the oil filter

union.
58. INSTALL OIL FILTER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply engine oil to the installation surface of the oil filter sub-assembly.
(b) Using SST, install the oil filter sub-assembly.

SST: 09228-22020
59. INSTALL OIL FILLER CAP ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the oil filler cap assembly.
39/39
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000N82011X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
HINT:
The exhaust valve in which metallic sodium is encapsulated can be identified with the embossed
mark.
For removal of the exhaust valve,
For disposal of the exhaust valve,
*a
1. REMOVE ENGINE HANGERS

(a) Remove the bolt and engine hanger.

1/7
8/6/12

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and generator assembly.

9. REMOVE COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover.
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover.
12. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
2/7
8/6/12
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.
(b) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose.
(c) Remove the union bolt and gasket, and disconnect the
fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.
13. SEPARATE VENTILATION HOSE

(a) Disconnect the throttle body assembly connector.
(b) Disconnect the 2 water by-pass hoses from the throttle

body assembly.
3/7
8/6/12
(c) Disconnect the vacuum sensor connector.
(d) Disconnect the No. 1 vacuum switching valve assembly

connector.
(e) Disengage the 2 clamps and disconnect the 4 connectors.

*a
for Bank 2
*b
for Bank 1
(f) Disconnect the wire harness.
4/7
8/6/12
(g) Disconnect the fuel pump connector.
(h) Remove the 6 bolts, intake manifold and 2 gaskets.

*a
for Bank 2
*b
for Bank 1

16. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
17. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE LH
18. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE RH
19. REMOVE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
20. REMOVE FUEL INJECTOR SEAL
24. REMOVE ENGINE WIRE
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the ground wire harness.
5/7
8/6/12
(b) Disconnect each connector and clamp, and remove the engine wire.
25. REMOVE NO. 2 VENTILATION HOSE
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
26. REMOVE NO. 2 WATER BY-PASS HOSE
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 water by-pass hose.
27. REMOVE NO. 3 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Disconnect the No. 3 transmission oil cooler hose.
28. REMOVE NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Manual

Transmission)
(a) Loosen the hose clip and disconnect the water by-pass
hose.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the No. 1 water by-pass pipe.
6/7
8/6/12
29. REMOVE NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Automatic

Transmission)
(a) Loosen the 2 hose clips and disconnect the 2 water bypass hoses.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 1 water by-pass pipe.
30. REMOVE IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 4 bolts and 4 ignition coil assemblies.
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000U3S02RX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT
2. INSPECT ENGINE OIL
3. INSPECT BATTERY
4. INSPECT AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
5. INSPECT SPARK PLUG
6. INSPECT V-RIBBED BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the fan and generator V belt
(b) Check that nothing gets caught in the tensioner by turning it clockwise and counterclockwise.
If a any malfunction exists, replace the tensioner.
(c) Install the fan and generator V belt
7. INSPECT IGNITION TIMING

(a) Warm up and stop the engine.
(2) Start the engine and idle it.
(4) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine and ECT / Data List / IGN Advance.
Standard ignition timing:
-5 to 10 BTDC at idle
NOTICE:
Switch off all the accessories and the A/C before connecting the Techstream.
When checking the idle speed, the transmission should be in neutral.
HINT:
Refer to the Techstream operator's manual for further details.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000U3S02RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
(5) Check that the ignition timing advances immediately when the engine speed is increased.
(c) When not using the Techstream:
(1) Connect the tester probe of a timing light to the wire

of the ignition connector for the No. 1 cylinder.
HINT:
Use a timing light that detects the primary current.
(2) Using the timing light, check the ignition timing.

Standard ignition timing:
-5 to 10 BTDC at idle
NOTICE:
When checking the ignition timing, the transmission
should be in neutral.
(3) Check that the ignition timing advances immediately when the engine speed is increased.
(4) Disconnect the timing light from the engine.
8. INSPECT ENGINE IDLE SPEED

(a) Warm up and stop the engine.
NOTICE:
Switch off all the accessories and the A/C before connecting the Techstream.
(2) Race the engine at 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.

(4) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine and ECT / Data List / Engine Speed.
Standard Idle Speed:
TRANSMISSION
IDLING SPEED
600 to 800 rpm
550 to 750 rpm
NOTICE:
When checking the idle speed, the transmission should be in neutral.
2/5
8/6/12
HINT:
If the idle speed is not as specified, check the air intake system.
(5) Disconnect the Techstream from the DLC3.
9. INSPECT COMPRESSION
(a) Check for DTCs
(b) Remove the relay block cover.
(c) Remove the F/PMP fuse.

*1
Engine Room Relay

Block
(d) Warm up and stop the engine.

(e) Remove the 4 spark plugs
(f) Insert a compression gauge into the spark plug hole.
(g) Inspect the cylinder compression pressure.

(1) While cranking the engine, measure the compression pressure.
HINT:
Always use a fully charged battery to obtain an engine speed of 250 rpm or more.
NOTICE:
The measurement must be performed as quickly as possible.
3/5
8/6/12
Standard compression pressure:

1750 kPa (17.8 kgf/cm 2 , 254 psi) or higher
Minimum pressure:
1150 kPa (11.7 kgf/cm 2 , 167 psi)
Difference between each cylinder:
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 29 psi) or less
HINT:
If the cylinder compression is low, pour a small amount of engine oil into the cylinder through the
spark plug hole and inspect the compression again. Then perform the 2 steps above for the cylinders
with low compression.
If adding oil increases the compression, the piston rings and/or cylinder bore may be
worn or damaged.
If the pressure stays low, a valve may be stuck or seated improperly, or there may be
leakage from the gasket.
(h) Install the 4 spark plugs
(i) Reinstall the F/PMP fuse.

(j) Install the relay block cover.
(k) Clear the DTC
10. INSPECT CO/HC

HINT:
This check is for determining whether or not the idle CO/HC complies with regulations.

(b) Maintain the engine speed at 2500 rpm for approximately 180 seconds.
(c) Insert a CO/HC meter testing probe at least 40 cm (1.31 ft) into the tailpipe during idling.
(d) Immediately check the CO/HC concentration at idle and/or 2500 rpm.
HINT:
When performing the 2 mode (2500 rpm and idle) test, follow the measurement order prescribed
by the applicable local regulations.
If the CO/HC concentration does not comply with regulations, troubleshoot in the order given
below.
(1) Check the A/F sensor
and heated oxygen sensor
operation.
(2) Refer to the table below for the possible cause, and then inspect and correct the applicable
causes if necessary.
CO
HC
SYMPTOM
CAUSES
1. Faulty ignition:
Incorrect timing
Plugs are contaminated or shorted, or plug
4/5
8/6/12
Normal High
Rough idle
gaps are incorrect

2. Incorrect valve clearance
3. Leaky intake and exhaust valves
4. Leaky cylinders
1. Vacuum leaks:
Rough idle
Low
High
(Fluctuating HC
reading)
Ventilation hoses
Intake manifold
Throttle body
2. Lean mixture causing misfire
1. Restricted air filter
2. Plugged PCV valve
3. Faulty EFI system:
Rough idle
High
High
(Black smoke from

exhaust)
Faulty pressure regulator

Defective engine coolant temperature sensor
Faulty mass air flow meter
Faulty ECM
Faulty injectors
Faulty throttle position sensor
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002S5D01AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002S5D01AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000041LD007X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Apply engine oil to the lip of a new timing chain or belt cover oil seal.
NOTICE:
Keep the lip free of foreign matter.
Do not apply engine oil to the dust seal section.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the timing chain or belt
cover oil seal until its surface is flush with the timing chain
cover edge.
SST: 09223-22010
NOTICE:
Do not tap the oil seal at an angle.
HINT:
Alternatively, the tapping depth of the timing chain or belt
cover oil seal can be 0 to -1.0 mm (0 to -0.039 in.) from the
timing chain cover end surface.

(a) Install the crankshaft pulley spacer.
(b) Install a new O-ring to the crankshaft pulley spacer.
(c) Install the crankshaft pulley while aligning the knock hole
of the pulley with the knock pin on the crankshaft pulley
spacer.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000041LD007X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
*1
Knock Hole
*2
Knock Pin
*a
Turn
*b
Hold
(d) Apply engine oil to the pulley bolt.

(e) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley and tighten the pulley bolt.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(f) Using a marker, draw the reference line (A) on the crank
pulley bolt and also the reference line (B) on the crank
pulley according to the line engraved around the crank
pulley bolt head as shown in the illustration.
*a
Reference Line A
*b
Reference Line B
HINT:
There are carved lines on the pulley bolt head every 90.
(g) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the
pulley bolt by 90 until the reference lines A and B are
aligned.
2/3
8/6/12
*a
Reference Line A
*b
Reference Line B
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000041LE007X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley and loosen the
crankshaft pulley set bolt.
*a
Hold
*b
Turn
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Remove the crankshaft pulley.
(c) Remove the O-ring and crankshaft pulley spacer.

tape, pry out the timing chain or belt cover oil seal.
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
After the removal, check the crankshaft for damage. If
it is damaged, smooth the surface with 400-grit
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000041LE007X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
sandpaper.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000041LE007X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004I0M003X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004I0M003X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000041LF007X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL
(a) Apply engine oil to the lip of a new rear engine oil seal.
NOTICE:
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the oil seal until its
surface is flush with the rear oil seal retainer edge.
SST: 09223-15030
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07150
Oil seal tap in depth:
0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.0394 in.)
NOTICE:
Wipe any extra grease off of the crankshaft.
Do not tap on the oil seal at an angle.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE

(a) Clean the 8 bolts and 8 bolt holes.
(b) Install the No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate.
*1
Pin Hole
*2
Pin
HINT:
Align the pin of the front drive spacer with the pin hole of the
crankshaft.
3. INSTALL FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000041LF007X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley.

SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Install the flywheel sub-assembly onto the crankshaft.
(c) In several steps, uniformly install and tighten the 8 bolts

in the sequence shown in the illustration.
4. INSTALL CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

5. INSTALL CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
6. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley.

SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Install the drive plate and ring gear sub-assembly and rear drive plate spacer onto the crankshaft.
(c) In several steps, uniformly install and tighten the 8 bolts

2/3
8/6/12
in the sequence shown in the illustration.

8. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
9. INSPECT FOR OIL LEAK
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000041LG007X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
3. REMOVE DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft.

SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Remove the 8 bolts, drive plate and ring gear subassembly and rear drive plate spacer.
4. REMOVE CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

5. REMOVE CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
6. REMOVE FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000041LG007X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Remove the 8 bolts and flywheel sub-assembly.
7. REMOVE NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE

(a) Remove the No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate.
8. REMOVE REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL
(a) Using a knife, cut through the oil seal lip.

*1
Protective Tape
*a
Cut position
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip taped, pry out the rear engine oil seal.
NOTICE:
After removal, check the crankshaft for damage. If it is damaged, smooth the surface with 400grit sandpaper.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000041LG007X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000591S000X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000056U7009X
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere onto or to enter into the component parts during
installation.
HINT:
(a) Temporarily install the pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(b) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow in the
*1
Link Plate
*2
Plunger
(c) Insert an approximately 1 mm (0.039 in.) wire or the like

into the chain tensioner through the stopper pin hole, and
hold the plunger.
HINT:
hole on the chain tensioner are not aligned, check that the
first notch of the plunger rack is engaged with the stopper
tooth. If not engaged, retract the plunger a little so that the
tooth.
*1
*2
Stopper Tooth
(d) Align the alignment mark on the camshaft timing intake

1/6
8/6/12
assembly LH with the position shown in the illustration.

NOTICE:
timing intake gear assemblies more than the zero-lift
range (the range where camshaft timing intake gear
assembles can be turned lightly by hand).
*a
Alignment Mark
(e) Align the timing chain mark plate (blue) with the
alignment mark of the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
*a
Alignment Mark
*b
Timing Mark
*c
Mark plate (Blue)
*d
Mark plate (Pink)
(f) Align the timing chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly LH.
(g) Align the timing chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH.
(h) Apply engine oil to the bolt.
(i) Using a 5 mm hexagon socket wrench, install the No. 1 chain vibration damper with the bolt.
(j) Install a new O-ring to the cylinder block (bank 2).
2/6
8/6/12
(k) Install the chain tensioner slipper.
(l) Install the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly with the 2 bolts.
(m) Check that the chain is correctly installed.
*a
Alignment Mark
*b
Timing Mark
*c
Mark plate (Blue)
*d
Mark plate (Pink)
(1) Timing chain mark plate (blue) is aligned with the

alignment mark on the crankshaft timing gear or
sprocket.
(2) Timing chain mark plate (pink) is aligned with the
timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly LH.
timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH.
(n) Pull out the wire or the like from the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly.
(o) Temporarily install the pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(p) Turn the crankshaft clockwise, and make sure that there are no abnormal conditions.
NOTICE:

NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere onto or to enter into the component parts during
installation.
HINT:
3/6
8/6/12
(a) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow in the
*1
Link Plate
*2
Plunger
(b) Insert a 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) hexagon wrench into the No.
1 chain tensioner assembly through the stopper pin hole,
and hold the plunger.
*1
*2
Stopper Tooth
HINT:
hole on the chain tensioner are not aligned, check that the
tooth. If not engaged, retract the plunger a little so that the
tooth.
(c) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment marks of the
assembly LH shown in the illustration.
*a
Alignment Mark
HINT:
When the marks are aligned with the positions in the
illustration, crankshaft key faces directly underneath.
(d) Align the alignment marks of the camshaft timing intake

assembly RH as shown in the illustration.
4/6
8/6/12
NOTICE:
timing intake gear assembly RH and camshaft more
than the zero-lift range (the range where the camshaft
timing intake gear assembles can be turned lightly by
hand).
*a
Alignment Mark
(e) Align the timing chain mark plate (blue) with the
alignment mark on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
*a
Alignment Mark
*b
Timing Mark
*c
Mark plate (Blue)
*d
Mark plate (Pink)
(f) Align the timing chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly RH.
(g) Align the timing chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH.
(h) Apply engine oil to the bolt.
(i) Using a 5 mm hexagon socket wrench, install the No. 1 chain vibration damper with the bolt.
(j) Install the chain tensioner slipper.
(k) Install the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly with the 2 bolts.
5/6
8/6/12
(l) Check that the chain is correctly installed.

*a
Alignment Mark
*b
Timing Mark
*c
Mark plate (Blue)
*d
Mark plate (Pink)

(1) Timing chain mark plate (blue) is aligned with the
alignment mark on the crankshaft timing gear or
sprocket.
timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly RH.
timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH.
(m) Pull out the hexagon wrench from the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(n) Turn the crankshaft clockwise, and make sure that there are no abnormal conditions.
NOTICE:
(o) Remove the pulley bolt.
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000056U900BX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(a) Temporarily install the pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(b) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment marks of the
assembly RH.
*1
Alignment Mark
*2
Key
HINT:
The crankshaft key faces downward at this time.
(c) Push down the chain tensioner slipper and insert a 2.5
mm (0.098 in.) hexagonal wrench through the stopper
plate into the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000056U900BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
(e) Remove the chain tensioner slipper.
(f) Using a 5 mm hexagonal wrench, remove the bolt and No.

1 chain vibration damper.
(g) Remove the chain sub-assembly.

NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly removed, the valve heads may contact each other if the camshafts
are turned, causing the valve stems to bend.
To avoid this, do not turn the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH more than the
zero-lift range (the range where camshafts can be turned lightly by hand).
HINT:
(a) Turn the crankshaft and position each alignment mark on

the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket, camshaft timing
intake gear assembly LH and camshaft timing exhaust
2/4
8/6/12
*1
Key
*2
Alignment Mark
(b) Push the chain tensioner slipper and retain the plunger
by inserting an approximately 1 mm (0.039 in.) wire
through the stopper plate into the No. 2 chain tensioner
assembly.
(c) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 2 chain tensioner assembly.
(d) Remove the chain tensioner slipper.
(e) Remove the O-ring from the cylinder block (bank 2).
3/4
8/6/12
(f) Using a 5 mm socket hexagon wrench, remove the bolt

and No. 1 chain vibration damper.
(g) Remove the chain sub-assembly.

NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly removed, the valve heads may contact each other if the camshafts
are turned, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not turn the exhaust camshaft LH
more than the zero-lift range (the range where the camshaft can be turned lightly by hand).
At this time, the No. 1 and No. 4 pistons are located near TDC. If the intake camshaft is turned, the
valves may come into contact with the piston, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do
not turn the intake camshaft LH.
HINT:
(h) Remove the pulley bolt.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: VALVE CLEARANCE: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000RRR00NX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: VALVE CLEARANCE: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. REMOVE IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY

6. INSPECT VALVE CLEARANCE
NOTICE:
Inspect the valve clearance when the engine is cold.
(a) Set the No. 1 cylinder to the TDC/compression.

(1) Turn the crankshaft clockwise to align the timing mark on the crankshaft pulley with the
indicator of the timing chain cover.
*1
Intake Camshaft
*2
Exhaust Camshaft
*3
No. 1 Valve Rocker Arm Sub-assembly
*a
Timing Mark
(b) At this time, check that the intake camshaft and exhaust camshaft do not depress the No. 1
cylinder intake side No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly (intake valve) and exhaust side No. 1
valve rocker arm sub-assembly (exhaust valve).
HINT:
If the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly (valve) is depressed, turn the crank pulley by 360 in
order to make the No. 1 cylinder piston at TDC/compression.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000RRR00NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
(c) Inspect the valve clearance indicated in the illustration.
*a
Intake Side
*b
Exhaust Side
(d) Measure the clearance between the surface of the cam base circle and the roller surface of the No.
1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly using a feeler gauge.
Standard Valve Clearance (Cold):
Intake 0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.)
Exhaust 0.21 to 0.27 mm (0.0083 to 0.0106 in.)
(e) Turn the crank pulley by 360.
(f) Inspect the valve clearance indicated in the illustration.
*a
Intake Side
(g) Measure the clearance between the surface of the cam base circle and the roller surface of the No.
2/5
8/6/12

Intake 0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.)
(h) Turn the crank pulley clockwise, set the No. 2 cylinder at TDC/compression, and then align the
timing mark (notch) with 0 position of the timing chain cover.
*1
Intake Camshaft
*2
Exhaust Camshaft
*3
No. 1 Valve Rocker Arm Sub-assembly
*a
Timing Mark
(i) At this time, check that the intake camshaft and exhaust camshaft do not depress the No. 2
cylinder intake side No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly (intake valve) and exhaust side No. 1
valve rocker arm sub-assembly (exhaust valve).
HINT:
If the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly (valve) is depressed, turn the crank pulley by 360 in
order to make the No. 2 cylinder piston at TDC/compression.
(j) Inspect the valve clearance indicated in the illustration.
*a
Intake Side
*b
Exhaust Side
(k) Measure the clearance between the surface of the cam base circle and the roller surface of the No.
3/5
8/6/12
Intake 0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.)

Exhaust 0.21 to 0.27 mm (0.0083 to 0.0106 in.)
(l) Turn the crank pulley by 360.
(m) Inspect the valve clearance indicated in the illustration.
*a
Intake Side
(n) Measure the clearance between the surface of the cam base circle and the roller surface of the No.
Intake 0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.)
7. ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE

(a) Remove the camshaft housing sub-assembly.

4/5
8/6/12
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the

removed valve adjusting shims.
specified values.
Intake Side:
A = B + [C - 0.13 mm (0.0051 in.)] x 1.54
Exhaust Side:
A = B + [C - 0.24 mm (0.0094 in.)] x 1.69
A:
B:
C:
(f) Apply engine oil to the inner face of the valve adjusting shim, and install it to the valve.
NOTICE:
Check whether valve adjusting shim can be rotated smoothly on the valve.

(h) Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly.

12. INSTALL IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: VALVE CLEARANCE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000409400QX
Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: VALVE CLEARANCE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT VALVE CLEARANCE
(a) Check for noise and vibration
(1) Check for valve noise or a rough idle.
(2) Judge whether the valve clearance needs to be
adjusted.
HINT:
If the valve noise is too loud or the idle is rough, inspect the
valve clearance
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000409400QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PE206UX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PE206UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PE206UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WQQ07RX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
This inspection aims is to inspect the fuel injectors for opens or shorts, because the fuel
injectors of this vehicle are of a high-pressure type and cannot be inspected for fuel injection
volume.

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
1.9
*a

(Fuel Injector Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the fuel injector
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WQQ07RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q4608BX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FUEL INJECTOR SEAL
(a) Apply engine conditioner to the injector area shown in the
illustration. Using a piece of cloth, remove the carbon
deposits from the injector and its grooves.
*a
Clean Area
NOTICE:
Do not clean the tip of the injector.
Do not use a wire brush to clean the injector.
If an injector is dropped or the tips of the injectors are
struck, replace it with a new one.
(b) Apply engine oil to the injector contact surface of SST

(guide). Then attach SST (guide) to the injector with the
tapered inner portion facing the tip of the injector, as
SST: 09260-39020
09261-03020
*1
SST (Guide)
*a
Tapered Inner Portion
(c) Install a new injector seal to SST (holder).

SST: 09260-39020
09261-03010
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q4608BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
*1
SST (holder)
*2
Injector Seal
*a
CORRECT
*b
INCORRECT
NOTICE:
Be careful not to install the injector seal to SST (holder)
at an angle. Doing so will stretch the seal and correcting
this problem is very complicated.
(d) Install SST (holder with injector seal) to the tip of the
injector. Slide the seal downward into the injector groove
(injector connector side) with your fingers, as shown in
the illustration.
SST: 09260-39020
09261-03010
09261-03020
*1
SST (Guide)
*2
SST (Holder)
HINT:
Check that the seal covers the circumference of the injector
groove as shown in the illustration.
(e) Using SST (holder), gently press downward on the

injector seal (injector connector side). Then slowly slide
SST (guide) toward the injector tip to settle the seal into
the injector groove.
SST: 09260-39020
09261-03010
09261-03020
*1
SST (Guide)
2/7
8/6/12
*2
SST (Holder)
*3
Injector Seal
*a
Gently Press
*b
Slowly Slide
*c
CORRECT
*d
INCORRECT
NOTICE:
Be careful that the seal is not pinched between SST
(guide) and the injector groove. Replace the seal if it
becomes damaged.
HINT:
When using SST (guide) to settle the seal into the groove,
SST (guide) only needs to be slid upward to the position
labeled A in the illustration.
After using SST (guide) to settle the seal into the groove,
return SST (guide) to its position labeled B in the
illustration.
(f) Slowly slide SST (guide) toward the tip of the injector.
When the injector contact surface of SST (guide) aligns
with the seal (injector connector side) as shown in the
illustration, hold the position for 5 seconds or more to fully
align the seal into the injector groove.
SST: 09260-39020
09261-03020
*1
SST (Guide)
*2
Injector Seal
NOTICE:
Be careful that the seal is not pinched between SST
(guide) and the injector groove. Replace the seal if it
becomes damaged.
HINT:
Set SST (guide) so that its bottom surface and seal are
flush.
If there is difficulty in sliding SST upward, slowly wiggle it
from side to side while sliding it up the injector little by
little.
(g) After installing the seals, check that they are not
3/7
8/6/12
scratched, deformed or protruding from the injector

groove.
*a
CORRECT
*b
INCORRECT
*c
Normal
*d
Protruding
*e
Deformed
NOTICE:
If a seal is scratched, deformed or protruding from the
groove, replace it with a new one.

NOTICE:
If the tip of the fuel injector assembly is struck or the fuel injector assembly is dropped,
replace the fuel injector assembly with a new one.
(a) Install new backup rings (No. 1 and No. 2) and a new
injector seal to the fuel injector as shown in the
illustration.
*1
No. 2 Backup Ring
*2
Injector Seal
*3
No. 1 Backup Ring
*a
Alignment Opening
*b
INCORRECT
*c
CORRECT
*d
Overlapped
*e
Normal
*f
Stretched
NOTICE:
Check that there is no foreign matter or damaged areas in
the injector seal groove.
Check that the No. 1 and No. 2 backup rings are installed
in the correct direction.
Make sure that the backup rings and injector seal are
installed in the correct order.
Check that the alignment openings of the backup rings
are not overlapped or stretched as shown in the
4/7
8/6/12
illustration.
After installing the injector seal, check that it is not
contaminated with foreign matter and is not damaged.
(b) Install a new fuel injector insulator and C-ring to the fuel injector.
*1
C-Ring
*2
Fuel Injector Insulator
NOTICE:
Install a new fuel injector insulator to the fuel injector as shown in the illustration.
(c) Install the nozzle holder clamp.

(d) Apply new engine oil to the surface of the injector insertion hole in the fuel delivery pipe.
5/7
8/6/12
*a
Protruding section
*b
Baffle hole
No gap
NOTICE:
Check that there are no foreign objects or scratches in the inner face of the fuel injector assembly
insertion hole in the fuel delivery pipe.
Ensure that gasoline does not adhere to the fuel injector seal or to inside the attachment hole.
Insert the fuel injector assembly in a straight line into the fuel delivery pipe without tilting it.
Ensure that there is no gap between the nozzle holder clamp and the fuel injector pipe on the
high-pressure side.
If using a new fuel injector assembly, use one with the same numbers.
*1
Number
*2
Quick Response Code
NOTICE:
Make sure that there is no gap between the delivery pipe and the clamp.
Check that there is no foreign matter or damage to the injector insertion hole of the delivery pipe.
Insert the injector straight into the delivery pipe without tilting it.
(e) Install the nozzle holder clamp, aligning the protrusions on the nozzle holder clamp with the baffle
on the fuel delivery pipe.
3. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE LH

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe LH with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the 2 fuel injector assembly connectors.
6/7
8/6/12
4. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE RH

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe RH with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the fuel pressure sensor connector and 2 fuel injector assembly connectors.

(a) Temporarily install the new fuel delivery pipe with the 2 union nuts and 3 bolts.
(b) Tighten the 3 bolts.
(c) Using a union nut wrench, tighten the 2 union nuts.

(a) Temporarily install the new No. 2 fuel pipe with the 2 union nuts.
(b) Using a union nut wrench, tighten the 2 union nuts.
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q4808IX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Using a union nut wrench, loosen the 2 union nuts and
remove the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
When removing the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe, pull it out in
a straight line to avoid damaging seal surface of the
fuel delivery pipe LH.
(b) Using a union nut wrench, loosen the 2 union nuts and remove the fuel delivery pipe.
4. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE LH
(a) Disconnect the 2 fuel injector assembly connectors.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q4808IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and fuel delivery pipe LH.
5. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE RH
(a) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector and 2 fuel

injector assembly connectors.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and fuel delivery pipe RH.

(a) Remove the 4 fuel injector assemblies from the fuel delivery pipe.
2/4
8/6/12
*a
for Bank 2
*b
for Bank 1
NOTICE:
If the tip of the fuel injector assembly is struck or the fuel injector assembly is dropped, replace the
fuel injector assembly with a new one.
Pull and remove the fuel injector assembly in a straight line to avoid damaging the seal surface of
the fuel delivery pipe.
For re-installation, attach a tag or label to each fuel injector assembly.
NOTICE:
Pull and remove the injector in a straight line to avoid damaging to the seal surface of the delivery
pipe O-rings.
For reinstallation, attach a tag or label to the injector shaft.
3/4
8/6/12
(b) Remove the nozzle holder clamps from the fuel injectors.
(c) Using a screwdriver, remove the C-ring and fuel injector

insulator.
*1
C-ring
*2
Fuel Injector Insulator
(d) Using a needle nose plier, remove the backup No. 1 ring.
*1
No. 1 Backup Ring
*2
Fuel Injector Seal
*3
No. 2 Backup Ring
(e) Remove the fuel injector seal and No. 2 backup ring.
7. REMOVE FUEL INJECTOR SEAL

(a) Using the tips of a pair of needle nose pliers, pinch and
pull one of the injector seal at several points to stretch it.
Repeat this for the other injector seal.
NOTICE:
Excessively pinching the injector seal may damage the
groove of the injector.
If an injector is dropped or the tips of the injectors are
struck, replace it with a new one.
(b) Remove the injector seal from the injector.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PE206TX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PE206TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PE206TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WQQ07QX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
12
*a

(Fuel Injector Assembly)
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the fuel
injector assembly.
(b) Inspect the injection volume.

CAUTION:
This test involves high-pressure fuel and electricity. Take all precautions regarding safe
handling of both the fuel and the electricity. Perform this test in a safe area, and avoid any
sparks or flames. Do not smoke.
(c) Disconnect the fuel tube.
(d) Connect SST (hose) to the fuel pipe (vehicle side) with
SST (hose band).
SST: 09268-31014
09268-41700
95336-08070
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WQQ07QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
SST
*1
(Hose)
SST
*2
(Hose Band)
*3
Fuel Pipe (Vehicle Side)
(e) Install the O-ring to the fuel injector assembly.

(f) Install SST and vinyl tube to the fuel injector assembly.
SST: 09268-31014
09268-41141
09268-41410
09268-41700
95336-08070
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
SST
(Hose)
SST
(Hose Band)
SST
(Adapter)
O-ring
SST
(Clamp)
Vinyl Tube
(g) Tie SST (clamp and adapter) together with SST (tie band)
SST: 09268-31014
09268-41141
09268-41410
09268-41800
*1
SST
(Tie Band)
SST
*2
(Adapter)
2/4
8/6/12
SST
*3
(Clamp)
(h) Put the injector into a graduated cylinder.

SST: 09842-30090
*1
SST (Wire)
*a
Connect
CAUTION:
Install a strong rubber tube onto the injector to prevent
gasoline from splashing.
(i) Operate the fuel pump (turn the ignition switch to ON).
(j) Connect SST (wire) to the injector and the battery for 15 seconds, and measure the injection
volume with the graduated cylinder. Test each injector 2 or 3 times.
Standard injection volume:
84 to 103 cc (5.1 to 6.3 cu.in.) per 15 seconds
Difference between each injector:
19 cc (1.2 cu.in.) or less
NOTICE:
Make sure that SST (EFI inspection wire I) is securely connected.
Always turn on and off the voltage on the battery side, not on the fuel pump side.
If the injection volume is not as specified, replace the fuel injector assembly.
(k) Check for leakage.
(1) In the condition above, disconnect the tester probes

of SST (wire) from the battery and check for fuel
leakage from the fuel injector assembly.
Standard fuel drop:
1 drop or less in 22 minutes
If there is excessive leakage, replace the fuel injector
assembly.
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q4608AX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Apply gasoline to 2 new O-rings and install them to the
injector.
*1
New O-ring
NOTICE:
Check that there is no damage or foreign material in the
groove of the injector when installing the injector's Orings.
(b) Install the 4 fuel injector assemblies to the fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
Check that there are no foreign objects or scratches in the insertion opening of the fuel delivery
pipe.
Take sufficient care not to twist the O-ring.
If the injector does not rotate smoothly after installing it to the fuel delivery pipe, remove the
injector and reinstall it with a new O-ring.
2. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE (for Bank 1)

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1) (with injector) to the intake manifold with the 2 bolts.
(b) Engage the clamp to connect the wire harness.
(c) Connect the 2 fuel injector assembly connectors.
HINT:
Connect the connector, aligning it with the baffles on the fuel injector assembly on the fuel delivery
pipe (for bank 1).
(d) Connect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1)

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2) (with injector) to the intake manifold with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the 2 injector connectors and clamp.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q4608AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
Connect the connector, aligning it with the baffles on the fuel injector assembly on the fuel delivery
pipe (for bank 2).
(c) Connect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2)

(b) Install the wire harness clamp bracket to the injector cover with the bolt.
5. CONNECT NO. 2 FUEL HOSE

(a) Connect the No. 2 fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly with the clamp.

(a) Align the matchmarks on the the fuel delivery pipe and No. 3 fuel hose.
(b) Connect the No. 3 fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly

(a) Align the matchmarks on fuel delivery pipe and the No. 1 fuel hose.
(b) Connect the No. 1 fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe

(b) Engage the 4 clamps to install the wire harness to the injector cover.

10. INSTALL CHAMBER ASSEMBLY

12. INSPECT FOR FUEL LEAK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q4608AX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q4808HX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

3. REMOVE CHAMBER ASSEMBLY

(a) Disengage the 4 clamps and separate the wire harness

from the injector cover (for bank 1).
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover (for bank 1).
6. DISCONNECT NO. 1 FUEL HOSE
(a) Place matchmarks on the fuel delivery pipe and the No. 1
fuel hose.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q4808HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
*a
Matchmark
(b) Using SST, disconnect the No. 1 fuel hose from the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly
SST: SU003-03936
(a) Place matchmarks on the fuel delivery pipe and the No. 3
fuel hose from the fuel pipe.
*a
Matchmark
(b) Using SST, disconnect the No. 3 fuel hose from the fuel pipe
SST: SU003-03936
(a) Remove the clamp and disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor
feed hose from the fuel pipe.
2/5
8/6/12
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the wire harness clamp
bracket from the injector cover (for bank 2).
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover (for bank 2).
10. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE (for Bank 2)
(b) Disengage the clamp and separate the wire harness.
(c) Disconnect the fuel pump assembly connector.
3/5
8/6/12
(d) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly from

the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2)
(e) Remove the 2 bolts and fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2).
NOTICE:
When removing the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2), hold
the pipe by both ends and pull it straight upward.
(b) Disengage the clamp and separate the wire harness.

(c) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly from the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1)
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1).
NOTICE:
When removing the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1), hold
the pipe by both ends and pull it straight upward.

4/5
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 4 fuel injector assemblies from the fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
For reinstallation, attach a tag or label to the injector shaft.
(b) Remove the 2 O-rings from the fuel injector assembly.

*1
O-ring
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIL02HX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIL02HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIL02HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WU302HX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
(a) Check the fuel pressure sensor output voltage.
(1) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONNECTION
1 (GND) - 2
(VOUT)
CONDITION
Apply 5 V between terminals 3

(VCC) and 1 (GND)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Approximately
0.5 V
*a

(Fuel Pressure Sensor)
NOTICE:
Be careful when connecting the leads, as the fuel
pressure sensor may be damaged if the leads are
connected to the wrong terminals.
Do not apply a voltage of 6 V or more to the terminals 3
(VCC) and 1 (GND).
HINT:
If a stable power supply is not available, use 4 1.2 V nickelmetal hydride batteries, etc.
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the fuel

pressure sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WU302HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIK030X
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Be sure to use a new fuel delivery pipe and new fuel pressure sensor.

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe (for Bank 1) with the 2 bolts.
3. INSTALL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR

(a) Temporarily install the new fuel pressure sensor by hand as much as possible to the fuel delivery
pipe (for Bank 1).
(b) Tighten the fuel pressure sensor.
NOTICE:
Ensure that no oil adheres to the threads of the fuel pressure sensor and No. 1 fuel delivery pipe
sub-assembly RH.
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere when installing the fuel pressure sensor.
Once the fuel pressure sensor is tightened to the specified torque, do not retighten or recheck it.
(c) Connect the fuel pressure sensor connector and 2 fuel injector connectors.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIK030X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIM02ZX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(a) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector and 2 fuel

injector connectors.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel delivery pipe (for Bank
1).
4. REMOVE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
(a) Remove the fuel pressure sensor from the fuel delivery
pipe (for Bank 1).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIM02ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIM02ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIR02GX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIR02GX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000053LC004X
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
1.19 to 1.39
*a

If the result is not as specified, replace the fuel pump
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000053LC004X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIQ02TX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
illustration.
Seal packing:
Standard seal diameter:
Within 1 mm (0.039 in.)
NOTICE:
Install within 5 minutes of applying seal packing, and
tighten the bolts within 15 minutes.
Do not pour in engine oil for at least 2 hours after
installation.
Do not start the engine for at least 2 hours after
installation.
Do not allow seal packing to enter the engine oil passage.
*A A-A cross-section
*1 Seal Packing
*a
Seal Application Position : Within 1 mm (0.039 in.) from

Edge
*b Seal Diameter : 2 to 4 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
(b) Using a 6 mm hexagon wrench, install the pump drive case assembly with the 3 bolts.

(a) Turn the crankshaft until the flat of the cam is facing the cylinder head cover's fuel pump
attachment hole.
HINT:
When installing the fuel pump by following the procedure described above, it is easier to install the
fuel pump and the No. 2 fuel pipe later if the crankshaft pointed side is not used to push up the pump
activation surface.
(b) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pump activation cam and pump lifter part.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIQ02TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(c) Apply new engine oil to the inside of the pump drive case
assembly and the underside of the valve lifter, and install
the valve lifter to the pump drive case assembly.
*1
Valve Lifter
*2
Pump Drive Case Assembly
*3
Location for applying new engine oil
HINT:
When applying oil to the underside of the valve lifter, drop a
few drops of oil on the camshaft and the roller rocker arm
from the valve lifter hole.

(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to a new O-ring and install it to the fuel pump assembly.
(b) Using a "TORX" Plus Socket Wrench, install the fuel pump assembly with the 2 bolts.
4. CONNECT FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the fuel pump assembly with a new gasket and the
union bolt.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIQ02TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIT02IX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION
(a) Check fuel pressure.
(4) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Target Fuel
Pressure.
(5) Check that the fuel pressure fluctuates when the target fuel pressure changes.
HINT:
The target fuel pressure operation lowers the target fuel pressure by -12.5% or increases the target
fuel pressure by 24.8%.
Standard:
Fuel pressure fluctuates in accordance with the Techstream operation.
If the result is not as specified, replace the fuel pump or fuel pressure sensor.
(b) Check operating sound.
(1) Remove the injector cover (for bank 2).
(3) Using a sound scope, check the operating sound of

the pump.
If no sound can be heard, check the fuel pump, wire
harness and ECM.
(4) Stop the engine.

(5) Reinstall the injector cover (for bank 2).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIT02IX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIS02SX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

3. DISCONNECT FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the union bolt and gasket, and disconnect the
fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.
(a) Using a "TORX" Plus Socket Wrench, remove the 2 bolts

and fuel pump assembly.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the fuel pump assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIS02SX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Remove the valve lifter from the pump drive case
assembly.
(a) Using a 6 mm hexagon wrench, remove the 3 bolts and

pump drive case assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIS02SX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIW02HX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIW02HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIU044X
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Attach the fuel pump control ECU assembly bracket to the body attachment hole, and pass the
stud bolt through the hole in the body.
(b) Install the fuel pump control ECU assembly with the nut.
NOTICE:
Do not reuse the fuel pump control ECU assembly if it has been subjected to shocks.
(c) Connect the fuel pump control ECU assembly connector.
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER RH

3. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH
4. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY RH
5. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH
6. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIU044X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIX041X
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. SEPARATE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH
3. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH
4. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY RH
5. SEPARATE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH
6. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER RH
7. REMOVE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU assembly

connector.
(b) Remove the nut.
(c) Push in the fuel pump control ECU assembly stud bolt.
*1
Stud Bolt
*2
Bracket
(d) Move the fuel pump control ECU assembly towards the rear of the vehicle, disengage the bracket,
and remove the fuel pump control ECU assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not reuse the fuel pump control ECU assembly if it has been subjected to shocks.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIX041X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QDV05XX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QDV05XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QDW07JX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not disconnect the hose indicated in the illustration.
When replacing the fuel filter assembly, replace it together with the fuel suction plate subassembly.
1. REMOVE FUEL SENDER GAGE ASSEMBLY

2. REMOVE NO. 1 FUEL SUB-TANK
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump connector.
(b) Hold the fuel suction plate sub-assembly in the direction

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QDW07JX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
of the arrow as shown in the illustration.
(c) Using needle nose plier, remove the E-ring.
(d) Using a screwdriver with the tip taped, disengage the

claw and separate the jet pump nozzle.
*1
Protective Tape
(e) Using a screwdriver with the tip taped, disengage the 3

claws and separate the No. 1 fuel sub-tank.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the No. 1 fuel sub-tank or the fuel filter.
(f) Using a screwdriver with the tip taped, disengage the

claw and separate the jet pump.
2/4
8/6/12
(g) Remove the O-ring from the No. 1 fuel sub-tank.
(a) Using 2 screwdrivers with the tip taped, disengage the 2

claws.
(b) Using a screwdriver with the tip taped, disengage the 3

claws and remove the fuel pump.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the fuel pump or the fuel filter.
(c) Disconnect the connector, and remove the fuel pump wire
harness.
(d) Remove the O-ring and fuel pump spacer from the fuel pump assembly.
*1
fuel pump wire harness
3/4
8/6/12
*2
O-Ring
*3
Fuel Pump Spacer
4. REMOVE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the fuel pressure regulator assembly from the

fuel filter.
(b) Remove the 2 O-ring and backup ring from the fuel
pressure regulator assembly.
*1
O-Ring
*2
Backup Ring
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W1H055X
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the resistance of the fuel pump assembly.
the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
0.2 to 3.0
*a

If the result is not as specified, replace the fuel pump
assembly.
(b) Inspect the operation of the fuel pump assembly.

(1) Connect a battery's negative (-) lead to terminal 3 of
the connector, and a positive (+) lead to terminal 4.
Check that the fuel pump operates.
*a

(Fuel Suction Tube Assembly with Pump and Gauge)
NOTICE:
These tests must be performed within 10 seconds to
prevent the coil from burning out.
Keep the fuel pump as far away from the battery as
possible.
Always turn on and off the voltage on the battery side,
and not on the fuel pump side.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000W1H055X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QDU07TX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND GAUGE
(a) Set the new gasket to the fuel suction tube assembly
with pump and gauge.
*1
(b) Connect the fuel tank vent hose sub-assembly
Gasket
NOTICE:
When connecting the fuel tube connector, do not forcibly pull the fuel return vent tube subassembly.
Be careful not to bend the arm of the fuel sender gauge assembly.
(c) Insert the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge inside the fuel tank assembly, and
then attach the new gasket which has already been mounted on the fuel suction tube assembly
with pump and gauge to the fuel tank assembly.
NOTICE:
Gaps or misplaced attachment of the gasket may cause fuel to leak, so make sure that there
are no gaps or misalignments anywhere around the gasket when attaching it to the fuel tank
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QDU07TX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(d) Apply a light coat of gasoline to a gasket.

*1
Gasket
*a
Application area
NOTICE:
Apply gasoline in the area indicated in the illustration.
Ensure that gasoline does not adhere to the threads of
the fuel tank assembly.
Check that is no fuel or foreign matter in the seal section.
(e) Set the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge
within the fuel tank assembly installation position marks.
*a
Position marks
(f) Attach a new sheet ring and fuel pump gauge retainer, and temporarily tighten the fuel pump
gauge retainer.
(g) Temporarily install SST (plate and 4 claws) to the fuel pump gauge retainer.
SST: 09808-14030
09808-01010
2/4
8/6/12
09808-01020
09808-01030
09808-01050
SST: 09808-01071
NOTICE:
Do not apply a claw of SST at the marked part.
*a
Marked Part
HINT:
Be sure to use SST (claws) as shown in the illustration.
Engage SST (claws) securely with the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs to secure SST.
(h) While securely pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs, install the 2 bolts.
HINT:
Install SST while pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer (towards the center of
SST).
(i) Install SST (handle).
(j) Tighten the fuel pump gauge retainer so that the start
mark on the fuel pump gauge retainer is in the position
NOTICE:
Do not use any tools other than those specified in this
operation. Damage to the fuel pump gauge retainer or
fuel tank may result.
Do not press down on SST excessively as this may make
the fuel pump gauge retainer hard to rotate, and may
damage components.
Make sure to rotate SST (handle) horizontally. If SST
3/4
8/6/12
(handle) is rotated at an angle, SST may come off.

Do not spin SST too fast or use an impact wrench as this
may result in damage to components.
If SST comes off of the fuel pump gauge retainer, loosen
SST (bolts) and reinstall SST.
HINT:
Lightly press down on SST to prevent it from separating
from the fuel pump gauge retainer. While pressing SST,
rotate the handle slowly to tighten the fuel pump gauge
retainer.
The tips of SST (claws) can be fitted onto the ribs of the
fuel pump gauge retainer.
(k) Connect the fuel tank main tube

4. INSTALL NO. 2 REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
(a) Connect the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge connector.
(b) Install the No. 2 rear floor service hole cover with new butyl tape.
5. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY LH
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QDU07UX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply a light coat of gasoline to new 2 O-rings, and install

the 2 O-rings and backup ring to the fuel pressure
regulator assembly.
*1
O-Ring
*2
Backup Ring
(b) Install the fuel pressure regulator assembly to the fuel

filter.

(a) Install the new O-ring and fuel pump spacer to the fuel
pump assembly.
*1
Fuel Pump Wire harness
*2
O-Ring
*3
Fuel Pump Spacer
(b) Connect the new fuel pump wire harness to the fuel pump assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QDU07UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(c) Apply a light coat of gasoline to a seal, and install it to the

fuel pump assembly.
(d) Attach the 5 claws of the fuel filter to install the fuel pump assembly.
NOTICE:
When installing the seal, make sure that it does not become pinched or cut.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 FUEL SUB-TANK

(a) Set the fuel suction plate sub-assembly to the No. 1 fuel sub-tank using the spring.
(b) Apply a light coat of gasoline to a new O-ring and install

the O-ring to the jet pump.
*1
Jet Pump
(c) Install the jet pump to the No. 1 fuel sub-tank.

NOTICE:
When installing the O-ring, make sure that it does not become pinched or cut.
Securely attach the claws.
(d) Attach the 3 claws to install the fuel filter assembly to the
No. 1 fuel sub-tank.
2/3
8/6/12
(e) Attach the claw to install the jet pump nozzle to the No. 1
fuel sub-tank.
(f) Install a new E-ring.
(g) Connect the fuel pump connector.
4. INSTALL FUEL SENDER GAGE ASSEMBLY
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QDW07IX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. DRAIN FUEL
(a) If the fuel gauge reads 2/3 or more, carry out the following procedure to drain fuel.
CAUTION:
After running, the engine will be very hot, so take care to avoid burns.
NOTICE:
Be sure not to scatter any fuel.
In some cases, there may be fuel in the fuel filler pipe section. Use a gasoline-capable pump or a
gasoline-capable hose with a diameter of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) or less, to drain fuel from the fuel
filler pipe section.
(1) Remove the center exhaust pipe assembly.
(2) Remove the tail exhaust pipe assembly.
(3) Loosen the hose clamp bolt and disconnect the fuel
tank to filler pipe hose.
NOTICE:
(4) Place a metal container below the vehicle, and use a gasoline-capable hose with a diameter of
10 mm or less to drain fuel from the opening of fuel tank assembly to filler pipe hose.
NOTICE:
Static electricity could possibly ignite gasoline, so be sure to use earthed metal containers.
(5) Connect the fuel tank to filler pipe hose to the fuel tank filler pipe sub-assembly with the clamp.

4. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY LH
5. REMOVE NO. 2 REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QDW07IX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Remove the No. 2 rear floor service hole cover.
(b) Disconnect the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and
gauge connector.
6. REMOVE FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND GAUGE
(a) Disconnect the fuel tank main tube
(b) Disengage the clamp and separate the fuel tank main
tube from the fuel tank assembly.
(c) Remove the fuel pump gauge retainer.

(1) Temporarily install SST to the fuel pump gauge retainer.
2/4
8/6/12
SST: 09808-14030
09808-01010
09808-01020
09808-01030
09808-01050
SST: 09808-01071
NOTICE:
*a
Marked Part
HINT:
(2) While securely pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs, install the 4
bolts.
(3) Install SST (handle).
(4) Lightly press down on SST to prevent it from
separating from the fuel pump gauge retainer. While
pressing SST, rotate the handle slowly to loosen the
3/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
the fuel pump gauge retainer hard to rotate and may
damage components.
(5) Disconnect the fuel tank vent hose sub-assembly

.
(6) Remove the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge from the fuel tank assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not pull the fuel return vent tube sub-assembly forcibly when disconnecting the fuel return vent
tube sub-assembly.
Do not rotate the fuel suction tube assembly inside the fuel tank assembly, as doing so may bend
the fuel sender gauge arm section.
Be sure not to spill the fuel remaining in the fuel suction tube assembly on the exterior of the fuel
tank assembly or interior of the vehicle.
(7) Remove the gasket from the fuel tank assembly.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OU801OX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OU801OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OU801OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000014W605MX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Take special care of fire.
(a) Inspect to see if there is any damage to the fuel sender gauge assembly.
(b) Measure the dimensions between the fuel tank seat face
and the float center with the float position at F (upper
end) and at E (lower end).
Dimensions
Float position F (upper end) to fuel
tank seat face
121 to 129 mm (4.764 to

5.079 in.)
Float position E (lower end) to fuel

tank seat face
14.7 to 22.7 mm (0.579

to 0.894 in.)
*1
Float position F (upper end)
*2
Float position E (lower end)
*3
Fuel tank seat face
(c) Check that the float moves smoothly between F (upper) and E (lower).
(d) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Float position is F
(upper end)
6.5 to 8.5
Float position is E
(lower end)
168 to 172
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000014W605MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
*a

(Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly)
*b
F (upper end)
*c
E (lower end)
If the value is not as specified, replace the fuel sender
gauge assembly.
2. INSPECT NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
Take special care of fire.
(a) Inspect to see if there is any damage to the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly.
(b) Measure the dimensions between the fuel tank seat face
and the float center with the float position at F (upper
end) and at E (lower end).
Dimensions
Float position F (upper end) to
150.3 to 158.3 mm (5.917
fuel tank seat face
to 6.232 in.)
Float position E (lower end) to
0.7 to 8.7 mm (0.028 to
fuel tank seat face
0.343 in.)
*1
Float position F (upper end)
*2
Float position E (lower end)
*3
Fuel tank seat face
(c) Check that the float moves smoothly between F (upper) and E (lower).
(d) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the

table below.
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
1-2
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Float position is F
(upper end)
5.5 to 9.5
2/3
8/6/12
Float position is E
236 to 244
(lower end)
*a

(No. 2 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly)
*b
F (upper end)
*c
E (lower end)
If the value is not as specified, replace the fuel sender
gauge assembly.
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OU701VX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(a) Slide the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly downwards and attach the claw labeled A to install
the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly.
Slide
(b) Connect the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly connector.

(c) Engage the 4 clamps.
2. INSTALL FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE

(a) Install a new gasket to the fuel tank assembly.
(b) Apply a light coat of gasoline to a gasket.
*1
Gasket
*a
Application area
NOTICE:
Apply gasoline in the area indicated in the illustration.
Ensure that gasoline does not adhere to the threads of
Check that is no fuel or foreign matter in the seal section.
(c) Engage the clamp to install the tube and set the fuel tank return tube into the fuel tank assembly.
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OU701VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
Be careful not to bend the arm of the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly.
(d) Set the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly within the fuel
tank assembly installation position marks.
*a
Position marks
(e) Temporarily install SST (plate and 4 claws) to the fuel pump gauge retainer.
SST: 09808-14030
09808-01010
09808-01020
09808-01030
09808-01050
SST: 09808-01071
NOTICE:
*a
Marked Part
HINT:
(f) While securely pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs, install the 4 bolts.
HINT:
Install SST while pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer (towards the center of
SST).
(g) Install SST (handle).

2/4
8/6/12
(h) Tighten the fuel pump gauge retainer so that the start
mark on the fuel pump gauge retainer is in the position
NOTICE:
the fuel pump gauge retainer hard to rotate, and may
damage components.
Do not spin SST too fast or use an impact wrench as this
may result in damage to components.
HINT:
Lightly press down on SST to prevent it from separating
from the fuel pump gauge retainer. While pressing SST,
rotate the handle slowly to tighten the fuel pump gauge
retainer.
The tips of SST (claws) can be fitted onto the ribs of the
3. INSTALL FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY

(a) Slide the fuel sender gauge assembly downwards and attach the claw labeled A to install the fuel
sender gauge assembly.
Slide
(b) Connect the fuel pump harness to the 2 clamps.

(c) Connect the fuel sender gauge assembly connector.
3/4
8/6/12

8. INSTALL REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
(a) Connect the fuel tank return tube connector.
(b) Install the rear floor service hole cover with new butyl tape.

4/4
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OU901TX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

7. REMOVE FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump harness from the 4 clamps.

(c) Push the claw labeled A of the fuel sender gauge assembly, and then pull up the fuel sender
gauge assembly to remove it.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OU901TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Push
Pull up
8. REMOVE REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
(a) Remove the rear floor service hole cover.
(b) Disconnect the fuel tank return tube connector.
9. REMOVE FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE
2/5
8/6/12
(a) Temporarily install SST to the fuel pump gauge retainer.

SST: 09808-14030
09808-01010
09808-01020
09808-01030
09808-01050
SST: 09808-01071
NOTICE:
*a
Marked Part
HINT:
(b) While securely pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs, install the 4 bolts.
(c) Install SST (handle).
(d) Lightly press down on SST to prevent it from separating from the fuel pump gauge retainer.
While pressing SST, rotate the handle slowly to loosen the fuel pump gauge retainer.
NOTICE:
3/5
8/6/12
Do not use any tools other than those specified in this operation.
Damage to the fuel pump gauge retainer or fuel tank may result.
Do not press down on SST excessively as this may make the fuel pump gauge retainer hard to
rotate and may damage components.
Make sure to rotate SST (handle) horizontally. If SST (handle) is rotated at an angle, SST may
come off.
Do not spin SST too fast or use an impact wrench as this may result in damage to components.
If SST comes off of the fuel pump gauge retainer, loosen SST (bolts) and reinstall SST.
(e) Remove the fuel pump gauge retainer.
(f) Disengage the clamp and separate the fuel tank vent
hose sub-assembly from the fuel tank return tube.
(g) Remove the fuel tank return tube from the fuel tank assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to bend the arm of the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly.
(h) Remove the gasket from the fuel tank assembly.
10. REMOVE NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly

connector.
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump harness from the clamp.

(c) Push the claw labeled A of the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly, and then pull up the No. 2 fuel
sender gauge assembly to remove it.
4/5
8/6/12
Push
Pull up
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q3M04GX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION AND INSPECT FOR FUEL LEAK
NOTICE:
Do not start the engine.

(3) Enter the following menus: Power train / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump Speed.
(b) Check the fuel pump operation.
(1) Check for pressure in the fuel inlet tube from the fuel line. Check that sound of fuel flowing in
the fuel tank can be heard.
If no sound can be heard, check the EFI MAIN 1 relay, fuel pump, ECM and wiring connector.
(c) Inspect for fuel leaks.
(1) Check that there are no fuel leaks anywhere on the system after performing maintenance.
If there is a fuel leak, repair or replace parts as necessary.
2. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

(a) Check that the battery positive voltage is above 12 V.
(b) Discharge the fuel system pressure
(c) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism in which the door glass moves down slightly
when the door is opened, and in which the glass moves up when the door is closed the door in
order to prevent the door molding from being damaged. When the battery negative (-) terminal
needs to be disconnected for servicing, fully open the driver and passenger door glasses in
advance.
(d) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel tube. (Direct injection side)
(1) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the No. 2 fuel
tube.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q3M04GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(e) Disconnect the fuel tube. (Port injection side)
(1) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the fuel

tube.
(f) Install SST (pressure gauge) as shown in the illustration.

SST: 09268-31014
09268-41700
SST: 09268-45100
09268-41250
09268-41260
09268-41270
95336-08070
96135-51300
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
SST
(Pressure Gauge)
SST
(Straight joint)
SST
(Hose)
SST
(T-joint)
SST
(Hose Band)
SST
(Clip)
(g) Wipe off any gasoline.

(h) Reconnect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
(i) Operate the fuel pump.
NOTICE:
2/3
8/6/12

(4) Enter the following menus: Power train / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump Speed.
(j) Measure the fuel pressure.
Standard fuel pressure:
350 to 500 kPa (4 to 5 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to 73 psi)
If the fuel pressure is higher than the specification, replace the fuel pump (built-in fuel tank).
If the pressure is lower than the specification, check the fuel hoses, connections, and fuel pump
(built-in fuel tank).
(k) Start the engine.
(l) Measure the fuel pressure when idle.
350 to 500 kPa (4 to 5 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to 73 psi)
If the pressure is not as specified, check the fuel pump and injectors.
(m) Stop the engine.
(n) Check that the fuel pressure remains as specified for 5 minutes after the engine has stopped.
147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 , 21 psi) or more
If the pressure is not as specified, check the fuel pump or injectors.
(o) After checking the fuel pressure, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and
carefully remove SST and the fuel tube connector to prevent fuel from spilling.
(p) Reconnect the No. 2 fuel tube with the clamp. (Direct injection side)
(q) Reconnect the fuel tube with the clamp. (Port injection side)
(r) Inspect for fuel leaks (Step 1).
3. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (for High Pressure)

(b) Start and warm up the engine.
(c) Run the engine at idle.
(d) Enter the following menus: Power train / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(e) Check the high pressure side fuel pressure.
3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 51.0 kgf/cm 2 , 435 to 725 psi)
If the pressure is not as specified, check the fuel pump, high pressure side fuel pump, fuel
pressure sensor and wirings.
(f) Stop the engine.
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VHO03YX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VHO03YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q3K042X
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
Before working on the fuel system, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
Do not smoke or be near an open flame when working on the fuel system.
Keep gasoline away from rubber or leather parts.
Do not allow fuel to spray when removing the pipe between the high pressure side fuel pump and
the fuel injector. The fuel in the pipe is highly pressurized.
1. PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
After turning the ignition switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the
cable from the battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable from
the battery terminal notice before proceeding with work
.

CAUTION:
Make sure the engine coolant temperature is 60C (140F) or less when performing this
procedure.
Do not disconnect any part of the fuel system until you have discharged the fuel system pressure.
Even after discharging the fuel pressure, place a piece of cloth or equivalent over fittings as you
separate them to reduce the risk of fuel spray on yourself or in the engine compartment.
(a) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
(b) Remove rear seat cushion assembly LH.
(c) Remove the No. 2 rear floor service hole cover.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q3K042X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/9
8/6/12
(d) Disconnect the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and
gauge connector.
(e) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.

(f) Start the engine. After the engine has stopped on its own, turn the ignition switch off.
HINT:
Some DTCs may be stored. Clear the DTCs before proceeding to the next step.
(g) Crank the engine again, then check that the engine does not start.
(h) Loosen the fuel tank cap, then discharge the pressure in the fuel tank completely.
(i) Connect the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge connector.
(j) Install the No. 2 rear floor service hole cover.
(k) Install rear seat cushion assembly LH.
3. FUEL SYSTEM
(a) When disconnecting a fuel pressure line, a large amount of gasoline will spill out. Perform the
following procedure:
(1) Discharge fuel system pressure.
(2) Put a container under the connection.
(3) Disconnect the fuel pump tube.
(4) Drain the fuel remaining inside the fuel pump tube into the container.
(5) Cover the disconnected pipe and connector with a plastic bag to prevent damage and
contamination.
(b) Observe these precautions when connecting the fuel tube connector (for metallic type).
2/9
8/6/12
(1) Attach SST to the fuel

pipe.
SST: SU003-03936
(2) Insert SST in the fuel tube connector side, and remove the fuel tube from the fuel pipe.
*1
Retainer
*2
O-Ring
*3
Housing
*4
Fuel Pipe
Insert
(3) Cover the disconnected fuel pipe and fuel tube connector with plastic bags to prevent damage
and contamination.
(c) Observe these precautions when connecting the fuel tube connector (for metallic type).
(1) Check for damage or foreign matter on the connected part of the fuel pipe.
(2) Align the fuel tube connector axis with the fuel pipe axis, and push the fuel tube connector in
until the retainer makes a clicking sound.
3/9
8/6/12
Push
(3) After connecting the fuel tube connector, pull the fuel tube connector and pipe, and then push
them to check that they are connected firmly.
NOTICE:
Be sure to always finish checking the fuel pipe connections by pushing.
Pull
Push
(4) Inspect for fuel leaks
(d) Observe these precautions when disconnecting the fuel tube connector (for quick type A).
(1) Check that there is no damage or foreign matter on the part of the pipe that contacts the
connector.
(2) Detach the 2 claws of the connector retainer. Push down on the connector and disconnect it
from the pipe.
4/9
8/6/12
*1
Retainer
Push
Down
Pull
HINT:
If the connector and pipe are stuck, pinch the fuel pipe by hand and push and pull the connector to
disconnect it.
Pull
Push
NOTICE:
Check for any dirt and foreign matter contamination in the pipe and around the connector. Clean if
necessary. Foreign matter may damage the O-ring or cause leaks in the seal between the pipe
and connector.
5/9
8/6/12
Do not use any tools to separate the pipe and connector.

Do not allow any scratches or foreign matter on the parts when disconnecting them, as the fuel
tube joint contains the O-rings that seal the plug.
Check for any dirt and foreign matter on the pipe seal surface. Clean if necessary.
Do not forcibly bend, twist or turn the nylon tube.
Protect the disconnected part by covering it with a plastic bag and tape after disconnecting the
main tube.
If the pipe and connector are stuck together, pinch the tube between your fingers and turn it
carefully to free it. Then disconnect the main tube.
*1
Pipe
*2
Retainer
*3
Nylon Tube
*4
Connector
*5
O-Ring
(3) Check for foreign matter on the seal surface of the disconnected pipe. Clean it if necessary.
(4) To protect the disconnected pipe and connector from damage and foreign matter, cover them
with a plastic bag.
(e) Observe these precautions when connecting the fuel tube connector (for quick type A).
(1) Check for foreign matter on the pipe and around the connector before connecting it. Clean it if
necessary.
(2) Align the axis of the connector with the axis of the pipe. Push the pipe into the connector, and
then push up on the retainer.
6/9
8/6/12
*1
Retainer
Up
Push
NOTICE:
Before connecting the tube connectors to the pipes, check if there is any damage or foreign matter
in the connectors.
After connecting the pipe and the connector, check that the pipe and connector are securely
connected by trying to pull them apart.
Pull
(f) Perform the following procedure when disconnecting a fuel tube connector (Quick Type B).
*1
Fuel Tube Connector
*2
Fuel Pipe
*3
Retainer
7/9
8/6/12
Pinch
Pull Out
(1) Check that there is no dirt or other foreign matter around the fuel tube connector before
disconnecting it. Clean the joint if necessary.
(2) Pinch the retainer as illustrated, then pull out the fuel tube connector from the fuel pipe.
NOTICE:
Be sure to disconnect the fuel tube connector by hand.
(3) If the fuel tube connector and fuel pipe are stuck,
pinch the fuel pipe, and then push and pull the fuel
tube connector to release and disconnect the fuel
tube connector.
(4) Check if there is any dirt or other foreign matter on the seal surface of the disconnected fuel
pipe and clean it away as necessary.
(5) Cover the disconnected fuel pipe and fuel tube connector with plastic bags to prevent damage
and contamination.
(g) Perform the following procedure when connecting a fuel tube connector (Quick Type B).
(1) Check for damage or foreign matter on the connected part of the fuel pipe.
(2) Align the fuel tube connector with the fuel pipe, and then push in the fuel tube connector until
the retainer makes a "click" sound.
HINT:
If the fuel pipe is difficult to push into the fuel tube connector, apply a light coat of engine oil to the
tip of the fuel pipe and reinsert it.
8/9
8/6/12
(3) After finishing the connection, check that the fuel pipe
and the fuel tube connector are securely connected by
pulling on them.

(a) Check that there are no fuel leaks anywhere on the fuel system after performing maintenance
.
9/9
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDZ03ZX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. FUEL FLOW DIAGRAM
*A
Direct Injection Side
*1
Throttle with Motor Body Assembly
*2
Fuel Injector Assembly (for Direct Injection)
*3
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper
*4
Cylinder
*5
*6
Solenoid Spill Valve
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDZ03ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
*7
Fuel Pump Assembly (for High Pressure)
*8
*9
Fuel Tank Assembly
*10 Jet Pump
Camshaft
Fuel Suction Tube Assembly with Pump and

Gauge
*11 Fuel Pressure Regulator
*12
*13 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly
*14 Fuel Pump Assembly
*15 Fuel Filter
*16 Fuel Tank Return Tube
*17 No. 2 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly
*a
to Fuel Injector Assembly (for Port

Injection)
*b
High Pressure Fuel Line
*c
Low Pressure Fuel Line
2/7
8/6/12
*A
Port Injection Side
*1
*2
Fuel Injector Assembly (for Port Injection)
*3
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper
*4
Fuel Delivery Pipe
*5
Fuel Tank Assembly
*6
Jet Pump
*7
Fuel Tank Return Tube
*8
No. 2 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly
*9
Fuel Suction Tube Assembly with Pump and Gauge *10 Fuel Pressure Regulator
*11 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly
*12 Fuel Pump Assembly
*13 Fuel Filter
*a
*b
Low Pressure Fuel Line
to Fuel Injector Assembly (for Direct Injection)
2. ELECTRICAL CONTROL DIAGRAM
3/7
8/6/12
*1
*2
*3
Fuel Pump Assembly (for High Pressure)
*4
Solenoid Spill Valve
*5
ECM
*6
Injector Driver
*7
Fuel Pump Control ECU Assembly
*8
Fuel Tank Assembly
4/7
8/6/12
*9
Fuel Pump Assembly
*10 Battery
*11 Camshaft
*12 Fuel Injector Assembly (for Direct Injection)
*13 Fuel Injector Assembly (for Port Injection)
3. HIGH PRESSURE SIDE FUEL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
5/7
8/6/12
4. LOW PRESSURE SIDE FUEL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
6/7
8/6/12
7/7
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QDY03WX
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QDY03WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QDX057X
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 1 FUEL TANK CUSHION
(a) Install 10 new No. 1 fuel tank cushions to the fuel tank assembly.
2. INSTALL NO. 2 FUEL TANK MAIN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the fuel filter to the No. 2 fuel tank main tube sub-assembly.
(b) Install the No. 2 fuel tank main tube sub-assembly to the fuel tank assembly.
3. INSTALL FUEL TANK TO FILLER PIPE HOSE

(a) Install the fuel tank to filler pipe hose to the fuel tank assembly with the clamp.
(b) Tighten the hose clamp bolt.
4. INSTALL FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the fuel tank cover.

HINT:
The fuel tank cover is used as a base when attaching the fuel
tank assembly, so inspect for any deformation, cracking, or
other damage. If any faults are found, replace with a new one.
(b) Hold the fuel tank assembly with an engine lifter.

(c) Temporarily install the fuel tank assembly to the body with the 2 No. 1 fuel tank bands and 4 bolts.
(d) Adjust the position of the fuel tank assembly to achieve

the required separation between the front edge of the
fuel tank cover and the holes used for fixing the parking
brake cable bracket in place.
Standard:
42 to 44 mm (1.6535 to 1.7323 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QDX057X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(e) Adjust the position of the fuel tank assembly to achieve

the required difference in clearance between the left and
right sides of the fuel tank assembly and the body.
Standard:
Below 2 mm (0.0787 in.)

5. INSTALL CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Connect the quick connector as indicated by the arrows in

6. CONNECT FUEL TANK VENT HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the clamp to install the tube.
(b) Connect the fuel tank vent hose sub-assembly with the clamp.
7. CONNECT FUEL TANK TO FILLER PIPE HOSE

(a) Connect the fuel tank to filler pipe hose to the fuel tank filler pipe sub-assembly with the clamp.
(b) Tighten the hose clamp bolt.
2/3
8/6/12

(a) Install the No. 3 fuel tank protector with a new nut and 2 clips.
12. INSTALL FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE

14. ADD FUEL
18. INSTALL REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QDZ052X
Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

6. REMOVE REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
8. REMOVE FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE
9. DRAIN FUEL
(a) Remove the nut, 2 clips and No. 3 fuel tank protector.

14. DISCONNECT FUEL TANK TO FILLER PIPE HOSE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QDZ052X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Loosen the hose clamp bolt and disconnect the fuel tank
to filler pipe hose.
15. DISCONNECT FUEL TANK VENT HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clamp and disconnect the fuel tank vent hose
sub-assembly.
(b) Disengage the clamp and separate the tube.
16. SEPARATE CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the quick connector as indicated by the arrows

17. REMOVE FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Place an engine lifter under the fuel tank assembly.
(b) Remove the 4 bolts, 2 No. 1 fuel tank bands and fuel tank assembly.
18. REMOVE FUEL TANK TO FILLER PIPE HOSE
(a) Loosen the hose clamp bolt and remove the fuel tank to
filler pipe hose from the fuel tank.
19. REMOVE NO. 2 FUEL TANK MAIN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the No. 2 fuel tank main tube sub-assembly from
(b) Remove the fuel filter from the No. 2 fuel tank main tube
sub-assembly.
20. REMOVE NO. 1 FUEL TANK CUSHION

3/4
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 10 No. 1 fuel tank cushions shown in the

illustration.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIO02JX
Title: FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIO02JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIN02UX
Title: FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Be careful not to drop or strike the injector driver.
The injector driver is grounded at the bolt and the nut. To ensure that it is grounded, clean all oil
and foreign matter from the installation areas of the injector driver and engine before installing the
injector driver.
(a) Install the injector driver with the 3 bolts.
(b) Connect the 4 connectors to the injector driver. Move the lock levers in the direction indicated by
the arrow to lock the 3 connectors.
*1
Lock Lever
Lock with Connector
Normal Connector
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIN02UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIN02UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VIP02SX
Title: FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Move the lock levers in the direction indicated by the arrow to release the 3 connector locks.
Disconnect the 4 connectors from the injector driver.
*1
Lock Lever
*a
Release
Lock with Connector
Normal Connector
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIP02SX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(b) Remove the 3 bolts and injector driver.

NOTICE:
Be careful not to drop or strike the injector driver.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VIP02SX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003VQK009X
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VQK009X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QE000JX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
(a) Check operation of the chamber assembly.
(1) Blow air into exhaust side. Check that air does not
come out of intake side.
*a
Exhaust Side
*b
Intake Side
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QE000JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QDX00RX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the air cleaner duct to the chamber assembly with a hose clamp.
2. INSTALL AIR CLEANER DUCT

(a) Install the 2 bolts and the air cleaner duct with the chamber.
(b) Install the air cleaner duct with a hose clamp.
3. INSTALL HOSE
(a) Engage the 2 clamps and install the hose.
(b) Insert the hose in until its flange contacts that of the grommet.
*1
Grommet
*a
Flange
NOTICE:
Do not convolute the grommet when insert the hose to the grommet.
Check the grommet from the vehicle interior side to verify that it is properly installed onto the
body.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QDX00RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(c) Connect the hose.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QDX00RX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QDZ00SX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE HOSE
(a) Disconnect the hose.

(c) Remove the grommet and the hose.
2. REMOVE AIR CLEANER DUCT
(a) Loosen the hose clamp.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QDZ00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the air cleaner duct with the
chamber assembly.
3. REMOVE CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and remove the chamber

assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QDZ00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000497C007X
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000497C007X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000497C007X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000497B007X
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Install 2 new gaskets.
(b) Install the exhaust manifold with the 6 new nuts.
NOTICE:
(c) Install new gasket to the exhaust manifold.

(d) Install 2 new nuts and the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly.
2. INSTALL FRONT EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY

4. INSTALL HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
5. INSTALL AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000497B007X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000497D007X
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
2. REMOVE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

4. REMOVE FRONT EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and disconnect the front exhaust pipe
sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the gasket.
(c) Remove the 6 nuts and the exhaust manifold.
(d) Remove the 2 gaskets.
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QD104LX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QD104LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QD005KX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT EXHAUST PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Rope up the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly to the front suspension crossmember.
HINT:
This operation is necessary in order to prevent the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly from falling off.
(b) Remove the SST.

SST: 09250-53011
2. INSTALL TAIL PIPE BAFFLE

(a) Press in the tail pipe baffle until the tail exhaust pipe assembly plate contact shown in the
illustration.
*1
Tail Exhaust Pipe Assembly
*2
Tail Pipe Baffle
*3
Plate
Contact area
(b) Install the 2 bolts and the 2 tail pipe baffles.

3. INSTALL TAIL EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the 4 cushion rubbers and the tail exhaust pipe assembly.
4. INSTALL CENTER EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the center exhaust pipe assembly with the cushion rubber.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QD005KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Install the 2 new gaskets and the center exhaust pipe assembly with the 2 new nuts and the 2
bolts.
NOTICE:

(a) Temporarily install the front exhaust pipe assembly to the bracket with the bolt.
(b) Install the new gaskets and the front exhaust pipe assembly to the center exhaust pipe assembly
with the 2 nuts.
NOTICE:
(c) Install the new gaskets and the front exhaust pipe assembly to the front exhaust pipe subassembly with the 2 new nuts.
NOTICE:
(d) Fully tighten the bolt.

(a) If gas is leaking, tighten the areas necessary to stop the leak. Replace the damaged parts as
necessary.
7. ADJUST SHIFT LEVER POSITION

(a) Install the 7 bolts and the No. 2 engine under cover.

(a) Install the No. 1 engine under cover with the 12 bolts and engage the 7 clips.
2/3
8/6/12
Bolt A
Bolt B
Bolt A - Torque: 30 Nm (306 kgfcm, 22ftlbf)

Bolt B - Torque: 7.5 Nm (76 kgfcm, 66inlbf)
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000QD205FX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Disengage the 7 clips and remove the 12 bolts and No. 1
engine under cover.
(a) Remove the 7 bolts and the No. 2 engine under cover.
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and disconnect the exhaust joint

pipe.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000QD205FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts.
(c) Remove the 2 compression springs and disconnect the center exhaust pipe assembly.
(d) Remove the bolt and the front exhaust pipe assembly.
(e) Remove the 2 gaskets.
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and 2 bolts, and disconnect the tail
(b) Remove the cushion rubber and the center exhaust pipe
assembly.
(c) Remove the gasket.

2/3
8/6/12
5. REMOVE TAIL EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 4 cushion rubbers and the tail exhaust pipe
assembly.
6. REMOVE TAIL PIPE BAFFLE

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 tail pipe baffles.
7. REMOVE FRONT EXHAUST PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Set the SST.

SST: 09250-53011
(b) Remove the rope that is tying the joint pipe to the front suspension cross member sub-assembly.
(c) Remove the exhaust joint pipe.
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q0T024X
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q0T024X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MU900WX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
(a) Remove the bolt and manifold absolute pressure sensor

from the intake manifold.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the manifold absolute pressure

sensor.
2. REMOVE PURGE VALVE
(a) Disconnect the No. 1 fuel vapor feed hose from the intake
manifold.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MU900WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(b) Remove the nut and purge valve.
3. REMOVE CAP (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the cap from the intake manifold.

(a) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly from the fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
If the connector and pipe are stuck, pinch the fuel delivery pipe by hand and push and pull the
connector to disconnect it
Do not allow any scratches or foreign matter on the parts when disconnecting them, as the No. 2
fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly joint contains the O-rings that seal the plug.
Do not use any tools to separate the pipe and connector.
Do not forcibly bend, twist or turn the nylon tube.
If the pipe and connector are stuck together, pinch the tube between your fingers and turn it
carefully to free it. Then, disconnect the main tube.
Protect the disconnected part by covering it with a plastic bag and tape after disconnecting the
main tube.
Check that the top hat cannot be pulled out.
2/4
8/6/12
*1
Retainer
*2
No. 2 Fuel Delivery Pipe Sub-assembly Connector
*3
Nylon Tube
*4
O-ring
*5
fuel delivery pipe
*6
Top Hat
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel delivery pipe from the
intake manifold.

HINT:
Use the same procedure described for the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2).
6. REMOVE NO. 2 FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 3 clamps and remove the No. 2 fuel

3/4
8/6/12
delivery pipe sub-assembly from the intake manifold.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VFL02UX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Install the 2 new gaskets to the intake manifold.
(b) Install the intake manifold with the 6 bolts.
(c) Engage the 2 clamps.
(d) Engage the 4 connectors and connect the wire harness.
(e) Connect the fuel pump connector.
(f) Engage the clamp and connect the engine wire harness.
(g) Engage the 5 clamps and connect the battery cable.
(h) Connect the purge valve connector.
(i) Connect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.

(a) Connect the ventilation hose.
3. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Engage the 3 claws and install the No. 1 engine cover sub-assembly.
5. CONNECT FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Connect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose.
(b) Install the bolt and connect the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.

10. CONNECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Install a new gasket to the intake manifold.
(b) Install the 4 bolts and throttle with motor body assembly to intake manifold.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VFL02UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

13. INSPECT FUEL PUMP OPERATION AND INSPECT FOR FUEL LEAK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VFL02UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MU600XX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL NO. 2 FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the

intake manifold with the 3 clamps.

(a) Apply a gasoline to the contact surfaces of the new O-ring on each fuel injector assembly.
(b) Install a new O-ring to each fuel injector assembly.
(c) Install the fuel injector assembly to the intake manifold with fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the fuel injector assembly or the O-ring.
Do not twist the O-ring.
(d) Install the fuel delivery pipe with the 2 bolts.

(e) Check that the fuel injectors rotate smoothly.

NOTICE:
If the fuel injectors do not rotate smoothly, the probable cause is incorrect installation of the
O-rings. Replace the O-rings.
(f) Position the fuel injector connector outward.

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MU600XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
Use the same procedure described for the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2).
4. INSTALL CAP (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Install the clamp and cap to the intake manifold.
5. INSTALL PURGE VALVE
(a) Connect the No.1 fuel vapor feed hose to the intake
manifold.
(b) Install the nut and purge valve to the intake manifold.
6. INSTALL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

(a) Apply engine oil to the contact surfaces of the new O-ring on manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(b) Install a new O-ring to the manifold absolute pressure

2/3
8/6/12
sensor.
(c) Install the manifold absolute pressure sensor to the

intake manifold with the bolt.
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q0U02UX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION AND INSPECT FOR FUEL LEAK
4. REMOVE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and the throttle with motor body
assembly.
(b) Remove the gasket.

9. DISCONNECT FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the fuel delivery pipe
sub-assembly.
(b) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose and move the
fuel delivery pipe toward the front of the vehicle.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q0U02UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
(a) Disengage the 3 craws and remove the No. 1 engine

cover sub-assembly.
HINT:
Disengage the 3 craws in the order shown in the illustration.
11. DISCONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Manual Transmission)

12. DISCONNECT VENTILATION HOSE
(a) Disconnect the ventilation hose.

connector.
2/5
8/6/12
(c) Disengage the 5 clamps and disconnect the battery cable.
(d) Disengage the clamp and disconnect the engine wire

harness.
(e) Disengage the 2 clamps and disconnect the 4 connectors.

3/5
8/6/12
*a
Bank 2 Side
*b
Bank 1 Side
(f) Disconnect the fuel pump connector.
(g) Remove the 6 bolts, intake manifold and 2 gaskets.

*a
Bank 2 Side
*b
Bank 1 Side
4/5
8/6/12
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Q2601JX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT INTAKE SYSTEM
(a) Check that there is no air suction at the points shown in the illustration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Q2601JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
*A
Check points
*B
Forward
NOTICE:
Disengagement, cracks or damage in the intake component may cause an idling defect.
2. INSPECT AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBY
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Disengage the 2 clips.
(b) Lift the rear air cleaner case, and disengage the 2 claws.
(c) Lift the rear air cleaner case as shown in the illustration,
and remove the air cleaner filter element sub-assembly.
(d) Check that the air cleaner element is moderately clean.

Standard air cleaner element condition:
Not too dirty.
NOTICE:
If the element is too dirty, replace the air cleaner filter element.
(e) Use compressed air if the air cleaner filter element needs to be cleaned.
3/4
8/6/12
(f) Lift the rear air cleaner case, and install the air cleaner filter element sub-assembly.
(g) Engage the 2 claws.
(h) Engage the 2 clips.

NOTICE:
Securely engage the lower side claws of the air cleaner
case.
Check if the right and left locating lugs of the air cleaner
case do not get into the opposite air cleaner case.
*1
Locating Lugs
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VDM01FX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VDM01FX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PE701HX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. INTAKE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM VALVE DIAGRAM
*1
ECM
*2
Mass Air Flow Meter
*3
*4
Air Cleaner
*5
Crankshaft Position Sensor
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PE701HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PE701HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: LUBRICATION SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T5102GX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: LUBRICATION SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK ENGINE OIL QUALITY
(a) Check the oil for deterioration, water contamination, discoloring or thinning.
If the quality is visibly poor, replace the oil and oil filter element.
2. CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL

(a) Warm up and stop the engine, and then wait for 5 minutes. The oil level should be between the
dipstick's low level and full level marks.
If low, check for leakage and add oil up to the full level mark.
NOTICE:
Do not add engine oil above the full level mark.
HINT:
Engine oil is always being consumed when driving the vehicle.
Generally, engine oil consumed at a rate of 1 liter every 3000 km, or 1 US qts. every 2000 miles.
In the following situations, oil consumption may increase and it may be necessary to add oil between
maintenances.
The engine is new.

The oil quality is poor or the viscosity is inappropriate.
The engine speed or load is high, the vehicle is towing something or the vehicle is being
accelerated and decelerated frequently.
The engine is idled for a very long time or the vehicle is frequently driven in traffic.
3. CHECK OIL PRESSURE

(a) Remove the oil pressure switch assembly
(b) Install the oil pressure gauge with adapter.
(c) Install the air cleaner assembly
(d) Warm up the engine.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T5102GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: LUBRICATION SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
(e) Check the oil pressure under the following conditions.

Specification Oil Pressure:
ITEM
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7.3 psi) or more
Idle
80C (176F)
6000 rpm
(f) Remove the air cleaner assembly
OIL PRESSURE
(g) Remove the oil pressure gauge with adapter.

(h) Install the oil pressure switch assembly
(i) Inspect for engine oil leaks.
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL AND OIL FILTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T50021X
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL AND OIL FILTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T50021X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL AND OIL FILTER: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T4Z02CX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL AND OIL FILTER: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
Prolonged and repeated contact with engine oil will result in removal of natural oils from the skin,
leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially
harmful contaminants which may cause skin cancer.
Precautions should be taken when replacing engine oil to minimize the risk of your skin making
contact with used engine oil. Protective clothing and gloves that cannot be penetrated by oil
should be worn. The skin should be washed with soap and water, or use waterless hand cleaner,
to remove any used engine oil thoroughly. Do not use gasoline, thinners, or solvents.
In order to preserve the environment, used oil and used oil filters must be disposed of at
designated disposal sites.
1. DRAIN ENGINE OIL

(a) Remove the oil filler cap.
(b) Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the oil into a container.
(c) Clean and install the oil pan drain plug with a new oil pan drain plug gasket.

(a) Remove any foreign matter and clean the installation
surface of the engine.
(b) Using SST, remove the oil filter sub-assembly.
SST: 09228-22020
(a) Using a 24mm deep socket wrench, remove the oil filter
union.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4Z02CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL AND OIL FILTER: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
(a) Using a 24mm deep socket wrench, install the oil filter union.

(a) Remove any foreign matter and clean the inside and installation surface of the engine.
(b) Apply a light layer of engine oil to the seal rubber of a new oil filter sub-assembly.
(c) Tighten the oil filter sub-assembly by hand.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the seal rubber of the oil filter sub-assembly.
(d) Using SST, tighten the oil filter sub-assembly.

SST: 09228-22020
6. ADD ENGINE OIL

(a) Add new engine oil and install the oil filler cap.
Standard Oil Grade:
OIL GRADE
OIL
VISCOSITY
(SAE)
API grade SL "energy-conserving", SM "energy-conserving", SN "resourceconserving" or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
0W20
5W30
Standard Capacity:
ITEM
CAPACITY
Drain and refill with oil filter change
Drain and refill without oil filter change
Dry fill
7. INSPECT FOR ENGINE OIL LEAK

(a) Start the engine. Make sure that there are no oil leaks from the connection point of the oil filter
sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T4Z02CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000364101CX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000364101CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZA5074X
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads of the engine oil
*1
Adhesive
Adhesive:
equivalent
(b) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil pressure switch assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not start the engine for at least 1 hour after installation.
(c) Connect the engine oil pressure switch connector.

4. INSPECT FOR OIL LEAK
(b) Check for engine oil leaks from the engine oil pressure switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZA5074X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZA8072X
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Disconnect the engine oil pressure switch connector.
(b) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, remove the engine

*1
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZA8072X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T56024X
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
5/6
8/6/12
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000591J000X
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY

*1
4. REMOVE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

oil temperature sensor.
*1

(a) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000591J000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12



(a) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve.
valve.
2/4
8/6/12
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
valve.
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
3/4
8/6/12
valve.
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
valve.
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T5302TX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the 4 O-rings.
(b) Remove any old packing material remaining on the sealing surfaces before applying seal packing.
(c) Apply seal packing in a continuous line to the engine unit as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing Black, Three Bond 1217G or equivalent
(d) Apply seal packing in a line to the timing chain cover as shown in the following illustration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T5302TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12
*a
Range A
*b
Boss (5 locations)
*c
Range B
*d
Other than ranges A and B
*e
3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in.)
*f
2 mm (0.079 in.)
*g
12 mm (0.472 in.)
*h
2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
*i
0.5 mm (0.020 in.)
Seal packing:
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing 1217G or equivalent
NOTICE:
If the contact surfaces are wet, wipe them with an oil-free cloth before applying seal packing.
Install the chain cover within 3 minutes and tighten the bolts within 10 minutes after applying seal
packing.
Do not add engine oil for at least 30 minutes after installing.
Do not start the engine for at least 30 minutes after installing.
(e) Temporarily tighten the timing chain cover with the 32 bolts.
(f) Fully tighten the 32 bolts shown in the illustration.
2/6
8/6/12
Bolt A
Bolt B
Bolt C
Bolt D
for bolt A and B - Torque: 10 Nm (102 kgfcm, 7ftlbf)

for bolt C and D - Torque: 25 Nm (255 kgfcm, 18ftlbf)
Bolt Length:
ITEM
LENGTH
ITEM
LENGTH
Bolt A
20 mm (0.787 in.)
Bolt B
25 mm (0.984 in.)
Bolt C
60 mm (2.362 in.)
Bolt D
50 mm (1.969 in.)

(a) Install the washer plate to the No. 1 idler pulley subassembly as shown in the illustration.
3/6
8/6/12
*a
Protrusion
(b) Install the washer plate and No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly with the bolt.
(c) Install the washer plate to the No. 1 idler pulley subassembly as shown in the illustration.
*a
Protrusion
(d) Install the washer plate and No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly with the bolt.

(a) Temporarily install the V-ribbed belt tensioner with the 5
bolts.
(b) Tighten the 4 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
(a) Install the washer plate to the No. 2 idler pulley subassembly as shown in the illustration.
4/6
8/6/12
*a
Protrusion
(b) Install the washer plate and No. 2 idler pulley sub-assembly with the bolt.

(a) Install a new O-ring to the oil level dipstick guide.
(b) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(c) Install the oil level dipstick guide with the bolt.
(d) Install the oil level dipstick sub-assembly.

(a) Connect the camshaft position sensor connector and camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
(b) Engage the wire harness clamp.
(c) Connect the engine oil pressure switch connector and engine oil temperature sensor connector.
(d) Connect the camshaft position sensor connector and camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
(e) Connect the 2 camshaft position sensor connectors and camshaft timing oil control valve
connector.
(f) Connect the camshaft position sensor connector.
(g) Install the wire harness bracket with the bolt.
(h) Engage the wire harness clamp.
(i) Install the 2 wire harness brackets with the 2 bolts.

10. INSTALL WATER PUMP PULLEY
11. CONNECT RADIATOR OUTLET HOSE
5/6
8/6/12
13. INSTALL WATER FILLER SUB-ASSEMBLY

14. INSTALL RADIATOR RESERVE TANK ASSEMBLY

18. ADD ENGINE OIL
19. INSPECT FOR ENGINE OIL LEAK
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000591K000X
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
valve.
(c) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve with the 2
bolts.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the O-ring is not damaged or does not
jump out of position during installation.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000591K000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
valve.
bolts.
NOTICE:
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
2/6
8/6/12
valve.
bolts.
NOTICE:
*1
O-ring
*2
Back-up Ring
valve.
bolts.
NOTICE:

3/6
8/6/12







4/6
8/6/12
9. INSTALL ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(a) Install a new gasket to the engine oil temperature sensor.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil

temperature sensor to the cylinder head sub-assembly.
*1


(a) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads of the engine oil
*1
Adhesive
Adhesive:
equivalent
(b) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil

*1

NOTICE:
Do not start the engine for at least 1 hour after
installation.
5/6
8/6/12

6/6
8/6/12
FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000T5702RX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

5. REMOVE RADIATOR RESERVE TANK ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE WATER FILLER SUB-ASSEMBLY
8. DISCONNECT RADIATOR OUTLET HOSE

9. DRAIN ENGINE OIL
10. REMOVE WATER PUMP PULLEY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the 2 wire harness clamp brackets from the engine assembly.
(b) Remove the bolts and disconnect the wire harness clamp
bracket from the engine assembly.
(c) Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000T5702RX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12
(d) Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector and 2

camshaft timing oil control valve connectors.
(e) Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector and

camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
(f) Disconnect the engine oil pressure switch connector and engine oil temperature connector.
(g) Disengage the clamp.
(h) Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector and

camshaft timing oil control valve connector.

(a) Remove the oil level dipstick sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the bolt and oil level dipstick guide.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the oil level dipstick guide.
2/5
8/6/12
(a) Remove the bolt, washer plate and No. 2 idler pulley subassembly.
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and V-ribbed belt tensioner

assembly.
(a) Remove the bolt, washer plate and No. 1 idler pulley subassembly.
(b) Remove the bolt, washer plate and No. 1 idler pulley subassembly.

3/5
8/6/12
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective tape, remove the timing chain or belt
cover sub-assembly by prying between the timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly and cylinder
head or cylinder block.
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the contact surfaces of the cylinder head, cylinder block or chain
4/5
8/6/12
cover.
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003VP800LX
Title: FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VP800LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VP800LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003VP700NX
Title: FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
All combinations of all

terminals
LOCK
10 k or higher
2 (AM2) - 3 (ACC)
ACC
Below 1
2 (AM2) - 3 (ACC) - 4
(IG1)
ON
Below 1
START
Below 1
6 (IG2) - 7 (AM1)
1 (ST1) - 2 (AM2) - 4
(IG1)
6 (IG2) - 7 (AM1) - 8
(ST2)
*a

(Ignition or starter Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the ignition or
starter switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VP700NX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003VP600UX
Title: FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 2 screws, and install the ignition or starter switch.
2. INSTALL UPPER STEERING COLUMN COVER

3. INSTALL LOWER STEERING COLUMN COVER
5. INSTALL UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL METER ORNAMENT
6. INSTALL METER HOOD SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. INSTALL CENTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VP600UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003VP900UX
Title: FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CENTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE METER HOOD SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL METER ORNAMENT
6. REMOVE LOWER STEERING COLUMN COVER
7. REMOVE UPPER STEERING COLUMN COVER
8. REMOVE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 2 screws, and remove the ignition switch.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VP900UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: Key Cannot be Removed or Inserted (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002U5203MX
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: Key Cannot be Removed or Inserted (2013 FR-S)
Key Cannot be Removed or Inserted
DESCRIPTION
When an ACC signal and a P signal is input, the control unit relay assembly outputs a signal to the key
inter lock solenoid.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to System Diagram
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ACC VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the D42 control unit relay assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D42-6 (ACC) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002U5203MX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
(to control unit relay assembly)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
2.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY - BODY
GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D42 control unit relay assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D42-1 (E) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
INSPECT P SWITCH (FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT LEVER HOUSING)
(a) Inspect the P switch (floor shift shift lever housing)
NG
REPLACE P SWITCH (FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT

LEVER HOUSING)
OK
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY - P

2/5
8/6/12
4.
SWITCH (FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT LEVER HOUSING)

(b) Disconnect the D28 P switch (floor shift shift lever housing) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D42-4 (P) - D28-1 (P)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
D42-4 (P) or D28-1 (P) - Body ground
Always
NG
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher

CONNECTOR
OK
5.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (P SWITCH (FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT LEVER
HOUSING) - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D28 P switch (floor shift shift lever housing) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D28-3 (E) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3/5
8/6/12
6.
INSPECT KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID
(a) Disconnect the D60 key inter lock solenoid connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
13.05 to 15.95
*a

(Key Inter Lock Solenoid)
NG
REPLACE KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID
OK
7.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY - KEY
INTER LOCK SOLENOID)

(b) Disconnect the D60 key inter lock solenoid connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D42-5 (KLS+) - D60-2
Always
Below 1
4/5
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D42-5 (KLS+) or D60-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID - BODY
GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D60 key inter lock solenoid connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D60-1 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000057TO000X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK KEY INTER LOCK OPERATION
(b) Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to any position other than P.
(c) Check that the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK.
(d) Move the shift lever to P, turn the ignition key to LOCK and check that the ignition key can be
removed. If the operation cannot be done as specified, inspect the key inter lock circuit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000057TO000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000BNP00OX
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000BNP00OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003N4Y00WX
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

Key Inter Lock System
SYMPTOM
Key cannot be removed or inserted
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Key inter lock circuit
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N4Y00WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003N95014X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000048MW007X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000048MW007X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000048MW007X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000048QE007X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the control unit relay with the bolt.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000048QE007X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000048QF007X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. REMOVE CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the control unit relay assembly connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and control unit relay assembly unit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000048QF007X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001FFP03HX
Title: FA20 STARTING: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT ST RELAY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Battery voltage not applied to

terminals 1 and 2
93.8 to 136.4
Measurement temperature : 20 k
C
1-2
3-5

terminals 1 and 2
10 k or
higher
3-5
Battery voltage applied to

terminals 1 and 2
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the starter relay.
2. REMOVE INHIBITOR RELAY

table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION

terminals 1 and 2
93.8 to 136.4
Measurement temperature : 20 k
C
3-5

terminals 1 and 2
10 k or
higher
3-5

terminals 1 and 2
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the starter relay.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001FFP03HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001FFP03HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UBV007X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UBV007X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000EGY01TX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the nut and disconnect the lead wire from
terminal C.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the magnet starter switch

assembly from the starter drive housing assembly.
2. REMOVE STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a "TORX" socket wrench T25, remove the 2 through

bolts.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000EGY01TX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(b) Remove the starter yoke assembly and starter cover from
the starter drive housing assembly.
3. REMOVE STARTER COVER
(a) Remove the 2 screws.
(b) Remove the starter cover from the starter yoke

assembly.
*1
Starter Yoke Assembly
*2
Starter Cover
NOTICE:
Hold the lead wire and remove the starter cover.
(c) Remove the dust starter protect from the starter yoke assembly.
4. REMOVE STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a screwdriver, disengage the spring from the bush.
2/4
8/6/12
(b) Disconnect the 4 brush from the starter brush holder assembly.
(c) Remove the starter brush holder assembly.
5. REMOVE STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY
(a) Pull out the starter armature assembly from the starter
yoke assembly.
*1
*2
Starter Armature Assembly
6. REMOVE STARTER ARMATURE PLATE

(a) Remove the starter armature plate from the starter yoke
assembly and starter drive housing assembly.
*1
Starter Drive Housing Assembly
*2
*3
Starter Armature Plate
7. REMOVE RUBBER SEAL
(a) Remove the rubber seal from the starter drive housing
assembly.
*1
Rubber Seal
8. REMOVE STARTER PLANETARY GEAR
3/4
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 3 starter planetary gears from the starter

clutch sub-assembly.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000162401EX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT STARTER ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
As a large electric current passes through the cable during this inspection, a thick cable must
be used. If not, the cable may become hot and cause injury.
NOTICE:
The following tests must each be performed within 3 to 5 seconds to prevent the coil from
burning out.
(a) Mount the starter in a vise between aluminum plates.

(b) Perform a pull-in test.
(1) Remove the nut, and then disconnect the lead wire from terminal C.
(2) Connect the battery to the starter as shown in the
illustration. Check that the clutch pinion gear extends.
*1
Body
*2
Terminal 50
*3
Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear does not move, inspect the
magnet starter switch assembly. If the magnet starter
switch assembly is not as specified, replace it.
(c) Perform a holding test.

(1) Disconnect the negative (-) terminal lead from terminal
C while the conditions specified in the pull-in test
above are maintained. Check that the pinion gear
remains out.
*1
Body
*2
Terminal 50
*3
Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear returns inward, inspect the
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000162401EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12
(d) Inspect the clutch pinion gear return.

(1) Disconnect the negative (-) terminal lead from the
starter body. Check that the clutch pinion gear returns
inward.
*1
Body
*2
Terminal 50
*3
Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear does not return inward,
inspect the magnet starter switch assembly. If the
magnet starter switch assembly is not as specified,
replace it.
(e) Perform an operation test without load.

(1) Connect the lead wire to terminal C with the nut.
(2) Connect the battery and an ammeter to the starter as
*1
Terminal 50
*2
Terminal 30
*3
Ammeter
(3) Check that the starter rotates smoothly and steadily while the clutch pinion gear is extended.
Then measure the current.
Standard Current:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Battery positive terminal - Terminal 30 - Terminal 50
11.5 V
Below 90 A
If the result is not as specified, inspect the starter assembly.

HINT:
Inspect the starter armature assembly, starter commutator end frame assembly and magnet starter
switch assembly. If there is a malfunction, replace the part and perform again this test.
2. INSPECT STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY

2/6
8/6/12
(a) Check the commutator for dirt and/or burns on the surface.
If the surface is dirty or burnt, correct it with sandpaper (No. 400) or a lathe. If necessary, replace
the starter armature assembly.
(b) Inspect the commutator for an open circuit.
the table below.
*1
Segment
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Segment - Segment
Always
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the starter

armature assembly.
(c) Inspect the commutator for short circuits.
the table below.
*1
Segment
*2
Coil Core
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Segment - Coil core
Always
10 k or higher

armature assembly.
(d) Check the commutator for signs of seizure or stepped wear caused by roughness of the surface. If
there is light wear, use sandpaper to repair.
(e) Check for runout on the commutator. If excessive, replace
the armature.
Standard runout:
0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
Maximum runout:
3/6
8/6/12
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)

*1
Dial Gauge
*2
V-block

armature assembly.
(f) Using vernier caliper, measure the commutator diameter.

*a
Diameter
Standard diameter:
29 mm (1.1417 in.)
Minimum diameter:
28 mm (1.1024 in.)
If the diameter is less than the minimum, replace the
starter armature assembly.
(g) Using vernier caliper, measure the under cut depth of the
segment. If it is not within the standard, replace the
starter armature assembly.
Standard depth:
0.7 mm (0.0276 in.)
Minimum depth:
0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)
3. INSPECT STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the brush length.
*a
Length
Standard length:
14.4 mm (0.5669 in.)
Minimum length:
9.0 mm (0.3543 in.)
If the length is less than the minimum, replace the starter
brush holder assembly.
4/6
8/6/12
(b) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
Below 1
A-B
A-C
B-D
C -D
A-D
B-C
If the result is not as specified, replace the starter brush

holder assembly.
4. INSPECT MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the plunger.
(1) Push in the plunger and check that it returns quickly to

it is original position.
If necessary, replace the magnet starter switch
assembly.
(b) Inspect the pull-in coil.

the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Terminal C - Terminal 50
Always
Below 1
*1
Terminal C
*2
Terminal 50
If the result is not as specified, replace the magnet
5/6
8/6/12
(c) Inspect the holding coil.

the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
Terminal 50 - Switch
body

Always
Below 2
*1
Terminal 50
*2
Switch Body
If the result is not as specified, replace the magnet
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000V3F029X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Temporarily install the upper side bolts.
(b) Install the lower side bolt.
(d) Using SST, install the upper side bolt and starter
assembly.
SST: 09249-37010
HINT:
Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 260 mm
(10.2 in.). When using a torque wrench with a fulcrum
length that is not 260 mm (10.24 in.), calculate the torque
specification for the torque wrench and SST based on the
"without SST" torque specification
.
Make sure SST and the wrench are connected in a straight
line.
(e) Engage the wire clamp.
(f) Connect the starter connector.
(g) Connect the starter wire with the nut.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000V3F029X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000EH001TX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL STARTER PLANETARY GEAR
(a) Apply high-temperature grease to the planetary gears and pins of the planetary shaft.
(b) Install the 3 starter planetary gears.
High-temperature Grease
2. INSTALL RUBBER SEAL
(a) Install the rubber seal to the starter drive housing

assembly.
*1
Rubber Seal
3. INSTALL STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the starter armature assembly to the starter yoke

assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000EH001TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12
*1
*2
Starter Armature Assembly
4. INSTALL STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 4 brushes and 4 brush springs.
(b) Install the starter brush holder assembly to the starter

armature assembly. Push the 4 brushs.
(c) Insert the grommet between the positive (+) motor read
wire and the negative (-) brush holder plate.
*1
Grommet
*2
Negative (-) Brush Holder Plate
*3
Positive (+) Motor Read Wire
5. INSTALL STARTER COVER

(a) Install the dust starter protector to the starter yoke assembly.
2/5
8/6/12
(b) Align the starter brush holder assembly read wire rubber
with the groove of the starter cover.
(c) Install the starter cover to the starter brush holder

assembly with 2 screws.
- Torque: 1.5 Nm (15 kgfcm, 13inlbf)
6. INSTALL STARTER ARMATURE PLATE

(a) Align the claw of the starter yoke assembly with the groove the starter armature plate.
(b) Install the starter armature plate to the starter yoke assembly.
*1
Claw
*2
Groove
7. INSTALL STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY
(a) Align the claw of the starter yoke assembly with the
groove inside the starter drive housing assembly.
Install the starter yoke assembly together with the
3/5
8/6/12
starter armature assembly to the starter drive housing

assembly.
*1
Claw
*2
Groove
(b) Using a "TORX" socket wrench T25, install the 2 through

bolts.
8. INSTALL MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply high-temperature grease to the plunger and hook as shown in the illustration.
High-temperature grease
(b) Hook the plunger and hook of the magnet starter switch
assembly to the lever of the starter drive housing
assembly.
4/5
8/6/12
*1
Plunger and Hook
*2
Lever
(c) Install the magnet starter switch assembly with the 2

screws.
(d) Connect the lead wire to terminal C with the nut.

5/5
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000V3I029X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Remove the nut and disconnect the starter wire.
(b) Disconnect the starter connector.
(c) Disengage the wire clamp.
(d) Remove the upper side bolt.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000V3I029X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Automatic Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(e) Remove the bolt.
(f) Remove the lower side bolt, battery cable stay and starter
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000V3I029X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UBV00BX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UBV00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000EGY023X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the nut and disconnect the lead wire from
terminal C.
(b) Remove the 2 screws and the magnet starter switch

assembly from the starter drive housing assembly.
2. REMOVE STARTER COVER
(a) Remove the 2 through bolts and 2 screws, and remove

the starter cover.
3. REMOVE STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000EGY023X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Remove the starter brush holder assembly.

HINT:
Hold the brush with your fingers so that the brush spring does
not come flying out.
4. REMOVE STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the starter yoke assembly and starter armature

assembly together from the starter drive housing
assembly.
5. REMOVE STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY
(a) Pull out the starter armature assembly from the starter
yoke assembly.
6. REMOVE STARTER HOUSING RUBBER

(a) Remove the starter housing rubber, seal rubber and plate
from the starter drive housing assembly.
*1
Starter Housing Rubber
*2
Plate
*3
Seal Rubber
7. REMOVE STARTER PLANETARY GEAR

2/4
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 3 starter planetary gears from the starter

clutch sub-assembly.
8. REMOVE STARTER CLUTCH SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the starter clutch sub-assembly together with

the drive lever set pin from the starter drive housing
assembly.
(b) Using a 14 mm deep socket wrench, remove the stopper

from snap ring.
*1
*2
Stopper
*3
Snap Ring
(c) Using snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring and stopper.
3/4
8/6/12
(d) Pull out the over running clutch from the shaft.
(e) Remove the internal gear assembly from the shaft.

*1
Internal Gear Assembly
*2
Shaft
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000162401OX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT STARTER ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
As a large electric current passes through the cable during this inspection, a thick cable must
be used. If not, the cable may become hot and cause injury.
NOTICE:
The following tests must each be performed within 3 to 5 seconds to prevent the coil from
burning out.
(a) Mount the starter in a vise between aluminum plates.

(b) Perform a pull-in test.
(1) Remove the nut, and then disconnect the lead wire from terminal C.
(2) Connect the battery to the starter as shown in the
illustration. Check that the clutch pinion gear extends.
*1
Body
*2
Terminal 50
*3
Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear does not move, inspect the
(c) Perform a holding test.

(1) Disconnect the negative (-) terminal lead from terminal
C while the conditions specified in the pull-in test
above are maintained. Check that the pinion gear
remains out.
*1
Body
*2
Terminal 50
*3
Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear returns inward, inspect the
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000162401OX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
(d) Inspect the clutch pinion gear return.

(1) Disconnect the negative (-) terminal lead from the
starter body. Check that the clutch pinion gear returns
inward.
*1
Body
*2
Terminal 50
*3
Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear does not return inward,
inspect the magnet starter switch assembly. If the
magnet starter switch assembly is not as specified,
replace it.
(e) Perform an operation test without load.

(1) Connect the lead wire to terminal C with the nut.
(2) Connect the battery and an ammeter to the starter as
*1
Terminal 50
*2
Terminal 30
*3
Ammeter
(3) Check that the starter rotates smoothly and steadily while the clutch pinion gear is extended.
Then measure the current.
Standard Current:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Battery positive terminal - Terminal 30 - Terminal 50
11.5 V
Below 90 A
If the result is not as specified, inspect the starter assembly.

HINT:
Inspect the starter armature assembly, starter commutator end frame assembly and magnet starter
switch assembly. If there is a malfunction, replace the part and perform again this test.
2. INSPECT STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY

2/6
8/6/12
(a) Check the commutator for signs of seizure or stepped wear caused by roughness of the surface. If
there is light wear, use sandpaper to repair.
(b) Check for runout on the commutator. If excessive, replace
the armature.
Standard runout:
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Maximum runout:
0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
*1
Dial Gauge
*2
V-block
(c) Check the depth of the segment mold. If it is not within

the standard, replace the armature.
Standard depth:
0.50 mm (0.020 in.)
*1
Mold
*2
Segment
*3
Depth of Mold
(d) Place the armature on the growler tester to check for

short circuits. While slowly turning the armature, support
the steel sheet for the armature core. If the circuit of the
armature is shorted, the steel sheet will vibrate, causing it
to move towards the core. When the steel sheet has
moved or vibrated, replace the armature.
*1
Steel Sheet
*2
Growler Tester
3/6
8/6/12
(e) Touch the probe of one side to the commutator segment,

and the other probe to the shaft. If there is continuity,
replace the armature.
3. INSPECT STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY

(a) Make sure that the pole is set at the predetermined position.
4. INSPECT STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY

(a) Visually check the brush. If there is any abnormal wear or cracks, replace the brush.
(b) Measure the length of the brush. If it exceeds the service
limits, replace the brush.
Standard length:
12.3 mm (0.484 in.)
Minimum length:
7.0 mm (0.276 in.)
*1
Service Limit Line
*2
Brush
(c) Check that the brush moves smoothly in the brush holder.
(d) Measure the brush spring force with a spring scale. Replace the brush holder if below the service
limit.
Standard brush spring force:
15.9 to 19.5 N (1.6 to 2.0 kgf, 3.6 to 4.4 lbf)
Minimum brush spring force:
2.5 N (0.3 kgf, 0.6 lbf)
5. INSPECT STARTER CLUTCH SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the gear teeth on the planetary gear, internal gear and starter clutch for wear or damage.
If any of the gears is damaged, replace the starter center bearing clutch sub-assembly.
(b) Check the starter clutch pinion gear.
(1) Hold the starter clutch, rotate the pinion gear

clockwise and check that it turns freely. Try to rotate
the pinion gear counterclockwise and check that it
4/6
8/6/12
locks.
*a
Free
*b
Lock
If necessary, replace the starter clutch sub-assembly.
6. INSPECT MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Check that there is continuity between terminals 50 and
C, and between terminal 50 and ground. Also, check to be
sure there is no continuity between terminal C and 30.
TESTER CONNECTION
Terminal 50 - Switch
body

Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
1 M or higher
*1
Terminal 50
*2
Terminal C
*3
Terminal 30
(b) Using a lead wire, connect the switch assembly terminal 50 to the positive terminal of the battery,
and the starter body to the ground terminal of the battery. The pinion should be forced to be
pushed out on the shaft.
HINT:
With the pinion forced to be pushed out on the shaft, the starter motor can sometimes rotate because
the current flows, through pull-in coil, to motor. This is not a problem.
(c) Disconnect the connector from terminal C. Then, using a

lead wire, connect the positive terminal of the battery and
terminal C, and ground terminal to starter body. In this
test set up, the pinion should return to its original position
even when it is pulled out with a screwdriver.
5/6
8/6/12
*1
Terminal 50
*2
Terminal C
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000V3F02LX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Temporarily install the upper side bolts.
(b) Install the lower side bolt.
(d) Using SST, install the upper side bolt and starter
assembly.
SST: 09249-37010
HINT:
(10.2 in.). When using a torque wrench with a fulcrum
length that is not 260 mm (10.24 in.), calculate the torque
specification for the torque wrench and SST based on the
"without SST" torque specification
.
Make sure SST and the wrench are connected in a straight
line.
(e) Engage the wire clamp.
(f) Connect the starter connector.
(g) Connect the starter wire with the nut.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000V3F02LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000EH0023X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL STARTER CLUTCH SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply high-temperature grease to the shaft as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the internal gear to the shaft.
(c) Apply high-temperature grease to the shaft as shown in the illustration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000EH0023X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12
(d) Install the over running clutch to the shaft.
(e) Install the stopper to the shaft.

Using snap ring pliers, install the snap ring.
(f) Using a press, press the snap ring into the stopper.
*1
Snap Ring
*2
Stopper
2/5
8/6/12
(g) Install the starter clutch sub-assembly together with the

drive lever set pin to the starter drive housing assembly.
2. INSTALL STARTER PLANETARY GEAR
(a) Apply high-temperature grease to the planetary gears and pins of the planetary shaft.
(b) Install the 3 starter planetary gears.
3. INSTALL STARTER HOUSING RUBBER

(a) Install the starter housing rubber, seal rubber and plate
to the starter drive housing assembly.
*1
Starter Housing Rubber
*2
Plate
*3
Seal Rubber
4. INSTALL STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY
3/5
8/6/12
(a) Install the starter armature assembly to the starter yoke

assembly.
5. INSTALL STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY
(a) Align the claw of the starter yoke assembly with the
groove inside the starter drive housing assembly.
*1
Claw
*2
Groove
(b) Install the starter yoke assembly together with the

starter armature assembly to the starter drive housing
assembly.
6. INSTALL STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install a 24 mm socket to the starter brush holder

assembly.
(b) Install the starter brush holder assembly to the starter armature assembly.
7. INSTALL STARTER COVER

4/5
8/6/12
(a) Install the starter cover with 2 screws and 2 bolts.

Screw - Torque: 1.4 Nm (14 kgfcm, 12inlbf)
8. INSTALL MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the magnet starter switch assembly with the 2

screws.
(b) Connect the lead wire to terminal C with the nut.

5/5
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000V3I02LX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Remove the nut and disconnect the starter wire.
(b) Disconnect the starter connector.
(c) Disengage the wire clamp.
(d) Remove the upper side bolt.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000V3I02LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTER (for Manual Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(e) Remove the bolt.
(f) Remove the lower side bolt, battery cable stay and starter
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000V3I02LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000048MU006X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000048MU006X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 STARTING: STARTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000048MV006X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000048MV006X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F8D01HX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use these procedures to troubleshoot the combination meter.
*: Use the Techstream.
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*
(a) Use a Techstream to check if the CAN communication system is functioning normally.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN DTC is not output
CAN DTC is output
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F8D01HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
4.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Fault is not listed in Problem Symptoms Table
Fault is listed in Problem Symptoms Table
Go to step 6
5.
OVERALL ANALYSIS AND TROUBLESHOOTING*
(a) Data List/Active Test

(b) Terminals of ECU
.
.
(c) On-vehicle Inspection
NEXT
6.
ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
7.
CONFIRMATION TEST*
2/3
8/6/12
NEXT
END
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDH0K9X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECM (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECM
HINT:
The standard voltage between each pair of the ECM terminals is shown in the table below. The
appropriate conditions for checking each pair of the terminals are also indicated. The result of
checks should be compared with the standard voltage for that pair of the terminals, and displayed in
the "Specified Condition" column. The illustration above can be used as a reference to identify the
ECM terminal locations.
TERMINAL
NO.
(SYMBOL)
A33-1 (+B2) A36-4 (E01)
WIRING
COLOR
TERMINAL DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
V - B-L
Power source of ECM
Ignition switch ON
12 to 14 V
Always
10 to 13 V
11 to 14 V
0 to 1 V
0 to 1 V
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON with A/C on
0 to 1 V
Idling with A/C off
12 to 14 V
A33-2 (BATT)
Battery(for measuring battery
W - B-L
- A36-4 (E01)
voltage and for ECM memory)
A33-3 (ST1-)
- A36-4 (E01)
BR-B B-L
Stop light switch
A33-7 (STP) A36-4

(E01)*1
R - B-L
Stop light switch
A33-8 (ACP) A36-4 (E01)
G - B-L
Air conditioning pressure

sensor
A33-12 (THA)
BR-G -
Intake air temperature

sensor
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDH0K9X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/13
8/6/12
- A36-29 (E1)
A33-14
(STSW2) A36-4
(E01)*3
A33-15
(CLSW) A36-4
(E01)*2
Y-B
BR - B-L
R-Y - BL
(built into mass air flow

meter)
Ignition switch ON
0.3 to 4.6 V
Ignition switch ON
0 to 1 V
Cranking
6 to 13 V
Ignition switch ON with clutch

pedal depressed
0 to 1 V
Ignition switch ON with clutch

pedal released
10 to 13 V
Starter signal
Clutch switch
Ignition switch ON, shift lever in

P or N*1
W-R B-L*1
A33-16
(NSW) - A36G-B - B4 (E01)
L*2
Neutral switch signal
Ignition switch ON, shift lever in

Neutral*2
Ignition switch ON, shift lever
not in P or N*1
Ignition switch ON, shift lever
0 to 1 V
10 to 13 V
not in Neutral*2
A33-17
(STSW2) -
BR - B-L
Ignition switch ON
0 to 1 V
Cranking
6 to 13 V
Starter signal
A36-4 (E01)
A33-18
B-P - B(CANL) - A36L
4 (E01)
CAN communication line
Ignition switch ON
O - B-L
Ignition switch ON
BLOWER relay
Ignition switch ON with blower

fan switch on
Ignition switch ON with blower
fan switch off
A33-29 (E2G)
A33-27
(IGSW) -
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 2)
A33-20 (HB) - G-Y - BA36-4 (E01)

L
A33-22 (VG) -
(See
waveform 1)
A33-19
(CANH) A36-4 (E01)
Pulse
generation
0 to 1 V
10 to 13 V
Y - B-G
Mass air flow meter
0.9 to 4.5 V
GR - B-L
IG2 relay
Ignition switch ON
10 to 13 V
A36-4 (E01)
A34-5 (HA1A)
- A36-4 (E01)
V - B-L
Air fuel ratio sensor heater
Idling with cold engine
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 3)
2/13
8/6/12
A34-6 (+B) -
V - B-L
Power source of ECM
Ignition switch ON
12 to 14 V
V-B - YB
1.0 to 1.7 V
A36-4 (E01)
A34-9 (PR) A36-29 (E1)
Pulse
A34-11 (IJF1) R-Y - B- A36-4 (E01)
L
Injector for direct injection

confirmation signal
Idling
generation
(See
waveform 4)
A34-13 (FPF)
- A36-4 (E01)
A34-14
(EV1+) - A364 (E01)
A3415(VV2+) A36-4 (E01)
R-B - BL
Y-BR B-L
Pulse
generation
High pressure side fuel pump

(Spill valve)
Idling
waveform 5)
Variable valve timing (VVT)

sensor (Exhaust side (bank
1))
Y-V - B-
sensor (Intake side (bank 2))
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 6)
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 7)
Pulse
generation
A34-16 (NE+)
- A34-27 (NE)
(See
B-W
Crank position sensor
(See
waveform 6
or 7)
A34-17
(KNK2) - A36-
G - Y-B
Knock sensor
Ignition switch ON
Approximately
2.5 V
O - B-L
Ignition switch ON
2.4 to 2.7 V
(A1A+) - A36- W - B-L

4 (E01)
Ignition switch ON
2.8 to 3.2 V
1.1 to 2.0 V
0 to 0.9 V
29 (E1)
A34-18 (A1A) - A36-4
(E01)
A34-19
A34-20 (PIM)
BR-B -
Manifold absolute pressure
- A36-29 (E1)
Y-B
sensor
L-W B-L
A34-21
(OX1B) - A364 (E01)
A34-25
(EV2+) - A364 (E01)
BR-Y B-L

sensor (Exhaust side (bank
2))
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 6)
3/13
8/6/12
A34-26
(VV1+) - A364 (E01)
Y-P - BL

(See
waveform 7)
A34-28
(KNK1) - A36-
Pulse
generation
G - Y-B
Knock sensor
Ignition switch ON
29 (E1)
Approximately
2.5 V
Pulse
A34-31 (IJF2) R-G - B- A36-4 (E01)

L

confirmation signal
Idling
generation
(See
waveform 4)
A34-32 (FPD)
R-W -
High pressure side fuel pump
- A36-4 (E01)
B-L
(Spill valve)
Idling
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 5)
A34-34 (VCV) G-B - BL

- A36-4 (E01)
timing oil control valve (OCV)
A35-1 (VPMP) D-L - B- A36-4 (E01)

L
Vent valve (built into canister

pump module)
Power source of camshaft
A35-5 (IREL)
D-W -
- A36-4 (E01)
B-L
A35-7 (+BM)
R-L - B-
- A36-4 (E01)
A35-8
(MPMP) -
O-L - B-
Leak detection pump (built
into canister pump module))
W-B B-L
pump control malfunctioning
A36-4 (E01)
A35-10 (DI) A36-4 (E01)
INJ relay
ETCS relay
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
Ignition switch ON
10 to 13 V
Idling
10 to 13 V
Ignition switch ON
0 to 1 V
Ignition switch ON
10 to 13 V
Ignition switch ON
10 to 13 V
Leak detection pump ON
0 to 1 V
Ignition switch ON
10 to 12 V
Fuel pump control (for fuel

detection)
Ignition switch ON
A35-11
(FAN1) - A364 (E01)
R-W B-L
Cooling fan not operated

FAN NO. 3 relay
10 to 13 V
Idling with A/C on or High

0 to 0.5 V
Cooling fan operated

A35-12
B-R - B(FAN2) - A36L
4 (E01)
A35-13
(SSHUT) -
LG - B-L
Ignition switch ON
FAN NO. 2 relay
10 to 13 V
Idling with A/C on or High

0 to 0.5 V
Cooling fan operated
EFI MAIN1 relay
Ignition switch ON
0 to 1 V
A36-4 (E01)
4/13
8/6/12
A35-15
(TACH) - A364 (E01)*3
GR-R B-L
A35-17 (MCR) L-R - B- A36-4 (E01)

L
Pulse
Engine speed
ETCS relay
Engine speed maintained at
generation
1500 rpm
(See
waveform 8)
Ignition switch ON
0 to 1 V
Pulse
A35-19(FPC)
- A36-4 (E01)
SB - B-L
Fuel pump control
Ignition switch ON
generation
(See
waveform 9)
A35-20
(PPMP) - A364 (E01)
A35-21
(VCPA) - A364 (E01)
O-B - BL
(EPA)
A35-26 (STA)
- A36-4 (E01)
pedal position sensor
W -L
B-W B-L
Power source of accelerator

pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position

sensor (for engine control)
ST relay
Accelerator pedal position

O - Y-B
sensor (for sensor

malfunctioning detection)
A35-35 (AC) - L-O - BA36-4 (E01)

L
A36-4 (E01)
1.5 to 4.0 V
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
Ignition switch ON, Accelerator
Approximately
pedal fully released
0.7 V
Approximately
pedal fully depressed
30 (EPA2)
A36-1 (M-) -
Ignition switch ON
module)
Power source of accelerator
A35-31
(VPA2) - A35-
(built into canister pump
L-Y - B-
A35-22
G-B - B(VCP2) - A36L
4 (E01)
A35-23(VPA)
- A35-29
SB - B-L
HEATER relay
Throttle actuator
3.1 V
Ignition switch ON
10 to 13 V
Cranking
0 to 1 V

Approximately
0.7 V
Approximately
3.1 V
Idling with A/C on
0 to 0.5 V
Idling with A/C off
12 to 14 V
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 10)
Pulse
A36-2 (M+) -
G-Y - B-
A36-4 (E01)
Throttle actuator
generation
(See
waveform 10)
Ignition switch ON
A36-5 (OE2) -
BR-L -
11 to 14 V
Pulse
5/13
8/6/12
A36-4 (E01)
B-L
valve (OCV) (Exhaust side

(bank 2))
generation
(See
waveform 11)
Ignition switch ON
A36-6 (HT1B) R-B - B- A36-4 (E01)
Pulse

heater
11 to 14 V
generation
(See
waveform 12)
Ignition switch ON
A36-7 (OE1) -
R-W -
A36-4 (E01)
B-L

valve (OCV) (Exhaust side
(bank 1))
11 to 14 V
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 11)
Pulse
A36-8 (IGT4)
W-L -
- A36-4 (E01)
B-L
Ignition coil (ignition signal)
generation
(See
waveform 13)
A36-10
(IGT2) - A364 (E01)
Pulse
Y-R - BL
generation
(See
waveform 13)
One of the following conditions

is met:
A36-11 (PRG) R-G - B- A36-4 (E01)
L
Ignition switch ON
Idling with warm
Purge valve
engine, under purge

control
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 14)
Pulse
A36-12 (#10)
- A36-4 (E01)
P - B-L
A36-13 (#40) P-G - B- A36-4 (E01)

L
generation
(See
waveform 15)
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 15)
Pulse
A36-14 (#1) W - B-L

A36-4 (E01)
generation
(See
waveform 4)
Ignition switch ON
A36-16 (OC2)
- A36-4 (E01)
GR - B-L

11 to 14 V
Pulse
generation
6/13
8/6/12
A36-17 (OC1)
- A36-4 (E01)
G-W B-L

(See
waveform 11)
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 11)
A36-18
(VTA1) - A36- LG - Y-B
29 (E1)
A36-19 (VC) A36-29 (E1)
R - Y-B
A36-20 (OT) BR - Y-B

A36-29 (E1)
A36-21
(IGT1) - A364 (E01)
W-R B-L
Approximately
0.6 V
Approximately
4.2 V
Power source for sensor

(specific voltage)
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
Oil temperature sensor
Idling
0.5 to 1.4 V
Throttle position sensor (for

engine control)
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 13)
Pulse
A36-22 (#20) P-L - B- A36-4 (E01)

L
A36-23 (#4) -
LG-R -
A36-4 (E01)
B-L
generation
(See
waveform 15)
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 4)
Pulse
A36-24 (#3) A36-4 (E01)
A36-25 (#2) A36-4 (E01)
LG-W B-L
LG-B B-L
generation
(See
waveform 4)
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 4)
A36-28
(VTA2) - A3629 (E1)
A36-30
(THW) - A3629 (E1)
R-Y - Y- Throttle position sensor (for

B
sensor malfunction detection)
BR-W Y-B

sensor
Approximately
1.5 V
Approximately
4.3 V
Idling, Engine coolant

temperature 60 to 120C (176
to 248F)
0.8 to 1.8 V
7/13
8/6/12
A36-31
(IGT3) - A364 (E01)
W-G B-L
Pulse
generation
(See
waveform 13)
Pulse
A36-32 (#30) P-B - B- A36-4 (E01)

L
A33-4 (EC) Body ground
generation
Ground
Always
Below 1
Shield
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
Shield
Always
Below 1
Shield
Always
Below 1
Shield
Always
Below 1
L - B-L
Ground
Ignition switch ON
0 to 1 V
Ground
Ignition switch ON
0 to 1 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
B-L Body
(See
waveform 15)
ground
A33-28
(SLE2) - Body
ground
A34-1 (E03) Body ground
B-R Body
ground
B-W Body
ground
A34-3 (E05) -
B-W Body
Body ground
ground
A34-29
(EKNK) Body ground
A34-30
(SLE1) - Body
ground
A34-35
(SLE3) - Body
ground
A35-29 (EPA)
- A36-4 (E01)
A35-30
(EPA2) - A364 (E01)
Y-B - BL
B-Y -
Body
ground
A36-4 (E01) -
B-L Body
Body ground
ground
8/13
8/6/12
Y-B Body
Ground
Ignition switch ON
0 to 1 V
ground

*2: for Manual Transmission
1. WAVEFORM 1
CAN Communication Signal
ECM Terminal Name
Between CANL and E01
Tester Range
1 V/DIV., 10 s./DIV.
Condition
Ignition switch ON
HINT:
The waveform varies depending on the CAN communication
signal.
2. WAVEFORM 2
CAN Communication Signal
ECM Terminal Name
Between CANH and E01
Tester Range
Condition
Ignition switch ON
HINT:
The waveform varies depending on the CAN communication
signal.
3. WAVEFORM 3
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Heater
ECM Terminal
Between HA1A and
Name
E01
Tester Range
Condition
9/13
8/6/12
4. WAVEFORM 4
Injector for Direct Injection No. 1 (to No. 4) Injection Signal
CH1: Between #1 (to #4) and E01
ECM Terminal Name
CH2: Between IJF1or IJF2 and E01
Tester Range
Condition
HINT:
The wavelength becomes shorter as the engine speed
increases.
5. WAVEFORM 5
Fuel Pump for High Pressure (Spill Valve)
ECM Terminal
Name
CH1: Between FPD and

E01
CH2: Between FPF and E01
Tester Range
Condition
6. WAVEFORM 6
Crankshaft Position Sensor and VVT Sensor for Exhaust
Camshaft
CH1: Between NE+ and NEECM Terminal Name
CH2: Between EV1+ and E01

CH3: Between EV2+ and E01
Tester Range
Condition
HINT:
increases.
7. WAVEFORM 7
Crankshaft Position Sensor and VVT Sensor for Intake
Camshaft
10/13
8/6/12
CH1: Between NE+ and NEECM Terminal Name
CH2: Between VV1+ and E01

CH3: Between VV2+ and E01
Tester Range
Condition
HINT:
increases.
8. WAVEFORM 8
Engine Speed Signal
ECM Terminal Name
Between TACH and E01
Tester Range
Condition
Engine speed maintained at 1500 rpm
HINT:
The wavelength becomes shorter as the vehicle speed
increases.
9. WAVEFORM 9
Fuel Pump Control
ECM Terminal
Between FPC and
Name
E01
Tester Range
Condition
Ignition switch ON
10. WAVEFORM 10
Throttle Actuator
ECM Terminal
Name
CH1: Between M+ and E01

CH1: Between M- and E01
CH1: 5 V/DIV., 500 s./DIV.
11/13
8/6/12
Tester Range
CH2: 200 mV/DIV., 500

s./DIV.
Condition
11. WAVEFORM 11
Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve (OCV)
ECM Terminal
Name
Between OC1, OC2, OE1 or OE2 and

E01
Tester Range
Condition
12. WAVEFORM 12
ECM Terminal
Between HT1B and
Name
E01
Tester Range
Condition
13. WAVEFORM 13
Ignition Coil (Ignition Signal)
ECM Terminal
Name
Between IGT (1 to 4) and

E01
Tester Range
Condition
14. WAVEFORM 14
Purge Valve
ECM Terminal
12/13
8/6/12
Name
Between PRG and E01
Tester Range
Condition
Ignition switch ON
Idling with warm engine, under
purge control
15. WAVEFORM 15
Injector for Port Injection No. 1 (to No. 4) Injection Signal
ECM Terminal Name
Between # (10 to 40) and E01
Tester Range
Condition
HINT:
increases.
13/13
8/6/12
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W770REX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DTC CHECK /
CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

NOTICE:
HINT:
stored.
as pending DTCs.
Current and pending DTCs can be cleared by using the Techstream. However, permanent DTCs
cannot be cleared using either of these two methods.
After clearing current DTCs using the Techstream, permanent DTCs can be cleared when the
system is determined to be normal for the relevant DTCs and then the universal trip is performed.
Store
condition
Pending
DTC
Clear
condition
or
or
Cable disconnected from negative battery terminal
Current
DTC
Store
condition
Clear
condition
Store
condition
Permanent
DTC
Clear
condition
ON

or
or
After DTCs cleared using Techstream, malfunction not detected when
universal trip driving performed
1/5
8/6/12
MIL
OFF

or
2/5
8/6/12
1. CHECK DTC
(e) Check the DTC(s) and freeze frame data, and then write them down.

(e) Clear the DTCs.

HINT:
3/5
8/6/12
Even if the following procedure is not performed, permanent DTCs are cleared if no malfunction are
detected during 3 consecutive driving cycles.

HINT:
(f) Clear DTCs.

(g) Perform the universal trip.
HINT:
than 40 km/h (25 mph) during the driving cycle provided that the vehicle is driven
at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes.
When accelerating through the gears, make sure the vehicle is driven so all gears
are used in order and no gears are skipped.
(i) Wait 15 seconds.
(j) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
4/5
8/6/12
(k) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes.

(l) Check that the permanent DTCs have been cleared.
HINT:
If the permanent DTCs have not been cleared, perform the universal trip again.
5/5
8/6/12
FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: CAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010EX1UGX
Title: FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: CAUTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION
This contents does not include all the necessary items about repair and service. This manual is
made for the use of persons who have special techniques and certifications. If non-specialized or
uncertified technicians perform repairs or service only using this manual or without proper
equipment or tools, this may cause severe injury to you or other persons nearby and also cause
damage to your customer's vehicle.
In order to prevent dangerous operation and damage to your customer's vehicle, be sure to follow
the instructions shown below.
This contents must be read thoroughly. It is especially important to have a good
understanding of all the contents written in the PRECAUTION of "INTRODUCTION"
section.
The service method written in this manual is very effective to perform repair and service.
When performing the operations following the procedures using this manual, be sure to
use tools specified and recommended. If using non-specified or tools other than
recommended tools and service methods, be sure to confirm the safety of the
technicians and that there is no possibility of causing personal injury or damage to the
customer's vehicle before starting the operation.
If part replacement is necessary, the part must be replaced with the same part number
or equivalent part. Do not replace it with an inferior quality part.
It is important to note that this manual contains various "Cautions" and "Notices" that
must be carefully observed in order to reduce the risk of personal injury during service
or repair, or reduce the possibility that improper service or repair may damage the
vehicle or render it unsafe. It is also important to understand that these "Cautions" and
"Notices" are not exaggerations and are possible hazardous consequences that might
result from failure to follow these instructions.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010EX1UGX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: FOREWORD (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010EW2RZX
Title: FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: FOREWORD (2013 FR-S)
FOREWORD
This is Volume 1 of the 2013 SCION FR-S manual. There are three volumes to this manual. The
sections included in each volume are indicated by black type in the Section Index. Use the Section
Index of each volume to find the volume with the section you need.
Applicable models
ZN6 series
Please note that the publications below have also been prepared as relevant service manuals for
the components and system in these vehicles.
MANUAL NAME
PUB. NO.
2013 SCION FR-S Electrical Wiring Diagram
EM20S0U
2013 SCION FR-S New Car Features
NM20S0U
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication.
However, specifications and procedures are subject to change without notice. For the most current
information available, refer to the Toyota Technical Information System (TIS) online at dealership
locations or on the Internet at http://techinfo.toyota.com.
If you find any failures in this manual, you are kindly requested to inform us by using the report
form on the next page.
Repair Manual Quality Report

Att.) Service Manager, Your Distributor
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010EW2RZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: FOREWORD (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010EW2RZX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT INSPE
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UZ30BTX
Title: INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT

INSPECTION PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. BASIC INSPECTION
(a) WHEN MEASURING RESISTANCE OF ELECTRONIC PARTS
(1) Unless otherwise stated, all resistance measurements are standard values measured at an
ambient temperature of 20C (68F). Resistance measurements may be inaccurate if measured
at high temperatures, i.e. immediately after the vehicle has been running. Measurements
should be made after the engine has cooled down.
(b) HANDLING CONNECTORS
*a
INCORRECT
*b
CORRECT
(1) When disconnecting a connector, first squeeze the

mating connector housing halves tightly together to
release the lock, and then press the lock claw and
separate the connector.
(2) When disconnecting a connector, do not pull on the
harnesses. Grasp the connector directly and separate
it.
(3) Before connecting a connector, check that there are
no deformations, damage, looseness or missing
terminals.
(4) When connecting a connector, press firmly until it
locks with a "click" sound.
(5) If checking a connector with a TOYOTA electrical
tester, check the connector from the backside
(harness side) using a mini test lead.
NOTICE:
As a waterproof connector cannot be checked from the
backside, check it by connecting a sub-harness.
Do not damage the terminals by moving the inserted
tester needle.
(c) CHECKING CONNECTORS
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZ30BTX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
*a
Core Wire
*b
Looseness of Crimping
*c
Terminal Deformation
*d
Pull Lightly
(1) Checking when a connector is connected: Squeeze the connectors together to confirm that
they are fully connected and locked.
(2) Checking when a connector is disconnected: Check by pulling the wire harness lightly from the
backside of the connector. Look for unlatched terminals, missing terminals, loose crimps or
broken conductor wires. Visually check for corrosion, metallic or foreign matter and water, and
bent, rusted, overheated, contaminated or deformed terminals.
(3) Checking the contact pressure of the terminal:

Prepare a spare male terminal. Insert it into a female
terminal, and check for ample tension when inserting
and after full engagement.
NOTICE:
When testing a gold-plated female terminal, always use
a gold-plated male terminal.
(d) CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR METHOD

*a
CORRECT
*b
INCORRECT
(1) If there is any foreign matter on the terminal, clean

the contact point with compressed air or a cloth.
Never rub the contact point using sandpaper as the
plating may come off.
(2) If there is abnormal contact pressure, replace the
female terminal. If the male terminal is gold-plated
2/7
8/6/12
(gold color), use a gold-plated female terminal; if it is

silver-plated (silver color), use a silver-plated female
terminal.
(3) Damaged, deformed or corroded terminals should be
replaced. If the terminal does not lock into the
housing, the housing may have to be replaced.
(e) WIRE HARNESS HANDLING

*a
INCORRECT
(1) If removing a wire harness, check the wiring and

clamps before proceeding so that it can be restored in
the same way.
(2) Never twist, pull or slacken the wire harness more
than necessary.
(3) The wire harness should never come into contact with
any high temperature part, rotating, moving, vibrating
or sharp-edged parts. Avoid contact with panel edges,
screw tips and other sharp items.
(4) When installing parts, never pinch the wire harness.
(5) Never cut or break the cover of the wire harness. If it
is cut or broken, repair it with insulating tape or
replace the wire harness.
2. CHECK FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
(a) For an open circuit in the wire harness in Fig. 1, measure

the resistance and voltage as follows:
(b) Check the resistance.
3/7
8/6/12
(1) Disconnect connectors A and C and measure the resistance between the terminals of the
connectors.
Standard Resistance (Fig. 2):
TESTER CONNECTION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Connector A terminal 1 - Connector C terminal 1
10 k or higher
Connector A terminal 2 - Connector C terminal 2
Below 1
HINT:
Measure the resistance while lightly shaking the wire harness vertically and horizontally.
If the results match the values specified above, an open circuit exists between terminal 1 of
connector A and terminal 1 of connector C.
(2) Disconnect connector B and measure the resistance
between the terminals of the connectors.
TESTER CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Connector A terminal 1 - Connector B1

terminal 1
Connector B2 terminal 1 - Connector C
terminal 1
Below 1
10 k or higher
If the results match the values specified above, an

open circuit exists between terminal 1 of
connector B2 and terminal 1 of connector C.
(c) Check the voltage.

(1) In a circuit in which voltage is applied to the ECU
connector terminal, an open circuit can be checked by
conducting a voltage check.
With each connector still connected, measure the
voltage between body ground and the following
4/7
8/6/12
terminals (in this order): 1) terminal 1 of connector A,

2) terminal 1 of connector B, and 3) terminal 1 of
connector C.
Standard Voltage (Fig. 4):
TESTER CONNECTION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Connector A terminal 1 - Body ground
5V
Connector B terminal 1 - Body ground
5V
Connector C terminal 1 - Body ground
Below 1 V
If the results match the values specified above, an

open circuit exists in the wire harness between
terminal 1 of connector B and terminal 1 of
connector C.
3. CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
(a) If a wire in the harness is shorted to ground (Fig. 5),

locate the shorted section by measuring the resistance as
follows:
(b) Check the resistance to body ground.
(1) Disconnect connectors A and C and measure the resistance.

TESTER CONNECTION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
10 k or higher
5/7
8/6/12
HINT:
Measure the resistance while lightly shaking the wire harness vertically and horizontally.
If the results match the values specified above, a short circuit exists between terminal 1 of
connector A and terminal 1 of connector C.
(2) Disconnect connector B and measure the resistance.
TESTER CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION

Connector B2 terminal 1 - Body
ground
10 k or higher
Below 1
If the results match the values specified above, a

short circuit exists between terminal 1 of
connector B2 and terminal 1 of connector C.
4. CHECK AND REPLACE ECU

NOTICE:
The connector should not be disconnected from the ECU. Perform the inspection from the backside
of the connector on the wire harness side.
When no measuring condition is specified, perform the inspection with the engine stopped and the
ignition switch ON.
Check that the connectors are fully seated. Check for loose, corroded or broken wires.
(a) First, check the ECU ground circuit. If it is faulty, repair it. If it is normal, the ECU could be faulty.
Temporarily replace the ECU with a normally functioning one and check if the symptoms occur. If
the trouble symptoms disappear, replace the original ECU.
(1) Measure the resistance between the ECU ground

terminal and body ground.
*a
Ground
Below 1
(2) Disconnect the ECU connector. Check the ground

terminals on the ECU side and wire harness side for
bent terminals, corrosion or foreign matter. Lastly,
check the contact pressure of the female terminals.
6/7
8/6/12
*a
*b
*c
*d

(ECU)
Ground
(to ECU)
Ground
7/7
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: GENERAL INFORMATION (2
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UZ20BWX
Title: INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: GENERAL INFORMATION

(2013 FR-S)
GENERAL INFORMATION
A large number of ECU controlled systems are used in this vehicle. In general, ECU controlled
systems are considered to be very intricate, requiring a high level of technical knowledge to
troubleshoot. However, most problem checking procedures only involve inspecting the ECU
controlled system circuits one by one. An adequate understanding of the system and a basic
knowledge of electricity is enough to perform effective troubleshooting, accurate diagnosis and
necessary repairs.
(For using the Techstream*)
HINT:
*: The Techstream is the name for the diagnostic tester in North America.
Before using the Techstream, read the operator's manual thoroughly.

If the Techstream cannot communicate with the ECU controlled systems when
connected to the DLC3 with the ignition switch ON and the Techstream turned on, there
is a problem on the vehicle side or the Techstream side.
i. If communication is possible when the Techstream is connected to another
vehicle, inspect the diagnosis data link line (bus (+) line), CANH and CANL
lines, and the power circuits for the vehicle ECUs.
ii. If communication is still not possible when the Techstream is connected to
another vehicle, the problem is probably in the Techstream itself. Perform the
Self Test procedure outlined in the Techstream operator's manual.
1. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
The troubleshooting procedures consist of diagnosis procedures for when a DTC is stored and
diagnosis procedures for when no DTC is stored. The basic idea is explained in the following
table.
PROCEDURE
TYPE
DTC Based
Diagnosis
Symptom
Based
Diagnosis
(No DTCs
DETAILS
TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
The malfunctioning part is identified based on the

DTC detection conditions using a process of
The diagnosis procedure is
elimination.
based on the DTC that is
The possible trouble areas are eliminated one-bystored.
one by use of the Techstream and inspection of
related parts.
The malfunctioning part is identified based on the
The diagnosis procedure is problem symptoms using a process of elimination.
based on problem
The possible trouble areas are eliminated one-bysymptoms.
one by use of the Techstream and inspection of
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZ20BWX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
stored)
related parts.
Vehicle systems are complex and use many ECUs that are difficult to inspect independently.
Therefore, a process of elimination is used, where components that can be inspected
individually are inspected, and if no problems are found in these components, the related ECU
is identified as the problem and replaced.
It is extremely important to ask the customer about the environment and the conditions
present when the problem occurred (Customer Problem Analysis). This makes it possible to
simulate the conditions and confirm the symptom. If the symptom cannot be confirmed or the
DTC does not recur, the malfunctioning part may not be identified using the troubleshooting
procedure, and the ECU for the related system may be replaced even though it is not
defective. If this happens, the original problem will not be solved.
In order to prevent endless expansion of troubleshooting procedures, the troubleshooting
procedures are written with the assumption that multiple malfunctions do not occur
simultaneously for a single problem symptom.
To identify the malfunctioning part, troubleshooting procedures narrow down the target by
separating components, ECUs and wire harnesses during the inspection. If the wire harness is
identified as the cause of the problem, it is necessary to inspect not only the connections to
components and ECUs but also all of the wire harness connectors between the component
and the ECU.
2. DESCRIPTION
(a) The data of each system and Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can be read from the Data Link
Connector 3 (DLC3) of the vehicle. When the system seems to be malfunctioning, use the
Techstream to check for malfunctions and perform repairs.
3. CHECK DLC3
(a) The vehicle ECUs use ISO 15765-4 communication
protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies
with SAE J1962 and matches the ISO 15765-4 format.
TERMINAL NO.
TERMINAL
(SYMBOL)
DESCRIPTION
4 (CG) - Body
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Chassis ground Always
Below 1
Signal ground
Always
Below 1
16 (BAT) - Body Battery

ground
positive
Always
11 to 14 V
6 (CANH) - 14
(CANL)
CAN bus line
Ignition
switch off*
57 to 63
6 (CANH) - 4
HIGH-level CAN Ignition
200 or
(CG)
bus line
switch off*
higher
14 (CANL) - 4
(CG)
LOW-level CAN
bus line
Ignition
switch off*
200 or
higher
ground
5 (SG) - Body
ground
2/3
8/6/12
6 (CANH) - 16
HIGH-level CAN Ignition
(BAT)
bus line
switch off*
14 (CANL) - 16
LOW-level CAN
Ignition
(BAT)
bus line
switch off*
6 k or higher
6 k or higher
NOTICE:
*: Before measuring the resistance, leave the vehicle as
is for at least 1 minute and do not operate the ignition
switch, any other switches or the doors.
If the result is not as specified, the DLC3 may have a

malfunction. Repair or replace the harness or connector.
3/3
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: HOW TO PROCEED WITH T
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UZ1088X
Title: INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)

1. OPERATION FLOW
HINT:
Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure below. The following is an outline of basic
troubleshooting procedure. Confirm the troubleshooting procedure for the circuit you are working on
before beginning troubleshooting.
1.
NEXT
2.
(a) Ask the customer about the conditions and environment when the problem occurred.
NEXT
3.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before proceeding to the next step.
NEXT
4.
SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DTC (AND FREEZE FRAME DATA) CHECK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZ1088X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/10
8/6/12
(a) Visually check the wire harnesses, connectors and fuses for open and short circuits.
(b) Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature.
(c) Confirm the problem symptoms and conditions, and check for DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is output
DTC is not output
GO TO STEP 6
5.
DTC CHART
(a) Find the output DTC in the DTC chart. Look at the Trouble Area column for a list of potentially
malfunctioning circuits and/or parts.
NEXT
6.
GO TO STEP 7
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS CHART
(a) Find the problem symptoms in the problem symptoms table. Look at the Suspected Area column
for a list of potentially malfunctioning circuits and/or parts.
NEXT
7.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION OR PARTS INSPECTION
(a) Identify the malfunctioning circuit or part.
NEXT
2/10
8/6/12
8.
(a) Adjust, repair or replace the malfunctioning circuit or parts.
NEXT
9.
CONFIRMATION TEST
(a) After the adjustment, repairs or replacement of components, confirm that the malfunction no
longer exists. If the malfunction does not recur, perform a confirmation test under the same
conditions and in the same environment as when the malfunction first occurred.
NEXT
END
2. CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS

HINT:
When troubleshooting, confirm that the problem symptoms have been accurately identified.
Preconceptions should be discarded in order to make an accurate judgment. To clearly understand
what the problem symptoms are, it is extremely important to ask the customer about the problem
and the conditions at the time the malfunction occurred.
Gather as much information as possible for reference. Past problems that seem unrelated may also
help in some cases.
The following 5 items are important points for problem analysis:
What
Vehicle model, system name
When
Date, time, occurrence frequency
Where
Road conditions
Under what conditions?
Driving conditions, weather conditions
How did it happen?
Problem symptoms
3. SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE

HINT:
The diagnostic system in this vehicle has various functions.
The first function is the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) check. A DTC is a code stored in the ECU
memory whenever a malfunction in the signal circuits to the ECU occurs. In a DTC check, a previous
malfunction's DTC can be checked by a technician during troubleshooting.
Another function is the Input Signal Check, which checks if the signals from various switches are
3/10
8/6/12
sent to the ECU correctly.

By using these functions, the problem areas can be narrowed down and troubleshooting can
be more effective. Diagnostic functions are incorporated in the following systems of this
vehicle.
SYSTEM
SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE

DTC
DTC
SENSOR CHECK/TEST MODE
DATA
ACTIVE
CHECK
CHECK
(INPUT SIGNAL CHECK)
LIST
TEST
(NORMAL
MODE)
(CHECK
MODE)
SFI System (FA20)
Ignition System (FA20)
Fuel System (FA20)
Cooling Fan System (FA20) -
Starting System (FA20)
Key Inter Lock System

(FA20)
Cruise Control System
System (TX6A)
Power Steering System
Audio and Visual System
Charging System (FA20)
Electric Power Control

System
LIN Communication System
Emission Control System

(FA20)
Intake System (FA20)
Tire Pressure Warning

System
Vehicle Stability Control
System
CAN Communication
System
Power Door Lock Control
System
Wireless Door Lock Control
System
4/10
8/6/12
Key Reminder Warning
Engine Immobiliser System
Lighting System (INT)
Meter / Gauge System
Clock System
Airbag System
Seat Heater System
Seat Belt Warning System
Air Conditioning System
Power Window Control

System
Window Defogger System
Luggage Compartment
Door Opener System
Power Mirror Control

System
Wiper and Washer System -
Lighting System (EXT)
Horn System
System
Occupant Classification
System
In the DTC check, it is very important to determine whether the problem indicated by the DTC
either: 1) still occurs, or 2) occurred in the past but has returned to normal. In addition, the DTC
should be compared to the problem symptom to see if they are related. For this reason, DTCs
should be checked before and after confirmation of symptoms (i.e., whether or not problem
symptoms exist) to determine current system conditions, as shown in the flowchart below.
Never skip the DTC check. Failing to check for DTCs, depending on the case, may result in
unnecessary troubleshooting for systems operating normally or lead to repairs not related to the
problem. Follow the procedure listed in the flowchart in the correct order.
The following flowchart shows how to proceed with troubleshooting using the DTC check.
Directions from the flowchart will indicate how to proceed either to DTC troubleshooting or to the
troubleshooting of each problem symptom.
1.
DTC CHECK
NEXT
5/10
8/6/12
2.
MAKE A NOTE OF DTC DISPLAYED AND THEN CLEAR DTCs
NEXT
3.
SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No symptoms exist
Symptoms exist
GO TO STEP 5
4.
SIMULATION TEST USING SYMPTOM SIMULATION METHODS
NEXT
5.
DTC CHECK
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
6/10
8/6/12
TROUBLESHOOT FOR PROBLEM INDICATED BY

DTC
6.
SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Symptoms exist
No symptoms exist
If a DTC was displayed in the initial DTC check, the problem may have occurred in a wire harness or
connector in that circuit in the past. Check the wire harness and connectors.
END
TROUBLESHOOT FOR EACH PROBLEM SYMPTOM
If problem symptoms are present, but no DTCs were stored again after they were cleared, then the
problem causing the symptom may be occurring for something that does not store DTCs (the DTC that
was displayed in the initial DTC check may have been from a past problem or a secondary problem).
4. SYMPTOM SIMULATION
HINT:
The most difficult case in troubleshooting is when no problem symptoms occur. In such a case, a
thorough problem analysis must be carried out. A simulation of the same or similar conditions and
environment in which the problem occurred in the customer's vehicle should be carried out. No
matter how much skill or experience a technician has, troubleshooting without confirming the
problem symptoms will lead to important repairs being overlooked and mistakes or delays.
For example:
With a problem that only occurs when the engine is cold or as a result of vibration caused by the
road during driving, the problem can never be determined if the symptoms are being checked on a
stationary vehicle or a vehicle with a warmed-up engine. Vibration, heat or water penetration
(moisture) is difficult to reproduce. The following symptom simulation tests are effective substitutes
for the conditions and can be applied to a stationary vehicle. Important points in the symptom
simulation test:
In the symptom simulation test, the problem symptoms as well as the problem area or parts must
be confirmed. First, narrow down the possible problem circuits according to the symptoms. Then,
connect the tester and carry out the symptom simulation test, judging whether the circuit being
7/10
8/6/12
tested is defective or normal. Also, confirm the problem symptoms at the same time. Refer to
Problem Symptoms Table for each system to narrow down the possible causes.
To reproduce DTCs, it is necessary to satisfy the respective DTC detection conditions.
(a) VIBRATION METHOD: When a malfunction seems to occur
as a result of vibration.
*a
Vibrate Slightly
*b
Shake Slightly
(1) PARTS OR SENSORS

Apply slight vibration with a finger to the part or
sensor suspected to be the cause of the problem, and
check whether the malfunction occurs.
NOTICE:
Applying strong vibration to relays may open the
relays.
(2) CONNECTORS
Slightly shake the connector vertically and
horizontally.
(3) WIRE HARNESS
Slightly shake the wire harness vertically and
horizontally.
HINT:
The connector joint and fulcrum of the vibration are the
major areas that should be checked thoroughly.
(b) HEAT METHOD: When a malfunction seems to occur when the area in question is heated.
(1) Heat the component that is the possible cause of the malfunction with a hair dryer or similar
device. Check if the malfunction occurs.
NOTICE:
Do not heat components to more than 60C (140F). Exceeding this temperature may damage the
components.
Do not apply heat directly to parts in an ECU.
(c) WATER SPRINKLING METHOD: When a malfunction seems
to occur on a rainy day or in high-humidity.
(1) Sprinkle water onto the vehicle and check if the
malfunction occurs.
NOTICE:
Never sprinkle water directly into the engine
8/10
8/6/12
compartment. Indirectly change the temperature and

humidity by spraying water onto the front of the radiator.
Never apply water directly onto the electronic
components.
HINT:
If the vehicle has or had a water leak problem, the leak may
have damaged the ECU or connections. Look for evidence of
corrosion or short circuits. Proceed with caution during water
tests.
(d) HIGH ELECTRICAL LOAD METHOD: When a malfunction

seems to occur when the electrical load is high.
(1) Turn on the heater blower, headlights, rear window
defogger and all other electrical loads. Check if the
malfunction recurs.
5. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART

Look for output Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) (from the DTC checks) in the appropriate section's
Diagnostic Trouble Code chart. Use the chart to determine the trouble area and the proper inspection
procedure. A description of each of the chart's columns is shown in the table below.
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DTC No.
Indicates the diagnostic trouble code.
Detection
Item
Indicates the system or details of the problem.
Trouble
Area
Indicates the suspected areas of the problem.
See page
Indicates the page where the inspection procedure for each circuit is to be found, or gives
instruction for checking and repairs.
6. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

When no DTC is output but the problem still occurs, use the Problem Symptoms Table. The suspected
areas (circuits or parts) for each problem symptom are shown in the table. The suspected areas are
listed in order of probability. A description of each of the table columns is shown in the following table.
HINT:
In some cases, the problem is not detected by the diagnostic system even though a problem
symptom occurs. It is possible that the problem occurs outside the detection range of the diagnostic
system, or that the problem occurs in a completely different system.
9/10
8/6/12
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Symptom
Suspected Area
Indicates the circuit or part which needs to be checked.
See page
Indicates the page where the inspection procedure is located.
7. INSPECTION
A description of the main points for inspection of suspected areas is shown in the following table.
ITEM
Description
DTC No., DTC
Detection Condition
and Trouble Area
DESCRIPTION
The major role and operation of the circuit or system and its component parts are
explained.
Indicates the diagnostic trouble codes, DTC detection conditions and suspected
areas for a problem.
This is a wiring diagram for the circuit or system.
This diagram can be used together with the Electrical Wiring Diagram to
thoroughly understand the circuit.
Wiring Diagram
Wire colors are indicated by alphabetical codes. B = Black, L = Blue, R = Red, BR =

Brown, LG = Light Green, V = Violet, G = Green, O = Orange, W = White, GR =
Gray, P = Pink, Y = Yellow, SB = Sky Blue
The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the second letter indicates the
color of the stripe.
Inspection
Procedure
This shows the procedure not only to determine whether the circuit is normal or
abnormal, but also to determine whether the problem is located in the sensors,
actuators, wire harness or ECU.
The illustration shows whether the connector being checked is connected or
Illustration of the
ECU connector
during the check
disconnected.
The connections for an electrical tester are indicated by (+) or (-) after the
terminal name.
For inspections between a connector and body ground, information about the
ground is not shown in the illustration.
10/10
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL: GENERAL INFORMATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UYV0BHX
Title: INTRODUCTION: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL: GENERAL INFORMATION (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL INFORMATION
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
(a) This manual is written in accordance with SAE J2008.
(b) Repair operations can be separated mainly into the following 3 processes:
(1) Diagnosis
(2) Removing/Installing, Replacing, Disassembling/Reassembling, Checking and Adjusting
(3) Final Inspection
(c) The following procedure is omitted from this manual. However, this procedure must be performed.
(1) Use a jack or lift to perform operations.
(2) Clean all removed parts.
(3) Perform a visual check before and after performing any work.
2. INDEX
(a) An alphabetical INDEX section is provided at the end of the manual as a reference to help find the
item to be repaired.
3. PREPARATION
(a) Use of Special Service Tools (SST) and Special Service Materials (SSM) may be required, depending
on the repair procedure. Be sure to use SST and SSM when they are required and follow the work
procedure properly. A list of SST and SSM is in the "Preparation" section of this manual.
4. REPAIR PROCEDURES
(a) A component illustration is placed under the title where necessary.
(b) Non-reusable parts, grease application areas, precoated parts and torque specifications are noted
in the component illustrations.
The following illustration is an example.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UYV0BHX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(c) Torque specifications, grease application areas and non-reusable parts are emphasized in the
procedures.
HINT:
There are cases where such information can only be explained by using an illustration. In these
cases, torque, oil and other information are described in the illustration.
(d) Only items with key points are described in the text. What to do and other details are explained
using illustrations next to the text. Both the text and illustrations are accompanied by standard
values and notices.
Illustration
What to do and where to do it
Task heading
What work will be performed

How to perform the task
Information such as specifications and warnings, which are written in
Explanation
text
boldface text
(e) Illustrations of similar vehicle models are sometimes used. In these cases, minor details may be
different from the actual vehicle.
(f) Procedures are presented in a step-by-step format.
5. SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Specifications are presented in boldface text throughout the manual. The specifications are also
found in the "Service Specifications" section for reference.
6. TERM DEFINITIONS
CAUTION
Possibility of injury to you or other people.
NOTICE
Possibility of damage to components being repaired.
2/3
8/6/12
HINT
Provides additional information to help you perform repairs.
7. INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS

(a) The units used in this manual comply with the International System of Units (SI UNIT) standard.
Other units from the metric system and the English systems are also provided.
Example:
3/3
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION: VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS (201
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UYW0DPX
Title: INTRODUCTION: IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION: VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

(2013 FR-S)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

1. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(a) The vehicle identification number is stamped on the vehicle body, on the plates and on the
certification label as shown in the illustration.
*A
Manual transmission
*1
Vehicle Identification Number
*2
Certification Label
2. ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSMISSION SERIAL NUMBER
(a) The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block

of the engine as shown in the illustration.
*1
FA20 Engine Serial Number
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UYW0DPX.html?locale=en
1/2
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION: VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS (201
(b) The transmission serial number is printed on the transmission number label.
*A
TL70
*B
TX6A
*1
Transmission Number Label
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UYW0DPX.html?locale=en
2/2
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004PFL00QX
Title: INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS
1. CUSTOMIZE WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM
2. CUSTOMIZE KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM
3. CUSTOMIZE LIGHTING SYSTEM (INT)
4. CUSTOMIZE METER / GAUGE SYSTEM
5. CUSTOMIZE SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM
6. CUSTOMIZE WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
7. CUSTOMIZE LIGHTING SYSTEM (EXT)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004PFL00QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: INITIALIZATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000315Z04XX
Title: INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: INITIALIZATION (2013 FR-S)
INITIALIZATION
1. PROCEDURES NECESSARY WHEN ECU OR OTHER PARTS ARE REPLACED
REPLACEMENT PART
NECESSARY PROCEDURE
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
registration
ECM
EFFECT/INOPERATIVE FUNCTION WHEN

NECESSARY PROCEDURES ARE NOT
PERFORMED
SEE
PAGE
MIL comes on
ECU communication ID
registration (Engine
immobiliser system)
TCM
Automatic
transmission
assembly
Transmission
valve body
assembly
Transmission
wire
Shift solenoid
valve S1, S2,
S3, S4, SL1,
SL2, SLT,
SLU, and/or
SR
Engine
assembly
Reset memory
Brake
actuator
assembly
(Skid control
ECU)
Steering
sensor
VSC sensor neutral
Steering
memorization
column
assembly
Steering gear
assembly
Engine start
Large shift shock

The deterioration of fuel efficiency
VSC system does not operate normally

(warning indicator light comes on).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000315Z04XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
Adjust front
wheel
alignment
Power steering ECU

assembly
Rotation angle sensor

initialization and torque
sensor zero point
calibration
Steering column
assembly

initialization and torque
sensor zero point
calibration
Door control
receiver
Tire pressure
warning
valve and
transmitter
Transmitter ID
registration
Initialization
P/S warning light comes on

EPS control
Steering effort is different between turning

steering wheel to left and right
When DTC detection conditions of

"transmitter ID not received" DTC
are met, TPWS indicator blinks for
1 minute, and then illuminates.
Tire pressure warning function
Key
Main body
ECU (network
Code registration
gateway
(Engine immobiliser
ECU)
system)
Combination
Engine start
meter
assembly
Door control
transmitter
assembly
Door control
Code registration
(Wireless door lock
Wireless door lock control system
system)
receiver
Power
window
regulator
master
switch
assembly
Power
window
regulator
switch
assembly
Power
window
2/3
8/6/12
regulator
motor
assembly
Front door
window
regulator
Auto up/down function

Initialize power window
control system
Jam protection function

Operation function after ignition
switch is turned off
sub-assembly
Front door
glass subassembly
Front door
rear lower
frame subassembly
Front door fix
window glass
Front door
opening trim
weatherstrip
3/3
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UYX0E9X
Title: INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. BASIC REPAIR HINT
(a) HINTS ON OPERATIONS
Attire
Vehicle protection
Safety
procedures
Always wear a clean uniform.

A hat and safety shoes must be worn.
Prepare a grille cover, fender cover, seat cover and floor mat before starting
work.
When working with 2 or more persons, be sure to check the safety of
one another.
When working with the engine running, make sure to provide
ventilation for exhaust fumes in the workshop.
If working on high temperature, high pressure, rotating, moving or
vibrating parts, wear appropriate safety equipment and take extra
care not to injure yourself or others.
When jacking up the vehicle, be sure to support the specified
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UYX0E9X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/22
8/6/12
locations with safety stands.

When lifting up the vehicle, use appropriate safety equipment.
Preparation of
tools and
measuring
equipment
Removal and
installation,
disassembly and
assembly
operations
Before starting work, prepare a tool stand, SST, measuring equipment, oil, and
any replacement parts required.
Diagnose with a thorough understanding of proper procedures and of

the reported problem.
Before removing any parts, check the general condition of the
assembly and for deformation and damage.
If the procedure is complicated, take notes. For example, note the
total number of electrical connections, bolts or hoses removed. Add
matchmarks to ensure reassembly of components in the original
positions. Temporarily mark hoses and their fittings if needed.
Clean and wash the removed parts if necessary and assemble them
after a thorough check.
Place the removed parts in a separate box to avoid mixing them up
with new parts or contaminating the new parts.
Removed parts
For non-reusable parts such as gaskets, O-rings and self-locking

nuts, replace them with new ones as instructed in this manual.
Retain the removed parts for customer inspection, if requested.
Make sure that removed and installed parts (oil filler cap, level
Checks to
7* perform after
work is finished
dipstick, floor mat, etc.) are properly installed/tightened.

Make sure that none of the cloths or tools that were used have been
left in the engine compartment or within the vehicle.
Check that there are no oil leaks.
CAUTION:
*: Be sure to perform these checks properly, Not performing these checks properly after
finishing work can lead to serious accident or injury.
(b) JACKING UP AND SUPPORTING THE VEHICLE

(1) Care must be taken when jacking up and supporting the vehicle. Be sure to lift and support the
vehicle at the proper locations.
(c) PRECOATED PARTS
*a
Seal Lock Adhesive
(1) Precoated parts are bolts and nuts that are coated
with seal lock adhesive at the factory.
(2) If a precoated part is retightened, loosened or moved
in any way, it must be recoated with the specified
2/22
8/6/12
adhesive.
(3) When reusing a precoated part, clean off the old
adhesive and dry the part with compressed air. Then
apply new seal lock adhesive appropriately to that
part.
(4) Some seal lock agents harden slowly. You may have
to wait for the seal lock adhesive to harden.
(d) GASKETS
(1) When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to prevent leaks.
(e) BOLTS, NUTS AND SCREWS
(1) Carefully follow all the specifications for tightening torque. Always use a torque wrench.
(2) Make sure that no foreign matter (burrs, paint, etc.) gets trapped under the heads of the bolts
and nuts when tightening them.
(f) FUSES
*a
INCORRECT
*b
CORRECT
(1) When inspecting a fuse, check that the wire of the fuse is not broken.
(2) If the wire of a fuse is broken, confirm that there are no shorts in its circuit.
(3) When a fuse is replaced, a fuse with the same amperage rating must be used.
ILLUSTRATION
SYMBOL
PART NAME
FUSE
ABBREVIATION
FUSE
3/22
8/6/12
MEDIUM CURRENT FUSE
M-FUSE
HIGH CURRENT FUSE
H-FUSE
FUSIBLE LINK
FL
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB
(g) CLIPS
(1) The removal and installation methods of typical clips used for vehicle body parts are shown in
the table below.
HINT:
If clips are damaged during a procedure, always replace the damaged clips with new ones.
SHAPE (EXAMPLE)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4/22
8/6/12
Remove the clips with a clip remover or pliers.
Remove the clips with a clip remover or screwdriver.
Remove the clips with a wide scraper to prevent panel damage.
Remove the clips by pushing the center pin through and prying out the
shell.
5/22
8/6/12
Remove the clips by unscrewing the center pin and prying out the shell.
Remove the clips by prying out the pin and then prying out the shell.
(h) CLAWS
(1) The removal and installation methods of typical claws used for vehicle body parts are shown in
the table below.
HINT:
If claws are damaged during a procedure, always replace the cap or cover that has damaged claws
with a new one.
SHAPE (EXAMPLE)
ILLUSTRATION
PROCEDURE
Using a screwdriver, disengage the

claws and remove the cap or cover.
6/22
8/6/12


(i) HINGES, GUIDES, CLAMPS, PINS, ETC.

(1) The removal and installation methods of typical hinges, guides, clamps and pins used for
vehicle body parts are shown in the table below.
HINT:
If clamps are damaged during a procedure, always replace the cap or cover that has damaged
clamps with a new one.
SHAPE (EXAMPLE)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
7/22
8/6/12
(j) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF VACUUM HOSES
(1) To disconnect a vacuum hose, pull and twist it from

the end of the hose. Do not pull it from the middle of
the hose as this may damage the hose.
8/22
8/6/12
*a
INCORRECT
*b
CORRECT
(2) When disconnecting vacuum hoses, use tags to

identify where they should be reconnected.
(3) After completing any hose related repairs, double-check that the vacuum hoses are properly
connected. The label under the hood shows the proper layout.
(4) When using a vacuum gauge, never force the hose onto a connector that is too large. If a hose
has been stretched, air may leak. Use a step-down adapter if necessary.
(k) TORQUE WHEN USING TORQUE WRENCH WITH EXTENSION TOOL
(1) Use the formula below to calculate special torque

values for situations where SST or an extension tool
is combined with a torque wrench.
Formula
T' = (L2/(L1 + L2))*T
Reading of torque wrench {N*m (kgf*cm,
T'
ft.*lbf)}
TTorque {N*m (kgf*cm, ft.*lbf)}
9/22
8/6/12
L1
Length of SST or extension tool {cm (in.)}
L2
Length of torque wrench {cm (in.)}
NOTICE:
If an extension tool or SST is combined with a torque
wrench and used to tighten to a torque specification in
this manual, the actual torque will be excessive and
parts will be damaged.
2. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH SRS AIRBAG AND SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
CAUTION:
Before performing pre-disposal deployment of any SRS component, review and closely follow all
applicable environmental and hazardous material regulations. Pre-disposal deployment may be
considered hazardous material treatment.
Failure to carry out the service operations in the correct sequence could cause the SRS to
unexpectedly deploy during servicing and lead to serious injury. Furthermore, if a mistake is made
when servicing the SRS, it is possible that the SRS may fail to operate properly. Before servicing
(including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement), be sure to read the following
section carefully.
(a) GENERAL NOTICE
(1) The power window system utilizes a mechanism in which the door glass moves down slightly
when the door is opened, and in which the glass moves up when the door closed in order to
prevent the door molding from being damaged. When the negative (-) battery terminal needs
to be disconnected for servicing, fully open the driver and passenger door glasses in advance.
(2) As malfunctions of the SRS are difficult to confirm, the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) become
the most important source of information when troubleshooting. When troubleshooting the
SRS, always check for DTCs before disconnecting the battery.
(3) In the event of a collision, carry out an inspection using diagnosis even if the SRS airbag and
pretensioner parts do not operate.
(4) Work must be started at least 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off and after the
cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal.
The SRS is equipped with a back-up power source. If work is started within 90 seconds after
turning the ignition switch off and disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery
terminal, the SRS may deploy.
When the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal, the clock and audio
system memory will be cleared. Before starting work, make a note of the settings of each
memory system. When work is finished, reset the clock and audio system as before.
CAUTION:
Never use a back-up power source (battery or other) to avoid clearing the system memory.
The back-up power source may inadvertently power the SRS and cause it to deploy.
(5) If the vehicle has been involved in a minor collision where the SRS does not deploy, the horn
button assembly, instrument panel passenger airbag assembly, knee airbag assembly, front
seat airbag assembly, curtain shield airbag assembly and front seat outer belt assembly
should be inspected before further use of the vehicle.
10/22
8/6/12
(6) Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, use new ones.
(7) Before repairs, remove the airbag sensor assemblies if impacts are likely to be applied to the
sensor during repairs.
(8) Never disassemble and attempt to repair any airbag sensor assemblies or airbag assemblies.
1. Horn button assembly
2. Instrument panel passenger airbag assembly
3. Front seat airbag assembly
4. Curtain shield airbag assembly
5. Front seat outer belt assembly
(9) Replace the airbag sensor assemblies and the airbag assemblies if: 1) damage has occurred
from being dropped, or 2) cracks, dents or other defects in the case, bracket or connector are
present.
(10) Do not directly expose the airbag sensor assemblies or airbag assemblies to hot air or flames.
(11) Use a voltmeter/ohmmeter with high impedance (minimum = 10 k) for troubleshooting
electrical circuits.
(12) Information labels are attached to the SRS components. Follow the instructions on the labels.
(13) After work on the SRS is completed, check the SRS warning light.
(b) SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(1) The steering wheel must be fitted correctly to the steering column with the spiral cable subassembly at the neutral position. Otherwise, cable damage and other problems may occur.
Refer to the information about correct installation of the steering wheel
(c) HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY

(1) Always place a removed or new horn button assembly with the surface facing upward. Placing
the horn button assembly with the pad surface facing downward could cause a serious
accident if the airbag deploys. Also, do not place anything on top of the horn button assembly.
(2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to deploy, which
could cause serious injury.
(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the horn button assembly.
(4) Store the horn button assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 93C
(199F), the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise.
(5) Before using an electric welder anywhere on the vehicle, disconnect the airbag ECU assembly
connectors. These connectors contain shorting springs. This feature reduces the possibility of
the airbag deploying due to current entering the squib wiring.
(6) When disposing of the vehicle or the horn button assembly by itself, the airbag should be
deployed using SST before disposal
electrical noise.
. Deploy the airbag in a safe place away from
(d) INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

(1) Always place a removed or new instrument panel passenger airbag assembly with the pad
surface facing upward. Placing the airbag assembly with the airbag deployment direction facing
downward could cause a serious accident if the airbag deploys.
(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the instrument panel passenger
11/22
8/6/12
airbag assembly.
(4) Store the airbag assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 93C (199F),
the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise.
(6) When disposing of the vehicle or the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly unit by
itself, the airbag should be deployed using SST before disposal
. Deploy the airbag in a
safe place away from electrical noise.

(e) FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
(1) Always place a removed or new front seat airbag assembly with the airbag deployment
direction facing upward.
(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the front seat airbag assembly.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the front seat airbag assembly unit by itself, the airbag should
be deployed using SST before disposal
electrical noise.
. Deploy the airbag in a safe place away from
(f) CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

(1) Always place a removed or new curtain shield airbag assembly in a clear plastic bag, and keep
it in a safe place.
CAUTION:
The plastic bag should be disposed of after use.
NOTICE:
Never disassemble the curtain shield airbag assembly.
(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the curtain shield airbag assembly.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the curtain shield airbag assembly unit by itself, the airbag
should be deployed using SST before disposal
from electrical noise.
. Deploy the airbag in a safe place away
(g) FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER)

12/22
8/6/12
(1) Never measure the resistance of the front seat outer belt assembly. This may cause the
pretensioner of the front seat outer belt assembly to activate, which could cause serious
injury.
(2) Never disassemble the front seat outer belt assembly.
(3) Never install the front seat outer belt assembly on another vehicle.
(4) Store the seat outer belt assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 80C
(176F), the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the front seat outer belt assembly unit by itself, the front seat
outer belt assembly should be activated before disposal
. Activate the front seat outer
belt assembly in a safe place away from electrical noise.

(7) As the front seat outer belt assembly is hot after being activated, allow some time for it to cool
down sufficiently before disposal. Never apply water to cool down the front seat outer belt
assembly.
(8) Grease, detergents, oil or water should not be applied to the front seat outer belt assembly.
(h) AIRBAG ECU ASSEMBLY
(1) Never reuse a airbag ECU assembly that has been involved in a collision where the SRS has
deployed.
(2) The connectors to the airbag ECU assembly should be connected or disconnected with the
airbag ECU assembly installed to the vehicle. If the connectors are connected or disconnected
while the airbag ECU assembly is not installed, the SRS may activate.
(3) Work must be started at least 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off and the cable
is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal, even if only loosening the bolts of the
airbag ECU assembly.
(i) WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
(1) All the connectors in the system are a standard yellow color. If an SRS wire harness has an
open circuit or a connector is broken, replace it.
3. VEHICLES WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

(a) After removing or replacing the seat cushion cover, ensure that the worker gets into and out of
the front passenger seat after installing the seat, and confirm that the front passenger airbag
ON/OFF indicator switches between on and off. Confirm that the ON indicator is lit when the front
passenger seat is occupied, and that the OFF indicator is lit when the front passenger seat is
vacant.
(b) The occupant detection ECU, occupant detection sensor, seat cushion pad, and seat cushion
frame comprise the seat cushion pad and frame assembly. Therefore, never remove the occupant
detection ECU and occupant detection sensor from the seat cushion pad and frame assembly.
(c) If the seat cushion cover is removed, make sure to replace the hang wires on the seat cushion
cover side with new ones.
(d) Do not replace or alter the cover or filling of the front passenger seat.
(e) Do not install accessories other than genuine accessories (for example, audio amps, etc.) under
the front passenger seat.
13/22
8/6/12
(f) Do not place magnetized items near the seat belt buckle switch.
(g) When packages or electronic items are placed on the front passenger seat, the occupant
classification system may not properly detect the weight of a passenger, and the front passenger
airbag may deploy in the event of a collision. When driving after work on the front passenger seat,
do not place packages or electronic items on the front passenger seat.
4. ELECTRONIC CONTROL
*1
Cable
*2
Negative (-) Battery Terminal
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism in which the door glass moves down slightly when
the door is opened, and in which the glass moves up when the door closed in order to prevent the
door molding from being damaged. When the negative (-) battery terminal needs to be
disconnected for servicing, fully open the driver and passenger door glasses in advance.
Certain systems need to be initialized after disconnecting and reconnecting the cable from the
negative (-) battery terminal.
After the ignition switch is turned off, the navigation receiver assembly (for Navigation Receiver
Type) or radio and display receiver assembly (for Radio and Display Type with Intuitive Parking
Assist System) records various types of memory and settings. As a result, after turning the ignition
switch off, make sure to wait at least 60 seconds before disconnecting the cable from the negative
(-) battery terminal.
(a) DISCONNECTING AND RECONNECTING NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
(1) Before performing work on electronic components, disconnect the cable from the negative (-)
battery terminal to prevent damage to the electrical system or components.
(2) When disconnecting the cable, turn the ignition switch and headlight switch off and loosen the
cable nut completely. Perform these operations without twisting or prying the cable. Then
disconnect the cable.
(3) Clock settings, radio settings, audio system memory, DTCs and other data will be cleared when
the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal. Write down any necessary
data before disconnecting the cable.
(b) HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC PARTS
14/22
8/6/12
*a
INCORRECT
(1) Do not open the cover or case of the ECU unless

absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched,
the IC may be rendered inoperative by static
electricity.
(2) Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting electronic
connectors. Pull on the connector itself.
(3) Do not drop electronic components, such as sensors
or relays. If they are dropped on a hard surface, they
should be replaced.
(4) When cleaning the engine components with steam,
protect the electronic components, air filter and
emission-related components from water.
(5) Never use an impact wrench to remove or install
temperature switches or temperature sensors.
(6) When measuring the resistance between terminals of
a wire connector, insert the tester probe carefully to
prevent the terminals from bending.
5. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FUEL CONTROL PARTS

(a) PLACE FOR REMOVING AND INSTALLING FUEL SYSTEM PARTS
(1) Work in a location with good air ventilation that does not have welders, grinders, drills, electric
motors, stoves, or any other ignition sources nearby.
(2) Never work in a pit or near a pit as fuel vapors will collect there.
(b) REMOVING AND INSTALLING FUEL SYSTEM PARTS
(1) Prepare a fire extinguisher before starting work.
(2) To prevent static electricity, install a ground wire between the fuel changer and vehicle, and do
not spray the surrounding area with water. Be careful when performing work in this area, as
the floor surface will become slippery. Do not clean up gasoline spills with water, as this may
cause the gasoline to spread, and possibly create a fire hazard.
(3) Avoid using electric motors, work lights and other electric equipment that can cause sparks or
high temperatures.
(4) Avoid using iron hammers as they may create sparks.
(5) Dispose of fuel-contaminated cloth separately using a fire resistant container.
6. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE INTAKE PARTS
15/22
8/6/12
(a) If any metal particles enter intake system parts, this may
damage the engine.
(b) When removing and installing intake system parts, cover the openings of the removed parts and
engine openings. Use adhesive tape or other suitable materials.
(c) When installing intake system parts, check that no metal particles have entered the engine or
installed parts.
7. REMOVING AND INSTALLING HOSES

(a) Before removing and installing hoses
Using hoses that are damaged or deformed may cause seeping, leaking, or coming off
hoses, etc. Leaked oil may disperse into the exhaust pipe and ignite or cause fumes, so
take sufficient care during inspection and maintenance.
Neglecting to remove hoses when working on areas that require removal of hoses may
damage the interior of the hoses. Be sure to remove such hoses when working.
(b) When removing, installing, and inspecting hoses
(1) Comply with the following when removing hoses.

When using standard hose removers, do not
use hose removers with pointed tips (hose
pluckers) as pointed tips may damage the
hose or the surface of the pipe.
When using pliers, etc. to make hose removal
process easier, be sure to protect the hose
with a cloth, then pull it out by hand in a
straight line while rotating it slightly.
*1
Hose Remover
(2) When continuing to use the same hose, perform the

following inspection, and replace with a new hose if a
fault is found.
16/22
8/6/12
Replace hoses that have ridden up on the

stay or spool.
Bend hoses and check carefully to see
whether they exhibit damage to their outer
or inner surfaces, cracks, fractures, hardened
or softened rubber, swelling, peeling
interiors, or deformation due to foreign
matter adhering to or penetrating the hose.
Replace with a new hose if any of these
problems are found.
*a
Hose riding up on stay
*b
Hose riding up on spool
(3) Comply with the following when installing hoses.

Take sufficient care with regard to where the
hose is installed.
Do not use lubricant.
Push in firmly up to the specified position (the
seat or spool).
Check whether the hose clamp position,
orientation, and hose layout are correct
(Check that the positioning and orientation
are correct, that the hose is not too long or
too short, that the hose is not different to
before the procedure was done, and that
sufficient space has been left between the
hose and other parts in the area).
After attaching the hoses, check that they are
not leaking or losing fluid (Check that the
hoses are firmly fixed in place with the
clamps).
*a
Push the hose against the spool (Do not push the hose
firmly enough to cause wrinkles on its tip).
*b
Apply clamping force evenly around the exterior of the

hose.
(4) For hose clips and hose clamps, perform the following inspection and replace with new ones if
a fault is found.
17/22
8/6/12
Check for the presence of deformation, rust, damage, and foreign matter.
For clips, check that the springs are performing properly, and that the clip has
sufficient clamping force.
For clamps, check that the clamp can be screw-tightened, that the clamp is not
elliptical in shape, and that the screws are undamaged.
(5) For pipes, perform the following inspection, and replace with a new pipe if a fault is found.
Check that there is no damage, rust, peeling (including peeling plating), foreign matter,
bending, breakage, or fracturing.
(6) Replace the following parts with new ones when removing or changing the attachment position
of the hose.
Transmission oil cooler hose and fuel hose
8. HANDLING OF HOSE CLAMPS

*1
Clamp Track
*2
Spring Type Clamp
(a) Before removing a hose, check the clamp position so that

it can be reinstalled in the same position.
(b) Replace any deformed or dented clamps with new ones.
(c) When reusing a hose, attach the clamp on the clamp track
portion of the hose.
(d) For a spring type clamp, it may be necessary to spread
the tabs slightly after installation by pushing them in the
direction of the arrows as shown in the illustration.
9. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH MOBILE

COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
(a) Install the antenna as far away from the ECU and
sensors of the vehicle electronic systems as possible.
(b) Install the antenna and feeder at least 20 cm (7.87 in.)
away from the ECU and sensors of the vehicle electronic
systems. For details about ECU and sensor locations,
refer to the section on the applicable components.
(c) Keep the antenna and feeder separate from other wiring
as much as possible. This will prevent signals sent from
the communication equipment from affecting vehicle
equipment and vice versa.
(d) Check that the antenna and feeder are correctly
adjusted.
(e) Do not install a high-powered mobile communication
18/22
8/6/12
system.
10. HEADLIGHT INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE

(a) When the headlight dimmer switch assembly is set to head, do not touch the discharge headlight
high-voltage socket area.
NOTICE:
When performing inspection or maintenance, the discharge headlight precautions must be
followed.
(b) When the headlights are illuminated, do not cover the

headlights for 3 minutes or more.
*a Illumination for 3 minutes or more prohibited if covered
NOTICE:
As the headlight's outer lens is made of resin, the
resulting heat created when covering the headlight for
an extended period of time may deform the headlight.
11. SET HOOD SUPPORT ROD
(a) When performing inspections or general maintenance, use the hood support rod in its normal
attachment position A.
NOTICE:
When performing inspections or general maintenance, do not remove the hood support rod.
(b) When it is necessary to open the hood subassembly further to remove the engine, etc., set the
hood support rod in attachment position B, as shown in the illustration.
12. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH TRACTION CONTROL (TR(A)C) AND VEHICLE STABILITY
CONTROL (VSC) SYSTEMS
When testing with a 2-wheel drum tester such as a speedometer tester, a combination speedometer
and brake tester, or a chassis dynamometer, or when jacking up the front wheels and turning the
19/22
8/6/12
wheels, perform the following procedure to enter inspection mode and disable the TR(A)C and VSC
systems
HINT:
The vehicle may slip unexpectedly out of the dynamometer because of TR(A)C and VSC operation.
Pressing the VSC OFF switch does not disable TR(A)C and VSC operation completely.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the VSC OFF indicator light will come on.
Secure the vehicle with chains for safety.
13. PRECAUTIONS FOR TOWING REAR WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLES

(a) Use one of the following methods to tow the vehicle.
(b) If the vehicle has trouble with the chassis or drivetrain, use method 1 (flatbed truck).
NOTICE:
Do not use any towing method other than those shown above.
If a collision occurs when traveling with the towing hook attached, it is not possible to make
appropriate determinations regarding the collision. Accordingly, remove the towing hook after
towing.
20/22
8/6/12
(c) If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency the vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable
or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet(s).
This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for distances of less than 30 km, and at
speeds below 30km/h (19 mph).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drivetrain,
axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
NOTICE:
If the towing speed or distance exceeds the above limits, or the vehicle is towed in a backward
direction with the wheels on the ground, the drivetrain or vehicle may be damaged.
(1) Emergency towing procedure

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal slowly.
NOTICE:
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers
which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains.
Do not turn off the ignition switch. Turning off the ignition switch may result in engagement of the
steering lock, resulting in a hazardous situation or accident.
(d) The towing methods shown below are dangerous and can damage the vehicle, so do not use
them.
(1) Do not tow the vehicle with only 2 wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
If the vehicle is towed with only the front wheels on the ground, the steering may move,
causing the vehicle to become unstable.
NOTICE:
If the vehicle is towed with only the rear wheels on the ground, the drivetrain may overheat
and be damaged.
(2) Do not use a sling-type towing method either from the front or rear.
NOTICE:
If a sling-type tow truck is used, damage may occur to the vehicle body.
21/22
8/6/12
14. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH CATALYTIC CONVERTER

CAUTION:
If a large amount of unburned gasoline or gasoline vapors flow into the converter, it may cause
converter overheating and create a fire hazard. To prevent this, observe the following
precautions:
(a) Use only unleaded gasoline.

(b) Avoid performing unnecessary spark tests.
(1) Perform a spark test only when absolutely necessary. Perform this test as rapidly as possible.
(2) While testing, never race the engine unless instructed.
(c) Avoid a prolonged engine compression measurement. Engine compression measurements must be
performed as rapidly as possible.
(d) Do not run the engine when the fuel tank is nearly empty. This may cause the engine to misfire
and create an extra load on the converter.
22/22
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UYY0AOX
Title: INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS (2013 FR-S)
VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS

1. NOTICE ABOUT VEHICLE CONDITION WHEN RAISING VEHICLE
(a) The vehicle must be unloaded before jacking up or raising the vehicle. Never jack up or raise a
heavily loaded vehicle.
(b) When removing any heavy components like the engine or transaxle, the vehicle center of gravity
will shift. To stabilize the vehicle, place a balance weight in a location that will prevent the vehicle
from rolling or shifting, or place a transmission jack under the appropriate jack position at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
2. NOTICE FOR USING 4 POST LIFT

(a) Follow the safety procedures outlined in the lift's instruction manual.
(b) Do not damage the tires or wheels while driving onto the lift.
(c) Use wheel chocks to secure the vehicle.
3. NOTICE FOR USING JACK AND SAFETY STANDS

(a) Work on a level surface. Use wheel chocks at all times.
(b) Use safety stands with rubber attachments as shown in

the illustration.
*1
Rubber Attachment
(c) Set the jack and safety stands exactly under the specified locations on the vehicle.
(d) Do not work on or leave the vehicle supported only by a jack. Be sure to support the vehicle with
safety stands.
(e) When jacking up the vehicle, first release the parking brake and move the shift lever to N.
(f) When jacking up the entire vehicle:
(1) When jacking up the front wheels first, make sure wheel chocks are behind the rear wheels.
(2) When jacking up the rear wheels first, make sure wheel chocks are in front of the front wheels.
(g) When jacking up only the front or rear wheels of the vehicle:
(1) Before jacking up the front wheels, place wheel chocks on both sides of the rear wheels.
(2) Before jacking up the rear wheels, place wheel chocks on both sides of the front wheels.
(h) When lowering a vehicle that only has its front or rear wheels jacked up.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UYY0AOX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(1) Before lowering the front wheels, make sure wheel chocks are in front of the rear wheels.
(2) Before lowering the rear wheels, make sure wheel chocks are behind the front wheels.
4. NOTICE FOR USING A SWING ARM TYPE LIFT

(b) Use swing arms equipped with rubber attachments as shown in the illustration.
(c) Position the vehicle so that its center of gravity is centered on the lift (length of "L" in the
illustration should be as short as possible).
(d) Ensure that the rubber cushions or swing arms do not contact the body cladding or lower
mouldings.
(e) Be sure to lock the swing arms before raising the vehicle (if equipped with arm locks).
(f) Use the lift to raise the vehicle until the tires are off the ground, then stop the lift and shake the
front and rear of the vehicle to make sure that it is stable.
2/4
8/6/12
5. NOTICE FOR USING PLATE TYPE LIFT

(b) Use plate lift attachments (rubber lifting blocks) on top of the plates.
(c) Be sure to set the vehicle to the specified position described in the following chart and shown in
the following illustration.
Right and left set
position
Front and rear set
position
Center the vehicle on the lift.
Match the attachments to positions A in the illustration.

Do not use a plate lift with attachments that are unable to reach
positions A in the illustration.
(d) Ensure that the plate lift or rubber lifting blocks do not contact the body cladding or lower
mouldings.
(e) Use the lift to raise the vehicle until the tires are off the ground, then stop the lift and shake the
front and rear of the vehicle to make sure that it is stable.
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: TERMS: ABBREVIATIONS USED IN MANUAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UZB09AX
Title: INTRODUCTION: TERMS: ABBREVIATIONS USED IN MANUAL (2013 FR-S)
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN MANUAL

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
ABS
Anti-Lock Brake System
A/C
Air Conditioner
AC
Alternating Current
ACC
Accessory
ACIS
Acoustic Control Induction System
ACM
Active Control Engine Mount
ACSD
Automatic Cold Start Device
ACT
Actuator
A.D.D
Automatic Disconnecting Differential
ADM
P.T. Astra Daihatsu Motor
A/F
Air-Fuel Ratio
AFS
Adaptive Front-Lighting System
AHC
Active Height Control Suspension
AID
Air Injection Control Driver
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
ALT
Alternator
AMP
Amplifier
ANT
Antenna
ASG
Automated Sequential Gearbox
ASL
Automatic Sound Levelizer
ASSB
Assembly Services Sdn. Bhd.
A/T, ATM
Automatic Transmission (Transaxle)
A-TRAC, A-TRC
Active Traction Control
ATDC
After Top Dead Center
ATF
Automatic Transmission Fluid
AUTO
Automatic
AUX
Auxiliary
AVG
Average
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZB09AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
AVS
Adaptive Variable Suspension
AWD
All Wheel Drive
B+, +B
Battery Voltage
BA
Brake Assist
BACS
Boost Altitude Compensation System
BATT
Battery
BDC
Bottom Dead Center
B/L
Bi-Level
B/S
Bore-Stroke Ratio
BTDC
Before Top Dead Center
BVSV
Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve
Calif.
California
CAN
Controller Area Network
CB
Circuit Breaker
CCM
Carbon Ceramic Material
CCo
Catalytic Converter for Oxidation
CCV
Canister Closed Valve
CD
Compact Disc
CF
Cornering Force
CG
Center of Gravity
CH
Channel
CKD
Complete Knock Down
CNG
Compressed Natural Gas
COMB.
Combination
CPS
Combustion Pressure Sensor
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CRAWL
Crawl Control
CRS
Child Restraint System
CTR
Center
C/V
Check Valve
CV
Control Valve
CVT
Continuously Variable Transmission (Transaxle)
CW
Curb Weight
2/9
8/6/12
DC
Direct Current
DEF
Defogger
DFL
Deflector
DIFF.
Differential
DIFF. LOCK
Differential Lock
D/INJ
Direct Injection
DLC
Data Link Connector
DLI
Distributorless Ignition
DOHC
Double Overhead Camshaft
DP
Dash Pot
DS
Dead Soak
DSP
Digital Signal Processor
DTC
Diagnostic Trouble Code
DVD
Digital Versatile Disc
EBD
Electric Brake Force Distribution
EC
Electrochromic
ECAM
Engine Control And Measurement System
ECD
Electronically Controlled Diesel
ECDY
Eddy Current Dynamometer
ECT
Electronic Controlled Automatic Transmission
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
ED
Electro-Deposited
EDU
Electronic Driving Unit
EDIC
Electric Diesel Injection Control
EFI
Electronic Fuel Injection
E/G
Engine
EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
EMPS
Electric Motor Power Steering
EPS
Electric Power Steering
ENG
Engine
ES
Easy & Smooth
ESA
Electronic Spark Advance
3/9
8/6/12
EVAP
Evaporative Emission Control
E-VRV
Electric Vacuum Regulating Valve
EX
Exhaust
FE
Fuel Economy
FF
Front-Engine-Front-Wheel-Drive
F/G
Fuel Gauge
FIPG
Formed In Place Gasket
FL
F/P
FR
Fusible Link
Front Left
Fuel Pump
Front
Front Right
F/W
Flywheel
FW/D
Flywheel Damper
FWD
Front Wheel Drive
GAS
Gasoline
GND
Ground
GPS
Global Positioning System
GSA
Gear Shift Actuator
GTMC
Gac Toyota Motor Co., Ltd.
GTS
Global TechStream
H/B
Hatchback
H-FUSE
High Current Fuse
HID
High Intensity Discharge (Headlight)
HPU
Hydraulic Power Unit
HSG
Housing
HT
Hard Top
HV
Hybrid Vehicle
HWS
Heated Windshield System
IC
Integrated Circuit
IDI
Indirect Diesel Injection
IFS
Independent Front Suspension
IG
Ignition
4/9
8/6/12
IIA
Integrated Ignition Assembly
IMC
INDUS Motor Company Ltd.
IN
Intake (Manifold, Valve)
INT
Intermittent
I/P
Instrument Panel
IRS
Independent Rear Suspension
ISC
Idle Speed Control
ISCV
Idle Speed Control Valve
KD
Kick-Down
KDSS
Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System
LAN
Local Area Network
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LEV
Low Emission Vehicle
LH
Left-Hand
LHD
Left-Hand Drive
LIN
Local Interconnect Network
L/H/W
Length, Height, Width
LLC
Long-Life Coolant
LNG
Liquefied Natural Gas
LPG
Liquefied Petroleum Gas
LSD
Limited Slip Differential
LSP & BV
Load Sensing Proportioning and Bypass Valve
LSPV
Load Sensing Proportioning Valve
MAP
Manifold Absolute Pressure
MAX.
Maximum
MIC
Microphone
MIL
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MIN.
Minimum
MG1
Motor Generator No. 1
MG2
Motor Generator No. 2
MMT
Multi-mode Manual Transmission
MP
Multipurpose
5/9
8/6/12
MPI
Multipoint Electronic Injection
MPX
Multiplex Communication System
M/T
Manual Transmission (Transaxle)
MT
Mount
MTG
Mounting
Neutral
NA
Natural Aspiration
NO.
Number
O2S
Oxygen Sensor
OC
Oxidation Catalyst
OCV
Oil Control Valve
O/D
Overdrive
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturing
OPT
Option
ORVR
On-board Refilling Vapor Recovery
O/S
Oversize
P & BV
Proportioning and Bypass Valve
PBD
Power Back Door
PCS
Power Control System

Pre-crash Safety System/Pre-collision System
PCV
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
PKB
Parking Brake
PPS
Progressive Power Steering
PROM
Programmable Read Only Memory
PS
Power Steering
PSD
Power Slide Door
PTC
Positive Temperature Coefficient
PTO
Power Take-Off
PZEV
Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
P/W
Power Window
R&P
Rack and Pinion
RAM
Random Access Memory
RBS
Recirculating Ball Type Steering
REAS
Relative Absorber System
6/9
8/6/12
R/F
Reinforcement
RFS
Rigid Front Suspension
RH
Right-Hand
RHD
Right-Hand Drive
RL
Rear Left
ROM
Read Only Memory
RR
Rear
Rear Right
RRS
Rigid Rear Suspension
RSE
Rear Seat Entertainment
RWD
Rear Wheel Drive
SC
Supercharger
SCV
Swirl Control Valve (for gasoline engine)

Suction Control Valve (for diesel engine)
SFTM
Sichuan Faw Toyota Motor Co., Ltd.
SIA
Subaru of Indiana Automotive, Inc.
SICS
Starting Injection Control System
SLLC
Super Long Life Coolant
SOC
State Of Charge
SOHC
Single Overhead Camshaft
SPEC
Specification
SPI
Single Point Injection
SPV
Spill Control Valve
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
SSM
Special Service Materials
SST
Special Service Tools
STD
Standard
STJ
Cold-Start Fuel Injection
SULEV
Super Ultra Low Emission Vehicle
T/A
Transaxle
TACH
Tachometer
TASA
Toyota Argentina S.A.
TCAP
Toyota Caetano Portugal, S.A.
7/9
8/6/12
TCM
TCV
Transmission Control Module

Timing Control Valve (for diesel engine)
Tumble Control Valve (for gasoline engine)
TDB
Toyota do Brasil Ltda.
TDC
Top Dead Center
TDV
Toyota de Venezuela, C.A.
TEMP.
Temperature
TFT
TOYOTA Free-Tronic
TFTM
Tianjin Faw Toyota Motor Co., Ltd.
THS ll
TOYOTA Hybrid System ll
TIS
Total Information System for Vehicle Development
T/M
Transmission
TMC
Toyota Motor Corporation
TMCA
Toyota Motor Corporation Australia Ltd.
TMMBC
Toyota Motor Manufacturing de Baja California, S. de R.L. de C.V.
TMMC
Toyota Motor Manufacturing Canada Inc.
TMMF
Toyota Motor Manufacturing France S.A.S.
TMMI
Toyota Motor Manufacturing, Indiana, Inc.
TMMIN
P.T. Toyota Motor Manufacturing Indonesia
TMMK
TOYOTA Motor Manufacturing Kentucky, Inc.
TMMR
Toyota Motor Manufacturing Russia
TMMT
Toyota Motor Manufacturing Turkey Inc.
TMMTX
Toyota Motor Manufacturing, Texas, Inc.
TMUK
Toyota Motor Manufacturing (UK) Ltd.
TMP
Toyota Motor Philippines Corp.
TMT
Toyota Motor Thailand Co. Ltd.
TMV
Toyota Motor Vietnam Co., Ltd.
TPCA
Toyota Peugeot Citroen Automobiles Czech, s.r.o.
TRAC/TRC
Traction Control System
TSAM
Toyota South Africa Motors (Pty) Ltd.
TVIP
TOYOTA Vehicle Intrusion Protection
TWC
Three-Way Catalyst
U/D
Underdrive
8/9
8/6/12
U/S
Undersize
VCV
Vacuum Control Valve
VDIM
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
VENT
Ventilator
VGRS
Variable Gear Ratio Steering
VIM
Vehicle Interface Module
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VLC
Valve Lift Control
VPS
Variable Power Steering
VSC
Vehicle Stability Control
VSV
Vacuum Switching Valve
VTV
Vacuum Transmitting Valve
VVT-i
Variable Valve Timing-intelligent
W/, w/
With
WGN
Wagon
W/H
Wire Harness
W/O, w/o
Without
X-REAS
X-Relative Absorber System
1ST, 1st
First
2ND, 2nd
Second
2WD
Two Wheel Drive Vehicle (4 x 2)
3RD, 3rd
Third
4TH, 4th
Fourth
4WD
Four Wheel Drive Vehicle (4 x 4)
4WS
Four Wheel Steering System
5TH, 5th
Fifth
6TH, 6th
Sixth
7TH, 7th
Seventh
8TH, 8th
Eighth
9/9
8/6/12
INTRODUCTION: TERMS: GLOSSARY OF SAE AND SCION TERMS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000286702CX
Title: INTRODUCTION: TERMS: GLOSSARY OF SAE AND SCION TERMS (2013 FR-S)
GLOSSARY OF SAE AND SCION TERMS

This glossary lists all SAE-J1930 terms and abbreviations used in this manual in compliance with SAE
recommendations, as well as their SCION equivalents.
SAE
SAE TERM
SCION TERM
ABBREVIATION
( )-ABBREVIATION
A/C
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioner
ACL
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner, A/CL
AIR
Secondary Air Injection
Air Injection (AI)
AP
Accelerator Pedal
B+
Battery Positive Voltage
+B, Battery Voltage
BARO
Barometric Pressure
CAC
Charge Air Cooler
Intercooler
CARB
Carburetor
Carburetor
CFI
Continuous Fuel Injection
CKP
Crankshaft Position
Crank Angle
CL
Closed Loop
Closed Loop
CMP
Camshaft Position
Cam Angle
CPP
Clutch Pedal Position
CTOX
Continuous Trap Oxidizer
CTP
Closed Throttle Position
LL ON, Idle ON
DFI
Direct Fuel Injection
Direct Injection (DI./INJ)
DI
Distributor Ignition
DLC3
Data Link Connector 3
OBD II Diagnostic Connector
DTC
DTM
Diagnostic Test Mode
ECL
Engine Coolant Level
ECM
Engine Control Module
Engine Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
ECT
Engine Coolant Temperature
Coolant Temperature, Water Temperature

(THW)
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read

Only Memory
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read

Only Memory (EEPROM)
1/4
8/6/12
EFE
Early Fuel Evaporation
Cold Mixture Heater (CMH), Heat Control

Valve (HCV)
EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
EI
Electronic Ignition
Distributorless Ignition (DLI)
EM
Engine Modification
Engine Modification (EM)
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read Only

Memory
Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM)
EVAP
Evaporative Emission
Evaporative Emission Control (EVAP)
FC
Fan Control
FEEPROM
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable

Read Only Memory
FEPROM
Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only

Memory
FF
Flexible Fuel
FP
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump
GEN
Generator
Alternator
GND
Ground
Ground (GND)
HO2S
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO 2 S)
IAC
Idle Air Control
Idle Speed Control (ISC)
IAT
Intake Air Temperature
Intake or Inlet Air Temperature
ICM
Ignition Control Module
IFI
Indirect Fuel Injection
Indirect Injection (IDL)
IFS
Inertia Fuel-Shutoff
ISC
Idle Speed Control
KS
Knock Sensor
Knock Sensor
MAF
Mass Airflow
Air Flow Meter
MAP
Manifold Absolute Pressure
Manifold Pressure Intake Vacuum

Electric Bleed Air Control Valve (EBCV)
MC
Mixture Control
Mixture Control Valve (MCV)

Electric Air Control Valve (EACV)
MDP
Manifold Differential Pressure
MFI
Multiport Fuel Injection
Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI)
MIL
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
MST
Manifold Surface Temperature
MVZ
Manifold Vacuum Zone
2/4
8/6/12
NVRAM
Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
O2S
Oxygen Sensor
Oxygen Sensor, O 2 Sensor (O 2 S)
OBD
On-Board Diagnostic
On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
OC
Oxidation Catalytic Converter
Oxidation Catalytic Convert (OC), CCo
OL
Open Loop
Open Loop
PAIR
Pulsed Secondary Air Injection
Air Suction (AS)
PCM
Powertrain Control Module
PNP
Park/Neutral Position
PROM
Programmable Read Only Memory
PSP
Power Steering Pressure
PTOX
Periodic Trap Oxidizer
RAM
Random Access Memory
Random Access Memory (RAM)
RM
Relay Module
ROM
Read Only Memory
Read Only Memory (ROM)
RPM
Engine Speed
Engine Speed
SC
Supercharger
Supercharger
SCB
Supercharger Bypass
E-ABV
SFI
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection
Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI), Sequential

Injection
SPL
Smoke Puff Limiter
SRI
Service Reminder Indicator
SRT
System Readiness Test
ST
Scan Tool
TB
Throttle Body
Throttle Body
TBI
Throttle Body Fuel Injection
TC
Turbocharger
Turbocharger
TCC
Torque Converter Clutch
Torque Converter
TCM
Transmission Control Module
Transmission ECU, ECT ECU
TP
Throttle Position
Throttle Position
TR
Transmission Range
TVV
Thermal Vacuum Valve
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

Diesel Particulate Trap (DPT)
Single Point Injection

Central Fuel Injection (Ci)
Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve (BVSV)

Thermostatic Vacuum Switching Valve (TVSV)
3/4
8/6/12
TWC
Three-Way Catalytic Converter
Three-Way Catalytic (TWC)

Manifold Converter
CC R O
TWC+OC
Three-Way + Oxidation Catalytic

Converter
CC R + CCo
VAF
Volume Airflow
Air Flow Meter
VR
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
VSS
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor
WOT
Wide Open Throttle
Full Throttle
WU-OC
Warm Up Oxidation Catalytic Converter
WU-TWC
Warm Up Three-Way Catalytic Converter
3GR
Third Gear
4GR
Fourth Gear
4/4
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: BODY: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000019FS055X
Title: MAINTENANCE: BODY: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. BODY INSPECTION
(a) Check the body exterior for dents, scratches and rust.
(b) Check the underbody for rust and damage.
If necessary, replace the damaged part or repair the damaged area.
2. REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING FILTER

(a) Remove the air conditioning filter
(b) Visually inspect the surface of the air conditioning filter.

(c) If the air conditioning filter is contaminated with foreign matter, replace it.
3. ROAD TEST
(a) Check the engine and chassis for abnormal noises.
(b) Check that the vehicle does not wander or pull to one side.
(c) Check that the brakes work properly and do not drag.
(d) Set the parking brake shoes and drums.
4. TIGHTEN BOLTS AND NUTS ON CHASSIS AND BODY

(a) If necessary, tighten the bolts and nuts on the chassis parts listed below.
Front axle and suspension
Drivetrain
Rear axle and suspension
Brake system
Engine mounts
Other chassis parts
(b) If necessary, tighten the bolts and nuts on the body parts listed below.
Seat belt system
Seats
Doors and hood
Body mounts
Fuel tank
Exhaust system
Other body parts
5. FINAL INSPECTION
(a) Check the operation of the body parts.
(1) Hood
Auxiliary catch operates properly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000019FS055X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: BODY: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
Hood locks securely when closed.

(2) Front doors
Door locks operate properly.
Doors close properly.
(3) Luggage compartment door
Luggage compartment door opens and closes properly.
(4) Seats
Seats adjust easily and lock securely in any position.
Front seatbacks lock securely in any position.
Fold-down rear seatbacks lock securely.
(5) Be sure to deliver a clean car. Make sure to check the following:
Steering wheel
Shift lever knob
All switches and knobs
Door handles
Seats
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000019FS055X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: BRAKE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001AQU061X
Title: MAINTENANCE: BRAKE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. INSPECT BRAKE LINE PIPES AND HOSES
HINT:
Work in a well-lighted area. Turn the front wheels fully to the
right or left before beginning the inspection.
(a) Using a mirror, check the entire circumference and length

of the brake lines and hoses for:
Damage
Wear
Deformation
Cracks
Bends
Corrosion
Leaks
Twists
(b) Check all the clamps for tightness and connections for
leakage.
(c) Check that the hoses and lines are not near sharp edges,
moving parts or the exhaust system.
(d) Check that the lines are installed properly and pass
through the center of the grommets.
2. INSPECT BRAKE PEDAL

(a) Check the brake pedal
for Automatic Transmission,
for Manual Transmission).
3. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE

(a) Check the parking brake shoe clearance and parking brake lever travel
(b) Check the parking brake cables to ensure that they are not deformed or binding.
4. INSPECT BRAKE LININGS AND DRUMS

(a) Check the parking brake linings and drums.
5. INSPECT FRONT BRAKE

(a) Check the front brake pads and discs
6. INSPECT REAR BRAKE

(a) Check the rear brake pads and discs
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001AQU061X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: BRAKE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
7. INSPECT OR CHANGE BRAKE FLUID

(a) Inspect or change the brake fluid
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001AQU061X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: CHASSIS: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001AQV066X
Title: MAINTENANCE: CHASSIS: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. INSPECT STEERING LINKAGE AND GEAR HOUSING
(a) Check the steering wheel free play
(b) Check the steering linkage for looseness or damage.

(1) Check that the tie rod ends do not have excessive play.
(2) Check that the dust seals and boots are not damaged.
(3) Check that the boot clamps are not loose.
(4) Check that the steering gear box is not damaged.
(5) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the steering gear box.
2. INSPECT SUSPENSION BALL JOINT AND DUST COVER

(a) Inspect the ball joints for excessive looseness.
(1) Jack up the front of the vehicle and place wooden blocks with a height of 180 to 200 mm (7.09
to 7.87 in.) under the front tires.
(2) Jack up the lower suspension arm until there is about half a load on the front suspension.
(3) Check that the front wheels are pointing straight ahead. Use wheel chocks on all 4 wheels.
(4) Using a lever, pry up the end of the lower arm. Check the amount of play.
Maximum ball joint vertical play:
0 mm (0 in.)
If there is any play, replace the ball joint.
(b) Check the dust cover for damage.
3. INSPECT CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL AND SYSTEM OPERATION

(a) Check the clutch fluid level
4. INSPECT DRIVE SHAFT BOOTS

(a) Check the drive shaft boots for loose clamps, cracks, grease leaks, kinks or damage.
5. INSPECT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

(a) Visually check the automatic transmission for fluid leakage. If fluid is leaking, find the cause and
repair it.
(b) Inspect the automatic transmission fluid
6. REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

(a) Replace the automatic transmission fluid
7. INSPECT MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL

(a) Visually check the manual transmission for oil leakage. If fluid is leaking, find the cause and repair
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001AQV066X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: CHASSIS: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
it.
(b) Inspect the manual transmission oil
8. INSPECT REAR DIFFERENTIAL OIL

(a) Visually check the rear differential for oil leakage. If fluid is leaking, find the cause and repair it.
(b) Inspect the rear differential oil
9. PERFORM TIRE ROTATION

10. INSPECT FRONT AND REAR SUSPENSION
(a) Check the front and rear suspension.
SUSPENSION TYPE
SEE PROCEDURE
Front Suspension
Rear Suspension
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001AQV066X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: ENGINE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001AQT066X
Title: MAINTENANCE: ENGINE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
HINT:
Perform these procedures after the engine has cooled down.
1. INSPECT DRIVE BELT

(a) Inspect the drive belt
2. INSPECT ENGINE OIL

(a) Inspect the engine oil
3. REPLACE ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

(a) Replace the engine oil and oil filter
4. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT

(a) Inspect the engine coolant
5. REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT

(a) Replace the engine coolant
6. REPLACE SPARK PLUGS

(a) Replace the spark plugs
7. REPLACE FUEL FILTER

(a) Replace the fuel filter
8. INSPECT BATTERY
(a) Check the battery
9. INSPECT AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT

(a) Remove the air cleaner filter element.
(b) Check that the air cleaner filter element is not excessively dirty. If the air cleaner filter element is
excessively dirty, replace the air cleaner filter element.
(c) Clean the air cleaner filter element with compressed air.
(d) Reinstall the air cleaner filter element.
10. INSPECT EXHAUST PIPES AND MOUNTINGS

(a) Visually check the pipes, hangers and connections for severe corrosion, leaks or damage.
11. INSPECT FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY

(a) Inspect the fuel tank cap gasket
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001AQT066X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: ENGINE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
12. INSPECT FUEL LINES, CONNECTIONS, FUEL TANK VAPOR VENT SYSTEM HOSES AND FUEL
TANK BANDS
(a) Visually check the fuel lines and hoses for cracks, leakage, loose connections, or deformation.
(b) Check for tank band looseness or deformation.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001AQT066X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: INSIDE VEHICLE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UZE09JX
Title: MAINTENANCE: INSIDE VEHICLE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
These are maintenance and inspection items that are considered to be the owner's responsibility.
The owner can do them or they can have them done at a service center.
These items include those that should be checked on a daily basis, those that in most cases
do not require special tools, and those that are considered to be reasonable for the owner
to do.
General maintenance items and procedures are as follows:
1. GENERAL NOTES
Maintenance requirements vary depending on the country.
Check the maintenance schedule in the owner's manual supplement.
Determine the appropriate time to service the vehicle using either miles driven or time
(months) elapsed, whichever reaches the specification first.
Maintain similar intervals between periodic maintenance unless noted.
Failing to check each vehicle part could lead to poor engine performance and increase exhaust
emissions.
2. LIGHTS
(a) Check that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights illuminate or
blink properly. Also, check if they have enough brightness.
(b) Check that the headlights are aimed properly.
3. WARNING LIGHTS AND BUZZERS

(a) Check that all the warning lights and buzzers are working.
4. HORNS
(a) Check if the horns are working correctly.
5. WINDSHIELD GLASS
(a) Check for scratches, pits or abrasions.
6. WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

(a) Check that the washers are aimed properly. Also, check that the washer fluid hits the center of
the operating range of each wiper on the windshield.
(b) Check if the wipers streak. Replace them if necessary.
7. WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
(a) When the air conditioning is on the defroster setting, check that air comes out of the defroster
outlets.
8. REAR VIEW MIRROR

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZE09JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
(a) Check that the rear view mirror is securely mounted.
9. SUN VISORS
(a) Check that the sun visors move freely and are securely mounted.
10. STEERING WHEEL

(a) Check that the steering wheel has the proper amount of free play. Also check for steering difficulty
and unusual noises
11. SEATS
(a) Check that the seat adjusters, seatback recliner and other seat controls operate smoothly.
(b) Check that all the latches lock securely in all positions.
(c) Check that the locks hold securely in all positions.
(d) Check that the headrests move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in all
latched positions.
(e) When the rear seatbacks are folded down, check that the latches lock securely.
12. SEAT BELTS

(a) Check that the seat belt components, such as the buckles, retractors and anchors, operate
properly and smoothly.
(b) Check that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
13. ACCELERATOR PEDAL

(a) Check that the pedal operates smoothly. Check that the pedal does not have uneven resistance
or stick in certain positions.
14. BRAKE PEDAL

(a) Check that the brake pedal operates smoothly.
(b) Check that the pedal has the proper reserve distance and free play
Transmission,
for Automatic
for Manual Transmission).
(c) Start the engine and check the brake booster function.
(d) Start the engine and check the brake system indicator.
15. BRAKES
(a) In a safe place, check that the vehicle does not pull or lead to the side when applying the brakes.
16. PARKING BRAKE

(a) Check that the parking brake lever has the proper amount of travel
(b) On a slight grade, check that the parking brake alone can hold the vehicle in place.
17. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION "PARK" MECHANISM

(a) Check the shift lever for proper and smooth operation.
(b) When the shift lever is in P and all brakes are released in an area that has a slight grade, check
that the vehicle is stable.
18. FLOOR MATS

2/3
8/6/12
(a) Check that the correct floor mats are used, and that they are properly installed.
3/3
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: OUTSIDE VEHICLE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UZD08YX
Title: MAINTENANCE: OUTSIDE VEHICLE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
These are maintenance and inspection items that are considered to be the owner's responsibility.
The owner can do them or they can have them done at a service center.
These items include those that should be checked on a daily basis, those that in most cases
do not require special tools, and those that are considered to be reasonable for the owner
to do.
General maintenance items and procedures are as follows:
1. GENERAL NOTES
Following the maintenance schedule is mandatory.
Failing to check each vehicle part could lead to poor engine performance and increase exhaust
emissions.
2. TIRES
(a) Check the tire inflation pressure with a gauge. Make adjustments if necessary.
(b) Check the surfaces of the tires for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
3. WHEEL NUTS
(a) Check for nuts that are loose or missing. Tighten them if necessary.
4. TIRE ROTATION
(a) Check the maintenance schedule in the owner's manual supplement.
5. WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

(a) Check the blades for wear or cracks whenever they are unable to wipe the windshield clean.
Replace them if necessary.
6. FLUID LEAKS
(a) Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel, oil, water and other fluids.
NOTICE:
If you smell fuel or notice any leaks, locate the cause and correct it.
7. DOORS AND ENGINE HOOD

(a) Check that all of the doors and the hood operate smoothly, and that all the latches lock securely.
(b) When the primary latch is released, check that the engine hood secondary latch prevents the
hood from opening.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZD08YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: OUTSIDE VEHICLE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZD08YX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: UNDER HOOD: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UZF091X
Title: MAINTENANCE: UNDER HOOD: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. GENERAL NOTES
Following the maintenance schedule is mandatory.
Maintain similar intervals between periodic maintenance unless noted.
Failing to check each maintenance item could lead to poor engine performance and increase
exhaust emissions.
2. WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

(a) Check that there is sufficient fluid in the tank.
3. ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

(a) Check that the coolant level is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the see-through reservoir.
4. RADIATOR AND HOSES

(a) Check that the front of the radiator is clean and not blocked by leaves, dirt and bugs.
(b) Check the radiator and hoses for:
Damage
Cracks
Kinks
Corrosion
Rot
Clogging
Leaks
5. BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

(a) Check that the electrolyte level of all the battery cells is between the upper and lower level lines
on the case.
HINT:
If the electrolyte level is difficult to see, lightly shake the vehicle.
6. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

(a) Check that the brake fluid level is near the upper level line on the see-through reservoirs.
7. ENGINE DRIVE BELT

(a) Check the drive belt for fraying, cracks, wear or oil.
8. ENGINE OIL LEVEL

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZF091X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
MAINTENANCE: UNDER HOOD: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
(a) Park the vehicle on in a level place.

(b) With the engine turned off, check that the engine oil level is between the full level and low level
marks.
HINT:
Check the oil level before the engine is started, or 5 minutes or more after the engine has been
stopped (after engine warming).
Check both sides of the dipstick and use the value obtained from the lower side oil level.
9. EXHAUST SYSTEM
(a) Visually inspect for severe corrosion, cracks, holes or loose supports.
HINT:
If any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell of the exhaust fumes is noticed, inspect and repair
the exhaust system.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UZF091X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KES00HX
Title: PREPARATION: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Vernier caliper
Alignment tester
Toe-in gauge
Camber-caster-kingpin gauge
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KES00HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: AUDIO / VIDEO: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020C700RX
Title: PREPARATION: AUDIO / VIDEO: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020C700RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: AUDIO / VIDEO: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020FO00IX
Title: PREPARATION: AUDIO / VIDEO: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
Toyota Electrical Tester Set
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020FO00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002H7Q010X
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Axle
Torque wrench
Dial indicator with magnetic base
Non-residue solvent
Differential
Torque wrench
Micrometer
Non-residue solvent
Prussian blue
MP grease
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002H7Q010X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002H7R00ZX
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
Differential
ITEM
Rear
differential
oil
(except
CAPACITY
OIL GRADE
1.10 to 1.20 liters (1.17 to 1.27 US qts,

0.97 to 1.05 Imp. qts)
Toyota genuine differential gear oil LT 75W85 GL-5 or equivalent
1.10 to 1.20 liters (1.17 to 1.27 US qts,

0.97 to 1.05 Imp. qts)
Toyota genuine differential gear oil LX 75W85 GL-5 or equivalent
LSD)
Rear
differential
oil
(for LSD)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002H7R00ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZWC00VX
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110
(09013-6C130)
Set, Hexagon Socket Wrench
Socket Hexagon
10mm
09051-1C110
Plastic Hammer
09051-1C300
Chisel
09072-1C200
Vernier Calipers
150mm
09905-00013
Snap Ring Pliers
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZWC00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002H7P00ZX
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing 1281, Three Bond 1281 or equivalent
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002H7P00ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KC800HX
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09213-70011
Crankshaft Pulley Holding Tool
09308-00010
Oil Seal Puller
09330-00021
Companion Flange Holding Tool
09504-22011
Differential Side Bearing
Replacer
09506-30012
Differential Drive Pinion Rear
Bearing Cone Replacer
09520-01010
Drive Shaft Remover Attachment
09520-24010
Differential Side Gear Shaft
Puller
(09520-32040)
09554-22010
Shocker Set
Differential Oil Seal Replacer
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KC800HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
09556-22010
Drive Pinion Front Bearing
Remover
09570-18011
Rear Differential Mount Cushion
Remover and Replacer
(09571-01011)
Remover
(09571-01021)
Base
(09571-01041)
Replacer
(09571-01091)
Bolt and Nut
Rear Differential Mount Cushion
09570-18021
Remover and Replacer
(09571-01091)
Bolt and Nut
(09571-01101)
Remover
(09571-01111)
Base No.1
2/7
8/6/12
(09571-01121)
Base No.2
(09571-01131)
Replacer
Upper Ball Joint Dust Cover
09636-20010
Replacer
09710-18050
Suspension Bush Tool Set
(09711-01060)
Remover and Replacer No.3
(09711-01100)
Base No.2
Rear Suspension Bush Tool
09710-30012
Set
(09710-04081)
09930-00010
Base
Drive Shaft Nut Chisel
3/7
8/6/12
09950-00020
Bearing Remover
09950-30012
Puller A Set
(09951-03010)
Upper Plate
(09953-03010)
Center Bolt
(09954-03010)
Arm
(09955-03030)
Lower Plate 130
(09956-03030)
Adaptor 20
09950-40011
Puller B Set
(09951-04020)
Hanger 200
(09952-04010)
Slide Arm
4/7
8/6/12
(09953-04030)
Center Bolt 200
(09954-04010)
Arm 25
(09955-04061)
Claw No. 6
(09957-04010)
Attachment
(09958-04011)
Holder
09950-60010
Replacer Set
(09951-00350)
Replacer 35
(09951-00380)
Replacer 38
(09951-00430)
Replacer 43
5/7
8/6/12
(09951-00480)
Replacer 48
(09951-00580)
Replacer 58
(09951-00590)
Replacer 59
(09952-06010)
Adapter
Replacer Set No. 2
(09951-00720)
Replacer 72
(09951-00890)
Replacer 89
09950-70010
Handle Set
(09951-00410)
Replacer 41
09950-60020
6/7
8/6/12
(09951-00620)
Replacer 62
(09951-07100)
Handle 100
(09951-07200)
Handle 200
(09952-06010)
Adapter
Ball Joint Puller Set
Ball Joint Puller
09960-20010
(09961-02010)
Assembly
(09961-02060)
Spacer B
7/7
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YI07PX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Vinyl tape
Ruler
Micrometer
Torque wrench
Wooden Plate
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YI07PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YJ04TX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
ITEM
CAPACITY
CLASSIFICATION
Brake fluid
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT3
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YJ04TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YH07OX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09017-1C100
Union Nut Wrench
10 mm
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YH07OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YI07QX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Vinyl tape
Ruler
Micrometer
Wooden block
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YI07QX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YJ04UX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
ITEM
CAPACITY
CLASSIFICATION
Brake fluid
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YJ04UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YH07PX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09017-1C100
Union Nut Wrench
10 mm
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YH07PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043ET003X
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000043ET003X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043ES003X
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FRS)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09017-1C100
Union Nut Wrench
10mm
09017-1C110
Union Nut Wrench
12mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000043ES003X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YI07OX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YI07OX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YJ04SX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
ITEM
CAPACITY
CLASSIFICATION
Brake fluid
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YJ04SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039YH07NX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09017-1C100
Union Nut Wrench
10mm
09017-1C110
Union Nut Wrench
12mm
99999-90022
Hand-held vacuum pump
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039YH07NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: CLUTCH: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZTT00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CLUTCH: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Vernier calipers
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZTT00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: CLUTCH: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZTU00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CLUTCH: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
ITEM
Brake fluid
CAPACITY
-
CLASSIFICATION
SAE J1703 or FMVSS NO. 116 DOT3
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZTU00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: CLUTCH: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZTW00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CLUTCH: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09012-2C510
Deep Socket Wrench
19mm
09017-1C100
Union Nut Wrench
10mm
09051-1C400
Pin Punch
09072-1C200
Vernier Calipers
150mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZTW00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: CLUTCH: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZTS00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CLUTCH: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09301-00110
Clutch Guide Tool
09333-00013
Clutch Diaphragm Spring Aligner
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZTS00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: CRUISE CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001VAO00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CRUISE CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001VAO00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000312203NX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Protective tape
Protective goggle
Metal saw
Cutter or other similar tool
Plastic-faced hammer
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000312203NX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZNQ076X
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
MP grease
Toyota genuine adhesive 1324, Three bond 1324 or equivalent
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZNQ076X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000312003OX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C120
(09013-1C120)
Set, "TORX" Socket Wrench
"TORX" Socket Wrench T-type
T30
09050-00032
Air Drill
09050-20010
Air Riveter
09061-1C100
Clip Remover
6mm
09061-1C300
Set, Moulding Remover
Remover A, Moulding
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
(09061-1C310)
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: SSM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000367203QX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
08850-00065
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000367203QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
Butyl Tape Set
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043Y4003X
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09812-18010
Front Door Glass Adjusting Tool
09812-18020
Front Door Fix Window Glass
Adjusting Tool
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000043Y4003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Z4E00CX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Protective tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Z4E00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
MP grease
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Z4D00CX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C120
(09013-1C120)
T30
09011-3C400
Socket Wrench
09061-1C100
Clip Remover
6mm
09061-1C110
Clip Remover
10mm
09061-1C300
Remover A, Moulding
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
(09061-1C310)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Z4D00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Z4D00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JAQ00HX
Title: PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JAQ00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCI00HX
Title: PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09051-1C110
Plastic Hammer
09905-00012
Snap Ring No. 1 Expander
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCI00HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JAP00GX
Title: PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09325-20010
Transmission Oil Plug
09325-40010
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JAP00GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000208P00JX
Title: PREPARATION: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Protective tape
Heat light
Piano wire
Wooden block or similar object
For tying both piano wire ends
Cutter or other similar tool

Torque wrench
Double-sided tape
Adhesive
3M DP-105 or equivalent
Infrared light
Non-residue solvent
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000208P00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000208O00JX
Title: PREPARATION: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09061-1C100
Clip Remover
6mm
09061-1C300
(09061-1C320)
Remover B, Moulding
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000208O00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205L00FX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Vernier calipers
Pin (1mm)
Vise
Ohmmeter
Ammeter
Aluminium plate
Soldering iron
Solder
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205L00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205K00FX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09011-3C400
Socket Wrench
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205K00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205J00FX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09387-00041
Bearing Puller Assembly
09632-36010
Steering Vane Pump Bearing
Replacer
09820-36010
Starter Amateur Bearing
Remover & Replacer
09950-60010
Replacer Set
(09951-00250)
Replacer 25
(09951-00520)
Replacer 52
09950-70010
Handle Set
(09951-07100)
Handle 100
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205J00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: SST (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205J00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: COOLANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZAV00KX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: COOLANT (2013 FR-S)
COOLANT
ITEM
CAPACITY
7.2 liters (7.6

US qts, 6.3
Imp. qts) (for
Manual
Engine Transmission)
coolant 7.5 liters (7.9
US qts, 6.6
Imp. qts) (for
Automatic
Transmission)
CLASSIFICATION
Use only "TOYOTA Super Long Life Coolant (SLLC) 50 Blue" or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and nonborate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology (coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZAV00KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZAU00KX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Thermometer
Torque wrench
Vernier caliper
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZAU00KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZAT00KX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110

-
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set

-
09230-40010
Radiator Cap Tester

-
09231-40010
Radiator Cap Tester

Adapter Set A
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZAT00KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZAS00KX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09960-10010
Variable Pin Wrench Set
(09962-01000)
Variable Pin Wrench Arm Assembly
(09963-00700)
Pin 7
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZAS00KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KD402GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Battery
Pressure Gauge
Sound scope
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KD402GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004B3Y006X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09012-2C510
Deep Socket Wrench
19mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004B3Y006X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004B6C007X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004B6C007X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020IF00EX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Voltmeter
Ohmmeter
Battery
Thermometer
Torque wrench
Spark plug cleaner
Megohmmeter
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020IF00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020IE00EX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09011-3C220
Wrench,Spark Plug
14mm
09017-1C140
Union Nut Wrench
19mm
09022-1C500
Tilt Extension Bar
35mm
09022-3C200
Joint,Universal
54mm
09025-00010
Torque Wrench (30 kgf-cm)
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
99999-70027
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020IE00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043I2006X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09224-00010
O2 Sensor Wrench
09240-00020
Wire Gauge Set
09250-53011
Engine Mount Spacer
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000043I2006X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UYQ00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Abrasive compound
Angle gauge
Caliper gauge
Carbide cutter (30)
Carbide cutter (45)
Carbide cutter (60)
Carbide cutter (75)
CO/HC meter
Compression gauge
Connecting rod aligner
Cylinder gauge
Dial indicator
Dye penetrant
Engine tune-up tester
Engine Stand
Feeler gauge
Marker
Micrometer
Piston ring compressor
Piston ring expander
Plastigage
Precision straightedge
Reamer (5.5 mm)
Steel square
Torque wrench
Valve seat cutter
V-block
Vernier caliper
Wooden block
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UYQ00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
Wire (1.0 mm)
Hexagonal wrench (2.5 mm)
Prussian blue
Plastic-faced hammer
400-grit sandpaper
HINT:
Torx is registered trademark of Textron Inc.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UYQ00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UYO00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110
(09013-6C100)
Socket Hexagon
5mm
09011-3C220
Wrench,Spark Plug
14mm
09012-2C510
Deep Socket Wrench

19mm
09012-2C520
Deep Socket Wrench

24mm
09013-1C551
"TORX" Socket Wrench E-type

E14
09013-1C560

E16
09017-1C140
Union Nut Wrench

19mm
09061-1C110
Clip Remover
10mm
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UYO00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
09072-1C200
Vernier Calipers
150mm
09090-04020
Engine Sling Device
09091-1C100
Oil Pan Seal Cutter
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UYO00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UYP00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Toyota Genuine Adhesive 1324, Three Bond 1324 or equivalent
Three Bond 1105 or equivalent
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UYP00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000206N00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09201-10000
Valve Guide Bushing Remover &
Replacer Set
(09201-01050)
Valve Guide Bushing Remover &
Replacer 5
09201-41020
Valve Stem Oil Seal Replacer
09202-70020
Valve Spring Compressor
(09202-00010)
Attachment
(09202-01010)
Arm
(09202-01020)
Set Bolt
09223-15030
Oil Seal & Bearing Replacer
09223-22010
Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000206N00GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
Replacer
09228-22020
Oil Filter Wrench
09950-70010
Handle Set
(09951-07100)
Handle 100
(09951-07150)
Handle 150
(09962-01000)
(09963-00700)
Pin 7
(09963-01000)
Pin 10
Fuel Hose Puller
09960-10010
SU003-03936
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000201K00IX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Stop watch
Sound scope
Measuring flask
Ohmmeter
Volt meter
Torque wrench
Needle nose pliers
Engine lifter
Vernier calipers
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000201K00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000201J00IX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110
(09013-6C110)
Socket Hexagon
6mm
09013-1C160
"TORX" Plus Socket Wrench
09017-1C130
Union Nut Wrench
17mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000201J00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001U0T03YX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Butyl Tape Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001U0T03YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000201I00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09260-39020
Injector Seal Toolset
(09261-03010)
Injector Seal Holder
(09261-03020)
Injector Seal Guide
Injection Measuring Tool Set
(09268-41141)
Adapter
(09268-41410)
Clamp
(09268-41700)
Hose Band
(09268-41800)
Tie Band
(95336-08070)
Hose
09268-31014
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000201I00GX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
09268-45100
EFI Fuel Pressure Gauge Set
(09268-41250)
T Joint
(09268-41260)
Gauge
(09268-41270)
Straight Joint
(95336-08070)
Hose
(96135-51300)
Clip
09808-01071
Claw No.3
09808-14030
Fuel Pump Retainer Tool
Handle
(09808-01010)
2/3
8/6/12
(09808-01020)
Bolt
(09808-01030)
Plate
(09808-01050)
Bolt And Washer Set
09842-30090
EFI Inspection Wire I
SU003-03936
Fuel Hose Puller
3/3
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KD602OX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Vernier calipers
Wooden block
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KD602OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004ICT008X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09250-53011
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004ICT008X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
Engine Mount Spacer
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020DH00LX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Oil pressure gauge
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020DH00LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020DI00NX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
Standard Oil Grade
OIL GRADE
OIL VISCOSITY
(SAE)
API grade SL "energy-conserving", SM "energy-conserving", SN "resource-conserving"

or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
0W-20
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
5W-20
5W-30
Standard Capacity
ITEM
CAPACITY
Drain and refill with oil filter change
Drain and refill without oil filter change
Dry fill
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020DI00NX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000005B3V000X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09012-2C510
Deep Socket Wrench
19mm
09012-2C520
Deep Socket Wrench
24mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C110
AC/DC400A Probe
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000005B3V000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: SSM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020DG00LX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing Black, Three Bond 1217G or equivalent
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020DG00LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020DF00JX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09228-22020
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020DF00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
Oil Filter Wrench
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205I00CX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Battery
Torque wrench
Service Wire Harness
Vernier calipers
Vise
Sandpaper (No. 400)
Ohmmeter
Ammeter
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205I00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
High-temperature grease
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205H00CX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09012-1C130
Deep Socket Wrench
14mm
09041-2C220
"TORX" Driver
T25H
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
(09013-1C110)
T25
09905-00013
Snap Ring Pliers
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205H00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000005B0X000X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09249-37010
Wrench
VVT Set Bolt
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000005B0X000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020E500QX
Title: PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Wooden block
metal saw
Shock absorber disposal
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020E500QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003GGB021X
Title: PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110
(09013-6C110)
Socket Hexagon
6mm
09013-6C510
Long Socket Hexagon
6mm
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003GGB021X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KEP00IX
Title: PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09710-18050
(09711-01070)
(09711-01080)
(09711-01090)
Base No.1
(09711-01110)
Base No.3
09726-18010
Stud Bolt Socket Wrench
09726-18011
Stud Bolt Socket Wrench
09727-30021
Coil Spring Compressor
Bolt Set
(09727-00010)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KEP00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: SST (2013 FR-S)
(09727-00021)
Arm Set
(09727-00031)
Compressor
Socket,Lock Nut17
09729-97202
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KEP00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020FZ00IX
Title: PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Vinyl tape
Torque wrench
Clip remover
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020FZ00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020G000IX
Title: PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
ITEM
Compressor oil
CAPACITY
-
CLASSIFICATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020G000IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020FY00IX
Title: PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C120
09013-6C090
Hexagon Socket Wrench

4
(09013-1C100)

T20
09013-7C400
Wrench Set
09061-1C110
Clip Remover
10mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
95146-00180
Halogen Leak Detector

DENSO Part No.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020FY00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000440W003X
Title: PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09985-20010
Set,Air Conditioner
Service Tool
(09985-02010)
Gauge,Refrigerant Charging
(09985-02050)
Hose,Refrigerant Charging
(09985-02060)
(09985-02070)
(09985-02090)
Coupler,Quick
(09985-02110)
Coupler,Quick
(09985-02130)
Valve,Refrigerant Drum Service
(09985-02150)
Joint,T
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000440W003X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: SST (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: HORN: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020EE027X
Title: PREPARATION: HORN: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Battery
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020EE027X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: HORN: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002PN003TX
Title: PREPARATION: HORN: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002PN003TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020FJ00IX
Title: PREPARATION: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Double-sided tape
Protective tape
Clip remover
Adhesive Tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020FJ00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCS00AX
Title: PREPARATION: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09061-1C100
Clip Remover
6mm
09061-1C110
Clip Remover
10mm
09061-1C300
(09061-1C310)
Remover A, Moulding
(09061-1C320)
Remover B, Moulding
(09061-1C330)
Remover C, Moulding
(09061-1C340)
Remover D, Moulding
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCS00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: LIGHTING (EXT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCO009X
Title: PREPARATION: LIGHTING (EXT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
White paper
Tire pressure gauge
Protective tape
Battery
Dry cell battery
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCO009X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: LIGHTING (EXT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCN009X
Title: PREPARATION: LIGHTING (EXT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09042-1C200
Plier 150mm
09061-1C100
Clip Remover
6mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
Oscilloscope
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCN009X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: LIGHTING (INT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCK009X
Title: PREPARATION: LIGHTING (INT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Protective tape
Battery
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCK009X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: LIGHTING (INT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCJ009X
Title: PREPARATION: LIGHTING (INT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09061-1C300
Remover B, Moulding
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
(09061-1C320)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCJ009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020LK00GX
Title: PREPARATION: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Protective tape
Adhesive tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020LK00GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000021LE00HX
Title: PREPARATION: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09061-1C100
Clip Remover
6mm
09061-1C110
Clip Remover
10mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000021LE00HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: MIRROR (EXT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020LM043X
Title: PREPARATION: MIRROR (EXT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Protective tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020LM043X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: MIRROR (EXT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020LL043X
Title: PREPARATION: MIRROR (EXT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09061-1C300
(09061-1C340)
Remover D, Moulding
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020LL043X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: NETWORKING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003K6A01KX
Title: PREPARATION: NETWORKING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003K6A01KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003J9D00AX
Title: PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Ruler
Drum gauge
Torque wrench
Ohmmeter
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003J9D00AX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004ZQY001X
Title: PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004ZQY001X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003J9C00AX
Title: PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09718-00011
Shoe Hold Down Spring Driver
09921-00011
Spring Tension Tool
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003J9C00AX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCD00AX
Title: PREPARATION: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCD00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCC00AX
Title: PREPARATION: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCC00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: POWER DISTRIBUTION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Z9203SX
Title: PREPARATION: POWER DISTRIBUTION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Z9203SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000314A051X
Title: PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Wooden block
Jack
metal saw
Shock absorber disposal
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000314A051X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCW013X
Title: PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110
(09013-6C100)
Socket Hexagon
5mm
09017-1C120
Union Nut Wrench
14mm
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCW013X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCV00XX
Title: PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09710-18050
(09711-01040)
(09711-01050)
(09711-01060)
(09711-01090)
Base No.1
(09711-01100)
Base No.2
Coil Spring Compressor
(09727-00010)
Bolt Set
(09727-00021)
Arm Set
09727-30021
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCV00XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: SST (2013 FR-S)
(09727-00031)
Compressor
09729-18010
Lock Nut Socket Wrench
09960-20010
Ball Joint Puller
(09961-02010)
Assembly
(09961-02060)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCV00XX.html?sisuffix=ff
Spacer B
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ZXQ01GX
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Battery
Plastic bag
Hog ring pliers
Hog ring
Protective tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ZXQ01GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ZXP01GX
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ZXP01GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ZXO00RX
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09082-18010
Airbag Deployment Wire
09082-18020
Sub-Harness No.11
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ZXO00RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: SEAT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020G2052X
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Hog ring
Hog ring pliers
Tape
To avoid surface damage
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020G2052X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: SEAT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020G1015X
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C120
(09013-1C130)
T40
09013-1C540
E10
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
HINT:
"TORX" is a registered trademark of Textron lnc.
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JBG01ZX
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JBG01ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000005B87000X
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09061-1C300
(09061-1C340)
Remover D, Moulding
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043ZP003X
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09950-50013
Puller C Set
(09951-05010)
Hanger 150
(09952-05010)
Slide Arm
(09953-05020)
Center Bolt 150
(09954-05031)
Claw No.3
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000043ZP003X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCB00AX
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCB00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KC900AX
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09521-24010
Drive Shaft Boot Clamping Tool
09612-00012
Rack & Pinion Steering Rack
Housing Stand
09616-00011
Steering Worm Bearing Adjusting
Socket
09631-10021
Rack Stopper Wrench
09922-10010
Variable Open Wrench
09960-20010
Assy
(09961-02010)
Ball Joint Puller
(09961-02060)
Spacer B
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KC900AX.html?locale=en
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NB601RX
Title: PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Battery
Protective tape
Tire
Width: 185 mm (7.28 in.) or more
Airbag disposal
Inner diameter: 360 mm (1.18 ft.) or more

Tire with disc wheel
Width: 185 mm (7.28 in.) or more
Airbag disposal
Inner diameter: 360 mm (1.18 ft.) or more

Wire harness
Stripped wire section: 1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ) or more
Airbag disposal
Cardboard Box
Airbag disposal
Plastic bag
Airbag disposal
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NB601RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NB501RX
Title: PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NB501RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NB401OX
Title: PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09082-18010
09082-18020
Sub-Harness No.11
09082-18030
Sub-Harness No.12
09082-18040
Sub-Harness No.13
09843-18061
SRS Check Wire
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NB401OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003K5Q020X
Title: PREPARATION: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Protective tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003K5Q020X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043F8004X
Title: PREPARATION: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09843-18040
Diagnosis Check Wire No. 2
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TIRE / WHEEL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ERZ02DX
Title: PREPARATION: TIRE / WHEEL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Tire pressure gauge
Wheel balancer
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ERZ02DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JBC01BX
Title: PREPARATION: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Tire pressure gauge
Torque wrench
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JBC01BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JBB01BX
Title: PREPARATION: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JBB01BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXN00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Cylinder gauge
Dial indicator
Feeler gauge
Magnetic base
Micrometer
Torque wrench
Press
V-block
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXN00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXO00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
ITEM
Manual transmission gear oil
CAPACITY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXO00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
CLASSIFICATION
API GL-3
SAE 75W-90
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXL00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110
(09013-6C130)
Socket Hexagon
10mm
09010-3C120
(09013-1C130)
T40
(09013-1C140)
T45
09012-2C510
Deep Socket Wrench
19mm
09012-2C530
Deep Socket Wrench
27mm
09017-1C140
Union Nut Wrench
19mm
09051-1C110
Plastic Hammer
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXL00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
09051-1C200
Bar,Brass
09051-1C400
Pin Punch
09053-1C100
Magnet,Hand
09072-1C200
Vernier Calipers
150mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
09905-00012
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXL00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SSM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXM00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXM00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXK00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09308-00010
Oil Seal Puller
09309-35010
Transmission Rear Bearing
Replacer
09309-36010
Transmission Rear Bearing
Replacer
09309-37010
Transmission Bearing Replacer
09316-60011
Transmission & Transfer Bearing
Replacer
(09316-00011)
Replacer Pipe
(09316-00021)
Replacer A
09325-20010
09330-50010
Propeller Shaft Center Bearing
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXK00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
Replacer
09350-20015
TOYOTA Automatic Transmission
Tool Set
(09350-06120)
No. 2 Measure Terminal
09527-20011
Rear Axle Shaft Bearing Remover
09612-70100
Power Steering Oil Seal Remover
Set
(09612-07210)
Collet Setting Pipe No.1
09631-12090
Seal Ring Tool
09632-36010
Steering Vane Pump Bearing
Replacer
09950-00020
Bearing Remover
09950-30012
Puller A Set
2/4
8/6/12
(09951-03010)
Upper Plate
(09953-03010)
Center Bolt
(09956-03010)
Adaptor 16
09950-60010
Replacer Set
(09951-00230)
Replacer 23
(09951-00420)
Replacer 42
(09951-00560)
Replacer 56
Replacer Set No. 2
Replacer 75
09950-60020
(09951-00750)
3/4
8/6/12
09950-70010
Handle Set
(09951-07100)
Handle 100
4/4
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PM600CX
Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Protective tape
Vernier caliper
Straightedge
Feeler gauge
Caliper gauge
Dial indicator or dial indicator with magnetic base
V block
Micrometer
Cylinder gauge
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PM600CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
ITEM
CAPACITY
CLASSIFICATION
(REFERENCE)
fluid
Dry fill
7.5 liters (7.9 US qts, 6.6 Imp.

qts)
Drain and
refill
2.0 liters (2.1 US qts, 1.8 Imp.

qts)
Toyota Genuine ATF

WS
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FRS)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110
(09013-6C100)
Socket Hexagon
5mm
09013-2C120
Wrench Torx For Tamper Resistant
T55H
09051-1C400
Pin Punch
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
09905-00012
09905-00013
Snap Ring Pliers
1/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SSM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09308-00010
Oil Seal Puller
09309-37010
Transmission Bearing Replacer
09320-89010
Transfer Clutch Spring
Compressor
09325-40010
09350-30020
Tool Set
(09350-06120)
No. 2 Measure Terminal
(09350-07020)
Oil Pump Puller
(09350-07050)
No. 3 Piston Spring Compressor
(09350-07060)
No. 1 Snap Ring Expander
1/5
8/6/12
(09350-07070)
No. 2 Snap Ring Expander
(09350-07080)
Brake Reaction Sleeve Puller
(09350-07090)
Brake No.1 Piston Puller
(09350-07110)
Oil Seal Replacer
09350-32014
Tool Set
(09351-32010)
One-way Clutch Test Tool
(09351-32020)
Stator Stopper
09351-40010
Tool Set
(09351-04010)
Pipe
2/5
8/6/12
(09351-04020)
09380-60010
Spring Compressor No. 1
Brake Spring Compressor Set
(09381-06030)
Hanger C
(09381-06050)
Arm B
(09381-06080)
Ring C
(09381-06090)
Attachment
(09381-06100)
Crow
(09381-06110)
Nut
First & Reverse Brake Wrench
09387-00070
3/5
8/6/12
09387-00110
Clutch Compression Wrench
09843-18040
Diagnosis Check Wire No. 2
09950-60020
Replacer Set No. 2
Replacer 103
(09962-01000)
(09963-01000)
Pin 10
Automatic Transmission Oil
(09951-01030)
09960-10010
09992-00095
Pressure Gauge Set
(09992-00231)
Adaptor C
4/5
8/6/12
(09992-00271)
Gauge Assy
5/5
8/6/12
PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001XDT00IX
Title: PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Heat light
Protective Tape
Double-sided Tape
Knife
Suction cup
Piano wire
Wooden block or similar object
Plastic sheet
Scraper
Brush or sponge
Sealer gun
Battery
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XDT00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
MP grease
Primer (Sunstar #435-40)
Adhesive (Sunstar #560)
Primer (Sunstar #435-70)
Primer (Sunstar GP402)
Primer (Enclosed with penguin seal #580 super)
Primer (Yokohama M-300 or equivalent)
Adhesive (Sunstar penguin seal #580 super)
Adhesive (Toyota Genuine Windshield Glass Adhesive or equivalent)
Primer (3M N-200)
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001XDR00KX
Title: PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C120
(09013-1C110)
T25
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XDR00KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020LI02HX
Title: PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Wire brush
Protective tape
Battery
Windshield washer fluid
Thin-bladed screwdriver
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020LI02HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZNQ07LX
Title: PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
Multemp SA grease
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZNQ07LX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 B
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020LH02HX
Title: PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C120
(09013-1C120)
T30
09061-1C100
Clip Remover
6mm
09080-1C110
09080-2C100
Test Lead Set
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020LH02HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000312N05WX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Vehicle Height (Unloaded Vehicle)
FRONT B - A
REAR C
146 mm (5.75 in.)
REAR D
225 mm (8.86 in.)
REAR E
375 mm (14.76 in.)
372 mm (14.65 in.)
Measurement points:
A: Ground clearance of front lower suspension arm set front bolt center
B: Ground clearance of front wheel center
C: Ground clearance of lower control arm set bolt center
D: Front wheel arch height of front wheel center
E: Rear wheel arch height of rear wheel center
Camber (Unloaded Vehicle)
-
CAMBER INCLINATION
RIGHT-LEFT DIFFERENCE
Front
0 +/- 45' (0 +/- 0.75)
30' (0.50) or less
Rear
-112' +/- 45' (-1.20 +/- 0.75)
45' (0.75) or less
Caster (Unloaded Vehicle)

-
CASTER INCLINATION (REFERENCE)
Front
554' (5.90)
30' (0.50) or less
Wheel Turning Angle (Unloaded Vehicle)

-
INSIDE WHEEL (REFERENCE)
OUTSIDE WHEEL (REFERENCE)
Front
3654' (43.90)
3112' (31.20)
Toe-in (Unloaded Vehicle)

Front
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C + D: 000' +/- 011' (0.00 +/- 0.19)
B - A: 0 +/- 3.0 mm (0 +/- 0.1181 in.)
C + D: 010' +/- 015' (0.16 +/- 0.24)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000312N05WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
Rear
B - A: 2.0 +/- 3.0 mm(0.0787 +/- 0.1181 in.)
Wheel Turning Angle (Unloaded Vehicle)

-
INSIDE WHEEL
OUTSIDE WHEEL REFERENCE
Front
4148' +/- 2(41.8 +/- 2)
3620' (36.33)
Distance between the centers of the 2 installation bolts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH and RH
-
STANDARD DISTANCE
Rear
443.8 to 447.8 mm (17.47 to 17.63 in.)
Distance between the centers of the 2 installation bolts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
-
STANDARD DISTANCE
Rear
448.9 to 450.9 mm (17.67 to 17.75 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000312N05WX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NRN020X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Front shock absorber assembly x steering knuckle
155
1581
114
Hub nut
120
1224
89
Tie rod end lock nut
85
867
63
Toe adjust cam nut
100
1020
74
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NRN020X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: AUDIO / VIDEO: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZZA022X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: AUDIO / VIDEO: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Stereo component amplifier assembly x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front No. 3 speaker assembly x Upper instrument panel assembly
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Amplifier antenna assembly x Body
4.5
46
40 in.*lbf
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZZA022X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002G6J012X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Axle
Front axle hub bearing looseness
Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
Front axle hub runout
Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
Rear axle hub bearing looseness
Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
Rear axle hub runout
Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
Differential
Rear differential carrier oil seal drive in
depth
1.55 to 2.45 mm (0.0610 to 0.0964 in.)
Rear differential side gear shaft oil seal

drive in depth
-0.5 to 0.5 mm (-0.0197 to 0.0197 in.)
Differential ring gear runout
Maximum: 0.07 mm (0.00275 in.)
Rear differential case sub-assembly runout
Maximum: 0.07 mm (0.00275 in.)
Differential ring gear backlash
0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
Differential side gear backlash
0 mm (0 in.)
Rear drive pinion companion flange runout
Maximum: 0.09 mm (0.00354 in.)
Differential drive pinion preload (at starting)
New bearing: 1.49 to 2.59 N*m (15.2 to 26.4 kgf*cm,

13.2 to 22.9 in.*lbf)
Reused bearing: 1.11 to 1.91 N*m (11.3 to 19.5 kgf*cm,
9.8 to 16.9 in.*lbf)
New differential case bearing x New rear drive pinion
tapered roller bearing:
2.57 to 4.26 N*m (26.2 to 43.4 kgf*cm, 22.7 to 37.7
in.*lbf)
New differential case bearing x Reused rear drive pinion
2.19 to 3.58 N*m (22.3 to 36.5 kgf*cm, 19.4 to 31.7
in.*lbf)
Total preload (Drive pinion preload plus)
Reused differential case bearing x New rear drive pinion

1.98 to 3.37 N*m (20.2 to 34.4 kgf*cm, 17.5 to 29.8
in.*lbf)
Reused differential case bearing x Reused rear drive
pinion tapered roller bearing:
1.60 to 2.69 N*m (16.3 to 27.4 kgf*cm, 14.2 to 23.8
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002G6J012X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
in.*lbf)
2.57 to 2.59 (0.1012 to 0.1020)
2.59 to 2.61 (0.1020 to 0.1028)
2.61 to 2.63 (0.1028 to 0.1035)
2.63 to 2.65 (0.1035 to 0.1043)
2.65 to 2.67 (0.1043 to 0.1051)
2.67 to 2.69 (0.1051 to 0.1059)
2.69 to 2.71 (0.1059 to 0.1067)
2.71 to 2.73 (0.1067 to 0.1075)
2.73 to 2.75 (0.1075 to 0.1083)
2.75 to 2.77 (0.1083 to 0.1091)
2.77 to 2.79 (0.1091 to 0.1098)
2.79 to 2.81 (0.1098 to 0.1106)
2.81 to 2.83 (0.1106 to 0.1114)
2.83 to 2.85 (0.1114 to 0.1122)
2.85 to 2.87 (0.1122 to 0.1130)
2.87 to 2.89 (0.1130 to 0.1138)
2.89 to 2.91 (0.1138 to 0.1146)
2.91 to 2.93 (0.1146 to 0.1154)
2.93 to 2.95 (0.1154 to 0.1161)
2.95 to 2.97 (0.1161 to 0.1169)
2.97 to 2.99 (0.1169 to 0.1177)
2.99 to 3.01 (0.1177 to 0.1185)
Rear differential side gear shaft plate
3.01 to 3.03 (0.1185 to 0.1193)
washer thickness mm (in.)
3.03 to 3.05 (0.1193 to 0.1201)

3.05 to 3.07 (0.1201 to 0.1209)
3.07 to 3.09 (0.1209 to 0.1217)
3.09 to 3.11 (0.1217 to 0.1224)
3.11 to 3.13 (0.1224 to 0.1232)
3.13 to 3.15 (0.1232 to 0.1240)
3.15 to 3.17 (0.1240 to 0.1248)
3.17 to 3.19 (0.1248 to 0.1256)
3.19 to 3.21 (0.1256 to 0.1264)
3.21 to 3.23 (0.1264 to 0.1271)
3.23 to 3.25 (0.1271 to 0.1280)
3.25 to 3.27 (0.1280 to 0.1287)
3.27 to 3.29 (0.1287 to 0.1295)
3.29 to 3.31 (0.1295 to 0.1303)
3.31 to 3.33 (0.1303 to 0.1311)
3.33 to 3.35 (0.1311 to 0.1319)
3.35 to 3.37 (0.1319 to 0.1327)
3.37 to 3.39 (0.1327 to 0.1335)
3.39 to 3.41 (0.1335 to 0.1343)
3.41 to 3.43 (0.1343 to 0.1350)
3.43 to 3.45 (0.1350 to 0.1358)
3.45 to 3.47 (0.1358 to 0.1366)
2/3
8/6/12
3.47 to 3.49 (0.1366 to 0.1374)

1.69 to 1.71 (0.0665 to 0.0673)
1.72 to 1.74 (0.0677 to 0.0685)
1.75 to 1.77 (0.0688 to 0.0697)
1.78 to 1.80 (0.0701 to 0.0709)
1.81 to 1.83 (0.0713 to 0.0720)
1.84 to 1.86 (0.0724 to 0.0732)
1.87 to 1.89 (0.0736 to 0.0744)
1.90 to 1.92 (0.0748 to 0.0756)
1.93 to 1.95 (0.0760 to 0.0768)
1.96 to 1.98 (0.0772 to 0.0780)
Rear differential drive pinion plate washer
thickness mm (in.)
1.99 to 2.01 (0.0783 to 0.0791)

2.02 to 2.04 (0.0795 to 0.0803)
2.05 to 2.07 (0.0807 to 0.0815)
2.08 to 2.10 (0.0819 to 0.0827)
2.11 to 2.13 (0.0831 to 0.0839)
2.14 to 2.16 (0.0843 to 0.0850)
2.17 to 2.19 (0.0854 to 0.0862)
2.20 to 2.22 (0.0866 to 0.0874)
2.23 to 2.25 (0.0878 to 0.0886)
2.26 to 2.28 (0.0890 to 0.0898)
2.29 to 2.31 (0.0902 to 0.0909)
2.32 to 2.34 (0.0913 to 0.0921)
3/3
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002G6K012X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Axle
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM
Front disc brake caliper assembly x Steering knuckle
FT.*LBF
80
816
59
120
1224
89
Steering knuckle x Front axle hub sub-assembly
65
663
48
Front speed sensor x Steering knuckle
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Steering knuckle x Front shock absorber with coil spring
155
1581
114
Front disc brake dust cover x Steering knuckle
18
184
13
Steering knuckle x Front lower suspension arm assembly
51
520
38
Steering knuckle x Tie rod sub-assembly
27
275
20
Rear axle hub and bearing assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
65
663
48
Rear speed sensor x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Rear axle shaft nut x Rear drive shaft assembly
190
1938
140
Toe control link sub-assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
60
612
44
Rear upper control arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
80
816
59
Rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
110
1122
81
80
816
59
Rear stabilizer Link assembly x Rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
38
388
28
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Rear differential filler plug x Rear differential carrier assembly
49
500
36
Rear differential drain plug x Rear differential carrier assembly
49
500
36
Bearing cap x Rear differential carrier
85
870
63
Differential ring gear x Rear differential case sub-assembly
97
984
71
338 or
less
3445 or
less
249 or
less
8.0
82
71 in.*lbf
Hub nut
Differential
PART TIGHTENED
Rear drive pinion nut x Differential drive pinion

Rear differential breather plug oil deflector x Rear differential carrier
cover
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002G6K012X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Rear differential carrier cover x Rear differential carrier
47
475
35
Rear differential breather plug x Rear differential carrier cover
21
210
15
Rear differential carrier assembly x Rear suspension member subassembly (Rear)
103
1050
76
Rear differential carrier assembly x Rear suspension member subassembly (Front)
95
970
70
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002G6K012X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (FRONT): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EFG01VX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (FRONT): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Pad lining thickness
Disc thickness
Disc runout
Standard
1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
Minimum
11.0 mm (0.433 in.)
Standard
24.0 mm (0.945 in.)
Minimum
22.0 mm (0.866 in.)
Maximum
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EFG01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (FRONT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EFH01VX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (FRONT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
120
1224
89
Carrier x Steering knuckle
80
816
59
Disc brake cylinder assembly x Carrier
26
270
19
No. 1 front flexible hose x Disc brake cylinder assembly
18
184
13
No. 1 front flexible hose x brake tube
18
184
13
No. 1 front flexible hose x front shock absorber assembly
33
337
24
Hub nut
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EFH01VX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (REAR): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ED3024X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (REAR): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
for for Solid Disc Brake
Disc thickness
Disc runout
Standard
9.0 mm (0.354 in.)
Minimum
1.5 mm (0.059 in.)
Standard
10.0 mm (0.3937 in.)
Minimum
8.5 mm (0.3346 in.)
Maximum
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
Standard
11.0 mm (0.433 in.)
Minimum
1.5 mm (0.059 in.)
Standard
18.0 mm (0.7087 in.)
Minimum
16.5 mm (0.6496 in.)
Maximum
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
for Ventilated Disc Brake
Disc thickness
Disc runout
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ED3024X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (REAR): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ED4028X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (REAR): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Rear disc brake bleeder plug x Rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH
8.0
82
71 in.*lbf
Hub nut
120
1224
89
Caliper support bracket x Rear axle carrier
66
673
49
Rear disc brake cylinder assembly x Caliper support bracket
26
265
19
Rear brake flexible hose x Rear disc brake cylinder assembly
18
184
13
Brake line union nut
15
155
11
Rear brake flexible hose x Rear axle carrier
33
337
24
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ED4028X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043EU003X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
VSC OFF switch
5-8
VSC SPORT switch
1-8
Switch not pushed in
10 k or higher
Switch pushed in
Below 1
Switch not pushed in
10 k or higher
Switch pushed in
Below 1
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000043EU003X.html?locale=en
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000043EV003X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

(2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Front fender liner x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Brake actuator bracket assembly x Body
33
337
24
Brake actuator assembly x Brake actuator bracket assembly
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Brake actuator assembly x Brake line
15
155
11
Front speed sensor set bolt
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Rear speed sensor set bolt
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Hub nut
120
1224
89
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000043EV003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Z3V01IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Brake pedal height from floor mat
for Manual
Transmission
145mm (5.709in.)
for Automatic
Transmission
150mm (5.906in.)
Brake pedal free play
Brake pedal reserve distance from asphalt sheet

at 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
Vacuum of the vacuum pump assembly
2mm (0.079in.) or less

for Manual
Transmission
for Automatic
Transmission
With the engine

idling
More than 93 kPa (698 mmHg, 27

in.Hg) of vacuum
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Z3V01IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Z3W01NX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Disc brake cylinder bleeder plug
8.0
82
71 in.*lbf
Brake master cylinder sub-assembly x Brake tube
19
194
14
Brake pedal support x Brake booster assembly
18
184
13
Brake pedal support x Body
18
184
13
Brake pedal support x Brake pedal
30
306
22
Brake master cylinder sub-assembly x Brake booster assembly
14
143
10
120
1224
86
Brake master cylinder push rod clevis lock nut
19
194
14
Vacuum pump assembly set bolt
16
163
12
Hub nut
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Z3W01NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: CLUTCH: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXR00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: CLUTCH: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Clutch Pedal
Pedal play
Pedal stroke
(Reference)
4.0 (0.158 in.)

105 to 115 mm (4.134 to 4.528 in.)
Clutch Unit
Clutch disc rivet depth
Minimum 0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)
Clutch disc runout

Clutch cover diaphragm spring wear
Maximum 0.8 mm (0.0315 in.)

Maximum depth 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)
Maximum width 6.0 mm (0.236 in.)
Flywheel runout
Maximum 0.1 mm (0.00394 in.)
Clutch cover diaphragm spring tip non-alignment
Maximum 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)
Clutch Pedal Switch

Clutch start switch assembly
Standard resistance
ON (Pushed in) Below 1
1-2
OFF (Released) 10 k or higher
Clutch switch assembly

Standard resistance
ON (Pushed in) Below 1
1-2
OFF (Released) 10 k or higher
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXR00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: CLUTCH: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXS00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: CLUTCH: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Clutch release cylinder bleeder plug x Clutch release cylinder assembly
7.8
80
69
in.*lbf
Clutch switch assembly x Clutch pedal support sub-assembly
8.0
82
71
in.*lbf
Clutch pedal support sub-assembly x Body
18
184
13
Steering intermediate shaft assembly x Steering column assembly
35
357
26
Clutch master cylinder to flexible hose tube x Master cylinder to release

cylinder hose
15
153
11
Clutch master cylinder to flexible hose tube x Clutch master cylinder assembly
15
153
11
Clutch master cylinder assembly x Body
18
184
13
Clutch release cylinder assembly x Clutch housing
37
377
27
Master cylinder to release cylinder hose x Clutch release cylinder assembly
18
184
13
Clutch cover assembly x Flywheel sub-assembly
16
163
12
Release fork support x Manual transmission assembly.
16
163
12
Clutch start switch assembly x Clutch pedal support sub-assembly
8.0
82
71
in.*lbf
Clutch switch assembly x Clutch pedal support sub-assembly
8.0
82
71
in.*lbf
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXS00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: CRUISE CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000049O9015X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: CRUISE CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH
Resistance
1-3
Cruise control Main switch Assembly (ON-OFF button) released
1 M or higher
Cruise control Main switch Assembly (ON-OFF button) pushed
Below 2.5
+/RES switch ON
235 to 245
-/SET switch ON
617 to 643
CANCEL switch ON
1509 to 1571
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000049O9015X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: DOOR / HATCH: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000203C00IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: DOOR / HATCH: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Part Tightened
N*m kgf*cm ft.*lbf
HOOD
Hood hinge x Hood panel
25
255
18
Hood lock x Body
33
337
24
Hood lock control lever sub-assembly x Body
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Door hinge x Body
30
306
22
Door hinge x Door panel
25
255
18
Door striker x Body
18
184
13
Door check x Body
33
337
24
Door check x Door panel
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Front door sash x Door panel (Under)
14
143
10
Front door sash x Door panel (Upper)
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Front door rear lower frame sub-assembly x Door panel
14
143
10
Front door glass sub-assembly x Front door window regulator sub-assembly
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Front door window regulator sub-assembly (nut) x Door panel
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Front door window regulator sub-assembly (bolt) x Door panel
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Front door outside handle frame sub-assembly x Front door lock cylinder
assembly
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Front door outside handle frame sub-assembly x Door panel
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Front door sush stopper x Door panel
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Door glass inner stabilizer x Door panel
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY
FRONT DOOR
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000203C00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: DOOR / HATCH: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
LUGGAGE DOOR
Luggage door hinge x Luggage compartment door panel
18
184
13
Luggage compartment door lock assembly x Luggage compartment door panel
5.5
56
49
in.*lbf
Fuel lid lock open lever sub-assembly x Body
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Handle cover x Fuel lid lock open lever sub-assembly
4.5
46
40
in.*lbf
FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000203C00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: DOOR LOCK: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Z4F00IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: DOOR LOCK: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
FRONT DOOR LOCK
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
Front door lock assembly x Door panel
6.5
KGF*CM
66
FT*LBF
58 in.*lbf
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK

PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT*LBF
Luggage door closer assembly x Luggage compartment door panel
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Luggage compartment door lock cylinder assembly x Luggage compartment

door panel
4.5
46
40
in.*lbf
DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER

PART TIGHTENED
Door control receiver x Body
N*M
13
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Z4F00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
KGF*CM
133
FT*LBF
10
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JAN00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Propeller Shaft
Propeller shaft with center bearing shaft assembly runout
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JAN00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
Maximum runout: 0.6 mm (0.0236 in.)
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JAO00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Rear Drive Shaft
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Rear axle shaft set nuts
290
2957
214
Rear wheel set nuts
103
1050
76
Propeller Shaft
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Center support bearing assembly x Body
52
530
38
Propeller shaft assembly x Rear Differential companion flange
74
755
55
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JAO00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000208R00JX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED N*M KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
FRONT BUMPER
Front bumper cover x Fender liner
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front bumper cover x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front bumper cover x Front lower bumper cover
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front bumper reinforcement sub-assembly x Body
32
326
24
Front bumper stay bracket x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front lower bumper cover x Front bumper stay bracket
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front bumper cover x Front bumper hole cover RH
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Front bumper cover x Front bumper hole cover LH
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper reinforcement x Body (nut)
45
459
33
Rear bumper reinforcement x Body (bolt)
45
459
33
Rear bumper cover x Body
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper side retainer LH x Body
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper side retainer RH x Body
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper side bracket RH x Body
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper side bracket LH x Body
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Rear spoiler x Luggage compartment door
10
102
Rear spoiler x No.1 rear spoiler bracket RH
10
102
Rear spoiler x No.1 rear spoiler bracket LH
10
102
No.1 rear spoiler bracket RH x Luggage compartment door
10
102
No.1 rear spoiler bracket LH x Luggage compartment door
10
102
4.5
46
40 in.*lbf
4.5
46
40 in.*lbf
REAR BUMPER
REAR SPOILER (for Sport Package)
REAR SPOILER
Rear spoiler x Luggage compartment door
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH
Luggage compartment door outside garnish x Luggage compartment door
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000208R00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000208R00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205S00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Charging circuit without load
Charging circuit with load
Brush length
Standard amperage: 10 A or less

Standard voltage: 11.3 to 15.6 V
Standard amperage: 30 A or higher
Standard length: 22.5 mm (0.885 in.)
Minimum exposed length: 5.0 mm (0.196 in.)
Slip ring resistance: 2.0 to 2.4 k at 20C (68F)
Generator rotor assembly
Standard slip ring diameter: 22.7 mm (0.893 in.)

Minimum slip ring diameter: 22.1 mm (0.870 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205S00GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205T00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
Terminal x Generator rear end cover
N*M
8.9
Bolt A
Generator regulator x Generator rear end cover
2.0
Bolt B
3.9
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
91
79 in.*lbf
20
18 in.*lbf
40
35 in.*lbf
Stator coil x Generator rear end cover
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Bearing retainer x Generator drive end frame
3.9
40
35 in.*lbf
Generator pulley x Generator rotor assembly
108
1101
80
Generator rear end cover x Generator drive end frame
4.4
45
39 in.*lbf
Generator assembly x V-ribbed belt tensioner assembly
25
255
18
Generator wire x Terminal
16
163
12
Battery negative terminal set bolt
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 COOLING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZB800KX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 COOLING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Pumping speed:
1 pump per second
Radiator Cap
Standard valve (for brand-new cap):

93 to 123 kPa (0.95 to 1.25 kgf*cm 2 , 14 to 18 psi)
Minimum standard valve (after suing cap):
83 kPa (0.85 kgf*cm 2 , 12 psi)
Valve opening temperature:
Thermostat (for Engine Coolant)
86 to 90C (187 to 194F)

Valve lift:
8.0 mm (0.315 in.) or more at 95C (203F)
Valve opening temperature:
Thermostat (for Automatic Transmission)
48 to 52C (118 to 126F)

Valve lift:
6.0 mm (0.236 in.) or more at 63C (145F)
Standard current:
Cooling fan motor
7.4 to 11.4 A at 20C (68F)

(when the battery is connected to the fan motor connector)
Standard current:
No. 2 cooling fan motor
7.4 to 11.4 A at 20C (68F)

(when the battery is connected to the fan motor connector)
Standard resistance (3 - 5): 10 k or higher
Fan No. 1 relay
(Battery voltage is not applied between terminals 1 and 2)

Standard resistance (3 - 5): Below 1
(Battery voltage is applied between terminals 1 and 2)
Fan No. 2 relay

(Battery voltage is applied between terminals 1 and 2)
( Battery voltage is applied between terminals 1 and 2)
Fan No. 3 relay

((Battery voltage is not applied between terminals 1 and 2)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZB800KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 COOLING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 COOLING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZB900KX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 COOLING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Water pump assembly x Chain cover
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Water pump pulley x Water pump assembly
14
143
10
Water outlet x Cylinder block assembly (for Engine Coolant)
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Water outlet x Water pipe (for Automatic Transmission)
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Radiator assembly x Cooler condenser assembly
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
Radiator support x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Radiator support sub-assembly x Body
18
184
13
Cooling fan motor x Fan shroud
3.9
40
35 in.*lbf
No. 2 cooling fan motor x Fan shroud
3.9
40
35 in.*lbf
Fan x Cooling fan motor
6.3
64
56 in.*lbf
No. 2 fan x No. 2 cooling fan motor
6.3
64
56 in.*lbf
Water filler sub-assembly x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Air cleaner duct x Body
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
Air cleaner duct x Air cleaner case
3.0
31
27 in.*lbf
Radiator reserve tank assembly x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004B6K003X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
FUEL CUT-OFF RPM
ITEM
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Fuel cut off rpm
2500 rpm or more
Fuel injection restart rpm
1400 rpm
CANISTER
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Standard resistance
1-5
Standard voltage
7-8
SPECIFIED CONDITION
25 to 30 at 20C (68F)
27 to 35 at 60C (140F)
3.5 V at 25C (77F)
PURGE VALVE
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
20C (68F)
21 to 27
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004B6K003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KD802UX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
CANISTER
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Canister base bracket x Charcoal canister assembly
18
184
13
Charcoal canister assembly x Body (Bolt)
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Charcoal canister assembly x Body (Nut)
8.0
82
71 in.*lbf
Bracket A x Canister pump module
18
184
13
Bracket B x Canister pump module
18
184
13
Canister pump module x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
PURGE VALVE
PART TIGHTENED
Purge valve x Intake manifold
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
PCV VALVE
PART TIGHTENED
PCV valve sub-assembly x Cylinder head cover sub-assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KD802UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
23
235
17
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020HH00NX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Spark plug
Resistance
Always 6.85 to 7.65
Spark plug (terminal part) - Body

ground
Camshaft timing oil control valve assembly
Resistance
20C (68F) 6.85 to 7.65

Resistance
20C (68F) 0.3 to 100
2 (M+) - 1 (M-)
Accelerator pedal assembly
Released 0.213 to 4.772 V
Voltage
Accel sensor out No. 1
Depressed 0.213 to 4.772 V

Released 0.213 to 4.772 V
Voltage
Accel sensor out No. 2
Depressed 0.213 to 4.772 V
Mass air flow meter

Resistance
1 (THA) - 2 (E2)
-20C (-4F)
13.6 to 18.4 k
20C (68F)
2.21 to 2.69 k
60C (140F)
0.49 to 0.67 k
Always
1836 to 2244

1-2
Approx. 20C (68F) 2.35 to 2.65 k
Resistance
Approx. 80C (176F)
0.305 to 0.331
k

Approx. 20C (68F) 2.25 to 2.65 k
Resistance
Approx. 80C (176F)
0.305 to 0.331
k
Knock sensor
Resistance
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020HH00NX.html?sisuffix=ff&
20C (68F) 532 to 588 k

1/3
8/6/12

Resistance
1-2
20C (68F)
Resistance
1.98 to 2.64
Always
1-4
10 k or higher

Resistance
1-2
Resistance
1-4
20C (68F)
5.0 to 6.4
Always
10 k or higher
EFI MAIN 1 RELAY

Resistance
3-5
Battery voltage not applied to 1 and 2

10 kor higher
terminals
Battery voltage applied to 1 and 2 terminals Below 1
EFI MAIN 2 RELAY

Resistance
3-5

10 kor higher
terminals
EFI MAIN 3 RELAY

Resistance
3-5

10 kor higher
terminals
IG2 RELAY
Resistance
3-5

10 kor higher
terminals
INJ RELAY
Resistance
3-5

terminals
10 kor higher
ETCS RELAY
Resistance
3-5

terminals
10 kor higher
C/OPEN RELAY
Resistance

10 kor higher
terminals
2/3
8/6/12
3-5
3/3
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020HI00NX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Engine mount assembly x Front suspension cross member
45
459
33
Cylinder head cover sub-assembly x Injector driver
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
Cylinder head cover sub-assembly x Injector cover
19
194
14
Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly x Camshaft timing oil control valve
(OCV)
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
Throttle with motor body assembly x Intake manifold
8.0
82
71
in.*lbf
ECM x Body
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Accelerator pedal assembly x Body
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
MASS air flow meter x Air cleaner case sub-assembly
1.0
10
9.0
in.*lbf
VVT sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
Crankshaft position sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
Spark plug x Cylinder head sub-assembly
17
173
13
Ignition coil x Cylinder head cover sub-assembly
8.5
87
75
in.*lbf
Clutch flexible hose bracket x Body
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Engine wire x Injector cover
11
112
Engine coolant temperature sensor x Cylinder head sub-assembly
18
184
13
Engine oil temperature sensor x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
18
184
13
Knock sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly
24
245
18
Manifold absolute pressure sensor x Intake manifold
4.0
41
35
in.*lbf
21
214
16
Air fuel ratio sensor x Exhaust manifold

(without SST)
Air fuel ratio sensor x Exhaust manifold
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020HI00NX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
(with SST)
Heated oxygen sensor x Exhaust manifold
(without SST)
Heated oxygen sensor x Exhaust manifold
(with SST)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020HI00NX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
18
184
13
21
214
16
18
184
13
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UZ700FX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Ignition timing
Idle speed
Compression
Valve clearance
-5 to 10 BTDC at idle (Transmission in neutral)

Automatic transmission (in neutral)
600 to 800 rpm
Manual transmission
550 to 750 rpm
Compression pressure
1750 kPa (17.8 kgf/cm, 254 psi)
Minimum pressure
1150 kPa (11.7 kgf/cm 2 , 167 psi)
Difference between each

cylinder
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 29 psi) or less

0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to
0.0063 in.)
Exhaust
0.21 to 0.27 mm (0.0083 to

0.0106 in.)
Maximum
0.020 mm (0.00079 in.)
Intake
40.82 to 40.92 mm (1.6083 to

1.6110 in.)
Exhaust
40.72 to 40.82 mm (1.6031 to

1.6071 in.)
For fuel pump
40.6 mm (1.5984 in.)
Intake
34.0 mm (1.3386 in.)
Exhaust
34.0 mm (1.3386 in.)
Standard (Cold)
Circle runout
Cam lobe height
Camshaft
Intake
Cam base circle
25.946 to 25.963 mm (1.02149
Journal diameter
Thrust clearance
0.0068 to 0.1160 mm (0.00027

to 0.00457 in.)
Oil clearance
0.037 to 0.072 mm (0.00146 to

0.00283 in.)
Warpage
Cylinder head
sub-assembly
to 1.02216 in.)
Cylinder head height
Maximum
0.035 mm (0.00138 in.)
Standard
98.5 mm (3.878 in.)
Minimum
98.4 mm (3.874 in.)
Overall length
103.3 mm (4.067 in.)
Margin thickness
0.8 to 1.2 mm (0.0315 to 0.0472

in.)
Intake valve
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UZ700FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
5.455 to 5.470 mm (0.2148 to

1/5
8/6/12
Exhaust valve
Intake valve
guide bush
Valve stem diameter
0.2154 in.)
Valve seat width
0.8 to 1.6 mm (0.032 to 0.063

in.)
Overall length
95.1 mm (3.744 in.)
Margin thickness
1.0 to 1.4 mm (0.039 to 0.055

in.)
Valve stem diameter
5.445 to 5.460 mm (0.21437 to

0.21496 in.)
Valve seat width
1.1 to 1.7 mm (0.043 to 0.067

in.)
Inside diameter
5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to

0.21701 in.)
Oil clearance
0.030 to 0.057 mm (0.00118 to

0.00224 in.)
Protrusion height
11.4 to 11.8 mm (0.449 to 0.466

in.)
5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to
Inside diameter
Exhaust valve
guide bush
0.21701 in.)
0.040 to 0.067 mm (0.00157 to
Oil clearance
0.00264 in.)
11.4 to 11.8 mm (0.449 to 0.466
in.)
Protrusion height
Intake
Valve stem end diameter
Exhaust
Valve adjusting
shim
Valve spring
0.21535 in.)
5.445 to 5.460 mm (0.21437 to
0.21496 in.)
Valve adjusting shim inside diameter
5.500 to 5.560 mm (0.21654 to

0.21890 in.)
Oil clearance
0.030 to 0.115 mm (0.00118 to

0.00453 in.)
Free length
41.06 mm (1.617 in.)
Deviation
Maximum
Less than 1.8 mm (0.0710 in.)
Angle
Maximum
2.5
Warpage
Maximum
0.025 mm (0.00098 in.)
Standard
205.0 mm (8.071 in.)
Minimum
204.9 mm (8.067 in.)
Thrust
86.005 to 86.015 mm (3.38602

to 3.38641 in.)
Cylinder block height
Cylinder block
5.455 to 5.470 mm (0.21476 to
2/5
8/6/12
Cylinder bore diameter
lateral
to 3.38602 in.)
Maximum (When
boring)
Cylinder bore
85.995 to 86.005 mm (3.38562
86.505 mm (3.40570 in.)
Taper
0.030 mm (0.00118 in.)
Out-of-runout
0.010 mm (0.00039 in.)

Distance from
piston head
Piston diameter
Piston
A grade
85.985 to 85.995 mm (3.38523

to 3.38562 in.)
B grade
85.975 to 85.985 mm (3.38484

to 3.38523 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098
86.225 to 86.245 mm (3.39468
in.) over size
to 3.39547 in.)
0.50 mm (0.0197
in.) over size
86.475 to 86.495 mm (3.40452

to 3.40531 in.)
0.010 to 0.030 mm (0.00039 to
0.00118 in.)
Oil clearance
0.004 to 0.008 mm (0.00016 to
Piston pin oil clearance
0.00031 in.)
Piston pin
Connecting rod bushing oil clearance
Piston ring end gap
Piston ring
39.4 mm (1.551 in.)
0.006 to 0.026 mm (0.00024 to

0.00102 in.)
No. 1
0.25 to 0.30 mm (0.00984 to

0.01181 in.)
No. 2
0.60 to 0.70 mm (0.02362 to

0.02756 in.)
Oil ring
No. 1
Groove clearance
No. 2
Bend
Maximum
Twist
Maximum
Thrust clearance
Oil clearance
0.10 to 0.35 mm (0.00394 to

0.01378 in.)
0.030 to 0.080 mm (0.00118 to
0.00315 in.)
0.030 to 0.070 mm (0.00118 to
0.00276 in.)
0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) per 100
mm (3.937 in.) in length
0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) per 100
mm (3.937 in.) in length
0.070 to 0.330 mm (0.00276 to
0.01299 i
0.025 to 0.055 mm (0.00098 to
0.00217 in.)
3/5
8/6/12
Standard
Connecting rod
1.492 to 1.508 mm (0.05874 to

0.05937 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012
in.) Undersize
1.511 to 1.515 mm (0.05949 to
0.05 mm (0.0020
1.521 to 1.525 mm (0.05988 to
in.) Undersize
0.06004 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098
1.621 to 1.625 mm (0.06382 to
in.) Undersize
0.06398 in.)
Standard
49.976 to 50.000 mm (1.96756

to 1.96850 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012
in.) Undersize
49.946 to 49.970 mm (1.96637

to 1.96732 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020
49.926 to 49.950 mm (1.96559
in.) Undersize
to 1.96653 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098
49.726 to 49.750 mm (1.95771
in.) Undersize
to 1.95866 in.)
Circle runout
Maximum
0.035 mm (0.00138 in.)
Crank pin taper
Maximum
0.006 mm (0.00024 in.)
Crank pin out-of-runout
Maximum
0.005 mm (0.00020 in.)
Crankshaft journal taper
Maximum
0.006 mm (0.00024 in.)
Crankshaft journal out-ofrunout
Maximum
0.005 mm (0.00020 in.)
Crank pin diameter
Minimum
47.726 mm (1.87897 in.)
Crankshaft journal diameter
Minimum
67.735 mm (2.66673 in.)
Bearing size (Thickness at
0.05965 in.)
center)
Crank pin diameter
Standard
Connecting rod bearing

thickness (at center)
1.492 to 1.508 mm (0.05874 to

0.05937 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012
in.) Undersize
1.511 to 1.515 mm (0.05949 to

0.05965 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020
in.) Undersize
1.521 to 1.525 mm (0.05988 to

0.06004 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098
1.621 to 1.625 mm (0.06382 to
in.) Undersize
0.06398 in.)
Standard
2.495 to 2.513 mm (0.09823 to

0.09894 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012
2.519 to 2.522 mm (0.09917 to
No. 1 to No. 4 crank bearing
in.) Undersize
0.09929 in.)
thickness (at center)
0.05 mm (0.0020
2.529 to 2.532 mm (0.09957 to
in.) Undersize
0.09968 in.)
4/5
8/6/12
Crankshaft
No. 5 crank bearing thickness

(at center)
0.25 mm (0.0098
2.629 to 2.632 mm (0.10350 to
in.) Undersize
0.10362 in.)
Standard
2.493 to 2.511 mm (0.09815 to

0.09886 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012
in.) Undersize
2.517 to 2.520 mm (0.09909 to

0.09921 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020
2.527 to 2.530 mm (0.09949 to
in.) Undersize
0.09961 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098
2.627 to 2.630 mm (0.10342 to
in.) Undersize
0.10354 in.)
Standard
Crank pin outer diameter
Crankshaft journal diameter
49.976 to 50.000 mm (1.96756

to 1.96850 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012
49.946 to 49.970 mm (1.96637
in.) Undersize
to 1.96734 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020
49.926 to 49.950 mm (1.96559
in.) Undersize
to 1.96653 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098
49.726 to 49.750 mm (1.95771
in.) Undersize
to 1.95866 in.)
Standard
67.985 to 68.009 mm (2.67657

to 2.67751 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012
67.955 to 67.979 mm (2.67539
in.) Undersize
to 2.67633 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020
67.935 to 67.959 mm (2.67460
in.) Undersize
to 2.67555 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098
67.735 to 67.759 mm (2.66673
in.) Undersize
to 2.66767 in.)
Thrust clearance
Oil clearance
0.130 to 0.308 mm (0.00512 to

0.01213 in.)
0.013 to 0.031 mm (0.00051 to
0.00122 in.)
5/5
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UZ800FX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
Belt generator cover x Compressor with magnet clutch
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Generator cover x Generator assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
for Bolt
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
for Clamp
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
No. 1 chain vibration damper x Cylinder head sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
No. 1 chain tensioner assembly x Cylinder head sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
No. 2 chain tensioner assembly x Cylinder head sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Camshaft cap x Camshaft housing sub-assembly LH
18
184
13
Camshaft cap x Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH
18
184
13
Camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH x Exhaust camshaft LH
18
184
13
Camshaft timing intake gear assembly LH x Intake camshaft LH
18
184
13
Camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly RH x Exhaust camshaft RH
18
184
13
Camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH x Intake camshaft RH
18
184
13
1st
20
204
15
2nd
100
1020
74
3rd
loosen 360
4th
20
204
15
5th
42
428
31
6th
Turn 100
Air cleaner cap with air cleaner hose x Body
Cylinder head sub-assembly LH x Cylinder block LH
FT.*LBF
turn 100 (2 central bolts)
Cylinder head sub-assembly RH x Cylinder block RH
7st
turn 50 (except 2 central

bolts)
1st
20
204
15
2nd
100
1020
74
3rd
loosen 360
4th
20
204
15
5th
42
428
31
6th
Turn 100
1/4
8/6/12
7th
Crankshaft pulley x Crankshaft
turn 100 (2 central bolts)

turn 50 (except 2 central
bolts)
1st
20
204
2nd
Turn 90
15
Flywheel sub-assembly x Crankshaft
85
867
63
Drive plate and ring gear sub-assembly x Crankshaft
95
969
70
No. 1 Engine Hanger x Engine assembly
43
439
32
Front engine mounting bracket x Engine assembly
45
459
33
Transmission assembly x Engine assembly
50
510
37
Fuel hose x Fuel pipe
1.3
13
12 in.*lbf
Front engine mounting bracket x Front suspension crossmember subassembly
45
459
33
Manual transmission assembly x Engine assembly
50
510
37
Automatic transmission assembly x Engine assembly
50
510
37
Rear engine under cover LH x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Grounded cable x Engine assembly
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Suction hose sub-assembly x Compressor assembly
10
102
Suction hose sub-assembly x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Vacuum tube connector hose x Engine assembly
18
184
13
Generator wire x Generator assembly
16
163
12
Wire harness clamp bracket x Body
11
112
Wire harness clamp bracket x Engine assembly
11
112
Wire harness clamp bracket x No. 2 engine hanger
10
102
Water filler sub-assembly x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Stay x Body
35
357
26
Air cleaner assembly with hose x Body
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
Air cleaner assembly with hose x Throttle body with motor assembly
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Oil spacer x Camshaft housing sub-assembly LH
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Hole plug x Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH
25
255
18
31
316
23
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Oil spacer x Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Stud bolt x Oil pan sub-assembly
10
102
for Union
Camshaft oil feed pipe sub-assembly x Camshaft housing sub- bolt
assembly RH
for Bolt
2/4
8/6/12
Baffle plate x Oil pan sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Oil strainer sub-assembly x Oil pan sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly x Oil pan sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
drain plug x No. 2 oil pan sub
39
400
29
No. 2 engine hanger x Engine assembly
21
214
16
1st
18
184
13
2nd
loosen 180
3rd
18
184
13
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
1st
18
184
13
2nd
loosen 180
3rd
18
184
13
Cylinder head cover sub-assembly RH x Camshaft housing sub-assembly

RH
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH x Injector driver bracket
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Spark plug x Cylinder head sub-assembly
17
174
13
10
102
25
255
18
Water outlet x Cylinder block sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Engine water pump assembly x Cylinder block sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Water pump pulley x Engine water pump assembly
14
143
10
No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
36
367
27
PCV valve sub-assembly x Cylinder block sub-assembly
23
235
17
Water inlet pipe x Cylinder block sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Rear cylinder head plate x Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH
16
163
12
PCV hose connector x Cylinder block sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Engine oil pressure switch assembly x Timing chain or belt cover subassembly
18
184
13
18
184
13
Camshaft timing oil control valve x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
VVT sensor x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Crank position sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly
6.4
Camshaft housing sub-assembly LH x Cylinder head subassembly LH
Cylinder head cover sub-assembly LH x Camshaft housing sub-assembly

LH
Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH x Cylinder head subassembly RH
Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
Bolt A and
B
Bolt C and
D
3/4
8/6/12
65
57 in.*lbf
Knock control sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly
24
245
18
E.F.I. water temperature sensor x Water inlet pipe
18
184
13
Oil filter union x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
45
459
33
Oil filter sub-assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
14
143
10
Ignition coil x Cylinder block sub-assembly
8.5
87
75 in.*lbf
No. 1 water by-pass x Engine assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Intake manifold x Cylinder head cover sub-assembly
25
255
18
Fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly x Fuel pump assembly
31
316
23
Fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly x Intake manifold
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Injector cover x Intake manifold
19
194
14
Generator assembly x Engine assembly
25
255
18
Stud bolt x Cylinder head
18
184
13
Chain cover mount bolt x Cylinder head LH
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
No. 1 cylinder block tight plug x Cylinder block
37
377
27
Crankshaft sensor holder assembly x cylinder block LH
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Cylinder block plate x cylinder block LH
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Oil separator cover x cylinder block RH
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
1st
10
102
2nd
25
255
18
3rd
turn 92.5
1st
35
2nd
loosen 180
3rd
35
4st
loosen 180
5st
17
6st
turn 60
Connecting rod x Connecting rod cap
Cylinder block sub-assembly
Cylinder block sub-assembly
25
357
357
173
255
26
26
13
18
4/4
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 FUEL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000201W00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 FUEL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Fuel pressure
350 to 500 kPa (4.0 to 5.0 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to

73 psi)
Fuel pressure : at fuel pressure remains for 5 minutes after

engine has stopped
Fuel pressure (for high pressure) : at engine warm up and
idle
3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 51.0 kgf/cm 2 ,

435 to 725 psi)
Fuel injector (for port injection)

Resistance at 20C (68F)
12
Injection volume
84 to 103 cc(5.1 to 6.3 cu.in.) per 15

seconds
Difference between each injector
19 cc(1.2 cu.in.) or less
Fuel drop
1 drop or less per 22 minutes
Fuel Injector (for direct injection)

1.9

voltage
Terminal 2 (VOUT) and 1 (GND)

: Apply 5 V between terminals 3 (VCC) and 1
(GND)
Approximately 0.5 V
Fuel pump
0.2 to 3.0

1.19 to 1.39
Fuel sender gauge assembly (Main)

Resistance
Float Level F
6.5 to 8.5
Float Level E
168 to 172
Fuel sender gauge assembly (Sub)

Resistance
Float Level F
5.5 to 9.5
Float Level E
236 to 244
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000201W00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 FUEL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000201X00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 FUEL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Fuel delivery pipe x Intake manifold
19
194
14
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Injector cover x Intake manifold
19
194
14
Wire harness clamp bracket x Intake manifold protector
11
112
Fuel delivery pipe LH x Cylinder head
19
194
14
Fuel delivery pipe RH x Cylinder head
19
194
14
Fuel delivery pipe LH x Fuel delivery pipe (Union nut)
35
357
26
Fuel delivery pipe RH x Fuel delivery pipe (Union nut)
35
357
26
Fuel delivery pipe x Water pipe
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Fuel delivery pipe LH x No. 2 fuel delivery pipe (Union nut)
35
357
26
No. 2 fuel delivery pipe (Union nut) x Fuel pump (High-pressure)
35
357
26
Fuel pressure sensor x No. 1 fuel delivery pipe
35
357
26
Injector driver x Engine assembly
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Fuel pump gauge retainer x Fuel tank
85
867
63
Pump drive case assembly x Cylinder head
19
194
14
Fuel pump (for high pressure) x Pump drive case assembly
21
214
16
Fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly x Fuel pump (for high pressure) (Union bolt)
31
316
23
Fuel pump ECU x Body
5.0
51
44 in.*lbf
Fuel tank to filler pipe hose x Fuel tank assembly (Hose clamp)
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Fuel tank assembly x Body
33
337
24
No. 1 fuel tank protector x Body
9.0
92
80 in.*lbf
No. 2 fuel tank protector x Body
9.0
92
80 in.*lbf
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000201X00GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KDA034X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
INTAKE MANIFOLD
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Fuel delivery pipe x Intake manifold
19
194
14
Purge valve x Intake manifold
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Manifold absolute pressure sensor x Intake manifold
4.0
41
35 in.*lbf
Intake manifold x Cylinder head
25
255
18
6.4
65
57 in.*lbf
Throttle with motor body assembly x Intake manifold
8.0
82
71 in.*lbf
CHAMBER
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Air cleaner duct with chamber x Intake manifold
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
Chamber duct x Air cleaner case sub-assembly (Hose clamp)
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
Chamber duct x Chamber (Hose clamp)
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Exhaust manifold x Cylinder head
30
306
22
Exhaust manifold x Front exhaust pipe sub-assembly
35
357
26
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
PART TIGHTENED
EXHAUST PIPE
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Tail pipe baffle x Tail exhaust pipe assembly
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Tail exhaust pipe assembly x Center exhaust pipe assembly
48
490
35
Center exhaust pipe assembly x Front exhaust pipe assembly
18
184
13
Front exhaust pipe assembly x Front exhaust pipe sub-assembly
43
439
32
Front exhaust pipe assembly x Exhaust pipe bracket
50
510
37
Front exhaust pipe sub-assembly x Exhaust manifold
35
357
26
No. 1 engine under cover x Body (Bolt A)
30
306
22
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KDA034X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
No. 1 engine under cover x Body (Bolt B)
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
No. 2 engine under cover x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KDA034X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 LUBRICATION: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000208G00MX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 LUBRICATION: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Oil pressure
Idle: 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2 , 7.3 psi) or more

6000 rpm: 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 , 73 psi) or more
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000208G00MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 LUBRICATION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000208H00MX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 LUBRICATION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Oil pan drain plug x No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly
39
400
29
Oil filter union x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
45
459
33
Oil filter sub-assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
14
143
10
18
184
13
Cam timing oil control valve x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
Camshaft position sensor x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
18
184
13
18
184
13
Bolt A and B
10
102
Bolt C and D
25
255
18
36
367
27
Idler pulley bracket x Engine assembly
36
367
27
36
367
27
Oil level dipstick guide x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
Wire harness bracket x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000208H00MX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 STARTING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205Q00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 STARTING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Starter assembly
Standard current
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
0.50 mm (0.020 in.)
0.7 mm (0.0276 in.)
0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)
Segment - Segment
Below 1
Commutator - Armature coil core

10 k or higher
29 mm (1.1417 in.)
Minimum diameter for Automatic Transmission
28 mm (1.1024 in.)
Standard runout
Maximum runout
Standard depth
Segment - Mold
Starter armature
assembly
Minimum depth
Segment - Mold
Standard
resistance
Standard
diameter
12.3 mm (0.484 in.)
14.4 mm (0.5669 in.)
7.0 mm (0.276 in.)
9.0 mm (0.3543 in.)
Standard brush
spring force
15.9 to 19.5 N (1.6 to 2.0

kgf, 3.6 to 4.4 lbf)
Minimum brush
spring force
2.5 N (0.3 kgf, 0.6 lbf)
A
A
B
C
10 k or higher
Standard length
Minimum length
Brush length
Standard
resistance
for Automatic
Transmission
Starter magnetic
switch assembly
Below 90 A at 11.5 V
-B
-C
-D
-D
A-D
B-C
Below 1
Standard
resistance
Terminal 50 Terminal C
Below 1
Below 1
Standard
resistance
Terminal 50 Switch body
Below 1
Below 2
Standard
resistance
Terminal 30 Terminal C
1 M or higher
Standard
resistance
All combinations
of all terminals
LOCK
10 k or higher
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205Q00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 STARTING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
Ignition switch
assembly
Standard
resistance
2 (AM1) - 3 (ACC)
ACC
Below 1
Standard
resistance
2 (AM1) - 3 (ACC)
- 4 (IG1)
6 (IG2) - 7 (AM2)
ON
Below 1
Standard
resistance
1 (ST1) - 2 (AM1) START
4 (IG1)
6 (IG2) - 7 (AM2) 8 (ST2)
Starter relay
Inhibitor relay
Specified
condition
Specified
condition
Below 1
1-2
(Battery voltage not applied to
terminals 1 and 2)
(Measured temperature : 20 C
(68 F))
93.8 to 136.4 k
3-5
(Battery voltage is applied
between terminals 1 and 2)
Below 1
3-5
(Battery voltage is not applied
10 k or higher
1-2
(Battery voltage not applied to
terminals 1 and 2)
(Measured temperature : 20 C
(68 F))
93.8 to 136.4 k
3-5
(Battery voltage is applied
Below 1
3-5
(Battery voltage is not applied
10 k or higher
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205Q00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 STARTING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000205R00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 STARTING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM
Lower side bolt
FT*LBF
50
510
37
50
510
37
36
367
27
Terminal 30
10
102
Terminal C
10
102
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
for Manual transmission
1.5
15
13 in.*lbf
for Automatic transmission
1.4
14
12 in.*lbf
Starter yoke assembly x Starter drive housing
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
Control unit relay assembly
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
Upper side bolt

(without SST)
Starter x Engine
Upper side bolt

(with SST)
Starter magnetic switch assembly x Starter drive housing

Starter cover x Starter brush holder assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000205R00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: FRONT SUSPENSION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KDE00KX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FRONT SUSPENSION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
front suspension upper to cowl brace sub-assembly x Body
16
163
12
Front suspension support sub-assembly x Front shock absorber assembly

(without SST)
55
561
41
Front suspension support sub-assembly x Front shock absorber assembly

(with SST)
49
495
36
Front shock absorber with coil spring x Body
23
235
17
155
1581
114
Front stabilizer link assembly x Front shock absorber assembly
46
469
34
Front flexible hose x Front shock absorber assembly
33
337
24
Hub nut
120
1224
89
Front lower suspension arm bolt x Body
110
1122
81
51
520
38
110
1122
81
Front lower suspension arm assembly x Body
85
867
63
No. 1 engine under cover bolt
30
306
22
No. 2 engine under cover bolt
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf.
Front No. 2 stabilizer bracket bolt
75
765
55
Front No. 2 stabilizer bracket nut
25
255
18
Rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly x Body
60
612
44
Front stabilizer link assembly x Front stabilizer bar
46
469
34
Front cross member sub-assembly x Body
95
969
70
Front shock absorber with coil spring x Steering knuckle
Front lower arm suspension arm assembly x Steering knuckle

Lower arm support plate x Body
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KDE00KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020EM00IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Refrigerant charge volume
Standard: 390 +/-50 g(13.8 +/-1.8 oz)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020EM00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020EN00JX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Instrument panel reinforcement assembly x Body
25
255
18
Lower instrument panel reinforcement sub-assembly x Instrument panel

reinforcement assembly
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
Air conditioning tube assembly x Cooler expansion valve
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
Air conditioning unit assembly x Body
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
Cooler expansion valve x Air conditioner tube assembly
3.5
36
31
in.*lbf
Air conditioner tube assembly x No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly
3.5
36
31
in.*lbf
COOLER EXPANSION VALVE

PART TIGHTENED
Suction hose sub-assembly x Cooler expansion valve
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
COMPRESSOR
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Compressor with magnet clutch x Engine
36
367
27
Suction hose sub-assembly x Compressor with magnet clutch
10
102
No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose x Compressor with magnet clutch
10
102
CONDENSER
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Cooler condenser assembly x Radiator assembly
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose x Cooler condenser assembly
10
102
Air conditioner tube and accessory assembly x Cooler condenser assembly
10
102
No. 1 cooler condenser bracket x Cooler condenser assembly
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020EN00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
No. 2 cooler condenser bracket x Cooler condenser assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020EN00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
6.0
61
53 in.*lbf
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: HORN: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020ED00IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: HORN: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Part Tightened
N*m kgf*cm
ft.*lbf
Low pitched horn assembly x Body
18
184
13
High pitched horn assembly x Hone bracket sub-assembly
18
184
13
Horn bracket sub-assembly x Front bumper reinforcement sub-assembly
13
133
10
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020ED00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000200K00NX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY PAD
PART TIGHTENED
Instrument panel reinforcement x Passenger airbag
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
FRONT CONSOLE BOX

PART TIGHTENED
Console box assembly x Body
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
6.5
66
58 in.*lbf
ROOF HEADLINING
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Center pillar garnish LH x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Center pillar garnish RH x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Front seat outer belt assembly LH x Body
30
306
22
Front seat outer belt assembly RH x Body
30
306
22
Rear window side garnish LH x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Rear window side garnish RH x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Rear quarter trim front garnish LH x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Rear quarter trim front garnish RH x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000200K00NX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: LIGHTING (EXT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCQ00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: LIGHTING (EXT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY (for Halogen Headlight)

Headlight assembly x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front bumper side support RH x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front bumper side support LH x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Headlight assembly x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front bumper side support RH x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
Front bumper side support LH x Body
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
2.0
20
18 in.*lbf
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
4.5
46
40 in.*lbf
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY (for HID Headlight)
FOG LIGHT ASSEMBLY

Fog light assembly x Front bumper cover
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR
Daytime running light resistor x Body
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Front turn signal light assembly x Front bumper cover
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Rear combination light assembly x Body
REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Rear light assembly x Rear bumper cover
HEIGHT CONTROL SENSOR
Rear height control sensor sub-assembly LH x Body
HEADLIGHT LEVELING ECU
Headlight leveling ECU assembly x Body
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCQ00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: LIGHTING (INT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCP009X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: LIGHTING (INT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
Front door courtesy switch assembly x Body
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCP009X.html?sisuffix=ff&
N*M
7.5
KGF*CM
76
FT.*LBF
66 in.*lbf
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: MIRROR (EXT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020LN03QX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: MIRROR (EXT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
Outer rear view mirror sub-assembly x Door panel
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020LN03QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: PARKING BRAKE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020CK00MX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: PARKING BRAKE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Parking brake switch assembly resistance ON (When switch shaft is not pressed)
(Switch connector - Switch body)
OFF (When switch shaft is pressed)
Parking brake lever travel at 200 N (20 kgf, 45.0 lbf)

Brake disc inside diameter
Parking brake shoe lining thickness
Below 1
10 k or higher
7 to 8 notches
Standard
190 mm (7.48 in.)
Maximum
191 mm (7.52 in.)
Standard
3.5 mm (0.1378 in.)
Minimum
1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020CK00MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: PARKING BRAKE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020CL00MX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: PARKING BRAKE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Hub nut
120
1224
89
Parking brake switch assembly set screw
1.5
15
13 in.*lbf
Parking brake lever sub-assembly set bolt
18
184
13
No. 1 fuel tank Protector set bolt
9.0
92
80 in.*lbf
No. 2 fuel tank Protector set bolt
9.0
92
80 in.*lbf
No. 2/No. 3 parking brake cable assembly x Body
18
184
13
Center exhaust pipe assembly x Tail exhaust pipe assembly
48
490
35
Center exhaust pipe assembly x Front exhaust pipe assembly
18
184
13
Lower casing bracket set bolt
18
184
13
Clamp H/B x Casing lower bracket
18
184
13
Rear disc brake caliper assembly set bolt
66
673
49
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020CL00MX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCF00FX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
Power steering ECU set bolts
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
10
102
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCF00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: POWER DISTRIBUTION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002KJF014X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: POWER DISTRIBUTION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Battery x Battery current sensor assembly
6.0
61
53
in.*lbf
Engine wire x Battery current sensor assembly
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
7.5
76
Bolt 7.5
76
Instrument panel junction block assembly x Instrument panel

reinforcement assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002KJF014X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
Nut
66
in.*lbf
66
in.*lbf
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: REAR SUSPENSION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020E700SX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: REAR SUSPENSION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Rear support to rear shock absorber nut

without SST
25
255
18
Rear support to rear shock absorber nut

with SST
23
235
17
Rear shock absorber with coil spring x Body
30
306
22
161
1642
119
80
816
59
Rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly x Rear shock absorber with coil spring
80
816
59
Rear stabilizer link sub-assembly x Rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
38
388
28
Rear height control sensor sub-assembly x Rear No. 2 suspension arm

assembly
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Hub nut
120
1224
89
Upper control arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
80
816
59
Upper control arm assembly x Rear suspension member assembly
90
918
66
Rear NO. 1 suspension arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
110
1122
81
Rear NO. 1 suspension arm assembly x Rear suspension member assembly
110
1122
81
18
184
13
120
1224
89
60
612
44
100
1020
74
Rear stabilizer bracket x Body
30
306
22
Rear stabilizer link sub-assembly x Rear stabilizer bar
38
388
28
NO. 1 fuel tank protector x Body
9.0
92
80
in.*lbf
NO. 2 fuel tank protector x Body
9.0
92
80
in.*lbf
Rear suspension member assembly x Body (Bolt A)
145
1479
107
Rear suspension member assembly x Body (Bolt B)
70
714
52
No. 3 parking brake cable assembly x Rear suspension member assembly
18
184
13
Rear No. 1 upper control arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
NO. 1 parking brake cable support bracket x Rear NO. 1 suspension arm
assembly
Wheel nut
Toe control link sub-assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly
Toe control link sub-assembly x Rear suspension member assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020E700SX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: SEAT BELT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003UWV00QX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: SEAT BELT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
42
428
31
Front seat inner belt assembly x Front seat assembly

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Rear window side garnish x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Rear quarter trim front garnish x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Center pillar garnish x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Front seat outer belt assembly (shoulder anchor) x Body
30
306
22
Front seat outer belt assembly (floor anchor) x Body
30
306
22
Front seat outer belt assembly (Upper bolt) x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Front seat outer belt assembly (Lower bolt) x Body
30
306
22
REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY

PART TIGHTENED
Rear seat inner belt assembly x Body
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
30
306
22
REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Separate type rear seat cushion assembly x Body
13
133
10
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Rear seat outer belt assembly (floor anchor) x Body
30
306
22
Rear seat outer belt assembly x Body
30
306
22
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
13
133
10
Bench type rear seatback assembly x Body
33
337
24
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Child restraint seat tether anchor bracket x Body
25
255
18
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR

PART TIGHTENED
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET

PART TIGHTENED
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UWV00QX.html?sisuffix=ff
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: SEAT BELT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
13
133
10
Bench type rear seatback assembly x Body
33
337
24
Rear seat hinge sub-assembly x Body
33
337
24
Child restraint seat anchor bracket sub-assembly x Body
25
255
18
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UWV00QX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: SEAT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Z9308ZX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: SEAT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Front seat assembly x Body
53
540
39
Separate type front seatback assembly x Separate type front seat cushion
assembly
42
428
31
Front seat inner belt assembly x Front seat assembly
42
428
31
5.5
56
5.5
56
Separate type front seatback cover bracket x Separate type front seatback
frame assembly
Front seat airbag assembly x Separate type front seatback frame assembly
49
in.*lbf
49
in.*lbf
REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY

PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
Bench type seatback assembly x Rear seat hinge sub-assembly
33
337
24
13
133
10
Rear rear window side garnish x Body
7.5
77
66 in.*lbf
Rear seatback lock striker x Body
33
337
24
Rear seatback lock assembly x Rear seatback frame assembly
25
250
18
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Z9308ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000118V0C8X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH (2013 FR-S)
HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH

Bolt Type
HEXAGON HEAD BOLT
NORMAL RECESS BOLT
STUD BOLT
WELD BOLT
CLASS
DEEP RECESS BOLT
4T
No Mark
No Mark
No Mark
5T
6T
w/ Washer
w/ Washer
7T
8T
9T
10T
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000118V0C8X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH (2013 FR-S)
11T
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: HOW TO DETERMINE NUT STRENGTH (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000118X0C8X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: HOW TO DETERMINE NUT STRENGTH (2013 FR-S)
HOW TO DETERMINE NUT STRENGTH

Nut Type
PRESENT STANDARD HEXAGON NUT
OLD STANDARD HEXAGON NUT

COLD FORGING NUT
CLASS
CUTTING PROCESSED NUT
4N
No Mark
5N (4T)
No Mark (w/ Washer)
No Mark (w/ Washer)
No Mark
6N
7N (5T)
8N
10N (7T)
No Mark
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000118X0C8X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
11N
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: HOW TO DETERMINE NUT STRENGTH (2013 FR-S)
12N
HINT:
*: Nut with 1 or more marks on one side surface of the nut.
Use a nut with the same nut strength classification number (or more) as the bolt strength
classification number when tightening parts with a bolt and nut.
Example:
Bolt = 4T
Nut = 4N or more
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000118X0C8X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: SPECIFIED TORQUE FOR STANDARD BOLTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000118W0C8X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: SPECIFIED TORQUE FOR STANDARD BOLTS (2013 FR-S)
SPECIFIED TORQUE FOR STANDARD BOLTS

CLASS
DIAMETER
PITCH
(MM)
(MM)
SPECIFIED TORQUE
HEXAGON HEAD BOLT
N*M
4T
5T
6T
7T
8T
KGF*CM
HEXAGON FLANGE BOLT
FT.*LBF
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
55
48 in.*lbf
60
52 in.*lbf
1.25
12.5
130
14
145
10
10
1.25
26
260
19
29
290
21
12
1.25
47
480
35
53
540
39
14
1.5
74
760
55
84
850
61
16
1.5
115
1,150
83
6.5
65
56 in.*lbf
7.5
75
65 in.*lbf
1.25
15.5
160
12
17.5
175
13
10
1.25
32
330
24
36
360
26
12
1.25
59
600
43
65
670
48
14
1.5
91
930
67
100
1,050
76
16
1.5
140
1,400
101
80
69 in.*lbf
90
78 in.*lbf
1.25
19
195
14
21
210
15
10
1.25
39
400
29
44
440
32
12
1.25
71
730
53
80
810
59
14
1.5
110
1,100
80
125
1,250
90
16
1.5
170
1,750
127
10.5
110
12
120
1.25
25
260
19
28
290
21
10
1.25
52
530
38
58
590
43
12
1.25
95
970
70
105
1,050
76
14
1.5
145
1,500
108
165
1,700
123
16
1.5
230
2,300
166
1.25
29
300
22
33
330
24
10
1.25
61
620
45
68
690
50
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000118W0C8X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: SPECIFIED TORQUE FOR STANDARD BOLTS (2013 FR-S)
9T
10T
11T
12
1.25
110
1,100
80
120
1,250
90
1.25
34
340
25
37
380
27
10
1.25
70
710
51
78
790
57
12
1.25
125
1,300
94
140
1,450
105
1.25
38
390
28
42
430
31
10
1.25
78
800
58
88
890
64
12
1.25
140
1,450
105
155
1,600
116
1.25
42
430
31
47
480
35
10
1.25
87
890
64
97
990
72
12
1.25
155
1,600
116
175
1,800
130
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000118W0C8X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING COLUMN: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JBJ01SX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING COLUMN: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Maximum steering free play
30 mm (1.18 in.)
Steering column assembly preload
1.6 to 2.1 N*m (16.3 to 21.4

kgf*cm, 14.2 to 18.6 in.*lbf)
Steering intermediate shaft assembly turn torque (rack and

pinion power steering gear assembly side)
6.6 N*m (66 kgf*cm, 58 in.*lbf) or

less
Steering intermediate shaft assembly turn torque (steering

column assembly side)
6.0 N*m (61 kgf*cm, 53 in.*lbf) or

less
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JBJ01SX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING COLUMN: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JBK01XX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING COLUMN: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
No. 1 engine under cover set bolt
30
306
22
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf.
Steering intermediate shaft assembly x Steering column assembly
35
357
26
Steering intermediate shaft assembly x Rack and pinion steering gear

assembly
35
357
26
Steering column assembly set nuts
40
408
30
Steering column assembly set bolt
40
408
30
Steering wheel assembly set nut
39
398
29
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JBK01XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCH00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Rack and pinion power steering gear assembly total
preload (turning)
0.9 to 1.6 N*m (9.2 to 16.3 kgf*cm, 8.0 to

14.2 in.*lbf)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCH00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KCG00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
30
306
22
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf.
Front stabilizer link assembly x Front stabilizer bar
46
469
34
Front stabilizer bar set bolts
60
612
44
Tie rod end sub-assembly x Steering knuckle
27
275
20
Steering intermediate shaft assembly x Rack and pinion power steering gear
assembly
35
357
26
120
1220
89
85
869
63
Steering rack end sub-assembly
103
1050
76
Lock nut x Steering rack housing
60
612
44
Rack and pinion power steering gear assembly set bolts

Tie rod end sub-assembly x Steering rack end sub-assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KCG00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003KFQ00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Curtain shield airbag assembly x Body
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
Separate type front seatback assembly x Separate type front seat cushion
assembly
42
428
31
5.5
55
Front seat airbag assembly x Separate type front seatback frame assembly
5.5
55
Airbag sensor assembly x Body
25
255
18
Front airbag sensor x Body
13
133
10
Door side airbag sensor x Front door
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly x Body
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
Rear airbag sensor assembly x Body
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
No. 2 airbag sensor assembly x Body
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
Separate type front seatback cover bracket x Separate type front seatback
frame assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003KFQ00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
49
in.*lbf
49
in.*lbf
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003K5R00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
Transponder key ECU x Body
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
7.5
76
66 in.*lbf
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003K5R00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: TIRE / WHEEL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JBI02HX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TIRE / WHEEL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure:
TIRE SIZE
COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

KPA (KGF/CM 2 , PSI)
P205/55R16 91V
240 (2.4, 35)
240 (2.4, 35)
215/45R17 87W
240 (2.4, 35)
240 (2.4, 35)
T135/80D16 101M
420 (4.2, 60)
420 (4.2, 60)
Maximum wheel runout
Steel wheel
1.5 mm (0.0591 in.) (Vertical and lateral)
Aluminum wheel
1.0 mm (0.0394 in.) (Vertical and lateral)
Maximum wheel imbalance after adjustment
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JBI02HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
10.0 g (0.0220 lb)
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003JBH009X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M
KGF*CM
FT.*LBF
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER SET NUT
4.0
41
35 IN.*LBF
HUB NUT
120
1224
89
13
133
10
Door control receiver set bolt
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003JBH009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXP00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Neutral position switch assembly
1-2
Back-up light switch assembly
1-2
Manual transmission extension housing oil seal

installation depth
Reverse idler gear radial clearance
Pushed: Below 1
Released: 10 k or higher
Pushed: Below 1
Released: 10 k or higher
- 0.1 to 1.1 mm (0.00394 to 0.0433 in.)

to 0.082 mm (0.00157 to
Standard 0.040
0.00323 in.)
Maximum 0.082 mm (0.00323 in.)
No. 4 gear shift fork slotted spring pin drive in

depth
mm (0 in.) (from the end surface of

- 0
the No. 4 gear shift fork)
No. 1 gear shift head slotted spring pin drive in

depth

- 0
the No. 1 gear shift head)

depth

- 0

depth

- 0
Transmission front bearing retainer oil seal

installation depth
- 11.1 to 11.9 mm (0.437 to 0.469 in.)
Extension housing rear oil seal installation depth
- 1.0 to 2.0 mm (0.0394 to 0.0787 in.)
Counter 6th gear thrust clearance
to 0.40 mm (0.00394 to 0.0157

Standard 0.10
in.)
Maximum 0.40 mm (0.0157 in.)
Counter 6th gear radial clearance
to 0.068 mm (0.000590 to
Standard 0.015
0.00268 in.)
Maximum 0.068 mm (0.00268 in.)
Input shaft radial clearance
to 0.072 mm (0.00114 to
Standard 0.029
0.00283 in.)
Maximum 0.072 mm (0.00283 in.)
1st gear thrust clearance
Standard 0.15 to 0.40 (0.00590 to 0.0157 in.)

Maximum 0.40 (0.0157 in.)
1st gear radial clearance
to 0.066 (0.000590 to 0.00260

Standard 0.015
in.)
Maximum
0.066 (0.00260 in.)
2nd gear thrust clearance
Standard 0.10 to 0.45 (0.000394 to 0.0177 in.)

Maximum 0.45 (0.0177 in.)
2nd gear radial clearance
to 0.066 (0.000590 to 0.00260

Standard 0.015
in.)
Maximum
0.066 (0.00260 in.)
Reverse gear thrust clearance
Standard 0.10 to 0.45 (0.000394 to 0.0177 in.)

Maximum 0.45 (0.0177 in.)
Reverse gear radial clearance
to 0.066 (0.000590 to 0.00260

Standard 0.015
in.)
Maximum
0.066 (0.00260 in.)
3rd gear thrust clearance
Standard 0.10 to 0.35 (0.00393 to 0.0138 in.)

Maximum 0.35 (0.0138 in.)
0.015 to 0.068 (0.000590 to 0.00268
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXP00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
3rd gear radial clearance
Standard in.)
Maximum 0.068 (0.00268 in.)
Counter shaft 4th speed gear thrust clearance
Standard 0.10 to 0.35 (0.00393 to 0.0138 in.)

Maximum 0.35 (0.0138 in.)
Counter shaft 4th speed gear radial clearance
0.065 to 0.115 (0.002559 to 0.00453

Standard in.)
Maximum 0.115 (0.00453 in.)
No. 1 gear shift head clearance
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

Standard in.)
Maximum 15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
Standard 15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

in.)
Maximum 15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
Standard 15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

in.)
Maximum 15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
No. 1 shift fork shaft
Standard
width 14.8 to 15.0 mm (0.583 to 0.591 in.)
width
No. 2 shift inter lock pin
Standard
width 14.8 to 15.0 mm (0.583 to 0.591 in.)
width
No. 4 gear shift fork
to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

Standard 15.2
in.)
Maximum 15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
Reverse and 5th shift head
to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

Standard 15.2
in.)
Maximum 15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
No. 4 synchronizer ring and counter 6th gear

clearance
Standard 0.88 to 1.52 mm (0.0346 to 0.0598 in.)

Minimum 0.88 mm (0.0346 in.)
Counter 6th gear inside diameter
Standard 34.015 to 34.040 mm (1.33917 to

1.34016 in.)
Maximum 34.040 mm (1.34016 in.)
No. 4 gear shift fork claw

No. 4 gear shift fork claw and glove of the No. 4

transmission hub sleeve clearance
to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138

Standard 0.15
in.)
Maximum 0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
Reverse idler gear sub-assembly inside diameter
to 22.061mm (0.86771 to
Standard 22.040
0.86854 in.)
Maximum 22.061mm (0.86854 in.)
Reverse idler gear shaft outer diameter
to 22.000 mm (0.86531 to
Standard 21.979
0.86614 in.)
Minimum 21.979 mm (0.86531 in.)
Shaft snap ring thickness
Standard 0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)

Mark A 2.80 mm (0.11023 in.)
B 2.85 mm (0.11220 in.)
Shaft snap ring
C 2.90 mm (0.11417 in.)

D 2.95 mm (0.11614 in.)
E 3.00 mm (0.11811 in.)
F 3.05 mm (0.12007 in.)
No. 3 synchronizer ring and 3rd gear clearance

2/5
8/6/12
Front bearing shaft snap ring thickness
Standard 0 mm (0 in.)
Maximum 0.1 mm (0.00394 in.)
Mark 0 1.95 mm (0.07677 in.)
2 2.00 mm (0.07874 in.)
Front bearing shaft snap ring
3 2.05 mm (0.08070 in.)

4 2.10 mm (0.08267 in.)
5 2.15 mm (0.08464 in.)
6 2.20 mm (0.08661 in.)
Standard 31.984 to 32.000 mm (1.25921 to
A 1.25984 in.)
to 43.000 mm (1.69228 to
B 42.984
1.69291 in.)
Output shaft outer diameter
C 40.984 to 41.000 mm (1.61354 to

1.61417 in.)
Minimum 31.984 mm (1.25921 in.)
A
B 42.9849 mm (1.69228 in.)
C 40.984 mm (1.61354 in.)
Output shaft runout
Standard 0.03 mm (0.00118 in.) or less
Reverse gear inside diameter
Standard 47.015 to 47.040 mm (1.85098 to

Maximum 1.85197 in.)
47.040 mm (1.85197 in.)
1st gear inside diameter
to 46.340 mm (1.82343 to
Standard 46.315
1.82441 in.)
Maximum 46.340 mm (1.82441 in.)
2nd gear inside diameter
to 49.040 mm (1.92972 to
Standard 49.015
1.93071 in.)
Maximum 49.040 mm (1.93071 in.)
1st gear bearing inner race outer diameter
to 40.300 mm (1.58598 to
Standard 40.284
1.58661 in.)
Minimum 40.284 mm (1.58598 in.)


Standard 0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138

in.)
Maximum 0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)


to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138

Standard 0.15
in.)
Maximum 0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
inner
No. 1 synchronizer ring set and 1st gear clearance
Middle 0.38 to 1.22 mm (0.0150 to 0.0480 in.)

Outer 0.8 to 1.8 mm (0.0315 to 0.0709 in.)
Standard
inner 0.48 to 1.12 mm (0.0189 to 0.0441 in.)
No. 1 synchronizer ring set and 2nd gear clearance
Middle 0.38 to 1.22 mm (0.0150 to 0.0480 in.)

Outer 0.8 to 1.8 mm (0.0315 to 0.0709 in.)
No. 3 transmission clutch hub shaft snap ring

thickness

Mark A 1.80 mm (0.07086 in.)
3/5
8/6/12
B 1.85 mm (0.07283 in.)

C 1.90 mm (0.07480 in.)

D 1.95 mm (0.07677 in.)
E 2.00 mm (0.07874 in.)
F 2.05 mm (0.08070 in.)
6th gear shaft snap ring thickness

Mark A 2.67 mm (0.10511 in.)
B 2.73 mm (0.10748 in.)
C 2.79 mm (0.10984 in.)
D 2.85 mm (0.11220 in.)
E 2.91 mm (0.11456 in.)
6th gear shaft snap ring
F 2.97 mm (0.11692 in.)

G 3.03 mm (0.11929 in.)
H 3.09 mm (0.12165 in.)
J 3.15 mm (0.12401 in.)
K 3.21 mm (0.01053 in.)
L 3.27 mm (0.12874 in.)


0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138

Standard in.)
Maximum
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
No. 1 synchronizer ring and counter shaft 4th

speed gear clearance

Standard
inner 0.4 to 1.2 mm (0.0157 to 0.0472 in.)
No. 1 synchronizer ring set and 3rd gear clearance
Middle 0.3 to 1.3 mm (0.0118 to 0.0512 in.)

Outer 0.8 to 1.8 mm (0.0315 to 0.0709 in.)
Standard 39.284 to 39.300 mm (1.54661 to
A 1.54721 in.)
37.984 to 38.000 mm (1.49543 to
B 1.49606 in.)
Counter shaft outer diameter
24.987 to 25.000 mm (0.98374 to

C 0.98425 in.)
Minimum 39.284 mm (1.54661 in.)
A
B 37.984 mm (1.49543 in.)
C 24.987 mm (0.98374 in.)
Counter shaft runout
Standard 0.03 mm (0.00118 in.) or less
3rd gear inside diameter
43.015 to 43.040 mm (1.69350 to

Standard 1.69448 in.)
Maximum
43.040 mm (1.69448 in.)
Counter shaft 4th speed gear inside diameter
Standard 46.315 to 46.340 mm (1.82425 to

1.82441 in.)
Maximum 46.340 mm (1.82441 in.)
4th gear bearing inner race outer diameter
46.225 to 46.250 mm (1.81988 to

Standard 1.82087 in.)
Minimum
46.225 mm (1.81988 in.)
4th gear washer thickness
4/5
8/6/12
Mark A 3.75 mm (0.14763 in.)

B 3.80 mm (0.14960 in.)
C 3.85 mm (0.15157 in.)
4th gear washer
D 3.90 mm (0.15354 in.)

E 3.95 mm (0.15551 in.)
F 4.00 mm (0.15748 in.)
G 4.05 mm (0.15944 in.)
H 4.10 mm (0.16141 in.)

thickness

Mark A 1.80 mm (0.07086 in.)
B 1.85 mm (0.07283 in.)
C 1.90 mm (0.07480 in.)

D 1.95 mm (0.07677 in.)
E 2.00 mm (0.07874 in.)
F 2.05 mm (0.08070 in.)
No. 2 front counter gear bearing snap ring

thickness

Mark 1 2.05 mm (0.08070 in.)
2 2.10 mm (0.08267 in.)
No. 2 front counter gear bearing snap ring
3 2.15 mm (0.08464 in.)

4 2.20 mm (0.08661 in.)
5 2.25 mm (0.08858 in.)
6 2.30 mm (0.09055 in.)
5/5
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YXQ00EX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013

FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Manual transmission filler plug x Manual transmission assembly
37
377
27
Manual transmission drain plug sub-assembly x Manual transmission assembly
37
377
27
Neutral position switch assembly x Manual transmission assembly
32
329
24
Back-up light switch assembly x Manual transmission assembly
32
329
24
Manual transmission assembly x Rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator
40
408
30
Manual transmission assembly x Engine for bolt
50
510
37
Manual transmission assembly x Engine for nut
50
510
37
Rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator x Body for bolt
65
663
48
Rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator x Body for nut
55
561
41
Exhaust pipe bracket x Manual transmission assembly
23
235
17
Floor shift control shift lever retainer sub-assembly x Body
18
184
13
Clutch release cylinder assembly x Manual transmission assembly
37
377
27
Wire harness clamp bracket x Manual transmission assembly
10
102
Ground cable x Manual transmission assembly
13
133
10
Shift lever cap x floor shift control shift lever retainer
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
Shift lever boot x Body
18
184
13
No. 3 gear shift fork shaft x No. 3 gear shift fork
20
199
14
20
199
14
20
199
14
Front bearing retainer x Clutch housing
17
173
13
Manual transmission case x Clutch housing
29
296
21
Manual transmission case x Reverse idler gear shaft
28
286
21
Clutch housing x Reverse idler gear shaft
28
286
21
Output shaft rear bearing retainer x Manual transmission case
30
306
22
No. 1 straight screw plug x Manual transmission case
19
194
14
No. 2 shift inter lock pin x No. 1 shift fork shaft
33
340
25
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXQ00EX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
No. 1 extension housing oil receiver pipe x Manual transmission extension

housing sub-assembly
8.5
87
75
in.*lbf
Manual transmission extension housing sub-assembly x Manual transmission

case
29
296
21
Bolt x Manual transmission extension housing sub-assembly
31
316
23
No. 2 straight screw plug (27 mm) x Manual transmission extension housing
sub-assembly
39
400
29
No. 2 straight screw plug (10 mm) x Manual transmission extension housing
sub-assembly
25
250
18
Wire harness clamp bracket x Clutch housing
7.0
71
62
in.*lbf
Release fork support x Clutch housing
16
163
12
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YXQ00EX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PMD00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Line pressure (Fluid temperature): 50 to 80C D position
(122 to 176F)
Engine idling
R position
Line pressure (Fluid temperature): 50 to 80C D position

(122 to 176F)
350 to 430 kPa (3.6 to 4.4 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to

62 psi)
760 to 950 kPa (7.7 to 9.7 kgf/cm 2 , 110 to
138 psi)
1200 to 1380 kPa (12.5 to 14.0 kgf/cm 2 ,
174 to 200 psi)
At stall speed (Throttle valve fully open)
R position
1410 to 1630 kPa (14.4 to 16.6 kgf/cm 2 ,

204 to 236 psi)
Engine stall speed
D position
2350 +/- 250 rpm
ND
position
Less than 1.2 seconds
NR
position
Less than 1.5 seconds
Engine idle speed (A/C OFF)
N position
600 to 800 r/min
Drive plate runout
Maximum
0.30 mm (0.0118 in.)
12
47 km/h (29 mph)
23
96 km/h (59 mph)
34
142 km/h (88 mph)
45
201 km/h (125 mph)
56
282 km/h (175 mph)
12
12 km/h (7 mph)
23
20 km/h (12 mph)
34
30 km/h (19 mph)
45
48 km/h (30 mph)
56
59 km/h (37 mph)
264 km/h (164 mph)
186 km/h (116 mph)
Time lag
Shift schedule
D, 6 position
Throttle valve fully open
Throttle valve opening 6 %
Manual downshift speed
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PMD00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/6/12
5, 4, 3, 2, 1 gear range
129 km/h (80 mph)
80 km/h (50 mph)
38 km/h (23 mph)
NOTICE:
All shift point values indicated in the above tables are actual values. Therefore, if checking a shift
point with a chassis dynamometer, keep in mind that there is a range of error in the chassis
dynamometer indication.
If checking a shift point against the speed indicated on the speedometer, remember to consider
the speedometer correction rate and range of error in the tester indication.
Transmission Revolution Sensor
ITEM
TESTER CONNECTION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
CONDITION
1-2
Transmission revolution sensor NT
560 to 680
20C (68F)
1-2
Transmission revolution sensor SP2
560 to 680
20C (68F)
Transmission Wire
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL)
10C (50F)
5 to 8 k
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL)
25C (77F)
2.5 to 4.5 k
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL)
110C (230F)
0.22 to 0.28 k
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL)
Always
79 to 156 k
1 (E2) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
9 (OIL) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher

ITEM
TESTER CONNECTION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
CONDITION
Shift solenoid valve SL1
Shift solenoid valve S1
1-2
20C (68F)
Solenoid Connector (S1) - Solenoid Body (S1)
20C (68F)
20C (68F)
20C (68F)
5.0 to 5.6
11 to 15
11 to 15
11 to 15
2/7
8/6/12

Shift solenoid valve SL2
Shift solenoid valve SR
Shift solenoid valve SLT
Shift solenoid valve SLU
20C (68F)
1-2
11 to 15
5.0 to 5.6
20C (68F)
Solenoid Connector (SR) - Solenoid Body (SR)
20C (68F)
1-2
11 to 15
5.0 to 5.6
20C (68F)
1-2
5.0 to 5.6
20C (68F)
Park/Neutral Position Switch

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
2 (RB) - 6 (PL)
Shift lever in P
Below 1
4 (B) - 5 (L)
Shift lever not in P
10 k or higher
Shift lever in R
Below 1
Shift lever not in R
10 k or higher
2 (RB) - 9 (NL)
Shift lever in N
Below 1
4 (B) - 5 (L)
Shift lever not in N
10 k or higher
Shift lever in D, M, "+" or "-"
Below 1
Shift lever not in D, M, "+" or "-"
10 k or higher
2 (RB) - 1 (RL)
2 (RB) - 7 (DL)
Shift Lever Assembly

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
1-3
2-3
Shift lever in P
8-9
10 - 11
12 - 13
Shift lever in M
Shift lever held in "+" (Up shift)
Shift lever in M
Shift lever held in "-" (Down shift)
Shift lever in P
2-3
10 - 11
Below 1
Shift lever in M
1-3
8-9
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Shift lever in M
Shift lever not in "+"
10 k or higher
Shift lever not in M
3/7
8/6/12
Shift lever in M
12 - 13
Shift lever not in "-"
Shift Lock Solenoid

TESTER CONNECTION
4-5
CONDITION
20C (68F)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
27.6 to 30.5
Shift Paddle Switch

TESTER CONNECTION
1-3
1-4
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Pull continuously "+" (Up shift)
Below 1
Release "+"
10 k or higher
Pull continuously "-" (Down shift)
Below 1
Release "-"
10 k or higher
Pattern Select Switch

TESTER CONNECTION
6-8
4-8
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Pattern select (SNOW) switch on
Below 1
Pattern select (SNOW) switch off
10 k or higher
Pattern select (SPORT) switch on
Below 1
Pattern select (SPORT) switch off
10 k or higher
Automatic Transmission Unit:

1st and reverse return spring free length
Standard: 23.74 mm (0.934 in.)
Rear planetary gear pinion thrust clearance
Standard: 0.2 to 0.6 mm (0.00788 to 0.0236 in.)
Rear planetary gear bushing inside diameter
Standard: 18.025 mm (0.710 in.)
1st and reverse brake pack clearance
0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.0197 to 0.0315 in.)

Mark 0: 0 mm (0 in.)
Mark 2: 0.2 mm (0.00787 in.)
Mark 4: 0.4 mm (0.01575 in.)
Flange thickness (1st and reverse brake)
Mark 6: 0.6 mm (0.02362 in.)

Mark 8: 0.8 mm (0.03150 in.)
Mark 10: 1.0 mm (0.03937 in.)
Mark 12: 1.2 mm (0.04724 in.)
Mark 14: 1.4 mm (0.05512 in.)
Intermediate shaft runout

Intermediate shaft diameter
Standard: 0.03 mm (0.00118 in.)

Standard A: 22.962 to 22.975 mm (0.9041 to 0.9045 in.)
Standard B: 27.759 to 27.775 mm (1.0929 to 1.0935 in.)
4/7
8/6/12
Center planetary gear pinion thrust

clearance
No. 2 brake pinion return spring free length
No. 2 brake piston piston stroke
0.6 to 0.9 mm (0.0237 to 0.0354 in.)

Mark 0: 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
Mark 1: 2.1 mm (0.0826 in.)
Mark 2: 2.2 mm (0.0866 in.)
Flange thickness (No. 2 brake piston)
Mark 3: 2.3 mm (0.0905 in.)

Mark 4: 2.4 mm (0.0944 in.)
Mark 5: 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.)
Mark 6: 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
Mark 7: 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
Brake piston return spring free length
Front planetary gear pinion thrust clearance
Front planetary gear bushing inside diameter Standard: 48.78 mm (1.92 in.)
No. 1 brake piston piston stroke
0.42 to 0.72 mm (0.0166 to 0.0283 in.)
No. 3 brake piston return spring free length

Mark 0: 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
Flange thickness ( No. 1 brake piston)
Mark 1: 2.2 mm (0.0866 in.)

Mark 2: 2.4 mm (0.0944 in.)
Mark 3: 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
Oil Pump:
Stator shaft bushing inside diameter
Standard: 21.527 mm (0.8475 in.)
Clutch Drum And Input Shaft:

Direct clutch return spring free length
Reverse clutch return spring free length
Direct clutch pack clearance
0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.0197 to 0.0314 in.)

Mark 0: 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
Mark 1: 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
Mark 2: 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
Mark 3: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
Flange thickness (Direct clutch)
Mark 4: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)

Mark 5: 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
Mark 6: 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
Mark 7: 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
Mark 8: 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
Reverse clutch pack clearance
0.4 to 0.7 mm (0.0158 to 0.0275 in.)
5/7
8/6/12
Mark 0: 2.4 mm (0.0945 in.)

Mark 1: 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.)
Mark 2: 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
Mark 3: 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
Mark 4: 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
Mark 5: 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
Flange thickness (Reverse clutch)
Mark 6: 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)

Mark 7: 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
Mark 8: 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
Mark 9: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
Mark A: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
Mark B: 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
Forward clutch return spring free length
Forward clutch pack clearance
0.56 to 0.86 mm (0.0221 to 0.0338 in.)

Mark 0: 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
Mark 1: 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
Mark 2: 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
Mark 3: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
Mark 4: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
Flange thickness (Forward clutch)
Mark 5: 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)

Mark 6: 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
Mark 7: 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
Mark 8: 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
Mark 9: 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
Coast clutch pack clearance
0.4 to 0.7 mm (0.0158 to 0.0275 in.)

Mark 0: 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
Mark 1: 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
Mark 2: 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
Mark 3: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
Mark 4: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
Flange thickness (Coast clutch)
Mark 5: 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)

Mark 6: 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
Mark 7: 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
Mark 8: 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
Mark 9: 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
Forward clutch hub inside diameter
Reverse clutch hub inside diameter
Accumulator:
SPRING
B 1 (Outer)
C2
FREE LENGTH/OUTER DIAMETER MM (IN.)
COLOR
46.36 (1.8252)/17.10 (0.6732)
Natural
65.07 (2.5618)/16.2 (0.6378)
Pink
6/7
8/6/12
B3
64.5 (2.539)/19.5 (0.768)
Orange
C 3 (Inner)
44.0 (1.732)/14.0 (0.551)
Yellow
C 3 (Outer)
76.65 (3.0178)/20.10 (0.7913)
White
Output Shaft Bearing:

Clearance
0.02 to 0.12 mm (0.000787 to 0.00472 in.)

No. 1: 3.80 mm (0.150 in.)
No. 2: 3.85 mm (0.152 in.)
No. 3: 3.90 mm (0.154 in.)
No. 4: 3.95 mm (0.156 in.)
No. 5: 4.00 mm (0.157 in.)
Flange thickness
No. 6: 4.05 mm (0.159 in.)

No. 7: 4.10 mm (0.161 in.)
No. 8: 4.15 mm (0.163 in.)
No. 9: 4.20 mm (0.165 in.)
No. 10: 4.25 mm (0.167 in.)
No. 11: 4.30 mm (0.169 in.)
No. 12: 4.35 mm (0.171 in.)
7/7
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 F
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PME00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

(2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Overflow plug x Automatic transmission assembly
20
204
15
Refill plug x Automatic transmission assembly
39
400
29
Transmission revolution sensor x Automatic transmission assembly
5.4
55
48
in.*lbf
ATF temperature sensor x Transmission valve body assembly
10
102
Valve body wire harness clamp x Transmission valve body assembly
6.4
65
57
in.*lbf
Valve body oil strainer assembly x Transmission valve body assembly
10
102
Automatic transmission oil pan sub-assembly x Automatic transmission

assembly
7.0
71
62
in.*lbf
Shift solenoid valve (S2) x Transmission valve body assembly
10
102
10
102
10
102
Shift solenoid valve (SR) x Transmission valve body assembly
10
102
Transmission valve body assembly x Automatic transmission assembly
11
112
Detent spring x Transmission valve body assembly
10
102
Lock nut x Park/neutral position switch assembly
6.9
70
61
in.*lbf
Park/neutral position switch assembly x Automatic transmission assembly
13
130
Transmission control shaft lever RH x Park/neutral position switch assembly
16
163
12
Transmission oil cooler bracket x Transmission oil cooler
23
235
17
Transmission oil cooler x Body
23
235
17
Floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly x Shift lever assembly
18
184
13
Floor shift assembly x Body
18
184
13
Shift Paddle Switch (Transmission Shift Switch Assembly) x Steering wheel

assembly
1.7
18
15
in.*lbf
Oil cooler tube x Automatic transmission assembly
21
214
16
Automatic transmission assembly x Engine
50
510
37
Rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator x Automatic transmission assembly
40
408
30
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PME00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 F
Rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator x Rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator
55
561
41
Rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator x Body
65
663
48
Exhaust pipe bracket x Automatic transmission assembly
23
235
17
Torque converter assembly x Drive plate
25
255
18
Vacuum tube connector hose x Engine
18
184
13
No. 2 engine hanger x Engine
21
214
16
Wire harness clamp bracket x No. 2 engine hanger
10
102
Ground cable x Automatic transmission assembly
13
133
10
Oil pump assembly x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly
21
214
16
Parking lock pawl bracket x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly
7.3
74
65
in.*lbf
Extension housing sub-assembly x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly
34
345
25
Automatic transmission housing x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly

(for Bolts A and B)
34
347
25
Automatic transmission housing x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly

(for Bolt C)
57
581
42
Automatic transmission case plug (TORX) x Automatic transmission case subassembly
39
400
29
7.4
75
Automatic transaxle breather tube x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly 5.4
55
48
in.*lbf
Automatic transmission case plug (Hexagon) x Automatic transmission case

sub-assembly
65
in.*lbf
Oil cooler tube union x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly
39
393
28
TCM bracket x TCM
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
TCM x Body
7.5
77
66
in.*lbf
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PME00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: WINDOW / GLASS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002E8X03DX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: WINDOW / GLASS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR
PART TIGHTENED
Power window regulator motor assembly x Front door window regulator subassembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002E8X03DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF

6.0
61
53
in.*lbf
1/1
8/6/12
SPECIFICATIONS: WIPER / WASHER: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000313803JX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: WIPER / WASHER: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
PART TIGHTENED
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
FRONT WIPER MOTOR

Windshield wiper arm and blade assembly LH x Front wiper motor and link
assembly
22
224
16
Windshield wiper arm and blade assembly RH x Front wiper motor and link
assembly
22
224
16
Front wiper motor and link assembly x Body
6.0
61
53
in.*lbf
Windshield wiper link assembly x Windshield wiper motor assembly
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
Windshield wiper motor assembly x Front wiper crank sub-assembly
8.5
87
75
in.*lbf
7.5
76
66
in.*lbf
WASHER MOTOR
Front fender liner LH x Front bumper cover
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000313803JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
TOC2: TOC2: CAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010EX1UHX
Title: TOC2: TOC2: CAUTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION
section.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010EX1UHX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
TOC2: TOC2: FOREWORD (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010EW2S0X
Title: TOC2: TOC2: FOREWORD (2013 FR-S)
FOREWORD
Applicable models
ZN6 series
MANUAL NAME
PUB. NO.
2013 SCION FR-S Electrical Wiring Diagram
EM20S0U
NM20S0U

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010EW2S0X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
2/2
8/6/12
TOC3: TOC3: CAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010EX1UIX
Title: TOC3: TOC3: CAUTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION
section.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010EX1UIX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010EW2S1X
Title: TOC3: TOC3: FOREWORD (2013 FR-S)
FOREWORD
Applicable models
ZN6 series
MANUAL NAME
PUB. NO.
2013 SCION FR-S Wiring Diagram
EM20S0U
NM20S0U

1/2
8/6/12
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDN0LXX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:
In the table below, the values listed under Normal Condition are reference values. Do not

(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List.
(g) Check the values by referring to the table below.
ECM
TESTER
DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
When the battery voltage is

below 11 V, other systems may
be affected.
Reference figures:
Battery
Voltage
Battery
Current
Battery voltage:
Min.: 0 V, Max.:
65.535 V
Battery current:
Min.: -125 A, Max.:
125 A
11 to 14 V: Idling
Changes in response to the

amount of electricity generated
by the alternator: while running
after warming up.
Battery temperature:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDN0LXX.html?sisuffix=ff&
IG ON: 12.5 V
When cranking:
9.834 V
When idling (after
warming up): 13.359
V
When a malfunction occurs,
there may be a problem with
the IB voltage system or the
sensor power source.
1/3
8/6/12
Battery
Min.: -40C (-40F),
Temperature Max.: 6513.5C
(11756.3F)
Alt Vol - Non

Active Test
Displays the voltage

required when the
regulator is not being
forcefully driven:
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 80 V
Alt Vol Active Test

required when the
regulator is being
forcefully driven:
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 80 V
Displays the charging

Alternator
Duty
control signal:
Min.: 0%, Max.: 255
%
Displays the
Request
Voltage to
alternator generation
control mode:
Alternator
Min.: 13.5 V, Max.:

14.5 V
# Codes
(Include
History)
Number of DTCs:
Min.: 0, Max.: 255

actual temperature: while
running after warming up.
there may be a problem with

the THB voltage system or the
sensor power source.

battery fluid temperature and
running state (12.4 to 14.8 V):
after starting the engine.

there may be problems with
charging control systems.
Specified voltage required when

performing the "generation
required voltage" active test:
after starting the engine.

generated when
performing the active
test.
When a malfunction
occurs, there may be
problems with the
charging control
systems.

by the alternator: while charging
the charging control systems.
control.
by the alternator: while charging
control.

the charging control systems.
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test.
(e) Perform the Active Test by referring to the table below.
2/3
8/6/12
ECM
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL
RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
While engine running.

Control the
Voltage of
Alternator
Fluctuations in the required

alternator generated voltage.
Between
12.8 and
14.0 V
While engine running.

Test is possible when
vehicle is stopped and
engine is idling
Shift lever P or N position
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDJ0VJX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) Check the DLC3
2. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, replace or recharge the battery.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDJ0VJX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MXP02KX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)

DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
P0516
Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit Low
P0517
Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit High
P1530
Short in Battery Current Sensor Circuit
P1531
Open in Battery Current Sensor Circuit
P1532
Battery Current Sensor Circuit
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MXP02KX.html?sisuffix=ff
SEE PAGE
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDK0XKX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / DTC.
(e) Check the DTC(s), and then write them down.
2. CLEAR DTC
(e) Clear the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDK0XKX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MXV01SX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
If any of the following DTCs are stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode to allow the vehicle to be driven
temporarily.
DTC NO.
P0516, P0517, P1530, P1531 and

P1532
COMPONENT FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
Generator
Generator command is
fixed.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MXV01SX.html?sisuffix=ff
FAIL-SAFE DEACTIVATION
CONDITION
Pass condition detected
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (20
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PD90TJX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
1.
NEXT
2.
HINT:
In troubleshooting, confirm that the problem symptoms have been accurately identified.
Gather as much information as possible for reference. Past problems that seem unrelated may also
help in some cases.
The following 5 items are important points in the problem analysis:
What
When
Where
Road conditions
Running conditions, driving conditions, weather conditions
How did it happen?
Problem symptoms
NEXT
3.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PD90TJX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
4.
INSPECT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION OF CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*
(a) Use the Techstream to check if the CAN communication system is functioning normally
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN DTCs are not output
CAN DTCs are output
GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM .
5.
CHECK FOR DTC*
HINT:
Refer to DTC Check / Clear
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No code
Trouble code
GO TO DTC CHART
A
2/5
8/6/12
6.
REFER TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
HINT:
Refer to Problem Symptoms Table
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Malfunctioning parts not confirmed
Malfunctioning parts confirmed
GO TO STEP 10
7.
HINT:
Refer to Data List / Active Test
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Malfunctioning parts not confirmed
Malfunctioning parts confirmed
GO TO STEP 10
8.
CHECK ECU CIRCUIT
3/5
8/6/12
HINT:
Refer to Terminals of ECU
NG
GO TO STEP 10
OK
9.
HINT:
Refer to Symptom Simulation
NEXT
10.
CONDUCT PARTS INSPECTION
NEXT
11.
IDENTIFY PROBLEM
NEXT
12.
ADJUST AND/OR REPAIR
NEXT
4/5
8/6/12
13.
CONDUCT CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001AR909JX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK BATTERY CONDITION
NOTICE:
If the battery is weak or if the engine is difficult to start, perform the following procedures.
(a) Check the battery for damage and deformation. If severe damage, deformation or leakage is
found, replace the battery.
(b) Check the volume of electrolyte quantity in each cell.
If the electrolyte volume is below the lower line,
add distilled water to each cell. Then, recharge
the battery and check the electrolyte specific
gravity.
1.25 to 1.29 at 20C (68F)
If the electrolyte volume is above the lower
line, check the battery voltage when
cranking the engine. If the battery voltage
is less than 9.6 V, recharge or replace the
battery.
HINT:
Before checking the battery voltage, turn off all
the electrical systems (headlights, blower
motor, rear defogger, etc.).
2. INSPECT BATTERY TERMINAL AND FUSE

(a) Check that the battery terminals are not loose or corroded.
If the terminal is corroded, clean the terminal.
(b) Measure the resistance of the H-fuses and fuses.
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the fuse.
3. INSPECT FAN AND GENERATOR V BELT

4. INSPECT GENERATOR WIRING
(a) Visually check the generator wiring.
(1) Check that the wiring is in good condition.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001AR909JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
5. CHECK FOR ABNORMAL NOISES

(a) Listen for abnormal noises from the generator.
(1) Check that no abnormal noises are heard from the generator while the engine is running.
6. INSPECT CHARGE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT

(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Check that the charge warning light comes on.
(b) Start the engine and check that the light goes off.
If the light does not operate as specified, troubleshoot the charge warning light circuit.
7. INSPECT CHARGING CIRCUIT WITHOUT LOAD

(a) Connect a voltmeter and ammeter to the charging circuit
as follows.
(1) Disconnect the wire from terminal B of the generator,
and then connect it to the negative (-) lead of an
ammeter.
*1
Battery
*2
Terminal B
*3
Generator Assembly
(2) Connect the positive (+) lead of the ammeter to

terminal B of the generator.
(3) Connect the positive (+) lead of a voltmeter to
terminal B of the generator.
(4) Ground the negative (-) lead of the voltmeter.
(b) Check the charging circuit.
(1) Maintain the engine speed at 2000 rpm and check the reading on the ammeter and voltmeter.
Standard current:
20 A or less
Standard voltage:
11.3 to 15.6 V
If the result is not as specified, replace the generator assembly.
HINT:
If the battery is not fully charged, the ammeter reading will sometimes be higher than the standard
current.
8. INSPECT CHARGING CIRCUIT WITH LOAD

(a) With the engine running at 2000 rpm, turn the high beam headlights on and turn the heater
blower switch to the HI position.
(b) Check the reading on the ammeter.
2/3
8/6/12
Standard current:
30 A or higher
If the ammeter reading is below the standard current, repair the generator.
HINT:
If the battery is fully charged, the indication will sometimes be below the standard current. If this is
the case, add more electrical load (operate the wipers, rear window defogger, etc.) and check the
reading on the ammeter again.
3/3
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: P0516,P0517: Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010BK0E1X
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: P0516,P0517: Battery Temperature Sensor
Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P0516
Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit Low
DTC
P0517
Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
The battery temperature sensor installed on the battery current sensor assembly detects the battery
temperature.
A thermistor is integrated into the battery temperature sensor, and the resistance in the battery
temperature sensor changes according to the battery temperature.
The resistance of the thermistor in the battery temperature sensor decreases as the battery
temperature increases. The resistance increases as the temperature decreases.
The battery temperature sensor is connected to the ECM. The ECM supplies 5 V from the THB terminal to
the battery temperature sensor through resistor R.
The battery temperature sensor and resistor R are connected in series. This results in fluctuations in the
voltage supplied from the THB terminal when the resistance changes according to the battery
temperature.
The ECM determines the battery temperature according to fluctuations in voltage. When the battery
temperature is high, the ECM determines to reduce the amount of current supplied from the generator in
order to protect the battery.
DTC
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010BK0E1X.html?sisuffix=ff&
TROUBLE AREA
1/4
8/6/12
NO.
P0516
Engine speed is 500 r/min or more, battery voltage

is 10.9 V or more, and 1 second or more have
elapsed after starting.
Battery temperature sensor output is less than
0.104 V, and duration of the malfunction is 0.5
seconds or more (1-trip detection logic).
Battery current
sensor assembly
(battery
temperature sensor)
Short to GND in
battery temperature
sensor circuit
ECM
P0517
Engine speed is 500 r/min or more, battery voltage

is 10.9 V or more, and 1 second or more have
elapsed after starting.
Battery temperature sensor output is more than
4.867 V, and duration of the malfunction is 0.5
seconds or more (1-trip detection logic).
Battery current
sensor assembly
(battery
temperature sensor)
Open in battery
temperature sensor
circuit
ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
INSPECT BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY
2/4
8/6/12
(b) Disconnect the A11 battery current sensor assembly

connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
2 (THB) - 3 (GND)
CONDITION
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1.5 to 2.6 k
*a

(Battery Current Sensor Assembly)
(d) Reconnect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.

REPLACE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
ASSEMBLY
NG
OK
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the A33 and A35 ECM connectors.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-24 (THB) - A11-2 (THB)
Always
Below 1
A35-30 (EPA2) - A11-3 (GND)
Always
Below 1
3/4
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-24 (THB) or A11-2 (THB) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A35-30 (EPA2) or A11-3 (GND) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE ECM
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: P1530-P1532: Short in Battery Current Sensor Circ
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010BL058X
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: P1530-P1532: Short in Battery Current Sensor
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
P1530
Short in Battery Current Sensor Circuit
DTC
P1531
Open in Battery Current Sensor Circuit
DTC
P1532
Battery Current Sensor Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The battery current sensor assembly installed on the negative (-) battery terminal detects the amount of
current supplied from the generator.
The battery current sensor assembly changes current to voltage (at the negative (-) battery terminal)
and sends it to the ECM. The ECM controls the voltage of the generator based on the signals from the
battery current sensor assembly.
DTC
NO.
Engine speed is 500 r/min or more, battery voltage is 10.9 V or

more, and 1 second or more have elapsed after starting.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010BL058X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
TROUBLE AREA
Battery
current
sensor
assembly
Open or
short to
1/5
8/6/12
P1530
P1531
Battery current sensor output is less than 0.347 V, and duration

of the malfunction is 0.5 seconds or more (1-trip detection logic).
Engine speed is 500 r/min or more, battery voltage is 10.9 V or

more, and 1 second or more have elapsed after starting.
Battery current sensor output is more than 4.653 V, and
duration of the malfunction is 0.5 seconds or more (1-trip
detection logic).
GND in
battery
current
sensor
circuit
ECM
Battery
current
sensor
assembly
Short to
+B or VC
in
battery
current
sensor
circuit
ECM
Ignition switch ON
Current sensor fixing diagnosis: The difference between the
maximum and minimum current value when changing charging
P1532
states is less than 0.07 V, and the charging state changes 10

times or more in succession when malfunctioning (1-trip
Battery
detection logic).
Charging side properties diagnosis: After the alternator target
current
sensor
DUTY has changed from 60% or more to less than 40%, with the
alternator target DUTY is less than 40%, the battery voltage is
assembly
Short in
less than 13.2 V and the battery current sensor voltage is 2.6 V
or more and less than 5 V, and the duration of the malfunction is
battery
current
30 seconds or more (1-trip detection logic).

Discharge side properties diagnosis: After the alternator target
sensor
circuit
DUTY has changed from less than 40% to 60% or more, with the
alternator target DUTY at 60% or more, the battery voltage is
ECM
more than 13.7 V and the battery current sensor voltage is 0 V

or more and less than 2.4 V and the duration of malfunction is
30 seconds or more (1-trip detection logic).
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0516
PROCEDURE
2/5
8/6/12
1.
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO P1530, P1531, P1532)

(e) Read the DTC.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC P1530, P1531 and P1532 are output
DTC P1530, P1531, P1532 and other DTCs are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P1530, P1531 and P1532 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (BATTERY CURRENT)
(a) Turn all of the electrical systems (headlights, blower motor, rear defogger, etc.) off.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Battery Current.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Battery current is fixed at 0 A, or fluctuates by +/- 1 A or less between -100 and 100 A
Battery current fluctuates between -20 and 0 A
3/5
8/6/12
USE SIMULATION METHOD TO CHECK
3.
INSPECT BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery

terminal.
(b) Disconnect the A11 battery current sensor assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 (VIN) - 3 (GND)
Always
3 to 10 k
1 (VIN) - 4 (IB)
Always
Below 0.5 k
3 (GND) - 4 (IB)
Always
3 to 10 k
*a

(Battery Current Sensor Assembly)
(d) Reconnect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
NG
REPLACE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

ASSEMBLY
OK
4/5
8/6/12
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY - ECM)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-11 (IB) - A11-4 (IB)
Always
Below 1
A35-22 (VCP2) - A11-1 (VIN)
Always
Below 1
A35-30 (EPA2) - A11-3 (GND)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A33-11 (IB) or A11-4 (IB) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A35-22 (VCP2) or A11-1 (VIN) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A35-30 (EPA2) or A11-3 (GND) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
REPLACE ECM
CONNECTOR
5/5
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003SCX00LX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003SCX00LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003SCX00LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001GNI01AX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. PRECAUTION
(a) Check that the battery cables are connected to the correct terminals.
(b) Disconnect the battery cables when the battery is given a quick charge.
(c) Do not perform tests with a high voltage insulation resistance tester.
(d) Never disconnect the battery cables while the engine is running.
(e) Check that the charging cable nuts are tightened on terminal B of the generator and on the
engine room relay block.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001GNI01AX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MXQ01AX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Charging System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Battery
Charging warning light comes on
Generator assembly
Charging system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MXQ01AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HWM00YX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HWM00YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HWM00YX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000220604OX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK ECM
(a) Measure the resistance, voltage and waveform according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING
COLOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A33-2 (BATT) A34-1 (E03)
W - B-R
Battery power
Always
11 to 14 V
A33-11 (IB) A35-30 (EPA2)
R-B - Y-B
Battery current sensor
Ignition switch ON
0.5 to 4.5 V
A33-24 (THB) A35-30 (EPA2)
R-W - Y-B
Battery temperature
sensor
Ignition switch ON 20 to
50C (68 to 122F)
1.1 to 2.4 V
B-R Body
ground
Body ground
Always
Below 1
A35-18 (ALT) A34-1 (E03)
V - B-R
Generator
Pulse generation
(See waveform 1)
A35-22 (VCP2) A35-30 (EPA2)
G-B - Y-B
Power source of battery

current sensor assembly
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
(SYMBOL)
If the result is not as specified, the ECU may have a malfunction.

(b) WAVEFORM 1
Generator
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TESTER
CONNECTION
TOOL
SETTING
A35-18 (ALT) 2 V/DIV., 2

- A34-1 (E03) msec./DIV.
VEHICLE
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Idling with
warm
engine
Correct waveform as
shown in illustration
HINT:
The oscilloscope waveform shown in the illustration is an
example for reference only. Noise, chattering, etc. are not
shown.
A constant value is not output, as the duty ratio varies
depending on the electrical load and battery condition.
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000017VI01GX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017VI01GX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017VI01GX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000017VK02QX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE GENERATOR REAR END COVER
(a) Remove the 4 through bolts.
(b) Using the heat gun, heat the generator rear end cover.
Heating Temperature:
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Generator Rear End Cover
50 to 60C (122 to 140F)
*1
Heat gun
(c) Insert the 2 screw drivers, and remove the generator rear
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017VK02QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
end cover as shown in the illustration.
2. REMOVE GENERATOR PULLEY
(a) Mount the generator in a vise between aluminum plates.

*1
Aluminium plate
(b) Remove the nut and generator pulley.
3. REMOVE GENERATOR DRIVE END FRAME ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the generator drive end frame assembly from the
2/6
8/6/12
generator rotor assembly.
4. REMOVE GENERATOR DRIVE END FRAME BEARING
(a) Mount the generator drive end frame assembly in a vise

between aluminum plates.
(b) Remove the 4 bolts and bearing retainer.

*1
Aluminium plate
(c) Using SST and a hammer, tap out the bearing.

SST: 09950-60010
09951-00250
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
5. REMOVE GENERATOR ROTOR BEARING
(a) Set the SST to the generator rotor assembly between

3/6
8/6/12
wooden blocks.
SST: 09387-00041
*1
Wooden block
(b) Hold the SST nut, and turn the SST bolt to remove the
generator rotor bearing.
*1
SST Nut
*2
SST Bolt
*a
Hold
*b
Turn
6. REMOVE GENERATOR COIL ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 6 bolts and generator coil assembly.
7. REMOVE GENERATOR BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY

4/6
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and generator brush holder

assembly.
8. REMOVE BRUSH
(a) Remove the cover A from the brush holder assembly.
(b) Remove the cover B from the brush holder assembly.
(c) Using a soldering iron, separate the 2 brushes from the

brush holder assembly.
*1
Soldering iron
5/6
8/6/12
9. REMOVE GENERATOR HOLDER WITH RECTIFIER
(a) Remove the terminal cover.
(b) Remove the nut and the terminal.
(c) Remove the 3 bolts and the generator holder with

rectifier.
6/6
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000017VH02NX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BRUSH
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the brush length.
Standard length:
22.5 mm (0.885 in)
Minimum length:
5.0 mm (0.196 in)
*a
Minimum length
*b
Standard length
*c
Mark of minimum length
Brush
If the brush length is less than the minimum, replace the brush.
2. INSPECT GENERATOR COIL ASSEMBLY

the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-2
1-3
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017VH02NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
2-3
Always
Below 1
4-5
4-6
5-6
*a
Lead wire
If the result is not as specified, replace the generator
coil assembly.
(b) Check the resistance.

the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Stator core - Lead wire
Always
10 k or higher
*1
Stator core
*a
Lead wire
coil assembly.
3. INSPECT GENERATOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the generator rotor assembly for open circuits.
the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Slip ring - Slip ring
20C (68F)
2.0 to 2.4
*1
Slip Ring

2/4
8/6/12
rotor assembly.
(b) Check if the generator rotor assembly is grounded.

the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
Slip ring - Rotor core
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
*1
Slip Ring
*2
Rotor Core
rotor assembly.
(c) Check the slip ring diameter.

(1) Using a vernier caliper, measure the diameter of each
slip ring.
Standard diameter:
22.7 mm (0.893 in.)
Minimum diameter:
22.1 mm (0.870 in.)
If the diameter is less than the minimum, replace the
*a
Diameter of Slip Ring
4. INSPECT GENERATOR HOLDER WITH RECTIFIER

the table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6

3/4
8/6/12
(Tester positive)
P1, P2, P3, P4,
P5, P6 - B
Below 1
B (Tester negative)
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
(Tester negative)
10 k or higher
B (Tester positive)
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
(Tester positive)
P1, P2, P3, P4,
E (Tester negative)
P5, P6 - E
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6

(Tester negative)
10 k or higher
Below 1
E (Tester positive)
holder with rectifier.
4/4
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000017VG01NX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Install the generator with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the generator connector.
(c) Connect the generator wire with the nut.
(d) Install the terminal cap.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017VG01NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000017VL02TX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL GENERATOR HOLDER WITH RECTIFIER
(a) Install the generator holder with rectifier with the 3 bolts.
(b) Install the terminal with the nut.

(c) Install the terminal cover.
2. INSTALL BRUSH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017VL02TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
(a) Using a soldering iron, install the 2 brushes to the brush

holder assembly.
*1
Soldering iron
*2
Solder
(b) Install the cover B to the brush holder assembly.
(c) Install the cover A to the brush holder assembly.
3. INSTALL GENERATOR BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the generator brush holder assembly with the 4

bolts.
Bolt A - Torque: 2.0 Nm (20 kgfcm, 18inlbf)
Bolt B - Torque: 3.9 Nm (40 kgfcm, 35inlbf)
2/5
8/6/12
(b) While pushing the 2 brushes into the generator rear end
cover, insert a 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.) pin into the generator
rear end cover.
NOTICE:
Remove the pin after reassembling the generator.
*1
Pin 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
4. INSTALL GENERATOR COIL ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the generator coil assembly with the 6 bolts.

5. INSTALL GENERATOR ROTOR BEARING
(a) Using SST and a press, press in a new generator rotor

bearing.
SST: 09632-36010
SST: 09820-36010
6. INSTALL GENERATOR DRIVE END FRAME BEARING
3/5
8/6/12
(a) Using SST and a press, press in a new generator drive

end frame bearing.
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00520
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
(b) Install the bearing retainer with the 4 screws.

7. INSTALL GENERATOR DRIVE END FRAME ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the generator drive end frame assembly to the

8. INSTALL GENERATOR PULLEY
(a) Mount the generator in a vise between aluminum plates.

*1
Aluminium plate
4/5
8/6/12
(b) Install the generator pulley with the nut.

9. INSTALL GENERATOR REAR END COVER
(a) using the heat gun, heat the generator rear end cover.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Generator Rear End Cover
50 to 60C (122 to 140F)
*1
Heat gun
(b) Install the generator rear end cover.

(c) Pull out the pin of the generator rear end cover.
(d) Install the 4 through bolts.

5/5
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000017VJ01HX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism in which the door glass moves down slightly
when the door is opened, and in which the glass moves up when the door closed in order to
prevent the door molding from being damaged. When the negative (-) battery terminal needs
to be disconnected for servicing, fully open the driver and passenger door glasses in advance.
(a) Remove the terminal cap.

*1
Terminal cap
(b) Remove the nut and disconnect the generator wire.
(c) Disconnect the generator connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017VJ01HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and generator assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017VJ01HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Bus Buffer ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000109K06OX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Bus Buffer ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013
FR-S)
Bus Buffer ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION
ITEM
Bus Buffer ECU
Communication
Stop Mode
SYMPTOM
Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start with U) that are

output correspond to "Bus Buffer ECU Communication Stop
Mode" in "DTC Combination Table"
TROUBLE AREA
PSP (option
connector) branch
line or connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000109K06OX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Before measuring the resistance of the CAN bus, turn the ignition switch off and leave the vehicle
for 1 minute or more without operating the key, switches or opening or closing the doors. After
that, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and leave the vehicle for 1 minute
or more before measuring the resistance.
After turning the ignition switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal notices before proceeding with work
.
Because the order of diagnosis is important to allow correct diagnosis, make sure to begin
troubleshooting using How to Proceed with Troubleshooting when CAN communication system
related DTCs are output
.
After performing repairs, perform the DTC check procedure and confirm that the DTCs are not
output again.
DTC check procedure: Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least 10 seconds.
After the repair, perform CAN Bus Check and check that all the ECUs and sensors connected to the
CAN communication system are displayed
HINT:
Operating the ignition switch, any other switches or a door triggers related ECU and sensor
communication on the CAN. This communication will cause the resistance value to change.
Even after DTCs are cleared, if a DTC is stored again after driving the vehicle for a while, the
malfunction may be occurring due to vibration of the vehicle. In such a case, wiggling the ECUs or
wire harness while performing the inspection below may help determine the cause of the
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (PSP (OPTION CONNECTOR) BRANCH LINE)

terminal.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
2/3
8/6/12
D29-4 (CANH) - D29-5
Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery
(CANL)
terminal
57 to 63
*a

(to PSP (Option Connector))
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE CAN BRANCH LINE OR
OK
END
CONNECTOR (PSP (OPTION CONNECTOR))
3/3
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Center Airbag Sensor Communication Stop Mode (201
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WG905CX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Center Airbag Sensor Communication Stop Mode
(2013 FR-S)
Center Airbag Sensor Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION
ITEM
SYMPTOM
Either condition is met:

Center Airbag
Sensor
Communication
Stop Mode
"Airbag" is not displayed on the "CAN Bus Check"

screen of the Techstream
Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start with U)
that are output correspond to "Center Airbag Sensor
Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC Combination
Table"
TROUBLE AREA
Air bag
ECU
assembly
branch
line or
connector
Power
source
circuit of
air bag
ECU
assembly
Air bag
ECU
assembly
ground
circuit
Air bag
ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WG905CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
output again.
HINT:
2/5
8/6/12
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (AIR BAG ECU ASSEMBLY BRANCH LINE)
(b) Disconnect the D27 air bag ECU assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
D27-13 (CANH) - D27-22

(CANL)

terminal
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
*a

(to Air Bag ECU Assembly)
NG

CONNECTOR (AIR BAG ECU ASSEMBLY)
OK
3/5
8/6/12
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT)

table below.
TESTER
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTION
CONDITION
D27-25 (GND) -
Cable disconnected from
Body ground
negative (-) battery terminal
D27-26 (GND) -
Body ground
Below 1
Below 1
*a

(b) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D27-21 (IG) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
4/5
8/6/12
*a

NG
OK
REPLACE AIR BAG ECU ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT)
5/5
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Line for Short to +B (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001FAD05LX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Line for Short to +B (2013 FR-S)
Check CAN Bus Line for Short to +B
DESCRIPTION
There may be a short circuit between one of the CAN bus lines and +B when no resistance exists
between terminals 6 (CANH) and 16 (BAT) or 14 (CANL) and 16 (BAT) of the DLC3.
SYMPTOM
No resistance exists between terminals 6 (CANH) and 16 (BAT)

or 14 (CANL) and 16 (BAT) of DLC3.
TROUBLE AREA
Short to +B in CAN main bus
line
Short to +B in CAN branch
line
Main body ECU (network
gateway ECU)
Combination meter
assembly
ECM
TCM*
Skid control ECU (brake
actuator assembly)
Steering angle sensor
(spiral cable sub-assembly)
Power steering ECU
assembly
Air bag ECU assembly
CAN No. 1 junction
connector
CAN No. 2 junction
connector
*: for Automatic Transmission System
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001FAD05LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/9
8/6/12
2/9
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
3/9
8/6/12

.
output again.
DTC check procedure: Turn the ignition switch to ON, wait at least 60 seconds,
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CAN BUS LINE (CAN NO. 2 J/C)
(a) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the D43 CAN
No. 2 junction connector.
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTED TO
CONDITION
D43-1 - D1016 (BAT)
Cable disconnected from negative
6 k or higher
CAN No. 1 junction connector

4/9
8/6/12
D43-12 - D10-
(-) battery terminal
16 (BAT)
D43-2 - D1016 (BAT)
D43-13 - D10-
6 k or higher
16 (BAT)
D43-3 - D1016 (BAT)

D43-14 - D1016 (BAT)
6 k or higher

gateway ECU)
D43-5 - D1016 (BAT)

D43-16 - D10-

6 k or higher
DLC3
16 (BAT)
D43-6 - D1016 (BAT)
D43-17 - D10-
6 k or higher
Steering angle sensor (spiral

cable sub-assembly)
16 (BAT)
D43-7 - D1016 (BAT)
D43-18 - D1016 (BAT)
D43-8 - D1016 (BAT)

D43-19 - D10-

6 k or higher
PSP (option connector)
6 k or higher
6 k or higher
ECM
16 (BAT)
D43-9 - D1016 (BAT)
D43-20 - D10-
16 (BAT)
*1
*a
DLC3
(to CAN No. 2 Junction Connector)
*b
to CAN No. 1 Junction Connector
*c
to Combination Meter Assembly
*d
to Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)
*e
to DLC3
5/9
8/6/12
*f
to Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)
*g
to PSP (Option Connector)
*h
to Air Bag ECU Assembly
*i
to ECM
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (CAN No. 1 junction connector main line)
NG (ECM main line)
NG (ECU or sensor branch line)
NG (DLC3 branch line or PSP (option connector) branch line)
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CAN BUS LINE
REPAIR OR REPLACE CAN MAIN BUS LINE OR
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CONNECTED
(CAN NO. 1 J/C)
CONNECTOR (CAN NO. 2 J/C - ECM)
COMPONENT (ECU, SENSOR)

REPAIR OR REPLACE CAN BRANCH LINE
2.
CONNECTED TO DLC3 OR PSP (OPTION

CONNECTOR)
REPLACE CAN NO. 2 JUNCTION CONNECTOR
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CAN BUS LINE (CAN NO. 1 J/C)
6/9
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the A17 CAN
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
CONNECTED TO
6 k or higher
TCM
Cable disconnected from negative (-)

battery terminal
6 k or higher

actuator assembly)

battery terminal
6 k or higher

battery terminal
6 k or higher
Power steering ECU assembly
A17-5 - D10-16
(BAT)
battery terminal
A17-16 - D1016 (BAT)

A17-6 - D10-16
(BAT)
A17-17 - D1016 (BAT)
A17-7 - D10-16
(BAT)
A17-18 - D1016 (BAT)
A17-8 - D10-16
(BAT)
A17-19 - D1016 (BAT)
*1
DLC3
7/9
8/6/12
*a

*b
to TCM
*c
to Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly)
*d
*e
to Power Steering ECU Assembly

Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) main line)

CONNECTOR (CAN NO. 2 J/C - CAN NO. 1 J/C)
CONNECTOR (CAN NO. 1 J/C - SKID CONTROL
ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY))
3.
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CONNECTED

CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CONNECTED COMPONENT (ECU, SENSOR)
(a) Reconnect all the wire harness connectors (the A17 CAN No. 1 junction connector and D43 CAN
No. 2 junction connector).
(b) Disconnect the ECU or sensor connected to the CAN bus line that is shorted to +B.
HINT:
If the ECU or sensor has multiple connectors, disconnect the connector that includes the CAN bus
lines. To determine the ECU or sensor that is connected to the shorted bus line, refer to the terminals
of ECU tables

table below.
8/9
8/6/12
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION

6 k or
higher
D10-6 (CANH) D10-16 (BAT)

D10-14 (CANL) D10-16 (BAT)
*1
DLC3
HINT:
If the resistance changes to 6 k or higher when the connector is disconnected from the ECU (or
sensor), there may be a short in the ECU (or sensor).
REPAIR OR REPLACE REPAIR OR REPLACE
NG
CORRESPONDING ECU/SENSOR WIRE OR

CONNECTOR
OK
REPLACE CORRESPONDING ECU OR SENSOR
9/9
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Line for Short to GND (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001FAD05PX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Line for Short to GND (2013 FR-S)
Check CAN Bus Line for Short to GND
DESCRIPTION
There may be a short circuit between one of the CAN bus lines and GND when there is no resistance
between terminals 6 (CANH) and 4 (CG) or 14 (CANL) and 4 (CG) of the DLC3.
SYMPTOM
No resistance exists between terminals 6 (CANH) and 4 (CG)

or 14 (CANL) and 4 (CG) of DLC3.
TROUBLE AREA
Short to ground in CAN main
bus line
Short to ground in CAN
branch line
gateway ECU)
ECM
TCM*
actuator assembly)
cable sub-assembly)
Power steering ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001FAD05PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/9
8/6/12
2/9
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
3/9
8/6/12

.
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CAN BUS LINE (CAN NO. 2 J/C)
(a) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the D43 CAN
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
D43-1 - D10-4
(CG)
Cable disconnected from negative (-
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
200 or
CONNECTED TO

4/9
8/6/12
D43-12 - D10-
) battery terminal
higher
(CG)
200 or
D43-13 - D10-
) battery terminal
higher
(CG)
200 or
D43-14 - D104 (CG)
) battery terminal
higher
gateway ECU)
200 or
higher
DLC3
4 (CG)
D43-2 - D10-4
4 (CG)
D43-3 - D10-4
D43-5 - D10-4
(CG)
Cable disconnected from negative () battery terminal
D43-16 - D104 (CG)
D43-6 - D10-4
(CG)
200 or
D43-17 - D10-
) battery terminal
higher
cable sub-assembly)
(CG)
200 or
D43-18 - D10-
) battery terminal
higher
4 (CG)
D43-7 - D10-4
4 (CG)
D43-8 - D10-4
(CG)
Cable disconnected from negative (D43-19 - D104 (CG)
) battery terminal
200 or
higher
D43-9 - D10-4
(CG)

D43-20 - D10-
200 or
higher
ECM
4 (CG)
*1
*a
DLC3
*b
*c
*d
*e
to DLC3
5/9
8/6/12
*f
*g
*h
*i
to ECM
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (ECM main line)
CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CAN BUS LINE
CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CONNECTED
(CAN NO. 1 J/C)

CONNECTOR)
2.
CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CAN BUS LINE (CAN NO. 1 J/C)
6/9
8/6/12
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
CONNECTED TO

battery terminal
200 or higher
TCM

battery terminal
200 or higher

actuator assembly)
200 or higher
A17-5 - D10-4
(CG)
A17-16 - D104 (CG)
A17-6 - D10-4
(CG)
A17-17 - D104 (CG)
A17-7 - D10-4
(CG)

battery terminal
A17-18 - D104 (CG)

A17-8 - D10-4
(CG)
A17-19 - D104 (CG)
battery terminal
200 or higher Power steering ECU assembly
*1
DLC3
7/9
8/6/12
*a

*b
to TCM
*c
*d
*e

Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK

3.

CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CONNECTED
CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CONNECTED COMPONENT (ECU, SENSOR)
(b) Disconnect the ECU or sensor connected to the CAN bus line that is shorted to ground.
HINT:
If the ECU or sensor has multiple connectors, disconnect the connector that includes the CAN bus
lines. To determine the ECU or sensor that is connected to the shorted bus line, refer to the terminals
of ECU tables

table below.
8/9
8/6/12
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION

200 or
higher
D10-6 (CANH) D10-4 (CG)

D10-14 (CANL)
- D10-4 (CG)
*1
DLC3
HINT:
If the resistance changes to 200 or higher when the connector is disconnected from the ECU (or
sensor), there may be a short in the ECU (or sensor).
REPAIR OR REPLACE REPAIR OR REPLACE
NG
CORRESPONDING ECU/SENSOR WIRE OR

CONNECTOR
OK
9/9
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Lines for Short Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001FAD05IX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Lines for Short Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Check CAN Bus Lines for Short Circuit
DESCRIPTION
There may be a short circuit between the V bus main lines and/or CAN branch lines when the resistance
between terminals 6 (CANH) and 14 (CANL) of the DLC3 is below 57 .
SYMPTOM
Resistance between terminals 6 (CANH) and 14 (CANL) of

DLC3 is below 57 .
TROUBLE AREA
Short in CAN main bus line
Short in CAN branch line
Main body ECU (network gateway
ECU)
ECM
TCM*
Skid control ECU (brake actuator
assembly)
cable sub-assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001FAD05IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/10
8/6/12
2/10
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
3/10
8/6/12

.
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (ECM)
(b) Disconnect the A33 ECM connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A33-19 (CANH) - A33-18

(CANL)

terminal
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
114 to 126
*a

(to ECM)
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID

4/10
8/6/12
NG
CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR

ASSEMBLY))
OK
2.
REPLACE ECM
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY))
(a) Reconnect the A33 ECM connector.
(b) Disconnect the A5 skid control ECU (brake actuator

assembly) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A5-26 (CANH) - A5-14
(CANL)
terminal
114 to 126
*a
3.

(to Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly))
NG
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN

NO. 2 J/C)
OK
REPLACE SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE

ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 2 J/C)
(a) Reconnect the A5 skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
5/10
8/6/12
(b) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the D43 CAN
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
CONNECTED TO
D43-1 - D4312
114 to 126
D43-2 - D43-
200 or
13
) battery terminal
higher
D43-3 - D43-
200 or
14
) battery terminal
higher
gateway ECU)
D43-5 - D4316
Cable disconnected from negative (1 M or higher

) battery terminal
D43-6 - D4317
D43-7 - D4318
Cable disconnected from negative (1 M or higher

) battery terminal
D43-8 - D4319
200 or
higher
D43-9 - D4320
114 to 126
ECM
200 or
higher
DLC3
cable sub-assembly)
*a

*b
*c
6/10
8/6/12
*d
*e
to DLC3
*f
*g
*h
*i
to ECM
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (ECM main line)
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO.

CHECK FOR SHORT IN CONNECTED COMPONENT

(ECU, SENSOR)
1 J/C)
4.

CONNECTOR)
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 1 J/C)
7/10
8/6/12
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTED TO
CONDITION
A17-5 - A1716

battery terminal
200 or higher
TCM
A17-6 - A1717

battery terminal
114 to 126

actuator assembly)
A17-7 - A1718

battery terminal
1 M or higher
A17-8 - A17-
19
battery terminal
200 or higher Power steering ECU assembly
*a

*b
to TCM
*c
*d
*e

Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
8/10
8/6/12
5.


CHECK FOR SHORT IN CONNECTED COMPONENT

(ECU, SENSOR)
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CONNECTED COMPONENT (ECU, SENSOR)
(b) Disconnect the connector that includes terminals CANH and CANL from the ECU (or sensor) to
which the short circuited branch line is connected
.
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
D10-6 (CANH) D10-14 (CANL)

SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
*1
DLC3
HINT:
If the resistance becomes normal (between 57 and 63 ) when the connector is disconnected from
the ECU (or sensor), there may be a short in the ECU (or sensor).
If the resistance does not become normal (between 57 and 63 ) when the connector is
disconnected from the ECU (or sensor), repair or replace the short circuited branch line or
connector.
9/10
8/6/12
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE CORRESPONDING ECU
OK
OR SENSOR BUS LINE OR CONNECTOR
10/10
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Combination Meter ECU Communication Stop Mode (20
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F1S06SX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Combination Meter ECU Communication Stop Mode
(2013 FR-S)
Combination Meter ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION
ITEM
SYMPTOM

Combination
Meter ECU
Communication
Stop Mode
"Combination Meter" is not displayed on the "CAN

Bus Check" screen of the Techstream
Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start with
U) that are output correspond to "Combination
Meter ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC
Combination Table"
TROUBLE AREA
Combination
meter
assembly
branch line
or
connector
Power
source
circuit of
combination
meter
assembly
Combination
meter
assembly
ground
circuit
Combination
meter
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F1S06SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
output again.
HINT:
2/5
8/6/12
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY BRANCH
LINE)
1.
(b) Disconnect the D7 combination meter assembly

connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
D7-6 (CANH) - D7-7

(CANL)

terminal
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
*a

(to Combination Meter Assembly)
NG
CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER

ASSEMBLY)
OK
3/5
8/6/12
2.

table below.
TESTER
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTION
CONDITION
D7-20 (ES1) -
Body ground
D7-40 (ES2) -
Body ground
Below 1
Below 1
*a

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-1 (B) - Body ground
Ignition switch off
11 to 14 V
D7-2 (IG+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
*a


4/5
8/6/12
NG
OK
5/5
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004UCE002X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. ECUS OR SENSORS WHICH COMMUNICATE THROUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(a) V Bus
(1) Main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
(2) Combination meter assembly
(3) ECM
(4) TCM*
(5) Skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly)
(6) Steering angle sensor (spiral cable sub-assembly)
(7) Power steering ECU assembly
(8) Air bag ECU assembly
(9) PSP (option connector)
2. CHECK FOR INSTALLED SYSTEMS (ECUS AND SENSORS) THAT ADOPT CAN COMMUNICATION
(a) The systems (ECUs and sensors) that adopt CAN communication vary depending on the vehicle and optional
equipment. Check which systems (ECUs and sensors) are installed on the vehicle.
HINT:
The names of ECUs and sensors shown on the Techstream display may differ from those shown in the DTC Table
by ECU section that follows.
ECU/SENSOR NAME
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY
APPLICABILITY
Main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
Main Body
Installed on all vehicles
Combination Meter
ECM
ECM (Engine)
TCM
TCM

System
Skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly)
Skid Control (ABS/VSC/TRAC)
Steering angle sensor (spiral cable subassembly)
Spiral cable (Steering Angle

Sensor)
Power Steering (EPS)
Airbag
3. CAN BUS CHECK

HINT:
The ECUs and sensors that are properly connected to the CAN communication system can be displayed using the
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004UCE002X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/34
8/6/12
The ECUs and sensors that are properly connected to the CAN communication system can be displayed using the
Techstream.
(a) Using the Techstream, select "CAN Bus Check" from "System Select".
NOTICE:
It may be possible to select buses that do not have ECUs or sensors from the bus selection pull-down menu.
This is not a malfunction. (This occurs when optional devices are not on a sub bus that is monitored by a
gateway function equipped ECU.)
In the bus selection pull down menu, all buses applicable to the model are displayed (e.g. LIN communication
buses are also displayed). Therefore, refer to the wiring diagrams to check the names of the sub buses for
CAN communication
HINT:
Different connection statuses are indicated by the background color of the ECUs and sensors that are displayed.
Explanation of CAN Bus Check (Communication Bus Check) screen

BUS TYPE
BACKGROUND
COLOR
White
Communication has been normal since the start of the CAN

bus check.
Yellow
Communication stop occurred at least once since the start of

the CAN bus check, but communication is currently occurring
(unstable communication).
Red
Communication was established at least once since the start

of the CAN bus check, but communication is currently not
occurring (unstable communication).
Not displayed
Communication stop has continued since the start of the CAN

bus check.*1
V Bus
Sub bus
(gateway function equipped ECU
that does not have history of
connected ECUs)*2
CONNECTION STATUS
White

bus check.
Yellow

Red
Communication was established at least once since the start

of the CAN bus check, but communication is currently not
occurring (unstable communication).
Not displayed
Communication stop has continued since the start of the CAN

bus check.*1
White

bus check.
Yellow

Currently not communicating (either of the following):
Sub bus
(gateway function equipped ECU
that has history of connected
Red
Communication stop has continued since the start of

the CAN bus check
Communication was established at least once since
the start of the CAN bus check, but communication is
2/34
8/6/12
that has history of connected
currently not occurring
ECUs)*3
Either of the following:

If a gateway function equipped ECU cannot
communicate, the sub bus and ECUs connected to
Not displayed
the sub bus will not be displayed.

If no ECUs are connected to the sub bus, ''There is
no system found on the Communication Bus'' will be
displayed.
HINT:
Gateway function equipped ECUs relay signals between the ECUs connected to the different buses.
*1: ECUs that are present in the vehicle but are not displayed on the CAN Bus Check.
*2: Gateway function equipped ECU that does not memorize the sub bus ECUs that are connected to it.
*3: Gateway function equipped ECU that memorizes the sub bus ECUs that are connected to it.
If none of the connected ECUs are displayed, or there is no response from the vehicle to the Techstream,
check the DLC3 branch and the V bus main bus lines for a malfunction.
(b) Observe the connection response screen for approximately 2 minutes to check for a change in connection
status of the connected ECUs and sensors.
HINT:
If an open occurs in one of the lines of a CAN branch (except DLC3), output from the other branch line (the line
that is not open) will be unstable and it may interfere the response (display) of other ECUs and sensors.
If the connection status changes during the inspection, repair the open in the branch line of the ECU or sensor
that does not respond (is not detected) and then perform the CAN bus check again.
4. HOW TO INTERPRET CAN BUS CHECK (COMMUNICATION BUS CHECK) SCREEN

(a) When a communication stop is currently occurring, the probable malfunctioning part can be determined from
the CAN bus check and by using the following methods.
NOTICE:
The following CAN bus wiring diagram is provided only as an example. This wiring diagram is different
from the actual wiring diagram for this vehicle.
HINT:
When a communication stop is currently occurring, it is easier to determine the probable malfunctioning part
from the CAN bus check rather than from communication DTCs.
Wait for approximately 2 minutes after turning the Ignition switch ON (or simulate the driving conditions that
enable the malfunction to be reproduced) and select the CAN bus check. Then observe the communication
status of each ECU on the screen.
(b) If a communication error of only 1 ECU or sensor is indicated on the CAN Bus Check screen, a communication
stop of the ECU or sensor is suspected.
Example: Open in both CAN branch lines of ECU B on the V bus
3/34
8/6/12
*a V Bus
*b Sub bus
*c Terminating Resistor
*d Location of malfunction
*e Not displayed or background color changes to red or yellow
*f
CAN Bus Check screen
HINT:
When there are communication stops, ECUs are present in the vehicle even though they are not displayed on the
CAN Bus Check screen.
(c) If communication errors for multiple ECUs or sensors are indicated on

the CAN Bus Check screen, then a communication stop of the ECU or
sensor that shows a more serious communication stop (an ECU or a
sensor which is not displayed) is suspected.
Example: Open in a CAN branch line for ECU D on the V bus
*a
Background color periodically changes to yellow or red
*b
Not displayed or background color is yellow or red
*c
Not displayed
Explanation of CAN Bus Check (Communication Bus Check) screen

BUS TYPE
BACKGROUND
COLOR
CONNECTION STATUS
Communication has been normal

White
since the start of the CAN bus

check.
4/34
8/6/12
check.
Communication stop occurred at
least once since the start of the
Yellow
CAN bus check, but communication

is currently occurring (unstable
communication).
V Bus
Red
Communication was established at

is currently not occurring (unstable
communication).
Communication stop has continued

Not displayed since the start of the CAN bus
check.*1
White

check.
Yellow

communication).
Sub bus
(gateway function
equipped ECU that
does not have history
Communication was established at

of connected ECUs)*2
Red

is currently not occurring (unstable
communication).
Communication stop has continued
Not displayed since the start of the CAN bus

check.*1
White

check.
Yellow

communication).
Currently not communicating
(either of the following):
Communication stop has
Sub bus
(gateway function
equipped ECU that
has history of
connected ECUs)*3
Red
continued since the start

of the CAN bus check
Communication was
established at least
once since the start of
the CAN bus check, but
communication is
5/34
8/6/12
connected ECUs)*3
currently not occurring

Either of the following:
If a gateway function
equipped ECU cannot
communicate, the sub
bus and ECUs connected
to the sub bus will not
Not displayed
be displayed.
If no ECUs are
connected to the sub
bus, ''There is no system
found on the
Communication Bus'' will
be displayed.
HINT:
Gateway function equipped ECUs relay signals between the ECUs
connected to the different buses.
*1: ECUs that are present in the vehicle but are not displayed on the
CAN Bus Check screen.
*2: Gateway function equipped ECU that does not memorize the sub
bus ECUs that are connected to it.
*3: Gateway function equipped ECU that memorizes the sub bus
ECUs that are connected to it.
The example of the CAN Bus Check screen in the illustration shows
the result of electrical noise on the CAN bus which is caused by an
open in a CAN branch line of ECU D (output from the other branch line
is unstable) and the communication of ECU C is also unstable. In
addition, in this example, ECU C is equipped with a gateway function.
Therefore, communication is also unstable between the sub bus ECUs
of ECU C and the V bus.
The example in the illustration shows that ECU D is not displayed on
the CAN Bus Check screen. This indicates a more significant
communication stop. In this case, a communication stop of ECU D is
suspected.
(d) If a communication error is indicated on both the V bus and sub bus
on the CAN Bus Check screen, suspect any communication stop
displayed for the V bus first.
Example: Open in both CAN branch lines of ECU C on the V bus
*a
Not displayed or background color changes to red
HINT:
In the CAN bus check, it is possible to confirm the communication
status of ECUs connected to the V bus after connecting the
6/34
8/6/12
Techstream to the DLC3. As for the sub buses, it is possible to confirm

which sub bus connected ECUs can communicate with a gateway
function equipped ECU on the V bus.
If a gateway function equipped ECU has a communication error, ECUs
connected to the gateway function equipped ECU are also affected,
and communication stops will be indicated.
The CAN Bus Check screen in the illustration shows that ECU C has a
gateway function and a communication stop in ECU C is suspected.
(e) If the CAN Bus Check screen indicates a communication stop only in
the sub bus, a communication stop in the sub bus is suspected.
Example: Open in both CAN branch lines of ECU G on the sub bus
*a
Background color changes to red
HINT:
A communication error in a sub bus does not affect the V bus or other
buses.
When a gateway function equipped ECU has memorized the ECUs
that are connected to the sub bus, if any of the ECUs connected to
the gateway function equipped ECU has a communication error, the
background color changes to yellow or red. (The displayed name will
not disappear.)
(f) If both of the V bus main bus lines are open, ECUs or sensors that are located farther away from the DLC3
than the open part will be displayed as a communication stop on the CAN Bus Check screen.
(In this case, ECU A and B are not displayed or their background color changes to red.)
7/34
8/6/12
*a
V Bus
*b
Sub Bus
*c
Terminating Resistor
*d
Location of malfunction
*e
Not displayed or background color is red
*f
HINT:
If a communication error occurs in an ECU, it is not displayed on the CAN Bus Check screen even though the ECU
is present.
(g) If both of the sub bus main bus lines are open, the ECUs that are located farther away from the gateway
function equipped ECU than the open part will be displayed as a communication stop on the CAN Bus Check
screen.
(In this case, ECU I and J are not displayed or their background color changes to red.)
8/34
8/6/12
*a
V Bus
*b
Sub Bus
*c
Terminating Resistor
*d
*e
Not displayed or background color is red
*f
*g
Gateway function equipped ECU
(h) When any of the following malfunctions occurs, CAN communication

cannot be established and almost all ECUs and sensors on the bus
show a communication error on the CAN Bus Check screen.
*a When any of the following malfunctions occurs on the V bus
*b When any of the following malfunctions occurs on a sub bus
*c Not displayed
Details of Malfunction
Short between CAN lines (CANH and CANL)
Short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and +B
Short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and ground
Open in a CAN main bus line
HINT:
When a malfunction occurs on the V bus, almost all ECUs and sensors
on the V bus and sub bus indicate a communication error (almost all
ECUs are not displayed). As communication with the gateway function
equipped ECU that is connected to the V bus stops, communication
from the ECUs connected to the sub bus that is monitored by the
gateway function equipped ECU also stops (these ECUs are not
displayed).
When a malfunction occurs in a sub bus, almost all ECUs connected to
the sub bus indicate a communication error.
A communication error in a sub bus does not affect the V bus or other
buses.
The malfunctioning part can be determined by checking for a short
circuit between CAN bus lines or between a CAN bus line and ground
or +B short using an electrical tester.
9/34
8/6/12
5. HOW TO INTERPRET COMMUNICATION DTCS (DTCS THAT START WITH U)

(a) If a CAN communication error cannot be reproduced, determine the suspected malfunctioning part using the
DTCs stored in ECUs that are connected to the CAN buses by following the procedure below.
HINT:
Communication DTCs (DTCs that start with U) indicate a communication error between the ECU that stores the
DTC and the ECU that is indicated by the DTC.
(1) If multiple ECUs store a communication DTC for a particular ECU, a communication stop of the ECU is
suspected.
*a
Items to be checked
NOTICE:
This DTC table is from another model, and is only used here to show an example of DTCs that are output
when there is an open in a CAN branch line for the main body ECU. This table does not show DTCs applicable
to this vehicle.
Even though a DTC title may indicate a communication error with a specific ECU, the ECU name used in the
DTC name on the Techstream may differ depending on the ECU that stores the DTC. (Regarding output DTCs,
refer to step 6 and the DTC chart for each ECU.)
HINT:
As multiple ECUs indicate a communication stop with the main body ECU, the possibility of a communication stop
of the main body ECU is high.
(2) If almost all of the communication DTCs of an ECU are stored, a communication stop of the ECU is
suspected.
10/34
8/6/12
*a
Items to be checked
NOTICE:
This DTC table is from another model, and is only used here to show an example of DTCs that are output
when there is an open in a CAN branch line for the main body ECU. This table does not show DTCs
applicable to this vehicle.
HINT:
If almost all of the DTCs of the main body ECU are stored, the possibility of a communication stop of the main
body ECU is high.
(3) When a CAN communication error occurs, many DTCs are output. DTCs other than communication error
DTCs (such as DTCs that start with C or B) and communication DTCs for the ABS system are important
DTCs, however it may be easier to determine the malfunctioning part by examining the overall situation
without considering these DTCs.
(b) To help determine the part of the sub bus that has a communication error, prioritize the communication stop
DTCs stored in the gateway function equipped ECU.
11/34
8/6/12
*a
Items to be checked
*b
ECM
*c
Gateway function equipped ECU
*d
*e
V Bus
*f
Sub Bus
NOTICE:
This DTC table is from another model, and is only used here to show the ECUs connected to both a V bus
and a sub bus. It shows DTCs output when there is an open in the main bus lines for the ECM on the sub
bus. This table does not show DTCs applicable to this vehicle.
HINT:
As gateway function equipped ECUs (sub bus monitor ECU) monitor signals from all ECUs that are connected
to sub buses, gateway function equipped ECUs can detect ECUs with a communication stop more accurately.
When there is a communication stop for the gateway function equipped ECU (gateway), communication with
ECUs connected to other buses such as the V bus stops. Therefore, communication DTCs for ECUs connected
to other buses are also stored.
(c) When any of the following malfunctions occurs, many DTCs are likely to be output from many ECUs. Because of
this, it may be difficult to determine the probable malfunctioning part.
Short between CAN lines (CANH and CANL)
Short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and ground
Short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and +B
Open in a CAN branch line (CANH or CANL) of an ECU or sensor
Open in a CAN main bus line (CANH or CANL) between 2 ECUs that have a terminating resistor
6. DTC TABLE BY ECU

HINT:
In the CAN communication system, the CAN communication DTCs of each ECU can be displayed using the
Techstream.
If CAN communication system DTCs are output, trouble cannot be determined only by the DTCs. Perform
troubleshooting according to How to Proceed with Troubleshooting
.
If system function temporarily returns to normal, DTCs may not be output again even though the following DTC
check procedures are used.
(a) Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU) / Techstream Display "Main Body"
DTC
DETECTION
ITEM
DTC DETECTION
CONDITION
DTC DETECTION PRECONDITION
DTC CHECK
PROCEDURE
WARNING
INDICATION
IN METER
DTC
STORAGE
METHOD
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
Both conditions are

met:
Control Module
U0073 Communication
Bus "A" Off

gateway computer)
communications stopped
because of an error with
high-speed CAN.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the main
body ECU
(network
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 15
seconds.
12/34
8/6/12
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are
met:
Lost
Communication
U0100
With ECM/PCM
"A"
The main body ECU

(network gateway ECU)
does not receive data
from the ECM.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Turn the
second
ignition
elapses.
The power switch to ON
and wait for
source
voltage of
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
at least 15
seconds.
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Lost
U0101 Communication
with TCM
The main body ECU

from the TCM.
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 15
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are
met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
Lost
Communication
U0122 with Vehicle
Dynamics
Control Module
The main body ECU

from the skid control ECU
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
(brake actuator
voltage of
at least 15
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
13/34
8/6/12
assembly).
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
seconds.
Techstream.
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 15
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
Both conditions are

met:
Lost
Communication
with
Instrument
U0155
Panel Cluster
(IPC) Control
Module
The main body ECU

from the combination
meter assembly.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
Invalid Data
U0401 Received From
ECM/PCM "A"
The main body ECU

(network gateway
computer) detects
abnormal data from the
ECM.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Turn the
second
ignition
elapses.
switch to ON
The power
and wait for
source
at least 15
voltage of
seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are
met:
The ignition
Invalid Data
The main body ECU

(network gateway
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
DTC is
stored until
14/34
8/6/12
U0402 Received From

TCM
(network gateway
computer) detects
TCM.
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the main
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 15
seconds.
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are
met:
Invalid Data
Received From
U0416 Vehicle
Dynamics
Control Module
The main body ECU

(network gateway
computer) detects
skid control ECU (brake
actuator assembly).
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 15
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
Both conditions are

met:
Invalid Data
Received From
U0423 Instrument
Panel Cluster
Control Module
The main body ECU

(network gateway
computer) detects
combination meter
assembly.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 15
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
-
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are
met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
15/34
8/6/12
ON and 1
U1201
CAN Fail/Error
Counter Circuit
Unstable
communications because
of an error with highspeed CAN.
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 15
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
seconds.
ECU) is 10
V or more.
HINT:
This ECU uses the CAN communication system for DTC communication.
(b) Combination Meter Assembly / Techstream Display "Combination Meter"

DTC
DETECTION
ITEM
DTC DETECTION
CONDITION
DTC CHECK
PROCEDURE
WARNING
INDICATION
IN METER
DTC
STORAGE
METHOD
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
The combination meter
assembly
Control Module
communications
U0073 Communication
stopped because of an
Bus "A" Off
error with high-speed
CAN.
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the
combination
Turn the
ignition switch
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are
met:
The ignition
Lost
Communication assembly does not
U0100 with ECM/PCM receive data from the
"A"
ECM.
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the
combination
meter
Turn the
ignition switch
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
16/34
8/6/12
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
Lost
Communication
U0122 with Vehicle
Dynamics
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the

assembly does not
receive data from the
Control Module actuator assembly).
Turn the
ignition switch
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are
met:
Lost
U0131 with Power
Steering
power steering ECU
Control Module assembly.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the
combination
Turn the
ignition switch
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are
met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
Lost
Communication
U0140
with Body
Control Module
assembly does not

main body ECU
(network gateway
ECU).
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the
Turn the
ignition switch
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
-
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
17/34
8/6/12
the
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
Lost
U0151

with Restraints receive data from the
Control Module air bag ECU assembly.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
Turn the
ignition switch
voltage of
the
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
-
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
HINT:
(c) ECM / Techstream Display "Engine"

DTC
DETECTION ITEM
DTC DETECTION
DTC DETECTION
DTC CHECK
WARNING
DTC
CONDITION
PRE-CONDITION
PROCEDURE
INDICATION
IN METER
STORAGE
METHOD
Both conditions
are met:
Control Module
U0073 Communication
Bus "A" Off
The ECM
communications
stopped because of
an error with highspeed CAN.
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
power
source
voltage
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
MIL
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
18/34
8/6/12
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
Lost
U0101 Communication
with TCM
The ECM does not

TCM.
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
second and wait for at
elapses. least 10
seconds.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
DTC is
MIL
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
Lost
Communication
U0122 with Vehicle
Dynamics Control
Module
The ECM does not

skid control ECU
(brake actuator
assembly).
turned
to ON
and 1
second
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
elapses.
seconds.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
DTC is
MIL
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
19/34
8/6/12
turned
Lost
Communication
U0155 With Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
Control Module
The ECM does not

combination meter
assembly.
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
MIL
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
elapses. least 10
The
seconds.
power
source
voltage
DTC is
MIL
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The ECM detects

Invalid Data
U0402
abnormal data from
Received from TCM
the TCM.
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
Invalid Data
U0416
Received from
Vehicle Dynamics
Control Module
The ECM detects

abnormal data from
the skid control ECU
(brake actuator
assembly).
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
MIL
DTC is
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
ECM is
10 V or
more.
20/34
8/6/12
Both conditions
are met:
Invalid Data
Received from
U0423 Instrument Panel
Cluster Control
Module
The ECM detects

abnormal data from
the combination
meter assembly.
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
Turn the ignition
switch to ON
and wait for at
elapses. least 10
seconds.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
MIL
DTC is
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
HINT:
(d) TCM / Techstream Display "ECT"

DTC
DETECTION ITEM
DTC DETECTION
CONDITION
DTC DETECTION
PRE-CONDITION
DTC CHECK
PROCEDURE
WARNING
INDICATION
DTC
STORAGE
IN METER
METHOD
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
Control Module
U0073 Communication
Bus "A" Off
The TCM
communications
stopped because of
an error with highspeed CAN.
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
21/34
8/6/12
Lost
U0100 Communication
with ECM/PCM "A"
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
The TCM does not

ECM.
Turn the ignition
switch to ON
and wait for at
elapses. least 10
seconds.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
DTC is
-
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
Lost
Communication
U0122 with Vehicle
Dynamics Control
Module
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
The TCM does not

skid control ECU
(brake actuator
assembly).
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
-
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
U0140
Lost
Communication
with Body Control
Module
The TCM does not

main body ECU
(network gateway
ECU).
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
power
source
voltage
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
-
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
22/34
8/6/12
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
Lost
Communication
U0155 With Instrument
Panel Cluster
(IPC) Control
Module
The TCM does not

to ON
and 1
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
combination meter
assembly.
second and wait for at

elapses. least 10
The
seconds.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
Invalid Data
U0401 Received from
ECM/PCM "A"
The TCM detects

abnormal data from
the ECM.
turned
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
23/34
8/6/12
Invalid Data
Received from
U0416
Vehicle Dynamics
Control Module
The TCM detects

abnormal data from
the skid control ECU
(brake actuator
assembly).
turned
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
Invalid Data
Received from
U0422
Body Control
Module
The TCM detects

abnormal data from
the main body ECU
(network gateway
computer).
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
-
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
Both conditions
are met:
Invalid Data
Received from
U0423 Instrument Panel
Cluster Control
Module
The TCM detects

abnormal data from
the combination meter
assembly.
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON
and 1
second
elapses.
The
power
source
voltage
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
-
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
24/34
8/6/12
HINT:
(e) Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly) / Techstream Display "ABS/VSC/TRAC"
DTC
DETECTION
ITEM
DTC DETECTION
CONDITION
DTC CHECK
PROCEDURE
WARNING
INDICATION
IN METER
DTC
STORAGE
METHOD
Both conditions are

met:
The skid control ECU

(brake actuator
Control Module
assembly)
U0073 Communication
communications stopped
Bus OFF
because of an error with
high-speed CAN.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the skid
control ECU
(brake
actuator
assembly)
is 10 V or
more.
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 60
seconds.
DTC is
ABS
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 10
seconds.
DTC is
ABS
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
Both conditions are

met:

(brake actuator
Lost
Communication
U0100
assembly) does not
With ECM/PCM
"A"
ECM.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the skid
control ECU
(brake
actuator
assembly)
is 10 V or
more.
Both conditions are
met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
25/34
8/6/12
ON and 1
second
Lost
(brake actuator
U0101 Communication assembly) does not
with TCM
TCM.
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the skid
control ECU
(brake
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 10
seconds.
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
ABS
warning
actuator
assembly)
is 10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
(brake actuator
Lost
Communication assembly) does not
U0126 With Steering
steering angle sensor
Angle Sensor
(spiral cable subModule
assembly).
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the skid
control ECU
(brake
actuator
assembly)
is 10 V or
more.
Turn the
ignition
switch to ON
and wait for
at least 60
seconds.
DTC is
ABS
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
HINT:
(f) Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly) / Techstream Display "-"
HINT:
The steering angle sensor is connected to the CAN communication system, but CAN communication DTCs are not
output.
(g) Power Steering ECU Assembly / Techstream Display "EMPS"

DTC
DETECTION
ITEM
DTC DETECTION
CONDITION
DTC CHECK
PROCEDURE
WARNING
INDICATION
IN METER
DTC
STORAGE
METHOD
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
26/34
8/6/12
Lost
Communication
U0100
with ECM/PCM
"A"
The power steering ECU

assembly does not
ECM.
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the power
steering
ECU
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Turn the
ignition switch
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
EPS
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
Both conditions are

met:
Lost
Communication
U0122 with Vehicle
Dynamics
Control Module

assembly does not
actuator assembly).
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the power
steering
ECU
Turn the
ignition switch
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
EPS
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are
met:
The ignition
switch is
Invalid Data
Received from
U0416 Vehicle
Dynamics
Control Module

assembly does not send
data to the skid control
ECU (brake actuator
assembly).
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the power
steering
ECU
assembly is
Turn the
ignition switch
to ON and
wait for at
least 10
seconds.
DTC is
EPS
stored until
warning
it is cleared
light
using the
illuminates.
Techstream.
10 V or
more.
HINT:
27/34
8/6/12
(h) Air Bag ECU Assembly / Techstream Display "SRS Airbag"

DTC
DETECTION
ITEM
DTC DETECTION
CONDITION
DTC CHECK
PROCEDURE
WARNING
INDICATION
IN METER
DTC
STORAGE
METHOD
DTC is
stored until
it is cleared
using the
Techstream.
Both conditions are

met:

Control Module communications
U0073 Communication stopped because of an
Bus "A" Off
error with high-speed
CAN.
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second
elapses.
The power
source
voltage of
the air bag
ECU
assembly is
Turn the ignition

switch to ON
and wait for at
least 60
seconds.
10 V or
more.
HINT:
(i) PSP (Option Connector) / Techstream Display "-"

HINT:
The PSP (option connector) is connected to the CAN communication system, but CAN communication DTCs are not
output.
7. DTC COMBINATION TABLE (OPEN IN CAN BRANCH OF V BUS, PAST COMMUNICATION ERROR)
(a) Regarding the past communication error of ECUs and sensors connected to the V bus (in this case, normal
was displayed when performing the CAN bus check, but communication DTCs are output), the probable CAN
branch that had a malfunction can be determined based on the following DTC combination table.
HINT:
Based on the table below and DTCs output from ECUs connected via CAN communication, the probable part for
which communication stop occurred can be determined.
Regarding an open in a CAN branch and a communication stop that is currently occurring, the malfunctioning
part can be confirmed easily by performing the CAN bus check using the Techstream because the ECU or
sensor connected to the CAN branch does not respond (the ECU or sensor name will not be displayed on the
screen).
If an open in a CAN main bus line, a short between the CAN bus lines (CANH and CANL) or a +B or ground
short in the CAN bus occurs, DTCs of almost all ECUs (or sensors) on the CAN bus may be output, or a
message indicating a communication error may be displayed on the Techstream screen. In this case, check the
resistance of the CAN bus (steps 7 to 9) first.
If an open occurs in just one of the lines of a CAN branch, DTCs which are not related to malfunctioning parts
may be output (DTCs may be displayed randomly), or a message indicating a communication error may be
displayed.
28/34
8/6/12
DTC
OUTPUT
ECU
TROUBLE MODE
OUTPUT
DTC
SKID CONTROL
POWER
STEERING ANGLE
ECM
TRANSMISSION
ECU
STEERING ECU
SENSOR
COMMUNICATION CONTROL ECU
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
STOP MODE
COMMUNICATION
STOP MODE
STOP MODE
STOP MODE
STOP MODE
U0073
Skid Control
ECU (Brake U0100
Actuator
U0101
Assembly)
U0126
*1
*1
*1
*1
Power
Steering
ECU
Assembly
U0100
*1
U0122
*1
U0416
X*1
U0073
*1
U0101
*1
U0122
*1
U0155
*1
U0402
X*1
U0416
X*1
U0423
X*1
U0073
*1
U0100
*1
U0122
*1
U0140
*1
U0155
*1
U0416
X*1
U0422
X*1
U0423
X*1
U0073
U0100
U0101
U0122
U0155
U0401
X*2
U0402
X*2
U0416
X*2
U0423
ECM
TCM
Main Body
ECU
(Network
Gateway
ECU)
U1201
X
29/34
8/6/12
U1201
U0073
U0100
U0140
U0151
U0073
Combination U0122
Meter
U0131
Assembly
Air Bag ECU

Assembly
DTC
OUTPUT ECU
TROUBLE MODE
OUTPUT
MAIN BODY ECU
COMBINATION METER
CENTER AIRBAG
BUS BUFFER ECU
DTC
COMMUNICATION
ECU COMMUNICATION
SENSOR
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION
STOP MODE
STOP MODE
STOP MODE
STOP MODE
Skid Control
ECU (Brake
Actuator
Assembly)
Power Steering
ECU Assembly
ECM
TCM
U0073
U0100
U0101
U0126
U0100
U0122
U0416
U0073
U0101
U0122
U0155
U0402
U0416
U0423
U0073
U0100
U0122
U0140
U0155
U0401
U0416
U0422
30/34
8/6/12
Main Body ECU

(Network
Gateway ECU)
Combination
Meter Assembly
Air Bag ECU

Assembly
U0422
U0423
U0073
*1
U0100
*1
U0101
*1
U0122
*1
U0155
*1
U0401
X*1
U0402
X*1
U0416
X*1
U0423
X*1
X*2
U1201
*1
U0073
*1
U0100
*1
U0122
*1
U0131
*1
U0140
*1
U0151
*1
U0073
*1
HINT:
: Set
X: Not set or may be set according to the malfunctioning part when one line of a CAN branch is open.
-: DTC is not output.
*:1 DTC is not output during communication error, but will be output as a history DTC (past DTC) when
communication returns to normal.
*:2 DTC may not be stored depending on conditions.
8. CAN BUS WAVEFORMS
31/34
8/6/12
HINT:
This waveform is measured between terminals CANH and GND, and terminals CANL and GND of the DLC3. (Use
this as a reference for diagnosis of CAN communication lines.)
When malfunctions in multiple ECUs are suspected based on CAN Bus Check and DTCs checked using the
Techstream, check the resistance of the CAN bus using an ohmmeter first
. If no problems are found,
check the following waveforms.
If a waveform is not similar to one of the following 3 patterns (Group 1), then an open in a CAN main bus line,
an open in a CAN branch line, or a short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and ground is suspected (Group
2).
Wiggle the connector and wire harness to check if the waveform changes.
(a) CAN bus waveforms (Group 1)
(1) Normal
waveform
(2) Open in both of the lines (CANH and CANL) of a CAN branch
HINT:
Waveforms (waveforms shown using dotted lines) are not present
from an ECU or sensor connected to a CAN branch with an open
circuit in both lines. (Waveforms from other ECUs or sensors are
normal.)
32/34
8/6/12
normal.)
Because this waveform is similar to a normal waveform, instead of
using the waveform, the malfunctioning part can be narrowed down
by performing a CAN bus check.
(3) Short between the CAN bus lines (CANH and CANL)
HINT:
Waveforms disappear.
If the malfunction is in an ECU, disconnecting the ECU will change the
waveform. If the waveform does not change, a malfunction in the
wire harness is suspected.
(b) CAN bus waveforms (reference) (Group 2)

NOTICE:
The following CAN bus waveforms can be used only as reference. The actual measured waveform may
differ significantly depending on the location of the open or short circuit.
(1) Open in a CAN branch line (CANH)

HINT:
An abnormal waveform is output from an ECU with an open in one of
its CAN branch lines. Because this abnormal output interferes with
the signals from other ECUs, the output of other ECUs will also
appear abnormal.
Narrow down the malfunctioning part by checking DTCs or performing
a CAN bus check, or by checking waveform changes when ECUs or
sensors are disconnected. The waveform will change to one for an
open in both sides of a CAN branch when the ECU or sensor with an
open CAN branch line is disconnected.
(2) Open in a CAN branch line (CANL)

HINT:
An abnormal waveform is output from an ECU with an open in one of
its CAN branch lines. Because this abnormal output interferes with
the signals from other ECUs, the output of other ECUs will also
appear abnormal.
Narrow down the malfunctioning part by checking DTCs or performing
a CAN bus check, or by checking waveform changes when ECUs or
sensors are disconnected. The waveform will change to one for an
open in both sides of a CAN branch when the ECU or sensor with an
open CAN branch line is disconnected.
(3) Open in a CAN main bus line (CANH)

HINT:
33/34
8/6/12
Waveforms of ECUs or sensors that are nearer to the DLC3 than the
open part are almost normal.
Waveforms of ECUs or sensors that are on the opposite side of the
DLC3 from the open part are abnormal.
An open in a CAN main bus line can be confirmed by measuring the
resistance between the CANH and CANL terminals of any CAN branch.
(4) Short between a CAN bus line (CANH) and ground

HINT:
Narrow down the shorted part by checking for waveform changes
when disconnecting connectors from the CAN junction connector or
when disconnecting ECUs or sensors.
A short to ground in the CANH line can be confirmed by measuring the
resistance between CANH and ground using an ohmmeter.
(5) Short between a CAN bus line (CANL) and ground

HINT:
Narrow down the shorted part by checking for waveform changes
when disconnecting connectors from the CAN junction connector or
when disconnecting ECUs or sensors.
A short to ground in the CANL line can be confirmed by measuring the
resistance between CANL and ground using an ohmmeter.
34/34
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: ECM Communication Stop Mode (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WIP0B6X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: ECM Communication Stop Mode (2013 FR-S)
ECM Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION
ITEM
SYMPTOM

ECM
Communication
Stop Mode
"ECM (Engine)" is not displayed on the "CAN Bus

Check" screen of the Techstream
Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start with U)
that are output correspond to "ECM Communication
Stop Mode" in "DTC Combination Table"
TROUBLE AREA
Power
source
circuit of
ECM
ECM main
line or
connector
ECM
ground
circuit
ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WIP0B6X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
output again.
HINT:
2/4
8/6/12
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (ECM MAIN LINE)
(b) Disconnect the A33 ECM connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A33-19 (CANH) - A33-18
(CANL)
terminal
114 to 126
*a

(to ECM)
NG

CONNECTOR (ECM MAIN LINE)
OK
2.
3/4
8/6/12
(a) Check the ECM power source circuit
NG

OK
REPLACE ECM
4/4
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WI60A6X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING

(2013 FR-S)

1. PRECAUTIONS WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTICE:
related DTCs are output.
If the CAN communication system is malfunctioning, check the contact pressure of the terminals in
connectors, as insufficient terminal contact pressure may be the cause
.
Refer to Diagnosis System for the DTCs for the CAN communication system.
Refer to troubleshooting of each system if DTCs regarding the CAN communication system are not
output.
(a) CAN communication DTCs are output for CAN main bus and CAN branch malfunctions as well as for
internal malfunctions or power source malfunctions of ECUs or sensors for systems using CAN
communication. Therefore, when DTCs for internal malfunctions or power source malfunctions of
corresponding systems are output at the same time as CAN communication DTCs, troubleshoot
according to the internal malfunction and power source malfunction DTCs.
(b) The DLC3 branch and V bus main bus circuits can be checked for malfunctions by inspecting at the
DLC3 terminals using an electrical tester.
NOTICE:
When inspecting at the DLC3 connector, do not connect the tester directly to the terminals.
Instead, connect using service wires.
Inspections for an open in an ECU or sensor branch, or inspections for buses other than the V bus
cannot be performed from the DLC3.
(c) An open in a branch for ECUs or sensors that are connected to the CAN main bus can be checked
by performing a CAN bus check using the Techstream. (This inspection is possible when the DLC3
branch and V bus main bus lines are normal.)
(d) If the V bus had a communication error, the probable ECU or sensor for which communication
stopped can be determined using the combination of communication DTCs (DTCs that start with U)
that are output.
(e) When an open circuit is detected, before disconnecting the related connectors for inspection, push
in on the connector body to check that the connector is not loose or disconnected.
(f) When a connector is disconnected, check that the terminals and the connector body are not
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WI60A6X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/10
8/6/12
cracked, deformed or corroded.
1.
HINT:
If the ignition switch can be turned to ON when the vehicle is brought in for repair, check for DTCs
and check the illumination condition of the indicators in the combination meter assembly and the
basic operation of the vehicle (such as steering operation) promptly.
Do not turn the ignition switch off until the inspection of the vehicle is finished, as some fail-safe
functions are canceled when the ignition switch is turned off.
If the ignition switch cannot be turned to ON when the vehicle is brought in, measure the voltage
of the battery. If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before performing
troubleshooting.
NEXT
2.
HINT:
Ask the customer if the vehicle is/was equipped with additional devices such as a theft deterrent
device or monitor. (If equipped, explain the customer that the additional devices will be removed
before performing troubleshooting as the malfunction cannot be checked properly.)
(a) It is useful to confirm the symptoms and the conditions in which the vehicle was operating at
the time when a malfunction occurred. This helps to narrow down the malfunctioning part.
HINT:
What was affected (system, part or meter warning indicators)
What happened (details of the malfunction)
When (occurrence date and time, frequency and if it recurs or not)
Under what kind of situation did the problem occur (driving and operating condition at the
occurrence and weather)
Road type or condition (city, suburb, paved road, unpaved road, highway, etc.)
Return conditions (what made the vehicle return to normal. Example: ignition switch was turned
off)
Points to be Confirmed
Electric power steering

2/10
8/6/12
- Normal
- A little heavier than usual
Symptom
- There was no assist

Multi-information display
- Whether each display has stopped updating
Others
Illumination of warning lights and the order in which they illuminated

- Slip indicator light
- ABS warning light
- Check Engine warning light
- Brake warning light
Meter warning lights
- SRS warning light

- Others
Meter display
- Shift indicator
- Speedometer
- Tachometer (if it is fixed at 0 rpm)
- Engine coolant temperature gauge (if it is fixed at COLD)
NEXT
3.
CHECK TECHSTREAM OPERATION
HINT:
Read the Techstream operators manual before use

(d) Check that the Techstream and ECUs can communicate with the ignition switch ON.
HINT:
If communication is impossible, the Techstream screen will indicate an error.
If communication between the Techstream and ECUs is impossible, either the Techstream or
vehicle has a malfunction.
When communication between the Techstream and the vehicle is impossible, but communication is
possible when the Techstream is connected to another vehicle, the vehicle has the malfunction.
Inspect the CANH and CANL branch lines of the DLC3 and the ECU power source circuits (in this
case perform steps 7 to 9 first). In addition, check that the BAT terminal of the DLC3 receives
3/10
8/6/12
battery voltage (11 V or more).

If communication between the Techstream and ECUs is still impossible even when the Techstream
is connected to another vehicle, the Techstream has a malfunction. Perform the self tests
described in the Techstream operators manual. (The Techstream may be malfunctioning or its
battery may be discharged.)
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
OK (Communication between the Techstream and the vehicle is possible.)

OK (Communication between the Techstream and the vehicle is impossible but
communication is possible when connected to another vehicle.)
NG (Communication is not possible between the Techstream and the vehicle, nor between
the Techstream and another vehicle.)
Go to step 7
Refer to Techstream operator's manual
A
B
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Using the Techstream, perform Health Check to read current and history DTCs and record them.
NOTICE:
CAN communication DTCs are output when there is an open or short in any of the communication
lines. Any problems with the power source of a corresponding ECU or sensor, or problems in the
ECU, the sensor itself also cause these DTCs to be output.
If a CAN communication line connector is disconnected with the ignition switch ON, the ECUs of the
corresponding system and related systems store a DTC.
HINT:
If an open in a CAN main bus line, a short between the CAN bus lines (CANH and CANL) or a +B or
ground short in a CAN bus occurs, DTCs of almost all ECUs and sensors on the CAN bus may be
output (or a message indicating a communication error may be displayed on the Techstream
screen). In this case, check the resistance of the CAN bus (steps 7 to 9) first.
If an open occurs in just one of the lines of a CAN branch, DTCs which are not related to
malfunctioning parts may be output (DTCs may be displayed randomly), or a message indicating a
communication error may be displayed on the Techstream.
(b) Read the freeze frame data using the Techstream and record it.
4/10
8/6/12
NEXT
CHECK COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION CHECK (CONNECTION STATUS CHECK USING

TECHSTREAM)
5.
(a) Select "CAN Bus Check" from the screen on the Techstream.
(b) Record all the DTCs stored for ECUs and sensors.
NEXT
6.
CHECK CAN BUS CHECK (CONNECTION STATUS CHECK USING TECHSTREAM)
(a) Based on the vehicle equipment and specifications, confirm the systems that use CAN
communication
.
(b) Select "CAN Bus Check" from the screen on the Techstream.
(c) Observe the screen for approximately 2 minutes to check the ECUs and sensors displayed on
the screen.
NEXT
7.
CHECK DLC3 BRANCH LINE AND V BUS MAIN LINE (CANH - CANL)
NOTICE:
Before measuring the resistance of the CAN bus, turn the ignition switch off and leave the
vehicle for 1 minute or more without operating the key, switches or opening or closing the
doors. After that, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and leave the
vehicle for 1 minute or more before measuring the resistance.
HINT:
Operating the ignition switch, any other switches or a door triggers the related ECU and sensor
5/10
8/6/12

terminal.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D10-6 (CANH) - D10-14

(CANL)

terminal
57 to 63
*1
DLC3
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (64 or higher)
NG (Below 57 )
GO TO OPEN IN CAN MAIN BUS LINE
GO TO SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES
8.
CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN V BUS (CANH, CANL - CG)

table below.
6/10
8/6/12
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D10-6 (CANH) D10-4 (CG)

200 or
higher
D10-14 (CANL)
- D10-4 (CG)

200 or
higher
*1
NG
DLC3
GO TO SHORT TO GND IN CAN BUS LINE
OK
9.
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN V BUS (CANH, CANL - BAT)

table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D10-6 (CANH) -
6 k or
D10-16 (BAT)
higher
D10-14 (CANL) -
6 k or
D10-16 (BAT
higher
*1
NG
DLC3
GO TO SHORT TO +B IN CAN BUS LINE
OK
7/10
8/6/12
CHECK RESULT OF CAN BUS CHECK (CONNECTION STATUS CHECK USING

TECHSTREAM)
10.
(a) Inspect or repair the probable malfunctioning part based on the check result of step 6 (the step
in which CAN Bus Check was performed).
Result of CAN Bus Check (Connection Status Check Using Techstream):
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
All ECUs and sensors connected to the CAN communication system are displayed on the
screen.
(CAN bus circuit is currently normal.)

One of the ECUs and sensors connected to the V Bus is not displayed on the screen.
(Open in ECU or sensor branch lines, or communication interrupted.)
In addition to the ECUs and sensors which are connected to the CAN communication system
but are not displayed on the screen, there are ECUs or sensors for which the detection
status changes (changes between detected and not detected) during the inspection.
(Open in one side of ECU or sensor branch lines.)

NOTICE:
Non-installed ECUs or sensors will not be displayed. Do not mistake them for being in
communication stop mode.
It may be possible to select buses that do not have ECUs or sensors from the bus selection pulldown menu on the Techstream. This is not a malfunction.
HINT:
Regarding CAN Bus Check, refer to How to Interpret CAN Bus Diagnosis (CAN Bus Check) Screen
.
If the detection status of ECUs changes during the inspection, one of the branch lines of a
connected ECU or sensor may be open. (Signals from the ECU or sensor that has an open in one
of its branch lines create electrical noise, affecting response to the Techstream and the ECUs and
whether or not sensors displayed.)
GO TO COMMUNICATION STOP MODE TABLE
GO TO OPEN IN ONE SIDE OF CAN BRANCH LINE
8/10
8/6/12
CHECK RESULT OF COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION CHECK (SELECT THE

MALFUNCTIONING BUS)
11.
(a) Inspect or repair the probable malfunctioning part based on the check result of step 5 (the step
in which checking for communication malfunction DTCs was performed).
HINT:
When checking for communication DTCs, refer to How to Interpret Communication DTCs (DTCs that
start with U)
.
If communication DTCs are stored, and all ECUs and sensors connected to the CAN communication
system are displayed on the Communication Bus Check (CAN bus check) screen of the Techstream,
a past malfunction that is currently not occurring is suspected.
When a CAN branch of the V bus is malfunctioning, because the ECUs and sensors related to it
detect the malfunction, the problem area can be determined using the combination of DTCs that
are output.
NEXT
12.
DTC COMBINATION TABLE
(a) Confirm the problem according to the combination of output DTCs regarding the CAN
communication system
.
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Combination of DTCs is not in DTC Combination Table
Combination of DTCs is in DTC Combination Table
HINT:
CAN communication system history DTCs may indicate the problem if CAN communication system
DTCs are output and all ECUs and sensors connected to the CAN communication system are displayed
on "CAN Bus Check" of the Techstream.
GO TO COMMUNICATION STOP MODE TABLE
13.
IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM (PAST MALFUNCTION IN MAIN BUS OF V BUS)
9/10
8/6/12
(a) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.

(b) Clear the DTCs using the Techstream.
(c) Perform the tests in Symptom Simulation to check the wire harnesses and connectors including
those for V bus main bus lines
.
(d) Based on the results of the check, inspect the parts that output DTCs to determine the
malfunctioning part.
HINT:
If DTCs are output, do not turn the ignition switch off.
NEXT
14.
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
NEXT
15.
CONFIRMATION TEST*
NEXT
END
10/10
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Main Body ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F1V05UX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Main Body ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013
FR-S)
Main Body ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION
ITEM
SYMPTOM

"Main Body" is not displayed on the "CAN Bus
Main Body ECU
Communication
Stop Mode
Check" screen of the Techstream

Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start
with U) that are output correspond to "Main Body
ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC
Combination Table"
TROUBLE AREA
Main body ECU

(network
gateway ECU)
branch line or
connector
Power source
circuit of main
body ECU
(network
gateway ECU)
Main body ECU
(network
gateway ECU)
ground circuit
Main body ECU
(network
gateway ECU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F1V05UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
NOTICE:
2/6
8/6/12
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU)
BRANCH LINE)
(b) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway

ECU) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
D5-14 (CANH) - D5-13
(CANL)
terminal
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
*a

(to Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))
3/6
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
GATEWAY ECU))
OK
2.
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the main body ECU (network gateway ECU)

(b) Remove the instrument panel junction block assembly
.
.
*a
(Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3E-1 - MB-8 (IG)
Battery voltage is applied to terminals 3A-15 and 3A-12
Below 1
MB-1 (BECU) - 3A-27
Always
Below 1
MB-11 (GND) - 3B-18
Always
Below 1
MB-32 (BMPX) - 3C-19
Always
Below 1
NG
REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION
4/6
8/6/12
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
(a) Install the instrument panel junction block assembly.
*a

*b

(to Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D6-1 (GND) - Body ground

terminal
MB-11 (GND) - Body
ground
terminal
Below 1
Below 1
(c) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
5/6
8/6/12
*a
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
MB-1 (BECU) - Body ground
Ignition switch off
11 to 14 V
MB-8 (IG) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
MB-32 (BMPX) - Body ground
Ignition switch off
11 to 14 V
NG
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
6/6
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Open in CAN Main Bus Line (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001V9P06AX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Open in CAN Main Bus Line (2013 FR-S)
Open in CAN Main Bus Line
DESCRIPTION
There may be an open circuit one of the V bus main lines and/or a DLC3 branch line when the resistance
between terminals 6 (CANH) and 14 (CANL) of the DLC3 is 64 or higher.
SYMPTOM
Resistance between terminals 6 (CANH) and 14 (CANL) of

DLC3 is 64 or higher.
TROUBLE AREA
DLC3 branch line or connector
CAN main bus line or
connector
ECM
actuator assembly)
This malfunction is not related to the lines of a CAN main bus branch or to ECUs or sensor connected a
CAN main bus branch.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001V9P06AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/8
8/6/12
NOTICE:
2/8
8/6/12
.
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (DLC3 BRANCH LINE)
table below.
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D10-6 (CANH) -
114 to 126
D10-14 (CANL)
*1
DLC3
NOTICE:
When the measured value is 127 or higher and a CAN
communication system DTC is output, there may be a
fault besides disconnection of the DLC3 branch line. For
that reason, troubleshooting should be performed again
from How to Proceed with Troubleshooting after
repairing the trouble area
.
NG
3/8
8/6/12
CONNECTED TO DLC3
OK
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (ECM)
(a) Disconnect the A33 ECM connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A33-19 (CANH) - A33-18

(CANL)

terminal
114 to 126
*a

(to ECM)
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID
3.
NG
CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR

ASSEMBLY))
OK
REPLACE ECM
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY))
(a) Reconnect the A33 ECM connector.

4/8
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A5-26 (CANH) - A5-14
(CANL)
terminal
114 to 126
*a
4.

NG
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO.
OK
2 J/C)
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 2 J/C)
(a) Reconnect the A5 skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
5/8
8/6/12
(b) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the D43 CAN
TESTER
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTION
D43-1 - D43-12
D43-9 - D43-20
CONNECTED TO
CONDITION
battery terminal
battery terminal
114 to 126
114 to 126
CAN No. 1 junction

connector
ECM
*a

*b
*c
to ECM
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (ECM main line)
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 2
J/C - CAN NO. 1 J/C)
6/8
8/6/12
5.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 2 J/C - CAN NO. 1 J/C)
(a) Reconnect the wire harness connector to the D43 CAN No. 2 junction connector.
(b) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the A17 CAN
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A17-7 - A17-18
114 to 126
*a
*b

NG

OK
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 1 J/C - SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE
7/8
8/6/12
6.
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY))

table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
A17-6 - A1717

SPECIFIED
CONDITION
114 to 126
*a

*b to Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly)
NG

OK
8/8
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Open in One Side of CAN Branch Line (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZUR06GX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Open in One Side of CAN Branch Line (2013 FR-S)
Open in One Side of CAN Branch Line
DESCRIPTION
If an ECU or sensor is not displayed on the CAN Bus Check screen of the Techstream and some ECUs and
sensors repeatedly appear and disappear from the screen when the CAN main bus lines are normal
(there is no open, short, short to +B or short to GND in the main bus lines), there may be an open circuit
in either of one pair of CAN branch lines.
HINT:
If some ECUs and sensors repeatedly appear and disappear from the CAN Bus Check screen,
communication between the normal ECUs (sensors) and the Techstream may be affected by the
incomplete signals that are output from the ECU that has an open circuit in either of its CAN branch
lines. In this case, the CAN branch lines for the ECUs and sensors that repeatedly appear and
disappear from the screen are normal and the ECU that is not displayed on the screen may be the
main cause of the problem (this ECU may have an open circuit in either of its CAN branch lines).
SYMPTOM
TROUBLE AREA
One side of CAN branch line is open, or
output signals are incomplete.
2 or more ECUs and/or sensors do not appear on the

Techstream "CAN Bus Check" screen.
Short in CAN main bus line

Short in CAN branch line
ECU)
ECM
TCM*
Skid control ECU (brake actuator
assembly)
cable sub-assembly)
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZUR06GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Open in One Side of CAN Branch Line (2013 FR-S)

.
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN ONE SIDE OF V BUS BRANCH LINE
(a) Based on the vehicle equipment and specifications, confirm the systems that use CAN
communication
.
(b) Using the Techstream, select and perform the CAN bus check
(c) Observe the screen for approximately 2 minutes to check the ECUs and sensors that are not
displayed on the screen and also those that repeatedly appear and disappear from the screen.
(d) Check the applicable communication stop mode for the ECU or sensor that is not displayed on
the screen.
NEXT
GO TO CORRESPONDING COMMUNICATION
STOP MODE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZUR06GX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000044OW00BX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000044OW00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000044OW00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Power Steering ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001RT004DX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Power Steering ECU Communication Stop Mode
(2013 FR-S)
Power Steering ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION
ITEM
SYMPTOM

Power Steering
ECU
Communication
Stop Mode
"Power Steering (EPS)" is not displayed on the

"CAN Bus Check" screen of the Techstream
U) that are output correspond to "Power Steering
ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC
Combination Table"
TROUBLE AREA
Power
steering
ECU
assembly
branch line
or
connector
Power
source
circuit of
power
steering
ECU
assembly
Power
steering
ECU
assembly
ground
circuit
Power
steering
ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001RT004DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
output again.
HINT:
2/4
8/6/12
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY BRANCH
LINE)
1.
(b) Disconnect the A14 and A15 power steering ECU

assembly connectors.
TESTER CONNECTION
A15-1 (CANH) - A15-7

(CANL)
CONDITION

terminal
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
*a

(to Power Steering ECU Assembly)
NG
CONNECTOR (POWER STEERING ECU

ASSEMBLY)
OK
3/4
8/6/12
2.

table below.
TESTER
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTION
CONDITION
A14-2 (PGND) -
Body ground
Below 1
*a


table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A14-1 (PIG) - Body
Ignition switch
ground
off
A15-6 (IG) - Body
Ignition switch
ground
ON
11 to 14 V
11 to 14 V
*a

NG
OK
REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
4/4
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WI50CRX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
(a) Because the order of diagnosis is important to allow a correct diagnosis, make sure to begin
2. PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING SYSTEM HANDLING

(a) Be careful when replacing parts. Incorrect replacement could affect the performance of the
steering system and result in hazardous driving.
3. PRECAUTIONS FOR SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM HANDLING

(a) This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) which includes parts such as
airbags for the driver and the front passenger. Failure to carry out service operations in the correct
sequence could cause unexpected SRS deployment during servicing and may cause a serious
accident. Before servicing (including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement), be
sure to read Precaution for SRS
4. BUS LINE REPAIR

(a) After repairing a bus line with solder, wrap the repaired
part with electrical tape.
NOTICE:
The CANL bus line and CANH bus line must be installed
together at all times.
When installing, make sure that these lines are twisted,
because CAN bus lines are likely to be influenced by
electrical noise if the bus lines are not twisted.
Leave approximately 80 mm (3.150 in.) loose in the
twisted wires around the connector.
When repairing the CAN bus lines, do not change the
length of the lines. (Make sure that the length of the
CANH bus line and CANL bus line are the same.)
(b) Do not use bypass wiring between connectors.

*a
Bypass Wire
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WI50CRX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
NOTICE:
The ability of the twisted bus lines to resist interference
will be lost if bypass wiring is used.
Do not use a twisted pair of wires for bypass wiring.
5. CONNECTOR HANDLING
(a) When checking resistance with a tester, insert the tester

probes from the backside (harness side) of the connector.
*a
Tester Probe
(b) Use service wires to check the connector if it is impossible

to check continuity from the rear of the connector.
*a
Service Wire
6. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTING OR REPLACING CAN JUNCTION CONNECTOR

(a) If the CAN junction connector is removed from the vehicle for inspection or replacement, make sure
to install the CAN junction connector and all wire harnesses to their original locations with tape
and the clamps.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WI50CRX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WI80AVX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Because the order of diagnosis is important to allow a correct diagnosis, make sure to begin
Result List of How to Proceed with Troubleshooting

SYMPTOM
The result of "How to Proceed with Troubleshooting" is

"Open in CAN Main Bus Line".
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Open in CAN Main Bus Line

(Includes DLC3 branch lines and
terminating resistors)

"Short in CAN Bus Lines".
Short in CAN Bus Lines

"Short to +B in CAN Bus Line".
Short to +B in CAN Bus Line

"Short to GND in CAN Bus Line".
Short to GND in CAN Bus Line

"Open in One Side of CAN Branch Line".
Open in One Side of CAN Branch

Line
HINT:
Refer to How to Proceed with Troubleshooting for the V Bus Check procedure.
Communication Stop Mode Table

The suspected communication stop area can be determined based on the ECU or sensor that was not
displayed in CAN Bus Check and by referring to the table below.
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
"Skid Control (ABS/VSC/TRAC)" is not displayed on the

Techstream.
Skid Control ECU Communication Stop

Mode
"Power Steering (EPS)" is not displayed on the
SEE
PAGE
Power Steering ECU Communication
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WI80AVX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
Techstream.
Stop Mode
"Spiral cable (Steering Angle Sensor)" is not displayed

on the Techstream.
Steering Angle Sensor Communication

Stop Mode
"ECM (Engine)" is not displayed on the Techstream.
ECM Communication Stop Mode
"TCM" is not displayed on the Techstream.
Transmission Control ECU

Communication Stop Mode
"Main Body" is not displayed on the Techstream.
Main Body ECU Communication Stop

Mode
"Combination Meter" is not displayed on the

Techstream.
Combination Meter ECU

Communication Stop Mode
"Airbag" is not displayed on the Techstream.
Center Airbag Sensor Communication

Stop Mode
DTC Combination Table

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
Although CAN communication (V

bus) is currently normal, ECUs
The probable part for which communication is interrupted

can be determined using DTC Combination Table and
connected to the V bus store CAN

communication DTCs.
comparing the DTCs output from ECUs connected to the

CAN communication system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WI80AVX.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE
PAGE
2/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Skid Control ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001V2C056X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Skid Control ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013
FR-S)
Skid Control ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION
ITEM
SYMPTOM
Skid Control
ECU
Communication
Stop Mode
"Skid Control (ABS/VSC/TRAC)" is not displayed

on the "CAN Bus Check" screen of the
Techstream
with U) that are output correspond to "Skid
Control ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC
Combination Table"
TROUBLE AREA
Skid control
ECU (brake
actuator
assembly) main
line or
connector
Power source
circuit of skid
control ECU
(brake actuator
assembly)
Skid control
ECU (brake
actuator
assembly)
ground circuit
Skid control
ECU (brake
actuator
assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
output again.
DTC check procedure: Turn the ignition switch to ON, wait at least 60 seconds,.
HINT:
2/5
8/6/12
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY) MAIN LINE)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
A5-26 (CANH) - A5-14

(CANL)

terminal
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
114 to 126
*a

NG
CONNECTOR (SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE

ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY) MAIN LINE)
OK
3/5
8/6/12
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT)

table below.
TESTER
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTION
CONDITION
A5-13 (GND2) -
Body ground
A5-38 (GND1) -
Body ground
Below 1
Below 1
*a


table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A5-1 (+BM) - Body
Ignition switch
ground
off
A5-25 (+BS) - Body
Ignition switch
ground
off
A5-28 (IG1) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
11 to 14 V
11 to 14 V
11 to 14 V
*a

NG


4/5
8/6/12
OK
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
5/5
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Steering Angle Sensor Communication Stop Mode (20
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WIH07PX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Steering Angle Sensor Communication Stop Mode
(2013 FR-S)
Steering Angle Sensor Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION
ITEM
SYMPTOM
Steering Angle
Sensor
Communication
Stop Mode
"Spiral cable (Steering Angle Sensor)" is not

displayed on the "CAN Bus Check" screen of the
Techstream
with U) that are output correspond to "Steering
Angle Sensor Communication Stop Mode" in
"DTC Combination Table"
TROUBLE AREA
Steering angle
sensor (spiral
cable subassembly)
branch line or
connector
Power source
circuit of
steering angle
sensor (spiral
cable subassembly)
Steering angle
sensor (spiral
cable subassembly)
ground circuit
Steering angle
sensor (spiral
cable subassembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WIH07PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
output again.
HINT:
2/4
8/6/12
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SPIRAL CABLE SUBASSEMBLY) BRANCH WIRE)
(b) Disconnect the D56 steering angle sensor (spiral cable

sub-assembly) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
D56-3 (CANH) - D56-2

(CANL)
CONDITION

terminal
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
*a

(to Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly))
NG
CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR

SUB-ASSEMBLY)
OK
3/4
8/6/12
2.

table below.
TESTER
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTION
CONDITION
D56-1 (ESS) -
Body ground
Below 1
*a


table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D56-4 (IG1) - Body
Ignition switch
ground
ON
11 to 14 V
*a

NG
OK
REPLACE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SPIRAL

CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY)
4/4
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000YDW0B4X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. BRIEF DESCRIPTION
(a) The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial data communication system for real time application.
It is a vehicle multiplex communication system which has a high communication speed and the
ability to detect malfunctions.
(b) Using the CANH and CANL bus lines as a pair, CAN communication is performed using a voltage
differential. (A base voltage is applied to the pair of lines and a voltage differential is created when
communicating.)
(c) Many ECUs or sensors installed on the vehicle operate by sharing information and communicating
with each other.
(d) The CAN has two resistors of 120 which are necessary to enable communication.
(e) Control system CAN is composed of 1 bus.
2. DEFINITION OF TERMS
(a) Main bus
(1) The main bus is a wire harness between the two terminating resistors on the bus. This is the
main bus in the CAN communication system.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YDW0B4X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Branch
(1) The branch is a wire harness which diverges from the main bus to an ECU or sensor.
(c) Terminating resistors
(1) Two resistors of 120 are installed in parallel across the ends of the CAN main bus lines. They
are called terminating resistors. These resistors allow the changes of the voltage differential
between the CAN bus lines to be accurately judged. To allow proper function of CAN
communication, it is necessary to have both terminating resistors installed. Since the two
resistors are installed in parallel, this results in a measurement of approximately 60 .
3. ECUS OR SENSORS WHICH COMMUNICATE THROUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

(a) V Bus
(1) Main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
(2) Combination meter assembly
(3) ECM
(4) TCM*
(5) Skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly)
(6) Steering angle sensor (spiral cable sub-assembly)
(7) Power steering ECU assembly
(8) Air bag ECU assembly
* : for Automatic Transmission System
4. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
(a) The V bus has termination circuits with two resistors of 120 .
5. TROUBLESHOOTING REMARKS
(a) DTCs for the CAN communication system can be checked using the Techstream. The DLC3 is
connected to the CAN communication system, but no DTCs exist regarding problems in the DLC3 or
the DLC3 branch lines. If there is any trouble in the DLC3 or the DLC3 branch lines, ECUs on the
CAN cannot output DTCs to the Techstream.
(b) Troubles in the CAN V bus (communication lines) can be checked by measuring the resistance
between the terminals of the DLC3. However, an open circuit in a branch line other than the DLC3
branch lines cannot be checked from the DLC3 (except branch line of the DLC3).
NOTICE:
Do not insert the tester probes directly into the DLC3. Be sure to use service wires.
6. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES FOR CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

HINT:
See Diagnosis System
7. HOW TO DISTINGUISH CONNECTOR OF CAN JUNCTION CONNECTOR

(a) In the CAN communication system, the shape of the connectors connected to the CAN junction
connector which has an earth terminal is the same. The connectors connected to the CAN junction
connector can be distinguished by the colors of the bus lines and the connecting side of the
junction connector.
2/3
8/6/12
HINT:
See Terminals of ECU for bus line color or the shape of connecting surface
3/3
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002DX504TX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. OVERALL CAN BUS DIAGRAM
(a) Control system CAN is composed of 1 bus.
*1
*3
*5
*7
V Bus
ECM
(for V Bus)
Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)
(for V Bus)
Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Subassembly)
*2
*4
*6
*8
(for V Bus)
*9
*11
Air Bag ECU Assembly

(for V Bus)
Power Steering ECU Assembly
(for V Bus)
*10
V Bus Terminating Resistor

Combination Meter Assembly
(for V Bus)
DLC3
(for V Bus)
PSP (Option Connector)
(for V Bus)
TCM
(for V Bus)
Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator

*12 Assembly)
(for V Bus)
2. V BUS
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002DX504TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
2/3
8/6/12
HINT:
The CAN communication system connects to other networks via ECUs that function as a gateway
.
3/3
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XVK0AOX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
NOTICE:
.
Turn the ignition switch off before measuring the resistances between CAN main bus lines and
between CAN branch lines.
Turn the ignition switch off before inspecting CAN bus lines for a ground short.
Before measuring the resistance, leave the vehicle as is for at least 1 minute and do not operate
the ignition switch, any other switches or the doors. If any doors need to be opened in order to
check connectors, open the doors and leave them open.
This section describes the standard values for all CAN related components.
HINT:
Operating the ignition switch, any other switches or a door triggers the related ECU and sensor
malfunction.
1. CAN NO. 1 JUNCTION CONNECTOR

(a) Check the CAN No. 1 junction connector.
HINT:
The following tables contain information about the items and buses connected via junction
connectors. The junction connector may be used for multiple separate buses. In this case, the name
of the bus will be shown below the name of the item that terminals are connected to. The bus name
will be shown in brackets (example: (for V bus)).
(1) Connection diagram
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XVK0AOX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/16
8/6/12
*a
*c
*e
*b

(for V bus)
*d
(for V bus)
to TCM
(for V bus)*
(for V bus)
-
(2) Check the connection diagram of the components which are connected to the CAN No. 1
junction connector.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING COLOR
CONNECTED TO
A17-5
B-W
TCM
A17-16
(for V bus)*
A17-6
BR
Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly)
A17-17
B-R
(for V bus)
A17-7
W-B
CAN No. 2 Junction Connector
A17-18
R-Y
(for V bus)
A17-8
Power Steering ECU Assembly
A17-19
(for V bus)
* : for Automatic Transmission System
2. CAN NO. 2 JUNCTION CONNECTOR

(a) Check the CAN No. 2 junction connector.
(1) Connection diagram
2/16
8/6/12
*a
*c
*e
*g
*i

(for V bus)
to DLC3
*b
*d
*f
(for V bus)
(for V bus)
to ECM
*h
(for V bus)

(for V bus)
(for V bus)
(for V bus)
(for V bus)
-
(2) Check the connection diagram of the components which are connected to the CAN No. 2
junction connector.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING COLOR
CONNECTED TO
D43-1
W-B
CAN No. 1 Junction Connector
D43-12
R-Y
(for V bus)
D43-2
BR
D43-13
BR-W
(for V bus)
D43-3
D43-14
LG
(for V bus)
D43-5
B-Y
DLC3
D43-16
LG
(for V bus)
D43-6
G-W
Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)
D43-17
(for V bus)
D43-7
PSP (Option Connector)
3/16
8/6/12
D43-18
(for V bus)
D43-8
P-L
Air Bag ECU Assembly
D43-19
R-W
(for V bus)
D43-9
ECM
D43-20
B-P
(for V bus)
3. DLC3
table below.
*a
DLC3
TERMINAL WIRING
NO.
TERMINAL
CONDITION
COLOR DESCRIPTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
(SYMBOL)
D10-6
HIGH-level
(CANH) -
B-Y -
CAN bus line -
D10-14
LG
LOW-level
(CANL)
CAN bus line
(CANH) -
B-Y - B-
D10-4
(CG)
(-) battery
terminal
HIGH-level
disconnected
CAN bus line - from negative

Ground
(-) battery
200 or
higher
Cable
LG - B-
D10-4
(CG)
LOW-level
disconnected

Ground
(-) battery
200 or
higher
terminal
D10-6
(CANH) -
B-Y -
D10-16
W-B
(BAT)
(BAT)
57 to 63
terminal
D10-14
(CANL) -
D10-16
disconnected
from negative
Cable
D10-6
D10-14
(CANL) -
Cable
HIGH-level
CAN bus line Battery
positive (+)
LOW-level
LG - W- CAN bus line B
Battery
positive (+)
Cable
disconnected
from negative
(-) battery
6 k or
higher
terminal
Cable
disconnected
from negative
(-) battery
terminal
6 k or
higher
4/16
8/6/12
4. ECM
*a
(ECM)

*a

(to ECM)
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
5/16
8/6/12
A33-19 (CANH) -
O - B-P
A33-18 (CANL)
A33-19 (CANH) -
HIGH-level CAN bus line -
114 to 126
LOW-level CAN bus line
200 or
Ground
higher
A36-4 (E01)
O - B-L
A33-18 (CANL) -
B-P - B-
LOW-level CAN bus line -
200 or
A36-4 (E01)
Ground
higher
6 k or
Battery positive (+)
higher
6 k or
higher
A33-19 (CANH) A33-2 (BATT)

A33-18 (CANL) A33-2 (BATT)
O-W
B-P - W
5. TCM (for Automatic Transmission System)
*a

(TCM)
(a) Disconnect the A18 TCM connector.

Front view of wire harness
*a connector
(to TCM)
6/16
8/6/12
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
CONDITION
A18-29 (CANH) A18-28 (CANL)
B-W - L
A18-29 (CANH) A18-3 (E02)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
HIGH-level CAN bus line LOW-level CAN bus line

57 to 63
B-W - BY
HIGH-level CAN bus line Ground

200 or
higher
A18-28 (CANL) A18-3 (E02)
L - B-Y
LOW-level CAN bus line Ground

200 or
higher
A18-29 (CANH) A18-26 (BM)
B-W - YR
HIGH-level CAN bus line Battery positive (+)

6 k or
higher
A18-28 (CANL) A18-26 (BM)
L - Y-R
LOW-level CAN bus line Battery positive (+)

6 k or
higher
6. POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
*a

(Power Steering ECU Assembly)
7/16
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the A14 and A15 power steering ECU

*a

TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
A15-1 (CANH) A15-7 (CANL)
B-W
A15-1 (CANH) A14-2 (PGND)

A15-7 (CANL) A14-2 (PGND)
A15-1 (CANH) A14-1 (PIG)
A15-7 (CANL) A14-1 (PIG)
B-B
W -B
B-W
W -W
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION

57 to 63
200 or
Ground
higher
200 or
Ground
higher
6 k or
higher
6 k or
higher
7. COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
8/16
8/6/12
*a
(Combination Meter Assembly)
(a) Disconnect the D7 combination meter assembly

connector.
*a

TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
CONDITION
D7-6 (CANH) -
BR - BR-
D7-7 (CANL)
200 or
Ground
higher
D7-6 (CANH) D7-20 (ES1)
BR - B-Y
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
D7-7 (CANL) -
BR-W -
200 or
D7-20 (ES1)
B-Y
Ground
higher
D7-6 (CANH) D7-1 (B
BR - RW

6 k or
higher
D7-7 (CANL) D7-1 (B
BR-W R-W

6 k or
higher
8. INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY AND MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
9/16
8/6/12
GATEWAY ECU)
*a

*b

(Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))
10/16
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway

ECU) connector.
*1 DLC3
*a

(to Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
D5-14 (CANH) D5-13 (CANL)
D5-14 (CANH) D10-4 (CG)
D5-13 (CANL) D10-4 (CG)
D5-14 (CANH) D10-16 (BAT)
D5-13 (CANL) D10-16 (BAT)
WIRING
COLOR
P - LG
P - B-Y
LG - B-Y
P - W-B
LG - WB
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
200 or
Ground
higher
200 or
Ground
higher
6 k or
higher

6 k or
higher
9. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY)
11/16
8/6/12
*a
(Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly))
(a) Disconnect the D56 steering angle sensor (spiral cable

sub-assembly) connector.
*1 DLC3
*a

TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
CONDITION
D56-3 (CANH) D56-2 (CANL)
G-W - G

57 to 63
D56-3 (CANH) D10-4 (CG)
G-W - BY

200 or
higher
D56-2 (CANL) D10-4 (CG)
G - B-Y

200 or
higher
D56-3 (CANH) D10-16 (BAT)
G-W W-B

6 k or
higher
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
12/16
8/6/12
D56-2 (CANL) D10-16 (BAT)
G - W-B

6 k or
higher
10. PSP (OPTION CONNECTOR)

*1
*a
DLC3
(to PSP (Option Connector))

table below.
TERMINAL WIRING
TERMINAL
NO.
COLOR DESCRIPTION
(SYMBOL)
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
P -L
Cable
HIGH-level
disconnected
CAN bus line from negative
LOW-level
(-) battery
CAN bus line
terminal
57 to 63
P - B-Y
Cable
HIGH-level
disconnected
Ground
(-) battery
terminal
200 or
higher
D29-5
(CANL) D10-4
(CG)
L - B-Y
Cable
LOW-level
disconnected
Ground
(-) battery
terminal
200 or
higher
D29-4
(CANH) D10-16
(BAT)
Cable
HIGH-level
disconnected
CAN bus line P - W-B
from negative
Battery
(-) battery
positive (+)
terminal
6 k or
higher
D29-5
(CANL) D10-16
(BAT)
Cable
LOW-level
disconnected
CAN bus line L - W-B
from negative
Battery
(-) battery
positive (+)
terminal
6 k or
higher
D29-4
(CANH) D29-5
(CANL)
D29-4
(CANH) D10-4
(CG)
13/16
8/6/12
11. AIR BAG ECU ASSEMBLY
*a
(Air Bag ECU Assembly)
(a) Disconnect the D27 air bag ECU assembly connector.

*1
*a
DLC3
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
CONDITION
D27-13 (CANH) -
P-L - R-
D27-22 (CANL)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
57 to 63
14/16
8/6/12
D27-13 (CANH) D10-4 (CG)
P-L - BY

200 or
higher
D27-22 (CANL) D10-4 (CG)
R-W - BY

200 or
higher
D27-13 (CANH) D10-16 (BAT)
P-L - WB

6 k or
higher
D27-22 (CANL) D10-16 (BAT)
R-W W-B

6 k or
higher
12. SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
*a
(Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly))
(a) Disconnect the A5 skid control ECU (brake actuator

*a

TERMINAL NO.
WIRING
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
A5-26 (CANH) A5-14 (CANL)
BR - B-R

114 to 126
A5-26 (CANH) A5-13 (GND2)
BR - B

200 or
higher
CONDITION
15/16
8/6/12
A5-14 (CANL) A5-13 (GND2)

A5-26 (CANH) A5-1 (+BM)
A5-14 (CAN_L) A5-1 (+BM)
B-R - B
BR - W
B-R - W
200 or
Ground
higher
6 k or
higher

6 k or
higher
16/16
8/6/12
NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Transmission Control ECU Communication Stop Mode (
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WIP0B7X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Transmission Control ECU Communication Stop
Mode (2013 FR-S)
Transmission Control ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION ITEM
SYMPTOM

Transmission
Control ECU
Communication
Stop Mode
"TCM" is not displayed on the "CAN Bus Check"

screen of the Techstream
U) that are output correspond to "Transmission
Control ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC
Combination Table"
TROUBLE AREA
TCM branch
line or
connector
Power
source
circuit of
TCM
Transmission
control ECU
assembly
ground
circuit
TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
output again.
HINT:
2/5
8/6/12
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (TCM BRANCH LINE)
(b) Disconnect the A18 TCM connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A18-29 (CANH) - A18-28
(CANL)
terminal
57 to 63
*a

(to TCM)
NG

CONNECTOR (TCM)
OK
2.
3/5
8/6/12
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1
terminal
A18-33 (E01) - Body
ground
terminal
Below 1
*a

(to TCM)
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A18-26 (BM) - Body ground
Ignition switch off
11 to 14 V
A18-34 (IG1) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
A18-35 (IG2) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
4/5
8/6/12
*a

(to TCM)
NG
OK
REPLACE TCM
5/5
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: B2321,B2325: Lost Communication with Driver Door Po
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002S8B02AX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: B2321,B2325: Lost Communication with Driver Door
Power Window ECU (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B2321
Lost Communication with Driver Door Power Window ECU
DTC
B2325
LIN Communication Bus Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
B2321 is stored when the communication between the power window regulator master switch assembly
and the main body ECU (network gateway computer) stops for 10 seconds or more.
The main body ECU (network gateway computer) monitors communication between all the ECUs
connected to the door LIN bus. When the main body ECU (network gateway computer) detects errors in
communication with all the ECUs connected to the door LIN bus at 2.6-second intervals and 3 times in a
row, DTC B2325 will be stored.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Lost communication between the multiplex network master switch

assembly and the main body ECU (network gateway computer).
Power window
regulator master
switch assembly
Main body ECU
(network
gateway ECU)
Harness or
connector
The main body ECU (network gateway computer) detects errors in

B2325 door LIN bus communication lines at 2.6-second intervals and 3
times in a row.
Power window
regulator master
switch assembly
Main body ECU
(network
gateway ECU)
Harness or
connector
B2321
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002S8B02AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
When using the Techstream with the ignition switch off to troubleshoot:
Connect the Techstream to the vehicle and turn a courtesy light switch on and off at 1.5
second intervals until communication between the Techstream and vehicle begins.
procedure.
HINT:
When communication between the power window regulator master switch assembly and the main
body ECU (network gateway ECU) stops, DTC B2325 is also stored.
PROCEDURE
1.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B2321 or B2325 is output
DTC B2321 or B235 is not output
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU) POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
2/4
8/6/12
(b) Disconnect the E8 power window regulator master switch assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D5-4 (LIN) - E8-11 (LIN)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D5-4 (LIN) or E8-11 (LIN) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-5 (GND) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-12 (+B) - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Power Window Regulator Master Switch Assembly)
3/4
8/6/12
NG

OK
5.
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Temporarily replace the power window regulator master switch assembly with a new or normally
functioning one
.
NEXT
6.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
7.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC B2321 or B2325 is not output.
NG

GATEWAY ECU)
OK
END (POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER

SWITCH ASSEMBLY WAS DEFECTIVE)
4/4
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003YZK012X
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)

DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
B2321
Lost Communication with Driver Door Power Window ECU
B2325
LIN Communication Bus Malfunction
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YZK012X.html?sisuffix=ff
SEE PAGE
1/1
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002S8D02IX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / (desired system) / DTC.
(e) Read the DTCs.
2. CLEAR DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / (desired system) / DTC.
(e) Clear the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002S8D02IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 F
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XHI066X
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013
FR-S)

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the LIN communication system.
1.
NEXT
2.
Preconceptions should be discarded in order to make an accurate judgment. To clearly
understand what the problem symptoms are, it is extremely important to ask the customer
about the problem and the conditions at the time when the malfunction occurred.
Gather as much information as possible for reference. Past problems that seem unrelated may
also help in some cases.
The following 5 items are important points in problem analysis:
What
When
Where
Road conditions
How did it happen?
Problem symptoms
NEXT
3.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XHI066X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
(a) Measure the battery voltage with the ignition switch off.
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
4.
CHECK COMMUNICATION FUNCTION OF LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*
(a) Using the Techstream, inspect the LIN communication function to ensure there are no
malfunctions in the communication system
.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
GO TO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
5.
(a) Terminals of ECU
NEXT
6.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
2/3
8/6/12
7.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
3/3
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XHK044X
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XHK044X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XHK044X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XHH05AX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
cable from the battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable from
the battery terminal notice before proceeding with work
.
1. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING TECHSTREAM

(a) When using the Techstream to troubleshoot with the ignition switch off:
Connect the Techstream to the DLC3, and turn the courtesy light switch on and off at 1.5-second
intervals until communication between the Techstream and vehicle begins.
(b) After all DTCs are cleared, check if the trouble occurs again 6 seconds after the ignition switch to
ON.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XHH05AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XHQ04KX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The LIN communication system is used for the communication between the components in the tables
below. If the communication cannot be performed through the LIN communication because of an open in
the communication lines or other reasons, the master control ECU of the relevant system will store a
DTC. Refer to the table below about the communication bus lines and connected components.
HINT:
Each component has a fail-safe function which activates to maintain the minimum performance of
the system and protect the system.
In the following table, "" indicates that the function applies, and "-" indicates that it does not.
Door Bus Lines
COMPONENT
MASTER
CONTROL
LIN COMMUNICATION DTC OUTPUT

FUNCTION
Power Window Regulator Master Switch

Assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XHQ04KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XHT04LX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. DOOR BUS LINES
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XHT04LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XHL04RX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY AND MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XHL04RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(a) Remove the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) from the instrument panel junction block
assembly
(b) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
2/3
8/6/12
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING COLOR
TERMINAL
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
CONDITION
None - Body
ground
Battery power
supply
Always
11 to 14 V
None - Body
Battery power
Ignition switch
ground
supply
ON
Ground
Always
Below 1
Battery power
supply
Always
11 to 14 V
(SYMBOL)
MB-1 (BECU) - Body
ground
MB-8 (IG) - Body ground
MB-11 (GND) - Body
None - Body
ground
ground
MB-32 (BMPX) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
11 to 14 V
If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction in the wire harness.
(c) Install the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) onto the instrument panel junction block
assembly.
(d) Measure the pulses according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING
TERMINAL
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
CONDITION
D5-4 (LIN) - D6-1

(GND)
LG - B
LIN Communication
line
Ignition switch ON
Pulse generation
If the result is not as specified, the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) or instrument panel
junction block assembly may have a malfunction.
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the E8 power window regulator master switch assembly connector.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING COLOR
TERMINAL
CONDITION
DESCRIPTION
(SYMBOL)
E8-5 (GND) - Body
ground
B - Body ground
E8-12 (+B) - Body
SB - Body
ground
ground
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Ground
Always
Below 1
Battery power supply
Always
11 to 14 V
3/3
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003QMR00BX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QMR00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003QRB00BX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
(a) Check the resistance of the battery negative terminal.

(1) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 (VIN) - 3 (GND)
Always
3 to 10 k
1 (VIN) - 4 (IB)
Always
Below 0.5 k
3 (GND) - 4 (IB)
Always
3 to 10 k
If the result is not as specified, replace the battery negative terminal.

*a

(Battery Negative Terminal)
(b) Check the resistance of the battery negative terminal.

the table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
2 (THB) - 3 (GND)
CONDITION
20C (68F) to 30C

(86F)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QRB00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
1.5 to 2.6 k
1/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
If the result is not as specified, replace the battery

negative terminal.
*a

(Battery Negative Terminal)
*b
[k]
*c
[C (F)]
HINT:
The "Condition" indicates the temperature in the vicinity of
the sensor, not of the actual sensor itself.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QRB00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003QMQ00BX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
(a) Install the battery negative terminal.
(b) Tighten the nut.
(c) Connect the engine wire with the nut.
(d) Connect the connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QMQ00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003QMS00BX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
HINT:
from the negative (-) battery terminal notices before proceeding with the work
2. REMOVE BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
(b) Remove the nut and disconnect the engine wire.

NOTICE:
Since this operation may damage the molding, make
sure to fully open the driver and passenger side door
windows.
*1
Engine Wire
(c) Loosen the nut and remove the battery negative

terminal.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QMS00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QMS00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1010: BIU System Error (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002MQ300VX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1010: BIU System Error (2013 FRS)
DTC
B1010
BIU System Error
DESCRIPTION
B1010 is stored when there is an internal malfunction in the Main body ECU (network gateway
ECU).
DTC
NO.
B1010
Main body ECU (network gateway ECU) internal

error
TROUBLE AREA

ECU)
PROCEDURE
1.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1010 is output
DTC is not output
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002MQ300VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1010: BIU System Error (2013 FR-S)
REPLACE MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY

ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002MQ300VX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1011: Battery Power Supply Control Ci
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002MQ300WX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1011: Battery Power Supply
Control Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1011
Battery Power Supply Control Circuit
DESCRIPTION
B1011 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the BMPX circuit.
HINT:
In some cases, none of the functions of the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) may function
when B1012 is stored together with B1011.
DTC
NO.
B1011
When BMPX voltage is 8.3 V or less, or 16.7 V or more

(BMPX circuit malfunction)
TROUBLE AREA

gateway ECU)
Instrument panel junction
block assembly
Harness or connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002MQ300WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
2/5
8/6/12
DTC B1011 is output
DTC is not output
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BMPX VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the 3C instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage :
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3C-19 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECU GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D6 and A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(b) Disconnect the 3B instrument panel junction block assembly connector.
Standard Resistance :
3/5
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
A73-4 (GND) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
3B-18 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5.
INSPECT INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the instrument panel junction block assembly
(b) Remove the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) from the instrument panel junction block
assembly.
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3C-19 - MB-32 (BMPX)
Always
Below 1
4/5
8/6/12
3B-18 - MB-11 (GND)
Always
Below 1
NG

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
5/5
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1012: Battery Power Supply Back Up
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002MQ300XX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1012: Battery Power Supply Back
Up Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1012
Battery Power Supply Back Up Circuit
DESCRIPTION
B1012 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the BECU circuit.
HINT:
In some cases, none of the functions of the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) may
function when B1011 is stored together with B1012.
DTC
NO.
B1012
When BECU voltage is 8.3 V or less, or 16.7 V or more

(BECU circuit malfunction)
TROUBLE AREA

gateway ECU)
block assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002MQ300XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
2/4
8/6/12
DTC B1012 is output
DTC is not output
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BECU VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the 3A instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3A-27 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECU GROUND)
NG

CONNECTOR
3/4
8/6/12
OK
5.
assembly.
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3A-27 - MB-1 (BECU)
Always
Below 1
3B-18 - MB-11 (GND)
Always
Below 1
NG
OK
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
GATEWAY ECU)
4/4
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1013: IG Power Supply Circuit (2013 F
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002MQ300YX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1013: IG Power Supply Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1013
IG Power Supply Circuit
DESCRIPTION
B1013 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the IG circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1013
When IG voltage is 8.3 V or less, or 16.7 V or more (IG

circuit malfunction)
TROUBLE AREA

gateway ECU)
block assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002MQ300YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1013 is output
DTC is not output
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the 3A and 3E instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
2/5
8/6/12
TESTER
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONNECTION
CONDITION
3A-15 - Body
ground
Ignition switch
ON
11 to 14 V
3E-1 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D6 and A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(b) Disconnect the 3A and 3B instrument panel junction block assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
3A-12 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
3A-13 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
3B-18 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3/5
8/6/12
5.
assembly.
*a
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
3E-1 - MB-8 (IG)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
No battery voltage is applied across terminals 3A-15 and

3A-12
10 k or higher
3E-1 - MB-8 (IG)
Battery voltage is applied across terminals 3A-15 and 3A12
Below 1
3B-18 - MB-11
(GND)
Always
Below 1
NG

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4/5
8/6/12
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
5/5
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1014: ACC Power Supply Circuit (201
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002MQ300ZX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1014: ACC Power Supply Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1014
ACC Power Supply Circuit
DESCRIPTION
B1014 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the ACC circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1014
When ACC voltage is 8.3 V or less, or 16.7 V or more

(ACC circuit malfunction)
TROUBLE AREA

gateway ECU)
block assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002MQ300ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1014 is output
DTC is not output
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the 3A and 3E instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
2/4
8/6/12
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3A-20 - Body
ground
Ignition switch
ACC
11 to 14 V
3E-1 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (GROUND)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5.
assembly.
3/4
8/6/12
*a
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
3E-1 - MB-9 (ACC)
3E-1 - MB-9 (ACC)

3B-18 - MB-11
(GND)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
No battery voltage is applied across terminals 3A-20 and

3A-12
Battery voltage is applied across terminals 3A-20 and 3A12
Always
10 k or higher
Below 1
Below 1
NG
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4/4
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000CCZ0BNX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FRS)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Data List.
Main Body (Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL
CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Battery Power Supply Control

Voltage

control voltage/
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 21.4 V
11 to 14 V
Battery Power Supply Back Up

Voltage
Battery power supply back

up voltage/
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 21.4 V
11 to 14 V
IG power supply voltage/

Min.: 0 V, Max.: 21.4 V
11 to 14 V
ACC voltage/
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 21.4 V
11 to 14 V
IG Power Supply Voltage
ACC Voltage
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000CCZ0BNX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MXP02LX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
(2013 FR-S)

DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
B1010
BIU System Error
B1011
Battery Power Supply Control Circuit
B1012
Battery Power Supply Back Up Circuit
B1013
IG Power Supply Circuit
B1014
ACC Power Supply Circuit
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MXP02LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE PAGE
1/1
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PDK0XLX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Trouble Codes.
(e) Check for DTCs.
2. CLEAR DTC
(e) Clear the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PDK0XLX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESH
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKJ0E8X
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
CHECK COMMUNICATION FUNCTION OF CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN DTC is output
Go to CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKJ0E8X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
4.
CHECK FOR DTC*
(a) Check for DTCs
(b) Clear the DTCs
(c) Recheck for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC output does not reoccur
DTC output reoccurs
Go to DTC CHART
5.
(b) Data List / Active Test
NEXT
6.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
2/3
8/6/12
7.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
3/3
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003HIV00QX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003HIV00QX.html?locale=en
1/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003HIV00QX.html?locale=en
2/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003HIX016X
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003HIX016X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001H7X00KX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001H7X00KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
HINT:
2/4
8/6/12
With the connectors connected, inspect from the rear side of the connectors.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING COLOR
(SYMBOL)
3A-15 - Body ground
W - Body
ground
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
IG power supply
CONDITION
Ignition switch
ON
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
11 to 14V
3A-20 - Body ground
SB - Body
ground
ACC power supply
Ignition switch
ACC
11 to 14V
3A-27 - Body ground
G-R - Body
ground
Battery power
supply
Always
11 to 14V
L-R - Body
Battery power
ground
supply
Always
11 to 14V
3E-1 - Body ground
B-R - Body
ground
Battery power
supply
Always
11 to 14V
3A-12 - Body ground
B - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
3C-19 - Body ground
3A-13 - Body ground
3B-18 - Body ground
B - Body
ground
B-Y - Body
ground
D6-1 (GND) - Body

ground
B - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
A73-4 (GND) - Body

ground
B-Y - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
assembly.
(c) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
MB-1 (BECU) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
Battery power supply back

up voltage
Always
MB-8 (IG) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
IG power supply
Ignition switch
11 to 14V
ON
MB-9 (ACC) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
ACC power supply
Ignition switch
11 to 14V
ACC
MB-32 (BMPX) - Body
None - Body
Battery power supply control
ground
ground
voltage
MB-11 (GND) - Body
None - Body
ground
ground
Ground
11 to 14V
Always
11 to 14V
Always
Below 1
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003TOD00CX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003TOD00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003TOD00CX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003TOC00EX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NETWORK GATEWAY ECU
NOTICE:
Prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the engagement, connector or terminals.
Do not touch the network gateway ECU connector terminals.
(a) Make the network gateway ECU guide to contact the
housing side wall.
HINT:
The angle between the junction block and the network
gateway ECU guide should be 20 or more.
*a
Housing Side Wall
*b
Guide
*c
20 or more
(b) While aligning the guide with the housing side wall, slide
the network gateway ECU toward the fuse area of the
instrument panel junction block assembly and engage the
2 guides.
*a
Hosing Side Wall
*b
Fuse Area
(c) Slide the network gateway ECU until it contacts the A

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003TOC00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
surface.
(d) Rotate the network gateway ECU while holding it against the instrument panel junction block
assembly surface (axis of rotation).
NOTICE:
Slide gently the network gateway ECU.
Do not apply strong impact to the side of the network gateway ECU.
*a
A surface
(e) Rotate the network gateway ECU until it engages with the lock to install it.
NOTICE:
When pressing the network gateway ECU, press the push area as shown in the illustration.
A lock sound will be heard when the network gateway ECU is engaged.
Do not hit or weight the network gateway ECU when it engages with the instrument panel
junction block assembly.
HINT:
If a lock sound is not heard, visually check the lock engagement. Check that the height of the
network gateway ECU and instrument panel junction block assembly match.
*1
Network Gateway ECU
*2
Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly
2/4
8/6/12
Push Area
(a) Connect the connector as shown in the illustration.
(b) Slide the lever as indicated by the arrow shown in the

illustration.
*1
Lever
(c) Connect the connector indicated as shown in the

illustration.
(d) Install the instrument panel junction block assembly with the bolt and the nut.
(e) Connect 6 connectors to the instrument panel junction block assembly.
3/4
8/6/12
(f) Connect the 3 connectors to the power steering ECU

assembly.
(g) Connect the connector to the power steering ECU assembly.

(1) As shown in the illustration, return the lock lever to its original position to connect the
connector and securely push in the lock of the lock lever.
(h) Engage the clamp.
*a
Return the lock lever
*b
Push the lock

5. PERFORM INITIALIZATION
4/4
8/6/12
POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003TOE00EX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Disengage the clamp.
(b) Disconnect the connector from the power steering ECU assembly.
(1) As shown in the illustration, pull out the lock of the lock lever and turn the lock lever to
disconnect the connector.
*a
Pull out the lock
*b
Turn the lock lever
(c) Disconnect the 3 connectors from the power steering ECU.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003TOE00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
(d) Disconnect the 6 front side connectors from the

instrument panel junction block assembly indicated as
(e) Remove the bolt, nut and the instrument panel junction
block assembly.
(f) Disconnect the connector indicated as shown in the

illustration.
(g) Disengage the claw and slide the lever upwards.

*1
Lever
2/4
8/6/12
(h) Disconnect the connector indicated as shown in the

illustration.
(i) Remove the instrument panel junction block assembly.
4. REMOVE NETWORK GATEWAY ECU
(a) Press the claw on the instrument panel junction block assembly side, as shown in the illustration
to release the lock.
(b) With the instrument panel junction block assembly side, insert the screwdriver with its tip
wrapped in protective tape between the network gateway ECU and the instrument panel junction
block assembly.
NOTICE:
Use a blade screwdriver with a diameter of 5.0 to 6.3 mm (0.197 to 0.248 in.),and with a length
of 90mm (3.543 in.) or longer.
*1
Protective Tape
(c) Using the screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective
tape, carefully raise the network gateway ECU until the
connector becomes disengaged.
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not twist the screwdriver to raise the network
gateway ECU.
If any terminals of the connectors, locking parts or cases
are deformed or damaged, replace the instrument panel
3/4
8/6/12
junction block assembly or the network gateway ECU.
(d) Raise the network gateway ECU as shown by arrow 1,

and then pull it out as shown by arrow 2 in the
illustration.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the network gateway ECU connector
terminals.
4/4
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XN502YX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XN502YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XN404SX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
Be sure to read Precaution thoroughly before servicing
2. INSTALL POWER STEERING ECU BRACKET

(a) Install the power steering ECU bracket with 4 screws.
3. INSTALL POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the power steering ECU assembly with the 2 bolts.
(b) Engage the clamp.
(c) Connect the 3 connectors to the power steering ECU assembly.
(d) Connect the connector to the power steering ECU

assembly.
(1) As shown in the illustration, return the lock lever to its
original position to connect the connector and securely
push in the lock of the lock lever.
*a
*b
Push the lock
(e) Engage the clamp.
5. INITIALIZE ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR AND CALIBRATE TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XN404SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XN604SX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
3. REMOVE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
(b) Disconnect the connector from the power steering ECU assembly.
(1) As shown in the illustration, pull out the lock of the lock lever and turn the lock lever to
*a
Pull out the lock
*b
Turn the lock lever
(c) Disconnect the 3 connectors from the power steering ECU assembly.
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(d) Disengage the clamp.
(e) Remove the 2 bolts and power steering ECU assembly.
4. REMOVE POWER STEERING ECU BRACKET
(a) Remove the 4 screws and power steering ECU bracket.
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1511-C1514,C1517: Torque Sensor Circuit M
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277F040X
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1511-C1514,C1517: Torque Sensor Circuit
Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC
C1511
Torque Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC
C1512
DTC
C1513
DTC
C1514
Torque Sensor Power Supply Abnormal
DTC
C1517
Torque Hold Abnormal
DESCRIPTION
The torque sensor converts the rotation torque input to the steering wheel into an electrical signal and
sends it to the power steering ECU assembly. Based on this signal, the ECU detects steering effort.
DTC
CODE
TROUBLE AREA
C1511 A torque sensor (TRQ1) signal error or stop

C1512 A torque sensor (TRQ2) signal error or stop
The deviation between torque sensor TRQ1 and TRQ2
C1513
exceeds a specified value.
C1514 A torque sensor power supply voltage error
C1517
Steering column
assembly (torque
sensor)
Power steering ECU
assembly
Temporary control due to a malfunction related to the

torque sensor continues for long time.
WIRING DIAGRAM
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
If the power steering ECU assembly or steering column assembly is replaced, perform rotation
angle sensor initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (TORQUE SENSOR - POWER STEERING

ECU ASSEMBLY)
(a) Check the connection condition of the z2 torque sensor

connector.
OK:
Torque sensor connector is securely connected to the
power steering ECU assembly.
*a

NG
CONNECT CONNECTOR SECURELY
2/4
8/6/12
OK
2.
CHECK POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY (TRQV VOLTAGE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
z2-9 (TRQV) - z2-11

(TRQG)
SWITCH
CONDITION
Ignition switch
ON
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
4.5 to 5.5 V
HINT:
When the value is within the specified range, record the
value.
*a

NG
OK
3.
CHECK POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY (TRQ1, TRQ2 VOLTAGE)
3/4
8/6/12
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Engine running, steering wheel not turned (without load) 2.3 to 2.7 V
z2-8 (TRQ1) - z2-11
(TRQG)
Engine running, steering wheel turned to right with

vehicle stopped
Engine running, steering wheel turned to left with vehicle
stopped
2.3 to 3.8 V
1.2 to 2.7 V
Engine running, steering wheel not turned (without load) 2.3 to 2.7 V
z2-10 (TRQ2) - z2-11
(TRQG)
Engine running, steering wheel turned to right with

vehicle stopped
Engine running, steering wheel turned to left with vehicle
stopped
1.2 to 2.7 V
2.3 to 3.8 V
(c) Calculate the difference between the value recorded when measuring the voltage at terminal
TRQV in the previous step, and the sum of the output of torque sensor 1 and torque sensor 2.
OK:
0.3 V or less (Absolute value)
*a

NG
REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
OK
4/4
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1515,C1525: Torque Sensor Zero Point Adju
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277G03MX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1515,C1525: Torque Sensor Zero Point
Adjustment Undone (2013 FR-S)
DTC
C1515
Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment Undone
DTC
C1525
Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization Undone
DESCRIPTION
These DTCs do not indicate a malfunction. The power steering ECU assembly stores these DTCs when it
determines that the rotation angle sensor value initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration
have not been performed.
DTC
CODE
TROUBLE AREA
Torque sensor zero point

C1515 calibration has not been
performed.
There is no malfunction if this DTC is not output again after

performing torque sensor zero point calibration.
Rotation angle sensor value

C1525 initialization has not been
performed.
There is no malfunction if this DTC is not output again after

performing rotation angle sensor value initialization.
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
INITIALIZE ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR AND CALIBRATE TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT
(a) Initialize the rotation angle sensor and calibrate the torque sensor zero point
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
1/3
8/6/12
(a) Check for DTCs
NOTICE:
If DTC C1515 or C1525 is output even though the rotation angle sensor value initialization and
torque sensor zero point calibration have been performed, check the procedure again, and
perform calibration and initialization 3 times.
Result
CONDITION
PROCEED
TO
DTC C1515 or C1525 is still output after performing rotation angle sensor initialization and
torque sensor zero point calibration 3 times.
DTC C1515 or C1525 is not output.
END
3.
(a) Replace the power steering ECU assembly
NEXT
4.
NEXT
5.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
2/3
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Result
CONDITION
PROCEED
TO
A
B
END
3/3
8/6/12
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000027BY03IX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1516,C1526: Torque Sensor Zero Point
Adjustment Incomplete (2013 FR-S)
DTC
C1516
Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment Incomplete
DTC
C1526
Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization Incomplete
DESCRIPTION
These DTCs do not indicate a malfunction. The power steering ECU assembly stores these DTCs when it
determines that the rotation angle sensor value initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration
are incomplete.
DTC
CODE
TROUBLE AREA
Torque sensor zero point calibration

is incomplete due to the steering
C1516
wheel being touched during
calibration.
There is no malfunction if this DTC is not output again

after clearing the DTC and torque sensor calibration
value, and performing zero point calibration.
Rotation angle sensor value

initialization is incomplete due to the
C1526
steering wheel being touched during
calibration.
There is no malfunction if this DTC is not output again

after clearing the DTC and torque sensor calibration
value, and performing rotation angle sensor value
initialization.
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTC(s)
NEXT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000027BY03IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
2.
NEXT
3.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
NOTICE:
perform the calibration and initialization 3 times.
Result
CONDITION
PROCEED
TO
END
4.
(a) Replace the power steering ECU assembly
NEXT
5.
CLEAR DTC
2/3
8/6/12
NEXT
6.
NEXT
7.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
NOTICE:
Result
CONDITION
PROCEED
TO
A
B
END
3/3
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1521,C1531-C1534,C1554: Motor Circuit Mal
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000027BZ03OX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1521,C1531-C1534,C1554: Motor Circuit
DTC
C1521
Motor Circuit Malfunction
DTC
C1531
ECU Malfunction
DTC
C1532
ECU Malfunction
DTC
C1533
ECU Malfunction
DTC
C1534
ECU Malfunction
DTC
C1554
Power Supply Relay Failure
DESCRIPTION
If the power steering ECU assembly stores these DTCs, it will shut off the power supply relay circuit (built
into the power steering ECU assembly) and stop power assist. However, power assist continues if DTC
C1533 or C1534 is stored.
DTC
CODE
C1521
Motor overcurrent
C1531
An ECU internal malfunction (CPU malfunction)
C1532
An ECU internal malfunction (peripheral circuit malfunction)
C1533
An ECU internal malfunction (substrate temperature sensor

malfunction)
C1534
An ECU internal malfunction (EEPROM error)
C1554
A power supply relay circuit malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
Power steering ECU

assembly
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000027BZ03OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1521,C1531-C1534,C1554: Motor Circuit Mal
If the power steering ECU assembly is replaced with a new one, perform rotation angle sensor
initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR DTC

(b) Check for DTCs
.
.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output.
DTC is output.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000027BZ03OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1522-C1555: Motor Circuit Malfunction (2013
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277N03JX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1522-C1555: Motor Circuit Malfunction
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
C1522
DTC
C1523
DTC
C1524
DTC
C1555
Motor Relay Welding Failure
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly supplies the current to the power steering motor through the motor
circuit.
DTC
CODE
TROUBLE AREA
C1522 A motor current sensor malfunction

C1523 An excessively large current deviation
C1524
A short or open in the motor circuit or abnormal voltage or

current in the motor circuit
Steering column
assembly
Power steering
ECU assembly
C1555 A motor relay malfunction
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000277N03JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (POWER STEERING MOTOR - POWER

STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY)
(a) Check the connection condition of the z1 power steering

motor connector.
OK:
Power steering motor connector is securely connected and
locked to the power steering ECU assembly.
*a

NG
OK
2/3
8/6/12
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MOTOR VOLTAGE)

(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / EMPS / Data List.
(f) Select the items "Motor Terminal Volt(U)", "Motor Terminal Volt(V)" and "Motor Terminal Volt(W)"
in the Data List and read the value displayed on the Techstream.
EMPS
TESTER
DISPLAY
Motor
Terminal
Volt(U)
Motor
Terminal
Volt(V)
Motor
Terminal
Volt(W)
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
Motor terminal
voltage (U phase)/
Min.: 0.000 V
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Value changes
between 4 and 35 V
The engine is running and the steering

wheel is being turned.
Value changes
between 4 and 35 V

Value changes
between 4 and 35 V

Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal
voltage (V phase)/
Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal
voltage (W phase)/
Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Result
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
During steering operation, value changes between 4 and 35 V.
During steering operation, voltage is not generated or voltage outside specified range is
generated.
3/3
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1528: Motor Rotation Angle Sensor Malfuncti
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277O03JX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1528: Motor Rotation Angle Sensor
DTC
C1528
Motor Rotation Angle Sensor Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The rotation angle sensor detects the motor rotation angle and sends this information to the power
steering ECU assembly.
DTC
CODE
C1528
A rotation angle sensor

malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
Rotation angle sensor (built into steering column

assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
1/3
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR - POWER

STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY)
(a) Check the connection condition of the z2 rotation angle

sensor connector.
OK:
Rotation angle sensor connector is securely connected to
the power steering ECU assembly.
*a

NG
OK
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MOTOR ROTATION ANGLE)

EMPS
TESTER
DISPLAY
Motor
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Motor rotation
angle/
2/3
8/6/12
Rotation
Angle
Min.: 0.000 deg

Max.: 360.000
deg
Motor rotation angle value

changes from 0 to 360
The engine is running and the

steering wheel is being turned.
OK:
During steering operation, motor rotation angle value changes from 0 to 360.
3.
NG
CHECK STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the z2 rotation angle sensor connector from

the power steering ECU assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
z2-14 (RZSN) - z2-7 (RZG)
At 23C (73F)
75.2 to 112.8
z2-5 (RZV) - z2-7 (RZG)
At 23C (73F)
27.6 to 41.4
z2-13 (RZCS) - z2-7 (RZG)
At 23C (73F)
73.6 to 110.4
*a

(to Rotation Angle Sensor)
NG
OK
3/3
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1541: Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction (201
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000027C005LX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1541: Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
C1541
Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly receives vehicle speed signals from the skid control ECU via CAN
communication. The power steering ECU assembly provides appropriate assisting force in accordance
with the vehicle speed, based on the signals.
If the power steering ECU assembly stores this DTC, it adjusts the amount of power assist to the
amount provided for a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and continues the system control.
DTC CODE
C1541
The vehicle speed signals malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
Speed sensor circuit
Skid control ECU
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM)
(a) Check if DTC U0416 is output
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC U0416 is not output.
DTC U0416 is output.
HINT:
DTC U0416 indicates a skid control ECU communication malfunction in the power steering system.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000027C005LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1541: Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction (201
GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (HOW TO

PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING)
2.
CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM)
(a) Using the Techstream, check for DTCs and confirm that there are no problems in the brake
control system
.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output.
DTC is output.

(DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000027C005LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1551: IG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277I03TX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1551: IG Power Supply Voltage
DTC
C1551
IG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly determines whether the ignition switch status is ON or off through the
IG power supply circuit.
DTC
CODE
C1551
An IG power supply circuit malfunction inside the

ECU
TROUBLE AREA
ECU IG1 fuse

IG power supply circuit
Power steering ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000277I03TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12

.
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (IG POWER SUPPLY)

EMPS
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
ECU power source voltage/

IG Power Supply
9 to 16 V
Min.: 0.0000 V
The ignition switch is ON.
Max.: 20.1531 V
OK:
The normal condition value is displayed the Techstream.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER
2.
NG
STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY - BATTERY/BODY

GROUND)
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY BATTERY/BODY GROUND)
2/3
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A15-6 (IG) - Body ground
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
9 to 16 V
TESTER CONNECTION
A14-2 (PGND) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
*a

NG
OK
CONNECTOR
3/3
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1552: PIG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277J03TX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1552: PIG Power Supply Voltage
DTC
C1552
PIG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
When a problem occurs in the power steering system, the power supply relay circuit is shut off to stop
the power assist.
DTC
CODE
C1552
A PIG power supply circuit malfunction inside the

ECU
TROUBLE AREA
EPS fuse
PIG power supply circuit
Power steering ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000277J03TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12

.
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (PIG POWER SUPPLY)

EMPS
TESTER
DISPLAY
PIG Power
Supply
Power source voltage to

active motor/
Min.: 0.0000 V
NORMAL
CONDITION
9 to 16 V
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
The engine is running and power steering

is operating.
Max.: 20.1531 V
OK:
2.
NG

GROUND)
OK
2/3
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the A14 power steering ECU assembly

connector .
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A14-1 (PIG) - Body ground
Always
9 to 16 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3/3
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1581: Assist Map Number Un-Writing (2013
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277L090X
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1581: Assist Map Number Un-Writing
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
C1581
Assist Map Number Un-Writing
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly stores this DTC when it determines that the assist map is not written
in the ECU.
HINT:
The assist map is data written in the power steering ECU assembly to control the degree of power
assist. The assist map is selected based on the vehicle's specified communication data.
DTC
CODE
C1581
The assist map is not written in the power steering ECU

assembly.
TROUBLE AREA
assist map not written

CAN communication
system
ECM
Power steering ECU
assembly
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
HINT:
The assist map is automatically written during the rotation angle sensor initialization and torque
sensor zero point calibration.
NEXT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000277L090X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1581: Assist Map Number Un-Writing (2013
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC C1581 is not output.
HINT:
DTC C1581 is cleared after the assist map is written.
3.
NG
CHECK FOR DTC (CAN COMMUNICATION

SYSTEM)
OK
END
CHECK FOR DTC (CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM)
(a) Using the Techstream, check for DTCs and confirm that there are no problems in the CAN
.
OK:
DTC is not output.
NG
GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (HOW

TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING)
OK
4.
CHECK ECM
(a) Check if an ECM that complies with the vehicle specifications is installed.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000277L090X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1582: Assist Map Number Mismatch (2013 F
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003TY800IX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1582: Assist Map Number Mismatch (2013
FR-S)
DTC
C1582
Assist Map Number Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
If an incorrect power steering ECU assembly or ECM or skid control ECU is installed, DTC C1582 is stored
as the vehicle specification and data do not match.
HINT:
The assist map is data written in the power steering ECU assembly to control the degree of
assistance. The assist map is selected based on the vehicle's specified communication data.
DTC
CODE
C1582
TROUBLE AREA
Data that does not match the vehicle specification is

received through CAN communication.
CAN communication
system
ECM (wrong assembly)
Skid control ECU (wrong
assembly)
Power steering ECU
assembly (wrong
assembly)
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
(a) Using the Techstream, check for DTCs and confirm that there are no problems in the CAN
.
OK:
DTC is not output.
NG

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003TY800IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1582: Assist Map Number Mismatch (2013 F
OK
2.
CHECK ECM
(a) Check if an ECM that complies with the vehicle specifications is installed.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
3.
CHECK SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
(a) Check if a skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) that complies with the vehicle
specifications is installed.
NG
OK
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003TY800IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: CALIBRATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000275304ZX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: CALIBRATION (2013 FR-S)
CALIBRATION
1. ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION AND TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT
CALIBRATION
NOTICE:
Initialize the rotation angle sensor and calibrate the torque sensor zero point if any of the
following conditions occur:
The power steering ECU is replaced.

The steering column assembly is replaced.
Steering effort differs between turning left and right.
HINT:
When rotation angle sensor initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration are performed, the
assist map writing, the rotation angle sensor value initialization and the torque sensor zero point
calibration are performed at the same time.
(a) Inspection before calibration

(5) Enter the following menus: Chassis / EMPS / Data List.
(6) Check the values by referring to the table below.
EMPS
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
9 to 16 V

IG Power Supply
Min.: 0 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
Standard voltage:
10 V or more
NOTICE:
If the IG power supply voltage is 9 V or less, calibration cannot be performed. In this case,
charge or replace the battery, and then perform calibration.
(b) Rotation angle sensor initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration
NOTICE:
If DTC C1516 (Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment Incomplete) is stored, the torque sensor zero
point cannot be calibrated. Clear the DTC before starting calibration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000275304ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: CALIBRATION (2013 FR-S)
If DTC C1526 (Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization Incomplete) is stored, the rotation angle sensor
cannot be initialized. Clear the DTC before starting initialization.
(5) Enter the following menus: Chassis / EMPS / Utility / Torque Sensor Adjustment.
(6) According to the display on the Techstream, perform calibration.
NOTICE:
Set the steering wheel to the center point and align the front tires straight ahead.
Do not turn the steering wheel sharply.
Do not touch the steering wheel during the rotation angle sensor initialization and torque sensor
zero point calibration (for 3 seconds).
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000275203PX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

(f) According to the display on the Techstream, read the Data List.
EMPS
TESTER
DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
Vehicle speed from skid
Meter
Vehicle
Velocity
Engine
Revolution
0 km/h (0 mph)
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
The vehicle is stopped.
control ECU/
Min.: 0.0 km/h (0.0 mph)
No significant
Max.: 300.0 km/h (186.4

mph)
fluctuation
Engine speed/
Min.: 0 rpm
Max.: 12800 rpm
Amount of current to
Motor Actual motor/
Current
Min.: -327.68 A
Max.: 327.67 A
Command
Value
Current
NORMAL
CONDITION
Demanded amount of
current to motor/
Min.: -327.68 A
Max.: 327.67 A
The vehicle is driven at a constant speed.
No significant
fluctuation
The engine is running at a constant

speed.
Value changes in
proportion to
steering effort

Value changes in
proportion to
steering effort

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000275203PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
Steering
Angle
Velocity
Steering angle speed/

Min.: -32768 deg/s
Max.: 32767 deg/s
Value changes in
proportion to
steering effort
ECU substrate
temperature/
Thermistor
Temperature Min.: -50.0C (-58.0F)

Max.: 150.0C (302.0F)
PIG Power
Supply

active motor/
Min.: 0.0000 V
9 to 16 V

is operating.
9 to 16 V
Value changes in
proportion to
steering effort

Max.: 20.1531 V
IG Power
Supply
ECU power source

voltage/
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
Steering
Wheel
Torque
Steering wheel torque/
Motor
Motor rotation angle/
Rotation
Angle
Min.: 0.000 deg
Command
Val Current
2
Min.: -7.00 Nm
Max.: 7.00 Nm
Max.: 360.000 deg

Demanded amount of
current to motor/
Min.: -327.68 A
Max.: 327.67 A
Coil rear pressurization
PIG2
voltage/
Voltage
Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor power supply

Motor
voltage/
Voltage
Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor
Terminal
Volt(U)
Motor
Terminal
Motor terminal voltage

(U phase)/
Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor rotation
angle value
changes from 0 to

360
Value changes in
proportion to
steering effort

Approximately 27
wheel is not being turned.
Value changes
between 16 and
35 V

Approximately 27
Value changes
between 4 and 35
V
Value changes
between 4 and 35
V

(V phase)/
Min.: 0.000 V
Value changes
between 4 and 35 The engine is running and the steering
2/4
8/6/12
Volt(V)
Motor
Terminal
Volt(W)
Max.: 98.000 V

(W phase)/
Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Value changes
between 4 and 35
V
2.3 to 2.7 V
Torque
Sensor 1
Output
Torque sensor 1 output

voltage/
2.3 to 3.8 V
Min.: 0.0000 V

wheel is not turned (without load).
wheel is turned to the right when the
vehicle is stopped.
Max.: 5.0000 V
1.2 to 2.7 V

wheel is turned to the left when the
vehicle is stopped.
2.3 to 2.7 V
Torque
Sensor 2
Output
Torque sensor 2 output

voltage/
1.2 to 2.7 V

vehicle is stopped.
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 5.0000 V
2.3 to 3.8 V

wheel is turned to the left when the
vehicle is stopped.
Torque sensor 1 zero

TRQ1 Zero
Point Value
point voltage/
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 5.0000 V
Torque sensor 2 zero
TRQ2 Zero
Point Value
point voltage/
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 5.0000 V
Values differ
depending on
vehicle
Values differ
depending on
vehicle


Number of times ignition

IG ON/OFF
Times
switch turned to ON/off

after fail detection/
This value indicates the number of times

-
the ignition switch is turned to ON and off

after the latest DTC detection.
Min.: 0 times
Max.: 65535 times
Motor
Overheat
Record
Continuous overheat
prevention control
record/
Unrec
Unrec
Unrec or Rec
Motor Lo
PIG power supply
Power
Record
voltage drop record/

Unrec or Rec
3/4
8/6/12
Eng Rev
Record of engine speed
Inter Record interruption/
Unrec
Unrec
0 to 65535
0 to 255
Unrec or Rec
Spd Sig
Record of vehicle speed
Invalid
signal invalid/
Record
Unrec or Rec
Battery
Voltage Lo
Record
Battery voltage
reduction history/
Min.: 0 times, Max.:
65535 times
Number of stored DTCs
The Number
of DTCs
when freeze frame data

stored/
Min.: 0
Max.: 255
4/4
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000274Z04YX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. CHECK DLC3
(a) Check the DLC3
2. FUNCTION OF EPS WARNING LIGHT

(a) When a malfunction is detected in the power steering
system, the EPS warning light in the combination meter
comes on to inform the driver of the malfunction.
HINT:
When power assist is stopped or reduced, the EPS warning
light comes on.
Power assist is stopped:
When a malfunction occurs in the power steering system

(including lost CAN communication, etc.)
When the engine stalls (not a malfunction)
During the period after the ignition switch is turned to ON
until the engine is started (not a malfunction)
Power assist is reduced:
When a malfunction occurs in the power steering system

(including lost CAN communication, etc.)
When the battery voltage decreases (not a malfunction)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274Z04YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 F
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000274U04GX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013
FR-S)

HINT:
If a trouble code is output during the DTC check, inspect the trouble areas listed for that code. For
details of the code, refer to the "See page" below.

DTC
CODE
DETECTION ITEM
RETURN-TO-NORMAL
CONDITION
EPS
WARNING
LIGHT
C1511 Torque Sensor Circuit Malfunction
Ignition switch ON again
*1
*1
*1
C1514 Torque Sensor Power Supply Abnormal
*1
C1515
Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment

Undone
Zero Point calibration

completes
*1
C1516
Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment

Incomplete
Clear DTC
*1
C1517 Torque Hold Abnormal
*1
C1521 Motor Circuit Malfunction
*1
*1
*1
*1
C1525
Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization

Undone
Rotation Angle Sensor

calibration completes
*1
C1526
Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization

Incomplete
Clear DTC
*1
C1528 Motor Rotation Angle Sensor Malfunction
*1
C1531 ECU Malfunction
*1
*1
After normal confirmation
*2
*1
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274U04GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE
PAGE
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 F
C1541 Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction
*1
C1551 IG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
*1
C1552 PIG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
*1
C1554 Power Supply Relay Failure
*1
C1555 Motor Relay Welding Failure
*1
C1581 Assist Map Number Un-Writing
Assist Map write
*1
C1582 Assist Map Number Mismatch
*2
U0100 Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A"
*1
U0122
Lost Communication with Vehicle

Dynamics Control Module
*1
U0416
Invalid Data Received from Vehicle

Dynamics Control Module
*1
*1: Warning light comes on

*2: Warning light turns off
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274U04GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002750059X
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / EMPS / Trouble Codes.
(f) Read the DTCs following the display on the Techstream.
(g) Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart for DTC information
2. CLEAR DTC
(f) Clear the DTCs by following the display on the Techstream.
(g) Turn the ignition switch off.
(h) Disconnect the Techstream from the DLC3.
1/1
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: EPS Warning Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277E04GX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: EPS Warning Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
EPS Warning Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
If the power steering ECU assembly detects a malfunction, the EPS warning light comes on. At this time,
the power steering ECU assembly stores a DTC in its memory.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
procedure.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000277E04GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
When the power supply voltage to the power steering ECU assembly (terminals IG and PIG) drops,
required steering effort increases and the EPS warning light turns on.
PROCEDURE
1.

(b) Check the indication condition of the EPS warning light by wiggling the power steering ECU
assembly connector and wire harness up and down, and right and left.
OK:
EPS warning light indication condition does not change.
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
2.
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC is not output.
NG

OK
3.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (IG POWER SUPPLY)

2/6
8/6/12

EMPS
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

IG Power Supply
9 to 16 V
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
OK:
NG

GROUND)
OK
4.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (PIG POWER SUPPLY)

EMPS
TESTER
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
CONDITION
PIG Power
Supply
active motor/
Min.: 0.0000 V
9 to 16 V

is operating.
Max.: 20.1531 V
OK:
NG

GROUND)
3/6
8/6/12
OK
5.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (METER / GAUGE SYSTEM)
(a) Perform the Active Test of the combination meter using the Techstream
Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
Indicat. EPS
TEST PART
EPS warning light
CONTROL RANGE
OFF/ON
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Vehicle is stopped and engine is idling
(b) Check that the EPS warning light operates in accordance with the Active Test.
HINT:
Reconnect the connectors and restore the vehicle to its previous condition before checking the
combination meter.
6.
NG
OK
4/6
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A15-6 (IG) - Body ground
SWITCH CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
9 to 16 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
*a
7.

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5/6
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the A14 power steering ECU assembly

connector .
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A14-1 (PIG) - Body ground
Always
9 to 16 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
6/6
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000275402ZX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
If a problem occurs in the power steering system, the EPS warning light comes on in the combination
meter and the power steering assist is stopped, locked at a particular point, or decreased
simultaneously to protect the system.
DTC
CODE
DETECTION CONDITION
FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
C1511
C1512
C1513
C1514 Torque sensor malfunction
C1515
C1516
C1517
C1521
C1522
C1523
Power assist stops.

Motor circuit malfunction
C1524
C1525
C1526
Motor rotation angle sensor

malfunction
C1528
C1531
C1532
C1533
ECU malfunction
C1534
C1541 Skid control malfunction
Assist force is restricted.

The amount of power assist is locked at the 100 km/h (62
mph) level of power assist.
C1551 IG power supply voltage error

C1552 PIG power supply voltage error
C1554 Power supply relay malfunction
Power assist stops.
C1555 Motor relay malfunction

1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
Assist map not written in power Control is performed using the default settings.
C1581 steering ECU
C1582
Assist map mismatch in power

steering ECU
U0100 ECM communication error
Control is performed using the current assist map.

Power assist continues as normal*1.
Power assist stops*2.
U0122 Skid control ECU communication

U0416 error
The amount of power assist is locked at the 100 km/h (62

mph) level of power assist.
HINT:
*1: When the DTC is stored while the engine is running.
*2: When the DTC is stored before the engine is started.
The amount of power assist may be decreased to prevent the motor and ECUs from overheating if
the steering wheel is continuously turned when the vehicle is either stopped or driven at a low
speed, or if the steering wheel is kept at either full lock position for a long time. In such cases, the
amount of power assist returns to normal if the steering wheel is not turned for approximately 10
minutes with the engine idling.
If the battery is not sufficiently charged or the voltage decreases temporarily, the amount of
power assist is reduced and the EPS warning light comes on. In such cases, the amount of power
assist returns normal when the battery voltage recovers.
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: FREEZE FRAME DATA (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000275504RX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: FREEZE FRAME DATA (2013 FR-S)
FREEZE FRAME DATA

(f) According to the display on the Techstream, select the freeze frame data.
EMPS
TESTER
DISPLAY
Meter
Vehicle
Velocity
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
Vehicle speed
from skid control
ECU/
Min.: 0.0 km/h
(0.0 mph)
NORMAL CONDITION
0 km/h (0 mph)
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
The vehicle is stopped.
No significant fluctuation The vehicle is driven at a constant speed.
Max.: 300.0 km/h

(186.4 mph)
Engine
Revolution
Engine speed/
Min.: 0 rpm
No significant fluctuation The engine is running at a constant speed.
Max.: 12800 rpm
Amount of
Value changes in
Motor Actual current to motor/
proportion to steering
Current
Min.: -327.68 A
effort
Max.: 327.67 A
Command
Value
Current
Demanded
amount of
Value changes in
current to motor/ proportion to steering
effort
Min.: -327.68 A


Max.: 327.67 A
Steering
Angle
Velocity
Steering angle
speed/
Min.: -32768
deg/s
Max.: 32767
deg/s
Value changes in
effort

ECU substrate
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000275504RX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
temperature/
Thermistor
Min.: -50.0C
Temperature (-58.0F)
Max.: 150.0C
(302.0F)
PIG Power
Supply
Power source
voltage to active
motor/
9 to 16 V
The engine is running and power steering is

operating.
9 to 16 V
Value changes in
effort

Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
IG Power
Supply
ECU power
source voltage/
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
Steering
Wheel
Torque
Motor
Rotation
Angle
Steering wheel
torque/
Min.: -7.00 Nm
Max.: 7.00 Nm
Motor rotation
angle/
Min.: 0.000 deg
Max.: 360.000
deg
Motor rotation angle

value changes from 0 to
360 deg
Demanded
Command
Val Current
amount of
Value changes in
current to motor/ proportion to steering
Min.: -327.68 A
effort

Max.: 327.67 A
PIG2
Voltage
Coil rear
pressurization
voltage/
Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor power
Motor
Voltage
Motor
Terminal
Volt(U)
supply voltage/
Approximately 27 V

Value changes between The engine is running and the steering

16 and 35 V
Approximately 27 V

Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
4 and 35 V
Motor terminal
voltage (U
phase)/
Min.: 0.000 V

4 and 35 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal
Motor
voltage (V
2/3
8/6/12
Terminal
phase)/
Volt(V)
Min.: 0.000 V
4 and 35 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor
Terminal
Volt(W)
Motor terminal
voltage (W
phase)/
Min.: 0.000 V
4 and 35 V
Max.: 98.000 V
2.3 to 2.7 V
Torque
Sensor 1
Output
Torque sensor 1
output voltage/
2.3 to 3.8 V
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 5.0000 V
Torque sensor 2
output voltage/

vehicle is stopped.
2.3 to 2.7 V
Sensor 2
Output

1.2 to 2.7 V
Torque
wheel is turned to the left when the vehicle

is stopped.
1.2 to 2.7 V
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 5.0000 V
2.3 to 3.8 V

vehicle is stopped.
wheel is turned to the left when the vehicle
is stopped.
TRQ1 Zero
Point Value
Torque sensor 1
zero point
voltage/
Min.: 0.0000 V
Values differ depending
on vehicle
Values differ depending

on vehicle

Max.: 5.0000 V
Torque sensor 2
TRQ2 Zero
Point Value
zero point
voltage/
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 5.0000 V
3/3
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTIN
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000274T05UX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
1.
NEXT
2.
(a) Confirm problem symptoms
NEXT
3.
INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE*
(a) Measure the voltage of the battery.

Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
(b) Using the Techstream, inspect battery voltage reduction history "Battery Voltage Lo Record" in
the Data List
.
NEXT
4.
CHECK DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA*
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274T05UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Check and record DTCs and freeze frame data.
NEXT
5.
CLEAR DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA*
(a) Clear the DTCs and freeze frame data.
NEXT
6.
PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Symptom does not occur.
Symptom occurs.
Go to step 8
7.
SYMPTOM SIMULATION
(a) Perform symptom simulation
NEXT
8.
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN communication system DTC is not output.
CAN communication system DTC is output.
HINT:
If any CAN communication system DTCs are output, perform troubleshooting for the CAN
communication system first.
If communication to the power steering ECU cannot be established through the Techstream,
inspect terminals CANH and CANL of the DLC3 and power steering ECU, and the IG circuit of the
power steering ECU.
PROCEED TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

(HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING)
9.
CHECK FOR DTC*
(a) Check for DTCs
HINT:
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart when any DTCs are output
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output.
DTC is output.
Go to step 11
3/4
8/6/12
10.
(a) Refer to Problem Symptoms Table
NEXT
11.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
NEXT
12.
IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM
NEXT
13.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
14.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
4/4
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WF605FX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK STEERING EFFORT (TORQUE)
NOTICE:
Some of these service operations may affect the SRS airbags. Read the precautionary notices
concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing.
(a) Stop the vehicle on a level, paved surface and align the wheels straight ahead.
(b) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
Wait at least 90 seconds after disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal to
disable the SRS system.
(c) Remove the steering pad
(d) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.

(e) Using a torque wrench, check that the steering wheel set nut is properly tightened.
(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON so that the power steering is ready to operate.
(g) Turn the steering wheel 90 degrees to the right and check the steering effort (torque) while
continuing to turn it further in the same direction.
Standard steering effort (Reference):
6.0 N*m (61 kgf*cm, 53 in.*lbf) or less
(h) Align the front wheels facing straight ahead.
(i) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
(j) Install the steering pad
(k) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WF605FX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000274V02QX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274V02QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000274S03XX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM
(a) The vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Failure to carry out service
operations in the correct sequence could cause the SRS to unexpectedly deploy during servicing.
This may cause a serious accident.
Before servicing (including inspection, replacement, removal and installation of parts), be sure to
read the precautionary notices for Supplemental Restraint System
2. PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND REPLACEMENT OF ELECTRONIC MOTOR

POWER STEERING COMPONENTS
(a) Be sure to align the front wheels straight ahead when removing and installing the power steering
link assembly.
(b) If disconnecting the steering intermediate shaft and pinion shaft of the power steering link
assembly, be sure to place matchmarks before starting the operation.
(c) If replacing the power steering ECU assembly, always replace it with a new one (if the power
steering ECU assembly is not replaced with a new one, DTCs may be stored).
NOTICE:
Do not use the power steering ECU assembly from another vehicle (display model, etc.).
(d) After replacing the steering column assembly or power steering ECU assembly, write the assist
map, initialize the rotation angle sensor and calibrate the torque sensor zero point
3. HANDLING PRECAUTION
(a) When handling electronic parts:
Avoid any impact to electronic parts such as ECUs and relays. Replace electronic parts
with new ones if dropped or subjected to a severe blow.
Do not expose any electronic parts to high temperatures or humidity.
Do not touch the connector terminals in order to prevent deformation or malfunctions due
to static electricity.
(b) When handling the steering column assembly:
Avoid any impact to the steering column assembly, especially to the motor and torque
sensor. Replace them with new ones if dropped or subjected to a severe blow.
Do not pull the wire harness when moving the steering column assembly.
(c) When disconnecting the connectors related to the power steering system, turn the ignition switch
to ON, center the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal, and then disconnect the connectors.
4. PRECAUTIONS FOR CAN COMMUNICATION

(a) Perform troubleshooting for the communication line problems when DTCs of the CAN
communication system are output. Be sure to start troubleshooting the power steering system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274S03XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
after confirming that the CAN communication system is normal.

(b) Since the CAN communication line has a specific length and route, it cannot be repaired
temporarily with a bypass wire, etc.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274S03XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020NO01EX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Front tires (Improperly

inflated, unevenly worn)
Front wheel alignment
(Incorrect)
Front suspension (Lower ball
joint)
Rack and pinion power
steering gear assembly
Steering column assembly
Steering is heavy.
Torque sensor (Built into

steering column assembly)
Power steering motor (Built

into steering column assembly)
Speed sensor
Skid control ECU
Battery and power source
system
Power steering ECU power
supply voltage and relay
Calibration of rotation angle
sensor output and torque
sensor
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020NO01EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12

(Incorrect)
Steering effort differs between right and left or is uneven.

joint)


joint)
Speed sensor
Skid control ECU
While driving, steering effort does not change in accordance
with vehicle speed or the steering wheel does not return
properly.


joint)
A knocking (or cranking) sound occurs when turning the
steering wheel while power steering operating.
Steering intermediate shaft


Noise occurs when turning the steering wheel during low speed steering gear assembly
driving.

Steering sensor

High-pitched sounds (squeaking) occur when turning the

2/3
8/6/12
steering wheel slowly with the vehicle stopped.


The steering wheel vibrates and noise occurs when turning the
steering wheel from lock to lock.


EPS warning light remains on.
EPS warning light circuit
3/3
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000274Y02YX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. DESCRIPTION
The power steering system generates torque through the operation of the motor and
reduction gear installed on the column shaft in order to assist steering effort.
The power steering ECU determines directions and the amount of assisting power in
accordance with vehicle speed signals and signals from the torque sensor built into the
steering column assembly. As a result, the power steering ECU adjusts the steering effort so
that it is lighter during low speed driving and heavier during high speed driving.
When there is a power supply voltage drop that may result in an increase in required steering
effort, the power steering system has a function that warns the driver by illuminating the EPS
warning light.
(a) Power steering ECU:
The power steering ECU calculates assisting power based on steering torque signals from the
torque sensor and vehicle speed signals from the skid control ECU.
(b) Torque sensor:
The torque sensor detects the steering effort generated when the steering wheel is turned and
converts it to an electrical signal.
(c) Power steering motor:
The power steering motor is activated by the current from the power steering ECU and generates
torque to assist the steering effort.
(d) Motor rotation angle sensor:
The motor rotation angle sensor consists of the resolver sensor, which excels in reliability and
durability. The rotation angle sensor detects the rotation angle of the motor and outputs it to the
power steering ECU. As a result, it ensures efficient EPS control.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274Y02YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000275102ZX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1/1
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000274W02YX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK POWER STEERING ECU
*a
HINT:
As connector z1 uses a lock lever, each terminal cannot be checked while the connector is still
connected to the power steering ECU.
TERMINAL NO. (SYMBOL)
z1-1 (V)
V phase motor output
z1-2 (U)
U phase motor output
z1-3 (W)
W phase motor output
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
A14-1 (PIG) A14-2 (PGND)
WIRING
COLOR
W -B
Motor power supply
A14-2 (PGND) - B - Body

Power ground
Body ground
ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Always
9 to 16 V
Always
Below 1
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000274W02YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
A15-1 (CANH) - B - W
A15-7 (CANL)
Ignition switch off
57 to 63
A15-6 (IG) A14-2 (PGND)
G-W - B
IG power supply
Ignition switch ON
9 to 16 V
z2-5 (RZV) A14-2 (PGND)
R-B

excitation output signal
Engine running, steering wheel

being turned
0.68 to 4.42
V
z2-7 (RZG) A14-2 (PGND)
B-B

excitation circuit ground
Always
Below 1
z2-13 (RZCS) A14-2 (PGND)
L-B

COS aspect input signal

being turned
0.68 to 4.42
V
z2-14 (RZSN) A14-2 (PGND)
Y-B

SIN aspect input signal

being turned
0.68 to 4.42
V
Engine running, steering wheel not

turned (without load)
2.3 to 2.7 V

turned to right with vehicle stopped
2.3 to 3.8 V

turned to left with vehicle stopped
1.2 to 2.7 V
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
z2-8 (TRQ1) z2-11 (TRQG)
z2-9 (TRQV) z2-11 (TRQG)
W -B
R-B
Torque sensor signal 1
Torque sensor power

supply
Engine running, steering wheel not

turned (without load)
z2-10 (TRQ2) z2-11 (TRQG)
Y-B
z2-11 (TRQG) -
B - Body
Body ground
ground
Torque sensor signal 2
Torque sensor ground
2.3 to 2.7 V

turned to right with vehicle stopped
1.2 to 2.7 V

turned to left with vehicle stopped
2.3 to 3.8 V
Always
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, the ECU may have a malfunction.
2/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: U0100,U0122,U0416: Lost Communication wit
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000277M064X
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: U0100,U0122,U0416: Lost Communication
with ECM / PCM "A" (2013 FR-S)
DTC
U0100
Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A"
DTC
U0122
DTC
U0416
Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly receives signals from the ECM and skid control ECU (brake actuator
assembly) via the CAN communication system.
DTC
CODE
U0100
Lost communication with the ECM/PCM "A"
U0122
Lost communication with the brake system

control module
U0416
The brake system control module signal

malfunction
TROUBLE AREA

ECM

Skid control ECU (Brake actuator
assembly)
PROCEDURE
1.

(b) Check for DTCs
.
.
OK:
DTC is not output.
NG

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000277M064X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: U0100,U0122,U0416: Lost Communication wit
OK
2/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002TEU01VX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002TEU01VX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WAE05WX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
When using a vise, do not overtighten it.
Do not drop the steering column assembly, strike it with tools or subject it to impacts.
If the steering column assembly is subjected to an impact, replace it with a new one.
Do not pull the wire harness of the steering column assembly.
Do not allow any moisture to come into contact with the steering column assembly.
Do not loosen any bolts not mentioned in the procedure.
1. REMOVE STEERING COLUMN UPPER WITH SWITCH BRACKET ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a center punch, mark the center of the 2 tapered-head bolts.
(b) Using a 3 to 4 mm (0.118 to 0.157 in.) diameter drill bit, drill a hole in each tapered-head bolt.
(c) Using a screw extractor, remove each tapered-head bolt,

and then remove the steering column upper with switch
bracket assembly from the steering column assembly.
2. REMOVE TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER
(a) Slide the transponder key amplifier, disengage the 2

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WAE05WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
claws and then remove the transponder key amplifier as

3. REMOVE UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Insert the key.
(b) Disengage the 2 claws and slide the unlock warning switch assembly to remove it as shown in the
illustration.
4. REMOVE KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the 2 screws and the key interlock solenoid from
the steering column upper bracket assembly.
(b) Disengage the clamp.
5. REMOVE IGNITION SWITCH LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Turn the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly to the ACC
position.
(b) Insert a screwdriver into the hole of the steering column upper bracket assembly as shown in the
illustration. Pull the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly until its claw contacts the stopper of the
steering column upper bracket assembly.
*1
Claw
*2
Stopper
*a
LOCK
*b
ACC
Push
Pull
NOTICE:
Make sure to pull the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly until its claw contacts the stopper
of the steering column upper bracket assembly. Failure to do so will affect later work
operations.
(c) Insert a screwdriver into the hole of the steering column upper bracket assembly. Tilt the
screwdriver as shown in the illustration to disengage the claw of the ignition switch lock cylinder
assembly, and pull out the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly from the steering column upper
bracket assembly.
3/4
8/6/12
*1
Claw
*2
Stopper
*a
Claw disengaged
*b
Driver Insertion Hole

Tilt
Pull out
6. REMOVE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 screws and the ignition or starter switch

assembly from the steering column upper bracket
assembly.
4/4
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001NM101CX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
NOTICE:
1. INSPECT PRELOAD
(a) Secure the steering column assembly in a vice using
aluminum plates and wooden block as shown in the
illustration.
*1
Wooden Block
NOTICE:
Do not overtighten the vice, as the steering column
assembly may become deformed.
Support the steering column assembly with a wooden
block or similar item to ensure that it does not fall.
(b) Install the 2 service nuts to the steering main shaft.

*1
Service Nut
Recommended service nut:

Thread diam eter
12.0 mm (0.472 in.)
Thread pitch
1.25 mm (0.0492 in.)
(c) Tighten the 2 service nuts each other to lock them.
NOTICE:
Do not apply excess torque to the service nuts by using a tool such as an impact wrench.
HINT:
These nuts are installed to turn the steering main shaft. They should be removed after inspecting the
steering main shaft rotating torque.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001NM101CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(d) Using a torque wrench, turn the main shaft and measure
the preload.
Preload:
1.6 to 2.1 N*m (16.3 to 21.4 kgf*cm, 14.2 to 18.6 in.*lbf)
If the preload is not as specified, replace the steering
column assembly with a new one.
2. INSPECT STEERING LOCK OPERATION
(a) Check that the steering lock mechanism is activated when

the key is removed.
(b) Check that the steering lock mechanism is deactivated

when the key is inserted and turned to the ACC position.
*a
LOCK
*b
ACC
HINT:
If there is any abnormality, replace the ignition switch lock
cylinder assembly or steering column upper bracket
assembly.
3. INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the 2 capsules are securely installed to the

steering column assembly as shown in the illustration.
OK:
5.0 mm (0.1969 in.) or more
2/4
8/6/12
*1
Capsule
If the capsules are not positioned as specified, replace the

steering column assembly with a new one.
(b) Check the 2 capsules for deformation and damage.

If either of the capsules is deformed, loose, missing or damaged, replace the steering column
assembly with a new one.
4. INSPECT STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

(a) Check for play
(1) Check that there is no play at the universal joint.

OK:
No play
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, replace the steering
intermediate shaft assembly with a new one.
(b) Turning toque
(1) Hold the steering intermediate shaft assembly in a

vise with the yoke on the rack and pinion power
steering gear assembly side facing upward.
(2) Using a push and pull gauge, measure the turning torque in the both directions.
3/4
8/6/12
Torque:
6.6 N (66 kgf, 58 lbf) or less
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, replace the steering intermediate shaft assembly with a new one.
(3) Hold the steering intermediate shaft assembly in a vise with the yoke on the steering column
assembly side facing upward.
(4) Using a push and pull gauge, measure the turning torque in the both directions.
Torque:
6.0 N (61 kgf, 53 lbf) or less
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, replace the steering intermediate shaft assembly with a new one.
4/4
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WAB094X
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
2. INSTALL STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the steering column assembly with the 2 nuts and new bolt.
NOTICE:
When installing the steering column assembly, be careful that the wire harness does not
interfere with or is not pinched between other parts.
(c) Connect the 2 connectors to the power steering ECU.

(1) As shown in the illustration, return the lock lever to its original position to connect the
connector and securely push in the lock of the lock lever.
(d) Connect the each connector and engage the wire harness clamps to the steering column
assembly.
*a
*b
Push in the lock
3. INSTALL STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WAB094X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(a) Pass the steering intermediate shaft assembly through the hole in the body from the inside of the
cabin.
(b) Connect the steering intermediate shaft assembly to the
rack and pinion power steering gear assembly.
*1
Matchmark
NOTICE:
Align the matchmarks on the steering intermediate
shaft assembly and the rack and pinion power steering
gear assembly.
(c) Install the new bolt.

(d) Install the steering intermediate shaft assembly to the
steering column assembly.
*1
Matchmark
NOTICE:
Align the matchmarks on the steering intermediate
shaft assembly and the steering column assembly.
(e) Install the new bolt.

(f) Engage the 4 claws and install the dust seal.
4. INSTALL TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ASSEMBLY WITH SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected and turn the ignition switch to ON.
Do not rotate the spiral cable without the steering wheel with the battery connected and turn the
ignition switch to ON.
Ensure that the steering wheel is installed and aligned straight when inspecting the steering
sensor.
(a) With the clamp loosened, install the turn signal switch assembly with spiral cable sub-assembly to
the steering column assembly.
(b) Engage the claw on the turn signal switch assembly with spiral cable sub-assembly to the steering
column assembly and tighten the clamp.
(c) Connect the each connector to the turn signal switch assembly with spiral cable sub-assembly.

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the upper steering column cover.
2/3
8/6/12

(a) Engage the 6 claws to install the lower steering column cover.
(b) Install the 2 screws.

10. TURN FRONT WHEELS TO FACE STRAIGHT AHEAD
11. INSPECT AND ADJUST SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
12. INSPECT STEERING WHEEL CENTER POINT
13. INSTALL STEERING WHEEL ASSEMBLY
14. INSTALL LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY

16. INSTALL INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL
(a) Engage the 4 clips and claw to install the instrument side
panel.

21. INITIALIZE ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR AND CALIBRATE TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT
3/3
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WAF05WX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not drop the steering column assembly, strike it with tools or subject it to impacts.
If the steering column assembly is subjected to an impact, replace it with a new one.
Do not pull the wire harness of the steering column assembly.
Do not allow any moisture to come into contact with the steering column sub-assembly.
Do not loosen any bolts not mentioned in the procedure.
1. INSTALL IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the ignition or starter switch assembly with the 2

screws to the steering column upper bracket assembly.
2. INSTALL IGNITION SWITCH LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Make sure that the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly
is in the ACC position.
*a
LOCK
*b
ACC
(b) Install the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly to the steering column upper bracket assembly.
(c) Make sure that the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly is securely installed.
3. INSTALL KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID (for Automatic Transmission)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WAF05WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(a) Engage the clamp.
(b) Install the 2 screws and the key interlock solenoid to the steering column upper bracket assembly.
4. INSTALL UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Slide the unlock warning switch assembly and engage the
2 claws to install the unlock warning switch assembly to
the steering column upper bracket assembly as shown in
the illustration.
5. INSTALL TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER
(a) Align the transponder key amplifier with the steering

column upper bracket assembly. Tilt the transponder key
amplifier slightly and slide it into position.
(b) Push the transponder key amplifier, and engage the 2 claws to install the transponder key
amplifier to the steering column upper bracket assembly.
6. INSPECT STEERING LOCK OPERATION

7. INSTALL STEERING COLUMN UPPER WITH SWITCH BRACKET ASSEMBLY
(a) Secure the steering column assembly in a vise.
2/3
8/6/12
(b) Temporarily install the steering column upper with switch

bracket assembly to the steering column assembly with
new tapered-head bolt.
(c) Tighten the tapered-head bolt until the bolt head break off.
3/3
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WAD090X
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices
concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing the steering column.
1. PRECAUTION
2. TURN FRONT WHEELS TO FACE STRAIGHT AHEAD

5. REMOVE STEERING WHEEL ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL
(a) Using a moulding remover, disengage the claw and 4 clips

and remove the instrument side panel.
*1
Moulding Remover

8. REMOVE LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WAD090X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 6 claws and remove the lower steering column cover.
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the upper steering

column cover.
14. REMOVE TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ASSEMBLY WITH SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the each connector from the turn signal switch assembly with spiral cable subassembly.
(b) Using pliers, loosen the clamp.
(c) With the clamp loosened, use a screwdriver to disengage

the claw, and remove the turn signal switch assembly
with spiral cable sub-assembly from the steering column
assembly.
2/5
8/6/12
*1
Clamp
*2
Claw
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected
and turn the ignition switch to ON.
Do not rotate the spiral cable with the battery connected
and turn the ignition switch to ON.
Ensure that the steering wheel is installed and aligned
straight when inspecting the steering sensor.
15. REMOVE STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Put matchmarks on the steering intermediate shaft

assembly and the steering column assembly.
*1
Matchmark
(b) Remove the bolt and separate the steering intermediate shaft assembly from the steering column
assembly.
(c) Put matchmarks on the steering intermediate shaft

assembly and the rack and pinion power steering gear
assembly.
*1
Matchmark
(d) Remove the bolt and separate the steering intermediate shaft assembly from the rack and pinion
power steering gear assembly.
3/5
8/6/12
(e) Disengage the 4 claws from the exterior of the vehicle

cabin, and remove the steering intermediate shaft
assembly.
16. REMOVE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the 2 connectors from the power steering

ECU.
(1) As shown illustration, pull out the lock of the lock lever
and turn the lock lever to disconnect the connector.
*a
Pull out the lock
*b
Turn the lock lever

(c) Disconnect the each connector and disengage the wire harness clamps from the steering column
assembly.
(d) Remove the bolt and 2 nuts to remove the steering

4/5
8/6/12
column assembly.
HINT:
When pulling the bolts out, lifting the motor section of the
steering column assembly and tilting the steering column
assembly will make it easier to remove the bolts.
5/5
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001R4405BX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
(a) Inspect steering wheel off center.
(1) Turn the steering wheel to the center position.
(2) Apply masking tape to the top center of the steering

wheel and upper steering column cover.
*1
Steering Wheel
*2
Upper Steering Column Cover
*a
Masking Tape
(3) Drive the vehicle in a straight line for 100 m (328 ft.) at a constant speed of 56 km/h (35 mph),
while holding the steering wheel to maintain the course.
(4) Draw a line on the masking tape as shown in the

illustration.
*1
*2
Steering Wheel
*a
Marked Line
(5) Turn the steering wheel to the center position.

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001R4405BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
Look at the upper surface of the steering wheel, steering spoke and SRS airbag line to find the center
position.
(6) Draw a new line on the masking tape on the steering

wheel as shown in the illustration.
*1
*2
Steering Wheel
*a
Marked Line
(7) Measure the distance between the 2 lines on the masking tape on the steering wheel.
(8) Convert the measured distance to steering angle.
HINT:
Measured distance 1 mm (0.0394 in.) = Steering angle of approximately 1 degree.
Make a note of the steering angle.
(b) Adjust the steering angle.
(1) Put matchmarks on both sides of the tie rod assembly

and steering rack end sub-assembly respectively.
*1
Matchmark
(2) Using a paper gauge, measure the distance from the RH and LH tie rod ends to the rack end
screws.
HINT:
Measure both RH and LH sides.
Make a note of the measured values.
2/3
8/6/12
(3) Remove the steering rack boot clips from both sides of
the rack boots.
(4) Loosen the RH and LH lock nuts.

(5) Turn the RH and LH rack ends by the same amount (but in different directions) according to the
steering angle.
HINT:
One 360 degree turn of rack end (1.5 mm (0.0591 in.) horizontal movement) equals to 12 degrees of
steering angle.
(6) Tighten the RH and LH lock nuts to the specified torque.

NOTICE:
Make sure that the difference in length between the RH and LH tie rod ends and rack end
screws is within 1.5 mm (0.0591 in.).
(7) Install the RH and LH boot clips.
3/3
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WB705QX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT STEERING WHEEL FREE PLAY
(a) Stop the vehicle and position the front wheels straight ahead.
(b) Gently turn the steering wheel right and left, and check steering wheel free play.
Maximum free play:
30 mm (1.18 in.)
HINT:
If the free play exceeds the maximum, check the steering system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WB705QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WB506OX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING SYSTEM
(a) Care must be taken when replacing parts. Incorrect replacement may affect the performance of
the steering system and result in a driving hazard.
2. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM

(a) This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Failure to carry out service
operations in the correct sequence could cause the SRS to unexpectedly deploy during servicing.
This may cause a serious accident. Before servicing (including inspection, replacement, removal,
and installation of parts), be sure to read the precautionary notices for Supplemental Restraint
System
3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING COLUMN (When handling the steering column
assembly)
(a) Avoid any impact to the steering column assembly, especially to the torque sensor. Replace the
steering column assembly with a new one if it is dropped or subjected to any severe impacts.
(b) Do not pull the wire harness when moving the steering column assembly.
(c) When the steering column assembly has been replaced, perform the rotation angle sensor
(d) When the steering column assembly has been replaced, perform the VSC sensor neutral
memorization
(e) Do not release the tilt lever when the steering column assembly is not installed on the vehicle.
4. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING COLUMN (When disconnecting or reconnecting

the connectors)
(a) Before disconnecting the connectors related to the power steering system, turn the ignition switch
to ON, center the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch off, and then disconnect the connectors.
(b) Before reconnecting the connectors related to the power steering system, ensure that the ignition
switch is off. Then center the steering wheel and turn the ignition switch to ON.
NOTICE:
Do not turn the ignition switch to ON when the steering wheel is not centered.
(c) If the above operations are not carried out properly, the steering center point (zero point) will
deviate, which may lead to a difference in steering effort between turning right and left. If there is
a difference in steering effort between turning right and left, perform the rotation angle sensor
5. HANDLING PRECAUTION FOR SPIRAL CABLE

(a) Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected and turn the ignition switch to ON.
(b) Do not rotate the spiral cable without the steering wheel with the battery connected and turn the
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WB506OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
(c) Ensure that the steering wheel is installed and aligned straight when inspecting the steering
sensor.
(d) Be sure that the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly is in the center position during installation
and when removing and installing the steering wheel
CAUTION:
If the steering wheel is turned without the spiral cable installed in the neutral position, the
cable may break.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WB506OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WB606VX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Steering System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE

(Incorrect)
Steering system joints (Worn)
Steering column
Heavy steering


Speed sensor
Battery and power source
system
Power steering ECU power

source voltage and relay
Power steering ECU
actuator assembly)

(Incorrect)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WB606VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
Poor return

Power steering ECU
Steering system joints (Worn)

joint)
Excessive free play
Intermediate shaft, universal

joint, sliding yoke (Worn)
Front axle hub (Hub bearing)

A knocking (or clunking) sound occurs when turning the

steering wheel back and forth while power steering is
operating.

joint)
Steering intermediate shaft
Power steering ECU

Friction occurs when turning the steering wheel during lowspeed driving.
A high-pitched sound (squeaking) occurs when turning the

steering wheel slowly with the vehicle stopped.
Steering wheel vibrates and noise occurs when turning the

steering wheel with the vehicle stopped.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WB606VX.html?sisuffix=ff



2/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000033RS06RX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000033RS06RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000033RS06RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000033RR08CX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected and the ignition switch ON.
Do not rotate the spiral cable without the steering wheel with the battery connected and the
ignition switch ON.
sensor.
1. INSTALL NO. 1 STEERING WHEEL ORNAMENT

(a) Engage the 2 claws and guide to install the No. 1 steering wheel ornament.
2. INSTALL LOWER STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER (w/ Cruise Control System)
3. INSTALL LOWER STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER (w/o Cruise Control System)
(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the lower steering wheel boss cover.
4. INSTALL STEERING SHAKE DAMPER

(a) Install the steering shake damper with 2 screws to steering wheel assembly.
5. INSTALL SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY) (for

Automatic Transmission)
6. ALIGN FRONT WHEELS FACING STRAIGHT AHEAD
(a) Install the steering wheel assembly aligning the

matchmarks on the steering wheel assembly and steering
main shaft.
*1
Matchmark
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000033RR08CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(b) Install the steering wheel assembly set nut.

(c) Connect the connectors to the spiral cable sub-assembly and steering wheel assembly.
9. CHECK STEERING WHEEL CENTER POINT

10. INSTALL HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
11. INSPECT HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
12. PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK
13. INSPECT SRS WARNING LIGHT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000033RR08CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000033RT088X
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected and the ignition switch ON.
Do not rotate the spiral cable without the steering wheel with the battery connected and the
ignition switch ON.
sensor.
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
cable from the negative (-) battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting
the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal notices before proceeding with work
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism that the door glass moves down slightly when
the door is opened, and that the glass moves up when closing the door in order to prevent the
door molding from being damaged. When the battery negative (-) terminal needs to be
3. ALIGN FRONT WHEELS FACING STRAIGHT AHEAD

4. REMOVE HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the steering wheel assembly set nut.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000033RT088X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
*1
Matchmark
(b) Put matchmarks on the steering wheel assembly and steering main shaft.
(c) Disconnect the connectors from the spiral cable sub-assembly and steering wheel assembly.
(d) Using SST, remove the steering wheel assembly.
*a
Turn
*b
Hold
SST: 09950-50013
09951-05010
09952-05010
09953-05020
09954-05031
NOTICE:
Apply a small amount of grease to the threads and tip of
SST (09953-05020) before use.
6. REMOVE SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY) (for

Automatic Transmission)
7. REMOVE STEERING SHAKE DAMPER
(a) Remove the 2 screws and steering shake damper from

steering wheel assembly.
2/3
8/6/12
8. REMOVE LOWER STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER (w/ Cruise Control System)
9. REMOVE LOWER STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER (w/o Cruise Control System)
(b) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the lower steering wheel boss cover.
10. REMOVE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSEMBLY (w/ Cruise Control System)
11. REMOVE NO. 1 STEERING WHEEL ORNAMENT
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and guide to remove the No. 1

steering wheel ornament.
3/3
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002TET014X
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002TET014X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000045EQ00OX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. SECURE RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, secure the rack and pinion power steering
gear assembly in a vise.
SST: 09612-00012
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
Tape SST before use.
2. REMOVE TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Put matchmarks on the tie rod end sub-assembly LH and

the steering rack end sub-assembly.
*1
Matchmark
(b) Remove the tie rod end sub-assembly LH and lock nut.
3. REMOVE TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the LH side.
4. REMOVE STEERING RACK BOOT CLIP

HINT:
Use the same procedure for both the LH side and RH side.
(a) Using pliers, remove the steering rack boot clip.
5. REMOVE NO. 1 STEERING RACK BOOT CLAMP

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000045EQ00OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the No. 1 steering rack boot

clamp.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the No. 1 steering rack boot.
6. REMOVE NO. 1 STEERING RACK BOOT

NOTICE:
If the No. 1 steering rack boot is fissured, damaged or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.
HINT:
7. REMOVE STEERING RACK END SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Using SST, remove the steering rack end sub-assembly.
SST: 09922-10010
*a
RH Side
*b
LH Side
*c
Turn
*d
Hold
NOTICE:
Turn SST in the direction as shown in the illustration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000045EQ00OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001S2N02GX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Secure the tie rod assembly in a vise.
NOTICE:
Do not overtighten the vise.
(b) Turn the ball joint back and forth.

OK:
There is no unusual resistance or play while turning.
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, remove the tie rod end sub-assembly with a new one.
If the dust seal is fissured, damaged or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.
2. INSPECT TOTAL PRELOAD

NOTICE:
Inspect the total preload in a no-load condition by removing the tie rod assembly RH and LH,
and steering rack boots.
(a) Install SST to the pinion shaft and turn it left and right 5
times or more.
SST: 09616-00011
(b) Set a torque wrench to SST and turn the pinion shaft continuously at a rate of 4 to 6 seconds per
turn to inspect the total preload of the steering gear assembly.
Standard Preload:
NOTICE:
Inspect the total preload around the steering rack center position.
HINT:
If the total preload is not within the specified range, adjust the total preload.
3. ADJUST TOTAL PRELOAD

(a) Temporarily install the rack ends sub-assembly RH and LH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001S2N02GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
(b) Install the steering rack guide and steering rack guide spring to the steering rack housing.
(c) Apply the three bond to the screw part of steering rack guide spring cap and steering rack
housing.
(d) Temporally install the steering rack guide spring cap.
(e) Using SST, tighten the steering rack guide spring cap so
that the rotational torque of the pinion shaft reaches the
standard value.
SST: 09631-10021
SST: 09616-00011
Torque: Preload (turning):
(f) Apply the three bond to the screw part of lock nut.
(g) Using SST, hold the steering rack guide spring cap and
tighten the lock nut.
SST: 09631-10021
SST: 09922-10010
NOTICE:
situations where SST is combined with a torque wrench
.
(h) Set a torque wrench to SST and turn the pinion shaft continuously at a rate of 4 to 6 seconds per
turn to inspect the total preload of the steering gear assembly.
SST: 09616-00011
Standard Preload:
0.9 to 1.6 N*m (9.2 to 16.3 kgf*cm, 8.0to 14.2 in.*lbf)
NOTICE:
Inspect the total preload around the steering rack center position.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001S2N02GX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001S2M03AX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the rack and pinion power steering gear assembly with the 2 bolts.
HINT:
Confirm that the rack is positioned in neutral.
2. CONNECT STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Align the matchmarks and install the steering

intermediate shaft to the rack and pinion power steering
gear assembly.
*1
Matchmark
(b) Install the new bolt.

3. CONNECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Connect the tie rod end sub-assembly LH to the steering knuckle with the nut.
(b) Install a new cotter pin.
NOTICE:
Further tighten the nut up to 60 if the holes for the cotter pin are not aligned.
4. CONNECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
5. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER BAR

(a) Install the front stabilizer bar together with the rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly LH and
RH to the front suspension cross member with the new 8 bolts.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001S2M03AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6. CONNECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Connect the front stabilizer link assembly LH to the front

stabilizer bar with the new nut.
If the ball joint turns together with the nut, use a
hexagon wrench to hold the stud bolt.
7. CONNECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:

10. INSTALL FRONT WHEELS
11. INSPECT AND ADJUST FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT

13. PERFORM MEMORIZATION
HINT:
Perform VSC sensor neutral memorization
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001S2M03AX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000045ER00OX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. ADJUST TOTAL PRELOAD
2. INSTALL STEERING RACK END SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, install the steering rack end sub-assembly.
SST: 09922-10010
*a
RH Side
*b
LH Side
*c
Turn
*d
Hold
HINT:
Using SST, hold the steering rack and install the steering rack end sub-assembly.

NOTICE:
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for situations where SST is combined with a
torque wrench
.
Fix the steering rack firmly in place.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 STEERING RACK BOOT

HINT:
(a) Wipe the old grease off of the No. 1 steering rack boot and rack end mating groove.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000045ER00OX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Apply silicone grease to the inside of the small opening of

a new No. 1 steering rack boot.
(c) Install the No. 1 steering rack boot to the groove on the rack housing.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage or twist the boot.
Make sure that the boot is free of rust and foreign matter.
4. INSTALL NO. 1 STEERING RACK BOOT CLAMP

HINT:
(a) Install the new No. 1 steering rack boot clamp to the No.
1 steering rack boot in such a way that the staked part of
the clamp is positioned with in the range, as shown in the
illustration.
*a
150
(b) Using SST, tighten a new No. 1 steering rack boot clamp
SST: 09521-24010
Clearance:
2.0 mm (0.079 in.) or less
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the No. 1 steering rack boot.
If the No. 1 steering rack boot is fissured, damaged or
deteriorated, replace it with a new one.
5. INSTALL STEERING RACK BOOT CLIP

HINT:
2/3
8/6/12
(a) Using pliers, install the steering rack boot clip.
6. INSPECT RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY

(a) Using SST, rotate the pinion shaft to see if both the left
and the right steering rack boots expand and contract
smoothly.
SST: 09616-00011
NOTICE:
Set the pinion shaft at the neutral position after the
inspection.
HINT:
If the operation cannot be done as specified, use a new
steering rack boot clamp and reinstall the steering rack
boots.
7. INSTALL TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Temporarily tighten the lock nut and tie rod end subassembly LH to the steering rack end sub-assembly until
the matchmarks are aligned.
*1
Matchmark
HINT:
After adjusting the front wheel alignment, securely tighten
the lock nut.
Temporarily tighten - Torque: 5.0 Nm (51 kgfcm,

44inlbf)
Securely tighten - Torque: 85 Nm (869 kgfcm,
63ftlbf)
8. INSTALL TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
Use the procedure as for the LH side.
3/3
8/6/12
STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001S2P03AX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
Be sure to align the front wheels straight ahead when removing and installing the steering gear
assembly.
When disconnecting the steering intermediate shaft assembly and the pinion shaft of the steering
gear assembly, be sure to place matchmarks before servicing.
1. PLACE FRONT WHEELS FACING STRAIGHT AHEAD

2. REMOVE FRONT WHEELS
3. SECURE STEERING WHEEL ASSEMBLY
(a) Secure the steering wheel assembly with the seat belt in
order to prevent rotation.
HINT:
This operation is useful to prevent damage to the spiral cable.

6. DISCONNECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the nut and front stabilizer link assembly LH from
the front stabilizer bar.
7. DISCONNECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001S2P03AX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
8. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER BAR
(a) Remove the 8 bolts, and remove the front stabilizer bar
together with the rear body mounting cushion subassembly LH and RH from the front suspension cross
member.
9. SEPARATE STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Put matchmarks on the steering intermediate shaft

assembly and rack and pinion power steering gear
assembly.
*1
Matchmark
(b) Remove the bolt.

(c) Disconnect the steering intermediate shaft assembly from the rack and pinion power steering gear
assembly.
10. DISCONNECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the cotter pin and nut.
(b) Install SST to the tie rod end sub-assembly LH.

SST: 09960-20010
2/4
8/6/12
09961-02060
NOTICE:
Make sure that the lower ends of the tie rod end subassembly LH and SST are aligned.
(c) Secure SST using a string.

NOTICE:
Be sure to tighten the string firmly to secure SST to the steering knuckle to prevent SST from
falling off.
(d) Using SST, separate the tie rod end sub-assembly LH from the steering knuckle.
*1
Center Nut
*a
String
Place the wrench here.
*b
Grease Application Area
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02010
CAUTION:
Apply grease to the bolt threads and the tip of SST.
NOTICE:
Install SST with the center nut so that A and B shown in the illustration are parallel. Otherwise, the
dust cover may be damaged.
3/4
8/6/12
Be sure to place the wrench on the part indicated in the illustration.

Do not damage the front disc brake dust cover.
Do not damage the ball joint dust cover.
Do not damage the steering knuckle.
11. DISCONNECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
12. REMOVE RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and rack and pinion power steering
gear assembly.
4/4
8/6/12
ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001BCN021X
Title: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
NOTICE:
If the wheel alignment has been adjusted, and if suspension or underbody components have
been removed/installed or replaced, be sure to perform the following initialization procedure
in order for the system to function normally:
Perform zero point calibration of the yaw rate and acceleration sensor and test mode
inspection
.
1. INSPECT TIRES
2. MEASURE VEHICLE HEIGHT
(a) Bounce the vehicle up and down at the corners to
stabilize the suspension before inspecting the vehicle
height.
Vehicle Height (Unloaded Vehicle)
TIRE SIZE
215/45 R17
P215/45 R17
FRONT B - A
REAR C
FRONT D
375 mm
REAR E
146 mm
225 mm
(5.75 in.)
(8.86 in.) (14.76 in.)
(14.65 in.)
146 mm
225 mm
372 mm
(5.75 in.)
(8.86 in.) (14.76 in.)
375 mm
372 mm
(14.65 in.)
NOTICE:
Perform the inspection while the vehicle is empty (with a
spare tire, jack and tools on board, and with the fuel tank
filled with fuel).
The standard value shown here is a value that is used for
adjusting the wheel alignment and does not indicate the
height of an actual vehicle.
Measuring points:
A
Ground clearance of front lower suspension arm set front
bolt center
B
Ground clearance of front wheel center
C
Ground clearance of lower control arm set bolt center
D
Front wheel arch height of front wheel center
E
Rear wheel arch height of rear wheel center
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001BCN021X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
3. INSPECT CAMBER, CASTER AND STEERING AXIS

INCLINATION
NOTICE:
Perform the inspection while the vehicle is empty (with
a spare tire, jack and tools on board, and with the fuel
tank filled with fuel).
(a) Put the front wheel on the center of the alignment tester.
*1
Alignment tester
*2
Camber-Caster-Steering Axis Inclination Gauge
(b) Remove the wheel cap.

(c) Set the camber-caster-steering axis inclination gauge at
the center of the axle hub or drive shaft.
(d) Inspect the camber, caster and steering axis inclination.
Standard Dimension (Unloaded Vehicle):
CAMBER
CASTER
STEERING AXIS INCLINATION
(REFERENCE)
(REFERENCE)
0 +/- 45'
554'
1531'
(0 +/- 0.75)
(5.90)
(15.52)
NOTICE:
Perform the inspection while the vehicle is empty (with a
spare tire, jack and tools on board, and with the fuel tank
filled with fuel).
The tolerance for the difference between the left and right
wheels is 45' (0.75) or less for both the camber.
(e) Remove the camber-caster-steering axis inclination gauge
and attachment.
(f) Install the wheel cap.
If the caster and steering axis inclination are not within
the specified values after the camber has been correctly
adjusted, recheck the suspension parts for damage and
wear.
4. ADJUST CAMBER
NOTICE:
Inspect toe-in after the camber has been adjusted.
(a) Remove the front wheel.
2/7
8/6/12
(b) Loosen the lower mounting bolt and nut of the front
shock absorber assembly and steering knuckle.
(c) Replace the upper mounting bolt of the front shock

absorber assembly and steering knuckle with a service
bolt. (Part No.: SU003-02818)
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the rear side of the vehicle.
(d) Pivot the lower mounting bolt to move the front shock
absorber assembly and steering knuckle, and use the play
between the bolt and bolt holds of the steering knuckle
and front shock absorber assembly to adjust the camber.
NOTICE:
Left-right tolerance for camber is to be 045' (0.75) or
less.
HINT:
The range that can be adjusted by replacing bolts is 0+/- 45'
(0+/- 0.75).
(e) Tighten the 2 bolts and 2 new nuts.

(f) Install the front wheel.

(g) Lower the vehicle and bounce it up and down several times to stabilize the front suspension.
3/7
8/6/12
(h) Check the camber.

(i) Check the toe-in.
5. INSPECT TOE-IN
(a) Bounce the vehicle up and down at the corners to stabilize the suspension.
(b) Release the parking brake and move the shift lever to the neutral position (for manual
transmission).
(c) Release the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (for Automatic transmission).
(d) Push the vehicle straight ahead approximately 5 m (16.4 ft.). (Step A)
(e) Put tread center marks on the rearmost points of the front wheels and measure the distance
between the marks (dimension B).
*a
Tread Center Mark
*b
Dimension B
(f) Slowly push the vehicle straight ahead to cause the front wheels to rotate 180. Use the front tire
valve as a reference point.
HINT:
Do not allow the wheels to rotate more than 180. If the wheels rotate more than 180, perform the
procedure from Step A again.
(g) Measure the distance between the tread center marks on the front side of the wheels (dimension
A).
4/7
8/6/12
*a
Dimension A
Standard Dimension (Unloaded Vehicle):

SPECIFIED CONDITION
C + D: 000' +/- 011' (0.00 +/- 0.19)
B - A: 0 +/- 3.0 mm (0 +/- 0.1181 in.)
HINT:
Measure "B - A" only when "C + D" cannot be measured.
If the toe-in is not within the specified value, adjust it at the rack ends.
6. ADJUST TOE-IN
(a) Measure the thread lengths of the right and left rack
ends.
Standard:
Difference in thread length of 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.) or less
(b) Remove the rack boot set clips.
(c) Loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.
(d) Adjust the rack ends if the difference in thread length
between the right and left rack ends is not within the
specified range.
(1) If the toe-in measurement is greater than the
specified range (too much toe-out), extend the shorter
rack end so that the length difference is within the
specified range.
(2) If the toe-in measurement is less than the specified
range (too much toe-in), shorten the longer rack end
so that the length difference is within the specified
range.
5/7
8/6/12
(3) Measure the toe-in.

(e) Turn the right and left rack ends by an equal amount to
adjust the toe-in.
(f) Make sure that the thread lengths of the right and left
rack ends are the same.
(g) Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts.
(h) Place the steering rack boots on the seats and install the
steering rack boot clips.
HINT:
Make sure that the steering rack boots are not twisted.
7. INSPECT WHEEL ANGLE

(a) Put tread center marks on the rearmost points of a turning radius gauge.
*a
Inside
*b
Outside
(b) Turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right and measure the turning angle.
HINT:
Inspect while the vehicle is unloaded.
Wheel Turning Angle (Unloaded Vehicle):

INSIDE WHEEL
OUTSIDE WHEEL
(REFERENCE)
(REFERENCE)
3654'
3112'
(43.90)
(31.20)
6/7
8/6/12

7/7
8/6/12
ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WXS028X
Title: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
NOTICE:
If the wheel alignment has been adjusted, and if suspension or underbody components have
been removed/installed or replaced, be sure to perform the following initialization procedure
in order for the system to function normally:
Perform zero point calibration of the yaw rate and acceleration sensor and test mode
inspection
.
1. INSPECT TIRES
2. MEASURE VEHICLE HEIGHT
3. INSPECT TOE-IN
NOTICE:
Inspect while the vehicle is unloaded.
(a) Bounce the vehicle up and down at the corners to stabilize the suspension.
(b) Release the parking brake and move the shift lever to N.
(c) Push the vehicle straight ahead approximately 5 m (16.4 ft.). (Step B)
(d) Put tread center marks on the rearmost points of the rear wheels and measure the distance
between the marks (dimension B).
*a
Tread Center Mark
*b
Dimension B
(e) Slowly push the vehicle straight ahead to cause the rear wheels to rotate 180. Use the rear tire
valve as a reference point.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WXS028X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
Do not allow the wheels to rotate more than 180. If the wheels rotate more than 180, perform the
procedure from Step B again.
(f) Measure the distance between the tread center marks on the front of the rear wheels (dimension
A).
*a
Dimension A
Toe-in (Unloaded Vehicle):

SPECIFIED CONDITION
C + D: 010' +/- 015' (0.16 +/- 0.24)
B - A: 2.0 +/- 3.0 mm(0.0787 +/- 0.1181 in.)
HINT:
Measure "B - A" only when "C + D" cannot be measured.
If the toe-in is not within the specified range, adjust it at the toe control link sub-assembly.
4. ADJUST TOE-IN
(a) Loosen the toe adjust cam nut.
(b) Turn the adjust cams by an equal amount to adjust the toe-in.
Toe-in (Unloaded Vehicle):
2/4
8/6/12
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C + D: 010' +/- 015' (0.16 +/- 0.24)
B - A: 2.0 +/- 3.0 mm(0.0787 +/- 0.1181 in.)
HINT:
Try to adjust the toe-in to the center value.
The toe-in will change by approximately 1.3 mm (0.051 in.) for each gradation of the cam.
(c) Tighten the toe adjust cam nut.
5. INSPECT CAMBER
(a) Remove the center wheel ornament.
(b) Install a camber-caster-kingpin gauge at the center of the

axle hub or drive shaft.
*1
Camber-caster-kingpin Gauge
(c) Inspect the camber.

Camber (Unloaded Vehicle):
CAMBER INCLINATION
-112' +/- 45'
45' (0.75) or less
(-1.20 +/- 0.75)
If the measured value is not within the specified range, inspect the suspension parts for damage
and wear. Replace parts as necessary because camber cannot be properly adjusted with any
damaged or worn parts.
(d) Remove the camber-caster-kingpin gauge.
(e) Install the center wheel ornament.
6. INSPECT REAR SUSPENSION
(a) Inspect the rear suspension member.

(1) Measure the distance between the centers of the 2
installation bolts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm
3/4
8/6/12
assembly LH and RH
Standard distance:
442.8 to 448.8 mm (17.43 to 17.67 in.)
If the distance is not within the specified range,
replace the rear suspension member.
(b) Inspect the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly.

(1) Measure the distance between the centers of the 2
installation bolts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly.
Standard distance:
447.9 to 451.9 mm (17.63 to 17.79 in.)
If the distance is not within the specified range,
replace the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly.
(c) Inspect and adjust the toe-in and camber.
(1) Inspect the toe-in and camber.
Inspect the toe-in and camber. If the values are not within the specified ranges, adjust the
installation bolt holding the rear suspension member to the vehicle body, or the bolt holding
the upper control arm and rear suspension arm so that the values fall within the specified
ranges.

4/4
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004EOJ00OX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004EOJ00OX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004EOJ00OX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058PR000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
1. REMOVE FRONT LOWER NO. 1 ARM BUSH LH
(a) Using SST and a press, install the front lower No. 1 arm
bush LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01080
09711-01110
2. REMOVE FRONT LOWER NO. 2 ARM BUSH LH
(a) Using SST, install the front lower No. 2 arm bush LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01070
09711-01090
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PR000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058V1000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Inspect the state of rotation of the ball joint.
(1) With the brake pedal depressed, attempt to move the top and bottom of the front tire in the
axial direction, and confirm that there is no play.
(2) If there is any play, replace the front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
(3) With the brake pedal released, attempt to move the top and bottom of the front tire in the
axial direction, and confirm that there is no play.
(4) If there is any play, replace the front axle hub.
(5) Install the nut to the front lower suspension arm assembly LH stud.
(6) Turn the stud back and forth.

Standard:
There is no unusual resistance or play.
(7) If there is any unusual resistance or play, replace the front lower suspension arm assembly LH
with a new one.
(b) Inspect the dust cover.
(1) Check that the dust cover is not cracked and that there is no grease on it.
(2) If the dust cover is cracked or there is grease on it, replace the front lower suspension arm
assembly LH with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058V1000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004EGK01DX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM BOLT

(a) Using SST, install the new front lower suspension arm bolt.
SST: 09726-18011
2. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Temporarily tighten the front lower suspension arm assembly LH with the bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the front of the vehicle.
3. INSTALL STEERING KNUCKLE LH

(a) Install the front lower arm suspension arm assembly LH with the nut to the steering knuckle LH.
(b) Install new clip.
4. INSTALL TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

5. INSTALL LOWER ARM SUPPORT PLATE
(a) Install the lower arm support plate with the new bolt and new nut.

7. STABILIZE SUSPENSION
8. FULLY TIGHTEN FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Fully tighten the nut on the rear of the front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
9. INSTALL REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER LH

(a) Install the rear engine under cover LH with the 3 clips.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004EGK01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004EGK01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058PS000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT LOWER NO. 1 ARM BUSH LH

(a) Using SST, install the front lower No. 1 arm bushing LH to the front lower suspension arm
assembly LH so that the fitting dimensions come within the specifications shown in the illustration.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01080
09711-01110
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PS000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
*1 Front Lower Suspension Arm Assembly LH
*2 Front Lower No. 2 Arm Bush LH
*a 44 to 50
*b 25.0 to 26.0 mm (0.984 to 1.023 in.)
*c 26.5 to 27.5 mm (1.043 to 1.083 in.)
2. INSTALL FRONT LOWER NO. 2 ARM BUSH LH
(a) Using SST, install the front lower No. 2 arm bush LH to the
front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01070
09711-01090
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PS000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004EGK01EX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. REMOVE REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER LH
(a) Remove the 3 clips and rear engine under cover LH.
3. REMOVE LOWER ARM SUPPORT PLATE
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and lower arm support plate.
4. SEPARATE TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

5. SEPARATE STEERING KNUCKLE LH
6. REMOVE FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004EGK01EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and front lower suspension arm
assembly LH from the front cross member sub-assembly.
7. REMOVE FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM BOLT
(a) Using SST, remove the front lower suspension arm bolt.
SST: 09726-18011
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004EGK01EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011DE02HX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DE02HX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058PO000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. REMOVE FRONT SUPPORT TO FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER NUT LH
(a) Secure the SST in a vise.

SST: 09727-30021
09727-00010
09727-00021
09727-00031
(b) Attach the arm of SST to the diameter of the front coil
spring LH.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the front coil spring LH is installed so that

the distance between the upper and lower hooks of SST
is at the maximum.
Make sure that the claws on the hooks are securely
engaged.
(c) Using SST, compress the front coil spring LH.

CAUTION:
If the front coil spring LH bends during the compression, immediately stop the compression and
reinstall SST.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PO000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
Do not compress the spring until the front coil spring LH contact each other.
Do not use an impact wrench.
(d) Using a long socket hexagon wrench 6mm, fix the shock absorber rod.
(e) Confirm that the front coil spring LH becomes free and
remove the lock nut.
SST: 09729-97202
CAUTION:
Do not remove the lock nut when the front coil spring LH
is not free.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage or deform the threaded section.
Fully insert a long socket hexagon wrench 6mm.
2. REMOVE FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Remove the front suspension support sub-assembly LH.
3. REMOVE FRONT SPRING SEAT

(a) Remove the front spring seat.
4. REMOVE FRONT SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Remove the front spring bumper.
5. REMOVE FRONT COIL SPRING INSULATOR UPPER LH

(a) Remove the front coil spring upper insulator LH.
6. REMOVE FRONT SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Remove the front spring bumper LH.
7. REMOVE FRONT COIL SPRING LH

(a) Release the SST and remove the front coil spring LH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PO000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011DB02IX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
1. DISPOSE OF FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Affix the front shock absorber assembly LH perpendicularly.
(b) Push the piston rod down approximately 70 mm (2.756 in.) by hand.
(c) Using a metal saw or the like, slowly cut a hole in the location shown in the illustration and let the
gas out.
Area to cut a hole
NOTICE:
Wear protective glasses.
Since the discharging gas may cause chips to scatter, cover the metal saw with a piece of cloth
when making the hole.
HINT:
The gas is colorless, odorless and non-poisonous.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DB02IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011DD02JX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Compress and extend the shock absorber rod 4 or more

times.
Standard:
There is no abnormal resistance or sound and operation
resistance is normal.
If there is any abnormality, replace the front shock
absorber assembly with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DD02JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011DC03FX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING

(a) Install the front shock absorber with coil spring (upper side) with the 3 new nuts.
(b) Install the front shock absorber with coil spring (lower side) to the steering knuckle and insert the
2 bolts and 2 new nuts.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the rear of the vehicle.

NOTICE:
While keeping the bolts from rotating, tighten the nuts.
2. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the front stabilizer link assembly to the front shock absorber assembly with a new nut.
(b) Using a socket hexagon wrench 6 mm, fix the stud bolt and install the front stabilizer link assembly
LH with a new nut.
3. INSTALL FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE

(a) Install the front flexible hose to the front shock absorber assembly with the bolt.
4. INSTALL FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT DUST COVER LH

(a) Install the front suspension support dust cover LH to the front shock absorber with coil spring.
5. INSTALL FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH

(a) Install the front speed sensor LH to the front shock absorber assembly with the 2 clamps.
NOTICE:
Do not twist the front speed sensor when installing it.

(a) Lower the vehicle and bounce it up and down several times to stabilize the front suspension.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DC03FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DC03FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058PP000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Install the front spring bumper LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
2. INSTALL FRONT COIL SPRING INSULATOR UPPER LH

(a) Install the front coil spring insulator upper LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
3. INSTALL FRONT COIL SPRING LH

SST: 09727-30021
09727-00010
09727-00021
09727-00031
(b) Install SST to the front coil spring LH with the hooks
spread as far apart as possible from each other.
(c) Attach the arm of SST to the diameter of the coil spring.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PP000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
CAUTION:
Make sure that the front coil spring LH is installed so that

the distance between the upper and lower hooks of SST
is at the maximum.
Make sure that the claws on the hooks are securely
engaged.
(d) Using SST, compress the front coil spring LH.

CAUTION:
If the front coil spring LH bends during the compression, immediately stop the compression and
reinstall SST.
Do not compress the spring until the coil springs contact each other.
(e) Install the front coil spring LH so that the lower end of the
spring and lower side spring seat stopper are aligned.
*1
Front Coil Spring LH
*a
0 to 10 mm (0 to 0.397 in.)
*b
Spring Seat Stopper
4. INSTALL FRONT SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Install the front spring bumper LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
5. INSTALL FRONT SPRING SEAT

(a) Install the front spring seat to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
6. INSTALL FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the front suspension support sub-assembly LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
7. INSTALL FRONT SUPPORT TO FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER NUT LH

(a) Using a long socket hexagon wrench 6, fix the shock absorber rod.
2/3
8/6/12
(b) Using SST, install a new front support to front shock

absorber nut LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
SST: 09729-97202
*a
Fulcrum Length
*b
40 mm (1.575 in.)

NOTICE:
Use a torque wrench wiht a fulcrum length of 300 mm
(11.81 in.)
Be careful not to damage or deform the threaded section.
Securely set the long socket hexagon wrench 6.
3/3
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011DF02NX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. SEPARATE FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH
(a) Remove the 2 clamps and separate the front speed

sensor LH from the front shock absorber with coil spring.
3. SEPARATE FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE
(a) Remove the bolt and separate the front flexible hose from
the front shock absorber with coil spring.
4. SEPARATE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the nut and separate the front stabilizer link
assembly LH from the front shock absorber with coil
spring.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DF02NX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12

5. REMOVE FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT DUST COVER LH

HINT:
If it is necessary to disassemble the front shock absorber with coil spring, remove the front
suspension support dust cover LH.
(a) Remove the front suspension support dust cover LH.
6. REMOVE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING
(a) Support the front axle using a jack and wooden block.
*1
Wooden Block
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and 2 nuts, and separate the front
shock absorber with coil spring (lower side) from the
2/3
8/6/12
steering knuckle.
(c) Remove the 3 nuts from the front upper coil spring
insulator LH.
(d) Remove the front shock absorber with coil spring.
3/3
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011I6031X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011I6031X.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011I6031X.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011DO051X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the ball joint.
(1) Secure the front stabilizer link assembly in a vise using
aluminum plates.
(2) Install the nut to the front stabilizer link assembly
stud.
Standard:
(4) If there is any unusual resistance or play, replace the
front stabilizer link assembly with a new one.
(2) If the dust cover is cracked or there is grease on it, replace the front stabilizer link assembly
with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DO051X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011DN03YX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for LH Side)
(a) Install the front No. 1 stabilizer bar bushing so that it is
positioned closer to the outside of the vehicle than the
front stabilizer bar stopper ring.
NOTICE:
Install the front No. 1 stabilizer bar bushing so that the
arrow mark is facing towards the front of the vehicle.
*1
Front No. 1 Stabilizer Bar Bushing
*a
*b
Outside of the Vehicle
*c
Stopper Ring
*d
Arrow
2. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for RH Side)

HINT:
Perform the same procedure as for the LH side.
3. INSTALL FRONT NO. 2 STABILIZER BRACKET LH
(a) Install the front No. 2 stabilizer bracket LH to the rear

body mounting cushion sub-assembly with the bolt and
nut.
Bolt - Torque: 75 Nm (765 kgfcm, 55ftlbf)
Nut - Torque: 25 Nm (255 kgfcm, 18ftlbf)
4. INSTALL FRONT NO. 2 STABILIZER BRACKET RH

HINT:
Perform the same procedure as the LH side.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DN03YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
5. INSTALL REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly LH and front stabilizer bar with the 4 new
bolts.
6. INSTALL REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:

(a) Using a hexagon wrench 6 mm, fix the stud bolt, and install the front stabilizer link assembly LH to
the front stabilizer bar with a new nut.
(b) Using a hexagon wrench 6 mm, fix the stud bolt, and install the front stabilizer link assembly LH to
the front shock absorber with coil spring with a new nut.
8. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
9. INSTALL REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER LH

10. INSTALL REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER RH
HINT:


https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DN03YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011DP03YX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. REMOVE REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER LH
5. REMOVE REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER RH
HINT:
6. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Using a socket hexagon 6 mm, fix the stud bolt, and
remove the nut.
(b) Remove the front stabilizer link assembly LH from the front shock absorber with coil spring.
(c) Using a socket hexagon 6 mm, fix the stud bolt, and
remove the nut.
(d) Remove the front stabilizer link assembly LH from the front stabilizer bar.
7. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011DP03YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
8. REMOVE REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Remove the 4 bolts, and remove the front stabilizer bar and the body mounting cushion subassembly LH together.
Bolt
Vehicle for Front Side
9. REMOVE REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
10. REMOVE FRONT NO. 2 STABILIZER BRACKET LH
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and front No. 2 stabilizer bracket LH
from the rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly.
11. REMOVE FRONT NO. 2 STABILIZER BRACKET RH

HINT:
12. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER BAR

2/3
8/6/12
(a) Remove the front stabilizer bar from the rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly.
13. REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for LH Side)

(a) Remove the front No. 1 stabilizer bar bushing from the front stabilizer bar.
14. REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for RH Side)

HINT:
3/3
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058PU000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PU000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058PT000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Install the front suspension upper to cowl brace sub-assembly with the new bolt and 3 new nuts.

HINT:
Use the same procedure for the RH side as for the LH side.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PT000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058PV000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Remove the bolt, 3 nuts and the front suspension upper
to cowl brace sub-assembly LH
*a
Bolt
*b
Nut

HINT:
Use the same procedure for the RH side as for the LH side.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058PV000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000035CJ01DX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000035CJ01DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000035CJ01DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034GK01OX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT CROSS MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Tighten 4 new bolts in the order shown in the illustration, and temporarily install the front cross
Vehicle of Front Side
Bolt
(b) Tighten the 4 bolts.

2. ADJUST SHIFT LEVER POSITION (for Automatic Transmission)

NOTICE:
If the front cross member sub-assembly mounting bolts are loosened even if only slightly,
check adjustment with the shift lever
.
3. INSTALL RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

5. INSTALL REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034GK01OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
7. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
8. INSTALL FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
9. INSTALL FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
10. INSTALL ENGINE ASSEMBLY

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034GK01OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034GL01OX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE ENGINE ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
3. REMOVE FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
4. SEPARATE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH

5. SEPARATE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
6. REMOVE REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

7. REMOVE REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
8. REMOVE RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
9. REMOVE FRONT CROSS MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 4 bolts and front cross member sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034GL01OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
Bolt
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034GL01OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003CRU02CX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use the table below to help determine the cause of problem symptoms. If multiple suspected areas
are listed, the potential causes of the symptoms are listed in order of probability in the "Suspected
Area" column of the table. Check each symptom by checking the suspected areas in the order they
are listed. Replace parts as necessary.
Front Suspension System

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Tire (worn or improperly inflated)

Front wheel alignment (incorrect)
Vehicle pulls to one side while driving
Rear wheel alignment (incorrect)

Front hub bearing (worn)
Front shock absorber (worn)
Rear shock absorber (worn)
Vehicle (overloaded)
Bottoming

Sways/pitches

Wheel (out of balance)
Wheel shimmy

Front lower suspension arm (worn)
Front hub bearing (worn)
Abnormal tire wear

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003CRU02CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003CRU02CX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFT00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFT00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFT00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XF000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM BUSHING

(a) Using SST, remove the rear No. 1 suspension arm bushing from the rear No. 1 suspension arm
assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01040
09711-01100
Pressing direction
2. REMOVE REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM BUSHING

(a) Using SST, remove the rear No. 2 suspension arm bushing from the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01050
09711-01090
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XF000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
Pressing direction
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XF000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFS00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Temporarily install the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly to the rear suspension member with
the bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the front side of the vehicle.
(b) Temporarily install the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly to the axle carrier with the bolt and
new nut.
NOTICE:
2. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING

(a) Temporarily install the rear shock absorber with coil spring to the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH with the bolt and new nut.
HINT:
The bolt may be inserted from either direction.
3. INSTALL STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

(a) Temporarily install the rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly LH to the axle carrier with the new
bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from inside the vehicle.
(b) Temporarily install the rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly LH to the rear suspension member
with the new bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from outside the vehicle.
6. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Fully tighten the 2 bolt and 2 nut of the rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly LH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFS00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
8. INSTALL NO. 1 PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET

(a) Install the No. 1 parking brake cable support bracket with the bolt.

10. INSPECT AND ADJUST REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFS00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XG000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM BUSHING

(a) Using SST and a press, install a new rear No. 2 suspension arm bushing to the rear No. 2
suspension arm assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01050
09711-01090
Pressing direction
2. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM BUSHING

(a) Using SST and a press, install a new rear No. 1 suspension arm bushing to the rear No. 1
suspension arm assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01060
09711-01100
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XG000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
Pressing direction
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XG000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFU00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. REMOVE NO. 1 PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET
(a) Remove the bolt and No.1 parking brake cable support
bracket.
3. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts, 2 nuts and the rear No. 1 suspension
arm assembly LH.
4. SEPARATE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

5. SEPARATE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFU00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear shock
absorber with coil spring from the rear No. 2 suspension
arm assembly.
(a) Remove the nut and bolt on the axle carrier side, and
then separate the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH.
(b) Remove the bolt and nut on the rear suspension member
side, and then remove the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFU00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IG500DX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IG500DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XC000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. REMOVE REAR SUPPORT TO REAR SHOCK ABSORBER NUT LH

SST: 09727-30021
09727-00010
09727-00021
09727-00031
(b) Set the arm hooks of SST on the middle line on the spring
outer circumference.
CAUTION:
Install SST to the rear coil spring LH so that the distance

between the upper and lower hooks is as wide as
possible within the installation area.
Check that the claws of the hooks are attached securely.
(c) Using SST, compress the rear coil spring LH.

CAUTION:
During the work, if the rear coil spring LH is arched, immediately stop the work and reset SST.
Do not compress the spring until each coil contacts each other.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XC000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)

(d) After the rear coil spring LH becomes free of load, install
SST to the rear support to rear shock absorber nut LH.
And then, using a long socket hexagon 5 mm, hold the
piston rod of the rear shock absorber assembly and
remove the rear support to rear shock absorber nut LH.
SST: 09729-18010
CAUTION:
When the rear coil spring LH is still applied with load, do
not remove the rear support to rear shock absorber nut
LH.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage or deform the threads.
Securely set the long socket hexagon 5 mm.
2. REMOVE REAR SUSPENSION SUPPORT ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Remove the rear suspension support assembly LH from rear shock absorber assembly LH.
3. REMOVE REAR UPPER SPRING SEAT LH

(a) Remove the rear upper spring seat LH from the rear suspension support assembly LH.
4. REMOVE REAR COIL SPRING LH

(a) Remove the rear coil spring from the rear shock absorber assembly LH. Release the SST and
remove the rear coil spring.
CAUTION:
Do not use an impact wrench. It will damage.
5. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SHOCK ABSORBER DUST COVER LH

(a) Remove the rear No. 1 shock absorber dust cover LH form the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
6. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Remove the rear No. 1 spring bumper LH from the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XC000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
1. DISPOSE OF REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Hold the rear shock absorber assembly LH perpendicularly.
(b) Push down the piston rod about 60 mm (2.362 in.) by hand.
(c) Using a metal saw or the like, slowly cut a hole in the location shown in the illustration and let the
gas out.
Area to cut a hole
NOTICE:
Wear protective glasses.
Since the discharging gas may cause chips to scatter, cover the metal saw with a piece of cloth
when making the hole.
HINT:
The gas is colorless, odorless and harmless.
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XB000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Check of the rear shock absorber assembly LH

(1) Compress and extend the shock absorber rod and
check the conditions.
Standard:
Compress and extend the shock absorber rod at a
constant speed, and check that the operating load is even
at all strokes and that there is no abnormal resistance or
abnormal sound during the operation.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XB000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING

(a) Mount the rear shock absorber with coil spring on the vehicle.
(b) Install rear shock absorber with coil spring with the 2 new nuts.

(a) Replace the mounting nuts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly LH and rear suspension
member sub-assembly with new nut and then temporarily tighten them.
(b) Temporarily install the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly LH to the rear axle carrier subassembly LH with the bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the front of the vehicle.
(c) Temporarily install the rear shock absorber with coil spring with the bolt and new nut.
HINT:
3. TEMPORARILY INSTALL STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

(a) Temporarily install the rear stabilizer link sub-assembly to the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH with the bolt and new nut.
(a) Jack up the axle carrier, with a wooden block placed

between the jack and axle carrier, to apply load to the
suspension so that the rear drive shaft assembly
becomes level.
*a
Wooden Block

(a) Fully tighten the nut on the rear axle carrier sub-assembly LH side.
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

(b) Fully tighten the nut holding the rear shock absorber.
(c) Fully tighten the nut on the rear suspension member sub-assembly side.
6. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Fully tighten the nut rear stabilizer link sub-assembly side.

8. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER LH

9. INSTALL REAR FLOOR FINISH PLATE
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XD000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Install the rear No. 1 spring bumper LH to the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
2. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 SHOCK ABSORBER DUST COVER LH

(a) Install the rear No. 1 shock absorber dust cover LH to the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
3. INSTALL REAR COIL SPRING LH

SST: 09727-30021
09727-00010
09727-00021
09727-00031
(b) Set the arm hooks of SST on the middle line on the spring
outer circumference.
CAUTION:
Install SST to the rear coil spring LH so that the distance

between the upper and lower hooks is as wide as
possible within the installation area.
Check that the claws of the hooks are attached securely.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XD000X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
(c) Using SST, compress the rear coil spring LH.

CAUTION:
During the work, if the rear coil spring LH is arched, immediately stop the work and reset SST.
Do not compress the spring until each coil contacts each other.
(d) Install the rear coil spring LH with the lower end of the
coil spring and the stopper of the spring seat fit.
HINT:
Fit the lower end of the rear coil spring LH into the gap of the
absorber lower seat.
*1
Rear Coil Spring LH
*a
0 to 10 mm (0 to 0.394 in.)
*b
Stopper of spring seat
4. INSTALL REAR UPPER SPRING SEAT LH

(a) Install the rear upper spring seat LH to the rear coil spring LH.
5. INSTALL REAR SUSPENSION SUPPORT ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear suspension support assembly LH to the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
6. INSTALL REAR SUPPORT TO REAR SHOCK ABSORBER NUT LH

(a) Temporarily tighten a new rear support to rear shock absorber nut LH to the rear shock absorber
assembly LH.
2/4
8/6/12
*a
for LH side
*b
for RH side
*c
75 to 85
*d
Lower End
Vehicle of Outside
(b) Adjust the rear suspension support assembly LH to the installation position of the shock absorber
so that the studs are positioned as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the left coil spring end faces toward the front of the vehicle and the right spring
end faces toward the rear.
(c) Release SST and remove it from the rear coil spring LH.
CAUTION:
Do not use an impact wrench
NOTICE:
Remove SST after confirming the position of the suspension support assembly.
(d) Install SST to the rear support to rear shock absorber nut
LH. And then, using a long socket hexagon 5 mm, hold the
piston rod of the rear shock absorber assembly LH, and
3/4
8/6/12
tighten the rear support to rear shock absorber nut LH

using a union nut wrench 14 mm.
*1
Union nut wrench 14 mm
*a
Fulcrum length
*b
25 mm (0.984 in.)
SST: 09729-18010
NOTICE:
(11.81 in.)
Be careful not to damage or deform the threads.
Securely set the long socket hexagon 5 mm.
4/4
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. REMOVE REAR FLOOR FINISH PLATE
3. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER INNER LH
5. SEPARATE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear stabilizer link
sub-assembly from the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH.
6. SEPARATE REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Loosen the nut on the rear suspension member side.

NOTICE:
Do not remove the nut.
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(b) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear shock
absorber with coil spring from the rear No. 2 suspension
arm assembly LH.
(c) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear axle carrier
sub-assembly LH from the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH.
7. REMOVE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and rear shock absorber with coil
spring.
NOTICE:
Hold the rear shock absorber with coil spring to prevent
it from falling accidentally.
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFZ00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFZ00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFZ00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XJ000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the state of rotation of the ball joint.
(1) Temporarily install the attaching nut to the stud of the rear stabilizer link assembly.

Standard:
(3) If there is unusual resistance or play, replace the rear stabilizer link assembly with a new one.
(2) If the dust cover is fissured or grease is leaked, replace the rear stabilizer link assembly with a
new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XJ000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFY00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for LH Side)
(a) Install the rear stabilizer bar bushing to the outside of

the stopper ring on the rear stabilizer bar as shown in the
illustration.
*1
Rear Stabilizer Bar Bushing
*a
Stopper Ring
2. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for RH Side)

HINT:
Use the same procedure described for the LH side.
3. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BAR

(a) Install the rear stabilizer bar to the rear suspension member.
4. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BRACKET (for LH Side)

(a) Install the rear stabilizer bracket with the 2 bolts.
*a
Crow

NOTICE:
Install the rear stabilizer bracket with its claw facing
upper.
5. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BRACKET (for RH Side)

HINT:
6. INSTALL STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

(a) Install the rear stabilizer link sub-assembly to the rear stabilizer bar
(b) Using a socket hexagon 5 mm, hold the stud bolt and tighten the nut.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFY00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

(c) Temporarily install the rear stabilizer link sub-assembly to the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH with the bolt and a new nut.
7. INSTALL STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)

HINT:
8. INSTALL REAR WHEELS

10. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
(a) Install the rear stabilizer link sub-assembly to the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly LH with the
bolt and nut.
11. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFY00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IG000FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE REAR WHEELS
2. REMOVE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the stabilizer link subassembly from the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH.
(b) Using a socket hexagon 5 mm, hold the stud bolt and
remove the nut and stabilizer link sub-assembly from the
rear stabilizer bar.
HINT:
Using a socket hexagon wrench 5 mm to hold the stud.
3. REMOVE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)

HINT:
4. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BRACKET (for LH Side)
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and rear stabilizer bracket.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IG000FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
5. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BRACKET (for RH Side)

HINT:
6. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BAR

(a) Remove the 2 rear stabilizer bushings and the rear stabilizer bar.
7. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for LH Side)

(a) Remove the rear stabilizer bar bushing from the rear stabilizer bar.
8. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for RH Side)

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IG000FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFQ00DX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFQ00DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFP00JX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION
2. INSTALL REAR NO. 2 DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION
3. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
4. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Support the rear suspension member sub-assembly with an engine lifter using 4 attachments or
equivalent tools.
NOTICE:
Make sure to secure the rear suspension member sub-assembly to prevent it from dropping.
Use the attachments to keep the rear suspension member sub-assembly level.
(b) Raise the rear suspension member sub-assembly until there is no clearance between the rear
suspension member sub-assembly and the vehicle body.
NOTICE:
When raising the rear suspension member sub-assembly, be careful not to damage the vehicle
body or other components installed on the vehicle.
(c) While supporting the rear suspension member sub-assembly with a high transmission jack, using
the 4 bolts B and 4 new bolts A, install the suspension member sub-assembly, front support rear
LH, front support rear RH, rear support upper and rear support lower all together.
NOTICE:
After temporarily tightening the bolts A in the order shown in the illustration, tighten them
securely.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFP00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/5
8/6/12
*a
Bolt A (New bolt)
*b
Bolt B
Torque: 145 Nm (1479 kgfcm, 107ftlbf)(Bolt A)

Torque: 70 Nm (714 kgfcm, 52ftlbf)(Bolt B)
6. TEMPORARILY INSTALL TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the toe control link sub-assembly LH and insert the toe adjust cam from the front of the
vehicle. Then, install the No. 2 toe adjust plate and temporarily install a new nut.
NOTICE:
Align the matchmarks on the rear suspension member and rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust
plate.
7. TEMPORARILY INSTALL TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:

(a) Temporarily install the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly LH to the rear suspension member
with the bolt and a new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from inside the vehicle.
9. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH

2/5
8/6/12
HINT:
10. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING LH

(a) Temporarily install the rear shock absorber assembly to the rear No. 2 suspension arm with the
bolt and a new nut.
HINT:
11. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING RH

HINT:

(a) Temporarily install the rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly LH to the rear suspension member
with the new bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from outside the vehicle.

HINT:
14. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BAR
15. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

16. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:
17. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET (for LH Side)

(a) Install the parking brake cable support bracket with the bolt.
18. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET (for RH Side)

HINT:

3/5
8/6/12
(a) Install the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the axle carrier with the clamp.
(b) Install the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the rear suspension member lower stopper LH
with the bolt.

HINT:
22. INSTALL REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
23. INSTALL REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
24. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY LH
25. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
26. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY
28. INSTALL EXHAUST TAIL PIPE ASSEMBLY

30. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
31. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
32. FULLY TIGHTEN TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

33. FULLY TIGHTEN TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
4/5
8/6/12

(a) Fully tighten the nut holding the rear shock absorber.
(b) Fully tighten the nut on the rear suspension member sub-assembly side.

HINT:
36. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

37. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:

(a) Fully tighten the bolt on the rear suspension member side of the rear No. 1 suspension arm
assembly LH.
39. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
40. INSTALL REAR WHEELS

43. CHECK FOR SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
5/5
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFR00JX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE REAR WHEELS
3. REMOVE EXHAUST TAIL PIPE ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVE REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY LH
6. REMOVE REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
7. REMOVE REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
8. REMOVE REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:

10. SEPARATE NO. 3 PARKING BRAKE CABLE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clamp and separate the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFR00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
(b) Remove the bolt and separate the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly from rear suspension member lower
stopper LH.
11. SEPARATE NO. 2 PARKING BRAKE CABLE ASSEMBLY

HINT:
12. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET (for LH Side)

13. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET (for RH Side)
HINT:
14. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BAR
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and rear No. 1 suspension arm
assembly LH.
16. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
17. SEPARATE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING LH

18. SEPARATE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING RH
HINT:
2/4
8/6/12
19. SEPARATE REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH from the rear suspension member subassembly.
20. SEPARATE REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
21. REMOVE TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

22. REMOVE TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Support the rear suspension member sub-assembly with an engine lifter using 4 attachments or
equivalent tools as shown in the illustration.
Attachment Placement Location
NOTICE:
Make sure to secure the rear suspension member sub-assembly to prevent it from dropping.
Use the attachments to keep the rear suspension member sub-assembly level.
(b) Remove the 8 bolts, 2 rear lower suspension member stoppers, 2 differential support member
3/4
8/6/12
stoppers and 2 rear suspension member lower stoppers from the rear suspension member.
(c) Slowly lower the rear suspension member sub-assembly.

NOTICE:
When lowering the rear suspension member sub-assembly, be careful not to damage the
vehicle body or other components installed on the vehicle.
24. REMOVE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH

25. REMOVE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
26. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION

27. REMOVE REAR NO. 2 DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION
4/4
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Rear Suspension System

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE

Vehicle tilts

Rear hub bearing (worn)
Rear shock absorber with coil spring (worn)
Bottoming
Vehicle (overloaded)

Wheel shimmy
Rear stabilizer bar (worn)

Toe control link sub-assembly (worn)
Abnormal tire wear
Rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly (worn)

Rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly (worn)
Rear upper control arm assembly (worn)
Rear hub bearing (worn)
Vehicle sways

1/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFN00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFN00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XE000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Inspect the ball joint of upper control arm assembly.
Standard:
(2) If there is any unusual resistance or play, replace the upper control arm assembly LH with a
new one.
(b) Inspect the dust cover of upper control arm assembly.
(2) If the dust cover is fissured or grease is leaked, replace the upper control arm assembly LH
with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XE000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFM00DX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Temporarily install the rear upper control arm assembly LH to the rear suspension member subassembly with the 2 bolts and 2 new nuts.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the rear side of the vehicle for the front side of the installation position.
Insert the bolt from the front side of the vehicle for the rear side of the installation position.
(b) Temporarily install the rear upper control arm assembly LH to the axle carrier with the new bolt
and a new nut.
NOTICE:
2. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
5. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Fully tighten the nut on the axle carrier side of the upper control arm assembly LH.
(b) Fully tighten the 2 nuts on the suspension member side of the upper control arm assembly LH.
6. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFM00DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFO00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 3 bolts, 3 nuts, and then remove the rear
upper control arm assembly LH from the rear suspension
3. REMOVE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFO00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFW00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFW00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XH000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. REMOVE LATERAL CONTROL ROD BUSHING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, lateral control rod bushing sub-assembly from

the toe control link sub-assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01040
09711-01100
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058YI000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Inspect the ball joint.
(1) Temporarily install the attaching nut to the stud of the

toe control link sub-assembly LH.

Standard:
(3) If there is unusual resistance or play, replace the toe control link sub-assembly LH with a new
one.
(2) If the dust cover is fissured or grease is leaked, replace the toe control link sub-assembly LH
with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058YI000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFV00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the toe control link sub-assembly LH and insert the toe adjust cam from the front of the
vehicle. Then, install the rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust plate and temporarily install the new
nut.
NOTICE:
Align the matchmarks on the rear suspension member and the rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust
plate.
(b) Install the rear suspension toe control link sub-assembly LH to the rear axle carrier side with a
nut.
(c) Install the new snap pin.

4. FULLY TIGHTEN TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Fully tighten the nut on the rear suspension member side.
NOTICE:
Check that the matchmarks on the rear suspension member and the rear No. 2 suspension toe
adjust plate are aligned.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFV00FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000058XI000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL LATERAL CONTROL ROD BUSHING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, install a new lateral control rod bushing subassembly to the toe control link sub-assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18050
09711-01040
09711-01100
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000058XI000X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003IFX00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

3. REMOVE TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the snap pin.
(b) Remove the nut on the rear axle carrier side.
(c) Install SST (2 pieces of spacer B) to the threaded section of the t toe control link sub-assembly LH.
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02060
09961-02010
(d) Using SST (ball join puller), separate the toe control link sub-assembly LH from the rear axle carrier
LH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003IFX00EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
*1
Nut
*2
Body
*3
Claw
*4
SST (Spacer B)
*a
1 mm (0.039 in.)
*b
Place wrench here
Molybdenum grease
Turning direction
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02060
09961-02010
CAUTION:
Before working, apply molybdenum grease to the bolt threads and bolt tip of SST.
NOTICE:
As the dust cover may be damaged, adjust SST with the center nut so that the body and claw are
parallel.
Make sure to tie the string of SST to the vehicle to prevent SST from dropping.
Do not damage the dust cover on the toe control link sub-assembly.
Do not damage the toe control link sub-assembly.
Do not damage the parking brake plate sub-assembly.
Do not damage the rear axle carrier.
(e) Put matchmarks on the rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust plate and the rear suspension member.
2/3
8/6/12
*a
Matchmark
(f) Remove the nut, toe adjust cam, rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust plate and the toe control link
sub-assembly.
3/3
8/6/12
TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE AND WHEEL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)
6.4 F
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003P8Q040X
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE AND WHEEL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FRS)

1. DIAGNOSIS OF TIRE VIBRATION
1.
TIGHTEN WHEEL NUTS
NEXT
2.
3.
INSPECT TIRES
NG
Go to step 3
OK
Go to step 4
REPAIR OR REPLACE TIRE(S)
NEXT
4.
INSPECT AND/OR ADJUST WHEEL BALANCE
NEXT
5.
INSPECT FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS AND AXLE HUB RUNOUT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003P8Q040X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
6.
NG
Go to step 6
OK
Go to step 7
REPAIR FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS AND AXLE HUB RUNOUT
NEXT
7.
8.
INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS AND AXLE HUB RUNOUT
NG
Go to step 8
OK
Go to step 9
REPAIR REAR AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS AND AXLE HUB RUNOUT
NEXT
9.
PERFORM ROAD TEST
NEXT
10.
RETURN VEHICLE TO CUSTOMER
2. DIAGNOSIS OF IRREGULAR TIRE WEAR
1.
INSPECT TIRES
2/3
8/6/12
NEXT
2.
REPAIR OR REPLACE TIRE(S)
NEXT
3.
INSPECT AND/OR ADJUST FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
NEXT
4.
INSPECT AND/OR ADJUST REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
NEXT
5.
PERFORM ROAD TEST
NEXT
6.
RETURN VEHICLE TO CUSTOMER
3/3
8/6/12
TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE AND WHEEL SYSTEM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000015KU04JX
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE AND WHEEL SYSTEM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TIRES
(a) Check the tires for wear and proper inflation pressure.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure:
TIRE SIZE
FRONT
KPA (KGF/CM
REAR
, PSI)
KPA (KGF/CM 2 , PSI)
215/45R17 87W
240 (2.4, 35)
240 (2.4, 35)
P215/45R17 87V
240 (2.4, 35)
240 (2.4, 35)
(b) Using a dial indicator, check the runout of the wheel.

Maximum wheel runout
Steel wheel
2.0 mm (0.0787 in.) (Vertical and

lateral)
Aluminum
wheel
1.0 mm (0.0394 in.) (Vertical and

lateral)
2. ROTATE TIRES
(a) Rotate the tires, as shown in the illustration.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000015KU04JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE AND WHEEL SYSTEM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
3. INSPECT WHEEL BALANCE

(a) Check and perform off-car balancing.
(b) If required, perform on-car balancing.
Imbalance after adjustment:
10.0 g (0.0220 lb) or less
4. INSPECT FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS
5. INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS
6. INSPECT FRONT AXLE HUB RUNOUT
7. INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB RUNOUT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000015KU04JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE REPAIR SEAL: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000021ML018X
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE REPAIR SEAL: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
1. DISPOSE OF TIRE REPAIR SEAL
HINT:
Confirm the expiration date on the side of the repair seal bottle.
(a) Dispose of the retrieved seal by consigning disposal to a waste the disposal firm.
NOTICE:
The valve and valve core cannot be reused.
Do not reuse items such as cloths that were used to wipe off seal or gloves soiled with the seal.
Dispose of such items as burnable waste.
(b) Dispose of the bottle used for retrieving the seal as plastic waste.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000021ML018X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE REPAIR SEAL: RECOVERY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000021MM018X
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE REPAIR SEAL: RECOVERY (2013 FR-S)
RECOVERY
1. RECOVERY OF TIRE REPAIR SEAL
NOTICE:
Try not to spill the tire repair seal in the tire during servicing.
Wipe off any spilt seal with a cloth or the equivalent.
(a) Using a tire changer, remove the tire from the wheel by following the same procedures as for a
regular tire change.
NOTICE:
Do not raise the tire rapidly as the seal may spill out.
(b) Retrieve the tire repair seal from the removed tire.
HINT:
Using a cloth or the equivalent, wipe off any seal spilt on the tire, the wheel, the tire changer and the
floor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000021MM018X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ZWC008X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ZWC008X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002PLM029X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
The tire pressure warning receiver is integrated in the door control receiver.
1. INSTALL DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER

(a) Engage the guide and install the door control receiver.
(b) Install the bolt.
NOTICE:
Do not drop the door control receiver or apply impact on it.
When replacing or inspecting the door control receiver, do not change the wiring route or the
length of the harness around the receiver.
HINT:
It is necessary to perform registration of the transmitter IDs into the tire pressure warning ECU
after the ECU has been replaced
.
When replacing the door control receiver on vehicles, be sure to perform Registration of
Recognition Code to register the transmitter IDs after ECU replacement
2. INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY

3. INSTALL REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH LH
4. INSTALL REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH RH
HINT:
5. INSTALL QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

6. INSTALL QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002PLM029X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
9. CONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER COVER LH

10. CONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER COVER RH
HINT:
11. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH

HINT:
13. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

HINT:

HINT:
17. INSPECT TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002PLO022X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
The tire pressure warning receiver is integrated in the door control receiver.

HINT:
3. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

4. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH
HINT:
5. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH

HINT:
7. SEPARATE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER LH

HINT:
9. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER LH

HINT:
11. REMOVE QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

12. REMOVE QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002PLO022X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
13. REMOVE REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH LH

14. REMOVE REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH RH
HINT:
15. REMOVE PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY

16. REMOVE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER

(c) Disengage the guide and remove the door control receiver.
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002PLO022X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2111-C2114: Transmitter ID1 Ope
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002DZD073X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2111-C2114: Transmitter ID1
Operation Stop (2013 FR-S)
DTC
C2111
Transmitter ID1 Operation Stop
DTC
C2112
DTC
C2113
DTC
C2114
DESCRIPTION
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitters that are installed in the tire and wheel assemblies
measure the tire pressures. The measured values are transmitted to the door control receiver in the
vehicle as radio waves. The ECU compares the measured air pressure values with the air pressure
threshold. When the measured air pressure value is less than this threshold, the warning light in the
combination meter assembly illuminates. The door control receiver stores a DTC when the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter stops transmitting signals. The signals can be forcibly transmitted by
releasing the tire pressure rapidly. The stored DTC is cleared when signal transmission resumes.
DTC
NO.
C2111
C2112 Tire pressure warning valve and transmitters stop
C2113 transmitting signals
C2114
TROUBLE AREA
Tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter
Door control receiver
HINT:
It is necessary to perform the following procedure to identify the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter that is malfunctioning because it cannot be identified by the output DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002DZD073X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
PERFORM FORCED TRANSMISSION OF TRANSMITTER ID OF ALL WHEELS
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Set the tire pressure to the specified value

(f) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Data List.
Tire Pressure Monitor
TESTER
DISPLAY
NORMAL
CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
ID1 tire inflation pressure/

min.: Absolute pressure / 50 kPa
ID1 Tire
(0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi), Relative

pressure / -50 kPa (-0.5 kgf/cm
Inflation 2 , -7 psi)
Pressure max.: Absolute pressure / 480
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),

Relative pressure / 380 kPa (3.9
If 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi) is displayed for

absolute pressure or -50 kPa (-0.5 kgf/cm 2 ,
-7 psi) is displayed for relative pressure, data
has not been received.*
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID2 tire inflation pressure /
ID2 Tire
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID3 Tire pressure / -50 kPa (-0.5 kgf/cm
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
Actual tire
inflation
pressure


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
3/4
8/6/12
ID4 Tire
Inflation
Pressure

2
, -7 psi)
max.: Absolute pressure / 480
Actual tire
inflation
pressure

kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),

kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
*: It may take a few minutes until the values are displayed. If the values are not displayed after a
few minutes, perform troubleshooting according to the inspection procedure for DTCs C2121 to C2124
.
(h) Rapidly reduce the tire pressure for each wheel at least 40 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm 2 , 5.8 psi) within
30 seconds.
(1) Check that each tire pressure data displayed on the Techstream has changed.
OK:
Each tire pressure data displayed on the Techstream will change to the value of the tire pressure.
NOTICE:
It may take a few minutes to display the updated tire pressure data.
When the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data has not changed, reset the tire pressure to the
appropriate specified value and rotate the tire 90 to 270 degrees. Then rapidly release the tire
pressure and recheck the data.
(2) After confirming that all of the tire pressure data displayed on the Techstream has changed,
set the tire pressure to the appropriate specified values.
HINT:
If the tire pressure data displayed on the Techstream has not changed after rechecking, inspect for
another problem
NG
GO TO TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER

OK
END
4/4
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2126: Transmitter ID not Receive
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003407071X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2126: Transmitter ID not
Received in Main Mode (2013 FR-S)
DTC
C2126
Transmitter ID not Received in Main Mode
DESCRIPTION
After all IDs are registered, DTC C2126 is set in the door control receiver and the tire pressure warning
light blinks for 1 minute and then illuminates.
When the door control receiver successfully receives radio waves from all the transmitters whose IDs are
stored in the ECU, DTC C2126 is cleared and the tire pressure warning light goes off.
DTC
NO.
C2126
After ID registration is completed, ECU does not receive radio

waves from transmitters whose IDs are stored in ECU.
TROUBLE AREA
ID registration
failure
Tire pressure
warning valve and
transmitter
Door control
receiver
HINT:
The purpose of this DTC is to help prevent delivering a vehicle that has incorrectly registered IDs.
After all IDs are registered, DTC C2126 is detected and the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and then illuminates. If the tire pressure warning light does not turn off after a little while,
IDs may be incorrectly registered.
WIRING DIAGRAM
1/8
8/6/12
NOTICE:
When replacing the door control receiver, read the IDs stored in the old ECU using the Techstream
and write them down before removal.
It is necessary to perform registration
of the transmitter IDs into the tire pressure warning
ECU after the ECU has been replaced.

2/8
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
IDENTIFY TRANSMITTER NOT RECEIVED
(a) Set the tire pressure to the specified values

TESTER
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
CONDITION
ID1 Tire
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID2 Tire
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
Actual tire
inflation
pressure


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
3/8
8/6/12
ID3 Tire 2 , -7 psi)

Inflation max.: Absolute pressure / 480
Pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
Actual tire
inflation
pressure

kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
*: It may take a few minutes until the values are displayed.
(h) Rapidly reduce the tire pressure for each wheel at least 40 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm 2 , 5.8 psi) within
30 seconds.
(i) Check the Data List.
NOTICE:
Record the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data transmitter ID that corresponds to each tire.
(j) After confirming that the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data for one tire (ID1 to ID4) has changed,
repeat this procedure one by one. Identify the transmitter not received.
Result:
CONDITION
PROCEED TO
One or more of transmitters abnormal
All normal
END
4/8
8/6/12
2.
CHECK TRANSMITTER ID

(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Data List.
(f) Check the values by referring to the table below.
TESTER DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
ITEM/DISPLAY
Registered ID1
Code
Registered ID2
Code
Registered ID3
Code
Registered ID4
Code
Registered ID1 code/

min.: 0
max.: FFFFFFF*
min.: 0
max.: FFFFFFF*
min.: 0
max.: FFFFFFF*
min.: 0
max.: FFFFFFF*
NOTE
ID No. registered for transmitter ID1
displayed

displayed

displayed

displayed
HINT:
*: Displayed only when the ID No. is not registered.
(g) Check the ID number on the identified transmitter by removing it from the tire and wheel.
5/8
8/6/12
*1 Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter
*2 Transmitter ID (7-digit number)
(h) Confirm that the ID number on the transmitter and recorded transmitter ID match.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Match
Do not match
REGISTRATION OF TRANSMITTER ID
3.
REPLACE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER
(a) Replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter
NEXT
4.
(a) Perform registration
6/8
8/6/12
NEXT
5.
CONFIRM TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE (DATA LIST)

(b) Connect Techstream to the DLC3.
TESTER
DISPLAY
NORMAL
CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

ID1 Tire

Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID2 Tire

Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
Actual tire
inflation

7/8
8/6/12
pressure

kPa (4.9 kgf/cm , 70 psi),

kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID4 Tire

Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
When no "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data has changed, reset the tire pressure to the appropriate
specified value and rotate the tire 90 to 270 degrees. Then rapidly release the tire pressure and
recheck the data.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Tire pressure values are not displayed.
All tire pressure readings are equal to specified values.
END
REPLACE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
8/8
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2141-C2144: Transmitter ID1 Err
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XN408JX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2141-C2144: Transmitter ID1
Error (2013 FR-S)
DTC
C2141
Transmitter ID1 Error
DTC
C2142
DTC
C2143
DTC
C2144
DESCRIPTION
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitters that are installed in the tire and wheel assemblies
measure the tire pressures. The measured values are transmitted to the door control receiver in the
vehicle as radio waves. The ECU compares the measured air pressure values with the air pressure
threshold. When the measured air pressure value is less than this threshold, the warning light in the
combination meter assembly illuminates.
When the internal circuit of a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is malfunctioning, one of these
DTCs is output.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
If an "ERROR" signal is received 3 times consecutively, the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter will be judged as defective and a DTC will
C2141 be output.
C2142 This will happen in situations where the inflation pressure is outside the
C2143 range -50 to 380 kPa (-0.5 to 3.9 kgf/cm 2 , -7 to 55 psi), the
C2144 temperature inside the tire is outside the specified range -40 to 120C
(-40 to 248F), or an error occurs in the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter or the surrounding area.
Tire
pressure
warning
valve and
transmitter
Door
control
receiver
HINT:
It is necessary to perform the following procedure to identify the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter that is malfunctioning because it cannot be identified by the output DTC.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XN408JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1.
IDENTIFY TRANSMITTER CORRESPONDING TO DTC
(a) Set the tire pressure to the specified value

(g) Display the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data for each wheel using the Techstream.
(h) Rapidly reduce the tire pressure for each wheel at least 40 kPa (0.4 kg/cm 2 , 5.8 psi) within 30
seconds. If "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" displayed on the Techstream (ID1 to ID4) does not
change, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter corresponding to the unchanged "ID Tire
Inflation Pressure" data was the cause of the output DTC.
HINT:
Identify the malfunctioning tire pressure warning valve and transmitter by repeatedly decreasing
the tire pressure for each tire.
Record which "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data (ID1 to ID4) corresponds to each tire.
TESTER
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
CONDITION
ID1 Tire
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
Actual tire
inflation
pressure


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
2/6
8/6/12

ID2 Tire
2 , -7 psi)
Inflation
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID3 Tire
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID4 Tire
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
*: It may take a few minutes until the values are displayed. If the values are not displayed after a
.
(i) Check the Data List.

Result:
RESULT
DETECTION CONDITION
One of "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data (ID1 to ID4) changed.
Normal
"ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data did not change.
Transmitter corresponding to DTC
NOTICE:
3/6
8/6/12
Record the transmitter IDs and positions of transmitters that are normal.
(j) When the "ID Tire inflation Pressure" data (ID1 to ID4) has changed, repeat this procedure to
identify the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter that corresponds to the DTC.
(k) When all of the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data (ID1 to ID4) has changed, identify the
malfunctioning tire pressure warning valve and transmitter using the recorded ID numbers and
output DTCs.
NEXT
2.
REPLACE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER
(a) Replace the identified tire pressure warning valve and transmitter with a new one
HINT:
Before installing a new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, read and write down its
transmitter ID.
The IDs for the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters which are not replaced should be
checked using the Techstream and recorded.
NEXT
3.
(a) Register the transmitter ID for all wheels
NEXT
4.

4/6
8/6/12

TESTER
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
CONDITION

Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID2 Tire
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID3 Tire
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID4 Tire
Inflation

2
, -7 psi)

kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
Actual tire
inflation
pressure

5/6
8/6/12

kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
recheck the data.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
END
6/6
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2171: Transmitter ID not Register
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002DZY05VX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2171: Transmitter ID not
Registered (2013 FR-S)
DTC
C2171
Transmitter ID not Registered
DESCRIPTION
The IDs of each tire pressure warning valve and transmitter are registered to the door control receiver.
When the ECU detects that a transmitter ID code is not registered in the ECU, a DTC is stored.
DTC
NO.
C2171
TROUBLE AREA
Transmitter ID code is not registered. (When an ID code is unregistered for 3 Door control
minutes or more)
receiver
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1.
CONFIRM REGISTRATION CONDITION (REGISTERED ID CODES)

TESTER DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
NORMAL CONDITION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002DZY05VX.html?sisuffix=ff
DIAGNOSTIC
1/4
8/6/12
ITEM/RANGE
Registered ID1
code
Registered ID2
code
Registered ID3
code
Registered ID4
code

min.: 0
max.: FFFFFFF*
min.: 0
max.: FFFFFFF*
min.: 0
max.: FFFFFFF*
min.: 0
max.: FFFFFFF*
NOTE
displayed

displayed

displayed

displayed
HINT:
*: Displayed only when the ID No. is not registered.
OK:
The registered transmitter ID codes are displayed on the Techstream.
2.
NG
PERFORM REGISTRATION (TRANSMITTER ID)
OK
PERFORM REGISTRATION (TRANSMITTER ID)
(a) Register the transmitter IDs for all the wheels
NEXT
3.

2/4
8/6/12

TESTER
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
CONDITION
ID1 Tire
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID2 Tire
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID3 Tire

Actual tire
inflation
pressure
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),


kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID4 Tire
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
Actual tire
inflation
pressure

kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
3/4
8/6/12

recheck the data.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
END
4/4
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2176: Receiver Error (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026PN07UX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2176: Receiver Error (2013
FR-S)
DTC
C2176
Receiver Error
DESCRIPTION
The signals are transmitted to the door control receiver in the vehicle as radio waves.
DTC NO.
C2176
TROUBLE AREA
Malfunction in the door control receiver internal circuit
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT (C2176)
(a) Clear the DTCs

(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON and check for DTCs
OK:
NG
OK
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000026PN07UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2179: Tire Pressure Monitor ECU
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003B9X02AX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2179: Tire Pressure Monitor
ECU Communication Stop (2013 FR-S)
DTC
C2179
Tire Pressure Monitor ECU Communication Stop
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) sends signals to the door control receiver via a direct line.
DTC
NO.
Communication between the main body ECU (network gateway

C2179 ECU) and door control receiver is interrupted for 10 seconds or
more.
TROUBLE AREA
Main body ECU

(network
gateway ECU)
Wire harness
or connector
Door control
receiver
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003B9X02AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER - MAIN BODY ECU
(NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))
1.
(a) Disconnect the H28 door control receiver connector and the D6 main body ECU (network
gateway ECU) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H28-5 (PRG) - D6-6 (PRG)
Always
Below 1
H28-5 (PRG) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
2.
(a) Replace the door control receiver
NEXT
3.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT
(a) Clear the DTCs

2/3
8/6/12
(d) Check for DTCs
OK:
NG

GATEWAY ECU)
OK
END
3/3
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 F
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMY07AX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013
FR-S)

1. READ DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

(f) According to the display on the Techstream, read the Data List.
TESTER
DISPLAY
Tire pressure warning

Mode Status system mode/
NORMAL or TEST
Main Tire
Number of main tire ID to be

registered/
4 or 5
Tire pressure warning reset

Initialization
switch/
Switch*3
ON, OFF
Vehicle
Speed
Vehicle speed reading/

min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), max.:
255 km/h (158 mph)
NORMAL
CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
NORMAL:
Normal
mode
TEST: Test
mode
4 to 5
displayed
ON: Switch
on
OFF: Switch
off
Actual
vehicle
speed
Speed indicated on the combination meter

assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMY07AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
Registered
ID1 Code
Registered
ID2 Code
Registered
ID3 Code

min.: 0, max.: FFFFFFF*1


ID No.
registered
for
transmitter
ID1
displayed
ID No.
registered
for
transmitter
ID2
displayed
ID No.
registered
for
transmitter
ID3
displayed
ID No.
Registered
ID4 Code

registered
for
transmitter
ID4
displayed
ID No.
Registered
ID5 Code*3 min.: 0, max.: FFFFFFF*1
registered
for
transmitter
ID5
displayed
ID1
ID1 temperature in tire/
Temperature min.: -40C (-40F), max.:
in Tire
120C (248F)
ID2

in Tire
120C (248F)
ID3
in Tire
120C (248F)
ID4

in Tire
120C (248F)
ID5

in Tire*3
120C (248F)
Actual tire
If -40C (-40F) is displayed, data has not
temperature been received.
Actual tire
Actual tire
Actual tire
Actual tire
2/6
8/6/12
ID1 Battery
ID1 battery voltage/OVER or
1.6 V or
LESS
more / Less
ID2 Battery
Voltage

LESS
1.6 V or
more / Less
ID3 Battery
1.6 V or
LESS
more / Less
1.6 V or
LESS
more / Less

LESS
1.6 V or
more / Less
WITHOUT
Voltage
Voltage
ID4 Battery
Voltage
ID5 Battery
Voltage*3
Initialization Tire pressure warning reset

switch setting information/
Switch
Info*3
WITH or WITHOUT
min.: Absolute pressure / 50
kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi),
ID1 Tire
Relative pressure / -50 kPa
Actual tire
Inflation
Pressure
(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
inflation
pressure
max.: Absolute pressure /

480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70
If 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi) is displayed

for absolute pressure or -50 kPa (-0.5
kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi) is displayed for relative
pressure, data has not been received.*2
psi), Relative pressure / 380

kPa (3.9 kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID2 Tire
Inflation
Pressure

(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
Actual tire
inflation
pressure
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70



ID3 Tire
Actual tire
Inflation
Pressure
(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
inflation
pressure

480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70


3/6
8/6/12
ID4 Tire
Inflation
Pressure

(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
Actual tire
inflation
pressure

480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

ID5 Tire
Inflation
Pressure*3
Actual tire
(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
inflation
pressure

480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70


ID1 initial threshold of lowpressure/
ID1 Initial
Threshold of Relative pressure / -50 kPa
Lowpressure
Tire
pressure
(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
after
initialization
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

ID2 Initial

Lowpressure
(-0.5 kgf/cm
, -7 psi)
Tire
pressure
after
initialization
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

ID3 Initial
Threshold of
Lowpressure

(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm
Tire
pressure
after
initialization
, 70
4/6
8/6/12

ID4 Initial
Threshold of
(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
Lowpressure
Tire
pressure
after
initialization
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

ID5 Initial

Low(-0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi)
pressure*3 max.: Absolute pressure /
Tire
pressure
after
initialization
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

Number of
Trouble
Code
Number of DTCs
Min.: 0,
recorded/min.: 0, max.: 255
Max.: -
HINT:
*1: Displayed only when the ID No. is not registered.
*2: It may take a few minutes until the values are displayed. If the values are not displayed after a
.
*3: This item is displayed on the Techstream, however, it is not used for this vehicle.

Using the Techstream to perform Active Tests allows the relays, VSVs, actuators and other items to be
operated without removing any parts. This non-intrusive functional inspection can be very useful because
intermittent operation may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed. Performing Active Tests
early in trouble shooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be displayed while
performing Active Tests.
5/6
8/6/12

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test.
(f) Check the operation by referring to the table below.
Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
Indicat. Tire Pressure
Tire pressure
Warning System
warning light
light OFF or ON
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Confirm that the vehicle is
stopped, engine idling
6/6
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMW081X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. CHECK WARNING LIGHT
NOTICE:
When there is a problem with the tire pressure warning system, the tire pressure warning light
blinks at 0.5 second intervals, and illuminates after 1 minute.
When the malfunction has been corrected, the tire pressure warning light does not illuminate.
When the tire pressure warning light illuminates, immediately check the tire pressures of the tire
and adjust it to the specified value(s).
After the ignition switch is turned to ON, the tire pressure warning light illuminates for 3 seconds
and then goes off. If the warning light does not illuminate for 3 seconds, proceed to the
troubleshooting for the tire pressure warning light circuit
(b) Check that the tire pressure warning light illuminates for
3 seconds.
*1
Tire Pressure Warning Light
2. WHAT TO CONSIDER WHEN TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES

(a) When the tire pressure warning light does not go off, or when it illuminates during driving, check
the tire pressure. If the tire pressure warning light illuminates within several hours after adjusting
the tire pressure, the tire may have a slow air leak.
(b) The system is disabled in the following conditions (when the condition becomes normal, the
system will work properly).
(1) When all of the tires and wheels that have the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters
registered with the door control receiver have not been installed.
(2) When all of the transmitter ID codes are not registered with the door control receiver.
(3) When the tire pressure is abnormally high (absolute pressure: 480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi)
or more; relative pressure: 380 kPa (3.9 kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi) or more).
(4) When the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter battery is depleted.
(c) The system may become disabled in the following conditions (when the condition becomes normal,
the system will work properly).
(1) When electric devices or facilities using similar radio frequencies are nearby.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMW081X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(2) When a wireless device or other equipment operating at a similar frequency is in use in the
vehicle.
(3) When a window tint that affects radio wave signals is installed.
(4) When there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels or wheel
housing.
(5) When non-genuine wheels are used.
(6) When tire chains are used.
3. TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHART

HINT:
The table below indicates the state of the tire pressure warning light after the ignition switch is
turned to ON.
IMMEDIATELY AFTER TURNING THE

IGNITION SWITCH TO ON
ILLUMINATES FOR 3 SEC.
ALWAYS
WARNING LIGHT OUTPUT PATTERN
GOES
OFF
ILLUMINATES BLINKS*1 BLINKS*2
Normal
Low tire pressure
System failure
Test mode (signal

check mode)
ECU connector
poorly connected
*1: Illuminates and goes off repeatedly at 0.5 second intervals, and illuminates after 1 minute.
*a
ON
*b
OFF
*c
0.5 sec.
*d
1 minute
2/3
8/6/12
*2: Illuminates and goes off repeatedly at 0.125 second intervals.
*a
ON
*b
OFF
*c
0.125 sec.
4. Normal mode DTCs

(a) DTCs are stored in the door control receiver and output by the blinking of tire pressure warning
light or by using the Techstream
5. Test mode (signal check mode) DTCs

(a) By switching from normal mode into test mode (input signal check), you can inspect the door
control receiver, each tire pressure warning valve and transmitter
6. FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
(a) When a system malfunction occurs in the tire pressure warning system, the tire pressure warning
light illuminates after blinking for 1 minute to inform the driver of the system failure.
(b) The result of this diagnosis code is stored in the door control receiver.
3/3
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CH
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMR06UX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
CHART (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
If a trouble code is displayed during the DTC check, inspect the circuit listed for that code. For details
of each code, refer to the relevant page listed under respective "DTC Code" in the DTC chart.
Tire Pressure Warning ECU and Receiver

DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
C2111
C2112
C2113
C2114
C2121
No Signal from Transmitter ID1
C2122
C2123
C2124
C2126
Transmitter ID not Received in Main Mode
C2141
C2142
C2143
C2144
C2171
Transmitter ID not Registered
C2176
Receiver Error
C2179
Tire Pressure Monitor ECU Communication Stop
C2181
Transmitter ID1 not Received (Test Mode DTC)
C2182
C2183
C2184
SEE PAGE
Main Body ECU (Multiplex Network Body ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMR06UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CH
DTC CODE
B1247
DETECTION ITEM
SEE PAGE
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver Communication Stop
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMR06UX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMX081X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FRS)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC (for DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER)
(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Trouble Codes.
(f) Read the DTCs.
2. CHECK DTC (for MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Trouble Codes.
(f) Read the DTCs.
3. CLEAR DTC (for DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER)

HINT:
After repairing the malfunctions, clear the DTCs.

(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Trouble Codes.
(f) Clear DTCs following the prompts on the Techstream screen.
HINT:
4. CLEAR DTC (for MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))

HINT:
After repairing the malfunctions, clear the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMX081X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Trouble Codes.
(f) Clear DTCs following the prompts on the Techstream screen.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMX081X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: ECU Power Source Circuit (2013 F
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XN206LX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: ECU Power Source Circuit (2013
FR-S)
ECU Power Source Circuit
DESCRIPTION
This is the power source for the door control receiver.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
of the transmitter IDs into the door control receiver
after the ECU has been replaced.
HINT:
procedure.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XN206LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: ECU Power Source Circuit (2013 F
PROCEDURE
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER - BATTERY AND BODY
GROUND)
1.
(a) Disconnect the H28 door control receiver connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
H28-1 (IG) - Body

ground
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Ignition switch
ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch
off
Below 1 V
*a

(to Door Control Receiver)
TESTER CONNECTION
H28-12 (GND) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XN206LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBL
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMQ07IX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the tire pressure warning system.
Make sure that the wireless door lock control system has exited diagnostic mode before
performing the following procedure.
1.
NEXT
2.
(a) Interview the customer to confirm the trouble.

HINT:
It is important to collect as much specific information as possible from the customer to allow for a
quick repair.
NEXT
3.
ADJUST TIRE PRESSURE*

(b) Set the all tire pressure to the specified value

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMQ07IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
(f) Read the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" values.

(g) Check the Data List
HINT:
It takes a few minutes to display the updated tire pressure data.
If the problem is that the tire pressure decreases, wait until all of the tire pressure data is
received by the ECU. If the data is received, the tire pressure warning light will go off.
Result:
CONDITION
PROCEED TO
Tire pressure warning light remains on
Tire pressure warning light goes off
GO TO STEP 11
4.
CHECK ECU CONNECTED TO CAN BUS*
(a) Check the ECUs connected to the CAN bus
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No malfunction appears
Malfunction appears
5.
CHECK FOR DTC (CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM)*
(a) Check for DTCs
2/4
8/6/12
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN system DTC is not output
CAN system DTC is output
6.
CHECK FOR DTC*
(a) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is output
DTC is not output
GO TO STEP 8
7.
DTC CHART
(a) Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart
NEXT
8.
GO TO STEP 10
3/4
8/6/12
NEXT
9.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION*
(a) Refer to Electronic Circuit Inspection Procedure
NEXT
10.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
(a) Repair or replace parts based on the diagnosis result.
NEXT
11.
CONFIRMATION TEST*
(a) Check the Data List to confirm that the tire inflation pressure has been received
NEXT
END
4/4
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XML063X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XML063X.html?locale=en
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XML063X.html?locale=en
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMK07SX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM PRECAUTION
(a) It is necessary for the tire pressures to be adjusted periodically because tire pressure decreases
naturally over time.
(b) In winter, tire pressure may decrease due to low ambient temperatures (tire pressure decreases
by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 kgf/cm 2 , 1.5 psi) for every 10C (50F) drop in the ambient
temperature). Therefore, the tire pressure warning system is more likely to indicate a warning if
the tire pressures are not adjusted appropriately. If the daily temperature variation is large, add
enough so that the tire pressures are suitable under cold conditions. As a result, unnecessary tire
pressure warning operation should decrease.
(c) Depending on the tire type, the system may not function properly even if the specified wheels are
used.
(d) To prevent damage to the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, make sure that the tire
pressure warning valve and transmitter does not interfere with the tire bead when installing or
removing a tire.
(e) To prevent damage to the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, before disengaging the
tire bead or removing the tire from the wheel, drop the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter into the wheel.
(f) Always use a new grommet, washer and nut when installing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, to ensure the sealing performance.
(g) When one or more tire pressure warning valve and transmitters or the door control receiver is
replaced, the transmitter IDs for all of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be reregistered. Before registering the transmitter ID of the new tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, check the Data List and record all of the transmitter IDs that are already registered.
(h) Use only a specified cap. If an unspecified cap is used, it may seize to the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter.
(i) The system is disabled in the following conditions (when the condition becomes normal, the system
will work properly).
(1) When all of the tires and wheels that have the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters
registered with the door control receiver have not been installed.
(2) When all of the transmitter ID codes are not registered with the door control receiver.
(3) When the tire pressure is abnormally high (absolute pressure: 480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi)
or more; relative pressure: 380 kPa (3.9 kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi) or more).
(4) When the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter battery is depleted.
(j) The system may become disabled in the following conditions (when the condition becomes normal,
the system will work properly).
(1) When electric devices or facilities using similar radio frequencies are nearby.
(2) When a wireless device or other equipment operating at a similar frequency is in use in the
vehicle.
(3) When a window tint that affects radio wave signals is installed.
(4) When there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels or wheel
housing.
(5) When non-genuine wheels are used.
(6) When tire chains are used.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMK07SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (20
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMT07BX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Tire Pressure Warning System
SYMPTOM
Tire pressure warning light does not illuminate despite tire

pressure decreasing
Tire pressure warning light remains illuminated (Goes off
during initial check)
Tire pressure warning light remains illuminated (Illuminates

during initial check)
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Check Data List (ID Tire Inflation

Pressure)
ID code check (Registration)
Tire pressure warning light
circuit
Check Data List (ID Tire Inflation
Pressure)
Tire pressure adjustment
ID code check (Registration)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMT07BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: REGISTRATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 M
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XN108GX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: REGISTRATION (2013 FR-S)
REGISTRATION
1. BEFORE REGISTRATION
NOTICE:
The transmitter ID is written on the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. It is not
possible to read the transmitter ID after installing the tire onto the wheel. Therefore, make a
note of the transmitter ID before installing the tire.
(a) In case of door control receiver replacement:

(1) Read the registered transmitter IDs that are stored in the old ECU using the Techstream and
note them down.
(2) If reading the stored transmitter IDs is impossible due to malfunctions of components such as
the door control receiver, remove the tires from the wheels and check the IDs located on the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.
(b) In case of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter replacement:
(1) Take a note of the 7 digit number (transmitter ID) written on the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter.
*1 Tire Pressure Warning Valve and Transmitter
*2 Transmitter ID (7 Digit Number)
2. REGISTER TRANSMITTER ID (USING THE TECHSTREAM)

HINT:
The previously registered IDs will be cleared from memory when the registration is completed.
If the ID registration step is not completed within 300 seconds, ID registration will be canceled.
(a) Set the air pressure of all tires to the specified value(s)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XN108GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: REGISTRATION (2013 FR-S)

(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON and the Techstream on.
(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Utility / ID Registration.
(f) Perform the procedure displayed on the Techstream.
3. CONFIRMATION OF TRANSMITTER ID REGISTRATION

NOTICE:
It may take up to a few minutes to update the tire pressure data. If the values are not displayed
after a few minutes, perform troubleshooting according to the inspection procedure for DTCs
C2121 to C2124
.
If the IDs have not been registered, DTC C2171 is stored in the door control receiver after 3
minutes or more.
If normal pressure values are displayed, the IDs have been registered correctly.
If the tire pressure values are not displayed after a few minutes, the IDs may be incorrect or the
system may have a malfunction.
After all IDs are registered, DTC C2126 is stored in the door control receiver and the tire pressure
warning light blinks for 1 minute and then illuminates. When the door control receiver successfully
receives signals from all the transmitters whose IDs are stored in the ECU, DTC C2126 is cleared
and the tire pressure warning light goes off.
(a) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Data List.
(b) Read the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" values.
(c) Confirm that the tire pressure data of all tires (except the spare tire) is displayed on the
Techstream screen.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XN108GX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMM081X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013
FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
(a) When the tire pressure warning system detects that the tire pressure of a tire becomes lower
than the threshold, it will inform the driver using a warning light.
(b) The door control receiver receives the transmitter ID, temperature and tire pressure information
from the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters shown in the following illustration. This
information is used to determine when the pressure in one of the tires has dropped.
*1
Door Control Receiver
*2
Tire Pressure Warning Valve and

Transmitter
*3
Combination Meter Assembly - Tire Pressure

Warning Light
*4
Main Body ECU (Network Gateway

ECU)
Front
2. DESCRIPTION OF REGISTRATION
(a) When tires and wheels are replaced, always ensure that each transmitter ID is correctly
registered.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMM081X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
(b) When one or more tire pressure warning valve and transmitters or the door control receiver is
replaced, the transmitter IDs for all of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be reregistered. Before registering the transmitter ID of the new tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, check the Data List and record all of the transmitter IDs that are already registered.
3. FUNCTION OF MAIN COMPONENTS

COMPONENT
Door
Control
Receiver
FUNCTION
Receives the data from the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter and
monitors the tire pressure.
When the door control receiver detects a drop in the tire pressure, a system
malfunction, it outputs the respective signal to the combination meter
assembly.
When the door control receiver detects a problem with the vehicle speed
signal, it uses changes in the signal strength from the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter as a judgment standard. If the ECU detects any changes
in the signal strength from the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it
determines that the vehicle is being driven.
Tire
Pressure
Warning
Valve and
Transmitter
Detects the pressure and internal temperature of the tire and transmits the measured
values and the ID code to the door control receiver.
Combination
Meter
Assembly
Tire
Pressure
Warning
Light
Main Body
ECU
(Network
Gateway
ECU)
Transmits the tire pressure warning light signal to the door control receiver.
Illuminates after blinking for 1 minute to warn the driver in accordance with the
signal from the door control receiver.
Displays 2-digit Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC).
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) and door control receiver are
connected using 2 direct lines that they use to communicate with each other.
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) is connected to the combination
meter assembly via CAN No. 1 bus.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMM081X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMN06DX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
HINT:
Each tire pressure warning valve and transmitter sends its transmitter ID, temperature and tire
pressure information to the door control receiver.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMN06DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
TRANSMITTING ECU
(TRANSMITTER)
RECEIVING ECU
SIGNAL
COMMUNICATION
METHOD
Skid Control ECU (Brake

Actuator Assembly)
Main Body ECU (Network

Gateway ECU)
Vehicle speed signal
CAN
communication
line

Gateway ECU)
Combination Meter
Assembly

light signal
CAN
communication
line
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMN06DX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XMS054X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
HINT:
Inspect the connectors from the back side while the connectors are connected.
(a) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. If the result is
not as specified, the ECU may have a malfunction.
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H28-1 (IG) - H28-12

(GND)
W -B
IG power source
Ignition
switch ON
11 to 14 V
H28-4 (RDA) - H28-12

(GND)
R-B
Output signals
Ignition
switch ON
Pulse generation (see

waveform 1)
P -B
Input signals
Ignition
Pulse generation (see
switch ON
waveform 1)
H28-7 (+B) - H28-12

(GND)
Y-R - B
Power Supply
Always
11 to 14 V
H28-12 (GND) - Body

ground
B - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
H28-5 (PRG) - H28-12

(GND)
(b) Using an oscilloscope, check waveform 1.

*a
Example
*b
GND
Waveform 1:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMS054X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
ITEM
Terminal
Tool setting
Vehicle condition
CONTENTS
H28-4 (RDA) - H28-12 (GND)
H28-5 (PRG) - H28-12 (GND)
5 V/DIV, 50 s./DIV.
Ignition switch ON
HINT:
The waveform shown in the illustration is an example. If the
tester displays a waveform that alternates between high and
low, where high is a voltage that is between the IG power
source voltage and a voltage 2.2 V lower than the IG power
source voltage, and where low is a voltage of between 0 and
1.2 V, the ECU can be judged normal.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XMS054X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: TEST MODE PROCEDURE (2013 F
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XN008BX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: TEST MODE PROCEDURE (2013
FR-S)
TEST MODE PROCEDURE

1. TEST MODE (SIGNAL CHECK MODE) PROCEDURE
HINT:
When entering test mode (signal check mode), the door control receiver sets all the test mode
(signal check mode) DTCs first.
After the door control receiver completes the signal check for each inspection item, the DTCs
for systems that are determined to be normal will be cleared.
The DTCs for other inspection items may not be cleared when only a certain signal is
inspected.
When test mode (signal check mode) returns to normal mode, all the test mode (signal check
mode) DTCs will be cleared.
(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON and the Techstream on.
(d) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Utility / Signal Check.
HINT:
Every time the test mode (signal check mode) DTC clear conditions are satisfied, the tire pressure
warning light illuminated for 1 second. Following this, the tire pressure warning light blinks at 0.125
second intervals.
*a
0.125 sec.
*b
ON
*c
OFF
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XN008BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(e) Wait for 1.5 minutes with the vehicle stopped, or drive the vehicle for 1 minute (C21811 to
C2184).
HINT:
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitters send signals to the door control receiver once
every 1.5 minutes while the vehicle is stopped and once every minute while driving.
(f) Check that the tire pressure warning system test mode (signal check mode) DTCs are cleared.
TEST MODE (SIGNAL
CHECK MODE) DTC
C2181 to C2184
TEST
SIGNAL
TEST MODE (SIGNAL CHECK MODE) DTC CLEAR CONDITION
Transmitter Data is received from the relevant transmitter which has a

Data
registered ID in the door control receiver.
(g) Result
HINT:
After the signal check is completed, check for test mode (signal check mode) DTCs to confirm the
system status.
CONDITION
PROCEDURE
Test mode (signal check mode) DTC is output
Repair the faulty part and enter Signal Check again
Test mode (signal check mode) DTCs are cleared
No problem
(h) End of test mode (signal check mode)

(1) After completing the test mode (signal check mode), turn the ignition switch off and disconnect
the Techstream.
(i) Test mode (signal check mode) DTCs
(1) If a trouble code is displayed during the test mode (signal check mode) DTC check, check the
diagnosis procedure listed for that code. For details of each code, refer to See page below.
DTC
DETECTION ITEM
TROUBLE AREA
NO.
C2181
C2182
SEE
PAGE
Transmitter ID1 not

received
Transmitter ID2 not

received
Transmitter ID3 not
Tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter
transmitter
transmitter
2/3
8/6/12
C2183
received

C2184
Transmitter ID4 not

received
transmitter
3/3
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: Tire Pressure Warning Light Circui
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XN305KX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: Tire Pressure Warning Light
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Tire Pressure Warning Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
If the door control receiver detects any problems, the tire pressure warning light blinks (stays on after
blinking for 1 minute) and tire pressure monitoring is cancelled at the same time. At this time, the ECU
stores a DTC in memory.
Connecting terminals TC and CG of the DLC3 makes the tire pressure warning light blink to output DTCs.
The door control receiver sends the tire pressure warning light illumination request signal to the main
body ECU (network gateway ECU) via a direct line. The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) then
sends the signal to the combination meter assembly via CAN communication.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XN305KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1.
(a) Check if a CAN communication system DTC is output
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output.
DTC is output.
2.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT (B1247)
(a) Clear the DTCs

(d) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC B1247 is not output.
NG
GO TO DTC B1247
OK
2/3
8/6/12
3.
CHECK OPERATION OF TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT (ACTIVE TEST)

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test.
(f) Check the condition of the tire pressure warning light by using the Techstream.
Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Tire pressure
Confirm that the vehicle is
Warning System
warning light
light OFF or ON
stopped, engine idling
OK:
The tire pressure warning light turns on or off in accordance with the Techstream operation.
NG
OK
3/3
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XV6042X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XV6042X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XV6042X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000X9J04LX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
HINT:
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is powered by a lithium battery. When disposing of
the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, remove the battery and dispose of it correctly.
1. DISPOSE OF TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER

(a) Cut the 2 terminals that connect the battery to the base
board to remove the battery.
*1
Terminal
*2
Lithium Battery
HINT:
The battery and base board are covered with urethane.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000X9J04LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F7Q04BX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Always use a new grommet, washer, nut and valve core when installing the tire pressure warning
Make sure not to damage the urethane covered backside of the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter (the surface opposite to the side with the ID code) with anything sharp.
If installing a new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, write down the ID number before
installation.
Check that there is no oil, water or lubricant around the rim hole, tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, washer and nut. Failing to do so may result in improper installation.
Use only a specified cap. If an unspecified cap is used, it may seize to the tire pressure warning
1. INSTALL TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER

(a) Install a new grommet to the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
(b) Insert the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter
into the valve installation hole from the inside of the rim
so that the printed surface can be seen.
*a
Printed Surface
*b
7-digit Number Transmitter ID
NOTICE:
Check that there is no visible deformation, damage, or
other abnormalities on the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter.
Check that there is no foreign matter on the grommet and
around the rim hole.
If the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is
installed upside down, it may be damaged or fail to
transmit signals when driving at high speeds.
(c) From the outside of the rim, install a new washer onto the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, and tighten a
new nut.
*1 Tire Pressure Warning Valve and Transmitter
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F7Q04BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
*2 Rim
*3 Grommet
*4 Washer
*5 Nut
NOTICE:
No further tightening is required once the nut is tightened
to the specified torque.
Check that there is no foreign matter on the washer and
nut.
(d) Set the wheel onto the mounting machine and install the lower bead. Position the main body of
the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter in the shaded area shown in the illustration.
*1
Rim
*a
Mount Tool of the Mounting Machine
*b
Area for Tire Pressure Warning Valve and Transmitter

Rim Rotating Direction
NOTICE:
If the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is positioned outside this area, it will interfere
2/3
8/6/12
with the tire bead and may be damaged.

If the use of lubricant is required when installing the bead, do not apply lubricant directly to the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
(e) Install the upper bead.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the tire bead and tool do not interfere with the main body of the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter and that it is not clamped by the bead.
(f) Install the new valve core.

(g) After the tire is inflated, the valve nut may be loose. Retighten the nut to the specified torque.
NOTICE:
No further tightening is required once the nut is tightened to the specified torque.
(h) Check for air leaks with soapy water.

If there is air leakage, push the valve core 2 or 3 times to remove any dirt attached to the valve
core. If air continues to leak, replace the grommet, washer and nut.
(i) Install the cap.


4. INSPECT TIRES
5. REGISTER TRANSMITTER ID
6. REGISTER TRANSMITTER ID
7. INSPECT TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
3/3
8/6/12
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F7R047X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER
(a) Remove the cap and valve core to release the air from the tire.
NOTICE:
Keep the removed cap.
(b) After ensuring that a sufficient amount of air has been released, remove the nut and washer used
to secure the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Drop the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter with the grommet into the tire.
HINT:
The grommet may remain attached to the rim.
(c) After dropping the tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter into the tire, disengage the bead using the
shoe of a tire remover.
*1
Tire
*2
Shoe
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter due to interference between the valve
and the tire bead.
Set the tire remover shoe as shown in the illustration.
Width (A):
10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in.)
(d) Separate the upper bead.
(e) Take out the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter with the grommet from the tire and
separate the lower bead.
(f) Remove the grommet from the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F7R047X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: FRONT DOOR: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: DOOR / HATCH: FRONT DOOR: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
HINT:
Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides.
The following procedure is for the LH side.
Centering bolts are used to mount the door hinge to the vehicle body and door. The door cannot
be adjusted with the centering bolts installed on it. Substitute the centering bolts with standard
bolts when making adjustments.
Specified torque for standard bolts is shown in the standard bolt chart
*1
Centering Bolt
*2
Standard Bolt
1. INSPECT FRONT DOOR

(a) Check that the clearance measurements of areas *a through *j are within each standard range.
1/6
8/6/12
Standard Clearance
AREA
MEASUREMENT
AREA
MEASUREMENT
*a
-1.0 to 2.0 mm (-0.0394 to 0.0787 in.)
*b
5.5 to 8.5 mm (0.2165 to 0.3347 in.)
*c
3.5 to 6.5 mm (0.1378 to 0.2559 in.)
*d
5.2 to 8.2 mm (0.2047 to 0.3228 in.)
*e
13.5 to 16.5 mm (0.5315 to 0.6496 in.)
*f
2.5 to 5.5 mm (0.0984 to 0.2165 in.)
*g
0.0 to 1.5 mm (0.0 to 0.0591 in.)
*h
4.8 to 7.8 mm (0.1890 to 0.3071 in.)
*i
3.1 to 5.6 mm (0.122 to 0.220 in.)
*j
-1.0 to 1.5 mm (-0.0394 to 0.0591 in.)
*1
Front Glass
*2
Front Door
2. ADJUST FRONT DOOR GLASS

(a) Using a SST, check that the clearance measurements of
areas "a" to "b" are within each standard range.
SST: 09812-18010
2/6
8/6/12
Standard Clearance:
AREA
MEASUREMENT
3.5 to 6.5 mm (0.1378 to 0.2559 in.)
5.2 to 8.2 mm (0.2047 to 0.3228 in.)
*1
SST
(b) Adjust the front door glass so that the fitting dimensions
come within the reference values.
(c) Loosen the nut on the front door sash stopper and front door rear sash stopper, and adjust the
glass position.
(d) After the adjustment, tighten the nut on the front door sash stopper and front door rear sash
stopper.
3/6
8/6/12
(e) Loosen the 2 nuts on the front door rear lower frame
sub-assembly, and adjust the glass position.
(f) After the adjustment, tighten the 2 nuts on the front door rear lower frame sub-assembly.
(g) Loosen the bolt on the door glass inner stabilizer and
adjust the glass position.
(h) After the adjustment, tighten the bolt on the door glass inner stabilizer.
(i) Loosen the 2 nuts on the front door rear lower frame sub-assembly.
(j) Using a screwdriver, rotate the bolts and then adjust the position of the front door glass in lateral
direction.
4/6
8/6/12
(k) After the adjustment, tighten the 2 nuts on the front door rear lower frame sub-assembly.
(l) Using a SST, check that the clearance measurements of
areas "a" to "b" are within each standard range .
SST: 09812-18020
*1
SST
Standard Clearance:
AREA
MEASUREMENT
*a
2.5 to 5.5 mm (0.0984 to 0.2165 in.)
*b
5.2 to 8.2 mm (0.2047 to 0.3228 in.)
(m) Adjust the front door fix window glass so that the fitting
dimensions come within the reference values.
(n) Loosen the 3 nuts on the front door fix window glass and adjust the front door fix window glass
position.
(o) After the adjustment, tighten the nut on the front door fix window glass.
3. ADJUST FRONT DOOR
5/6
8/6/12
(a) Loosen the hinge bolts on the vehicle body and adjust
the door position.
(b) After the adjustment, tighten the hinge bolts on the vehicle body.
(c) Loosen the hinge bolts on the door and adjust the door position.
(d) After the adjustment, tighten the hinge bolts on the door.
(e) Adjust the striker position by slightly loosening the striker

mounting screws and hitting the striker with a plasticfaced hammer.
(f) After the adjustment, tighten the striker mounting screws.

6/6
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: FRONT DOOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XBA06EX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: FRONT DOOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XBA06EX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
5/6
8/6/12
6/6
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: FRONT DOOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011QF0ANX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: FRONT DOOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:


tape, disengage the 7 claws.
(b) Disengage the guide and remove the door armrest cover.
*1
Protective Tape

tape, open the cap.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011QF0ANX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/13
8/6/12
*1
Protective Tape
(b) Using a clip remover, disengage the clip.
(c) Remove the 3 screws.
(d) Using a moulding remover, disengage the 10 clips.
(e) Pull out the front door trim board sub-assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow in the
illustration.
(f) Disconnect each connector.
(g) Raise the front door trim board sub-assembly and remove the front door trim board sub-assembly
together with the front door glass inner weatherstrip.
(h) Disconnect the front door lock remote control cable and
the front door inside locking cable.
2/13
8/6/12
*1
Front Door Inside Locking Cable
*2
Front Door Lock Remote Control Cable
4. REMOVE FRONT DOOR INSIDE HANDLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the 2 guides and remove the spacer and front door inside handle sub-assembly.
*1
Spacer
5. REMOVE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY WITH FRONT DOOR
ARMREST BASE PANEL (for Driver Side)
(a) Remove the 4 screws and power window regulator

master switch assembly with the front door armrest base
panel.
6. REMOVE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY WITH FRONT DOOR ARMREST
BASE PANEL (for Front Passenger Side)
3/13
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 4 screws and power window regulator switch

assembly with front door armrest base panel.
7. REMOVE DOOR ASSIST GRIP ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the guide and remove the door assist grip assembly.
8. REMOVE FRONT LOWER DOOR TRIM PAD
(a) Remove the front lower door trim pad with the 5 screws.
9. REMOVE FRONT DOOR GLASS INNER WEATHERSTRIP

(a) Put a 4 mm (0.1575 in.) drill bit into a drill.
(b) Wind tape around the drill bit approximately 5 mm (0.1969 in.) from the tip of the drill, as shown in
the illustration.
HINT:
Tape the 4 mm (0.1575 in.) drill bit to prevent the drill bit from going too deep.
4/13
8/6/12
*1
a
Drill
*2
5.0 mm (0.1969 in.)
Tape
-
(c) Lightly press the drill against the 6 rivets and drill off the flanges of the 6 rivets.
CAUTION:
Take care with the drilled rivet as it may become hot.
NOTICE:
Pressing the drill too firmly will cause the rivet to turn and result in the rivet not being drilled
through.
Do not pry the rivet with the drill because this may cause damage to the installation holes of the
rivet or the drill bit.
(d) Disengage the 9 claws and remove the front door glass
inner weatherstrip from the front door trim board subassembly, as shown in the illustration.

11. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
5/13
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly

connector.
(b) Disconnect the front door lock assembly connector.
(c) Remove the front door service hole cover.

HINT:
Remove any remaining butyl tape from the door.
12. REMOVE OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR SUB-ASSEMBLY

13. REMOVE FRONT DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the screw.
(b) Using a clip remover, disengage the 15 clips and remove the front door weatherstrip.
14. REMOVE FRONT DOOR GLASS SUB-ASSEMBLY
6/13
8/6/12
(a) Provisionally install the power window regulator master switch (for driver side).
(b) Provisionally install the power window regulator switch (for passenger side).
(d) Move the front door glass sub-assembly until the 2 nuts can be seen through the service holes.
(e) Disconnect the power window regulator master switch connector (for driver side).
(f) Disconnect the power window regulator switch connector (for passenger side).
(g) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
(h) Remove the 3 nuts and loosen the front door rear lower
frame sub-assembly.
(i) Remove the 2 nuts.
(j) Loosen the door glass inner stabilizer bolt.

*1
Door Glass Inner Stabilizer Bolt
NOTICE:
After the 2 nuts are removed, do not allow the door glass to fall.
7/13
8/6/12
(k) While holding the front door glass sub-assembly up, slide
the front door rear lower frame sub-assembly downward,
and pull the front door glass sub-assembly out from the
front door rear lower frame sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not allow the door glass to fall.
Do not damage the door glass.
(l) Remove the front door glass sub-assembly from the

position indicated in the illustration.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the front door weatherstrip.
HINT:
The front glass sub-assembly can only be removed from the
position indicated in the illustration.
15. REMOVE FRONT DOOR REAR LOWER FRAME SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the front door rear lower frame sub-assembly from the front door frame.
16. REMOVE DOOR GLASS INNER STABILIZER

(a) Remove the bolt and the door glass inner stabilizer.
17. REMOVE FRONT DOOR FIX WINDOW GLASS
(a) Remove the 3 nuts.
(b) Rotate the front door fix window glass as indicated by the
arrows in the order shown in the illustration, and remove
8/13
8/6/12
the front door sash.

NOTICE:
Since the front door fix window glass attachment bolts
interfere, be sure to follow the procedure shown in the
illustration.
Do not allow the front door fix window glass to fall.
Do not damage the front door sash.
18. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SASH STOPPER

(a) Remove the nut and front door sash stopper.
19. REMOVE FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
(b) Loosen the temporary bolt.

*1
Temporary Bolt
NOTICE:
Do not remove the temporary bolt. If the temporary bolt is removed, the front door window
regulator sub-assembly may fall and cause damage.
(c) Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.

(d) Remove the temporary bolt and the front door window regulator sub-assembly with power
window regulator motor assembly.
20. REMOVE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY

21. REMOVE FRONT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)
(a) Using a T30 "TORX" socket wrench, loosen the screw and
9/13
8/6/12
remove the front door lock cylinder assembly with front

door outside handle cover LH.
HINT:
The screw cannot be removed because it is integrated into the
front door outside handle frame sub-assembly.
22. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE COVER (for Driver Side)
(a) Using a screwdriver, disengage the claw and 2 guides

and remove the front door outside handle cover as shown
23. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE COVER (for Front Passenger Side)
(a) Using a T30 "TORX" socket wrench, loosen the screw and
remove the front door outside handle cover.
HINT:
The screw cannot be removed because it is integrated into the
front door outside handle frame sub-assembly.
24. REMOVE FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY

25. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the front door outside handle assembly, as

10/13
8/6/12
26. REMOVE FRONT DOOR FRONT OUTSIDE HANDLE PAD
(a) Disengage the 3 claws and remove the front door front
outside handle pad.
27. REMOVE FRONT DOOR REAR OUTSIDE HANDLE PAD
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the front door rear
outside handle pad.
28. REMOVE FRONT DOOR LOCK OPEN ROD
(a) Remove the front door lock open rod as indicated by the
arrows, in the order shown in the illustration.
29. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE FRAME SUB-ASSEMBLY
11/13
8/6/12
(a) Using a T30 "TORX" socket wrench, loosen the screw.
(b) Slide the front door outside handle frame sub-assembly to disengage the claw of the front door
outside handle frame sub-assembly, and then remove it.
*a
Outside Vehicle
*b
Inside Vehicle
30. REMOVE FRONT DOOR CHECK ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and front door check assembly.
31. REMOVE FRONT DOOR PANEL CUSHION
12/13
8/6/12
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the 2 front door panel
cushions.
32. REMOVE FRONT DOOR GLASS OUTER WEATHERSTRIP ASSEMBLY

33. REMOVE DOOR SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR
34. REMOVE FRONT DOOR HOLE COVER
(a) Disengage the 4 claws and remove the front door hole
cover.
13/13
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: FRONT DOOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011QG0ATX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: FRONT DOOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT DOOR HOLE COVER
(a) Insert the front door hole cover with the 4 claws.
2. INSTALL DOOR SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR

3. INSTALL FRONT DOOR GLASS OUTER WEATHERSTRIP ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL FRONT DOOR PANEL CUSHION
(a) Engage the 2 claws and install 2 new front door panel
cushions.
5. INSTALL FRONT DOOR CHECK ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply MP grease to the sliding areas of the front door check assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011QG0ATX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/14
8/6/12
(b) Apply adhesive to the threads of the bolt.

Adhesive:
equivalent

(d) Install the front door check assembly with the 2 nuts.
6. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE FRAME SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply MP grease to the sliding parts on the front door outside handle frame sub-assembly.
(b) Engage the claw.
(c) Using a T30 "TORX" socket wrench, install the front door outside handle frame sub-assembly with
the screw.
*a
Outside Vehicle
*b
Inside Vehicle
7. INSTALL FRONT DOOR LOCK OPEN ROD

2/14
8/6/12
(a) Install the front door lock open rod as indicated by the
arrows, in the order shown in the illustration.
8. INSTALL FRONT DOOR FRONT OUTSIDE HANDLE PAD
(a) Engage the 3 claws and install the front door front
outside handle pad.
9. INSTALL FRONT DOOR REAR OUTSIDE HANDLE PAD
(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the front door rear outside
handle pad.
10. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE ASSEMBLY
3/14
8/6/12
(a) Insert the front end of the front door outside handle
assembly into the front door outside handle frame subassembly.
(b) Insert the rear end of the front door outside handle assembly into the front door outside handle
frame sub-assembly, and then slide the front door outside handle assembly toward the front of
the vehicle to install it.
11. INSTALL FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY

12. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE COVER (for Driver Side)
(a) Engage the claw and 2 guides, and install the front door
outside handle cover to the front door lock cylinder
assembly.
13. INSTALL FRONT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)
(a) Install the front door outside handle cover with front door
lock cylinder assembly.
HINT:
Make sure that the front door lock cylinder rod is inserted into
the front door lock assembly.
(b) Using a T30 "TORX" socket wrench, install the front door
4/14
8/6/12
lock cylinder assembly with the screw.

14. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE COVER (for Front Passenger Side)
(a) Using a T30 "TORX" socket wrench, install the front door
outside handle cover with the screw.
15. INSTALL POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY

16. INSTALL FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply MP grease to the sliding parts of the front door window regulator sub-assembly.
(b) Install the temporary bolt to the front door window regulator sub-assembly.
(c) Temporarily install the front door window regulator subassembly.
(d) Tighten the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.

(e) Tighten the temporary bolt.
(f) Connect the connector.
*1
5/14
8/6/12
Temporary Bolt
17. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SASH STOPPER

(a) Install the front door sash stopper with the bolt.
18. INSTALL FRONT DOOR FIX WINDOW GLASS
(a) Insert the front door fix window glass so that it is

perpendicular to the front door frame, in the order shown
(b) Rotate the front door fix window glass 90.

NOTICE:
Do not damage the front door fix window glass.
(c) Install the front door fix window glass with the 3 nuts.
Nut(A) - Torque: 14 Nm (143 kgfcm, 10ftlbf)
Nut(B) - Torque: 7.5 Nm (76 kgfcm, 66inlbf)
19. INSTALL FRONT DOOR GLASS SUB-ASSEMBLY

(b) Connect the power window regulator master switch assembly connector (for driver side).
(c) Connect the power window regulator switch assembly connector (for front passenger side).
(d) Move the front door glass sub-assembly until the 2 nuts can be seen through the service holes.
(e) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
(f) Disconnect the power window regulator master switch assembly connector (for driver side).
(g) Disconnect the power window regulator switch assembly connector (for front passenger side).
(h) Insert the front door glass sub-assembly into the front
6/14
8/6/12
door frame from the position indicated in the illustration.

HINT:
The front door glass sub-assembly can only be installed from
the position indicated in the illustration, so install it while
sliding the front door rear lower frame sub-assembly.
(i) Insert the grommet of front door glass assembly into the rail of the front door rear lower frame
sub-assembly.
(j) Install the front door glass sub-assembly with the new 2
nuts.
20. INSTALL DOOR GLASS INNER STABILIZER

(a) Install the door glass inner stabilizer with the bolt.
21. INSTALL FRONT DOOR REAR LOWER FRAME SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the front door rear lower frame sub-assembly with the 3 nuts.
22. INSTALL FRONT DOOR WEATHERSTRIP

(a) Engage the 15 clips.
(b) Engage the 2 claws.
(c) Install the front door weatherstrip with the screw.
7/14
8/6/12
23. INSTALL OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR SUB-ASSEMBLY
24. ADJUST FRONT DOOR GLASS SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the front door glass sub-assembly
(b) Adjust the front door glass sub-assembly
25. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER

(a) Apply butyl tape to the front door panel.
(b) Pass the front door lock remote control cable assembly and the front door inside locking cable
assembly through a new front door service hole cover.
*1
Reference Point
8/14
8/6/12
(c) Attach the front door service hole cover according to the reference points on the front door panel.
NOTICE:
Overlay the butyl tape in lengths of 20 cm (7.874 in.) or more.
Do not block the drip holes in the front door panel with butyl tape.
Securely install the front door service hole cover preventing wrinkles and air bubbles.
(d) Connect each connector.
26. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (w/ Front Speaker)

27. INSTALL FRONT DOOR GLASS INNER WEATHERSTRIP
(a) Engage the 9 claws and install the front door glass inner
weatherstrip to the front door trim board sub-assembly,
(b) Install a nose piece to an air riveter or hand riveter.
(c) Insert the mandrel part of a new rivet into the nose piece.
(d) Place the riveter upright against the moulding and install the 6rivets.
HINT:
If the rivet cannot be cut, pull it once and cut it.
9/14
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Do not pry the rivet with the riveter as this will cause damage to the riveter and mandrel.
*1
Riveter
*2
Mandrel
*a
Incorrect
*b
Correct
Confirm that the rivets are seated properly against the front door glass inner weatherstrip.
*1
Riveter
*a
Incorrect
*b
Correct
Do not tilt the riveter when installing the rivet to the front door glass inner weatherstrip
Do not leave any space between the rivet head and front door glass inner weatherstrip.
10/14
8/6/12
28. INSTALL FRONT LOWER DOOR TRIM PAD
(a) Install the front lower door trim pad with the 5 screws.
29. INSTALL DOOR ASSIST GRIP ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the guide and install the door assist grip
assembly with the 2 screws.
30. INSTALL POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY WITH FRONT DOOR
(a) Install the power window regulator master switch

assembly with front door armrest base panel with the 4
screws.
31. INSTALL POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY WITH FRONT DOOR ARMREST
11/14
8/6/12
(a) Install the power window regulator switch assembly with

front door armrest base panel with the 4 screws.
32. INSTALL FRONT DOOR INSIDE HANDLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 2 guides.
(b) Install the front door inside handle sub-assembly and spacer to the front door trim board subassembly with the 2 screws.
*1
Spacer
(a) Connect the front door lock remote control cable and front
door inside locking cable to the front door inside handle.
*1
Front Door Inside Locking Cable
*2
Front Door Lock Remote Control Cable
(b) Connect each connector.
12/14
8/6/12
(c) Engage the 10 clips and install the front door trim board
sub-assembly.
(d) Engage the clip and install the 3 screws.
(e) Engage the claw and install the cap.
13/14
8/6/12
(a) Engage the guide and 7 claws, and install the door
armrest cover.

37. INSPECT POWER WINDOW
14/14
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002W9G02BX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002W9G02BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002W9F03NX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 11 clamps.
(b) Check that the matchmark of the fuel lid lock control cable
sub-assembly is aligned with the center of the clamp.
*a
Matchmark
(c) Install the fuel lid lock control cable sub-assembly as

indicated by the arrows in the order shown in the
illustration.
2. INSTALL FUEL LID LOCK OPEN LEVER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Connect the fuel lid lock control cable sub-assembly.
(b) Install the 2 nuts and fuel lid lock open lever sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002W9F03NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12

(c) Return the floor mat.
3. INSTALL HANDLE COVER

(a) Install the handle cover with the screw.
4. INSTALL NO. 2 PACKAGE TRAY TRIM SPACER

(a) Install the No. 2 package tray trim spacer.
(b) Install the 2 clips.

HINT:
7. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER LH

(a) Install the 5 clips and the luggage compartment inner trim cover RH.

HINT:
13. INSTALL FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY

HINT:

HINT:
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002W9H03OX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
3. DISCONNECT FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

HINT:
Disconnect the front door opening trim weatherstrip to the extent that allows the removal of the
luggage compartment trim cover LH.
4. DISCONNECT FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

HINT:
5. REMOVE FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY

HINT:

10. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH
(a) Disengage the 5 clips and remove the luggage

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002W9H03OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
compartment inner trim cover RH.
11. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER LH

HINT:
14. REMOVE NO. 2 PACKAGE TRAY TRIM SPACER
(a) Using a clip remover, remove the 2 clips and the No. 2
package tray trim spacer.
15. REMOVE HANDLE COVER

tape, disengage the claw.
*1
Protective Tape
2/5
8/6/12
(b) Remove the screw.
(c) Remove the handle cover as shown in the illustration.
16. REMOVE FUEL LID LOCK OPEN LEVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Peel back the floor carpet.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the fuel lid lock open lever sub-assembly.
(c) Disconnect the fuel lid lock control cable sub-assembly.
17. REMOVE FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
3/5
8/6/12
(a) Remove the fuel lid lock control cable sub-assembly as

indicated by the arrows, in the order shown in the
illustration.
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, disengage the 11 clamps and remove
the fuel lid lock control cable sub-assembly.
*1
Fuel Lid Lock Control Cable Sub-Assembly
4/5
8/6/12
5/5
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Y5406YX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Y530AMX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY
(a) Pass the hood lock control cable assembly into the engine compartment.
*1
Hood Lock Control Cable
*2
Grommet
*3
Hood Cable Grommet
*4
Matchmark
(b) Engage 6 clamps shown in the illustration.
2. INSTALL HOOD LOCK ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply MP grease to the sliding areas of the hood lock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Y530AMX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(b) Connect the hood lock control cable assembly to the hood
lock assembly.
(c) Install the hood lock assembly with the 3 bolts in the
3. INSTALL HOOD LOCK CONTROL LEVER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Connect the hood lock control cable assembly to install the hood lock control lever sub-assembly.
(b) Install the hood lock control lever sub-assembly with the bolt
4. INSPECT HOOD SUB-ASSEMBLY
5. ADJUST HOOD SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Y530AMX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Y5509ZX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH
3. REMOVE HOOD LOCK CONTROL LEVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and hood lock control lever subassembly.
(b) Disconnect the hood lock control cable assembly from the hood lock control lever sub-assembly.
5. REMOVE HOOD LOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and hood lock assembly.
(b) Disconnect the hood lock control cable assembly form the hood lock assembly.
6. REMOVE HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Y5509ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Using a screwdriver, disengage 6 clamps shown in the illustration.
*1
Hood Lock Control Cable
*3
Hood Cable Grommet
*2
-
Grommet
-
HINT:
(b) Pull the hood lock control cable assembly from the engine compartment and remove it.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Y5509ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XB506SX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
HINT:
Centering bolts are used to mount the hood hinge and hood lock. The hood and hood lock cannot
be adjusted with the centering bolts installed. Substitute the centering bolts with standard bolts
when making adjustments.
Specified torque for standard bolts is shown in the standard bolt chart
*1
Centering Bolt
*2
Standard Bolt

(a) Horizontally and vertically adjust the hood.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XB506SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(1) Loosen the 4 hinge bolts of the

hood.
(2) Adjust the clearance between the hood and front fender by moving the hood.
(3) Tighten the 4 hinge bolts after the adjustment.
(b) Adjust the height of the front end of the hood using the cushion rubbers.
(1) Adjust the 2 cushion rubbers so that the heights of

the hood and fender are aligned.
HINT:
Raise or lower the front end of the hood by turning the 2
cushion rubbers.
(c) Adjust the hood lock.

(1) Loosen the 3 bolts.
(2) Adjust the hood lock position so that the striker can
enter it smoothly.
2/3
8/6/12
(3) Tighten the 3 bolts after the adjustment in the order

(4) Check that the striker can engage smoothly with the hood lock.
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Y4M049X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE HOOD TO COWL TOP SEAL
(a) Disengage the craw and remove the hood to cowl top
seal and 3 clips.
2. REMOVE HOOD INSULATOR
(a) Using a clip remover, remove the 9 clips and hood

insulator.
3. REMOVE HOOD TO RADIATOR SUPPORT SEAL RH
(a) Using a clip remover, remove the 3 clips and hood to

radiator support seal RH.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Y4M049X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Y4M049X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
(a) Check that the clearance measurements of areas *a through *e are within each standard range.
Standard Clearance
AREA
MEASUREMENT
AREA
MEASUREMENT
*a
5.8 to 9.8 mm (0.2283 to 0.3858 in.)
*b
3.0 to 7.0 mm (0.1181 to 0.2756 in.)
*c
-2.0 to 2.0 mm (-0.0787 to 0.0787 in.)
*d
2.0 to 5.0 mm (0.0787 to 0.1969 in.)
*e
-2.0 to 1.0 mm (-0.0787 to 0.0394 in.)
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Y4N04CX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL HOOD TO RADIATOR SUPPORT SEAL RH
(a) Install the hood to radiator support seal RH with the 3

clips.
HINT:
2. INSTALL HOOD INSULATOR
(a) Install the hood insulator with the 9 clips.
3. INSTALL HOOD TO COWL TOP SEAL
(a) Engage the craw and install the hood to cowl top seal
with the 3 clips.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Y4N04CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: HOOD: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Y4N04CX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER INNER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OIV04VX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER INNER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FRS)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OIV04VX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER INNER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020BR010X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER INNER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
4-1
Pushed (ON)
Below 1
4-1
Not pushed (OFF)
10 k or higher
*a

(Luggage Door Opening Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the switch
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020BR010X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER INNER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OIU06IX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER INNER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FRS)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the luggage door opening switch assembly.
2. INSTALL SWITCH BASE

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OIU06IX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER INNER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OIW06JX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER INNER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE SWITCH BASE
4. REMOVE LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the luggage door

opening switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OIW06JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER MAIN SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001XT600XX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER MAIN SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FRS)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XT600XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER MAIN SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020BS00PX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER MAIN SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING CANCEL SWITCH ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
1-2
Pushed (ON)
Below 1
1-2
Not pushed (OFF)
10 k or higher
*a

(Luggage Door Opening Cancel Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the switch
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020BS00PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER MAIN SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001XT501LX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER MAIN SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FRS)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING CANCEL SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the luggage door opening cancel switch assembly.

(b) Install the luggage compartment inner trim cover LH with the 5 clips.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XT501LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER MAIN SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001XT701LX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER MAIN SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Disengage the 5 clips.
(b) Disconnect the connector and remove the luggage

compartment inner trim cover LH.
4. REMOVE LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING CANCEL SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the luggage door

opening cancel switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XT701LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OUTER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OIV04TX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OUTER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FRS)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OIV04TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OUTER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UM202DX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OUTER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FRS)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
1-2
Back door opener switch

not pushed
10 k or higher
1-2
Back door opener switch

pushed
Below 1
*a

(Back Door Opener Switch Assembly)
If the result is not specified, replace the back door opener
switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UM202DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OUTER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OIU06GX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OUTER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the back door opener switch assembly.
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OUTSIDE GARNISH SUB-ASSEMBLY

3. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER PACKING
4. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OIU06GX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OUTER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OIW06HX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OUTER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER PACKING
3. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OUTSIDE GARNISH SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the back door opener
switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OIW06HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VPK024X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013
FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
Trunk/BDoor
Open SW
Luggage door opening switch

signal/ON or OFF
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
ON: Luggage door opening switch
Trunk Cancel
Switch
Luggage door opening cancel

switch signal/ON or OFF
assembly pushed
OFF: Luggage door opening switch
assembly not pushed
ON: Luggage door opening cancel
switch assembly pushed
OFF: Luggage door opening cancel
switch assembly not pushed
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPK024X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Active Test.
(e) Perform the Active Test according to the display on the Techstream.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
Trunk and Back-Door

Open
TEST PART
Operate luggage compartment door

lock motor
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPK024X.html?sisuffix=ff&
CONTROL
RANGE
ON/OFF
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
This test will open the

trunk
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUB
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TFV016X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the luggage compartment door opener system.
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Go to step 6
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TFV016X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUB
4.
(a) Data List / Active Test

(b) Operation Check
(c) Terminals of ECU
NEXT
5.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
6.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TFV016X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: Luggage Compartment Door Ope
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001SHK019X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: Luggage Compartment Door
Opener does not Operate (2013 FR-S)
Luggage Compartment Door Opener does not Operate
DESCRIPTION
When the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) has received the ON signal from the luggage opening
cancel switch assembly and the ON signal from the luggage door opening switch assembly, the main
body ECU (network gateway ECU) activates the luggage compartment door lock motor.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001SHK019X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
Trunk and Back-Door

Open
TEST PART
CONTROL
RANGE
Operate luggage compartment door

lock motor
ON/OFF
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
This test will open the

trunk
OK:
Luggage compartment door lock motor operates.
NG
INSPECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR

LOCK ASSEMBLY
OK
2.
CHECK LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM (LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING

CANCEL SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) When the luggage door opening cancel switch assembly is on, push the luggage door opening
switch assembly and check that the luggage compartment door opens.
OK:
Luggage compartment door opener system operates normally.
(b) When the luggage door opening cancel switch assembly

is off, push the luggage door opening switch assembly and
2/7
8/6/12
check that the luggage compartment door does not open.

*1 Luggage Door Opening Cancel Switch Assembly
OK:
Luggage compartment door opener system does not
operate.
3.
NG
OK
END

Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
Trunk/BDoor
Open SW
signal/ON or OFF
Trunk Main
SW

NORMAL CONDITION
ON: Luggage door opening switch

assembly is pushed
OFF: Luggage door opening switch
assembly is not pushed
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
ON: Luggage door opening cancel

switch assembly is pushed
OFF: Luggage door opening cancel
switch assembly is not pushed
OK:
On the Techstream screen, each item changes between ON and OFF according to the above.
Result:
3/7
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG (Luggage door opening switch assembly is abnormal)
NG (Luggage door opening cancel switch assembly is abnormal)
OK
INSPECT LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING SWITCH
INSPECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
4.
INSPECT LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING CANCEL SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the luggage door opening cancel switch assembly
(b) Inspect the luggage door opening cancel switch assembly
NG
REPLACE LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING CANCEL

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING CANCEL SWITCH

ASSEMBLY - MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))
(a) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector and the H7 luggage door
opening cancel switch assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
D5-27 - H7-1
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
4/7
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D5-27 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
H7-2 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
6.
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
GATEWAY ECU)
INSPECT LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the luggage door opening switch assembly
(b) Inspect the luggage door opening switch assembly
REPLACE LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (LUGGAGE DOOR OPENING SWITCH ASSEMBLY MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))
(a) Disconnect the D6 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector and the D4 luggage door
opening switch assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
D6-16 (TSW) - D4-4
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
D6-16 (TSW) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
5/7
8/6/12
D4-1 - Body ground
8.
Always
Below 1
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
GATEWAY ECU)
INSPECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the luggage compartment door lock assembly
(b) Inspect the luggage compartment door lock assembly
NG
REPLACE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR

LOCK ASSEMBLY
OK
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY

- MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))
(a) Disconnect the 3B instrument panel junction block assembly connector and the J3 luggage
compartment door lock assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
J3-1 (B) - 3B-6
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
J3-1 (B) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
J3-2 (E) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
NG
6/7
8/6/12
CONNECTOR
OK
10.
REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Temporarily replace the instrument panel junction block assembly with a new or normally
functioning one
.
(b) Check the door closer operation.
OK:
Door closer operation normal.
NG

GATEWAY ECU)
OK
END
7/7
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000025VO02EX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. CHECK LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER OPERATION
NOTICE:
To prevent inadvertent operation of the luggage compartment door, the opener does not operate
while driving.
When the theft deterrent system is in the armed state or alarm sounding state, the luggage
compartment door opener does not operate.*
*: w/ Theft Deterrent System
(a) When the luggage door opening switch is on, push the luggage door opening switch assembly
and check that the luggage compartment door opens.
(b) When the luggage door opening switch assembly is off, push the luggage door opening switch
assembly and check that the luggage compartment door does not open.
(c) While the luggage door opening cancel switch is on, check that the luggage compartment door
does not open when the luggage door opening switch is pressed.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000025VO02EX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WLL00QX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WLL00QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001SHF015X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Luggage Compartment Door Opener System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Luggage Compartment Door Lock

Assembly
Luggage door opening switch assembly
Luggage compartment door opener does not
operate
Luggage door opening cancel switch

assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001SHF015X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001SHG011X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013
FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) The luggage compartment door opener is electrically controled.
(b) The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) activates the luggage compartment door lock motor
when the ON signal from the luggage door opening switch assembly is received.
(c) Close the luggage compartment door.
(d) The luggage compartment door opener system operates as follows:
OPENING CANCEL SWITCH
CONDITION
OPENING SWITCH
CONDITION
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER

SYSTEM CONDITION
ON (Pushed)
Pushed (ON)
Does not operate
ON (Pushed)
Not pushed (OFF)
Does not operate
OFF (Not pushed)
Pushed (ON)
Operates
OFF (Not pushed)
Not pushed (OFF)
Does not operate

COMPONENT
FUNCTION
Luggage Compartment
Door Lock Cylinder
Assembly
Controlled by main body ECU (network gateway ECU) and unlatches

luggage compartment door lock.
Luggage Door Opening

Switch Assembly
When luggage door opening switch is pushed, opening switch ON signal

is sent to main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
Luggage Door Opening

Cancel Switch Assembly
When luggage door opening cancel switch is pushed, opening cancel

switch ON signal is sent to main body ECU (network gateway ECU).

Gateway ECU)
When luggage door opening switch is pushed, main body ECU (network
gateway ECU) receives opening switch ON signal.
When luggage door opening cancel switch is pushed, main body ECU
(network gateway ECU) receives opening cancel switch ON signal.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001SHG011X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000418F00AX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Communication Table
SENDER
RECEIVER
SIGNAL
LINE
Luggage Compartment Door

Opening Switch
Main body ECU

(Network gateway
ECU)
Luggage compartment door

opening switch signal
Local
communication
Luggage Compartment Door

Opener Cancel Switch
Main body ECU

(Network gateway
ECU)

opener cancel switch signal
Local
communication
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000418F00AX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TFW011X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPENER SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TFW011X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
assembly.
(b) Disconnect the D5 and D6 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
2/3
8/6/12
(c) Measure the resistance and voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
D5-27 - Body
ground
WIRING
COLOR
G - Body
ground
Luggage door opening

cancel switch signal input
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Luggage door opening cancel 10 k or

switch assembly off
higher
switch assembly on
Below 1
Luggage door opening switch 10 k or

D6-16 (TSW) -
L - Body
assembly off
higher
Body ground
ground
switch signal input

Below 1
assembly on
If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.
(d) Reconnect the D5 and D6 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
(e) Install the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) to the instrument panel junction block
assembly.
(f) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER
WIRING
CONNECTION
COLOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D5-27 - Body
ground
G - Body
ground
Ignition switch ON
Luggage compartment door lock
motor drive output
cancel switch on
D6-16 (TSW) -
L - Body
Body ground
ground
motor drive output
3B-6 - Body
ground
G - Body
ground
Ignition switch ON
motor drive output
switch on
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON
switch on
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010WL00QX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010WL00QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XCH016X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
1. DISPOSE OF LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
(a) Secure the luggage compartment door support assembly horizontally in a vise with the piston rod
pulled out.
(b) Wear safety glasses. Use a metal saw to slowly cut a
groove between A and B, as shown in the illustration, to
release the gas.
Standard:
AREA
MEASUREMENT
A-B
80 mm (3.15 in.)
CAUTION:
Although the gas inside the luggage compartment door
support assembly is colorless, odorless and harmless,
there is a possibility that metal debris could scatter.
Therefore, cover it with a piece of cloth or other
material.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XCH016X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010WK00UX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

NOTICE:
Avoid touching the piston rod as much as possible to prevent foreign matter from attaching to it.
Be sure to hold the cylinder while servicing.
Do not wear cotton gloves or other similar materials when handling the piston rod. Fibers may
attach to the rod and result in gas leaks.
In order to prevent the piston rod from deforming, do not apply any horizontal load to the door
support.
(a) When reusing the luggage compartment door support assembly:
(1) Install the 2 stop rings to the luggage compartment

door support assembly.
(b) Install the luggage compartment door support assembly.

NOTICE:
Install the luggage compartment door support assembly
while supporting the luggage compartment door by hand.
Check that the luggage compartment door support
assembly is engaged in the ball joint and that the luggage
compartment door support assembly cannot be pulled
out.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010WK00UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010WM00VX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

NOTICE:
Avoid touching the piston rod as much as possible to prevent foreign matter from attaching to it.
Be sure to hold the cylinder while servicing.
Do not wear cotton gloves or other similar materials when handling the piston rod. Fibers may
attach to the rod and result in gas leaks.
In order to prevent the piston rod from deforming, do not apply any horizontal load to the door
support.
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the 2 stop rings along the
groove.
*1
Protective Tape
*2
Stop Ring
HINT:
(b) Release the ball joint and remove the luggage compartment door support.
NOTICE:
Remove the luggage compartment door support while supporting the luggage compartment
door by hand.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010WM00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XBX03HX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
HINT:
Centering bolts are used to mount the door hinge to the door. The door cannot be adjusted with
the centering bolts installed. Substitute the centering bolts with standard bolts when making
adjustments.
A bolt without a torque specification is shown in the standard bolt chart
*1
Centering Bolt
*2
Standard Bolt
1. INSPECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check that the clearance measurements of areas *a to *f are within each standard range.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XBX03HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
Standard Clearance
AREA
MEASUREMENT
AREA
MEASUREMENT
*a
7.8 mm (0.3071 in.)
*b
2.0 to 5.0 mm (0.0787 to 0.1969 in.)
*c
0.0 mm (0.0 in.)
*d
5.8 to 10.2 mm (0.2283 to 0.4016 in.)
*e
4.3 to 7.3 mm (0.1693 to 0.2874 in.)
*f
-2.0 to 1.0 mm (-0.0787 to 0.0394 in.)
*g
150.0 mm (5.9055 in.)
2. ADJUST LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
2/3
8/6/12
(a) Horizontally and vertically adjust the door by loosening

the door side hinge bolts.
(b) When adjusting the rear edge of the doors left or right, or
adjusting the luggage door closer assembly, loosen the
bolts before making adjustments.
(c) Using a brass bar and a hammer, hit the striker to adjust its position.
(d) After the adjustment, tighten the 2 bolts on the luggage door closer assembly.
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XBZ052X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XBZ052X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XBZ052X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OIM058X
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR CUSHION
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the 2 luggage

compartment door cushions.

4. REMOVE LUGGAGE DOOR CLOSER ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVE LUGGAGE CLOSER CABLE ASSEMBLY
8. REMOVE RADIATOR GRILLE EMBLEM (for Rear Side)
9. REMOVE LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY
10. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
11. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OIM058X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OIN05AX
Title: DOOR / HATCH: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:
3. INSTALL LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY

4. INSTALL RADIATOR GRILLE EMBLEM (for Rear Side)
7. INSTALL LUGGAGE CLOSER CABLE ASSEMBLY
8. INSTALL LUGGAGE DOOR CLOSER ASSEMBLY
11. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR CUSHION
(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the 2 new luggage

compartment door cushions.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OIN05AX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000454O00LX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000454O00LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003CVF02AX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE HOOD TO FRONT END PANEL SEAL
(a) Remove the 13 clips and hood to front end panel seal
from the front bumper upper retainer.
2. REMOVE NO. 2 FRONT BUMPER SIDE SUPPORT LH
(a) Remove the screw.
(b) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the No. 2 front

bumper side support LH.
3. REMOVE NO. 2 FRONT BUMPER SIDE SUPPORT RH

HINT:
4. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT PLATE LH

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003CVF02AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 2 clips and the front bumper reinforcement

plate LH.
5. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT PLATE RH

HINT:
6. REMOVE FRONT LOWER BUMPER COVER
(b) Remove the 4 clips and the front lower bumper cover.
7. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER STAY BRACKET
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and the front bumper stay bracket.
8. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER ENERGY ABSORBER
2/5
8/6/12
(a) Remove the front bumper energy absorber.
9. REMOVE RADIATOR COVER PLATE
(a) Remove the 6 clips and the radiator cover plate.
10. REMOVE HIGH PITCHED HORN ASSEMBLY

11. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 8 bolts and front bumper reinforcement subassembly.
12. REMOVE RADIATOR GRILLE (OR FRONT PANEL) EMBLEM

13. REMOVE NO. 1 LOWER RADIATOR GRILLE
(a) Disengage the 20 claws and remove the No. 1 lower

3/5
8/6/12
radiator grille.
14. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER HOLE COVER LH
(a) Remove the 3 screws and front bumper hole cover LH.
15. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER HOLE COVER RH

HINT:
16. REMOVE FOG LIGHT COVER LH
(a) Disengage the 10 claws and remove the fog light cover
LH.
17. REMOVE FOG LIGHT COVER RH

HINT:
18. REMOVE FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY LH

19. REMOVE FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY RH
4/5
8/6/12
20. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER HOLE COVER
(a) Disengage the 4 claws and remove the front bumper hole
cover.
21. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER SIDE RETAINER LH

(a) Put a 4 mm (0.1575 in.) drill bit into a drill.
(b) Wind tape around the drill bit approximately 5 mm

(0.1969 in.) from the tip of the drill, as shown in the
illustration.
*1
Drill
*a
5.0 mm (0.1969 in.)
HINT:
Tape the 4 mm (0.1575 in.) drill bit to prevent the drill bit
from going too deep.
(c) Lightly press the drill against the 2 rivets and drill off the flanges of the 2 rivets.
NOTICE:
Take care with the drilled rivet as it may become hot.
HINT:
Pressing the drill too firmly will cause the rivet to turn and result in the rivet not being drilled
through.
Do not pry the rivet with the drill because this may cause damage to the installation holes of the
rivet or the drill bit.
22. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER SIDE RETAINER RH

HINT:
5/5
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034WP02MX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER COVER
(a) Connect each connector.
(b) Engage the 6 claws to install the front bumper cover.
(c) Install the clip.
HINT:
(d) Install the 4 clips.

HINT:
(e) Install the 7 clips.

(f) Install the 2 bolts.
2. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER UPPER RETAINER

(a) Install the front bumper upper retainer with the 5 bolts.
3. INSTALL FRONT MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY LH

4. INSTALL FRONT MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034WP02MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003CVG02AX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER SIDE RETAINER LH
(a) Using an air riveter or a hand riveter, install the front

bumper side retainer LH with 2 new rivets.
2. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER SIDE RETAINER RH

HINT:
3. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER HOLE COVER
(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the front bumper hole

cover.
4. INSTALL FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY LH

5. INSTALL FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
6. INSTALL FOG LIGHT COVER LH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003CVG02AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
(a) Engage the 10 claws to install the fog light cover LH.
7. INSTALL FOG LIGHT COVER RH

HINT:
8. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER HOLE COVER LH
(a) Install the front bumper hole cover LH with the 3 screws.
9. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER HOLE COVER RH

HINT:
10. INSTALL NO. 1 LOWER RADIATOR GRILLE
(a) Engage the 20 claws to install the No. 1 lower radiator

grille.
11. INSTALL RADIATOR GRILLE (OR FRONT PANEL) EMBLEM

12. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
2/5
8/6/12
(a) Install the front bumper reinforcement sub-assembly with

the 8 bolts.
13. INSTALL HIGH PITCHED HORN ASSEMBLY

14. INSTALL RADIATOR COVER PLATE
(a) Install the radiator cover plate with the 6 clips.
15. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER ENERGY ABSORBER
(a) Install the front bumper energy absorber.
16. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER STAY BRACKET
(a) Install the front bumper stay bracket with the 3 bolts.
3/5
8/6/12
17. INSTALL FRONT LOWER BUMPER COVER
(a) Install the front lower bumper cover with the 3 bolts.
18. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT PLATE LH
(a) Install the front bumper reinforcement plate LH with the 2

clips.
19. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT PLATE RH

HINT:
20. INSTALL NO. 2 FRONT BUMPER SIDE SUPPORT LH
4/5
8/6/12
(a) Engage the 2 claws.
(b) Install the No. 2 front bumper side support LH with the
screw.
21. INSTALL NO. 2 FRONT BUMPER SIDE SUPPORT RH

HINT:
22. INSTALL HOOD TO FRONT END PANEL SEAL
(a) Install the hood to front end panel seal with the 13 clips
to the front bumper upper retainer.
5/5
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034WR02LX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT BUMPER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE FRONT MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY LH
2. REMOVE FRONT MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
3. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER UPPER RETAINER
(a) Remove the 2 clips.
(b) Remove the 5 bolts and front bumper upper retainer.
4. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER COVER
(a) Put protective tape around the front bumper assembly.

*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034WR02LX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Remove the 7 clips.
(c) Remove the 2 bolts.
(d) Remove the 4 clips.

HINT:
(e) Remove the clip.

HINT:
(f) Disengage the 6 claws indicated by the arrow in the

illustration.
HINT:
2/3
8/6/12
(g) Disconnect each connector and remove the front bumper cover.
3/3
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT DOOR BELT MOULDING: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003W5W014X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT DOOR BELT MOULDING: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003W5W014X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT DOOR BELT MOULDING: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001P7Y06ZX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT DOOR BELT MOULDING: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT DOOR GLASS OUTER WEATHERSTRIP ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the claws to install the screw and a new front
door glass outer weatherstrip assembly, as shown in the
illustration.
2. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SASH

(a) Check the front door glass sub-assembly.
(b) Adjust the front door glass sub-assembly.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001P7Y06ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT DOOR BELT MOULDING: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001P7Y06ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT DOOR BELT MOULDING: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001P8106ZX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT DOOR BELT MOULDING: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

9. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SUSH
10. REMOVE FRONT DOOR GLASS OUTER WEATHERSTRIP ASSEMBLY

*1 Protective Tape
(b) Using a screwdriver, disengage the claw and remove the front door glass outer weatherstrip
assembly.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001P8106ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT DOOR BELT MOULDING: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001P8106ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT FENDER GARNISH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003UYJ005X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT FENDER GARNISH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UYJ005X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT FENDER GARNISH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003UYI005X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT FENDER GARNISH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT FENDER MOULDING SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Clean the attachment surface.
(1) Using an infrared light, heat the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the front fender
panel.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Front Fender Panel
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot front fender panel or with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the front fender panel excessively.
(2) Using a piece of cloth, rub the remaining double-sided tape off the front fender panel while it is
hot from the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Installing the front fender moulding sub-assembly LH while any double-sided tape remains on
the front fender panel may cause adhesion failure. Therefore, completely remove the doublesided adhesive tape.
(3) Using a non-residue solvent, clean the attachment surface.

(b) Using an infrared light, heat the front fender moulding sub-assembly installation surface of the
front fender panel and new front fender moulding sub-assembly.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Front Fender Panel
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
Front Fender Moulding Sub-Assembly
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot front fender panel and front fender moulding sub-assembly or
with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the front fender panel and front fender moulding sub-assembly excessively.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UYI005X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT FENDER GARNISH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(c) Install the front fender moulding sub-assembly with the 6

clips.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UYI005X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT FENDER GARNISH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003UYK005X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT FENDER GARNISH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE FRONT FENDER MOULDING SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Apply protective tape to the front fender panel in the area
around the front fender moulding sub-assembly.
*1
Protective Tape
(b) Using an infrared light, heat the front fender panel and the front fender moulding sub-assembly.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Front Fender Panel
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
Front Fender Moulding Sub-Assembly
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot front fender panel and front fender moulding sub-assembly or
with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the front fender panel and front fender moulding sub-assembly excessively.
(c) Insert piano wire between the front fender panel and the
front fender moulding sub-assembly.
*1
Piano Wire
*2
Wooden Block
HINT:
Be careful of the boss positions.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UYK005X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT FENDER GARNISH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(d) Tie objects that can serve as handles (for example, wooden blocks) to the piano wire ends.
(e) Pull the piano wire and scrape off the double-sided tape that holds the front fender moulding subassembly to the front fender panel.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the front fender panel.
(f) Using a moulding remover, disengage the 6 clips and

remove the front fender moulding sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
If reusing the garnish, take care not to damage the front
fender moulding sub-assembly.
Be careful not to damage the vehicle body.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UYK005X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003HHF01CX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003HHF01CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003HHE01PX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Engage the clip to install the 3 screws and the luggage compartment door outside garnish subassembly.
(b) Connect the 2 license plate light connectors.
(c) Connect the back door opener switch assembly connector.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003HHE01PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003HHG01OX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Disconnect the back door opener switch assembly

connector.
(b) Remove the back door opener switch assembly grommet.
(c) Disconnect the 2 license plate light connectors.
(d) Remove the 3 nuts.
(e) Disengage the clip and remove the luggage compartment door outside garnish sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003HHG01OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003HHG01OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: NAME PLATE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003W5S016X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: NAME PLATE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: NAME PLATE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: NAME PLATE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000035V301ZX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: NAME PLATE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL RADIATOR GRILLE EMBLEM (for Front Side)
(1) Using an infrared light, heat the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the front bumper
cover.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Front Bumper Cover
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot front bumper cover or with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the front bumper cover excessively.
(2) Using a piece of cloth, rub the remaining double-sided tape off the front bumper cover while it
is hot from the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Installing the radiator grille emblem while any double-sided tape remains on the front bumper
cover may cause adhesion failure. Therefore, completely remove the double-sided adhesive
tape.

(b) Using an infrared light, heat the radiator grille emblem installation surface of the front bumper
cover and new radiator grille emblem.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Front Bumper Cover
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
Radiator Grille Emblem
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot front bumper cover and radiator grille emblem or with the
infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the front bumper cover and radiator grille emblem excessively.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000035V301ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
(c) Insert the 2 pins into the front bumper cover and install a
new radiator grille emblem with the new 2 push nuts.
*1
Location Pin

(1) Using an infrared light, heat the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the luggage
compartment door panel.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Luggage Compartment Door Panel
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot luggage compartment door panel or with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the luggage compartment door panel excessively.
(2) Using a piece of cloth, rub the remaining double-sided tape off the luggage compartment door
panel while it is hot from the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Installing the radiator grille emblem while any double-sided tape remains on the luggage
compartment door panel may cause adhesion failure. Therefore, completely remove the
double-sided adhesive tape.

(b) Using an infrared light, heat the radiator grille emblem installation surface of the luggage
compartment door panel and new radiator grille emblem.
2/4
8/6/12
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot luggage compartment door panel and radiator grille emblem
or with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the luggage compartment door panel and radiator grille emblem excessively.
(c) Insert the 2 pins into the luggage compartment door

panel and install a new radiator grille emblem.
*1
Location Pin
4. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR NAME PLATE

(1) Using an infrared light, heat the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the luggage
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot luggage compartment door panel or with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the luggage compartment door panel excessively.
(2) Using a piece of cloth, rub the remaining double-sided tape off the luggage compartment door
panel while it is hot from the infrared light.
3/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Installing the luggage compartment door name plate while any double-sided tape remains on
the luggage compartment door panel may cause adhesion failure. Therefore, completely
remove the double-sided tape.

(b) Using an infrared light, heat the luggage compartment door name plate installation surface of the
luggage compartment door panel and new luggage compartment door name plate.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
Luggage Compartment Door Name Plate
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot luggage compartment door panel and luggage compartment
door name plate or with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the luggage compartment door panel and luggage compartment door name plate
excessively.
(c) Install a new luggage compartment door name plate, as

*1
*2
*3
Bracket
(1) Install the enclosed bracket with luggage
compartment door name plate, to the luggage
(2) Remove the release paper from the luggage
compartment door name plate.
HINT:
After removing the release paper, keep the exposed adhesive
free from foreign matter.
(3) Using the bracket, install the luggage compartment

door name plate.
(4) Remove the bracket from luggage compartment door
panel.
4/4
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: NAME PLATE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000035V401ZX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: NAME PLATE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE RADIATOR GRILLE EMBLEM (for Front Side)
(a) Apply protective tape to the front bumper cover in the

area around the radiator grille emblem.
*1
Wooden Block
*2
Piano Wire
*3
Protective Tape
*4
Location Pin
(b) Using an infrared light, heat the front bumper cover and the radiator grille emblem.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
Front Bumper Cover
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot front bumper cover and radiator grille emblem or with the
infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the front bumper cover and radiator grille emblem excessively.
(c) Insert piano wire between the front bumper cover and radiator grille emblem.
HINT:
1/4
8/6/12
Be careful of the boss location pin positions.
(e) Pull the piano wire and scrape off the double-sided tape that holds the radiator grille emblem to
the front bumper cover.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the front bumper cover.
(f) Remove the 2 push nuts and the radiator grille emblem.
(a) Apply protective tape to the luggage compartment door

panel in the area around the radiator grille emblem.
*1
Wooden Block
*2
Piano Wire
*3
Protective Tape
*4
Location Pin
(b) Using an infrared light, heat the luggage compartment door panel and the radiator grille emblem.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot luggage compartment door panel and radiator grille emblem
or with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the luggage compartment door panel and radiator grille emblem excessively.
(c) Insert piano wire between the luggage compartment door panel and radiator grille emblem.
HINT:
Be careful of the boss location pin positions.
2/4
8/6/12
(e) Pull the piano wire and scrape off the double-sided tape that holds the radiator grille emblem to
the luggage compartment door panel.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the luggage compartment door panel.
(f) Remove the radiator grille emblem.
4. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR NAME PLATE
(a) Apply protective tape to the luggage compartment door

panel in the area around the luggage compartment door
name plate.
*1
Wooden Block
*2
Piano Wire
*3
Protective Tape
(b) Using an infrared light, heat the luggage compartment door panel and the luggage compartment
door name plate.
ITEM
TEMPERATURE
40 to 60C (104 to 140F)
20 to 30C (68 to 86F)
CAUTION:
Do not burn yourself with the hot luggage compartment door panel and luggage compartment
door name plate or with the infrared light.
NOTICE:
Do not heat the luggage compartment door panel and luggage compartment door name plate
excessively.
(c) Insert piano wire between the luggage compartment door panel and the luggage compartment
door name plate.
(e) Pull the piano wire and scrape off the double-sided tape that holds the luggage compartment door
name plate to the luggage compartment door panel.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the luggage compartment door panel.
3/4
8/6/12
(f) Remove the luggage compartment door name plate.
4/4
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003W5B01SX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003W5B01SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003CVK025X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE BACK-UP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE NO. 2 REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
(a) Remove the 2 clips and the No. 2 rear bumper

reinforcement.
3. REMOVE NO. 1 REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 2 rear bumper reinforcement.
4. REMOVE REAR BUMPER SIDE SEAL LH
(a) Remove the 4 clips and rear bumper side seal LH.
5. REMOVE REAR BUMPER SIDE SEAL RH

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003CVK025X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
6. REMOVE REAR BUMPER SIDE RETAINER LH
(a) Remove the 2 screws and the rear bumper side retainer
LH.
7. REMOVE REAR BUMPER SIDE RETAINER RH

HINT:
8. REMOVE REAR BUMPER SIDE BRACKET LH
(a) Remove the 3 screws and the rear bumper side bracket
LH.
9. REMOVE REAR BUMPER SIDE BRACKET RH

HINT:
10. REMOVE REAR BUMPER PAD
(a) Remove the rear bumper pad.
11. REMOVE REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT

2/3
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 4 bolts, 2 nuts and rear bumper

reinforcement.
12. REMOVE CENTER REAR BUMPER BRACKET
(a) Remove the clip and the center rear bumper bracket.
HINT:
13. REMOVE REAR BUMPER PLATE LH
(a) Disengage the 4 claws to remove the rear bumper plate

LH.
14. REMOVE REAR BUMPER PLATE RH

HINT:
3/3
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034WU02QX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR BUMPER COVER
(a) Insert the rear light harness to the luggage compartment room.
(b) Engage the 3 guides.
(c) Engage the 8 claws.

HINT:
(d) Install the 2 screws.

(e) Install the rear bumper cover with the 8 clips.
(f) Connect the connector.
(g) Engage the clamp to install the rear light assembly harness.

3. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT SIDE TRAY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034WU02QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003CVL027X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL REAR BUMPER PLATE LH
(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the rear bumper plate LH.
2. INSTALL REAR BUMPER PLATE RH

HINT:
3. INSTALL CENTER REAR BUMPER BRACKET
(a) Install the center rear bumper bracket with the clip.
HINT:
4. INSTALL REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
(a) Install the rear bumper reinforcement with the 2 new

nuts.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003CVL027X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Install the 4 new bolts.

5. INSTALL REAR BUMPER PAD
(a) Install the rear bumper pad.
6. INSTALL REAR BUMPER SIDE BRACKET LH
(a) Install the rear bumper side bracket LH with the 3

screws.
7. INSTALL REAR BUMPER SIDE BRACKET RH

HINT:
8. INSTALL REAR BUMPER SIDE RETAINER LH
(a) Install the rear bumper side retainer LH with the 2

screws.
9. INSTALL REAR BUMPER SIDE RETAINER RH

HINT:
2/3
8/6/12
10. INSTALL REAR BUMPER SIDE SEAL LH
(a) Install the rear bumper side seal LH with the 4 clips.
11. INSTALL REAR BUMPER SIDE SEAL RH

HINT:
12. INSTALL NO. 2 REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
(a) Install the No. 2 rear bumper reinforcement with the 2

clips.
13. INSTALL NO. 1 REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 2 rear bumper reinforcement.
14. INSTALL BACK-UP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
3/3
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034WW02MX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: REAR BUMPER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT SIDE TRAY
5. REMOVE REAR BUMPER COVER
(a) Disconnect the rear light assembly connector.
(b) Disengage the clamp and disconnect the wire harness.
(c) Disengage the grommet and pull out the wire harness.
(d) Remove the 2 screws.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034WW02MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(e) Put protective tape around the rear bumper cover.

*1
Protective Tape
(f) Using a clip remover, remove the 6 clips.
(g) Remove the clip.

HINT:
(h) Disengage the 8 claws as shown in the illustration.

HINT:
2/3
8/6/12
(i) Disengage the 3 guides and remove the rear bumper

cover.
3/3
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000036EL012X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000036EL012X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000036EK01NX
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL NO. 1 ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING CLIP

NOTICE:
If reusing the clips, do not remove the double-sided tape remaining on the clips and where the
clips will be installed on the body.
If installing new clips, remove the double-sided tape remaining where the clips will be installed on
the body and clean the body with a non-residue solvent.
(a) Apply a 2 to 3 mm (0.0787 to 0.118 in.) bead of adhesive
(3M DP-105 or equivalent) to new No. 1 roof drip side
finish moulding clip.
*1 Adhesive
*a 2 to 3 mm (0.0787 to 0.118 in.) Bead of Adhesive
HINT:
Adhesive strength (tensile strength): 13.7 MPa (140 kgf/cm 2 ,
1987 psi) or more (when the temperature is 23C (73F)).
(b) Press and install the No. 1 roof drip side finish moulding clip.
(c) Install the clips to the positions on the roof panel shown in the illustration. Determine the locations
and firmly press and install the No. 1 roof drip side finish moulding clip after lightly applying
adhesive (3M DP-105 or equivalent).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000036EK01NX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
26.2 mm (1.0315 in.)
20.5 mm (0.8071 in.)
*1
Out Side Panel
*2
Roof Panel
(d) Install the roof drip center side finish moulding when 40 minutes or more have elapsed after
pressing and installing the No. 1 roof drip side finish moulding clips.
HINT:
Initial hardening time: 40 minutes
Complete hardening time: 24 hours
2. INSTALL CENTER ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING
2/3
8/6/12
(a) Engage the 2 clips and install the center roof drip side
finish moulding, as shown in the illustration.
3/3
8/6/12
EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000036EM021X
Title: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE CENTER ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING
(a) Disengage the 2 clips and remove the center roof drip
side finish moulding.
NOTICE:
Do not remove the clips.
If the clips are damaged or dropped off, replace them with
new clips.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000036EM021X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HORN: HORN SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000016F404LX
Title: HORN: HORN SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000016F404LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
HORN: HORN SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000016F506PX
Title: HORN: HORN SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HORN SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
Horn does not sound
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
HORN NO. 1 fuse
HORN NO. 2 fuse
HORN relay
Horn button assembly
Spiral cable sub-assembly
Horn blows all the time
Low pitched horn operates but high pitched horn does not
operate
High pitched horn operates but low pitched horn does not
operate
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000016F506PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
Wire harness
HORN relay
Wire harness
High pitched horn

assembly
Wire harness
Low pitched horn

assembly
Wire harness
1/1
8/6/12
HORN: HORN SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000016F604OX
Title: HORN: HORN SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000016F604OX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HORN: HORN: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000455Y00IX
Title: HORN: HORN: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000455Y00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
HORN: HORN: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000455V00VX
Title: HORN: HORN: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT HIGH PITCHED HORN ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply battery voltage and check the operation of the horn
according to the table below.
OK:
SPECIFIED CONDITION
High pitched horn sounds
*a

(High Pitched Horn Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the high pitched
horn assembly.
2. INSPECT LOW PITCHED HORN ASSEMBLY

(a) Check that the low pitched horn sounds when the battery
voltage is applied between the terminal and the bracket.
OK:
Battery negative (-) Horn bracket
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Low pitched horn sounds
*1
*a
Bracket
(Low Pitched Horn Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the low pitched
horn assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000455V00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
HORN: HORN: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000455U00KX
Title: HORN: HORN: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL LOW PITCHED HORN ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the low pitched horn assembly with the bolt.
2. INSTALL HORN BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the horn bracket sub-assembly with the bolt and nut.
3. INSTALL HIGH PITCHED HORN ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the bolt and high pitched horn assembly with horn bracket sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000455U00KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HORN: HORN: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000455W00KX
Title: HORN: HORN: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE HIGH PITCHED HORN ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the bolt, and the high pitched horn assembly with horn bracket sub-assembly.
3. REMOVE HORN BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and nut, and the horn bracket subassembly.
4. REMOVE LOW PITCHED HORN ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000455W00KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
HORN: HORN: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(b) Remove the bolt and low pitched horn assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000455W00KX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EJR00DX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EJR00DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003QJN003X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
1-2
SWITCH CONDITION
Headlight swivel main

switch off
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
0.80 to 0.86 k
*a

(Daytime Running Light Resistor)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QJN003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EJP00DX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR
(b) Install the daytime running light resistor with the bolt.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EJP00DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EJS00DX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR
(b) Remove the bolt and daytime running light resistor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EJS00DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVI01JX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVI01JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003N8Y01EX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. REMOVE FRONT MARKER LIGHT SOCKET AND WIRE
(a) Turn the front marker light socket and wire with the front
marker light bulb in the direction indicated by the arrow
shown in the illustration to remove them as a unit.
2. REMOVE FRONT MARKER LIGHT BULB

(a) Remove the front marker light bulb from the front marker light socket and wire.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N8Y01EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002WM0032X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply battery voltage to the connector and check the side
marker light assembly.
OK:
CONDITION
Battery positive (+) 1
Battery negative (-)
2
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Side marker light assembly comes
on.
*a

(Side Marker Light Assembly)
If the result is not specified, replace the side marker light
bulb or the side marker light assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002WM0032X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVJ01VX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY

(b) Engage the claw to install the front marker light assembly.
(c) Check that the side front marker light assembly is installed securely.
HINT:
If the front marker light assembly is not installed securely, widen and adjust the claw.
Standard:
AREA
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
*1
Front Marker Light Assembly
*2
Claw
2. INSTALL FRONT FENDER LINER

(a) Install the fender liner with the 4 clips.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVJ01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003N8Z01EX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT MARKER LIGHT BULB

(a) Install the front marker light bulb to the front marker light socket and wire.
2. INSTALL FRONT MARKER LIGHT SOCKET AND WIRE
(a) Turn the front marker light socket and wire with the front
marker light bulb in the direction indicated by the arrow
shown in the illustration and install them as a unit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N8Z01EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVK01VX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. SEPARATE FRONT FENDER LINER

(a) Steer the front tire right most.
(b) Remove the 4 clips and partially remove the front fender
liner.
2. REMOVE FRONT MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a screwdriver wrapped with protective tape,

disengage the claw from service hole.
*1
Protective Tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVK01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
*2
Service Hole
HINT:
Insert screwdriver on the level.
(b) Disconnect the connector to remove the front marker light assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVK01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042O900FX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042O900FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XVR01AX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT SOCKET
(a) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table
below.
Standard:
CONDITION
Battery negative (-) 4
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Clearance light comes on
Turn signal light comes on
*a

(Front Turn Signal Light Socket)
If the result is not as specified, replace the bulb or the
front turn signal light socket.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XVR01AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042O800HX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB

(a) Install the front turn signal light bulb to the front turn signal light socket.
(b) Turn the front turn signal light socket with the front turn
signal light bulb in the direction indicated by the arrow
shown in the illustration and install them as a unit.
2. INSTALL FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the front turn signal light assembly.
(b) Install the 2 nuts.
(c) Connect the fog light connector.
3. INSTALL FOG LIGHT COVER

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042O800HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042OA00HX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
2. REMOVE FOG LIGHT COVER

3. REMOVE FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the fog light connector.
(c) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the front turn signal

light assembly.
4. REMOVE FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042OA00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Turn the front turn signal light socket with front turn
signal light bulb in the direction indicated by the arrow
shown in the illustration, and remove them as a unit.
(b) Remove the front turn signal light bulb from the front turn signal light socket and wire.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042OA00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HAZARD WARNING SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000015XI01GX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HAZARD WARNING SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000015XI01GX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HAZARD WARNING SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003QJV012X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HAZARD WARNING SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CLOCK ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
7 (HAZARD+) - 14
(HAZARD-)
Hazard warning signal

switch off
10 k or higher
7 (HAZARD+) - 14
(HAZARD-)
Hazard warning signal

switch on
Below 1
(b) Apply battery voltage to the connector and check the LED illumination condition.
OK:
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
LED illuminates
*a

(Clock Assembly)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QJV012X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HAZARD WARNING SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000014MX01SX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HAZARD WARNING SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the clock assembly.
2. INSTALL AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000014MX01SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HAZARD WARNING SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000014MY01RX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HAZARD WARNING SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE CLOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 4 claws to remove the clock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000014MY01RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011MI07KX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
HINT:
It is possible that a bulb is incorrectly installed, affecting headlight aim. Bulb installation should be
considered prior to performing the adjustment procedure.
1. PREPARE VEHICLE FOR HEADLIGHT AIM ADJUSTMENT

(a) Prepare the vehicle:
Ensure there is no damage or deformation to the body around the headlights.
Fill the fuel tank.
Make sure that the oil is filled to the specified level.
Make sure that the coolant is filled to the specified level.
Inflate the tires to the appropriate pressure.
Unload the trunk and vehicle, ensuring that the spare tire, tools and jack are in their
original positions.
Sit a person of average weight (68 kg, 150 lb) in the driver's seat.
2. PREPARE FOR HEADLIGHT AIMING (Using a headlight aim test machine)

(a) Adjust the headlight aim in accordance with the headlight aim test machine instructions.
3. PREPARE FOR HEADLIGHT AIMING (Using a screen)

(a) Prepare the vehicle:
*a
7.62 or 3 m (25 or 9.84 ft.)
*b
90
Place the vehicle in a location that is dark enough
to clearly observe the cutoff line. The cutoff line is
a distinct line, below which light from the
headlights can be observed and above which it
cannot.
Place the vehicle at a 90 angle to the wall.
Create a 7.62 m (25 ft.) distance between the
vehicle (headlight bulb center) and the wall.
Make sure that the vehicle is on a level surface.
Position the front wheels straight ahead.
Bounce the vehicle up and down to settle the
suspension.
NOTICE:
A distance of 7.62 m (25 ft.) between the
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011MI07KX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12
vehicle (headlight bulb center) and the

wall is necessary for proper aim
adjustment. If sufficient space is not
available, secure a distance of exactly 3
m (9.84 ft.) to allow for checking and
adjustment of headlight aim. (The size of
the target zone will change with the
distance, so follow the instructions in the
illustration.)
(b) Prepare a piece of thick white paper (approximately 2 m (6.6 ft.) (height) x 4 m (13.1 ft.) (width))
to use as a screen.
(c) Draw a vertical line down the center of the screen (V line).
(d) Set the screen as shown in the illustration.
*A
Aligning distance 7.62 m (25 ft.)
*B
Aligning distance 3 m (9.84 ft.)
*a
V RH Line
*b
V LH Line
*c
H Line
*d
V Line
*e
90
*f
7.62 m (25 ft.)
*g
3 m (9.84 ft.)
HINT:
Stand the screen perpendicular to the ground.
Align the V line on the screen with the center of the vehicle.
2/5
8/6/12
(e) Draw base lines (H, V LH, and V RH lines) on the screen
HINT:
The base lines differ for "low beam inspection" and "high
beam inspection".
Mark the headlight bulb center marks on the screen. If the
center mark cannot be observed on the headlight, use the
center of the headlight bulb or the manufacturer's name
marked on the headlight as the center mark.
(1) H Line (Headlight height):
Draw a horizontal line across the screen so that it
passes through the center marks. The H line should
be at the same height as the headlight bulb center
marks of the low beam headlights.
(2) V LH Line, V RH Line (Center mark position of left-hand
(LH) and right-hand (RH) headlights):
Draw 2 vertical lines so that they intersect the H line
at each center mark (aligned with the center of the
low beam headlight bulbs).
*a
V LH Line
*b
V Line
*c
V RH Line
*d
H Line
*e
Ground
4. INSPECT HEADLIGHT AIMING

(a) Cover the headlight or disconnect the connector of the headlight on the opposite side to prevent
light from the headlight that is not being inspected from affecting the headlight aiming inspection.
NOTICE:
Do not keep the headlight covered for more than 3 minutes. The headlight lens is made of
synthetic resin, which may melt or be damaged due to excessive heat.
HINT:
When checking the aim of the high beam, cover the low beam or disconnect the connector.

(c) Turn on the headlights and check the aiming of each beam.
HINT:
Preferred position for the low beam: Matches preferred cutoff line shown in the illustration
3/5
8/6/12
Preferred position for the high beam: Matches center of intensity shown in the illustration
*A
Aligning distance 7.62 m (25 ft.)
*B
Aligning distance 3 m (9.84 ft.)
*C
Low Beam
*D
High Beam
*a
V LH Line
*b
V RH Line
*c
H Line
*d
Preferred Cutoff Line
*e
Center of Intensity
HINT:
Since the low beam light and the high beam light are a unit, if the aim on the low beam is correct,
the high beam should also be correct. However, check both beams just to make sure.
If the alignment distance is 7.62 m (25 ft.):
The low beam cutoff line should be within 101 mm (3.97 in.) above or below the H line as
well as 101 mm (3.97 in.) left or right of the V line (SAE J599).
If the alignment distance is 3 m (9.84 ft.):
4/5
8/6/12
The low beam cutoff line should be within 39 mm (1.56 in.) above or below the H line as well
as 39 mm (1.56 in.) left or right of the H line (SAE J599).
If the alignment distance is 7.62 m (25 ft.):
The high beam center of intensity should be within 101 mm (3.97 in.) above or below the H
line as well as 101 mm (3.97 in.) left or right of the V LH or V RH line (SAE J599).
If the alignment distance is 3 m (9.84 ft.):
The high beam center of intensity should be within 39 mm (1.56 in.) above or below the H
line as well as 39 mm (1.56 in.) left or right of the V LH or V RH line (SAE J599).
5. ADJUST HEADLIGHT AIMING

(a) Adjust the aim vertically:
Adjust the aim of each headlight to the specified range by
turning each aiming screw with a screwdriver.
*1
Aiming Screw
NOTICE:
The high beam light and low beam light aim move in the
diagonal direction when aiming screw A is turned.
Remember the turning direction and the number of turns
of aiming screw A to correct the horizontal position in the
next step.
The final turn of the aiming screw should be made in the
clockwise direction. If the screw is tightened excessively,
loosen it and then retighten it, so that the final turn of the
screw is in the clockwise direction.
HINT:
The low beam light and the high beam light are a unit.
Adjusting the aim on the low beam to the correct position
should also result in the high beam adjustment being
correct.
If it is not possible to correctly adjust headlight aim, check
bulb, headlight unit, and headlight unit reflector
installation.
5/5
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QBR02FX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBR02FX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBR02FX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QBT02WX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. REMOVE NO. 1 HEADLIGHT BULB
(b) Turn the No. 1 headlight bulb in the direction indicated by

the arrow shown in the illustration, and remove it.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the bulb glass.
2. REMOVE NO. 2 HEADLIGHT BULB
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBT02WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
(b) Turn the No. 2 headlight bulb in the direction indicated by

the arrow shown in the illustration, and remove it.
NOTICE:
3. REMOVE HEADLIGHT CORD
(a) Disengage the claw to remove the headlight cord.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBT02WX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QBQ03LX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the claw to install the headlight assembly.
(b) Install the clip.
(d) Connect each connector.
2. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER SIDE SUPPORT

(a) Install the front bumper side support LH with the 3 bolts B.
(b) Install the bolt A.
(c) Engage the 2 clamps to connect the wire harness.
4. PREPARE VEHICLE FOR HEADLIGHT AIM ADJUSTMENT

5. PREPARE FOR HEADLIGHT AIMING (Using a headlight aim test machine)
6. PREPARE FOR HEADLIGHT AIMING (Using a screen)
7. INSPECT HEADLIGHT AIMING
8. ADJUST HEADLIGHT AIMING
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBQ03LX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QBU02WX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL HEADLIGHT CORD
(a) Engage the claw to install the headlight cord.
2. INSTALL NO. 2 HEADLIGHT BULB
(a) Turn the No. 2 headlight bulb in the direction indicated by

the arrow shown in the illustration to install it.
NOTICE:
3. INSTALL NO. 1 HEADLIGHT BULB
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBU02WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
(a) Turn the No. 1 headlight bulb in the direction indicated by

the arrow shown in the illustration to install it.
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBU02WX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QBS03IX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

.
2. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER SIDE SUPPORT
(a) Disengage the 2 clamps to disconnect the wire harness.
(b) Remove the bolt A.
(c) Remove the 3 bolts B and the front bumper side support.
3. REMOVE HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect each connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBS03IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(b) Remove the clip.
(c) Remove the bolt.

(d) Disengage the claw to remove the headlight assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QBS03IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MW101LX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MW101LX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000202H02DX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
table below.
Light Control Switch
TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
19 (A) - 12 (EL)
10 k or higher
20 (H) - 12 (EL) Light control switch off
10 k or higher
19 (A) - 12 (EL)
10 k or higher
18 (T) - 12 (EL)
Light control switch in tail

position
18 (T) - 12 (EL)
Light control switch in

20 (H) - 12 (EL) head position
Below 1
Below 1
Below 1
Dimmer Switch
TESTER
CONNECTION
11 (HU) - 12
(EL)
11 (HU) - 12
(EL)
17 (HF) - 12
(EL)
SWITCH CONDITION
Dimmer switch in high

position
Dimmer switch in high

flasher position
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1
Below 1
Below 1
Turn Signal Switch

TESTER
CONNECTION
13 (TR) - 12 (EL)
13 (TR) - 12 (EL)
15 (TL) - 12 (EL)
SWITCH
CONDITION
Right turn
Neutral
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000202H02DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1
10 k or higher
10 k or higher
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
15 (TL) - 12 (EL)
Left turn
Below 1
*a

(Headlight Dimmer Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the headlight
dimmer switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000202H02DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QCP03AX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Using pliers, expand the clamp as shown in the

illustration.
*1
Clamp
(b) While holding the clamp expanded, install the headlight

dimmer switch assembly as shown in the illustration.
(c) Engage the claw.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QCP03AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(d) Release the clamp to install the headlight dimmer switch

assembly.
(e) Connect the connector.
2. INSTALL WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

3. INSTALL SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QCP03AX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001QCR03AX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

3. REMOVE HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(b) Using pliers, expand the clamp as shown in the illustration.

*1
Clamp
(c) While holding the clamp expanded, disengage the claw

and remove the headlight dimmer switch assembly as
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001QCR03AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVY01LX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVY01LX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UX703KX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CENTER STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply battery voltage to the connector and check the
center stop light comes on.
OK:
CONDITION
Battery positive (+) 1 (HMSL)
Battery negative (-) 2 (EARTH)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Center stop light comes on
*a

(Center Stop Light Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the center stop
light assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UX703KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CENTER STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Slide the center stop light assembly directions shown by

the arrows in the illustration to engage the 2 guides.
(b) Engage the 2 claws to install the center stop light

assembly.
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002PLO01VX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE CENTER STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(b) Pull the center stop light assembly directions shown by

the arrow in the illustration to disengage the 2 claws.
(c) Slide the center stop light assembly directions shown by

the arrow in the illustration to disengage the 2 guides
and remove it.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002PLO01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003B3400FX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003B3400FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FVZ007X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply battery voltage to the connector and check the light
comes on.
OK:
CONDITION
Battery positive (+) 1 (B)
Battery negative (-) 2 (E)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
License plate light comes on.
*a

(License Plate Light Assembly)
If the result is not specified, replace the license plate light
bulb or the license plate light assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FVZ007X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003B3200GX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB
(a) Install the license plate light bulb to the license plate light socket and wire.
(b) Turn the license plate light socket and wire with the
license plate light bulb in the direction indicated by the
arrow shown in the illustration and install them as a unit.
HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the other side.
2. INSTALL LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the license plate light assembly.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003B3200GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003B3500GX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the license plate light assembly.
HINT:
3. REMOVE LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB
(a) Turn the license plate light socket and wire with the
license plate light bulb in the direction indicated by the
arrow shown in the illustration to remove them as a unit.
(b) Remove the license plate light bulb from the license plate light socket and wire.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003B3500GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004NUM00RX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
1. CUSTOMIZE LIGHTING SYSTEM (EXT)
HINT:
The following items can be customized.
NOTICE:
When the customer requests a change in a function, first make sure that the function can be
customized.
Be sure to make a note of the current settings before customizing.
When troubleshooting a function, first make sure that the function is set to the default setting.
(a) Customizing with the Techstream
(4) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Utility / Customize / Light Control.
(5) Select the setting by referring to the table below.
Light Control
DISPLAY DEFAULT
Light
Auto
OFF
30 s
Delay
DRL
Function
ON
CONTENT
SETTING RELEVANT ECU
Keeps the headlights on for a certain period of time after OFF, 30

turning the ignition switch off and closing all doors with
s, 60 s
the low beam headlights on.
or 90 s
ON/OFF of the DRL function
ON or
OFF
Main Body ECU

(Network
Gateway ECU)
HINT:
Items for which there are no settings do not appear on the Techstream, or do not operate.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004NUM00RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKV0AVX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
Using the Techstream to read the Data List allows the values or states of switches, sensors, actuator
time.
NOTICE:

Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
DRL Function
Light Auto
OFF Delay
D Door
Courtesy SW
IG SW
ACC SW
Dimmer SW
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
DRL function / ON or OFF
Customize setting displayed
Light auto OFF delay / Off, 30 s, 60 s

or 90 s
Customize setting displayed
Driver side door courtesy light switch ON: Driver side door open
signal / ON or OFF
OFF: Driver side door closed
Ignition switch ON signal / ON or OFF

Ignition switch ACC signal / ON or
OFF
Dimmer switch high position signal /
ON or OFF
Passing Light Dimmer switch high flash position

SW
(pass) signal / ON or OFF
ON: Ignition switch ON

OFF: Ignition switch off
ON: Ignition switch ACC
ON: Dimmer switch in high or high
flash position
OFF: Dimmer switch in low position

ON: Dimmer switch in high flash
position
OFF: Dimmer switch not in high
flash position
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKV0AVX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
Front Fog
Light SW
DRL Cancel
SW
Auto Light SW
Front fog light switch signal / ON or

OFF
DRL cancel switch / ON or OFF
Light control switch AUTO position

signal / ON or OFF
Head Light
SW (Head)
Light control switch head position

signal / ON or OFF
Head Light
SW (Tail)
Light control switch tail position

signal / ON or OFF
Illumination
Rate Info
Illumination rate information / 0.00

ms. to 2162.65 ms.
Rear Fog
Rear fog light output / ON or OFF
Lamp Monitor
Lighting 1

signal / ON or OFF
ON: Front fog light switch on

OFF: Front fog light switch off
ON: DRL cancel
OFF: Normal
ON: Light control switch in AUTO
position
OFF: Light control switch not in
AUTO position
ON: Light control switch in head
position
head position
ON: Light control switch in tail or
head position
OFF: Light control switch in neither
tail nor head position
Value is output according to
ambient light levels
ON: Rear fog light on
OFF: Rear fog light off
head position

Lighting 2
Lighting Hi
Front Fog
Light Output
DRL Output

signal / ON or OFF
position
Light control switch head (Hi)
ON: Headlight high beam on
position signal / ON or OFF
OFF: Normal
Front fog light output / ON or OFF
DRL output / ON or OFF

head position
ON: Front fog light on

OFF: Front fog light off
ON: DRL output
OFF: Normal
HINT:
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
2/3
8/6/12

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Daytime Running Light
Daytime running lights
ON/OFF
Taillight Relay
Taillight relay
ON/OFF
Headlight Relay
Headlight relay
ON/OFF
Headlight Hi
Headlight (high beam headlights)
ON/OFF
Front Fog Light Relay
Front fog light relay
ON/OFF
HINT:
3/3
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKS08HX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. DESCRIPTION
(a) Lighting system data and the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can be read from the Data Link
Connector 3 (DLC3) of the vehicle. When the system seems to be malfunctioning, use the
Techstream to check for malfunctions and to repair it.
2. CHECK DLC3
(a) Check the DLC3
3. INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKS08HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKT06BX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(e) Check for DTCs.
2. CLEAR DTC
(e) Clear the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKT06BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Headlight Dimmer Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011M307RX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Headlight Dimmer Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Headlight Dimmer Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) receives the following switch information:
Light control switch is in off, tail or head position
Headlight dimmer switch is in high, low or high flash position
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011M307RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY)

(e) Read the display on the Techstream.
Main Body
2/5
8/6/12
TESTER
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY
Dimmer SW
NOTE
Dimmer switch high position signal /
ON or OFF
flash position
OFF: Dimmer switch in low position
Passing Light Dimmer switch high flash position

SW
ON: Dimmer switch in high or high
(pass) signal / ON or OFF
ON: Dimmer switch in high flash

position
OFF: Dimmer switch not in high
flash position
Head Light

position
SW (Head)
signal / ON or OFF
head position
Head Light
SW (Tail)
Lighting Hi

head position
signal / ON or OFF

Light control switch head (Hi)

position signal / ON or OFF
ON: Headlight high beam on
OFF: Normal
OK:
The display is as specified in the normal condition column.
Result :
2.
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (Dimmer switch)
NG (Light control switch)
INSPECT HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH
INSPECT HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH

ECU)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
INSPECT HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the headlight dimmer switch assembly
3/5
8/6/12
(b) Inspect the headlight dimmer switch assembly
NG
.
REPLACE HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY, BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the 3B instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D50-17 (HF) - 3B-15
Always
Below 1
D50-11 (HU) - 3B-30
Always
Below 1
D50-12 (EL) - Body ground
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D50-17 (HF) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D50-11 (HU) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
4.
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
INSPECT HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the headlight dimmer switch assembly
(b) Inspect the headlight dimmer switch assembly
4/5
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY - MAIN

BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU), BODY GROUND)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D50-20 (H) - D5-2 (HEAD)
Always
Below 1
D50-18 (T) - D5-25 (TAIL)
Always
Below 1
D50-12 (EL) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
D50-3 (LFG) - Body ground
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D50-20 (H) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D50-18 (T) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK

5/5
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: High Beam Headlight Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001A7L070X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: High Beam Headlight Circuit (2013 FR-S)
High Beam Headlight Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) receives headlight dimmer switch information signals, and
illuminates the high beam headlight.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Inspect the fuses and bulbs for circuits related to this system before performing the following
inspection procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (HEAD LIGHT HI)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001A7L070X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Active Test
(e) Check that the relay operates.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Head Light Hi
Headlight dimmer relay
ON/OFF
OK:
Relay operates (high beam headlights illuminate).
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK

ECU)
2.
INSPECT DIM RELAY
(a) Remove the DIM relay from the engine room relay block.
(b) Inspect the DIM relay
NG
REPLACE DIM RELAY
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY - DIM RELAY)
2/4
8/6/12

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
Relay terminal 5 - Body

ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
*a
Engine Room Relay Block

(DIM Relay Terminal)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DIM RELAY - MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
GATEWAY ECU))
(a) Disconnect the A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Relay terminal 2 - A73-11 (DIM)
Always
Below 1
Relay terminal 1 - A73-23
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A73-11 (DIM) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A73-23 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
3/4
8/6/12
OK

4/4
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKJ0E5X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the lighting system.
1.
NEXT
2.
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AND SYMPTOM CHECK
NEXT
3.
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
4.
CHECK FOR DTC*
(a) Check for DTCs
Result:
1/3
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output.
DTC is output.
Go to step 7
5.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Fault is not listed in Problem Symptoms Table.
Fault is listed in Problem Symptoms Table.
Go to step 7
6.

NEXT
7.
2/3
8/6/12
NEXT
8.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
3/3
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Low Beam Headlight Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000ZBM070X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Low Beam Headlight Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Low Beam Headlight Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) receives headlight dimmer switch assembly information
signals, and illuminates the low beam headlight.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000ZBM070X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
1.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (H-LP RELAY)

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Headlight Relay
Low beam headlight relay
ON/OFF
OK:
Headlight relay operates (low beam headlights illuminate).
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK

ECU)
2.
INSPECT H-LP RELAY
(a) Remove the H-LP relay from the engine room relay block.
(b) Inspect the H-LP relay
NG
REPLACE H-LP RELAY
OK
2/6
8/6/12
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (H-LP RELAY - BATTERY)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
Relay terminal 5 - Body

ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
11 to 14 V
*a

(H-LP Relay Terminal)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (H-LP RELAY - MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
GATEWAY ECU))
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Relay terminal 2 - A73-11 (DIM)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A73-11 (DIM) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
3/6
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (H-LP RELAY - INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION

BLOCK ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the 3C instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Relay terminal 1 - 3C-17
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3C-17 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY

- MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))
(a) Disconnect the 3A and 3C instrument panel junction block assembly connector.
(b) Disconnect the D5 and A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4/6
8/6/12
3A-29 - D5-1
Always
Below 1
3C-30 - A73-2 (HRLY)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D5-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A73-2 (HRLY) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
7.
assembly.
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3C-17 - 3A-29
Always
Below 1
5/6
8/6/12
3C-17 - 3C-30
Always
Below 1
NG

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK

6/6
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011RO03FX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK
(b) Shift lever is other than in P*1.
(c) Release the parking brake.
(d) Turn the light control switch to the off.
(e) Ignition switch ON.
(f) Check that the high beam headlights*2 and taillights come on (when the light control switch is in
off, the taillights do not come on).
*2: Brightness of the headlights is decreased.
2. INSPECT BATTERY SAVER

(a) Remove the key from ignition switch, turn the light control switch to HEAD to illuminate the
headlights.
(b) Check that the headlights and taillights turn off when the light control switch remain in the same
condition for 20 minutes.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011RO03FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKL06CX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKL06CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002CDW04CX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. PRECAUTION FOR LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
(a) When the headlights are illuminated, do not cover the headlights for 3 minutes or more.
NOTICE:
As the outer lens of the headlight is made of resin, the resulting heat created when covering
the headlight for an extended period of time may deform the headlight.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002CDW04CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002CE20BVX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

Headlight
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
MAIN fuse
Low beam headlights and high beam headlights do not

illuminate.
Low beam headlight on one side does not illuminate.
Headlight dimmer switch

circuit
gateway ECU)
H-LP LH LO fuse or H-LP RH

LO fuse
No. 1 headlight bulb
Headlight unit

gateway ECU)
H-LP LH LO fuse and H-LP RH

LO fuse
Both left and right low beam headlights do not illuminate.
SEE
PAGE

circuit
Low beam headlight circuit
High beam headlight on one side do not illuminate.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002CE20BVX.html?sisuffix=ff
H-LP LH HI fuse or H-LP RH HI

fuse
No. 2 headlight bulb
Headlight unit

gateway ECU)
1/5
8/6/12
H-LP LH HI fuse and H-LP RH

HI fuse

circuit
Both left and right high beam headlight do not illuminate.
High beam headlight circuit


circuit
High beam headlights do not illuminate with "High Flash "

function (passing function)
Taillight
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
TAIL fuse
Headlight dimmer switch circuit

Both left and right tail lights do not illuminate (clearance
lights and license plate lights included).
Taillight circuit
gateway ECU)
Rear combination light socket

and wire sub-assembly
Tail light on one side does not illuminate.
Rear combination light lens and

body
License Plate Light

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
License plate light bulb
License plate lights do not illuminate (taillight is normal).
SEE PAGE
-
License plate light assembly

Rear Light
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Back-up light switch assembly*1

Rear light does not illuminate.
Park/neutral position switch assembly*2
2/5
8/6/12
Buck-up light bulb

Rear light on one side does not illuminate.
Back-up light socket and wire sub-assembly
*1: w/ Manual Transmission

*2: w/ Automatic Transmission
Stop Light
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
STOP fuse
Stop light does not illuminate.
Stop light switch assembly

Noise filter
Rear combination light socket and wire subStop light on one side does not
illuminate.
assembly
Rear combination light lens and body
Center Stop Light

SYMPTOM
Center stop light does not illuminate.
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Center stop light assembly

Turn Signal Light

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
GAUGE fuse
Turn signal lights does not illuminate.
Turn signal flasher assembly

Headlight dimmer switch circuit
Front turn signal light bulb
Front turn signal light on one side does not
Front turn signal light assembly
illuminate.
Front turn signal light socket
3/5
8/6/12
Front turn signal light bulb
Clearance lights do not illuminate (taillights are Front turn signal light assembly
normal).
Front turn signal light socket
Front marker light on one side does not

illuminate.
Rear turn signal light on one side does not

illuminate.
Front marker light bulb
Front marker light assembly
Front marker light socket and wire
Rear turn signal light bulb
Rear combination light lens and body
Rear combination light socket and wire subassembly

Hazard Warning Light

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Turn signal flasher

assembly
Hazard warning lights do not operate (turn signal lights are

normal).
Clock assembly
Battery Saving Control

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Door courtesy switch circuit

Light auto turn off system does not operate.
IG signal circuit
Daytime Running Light System

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
MPX-B fuse
DRL relay
Low beam headlight relay circuit

4/5
8/6/12
Daytime running light system does not operate.
Taillight relay circuit

Daytime Running Light Resister
5/5
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKR06HX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(a) The daytime running light system is designed to automatically illuminate the high beam
headlights*1, taillights, clearance lights and license plate lights during the daytime to make the
vehicle more visible to other vehicles.
This system is controlled by the main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
This system is enabled when the following conditions are met:
Ignition switch is ON.
Shift lever is other than in P*2.
Parking brake switch is off.
Engine speed signal is input (engine running).
The light control switch is in off or the tail position (when the light control
switch is in off, the taillights, clearance lights and license plate lights do not
come on).
Ignition switch is ACC.
*1: Brightness of the headlights is decreased.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKR06HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKU05UX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. HEADLIGHT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKU05UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
2/7
8/6/12
2. TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
3/7
8/6/12
4/7
8/6/12
3. STOP LIGHT
5/7
8/6/12
4. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
6/7
8/6/12
7/7
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Taillight Relay Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001MEH08MX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Taillight Relay Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Taillight Relay Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) receives headlight dimmer switch assembly information
signals, and illuminates the clearance lights, taillights and license plate lights.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001MEH08MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
1.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (TAIL RELAY)

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Taillight Relay
Taillight relay
ON/OFF
OK:
Taillight relay operates (taillights illuminate).
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK

ECU)
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY - INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK

ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the 3E instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
2/4
8/6/12
3E-1 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
assembly.
*a

Standard Voltage:
3/4
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3C-12 - Battery negative (-)
Connect a positive (+) lead from the battery

3E-1
terminal
Connect a negative (-) lead from the battery
11 to 14 V
MB-7 (TRLY)
3C-13 - Battery negative (-)

3E-1
terminal
11 to 14 V
MB-7 (TRLY)
3D-24 - Battery negative (-)

3E-1
terminal
11 to 14 V
MB-7 (TRLY)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3E-1 - 3C-12
Always
10 k or higher
3E-1 - 3C-13
Always
10 k or higher
3E-1 - 3D-24
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4/4
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKM051X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKM051X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
assembly.
(b) Disconnect the A73 and D6 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
2/4
8/6/12
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING COLOR
A73-4 (GND) - Body

ground
D6-1 (GND) - Body
ground
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
B-Y - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
B - Body ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ignition switch
3C-4 - Body ground
3C-7 - Body ground
Ignition switch power
ON
ground
supply
Ignition switch
off
Below 1 V
None - Body
ground
Always
11 to 14 V
Always
11 to 14 V
None - Body
3E-1 - Body ground
11 to 14 V
None - Body
ground
(d) Reconnect the instrument panel junction block assembly and main body ECU (network gateway
ECU) connectors.
(e) Measure the voltage or check for pulses according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
MB-21 (HU) Body ground
WIRING
COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
None - Body Dimmer switch high

ground
signal
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Dimmer switch in high position
Below 1 V
Dimmer switch in low position
11 to 14 V
Dimmer switch in high flash

MB-18 (HF) Body ground
None - Body Dimmer switch high

ground
flash signal
position
Dimmer switch not in high flash
position
D5-2 (HEAD) -
W - Body
Light control switch
Body ground
ground
head signal
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Light control switch in head

position
Below 1 V
Light control switch not in head

position
11 to 14 V
Light control switch in tail or

D5-25 (TAIL) -
BE - Body
Light control switch
head position
Body ground)
ground
tail signal
Light control switch in neither

Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
A73-2 (HRLY) -
L - Body
Headlight relay
Light control switch in head
Below 1 V
Body ground
ground
drive output
Light control switch not in head
11 to 14 V
Dimmer switch in high or high
Below 1 V
3/4
8/6/12
A73-11 (DIM) -
G - Body
Dimmer relay drive
Body ground
ground
output
flash position
Dimmer switch in low position
11 to 14 V
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) may have a malfunction.
4/4
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVM01SX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVM01SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVM01SX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003N8Y01CX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. REMOVE REAR COMBINATION LIGHT GASKET LH
(a) Remove the rear combination light gasket LH.

HINT:
Be sure to remove all the traces of the old rear
combination light gasket from the body.
Do not reuse the removed packing. Be sure to install a
new rear combination light gasket to prevent water
ingress.
2. REMOVE REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB
(a) Turn the rear combination light socket and wire subassembly with the rear turn signal light bulb in the
direction indicated by the arrow shown in the illustration,
and remove them as a unit.
(b) Remove the rear turn signal light bulb from the rear combination light socket and wire subassembly.
3. REMOVE REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT BULB
(a) Turn the rear combination light socket and wire subassembly with the rear side marker light bulb in the
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N8Y01CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
direction indicated by the arrow shown in the illustration,

and remove them as a unit.
(b) Remove the rear side marker light bulb from the rear combination light socket and wire subassembly.
4. REMOVE REAR COMBINATION LIGHT SOCKET AND WIRE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(c) Disengage the 2 clamps to remove the rear combination

light socket and wire sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N8Y01CX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000202E05ZX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
HINT:
1. INSPECT REAR COMBINATION LIGHT SOCKET AND WIRE SUB-ASSEMBLY

comes on.
Standard Voltage:
CONDITION
Battery positive (+) 4 (B)
(STP)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Turn signal light comes on
Stop light comes on

(TL)
Tail and Side marker light comes

on
*a

(Rear Combination Light Socket and Wire Sub-assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the bulb or the
rear combination light socket and wire sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000202E05ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVL025X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the guide to temporarily install the rear combination light assembly.
(b) Install the rear combination light assembly with the 4 nuts.
(c) Engage the 2 grommets to connect the rear combination light socket and wire sub-assembly.

(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the rear floor finish plate.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVL025X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003N8Z01CX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR COMBINATION LIGHT SOCKET AND WIRE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 2 clamps to install the rear combination light

socket and wire sub-assembly.
2. INSTALL REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT BULB

(a) Install the side marker light bulb to the rear combination light socket and wire sub-assembly.
(b) Turn the rear combination light socket and wire subassembly with the side marker light bulb in the direction
indicated by the arrow shown in the illustration to install
them as a unit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N8Z01CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
3. INSTALL REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB

(a) Install the rear turn signal light bulb to the rear combination light socket and wire sub-assembly.
(b) Turn the rear combination light socket and wire subassembly with the rear turn signal light bulb in the
direction indicated by the arrow shown in the illustration
to install them as a unit.
4. INSTALL REAR COMBINATION LIGHT GASKET LH
(a) Install a new rear combination light gasket LH.

HINT:
Be sure to remove all the traces of the old rear
combination light gasket from the body.
new rear combination light gasket to prevent water
ingress.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N8Z01CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVN023X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

(a) Using a clip remover, remove the 3 clips.
(b) Disengage the 4 claws to remove the rear floor finish plate.

4. REMOVE REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the 2 grommets and disconnect the wire harness.

*1
Grommet
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVN023X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(c) Remove the 4 nuts.
(d) Disengage the guide to remove the rear combination light assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVN023X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVP015X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVP015X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVP015X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003N9F015X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE BACK-UP LIGHT BULB
(a) Turn the back-up light socket and wire with the back-up
light bulb in the direction indicated by the arrow shown in
the illustration and remove them as a unit.
(b) Remove the back-up light bulb from the rear light socket and wire.
HINT:
2. REMOVE BACK-UP LIGHT SOCKET AND WIRE
(a) Disengage the 2 clamps to remove the back-up light

socket and wire.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N9F015X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000202E060X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BACK-UP LIGHT SOCKET AND WIRE
comes on.
Standard Voltage:
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Back-up light comes on
*a

(Back-Up Light Socket and Wire)
If the result is not as specified, replace the bulb or the back-up light socket and wire.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000202E060X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVO01DX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BACK-UP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the claw to install the back-up light assembly.
(b) Install the 2 bolts.
(c) Install the 2 clips.
2. INSTALL REAR BUMPER COVER
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVO01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003N9G015X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL BACK-UP LIGHT SOCKET AND WIRE
(a) Engage the 2 clamps to install the back-up light socket

and wire.
2. INSTALL BACK-UP LIGHT BULB

(a) Install the back-up light bulb to the back-up light socket and wire.
(b) Turn the back-up light socket and wire with the back-up
light bulb in the direction indicated by the arrow shown in
the illustration to install them as a unit.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003N9G015X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MVQ01DX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE REAR BUMPER COVER
2. REMOVE BACK-UP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(c) Disengage the claw to remove the back-up light

assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MVQ01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UPP059X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT H-LP RELAY
(a) Remove the H-LP relay from the engine room relay block.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3-5
Voltage is not applied between terminals 1 and 2
10 k or higher
3-5
Voltage is applied between terminals 1 and 2
Below 1
*a

(H-LP Relay)
If the result is not as specified, replace the H-LP relay.
2. INSPECT DIM RELAY
(a) Remove the DIM relay from the engine room relay block.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UPP059X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3-5
Voltage is not applied between terminals 1 and 2
10 k or higher
3-5
Voltage is applied between terminals 1 and 2
Below 1
*a

(DIM Relay)
If the result is not as specified, replace the DIM relay.
3. INSPECT DRL RELAY
(a) Remove the DRL relay from the engine room relay block.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3-4
Battery voltage not applied
Below 1
3-4
Battery voltage applied to terminals 1 and 2
10 k or higher
3-5
10 k or higher
3-5
Battery voltage applied to terminals 1 and 2
Below 1
*a

(DRL Relay)
If the result is not as specified, replace the DRL relay.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UPP059X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MWA01IX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MWA01IX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001UPN02JX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
1-2
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Pushed
10 k or higher
Not pushed
Below 1
*a

(Stop Light Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the stop light
switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001UPN02JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MW901XX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Insert the stop light switch assembly until the threaded
sleeve hits the pedal.
NOTICE:
When inserting the stop light switch assembly, support
the pedal from behind so that the pedal is not pushed in.
(b) Pull up the brake pedal.
(c) Turn the stop light switch assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration and
install it.
NOTICE:
When inserting the stop light switch assembly, support the pedal from behind so that the pedal
is not pushed in.
(d) Check the protrusion of the plunger.

Protrusion of Plunger:
0.7 to 2.0 mm (0.027 to 0.078 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MW901XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(e) Connect the connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MW901XX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MWB01YX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): STOP LIGHT SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(b) Turn the stop light switch assembly counterclockwise and

remove it.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MWB01YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MWM016X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MWM016X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001ZTV078X
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the D61 turn signal flasher assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
D61-4 (+B) - Body ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

(to Turn Signal Flasher Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, repair or replace the wire harness or connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, repair or replace the wire harness or connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZTV078X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
(d) Reconnect the D61 turn signal flasher assembly

connector.
(e) Measure the voltage according to the valve(s) in the table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D61-6 (ER) - Body

ground
Turn signal switch in RH position OFF

to ON
9 V or higher to below 1 V
D61-5 (EL) - Body

ground
Turn signal switch in LH position OFF

to ON
Hazard warning switch OFF to ON
D61-2 (LR) - Body
Turn signal switch in RH position OFF
Below 1 V to 9 V (60 to 120 times per
ground
to ON
minute)
D61-3 (LL) - Body

ground
Turn signal switch in LH position OFF

to ON

minute)
D61-2 (LR) - Body

ground

minute)
D61-8 (EHW) - Body

ground
D61-3 (LL) - Body

ground

minute)
*a

(Turn Signal Flasher Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, the turn signal flasher assembly may have a malfunction.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001ZTV078X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MWL01JX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY
(b) Engage the clamp to install the turn signal flasher assembly.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MWL01JX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MWN01JX
Title: LIGHTING (EXT): TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE TURN SIGNAL FLASHER ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a clip remover, disengage the clamp.
(b) Disconnect the connector to remove the turn signal flasher assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MWN01JX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PGN01TX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PGN01TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000015DS072X
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT OUTER MIRROR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the switch functions.
(1) Turn the mirror select switch to the L position.
the table below.
*1
Mirror Select Switch
*2
Mirror Surface Adjust Switch
*a

(Outer Mirror Switch Assembly)
Standard Resistance (for left side):
TESTER
CONNECTION
1 (B) - 14 (ML+)
10 (VL) - 7 (E)
1 (B) - 10 (VL)
14 (ML+) - 7 (E)
1 (B) - 8 (HL)
14 (ML+) - 7 (E)
1 (B) - 14 (ML+)
8 (HL) - 7 (E)
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
UP
Below 1
DOWN
Below 1
LEFT
Below 1
RIGHT
Below 1
(3) Turn the mirror select switch to the R position.

the table below.
Standard Resistance (for right side):
TESTER
CONNECTION
1 (B) - 12 (MR+)
11 (VR)- 7 (E)
SWITCH
CONDITION
UP
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1
1 (B) - 11 (VR)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000015DS072X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
12 (MR+) - 7 (E)
1 (B) - 9 (HR)
12 (MR+) - 7 (E)
1 (B) - 12 (MR+)
9 (HR) - 7 (E)
DOWN
Below 1
LEFT
Below 1
RIGHT
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the outer

mirror switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000015DS072X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003DK602SX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL OUTER MIRROR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 4 claws and install the outer mirror switch
assembly.
ARMREST BASE PANEL
3. INSTALL FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
4. INSTALL DOOR ARMREST COVER LH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003DK602SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003DK802MX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER MIRROR SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE DOOR ARMREST COVER LH
3. REMOVE FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
ARMREST BASE PANEL
5. REMOVE OUTER MIRROR SWITCH ASSEMBLY

tape, disengage the 4 claws and remove the outer mirror
switch assembly.
*1
Protective Tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003DK802MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PGK03SX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PGK03SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EWR01MX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL OUTER MIRROR LH
(a) w/o Mirror Heater:
(1) Engage the 2 claws on the upper part of the outer

rear view mirror sub-assembly LH to the outer mirror
LH.
(b) w/ Mirror Heater:
(1) Connect the 2

connectors.
(2) Engage the 2 claws on the upper part of the outer

rear view mirror sub-assembly LH to the outer mirror
LH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EWR01MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(c) Engage the 2 claws on the lower part of the outer rear
view mirror sub-assembly LH to the outer mirror LH, as
(d) Push the outside part of the outer rear view mirror subassembly LH and tilt it, as show in the illustration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EWR01MX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Q5703WX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE OUTER MIRROR LH
(a) Push the outside part of the outer rear view mirror subassembly LH and tilt it, as show in the illustration.
(b) Push the upper part of the mirror surface and tilt it.
(c) Apply protective tape, as shown in the illustration.

*1
Protective Tape
(d) Using a moulding remover, disengage the 2 claws at the

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Q5703WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
lower part of the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly LH,

and separate the outer mirror LH.
*1
Moulding Remover
(e) w/o Mirror Heater:
(1) Disengage the 2 claws at the upper part of the outer

mirror LH.
(2) Remove the outer mirror LH.

(f) w/ Mirror Heater:
(1) Disengage the 2 claws at the upper part of the outer

2/3
8/6/12
mirror LH.
(2) Disconnect the 2 connectors and remove the outer

mirror LH.
3/3
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PGQ04WX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PGQ04WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PGQ04WX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000044KC00PX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. REMOVE OUTER MIRROR LH

2. REMOVE OUTER MIRROR COVER LH
(a) Disengage the 6 claws and remove the outer mirror cover
LH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000044KC00PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000014YH04VX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Check the operation of the mirror surface.
(1) Disconnect the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly

RH connector.
(2) Apply battery voltage and check the operation of the mirror.
OK:
Battery positive (+) Terminal 3 (MR+)
Battery negative (-) Terminal 8 (MV)
Battery positive (+) Terminal 8 (MV)
Battery negative (-) Terminal 3 (MR+)
Battery positive (+) Terminal 3 (MR+)
Battery negative (-) Terminal 7 (MH)
Battery positive (+) Terminal 7 (MH)
Battery negative (-) Terminal 3 (MR+)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Turns upward
Turns downward
Turns right
Turns left
*a

(Outer Rear View Mirror Sub-assembly RH)
If the result is not as specified, replace the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly RH.
(b) Check the operation of the mirror heater (w/ Mirror Heater).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000014YH04VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(1) Disconnect the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly RH connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
4 (+) - 10 (-)
CONDITION
25C (75F)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
9.6 to 14.4
(3) Connect the cable from the positive (+) terminal to terminal 4 (+) and the negative battery (-)
terminal to terminal 10 (-), then check that the mirror becomes warm.
HINT:
It takes a short time for the mirror to become warm.
OK:
Mirror becomes warm.
2. INSPECT OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Check the operation of the mirror surface.
(1) Disconnect the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly LH

connector.
(2) Apply battery voltage and check the operation of the mirror.
OK:
Battery positive (+) Terminal 3 (ML+)
Battery negative (-) Terminal 8 (MV)
Battery positive (+) Terminal 8 (MV)
Battery negative (-) Terminal 3 (ML+)
Battery positive (+) Terminal 7 (MH)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Turns upward
Turns downward
Turns left
2/3
8/6/12
Battery negative (-) Terminal 3 (ML+)

Battery positive (+) Terminal 3 (ML+)
Turns right
Battery negative (-) Terminal 7 (MH)

*a
(Outer Rear View Mirror Sub-assembly LH)

If the result is not as specified, replace the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly LH.
(b) Check the operation of the mirror heater (w/ Mirror Heater).
(1) Disconnect the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly LH connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
4 (+) - 10(-)
CONDITION
25C (75F)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
9.6 to 14.4
(3) Connect the cable from the positive (+) terminal to terminal 4 (+) and the negative battery (-)
terminal to terminal 10 (-), then check that the mirror becomes warm.
HINT:
It takes a short time for the mirror to become warm.
OK:
Mirror becomes warm.
3/3
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PGP09IX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Retract the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly LH.
(b) Install the outer rear view mirror sub-assembly LH with the 3 bolts.
Torque: 7.5 Nm (76 kgfcm, 6ftlbf)
(c) Align the matchmark on the wire harness with the

harness clip on the body side, and install the wire
harness.
*a
Matchmark
(d) connect the connector.
2. INSTALL LOWER OUTER MIRROR COVER LH

(a) Engage the 5 claws and install the lower outer mirror cover LH.
3. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER LH

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PGP09IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PGP09IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000044KD00PX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): OUTER REAR VIEW MIRROR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:
1. INSTALL OUTER MIRROR COVER LH
(a) Engage the 6 claws to install the outer mirror cover LH.
2. INSTALL OUTER MIRROR LH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000044KD00PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000030W901VX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. CHECK OUTER MIRROR SWITCH OPERATION
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ACC.
(b) With the mirror master switch set to L, check that the mirror surface moves up, down, left and
right normally.
(c) With the mirror master switch set to R, check that the mirror surface moves up, down, left and
right normally.
2. CHECK MIRROR HEATER

(b) Check that pressing the mirror heater switch illuminates the indicator and warms the mirror
surface.
(c) Check that after approximately 15 minutes, the indicator light turns off and the mirror heater
deactivates.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000030W901VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000030W7012X
Title: MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000030W8018X
Title: MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Power Mirror Control System

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
ACC fuse
SEE
PAGE
-
Outer mirror switch assembly
Power retractable mirror does not operate*1
Outer rear view mirror assembly

LH
RH
Mirror heater does not operate with rear defogger

switch*2
MIR HTR fuse
MIR HTR relay

LH
RH
Window defogger system

*1: w/ Retract Mirror
*2: w/ Mirror Heater
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000030WA017X
Title: MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000030WA017X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000030WA017X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
MIRROR (EXT): RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000017WF03EX
Title: MIRROR (EXT): RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT MIR HTR RELAY
the table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
3-5
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION

terminals 1 and 2
10 k or
higher

terminals 1 and 2
Below 1
*a

(MIR HTR Relay)
If the result is not as specified, replace the MIR HTR
relay.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017WF03EX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: BACK WINDOW GLASS: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MKU01MX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: BACK WINDOW GLASS: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MKU01MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: BACK WINDOW GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MKT052X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: BACK WINDOW GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO.1 BACK WINDOW GLASS STOPPER
(a) When reusing the windshield glass:

(1) Apply primer (Sunstar #435-70) to the glass attachment surface of the new No.1 back window
glass stopper.
(2) Apply primer (Sunstar #435-40) to the No.1 back window glass stopper attachment surface of
the back window glass.
Primer
Adhesive
(3) After drying the primer, apply adhesive (Sunstar #560) to the No.1 back window glass stopper
attachment surface.
(4) Install the No.1 back window glass stopper to the

back window glass, as shown in the illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
MEASUREMENT
18.0 mm (0.7087 in.)
19.3 mm (0.7598 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MKT052X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/9
8/6/12
*1
No.1 Back Window Glass Stopper
*2
Back Window Glass
*a
Back Side
2. INSTALL NO.2 BACK WINDOW GLASS STOPPER

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No.1 back window glass stopper.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 BACK WINDOW MOULDING

(a) Using a brush or sponge, coat the application area of a new No. 1 back window moulding with
Primer (3M N-200).
NOTICE:
Do not apply too much primer.
Allow the primer coating to dry for 3 minutes or more.
Throw away any leftover primer.
HINT:
If an area other than specified is coated by accident, wipe off the primer with a clean piece of cloth
before it dries.
(b) Using a roller, install the new No. 1 back window

moulding onto the back window glass, as shown in the
illustration.
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Install the No. 1 back window moulding firmly so that it
does not sag.
(c) Using a roller, install the new No. 1 back window moulding
onto the back window glass, as shown in the illustration.
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Install the No. 1 back window moulding firmly so that it
does not sag.
2/9
8/6/12
4. INSTALL BACK WINDOW GLASS ADHESIVE DAM

(a) Using a brush or sponge, coat the application area of a new back window glass adhesive dams
with Primer (3M-N200).
NOTICE:
Do not keep any of the opened Primer for later use.
HINT:
If any area other than the specified is coated by accident, wipe off the primer with a clean piece of
cloth before it dries.
(b) Install the new back window glass adhesive dams onto the back window glass, as shown in the
illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
0.0 to 3.0 mm (0 to 0.1181 in.)
19.9 to 21.9 mm (0.7835 to 0.8622 in.)
18.9 to 20.9 mm (0.7441 to 0.8228 in.)
6.0 to 8.0 mm (0.2362 to 0.3150 in.)
3/9
8/6/12
*1
Back Window Glass Adhesive Dam
*a
Back Side
*2
-
Ceramic Notch
-
HINT:
5. INSTALL BACK WINDOW GLASS

(a) Position the back window glass.
*a
Matchmark
(1) Using suction cups, place the back window glass in the
correct position.
(2) Check that the whole contact surface of the back
window glass rim is perfectly even.
(3) Align the matchmarks on the back window glass and
vehicle body.
NOTICE:
Check that the back window glass stoppers are correctly
attached to the vehicle body.
(4) Remove the back window glass.

(b) Using a brush, coat the installation surface on the vehicle body with Primer (sunstar #435-40).
*a
NG
*b
OK
Primer (sunstar #435-40)
4/9
8/6/12
Adhesive
NOTICE:
Do not coat the adhesive with Primer.
HINT:
(c) Using a brush or sponge, coat the adhesive application area with Primer (3M N-200).
Standard Dimension:
AREA
a
DIMENSION
8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
*1
*a
Back Side
*2
-
Primer (3M N-200)

-
NOTICE:
HINT:
5/9
8/6/12
(d) Apply adhesive to the glass.

Adhesive:
Toyota Genuine Windshield Glass Adhesive or equivalent
(1) Cut off the tip of the cartridge nozzle as shown in the
illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
9.0 mm (0.354 in.)
8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
*1
Nozzle
(2) Load the sealer gun with the cartridge.

(3) Apply adhesive to the back window glass as shown in the illustration.
6/9
8/6/12
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
9.0 mm (0.354 in.)
9.8 mm (0.386 in.)
11.1 mm (0.437 in.)
*1
*2
Adhesive
*a
Back Side
*b
Beef up Area
(e) Apply adhesive tape, etc. to the back window glass and
7/9
8/6/12
the body panel section, and use a pen to apply matching

marks for use when installing (when using the new back
window glass).
*a
Matchmark
(1) Using suction cups, position the back window glass so

that the matchmarks are aligned, and press it in
gently along the rim.
NOTICE:
Check that the back window glass stopper are attached
to the vehicle body correctly.
Check the clearance between the vehicle body and back
window glass.
After the primer on the body is dried (about 10 minutes),
install the back window glass.
(2) Lightly press the front surface of the back window
glass to ensure that the back window glass is securely
fit to the vehicle body.
HINT:
Press the glass with force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22.0 lbf) or more.
(3) Using a scraper, remove any excess or protruding

adhesive.
HINT:
Apply adhesive onto the back window glass rim.
(4) Hold the back window glass using protective tape until
the applied adhesive becomes hard.
HINT:
Follow the instructions in the owner's manuals provided by
each adhesive manufacturer regarding the minimum required
drying time after applying adhesive, and the time required
before driving.
(f) Connect each connector.
6. INSPECT WATER LEAK

(a) After the adhesive has hardened, apply water from the outside of the vehicle. Check that no
water leaks into the cabin.
(b) If water leaks into the cabin, allow the water to dry and add adhesive.
(c) Remove the protective tape.
8/9
8/6/12

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
9/9
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: BACK WINDOW GLASS: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MKV053X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: BACK WINDOW GLASS: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
Disconnect the front door opening trim weatherstrip LH to the extent that allows the removal of the

HINT:
7. DISCONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER LH

8. DISCONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH
HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MKV053X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12

HINT:

16. REMOVE BACK WINDOW GLASS
(a) Apply protective tape to the installation position of the
back window glass on the vehicle body.
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
Apply protective tape to the vehicle body to prevent it from
being scratched.
(b) Using a knife, cut off the moulding, as shown in the

illustration.
*1
Body
*2
No.1 Back Window Moulding
*3
Back Window Glass
*a
Cut
NOTICE:
Do not damage the vehicle body with the knife.
If the vehicle body is damaged, repair the damaged
portion by applying an anti-rust coating after removing
the back window glass.
(c) Place matchmarks on the back window glass and vehicle

body on the locations indicated in the illustration.
2/6
8/6/12
*a
Matchmark
HINT:
Matchmarks are not needed to be placed if the back window
glass will not be reused.
(d) Disconnect the connector.
(e) Pass a piano wire between the vehicle body and back
window glass from the interior.
*1
Back Window Glass Stopper
*2
Piano Wire
(f) Tie both wire ends to wooden blocks or similar objects.

(g) Cut off the adhesive by pulling the piano wire around the back window glass.
NOTICE:
When separating the back window glass, take care not to damage the paint or interior and
exterior ornaments.
To prevent the package tray from being scratched when removing the back window glass, place a
plastic sheet between the piano wire and package tray.
(h) Using suction cups, disengage the windshield glass

stoppers and remove the back window glass.
*1
Back Window Glass Stopper
NOTICE:
3/6
8/6/12
There are 2 back window glass stoppers on the back

window glass, as shown in the illustration. Be careful not
to damage the back window glass when cutting off the
adhesive.
To prevent the back window glass from dropping when
performing this operation, be sure to hold the back
window glass using suction cups.
17. REMOVE BACK WINDOW GLASS ADHESIVE DAM

(a) When reusing the back window glass:
(1) Using a scraper, remove the back window glass
adhesive dam.
*1
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the back window glass.
Be sure to replace the back window glass adhesive dam
with a new one.
18. REMOVE NO. 1 BACK WINDOW MOULDING

(1) Using a scraper, remove the No. 1 back window

moulding.
*1
No. 1 Back Window Moulding
*a
Back Side
4/6
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Be sure to replace the No. 1 back window moulding with a
new one.
19. REMOVE NO.1 BACK WINDOW GLASS STOPPER

(1) Using a scraper, remove the No. 1 back window glass
stopper.
*1
No. 1 Back Window Glass Stopper
*2
No. 2 Back Window Glass Stopper
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Be sure to replace the No. 1 back window glass stopper
with a new one.
20. REMOVE NO.2 BACK WINDOW GLASS STOPPER

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No.1 back window glass stopper.
21. CLEAN BACK WINDOW GLASS

(a) Using a scraper, remove the adhesive tape and adhesive sticking to the back window glass.
NOTICE:
(b) Clean the outer circumference of the back window glass

with a non-residue solvent.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the glass surface after cleaning it.
Even if using new glass, clean it with a non-residue
solvent.
5/6
8/6/12
22. CLEAN VEHICLE BODY

(a) Clean and shape the contact surface of the vehicle body.
(1) Using a knife, cut away any rough adhesive on the contact surface of the vehicle body to
ensure the appropriate surface shape.
NOTICE:
HINT:
Leave as much adhesive on the vehicle body as possible.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
*1
Body
Adhesive
(2) Clean the contact surface of the vehicle body with a piece of cloth saturated with cleaner.
HINT:
Even if all the adhesive has been removed, clean the vehicle body.
6/6
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002I2Q02TX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FRS)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002I2Q02TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002AC80CBX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FRS)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 6 claws to install the power window regulator

switch assembly.
BASE PANEL
3. INSTALL FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the LH side
4. INSTALL DOOR ARMREST COVER RH

HINT:

7. INSPECT POWER WINDOW (POWER WINDOW OPERATION)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002AC80CBX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002AC90C2X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE DOOR ARMREST COVER RH
HINT:
3. REMOVE FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
BASE PANEL
5. REMOVE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY

tape, disengage the 6 claws and remove the power
window regulator switch assembly.
*1
Protective Tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002AC90C2X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: B2311,B2314: Driver Side Motor Malfunction
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002BQS07AX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: B2311,B2314: Driver Side Motor
DTC
B2311
Driver Side Motor Malfunction
DTC
B2314
Passenger Side Motor Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The power window regulator motor is operated by the power window regulator master switch assembly
and power window regulator assembly. The power window regulator master switch assembly has motor,
regulator and ECU functions.
These DTCs are output when the power window regulator motor assembly (for driver side and front
passenger side) has a malfunction, or the power window regulator master switch assembly and power
window regulator switch assembly has a malfunction.
DTC
NO.
B2311
B2314
TROUBLE AREA
Power window regulator motor assembly malfunction

(pulse sensor)
Power window regulator master switch assembly
malfunction
Power window regulator assembly malfunction
Open or short between power window regulator
motor assembly and power window regulator master
switch assembly
Power window
regulator motor
assembly
Power window
regulator master
switch assembly
Power window
regulator assembly
Wire harness or
connector
Power window regulator motor assembly malfunction

(pulse sensor)
Power window regulator switch assembly malfunction
Power window regulator assembly malfunction
Open or short between power window regulator
motor assembly and power window regulator switch
assembly
Power window
regulator motor
assembly
Power window
regulator switch
assembly
Power window
regulator assembly
Wire harness or
connector
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002BQS07AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/12
8/6/12
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
When the power window regulator master switch assembly, power window regulator switch
assembly and power window regulator motor assembly is reinstalled or replaced, the power
window control system must be initialized
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT
(a) Clear the DTC

(b) Check for DTCs
.
.
2/12
8/6/12
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B2311 is output
DTC B2314 is output
2.

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Master Switch / Data List.
(e) According to the display on the Techstream read the Data List.
Master Switch
TESTER DISPLAY
Current D Sensor Driver side sensor fail mode1(power of sensor

Fail Mode1
malfunction) /Detected or Not Detected
NORMAL
DIAGNOSTIC
CONDITION
NOTE
Not
Detected
Current D Sensor Driver side sensor fail mode2(Pulse sensor1 malfunction) Not
Fail Mode2
/Detected or Not Detected
Detected
Current D Sensor Driver side sensor fail mode3(Pulse sensor2 malfunction) Not
Fail Mode3
Detected
Current D Sensor Driver side sensor fail mode4(Pulse direction error)

Fail Mode4
Not
Detected
Current D Sensor Driver side sensor fail mode5(Pulse stop) /Detected or
Not
Fail Mode5
Detected
Not Detected
Current D Sensor Driver side sensor fail mode6(Dead zone opening
Not
Fail Mode6
Detected
direction error) /Detected or Not Detected
OK:
On the Techstream screen, Not Detected is displayed.
3/12
8/6/12
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Detect
Not Detect
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH

ASSEMBLY - POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the E5 power window regulator motor assembly connector.
Current D Sensor Fail Mode 1
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-3 (VCC) - E5-5 (VCC)
Always
Below 1
E8-14 (SGD) - E5-4 (SGD)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
E8-8 (SN1) - E5-6 (SN1)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
E8-1 (SN2) - E5-2 (SN2)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4/12
8/6/12
E8-1 (SN2) - E5-2 (SN2)
Always
Below 1
E8-8 (SN1) - E5-6 (SN1)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-1 (SN2) - E5-2 (SN2)
Always
Below 1
E8-3 (VCC) - E5-5 (VCC)
Always
Below 1
E8-8 (SN1) - E5-6 (SN1)
Always
Below 1
E8-14 (SGD) - E5-4 (SGD)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-1 (SN2) - E5-2 (SN2)
Always
Below 1
E8-3 (VCC) - E5-5 (VCC)
Always
Below 1
E8-8 (SN1) - E5-6 (SN1)
Always
Below 1
E8-14 (SGD) - E5-4 (SGD)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-3 (VCC) Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
E8-14 (SGD) Body ground
Always
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
E8-8 (SN1) -Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
E8-1 (SN2) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
E8-1 (SN2)- Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
5/12
8/6/12
Always
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-1 (SN2)- Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
E8-3 (VCC) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
E8-14 (SGD) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-3 (VCC) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
INSPECT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the power window regulator motor assembly
(b) Inspect the power window regulator motor assembly
NG
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR

MOTOR ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
6/12
8/6/12
functioning one
.
(b) Check the power window regulator master switch assembly operates
OK:
Driver door power window operates normally.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Does not operate
Operate
6.
END

ASSEMBLY

(e) According to the display on the Techstream read the Data List.
Master Switch
TESTER
DISPLAY
Current P
Sensor Fail
Mode1
Current P
Sensor Fail
Mode2
Current P
Sensor Fail
Mode3
NORMAL
DIAGNOSTIC
CONDITION
NOTE
Front passenger side sensor fail mode1(power of sensor

Not
Detected
Front passenger side sensor fail mode2(Pulse sensor1
Not
Detected
Front passenger side sensor fail mode3(Pulse sensor2

Not
Detected
Current P
7/12
8/6/12
Sensor Fail
Mode4
Front passenger side sensor fail mode4(Pulse direction

error) /Detected or Not Detected
Not
Detected
Current P
Sensor Fail
Front passenger side sensor fail mode5(Pulse stop)
Not
Detected
Front passenger side sensor fail mode6(Dead zone
Not
Detected
Mode5
Current P
Sensor Fail
Mode6
opening direction error) /Detected or Not Detected
OK:
On the Techstream screen, Not Detected is displayed.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Detect
Not Detect

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH

ASSEMBLY - POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the F6 power window regulator master switch assembly connector.
(b) Disconnect the F1 power window regulator motor assembly connector.
Current P Sensor Fail Mode 1
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
F6-3 (VCC) - F1-5 (VCC)
Always
Below 1
F6-14 (SGD) - F1-4 (SGD)
Always
Below 1

8/12
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
F6-8 (SN1) - F1-6 (SN1)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
F6-1 (SN2) - F1-2 (SN2)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
F6-1 (SN2) - F1-2 (SN2)
Always
Below 1
F6-8 (SN1) - F1-6 (SN1)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
F6-1 (SN2) - F1-2 (SN2)
Always
Below 1
F6-3 (VCC) - F1-5 (VCC)
Always
Below 1
F6-8 (SN1) - F1-6 (SN1)
Always
Below 1
F6-14 (SGD) - F1-4 (SGD)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
F6-1 (SN2) - F1-2 (SN2)
Always
Below 1
F6-3 (VCC) - F1-5 (VCC)
Always
Below 1
F6-8 (SN1) - F1-6 (SN1)
Always
Below 1
F6-14 (SGD) - F1-4 (SGD)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
F6-3 (VCC) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
F6-14 (SGD) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
9/12
8/6/12
F6-8 (SN1) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8.
INSPECT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY
10/12
8/6/12
(a) Remove the power window regulator motor assembly
(b) Inspect the power window regulator motor assembly
NG

MOTOR ASSEMBLY
OK
9.
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Temporarily replace the power window regulator switch assembly with a new or normally
functioning one
.
(b) Check the power window regulator switch assembly operates
OK:
Front passenger side door power window operates normally.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Does not operate
Operates
END
10.
functioning one
.
OK:
Driver door power window operates normally.
Result
11/12
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Does not operate
Operate
END

ASSEMBLY
12/12
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: B2312,B2315: Driver Side Master Switch O
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001LZY02UX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: B2312,B2315: Driver Side Master Switch
ON Stuck (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B2312
Driver Side Master Switch ON Stuck
DTC
B2315
Passenger Side P/W Switch ON Stuck
DESCRIPTION
The power window regulator motor assembly is operated by the power window master switch assembly
or power window regulator switch assembly. The power window regulator motor assembly has motor,
regulator and ECU functions. These DTCs are output when the ECU built into the regulator motor and
master switch determines that the power window master switch assembly or power window regulator
switch assembly is stuck.
NOTICE:
.
After the door glass or weatherstrip, etc. have been replaced, if AUTO UP is performed at the
position where the work was performed, a different window movement speed to the standard
operating learning value may be detected, causing the jam protection function to operate. When
the jam protection function malfunctions and prevents the door glass from closing completely, the
following procedure can be used to cancel the jam protection function and allow the door glass to
be closed*1.
Repeat the AUTO UP maintain jam protection function operation twice in
succession*2.
The third repeat of the AUTO UP maintain operation will cause the position of the upper
edge of the door glass to be relearned, allowing the door glass to be closed.
*1: In some cases, the state of the door glass or regulator may prevent the glass from
being closed, even in this mode.
*2: If any action other that the AUTO UP operation (DOWN operation, IG OFF, timeroperated
OFF, index operation, etc.) is performed between the operation of the jam protection
function and the AUTO UP maintain, this count will be reset.
DTC
NO.
B2312
The power window regulator master switch is

stuck
Power window regulator master switch assembly
held in same position for more than 20 seconds
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001LZY02UX.html?sisuffix=ff
TROUBLE AREA
Power window regulator master

switch assembly
1/4
8/6/12
B2315
The power window regulator switch is stuck

Power window regulator switch assembly held in
same position for more than 20 seconds
Power window
regulator master
switch assembly
Power window
regulator switch
assembly
Wire harness and
connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT
(a) Clear the DTCs

(b) Check the DTCs
.
.
Result
2/4
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B2312 is output
DTC B2315 is output
2.

SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(e) According to the display on the Techstream, read the Data List.
Master Switch
TESTER
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY
NOTE
ON: Front passenger side power
P Door
P/W Auto
SW
Front passenger side power window

auto switch signal / ON or OFF
window auto up/down switch

operated
OFF: Front passenger side power

window switch not operated
P Door
P/W Up
SW

manual up signal / ON or OFF

window manual up switch operated

P Door
P/W Down
SW

manual down signal / ON or OFF
window manual down switch

operated

OK:
The Techstream display changes normally when master switch is operated.
NG

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
3/4
8/6/12
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the F6 power window regulator switch assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
E8-2 (UART) - F6-2 (UART)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
E8-2 (UART) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
NG
OK

MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
4/4
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: B2313,B2316: Driver Side Glass Position Initi
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000027JF07BX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: B2313,B2316: Driver Side Glass Position
Initialization Incomplete (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B2313
Driver Side Glass Position Initialization Incomplete
DTC
B2316
Passenger Side Glass Position Initialization Incomplete
DESCRIPTION
The power window regulator motor assembly is operated by the power window regulator master switch
and power window regulator switch assembly. The power window regulator master switch assembly and
power window regulator switch assembly has motor, regulator and ECU functions.
When the ECU determines that the power window regulator master switch assembly, power window
regulator switch assembly and power window regulator motor assembly has not been initialized, DTCs
B2313 and B2316 are stored.
DTC
NO.
B2313
Power window regulator master switch

assembly not initialized
Power window regulator switch assembly

B2316
not initialized
TROUBLE AREA

assembly
Power window regulator switch
Power window regulator switch
assembly
PROCEDURE
1.
PERFORM INITIALIZATION

(b) Initialize the power window regulator master switch assembly or power window regulator switch
assembly
.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000027JF07BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: B2313,B2316: Driver Side Glass Position Initi
NEXT
2.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT
(a) Clear the DTCs
(b) Check for DTCs
HINT:
Check for DTCs for the power window regulator master switch assembly or power window regulator
switch assembly that has DTC B2313 or B2316 stored in its ECU.
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTCs output
DTC B2313 is output
DTC B2316 is output
GO TO OTHER PROBLEM (Proceed to Problem
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR

ASSEMBLY (for Front Passenger Side)
END (POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM HAS

NOT BEEN INITIALIZED)
Symptoms Table)
ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000027JF07BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011V107HX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. READ DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

Master Switch
TESTER
DISPLAY
D Door P/W
Auto SW
Driver side power window auto

switch signal / ON or OFF
D Door P/W Up Driver side power window manual

SW
up signal / ON or OFF
D Door P/W
Down SW
Driver side power window manual

down signal / ON or OFF
D Door
Courtesy SW
Driver side door courtesy light

Front passenger side power
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
ON: Driver side power window auto

up/down switch operated
OFF: Driver side power window
switch not operated or manual
up/down switch operated.
ON: Driver side power window
manual up switch operated
switch not operated
ON: Driver side power window
manual down switch operated
switch not operated
ON: Driver side door opened

window auto up/down switch
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011V107HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
P Door P/W
Auto SW
window auto switch signal / ON or

OFF

P Door P/W Up
window manual up signal / ON or
SW
OFF
P Door P/W
Down SW

window manual down signal / ON
or OFF
P Door
Courtesy SW
Front passenger side door

courtesy light switch signal / ON or
OFF
P Door P/W
Remote Auto
SW
window auto switch signal from

driver side / ON or OFF
operated

window switch not operated or
manual up/down switch operated.
window manual up switch operated
window manual down switch
operated

ON: Front passenger side door
opened
OFF: Front passenger side door
closed

window auto up/down switch from
driver side operated
window switch from driver side not

operated or manual up/down
switch operated.

P Door P/W
window manual up signal from
Remote Up SW

window manual up switch from
operated
P Door P/W
Remote Down

window manual down switch from
SW
driver side /OFF or ON

operated
Current D Door Driver side power window auto
P/W Auto SW
switch stuck as ON /Detected or
Not Detected
Current D Door Driver side power window manual

P/W Up SW ON up switch stuck as ON /Detected or Not Detected
ON Stuck
Stuck
Not Detected
Not Detected
Current D Door Driver side power window manual

P/W Down SW
ON Stuck
down switch stuck as ON /Detected Not Detected

or Not Detected
2/5
8/6/12
Current P Door Front passenger side power

P/W Remote
Auto SW ON
window auto switch from driver

side stuck as ON /Detected or Not
Stuck
Detected

P/W Remote
window manual up switch from
Up SW ON
Stuck
driver side stuck as ON /Detected

or Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected

P/W Remote
Down SW ON

driver seat stuck as ON /Detected
Stuck
or Not Detected

P/W Auto SW
ON Stuck
window auto switch stuck as ON


P/W Up SW ON window manual up switch stuck as
Stuck
ON /Detected or Not Detected
P/W Down SW window manual down Switch stuck
ON Stuck
as ON /Detected or Not Detected
Current D Door Glass position of the driver side

Glass Position power window /
Information
-100 to 700
Current P Door Glass position of the passenger

Glass Position
Information
Current D
Sensor Fail
Mode1
side power window /

-100 to 700
Driver side sensor fail
mode1(power of sensor
malfunction) /Detected or Not
Detected
Current D
Driver side sensor fail mode2(Pulse
Sensor Fail
Mode2
sensor1 malfunction) /Detected or

Not Detected
Not Detected
Current D
Sensor Fail

sensor2 malfunction) /Detected or Not Detected
Mode3
Not Detected
Current D
Sensor Fail
direction error) /Detected or Not
Mode4
Detected
Current D
Sensor Fail
Mode5
Current D

stop) /Detected or Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Driver side sensor fail mode6(Dead
3/5
8/6/12
Sensor Fail
zone opening direction error)
Mode6
Not Detected
Current D
Initial Fail
Driver side glass position

initialization incomplete /Detected
Not Detected
Mode
or Not Detected
Current D ECU
Driver side ECU(EEPROM) read
Fail Mode
error /Detected or Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Not Detected
Fail Mode
ECU(EEPROM) read error /Detected Not Detected

or Not Detected
Number of
Trouble Codes
Number of trouble codes / Min.: 0

or Max.: 255
Current P
Sensor Fail
Front passenger side sensor fail

mode1(power of sensor
Mode1
malfunction) /Detected or Not

Detected
Current P
Sensor Fail

mode2(Pulse sensor1 malfunction)
Mode2
Current P
Sensor Fail
mode3(Pulse sensor2 malfunction)
Mode3
Current P
Sensor Fail

mode4(Pulse direction error)
Mode4
Current P
Sensor Fail
mode5(Pulse stop) /Detected or
Mode5
Not Detected
Current P
Sensor Fail
Mode6

mode6(Dead zone opening
direction error) /Detected or Not
Detected
Current P
Front passenger side glass
Initial Fail
position initialization incomplete
Mode
Current P ECU
Front passenger side
Number of DTCs will be displayed
Main Body (Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))

TESTER DISPLAY
IG SW
Ignition switch IG signal / ON or OFF
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
-
2. ACTIVE TEST
4/5
8/6/12
HINT:

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Master Switch / Active Test.
CAUTION:
Be careful to avoid injuries as this test causes vehicle parts to move. During the Active Test,
the jam protection function will not operate.
Master Switch
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Power Window
Driver side power window
OFF / UP / DOWN
Power Window
OFF / UP / DOWN
5/5
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012GX0BRX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. DESCRIPTION
(a) The power window control system data can be read from the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) of the
vehicle. When the system seems to be malfunctioning, use the Techstream to check for
malfunctions and perform repairs.
2. CHECK DLC3
(a) Check the DLC3

(a) Measure the battery voltage.
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012GX0BRX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000363N04XX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
(2013 FR-S)

Power Window Control System
DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
B2311
Driver Side Motor Malfunction
B2312
Driver Side Master Switch ON Stuck
B2313
Driver Side Glass Position Initialization Incomplete
B2314
Passenger Side Motor Malfunction
B2315
Passenger Side P/W Switch ON Stuck
B2316
Passenger Side Glass Position Initialization Incomplete
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000363N04XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE PAGE
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: Driver Side Index Function does not Operate
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000005BJ8001X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: Driver Side Index Function does not
Operate (2013 FR-S)
Driver Side Index Function does not Operate
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) detects signals from the front door courtesy light switch.
When the ON signal from the front door courtesy light switch is sent to the power window regulator
master switch assembly via the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) using LIN communication system,
the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) will lower the driver side door window about 20 mm (0.787
in.) automatically. When the OFF signal from the front door courtesy light switch is detected, the main
body ECU (network gateway ECU) will raise the driver side door window to the fully-closed position
automatically.
NOTICE:
.
be closed*1.
succession*2.
*1: In some cases, the state of the door glass or regulator may prevent the glass
from being closed, even in this mode.
*2: If any action other that the AUTO UP operation (DOWN operation, IG OFF,
timer-operated OFF, index operation, etc.) is performed between the operation of
the jam protection function and the AUTO UP maintain, this count will be reset.
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (D Door Courtesy SW)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000005BJ8001X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12

Master Switch
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
D Door
Courtesy SW
Driver side door courtesy light switch signal /

ON or OFF
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
ON: Driver side door

opened
OFF: Driver side door
closed
OK:
On the Techstream screen, ON or OFF is displayed accordingly.
NG
GO TO LIGHTING SYSTEM (Door Courtesy

Switch Circuit)
OK
2.
(a) Initialize the power window regulator master switch assembly
(b) Check the power window regulator master switch assembly is operated
OK:
Driver side door power window operates normally.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
END
2/5
8/6/12
3.

Master Switch
TESTER DISPLAY
Current D Door Glass Position

Information
TEST PART
CONTROL
DIAGNOSTIC
RANGE
NOTE
Glass position of the driver side power

window / -100 to 700
OK:
Pulse generation.
NG

OK
4.
CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the power window regulator master switch assembly operates
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Operate (Does not window glass operate)
Does not operate

ASSEMBLY
3/5
8/6/12
5.
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Temporarily replace the power window regulator motor assembly with a new or normally
functioning one
.
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Operate
Does not operate
6.
END
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
functioning one
.
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Does not operate
Operate
END
4/5
8/6/12
7.
functioning one
.
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Operate
Does not operate
END
ASSEMBLY
5/5
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000YCC094X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Master switch / Trouble Codes.
2. CLEAR DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Master switch / Trouble Codes.
(e) Clear the DTCs
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YCC094X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000X8Z090X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
1. POWER WINDOW OPERATION IN FAIL-SAFE MODE
HINT:
If the pulse sensor built into the power window regulator motor malfunctions, the power window control system
enters fail-safe mode.
(a) The power window control system prohibits the following power window operations when the pulse sensor
for the jam protection function has problems and the window position or the learned value is abnormal.
Power Window Regulator Master Switch Assembly
POWER WINDOW OPERATION
CONDITION
IGNITION SWITCH
ON
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
(KEY-OFF OPERATION
PERMITTED)
(KEY-OFF OPERATION
PROHIBITED)
Manual up (Driver side door

window)
Manual down (Driver side door

window)
Auto up (Driver side door

window)
Auto down (Driver side door

window)
Manual up (Remote switch

operation)
Manual down (Remote switch

operation)
Auto up (Remote switch

operation)
Auto down (Remote switch

operation)

window)
(hold switch at auto up position)

operation)
Power Window Regulator Switch Assembly

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000X8Z090X.html?sisuffix=ff&
CONDITION
1/8
Manual up (Front passenger side door

window)
Manual down (Front passenger side
door window)
IGNITION
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
SWITCH ON
(KEY-OFF OPERATION
PERMITTED)
(KEY-OFF OPERATION
PROHIBITED)
Auto up (Front passenger side door

window)
window)
Auto down (Front passenger side door
window)
HINT:
: Operates
X: Operation prohibited
*: Operates in pull up the power window switch to the auto up position without jam protection
(1) Power window switch LED control
HINT:
During initialization of the power window regulator motor ECU, when the window position or initialization
complete status cannot be properly read from the EEPROM during fail-safe mode, the LED illuminates as shown
1. For Driver Side:
2/8
2. For Front Passenger Side:
(2) Fail-safe deactivation condition

When the pulse sensor is normal, to deactivate fail-safe mode, pull up the power window switch to the
auto up position and hold it for at least 1 second to fully close the window from the fully open
position. As a result, the auto up/down function will return.
(b) Initialization failure
HINT:
During initialization of the power window regulator motor ECU, when the window position or initialization
complete status cannot be properly read from the EEPROM, the power window control system prohibits the
operations as follows:

3/8
CONDITION
IGNITION SWITCH
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
ON
(KEY-OFF OPERATION
PERMITTED)
(KEY-OFF OPERATION
PROHIBITED)
Manual up (Driver side door

window)
Manual down (Driver side door

window)

window)
Auto down (Driver side door

window)
Manual up (Remote switch

operation)
Manual down (Remote switch

operation)

operation)
Auto down (Remote switch

operation)

window)

operation)

CONDITION
IGNITION
SWITCH ON
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
(KEY-OFF OPERATION
(KEY-OFF OPERATION
PERMITTED)
PROHIBITED)
Manual up (Front passenger side door

window)
Manual down (Front passenger side

door window)

window)
window)
4/8

window)
HINT:
: Operates
(1) Power window switch LED control
HINT:
During normal operation (fail-safe is not operating) the LED illuminate as shown in the illustration.
When a LIN communication system failure occurs, the LED will blink in a pattern of being on for 1.4 seconds,
and then off for 1.4 seconds.
If another failure occurs at the same time as the LIN failure, the pattern of being on for 0.7 seconds and off
for 0.7 seconds will take precedence.
1. For Driver Side:
5/8
2. For Front Passenger Side:
(c) LIN communication failure

HINT:
If the LIN communication line malfunctions (communication stop), the power window control system prohibits
the operations as follows:

CONDITION
IGNITION SWITCH ON
Manual up
Manual down
Auto up (hold switch at auto up position)
Auto up
Auto down

CONDITION
IGNITION SWITCH ON
Manual up
6/8
Manual up
Manual down
Auto up
Auto down
HINT:
: Operates
*: Jam protection can operate.
Remote up/down function does not operate.
(d) LIN communication failure and pulse sensor failure
HINT:
If the LIN communication line malfunctions (communication stop) and the pulse sensor for the jam protection
function has problems, the power window control system prohibits the operations as follows:

CONDITION
ALWAYS
Manual up
Manual down
Auto up
Auto down

CONDITION
ALWAYS
Manual up
Manual down
Auto up
Auto down
HINT:
: Operates
Driver door window: When the jam protection function does not operate due to a LIN communication failure,
the manual up and auto up functions will not operate.
Remote switch operation: Not operative during a LIN communication failure
(e) LIN communication failure and abnormal window position learned value or initialization failure
7/8
(e) LIN communication failure and abnormal window position learned value or initialization failure
HINT:
If the LIN communication line malfunctions (communication stop) and the window position or the learned value
is abnormal, the power window control system prohibits the operations as follows:

CONDITION
ALWAYS
Manual up
Manual down
Auto up
Auto down
HINT:
: Operates
Remote switch operation: Operation is not possible during a LIN communication failure.
8/8
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: Front Passenger Side Index Function does n
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000005BJ9001X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: Front Passenger Side Index Function
does not Operate (2013 FR-S)
Front Passenger Side Index Function does not Operate
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) detects signals from the front door courtesy light switch.
When the ON signal from the front door courtesy light switch is sent to the power window regulator
switch assembly via the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) using LIN communication system, the
main body ECU (network gateway ECU) will lower the front passenger side door window about 20 mm
(0.787 in.) automatically. When the OFF signal from the front door courtesy light switch is detected, the
main body ECU (network gateway ECU) will raise the front passenger side door window to the fullyclosed position automatically.
NOTICE:
.
be closed*1.
succession*2.
*1: In some cases, the state of the door glass or regulator may prevent the glass
from being closed, even in this mode.
*2: If any action other that the AUTO UP operation (DOWN operation, IG OFF,
timer-operated OFF, index operation, etc.) is performed between the operation of
the jam protection function and the AUTO UP maintain, this count will be reset.
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (D Door Courtesy SW)

1/5
8/6/12

Master Switch
TESTER
DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
P Door
Courtesy SW
Front passenger side door courtesy light

ON: Front passenger side

door opened
OFF: Front passenger side
door closed
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
OK:
On the Techstream screen, ON or OFF is displayed accordingly.
NG
GO TO LIGHTING SYSTEM (Door Courtesy

Switch Circuit)
OK
2.
(a) Initialize the power window regulator switch assembly
(b) Check the power window regulator switch assembly is operated
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
END
2/5
8/6/12
3.

Master Switch
TESTER DISPLAY
Current P Door Glass

Position Information
TEST PART
CONTROL
DIAGNOSTIC
RANGE
NOTE
Glass position of the passenger side power

window / -100 to 700
OK:
Pulse generation.
NG

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
4.
CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the power window regulator switch assembly operates
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Operate (Does not window glass operate)
Does not operate

ASSEMBLY
3/5
8/6/12
5.
functioning one
.
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Operate
Does not operate
6.
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH
END
ASSEMBLY
REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Temporarily replace the power window regulator switch assembly with a new or normally
functioning one
.
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Does not operate
Operate
END
4/5
8/6/12
7.
functioning one
.
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Operate
Does not operate
END
ASSEMBLY
5/5
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTI
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011UW0AMX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the power window control system.
1.
NEXT
2.
In troubleshooting, confirm that the problem symptoms have been accurately identified.
Preconceptions should be discarded in order to make an accurate judgment. To clearly
understand what the problem symptoms are, it is extremely important to ask the customer
about the problem and the conditions at the time the malfunction occurred.
Gather as much information as possible for reference. Past problems that seem unrelated may
also help in some cases.
The following 5 items are important points in the problem analysis:
What
When
Where
Road conditions
How did it happen?
Problem symptoms
NEXT
3.
PRE-CHECK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011UW0AMX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
(b) Check the fuses and relays.

(c) Check the connector connections and terminals to make sure that there are no abnormalities
such as loose connections, deformation, etc.
NEXT
4.
INSPECT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION OF LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*
(a) Use the techstream to check if the LIN communication system is functioning normally
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTCs output
DTCs output
GO TO LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
5.
CHECK FOR DTC*
(a) Check for DTCs and note any codes that are output
(b) Clear the DTCs.

(c) Recheck for DTCs.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
No DTCs output
DTCs output
2/4
8/6/12
6.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Fault is not listed in problem symptoms table
Fault is listed in problem symptoms table
Go to step 8
7.
(a) Operation Check
(b) Data List / Active Test

.
.
NEXT
8.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
3/4
8/6/12
9.
RESET POWER WINDOW MOTOR
(a) If the power window regulator master switch assembly or power window regulator switch
assembly LED is blinking, reset the power window regulator motor assembly
.
NEXT
10.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
4/4
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: INITIALIZATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011V207VX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: INITIALIZATION (2013 FR-S)
INITIALIZATION
1. INITIALIZE POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM (POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER
SWITCH ASSEMBLY OR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
CAUTION:
When power window regulator master switch assembly, power window regulator switch
window control system must be initialized. Functions such as the auto up/down, jam protection,
key-off operation do not operate if the initialization is not performed.
HINT:
When the battery is replaced, it is not necessary to initialize the power window regulator motor
assembly.
NOTICE:
assembly and power window regulator motor assembly is replaced, DTC B2313 and B2316 are
output. Clear the DTC after the initialization.
When performing initialization, do not perform any other procedures.
be closed*1.
succession*2.
If the initialization is not completed properly, the LIN communication system may have a
malfunction
(a) Initialization procedure

(1) Close the door and turn the ignition switch to ON.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011V207VX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: INITIALIZATION (2013 FR-S)
(2) Open the door glass halfway as shown in the

illustration.
(3) Control the power window regular switch (hold down AUTO UP) to fully close the door glass,
and then hold the switch for at least 1 second to reset the door glass position and to complete
the initialization.
HINT:
Use the switch for the front passenger side to initialize that side of setting.
The front passenger side of the window cannot be controlled by the power window regular switch
assembly without first initializing the setting.
The auto up / down and reverse functions are disabled until the initializing process is completed.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011V207VX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000016810B7X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. CHECK WINDOW LOCK SWITCH
HINT:
Before performing the window lock switch operation check, make sure that the window lock switch is
off (the switch is not pushed in).
(a) Check that the front passenger side window cannot be operated from each power window
regulator switch assembly when the window lock switch of the power window regulator master
switch assembly is pushed in.
OK:
Front passenger side window is disabled.
HINT:
Even when the window lock switch of the power window regulator master switch assembly is pushed
in, remote manual up and down and auto up and down functions can be operated.
(b) Check that the front passenger side window can be operated from power window regulator
switch assembly (front passenger side) when the window lock switch of the power window
regulator master switch assembly is pushed in again.
OK:
Front passenger side window operates normally.
2. CHECK MANUAL UP / DOWN FUNCTION

(a) Check that the driver side power window operates as follows:
OK
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
MASTER SWITCH
Driver side
SWITCH OPERATION
POWER WINDOW
Pulled halfway up
UP (Closes)
Pushed halfway down
DOWN (Opens)
(b) Check that the front passenger side window operates as follows:
OK
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Window lock switch off
REGULATOR SWITCH
SWITCH OPERATION
POWER WINDOW
Pulled halfway up
UP (Closes)
Pushed halfway down
DOWN (Opens)
3. CHECK AUTO UP / DOWN FUNCTION

1/4
8/6/12
(a) Check that the driver side power window operates as follows:
OK
CONDITION
MASTER SWITCH
Ignition switch ON
Driver side
SWITCH OPERATION
POWER WINDOW
Full Pulled up (One touch operation)
AUTO UP (Closes)
Full Pushed down (One touch operation)
AUTO DOWN (Opens)
(b) Check that the front passenger side window operates as follows:
OK
CONDITION
REGULATOR
SWITCH
Ignition switch
ON
Window lock
switch off
Front passenger
side
SWITCH OPERATION
POWER WINDOW
Full Pulled up (One touch

operation)
AUTO UP (Closes)
Full Pushed down (One touch

operation)
AUTO DOWN
(Opens)
4. CHECK REMOTE MANUAL UP / DOWN FUNCTION

(a) Check that the front passenger side window operates as follows:
OK
CONDITION
MASTER SWITCH
Ignition switch ON
SWITCH OPERATION
POWER WINDOW
Pulled halfway up
UP (Closes)
Pushed halfway down
DOWN (Opens)
5. CHECK REMOTE AUTO UP / DOWN FUNCTION

(a) Check that the front passenger side window operates as follows:
OK
CONDITION
MASTER SWITCH
Ignition switch
Front passenger
ON
side
SWITCH OPERATION
POWER WINDOW
Full Pulled up (One touch operation)
AUTO UP (Closes)
Full Pushed down (One touch

operation)
AUTO DOWN
(Opens)
6. CHECK POWER WINDOW OPERATION FUNCTION AFTER IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED OFF
(a) Check that all the power windows can be operated with the power widow regulator master switch
assembly and power window regulator switch assembly after the ignition switch is turned off.
HINT:
If the window lock switch is on, the power windows cannot be operated besides the driver door power
window. Therefore, turn the window lock switch off before checking the window operation.
2/4
8/6/12
(b) Check that the key-off operation function does not operate after the driver side door or front
passenger side door is opened immediately.
HINT:
If the driver side door or front passenger side door is opened during automatic window operation
while the key-off operation function is on, the window will stop operating.
(c) Check that all the power windows cannot be operated after more than approximately 45 seconds
have elapsed since the ignition switch was turned off. However, if the jam protection function is
still operating after 45 seconds have elapsed, the power windows continue operation until the jam
protection function completes.
7. CHECK JAM PROTECTION FUNCTION

(a) Check the basic function.
CAUTION:
Do not put your fingers between the door frame and door glass to check the jam protection
function. Also, prevent any part of your body from being caught during inspection.
HINT:
The jam protection function is operative during both the auto up and manual up operations while the
engine is running or the ignition switch is ON, and also 45 sec. have elapsed after the ignition switch
is turned off.
(1) Fully open the window.
(2) Set an approximately 12 cm (4.72 in) thick block of

expanded polystyrene or the like near the window
fully closed position.
*1
Thick block
(3) Operate the auto up or manual up function to check that the power window goes down after
the thick block is caught between the window and door frame, and stops when the opening
reaches approximately 200 mm (7.87 in.).
HINT:
The power window moves down approximately 50 mm (1.97 in.). However, when the opening does not
reach 200 mm (7.87 in.), the power window continues to go down until the opening reaches 200 mm
(7.87 in.) or until approximately 10 seconds elapse.
(4) While the power window is moving down, check that the door glass cannot be raised when the
power window switch is used.
8. INSPECT INDEX FUNCTION

(a) Open the driver side door or front passenger side door, and then check that the window glass
3/4
8/6/12
whose door has just been opened descends approximately 20 mm (0.787 in.) automatically from
the fully closed position.
(b) Close the driver side door or front passenger side door, and then check that the window glass
whose door is just closed ascends automatically to the fully closed position.
HINT:
The index control is not performed if the window glass opened more than approximately 20 mm
(0.787 in.) from the fully-closed position. However, considering the backlash on the regulator, if the
window opened more than approximately 20 mm (0.787 in.) because of the index control that caused
the window glass to descend and there is no interruption from any other operation, then the window
ascends automatically.
9. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH LED ILLUMINATION

(a) Check the LED illumination (power window regulator master switch assembly).
(1) Check that the LEDs located on the power window regulator master switch assembly illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to ON.
(b) Check the LED illumination (power window regulator switch assembly).
(1) Check that the LEDs located on the power window regulator switch assembly illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to ON.
4/4
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000363I03UX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000363I03UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000363I03UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003F4W00LX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
NOTICE:
The power window control system uses a LIN communication system. Inspect the communication
function by following How to Proceed with Troubleshooting
. Troubleshoot the power
window control system after confirming that the communication system is functioning properly.
The power window control system prohibits the AUTO UP/DOWN function when the jam protection
function malfunctions. Therefore, troubleshoot the power window control system after confirming
that no diagnostic codes are displayed.
assembly and power window regulator motor assembly is replaced, the power window control
system must be initialized
.
be closed*1.
succession*2.
The jam protection function may operate unexpectedly even when the power window control
system is normal, due to detection of a different operation learned value when the door glass
moving speed changes sharply under any of the following conditions:
a. A power window is opened or closed while the vehicle is being driven on a rough road.
b. A power window is opened or closed while the door is being opened or closed.
c. A sharp voltage change.
Do not disconnect the battery while the ignition switch is ON. Otherwise, the power window
system may have a malfunction.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003F4W00LX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011UY08NX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Power Window Control System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Check window lock switch

Remote Up / Down Function does not Operate
Power window regulator

master switch assembly
Driver Side Power Window does not Operate with Power Window
Master Switch
Refer to troubleshooting
Front Passenger Side Power Window does not Operate with Front
Passenger Side Power Window Switch
Driver Side Power Window Auto Up / Down Function does not

Operate with Power Window Master Switch
Front Passenger Side Power Window Auto Up / Down Function

does not Operate with Power Window Master Switch
Key-off Operation Function Operates even if Operating Conditions

are not Satisfied
Auto Up Operation does not Fully Close Power Window (Jam

Protection Function is Activated)
Auto Down Operation does not Fully Open Power Window (Jam
Protection Function is Activated)
Driver Side Index Function does not Operate
Front Passenger Side Index Function does not Operate
Power Window do not Operate Using All Window Switch
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011UY08NX.html?sisuffix=ff&


gateway ECU)
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: Remote Up / Down Function does not Opera
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010ZI05EX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: Remote Up / Down Function does not
Operate (2013 FR-S)
Remote Up / Down Function does not Operate
DESCRIPTION
With the ignition switch ON, the power window regulator master switch assembly transmits remote
operation signals to each power window regulator switch assembly. Then, the power window regulator
switch assembly drives each power window regulator motor assembly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTCs B2312 and B2315
NOTICE:
.
be closed*1.
succession*2.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY (WINDOW LOCK

SWITCH)
(a) Turn the window lock switch off and operate the switches on the power window regulator
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010ZI05EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
master switch assembly. Check that the remote UP/DOWN function operates normally.
OK:
Remote UP/DOWN function operates normally.
NG

OK
2.

Master Switch
TESTER
DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE

P Door P/W
Remote
Auto SW
window auto switch signal from

window auto up/down switch from

operated
P Door P/W
Remote Up
SW
window manual up signal from


window manual up switch from driver
side operated
operated
P Door P/W
Remote

Down SW
driver side /OFF or ON

operated
OK:
2/3
8/6/12
The Techstream display changes normally when master switch is operated.
NG

OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH

ASSEMBLY - POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the F6 power window regulator switch assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-2 (UART) - F6-2 (UART)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
E8-2 (UART) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
3/3
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011UZ075X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) The power window control system controls the power window operation using the power window
regulator motors. The main controls of this system are the power window regulator master switch
assembly, which is mounted on the driver side door, and the power window regulator switch,
which is mounted on the front passenger side door. Operating a window switch results in electrical
power being transmitted to the corresponding power window regulator motor.

The power window control system consists of the following components:
COMPONENT
OUTLINE
Power Window Regulator

Master Switch Assembly
Controls power window operation for driver side and front

passenger side doors.
When lock switch is set to lock position, window operation will
be possible only for driver side power window.

Switch Assembly
Located on front passenger side door.

Switch control window operation for front passenger side
window.

Motor Assembly
Receives switch signals and changes signals into motor

activation. As a result, the window position changes.
Uses Hall-IC in regulator motor with ECU to detect window
position and jamming.
3. SYSTEM FUNCTION
The power window control system has the following functions:
FUNCTION
Manual
up-anddown
function
OUTLINE
Function that causes the window to go up while the power window switch is being pulled
halfway and to go down while pushed halfway. The window stops as soon as the switch is
released.
Auto upFunction that enables windows of driver door to be fully opened or closed by one full pull or
and-down push of the power window regulator master switch assembly and power window regulator
function
switch assembly.
Function that disables power window regulator switch assembly (for Front
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011UZ075X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
Window
lock
function
passenger side) operations when the window lock switch is pressed.

The power window regulator switch assembly (for Front passenger side) can be
operated when the window lock switch is pressed again.
Jam
Function that automatically stops power window and moves it downward if a foreign object
protection
gets jammed in door window during auto up and manual up operation.
function
Remote
control
function
Key-off
operation
function
Function that allows the power window regulator master switch assembly to control
manual up-and-down operations of the front passenger side door window.
Function that makes it possible to operate all door power windows for
approximately 45 sec. after the ignition switch is turned off when the driver side
door or front passenger side door has not been opened.
If 45 sec. have passed or a front door is opened while the manual function is
operating, the window operation stops (Driver door and front passenger side
door).
Open the driver or front passenger side door, and then check that the window
glass whose door is just opened descends approximately 20 mm (0.787 in.)
Index
function
automatically from the fully closed position.

Close the driver door or front passenger side door, and then check that the
window glass whose door has just been closed ascends automatically to the fully
closed position.
Function that allows diagnosis of the power window control system if the power window
Diagnosis
ECU (built into the power window regulator motor assembly) detects a malfunction in the
system. If a malfunction is detected, the power window ECU will illuminate the LED on the
power window regulator master switch assembly to inform the driver of the malfunction.
Fail-safe
A fail-safe function to disable a part of power window functions if the pulse sensor in the
power window motor has a malfunction (Driver door).
Auto up-and-down function and remote control function are disabled (Driver door).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011UZ075X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000363J048X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
Communication Table
TRANSMITTING ECU
RECEIVING ECU
SIGNAL
COMMUNICATION
METHOD
Power window auto up
motor assembly
and down signal
Power window remote
switch assembly
up and down signal
communication

motor assembly
Power window auto up

and down signal
Local
communication
Gateway ECU)
Power window
operation permission


switch assembly
Local
communication
Local
LIN
signal
2/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000133907UX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
HINT:
Measure the values on the wire harness side with the connector disconnected.
TESTER CONNECTION
WIRING COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
E8-12 (+B) - E8-5 (GND)
SB - B
Power supply
Always
11 to 14 V
E8-5 (GND) - Body

ground
B - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
(c) Reconnect the E8 power window regulator master switch assembly connector.
TESTER
WIRING
TERMINAL
CONNECTION COLOR DESCRIPTION
E8-6 (WU) E8-5 (GND)
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON, power window regulator

Power
master switch assembly off
W-B - B window motor
UP output
master switch assembly UP (Manual operation)
Ignition switch ON, driver side door power window
fully open
E8-6 (WU) -
Power
window motor moving, power window regulator master switch
W-B - B
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000133907UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
1/6
8/6/12
E8-5 (GND)
E8-7 (WD) E8-5 (GND)
E8-7 (WD) E8-5 (GND)
AUTO UP
output
LG - B
LG - B
assembly fully pulled UP (Automatic operation)

fully closed
11 to 14 V

11 to 14 V
Power
master switch assembly off
window motor
DOWN output Ignition switch ON, power window regulator
Below 1 V
master switch assembly DOWN (Manual operation)
Power
window motor
AUTO DOWN
output

fully open
11 to 14 V

moving, power window regulator master switch
assembly fully pushed DOWN (Automatic
operation)
Below 1 V

fully closed
11 to 14 V
If the result is not as specified, the power window regulator master switch assembly may have a
malfunction.
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the F6 power window regulator switch assembly connector.
HINT:
TESTER CONNECTION
WIRING COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
F6-12 (+B) - F6-5 (GND)
SB - B
Power supply
Always
11 to 14 V
F6-5 (GND) - Body

ground
B - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Bellow 1 V
(c) Reconnect the F6 power window regulator switch assembly connector.
2/6
8/6/12
TESTER
WIRING
TERMINAL
F6-6 (WU) F6-5 (GND)
Power
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON, power window regulator switch

11 to 14 V
assembly off
W-B - B window motor

UP output
Bellow 1 V
assembly UP (Manual operation)
Ignition switch ON, front passenger side door
power window fully open
Power
F6-6 (WU) F6-5 (GND)
LG - B

assembly off
F6-5 (GND)
LG - B
11 to 14 V
11 to 14 V
window motor
DOWN output Ignition switch ON, power window regulator switch Bellow 1 V
assembly DOWN (Manual operation)
power window fully open
F6-7 (WD) -
Bellow 1 V
operation)
power window fully closed
Power
11 to 14 V
window motor power window moving, power window regulator

W-B - B
AUTO UP
switch assembly fully pulled UP (Automatic
output
F6-7 (WD) F6-5 (GND)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Power
window motor power window moving, power window regulator
AUTO DOWN
output
switch assembly fully pulled DOWN (Automatic

operation)
power window fully closed
11 to 14 V
Bellow 1 V
11 to 14 V
If the result is not as specified, the power window regulator switch assembly may have a
malfunction.
3. CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the E5 power window regulator motor assembly (for driver side) connector.
3/6
8/6/12
HINT:
TESTER CONNECTION
WIRING COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
E5-5 (VCC) - E5-4 (SGD)
W -R
Power supply
Always
11 to 14 V
E5-4 (SGD) - Body
R - Body
ground
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
(c) Reconnect the E5 power window regulator motor assembly (for driver side) connector.
TESTER
WIRING
TERMINAL
Power
E5-1 (WU) E5-4 (SGD)
W-B - R
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON, power window regulator master

switch assembly off
motor UP
input

Below 1 V
switch assembly UP (Manual operation)
fully open
Power
window
W-B - R
motor AUTO
UP input
E5-4 (SGD)
LG - R
LG - R
11 to 14 V
switch assembly off
motor DOWN
input

Below 1 V
switch assembly DOWN (Manual operation)
Power
E5-4 (SGD)
11 to 14 V
window

fully open
E5-3 (WD) -
Below 1 V
assembly fully pulled UP (Automatic operation)
fully closed
Power
11 to 14 V
E5-3 (WD) -
11 to 14 V
window
E5-1 (WU) E5-4 (SGD)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
window
motor AUTO
UP input
11 to 14 V

Below 1 V
assembly fully pulled DOWN (Automatic operation)

fully closed
11 to 14 V
If the result is not as specified, the power window regulator motor assembly (for driver side) may
have a malfunction.
4/6
8/6/12
4. CHECK MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU) AND INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
5/6
8/6/12
assembly.
(b) Measure the resistance and voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
MB-1 (BECU) - Body

ground
MB-8 (IG) - Body

ground
WIRING COLOR
None - Body
ground
None - Body
ground
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION

supply
CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch
ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch
off
Ignition switch
MB-9 (ACC) - Body
None - Body
ground
ground
ACC power supply
ACC
Ignition switch
off
MB-11 (GND) - Body
None - Body
ground
ground
MB-32 (+B) - Body
None - Body
ground
ground
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
Always
11 to 14 V
(c) Reinstall the main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
(d) Measure the voltage of the wire harness side connectors.
TESTER
CONNECTION
WIRING
COLOR
CONDITION
Front door RH
3B-13 - Body
ground
GR - Body
ground
Front door courtesy light switch

RH input
open
Front door RH
closed
Front door LH
3A-28 - Body
ground
V - Body
ground
Front door courtesy light switch

LH input
open
Front door LH
closed
D5-4 - Body
LG - Body
ground
ground
LIN communication signal
Ignition switch
ON
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Pulse generation
6/6
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002I2P03FX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002I2P03FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002AC80CAX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 6 claws and install the power window

regulator master switch assembly.
ARMREST BASE PANEL
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002AC80CAX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002AC90C1X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE DOOR ARMREST COVER LH
3. REMOVE FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
ARMREST BASE PANEL
5. REMOVE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

tape, disengage the 6 claws and remove the power
window regulator master switch assembly.
*1
Protective Tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002AC90C1X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002YEK042X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002YEK042X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002R1L066X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Check the operation of the power window regulator

motor assembly RH.
NOTICE:
Do not apply positive (+) battery voltage to any
terminals other than terminal 1 or 3 to avoid damaging
the pulse sensor inside the motor.
(1) Apply battery voltage to the power window regulator

motor assembly RH and check the operation of the
power window regulator motor assembly RH.
(b) Check that the motor gear rotates smoothly as follows:

Standard:
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1.
2.
Battery positive (+) Terminal 3 (WD)

Battery negative (-) Terminals 1 (WU)
Motor gear rotates clockwise
1.
2.
Battery positive (+) Terminal 1 (WU)

Battery negative (-) Terminals 3 (WD)
Motor gear rotates counterclockwise
*1
Motor Gear
*a
Clockwise
*b
Counterclockwise
*c

(Power Window Regulator Motor Assembly RH)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002R1L066X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
If the result is not as specified, replace the power window regulator motor assembly RH.
CAUTION:
Reset the power window regulator motor (initialize the pulse sensor) after installing the power
window regulator motor and regulator assembly onto the door.
2. INSPECT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Check the operation of the power window regulator

motor assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Do not apply positive (+) battery voltage to any
terminals other than terminal 1 or 3 to avoid damaging
the pulse sensor inside the motor.
(1) Apply battery voltage to the power window regulator

motor assembly LH and check the operation of the
power window regulator motor assembly LH.
(b) Check that the motor gear rotates smoothly as follows:

Standard:
1.
2.
Battery positive (+) Terminal 3 (WD)

Battery negative (-) Terminals 1 (WU)
1.
Battery positive (+) Terminal 1 (WU)
2.
Battery negative (-) Terminals 3 (WD)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Motor gear rotates counterclockwise
Motor gear rotates clockwise
*1
Motor Gear
*a
Counterclockwise
*b
Clockwise
*c

(Power Window Regulator Motor Assembly LH)
If the result is not as specified, replace the power window regulator motor assembly LH.
2/3
8/6/12
CAUTION:
Reset the power window regulator motor (initialize the pulse sensor) after installing the power
window regulator motor and regulator assembly onto the door.
3/3
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002YEJ053X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a T25 "TORX" socket wrench, install the power window regulator motor assembly with the 3
screws.
2. INSTALL FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the front door glass sub-assembly
(b) Adjust the front door glass sub-assembly

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002YEJ053X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002YEL04ZX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

9. REMOVE FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
10. REMOVE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a T25 "TORX" socket wrench, remove the 3 screws

and the power window regulator motor assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002YEL04ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: QUARTER WINDOW GLASS: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000038Z502HX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: QUARTER WINDOW GLASS: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038Z502HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: QUARTER WINDOW GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000352K08YX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: QUARTER WINDOW GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. CLEAN QUARTER WINDOW ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Clean the outer edges of the quarter window assembly

with a non-residue solvent.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the glass surface after cleaning it.
Be careful not to damage the glass or clips.
2. INSTALL QUARTER WINDOW GLASS ADHESIVE DAM

(a) Install the double-sided tape to the quarter window glass
moulding, as shown in the illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
8.9 mm (0.3504 in.)
8.0 mm (0.3150 in.)
9.2 mm (0.3622 in.)
7.8 mm (0.3070 in.)
*1
Double-sided Tape
(b) Using a brush or a sponge, apply primer (3M N-200) to the quarter window glass adhesive dam
attachment surface of the quarter window assembly LH.
(c) Install the new quarter window glass adhesive dam, applying double-sided tape all the way
around the glass except where the dam is installed, as shown in the illustration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000352K08YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
13.0 mm (0.5118 in.)
72.5 mm (2.8543 in.)
13.0 mm (0.5118 in.)
62.3 mm (2.4528 in.)
23.4 mm (0.9213 in.)
123.8 mm (4.874 in.)
*1
Quarter Window Glass Adhesive Dam
*a
Back Side
HINT:
If an area other than that specified is coated by accident, wipe off the primer with a non-residue
solvent before it dries.
NOTICE:
Allow the primer to dry for 3 minutes or more.
Throw away any leftover primer.
3. INSTALL QUARTER WINDOW ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Using a brush, coat the installation surface on the vehicle body with Primer (sunstar #435-40).
2/7
8/6/12
*a
NG
*b
OK
Primer (sanstar #435-40)
Adhesive
NOTICE:
Do not coat the adhesive with Primer (sunstar #435-40).
HINT:
If an area other than that specified is coated by accident, wipe off the primer with a clean piece of
(b) Using a brush or a sponge, coat the application area of adhesive with Primer (3M N-200).
Standard Dimension:
3/7
8/6/12
AREA
DIMENSION
8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
22.3 mm (0.878 in.)
10.1 mm (0.398 in.)
13.9 mm (0.547 in.)
*a
Back Side
Primer (3M N-200)
NOTICE:
HINT:
(c) Apply adhesive to the quarter window assembly LH.

Adhesive:
Toyota Genuine Windshield Glass Adhesive or equivalent
(1) Cut off the tip of the cartridge nozzle, as shown in the
illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
12.0 mm (0.472 in.)
8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
(2) Load the sealer gun with cartridge.

(3) Apply adhesive to the quarter window assembly as shown in the illustration.
4/7
8/6/12
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
12.0 mm (0.4724 in.)
5.6 mm (0.2205 in.)
26.3 mm (1.0354 in.)
50.0 mm (1.9685 in.)
*a
Back Side
Adhesive
HINT:
Apply adhesive onto the ceramic notches.
(d) Install the quarter window assembly LH to the vehicle body (When reusing the quarter window
assembly LH).
(1) Install the butyl tape (If the clips are broken).
(2) Position the quarter window assembly LH so that the

matchmarks are aligned, and press it in gently along
the rim.
5/7
8/6/12
*a
Matchmark
(3) Lightly press the front surface of the windshield glass to ensure that the windshield glass is
securely fit to the vehicle body.
HINT:
Press the glass with a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) or more.
(e) Install the quarter window assembly (When using a new quarter window assembly LH).
(1) Engage the 3 clips to install the quarter window assembly LH.
NOTICE:
HINT:
Press the glass with a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) or more.
(f) Hold the quarter window assembly LH in place securely with protective tape or equivalent until the
adhesive hardens.
NOTICE:
Check that the clips are attached to the body correctly.
Check the clearance between the body and the glass.
(g) Lightly press the outer surface of the glass to ensure that the glass is securely fit to the vehicle
body.
(h) Using a scraper, remove any excess or protruding

adhesive.
HINT:
Apply adhesive onto the glass rim.
(i) Hold the quarter window assembly LH using protective tape until the applied adhesive becomes
hard.

6/7
8/6/12

5. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR GARNISH LH

6. INSTALL REAR QUARTER TRIM FRONT GARNISH LH
11. INSTALL ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING LH
(a) Install the 7 screws and the roof drip side finish moulding LH.
12. INSTALL NO.2 FRONT DOOR WEATHERSTRIP LH

(a) Engage the 4 clips and install the new No.2 front door weatherstrip LH.

15. CONNECT FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH
7/7
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: QUARTER WINDOW GLASS: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000352M08SX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: QUARTER WINDOW GLASS: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
The quarter window glass assembly can be reused. When installing the window, if any of the clips
on the quarter window glass are broken, butyl tape can be used to support the glass until the
applied adhesive hardens.
When using butyl tape to temporarily secure the window, make sure that the butyl tape is not
applied exactly at the original clip location. If the butyl tape is applied exactly at the clip location, it
will cause the window to protrude

2. DISCONNECT FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

HINT:
5. REMOVE NO.2 FRONT DOOR WEATHERSTRIP LH
(a) Disengage the 4 clips and remove the No.2 front door
weatherstrip LH.
6. REMOVE ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING LH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000352M08SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 7 screws and the roof drip side finish
moulding LH.
7. DISCONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER LH

11. REMOVE REAR QUARTER TRIM FRONT GARNISH LH
12. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR GARNISH LH
13. REMOVE QUARTER WINDOW ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Apply protective tape to the outer surface of the vehicle

body to prevent scratches.
*1
Protective Tape
(b) When reusing the quarter window assembly LH.
(1) Place matchmarks on the quarter window assembly LH

and vehicle body on the locations indicated in the
illustration.
*a
Matchmark
(c) Pass a piano wire between the vehicle body and quarter
window assembly LH from the interior, as shown in the
illustration.
2/5
8/6/12
*1
Piano Wire
HINT:
Ensure not to interfere with the clips when passing the piano
wire.
(d) Tie both wire ends to wooden blocks or similar objects that can serve as handles.
NOTICE:
When separating the quarter window assembly LH from the vehicle, be careful not to damage
the paint or interior and exterior ornaments.
(e) Cut off the adhesive by pulling the piano wire around the quarter window assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Leave as much adhesive on the vehicle body as possible when cutting through the adhesive.
(f) Disengage the 3 clips.
(g) Using suction cups, remove the double-sided tape and quarter window assembly LH.
*1
Double-side Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to drop the quarter window assembly LH.
14. REMOVE QUARTER WINDOW GLASS ADHESIVE DAM

(a) When reusing the quarter window assembly LH.
(1) Using a scraper, remove the quarter window glass
adhesive dam.
3/5
8/6/12
*1
Quarter Window Glass Adhesive Dam
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the quarter window assembly
LH.
Be sure to replace the quarter window glass adhesive
dam with a new one.
(2) Remove the double-sided tape from the quarter
window moulding.

(a) Clean and shape the contact surface of the vehicle body.
(1) Using a knife, cut away any rough adhesive on the contact surface of the vehicle body to
ensure the appropriate surface shape.
NOTICE:
HINT:
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
*1
Body
Adhesive
(2) Clean the contact surface of the vehicle body with a piece of cloth saturated with cleaner.
HINT:
4/5
8/6/12
5/5
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WYH06EX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT RR DEF RELAY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
3-5
Battery voltage applied between

terminals
between terminals 1 and 2
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1
10 k or
higher
*a

( RR DEF Relay)
If the result is not as specified, replace the RR DEF relay.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WYH06EX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004X5F004X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
1. CUSTOMIZE WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
(a) Customizing using the Techstream
(4) Enter the following menus: Customize Setting / Air Conditioner.
Air Conditioner
TESTER
DISPLAY
Rear
Defogger
DEFAULT
Normal
CONTENT
Drive mode setting for rear window

defogger operation
SETTING
Normal*
RELEVANT ECU

Gateway ECU)
*: Rear defogger operation turned off after approximately 15 minutes
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004X5F004X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZCD02VX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / (desired system) / Data List.
Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
Rear Defogger
Status of rear defogger operation /

Normal
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Normal: Turn off after

approximately 15 minutes
Rear Defogger Status of rear defogger SW

SW
Rear Defogger Status of rear defogger output

Output
Air Conditioner
TESTER DISPLAY
Defogger Relay
(Rear)
Status of rear defogger relay output operation /

ON or OFF
NORMAL
CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZCD02VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

(e) According to the display on the Techstream, perform the Active Test.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
Rear Defogger
TEST PART
DEF relay
CONTROL RANGE
ON/OFF
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZCD02VX.html?sisuffix=ff
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
-
2/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (20
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZC703UX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use these procedures to troubleshoot the window defogger system.
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Go to step 6
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZC703UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (20
4.
(b) Data List/Active Test
NEXT
5.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
6.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZC703UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003XLI00BX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003XLI00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003XLI00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003XLK00CX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Window Defogger System

SYMPTOM
Rear window defogger system does not

operate
Rear window defogger does not operate

(indicator ON)
Rear window defogger does not operate

(indicator OFF)
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
RR DEF relay
RR DEF fuse
Back door glass (defogger wire)
HEATER fuse
Heater control sub-assembly (rear window

defogger switch)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003XLK00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: Rear Window Defogger System does not Operate
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002LI803CX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: Rear Window Defogger System does not
Operate (2013 FR-S)
Rear Window Defogger System does not Operate
DESCRIPTION
When the ignition is ON, operating the rear window defogger switch activates the rear window defogger.
The rear window defogger control is performed by the main body ECU (network gateway computer).
When the main body ECU (network gateway computer) receives an on signal from the rear window
defogger switch, it operates the RR DEF relay for 15 minutes. Also, when the main body ECU (network
gateway computer) receives an off signal from the rear window defogger switch within 15 minutes, it
stops operation of the RR DEF relay.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002LI803CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (RR DEF RELAY)

(d) Enter the following menus: Body / Main Body / Active Test.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
Rear Defogger
TEST PART
RR DEF relay
CONTROL RANGE
OFF or ON
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
-
OK:
The window defogger system operates normally.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION

SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
2.
INSPECT RR DEF RELAY
(a) Remove the RR DEF relay from the engine room relay block.
(b) Inspect the RR DEF relay
2/6
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE RELAY (RR DEF)
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (RR DEF RELAY - BATTERY)
(a) Remove the RR DEF relay from the engine room relay
block assembly.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
3 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*1
*2
RR DEF Relay
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3/6
8/6/12
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (RR DEF RELAY - MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
GATEWAY ECU))
(a) Remove the RR DEF relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
(b) Disconnect the A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
2 - A73-24
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
2 - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
NG
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k higher

CONNECTOR
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU) HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the D22 heater control sub-assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
D6-5 - D22-2 (RDEF+)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
D6-5 - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
4/6
8/6/12
NG
CONNECTOR
OK
6.
INSPECT HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the heater control sub-assembly
(b) Inspect the heater control sub-assembly
NG
REPLACE HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
OK
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BACK WINDOW GLASS (REAR WINDOW

DEFOGGER) - RR DEF RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the G10 and H29 rear window defogger connector.
(b) Remove the RR DEF relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G10-1 - 5
Always
Below 1
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H29-1 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
G10-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
5/6
8/6/12
OK
REPAIR OR REPLACE BACK WINDOW GLASS

(REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER)
6/6
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZCB030X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL
(a) The defogger system's thin heater wires are attached to the rear window and defog the rear
window surface quickly. The indicator light illuminates while the system is operating.

COMPONENT
OUTLINE
RR DEF relay
Receives rear window defogger activation request signals from main body ECU (network
gateway ECU) and supplies power to rear window defogger
Rear window
Receives power from RR DEF relay and heats defogger wire
defogger
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZCB030X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003XLJ00CX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003XLJ00CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZC902LX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZC902LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Remove the main body ECU (network gateway ECU).

(c) Measure the voltage and resistance of the wire harness side connector.
2/4
8/6/12
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING COLOR
(SYMBOL)
A73-24 - Body ground
TERMINAL
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
DESCRIPTION
W - Body
ground
CONDITION
Ignition switch
ON
Ignition power supply
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch
Below 1 V
off
2. CHECK HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for

Manual Air Conditioning System)
(a) Disconnect the D22 heater control sub-assembly
connector.
(b) Measure the voltage and resistance of the wire harness
side connector.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRING
TERMINAL
CONDITION SPECIFIED
COLOR DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
(SYMBOL)
D22-2
(RDEF+) D22-4
Ignition
W - B-Y
power supply
(RDEF-)
Ignition
switch off
D22-4
(RDEF-) Body
ground
Ignition
switch ON
B-Y Body
Ground
Always
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
Below 1
ground
If the result is not as specified, there may be a

malfunction on the wire harness side.
(c) Reconnect the D22 heater control sub-assembly
connector.
(d) Measure the voltage of the connector.
TERMINAL WIRING
NO.
TERMINAL
CONDITION
COLOR DESCRIPTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
(SYMBOL)
Ignition
switch ON,
rear window
D22-6
(IND+) D22-4
(RDEF-)
Rear window
R-V - B-
defogger
signal
11 to 14 V
defogger
switch OFF
Ignition
3/4
8/6/12
switch ON,
rear window
Below 1 V
defogger
switch ON
If the result is not as specified, the heater control
sub-assembly may have a malfunction.
4/4
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD GLASS: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002GAH02BX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD GLASS: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002GAH02BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MKQ070X
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD GLASS: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 1 WINDSHIELD GLASS STOPPER

(1) Apply primer (Sunstar #435-70) to the glass attachment surface of the new No. 1 windshield
glass stopper.
(2) Apply primer (Sunstar #435-40) to the No. 1 windshield glass stopper attachment surface of
the windshield glass.
Primer
Adhesive
NOTICE:
After applying the primer for the windshield glass stopper, and dry for at least 10 minute.
(3) After drying the primer, apply adhesive (Sunstar # 560) to the No. 1 windshield glass stopper
attachment surface.
(4) Install the No. 1 windshield glass stopper to the
windshield glass, as shown in the illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
16.3 mm (0.6417 in.)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MKQ070X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/11
8/6/12
17.3 mm (0.6811 in.)
*1
Windshield Glass
*a
Windshield Glass Stopper
2. INSTALL NO. 2 WINDSHIELD GLASS STOPPER

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 1 windshield glass stopper.
3. INSTALL WINDSHIELD OUTSIDE MOULDING

(a) Using a brush, apply primer (sunstar GP402) to the
windshield outside moulding attachment surface of the
windshield glass and the windshield glass outer ends.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
7.0 mm (0.2760 in.)
*1
Windshield Glass
*a
Back Side
*b
Application Area
NOTICE:
Do not apply primer out of the ceramic areas.
(b) After drying the primer, match the new windshield outside moulding to both edges of the
windshield glass.
(c) Using a roller, crimp the windshield outside moulding in

the direction of the arrows as shown in the illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
2/11
8/6/12
7.3 mm (0.2874 in.)
Standard:
50 N/100 mm (5.1 kgf/3.94 in, 11.2 lbf/3.94 in)
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Install the windshield outside moulding firmly so that it
does not sag
(d) Using a roller, crimp the windshield outside moulding in

the direction of the arrows, as shown in the illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
6.8 mm (0.2677 in.)
Standard:
50 N/100 mm (5.1 kgf/3.94 in, 11.2 lbf/3.94 in)
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Install the windshield outside moulding firmly so that it
does not sag.
4. INSTALL UPPER WINDSHIELD GLASS SEAL

(a) Remove the release paper from the upper windshield glass seal.
HINT:
After removing the release paper, keep the exposed adhesive free from foreign matter.
(b) install the upper windshield glass seal to the windshield outside moulding, as shown in the
illustration.
3/11
8/6/12
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
165 mm (6.4961 in.)
3.0 mm (0.1181 in.)
5.7 mm (0.2244 in.)
5.0 mm (0.1969 in.)
0 to 0.5mm (0 to 0.0197in.)
*1
Windshield Outside Moulding
*a
Back Side
Upper Windshield Glass Seal
HINT:
5. INSTALL WINDOW GLASS ADHESIVE DAM

(a) Install the new window glass adhesive dam onto the windshield glass, as shown in the
illustration.
4/11
8/6/12
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
13.0 mm (0.5118 in.)
15.3 mm (0.6024 in.)
0 to 3.0 mm (0 to 0.1181 in.)
14.8 mm (0.5827 in.)
*1
Ceramic Notch
*a
Back Side
*2
-
Window Glass Adhesive Dam

-
HINT:
6. INSTALL LOWER WINDSHIELD GLASS SEAL

(a) Install the new lower windshield glass seal onto the windshield glass, as shown in the illustration.
5/11
8/6/12
Standard Dimension:
AREA
a
DIMENSION
28.0 mm (1.1024 in.)
*1
Ceramic Notch
*2
Lower Windshield Glass Seal
*3
*a
Back Side
HINT:
7. INSTALL WINDSHIELD GLASS

(a) Position the windshield glass.
NOTICE:
Before installing the windshield glass, wait until the adhesive hardens completely.
HINT:
For the hardening time, follow the manufacturer's instruction manual.
(1) Using suction cups, place the windshield glass in the correct position.
(2) Check that the whole contact surface of the

windshield rim is perfectly even.
Standard Dimension:
6/11
8/6/12
AREA
DIMENSION
4.0 mm (0.1575 in.)
5.0 mm (0.1969 in.)
*1
Windshield Glass
*2
Body
(3) Align the matchmarks on the windshield glass and

vehicle body.
*a
Matchmark
NOTICE:
Check that the windshield glass stopper are attached to
the vehicle body correctly.
(4) Remove the windshield glass.

(b) Using a brush, coat the installation surface on the vehicle body with Primer.
Sunstar:
Enclosed with penguin seal #580 super.
Yokohama:
M-300 or equivalent
*a
NG
*b
OK
7/11
8/6/12
Primer
Adhesive
NOTICE:
Do not coat the adhesive with Primer.
HINT:
(c) Using a brush or sponge, coat the application area of adhesive with Primer.
Sunstar:
Enclosed with penguin seal #580 super.
Yokohama:
M-300 or equivalent
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
*a
Back Side
Primer
8/11
8/6/12
NOTICE:
HINT:
(d) Apply adhesive to the glass.
Adhesive:
Sunstar penguin seal #580 super.
(1) Cut off the tip of the cartridge nozzle as shown in the
illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
9.0 mm (0.354 in.)
8.0 mm (0.315 in.)
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
(2) Load the sealer gun with cartridge.

(3) Apply adhesive to the windshield glass, as shown in the illustration.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
8.0 mm (0.3150 in.)
9.0 mm (0.3543 in.)
9/11
8/6/12
11.3 mm (0.4449 in.)
22.0 mm (0.8661 in.)
30.0 mm (1.1811 in.)
10.8 mm (0.4252 in.)
*a
Back Side
Adhesive
HINT:
Apply adhesive keep to the window glass adhesive dam.
(e) Apply adhesive tape, etc. to the windshield glass and the
body panel section, and use a pen to apply matching
marks for use when installing (when using the new
windshield glass).
*a
Matchmark
(1) Using suction cups, position the windshield glass so
that the matchmarks are aligned, and press it in
gently along the rim.
NOTICE:
Check that the windshield glass stopper are attached to
the vehicle body correctly.
Check the clearance between the vehicle body and
windshield glass.
After the primer on the body is dried (about 10 minutes),
install the windshield glass.
(2) Lightly press the front surface of the windshield glass
to ensure that the windshield glass is securely fit to
the vehicle body.
HINT:
Press the glass with a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22.0 lbf) or more.
(3) Using a scraper, remove any excess or protruding

adhesive.
HINT:
10/11
8/6/12
Apply adhesive onto the windshield glass rim.
(4) Hold the windshield glass using protective tape until

the applied adhesive becomes hard.
HINT:
Follow the instructions in the owner's manuals provided by
each adhesive manufacturer regarding the minimum required
drying time after applying adhesive, and the time required
before driving.

10. INSTALL COWL VENTILATOR LOUVER

11. INSTALL FRONT FENDER TO COWL SIDE SEAL RH
12. INSTALL FRONT FENDER TO COWL SIDE SEAL LH
HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the RH side.
13. INSTALL WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ASSEMBLY LH

14. INSTALL WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ASSEMBLY RH
15. INSTALL WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM COVER
11/11
8/6/12
WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD GLASS: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000MKS06XX
Title: WINDOW / GLASS: WINDSHIELD GLASS: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM COVER
2. REMOVE WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ASSEMBLY LH
3. REMOVE WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ASSEMBLY RH
4. REMOVE FRONT FENDER TO COWL SIDE SEAL RH
5. REMOVE FRONT FENDER TO COWL SIDE SEAL LH
HINT:
6. REMOVE COWL VENTILATOR LOUVER

HINT:
It is not necessary to completely remove the roof headlining. Slightly lower the front section of the
roof headlining so that the windshield glass can be removed in a later step. Refer to the following
procedures
8. REMOVE WINDSHIELD GLASS

(a) Apply protective tape to the installation position of the
windshield glass on the vehicle body.
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
Apply protective tape to the area around installation surface
to prevent it from being scratched.
(b) Using a knife, cut off the windshield outside moulding, as

*1
Body
*2
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000MKS06XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
*3
Windshield Glass
*a
Cut
CAUTION:
Do not damage the vehicle body with the knife.

If the vehicle body is damaged, repair the damaged
portion by applying an anti-rust coating after removing
the windshield glass.
(c) Place matchmarks on the windshield glass and vehicle

body on the locations indicated in the illustration.
*a
Matchmark
HINT:
Matchmarks are not necessary if the windshield glass is not
going to be reused.
(d) Pass a piano wire between the vehicle body and

windshield glass from the interior, as shown in the
illustration.
*1
Wooden Block
*2
Plastic Sheet
*3
*4
Piano Wire
(e) Tie both wire ends to wooden blocks or similar objects that can serve as handles.
(f) Cut off the adhesive by pulling the piano wire around the windshield glass.
NOTICE:
When separating the windshield glass, be careful not to damage the paint or interior and exterior
ornaments.
2/6
8/6/12
To prevent the safety pad from being scratched when removing the windshield glass, place a
plastic sheet between the piano wire and safety pad.
Do not damage the windshield glass.
(g) Using suction cups, disengage the windshield glass

stopper and remove the windshield glass.
*1
NOTICE:
There are windshield glass stopper on the windshield
glass, as shown in the illustration. Be careful not to
damage the windshield glass stopper when cutting off the
adhesive.
To prevent the windshield glass from dropping when
performing this operation, be sure to hold the windshield
glass using suction cups.
9. REMOVE WINDOW GLASS ADHESIVE DAM

(1) Using a scraper, remove the window glass adhesive
dam.
*1
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the windshield glass.
Be sure to replace the window glass adhesive dam with a
new one.
10. REMOVE LOWER WINDSHIELD GLASS SEAL

(1) Using a scraper, remove the 2 lower windshield glass

seals.
3/6
8/6/12
*1
Lower Windshield Glass Seal
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Be sure to replace the lower windshield glass seal with a
new one.
11. REMOVE WINDSHIELD OUTSIDE MOULDING

(1) Using a scraper, remove the windshield outside
moulding with the upper windshield glass seal.
*1
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Be sure to replace the windshield outside moulding with a
new one.
12. REMOVE UPPER WINDSHIELD GLASS SEAL

NOTICE:
Be sure to replace the upper windshield glass seal with a new one.
13. REMOVE NO. 1 WINDSHIELD GLASS STOPPER

(1) Using a scraper, remove the No. 1 windshield glass
stopper.
*1
No. 1 Windshield Stopper
*2
No. 2 Windshield Stopper
*a
Back Side
NOTICE:
Be sure to replace the NO. 1windshield glass stopper with
a new one.
4/6
8/6/12
14. REMOVE NO. 2 WINDSHIELD GLASS STOPPER

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 1 windshield glass stopper.
15. CLEAN WINDSHIELD GLASS

(1) Using a scraper, remove the adhesive tape and

adhesive sticking to the windshield glass.
NOTICE:
(2) Clean the outer circumference of the windshield glass with a non-residue solvent.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the windshield glass surface after cleaning it.
Even if using a new windshield glass, clean the windshield glass with a non-residue solvent.

(a) Clean and shape the contact surfaces of the vehicle body.
(1) Using a knife, cut away excess adhesive on the contact surfaces of the vehicle body, as shown
NOTICE:
HINT:
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
5/6
8/6/12
2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
*1
Body
Adhesive
(2) Clean the contact surfaces of the vehicle body with a piece of cloth saturated with cleaner.
HINT:
6/6
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OV202DX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OV202DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VLO057X
Title: WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Ensure that fingers or articles of clothing do not get caught by moving parts when performing
this test.
1. INSPECT WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the LO operation.
OK:
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Battery positive (+) Terminal

5 (+1)
Motor operates at low speed

(LO)
Battery negative (-) Terminal
4 (E)
*a

(Windshield Wiper Motor Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the windshield
wiper motor assembly.
(b) Check the HI operation.

OK:
Battery positive (+) Terminal 3 (+2)
Battery negative (-) Terminal 4 (E)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Motor operates at high speed (HI)
If the result is not as specified, replace the windshield wiper motor assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VLO057X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OV1030X
Title: WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a T30 "TORX" socket wrench, install the windshield wiper motor assembly with the 2 bolts.
2. INSTALL FRONT WIPER CRANK SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Connect the windshield wiper motor assembly connector.
(c) Operate the wiper and stop the windshield wiper motor assembly at the automatic stop position.
(d) Turn the ignition switch off.
(e) Disconnect the windshield wiper motor assembly connector.
(f) Temporarily install the front wiper crank sub-assembly on the windshield wiper motor assembly
with the nut.
(g) Temporarily install the No. 1 rod on the crank arm pivot of the front wiper crank sub-assembly.
(h) Align the nut and crank arm pivot of the front wiper crank
sub-assembly with the No. 1 rod, as shown in the
illustration.
*1
No. 1 Rod
*2
Crank Arm Pivot
*3
Nut
(i) Tighten the front wiper crank sub-assembly with the nut.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OV1030X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
(j) Apply multemp SA grease to the crank arm pivot of the

front wiper crank sub-assembly.
(k) Connect the No. 1 rod to the crank arm pivot of the front
wiper crank sub-assembly.
3. INSTALL FRONT WIPER MOTOR AND LINK ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the grommet, as shown in the illustration.

*1
Grommet
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the windshield when installing
the front wiper motor and link assembly.
(b) Install the front wiper motor and link assembly with the 2 bolts.

(a) Engage the 15 guides to install the cowl ventilator louver, as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the 4 cowl top ventilator louver clips.
2/6
8/6/12
*1
Cowl Top Ventilator Louver Clips
(c) Install the 3 clips.

(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the clip and front fender to cowl side seal RH.

HINT:

(a) Operate the wiper and stop the windshield wiper motor at the automatic stop position.
3/6
8/6/12
(b) When reusing the windshield wiper arm and blade

assembly LH:
(1) Clean the wiper arm serrations to remove any burrs,
dirt, etc.
*1
Wiper Arm Serration
*2
Wire Brush
*3
Wiper Pivot Serration
NOTICE:
Do not grind down the wiper arm serrations.
(c) When reusing the windshield wiper link assembly:

(1) Clean the wiper pivot serrations with a wire brush.
(d) Install the windshield wiper arm and blade assembly LH

with the nut to the position, as shown in the illustration.
*1
Ceramic Dot
HINT:
Hold the wiper arm by hand while tightening the nut.
(e) Operate the front wipers while spraying washer fluid on the windshield glass. Make sure that the
front wipers function properly and there is no interference with the vehicle body.

4/6
8/6/12
(b) When reusing the windshield wiper arm and blade

assembly RH:
(1) Clean the wiper arm serrations to remove any burrs,
dirt, etc.
*1
Wiper Arm Serration
*2
Wire Brush
*3
Wiper Pivot Serration
NOTICE:
Do not grind down the wiper arm serrations.
(c) When reusing the windshield wiper link assembly:

(1) Clean the wiper pivot serrations with a wire brush.
(d) Install the windshield wiper arm and blade assembly RH

with the nut to the position, as shown in the illustration.
*1
Ceramic Dot
HINT:
Hold the wiper arm by hand while tightening the nut.
(a) Engage the claw to install the windshield wiper arm

cover.
5/6
8/6/12
HINT:
6/6
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UQH041X
Title: WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) for LH Side
(1) Operate the windshield wiper motor

assembly.
(2) Stop the windshield wiper motor assembly operation.

(3) Check the automatic stop (park) position.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
35.0 mm (1.378 in.)
OK:
The front wipers stop at the positions shown in the illustration.
*1
Ceramic Dot
*2
Cowl Panel End
HINT:
After the front wiper motor stops, check the automatic stop position after lifting the wiper blade 2
times.
(b) for RH Side
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UQH041X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
(1) Operate the windshield wiper motor

assembly.
(2) Stop the windshield wiper motor assembly operation.

(3) Check the automatic stop (park) position.
Standard Dimension:
AREA
DIMENSION
33.0 mm (1.299 in.)
OK:
The front wipers stop at the positions shown in the illustration.
*1
Ceramic Dot
*2
Cowl Panel End
HINT:
After the front wiper motor stops, check the automatic stop position after lifting the wiper blade 2
times.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UQH041X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OV302YX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Using a screwdriver, disengage the claw and remove the
windshield wiper arm cover, as shown in the illustration.
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
(a) Remove the nut and the windshield wiper arm and blade
assembly LH.
(a) Remove the nut and the windshield wiper arm and blade
assembly RH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OV302YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
(a) Disengage the 4 claws.
(b) Remove the clip and the front fender to cowl side seal RH.

HINT:

(b) While pressing the claws, as shown in the illustration, remove the 4 cowl top ventilator louver
clips.
2/5
8/6/12
*1
Cowl Top Ventilator Louver Clip
NOTICE:
Do not pull forcibly the cowl top ventilator louver clips because they may get damaged.
(c) Disengage the 15 guides and pull out the cowl ventilator louver, as shown in the illustration.
7. REMOVE FRONT WIPER MOTOR AND LINK ASSEMBLY

3/5
8/6/12
(c) Remove the 2 bolts.

(d) Disengage the grommet and remove the front wiper motor and link assembly, as shown in the
illustration.
*1
Grommet
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the windshield when removing the front wiper motor and link
assembly.
8. REMOVE FRONT WIPER CRANK SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a screwdriver, separate the No. 1 rod from the
crank arm pivot of the front wiper crank sub-assembly, as
*1
Protective Tape
*2
No.1 Rod
*3
Crank Arm Pivot
HINT:
4/5
8/6/12
(b) Remove the nut and the front wiper crank sub-assembly.
9. REMOVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a T30 "TORX" socket wrench, remove the 2 bolts

and the windshield wiper motor assembly from the
windshield wiper link assembly.
5/5
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER RUBBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XJT01JX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER RUBBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XJT01JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER RUBBER: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000037KE00GX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: FRONT WIPER RUBBER: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
HINT:
The procedure described below is for the LH side.
1. REMOVE FRONT WIPER BLADE
(a) Remove the holder of the front wiper blade.
(b) Remove the front wiper blade from the front wiper arm, as shown in the illustration.
*1
Holder
NOTICE:
Do not lower the front wiper arm with the front wiper blade removed. The arm tip may damage
the windshield surface.
2. REMOVE WIPER RUBBER
(a) Remove the wiper rubber with the wiper rubber backing
plates from the front wiper blade.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000037KE00GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Remove the 2 wiper rubber backing plates from the wiper
rubber.
3. INSTALL WIPER RUBBER
(a) Install the 2 wiper rubber backing plates to the wiper

rubber.
NOTICE:
Align the protrusions on the wiper rubber and the notches
of the backing plates.
Align the curves of the backing plates and the glass.
(b) Install the wiper rubber to the front wiper blade, as

NOTICE:
Push the wiper rubber into the wiper blade strongly to
engage them securely.
4. INSTALL FRONT WIPER BLADE
(a) Install the front wiper blade, as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the holder of the front wiper blade.

2/3
8/6/12
*1
Holder
3/3
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034YJ02VX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034YJ02VX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XK304GX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the front washer motor and pump assembly connector.
HINT:
Make sure that the front washer motor and pump assembly is installed to the washer jar.
(b) Fill the washer jar with windshield washer fluid.

(c) Check that the windshield washer fluid flows from the
washer jar.
OK:
MEASUREMENT
CONDITION
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Windshield washer fluid flows from

the washer jar
*a

(Windshield Washer Motor and Pump Assembly)
washer motor and pump assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XK304GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034YI033X
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the new motor packing.
(b) Install the windshield washer motor and pump assembly.

(d) Connect the washer hose.
2. ADD WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

(a) Add windshield washer fluid to the washer jar.

(a) Install the front fender liner LH with the 18 clips.
(b) Install the new grommet.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034YI033X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000034YK038X
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(b) Remove the grommet.
HINT:
The grommet need to be replaced with new ones because they will break when they are removed.
(c) Using a clip remover, disengage the 18 clips and remove

the front fender liner LH.
3. DRAIN WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034YK038X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Disconnect the washer hose from the windshield washer

motor and pump assembly, and drain the windshield
washer fluid.
HINT:
Use a container to collect the windshield washer fluid.
4. REMOVE WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the windshield washer motor and pump assembly and the motor packing.
NOTICE:
Be sure to replace the motor packing with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000034YK038X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OUQ02RX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
HINT:
1. ADJUST WASHER NOZZLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a 2 thin-bladed screwdrivers with its tip wrapped in protective tape, adjust the direction of
the washer nozzle sub-assembly.
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
Use the upper and lower adjustment grooves of the nozzle to adjust the washer nozzle.
NOTICE:
Do not use a tool which is wider than the adjusting grooves.
Do not insert the screwdriver into the washer fluid spraying nozzle. Doing so may damage the
washer fluid spraying nozzle, resulting in spraying problems.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OUQ02RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OUQ02RX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EWI02CX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EWI02CX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EWH02FX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL WASHER NOZZLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Connect a washer nozzle sub-assembly to the washer hose.
(b) Engage the 2 claws and install the washer nozzle sub-assembly.

HINT:

8. INSPECT WASHER NOZZLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EWH02FX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OUR02PX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT WASHER NOZZLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) With the engine running, check the position where the windshield washer fluid hits the windshield.
Standard:
The washer fluid hits the windshield in the areas shown in the illustration.
Standard Clearance
AREA
MEASUREMENT
AREA
MEASUREMENT
660 mm (25.984 in.)
684 mm (26.929 in.)
247 mm (9.724 in.)
232 mm (9.134 in.)
268 mm (10.551 in.)
250 mm (9.843 in.)
253 mm (9.961 in.)
299 mm (11.772 in.)
300 mm (11.811 in.)
250 mm (9.843 in.)
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OUR02PX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
If the result is not as specified, adjust the washer nozzle sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OUR02PX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003EWJ02EX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WASHER NOZZLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

7. REMOVE WASHER NOZZLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and separate the washer nozzle

sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the washer nozzle sub-assembly from the

washer hose.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003EWJ02EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001X7E00TX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001X7E00TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000ZCJ01TX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT PRECAUTION
(a) Using a 2 thin-bladed screwdrivers with its tip wrapped in protective tape, adjust the direction of
the washer nozzle sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not insert the screwdriver into the washer fluid spraying nozzle. Doing so may damage the
washer fluid spraying nozzle, resulting in spraying problems.
HINT:
Use the upper and lower adjustment grooves of the nozzle to adjust the washer nozzle.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000ZCJ01TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001X7F00TX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Front Wiper and Washer System

SYMPTOM
Front wiper and washer system does not operate
Front wiper system does not operate in LO or HI
Front wiper system does not operate in INT
Front washer system does not operate
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
WIPER fuse
WASHER fuse
Windshield wiper switch

assembly
WIPER fuse

assembly
Windshield wiper motor
assembly
WIPER fuse

assembly
assembly
WASHER fuse

assembly
Windshield washer motor and
pump assembly
Front wiper arm installation

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001X7F00TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
position
Front wiper arms do not return to their original positions when Windshield wiper switch
assembly
the wiper switch is turned off
assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001X7F00TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000397H00QX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. WASHER LINKED OPERATION
(a) This system operates the front wipers at low speed immediately after spraying a jet of washer
fluid when the front washer switch is turned on for 0.3 seconds or more. The system operates the
front wipers at low speed for approximately 2.2 seconds and then stops operation when the
washer switch is turned on for 1.5 seconds or more.
2. INTERMITTENT OPERATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000397H00QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(a) The system operates the front wipers once in approximately 1.6 to 10.7 seconds when the front
wiper switch is turned to the INT position. The intermittent time can be adjusted from 1.6 to 10.7
seconds by using the intermittent time adjust dial.
(b) If the windshield wiper switch (front wiper switch) is turned to the INT position, current flows from
the already charged capacitor C1 through terminals INT1 and INT2 of the front wiper switch to Tr1
(transistor). When Tr1 turns on, current flows from terminal +S of the front wiper switch to terminal
+1 of the front wiper switch, to terminal +1 of the windshield wiper motor, to the windshield wiper
2/3
8/6/12
motor and finally to ground, causing the windshield wiper motor to operate. At the same time,
current flows from capacitor C1 to terminal INT1 of the front wiper switch and then INT2. When the
current flow from capacitor C1 ends, Tr1 turns off to stop the relay contact point and halt the
windshield wiper motor.
When the relay contact point turns off, capacitor C1 begins to charge again and Tr1 remains off
until charging has been completed. This period corresponds to the intermittent time. When
capacitor C1 is fully charged, Tr1 turns on and then the relay contact point turns on, causing the
windshield wiper motor to operate again. This cycle is the intermittent operation.
The intermittent time can be adjusted by using the intermittent time adjust dial (variable resistor)
to change the charge time of capacitor C1.
3/3
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Y2U00SX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Y2U00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Y2U00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001DM101MX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001DM101MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001DM101MX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Y2V013X
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the windshield wiper switch assembly.
the table below.
Front Wiper Switch
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
CONDITION
D58-3 (+1) - D58-2

(+B)
MIST
D58- 3 (+1) - D58-1

(+S)
OFF
D58- 3 (+1) - D58-1

(+S)
INT
D58- 3 (+1) - D58-2

(+B)
LO
D58- 4 (+2) - D58-2

(+B)
HI
Below 1
*a

(Windshield Wiper Switch Assembly)
wiper switch.
(b) Check the front washer switch.

TESTER CONNECTION
D57-3 (WF) - D57-2 (EW)
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
ON
Below 1
OFF
10 k or higher
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Y2V013X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
If the result is not as specified, replace the windshield wiper switch.

(c) Check the intermittent operation.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to on and turn the windshield wiper switch assembly to INT.
(2) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
*a

HINT:
Measure the voltage from the rear of the connectors while they are connected to the windshield
wiper switch assembly.
Specified Condition:
Voltage changes as shown in the illustration below.
*a Voltage between terminals D57-2 (EW) and D58-1 (+S)
*b WIPER OPERATION
*c STOP
*d START
*e 0.6 to 2.6 seconds
*f
*g FAST
*h SLOW
10.0 to 22.0 seconds
(d) Check the washer operation.
2/3
8/6/12
(1) Turn the ignition switch to on and turn off the windshield wiper switch assembly.
*a

HINT:
Measure the voltage from the rear of the connectors while they are connected to the windshield
wiper switch assembly.
Specified Condition:
Voltage changes as shown in the illustration below.
*1 Washer Switch
*a Voltage between terminals D57-3 (WF) - D57-2 (EW)
*c Approximately 2.2 seconds
*b Approximately 0.05 seconds

-
If the result is not as specified, replace the windshield wiper switch assembly.
3/3
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001DLZ01QX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the claw and install the windshield wiper switch
assembly, as shown in the illustration.

(a) Engage the 4 claws and install the upper steering column cover.

(a) Engage the 6 claws to install the lower steering column cover.
(b) While turning the steering wheel assembly to the right and left, install the 2 screws.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001DLZ01QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001DM201QX
Title: WIPER / WASHER: WIPER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) While turning the steering wheel assembly to the right

and left, remove the 2 screws.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001DM201QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 6 claws and remove the lower steering

column cover.
(a) Disengage the 2claws and remove the upper steering

column cover.
8. REMOVE WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the 2 connectors.
(b) Using a screwdriver, disengage the claw and remove the
windshield wiper switch assembly, as shown in the
illustration.
2/3
8/6/12
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not press the claw too hard, as it may get damaged.
HINT:
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ZWC005X
Title: DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
(a) Engage the guide and install the door control receiver.
NOTICE:
When the door control receiver is replaced with a new one, register the wireless door lock control
system ID
and tire pressure warning receiver ID

(a) Engage the 4 clips and install the package tray trim panel assembly with the center stop light
assembly.

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
9. CONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER LH

1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
10. CONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002PLO01TX
Title: DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

HINT:
7. SEPARATE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER LH

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002PLO01TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
(b) Remove the 4 clips.
(c) Disengage the 4 clips and remove the package tray trim
panel assembly with the center stop light assembly.
16. REMOVE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
2/3
8/6/12

(c) Disengage the guide and remove the door control receiver.
NOTICE:
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010WI01TX
Title: DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010WI01TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010WI01TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010DZ022X
Title: DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the operation of the door control transmitter module set sub-assembly.
(1) Remove the transmitter battery (lithium battery: CR2016) from the door control transmitter
module set sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
When replacing the transmitter battery, before starting work, remove static electricity that has
built up in the body by touching, for example, the vehicle to prevent the door control
transmitter from being damaged.
(2) Install a new or normal transmitter battery (lithium battery: CR2016).

NOTICE:
When replacing the transmitter battery, before starting work, remove static electricity that has
built up in the body by touching, for example, the vehicle to prevent the door control
transmitter from being damaged.
(3) If a new or normal transmitter battery is not available,

connect 2 new dry cell batteries (1.5 V) in series.
Connect the positive (+) battery electrode to the
battery receptacle side terminal, and the negative (-)
battery electrode to the bottom terminal, and apply a
voltage of 3 V to the transmitter.
*1
Dry Cell Batteries
(4) In a location that is approximately 1 m (3.28ft.) away from the driver door outside handle,
point the transmitter at the vehicle and check the operation of the transmitter by pressing the
transmitter switches on the transmitter body.
OK:
The door lock/unlock can be operated via remote control. The LED illuminates when each switch is
pressed.
HINT:
The minimum operational distance differs depending on the way the transmitter is held and the
location.
Since the transmitter uses faint electric waves, the operational distance might be shortened if
noise or strong electric waves occur in the area.
(5) Install the battery (lithium battery: CR2016).
(b) Inspect the battery charge.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010DZ022X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
(1) Remove the battery from the door control transmitter

module set sub-assembly that does not operate.
Attach a lead wire (0.6 mm (0.0236 in.) or less in
diameter including wire sheath) with tape or
equivalent to the negative terminal.
NOTICE:
Do not wrap the lead wire around the terminal, wedge it
between terminals, or solder it. The terminal may be
deformed or damaged, and the battery will not be able to
be installed correctly.
When replacing the transmitter battery, before starting
work, remove static electricity that has built up in the
body by touching, for example, the vehicle to prevent the
door control transmitter from being damaged.
*1
Wire
(2) Carefully pull the lead wire out from the position
shown in the illustration and install the previously
removed transmitter battery.
NOTICE:
body by touching, for example, the vehicle to prevent
the electrical key transmitter from being damaged.
(3) Check the transmitter battery voltage.

HINT:
Measure the transmitter battery voltage while pressing the
lock or unlock switch on the door control transmitter module
set sub-assembly.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
Battery positive
(+) - Battery
Ignition switch off, all doors

closed and lock or unlock
negative (-)
switch is pressed
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010DZ022X.html?sisuffix=ff&
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
2.2 to 3.2
V
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010W8022X
Title: DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Take extra care when handling these precision electronic components.
1. INSTALL TRANSMITTER BATTERY

2. INSTALL DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER PACKING
(a) Install the door control transmitter module set sub-assembly.
3. INSTALL DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER MODULE SET SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the door control transmitter assembly.
4. INSTALL TRANSMITTER HOUSING COVER
(a) Install the transmitter housing cover onto the transmitter

housing case securely.
(b) After the installation, press any of the transmitter switches.
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010W9022X
Title: DOOR LOCK: DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
1. REMOVE TRANSMITTER HOUSING COVER

tape, pry apart the transmitter housing cover.
*1
Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not use excessive force when prying apart the
housing cover.
2. REMOVE DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER MODULE SET SUB-ASSEMBLY

tape, remove the door control transmitter module set
sub-assembly.
*1
Protective Tape
3. REMOVE DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER PACKING

(a) Remove the door control transmitter packing.
4. REMOVE TRANSMITTER BATTERY
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XBA06CX
Title: DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XBA06CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Y7Y03QX
Title: DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH
*a
*c
Lock
*b
(Front Door Lock Assembly LH)
Unlock
-
(a) Check the door lock motor operation.

(1) Apply battery voltage to the motor connector and check the operation of the front door lock
motor.
OK:
Battery positive (+) 4 (L)
Battery negative (-) 1 (UL)
Battery positive (+) 1 (UL)
Battery negative (-) 4 (L)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Lock
Unlock
If the result is not as specified, replace the front door lock assembly.
2. INSPECT FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY RH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Y7Y03QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
*a
*c
Unlock
*b
(Front Door Lock Assembly RH)
Lock
-
(a) Check the door lock motor operation.

(1) Apply battery voltage to the door lock motor connector and check the operation of the door
lock motor.
OK:
Battery positive (+) 4 (L)
Battery negative (-) 1 (UL)
Battery positive (+) 1 (UL)
Battery negative (-) 4 (L)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Lock
Unlock
If the result is not as specified, replace the front door lock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Y7Y03QX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002M7W02RX
Title: DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY

NOTICE:
Do not allow grease or dust to adhere to the surface of the connector which contacts the door
lock wire harness seal.
(a) Apply MP grease to the sliding parts of the front door lock assembly.
(b) Insert the front door lock open rod into the front door lock assembly.
(c) Check that the front door lock open rod is securely connected to the front door lock assembly.
(d) Install the front door lock assembly with the 3 new bolts.
2. INSTALL FRONT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)

5. INSTALL FRONT DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002M7W02RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002M7W02SX
Title: DOOR LOCK: FRONT DOOR LOCK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

4. REMOVE FRONT DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
7. REMOVE FRONT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)
8. REMOVE FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY
(b) Slide the front door lock assembly downward, pull out the front door lock open rod from the
outside handle frame, and remove the front door lock assembly and cables as a unit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002M7W02SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000593G000X
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
1. CUSTOMIZE KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM
NOTICE:
customized.
Record the current settings before customizing.
HINT:

(4) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Utility / Customize / Warning.
Warning
DISPLAY
DEFAULT
Key Remind
Sound
Normal
FUNCTION
Function to change cycle of the key
reminder warning buzzer.
SETTING
Normal, Slow
or Fast
RELEVANT ECU
Combination meter
assembly
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011WG042X
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. READ DATA LIST
NOTICE:
In the following table, the values listed under "Normal Condition" are reference values. Do not
HINT:
time.

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Data List.
(f) Read the Data List according to the display on the Techstream.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
IG SW
Ignition switch on signal / OFF or ON
ACC SW
Ignition switch ACC signal / OFF or ON
Key Unlock
Warning SW
Unlock warning switch / OFF or ON
D Door Courtesy
SW
Driver side door courtesy light switch

signal / ON or OFF
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011WG042X.html?sisuffix=ff
NORMAL CONDITION

OFF: Ignition key is not
inserted
ON: Ignition key is
inserted
opened
closed
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
-
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (201
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011G204ZX
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use these procedures to troubleshoot the key reminder warning system.
1.
NEXT
2.
(a) Check the battery voltage.

Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
HINT:
NEXT
3.
(a) Using the Techstream, inspect the CAN communication function to ensure that there are no
malfunctions in the communication system
.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011G204ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM .
4.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Fault is not listed on Problem Symptoms Table
Fault is listed on Problem Symptoms Table
Go to step 6
5.
(b) Data list/Active test
NEXT
6.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
7.
CONFIRMATION TEST
2/3
8/6/12
NEXT
END
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: Key Reminder Buzzer does not Sound (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000ZDE02GX
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: Key Reminder Buzzer does not Sound (2013 FR-S)
Key Reminder Buzzer does not Sound
DESCRIPTION
The key reminder warning buzzer sounds when the driver side door is opened while the ignition switch is
in the LOCK or ACC positions. The key reminder warning buzzer is activated when the main body ECU
(network gateway ECU) sends a buzzer sound request signal to the combination meter assembly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000ZDE02GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
Since the key reminder warning system has functions that use CAN communication, first confirm that
there is no malfunction in the communication system by inspecting the CAN communication functions
in accordance with How to Proceed with Troubleshooting. Then conduct the following troubleshooting
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (D DOOR COURTESY SW)

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE

D Door
Courtesy SW
Driver side door courtesy light switch signal / opened

ON or OFF
closed
OK:
ON or OFF appears on the screen according to the driver door condition.
NG
GO TO LIGHTING SYSTEM (DOOR COURTESY

LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT)
OK
2.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (KEY UNLOCK WARNING SW)

2/5
8/6/12
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Key Unlock Warning
Unlock warning switch signal / OFF
SW
or ON

inserted
ON: Ignition key is inserted
OK:
When the un-lock warning switch assembly is operated, the display changes as shown in the table.
NG
INSPECT UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY (BUZZER OPERATION)
(a) Remove the key from the key cylinder, turn the light control switch on the headlight dimmer
switch assembly to the tail position, and open the driver door.
OK:
The light reminder warning buzzer sounds.
HINT:
The key reminder warning system sounds the buzzer built in to the combination meter for key
reminder warnings. This buzzer is also used for the light reminder warning system. Therefore, check
the operation of the combination meter buzzer by checking if the buzzer sounds to inform that the
lights are still on.
4.
NG
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
INSPECT UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the un-lock warning switch assembly
(b) Inspect the un-lock warning switch assembly
3/5
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU - UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the D53 un-lock warning switch assembly connector.

(b) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(c) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D53-1 (UN+) - Body

ground
Always
11 to 14 V
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
D53-2 (UN-) - D5-22
(KSW)
D53-2 (UN-) - Body
ground
Always
Below 1
Always
10 k or higher
*a

(to Un-lock Warning Switch Assembly)
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
GATEWAY ECU)
4/5
8/6/12
5/5
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001332043X
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. CHECK FUNCTION
(a) Check that the key reminder warning buzzer sounds.
(1) With the driver side door closed, insert the key into the ignition key cylinder and then turn the
key to LOCK or ACC.
(2) Check that the buzzer sounds intermittently when the driver side door is open.
(b) Check that the key reminder warning buzzer stops.
(1) Check that the buzzer stops sounding if any of the following operations are performed while
the buzzer is sounding:
Close the driver side door (front door courtesy light switch is off).
Pull the key out from the ignition key cylinder.
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000037K100OX
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011G502GX
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Key Reminder Warning System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
Key reminder buzzer does not sound
Proceed to "Key Reminder Buzzer does not Sound"
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011G502GX.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE PAGE
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011G603SX
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) When the driver side door is opened with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position, this system
causes the key reminder warning buzzer to sound in order to warn the driver that the ignition key
has not been removed.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011G603SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000013P003NX
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000013P003NX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000013P003NX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011G4045X
Title: DOOR LOCK: KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011G4045X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
assembly.
(b) Disconnect the D5, D6 and A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
2/3
8/6/12
(c) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
MB-1 (BECU) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
Battery power
supply
Always
11 to 14 V
MB-8 (IG) - Body
None - Body
Ignition switch
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
ground
ground
power supply
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
MB-9 (ACC) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
ACC power supply
Ignition switch ACC
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Always
Below 1
Always
11 to 14 V
No Key in ignition key

cylinder (off)
Below 1 V
MB-11 (GND) - Body None - Body
Ground
ground
ground
MB-32 (BMPX) -
None - Body
Battery power
Body ground
ground
supply
D5-22 (KSW) - Body BR - Body
Unlock warning
ground
ground
switch input
Key inserted ignition key

cylinder (on)
11 to 14 V
D6-1 (GND) - Body
B - Body
ground
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
A73-4 (GND) - Body

ground
B-Y - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
(d) Reconnect the D5, D6 and A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
assembly.
(f) Measure the voltage according to the valve(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
CONDITION
Driver side door

open
Below 1 V
Driver side door

closed
11 to 14 V
3A-28 - Body
V - Body
ground
ground
switch input
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004FZG004X
Title: DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004FZG004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000020BT02DX
Title: DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT LUGGAGE DOOR CLOSER ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the operation of the door lock motor.
(1) Move the door lock to the closed (lock) position.
(2) Apply battery voltage to the door lock motor and
check the operation of the door lock motor.
OK:
MEASUREMENT
CONDITION
Battery positive
(+) 1 (B)
Battery negative
(-) 2 (E)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Luggage compartment door lock motor

open (unlock) operation
If the result is not as specified, replace the back door

lock assembly.
(b) Check the operation of the door courtesy switch.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
2 (E) - 3 (D+)
Locked
10 k or higher
2 (E) - 3 (D+)
Unlocked
Below 1
*a

(Luggage Door Closer Assembly)
*b
Lock
*c
Open
If the result is not as specified, replace the back door lock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000020BT02DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004FZF003X
Title: DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL LUGGAGE CLOSER CABLE ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the clamp to install the luggage closer cable assembly.

(a) Install the new luggage compartment door lock cylinder packing.
NOTICE:
Do not reuse the removed packing. Be sure to install a new luggage compartment door lock
cylinder packing to prevent water ingress.

(a) Connect the luggage compartment door lock cable to the luggage compartment door lock cylinder
assembly.
(b) Install the luggage compartment door lock cylinder assembly with the 2 nuts.
4. INSTALL LUGGAGE DOOR CLOSER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the luggage door closer assembly with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the luggage closer cable assembly to the luggage door closer assembly.
(c) Engage the claw to close the cover.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004FZF003X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004FZH003X
Title: DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE LUGGAGE DOOR CLOSER ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the claw and open the cover.

*1
Cover
(c) Disconnect the luggage closer cable assembly.

*1
Luggage Closer Cable Assembly
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and the luggage door closer

assembly.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004FZH003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and the luggage compartment door

lock cylinder assembly.
(b) Disconnect the luggage closer cable assembly.

*1
Luggage Closer Cable Assembly

(a) Remove the luggage compartment door lock cylinder
packing.
NOTICE:
new luggage compartment door lock cylinder packing to
prevent water ingress.
*1 Luggage Compartment Door Lock Cylinder Packing
4. REMOVE LUGGAGE CLOSER CABLE ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the clamp and remove the luggage closer

cable assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004FZH003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: All Doors LOCK/UNLOCK Functions do not Op
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000128S03EX
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: All Doors LOCK/UNLOCK Functions do not
Operate Via Door Control Switch (2013 FR-S)
All Doors LOCK/UNLOCK Functions do not Operate Via Door Control Switch
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) receives switch signals from the door control switch,
activates the door lock motor on each door accordingly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DOOR LOCK OPERATION
(a) Proceed to the next step according to the symptom listed in the table below.
Result
RESULT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000128S03EX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
PROCEED TO
1/8
8/6/12
Doors cannot be locked through power window regulator master switch assembly
Doors cannot be locked through power window regulator switch assembly
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (DOOR LOCK

SW-LOCK AND DOOR LOCK SW-UNLOCK)
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (DOOR LOCK SW-LOCK AND DOOR LOCK SWUNLOCK)
2.

Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
Door
Lock
SWLock
Door control switch (power window

regulator master switch assembly)
lock signal / OFF or ON
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
OFF: OFF: Lock side of door control

switch (power window regulator master
switch assembly) not pushed
ON: Lock side of door control switch
(power window regulator master switch
assembly) pushed
Door
Lock
SWUnlock

regulator master switch assembly)
unlock signal / OFF or ON
OFF: Unlock side of door control switch

assembly) not pushed
ON: Unlock side of door control switch
assembly) pushed
OK:
The Techstream indicates ON or OFF according to the switch operation shown in the table above.
NG
INSPECT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR

2/8
8/6/12
OK
3.

GATEWAY ECU)
INSPECT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the power window regulator master switch

assembly
.
TESTER CONNECTION
E8-16 - E8-5
E8-15 - E8-5
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Lock switch pushed
Below 1
off
10 k or higher
Unlock switch pushed
Below 1
off
10 k or higher
*a

(Power Window Regulator Master Switch Assembly (Door Control Switch))
NG

OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH - JUNCTION

BLOCK AND BODY GROUND)

3/8
8/6/12
(b) Disconnect the E8 power window regulator master switch assembly (door control switch)
connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3A-51 - E8-16
Always
Below 1
3A-30 - E8-15
Always
Below 1
E8-5 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
3A-51 or E8-16 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
3A-30 or E8-15 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5.
assembly.
*a

4/8
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
MB-17 (L) - 3A-51
Always
Below 1
MB-19 (UL) - 3A-30
Always
Below 1
NG
OK
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
GATEWAY ECU)
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (DOOR LOCK SW-LOCK AND DOOR LOCK SWUNLOCK)
6.

Main Body
TESTER
NORMAL CONDITION
DISPLAY
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
OFF: OFF: Lock side of door control

Door
Lock
SW-Lock
regulator switch assembly) lock

signal / OFF or ON
switch (power window regulator switch

(power window regulator switch

assembly) pushed
OFF: Unlock side of door control switch
Door
Lock
SWUnlock

regulator switch assembly) unlock
signal / OFF or ON

assembly) pushed
OK:
The Techstream indicates ON or OFF according to the switch operation shown in the table above.
NG
5/8
8/6/12
INSPECT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
7.

GATEWAY ECU)
INSPECT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the power window regulator switch assembly

.
TESTER CONNECTION
F6-16 - F6-5
F6-15 - F6-5
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Lock switch pushed
Below 1
off
10 k or higher
Unlock switch pushed
Below 1
off
10 k or higher
*a

(Power Window Regulator Master Switch Assembly (Door Control Switch))
NG

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
6/8
8/6/12
8.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER WINDOW SWITCH - JUNCTION BLOCK

AND BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the 3A and 3B instrument panel junction block assembly connector.
(b) Disconnect the F6 power window regulator switch assembly (door control switch) connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3A-41 - F6-16
Always
Below 1
3B-20 - F6-15
Always
Below 1
F6-5 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
3A-41 or F6-16 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
3B-20 or F6-15 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
9.
assembly.
7/8
8/6/12
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
MB-17 (L) - 3A-41
Always
Below 1
MB-19 (UL) - 3B-20
Always
Below 1
NG
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
8/8
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TNZ091X
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
NOTICE:
HINT:
time.

(d) Enter the following menus:
Body Electrical / Main Body / Data List.
Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
Open Door
Warning
Open door warning / OFF or ON
NORMAL CONDITION
Customized setting displayed
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
-
D Door
Courtesy
SW
Driver side door courtesy light switch ON: Driver side door opened
signal / ON or OFF
Door Lock
SW-Lock
OFF: Lock side of door control switch

(power window regulator master
switch assembly or power window
regulator switch assembly) not
regulator master switch assembly or
pushed
power window regulator switch
assembly) lock signal / OFF or ON
regulator switch assembly) pushed
OFF: Unlock side of door control

switch (power window regulator
master switch assembly or power
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TNZ091X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
Door Lock
SW-Unlock
P Door
Courtesy
SW
Luggage
Courtesy
SW
Back Door
Open
Trunk
Lock/Unlock
SW

regulator master switch assembly or
power window regulator switch
assembly) unlock signal / OFF or ON
Passenger side door courtesy light

Luggage compartment door lock /

Prohibit or Permit
Prohibit: Luggage compartment door

locked
Permit: Luggage compartment door
unlocked
cylinder not turned to unlock position

ON: Luggage compartment door key
cylinder turned to unlock position
OFF: Back door opener switch not

Back door opener switch / OFF or ON pushed
ON: Back door opener switch pushed
ACC SW
Ignition switch status / OFF or ON
Key Unlock
Warning
Unlock warning switch signal / OFF
Unlock
OFF: Passenger side door closed
OFF: Luggage compartment door key

Status of the luggage compartment
door lock/unlock switch /OFF or ON
Ignition switch status / OFF or ON
Front
Passenger
ON: Passenger side door opened
opened
IG SW
SW

regulator switch assembly) pushed
OFF: Luggage compartment door

Luggage compartment door courtesy closed
switch signal / OFF or ON
ON: Luggage compartment door
Back Door
Open
Handle SW
window regulator switch assembly)

not pushed
or ON
Status of passenger side door

unlock / OFF or ON

ON: Ignition switch to ON
ON: Ignition switch on (ACC)
OFF: No key is in ignition key cylinder
ON: Key is in ignition key cylinder
OFF: Passenger side door locked
ON: Passenger side door unlocked
OFF: All doors lock operation is not

Door Lock
Output
Status of all doors lock signal output

/ OFF or ON
performed
ON: All doors lock operation is
performed
All Unlock
Status of all doors unlock signal
OFF: All doors unlock operation is not

performed
output / OFF or ON
ON: All doors unlock operation is
performed
Driver
Status of driver side door unlock /
OFF: Driver side door locked
2/3
8/6/12
Unlock
Rear
Gate/Trunk
Output
OFF or ON
ON: Driver side door unlocked
Luggage compartment door unlock

signal output / OFF or ON
OFF: Luggage compartment door

open operation is not performed
ON: Luggage compartment door open
operation is performed
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:

(d) Enter the following menus:
Body Electrical / Main Body / Active Test.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Door Lock
Door lock motor
OFF / Unlock /
Lock
D-Door Unlock
Driver door lock motor
OFF / ON
Trunk and Back-Door

Open
Back door lock motor
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
Door Open/Close State

ECU)
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TNQ03UX
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
Use the following procedures to troubleshoot the power door lock control system.
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Go to step 5
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TNQ03UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
4.
(b) Operation check
(c) Data List/Active Test
NEXT
5.
NEXT
6.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TNQ03UX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002T6K04FX
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION
NOTICE:
The operation check below is based on the noncustomized initial condition of the vehicle.
(a) Check the basic function.

(1) Check that all doors lock when the door lock control switch (for manual operation) is turned to
lock and all doors unlock when turned to unlock.
(b) Check the key lock-in prevention function.
NOTICE:
In order to prevent the key from being actually locked-in, the following inspection should be
performed with the driver side door window open.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC.

(2) With the driver door open, check that all doors unlock immediately after the lock side of the
door control switch (for manual operation) is pressed.
(c) Check the security function of the door lock control system.
(1) Close all doors and leave the driver door window open so that the door lock knob can be
operated from outside the vehicle. (Step 1)
(2) Starting from Step 1, with the key outside the vehicle, close and lock the driver door using
wireless door lock operation. Then, check that the doors do not unlock when the unlock side of
the door control switch (for manual operation) is pressed from outside the vehicle.
HINT:
Check that the security function of the door lock control system is canceled under the following
conditions:

The doors are unlocked by a wireless operation.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002T6K04FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026V5019X
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TNU065X
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Power Door Lock Control System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE

All Doors LOCK/UNLOCK Functions do not Operate Via Power
Window Regulator Master Switch Assembly

gateway ECU)

block assembly

switch assembly
All Doors LOCK/UNLOCK Functions do not Operate Via Power
Window Regulator Switch Assembly

gateway ECU)

block assembly
Front door lock assembly LH
Only Driver Door LOCK/UNLOCK Functions do not Operate

gateway ECU)

block assembly
Front door lock assembly RH

gateway ECU)
Only Passenger Door LOCK/UNLOCK Functions do not Operate
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TNU065X.html?sisuffix=ff&

1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TNU065X.html?sisuffix=ff&
block assembly
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TNV03PX
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) The power door lock system locks/unlocks all the doors.
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) receives lock/unlock request signals from a door
control switch. Then, the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) sends these request signals to
the door lock motors in each door to lock/unlock each door in response to the inputs.

COMPONENTS
Power window
regulator master
switch assembly
Door
control
switch
Power window
regulator switch
assembly
Door
control
switch
FUNCTION
The door control switch on the power window regulator master switch assembly
locks/unlocks all doors.
The door control switch on the power window regulator switch assembly
locks/unlocks all doors.
Placed on each door.

Detects door status (open or closed) and outputs a signal to main body
ECU (network gateway ECU).
Turns on when door is opened and turns off when door is closed.
Door courtesy
light switch
assembly
Front door Lock

assembly LH
Front door Lock
assembly RH
The built-in motor locks/unlocks the door.
Luggage
compartment
door lock
assembly
Built-in motor unlatches door latch.

Built-in courtesy switch detects luggage compartment door status (open or
closed) and outputs a signal to main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
This switch turns on when luggage compartment door is opened and turns
off when luggage compartment door is closed
3. SYSTEM FUNCTION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TNV03PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
(a) This system is controlled by the main body ECU (network gateway ECU). The main body ECU
(network gateway ECU) outputs signals to each door lock motor. The power door lock control
system has the following functions:
FUNCTION
OUTLINE
Manual lock and

unlock function
This function can lock or unlock all doors by the door control switch operation.
Key lock-in
prevention
function
When the door lock operation is performed with the ignition key in the ignition key
cylinder, door will be locked once and immediately unlocked.
Manual unlock
prohibition function
When the condition below is met, unlocking the vehicle using the door control
switch will be prohibited:
The doors are locked using a wireless key operation with all doors
closed.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TNV03PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001XM401JX
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XM401JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XM401JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001JW703SX
Title: DOOR LOCK: POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001JW703SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
assembly.
2/4
8/6/12
(c) Measure the resistance and voltage between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors
and body ground.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING
TERMINAL
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
MB-1 (BECU) - Body
None - Body
Battery power
ground
ground
supply
MB-8 (IG) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
Ignition switch
power supply
MB-9 (ACC) - Body
None - Body
ground
ground
MB-11 (GND) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
MB-32 (BMPX) Body ground
None - Body
ground
CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ACC
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
Battery power
supply
Always
11 to 14 V
ACC power supply
No key in ignition key

D5-22 (KSW) - Body
ground
BR - Body
ground
Unlock warning
switch input
cylinder (off)
cylinder (on)
D6-1 (GND) - Body

ground
B - Body
ground
A73-4 (GND) - Body
B-Y - Body
ground
ground
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
assembly.
(f) Measure the voltage and resistance, according to the valve(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
3A-28 - Body
Y - Body
Driver side door open
Below 1 V
ground
ground
switch input
Driver side door closed
11 to 14 V
CONDITION
Passenger side door
Below 1 V
3B-13 - Body
L - Body
Passenger side door courtesy
open
ground
ground
light switch input
Passenger side door

closed
11 to 14 V
Door control switch not

pushed
Below 1 V
3B-2 - Body
ground
Y - Body
ground
Door lock motor lock drive output

(for driver side)
Lock side of door control

switch pushed
11 to 14 V
3/4
8/6/12

3B-3 - Body
L - Body
Door lock motor lock drive output
ground
ground
(for passenger side)
pushed
Lock side of door control
switch pushed
3D-11 - Body
R-G - Body
Door lock motor unlock drive
pushed
ground
ground
output (for driver side)
Unlock side of door

control switch pushed
3B-4 - Body
ground
L-W Body
ground

Door lock motor unlock drive
output (for passenger side)
pushed
Unlock side of door
control switch pushed
Luggage compartment
3D-26 - Body
SB - Body
door open
ground
ground
courtesy light switch input
Luggage compartment
door closed
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
4/4
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: TRANSMITTER BATTERY: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003ZV300TX
Title: DOOR LOCK: TRANSMITTER BATTERY: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
NOTICE:
1. REMOVE TRANSMITTER HOUSING COVER

2. REMOVE DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER MODULE SET SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE TRANSMITTER BATTERY
(a) Disengage the hook and remove the transmitter battery

cover.
(b) Remove the transmitter battery (lithium battery: CR2016).

NOTICE:
Do not push the terminals with your finger.
Do not use excessive force when prying up the battery
(lithium battery: CR2016) as this may damage the
terminals.
Do not touch the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause it to rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside the
transmitter as this may interfere with its proper
operation.
HINT:
4. INSTALL TRANSMITTER BATTERY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ZV300TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: TRANSMITTER BATTERY: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
(a) Install a battery (lithium battery: CR2016) with the

positive (+) side up, as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the positive (+) side and the negative (-)
side of the transmitter battery are correctly matched with
the transmitter terminals.
Do not bend the transmitter battery electrode during
insertion.
Keep the transmitter cover interior free of dust and oil.
(b) Engage the hook and install the transmitter battery

cover.
NOTICE:
Securely engage the claws of the cover to prevent the
poor contact between the battery and terminal.
5. INSTALL DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER MODULE SET SUB-ASSEMBLY

6. INSTALL TRANSMITTER HOUSING COVER
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003ZV300TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZQ501LX
Title: DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZQ501LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZQ501LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZQ401ZX
Title: DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
1 (UN+) - 2 (UN-)
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Not pushed
10 k or higher
Pushed
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the un-lock

warning switch assembly.
*1
*a
Pin
(Un-lock Warning Switch Assembly)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZQ401ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZQ302GX
Title: DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Attach the 2 claws to install the un-lock warning switch assembly.
(b) Connect the un-lock warning switch assembly connector.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZQ302GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002ZQ602HX
Title: DOOR LOCK: UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
8. REMOVE UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the un-lock warning switch assembly

connector.
(b) Detach the 2 claws and remove the un-lock warning switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002ZQ602HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XKV01IX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XKV01IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XKT025X
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER
(b) Engage the clamp to install the wireless door lock buzzer.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XKT025X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XKW01VX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER
(b) Detach the clamp and remove the wireless door lock
buzzer.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XKW01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: B1242: Wireless Door Lock Tuner Circuit M
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TQK00RX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: B1242: Wireless Door Lock Tuner Circuit
DTC
B1242
Wireless Door Lock Tuner Circuit Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
This door control receiver receives signals from the transmitter and sends these signals to the main body
DTC
NO.
In diagnostic mode, applicable RDA signal cannot be received 3 times in

B1242 succession after the PRG signal is output from the main body ECU
(network gateway ECU).
TROUBLE AREA
Wire
harness or
connector
Door
control
receiver
Main body
ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TQK00RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU) DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER)
(b) Disconnect the H28 door control receiver connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D6-6 (PRG) - H28-5 (PRG)
Always
Below 1
D6-7 (RDA) - H28-4 (RDA)
Always
Below 1
D6-6 (PRG) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D6-7 (RDA) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
2/4
8/6/12
OK
2.
INSPECT DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER (POWER SOURCE, GROUND)
(a) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
H28-7 (+B) - Body
ground

Always
11 to 14 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
H28-12 (GND) - Body

ground
Always
Below 1
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
(a) Temporarily replace the door control receiver with a new or normally functioning one
NEXT
3/4
8/6/12
4.
REGISTER RECOGNITION CODE
(a) Perform the Registration procedures
HINT:
If a new or normal functioning door control receiver is available, connect it and check if the wireless
door lock function is normal or the DTC is output. If the alternative receiver functions normally,
replace the original door control receiver.
NEXT
5.
CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTC
NEXT
6.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC is not output.
HINT:
Reinstall the parts, such as sensors and connectors, and restore the vehicle to its previous conditions
before rechecking for DTCs.
NG
OK
END (DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER IS
GATEWAY ECU)
DEFECTIVE)
4/4
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000593H000X
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
1. CUSTOMIZE WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTICE:
customized.
Record the current settings before customizing.
HINT:

(4) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Utility / Customize / Wireless Door Lock
or Others.
Wireless Door Lock
DISPLAY
Wireless
Control
Wireless
Buzzer
Resp
Hazard
Answer
Back
DEFAULT
ON
FUNCTION
Function that turns wireless door lock function / OFF

or ON
ON
Wireless door lock buzzer response
ON
When wireless lock switch on transmitter pressed,

illuminate all hazard warning lights once. When unlock
switch pressed, all hazard warning lights illuminate
twice.
Open
SETTING
RELEVANT
ECU
OFF or ON
Main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
OFF or ON
Main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
OFF or ON
Main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
Main
body ECU
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
Door
Warning
ON
Unlock 2
Operation
Panic
Function
Wireless
Auto Lock
The buzzer sounds when lock is pressed when any of

the doors are ajar.
ON
Function that unlocks driver door when unlock switch

on door control transmitter module set sub-assembly
is pressed once, and unlocks all doors when pressed
twice. If setting is OFF, pressing unlock switch once
makes all doors unlock.
ON
Function to operate theft deterrent system by

continuously pressing panic switch on door control
transmitter module set sub-assembly for 1.5 seconds
This function turns the wireless auto lock function OFF

or ON
ON
OFF or ON
(network
gateway
ECU)
OFF or ON
Main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
OFF or ON
Main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
OFF or ON
Main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
Auto Lock
Time
60 s
Time until relocking after unlocking with wireless door

lock function
30 s, 60 s or
120 s
Main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
Trunk Lid
Operation
Long1
Function to change the operation method of opening
1tim ON, 2tim
Main
body ECU
the luggage compartment door by the door control

transmitter module set sub-assembly.
ON, Long1 or
Long2
(network
gateway
ECU)
Level 7, Level
6, Level 5,
Level 4, Level
Wireless
Buzzer
Vol
Level 5
Wireless door lock buzzer volume
3, Level 2,
Level 1 or
Level 0
Main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
Others
DISPLAY
Detection of
Vehicle
DEFAULT
OFF
FUNCTION
SETTING
RELEVANT ECU
This function turns the detection of vehicle
OFF or
ON
gateway ECU)
function OFF or ON.
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XXB02BX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. READ DATA LIST
NOTICE:
HINT:
time.

Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Wireless
Control
Wireless door lock control function / OFF or ON
Customized setting
displayed
Wireless
Buzzer
Resp
Wireless buzzer response / OFF or ON
Customized setting
displayed
Hazard
Answer
Back
Hazard answer-back of wireless / OFF or ON
Customized setting
displayed
Open
Door
Warning
Open door warning / OFF or ON
Customized setting
displayed
Customized setting
displayed
Customized setting
displayed
Customized setting
displayed
Unlock 2
2 times operation of wireless unlock / OFF or ON
Operation
Panic
Function
Panic function / OFF or ON
Wireless
Automatic lock function / OFF or ON
Auto Lock
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XXB02BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
Auto Lock
Automatic lock time / 30 s, 60 s or 120 s
Time
Customized setting
displayed
Opening the luggage compartment door by the

Trunk Lid
door control transmitter module set sub-assembly/
Operation
1 tim ON, 2 tim ON, Long1 or Long2
Customized setting
displayed
Customized setting
displayed
Customized setting
displayed
Wireless
Buzzer
Vol
Wireless door lock buzzer volume/Level7, Level6,

Level5, Level4, Level3, Level2, Level1 or Level0
Detection
Detection of vehicle function OFF or ON
of Vehicle

D Door
Driver side door courtesy light switch signal / ON or opened
Courtesy
OFF
SW
closed
P Door
Passenger side door courtesy light switch signal /
Courtesy
ON or OFF
SW
ON: Passenger side door

opened
OFF: Passenger side
door closed
ON: Luggage
compartment door is
Luggage
Luggage compartment door courtesy switch signal

Courtesy
/ OFF or ON
SW
open
OFF: Luggage
compartment door is
closed
IG SW
ACC SW
Key
Unlock
Warning
SW
Hazard
Output
Ignition switch IG signal / ON or OFF
Ignition switch ACC signal / ON or OFF
Unlock warning switch / OFF or ON

inserted
ON: Ignition key is
inserted
Hazard warning light output / OFF or ON
OFF: Not during hazard

answer-back operation
ON: During hazard
answer-back operation
OFF: Not during wireless

Wireless
Buzzer
Wireless door lock buzzer output / OFF or ON
Output
door lock buzzer answerback operation

ON: During wireless door
lock buzzer answer-back

operation
2/3
8/6/12

HINT:

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
CONTROL
RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Door lock motor
Unlock /
Lock
Driver side door lock motor
OFF / ON
Trunk and BackDoor Open
Luggage door lock motor
OFF / ON
Illuminated Entry
System
Interior lights (Interior light switch is in door position

and all doors are closed)
OFF / ON
Wireless Buzzer
Wireless door lock buzzer
OFF / ON
Turn signal flasher assembly
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
Door Lock
D-Door Unlock
Hazard
Door Open/Close
State
TEST PART
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001PQX0CMX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. CHECK DLC3
(a) Check the DLC3

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
3. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (OPERATING IGNITION KEY CYLINDER)

(a) Switch to self-diagnostic mode.
(1) Insert the key into the ignition key cylinder and remove it.
(2) Within 5 seconds after the key is removed, insert it into the ignition key cylinder and then turn
the ignition switch to ON then off once. (End in off)
(3) Within 30 seconds after turning the ignition switch off, perform the following 9 times: Turn the
ignition switch to ON then off. (End in off)
HINT:
Turning the ignition switch to ON after the procedure above has been completed will end the selfdiagnostic mode.
NOTICE:
If the system fails to enter self-diagnostic mode, the system will return to normal mode.
(b) Check that the system has switched to self-diagnostic

mode by checking the interior light output pattern.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PQX0CMX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
(c) Check that the system has switched to self-diagnostic

mode by checking the wireless door lock buzzer output
pattern.
(d) Check the diagnostic outputs when the door control transmitter module set sub-assembly switch
is held down. The diagnostic outputs can be checked by the interior light and wireless door lock
buzzer patterns.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001PQX0CMX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (201
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012LR01SX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
(2013 FR-S)

DTC
CODE
DETECTION ITEM
TROUBLE AREA
SEE
PAGE
- Wire harness or connector

B1242
Wireless Door Lock Tuner Circuit

Malfunction
- Door control receiver

- Main body ECU (network gateway
ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012LR01SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012M1026X
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(a) DTC check
(4) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Trouble Codes.
(5) Check for DTCs.
(b) DTC clear
(4) Enter the following menu: Body Electrical / Main Body / Trouble Codes.
(5) Clear the DTCs by following the directions on the Techstream display.
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTI
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XX204PX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
The wireless door lock control system troubleshooting procedures are based on the premise that
the power door lock system is operating normally. Check the power door lock system first before
troubleshooting the wireless door lock control system.
Use this procedure to troubleshoot the wireless door lock control system.
1.
NEXT
2.
(a) Check the battery voltage.

Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
CHECK FOR DTC*
(b) Clear the DTCs
(c) Recheck for DTCs.

Result
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XX204PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
GO TO DTC CHART
4.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Go to step 6
5.
(b) Data List/Active Test

(c) Operation check
.
.
NEXT
6.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
2/3
8/6/12
HINT:
Register the recognition code when replacing the door control transmitter or the door control
receiver.
NEXT
7.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: No Answer-Back (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000027Q805LX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: No Answer-Back (2013 FR-S)
No Answer-Back
DESCRIPTION
In some cases, wireless door lock control functions are normal but the hazard warning light and/or
wireless door lock buzzer answer-back function(s) does not operate. In such cases, hazard warning light
and wireless door lock buzzer signal outputs from the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) may be
malfunctioning.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ANSWER-BACK OPERATION)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000027Q805LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Utility / Customize / Wireless Door
Lock.
(e) Select the setting by referring to the table below.
DISPLAY DEFAULT
Hazard
Answer
Back
ON
Wireless
Buzzer
Resp
Wireless
Buzzer
Vol
ON
Level 5
CONTENT
When the doors are locked by
wireless operation, the hazard
warning lights flash once.
When the doors are unlocked by
wireless operation, the hazard
warning lights flash twice.
Wireless door lock buzzer response
Wireless door lock buzzer volume
SETTING
RELEVANT ECU
OFF or ON
Main body ECU

(network
gateway ECU)
OFF or ON
Main body ECU

(network
gateway ECU)
Level 7, Level 6, Level 5,

Level 4, Level 3, Level 2,
Level 1 or Level 0
Main body ECU

(network
gateway ECU)
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Both items are ON and except Level 0
Either item is OFF or Level 0
PERFORM CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION
2.
CHECK WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL FUNCTIONS
(a) Check the wireless door lock control function using the door control transmitter module set subassembly.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Wireless door lock/unlock operates normally.
Wireless door lock/unlock does not operate normally.
2/6
8/6/12
GO TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
3.
CHECK WIRELESS ANSWER-BACK OPERATION
(a) Check the wireless answer-back operation using the door control transmitter module set subassembly.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Only wireless door lock buzzer answer-back does not occur.
Only hazard warning light answer-back does not occur.
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS OPERATION
4.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER)

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Wireless Buzzer
Turns the wireless door lock buzzer
ON/OFF
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
3/6
8/6/12
Wireless door lock buzzer does not turn on/off.
Wireless door lock buzzer turns on/off.
ECU)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER - MAIN BODY
ECU)
5.
(a) Disconnect the A63 wireless door lock buzzer connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A63-1 (+) - A73-1 (BZR)
Always
Below 1
A63-2 (-) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
A63-1 (+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
6.
REPLACE WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER
(a) Temporarily replace the wireless door lock buzzer with a new one
NEXT
4/6
8/6/12
7.
CHECK WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER OPERATION
(a) Check the operation of the wireless answer-back function.

OK:
Wireless answer-back function operates normally.
8.
NG
OK
END (WIRELESS DOOR LOCK BUZZER WAS
GATEWAY ECU)
DEFECTIVE)
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS OPERATION
(a) Check that the hazard warning light blinks when the hazard warning signal switch is pressed.
OK:
Hazard warning light signal is normally.
NG
GO TO LIGHTING SYSTEM (PROBLEM

SYMPTOMS TABLE)
OK
9.
assembly.
5/6
8/6/12
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3B-14 - MB-3 (HZR)
Always
Below 1
3B-16 - MB-3 (HZR)
Always
Below 1
NG
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
6/6
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: Only Wireless Control Function is Inoperativ
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Z4T03ZX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: Only Wireless Control Function is
Inoperative (2013 FR-S)
Only Wireless Control Function is Inoperative
DESCRIPTION
The door control receiver receives signals from the transmitter and sends these signals to the main body
ECU (network gateway ECU). The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) then controls all doors by
sending lock/unlock signals to each door.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION
(a) When the door control switch on the power window regulator master switch assembly is
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Z4T03ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/11
8/6/12
operated, check that the locked doors unlock
OK:
Locked doors unlock.
NG
GO TO POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM
OK
2.
CHECK KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM
(a) Check that the key reminder warning buzzer operates normally
OK:
Key reminder warning buzzer operates normally.
NG
GO TO KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM
OK
3.
SWITCH TO SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE
(a) Switch to self-diagnostic mode by operating the ignition key cylinder.

(1) Insert the key into the ignition key cylinder and remove it.
(2) Within 5 seconds after the key is removed, insert it into the ignition key cylinder and then
turn the ignition switch to ON then off once. (End in off)
(3) Within 30 seconds after turning the ignition switch off, perform the following 9 times: Turn
the ignition switch to ON then off. (End in off)
NOTICE:
If the system fails to enter self-diagnostic mode, the system will return to normal mode.
HINT:
Turning the ignition switch to ON after the procedure above has been completed will end the selfdiagnostic mode.
2/11
8/6/12
(b) Check that the system has switched to self-diagnostic

mode by checking the interior light output pattern.
(c) Check that the system has switched to self-diagnostic

mode by checking the wireless door lock buzzer output
pattern.
OK:
Flash pattern is same as illustration on left.
NEXT
4.
CHECK BY SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE
(a) Check the diagnostic outputs when the door control transmitter module set sub-assembly
switch is held down. The diagnostic outputs can be checked by the interior light and wireless
door lock buzzer patterns.
3/11
8/6/12
Result
5.
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Normal wave (light flash pattern and buzzer pattern) is output.
Unmatching recognition code is output.
No diagnosis outputs
CHECK RESPONSE OF DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER

ECU)
(RESPONSE)
(a) Check that the system can be switched to rewrite mode or add mode, and that a recognition
code can be registered.
OK:
Recognition code can be registered.
4/11
8/6/12
REPLACE DOOR CONTROL TRANSMITTER
6.
NG
MODULE SET SUB-ASSEMBLY
OK
END
CHECK RESPONSE OF DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER (RESPONSE)
(a) Prepare the door control transmitter from another vehicle.

(b) Press and hold down the door control transmitter switch.
(c) Check that an unmatching recognition code is output.
OK:
Unmatching recognition code is output.
NG
CHECK WAVE ENVIRONMENT
OK
7.
INSPECT TRANSMITTER BATTERY (VOLTAGE)
(a) Remove the battery from the door control transmitter module that does not operate. Attach a
lead wire (0.6 mm (0.0236 in.)) or less in diameter including wire sheath) with tape or equivalent
to the negative terminal
.
NOTICE:
Do not wrap the lead wire around the terminal, wedge it between terminals, or solder it. The
terminal may be deformed or damaged, and the battery will not be able to be installed
correctly.
*1
Lead Wire
5/11
8/6/12
(b) Carefully pull the lead wire out from the position shown in the illustration and install the
previously removed transmitter battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the transmitter battery, before starting work, remove any static electricity that
has built up by touching, for example, the vehicle to prevent the door control transmitter
module set from being damaged.

table below.
HINT:
When measuring the battery voltage, press one of the
transmitter switches.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
SWITCH CONDITION
CONNECTION
Battery positive (+) Battery negative (-)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Door control transmitter

lock or unlock switch
pushed
2.5 to 3.2 V
*a
8.
GND
NG
REPLACE TRANSMITTER BATTERY
OK

REPLACE TRANSMITTER BATTERY
(a) Replace the transmitter battery
NEXT
9.
CHECK BY SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE
(a) Inspect the diagnostic outputs when the door control transmitter module set sub-assembly
6/11
8/6/12
switch is held down. The diagnostic outputs can be checked by the flash patterns of the interior
lights and the buzzer patterns of the wireless door lock buzzer.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Normal wave (light flash pattern and buzzer pattern) is output.
Unmatching recognition code is output

No diagnosis outputs
10.

END (TRANSMITTER BATTERY IS DEFECTIVE)
CHECK WAVE ENVIRONMENT
(a) Bring the transmitter near the door control receiver, and perform a wireless operation check.
OK:
Wireless functions operate normally.
7/11
8/6/12
HINT:
When the transmitter is brought near the door control receiver, the possibility of wave interference
decreases, and it can be determined if wave interference is causing the problem symptom.
If the inspection result is that the problem only occurs in certain locations or times of day, the
possibility of wave interference is high. Also, added vehicle components may cause wave
interference. If installed, remove them and perform the operation check.
NG
AFFECTED BY WAVE INTERFERENCE
OK
11.
INSPECT DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER (POWER SOURCE, GROUND)

(b) Measure the resistance and voltage according to the
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
H28-7 (+B) - Body
ground

Always
11 to 14 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
H28-12 (GND) - Body

ground
Always
Below 1
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
8/11
8/6/12
OK
12.
INSPECT DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER (OUTPUT)
(a) Reconnect the H28 door control receiver connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONNECTION
H28-4 (RDA)
- Body
ground
SWITCH CONDITION
Ignition switch off, all doors closed

and door control transmitter
switch off
and door control transmitter
switch on
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
11 to 14 V
pulse
generation
*a

(Door Control Receiver)
NG
OK
13.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU) DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER)
(b) Disconnect the H28 door control receiver connector.
9/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D6-7 (RDA) - H28-4 (RDA)
Always
Below 1
D6-6 (PRG) - H28-5 (PRG)
Always
Below 1
D6-7 (RDA) or H28-4 (RDA) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D6-6 (PRG) or H28-5 (PRG) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
14.
(a) Temporarily replace the door control receiver with a new or normally functioning one
NEXT
15.
(a) Perform the Registration procedures
NEXT
16.
CHECK DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER (OPERATION)
(a) Check that the doors can be locked and unlocked by using the transmitter LOCK and UNLOCK
switches.
OK:
Doors can be locked and unlocked with transmitter.
NG

GATEWAY ECU)
10/11
8/6/12
OK
END (DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER IS

DEFECTIVE)
11/11
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WRD00FX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. FUNCTIONS AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
(a) This wireless door lock control function operates only when the following 3 conditions are met:
(1) There is no key in the ignition key cylinder.
(2) The power door lock system is functioning normally.
(3) The function is not disabled by customization.
(b) The operating range differs depending on the situation.
(1) The operating range differs depending on the user, the way the transmitter is held and the
location.
(2) In certain areas, the operating range will be reduced due to the vehicle body shape and the
influence of the surrounding environment.
(3) The transmitter's faint electric waves may be affected if the area has strong electric waves or
noise. The transmitter's operating range may be reduced or the transmitter may not function.
(4) When the battery weakens, the operating range is reduced or the transmitter may not
function.
HINT:
If the transmitter has had prolonged exposure to direct sunlight, such as being left on the instrument
panel, the battery may weaken or other problems may occur.
2. CHECK WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL FUNCTIONS

HINT:
The switches described below transmit signals and are built into the door control transmitter.
The transmitter's operating range must be taken into account while checks are being made.
(a) Make sure that the vehicle is in a condition in which the wireless control functions can be operated
(see above).
(b) Check basic functions.
(1) Check that all doors lock when lock switch is pressed.
(2) Check that the driver door unlocks when the unlock switch is pressed once, and unlocks all
doors when pressed twice within 5 seconds.
(3) Check that the luggage compartment door opens when the luggage open switch is held down
for 0.8 seconds or more.
(c) Check the chattering prevention function.
(1) When a switch is pressed, check that the corresponding operation occurs only once. When the
switch is held down, check that the corresponding operation occurs only once and does not
repeatedly activate. When the switch is pressed at 1-second intervals, check that the
corresponding operation activates once for each press of the switch.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WRD00FX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
(d) Check the automatic locking function.

(1) When all doors are unlocked with the unlock switch and none of the doors are opened or
locked within 30 seconds, check that the doors are relocked automatically.
(e) Check the switch operation fail-safe function.
(1) If the key is in the ignition key cylinder, check that the doors cannot be locked by the lock
switch. However, this does not apply when the system is in recognition code registration
mode.
(f) Check the door ajar warning function.
(1) Check that the wireless door lock buzzer sounds for approximately 5 seconds when the lock
switch is pressed with any of the doors ajar or open.
(g) Check the answer-back (hazard warning light) function.
(1) When the lock switch is pressed, check that the hazard warning lights flash once and all doors
are locked.
(2) When the unlock switch is pressed, check that the hazard warning lights flash twice and all
doors are unlocked.
(h) Check the answer-back (wireless door lock buzzer) function.
(1) When the lock switch is pressed, check that the buzzer sounds once simultaneously with the
locking operation of all doors.
(2) When the unlock switch is pressed once, check that the buzzer sounds twice simultaneously
with the unlocking operation of the driver door.
(3) When the luggage compartment door is opened by wireless operation, the wireless door lock
buzzer sounds.
(i) Check the panic alarm control function
(1) Check that the horn sounds, the headlights and taillights flash and the interior lights remain on
(when the light switch is turned to the door position) for 60 seconds by the theft alarm function
when the panic switch is held down for 0.8 seconds or more. Also, check that the horn stops
sounding and the lights stop flashing when any switch of the transmitter is pressed.
(j) Check the vehicle position sensing function*
(1) If the following conditions are met 3 times within 5 seconds, the vehicle position sensing
function will sound the horn once and flash the hazard warning lights 3 times.
Ignition switch off
Key is not inserted into the ignition key cylinder
All doors and luggage compartment door closed
Door control transmitter lock switch pressed
*: The default setting for the vehicle position sensing function is off.
(k) Check the illuminated entry function.
(1) When all doors are locked and the unlock switch is pressed, check that the map light
illuminates (when the light switch is in the DOOR position) and all doors are unlocked.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WRD00FX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XX302FX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XX302FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XX502MX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Wireless Door Lock Control
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Only wireless control function inoperative
Proceed to "Only wireless control function

inoperative"
Only answer-back function does not

operate normally
Proceed to "No answer-back"

Perform the operation check
The automatic lock function does not

operate normally
Unlock warning switch circuit

Instrument panel junction block assembly

The illuminated entry function only does
not operate
Lighting system

Only door ajar warning function does not Door courtesy switch circuit
operate

Lighting system (int) (interior lights)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XX502MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
Only panic alarm function does not

operate
Lighting system (ext) (headlights, taillights, hazard

lights)
Horn system
Wire harness or connector (vehicle horn - main body
ECU (network gateway ECU))

Only luggage compartment door open
function does not operate
Door control transmitter module set sub-assembly

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XX502MX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: REGISTRATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 M
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000023D3038X
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: REGISTRATION (2013 FR-S)
REGISTRATION
HINT:
Register the recognition code when replacing the door control transmitter or the door control
receiver.
The Add mode is used to retain the already registered codes while registering a new recognition
codes. This mode is used when adding a transmitter. If the number of registered codes exceeds 7
the previously registered code will be cleared in order, starting from the code registered first.
Rewrite mode is used to clear all the previously registered codes and register only new recognition
codes. This mode is used when exchanging the transmitter or the door control receiver for new
one.
Confirmation mode is used to confirm how many recognition codes have already been registered
before an additional registration of a recognition code.
Prohibition mode is used to clear all the registered codes and cancel the wireless door lock
function. Use this mode when the transmitter is lost.
All of the following registration procedures must be performed in order.
1. REGISTRATION OF RECOGNITION CODE (USING TECHSTREAM)

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Utility / Wireless Code Registration.
(e) Press both lock and unlock switches within 1 to 1.5 seconds.
(f) Press either switch for more than 1 second within 3 seconds.
(g) Perform either of the following to complete the registration of recognition codes:
Use a Techstream to send a completion command.
Disconnect the Techstream.
(h) Perform the following after registration is completed.
(1) Perform the wireless door lock control operation check
HINT:
If the wireless door lock control does not operate, perform the registration procedure again.
1/1
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XX8043X
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. WIRELESS DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) This system locks and unlocks the vehicle doors remotely. The wireless control system has the
following features:
The door control receiver performs the code identification procedure and the main body
ECU (network gateway ECU) operates the door lock control. A serial data link is provided
for communication between the receiver and main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
A key-integrated type transmitter is used and it contains the following 4 switches: the
door lock switch, door unlock switch, luggage open switch and panic switch.

COMPONENT
Door control transmitter

module set subassembly
Front door
courtesy light
switch LH/RH
Luggage door
courtesy light
switch
FUNCTION
Has lock, unlock, luggage open and panic switches.
Transmits weak radio waves (recognition codes and function
codes) to the door control receiver.
Illuminates indicator light (LED) during transmission.
Receives weak radio waves from the door control transmitter module set
sub-assembly and sends them to the main body ECU (network gateway
ECU).
Turns on when a door is opened and turns off when it is closed.

Outputs door status signals (open or closed) to the main body
Front door lock

assembly LH
Built-in motor locks or unlocks door.
Front door lock
assembly RH
Main body ECU (network Sends wireless door lock control signals in response to the code data from
gateway ECU)
the door control receiver and signals from each ECU.
3. SYSTEM FUNCTION
(a) The door control transmitter module set sub-assembly has door lock switch, door unlock switch,
luggage open switch and panic switch. Operating these switches activates each function. The
wireless door lock control system has the following functions:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XX8043X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
HINT:
The default setting of the functions are on. Some of these functions can be customized
FUNCTION
All door lock
function
All door unlock
function
(Unlock 2
operation)
OUTLINE
Pressing the lock switch locks all doors.
Pressing the unlock switch twice within 5 seconds unlocks all the doors after the
driver door is unlocked.
Luggage
compartment
door open
Pressing the luggage door open switch of the door control transmitter module set
sub-assembly for longer than about 0.8 seconds opens the luggage compartment
door.
Answer-back
function
(Hazard
warning light)
Hazard warning lights flash once when doors are locked, and flash twice when doors
are unlocked to indicate that the request has been completed.
Answer-back
function
(Wireless door
Wireless door lock buzzer sound once when doors are locked, and sound twice when
doors are unlocked to indicate that the request has been completed.
lock buzzer))
Pressing the panic switch of the door control transmitter module set sub-assembly for
longer than about 0.8 seconds causes the following alarms to activate:
Panic alarm
function
Sound the vehicle horns.

Blinks the headlights, hazard warning lights and taillights.
Illuminates the interior lights (when the interior light door switch on).
While the panic alarm is operating, pressing any switch of the door control transmitter
cancels the alarm operation.
Vehicle Position The vehicle position sensing function is a function that sounds the vehicle horn and
Sensing
flashes the hazard warning lights by operating the door control transmitter module
Function*
set sub-assembly in order to indicate the vehicle's position to the user.
Door ajar
The buzzer sounds when the lock switch is pressed when any of the doors are ajar,
warning
function
and it sounds for 10 seconds continuously. The buzzer stops when all doors are
closed or the unlock switch is pressed.
Automatic
If no doors are opened within 30 seconds after being unlocked by wireless door lock
locking function
control, all doors are locked again automatically.
Illuminated
When all the doors are locked, pressing unlock causes the interior light to come on
entry function
simultaneously with the unlock operation.

The system enters self-diagnostic mode under the following conditions.
Self-diagnostic
function
If the door control receiver receives normal radio waves from the door
control transmitter module set sub-assembly when the system is in
diagnostic mode, it flashes the interior light in a normal pattern that
2/3
8/6/12
corresponds to the function of each switch.

Transmitter
recognition
code
registration
function
Enables 4 modes for registering (writing and storing) transmitter recognition codes in
EEPROM, built into door control receiver.
*: The default setting for the vehicle position sensing function is off.
4. TRANSMITTER RECOGNITION CODE REGISTRATION FUNCTION

(a) The table below shows the 3 ID registration function modes by which up to 6 different codes can
be registered. The codes are electronically registered (written and stored) in the EEPROM that is
contained in the door control receiver.
MODE
FUNCTION
Adds a newly received code while preserving any previously registered codes.
Add mode
This mode is used when adding a new transmitter. If the number of registered codes
exceeds 7 the oldest registered code is cleared first.
Rewrite
mode
Clears all previously registered codes and registers only newly input codes.
Confirmation Confirms how many codes are currently registered. When adding a new code, this mode
mode
is used to check how many codes already are stored.
5. CONDITIONS THAT WIRELESS FUNCTIONS DO NOT OPERATE

(a) Lock function will not operate when either of the following conditions is met:
Any of the doors is open.
The key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
(b) Unlock function will not operate when the following condition is met:
The key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XXA039X
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XXA039X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001MAP01XX
Title: DOOR LOCK: WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001MAP01XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
assembly.
2/5
8/6/12
(c) Measure the resistance and voltage between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors
and body ground.
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING
TERMINAL
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
MB-1 (BECU) - Body
None - Body
Battery power
ground
ground
supply
MB-8 (IG) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
Ignition switch
power supply
MB-9 (ACC) - Body
None - Body
ground
ground
MB-11 (GND) - Body

ground
None - Body
ground
None - Body
ground
Always
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ACC
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
Battery power
supply
Always
11 to 14 V
ACC power supply

D5-22 (KSW) - Body
ground
BR - Body
ground
Unlock warning
switch input
cylinder (off)
cylinder (on)
D6-1 (GND) - Body

ground
B - Body
ground
A73-4 (GND) - Body
B-Y - Body
ground
ground
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
assembly.
(f) Measure the voltage and resistance, according to the valve(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL WIRING
NO.
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
3A-28 Body
YBody
ground
ground
3B-13 -
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Driver side door courtesy

light switch input
Driver side door open
Below 1 V
Driver side door closed
11 to 14 V
L-
Passenger side door
Passenger side door open
Below 1 V
Body
ground
Body
ground
courtesy light switch

input
Passenger side door closed
11 to 14 V
3D-26 Body
SB Body
Luggage compartment
door courtesy light switch
Luggage compartment door open
Below 1 V
ground
ground
input
Luggage compartment door closed
11 to 14 V
Door control switch not pushed
Below 1 V
3/5
8/6/12
3B-2 -
Y-
Door lock motor lock drive
Body
Body
output (for driver side)
ground
ground
3B-3 -
L-
Lock side of door control switch

pushed
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
Lock side of door control switch
Body
Body
output (for passenger
ground
ground
side)
3D-11 -
R-G -
Door lock motor unlock
Body
Body
drive output (for driver
ground
ground
side)
Unlock side of door control switch
3B-4 -
L-W -
Door lock motor unlock
Body
Body
drive output (for
ground
ground
passenger side)
Unlock side of door control switch
3B-6 -
G-
Body
Body
output (for luggage
ground
ground
compartment door)
pushed
pushed
pushed
Luggage door open button of door
control transmitter module set sub-
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
assembly not pressed

Luggage door open button of door
control transmitter module set sub-
11 to 14 V
assembly pressed
A73-1
(BZR) Body
ground
D6-6
(PRG) Body
ground
D6-7
(RDA) Body
ground
VBody
ground
RBody
ground
VBody
ground
Wireless door lock buzzer

signal
Signal output to door

control receiver
Signal input from door

control receiver
Wireless door lock buzzer off
Below 1 V
Wireless door lock buzzer on
Pulse generation
Key inserted in ignition key cylinder

Key pulled out of ignition key
11 to 14 V
Pulse generation
cylinder
11 to 14 V

and transmitter switch not pressed
11 to 14 V

and transmitter switch pressed
Pulse generation
2. CHECK DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER

4/5
8/6/12
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
H28-1 (IG) - Body

ground
WIRING
COLOR
W - Body
ground

supply
CONDITION
Ignition switch
ON
Ignition switch
off
H28-7 (+B) - Body
Y-R - Body
ground
ground
H28-12 (GND) - Body
B - Body
ground
ground
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
Always
11 to 14 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
(c) Reconnect the H28 door control receiver connector.

TERMINAL
WIRING TERMINAL DESCRIPTION
NO.
(SYMBOL)
COLOR
H28-5
(PRG) Body
ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
P-
Signal input from main
Key inserted in ignition key cylinder
11 to 14 V
Body
ground
body ECU (network

gateway ECU)
Key pulled out of ignition key

cylinder
Pulse generation
11 to 14 V
R-
Signal output to main
Body
body ECU (network
and door control transmitter switch

not pressed
ground
gateway ECU)

H28-4
(RDA) Body
ground

and door control transmitter switch
11 to 14 V
Pulse generation
pressed
5/5
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XM100UX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XM100UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE NO. 3 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the No. 3 heater

control sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the bulb.
3. REMOVE HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 4 claws and remove the heater control

sub-assembly.
4. REMOVE NO. 1 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the No. 1 heater

control sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the bulb.
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000314R02FX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NO. 3 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the heater control assembly resistance.
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
2(B) - 3(A/C)
A/C switch OFF
10 k or higher
2(B) - 4(LED-)
A/C switch OFF
10 k or higher
3(A/C) - 4(LED-)
Always
Below 1
2(B) - 3(A/C)
A/C switch ON
Below 1
2(B) - 4(LED-)
A/C switch ON
Below 1
5-6
Always
Below 1
*1
*a
A/C Switch
(No. 3 heater control sub-assembly)
(c) Check that the A/C Switch illumination.

OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000314R02FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
SPECIFIED CONDITION
illuminates

(d) Check that the indicator light.
Standard:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A/C switch OFF
go out
A/C switch ON
come on
2. INSPECT HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the heater control assembly resistance.
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
each terminal - 5(E)
A/C switch OFF
10 k or higher
10(L) - 5(E)
A/C switch LO
Below 1
10(L) - 5(E) - 3(M&M1)
A/C switch LO - M1
Below 1
10(L) - 5(E) - 3(M&M1)
A/C switch M1
Below 1
10(L) - 5(E) - 3(M&M1) - 6(M2)
A/C switch M1 - M2
Below 1
10(L) - 5(E) - 6(M2)
A/C switch M2
Below 1
10(L) - 5(E) - 6(M2) - 1(H)
A/C switch M2 - HI
Below 1
10(L) - 5(E) - 1(H)
A/C switch HI
Below 1
2/4
8/6/12
*a
OFF
*b
LO
*c
M1
*d
M2
*e
HI
*f
(heater control sub-assembly)
(c) Check the heater control assembly resistance.
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
2(RDEF+) - 4(RDEF-)
Rr DEF switch OFF
10 k or higher
2(RDEF+) - 4(RDEF-)
Rr DEF switch ON
Below 1
*1
*a
Rr DEF switch
(heater control sub-assembly)
(e) Check that the Rr DEF switch illumination.

OK:
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3/4
8/6/12
illuminates

(f) Check that the indicator light.
Standard:
TESTER CONNECTION
Battery positive (+) 6(IND+)
Battery negative (-) 8(IND-)
Battery positive (+) 6(IND+)
Battery negative (-) 8(IND-)
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Rr DEF switch OFF
go out
Rr DEF switch ON
come on
3. INSPECT NO. 1 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check that the FRS switch illumination.
OK:
MEASUREMENT
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
CONDITION

illuminates
*1 FRS switch
*a

(b) Check that the indicator light.

Standard:
TESTER CONNECTION
Battery positive (+) 5(REC)
Battery negative (-) 4(E)
Battery positive (+) 5(REC)
Battery negative (-) 4(E)
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
FRS switch OFF
go out
FRS switch ON
come on
4/4
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XM002AX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) After aligning with the cables, engage the 2 claws and connect the heater control cable subassembly. (for RH side).
(b) After aligning with the cables, engage the 2 claws and connect the heater control cable subassembly. (for LH side).
(c) Connect each connector.
(d) Engage the 6 claws.
(e) Install the air conditioning control assembly with the 2 screws.
2. INSTALL NO. 2 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL GARNISH

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XM002AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL NO. 1 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the bulb.
(b) Engage the 2 claws and install the No. 1 heater control
sub-assembly.
2. INSTALL HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 4 claws and install the heater control subassembly.
3. INSTALL NO. 3 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
(a) Install the bulb.
(b) Engage the 2 claws and install the No. 3 heater control
sub-assembly.
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XM202AX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

3. REMOVE NO. 2 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL GARNISH
(a) Remove the 2 screws and disengage the 6 claws.
(b) Disconnect each connector and air conditioning control

assembly.
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PANEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(c) Disengage the 2 claws and the cable assembly (for RH

side).
HINT:
Setting the temperature adjustment dial to MAX HOT is useful
when replacing the air conditioner unit assembly, and makes
positioning easier when attaching cables.
(d) Disengage the 2 claws and the cable assembly (for LH

side) and remove the air conditioning control assembly.
HINT:
Setting the blower dial to FACE is useful when replacing the
air conditioner unit assembly, and makes positioning easier
when attaching cables.
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (201
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000202W04YX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
(2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the wire harness.
(1) Disconnect the air air conditioner tube and accessory assembly connector.
(2) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance of the
wire harness side connector.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
2(E) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
2(E) - 4(B)
Ignition switch
ON
Below 1
*a

(air conditioner tube and accessory assembly)
(b) Check the air conditioning pressure sensor.

(1) Install a manifold gauge set.
(2) Apply pressure on the sensor as indicated in the table
below, and check the resistance between the
terminals.
*1
Sensor Part
TESTER
CONNECTION
1(AC) - 4(B)
CONDITION
0 kPa (No Pressure applied)
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
10 k or
higher
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (201
1(AC) - 4(B)
1520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm2, 221 psi)
Below 1
2(E) - 3(ACP) 0 kPa (No Pressure applied)
10 k or
higher
22.5 kPa (0.23 kgf/cm2, 33.0 psi)

2(E) - 3(ACP) or more and below 3140 kPa (32
kgf/cm2, 455 psi)
Below 1
2(E) - 3(ACP)
3140 kPa (32 kgf/cm2, 455 psi) or

more
10 k or
higher
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: Air Conditioning Compressor Magnetic Clut
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XCQ06ZX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: Air Conditioning Compressor
Magnetic Clutch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Air Conditioning Compressor Magnetic Clutch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the No. 3 heater control sub-assembly is turned on, a magnetic clutch on signal is sent from the AC
terminal of the ECM. Then, the engine room junction block assembly turns on to operate the magnetic
clutch assembly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XCQ06ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/10
8/6/12
1.

(d) Enter the following menus: Body / Main body / Date List.
(e) Check the value(s) by referring to the table below.
Main body
TESTER DISPLAY
A/C SW Input
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
ON: A/C switch on
A/C switch status / ON or OFF
OFF: A/C switch off
OK:
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NO. 3 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY POWER SOURCE)
(a) Measure the voltage according to the valve(s) in the

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Ignition
2/10
8/6/12
D21-2(B) - Body
switch on
ground
Blower
switch: on
10 to 16 V
*1
Component with Component with harness connected

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
INSPECT NO. 3 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the No. 3 heater control sub-assembly
(b) Inspect the No. 3 heater control sub-assembly
NG
REPLACE NO. 3 HEATER CONTROL SUBASSEMBLY
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NO. 3 HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY - MAIN

BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))
(a) Disconnect the D21 No. 3 heater control sub-assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3/10
8/6/12
D6-17 - D21-3(A/C)
Always
Below 1
D6-17 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
5.
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
GATEWAY ECU)
(a) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine and ETC / Date List.
(b) Check the value(s) by referring to the table below.
Engine
TESTER DISPLAY
A/C Pressure Normal SW Pressure Switch status / ON or OFF
NORMAL CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

ON: A/C on
OFF: A/C off
OK:
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
6.
CHECK REFRIGERANT VOLUME
(a) Check the refrigerant volume
NG
CHARGE REFRIGERANT
4/10
8/6/12
OK
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY

ASSEMBLY - POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the A7 air conditioning tube and accessory

assembly connector.
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONNECTION
A7-4(B) - Body
ground
CONDITION
Ignition switch
on
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
10 to 16 V
*1
Component without Component with harness connected

(Air conditioning tube and accessory assembly)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8.

ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)
TESTER CONNECTION
A7-2(E) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
5/10
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATER RELAY - AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND
ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY)
(a) Remove the heater relay from the engine room relay
block and junction block.
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
2 - A7-1(AC)
Always
Below 1
2 - Body ground
Always
10k or higher
*1
Component without relay installed

(Engine Room Relay Block)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
10.

ASSEMBLY - ECM)
6/10
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A7-3(ACP) - A33-8(ACP)
Always
Below 1
A7-3(ACP) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
11.
INSPECT AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the air conditioning tube and accessory assembly
12.
NG
REPLACE AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND

ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY
OK
REPLACE ECM
(a) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine and ETC / Date List.
(b) Check the value(s) by referring to the table below.
Engine
TESTER
MEASUREMENT
NORMAL
DISPLAY
ITEM/RANGE
CONDITION
A/C switch
A/C
Signal
status / ON or
OFF
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
ON: A/C
switch on
The air conditioning control assembly sends the A/C switch
OFF: A/C
signal to the ECM via CAN communication.
switch off
OK:
B
7/10
8/6/12
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATER

RELAY - COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH)
13.
INSPECT HEATER RELAY
(a) Remove the heater relay from the engine room relay block and junction block.
(b) Inspect the heater relay
NG
REPLACE HEATER RELAY
OK
14.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATER RELAY - POWER SOURCE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
5 - Body ground
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Ignition switch
off
Below 1 V
Ignition switch
on
10 to 16V
*1

8/10
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
15.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATER RELAY - ECM)

(b) Measure the resistance according to the valve(s) in the
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 - A35-35(AC)
Always
Below 1
1 - Body ground
Always
10k or higher
*1

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
16.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATER RELAY - COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET

CLUTCH)
9/10
8/6/12

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
C17-1(MG+) - 3
Always
Below 1
C17-1(MG+) - Body
ground
Always
10 k or higher
*1

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
17.
INSPECT COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH
(a) Inspect the compressor with magnet clutch
NG
REPLACE COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET

CLUTCH
OK
REPLACE ECM
10/10
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: Blower Motor Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TS806CX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: Blower Motor Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Blower Motor Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the heater control Sub-assembly is operated, the Heater relay will turn on to allow current to flow
to the blower motor and then the motor will start rotating. Operating the heater control Sub-assembly
switches the current flow between the blower resistor and body ground, thus, shifting the operating
speed of the blower motor.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TS806CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
1.
INSPECT HEATER BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
(a) Remove the heater blower motor relay.

(b) Inspect the heater blower motor relay
NG
REPLACE HEATER BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
OK
2.
INSPECT BLOWER MOTOR WITH FAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the A31 blower motor with fan sub-assembly connector.
(b) Inspect the blower motor with fan sub-assembly
NG
.
REPLACE BLOWER MOTOR WITH FAN SUBASSEMBLY
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATER BLOWER MOTOR RELAY - BLOWER

MOTOR WITH FAN SUB-ASSEMBLY)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A65-3 - A31-2
Always
Below 1
A65-3 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
2/6
8/6/12
4.
INSPECT HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the heater control sub-assembly
(b) Inspect the heater control sub-assembly
NG
REPLACE HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATER BLOWER MOTOR RELAY - HEATER

CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the D23 heater control sub-assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A65-2 - D23-10
Always
Below 1
A65-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BLOWER MOTOR WITH FAN SUB-ASSEMBLY HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY)
3/6
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A31-1 - D23-1
Always
Below 1
A31-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY - BODY

GROUND)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
D23-5(E) - Body ground
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
NG

CONNECTOR
NG
REPLACE BLOWER RESISTOR
OK
8.
INSPECT BLOWER RESISTOR
(a) Remove the blower resister
(b) Inspect the blower resistor
OK
4/6
8/6/12
9.
CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (HEATER CONTROL SUB-ASSEMBLY - BLOWER

RESISTOR)
(a) Disconnect the A26 blower resister connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D23-3(M&M1) - A26-2(M&M1)
Always
Below 1
D23-6(M2) - A26-3(M2)
Always
Below 1
D23-3(M&M1) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D23-6(M2) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
10.
CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (BLOWER MOTOR WITH FAN SUB-ASSEMBLY BLOWER RESISTOR)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A31-1 - A26-1(H)
Always
Below 1
A31-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5/6
8/6/12
11.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BLOWER RESISTOR - BODY GROUND)
TESTER CONNECTION
A26-4(L) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
6/6
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001GFL04DX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
and other items to be read without removing any parts. This non-intrusive inspection can be very useful
because intermittent conditions or signals may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed. Reading
the Data List information early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time.
NOTICE:

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body ECU / Data List.
(e) Check the value(s) by referring to the table below.
Main Body ECU
TESTER DISPLAY
Evaporator Fin
Sensor Voltage
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
NORMAL CONDITION
Evaporator
temperature sensor /
Min.: 0V
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Actual evaporator temperature

displayed Sensor Voltage
Max.: 21.4V
A/C SW Input
A/C SW Output
A/C Switch Input

OFF or ON
A/C Switch Output
OFF or ON
Engine
TESTER
DISPLAY
A/C
Pressure
Normal SW
A/C Signal
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
A/C Pressure Normal
Switch
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
A/C switch operated: ON

(when switch is pressed)
OFF or ON
A/C Signal /
OFF or ON
A/C switch not operated:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001GFL04DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
A/C
Magnetic
Clutch
Relay
OFF (when switch is not

pressed)
For use when engine stall,

starting problems or rough idle
is present.
A/C Magnetic Clutch Relay

/
OFF or ON
Compensation flow rate

according to air conditioner
Air
Conditioner load /
FB Val
Min.: -150
Max.: 149.99
2. ACTIVE TEST
early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be displayed while
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test.
(e) Check the operation by referring to the table below.
Engine
TESTER DISPLAY
A/C Magnetic Clutch Relay
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
OFF, ON
A/C system operation
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001GFL04DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOO
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PM609FX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the air conditioning system.
1.
NEXT
2.
(a) Inspect the battery voltage.

Standard Voltage:
10 to 16 V
NEXT
3.
(a) Use the Techstream to check if the CAN communication system is functioning normally.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN DTC is output
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PM609FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOO
4.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Go to step 6
5.

.
.
(c) On-vehicle Inspection.

(d) Inspection.
NEXT
6.
NEXT
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PM609FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000031BK02JX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000031BK02JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Y5Q09MX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. DO NOT HANDLE REFRIGERANT IN AN ENCLOSED

AREA OR NEAR AN OPEN FLAME
*a
Charging Cylinder
2. ALWAYS WEAR EYE PROTECTION

3. BE CAREFUL NOT TO GET LIQUID REFRIGERANT IN
YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR SKIN
If liquid refrigerant gets in your eyes or on your skin:
(a) Wash the area with lots of cold water.
CAUTION:
Do not rub your eyes or skin.
(b) Apply clean petroleum jelly to the skin.

(c) Go immediately to a hospital or see a physician for
professional treatment.
4. NEVER HEAT CONTAINER OR EXPOSE THE CONTAINER TO AN OPEN FLAME

5. BE CAREFUL NOT TO DROP CONTAINER OR APPLY PHYSICAL SHOCKS TO IT
6. DO NOT OPERATE COMPRESSOR WITHOUT ENOUGH REFRIGERANT IN REFRIGERANT
SYSTEM
If there is not enough refrigerant in the A/C system, oil lubrication will be insufficient and the compressor
may be damaged.
Necessary care should be taken to avoid this.
7. DO NOT OPEN HIGH PRESSURE MANIFOLD VALVE

WHILE COMPRESSOR IS OPERATING
(a) Open and close only the low pressure valve.
If the high pressure valve is opened, refrigerant flows in
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Y5Q09MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
the reverse direction causing the charging cylinder to

rupture.
*a
Wrong
*b
Okay
8. BE CAREFUL NOT TO OVERCHARGE SYSTEM WITH REFRIGERANT

If the system is overcharged with refrigerant, it causes problems such as insufficient cooling, poor fuel
economy, engine overheating, etc.
9. DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE AND COMPRESSOR WITH NO REFRIGERANT

CAUTION:
Doing so may damage inside the compressor because the compressor parts always move
regardless of whether the A/C system is turned on or off.
10. SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

(a) This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) such as the driver, front
passenger, side, and curtain shield airbags. Failure to carry out service operations in the correct
sequence could cause the SRS to unexpectedly deploy during servicing, possibly leading to a
serious accident. Before servicing (including removal or installation of parts, inspection or
replacement), be sure to read the precautionary notices
11. GENERAL PRECAUTION

(a) While using the battery during inspection, do not bring the positive (+) and negative (-) tester
probes too close to each other as a short circuit may occur.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Y5Q09MX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001O7X03IX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013
FR-S)

HINT:
Air Conditioning System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Blower motor circuit

Heater control sub-assembly
Air flow control: No blower operation
No. 1 heater control sub-assembly

Main body ECU (Network gateway ECU)
Switch operation not possible

Blower motor with fan sub-assembly
Air flow control: No blower operation

Blower Resistor
Air flow control: No blower control

Blower Resistor
Air flow control: Insufficient air flow

Refrigerant volume
Refrigerant pressure
Temperature control: Cooling effectiveness is poor
Cooler expansion valve

Compressor with magnet clutch
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001O7X03IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

Refrigerant volume
Refrigerant pressure
Air Conditioner tube and accessory
assembly
Temperature control: No cool air comes out
Air conditioning compressor magnetic
clutch circuit
Compressor with magnet clutch
Cooler expansion valve
No air inlet control
No. 1 air conditioning radiator damper

servo sub-assembly
Temperature adjustment not possible (temperature

cannot be changed)

Indicator does not come on

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001O7X03IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001O7U06TX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL
(a) The air conditioning system has the following controls.
CONTROL
Manual
Control
OUTLINE
The air conditioning control assembly controls the damper positions and blower speed in
accordance with the positions of the switches and dials (temperature control dial, blower
switch, mode control dial and inlet control switch).
Defroster
Defroster control logic is used to improve defroster performance.
Control
2. MODE POSITION AND DAMPER OPERATION

(a) Mode Position and Damper Operation
*1
Air Inlet Control Door
*2
Recirculated Air
*3
Fresh Air
*4
Blower Motor with Fan Sub-assembly
*5
No. 1 Cooler Evaporator Sub-assembly
*6
Air Mix Control Door
*7
Side Register
*8
Center Register
*9
Footwell Register Duct
*10 Mode Control Door
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001O7U06TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/8
8/6/12
*11 Front Defroster, Side Defroster
*12 Heater Radiator Unit Sub-assembly
*13 Passenger Side
*14 Driver Side
Functions of Main Dampers:

CONTROL
DAMPER
OPERATION
POSITION
DAMPER
POSITION
OPERATION
Air Inlet
Control
Damper
FRESH
Brings in fresh air.
RECIRCULATION
Recirculates internal air.
Air Mix
Control
Damper
MAX COLD to MAX

HOT Temperature
Setting
Varies the mixture ratio of warm air and cool air in order to
C - D (C' regulate the temperature continuously between hot and
D')
cold.
FACE
E, H,
Air blows out of the center register and side register ducts.
BI-LEVEL
F, H,
Air blows out of the center register, side register and

footwell register ducts.
Mode
Control
Door
FOOT
G, I,
Air blows out of the footwell register and side register

ducts. In addition, air blows out slightly from the front
defroster and side defroster.
FOOT AND
DEFROSTER
G, J,
DEFROSTER
G, K,
Defrosts the windshield through the front defroster, side

defroster and side register ducts, while air is also blown
out from footwell register ducts.
Defrosts the windshield through the front defroster, side
defroster and side register ducts.
3. AIR OUTLETS AND AIRFLOW VOLUME

(a) Air Outlets and Airflow Volume
2/8
8/6/12
INDICATION
MODE
FACE
FOOTWELL
CENTER
SIDE
DEFROSTER
FRONT
SIDE
FACE
BI-LEVEL
FOOT
FOOT AND DEFROSTER
F/D
The size of each circle indicates the ratio of airflow volume.
4. COMPRESSOR
(a) General:
(1) A compact and high performance scroll compressor with separator has been adopted.
3/8
8/6/12
(2) The scroll compressor with oil separator consists of a spirally wound fixed scroll and rotating
scroll that from a pair, and oil separator, and a magnetic clutch.
The fixed scroll is integrated with the housing. Because the rotation of the shaft causes the
rotating scroll to revolve while maintaining the same posture, the volume of the space that is
partitioned by both scrolls varies to perform the suction, compression, and the discharge of the
refrigerant gas.
A pin is attached behind the rotating scroll to prevent the autorotation of the rotating scroll,
allowing it only to revolve.
Locating the suction port directly above the scrolls enables direct suction, thus realizing
improved suction efficiency.
Containing a built-in oil separator, this compressor is able to separate the compressor oil that
is intermixed with the refrigerant and circulates in the refrigeration cycle, thus realizing a
reduction in the oil circulation rate.
4/8
8/6/12
*1
Fixed Scroll
*2
Rotating Scroll
*3
Pins
*4
Shaft
*5
Discharge Port
(3) A CS (Centrifugal with Shutter) type oil separator has been adopted to reduce the circulation
rate of the compressor oil that is intermixed with the refrigerant and circulates in the
refrigeration cycle.
This oil separator is provided with a cylindrical pipe in the separator case, enabling the
refrigerant gas that has been discharged through the discharge gas inlet to be separated into
refrigerant gas and oil through centrifugal force, and minimizing the outflow of the oil to the
discharge service port. As a result, the oil circulation rate has been reduced and makes energy
savings possible.
*1 Cooler Condenser Assembly and Modulator
*2 Cooler Expansion Valve
*3 Refrigerant Gas + Compressor Oil
*4 No.1 Cooler Evaporator Sub-assembly
*5 Oil
*6 Compressor Assembly
*7 Oil Separator
*a Oil Circulation Ratio of 4%
*b Oil Circulation Ratio of 1%
(b) Compressor with Magnet Clutch Operation

(1) As the capacity of the compression chamber, which is created between the rotating scroll and
the fixed scroll, increases in accordance with the revolution of the rotating scroll, refrigerant
gas is drawn in from the intake port.
(2) From the state at which the suction process has been completed, as the revolution of the
rotating scroll advances further, the capacity of the compression chamber decreases gradually.
5/8
8/6/12
Consequently, the refrigerant gas that has been drawn in becomes compressed gradually and
is sent to the center of the fixed scroll. The compression of the refrigerant gas is completed
when the rotating scroll completes approximately 2 revolutions.
(3) When the compression of the refrigerant gas is completed and the refrigerant pressure
becomes high, the refrigerant gas discharges through the discharge port located in the center
of the fixed scroll by pushing the discharge valve.
*1
Suction
*2
Discharge
*3
Compression
*4
Discharge Port
6/8
8/6/12
*5
Rotating Scroll
*7
Intake Port
*6
-
Fixed Scroll
-
(4) The refrigerant gas that is discharged from the discharge port flows by rotating around the
cylindrical pipe in the oil separator. At this time, the centrifugal force that is created during the
rotation separates the refrigerant gas and the compressor oil due to the difference in their
specific gravity. The refrigerant gas with the lighter specific gravity passes through the inside of
the pipe and travels from the discharge service port to the outside of the compressor. The
compressor oil with the heavier specific gravity is discharged through the oil discharge hole in
the shutter and is stored in the oil storage chamber. Then, the compressor oil is fed again into
the compressor and circulates inside the compressor.
*1
Refrigerant
*2
Shutter
*3
Refrigerant and Compressor Oil
*4
Compressor Oil
*5
Valve Chamber D
*6
Service Port
*7
Pipe
*8
Case
*9
Oil Discharge Hole
*10
Oil Storage Chamber
5. EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (NO. 1 COOLER THERMISTOR)

The evaporator temperature sensor (No. 1 cooler thermistor) detects the temperature of the cooled air
immediately past the evaporator in the form of resistance changes, and outputs this data to the main
body ECU (network gateway ECU).
6. Air Conditioning Pressure Switch (Airconditioner Tube Assembly)

The air conditioning pressure switch (airconditioner tube assembly) uses refrigerant pressure to output
7/8
8/6/12
an on/off signal to the ECM to control the compressor with magnet clutch.
8/8
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HZL04IX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HZL04IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
Communication Table
SENDER

ECU)
RECEIVER
ECM
SIGNAL
Prior A/C control request

signal
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HZL04IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
COMMUNICATION
LINE
CAN
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026DR05PX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. ECM
HINT:
Check from the rear of the connector while it is connected to the Air conditioning control assembly.
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
COLOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Engine running
A/C system operating
A33-8(ACP) - Body
ground
G - Body
ground
Air conditioning pressure

switch signal
Refrigerant pressure:
Abnormal
Engine running
A/C system operating
Refrigerant pressure:
Normal
A33- 18(CANL) - A3319(CANH)
B-P - O
CAN communication
system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000026DR05PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
Below 1 V
CAN communication
circuit
10 to 16 V
Pulse
generation
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FXE004X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXE004X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/6
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
5/6
8/6/12
6/6
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HLX057X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE NO. 1 AIR CONDITIONING RADIATOR DAMPER SERVO SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 screws and No. 1 air conditioning radiator

damper servo sub-assembly.
2. REMOVE HEATER COVER
(a) Remove the 3 screws and heater cover.
3. REMOVE HEATER RADIATOR UNIT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the screw and the clamp.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HLX057X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/8
8/6/12
(b) Remove the heater radiator unit sub-assembly as shown

4. REMOVE AIR FILTER CASE
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the air filter case.
5. REMOVE CLEAN AIR FILTER
(a) Remove the clean air filter as shown in the illustration.
6. REMOVE COOLING UNIT CASE
2/8
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 4 claws and remove the cooling unit case.
7. REMOVE COOLER EXPANSION VALVE
(a) Remove the gasket.
(b) Using a 4 mm hexagon socket wrench, remove the 2

hexagon bolts and cooler expansion valve.
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings from the evaporator pipe.

3/8
8/6/12
8. REMOVE COVER
(b) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the cover.
9. REMOVE NO. 1 COOLER UNIT DRAIN HOSE
(a) Remove the No. 1 cooler unit drain hose.
10. REMOVE NO. 1 AIR DUCT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 screws and remove the No. 1 air duct subassembly.
4/8
8/6/12
11. REMOVE BLOWER MOTOR WITH FAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 3 screws and remove the blower motor with
fan sub-assembly.
12. REMOVE NO. 2 AIR DUCT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 3 screws and remove the No. 2 air duct subassembly.
13. REMOVE AIR INLET DAMPER CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 3 claws and remove the air inlet damper
control cable sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Hold the control cable and remove the drive gear on the
unit side slowly, without pulling it.
14. REMOVE HEATER CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 3 claws and remove the heater control

cable sub-assembly.
5/8
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Hold the control cable and remove the drive gear on the
unit side slowly, without pulling it.
15. REMOVE COOLING UNIT CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 7 screws.
(c) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the cooling unit case sub-assembly.
16. REMOVE NO. 1 COOLER EVAPORATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly with

evaporator pipe as a unit.
17. REMOVE NO. 1 COOLER THERMISTOR

6/8
8/6/12
(a) Remove the No. 1 cooler thermistor.
18. REMOVE AIR CONDITIONER TUBE ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a 4 mm hexagon socket wrench, remove the 2

hexagon bolts and air conditioner tube assembly.
19. REMOVE BLOWER RESISTOR
(a) Remove the 2 screws and remove the blower resistor.
20. REMOVE COOLER BLOWER CASE
(a) Remove the 4 screws and disengage the 2 claws.
7/8
8/6/12
(b) Remove the cooler blower case from the lower heater case.
21. REMOVE COOLER UNIT CASE PACKING
(a) Remove the cooler unit case packing.
22. REMOVE COVER PLATE
(a) Remove the cover plate.
8/8
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HLU0WYX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Install the 3 bolts and 3 nuts.
(b) Engage the drain cooler hose.
(c) Connect each connector and engage each clamp and install the air conditioning unit assembly.
2. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT ASSEMBLY
*1
"TORX" Bolt
(a) Using a 4 mm "TORX" wrench, install the 4 "TORX" Bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the instrument panel reinforcement assembly with the 5 bolts in the order shown in the
illustration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HLU0WYX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(c) Connect each connector and engage each clamp.

(d) Connect the 2 earth wires with the 2 bolts.

4. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH
7. INSTALL STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
8. INSTALL LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the lower instrument panel reinforcement sub-assembly with the 2 bolts.
9. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
10. CONNECT AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the vinyl tape from the pipe.
(b) Sufficiently apply compressor oil to a new O-ring and fitting surface of the air conditioner tube and
accessory assembly.
Compressor oil:
for HFC- 134a (R134a)
(c) Install the O-ring to the air conditioner tube and accessory assembly.
(d) Install the air conditioner tube and accessory assembly.
11. CONNECT SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the vinyl tape from the pipe.
(b) Sufficiently apply compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the suction hose subassembly.
Compressor oil:
(c) Connect the O-ring to the suction hose sub-assembly.
(d) Connect the suction hose sub-assembly.
(e) Rotate the hook connector in the direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration.
2/3
8/6/12
(f) Insert the pipe joint into the cooler expansion valve
securely and tighten the bolt.
12. CONNECT OUTLET HEATER WATER HOSE A

(a) Install the outlet heater water hose A and attach the clip.
HINT:
Install the outlet heater water hose A while aligning it with the matching marks made when it was
removed.
13. CONNECT INLET HEATER WATER HOSE A

(a) Install the inlet heater water hose A and attach the clip.
HINT:
Install the inlet heater water hose A while aligning it with the matching marks made when it was
removed.


16. CHARGE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM WITH REFRIGERANT

18. WARM UP ENGINE
3/3
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HLY057X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL COVER PLATE
(a) Install the cover plate.
2. INSTALL COOLER UNIT CASE PACKING
(a) Install the cooler unit case packing.
3. INSTALL COOLER BLOWER CASE

(a) Install the cooler blower case from the lower heater case.
(c) Install the blower case assembly with the 4 screws.
4. INSTALL BLOWER RESISTOR

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HLY057X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/10
8/6/12
(a) Install the blower resistor with the 2 screws.
5. INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER TUBE ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a 4 mm hexagon wrench, install the air conditioner

tube assembly with the 2 hexagon bolts.
6. INSTALL NO. 1 COOLER THERMISTOR

7. INSTALL NO. 1 COOLER EVAPORATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly with

evaporator pipe as a unit.
8. INSTALL COOLING UNIT CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY

2/10
8/6/12
(b) Install the cooling unit case sub-assembly with the 7 screws.
9. INSTALL HEATER CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

NOTICE:
When working, take care not to get dirt or dust in the gear grease.
Do not hold gear sections while wearing cotton work gloves.
(a) Turn the pin on the cable side as far as possible in the
direction of the arrow, and position it so that it matches
the hole in the gear.
HINT:
Set the temperature adjustment dial to MAX HOT.
(b) Hold the protrusion on the drive gear, and rotate the
gear until the protrusion is aligned with the cylindrical
section of the case.
*1
Drive gear hole
3/10
8/6/12
*2
Control cable positioning pin
HINT:
Temperature adjustment dial: MAX HOT
(c) Push the control cable positioning pin in slowly until it matches the drive gear hole, and install the
heater control cable sub-assembly.
(d) Replacing the drive gear.
(1) When replacing the drive gear, pull the resin portion of
the control cable forward slowly and remove it.
*1
Shaft Gear
*2
Drive Gear
*a
Reference Position
*b
Drive gear protrusion
*c
Cylindrical section of the case
*d
Resin portion of the control cable
NOTICE:
Do not pull the drive gear.
(2) Pull the drive gear forward slowly and remove it.
(3) Rotate the shaft gear counterclockwise slowly until it stops.
NOTICE:
Be sure not to turn too forcefully.
(4) Match the shaft gear and the drive gear with their specified positions, and insert the drive gear
slowly into the heater case.
10. INSTALL AIR INLET DAMPER CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

NOTICE:
When working, take care not to get dirt or dust in the gear grease.
Do not hold gear sections while wearing cotton work gloves.
(a) Turn the pin on the cable side as far as possible in the
4/10
8/6/12
direction of the arrow, and position it so that it matches

the hole in the gear.
HINT:
Set the blower dial to DEF.
(b) Hold the protrusion on the drive gear, and rotate the
gear clockwise until it stops.
*1
Drive gear hole
*2
Control cable positioning pin
HINT:
Temperature control position: DEF
(c) Push the control cable positioning pin in slowly until it matches the drive gear hole, and install the
air inlet damper control cable sub-assembly.
(d) Replacing the drive gear.
(1) When replacing the drive gear, pull the resin portion of
the control cable forward slowly and remove it.
*1
Mode Main Link
*2
Drive Gear
*a
Reference Position
*b
Drive gear protrusion
*c
Resin portion of the control cable
NOTICE:
Do not pull the drive gear.
(2) Pull the drive gear forward slowly and remove it.
(3) Match the mode main link and the drive gear with their specified positions, and insert the drive
gear slowly into the heater case.
11. INSTALL NO. 2 AIR DUCT SUB-ASSEMBLY
5/10
8/6/12
(a) Install the No. 2 air duct sub-assembly with the 3 screws.
12. INSTALL BLOWER MOTOR WITH FAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the blower motor with fan sub-assembly with the 3
screws.
13. INSTALL NO. 1 AIR DUCT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 1 air duct sub-assembly with the 2 screws.
14. INSTALL NO. 1 COOLER UNIT DRAIN HOSE
(a) Install the No. 1 cooler unit drain hose as shown in the
illustration.
*1
Case
*2
Hose
*a
Rib
6/10
8/6/12
*b
Notched section
HINT:
Align the notched section of the hose with the rib on the case.
15. INSTALL COVER
(b) Install the cover with the 3 screws.
16. INSTALL COOLER EXPANSION VALVE
(a) Sufficiently apply compressor oil to 2 new O-rings and the

fitting surfaces. Install the 2 O-rings to the No. 1 cooler
evaporator sub-assembly.
Compressor oil:
(b) Using a 4 mm hexagon wrench, install the cooler

expansion valve with packing with the 2 hexagon bolts.
7/10
8/6/12
(c) Install the new gasket.
17. INSTALL COOLING UNIT CASE
(b) Install the cooling unit case with the 2 screws.
18. INSTALL CLEAN AIR FILTER
(a) Install the clean air filter as shown in the illustration.
19. INSTALL AIR FILTER CASE
8/10
8/6/12
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the air filter case.
20. INSTALL HEATER RADIATOR UNIT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the heater radiator unit sub-assembly as shown in

the illustration.
(b) Install the clamp with the screw.
21. INSTALL HEATER COVER
(a) Install the heater cover with the 3 screws.
22. INSTALL NO. 1 AIR CONDITIONING RADIATOR DAMPER SERVO SUB-ASSEMBLY
9/10
8/6/12
(a) Install the No. 1 air conditioning radiator damper servo

sub-assembly with the 3 screws.
10/10
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HLW0W7X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism that the door glass moves down slightly when the
door is opened, and that the glass moves up when closing the door in order to prevent the door
molding from being damaged. When the battery negative (-) terminal needs to be disconnected for
servicing, fully open the driver and passenger door glasses in advance.
5. DISCONNECT INLET HEATER WATER HOSE A

(a) Using pliers, grip the claws of the clip and slide the clip to
disconnect the inlet heater water hose A.
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessive force to the inlet heater water
hose A.
Prepare a drain pan or cloth in case the coolant leaks.
Since the inlet heater water hose A must be installed in a
predefined position, apply matching marks before
removing it.
6. DISCONNECT OUTLET HEATER WATER HOSE A
(a) Using pliers, grip the claws of the clip and slide the clip to
disconnect the outlet heater water hose A.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HLW0W7X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/8
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessive force to the outlet heater water
hose A.
Prepare a drain pan or cloth in case the coolant leaks.
Since the outlet heater water hose A must be installed in
a predefined position, apply matching marks before
removing it.
7. DISCONNECT SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and slide the hook connector.
(b) Disconnect the suction hose sub-assembly.

(c) Remove the O-ring from the suction hose sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
foreign matter.
8. DISCONNECT AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the air conditioner tube and accessory assembly.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the air conditioner tube and accessory assembly.
NOTICE:
foreign matter.
9. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
10. REMOVE LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and lower instrument panel

2/8
8/6/12
reinforcement sub-assembly.
11. REMOVE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

15. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH
16. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT ASSEMBLY
(a) for Driver Side
(1) Remove the each bolts.
3/8
8/6/12
*1
"TORX" Bolt
(2) Disconnect each connector and disengage the clamp and 2 claws.
(b) for Center Side
(1) Remove the each bolts and disengage the clip.
4/8
8/6/12
*a
Disengage the lock plate and disconnect connector.
(2) Disconnect each connector and disengage the each clamp.

(c) for Front Passenger Side
(1) Remove the each bolts.
5/8
8/6/12
*1
"TORX" Bolt
(2) Disconnect each connector and disengage the 2 clamps and 2 claws.
(d) Remove the instrument panel reinforcement assembly.

(a) Disconnect each connector and disengage each clamp.
6/8
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the drain cooler hose.
(c) Remove the 3 bolts, 3 nuts and air conditioning unit assembly.
7/8
8/6/12
*1
Bolt
*2
Nut
8/8
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FXQ007X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXQ007X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000201P076X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the connector from the thermistor assembly.
TESTER CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10C (50F)
3.00 to 3.73 k
15C (59F)
2.45 to 2.88 k
20C (68F)
1.95 to 2.30 k
25C (77F)
1.60 to 1.80 k
30C (86F)
1.28 to 1.47 k
35C (95F)
1.00 to 1.22 k
40C (104F)
0.80 to 1.00 k
45C (113F)
0.65 to 0.85 k
50C (122F)
0.50 to 0.70 k
55C (131F)
0.44 to 0.60 k
60C (140F)
0.36 to 0.50 k
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000201P076X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
NOTICE:
Even slightly touching the sensor may change the resistance value. Be sure to hold the connector
of the sensor.
When measuring, the sensor temperature must be the same as the thermistor assembly.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases (see the graph).
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the thermistor assembly.

*a

(thermistor assembly)
*b
Sensing Portion
*c
Resistance (k)
*d
Allowable Range
*e
Temperature (C (F))
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XMG01CX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the clamp and install the thermistor assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XMG01CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XMI01BX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the clamp and the thermistor assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XMI01BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER RESISTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FXK004X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER RESISTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXK004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER RESISTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000314S01YX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER RESISTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BLOWER RESISTOR
(a) Disconnect the connector from the blower resistor.
*a

(Blower Resistor)
HINT:
There is a fuse between terminals 1 and 3.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-4
Always
2.92
1-3
Always
0.44
1-2
Always
1.12
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the blower resistor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000314S01YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER RESISTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XU1016X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER RESISTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BLOWER RESISTOR
(a) Install the blower resistor with the 2 screws.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XU1016X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER RESISTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER RESISTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE BLOWER RESISTOR
(b) Remove the 2 screws and the blower resistor.
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FXM004X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXM004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXM004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002CVX05BX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH
(a) Disconnect the connector from the compressor with

magnet clutch.
*a

(compressor with magnet clutch)
(b) Apply battery voltage to the clutch and check operation of the clutch.
CONDITION
Battery negative (-) Body ground
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Magnet clutch is engaged
If the result is not as specified, replace the compressor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002CVX05BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XUK01YX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. ADJUST COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL
(a) When replacing the compressor with motor assembly with
a new one, gradually discharge the refrigerant gas from
the service valve, and drain the following amount of oil
from the new compressor with motor assembly before
installation.
Standard:
Drain oil from the new compressor assembly, and then add
new oil so that the amount of oil in the new compressor
assembly is the same as that in the compressor assembly
to be replaced.
HINT:
The drain bolt and washer can be reused.
NOTICE:
When checking the compressor oil level, observe the
precautions on the cooler removal/installation.
If a new compressor is installed without removing some
oil remaining in the pipes of the vehicle, the oil amount will
be excessive. This prevents heat exchange in the
refrigerant cycle and causes refrigeration system failure.
If the volume of oil remaining in the removed compressor
is too small, check for oil leaks.
Be sure to use ND-OIL 8 or equivalent for compressor oil.
2. INSTALL COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH
(a) Install the compressor with magnet clutch with the 3

bolts.
HINT:
Tighten the bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XUK01YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

(b) Apply sufficient compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the compressor with
magnet clutch.
Compressor oil:
(c) Install the O-ring onto the No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose.
(d) Install the No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose onto the compressor with magnet clutch with
the bolt.
4. CONNECT SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(b) Apply sufficient compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the compressor with
magnet clutch.
Compressor oil:
(c) Install the O-ring onto the suction hose sub-assembly.
(d) Install the suction hose sub-assembly onto the compressor with magnet clutch with the bolt.

8. INSTALL AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY
10. WARM UP ENGINE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XUK01YX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XUM01YX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY

6. DISCONNECT SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the suction hose subassembly from the compressor with magnet clutch.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the suction hose sub-assembly.

NOTICE:
foreign matter.
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the No. 1 cooler

refrigerant discharge hose from the compressor with
magnet clutch.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XUM01YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
NOTICE:
foreign matter.
8. REMOVE COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH
(b) Remove the 3 bolts and the compressor with magnet

clutch.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XUM01YX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FXO004X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXO004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XLU05TX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE NO. 1 COOLER CONDENSER BRACKET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 No. 1 cooler condenser

bracket.
2. REMOVE NO. 2 COOLER CONDENSER BRACKET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 No. 2 cooler condenser

bracket.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XLU05TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XLR04KX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL COOLER CONDENSER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the cooler condenser assembly with the 4 bolts.
HINT:
Do not damage the condenser or radiator when installing the condenser.
(b) Connect the external air temperature sensor clamp and connector.
2. CONNECT AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the attached vinyl tape from the tube and the connecting part of the cooler condenser
assembly.
(b) Sufficiently apply compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the tube joint.
Compressor oil:
(c) Install the O-ring on the air conditioner tube and accessory assembly.
(d) Install the air conditioner tube and accessory assembly on the cooler condenser assembly with
the bolt.

(a) Remove the attached vinyl tape from the pipe and the connecting part of the cooler condenser
assembly.
(b) Sufficiently apply compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the pipe joint.
Compressor oil:
(c) Install the O-ring on the No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose.
(d) Install the No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose on the cooler condenser assembly with the bolt.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XLR04KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6. WARM UP ENGINE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XLR04KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012UU039X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT COOLER CONDENSER ASSEMBLY
(a) If the cooler condenser assembly fins are dirty, clean them with water and dry with compressed
air.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the condenser assembly fins.
(b) If any cooler condenser assembly fins are bent, straighten them using a screwdriver or pliers.

(a) Using a halogen leak detector, check pipe joints for refrigerant leakage.
(b) If refrigerant leakage is detected in a joint, check the torque of the joint.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012UU039X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XLV05TX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL NO. 1 COOLER CONDENSER BRACKET
(a) Install the 2 No. 1 cooler condenser bracket with the 2

bolts.
HINT:
Install the bracket in parallel (horizontally).
2. INSTALL NO. 2 COOLER CONDENSER BRACKET
(a) Install the 2 No. 2 cooler condenser bracket with the 2

bolts.
HINT:
Install the bracket in parallel (horizontally).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XLV05TX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XLT04IX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the No. 1 cooler

refrigerant discharge hose from the condenser.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose.
NOTICE:
foreign matter.
4. DISCONNECT AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the air conditioning tube
and accessory assembly from the condenser.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the air conditioning tube and accessory assembly.
NOTICE:
foreign matter.
5. REMOVE COOLER CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XLT04IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: CONDENSER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(b) Remove the 4 bolts and the cooler condenser assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XLT04IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COOLER EXPANSION VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004N9800RX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COOLER EXPANSION VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004N9800RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COOLER EXPANSION VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004N9700LX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COOLER EXPANSION VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
When removing the cooler expansion valve by itself, be sure to install a new cooler expansion
valve and new bolt for suction hose sub-assembly.

(a) Apply sufficient compressor oil to 2 new O-rings and the fitting surfaces of the cooler expansion
valve.
Compressor oil:
(b) Install the 2 new O-rings onto the No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly.
(c) Using a 4 mm hexagon wrench, install the new cooler expansion valve with the new 2 hexagon
bolts.
2. INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY

3. INSTALL SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. CHARGE REFRIGERANT
5. WARM UP ENGINE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004N9700LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COOLER EXPANSION VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004N9900LX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COOLER EXPANSION VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
When removing the cooler expansion valve by itself, be sure to install a new cooler expansion
valve and new bolt for suction tube sub-assembly.
2. SEPARATE SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY

3. SEPARATE AIR CONDITIONER TUBE AND ACCESSORY ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a 4 mm hexagon wrench, remove the 2 hexagon

bolts.
(b) Temporarily install the bolt for the suction hose subassembly halfway to the cooler expansion valve.
*1
Bolt For The Suction Tube Sub-assembly
(c) Hold the bolt and pull it to remove the cooler expansion
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: COOLER EXPANSION VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
valve as shown in the illustration.
(d) Remove the 2 O-rings from the evaporator pipe.

*1
Evaporator Pipe
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT BLOWER MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FXI004X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT BLOWER MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXI004X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT BLOWER MOTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000314T027X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT BLOWER MOTOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BLOWER MOTOR
(a) Disconnect the connector from the blower motor.
*a

(Blower Motor)
OK:
MEASUREMENT
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
The blower motor operates

smoothly
If the result is not as specified, replace the blower motor.
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT BLOWER MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT BLOWER MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BLOWER MOTOR WITH FAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the blower motor with fan sub-assembly with the 3 screws.
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT BLOWER MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT BLOWER MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE BLOWER MOTOR WITH FAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 3 screws and the blower motor with fan sub-assembly.
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 F
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FXR004X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXR004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 F
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXR004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000202X050X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013
FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NO. 1 COOLER THERMISTOR
(a) Disconnect the connector from the No. 1 cooler thermistor.
*a

(No. 1 cooler thermistor)
*c
Resistance (k)
*e
Temperature (C (F))
*b
Sensing Portion
*d
Allowable Range
TESTER CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
-10C (14F)
7.30 to 9.10 k
-5C (23F)
5.65 to 6.95 k
0C (32F)
4.40 to 5.35 k
5C (41F)
3.40 to 4.15 k
10C (50F)
2.70 to 3.25 k
15C (59F)
2.14 to 2.58 k
20C (68F)
1.71 to 2.05 k
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000202X050X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
25C (77F)
1.38 to 1.64 k
30C (86F)
1.11 to 1.32 k
NOTICE:
Even slightly touching the sensor may change the resistance value. Be sure to hold the connector
of the sensor.
When measuring, the sensor temperature must be the same as the ambient temperature.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases (see the graph).
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the No. 1 cooler thermistor.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000202X050X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 F
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HLU0WZX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 1 COOLER THERMISTOR
(a) Install the No. 1 cooler thermistor as shown in the
illustration.
PART
LENGTH
*a
34.3 mm
*b
27.6 mm
*c
50 mm
*1
Sensor Part (Fifth Row)
*2
Fixed Part
*3
from Tank
NOTICE:
Be sure to insert the thermistor only once because
reinserting it will not allow it to be firmly secured.
When reusing the evaporator, insert the thermistor one
row next to the one that has been used previously (X in
the illustration).
After inserting the thermistor, do not apply excessive
force to the wire.
Directly insert the thermistor until the edge of plastic case
"a" comes into contact with evaporator "b".
2. INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER TUBE ASSEMBLY

3. INSTALL NO. 1 COOLER EVAPORATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL COOLING UNIT CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY
6. INSTALL HEATER CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. INSTALL AIR INLET DAMPER CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HLU0WZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 F



13. WARM UP ENGINE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001HLU0WZX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001HLW0W8X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FRS)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
Be sure to read Precaution thoroughly before servicing.
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
4. REMOVE AIR INLET DAMPER CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

5. REMOVE HEATER CONTROL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. REMOVE COOLING UNIT CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY
8. REMOVE NO. 1 COOLER EVAPORATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
9. REMOVE AIR CONDITIONER TUBE ASSEMBLY
10. REMOVE NO. 1 COOLER THERMISTOR
1/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Remove the No. 1 cooler thermistor from the No. 1 cooler
evaporator sub-assembly.
2/2
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: REFRIGERANT LINE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FXC004X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: REFRIGERANT LINE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FXC004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: REFRIGERANT: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001R8Z030X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: REFRIGERANT: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT REFRIGERANT PRESSURE WITH MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
(a) This method uses a manifold gauge set to locate problem areas. Read the manifold gauge
pressure when the test conditions are established.
Test conditions:
Temperature at the air inlet with the air recirculation switch set at RECIRC is 30 to 35C
(86 to 95F).
Engine is running at 1500 rpm.
All doors are fully open.
Blower speed control switch is set to HI.
A/C switch is on.
Gauge readings (Reference):
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001R8Z030X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
*a
Pressure on low-pressure side
*b
Blower HI Zone
*c
Blower LO Zone
*d
Pressure on high-pressure side
(1) Normally functioning refrigeration system.

Gauge Reading:
PRESSURE
SIDE
REFRIGERANT VOLUME
Low
0.15 to 0.25 MPa (1.5 to 2.5 kgf/cm 2

)
High
1.37 to 1.57 MPa (14 to 16 kgf/cm 2 )
(2) The A/C system periodically changes between normal and improper function due to moisture in
the refrigerant system.
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
DIAGNOSIS
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Replace
Dryer is overly
saturated
During operation,
pressure on low
pressure side
cycles between
normal and
vacuum
Moisture in refrigeration system

freezes at expansion valve
orifice, causing temporary stop
of cycle. However, when melted,
normal state is restored.
Moisture in
refrigeration
system freezes
at expansion
valve orifice
and blocks
refrigerant
circulation
cooler
dryer
2. Remove
moisture
from cycle
by
repeatedly
evacuating
air
3. Supply
appropriate
volume of
new
refrigerant
(3) The A/C system does not function effectively due to insufficient refrigerant.
2/6
8/6/12
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE
CAUSE
DIAGNOSIS
Pressure
low on both
low and
high
pressure
sides
Cooling
performance
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check for gas leakage and

repair if necessary
Gas leakage
from
refrigeration
system
Insufficient
refrigerant
Refrigerant
leakage
insufficient
2. Supply appropriate volume of

new refrigerant
3. If indicated pressure value
close to 0 with gauge
connected, create vacuum after
inspecting and repairing
location of leakage
(4) The A/C system does not function effectively due to poor circulation of the refrigerant.
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
DIAGNOSIS
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
Pressure low on both low and

high pressure sides
Frost exists on piping from
Refrigerant flow obstructed by

dirt in condenser
Condenser
clogged
Replace
condenser
condenser to A/C unit
(5) The A/C system does not function or functions intermittently because the refrigerant does not
circulate.
3/6
8/6/12
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
DIAGNOSIS
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check
expansion valve
refrigerant
2. Clean
expansion valve
Refrigerant
using
compressed air
Vacuum indicated on low

pressure side, and
flow obstructed
by moisture or
extremely low pressure
dirt in
indicated on high
pressure side
refrigeration
system
Refrigerant
does not
Frost or condensation
Refrigerant
circulate
seen on piping on both
flow obstructed
sides of condenser or
expansion valve
by gas leakage
from expansion
valve
3. Replace
condenser
4. Evacuate air
and charge
system with
appropriate
volume of new
refrigerant
5. For gas
leakage from
expansion
valve, replace
expansion valve
(6) The A/C system does not function effectively due to the system being overcharged with
refrigerant or insufficient cooling of the condenser.
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
DIAGNOSIS
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Clean condenser
4/6
8/6/12
Pressure extremely
high on both low
and high-pressure
sides
Excessive
Condenser is
2. Check condenser fan
refrigerant
Cooling
dirty
Condenser
motor operation
3. If actions taken in 1
performance
fan motor is
and 2 do not solve
of
malfunctioning
problem, check
condenser
insufficient
Excessive
refrigerant
amount of refrigerant
and adjust amount of
refrigerant to
appropriate amount
(7) The A/C system does not function due to air in the refrigeration system.
CAUTION:
The low-pressure piping may be very hot and cause serious burns.
NOTICE:
These gauge indications occur when the refrigeration system opens and the system is charged
with refrigerant without vacuum purging.
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE
DIAGNOSIS
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CAUSE
Air in
Pressure extremely high

on both low and high-
Air in
pressure sides
Low-pressure piping is
refrigeration
system
too hot to touch
refrigeration
system
Vacuum
purging
insufficient
1. Check if
compressor oil is
dirty or
insufficient
2. Evacuate air and
charge system
with new
refrigerant
(8) The A/C system does not function effectively due to an expansion valve malfunction.
5/6
8/6/12
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE
DIAGNOSIS
CAUSE
Pressure extremely high on
both low and high-pressure
sides
Frost or condensation on
Problem with
expansion valve
piping on low-pressure side
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
Excessive
refrigerant in low
pressure piping
Expansion valve
Replace
expansion
valve
open too widely
(9) The A/C system does not function due to a defective compressor.
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE
DIAGNOSIS
CAUSE
Pressure extremely high
on both low and high-
Internal
leakage in
pressure sides
Pressure extremely low on compressor
high pressure side
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
Compression failure
Leakage from
damaged valve or
broken sliding parts
Repair or
replace
compressor
6/6
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: REFRIGERANT: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001R8Y033X
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: REFRIGERANT: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
(b) Operate the cooler compressor under the conditions shown below:
ITEM
CONDITION
Engine Speed
Idling
Operating Time
3 minutes or more
A/C Switch Status
On
Blower Switch Status
HI
Set Temperature
MAX COOL
This causes most of the compressor oil from the various components of the A/C system to collect in
the A/C compressor.
NOTICE:
It is not necessary to operate the cooler compressor if the A/C does not operate because of
compressor lock, etc.
(c) Stop the engine.

(d) Recover the refrigerant from the A/C system using a refrigerant recovery unit.
HINT:
Use the refrigerant recovery unit in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual.
2. CHARGE REFRIGERANT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001R8Y033X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
HINT:
Charge refrigerant in accordance with the equipment manual.
(a) Perform vacuum purging using a vacuum pump.

(b) Charge refrigerant HFC-134a (R134a).
SST: 09985-20010
09985-02130
09985-02150
09985-02090
09985-02110
09985-02010
2/4
8/6/12
09985-02050
09985-02060
09985-02070
Standard:
390 +/-50 g (13.8 +/-1.8 oz)
*a
Amount to be charged
*b
Charge 100 g (3.53 oz)
*c
Mean value in proper range
*d
Point where bubbles disappear
*e
Overcharged
*f
Pressure
*g
Sub-cool system
*h
Refrigerant amount
NOTICE:
Do not operate the cooler compressor before charging refrigerant as the cooler compressor will
not work properly without any refrigerant, and will overheat.
The system may need to be charged with approximately 100 g (3.53 oz) of refrigerant after
bubbles disappear. The refrigerant amount should be checked by measuring its quantity, and not
with the sight glass.
3. WARM UP ENGINE
(a) Warm up the engine at less than 1640 rpm for 2 minutes or more after charging the refrigerant.
NOTICE:
Be sure to warm up the compressor by turning the A/C switch on after removing and installing
the cooler refrigerant lines (including the compressor) to prevent damage to the compressor.
4. CHECK FOR REFRIGERANT GAS LEAK

(a) After recharging the refrigerant, check for refrigerant gas leakage using a halogen leak detector.
(1) Perform the operation observing the following instructions:
3/4
8/6/12
Stop the engine.

Secure good ventilation (the halogen leak detector may react to volatile gases other
than refrigerant, such as evaporated gasoline or exhaust gas).
Repeat the test 2 or 3 times.
Make sure that some refrigerant remains in the refrigeration system.
HINT:
When the compressor is off: approximately 392 to 588 kPa (4.0 to 6.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57
to 85 psi).
(2) Using a halogen leak detector, check the refrigerant

line for leakage.
(3) If a gas leak is not detected from the drain hose, remove the blower motor control (blower
resistor) from the cooling unit. Insert the halogen leak detector sensor into the unit and check
for gas leakage.
(4) Disconnect the pressure switch connector and wait for approximately 20 minutes. Bring the
halogen leak detector close to the pressure switch and check for gas leakage.
*1
Halogen Leak Detector
*a
Check for Leakage
4/4
8/6/12
HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WXB00GX
Title: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT HEATER RELAY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3-5
10 k or higher
3-5

terminals 1 and 2
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the heater

relay.
2. INSPECT HEATER BLOWER MOTOR RELAY ASSEMBLY

table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3-4
Below 1
3-4

terminals 1 and 2
10 k or higher
3-5
10 k or higher
3-5

terminals 1 and 2
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the heater

relay.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WXB00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NEB011X
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NEB011X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004R0J003X
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE NO. 1 POWER OUTLET SOCKET ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE NO. 2 POWER OUTLET SOCKET COVER
3. REMOVE SEAT HEATER SWITCH (w/ Seat Heater System)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004R0J003X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NEA016X
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(b) Install the console box assembly with the 4 screws and 2 bolts.
2. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH

(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the instrument panel finish panel end LH.
3. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH

HINT:
4. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE HOLE COVER

(a) Engage the 5 claws to install the parking brake hole cover.
5. INSTALL CUP HOLDER CUSHION

(a) Install the cup holder cushion.
6. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL CUP HOLDER

(a) Install the instrument panel cup holder.
7. INSTALL PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

8. INSTALL SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Install the shifting hole cover sub-assembly with the 4 screws.
9. INSTALL UPPER CONSOLE PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(b) Engage the 2 clips and 4 claws to install the upper console panel sub-assembly.
10. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Turn the knob clockwise to install the shift lever knob subassembly.
*1
Pull collar
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NEA016X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Tighten the shift lever knob until the tightening on the
shift lever knob stiffens.
Check that the transmission moves into reverse when the
pull collar is pulled.
11. INSTALL PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

12. INSTALL SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Engage the claw.
(b) Install the shifting hole cover sub-assembly with the 2 screws.
13. INSTALL SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Engage the clamp.
(b) Install the shift position indicator with the 2 screws.
14. INSTALL UPPER CONSOLE PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(b) Engage the 2 clips and 4 claws to install the upper console panel sub-assembly.
15. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Turn the knob clockwise to install the shift lever knob sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Tighten the shift lever knob until the tightening on the shift lever knob stiffens.
Face the groove on the shift lever knob toward the rear of the vehicle.
2/3
8/6/12
*1
Groove
16. INSTALL NO. 1 STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY

17. INSTALL FRONT CONSOLE BOX COVER
(a) Engage the 6 claws to install the front console box cover.
3/3
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004R0K003X
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL SEAT HEATER SWITCH (w/ Seat Heater System)
2. INSTALL NO. 2 POWER OUTLET SOCKET COVER
3. INSTALL NO. 1 POWER OUTLET SOCKET ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004R0K003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NEC016X
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: FRONT CONSOLE BOX: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE FRONT CONSOLE BOX COVER
(a) Move the shift lever to N.
(b) Apply protective tape to the area shown in the

illustration.
*1
Protective Tape
(c) Disengage the 6 claws and remove the front console box cover.
HINT:
Hold the inside of the pocket with your hand, and pull off the front console box cover.
HINT:
Remove the instrument panel finish panel end RH, and then push the reverse side of the front console
box cover with a bar (tool handle, etc.) to remove it.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NEC016X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
*1
Bar
2. REMOVE NO. 1 STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY (w/ Stereo Jack Adapter)
3. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Turn the knob counterclockwise and remove the shift

lever knob sub-assembly.
4. REMOVE UPPER CONSOLE PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Disengage the 2 clips and 4 claws.
(b) Disconnect each connector and remove the upper console panel sub-assembly.
5. REMOVE SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR (for Automatic Transmission)
2/6
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the clamp to remove the shift position indicator.
6. REMOVE SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(b) Disengage the claw to remove the shifting hole cover sub-assembly.
7. REMOVE PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

8. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Turn the knob counterclockwise and remove the shift

lever knob sub-assembly.
9. REMOVE UPPER CONSOLE PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
3/6
8/6/12
(a) Disengage the 2 clips and 4 claws.
(b) Disconnect each connector and remove the upper console panel sub-assembly.
10. REMOVE SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the 4 screws and the shifting hole cover subassembly.
11. REMOVE PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

12. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL CUP HOLDER
(a) Remove the instrument panel cup holder.
13. REMOVE CUP HOLDER CUSHION
4/6
8/6/12
(a) Remove the cup holder cushion.
14. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE HOLE COVER
(a) Disengage the 5 claws to remove the parking brake hole

cover.
NOTICE:
Remove the parking brake hole cover by pulling straight
it up to disengage the claws, If not claws may be
broken.
15. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH
(a) Disengage the 4 claws to remove the instrument panel

finish panel end LH.
16. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH

HINT:
5/6
8/6/12
(c) Disconnect each connector and remove the console box assembly.
6/6
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O2P00GX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O2P00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O1V00OX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT RETAINER
(b) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the glove compartment retainer.
2. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR REINFORCEMENT
(a) Remove the screw and the glove compartment door

reinforcement.
3. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT CUSHION
(a) Remove the 2 glove compartment cushions.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O1V00OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
5. REMOVE CLIP
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O1V00OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O2M00GX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Connect the connectors.
(c) Install the lower instrument panel sub-assembly with the 2 screws and nut.
2. INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR DAMPER

(a) Engage the claw to install the glove compartment door damper.

(a) Horizontally engage the 2 hinges of the outer glove compartment door.
NOTICE:
Make sure to install the glove compartment door assembly hinges horizontally.
(b) Engage the 2 stoppers to install the glove compartment door assembly.
(c) Engage the claw to install the glove compartment door damper.

(b) Engage the 2 claws that are holding the upper instrument panel meter ornament and steering
column cover together.
(c) Engage the 2 clips and 6 claws.
(d) Install the upper instrument panel meter ornament with the screw.

(b) Install the meter hood sub-assembly with the screw.

(a) Engage the 4 clips and claw to install the instrument side panel RH.

HINT:

10. INSTALL UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O2M00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

(b) Install the upper instrument panel finish panel sub-assembly with the screw.

(b) Install the No. 1 instrument cluster finish panel garnish with the screw.
12. INSTALL UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:

HINT:
14. INSTALL STEREO OPENING COVER WITH BRACKET

(a) Install the stereo opening cover with bracket with the 4 screws.

(a) Engage the 4 clips and 2 claws to install the center instrument cluster finish panel sub-assembly.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O2M00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003QLG02RX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. PRECAUTION FOR VEHICLE WITH AIRBAG
(a) Some operations in this section may affect the airbag. Prior to performing the corresponding
operations, read the SRS Precaution
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QLG02RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O2U00GX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL CLIP
3. INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT CUSHION
(a) Install the 2 glove compartment cushions.
4. INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR REINFORCEMENT
(a) Install the glove compartment door reinforcement with

the screw.
5. INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT RETAINER
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O2U00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
(b) Install the glove compartment retainer with the 2 screws.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O2U00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O1U00PX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. TABLE OF BOLT, SCREW AND NUT
(a) All bolts, screws and nuts relevant to installing and removing the instrument panel are shown
along with an alphabetical code in the table.
2. PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
.

(a) Using a moulding remover, disengage the 2 claws and 4

clips to remove the center instrument cluster finish panel
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O1U00PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
sub-assembly.
*1
Moulding Remover
6. REMOVE STEREO OPENING COVER WITH BRACKET
(a) Remove the 4 screws to remove the stereo opening cover

with bracket.
(b) Disengage the 6 claws to remove the No. 2 instrument cluster finish panel garnish.
8. REMOVE UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
2/7
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 3 claws to remove the upper instrument panel finish panel sub-assembly.

HINT:
10. REMOVE UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:

(a) Using a moulding remover, disengage the claw and 4 clips

and remove the instrument side panel RH.
*1
Moulding Remover

HINT:
3/7
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 12 claws, and then pull out the meter hood sub-assembly diagonally upwards to
remove it.
(a) Disengage the 6 claws and 2 clips.
(b) Disengage the 2 claws that are holding the upper

instrument panel meter ornament and steering column
cover together.
(c) Disconnect the connector and remove the upper instrument panel meter ornament.

(a) Disengage the claw and release the glove compartment

door damper.
4/7
8/6/12
*1
Glove Compartment Door Damper
(b) Release the 2 stoppers and open the glove compartment

door assembly until it is horizontal.
*1
Stopper
(c) Pull the glove compartment door assembly horizontally backward to disengage the 2 hinges and
remove the glove compartment door assembly.
NOTICE:
Be sure to pull the glove compartment door assembly horizontally to remove it.
18. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR DAMPER
(a) Disengage the claw and remove the glove compartment

door damper.
19. REMOVE LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
5/7
8/6/12
(b) Remove the 2 screws and nut.
(c) Disconnect the connectors.

(d) Disengage the 12 claws to remove the lower instrument panel sub-assembly.
6/7
8/6/12
*1
DLC3
7/7
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O0W00NX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O0W00NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
5/7
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
6/7
8/6/12
7/7
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004R0R00BX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE TELEPHONE MICROPHONE ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE MICROPHONE COVER
3. REMOVE NO. 1 ROOF WIRE
(a) Remove the adhesive tape from the roof headlining.
Tape
(b) Disengage the 3 guides remove the No. 1 roof wire from the roof headlining.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004R0R00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001JVP00VX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Put the roof headlining assembly into the vehicle through
the front passenger side door.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the roof headlining assembly or body
interior.
(b) Engage the clip at the front of the roof headlining, and install the roof headlining assembly.
(c) Connect the antenna cord sub-assembly connectors.
(d) Install the 3 clips at the rear of the roof headlining.
(e) Engage the 2 clamps and connect the connector from the front pillar LH.
(f) Engage the 3 clamps and connect the connector from the front pillar RH.
2. INSTALL VISOR HOLDER

(a) Engage the 2 claws install the 2 visor holders.
3. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the visor assembly LH with the 2 screws.
4. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
5. INSTALL MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

6. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR GARNISH LH
(a) Engage the 2 guides and clip.
(b) Install the center pillar garnish LH with the 2 bolts and clip.
7. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR GARNISH RH

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001JVP00VX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
8. INSTALL REAR QUARTER TRIM FRONT GARNISH LH

(a) Engage the claw and clip.
(b) Install the rear quarter trim front garnish LH with the 2 bolts.
9. INSTALL REAR QUARTER TRIM FRONT GARNISH RH

HINT:

(a) Engage the guide and 2 clips.
(b) Install the rear window side garnish LH with the bolt.

HINT:

(a) Install the 2 lid cover clips from the quarter trim lid sub-assembly LH.
NOTICE:
If there is any damage, be sure to replace the lid cover clip with a new one.
(b) Engage the 2 guides and 6 claws and install the quarter
trim lid sub-assembly LH.
*1
Lid Cover Clip

HINT:

(a) Engage the 8 clips and 8 claws install the quarter trim panel assembly LH.
2/4
8/6/12

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the for LH side.

(a) Fold down the rear seatback assembly.
(b) Engage the 2 clips install the luggage compartment inner trim cover LH.

HINT:

20. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH
21. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Engage the 2 clips install the cowl side trim board LH.
23. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH

HINT:
(a) Align the alignment mark on the weatherstrip with the

protruding portion on the body indicated by the arrow in
the illustration, and install the front door opening trim
weatherstrip LH.
*a
Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
After installation, check that the corners fit correctly.
3/4
8/6/12

HINT:

(a) Engage the 6 claws install the front door scuff plate LH.

HINT:
28. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH

29. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH
4/4
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004R0S00BX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
2. INSTALL NO. 1 ROOF WIRE
(a) Engage the 2 guides and position the No. 1 roof wire as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the No. 1 roof wire is not twisted and that the marking line (white) faces up.
*a
Align the center of the white tape on the wire with

the edge of the trim, and fix the wire in place.
*c
Align the white tape on the wire with the clamp, and
fix the wire in place.
Tape
*b
Align the white tape on the wire with

the clip, and fix the wire in place.
(b) Apply the tape as shown in the illustration.
3. INSTALL MICROPHONE COVER

4. INSTALL TELEPHONE MICROPHONE ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004R0S00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004R0S00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001JVR00VX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: ROOF HEADLINING: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
.

5. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH
6. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH
(a) Disengage the 6 claws and remove the front door scuff
plate LH.

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001JVR00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/8
8/6/12
(a) Remove the front door opening trim weatherstrip LH.

HINT:
(a) Remove the clip.
(b) Disengage the 2 clips and remove the cowl side trim board LH.
12. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH

HINT:
13. SEPARATE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

14. SEPARATE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

2/8
8/6/12
(a) Fold down the bench type rear seatback assembly.
(b) Disengage the 2 clips and disconnect the luggage compartment inner trim cover LH.
18. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH

HINT:
(a) Pull up the rear seatback assembly.
(b) Remove the clip.

(c) Disengage the 8 clips and 8 claws, remove the luggage compartment trim cover LH.

HINT:
3/8
8/6/12
(a) Along the arrow in the illustration, disengage the 6

claws.
(b) Disengage the 2 clips and 2 guides.

HINT:
Make the quarter trim lid sub-assembly LH hang down from
the lid cover clip.
(c) Push the lid cover clip knobs in the direction of the arrow
to remove the 2 lid cover clips along with the quarter trim
lid sub-assembly LH.
*1
Lid Cover Clip
(d) Remove the 2 lid cover clips from the lid cover LH.
NOTICE:
If there is any damage, be sure to replace the lid cover clip with a new one.

HINT:
4/8
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 2 clips and guide remove the rear window side garnish LH.

HINT:
25. REMOVE REAR QUARTER TRIM FRONT GARNISH LH
(b) Disengage the clip and claw remove the rear quarter trim front garnish LH.
26. REMOVE REAR QUARTER TRIM FRONT GARNISH RH

HINT:
27. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR GARNISH LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and clip.
(b) Disengage the clips and 2 guides remove the center pillar garnish LH.
5/8
8/6/12
28. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR GARNISH RH

HINT:
29. REMOVE MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

30. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY LH
31. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
32. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER
(a) Disengage the 2 claws remove the 2 visor holders.
(a) Disengage the 3 clamps and disconnect the connector

from the front pillar RH.
6/8
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 2 clamps and disconnect the connector

from the front pillar LH.
(c) Remove the 3 clips at the rear of the roof headlining.
(d) Disconnect the antenna cord sub-assembly connector.
(e) Disengage the clip at the front of the roof headlining, and
remove the roof headlining assembly.
(f) Remove the roof headlining assembly from the vehicle

7/8
8/6/12
through the front passenger side door.

NOTICE:
Do not damage the roof headlining assembly or body
interior.
8/8
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O2O00DX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O2O00DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O1100LX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE NO. 2 HEATER TO REGISTER DUCT
(b) Disengage the claw to remove the No. 2 heater to register duct.
2. REMOVE NO. 1 HEATER TO REGISTER DUCT

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 2 heater to register duct.
3. REMOVE DEFROSTER NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the 5 claws and remove the defroster nozzle assembly, No. 2 side defroster nozzle
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O1100LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
duct, and No. 1 side defroster nozzle duct as a single unit.
4. REMOVE NO. 2 SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE DUCT
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the No. 2 side defroster

nozzle duct.
5. REMOVE NO. 1 SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE DUCT

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 2 side defroster nozzle duct.
6. REMOVE NO. 3 DEFROSTER NOZZLE GARNISH
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the No. 3 defroster

nozzle garnish.

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 3 defroster nozzle garnish.
8. REMOVE CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER ASSEMBLY
2/4
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 2 clips to remove the center instrument panel register assembly.
9. REMOVE NO. 2 INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 3 claws to remove the No. 2 instrument

panel register sub-assembly.
10. REMOVE NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER SUB-ASSEMBLY

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 2 instrument panel register sub-assembly.
11. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER BEZEL (for LH Side)
(a) Disengage the 3 claws to remove the instrument panel

register bezel.
12. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER BEZEL (for RH Side)

HINT:
3/4
8/6/12
(a) Disengage the 16 claws and 8 guides to remove the No. 1

defroster nozzle garnish.
14. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL CUSHION
(a) Remove the instrument panel cushion.
4/4
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O2K00HX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Install the instrument panel sub-assembly with the 7 screws and 2 bolts.
2. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly

with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the passenger airbag connector.

3. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL ORNAMENT

(a) Engage the 3 claws and 3 clips and install the instrument panel ornament.
4. INSTALL COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

5. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH
(a) Remove the protective cover (w/curtain shield airbag).
(b) Make sure that the front pillar garnish clip is not damaged.
NOTICE:
If there is any damage, replace the front pillar garnish clip with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O2K00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(c) Hook the tip of the front pillar garnish clip on the front
pillar garnish LH as shown in the illustration.
*1
Front Pillar Garnish Clip
(d) Turn the front pillar garnish LH in the direction of the arrow.
(e) Insert the 2 guides in the direction of the arrow (1).
(f) Engage the 2 clips and the front pillar garnish clip in the direction of the arrow, and install the front
pillar garnish LH.
*1
6. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

2/3
8/6/12
HINT:
7. INSTALL FRONT NO. 3 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

8. INSTALL FRONT NO. 2 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
(a) Connect connector.
(b) Engage the 6 claws to install the No. 1 instrument panel speaker panel sub-assembly.
10. INSTALL FRONT NO. 3 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)

11. INSTALL FRONT NO. 2 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:
13. INSTALL LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

15. CHECK SRS WARNING LIGHT
3/3
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003QLG02QX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. PRECAUTION FOR VEHICLE WITH AIRBAG
(a) Some operations in this section may affect the airbag. Prior to performing the corresponding
operations, read the SRS Precaution
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003QLG02QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O3E00GX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL CUSHION
(a) Install a new instrument panel cushion.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 DEFROSTER NOZZLE GARNISH
(a) Engage the 16 claws and 8 guides to install the No. 1

defroster nozzle garnish .
3. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER BEZEL (for LH Side)
(a) Engage the 3 claws to install the instrument panel

register bezel.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O3E00GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
4. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER BEZEL (for RH Side)

HINT:
5. INSTALL NO. 2 INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 3 claws to install the No. 2 instrument panel

register sub-assembly.
6. INSTALL NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER SUB-ASSEMBLY

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 2 instrument panel register sub-assembly.
7. INSTALL CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the 2 clips.
(b) Install the center instrument panel register assembly with the 2 screws.
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the No. 3 defroster nozzle

garnish.
2/4
8/6/12

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 3 defroster nozzle garnish.
10. INSTALL NO. 2 SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE DUCT
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the No. 2 side defroster

nozzle duct.
11. INSTALL NO. 1 SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE DUCT

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 2 side defroster nozzle duct.
12. INSTALL DEFROSTER NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
(b) Install the defroster nozzle assembly, No. 2 side defroster nozzle duct, and No. 1 side defroster
nozzle duct as a single unit with the screws.
13. INSTALL NO. 2 HEATER TO REGISTER DUCT
3/4
8/6/12
(a) Engage the claw.
(b) Install the No. 2 heater to register duct with the 3 screws.
14. INSTALL NO. 1 HEATER TO REGISTER DUCT

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the No. 2 heater to register duct.
4/4
8/6/12
INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003O1000MX
Title: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. TABLE OF BOLT, SCREW AND NUT
(a) All bolts, screws and nuts relevant to installing and removing the instrument panel are shown
along with their alphabetical code in the table.
2. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
4. REMOVE LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003O1000MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
(a) Apply protective tape to the area shown in the

illustration.
*1
Protective Tape
(b) Using a moulding remover, disengage the 6 claws and

remove the No. 2 instrument panel speaker panel subassembly.
*1
Moulding Remover
(c) Disconnect the connector.
6. REMOVE FRONT NO. 2 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

7. REMOVE FRONT NO. 3 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
HINT:
9. REMOVE FRONT NO. 2 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)

10. REMOVE FRONT NO. 3 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
11. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH
2/6
8/6/12
(a) Pull the upper part of the front pillar garnish LH in the
direction of the arrow (1), and disengage the 2 clips and
the front pillar garnish clip.
*1
HINT:
The front pillar garnish clip should be remained on the front
pillar garnish LH.
(b) Pull the front pillar garnish LH in the direction of the arrow (2) and disengage the 2 guides.
(c) Turn the front pillar garnish LH in the direction of the

arrow.
NOTICE:
While turning, be careful not to damage the curtain
shield airbag.
(d) Disengage the tip of the front pillar garnish clip and remove the front pillar garnish LH.
NOTICE:
Do not use any tools to disengage the tip of the front pillar garnish clip.
Be careful not to damage the front pillar garnish clip.
3/6
8/6/12
*1
front pillar garnish clip
(e) Protect the curtain shield airbag assembly (w/curtain

shield airbag).
*1
Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly
*2
Adhesive Tape
*3
Protective Cover
(f) Cover the airbag with a piece of cloth or nylon and secure the edges of the cover with tape as
NOTICE:
Cover the curtain shield airbag with a protective cover as soon as the front pillar garnish LH is
removed.
12. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

HINT:
13. REMOVE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

14. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL ORNAMENT
(a) Disengage the 3 clips and 3 claws to remove the

instrument panel ornament.
15. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
4/6
8/6/12
(b) Slide the slider and disconnect the passenger airbag connector.
*1
Slider
(c) Remove the 2 bolts and the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly.

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and 7 screws to remove the instrument panel sub-assembly.
5/6
8/6/12
6/6
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): FRONT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MUF01NX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): FRONT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUF01NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): FRONT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000202N035X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): FRONT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT DOOR COURTESY LIGHT SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
1 - Switch body
Not pushed
Below 1
1 - Switch body
Pushed
10 k or higher
*a

(Front Door Courtesy Light Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the front door
courtesy switch assembly.
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): FRONT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MUW021X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): FRONT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT DOOR COURTESY LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(b) Install the front door courtesy light switch assembly with the bolt.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUW021X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): FRONT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MUX01XX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): FRONT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. REMOVE FRONT DOOR COURTESY LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(b) Disconnect the connector and remove the front door

courtesy light switch assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUX01XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003YO000TX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YO000TX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003YNZ00VX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER
comes on.
OK:
CONDITION
Battery positive (+) 2 (ILL+)
Battery negative (-) 6 (ILL-)
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Light comes on
If the result is not as specified, replace the transponder

key amplifier.
*a

(Transponder Key Amplifier)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YNZ00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003YNY00XX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(b) Engage the 2 claws to install the transponder key amplifier.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YNY00XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003YO100XX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): IGNITION KEY CYLINDER LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective

tape, disengage the 2 claws and remove the transponder
key amplifier.
*1
Protective Tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YO100XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: ACC Signal Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011SQ09FX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: ACC Signal Circuit (2013 FR-S)
ACC Signal Circuit
DESCRIPTION
This circuit detects the ignition switch ACC or off condition, and sends it to the main body ECU (network
gateway ECU).
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011SQ09FX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12

OK:
Normal conditions listed above are displayed.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
ACC SW
2.
NORMAL CONDITION
Ignition switch ACC signal/ON or OFF
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
NG

(INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK
ASSEMBLY - BATTERY AND BODY GROUND)
OK


- BATTERY AND BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the 3A and 3E instrument panel junction block assembly connectors.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3E-1 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
3A-20 - Body
ground
Ignition switch
ACC
11 to 14 V
2/4
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3A-12 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
3A-13 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
*a

(to instrument panel junction block assembly)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
INSPECT INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY (ACC1 RELAY)
assembly.
*a

(Instrument panel junction block assembly)
3/4
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
3E-1 - MB-9 (ACC)
3E-1 - MB-9 (ACC)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
Battery positive (+) 3A-20

Battery negative (-) 3A-12 or 3A-13
Below 1
NG
OK
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
GATEWAY ECU)
4/4
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004PIC00IX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
1. CUSTOMIZE LIGHTING SYSTEM (INT)
(a) Customizing using the Techstream
HINT:
NOTICE:
customized.
(4) Enter the following menus: Customize Setting / Illuminated Entry.
Illuminated Entry
TESTER
DISPLAY
DEFAULT
CONTENT
SETTING
Changes the lighting time after closing all of the doors.

(It will fade out immediately in case of turning the
7.5 s,
15 s or
ignition switch from off to ACC or ON.)
30 s
Lighting
Time
15 s
I/L when
ACC OFF
ON
Lights up the ignition key cylinder light and map light

ON or
when the ignition switch is turned from ACC or ON to off. OFF
I/L ON
W/Door
Key
Unlock
ON

ON or
when doors are unlocked using a mechanical key or door
OFF
control transmitter.
Interior
Light
Control
ON

when the illuminated entry function is operating.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004PIC00IX.html?sisuffix=ff&lo
RELEVANT
ECU
Main body
ECU
(Network
gateway
ECU)
ON or
OFF
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKV0A8X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
D Door
Courtesy
SW
P Door
Courtesy
SW
Luggage
Courtesy
SW
IG SW
Driver side door courtesy light switch signal/ON or

OFF
Passenger side door courtesy light switch signal/ON

or OFF
Luggage compartment door courtesy switch

signal/ON or OFF
Ignition switch ON signal/ON or OFF
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKV0A8X.html?sisuffix=ff
NORMAL
CONDITION
ON: Driver side
door closed
OFF: Driver side
door open
ON: Passenger
side door closed
OFF: Passenger
side door open
ON: Luggage
compartment door
open
OFF: Luggage
compartment door
closed
ON: Ignition
switch ON
OFF: Ignition
switch off
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
1/3
8/6/12
ACC SW
Room Light
Output
Ignition switch ACC signal/ON or OFF
Map light assembly output signal/ON or OFF
Key
Illumination Ignition key cylinder light output signal/ON or OFF
Output
Lighting
Time
I/L when
ACC OFF
I/L ON
OFF: Ignition
switch off
ON: Map light
assembly on
OFF: Map light
assembly off
ON: Ignition key
cylinder light on
OFF: Ignition key
cylinder light off
15s: 15 seconds
Lighting time of the delay control function (illuminated
7.5s: 7.5 seconds
entry system)/15s, 7.5s or 30s
30s: 30 seconds
Function that lights up the interior lights when the
ignition switch is turned from on (ACC or IG) to
off/OFF or ON
Function that lights up the interior lights when the
W/Door Key
doors are unlocked/OFF or ON
Unlock
OFF: Function
disabled
ON: Function
enabled
OFF: Function
disabled
ON: Function
enabled
OFF: System not
Interior
Light
Control
ON: Ignition
switch ACC
Operation of the illuminated entry system/OFF or ON
operated
ON: System
operated
Customized
value is
displayed
Customized
value is
displayed
Customized
value is
displayed
Customized
value is
displayed
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:

(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
Main Body
2/3
8/6/12
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
RANGE
Illuminated Entry
System
Key Ring Light
Map light
assembly
Ignition key
cylinder light
Ignition key cylinder light
ON/OFF
Map light assembly switch in DOOR

position
ON/OFF
3/3
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Door Courtesy Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011T306TX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Door Courtesy Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Door Courtesy Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) detects the condition of the front door courtesy light switch
assembly using this circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.

1/5
8/6/12

OK:
Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
D Door
Courtesy SW
P Door
Courtesy SW
Driver side door courtesy light switch

signal/ON or OFF
Passenger side door courtesy light switch

signal/ON or OFF
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE

closed

open
ON: Passenger side
door closed
OFF: Passenger side

door open
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
OK
Driver side door courtesy light switch or passenger side door courtesy light switch does
not operate
2.
INSPECT FRONT DOOR COURTESY LIGHT
SWITCH ASSEMBLY (LH OR RH)
INSPECT FRONT DOOR COURTESY LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (LH OR RH)
(a) Remove the front door courtesy light switch assembly
(b) Inspect the front door courtesy light switch assembly
OK:
Front door courtesy light switch assembly is normal.
Result:
2/5
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK (for Front LH)
OK (for Front RH)
NG
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FRONT

DOOR COURTESY LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY RH
- INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK
ASSEMBLY)
REPLACE FRONT DOOR COURTESY LIGHT
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FRONT DOOR COURTESY LIGHT SWITCH

ASSEMBLY LH - INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the H21 front door courtesy light switch assembly LH connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H21-1 - 3A-28
Always
Below 1
H21-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
3/5
8/6/12
assembly.
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
3A-28 - MB-16 (FDCY)
5.
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
NG

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FRONT DOOR COURTESY LIGHT SWITCH

ASSEMBLY RH - INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the G18 front door courtesy light switch assembly RH connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G18-1 - 3B-13
Always
Below 1
G18-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
4/5
8/6/12
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
6.
assembly.
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
3B-13 - MB-10 (FPCY)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
NG

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
5/5
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKJ0DFX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the lighting system.
1.
NEXT
2.
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS AND SYMPTOM CHECK
NEXT
3.
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
4.
Result:
RESULT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKJ0DFX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
PROCEED TO
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)
Fault is not listed in Problem Symptoms Table.
Fault is listed in Problem Symptoms Table.
Go to step 6
5.

NEXT
6.
NEXT
7.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKJ0DFX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: IG Signal Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011SQ09EX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: IG Signal Circuit (2013 FR-S)
IG Signal Circuit
DESCRIPTION
This circuit detects the ignition switch ON or off condition, and sends it to the main body ECU (network
gateway ECU).
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011SQ09EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12

OK:
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
IG SW
2.
NORMAL CONDITION
Ignition switch ON signal/ON or OFF
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
NG

(INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK
ASSEMBLY - BATTERY AND BODY GROUND)
OK


- BATTERY AND BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the 3A and 3E instrument panel junction block assembly connectors.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONDITION
CONNECTION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3E-1 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
3A-15 - Body
ground
Ignition switch
ON
11 to 14 V
2/4
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3A-12 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
3A-13 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
*a

(to instrument panel junction block assembly)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
3.
INSPECT INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY (IG1 NO. 1 RELAY)
assembly.
*a

(Instrument panel junction block assembly)
3/4
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
3E-1 - MB-8 (IG)
3E-1 - MB-8 (IG)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10 k or higher
Battery positive (+) 3A-15

Battery negative (-) 3A-12 or 3A-13
Below 1
NG
OK
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
GATEWAY ECU)
4/4
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Ignition Key Cylinder Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000055AM000X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Ignition Key Cylinder Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Ignition Key Cylinder Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) controls the operation of the transponder key amplifier
(ignition key cylinder light).
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000055AM000X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12

(e) Check that the light operates.
ON:
Ignition key cylinder light comes on
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
Key Ring Light
2.
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
ON/OFF
Ignition key cylinder light
NG
INSPECT TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER
OK

INSPECT TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER
(a) Remove the transponder key amplifier
(b) Inspect the transponder key amplifier
OK:
Transponder key amplifier is normal.
NG
REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER - BATTERY)
(a) Disconnect the D54 transponder key amplifier connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
2/3
8/6/12
CONDITION
D54-2 (ILL+) - Body
ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

(to transponder key amplifier)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER - MAIN BODY ECU

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D54-6 (ILL-) - D5-28 (ILL)
Always
Below 1
D5-28 (ILL) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
3/3
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Interior Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001T9V05MX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Interior Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Interior Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) controls the operation of the map light assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001T9V05MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(e) Check that the lights operate.
OK:
Map light fades in.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
Illuminated Entry System
2.
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
Map light assembly
ON/OFF
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
-
NG
INSPECT MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
OK

NG
REPLACE MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
INSPECT MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the map light assembly
(b) Inspect the map light assembly
OK:
Map light assembly is normal.
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY - MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the K3 map light assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
2/3
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
K3-2 (+B) - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
*a

(to map light assembly)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY - MAIN BODY ECU
(a) Disconnect the K3 map light assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
K3-3 (DOOR SW) - D5-7 (DOMR)
Always
Below 1
D5-7 (DOMR) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
GATEWAY ECU)
3/3
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Luggage Compartment Door Courtesy Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011T306SX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: Luggage Compartment Door Courtesy Switch Circuit (2013
FR-S)
Luggage Compartment Door Courtesy Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) detects the condition of the luggage compartment door lock
assembly using this circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011T306SX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
OK:
Main Body
TESTER
DISPLAY
Luggage
Courtesy SW
2.
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
ON: Luggage compartment

door open
Luggage compartment door courtesy

OFF: Luggage compartment

door closed
NG
INSPECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR

LOCK ASSEMBLY
OK

INSPECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the luggage compartment door lock assembly

table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
DOOR LOCK
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3 (D+) - 2 (E)
Open (Unlock)
Below 1
3 (D+) - 2 (E)
Close (Lock)
10 k or higher
*a

(Luggage Compartment Door Lock Assembly)
*b
Close (Lock)
*c
Open (Unlock)
NG
REPLACE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR

LOCK ASSEMBLY
2/4
8/6/12
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY

- INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the 3D instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

(b) Disconnect the J3 luggage compartment door lock assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
J3-3 (D+) - 3D-26
Always
Below 1
J3-3 (D+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
J3-2 (E) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
assembly.
3/4
8/6/12
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
3D-26 - MB-12
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
NG
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4/4
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002R6C02ZX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. INSPECT INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL OPERATION
NOTICE:
Perform this inspection with the customize parameters at the initial settings.
HINT:
The interior light control illuminates the lights below.
Ignition Key Cylinder Light

Map Light
(a) The operation and conditions of this control are described below.
OPERATION
Fade in and illuminate
constantly
CONDITION
Any door is opened when all doors are closed.
When any of the following conditions is met, the lights illuminate for 15
seconds, and then fade out:
Illuminate for 15 seconds,

and then fade out
Any door is unlocked when the ignition switch is off with all
doors closed and locked.
The ignition switch is turned from ON to off when all doors are
closed.
All doors are closed after any door is opened and the ignition
switch off.
When any of the following conditions is met, the lights fade out
immediately:
Fade out immediately
The ignition switch is turned from off to ACC when all doors
are closed.
All doors are locked when the ignition switch is off, all doors
are closed and any door is unlocked.
All doors are locked again when all doors are already closed
and locked.
2. BATTERY SAVING CONTROL OPERATION

NOTICE:
Perform this inspection with the customize parameters at the initial settings.
HINT:
The lights controlled by battery saving control are as follows:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002R6C02ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)

Map Light
Luggage Compartment Light
(a) The operation and conditions of this control are described below.
OPERATION
CONDITION
When 20 minutes elapse after the ignition switch is turned from ACC or ON to off and the
lights that operate remain on, the lights are turned off.
HINT:
Battery saving control is canceled when any of the following operations is performed
Battery
saving
before the lights are turned off by battery saving control. After the operation is
performed, the lights remain on for another 20 minutes and then the lights are turned
off.
The
Any
The
Any
ignition switch is turned ACC or ON

door is opened and closed
luggage compartment door is opened and closed
door is unlocked
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002R6C02ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000PKL05UX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000PKL05UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004PDO00PX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING TECHSTREAM
(a) When using the Techstream with the ignition switch off to troubleshoot:
Connect the Techstream to the vehicle, and turn the courtesy light switch on and off at 1.5-second
intervals until communication between the Techstream and the vehicle begins.
(b) After all DTCs are cleared, check if the trouble occurs again 6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to ON.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004PDO00PX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002CE20B4X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Illuminated Entry System (Interior Light Control)

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Interior light circuit

gateway ECU)
Illuminated entry system does not operate.

Illuminated entry system does not operate with door opening
or closing operation.

gateway ECU)
Illuminated entry system does not operate with door lock or

unlock operation.

gateway ECU)
IG signal circuit
Illuminated entry system does not operate with ignition switch
operation.
ACC signal circuit

gateway ECU)
Map Light
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
Bulb
Map light assembly does not illuminate.
SEE PAGE
-
Map light assembly

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002CE20B4X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
Battery Saving Control

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
IG signal circuit
Battery saving function does not operate.
ACC signal circuit


SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Ignition key cylinder light (Transponder key

amplifier)
Ignition Key Cylinder Light does not
illuminate.
Ignition key cylinder light circuit

Luggage Compartment Room Light

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
Bulb
SEE
PAGE
-
No. 1 luggage compartment light assembly

Luggage compartment room light does not
illuminate.
Luggage compartment door courtesy switch

circuit

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002CE20B4X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002CDY04JX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
(a) The illuminated entry system has the following control functions:
CONTROL
OUTLINE
When any door is unlocked, the lights that operate turn on.
Door
Lock/UnlockWhen all doors are locked, the lights that operate turn off.
linked
When any door is opened, the lights that operate turn on.
Door
Open/CloseWhen all doors are closed, the lights that operate turn off.
linked
Ignition
Switchlinked
When the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to off, the

lights that operate turn on.
When the ignition switch is turned from off to ON or ACC, the
lights that operate turn off.
When approximately 15 seconds elapse after any of the
following conditions is met, the lights that operate turn off:
Delay
The door unlock-linked function is active.

Any door is opened and then all doors are closed
when the ignition switch is off.
LIGHTS THAT OPERATE

Ignition Key
Cylinder
Light
Map Light
Ignition Key
Cylinder
Light
Map Light
Ignition Key
Cylinder
Light
Map Light
Ignition Key
Cylinder
Light
Map Light
When 20 minutes elapse after the ignition switch is turned from

ACC or ON to off and the lights that operate remain on, the
lights are turned off.
HINT:
Battery saving control is canceled when any of the following
Battery
Saving
operations is performed before the lights are turned off by

battery saving control. After the operation is performed, the
lights remain on for another 20 minutes and then the lights
are turned off.
The
Any
The
Any
ignition switch is turned ACC or ON

door is opened and closed
luggage compartment door is opened and closed
door is unlocked
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002CDY04JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
Ignition Key
Cylinder
Light
Map Light
Luggage
Compartment
Light
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002CDY04JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000351Z02PX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000351Z02PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000351Z02PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000026E702JX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LIGHTING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000026E702JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the 3A, 3C, 3E, A73 and D6 instrument panel junction block assembly and main body
ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
2/4
8/6/12
TERMINAL NO.
WIRING COLOR
TERMINAL
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
Ignition switch
3A-15 - Body
ground
W - Body ground IG power supply
3A-20 - Body
ground
SB - Body
ground
3A-27 - Body
G-R - Body
ground
ground
3C-19 - Body
ground
3E-1 - Body
ground
ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off Below 1 V

Ignition switch
ACC power supply
ACC
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off Below 1 V

Always
11 to 14 V
L-R - Body
ground
Always
11 to 14 V
B-R - Body
ground
Always
11 to 14 V
TERMINAL NO. (SYMBOL)
WIRING COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
3A-12 - Body ground
B - Body ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
3A-13 - Body ground
B - Body ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
A73-4 (GND) - Body
B-Y - Body
ground
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
D6-1 (GND) - Body

ground
B - Body ground
(d) Reconnect the 3A, 3C, 3E, A73 and D6 instrument panel junction block assembly and main body
ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
(e) Measure the voltage and check for pulses according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRING TERMINAL DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
COLOR
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
(SYMBOL)
3A-28 -
V-
Body
Body
ground
ground
3B-13 Body
GR Body
ground
ground
Front door courtesy light

switch LH input
Front door courtesy light

switch RH input
Front door LH open
Below 1 V
Front door LH closed
11 to 14 V
Front door RH open
Below 1 V
Front door RH closed
11 to 14 V
3/4
8/6/12
3D-26 -
SB -
Luggage compartment
Body
Body
door courtesy light
ground
ground
switch input
L-
Illuminated entry drive
Body
output (to map light
ground
assembly)
D5-7
(DOMR) Body
ground
Luggage compartment door open
Below 1 V
Luggage compartment door closed
11 to 14 V
Map light switch in DOOR position and

map light assembly on
Map light switch in DOOR position and
map light assembly off
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off, ignition key cylinder

D5-28 (ILL)
- Body
YBody
ground
ground
light off (when operated by illuminated

Ignition key cylinder
entry system)
light drive output
Ignition switch off, ignition key cylinder

light on (when operated by illuminated
entry system)
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
4/4
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MUB01PX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUB01PX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000198305RX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NO. 1 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply battery voltage to the terminals and check that the
light comes on.
OK:
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Luggage compartment light

Comes on
If the result is not specified, replace the bulb or the No. 1

luggage compartment light assembly.
*a

(No. 1 Luggage Compartment Light Assembly)
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MUO01RX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
(a) Install the luggage compartment light bulb to the luggage compartment light body.
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT LENS

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the luggage compartment light lens.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT ASSEMBLY

(b) Turn the No. 1 luggage compartment light assembly in the

direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration, and
install it.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUO01RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MUP01RX
Title: LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE NO. 1 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the No. 1 luggage compartment light assembly in the

direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration, and
disconnect it.
(b) Disconnect the connector and remove the No. 1 luggage

compartment light assembly.
2. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT LENS
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUP01RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the luggage

compartment light lens.
3. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
(a) Remove the luggage compartment light bulb from the

luggage compartment light body.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUP01RX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MU9020X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000017LP009X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the map light assembly operation.
(1) Apply battery voltage to the terminals and check that
the light comes on.
OK:
CONDITION
Battery positive (+) - 2

(+B)
Battery negative (-) - 1
(GND)
Battery positive (+) - 2
(+B)
Battery negative (-) - 3
(DOOR SW)
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Map light switch

ON
Map light comes

on
Map light switch

DOOR
Map light comes

on
If the result is not specified, replace the map light bulb

or map light assembly.
*a

(Map Light Assembly)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000017LP009X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MUK026X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL MAP LIGHT BULB
(a) Install the map light bulb to the map light assembly.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 MAP LIGHT LENS

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the No. 1 map light lens.
3. INSTALL MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

(b) Engage the 2 guides.
(c) Engage the 2 claws and install the map light assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUK026X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003MUL026X
Title: LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 claws.
(b) Disengage the 2 guides and disconnect the map light

assembly.
(c) Disconnect the connector and remove the map light

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUL026X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
LIGHTING (INT): PERSONAL LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
assembly.
2. REMOVE NO. 1 MAP LIGHT LENS

tape, disengage the 2 claws and remove the No. 1 map
light lens.
*1
Protective Tape
3. REMOVE MAP LIGHT BULB

(a) Remove the map light bulb from the map light body.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003MUL026X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002NJF01AX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013
FR-S)

Use these procedures to troubleshoot the clock system.
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
NEXT
4.
NEXT
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002NJF01AX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR
5.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002NJF01AX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002NJG00YX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002NJG00YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002NJI017X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Clock System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Clock is not displayed

Clocks time is very incorrect
Clock power source circuit

Clock loses or gains time
Clock assembly
Perform data list (Outside Light)
Clocks nighttime illumination does

not operate
Operating Light Control Rheostat does not Change

Light Brightness

Clock assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002NJI017X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002NJL015X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002NJL015X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004HHY003X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004HHY003X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004HHX004X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the clock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004HHX004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004HHZ004X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: CLOCK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(a) Disengage the 4 claws and remove the clock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004HHZ004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004HHV003X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004HHV003X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004KXX003X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE COMBINATION METER GLASS
(a) Disengage the 7 claws and remove the combination
meter glass.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the pointer and the dial plate when
removing the combination meter glass and combination
meter cover.
Do not allow any dirt (fingerprints, grease, etc.) to adhere
to the combination meter glass or meter display panel. If
they are dirty, wipe them clean with a soft cloth.
2. REMOVE COMBINATION METER COVER
(a) Disengage the 6 claws and remove the combination

meter cover.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the pointer and the dial plate when
removing the combination meter glass and combination
meter cover.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004KXX003X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004HHU004X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
(b) Engage the 2 clips to install the combination meter assembly.
(c) Install the 2 screws.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004HHU004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004KXY003X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL COMBINATION METER COVER
(a) Engage the 6 claws to install the combination meter cover.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the meter dial plate is securely installed to the locating tabs when the
combination meter cover is installed.
2. INSTALL COMBINATION METER GLASS
(a) Engage the 7 claws to install the combination meter

glass.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any dirt (fingerprints, grease, etc.) to
adhere to the combination meter glass or meter display
panel. If they are dirty, wipe them clean with a soft
cloth.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004KXY003X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004HHW004X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: COMBINATION METER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. REMOVE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the 2 clips.
(c) Disconnect the connector and remove the combination

meter assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004HHW004X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042TI00DX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042TI00DX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042TH00BX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the light control rheostat.
2. INSTALL SWITCH BASE

(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the switch base.

(c) Engage the 4 clips to install the No. 1 instrument panel under cover sub-assembly.
(d) Install the 2 screws.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042TH00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042TJ00BX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(b) Disengage the 4 clips.
(c) Disengage the 4 claws and separate the No. 1 instrument panel under cover sub-assembly.
(d) Disconnect each connector and remove the No. 1 instrument panel under cover sub-assembly.
3. REMOVE SWITCH BASE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042TJ00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(a) Disengage the 4 claws and remove the switch base.
4. REMOVE LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the light control

rheostat.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042TJ00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: B1500: Fuel Sender Open Detected (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000032UZ00OX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: B1500: Fuel Sender Open Detected (2013 FRS)
DTC
B1500
Fuel Sender Open Detected
DESCRIPTION
This DTC is stored when the combination meter detects the fuel sender gauge malfunction.
DTC
NO.
B1500
When combination meter detects fuel sender

gauge malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly
Fuel suction tube assembly with
pump and gauge
Fuel tank return tube subassembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000032UZ00OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL INPUT)

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Data List.
(e) According to the display on the tester, read the Data List.
Combination Meter
ITEM
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Fuel sender gauge input

2/6
8/6/12
Fuel Input
Fuel sender input value
Min.: 0
Unit: Liter
Max.: 127.5
OK:
Fuel input signal displayed on the tester is approximately the same as the fuel receiver gauge
indication.
2.
NG
INSPECT FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
OK
(a) Remove the fuel sender gauge assembly
(b) Inspect the fuel sender gauge assembly
NG
REPLACE FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
INSPECT FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND GAUGE
(a) Remove the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and
gauge
.
table below.
TESTER CONNECTOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G7-1 (FS+) - 1
Always
Below 1
G7-2 (FS-) - 2
Always
Below 1
*a

(Fuel Suction Tube Assembly with Pump and Gauge)
3/6
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY

WITH PUMP AND GAUGE
OK
4.
INSPECT NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly
(b) Inspect the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly
NG
REPLACE NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE

ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
INSPECT FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the fuel tank return tube sub-assembly

table below.
TESTER CONNECTOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G6-1 (L) - 3
Always
Below 1
G6-2 (FS+) - 2
Always
Below 1
*a

(Fuel Tank Return Tube Sub-assembly)
NG
REPLACE FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE SUBASSEMBLY
4/6
8/6/12
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - FUEL

SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND GAUGE)
(a) Disconnect the D7 combination meter assembly connector.

(b) Disconnect the G7 fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge connector.
TESTER CONNECTOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-28 (FS-) - G7-2 (FS-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-28 (FS-) or G7-2 (FS-) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
7.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND
GAUGE - FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the G7 fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge connector.
(b) Disconnect the G6 fuel tank return tube sub-assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-1 (FS+) - G6-2 (FS+)
Always
Below 1
5/6
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-1 (FS+) or G6-2 (FS+) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
8.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - FUEL TANK

RETURN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY)

(b) Disconnect the G6 fuel tank return tube sub-assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-27 (L) - G6-1 (L)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTOR
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-27 (L) or G6-1 (L) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
6/6
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: B1509: Open in Ambient Temperature Sensor Ci
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002LJ403UX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: B1509: Open in Ambient Temperature Sensor
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1509
Open in Ambient Temperature Sensor Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The thermistor assembly is installed in the front part of the cooler condenser assembly to display the
ambient temperature on the multi-information display in the combination meter assembly and to control
the air conditioning auto mode. As the temperature decreases, the resistance increases. As the
temperature increases, the resistance decreases.
The combination meter assembly applies a voltage (5 V) to the thermistor assembly and reads the
voltage changes as changes in the resistance of the thermistor assembly.
DTC NO.
B1509
An open or short in the thermistor assembly circuit.
TROUBLE AREA
Thermistor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002LJ403UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12

Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
NORMAL CONDITION
Thermistor assembly
/
Ambient
Temperature
Min: -40.0C
(-40.0F)
Actual ambient temperature

displayed
Max: 87.5C
(189.5F)
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Open in the circuit: -40.0C

(-40.0F)
Short in the circuit: 87.5C
(189.5F)
OK:
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK (When troubleshooting according to the DTC)
OK (When troubleshooting according to problem symptoms table)
NG
INSPECT THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs
(b) Check for DTCs
2/4
8/6/12
OK:
DTC B1509 is not output
3.
NG
OK
END
NG
REPLACE THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY
INSPECT THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the thermistor assembly
(b) Inspect the thermistor assembly
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY - COMBINATION METER

ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the A48 thermistor assembly connector.

(b) Disconnect the D7 combination meter assembly connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A48-1 - D7-24 (TAM)
Always
Below 1
A48-2 - D7-25 (SG-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A48-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
A48-2 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
3/4
8/6/12
OK
4/4
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004NOP00DX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
1. CUSTOMIZE METER / GAUGE SYSTEM
(4) Enter the following menus: Customize Setting / Combination Meter / Warning.
NOTICE:
Be sure to record the current value before customizing.
Warning
TESTER DISPLAY
Key Remind Sound
DEFAULT
CONTENT
NORMAL,
Function to change the frequency
NORMAL
FAST or
of the key reminder buzzer.
SLOW
Tail Remind Buzzer
ON
Function to change the Tail

Remind Buzzer.
Driver Side Seatbelt

Warning Buzzer*
ON
Function to turn on/off the seat

belt warning buzzer
ON
Function to change the seat-belt

warning buzzer.
Front Passenger Side

Seatbelt Warning Buzzer*
SETTING
RELEVANT ECU
Combination
meter
assembly
ON or OFF
Combination
meter
assembly
ON or OFF
Combination
meter
assembly
ON or OFF
Combination
meter
assembly
*: This setting is only valid for the buzzer which sounds at 20 km/h (12 mph) or more
(9) Enter the following menus: Customize Setting / Combination Meter / Air Conditioner.
NOTICE:
Be sure to record the current value before customizing.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004NOP00DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
Air Conditioner
TESTER
DISPLAY
Ambient
Temperature
Adjustment
DEFAULT
CONTENT
0C (0F)
Function to change the

display temperature to match
the actual temperature.
SETTING
RELEVANT
ECU
+3C (+5.4F) +2C (+3.6F), +1C

Combination
(+1.8F), 0C (0F), -1C (-1.8F), -2C meter
(-3.6F) or 3C (-5.4F)
assembly
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004NOP00DX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F8Q01DX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.

TESTER DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
ODO/TRIP Change
SW
Light control rheostat

switch (cancel switch)
Tail Cancel SW
ON or OFF
ODO/TRIP Change
SW
ODO/TRIP change switch
P-Seatbelt Buckle
SW
Vehicle Speed
Meter
ON or OFF
Vehicle speed
Min.: 0 (0)
Max.: 255 (158)
Min.: 0
Max.: 12750
Coolant
Temperature
ON: Light control rheostat switch

(cancel switch) TAIL
OFF: Light control rheostat switch
(cancel switch) OFF
ON: ODO/TRIP switch pushed
OFF: ODO/TRIP switch not pushed
ON: Occupant detection sensor (Front

Occupant detection sensor
passenger side) ON
(Front passenger side)
OFF: Occupant detection sensor (Front
ON or OFF
passenger side) OFF
Engine speed
Engine Rpm
NORMAL CONDITION
Engine coolant
temperature
Min.: 0
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Approximately same as actual vehicle

speed (When vehicle is being driven)
Unit: km/h
(mph)
Approximately same as actual engine

speed (when engine is running)
Unit: rpm
After warming up:

80 to 108 (176 to 226)
Unit: C (F)
Max.: 127.5
Multi Display Select
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F8Q01DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
Switch
Multi Display Select Switch

ON or OFF
ON: DISP switch pushed
OFF: DISP switch not pushed
+B voltage
+B Voltage Value
Min.: 0
Below 1 to 14
Unit: V
Max.: 25.5
Fuel sender gauge input
Fuel Input
Min.: 0
Fuel sender input value
Unit: Liter
Max.: 127.5
Ambient
Temperature
Rheostat value
Ambient temperature
Min.: -40 (-40)
Same as outside temperature
Unit: C (F)
Max.: 87.5 (189.5)

switch input
Min.: 0
Displays rheostat volume figure

0 to 100
Unit: %
Max.: 100
Quantity of

switch output
Outside Light
Min.: 0
Displays rheostat volume figure

0 to 100
Unit: %
Max.: 100
Key Remind Sound
Tail Remind Buzzer
Key remind sound

FAST, NORMAL or SLOW
Tail remind buzzer
ON or OFF
Driver Side
Driver seat belt warning
Seatbelt Warning
Buzzer
buzzer
P-Seatbelt
Warning Buzzer
Number of Trouble
Code
ON or OFF
Front passenger seat belt
warning buzzer
ON or OFF
The DTC number which is
currently output
Display key reminder buzzer speed

setting
ON: Tail remind buzzer ON
OFF: Tail remind buzzer OFF
ON: Driver side seat belt warning
buzzer ON
OFF: Driver side seat belt warning
buzzer OFF
ON: Front passenger side seat belt
warning buzzer ON
OFF: Front passenger side seat belt
warning buzzer OFF
-
HINT:

HINT:
2/5
8/6/12

(e) According to the display on the tester, perform the Active Test.
Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
Speed Meter
Operation
TEST PART
Speedometer
Tachometer Operation Tachometer

Fuel Meter Operation
A/T Indicator
Operation 1
Fuel gauge
A/T shift indicator light
CONTROL RANGE
0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240
km/h
0, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000,
5000, 6000, 7000 rpm
EMPTY, 1/2, FULL
P, R, N, D, 4, 3, 2, 1
(Indicator light comes on.)
A/T Indicator
Operation 2
5, 6, M
A/T Indicator
Operation 3
Indicat. Lamp Airbag
Airbag warning light
Indicat. Lamp Doors

All Open
Door warning light

Seat Belt
Front passenger seat

belt warning light
OFF/ON
Driver Side Seat Belt
Driver side seat belt

warning light
OFF/ON
Indicat. Lamp ABS
ABS warning light
Indicat. Lamp Slip
SLIP indicator light
Indicat. Lamp Beam
Hi-beam indicator light
Indicat. Lamp Fr FOG
Front fog indicator light
Indicat. Lamp Rr FOG
Rear fog indicator light

D
OFF/ON
(Warning light blink.)
OFF/ON
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
-
Vehicle is stopped and

engine is idling
engine is idling
engine is idling

engine is idling
OFF/ON
engine is idling
OFF/ON

engine is idling
OFF/ON
(Indicator light blink.)
engine is idling
OFF/ON

engine is idling
OFF/ON
engine is idling
3/5
8/6/12
Indicat.Lamp Fuel
VSC TRC Indicator
Low fuel warning light
TRC OFF/TRAC OFF

indicator light
OFF/ON
engine is idling
OFF/ON

engine is idling

OFF/ON

engine is idling
OFF/ON
engine is idling
OFF/ON
engine is idling
A/T oil temperature

warning light
OFF/ON

engine is idling
Cruise indicator light
OFF/ON
(green)
engine is idling
OFF/ON

engine is idling
OFF/ON
engine is idling
OFF/ON

engine is idling
OFF/ON
engine is idling
Shift down indicator
OFF/ON
light
engine is idling
OFF/ON
engine is idling
Cruise warning light
OFF/ON
(yellow)
engine is idling
Smart System
Smart system indicator
OFF/ON
Indicator
light (green)
engine is idling
Smart System
Smart system warning
OFF/ON
Warning
light (yellow)
engine is idling
Check engine warning
OFF/ON
light
engine is idling
Warning System
TPMS warning light
SPORT Indicator
Sport indicator light
Indicat. Lamp ECT

SNOW
A/T Oil Temperature
Operation
Indicat. Lamp Cruise
Snow indicator light
Indicat. Lamp Brake
Brake warning light
Indicat. EPS
EPS warning light
Indicat. SET
SET indicator light
Indicat. SIL (Up)
Shift up indicator light
Indicat. SIL (Down)
Indicat. VSC OFF
Cruise Warning
Check Engine Warning
VSC OFF indicator light
Water Temperature
Water temperature
Meter Operation
gauge
Meter Display 1
Drive monitor display
Meter Display 2
LOW, NORMAL, HIGH

engine is idling
6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, All
(Display light comes on.)
engine is idling
9, 8, 7
4/5
8/6/12
Drive monitor display
(Display light comes on.)
engine is idling
HINT:
The Techstream shows that the warning lights and indicator lights are illuminated, but those actual
lights in the combination meter will blink.
Telltales for which there are no settings do not operate.
When not functioning normally, there may be a combination meter assembly malfunction.
5/5
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001O81015X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013
FR-S)

DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
B1500
Fuel Sender Open Detected
B1509
Open in Ambient Temperature Sensor Circuit
U0073
Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off
U0100
Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A"
U0131
Lost Communication with Power Steering Control Module
U0122
U0140
Lost Communication with Body Control Module
U0151
Lost Communication with Restraints Control Module
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001O81015X.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE PAGE
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001Q77012X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / DTC.
(e) Check DTCs and then write them down.
HINT:
(f) Confirm the details of the DTCs.
2. CLEAR DTC
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON (do not start the engine).
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / DTC / Clear.
HINT:
(e) Clear DTCs by pressing the YES button on the tester.

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001Q77012X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Engine Coolant Temperature Receiver Gauge M
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YO001TX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Engine Coolant Temperature Receiver Gauge
Engine Coolant Temperature Receiver Gauge Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The combination meter assembly controls the engine coolant temperature receiver gauge in accordance
with the engine coolant temperature sensor signals from the ECM through the CAN communication
system.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(a) Check if CAN communication DTCs are output
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
1/4
8/6/12
DTCs are not output
DTCs are output
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (WATER TEMPERATURE METER

OPERATION)

Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
RANGE
Water Temperature Meter
Water temperature
LOW, NORMAL,
Vehicle is stopped and engine
Operation
gauge
HIGH
is idling
OK:
The value selected during Active Test is displayed.
NG
OK
3.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (COOLANT TEMPERATURE)

2/4
8/6/12

Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
ITEM/RANGE
Coolant
Engine coolant
temperature
Temperature
Min.: 0 (0)
NOTE
After warming up: 80 to 108 (176 to

226)
Unit: C ( F)
Max.: 127.5 (261.5)

OK:
The vehicle's coolant temperature and tester value are the same.
NG
OK
4.
CHECK SFI SYSTEM
(a) Check if the SFI system outputs DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs are not output
DTCs are output
GO TO SFI SYSTEM
5.

3/4
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine and ECT / Data List.
Engine and ECT
TESTER
MEASUREMENT
DISPLAY
ITEM/RANGE
Coolant temperature
Coolant Temp
Min.: -40 (-40)

Max.: 215 (419)
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
After warming up: 75 to 100 (167 to
Unit: C ( F)
212)
OK:
The vehicle's coolant temperature and tester value are the same.
NG
GO TO SFI SYSTEM
OK
6.
(a) Replace the combination meter assembly with a new or a normal one
OK:
The operation of the engine coolant temperature receiver gauge returns to normal.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END
4/4
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Entire Combination Meter does not Operate (20
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001XSZ017X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Entire Combination Meter does not Operate
(2013 FR-S)
Entire Combination Meter does not Operate
DESCRIPTION
This circuit is the power source circuit for the combination meter assembly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - BATTERY AND

BODY GROUND)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XSZ017X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Entire Combination Meter does not Operate (20
(a) Disconnect the D7 combination meter assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
(c) Measure the resistance according to the value in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-20 (ES1) - Body ground
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
*a

(d) Reconnect the D7 combination meter assembly connector.
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001XSZ017X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Fuel Gauge Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F8K01IX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Fuel Gauge Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
Fuel Gauge Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The combination meter assembly controls the fuel receiver gauge in accordance with the resistance of
the fuel sender gauge, which varies depending on the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F8K01IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
1.
CONFIRM DTC OUTPUT
(a) Check DTC
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1500 is output
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL METER OPERATION)

Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
Fuel Meter Operation
TEST PART
Fuel gauge
CONTROL RANGE
EMPTY, 1/2, FULL
NG
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
-
OK
3.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL INPUT)
2/4
8/6/12
4.
NG
OK
REPLACE FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
5.
INSPECT FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND GAUGE
REPLACE FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH

PUMP AND GAUGE
6.
REPLACE NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
REPLACE NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
7.
REPLACE FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY
REPLACE FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE SUBASSEMBLY
3/4
8/6/12
8.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - FUEL

SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND GAUGE)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
9.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND
GAUGE - FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY)
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
10.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - FUEL TANK

RETURN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY)
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
4/4
8/6/12
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F8D01HX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use these procedures to troubleshoot the combination meter.
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
(a) Use a Techstream to check if the CAN communication system is functioning normally.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN DTC is output
1/3
8/6/12
4.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Go to step 6
5.
(a) Data List/Active Test

.
.
(c) On-vehicle Inspection
NEXT
6.
NEXT
7.
CONFIRMATION TEST*
2/3
8/6/12
NEXT
END
3/3
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Odo/Trip Switch Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003A3400JX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Odo/Trip Switch Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
Odo/Trip Switch Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The ODO/TRIP display of the combination meter changes each time the trip switch is pressed.
HINT:
For more information about switching between displays, refer to the owner's manual.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MULTI DISPLAY SELECT SWITCH, ODO/TRIP

CHANGE SW)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003A3400JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12

Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
OFF: ODO/TRIP switch not

pushed
ODO/TRIP Change
SW
ODO/TRIP switch / OFF or ON
Multi Display Select

Switch
Multi Display Select Switch / OFF

or ON
ON: ODO/TRIP switch

pushed
OFF: DISP switch not
pushed
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
ON: DISP switch pushed
OK:
The value displayed on the Techstream changes in accordance with the actual ODO/TRIP change
switch and multi display select switch operation.
2.
NG
INSPECT TRIP SWITCH
OK
INSPECT TRIP SWITCH
(a) Remove the trip switch
2/4
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
2 (TRIP) - 1
2 (TRIP) - 1
3 (DISP) - 1
3 (DISP) - 1
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
ODO/TRIP switch on
Below 1
(pushed)
ODO/TRIP switch off
10 k or higher
(not pushed)
DISP switch on
Below 1
(pushed)
DISP switch off
10 k or higher
(not pushed)
*a

(Trip Switch)
NG
REPLACE TRIP SWITCH
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER - TRIP SWITCH AND BODY
GROUND)

(b) Disconnect the D64 trip switch connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-34 (DISP) - D64-3 (DISP)
Always
Below 1
D7-36 (TRIP) - D64-2 (TRIP)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-34 (DISP) or D64-3 (DISP) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D7-36 (TRIP) or D64-2 (TRIP) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
3/4
8/6/12
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
4/4
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000014WB07ZX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT SPEEDOMETER
(a) Check the operation.
(1) Using a speedometer tester (calibrated chassis dynamometer), check the speedometer
indication according to the table below.
Indicator Type: km/h
CHASSIS DYNAMOMETER INDICATION (KM/H)
ACCEPTABLE RANGE (KM/H)
20
19.3 to 22.7
40
39.1 to 42.9
60
58.8 to 63.2
80
78.8 to 83.2
100
98.8 to 103.2
120
118.8 to 123.2
140
138.8 to 143.2
160
158.8 to 163.2
180
178.8 to 183.2
200
198.8 to 203.2
220
218.8 to 223.2
240
238.8 to 243.2
CHASSIS DYNAMOMETER INDICATION (MPH)
ACCEPTABLE RANGE (MPH)
20
19.4 to 21.8
40
39.3 to 41.9
60
59.3 to 61.9
80
79.3 to 81.9
100
99.3 to 101.9
120
119.3 to 121.9
140
139.3 to 141.9
Indicator Type: MPH
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000014WB07ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
Tire wear, over inflation, or under inflation will cause errors.
(2) Check the deviation from the acceptable range of the speedometer indication.
Reference:
Less than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph)
HINT:
If the indication is not as specified, go to the problem symptoms table
2. INSPECT TACHOMETER
(a) Connect a tune-up tachometer, and start the engine.
(b) Compare the test results with the tachometer indications.
TUNE-UP TACHOMETER INDICATION (RPM)
ACCEPTABLE RANGE (RPM)
1000
933 to 1067
2000
1923 to 2077
3000
2913 to 3088
4000
3913 to 4088
5000
4913 to 5088
6000
5913 to 6088
7000
6913 to 7088
8000
7913 to 8088
HINT:
If the indication is not as specified, go to the Problem Symptoms Table
3. INSPECT INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHTS

(a) Check the illumination function of the warning or indicator lights listed below when turning the
OK:
WARNING OR INDICATOR
LIGHT
LOW FUEL
A/T OIL TEMP*
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Warning or indicator light comes on for about 2 seconds after turning the
Warning or indicator light comes on for about 2 or 3 seconds after turning
the ignition switch to ON.
TPMS
Brake
TRAC OFF
Warning or indicator light comes on for about 3 seconds after turning the
VSC OFF
2/3
8/6/12
VSC SPORT
Warning light comes on for about 6 seconds after turning the ignition switch
to ON.
SRS
Charge
Oil pressure
MIL (Check engine
The light goes off right after the engine starts.
warning light)
EPS
SLIP
ABS
The light goes off 3 minutes after starting the engine.
3/3
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Operating Light Control Rheostat does not Cha
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003A3200GX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Operating Light Control Rheostat does not
Change Light Brightness (2013 FR-S)
Operating Light Control Rheostat does not Change Light Brightness
DESCRIPTION
The brightness of the combination meter assembly is controlled by rotating the light control rheostat
knob in upward and downward.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (RHEOSTAT SWITCH)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003A3200GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
Combination Meter
TESTER
DISPLAY
Tail Cancel
SW
Rheostat
value
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
Taillight relay / OFF or ON

switch input /
Min.: 0
Max.: 100
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
OFF: Headlight dimmer switch (Light control

switch) OFF
ON: Headlight dimmer switch (Light control
switch) TAIL
The volume value of the rheostat is
displayed.
0 to 100
OK:
The value displayed on the Techstream changes in accordance with the actual rheostat switch
operation.
2.
NG
INSPECT LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT
OK
INSPECT LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT
(a) Remove the light control rheostat
2/4
8/6/12
TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-6
Cancel switch off on
10 k or higher Below 1
4-6
Always
4475 to 4946
5-6
Light control rheostat fully up Light control rheostat

fully down
485 to 536 4380 to

4841
*a

(Light Control Rheostat)
NG
REPLACE LIGHT CONTROL RHEOSTAT
OK
3/4
8/6/12
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - LIGHT

CONTROL RHEOSTAT)

(b) Disconnect the D2 light control rheostat connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-30 (E) - D2-6
Always
Below 1
D7-31 (TR) - D2-5
Always
Below 1
D7-32 (T) - D2-4
Always
Below 1
D7-33 (TC) - D2-1
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D7-30 (E) or D2-6 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D7-31 (TR) or D2-5 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D7-32 (T) or D2-4 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D7-33 (TC) or D2-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
4/4
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003UUR00AX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UUR00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UUR00AX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003UUS00HX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Malfunction System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
Entire combination meter does not operate
SEE PAGE
Entire combination meter does not operate
Meter/Gauge
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
Speedometer malfunction
Speedometer circuit
Tachometer malfunction
Tachometer circuit
Fuel gauge malfunction
Fuel gauge circuit
Engine coolant temperature receiver gauge

malfunction
Engine coolant temperature receiver

gauge circuit
ODO/TRIP switch malfunction
ODO/TRIP switch circuit
Operating light control rheostat does not change

light brightness
Light control rheostat circuit
SEE
PAGE
Warning/Indicator Light
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE

Turn indicator light does not come on

Perform active test (Indicat. SET)
SET indicator light does not come on*1
Cruise SET Indicator Light Circuit

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003UUS00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp Cruise)

CRUISE indicator light does not come on
(green)*1

Perform active test (Cruise Warning)
CRUISE warning light does not come on

(yellow)*1

Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp Doors All Open)
Open door warning light does not come

on
Door courtesy switch


Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp Beam)
Beam indicator light does not come on
Lighting (EXT) - Lighting system

Perform active test (Indicat. Tire Pressure Warning
System)
TPMS indicator light does not come on
Tire Pressure Warning Light Circuit

Security indicator light does not come on
Security Indicator Light Does not Blink

System description - Multi information display flow
chart
REV indicator light does not come on*2
Trip switch

Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp Slip)
SLIP indicator light does not come on
Slip Indicator Light does not Come ON

Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp ABS)
ABS warning light does not come on
ABS Warning Light does not Come ON

Perform active test (Driver Side Seat Belt)
2/6
8/6/12
Driver side seat belt warning light does

not come on
Driver Side Seat Belt Warning Light does not

Operate
LED check
Charge warning light does not come on
Battery / charging - Charging system


LED check
Engine oil pressure warning light does
Engine oil pressure switch assembly
not come on

LED check
MIL does not come on
Perform active test (Check Engine Warning)

MIL circuit
Perform active test (SPORT Indicator)
SPORT indicator light does not come

on*3
Automatic transmission / transaxle - Automatic

transmission system
Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp ECT SNOW)
SNOW indicator light does not come

on*3

transmission system
LED check
A/T OIL TEMP warning light does not

come on*3
Perform active test (A/T Oil Temperature Operation)

transmission system
LED check
Brake warning light does not come on
Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp Brake)

Brake Warning Light does not Come ON
LED check
3/6
8/6/12
TRAC OFF indicator light does not come

on
Perform active test (VSC TRC Indicator)

TRC OFF Indicator Light does not Come ON
LED check
VSC OFF indicator light does not come

on
Perform active test (Indicat. VSC OFF)

VSC OFF Indicator Light does not Come ON
LED check
VSC SPORT indicator light does not come

on
VSC SPORT Indicator Light does not Come ON

LED check
Airbag warning light does not come on
Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp Airbag)

SRS Warning Light does not Come ON
LED check
EPS warning light does not come on
Perform active test (Indicat. EPS)

EPS Warning Light Circuit
LED check
Perform active test (Indicat. Lamp Fuel)
Low fuel warning light does not come on

No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly

*1: w/ Cruise Control System
*2: w/ Digital Speedometer
*3: for Automatic Transmission System
Buzzer
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
No buzzers sound
Combination meter
assembly
4/6
8/6/12
Seat belt warning buzzer does not sound (driver seat) (driver side Combination meter
seat belt warning light is normal)
assembly
EPS buzzer does not sound (EPS warning light is normal)
Combination meter
assembly
Key Reminder Buzzer does
Key reminder warning buzzer does not sound
not Sound
Theft deterrent / keyless
entry - engine immobiliser
Immobilizer key identification completion notice buzzer (buzzer
system
that sounds once) does not sound

Combination meter
assembly
Sports reject buzzer does not sound (driving system operates
Combination meter
normally)*1
assembly
System description - Multi
information display flow
chart
REV buzzer does not sound*2
Combination meter
assembly
Light reminder warning buzzer does not sound (lighting system
operates normally, door warning light comes on when a door is
opened)
Combination meter
assembly

Multi--Information Display
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Trip switch
Cannot switch between ODO/TRIP displays, or cannot
reset TRIP

Display fault (no display, figures do not change)

Perform active test (Meter Display 1 - 6,
5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 and all)
ODO/TRIP display does not come on.
Perform active test (Meter Display 2 - 9,

8, 7)
Perform active test (A/T Indicator
Operation 1 - L, 2, 3, 4, D, N, R and P)
5/6
8/6/12

Shift indicator light does not come on.*1
Operation 2 - 5, 6 and M)
Operation 3 - D)
System description - Multi information
display flow chart
Trip switch
Shift indicator light does not come on (display is

normal after clutch release)*2

Operation 1 - L, 2, 3, 4, D, N, R and P)
Operation 2 - 5, 6 and M)
Operation 3 - D)
Thermistor assembly
Ambient temperature not displayed

Significant error in average fuel consumption display
(speedometer, tachometer are normal)
Significant error in instantaneous fuel consumption

display (speedometer, tachometer are normal)
Digital speedometer display fault (no display, figures

do not change)*3

*2: for Manual Transmission System
6/6
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Speedometer Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YNX01BX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Speedometer Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
Speedometer Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The combination meter assembly controls the speedometer in accordance with the vehicle speed signals
from the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) through the CAN communication system.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs are not output.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YNX01BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
DTCs are output.
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (SPEED METER OPERATION)

Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
Speed Meter Operation
TEST PART
Speedometer
CONTROL RANGE
0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240 km/h
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
-
OK:
The vehicle speed displayed on the tester is approximately the same as that of the speedometer
reading.
NG
OK
3.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (VEHICLE SPEED METER)

2/4
8/6/12
Combination Meter
TESTER
MEASUREMENT
DISPLAY
ITEM/RANGE
Vehicle Speed
Meter
Vehicle speed /
Min.: 0 (0)
Max.: 255 (158)
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Approximately same as actual vehicle speed (when
Unit km/h
vehicle is being driven)
(mph)
OK:
The vehicle speed displayed on the tester is approximately the same as the actual vehicle speed.
NOTICE:
Determine whether the value displayed on the tester is within the acceptable range by
referring to the reference values described in "On-Vehicle Inspection"
.
NG
OK
4.
CHECK VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
(a) Check if the vehicle stability control system outputs DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs are not output.
DTCs are output.
5.

3/4
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Data List.
Combination Meter
TESTER
DISPLAY
MEASUREMENT
ITEM/RANGE
Vehicle speed /
Vehicle
Speed
Min.: 0 (0)
Max.: 326.4 (202.8)
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Approximately same as actual vehicle speed (when

vehicle is being driven)
Unit km/h
(mph)
OK:
The vehicle speed displayed on the tester is approximately the same as the actual vehicle speed.
NOTICE:
.
NG
OK
6.
OK:
The operation of the speedometer returns to normal.
NG
OK
END
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
4/4
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F8N01HX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. OUTLINE OF COMBINATION METER SUB-ASSEMBLY
*a
Speedometer
*b
Tachometer
*c
Multi-information display
*d
Digital speedometer
*e
Engine coolant temperature receiver gauge
*f
Fuel receiver gauge
2. MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY FLOW CHART
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F8N01HX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
*a
Screen transition while the ignition

switch is off
*b
Screen transition while the ignition switch is

ON
*c
ODO/TRIP switch
*d
DISP switch
*e
MT shift display setting (for manual

transmission system)
*f
RPM setting
2/6
8/6/12
*g
*i
*k
Buzzer sound ON/OFF setting
Long pressing the "ODO/TRIP" switch

resets the trip meter B to 0.0
Pressing the "DISP" switch when vehicle
speed is 0 km/h
Short press
*h
*j
*l
Long pressing the "ODO/TRIP" switch resets

the trip meter A to 0.0
Long pressing the "DISP" switch resets the
average fuel consumption to 0.0
The "REV." display blinks
Long press
3. CAN SIGNAL
4. DIRECT LINE SIGNAL

3/6
8/6/12
5. METER GAUGE AND WARNING INDICATOR

Meter/Gauge
ITEM
Speedometer
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
Indicates the vehicle speed based on signals received from the skid control ECU
(brake actuator assembly) and the gauge needle operates (CAN).
4/6
8/6/12
Indicates the engine speed based on signals from ECM and the gauge needle
Tachometer
operates (CAN).
Indicates the fuel level in accordance with signals received from fuel sender gauge
Fuel Gauge
assembly and the gauge needle operates (Direct line).
Engine coolant
The combination meter assembly receives an engine coolant temperature signal

from the ECM and the gauge needle operates (CAN).
temperature
gauge
Warning/Indicator
ITEM
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
TURN
Receives turn signal from turn signal flasher assembly (Direct line).
SET*1
Receives cruise control switch signal from the ECM (CAN).
CRUISE
(green)*1
CRUISE
(yellow)*1
DOOR

Open door indicator illuminates when receiving signal from main body ECU (network
gateway ECU) (CAN).
HI BEAM
Receives high beam signal from main body ECU (network gateway ECU) (CAN).
TPMS
Receives TPMS signal from main body ECU (network gateway ECU) (CAN).
SECURITY
Receives security signal from main body ECU (network gateway ECU) (CAN).
REV*2
Receives engine speed signal from the ECM (CAN).
SLIP
ABS
D SEAT BELT
Receives VSC control signal or malfunction signal from brake actuator assembly (skid
control ECU) (CAN).
Receives malfunction signal from brake actuator assembly (skid control ECU) (CAN).
Receives driver seat belt warning signal (unfastened) from main body ECU (network
gateway ECU) (Direct line).
CHARGE
Receives malfunction signal from generator assembly (Direct line).
OIL
Receives engine oil pressure warning signal from engine oil pressure switch assembly
PRESSURE
(Direct line).
MIL
Receives malfunction check engine warning signal from ECM (CAN).
SPORT*3
Receives sport indicator signal from TCM (CAN).
SNOW*3
Receives snow indicator signal from TCM (CAN).
AT OIL
TEMP*3
Receives malfunction signal from TCM (CAN).
Receives brake fluid level warning signal from brake level switch (Direct line).
Receives parking brake switch signal from main body ECU (network gateway
ECU) (CAN).
5/6
8/6/12
BRAKE
Receives malfunction signal from brake actuator assembly (skid control ECU)
(CAN).
TRAC OFF
Receives TRAC control off signal from brake actuator assembly (skid control ECU) (CAN).
VSC OFF
Receives VSC control off signal from brake actuator assembly (skid control ECU) (CAN).
VSC SPORT
Receives VSC sport signal from brake actuator assembly (skid control ECU) (CAN).
AIRBAG
Receives malfunction signal from airbag sensor assembly (CAN).
EPS
Receives malfunction signal from power steering ECU assembly (CAN).
LOW FUEL
Receives low fuel signal from fuel sender gauge assembly (Direct line).
*1: w/ Cruise Control System

Buzzer
ITEM
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
SEAT BELT (driver
Buzzer ON: When ignition switch is ON, driver seat belt is unfastened, and vehicle
seat belt)
speed is 20 km/h (12.4 mph) or more.
EPS
Buzzer ON: Receives malfunction signal from the power steering ECU assembly.
KEY REMINDER
Buzzer ON: Receives signal from main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
IMMOBILISER
Buzzer ON: Receives signal from main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
SPORTS SHIFT
REJECT*1
Buzzer ON: Receives signal from the ECM.
REV*2
Buzzer ON: Receives engine speed signal from the ECM.
LIGHT REMINDER
Buzzer ON: When ignition switch is off, receives signal from main body ECU
(network gateway ECU).

6/6
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F8P015X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F8P015X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Tachometer Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001YNY01SX
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: Tachometer Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
Tachometer Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The combination meter assembly controls the tachometer in accordance with the engine speed signals
from the ECM through the CAN communication system.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
Result
RESULT
DTCs are not output
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001YNY01SX.html?sisuffix=ff
PROCEED TO
A
1/4
8/6/12
DTCs are output
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (TACHOMETER OPERATION)

Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Tachometer
Operation
Tachometer
0, 1000, 2000, 3000, , 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000

rpm
OK:
The engine speed displayed on the tester is approximately the same as that of the tachometer
reading.
NG
OK
3.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE RPM)

2/4
8/6/12
Combination Meter
TESTER
MEASUREMENT
DISPLAY
ITEM/RANGE
Engine speed
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Approximately same as actual engine speed (when

engine is running)
Engine Rpm Min.: 0

Max.: 12750
Unit: rpm
OK:
The engine speed displayed on the tester is approximately the same as that displayed on the
combination meter assembly.
NOTICE:
.
NG
OK
4.
CHECK SFI SYSTEM
(a) Check if the SFI system outputs DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs are not output
DTCs are output
GO TO SFI SYSTEM
5.
3/4
8/6/12

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List.
Combination Meter
TESTER
MEASUREMENT
DISPLAY
ITEM/RANGE
Engine speed
Engine
Min.: 0
Speed
Max.: 16383.75
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Approximately same as actual engine speed (when

engine is running)
Unit: rpm
OK:
The engine speed displayed on the tester is approximately the same as that displayed on the
combination meter assembly.
NOTICE:
.
NG
GO TO SFI SYSTEM
OK
6.
OK:
The operation of the tachometer returns to normal.
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END
4/4
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001F8F014X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: METER / GAUGE SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
(a) Measure the voltage and resistance of the wire harness side connector.
TERMINALS
NO.
WIRING
COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D7-1 (B) Body ground
R-W Body
ground
Battery
Always
11 to 14 V
D7-2 (IG+) Body ground
W-G Body
ground
Ignition switch signal
Ignition switch off ON
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V
D7-6 (CANH)
- Body
ground
BR Body
ground
CAN communication
line
Ignition switch ON
Pulse generation
D7-7 (CANL)
- Body
ground
BR-W Body
ground
CAN communication
line
Ignition switch ON
Pulse generation
D7-9 (ILL-) Body ground
B-W Body
ground
Light control
rheostat output
signal
Light control rheostat all top open

all bottom open
D7-13 (P/SB)
- Body
ground
BR-R Body
ground
Front passenger
seat inner belt
output signal
Front passenger seat is occupied

and its seat belt unfastened
fastened
(SYMBOL)
Ignition switch ON
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001F8F014X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V
1/3
8/6/12
D7-14 (S) Body ground
LG Body
ground
Engine oil pressure

signal
D7-15 (CHGG - Body Charge warning light

) - Body
ground
signal
ground
D7-17 (LBL)
- Body
ground
W-L Body
ground
D7-18 (ILL+)
V - Body
- Body
ground
ground
D7-20 (ES1)
- Body
ground
D7-21 (LR) Body ground
D7-22 (LL) Body ground

D7-24 (TAM)
- D7-25 (SG-
D7-28 (FS-)
D7-30 (E) Body ground
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V
Engine start
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V
Charge warning light ON OFF

Ignition switch ON
Brake fluid level warning light ON
OFF
Ignition switch ON
Security warning
light signal
Security warning light blink OFF
B-Y Body
ground
Ground
Always
GR Body
ground
Right turn signal
W-R Body
Left turn signal
ground
Ignition switch ON
Right turn indicator light blink OFF
Ignition switch ON
Left turn indicator light blink OFF
L-W
Ambient temperature
sensor signal
Ignition switch ON
LG - L
Fuel level signal
Fuel level is FULL EMPTY
Light control
rheostat ground
Always
)
D7-27 (L) -
Brake fluid level

warning light signal
Engine oil pressure warning light ON

OFF
L-R Body
ground
at 25C (77F)
D7-31 (TR) -
Y - Body
Light control
Body ground
ground
rheostat input signal
all bottom open
D7-32 (T) -
G-W Body
Ignition switch signal
Ignition switch off ON
Body ground
D7-33 (TC) Body ground

D7-34
(DISP) Body ground
D7-36 (TRIP)
- Body
ground
ground
BR Body
ground
Light control
rheostat signal
R - Body
ground
DISP switch signal
P - Body
ODO/TRIP switch
ground
signal

Light control rheostat (cancel switch)
ON
DISP switch ON OFF
ODO/TRIP switch ON OFF
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V 11 to
14 V
Below 1
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V 11 to
14 V
Below 1 V 11
to 14 V 11 to
14 V
1.35 to 1.75 V
Below 1 V 4.5
to 9.0 V
Below 1
510 100
Below 1 V 3.6
to 4.6 V
10 k or higher
Below 1
Below 1 10
k or higher
Below 1 10
k or higher
2/3
8/6/12
D7-37
(DBKL) -
R-B Body
Body ground
ground
D7-38
(PBKL) Body ground
Driver seat inner belt

input signal
Driver seat is seat belt unfastened
Below 1 V 11
fastened
to 14 V
R-G Body
Airbag sensor
assembly input
Front passenger seat is occupied

and its seat belt unfastened
Below 1 V 11
ground
signal
fastened
to 14 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
D7-40 (ES2)
B-Y -
- Body
ground
Body
ground
If the result is not as specified, the combination meter assembly may have a malfunction.
3/3
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: TRIP SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042TF004X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: TRIP SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042TF004X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: TRIP SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001862038X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: TRIP SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TRIP SWITCH
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
2 (TRIP) - 1
3 (DISP) - 1
8 (CS) - 1
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Trip switch off
10 k or higher
Trip switch on
Below 1
Display switch
off
10 k or higher
Display switch
on
Below 1
Unit switch off
10 k or higher
Unit switch on
Below 1
*a

(Trip Switch)
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: TRIP SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042TE004X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: TRIP SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRIP SWITCH
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the trip switch.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042TE004X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: TRIP SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000042TG004X
Title: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: TRIP SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. REMOVE TRIP SWITCH
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the trip switch.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000042TG004X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (INT): INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004I1L003X
Title: MIRROR (INT): INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004I1L003X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (INT): INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004I1K003X
Title: MIRROR (INT): INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR BASE
(a) Install the new inner rear view mirror base to the button
*1
Button
2. INSTALL INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR ASSEMBLY
(a) Slide and install the inner rear view mirror as shown in
the illustration.
(b) Turn the inner rear view mirror assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration.
HINT:
Turning direction can be either right or left.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004I1K003X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
MIRROR (INT): INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004I1M003X
Title: MIRROR (INT): INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the inner rear view mirror assembly in the direction
indicated by the arrow in the illustration.
HINT:
Turning direction can be either right or left.
(b) Slide the inner rear view mirror assembly forward and remove it.
2. REMOVE INNER REAR VIEW MIRROR BASE
(a) Remove the inner rear view mirror base from the button
*1
Button
1/1
8/6/12
POWER OUTLETS (INT): POWER OUTLET SOCKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OZA01JX
Title: POWER OUTLETS (INT): POWER OUTLET SOCKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OZA01JX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER OUTLETS (INT): POWER OUTLET SOCKET: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000S6O00VX
Title: POWER OUTLETS (INT): POWER OUTLET SOCKET: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLIP
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the clip.
(a) Align the grooves in the clip with the No. 2 power outlet
socket assembly ribs, and then attach the No. 2 power
outlet socket assembly as shown in the illustration.
*a
Rib
*b
Groove
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000S6O00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER OUTLETS (INT): POWER OUTLET SOCKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000S6Q00VX
Title: POWER OUTLETS (INT): POWER OUTLET SOCKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Using a screw driver with its tip wrapped in protective

tape, remove the No. 2 power outlet socket assembly
while pressing the inside claw.
*1
Protective Tape
(b) Disconnect the connector and remove the No. 2 power outlet socket assembly.
HINT:
If it is difficult to remove the No. 2 power outlet socket assembly, remove the lower instrument panel
sub-assembly first and disengage the claw in the back.
3. REMOVE CLIP
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the clip.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000S6Q00VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
POWER OUTLETS (INT): REAR POWER OUTLET SOCKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000041P3007X
Title: POWER OUTLETS (INT): REAR POWER OUTLET SOCKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/1
8/6/12
POWER OUTLETS (INT): REAR POWER OUTLET SOCKET: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000023QZ027X
Title: POWER OUTLETS (INT): REAR POWER OUTLET SOCKET: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 2 POWER OUTLET SOCKET COVER
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the No. 2 power outlet

socket cover.
(a) Align the No. 1 power outlet socket assembly A section

with the No. 2 power outlet socket cover B section, as
(b) Engage the claw to install the No. 1 power outlet socket assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000023QZ027X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
POWER OUTLETS (INT): REAR POWER OUTLET SOCKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000023QZ028X
Title: POWER OUTLETS (INT): REAR POWER OUTLET SOCKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Open the cap of the No. 2 power outlet socket cover.
(b) Using a screwdriver, disengage the claw and remove the

No. 1 power outlet socket assembly.
*1
Protective Tape
HINT:
3. REMOVE NO. 2 POWER OUTLET SOCKET COVER
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the No. 2 power

outlet socket cover.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000023QZ028X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004S24006X
Title: SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004S23007X
Title: SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR SEAT HINGE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the rear seat hinge sub-assembly with the 3 bolts.

5. INSTALL CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the child restraint seat anchor bracket sub-assembly with the 2 bolts.
6. INSTALL BENCH TYPE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY

7. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004S25007X
Title: SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE BENCH TYPE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and child restraint seat anchor

bracket sub-assembly.

5. DISCONNECT FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP
HINT:
luggage compartment trim cover.

7. REMOVE REAR SEAT HINGE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and rear seat hinge sub-assembly.
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004S21009X
Title: SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004S20009X
Title: SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR BRACKET
(a) Engage the hook and install the child restraint seat tether anchor bracket with the bolt.
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the 2 child restraint seat tether anchor brackets.

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004S22009X
Title: SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
HINT:

15. REMOVE CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR BRACKET
(a) Remove the bolt and disengage the hook to remove the
child restraint seat tether anchor bracket.
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the 2 child restraint seat tether
anchor brackets.
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WZK007X
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WZK007X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WZJ00JX
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
(a) Apply battery voltage to the connector and check the LED
illumination condition.
OK:
CONDITION
Battery positive
(+) 10
Battery negative ()6
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Front passenger side seat belt warning

light comes on
*a

(Clock Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the clock
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WZJ00JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WZI00DX
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLOCK ASSEMBLY (FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT)
(a) Attach the 4 claws to install the clock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WZI00DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WZL00DX
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CLOCK ASSEMBLY (FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT)
(a) Detach the 4 claws and remove the clock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WZL00DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004SCP002X
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004SCP002X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004SCP002X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000129306PX
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)
table below.
TESTER
CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
1-2
Driver seat belt

unfastened
Below 1
1-2
Driver seat belt

fastened
10 k or higher
*a

(Front Seat Inner Belt Assembly (for Driver Side))
If the result is not as specified, replace the front seat
inner belt assembly (for Driver Side).
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004SCO002X
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)
(a) Install the front seat inner belt assembly with the nut and
washer.
NOTICE:
Do not allow the anchor part of the front seat inner belt
assembly to overlap the protruding part of the separate
type front seat cushion spring assembly.
*1
Protruding Part

(c) Engage the claw and 3 clamps under the front seat assembly.
(d) Connect the rubber band of the separate type front seatback cover.
2. INSTALL FRONT SEAT INNER CUSHION SHIELD (for Driver Side)

3. INSTALL FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Front Passenger Side)
(a) Install the front seat inner belt assembly with the nut and
washer.
NOTICE:
Do not allow the anchor part of the front seat inner belt
assembly to overlap the protruding part of the separate
type front seat cushion spring assembly.
*1
Protruding Part

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004SCO002X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004SCO002X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004SCQ002X
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE FRONT SEAT INNER CUSHION SHIELD (for Driver Side)

3. REMOVE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)
(a) Disconnect the rubber band of the separate type front

seatback cover.
(b) Disengage the claw and the 3 clamps under the front
seat assembly.
(c) Disengage the 2 clamps.
(d) Remove the nut, washer and front seat inner belt assembly.
4. REMOVE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Front Passenger Side)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004SCQ002X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)

(c) Remove the nut, washer and front seat inner belt assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004SCQ002X.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000209Q031X
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011CX05FX
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
CAUTION:
Before performing pre-disposal deployment of any SRS component, review and closely follow
all applicable environmental and hazardous material regulations. Pre-disposal deployment
may be considered hazardous material treatment.
HINT:
When scrapping vehicles equipped with a seat belt pretensioner or disposing of a front seat outer
belt assembly (with a seat belt pretensioner), always deploy the procedures described below. If any
abnormality occurs during deployment of the seat belt pretensioner, contact the SERVICE
DEPARTMENT of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
1. DISPOSE OF FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (When Installed in Vehicle)

CAUTION:
Use gloves and safety glasses when handling a front seat outer belt assembly with a deployed
pretensioner.
Always wash your hands with water after completing the operation.
Do not apply water, etc. to a front seat outer belt assembly with a deployed pretensioner.
When deploying a seat belt pretensioner, always use the specified SST (SRS airbag deployment
tool). Perform the operation in a place away from electrical interference.
When disposing of a front seat outer belt assembly with a pretensioner, never deploy the
pretensioner in the customer's vehicle.
NOTICE:
Never dispose of a front seat outer belt assembly with a pretensioner that has not been deployed.
The front seat outer belt assembly produces an exploding sound when the pretensioner deploys,
so perform the operation outdoors where it will not disturb local residents.
When deploying a seat belt pretensioner, perform the operation at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from
the front seat outer belt assembly.
Be sure to follow the procedure listed below when deploying a seat belt pretensioner.
(a) Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner connector.
(1) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
(2) Remove the front door scuff plate
(3) Disconnect the front door opening trim weatherstrip

(4) Remove the quarter trim panel
(5) Using a screwdriver with the tip wrapped with

protective tape, release the pretensioner connector
lock and disconnect the pretensioner connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011CX05FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/5
8/6/12
*1
Protective Tape
*2
Pretensioner Connector
*3
Pretensioner Connector Lock
HINT:
(b) Connect SST.
(1) Short the clip and terminal of

SST.
SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18020
*a
Short the clip and terminal
(2) Connect 2 SST, and then connect them to the seat belt pretensioner.
NOTICE:
To avoid damaging the SST connector and wire harness, do not lock the secondary lock of the
pretensioner connector.
(3) Move SST at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from the front
of the vehicle.
*a
10 m or more
(4) Close all the doors and windows of the vehicle.

NOTICE:
Do not damage the SST wire harness.
(c) Deploy the seat belt pretensioner.

(1) Confirm that no one is inside the vehicle or within a 10 m (32.8 ft.) radius of the vehicle.
2/5
8/6/12
(2) Connect the clip of SST to the battery positive (+) terminal.
(3) Connect the terminal of SST to the battery (-) terminal to the deploy the seat belt
pretensioner.
(d) Dispose of the front seat outer belt assembly.
(1) Remove the front seat outer belt assembly and SST.
(2) Place the front seat outer belt assembly in a plastic bag, tie the end tightly, and dispose of it in
the same way as other general parts.
CAUTION:
The front seat outer belt assembly becomes very hot when the pretensioner is deployed, so leave
it untouched for at least 40 minutes after the pretensioner is deployed.
pretensioner.
HINT:
When scrapping a vehicle, deploy the seat belt pretensioner, and then scrap the vehicle with the
front seat outer belt assembly installed.
2. DISPOSE OF FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (When not Installed in Vehicle)
CAUTION:
pretensioner.
When deploying a seat belt pretensioner, always use the specified SST (SRS airbag deployment
tool). Perform the operation in a place away from electrical interference.
NOTICE:
When disposing of a front seat outer belt assembly with a pretensioner, never deploy the
pretensioner in the customer's vehicle.
Never dispose of a front seat outer belt assembly with a pretensioner that has not been deployed.
The front seat outer belt assembly produces an exploding sound when the pretensioner deploys,
so perform the operation outdoors where it will not disturb local residents.
When deploying a seat belt pretensioner, perform the operation at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from
Be sure to follow the procedure listed below when deploying a seat belt pretensioner.
(a) Remove the front seat outer belt assembly
(b) Wind the seat belt webbing with the retractor.

3/5
8/6/12
*a
Cut
*b
100 mm
(c) When the seat belt webbing is sufficiently wound, cut the seat belt webbing approximately 100
mm (3.94 in.) from the retractor, as shown in the illustration.
HINT:
The retractor resistance increases in correlation with how much the seat belt webbing is wound.
(d) Connect SST.
(1) Short the clip and terminal of

SST.
SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18020
*a
Short the clip and terminal
(2) Connect 2 SST, and then connect them to the seat belt pretensioner.
NOTICE:
To avoid damaging the SST connector and wire harness, do not lock the secondary lock of the
pretensioner connector.
(3) Place the front seat outer belt assembly on the

ground and cover it with a tire and wheel assembly.
*a
10 m or more
NOTICE:
Position the front seat outer belt assembly as shown in
the illustration.
Use a scrap tire and wheel assembly when disposing of a
seat belt pretensioner.
(4) Position and hold SST at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from the wheel.
NOTICE:
4/5
8/6/12
Do not damage the SST wire harness.
(e) Deploy the seat belt pretensioner.

(1) Check that no one is within a 10 m (32.8 ft.) radius of the wheel.
(2) Connect the clip of SST to the battery positive (+) terminal.
(3) Connect the terminal of SST to the battery (-) terminal to the deploy the seat belt
pretensioner.
(f) Dispose of the front seat outer belt assembly.
(1) Remove the tire and wheel assembly and SST.
(2) Place the front seat outer belt assembly in a plastic bag, tie the end tightly, and dispose of it in
the same way as other general parts.
CAUTION:
The front seat outer belt assembly becomes very hot when the pretensioner is deployed, so leave
it untouched for at least 40 minutes after the pretensioner is deployed.
pretensioner.
5/5
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000U9903RX
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Before installing the front seat outer belt assembly, check
the ELR function.
NOTICE:
Do not disassemble the retractor.
(1) When the inclination of the retractor is 12 or less,

check that the belt can be pulled from the retractor.
When the inclination of the retractor is over 27, check
that the belt locks.
*1
Retractor
*a
Unlocked
*b
Locked
*c
27
If the result is not as specified, replace the front seat
outer belt assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000U9903RX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000120906OX
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSPECT FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

2. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the hook and install the front seat outer belt
assembly with the 2 bolts.
Bolt B - Torque: 30 Nm (306 kgfcm, 22ftlbf)
(b) Connect the pretensioner connector.

*1
*2
NOTICE:
When connecting any pretensioner connector, take care
not to damage the pretensioner wire harness.
(c) Push in the lock to install the pretensioner connector.

(d) Install the shoulder anchor of the front seat outer belt assembly with the bolt.
3. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR GARNISH

4. CONNECT FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(a) Install the floor anchor of the front seat outer belt assembly with the bolt.
(b) Check if the ELR locks.
NOTICE:
The check should be performed with the front seat outer belt assembly installed.
(1) With the front seat outer belt assembly installed, check that the belt locks when it is pulled out
quickly.
(c) Install the floor anchor cover.
5. INSTALL REAR QUARTER TRIM FRONT GARNISH

6. INSTALL REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH
7. INSTALL QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WYH065X
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the front seat outer belt
assembly.
1. INSPECT FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)
(a) Perform a diagnostic system check
(b) Visually check for defects with the front seat outer belt assembly installed on the vehicle.
(1) The defects are as follows:
Cuts on the front seat outer belt assembly
Small cracks on the front seat outer belt assembly
Significant discoloration on the front seat outer belt assembly
OK:
No defects are found.
HINT:
If any of the defects is found, replace the front seat outer belt assembly with a new one.
2. INSPECT FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision)
(b) Visually check for defects with the front seat outer belt assembly removed from the vehicle.
Cuts on the front seat outer belt assembly
Small cracks on the front seat outer belt assembly
Significant discoloration on the front seat outer belt assembly
Cracks or other damage to the connector
OK:
HINT:
If any of the defects is found, replace the front seat outer belt assembly with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WYH065X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001228064X
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
Replace any faulty parts of the seat belt systems (outer belt, inner belt, bolts, nuts, tether
anchor hardware and other related parts). When inspecting a vehicle that was in a collision, be
sure to check all of the seat belt systems regardless of whether or not the system was
activated in the collision. Replace any damaged or malfunctioning systems.
1. ROAD TEST (IN SAFE AREA)

CAUTION:
Conduct this test in a safe area.
(a) Fasten the front seat belts.

(b) Drive the vehicle at 16 km/h (10 mph) and firmly depress the brake pedal. Check that the belts
lock and cannot be extended at this time.
If a belt does not lock, replace the seat belt assembly
HINT:
Inspect the seat belt assembly before installing it
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000120B06LX
Title: SEAT BELT: FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
.
HINT:

CAUTION:
NOTICE:

HINT:

6. REMOVE QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. REMOVE REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH
8. REMOVE REAR QUARTER TRIM FRONT GARNISH
9. DISCONNECT FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn back the floor anchor cover.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000120B06LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
*1
Floor Anchor Cover
(b) Loosen the bolt and disconnect the floor anchor of the front seat outer belt assembly.
10. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR GARNISH

11. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Loosen the bolt and disconnect the shoulder anchor of

(b) Using a screwdriver with the tip wrapped with protective

tape, release the pretensioner connector lock and
disconnect the pretensioner connector.
*1
Protective Tape
*2
*3
HINT:
2/3
8/6/12
(c) Remove the 2 bolts and disengage the hook to remove

3/3
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004S1V00HX
Title: SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004S1V00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WKC01CX
Title: SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the rear seat inner belt assembly with the bolt in
the direction of the illustration.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WKC01CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WKE01CX
Title: SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. REMOVE REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and rear seat inner belt assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WKE01CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004S1Y00HX
Title: SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004S1Y00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004S1Y00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000U9903TX
Title: SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT REAR SEAT 3 POINT TYPE OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Before installing the rear seat 3 point type outer belt
assembly, check the ELR function.
NOTICE:
Do not disassemble the retractor.
(1) When the inclination of the retractor is 12 or less,

check that the belt can be pulled from the retractor.
When the inclination of the retractor is over 27, check
that the belt locks.
*1
Retractor
*a
Unlocked
*b
Locked
*c
27
If the result is not as specified, replace the rear seat 3
point type outer belt assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000U9903TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WKG01DX
Title: SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSPECT REAR SEAT 3 POINT TYPE OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

2. INSTALL REAR SEAT 3 POINT TYPE OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Tighten the bolt B to install the rear seat 3 point type
outer belt assembly.
(b) Install the bolt A.

(c) Check if the ELR locks.
NOTICE:
The check should be performed with the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly installed.
(1) With the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly installed, check that the belt locks when it
is pulled out quickly.
(d) Connect the floor anchor of the rear seat 3 point type
outer belt assembly with the bolt.
*1
Protruding Part

NOTICE:
Do not allow the anchor part of the rear seat 3 point
type outer belt assembly to overlap the protruding
parts of the floor panel.
3. INSTALL REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WKG01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
4. INSTALL QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WKG01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000WYH067X
Title: SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the rear seat 3 point
type outer belt assembly.
1. INSPECT REAR SEAT 3 POINT TYPE OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in
Collision)
(a) Visually check for defects with the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly installed on the
vehicle.
Cuts on the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly
Small cracks on the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly
Significant discoloration on the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly
OK:
HINT:
If any of the defects is found, replace the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly with a new one.
2. INSPECT REAR SEAT 3 POINT TYPE OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in
Collision)
(a) Visually check for defects with the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly removed from the
vehicle.
Cuts on the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly
Small cracks on the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly
Significant discoloration on the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly
OK:
HINT:
If any of the defects is found, replace the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000WYH067X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WKI01CX
Title: SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

HINT:

5. REMOVE QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH
7. REMOVE REAR SEAT 3 POINT TYPE OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the floor anchor of the
rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly.
(b) Remove the bolt A.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WKI01CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(c) Loosen the bolt B and remove the rear seat 3 point type outer belt assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WKI01CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004N7R00UX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
1. CUSTOMIZE SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM
HINT:
NOTICE:
customized.
These buzzers should be ON for safe driving. Perform this procedure only if it is necessary to set
the buzzer to OFF (disabled).
(4) Enter the following menus: Customize Setting / Warning.
Warning
DISPLAY
DEFAULT
CONTENT
SETTING
RELEVANT
ECU
Driver Side Seatbelt Warning

Buzzer
ON
Function to sound the driver seat belt

warning buzzer
ON/OFF

Seatbelt Warning Buzzer
ON
Function to sound the front

passenger seat belt warning buzzer
ON/OFF
Combination
meter
assembly
HINT:
This setting is only valid when the vehicle is driven at 20 km/h (12 mph) or more.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004N7R00UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012G70CIX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter, Occupant Detection or SRS Airbag
/ Data List.
Combination Meter (Combination Meter Assembly)
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL
CONDITION
Driver Side Seatbelt
Driver seat belt warning buzzer/ON or
Customized value
Warning Buzzer
OFF
displayed
P-Seatbelt Warning
Buzzer
Front passenger seat belt warning

buzzer/ON or OFF
Customized value
displayed
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
-
Occupant Detection (Occupant Detection ECU)

TESTER DISPLAY
Status of Passenger Side

Buckle SW
Front passenger buckle

switch/ON or OFF
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Unset: Seat belt not

fastened
Set: Seat belt fastened
NG: Data is not

determined
SRS Airbag (Airbag ECU Assembly)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012G70CIX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
TESTER DISPLAY
Driver Buckle
SW
Driver buckle switch/Unset, Set or

NG
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE

fastened
Set: Seat belt fastened

NG: Data is not determined
2. ACTIVE TEST
early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be displayed while
Combination Meter (Combination Meter Assembly)
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Seat belt warning light
OFF/ON
Front passenger Side Seat Belt
Seat belt warning light
OFF/ON
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012G70CIX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: Driver Side Seat Belt Warning Light does not Operate (201
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000014DK0AGX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: Driver Side Seat Belt Warning Light does not Operate
(2013 FR-S)
Driver Side Seat Belt Warning Light does not Operate
DESCRIPTION
The combination meter assembly illuminates, blinks or turns off the seat belt warning light on the
combination meter assembly in accordance with the state of the front seat inner belt assembly LH.
HINT:
The seat belt warning light on the combination meter assembly is used for both the driver seat and
front passenger seat.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (DRIVER SIDE SEAT BELT WARNING
LIGHT)

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000014DK0AGX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
OK:
Driver side seat belt warning light condition can be switched by Active Test.
Combination Meter
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
Driver side seat belt warning light
NG
ON/OFF
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
-
OK
2.
INSPECT FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the front seat inner belt assembly LH
(b) Inspect the front seat inner belt assembly LH
NG
REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY

LH
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the H19 front seat inner belt assembly LH connector.
TESTER CONNECTION
D7-37 (DBKL) - H19-1
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
2/3
8/6/12
H19-1 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
H19-2 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
3/3
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: Front Passenger Side Seat Belt Warning Light Malfunction
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000014DL09QX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: Front Passenger Side Seat Belt Warning Light
Front Passenger Side Seat Belt Warning Light Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
When the ignition switch is ON, the occupant detection ECU sends a signal to the airbag sensor
assembly to indicate the state of the front seat inner belt assembly RH and also whether the front
passenger seat is occupied. The airbag sensor assembly sends those signals to the combination meter
assembly. The telltale light assembly illuminates, blinks or turns off the seat belt warning light on the
combination meter assembly in accordance with these signals.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000014DL09QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
The seat belt warning system uses the CAN communication system. First, confirm that there is no
malfunction in the CAN communication system. Refer to the How to Proceed with Troubleshooting
procedure
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM)
(a) Clear DTCs
(b) Recheck for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
GO TO OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
2.
CHECK DTC OUTPUT (AIRBAG SYSTEM)
(a) Clear DTCs
(b) Recheck for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
GO TO AIRBAG SYSTEM
2/6
8/6/12
3.

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Occupant Detection / Data List.
Occupant Detection (Occupant Detection ECU)
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Set: Seat belt

fastened
Status of Passenger Side
Front passenger buckle switch/Set,
Buckle SW
Unset or NG

fastened
NG: Data is not

determined
Result
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
Unset or Set is displayed on the Techstream screen according to the front passenger seat
belt condition
Unset or Set is not displayed normally on the Techstream screen according to the front
passenger seat belt condition
NG is displayed on the Techstream screen
REPLACE FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY RH
RH
A
3/6
8/6/12
4.

SRS Airbag (Airbag Sensor Assembly)
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
P-Seatbelt Buckle
Front passenger buckle switch/ON or
SW
OFF
ON: Seat belt is not

fastened
OFF: Seat belt is fastened
Result
RESULT
PROCEED
TO
ON or OFF is displayed on the Techstream screen according to the front passenger seat
belt condition
ON or OFF is not displayed normally on the Techstream screen according to the front
passenger seat belt condition
5.
INSPECT CLOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clock assembly
(b) Apply battery voltage to the connector and check the

4/6
8/6/12
Result:
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION

10 (LAPB)
Front passenger side seat belt
Battery negative (-) warning light comes on

6 (LAPL)
*a

(Clock Assembly)
NG
REPLACE CLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK
6.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY - CLOCK ASSEMBLY - COMBINATION

METER ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the D18 clock assembly connector.

TESTER CONNECTION
SWITCH CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D18-6 (LAPL) - D7-13 (P/SB)
Always
Below 1
D18-6 (LAPL) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
D18-10 (LAPB) - Body ground
SWITCH CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
NG
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V

CONNECTOR
5/6
8/6/12
OK
6/6
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000Y5I0BNX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FRS)

HINT:
Use these procedures to troubleshoot the seat belt warning system.
*: Use a Techstream.
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
3.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000Y5I0BNX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/3
8/6/12
4.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Go to step 6
5.
(a) Operation Check

(b) Data List/ Active Test
NEXT
6.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
7.
CONFIRMATION TEST
2/3
8/6/12
NEXT
END
3/3
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002N53029X
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
OPERATION CHECK
1. INSPECT DRIVER SIDE SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
(b) Check that the front seat belt warning light on the combination meter assembly flashes when the
driver seat belt is not fastened.
2. INSPECT PASSENGER SIDE SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

(b) Check that the front passenger seat belt warning light on the telltale light assembly flashes when
the front passenger is seated and the seat belt is not fastened.
(c) Check that the front seat belt warning light on the clock assembly goes out when a passenger is
seated in the front passenger seat, and the seat belt tang plate is inserted into the buckle.
3. INSPECT SEAT BELT WARNING BUZZER

HINT:
If the buzzer does not sound, then the buzzer cancel setting may be on
(a) Lift up the vehicle using a swing arm type lift

(c) Have persons sit in the driver seat and front passenger seat.
NOTICE:
When getting into the vehicle, do not touch the seat backs.
HINT:
At this time, do not fasten these seat belts.
(d) While having the driver seat or front passenger seat belt tang plate not inserted into the buckle,
drive with a vehicle speed of approximately 20 km/h (12.5 mph) or more, and check that the
combination meter assembly buzzer sounds at an interval of 1.2 seconds for 30 seconds, then at
an interval of 0.4 seconds for 90 seconds.
(e) Check that 2 minutes after starting to sound, the buzzer stops sounding.
(f) After the buzzer stops, turn the ignition switch off, and then restart the engine. While having the
driver seat or front passenger seat belt tang plate not inserted into the buckle, drive with a
vehicle speed of approximately 20 km/h (12.5 mph) or more, and check that the buzzer sounds
again.
(g) After the buzzer stops, insert the driver and front passenger seat belt tang plates into the
buckles. With a vehicle speed of approximately 20 km/h (12.5 mph) or more, check that the buzzer
starts sounding again when the driver seat or front passenger seat belt is unfastened.
(h) After the buzzer stops, move the shift lever to R and then to D, and with the seat belt tang plate
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: OPERATION CHECK (2013 FR-S)
not inserted into the buckle, drive with a vehicle speed of approximately 20 km/h (12.5 mph) or
more and check that the buzzer starts sounding again.
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003FD201PX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FD201PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003FD201PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000148Y08DX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Seat Belt Warning System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Driver side seat belt warning light does

not operate
Front passenger side seat belt warning

light malfunction
Seat belt warning buzzer does not

operate
Proceed to "Driver Side Seat Belt Warning Light

does not Operate"
Airbag system
Occupant classification system
Proceed to "Front Passenger Side Seat Belt

Warning Light Malfunction"
Front seat inner belt assembly RH
Meter/Gauge system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM00000148Y08DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OKO07NX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) Driver seat belt warning light:
When the ignition switch is ON and the driver seat belt is not fastened, the front seat belt warning
light on the combination meter assembly will flash, warning the driver. The combination meter
assembly displays both the driver seat belt status and the vehicle speed.
(b) Front passenger seat belt warning light:
When the ignition switch is ON and a passenger is on the front seat, but the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened, the front seat belt warning light inside the telltale light assembly will flash.
The combination meter assembly notifies the front passenger seat belt status and front passenger
seating status.
(c) Seat belt warning buzzer:
After turning the ignition switch is ON, check that if the driver seat belt is not fastened within 1.8
seconds, the seat belt warning buzzer on the combination meter assembly sounds at an interval
of 1.2 seconds for 6 seconds.
When a front passenger is seated and the vehicle speed is 20 km/h (12.5 mph) or more while
either the driver or front passenger seat belts are not fastened, then the seat belt warning buzzer
on the combination meter assembly will sound once.
When 30 seconds have elapsed since the buzzer started sounding, the seat belt warning buzzer
on the combination meter assembly will sound at an interval of 1.2 seconds for 30 seconds.
After this, the seat belt warning buzzer on the combination meter assembly will sound at an
interval of 0.4 seconds for 90 seconds.

COMPONENT
FUNCTION
Front seat inner belt

(driver side buckle
switch)
Notifies the combination meter assembly of the driver seat belt status (fastened
or not fastened).
Front seat inner belt

(front passenger
side buckle switch)
Notifies the Occupant Detection ECU of the front passenger seat belt status
(fastened or not fastened).
Occupant detection
sensor
Notifies the Occupant Detection ECU of the front passenger seat status (seated
or not seated).
Occupant detection
ECU
Sends the front passenger seat belt buckle switch signal and occupant detection
signal to the Airbag ECU assembly.
Airbag ECU
assembly
Sends the front passenger seat belt buckle switch signal to the combination
meter assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OKO07NX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
Driver side seat belt

warning light
With the ignition switch ON, if the driver seat belt is not fastened, then the
combination meter will flash the seat belt warning light on the combination
meter assembly as a reminder.
Front passenger
side seat belt
warning light
If the front passenger is seated and the ignition switch is ON, and the front
passenger seat belt is not fastened, then the combination meter will flash the
seat belt warning light on the clock assembly as a reminder.
If any of the conditions below are met, and the vehicle speed is 20 km/h (12.5
mph) or more, then the combination meter buzzer will sound as a reminder.
Seat belt warning

buzzer
Skid control ECU
1. The driver seat belt is not fastened.

2. The front passenger is seated, but the front passenger seat belt is
not fastened.
Sends the vehicle speed signal to the combination meter assembly via CAN
communication.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OKO07NX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001OC706MX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OC706MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
Communication Table
SENDER
RECEIVER
SIGNAL
Airbag ECU assembly
Occupant detection
Skid control ECU
Vehicle speed
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001OC706MX.html?sisuffix=ff
COMMUNICATION METHOD
CAN
2/2
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000014DJ07VX
Title: SEAT BELT: SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
HINT:
TESTER CONNECTION
WIRING COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D7-1 (+B)- Body

ground
R-W - Body
ground
Combination meter
+B line
D7-2 (IG+) - Body

ground
W-G - Body
ground
Combination meter IG Ignition switch ON

line
Ignition switch off
11 to 14 V
D7-20 (ES1) - Body

ground
B-Y - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
Driver seat belt

fastened
10 k or higher
Driver seat belt

unfastened
Below 1
Always
Below 1
D7-37 (DBKL) - Body

ground
R-B - Body
ground
Driver seat belt signal
D7-40 (ES2) - Body

ground
B-Y - Body
ground
Ground
Always
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
(c) Reconnect the D7 combination meter assembly connector.
TESTER
WIRING
CONNECTION
COLOR
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000014DJ07VX.html?sisuffix=ff&
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
1/3
Front passenger seat occupied,

D7-13 (P/SB) -
BR-R - Body Front passenger seat belt seat belt fastened
Body ground
ground
warning signal
Front passenger seat occupied,

seat belt unfastened
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
If the result is not as specified, the combination meter assembly may have a malfunction.
2. CHECK AIRBAG ECU ASSEMBLY
TERMINAL NO.
TERMINAL SYMBOL
DESTINATION
G1-12
SVC
Occupant detection ECU
G1-13
SGD
Occupant detection ECU
3. CHECK OCCUPANT DETECTION ECU

(a) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table
below.
TESTER
WIRING
CONNECTION COLOR
G2-1 - Body
ground
TERMINAL
CONDITION SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
G-
Occupant
Body
ground
detection ECU
IG line
Ignition
switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition
switch ON
Pulse
generation
Airbag ECU
G2-2 - G2-3
Y-G - Y
assembly
communication
line
If the result is not as specified, the occupant detection ECU

may have a malfunction.
2/3
3/3
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WAY01DX
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WAY01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/4
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WB0028X
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE RECLINING ADJUSTER RELEASE HANDLE
(a) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective

tape, disengage the claw and remove the reclining
adjuster release handle.
*1
Protective Tape
2. REMOVE VERTICAL ADJUSTING HANDLE (for Driver Side)
(a) Remove the screw and vertical adjusting handle.
3. REMOVE FRONT SEAT CUSHION SHIELD
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WB0028X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
(b) Disengage the 4 claws, 5 guides and clip to remove the front seat cushion shield.
4. REMOVE FRONT SEAT INNER CUSHION SHIELD
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and 4 guides to remove the front

seat inner cushion shield.
5. REMOVE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)

6. REMOVE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Front Passenger Side)
7. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEATBACK ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 hooks.
(b) Disconnect the rubber band of the separate type front

seatback cover.
2/9
8/6/12
(c) Disengage the fastener and separate the front seat

airbag assembly wire harness.
(d) Disconnect the front seat heater connector and

disengage the clamp. (w/ Seat Heater System)
(e) Disengage the claw and 4 clamps to separate the front

seat airbag assembly wire harness.
(f) Using a T40 "TORX" socket wrench, remove the 4 bolts

and separate type front seatback assembly.
8. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEATBACK COVER WITH PAD
3/9
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 5 hog rings.
(b) Open the 2 fasteners.
(c) Turn back the separate type front seatback cover.
(d) Disengage the 2 hooks.
(e) Remove the nut and the 3 brackets.
4/9
8/6/12
(f) Disengage the 4 claws and remove the 2 front seat

headrest supports.
(g) Remove the separate type front seatback cover with pad from front seatback frame assembly.
9. REMOVE FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

10. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEATBACK COVER
(a) Remove the 14 hog rings and separate type front

seatback cover from the separate type front seatback
pad.
11. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT CUSHION COVER WITH PAD
(a) Disconnect the occupant classification sensor connector. (for passenger side)
(b) Disengage the claw and 3 clamps to separate the front

seat heater wire harness. (w/ Seat Heater System)
(c) Disengage each hook and remove the separate type front seat cushion cover with pad from
separate type front seat cushion frame assembly. (for Driver Side)
5/9
8/6/12
(d) Disengage each hook and remove the separate type front seat cushion cover with pad from
separate type front seat cushion frame assembly. (for Passenger Side)
12. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT CUSHION COVER
6/9
8/6/12
(b) Remove the 12 hog rings and the separate type front
seat cushion cover from the separate type front seat
cushion pad.
13. REMOVE FRONT SEAT LOWER CUSHION SHIELD LH (for Driver Side)
(b) Disengage the hook.

(c) Disengage the clip and remove the front seat lower cushion shield LH.
14. REMOVE FRONT SEAT LOWER CUSHION SHIELD RH (for Driver Side)
HINT:
15. REMOVE FRONT SEAT CUSHION EDGE PROTECTOR LH
(b) Disengage the 3 claws to remove the front seat cushion edge protector LH.
16. REMOVE FRONT SEAT CUSHION EDGE PROTECTOR RH

HINT:
7/9
8/6/12
17. REMOVE SEAT TRACK ADJUSTING HANDLE
(a) Using a screwdriver, disengage the 2 springs to remove

the seat track adjusting handle from separate type front
seat cushion frame assembly.
18. REMOVE RECLINING ADJUSTER RELEASE BAND
(a) Remove the screw and reclining adjuster release band.
19. REMOVE SEAT CUSHION EDGE PROTECTOR
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the seat cushion edge

protector.
HINT:
Use the same procedure for both the 2 seat cushion edge
protectors.
20. REMOVE SEAT TRACK LOWER RAIL PROTECTOR
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the seat track lower rail
protector.
8/9
8/6/12
HINT:
Use the same procedure for both the 2 seat track lower rail
protectors.
9/9
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WAX01DX
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Place the front seat assembly in the cabin.
NOTICE:
(b) Operate the reclining adjuster release handle and move the seatback to the upright position.
(c) Lift up the seat track adjusting handle and move the seat to the rearmost position.
(d) Temporarily install the 2 bolts on the front side of the front seat assembly.
(e) Connect each connector and clamp under the seat.
(f) Engage the hook of the separate type front seat cushion cover.
(g) Lift up the seat track adjusting handle and move the seat to the foremost position.
(h) Temporarily install the 2 bolts on the rear side of the front seat assembly.
(i) Lift up the seat track adjusting handle and move the seat to the rearmost position.
(j) Using a E10 "TORX" socket wrench, tighten the 2 bolts on

the front side of the seat.
NOTICE:
Tighten the bolts in the order indicated in the
illustration.
(k) Lift up the seat track adjusting handle and move the seat to the foremost position.
(l) Using a E10 "TORX" socket wrench, tighten the 2 bolts on

the rear side of the seat.
NOTICE:
Tighten the bolts in the order indicated in the
illustration.
2. INSPECT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTER LOCKS

(a) During the sliding operation of the front seat, check that the left and right adjusters move
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WAX01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
together smoothly and lock simultaneously. If the seat adjusters do not lock simultaneously,
loosen the seat installation bolts to adjust the adjuster position.
3. INSTALL FRONT SEAT HEADREST ASSEMBLY

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WAX01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WB1028X
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL SEAT TRACK LOWER RAIL PROTECTOR
(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the seat track lower rail protector.
HINT:
Use the same procedure for both the 2 seat track lower rail protectors.
2. INSTALL SEAT CUSHION EDGE PROTECTOR

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the seat cushion edge protector.
HINT:
Use the same procedure for both the 2 seat cushion edge protectors.
3. INSTALL RECLINING ADJUSTER RELEASE BAND

(a) Install the reclining adjuster release band with the screw.
4. INSTALL SEAT TRACK ADJUSTING HANDLE

(a) Engage the 2 springs to install the seat track adjusting handle to the separate type front seat
cushion frame assembly.
NOTICE:
Springs must be securely engaged.
Install the rear end of seat track adjusting handle on the seat track lever.
5. INSTALL FRONT SEAT CUSHION EDGE PROTECTOR LH

(a) Engage the 3 claws to install the front seat cushion edge protector LH.
(b) Install the screw.
6. INSTALL FRONT SEAT CUSHION EDGE PROTECTOR RH

HINT:
7. INSTALL FRONT SEAT LOWER CUSHION SHIELD LH (for Driver Side)
1/5
8/6/12
(a) Engage the clip to install the front seat lower cushion
shield LH.
(b) Engage the hook as shown in the illustration.

(c) Install the screw.
8. INSTALL FRONT SEAT LOWER CUSHION SHIELD RH (for Driver Side)

HINT:
9. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT CUSHION COVER
(a) Using hog ring pliers, install the separate type front seat
cushion cover to the separate type front seat cushion pad
with 12 new hog rings.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the separate type front seat
cushion cover.
When installing the hog rings, take care to minimize
wrinkles as much as possible.
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers
(b) Using hog ring pliers, install 2 new hog rings.

2/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
cushion cover.
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers
10. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT CUSHION COVER WITH PAD
(a) Temporarily install the separate type front seat cushion cover with pad to the separate type front
seat cushion frame assembly
(b) Engage each hook.
(c) Engage the claw and 3 clamps to install the front seat cushion heater wire harness. (w/ Seat
Heater System)
(d) Connect the occupant classification sensor connector. (for Passenger Side)
11. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEATBACK COVER
(a) Using hog ring pliers, install the separate type front
seatback cover to the separate type front seatback pad
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the separate type front
seatback cover.
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers
3/5
8/6/12
12. INSTALL FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

13. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEATBACK COVER WITH PAD
(a) Temporarily install the separate type front seatback cover with pad to the separate type front
seatback frame assembly.
(b) Install the 3 brackets with the nut.
CAUTION:
For vehicles with a front seat airbag assembly, the separate type front seatback cover must be
securely installed. Otherwise, the front seat airbag assembly may not deploy properly.
Make sure that the strap is not twisted after installing the nut.
Install the bracket securely.
(c) Engage the 4 claws to install the 2 front seat headrest supports.
(d) Engage the 2 hooks.
(e) Turn back the separate type front seatback cover.
(f) Close the 2 fasteners.
(g) Using hog ring pliers, install 5 new hog rings.

NOTICE:
seatback cover.
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers
14. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEATBACK ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a T40 "TORX" socket wrench, install the separate type front seatback assembly with the
new 4 bolts.
(b) Engage the claw and 4 clamps to install the front seat airbag assembly wire harness.
(c) Engage the fastener to secure the front seat airbag assembly wire harness.
(d) Engage the clamp and connect the front seat heater connector. (w/ Seat Heater System)
4/5
8/6/12
(e) Connect the rubber band of the separate type front seatback cover.
(f) Engage the 2 hooks.
15. INSTALL FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Driver Side)
16. INSTALL FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY (for Front Passenger Side)
17. INSTALL FRONT SEAT INNER CUSHION SHIELD
(a) Engage the 2 claws and 4 guides to install the front seat inner cushion shield.
18. INSTALL FRONT SEAT CUSHION SHIELD

(a) Engage the 4 claws, 5 guides and clip to install the front seat inner cushion shield.
19. INSTALL VERTICAL ADJUSTING HANDLE (for Driver Side)

(a) Install the vertical adjusting handle with the screw.
20. INSTALL RECLINING ADJUSTER RELEASE HANDLE

(a) Engage the claw to install the reclining adjuster release handle.
5/5
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WAZ01DX
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
If the side airbag was deployed, replace the front seat assembly,
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
3. REMOVE FRONT SEAT HEADREST ASSEMBLY

(a) Operate the reclining adjuster release handle and move the seatback to the upright position.
(b) Lift up the seat track adjusting handle and move the seat to the foremost position.
(c) Disengage the hook of the separate type front seat

cushion cover.
(d) Disconnect each connector and clamp under the seat.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WAZ01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(e) Using a E10 "TORX" socket wrench, remove the 2 bolts on

the rear side of the seat.
(f) Lift up the seat track adjusting handle and move the seat to the rearmost position.
(g) Using a E10 "TORX" socket wrench, remove the 2 bolts on

the front side of the seat.
(h) Remove the front seat assembly.

NOTICE:
Always work in teams of multiple people when removing seats from the vehicle.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WAZ01DX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XW9012X
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XW9012X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012HG020X
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ASSEMBLY LH
table below.
*a

(Separate Type Front Seat Cushion Pad LH)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A-1 - B-1
Always
Below 1
A-2 - A-3
Always
3.21 to 3.85
A-2 - B-2
Always
3.21 to 3.85
A-3 - B-2
Always
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the separate type

front seat cushion pad LH.
2. INSPECT FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ASSEMBLY RH

table below.
*a

(Separate Type Front Seat Cushion Pad RH)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012HG020X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A-1 - B-1
Always
Below 1
A-2 - A-3
Always
3.21 to 3.85
A-2 - B-2
Always
3.21 to 3.85
A-3 - B-2
Always
Below 1

front seat cushion pad RH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012HG020X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XW801KX
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT CUSHION PAD (FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Using hog ring pliers, install the separate type front seat
cushion pad to the separate type front seat cushion cover
NOTICE:
cushion cover.
When installing the hog rings. take care to minimize
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers

*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XW801KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
2. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT CUSHION COVER WITH PAD

2/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XWA01KX
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

7. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT CUSHION COVER WITH PAD
8. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT CUSHION PAD (FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER
ASSEMBLY)
(b) Remove the 12 hog rings and the separate type front
seat cushion pad from the separate type front seat
cushion cover.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002XWA01KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002XW6011X
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012HF01ZX
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT SEAT BACK HEATER ASSEMBLY LH
table below.
*a

(Separate Type Front Seatback Pad LH)
TESTER CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3.26 to 4

front seatback pad LH.
2. INSPECT FRONT SEAT BACK HEATER ASSEMBLY RH

table below.
*a

(Separate Type Front Seatback Pad RH)
TESTER CONNECTION
1-2
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3.26 to 4

front seatback pad RH.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012HF01ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEATBACK PAD (FRONT SEATBACK HEATER ASSEMBLY)
(a) Using hog ring pliers, install the separate type front
seatback pad to the separate type front seatback cover
NOTICE:
seatback cover.
When installing the hog rings. take care to minimize
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers

1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: SEAT: FRONT SEATBACK HEATER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

8. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEATBACK PAD (FRONT SEATBACK HEATER ASSEMBLY)
(a) Remove the 14 hog rings and separate type front

seatback pad from the separate type front seatback cover
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002SZW00SX
Title: SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002SZW00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/5
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/5
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/5
8/6/12
5/5
8/6/12
SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002SZY00SX
Title: SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK COVER
(a) Disengage the 3 claws and guide to remove the rear

seatback lock cover.
HINT:
Use the same procedure as for both the LH side and RH side.
2. REMOVE BENCH TYPE REAR SEATBACK COVER WITH PAD
(a) Remove the 4 clips.
(b) Disengage the hook and roll up the bench type rear
seatback cover.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002SZY00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(c) Disengage the 6 hooks and remove the bench type rear
seatback cover with pad from rear seatback frame
assembly.
3. REMOVE BENCH TYPE REAR SEATBACK COVER
(a) Remove the 10 hog rings and bench type rear seatback
cover from the bench type rear seatback pad.
4. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK ROD LH
(a) Disengage the claw.
(b) Remove the rear seatback lock rod LH from rear seatback lock sub-assembly LH as shown in the
illustration.
5. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK ROD RH

HINT:
6. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK RELEASE KNOB
(a) Rotate the rear seatback lock release knob

2/4
8/6/12
counterclockwise to remove them from the rear seatback

lock rod LH.
HINT:
7. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and rear seatback lock sub-assembly

LH.
8. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
9. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK RELEASE BAND
(a) Remove the screw and rear seatback lock release band
from rear seatback lock sub-assembly LH.
HINT:
10. REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION BRACKET
(a) Remove the screw and rear seat cushion bracket from
separate type rear seat cushion assembly LH.
3/4
8/6/12
HINT:
11. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER LH
(b) Remove the 3 hog rings and separate type rear seat
cushion cover LH from the separate type rear seat
cushion pad LH.
12. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER RH

HINT:
Use the same procedure as for both the LH side.
4/4
8/6/12
SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002SZV00SX
Title: SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK STRIKER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Install the rear seat back lock striker sub-assembly LH with the 2 bolts.
2. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOOK STRIKER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
3. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK STRIKER COVER LH

(a) Engage the 3 clips to install the rear seat back lock striker cover LH.
4. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK STRIKER COVER RH

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

(a) Engage the 8 clips and 8 claws to install the luggage compartment trim cover LH.
(b) Install the clip to floor panel.
(c) Install the 2 clips. (w/ luggage compartment inner trim cover)

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002SZV00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

HINT:

HINT:
(a) Temporarily tighten the 2 bolts. securely
(b) Securely tighten the 2 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the bench type rear
seatback assembly.
(c) Install the 3 clips and bench type rear seatback cover.
17. INSTALL NO. 1 CENTER CONSOLE SILENCER

(a) Install the No. 1 center console silencer with the 2 clips.

(a) Engage the hook to install the separate type rear seat cushion assembly LH.

HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002SZV00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002SZZ00SX
Title: SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER LH
(a) Using hog ring pliers, install the separate type rear seat
cushion cover LH to the separate type rear seat cushion
pad with 3 new hog rings.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the cover.
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002SZZ00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
NOTICE:
When installing the hog rings, take care to minimize wrinkles as much as possible.
2. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER RH

HINT:
3. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION BRACKET

(a) Install the rear seat cushion bracket to the rear seat cushion assembly LH with the screw.
HINT:
4. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK RELEASE BAND

(a) Install the rear seatback lock release band with the screw to rear seatback lock assembly LH.
HINT:
5. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear seatback lock sub-assembly LH with the 2 bolts.
6. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
7. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK RELEASE KNOB
(a) Rotate the rear seatback lock release knob clockwise to

install it to the rear seatback lock rod LH.
HINT:
8. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK ROD LH
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Connect the rear seatback lock rod LH to the rear

seatback lock sub-assembly LH as shown in the
illustration.
(b) Engage the claw to install the rear seatback lock rod LH.
9. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK ROD RH

HINT:
10. INSTALL BENCH TYPE REAR SEATBACK COVER
(a) Using hog ring pliers, install the bench type rear seatback
cover to the bench type rear seatback pad with 10 new
hog rings.
NOTICE:
*1
Hog Ring
*2
Hog Ring Pliers
11. INSTALL BENCH TYPE REAR SEATBACK COVER WITH PAD

(a) Temporarily install the bench type rear seatback cover with pad to the rear seatback frame
assembly.
(b) Engage the 6 hooks to the rear seatback frame assembly.
(c) Engage the hook.
(d) Install the bench type rear seatback cover with pad with the 4 clips.
12. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK LOCK COVER

(a) Engage the guide and 3 claws to install the rear seatback lock cover.
3/4
8/6/12
HINT:
4/4
8/6/12
SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002SZX00SX
Title: SEAT: REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(b) Disengage the hook and remove the separate type rear seat cushion assembly LH.

HINT:
3. REMOVE NO. 1 CENTER CONSOLE SILENCER
(a) Remove the 2 clips and No. 1 center console silencer.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002SZX00SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/4
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 3 clips and turn back rear seatback cover.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and bench type rear seatback

assembly.
NOTICE:

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Remove the 2 clips. (w/ luggage compartment inner trim

cover)
*A
w/ Luggage Compartment Inner Trim Cover
(b) Remove the clip from floor panel.

(c) Disengage the 8 clips and 8 claws to remove the quarter trim panel LH.

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:

16. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK STRIKER COVER LH
3/4
8/6/12
(a) Disengage the 3 clips to remove rear seatback lock striker

cover LH.
17. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK STRIKER COVER RH

HINT:
18. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOCK STRIKER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and rear seatback lock striker subassembly LH.
19. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK LOOK STRIKER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

HINT:
4/4
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004E2100FX
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004E2100FX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000012HE012X
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT SEAT HEATER SWITCH (for LH)
(a) Check the seat heater switch.
the table below.
*a
(Seat Heater Switch (for LH))

TESTER
CONNECTION
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
1-2
ON (HI)
Below 1
3-4
ON (HI)
Below 1
2-4
ON (LO)
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the seat

heater switch (for LH).
(b) Check that the indicator illuminates.
(1) Apply battery voltage to the seat heater switch (for
LH) and check that the indicator illuminates.
*a

(Seat Heater Switch (for LH))
OK:
CONDITION

Terminal 2
Terminal 3
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000012HE012X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
SWITCH
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
ON (HI)
Indicator
1/3
8/6/12
illuminates

Terminal 2
ON (LO)

Terminal 3

heater switch (for LH).
2. INSPECT SEAT HEATER SWITCH (for RH)

(a) Check the seat heater switch.
the table below.
*a
(Seat Heater Switch (for RH))

TESTER
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
CONNECTION
CONDITION
CONDITION
1-2
ON (HI)
Below 1
3-4
ON (HI)
Below 1
2-4
ON (LO)
Below 1

heater switch (for RH).
(b) Check that the indicator illuminates.
(1) Apply battery voltage to the seat heater switch (for

RH) and check that the indicator illuminates.
*a

(Seat Heater Switch (for RH))
OK:
CONDITION
SWITCH
SPECIFIED
2/3
8/6/12
CONDITION
CONDITION

Terminal 2
ON (HI)

Terminal 3
Terminal 2
Indicator
illuminates
ON (LO)
Terminal 3
heater switch (for RH).
3/3
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Y5G00LX
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SEAT HEATER SWITCH
(a) Engage the 4 claws to install the 2 seat heater switches

to the console box assembly.
HINT:
Install the seat heater switch so that the pointed tip of the
triangle mark is facing outside the vehicle.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Y5G00LX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002Y5I00LX
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE SEAT HEATER SWITCH
(a) Disengage the 4 claws to remove the 2 seat heater

switches from the console box assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002Y5I00LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011HP02TX
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011HP02TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011HP02TX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011HQ02ZX
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Seat Heater System

SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEAT HTR LH fuse
SEE
PAGE
-
Seat heater switch LH
Seat heater does not operate (for Driver)
Separate type front seatback pad (Front seat

cushion heater)
Separate type front seat cushion pad (Front seat
back heater)
SEAT HTR RH fuse
Seat heater switch RH

Seat heater does not operate (for Front
Passenger)
Separate type front seatback pad (Front seat

cushion heater)
Separate type front seat cushion pad (Front seat
back heater)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011HQ02ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011HR02XX
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
(a) The seat heater system is controlled by operating the seat heater switch, which is located in the
console box.
(b) Whether the seat heater is on or off can be determined by checking if the seat heater switch
indicator light is on or off.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011HR02XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000011HS02UX
Title: SEAT: SEAT HEATER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000011HS02UX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1000: Airbag ECU Assembly Malfunction (
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000YTI0EJX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1000: Airbag ECU Assembly Malfunction
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1000
Airbag ECU Assembly Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The airbag ECU assembly consists of the deceleration sensor, drive circuit, diagnosis circuit, ignition
control, etc.
If the airbag ECU assembly receives signals from the deceleration sensor, it determines whether the
airbag squib and pretensioner squib should be activated.
DTC B1000 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the airbag ECU assembly.
DTC NO.
B1000

Airbag ECU assembly malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
Airbag ECU assembly
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1000 is output
DTC B1000 and other DTCs are output
NOTICE:
If only DTC B1000 is output, do not clear the DTCs, replace the airbag ECU assembly.
HINT:
If any DTCs other than DTC B1000 are also output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
REPLACE AIRBAG ECU ASSEMBLY
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YTI0EJX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1000: Airbag ECU Assembly Malfunction (
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YTI0EJX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1610,B16F2: Front Airbag Sensor RH Malf
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000035ZW040X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1610,B16F2: Front Airbag Sensor RH
DTC
B1610
Front Airbag Sensor RH Malfunction
DTC
B16F2
Front Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
The front airbag sensor RH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and front airbag sensor RH.
The front airbag sensor RH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU assembly
to determine if the airbag should be deployed.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front airbag sensor RH.
DTC NO.
B1610
B16F2

Front airbag sensor RH malfunction
Improper installation of front airbag sensor RH
TROUBLE AREA
Front airbag sensor RH

Airbag ECU assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR RH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000035ZW040X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Interchange the front airbag sensor RH with LH and connect the connectors.
(e) Clear the DTCs stored in memory
(f) Turn the ignition switch off.

(g) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for at least 60 seconds.
(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs B1610, B1615, B16F2 and B16F3 are not output.
DTC B1610, B16F2 are output.
DTC B1615, B16F3 are output.
HINT:
Codes other than DTCs B1610, B1615, B16F2 and B16F3 may be output at this time, but they are not
related to this check.
(i) Turn the ignition switch off.

(j) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
(k) Return the front airbag sensor RH and LH to their original positions and connect the connectors.
*1
Front Airbag Sensor LH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
2/3
8/6/12
REPLACE FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR RH
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1612,B1613: Front Airbag Sensor RH Lost
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000YTM08HX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1612,B1613: Front Airbag Sensor RH Lost
Communication (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1612
Front Airbag Sensor RH Lost Communication
DTC
B1613
Front Airbag Sensor RH Initialization
DESCRIPTION
The front airbag sensor RH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and front airbag sensor RH.
The front airbag sensor RH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU assembly
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front airbag sensor RH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1612
B1613
The airbag ECU assembly receives a line short circuit signal, an

open circuit signal, a short circuit to ground signal or a short
circuit to B+ signal in the front airbag sensor RH circuit.
TROUBLE AREA
Instrument
panel wire
Engine
room main
wire
Front
airbag
sensor RH
Airbag ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YTM08HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/12
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly and front airbag
sensor RH. Also check that the connectors that link the engine room main wire and instrument
panel wire are properly connected.
OK:
The connectors are properly connected.
HINT:
If the connectors are not connected securely, reconnect the connectors and proceed to the next
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the airbag ECU assembly and front airbag sensor RH. Also
disconnect the connectors that link the engine room main wire and instrument panel wire.
2/12
8/6/12
(e) Check that the terminals of the connectors are not damaged.
OK:
The terminals are not deformed or damaged.
NG
REPLACE WIRE HARNESS
OK
2.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR RH CIRCUIT (OPEN)
(a) Connect the connectors that link the engine room main
wire and instrument panel wire.
(b) Using a service wire, connect terminals 29 (+SR) and 27 (-SR) of connector B.
NOTICE:
Do not forcibly insert the service wire into the terminals of the connector when connecting the
wire.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A51-2 (BUSIN) - A51-1 (RTNIN)
Always
Below 1
3/12
8/6/12
*1
Front Airbag Sensor RH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Airbag ECU Assembly)
(to Front Airbag Sensor RH)
NG
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (OPEN)
OK
3.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR RH CIRCUIT (SHORT)
(a) Disconnect the service wire from connector B.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
4/12
8/6/12
*a

NG
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (SHORT)
OK
4.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR RH CIRCUIT (SHORT TO B+)

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A51-2 (BUSIN) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
A51-1 (RTNIN) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
5/12
8/6/12
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a

NG
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (SHORT TO

B+)
OK
5.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR RH CIRCUIT (SHORT TO GROUND)

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A51-2 (BUSIN) - Body

ground
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher
A51-1 (RTNIN) - Body

ground
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a

NG

GROUND)
OK
6/12
8/6/12
6.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR RH
(a) Connect the connector to the airbag ECU assembly.
(b) Interchange the front airbag sensor RH with LH and connect the connectors.
(d) Clear the DTCs stored in memory

(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for at least 60 seconds.
(g) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs B1612, B1613, B1617 and B1618 are not output.
DTC B1617 or B1618 is output.
HINT:
Codes other than DTCs B1612, B1613, B1617 and B1618 may be output at this time, but they are not

CAUTION:
(j) Return the front airbag sensor RH and LH to their original positions and connect the connectors.
*1
7/12
8/6/12
*2
7.
Airbag ECU Assembly
REPLACE FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR RH
(a) Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the

engine room main wire.
HINT:
The service wire has already been inserted into connector B.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DA3-2 - DA3-1
Always
Below 1
(c) Disconnect the service wire from connector B.

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Engine Room Main Wire
8/12
8/6/12
*4
Instrument Panel Wire
*5
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Engine Room Main Wire)
8.
NG
REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE
OK
REPLACE ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DA3-2 - DA3-1
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*4
9/12
8/6/12
*a
9.

NG
OK
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (SHORT TO B+)


Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DA3-2 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
DA3-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*4
*a
10/12
8/6/12
10.
NG
OK
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (SHORT TO GROUND)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DA3-2 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
DA3-1 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*4
*a

NG
11/12
8/6/12
OK
12/12
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1615,B16F3: Front Airbag Sensor LH Malf
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003617040X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1615,B16F3: Front Airbag Sensor LH
DTC
B1615
Front Airbag Sensor LH Malfunction
DTC
B16F3
Front Airbag Sensor LH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
The front airbag sensor LH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and front airbag sensor LH.
The front airbag sensor LH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU assembly
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front airbag sensor LH.
DTC NO.
B1615
B16F3

Front airbag sensor LH malfunction
Improper installation of front airbag sensor LH
TROUBLE AREA
Front airbag sensor LH

Airbag ECU assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR LH
1/3
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Interchange the front airbag sensor LH with RH and connect the connectors.

(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1615 and B16F3 are output.
DTC B1610 and B16F2 are output.
HINT:

CAUTION:
(k) Return the front airbag sensor LH and RH to their original positions and connect the connectors.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
2/3
8/6/12
REPLACE FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR LH
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1617,B1618: Front Airbag Sensor LH Lost
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000YTN08JX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1617,B1618: Front Airbag Sensor LH Lost
Communication (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1617
Front Airbag Sensor LH Lost Communication
DTC
B1618
Front Airbag Sensor LH Initialization
DESCRIPTION
The front airbag sensor LH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and front airbag sensor LH.
The front airbag sensor LH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU assembly
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front airbag sensor LH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1617
B1618

circuit to B+ signal in the front airbag sensor LH circuit.
TROUBLE AREA
Instrument
panel wire
Engine
room main
wire
Front
airbag
sensor LH
Airbag ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YTN08JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/12
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly and front airbag
sensor LH. Also check that the connectors that link the engine room main wire and instrument
panel wire are properly connected.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the airbag ECU assembly and front airbag sensor LH. Also
disconnect the connectors that link the engine room main wire and instrument panel wire.
2/12
8/6/12
OK:
NG
OK
2.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR LH CIRCUIT (OPEN)
(a) Connect the connectors that link the engine room main
wire and instrument panel wire.
(b) Using a service wire, connect terminals 30 (+SL) and 28 (-SL) of connector B.
NOTICE:
wire.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
3/12
8/6/12
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Front Airbag Sensor LH)
NG
OK
3.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR LH CIRCUIT (SHORT)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
4/12
8/6/12
*a

NG
OK
4.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR LH CIRCUIT (SHORT TO B+)

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A58-2 (BUSIN) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
A58-1 (RTNIN) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
5/12
8/6/12
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a

NG

B+)
OK
5.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR LH CIRCUIT (SHORT TO GROUND)

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
A58-2 (BUSIN) - Body

ground
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher
A58-1 (RTNIN) - Body

ground
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a

NG

GROUND)
OK
6/12
8/6/12
6.
CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR LH
(b) Interchange the front airbag sensor LH with RH and connect the connectors.

(g) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs B1612, B1613, B1617 and B1618 are not output.
HINT:

CAUTION:
(j) Return the front airbag sensor LH and RH to their original positions and connect the connectors.
*1
7/12
8/6/12
*2
7.
Airbag ECU Assembly
REPLACE FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR LH

HINT:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DA3-4 - DA3-3
Always
Below 1

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
8/12
8/6/12
*4
*5
Service Wire
*a
*b

8.
NG
OK

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DA3-4 - DA3-3
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*4
9/12
8/6/12
*a
9.

NG
OK


Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DA3-4 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
DA3-3 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*4
*a
10/12
8/6/12
10.
NG
OK

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
DA3-4 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
DA3-3 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*4
*a

NG
11/12
8/6/12
OK
12/12
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B161A: Lost Communication with Front Sat
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000432J031X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B161A: Lost Communication with Front
Satellite Sensor Bus (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B161A
Lost Communication with Front Satellite Sensor Bus
DESCRIPTION
The front collision sensor circuit (front airbag sensor RH circuit and front airbag sensor LH circuit) is
composed of the airbag ECU assembly, front airbag sensor RH and front airbag sensor LH.
The front airbag sensor RH and front airbag sensor LH detect impacts to the vehicle and send signals to
the airbag ECU assembly to determine if the airbag should be deployed.
DTC B161A is stored when a malfunction is detected in the front collision sensor circuit (front airbag
sensor RH circuit and front airbag sensor LH circuit).
DTC
NO.
B161A

circuit to B+ signal in the front collision sensor circuit (front
airbag sensor RH circuit and front airbag sensor LH circuit).
TROUBLE AREA
Instrument
panel wire
Engine
room main
wire
Front
airbag
sensor RH
Front
airbag
sensor LH
Airbag ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
1/3
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for at least 60 seconds.
HINT:
If a communication error occurs, DTCs for both the LH and RH sides will be stored simultaneously. To
identify the malfunctioning area, turn the ignition switch off and then to ON again.
(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for at least 60 seconds.
(d) Check for DTCs
Result:
2/3
8/6/12
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs B1613 and B1618 are not output.
DTC B1613 is output.
HINT:
DTCs indicating communication errors will be changed to DTCs indicating errors in initialization by
turning the ignition switch off and then to ON again.
Codes other than DTCs B1613 and B1618 may be output at this time, but they are not related to
this check.
GO TO DTC B1613
GO TO DTC B1618
2.
CHECK DTC
(a) Clear the DTCs stored in memory

(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for at least 60 seconds.
(d) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC B161A is not output.
HINT:
Codes other than DTC B161A may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check.
NG
OK
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1620,B16F4: Side Airbag Sensor RH Circu
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001NZV05QX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1620,B16F4: Side Airbag Sensor RH
DTC
B1620
Side Airbag Sensor RH Circuit Malfunction
DTC
B16F4
Side Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
The side collision sensor RH circuit (to determine deployment of the front seat airbag assembly RH,
curtain shield airbag assembly RH and front seat outer belt assembly RH) is composed of the airbag ECU
assembly, side airbag sensor assembly RH, side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly RH, rear airbag sensor RH
and No. 2 airbag sensor assembly.
The side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly RH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag
ECU assembly to determine if the airbag should be deployed.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly RH.
DTC
NO.
B1620
B16F4
Side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly RH

malfunction
Improper installation of side No. 2 airbag
sensor assembly RH
TROUBLE AREA
Side No. 2 airbag sensor

assembly RH
Airbag ECU assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTCs B1622, B1623, B1632, B1633, B1642, B1692 and B1693
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001NZV05QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
1.
CHECK SIDE NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY RH
CAUTION:
(c) Interchange the side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly RH with LH and connect the connectors.

(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1620 or B16F4 is output.
HINT:
Codes other than DTCs B1620,B1625,B16F4 and B16F5 may be output at this time, but they are not

CAUTION:
(k) Return the side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly RH and LH to their original positions and connect
the connectors.
2/3
8/6/12
*1
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor Assembly LH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
REPLACE SIDE NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR

ASSEMBLY RH
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1625,B16F5: Side Airbag Sensor LH Circu
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001NZU05QX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1625,B16F5: Side Airbag Sensor LH
DTC
B1625
Side Airbag Sensor LH Circuit Malfunction
DTC
B16F5
Side Airbag Sensor LH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
The side collision sensor LH circuit (to determine deployment of the front seat airbag assembly LH,
curtain shield airbag assembly LH and front seat outer belt assembly LH) is composed of the airbag ECU
assembly, side airbag sensor assembly LH, side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly LH and rear airbag sensor
LH and No. 2 airbag sensor assembly.
The side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly LH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly LH.
DTC
NO.
B1625
B16F5
Side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly LH

malfunction
Improper installation of side No. 2 airbag
sensor assembly LH
TROUBLE AREA
Side No. 2 airbag sensor

assembly LH
Airbag ECU assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001NZU05QX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
1.
CHECK SIDE NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY LH
CAUTION:
(c) Interchange the side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly LH with RH and connect the connectors.

(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:
Codes other than DTCs B1620 and B1625 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this
check.

CAUTION:
(k) Return the side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly LH and RH to their original positions and connect
the connectors.
2/3
8/6/12
*1
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor Assembly RH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
REPLACE SIDE NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR

ASSEMBLY LH
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1630,B16F6: Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor R
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001NZX05CX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1630,B16F6: Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor RH
DTC
B1630
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor RH Malfunction
DTC
B16F6
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
assembly, side airbag sensor assembly RH, side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly RH and rear airbag sensor
RH and No. 2 airbag sensor assembly.
The rear airbag sensor RH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU assembly
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the rear airbag sensor RH.
DTC NO.
B1630
B16F6
TROUBLE AREA
Rear airbag sensor RH malfunction

Rear airbag sensor RH

Airbag ECU assembly
Improper installation of rear airbag sensor RH

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK REAR AIRBAG SENSOR RH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001NZX05CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Interchange the rear airbag sensor RH with LH and connect the connectors to them.

(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:

CAUTION:
(k) Return the rear airbag sensor RH and LH to their original positions and connect the connectors.
*1
Rear Airbag Sensor LH
2/3
8/6/12
*2
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor Assembly RH
REPLACE REAR AIRBAG SENSOR RH
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1635,B16F7: Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor LH
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001NZW05CX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1635,B16F7: Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor LH
DTC
B1635
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor LH Malfunction
DTC
B16F7
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor LH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
The rear airbag sensor LH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU assembly
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the rear airbag sensor LH.
DTC NO.
B1635
B16F7
TROUBLE AREA
Rear airbag sensor LH malfunction

Rear airbag sensor LH

Airbag ECU assembly
Improper installation of rear airbag sensor LH

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK REAR AIRBAG SENSOR LH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001NZW05CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Interchange the rear airbag sensor LH with RH and connect the connectors to them.

(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:

CAUTION:
(k) Return the rear airbag sensor LH and RH to their original positions and connect the connectors.
*1
Rear Airbag Sensor RH
2/3
8/6/12
*2
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor Assembly LH
REPLACE REAR AIRBAG SENSOR LH
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1650: Occupant Classification System Mal
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000016WN05TX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1650: Occupant Classification System
DTC
B1650
Occupant Classification System Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The occupant classification system circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and occupant classification
system.
If the airbag ECU assembly receives signals from the occupant detection ECU, it determines whether the
front passenger airbag and front seat belt pretensioner RH should be operated.
DTC B1650 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the occupant classification system circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1650

circuit to B+ signal in the occupant classification system circuit.
Occupant classification system malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
No. 2
floor
wire
Front
seat
assembly
RH
Airbag
ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000016WN05TX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/11
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC (OCCUPANT DETECTION ECU)
(a) Check for DTCs of the occupant detection ECU
OK:
DTC is not output.
NG
OK
2.
CHECK CONNECTORS

2/11
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly and front seat
wire RH.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the airbag ECU assembly and front seat wire RH.
OK:
NG
REPLACE NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE
OK
3.
CHECK CONNECTORS
(a) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the occupant detection ECU.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(b) Disconnect the connectors from the occupant detection ECU.

(c) Check that the terminals of the connectors are not damaged.
OK:
NG
OK
3/11
8/6/12
4.
CHECK OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CIRCUIT (OPEN)
(a) Connect the connectors to the front seat wire RH.
(b) Using a service wire, connect terminals 12 (SVC) and 13

(SGD) of connector B.
NOTICE:
Do not forcibly insert the service wire into the terminals
of the connector when connecting the wire.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-9
Always
Below 1
*1
Occupant Detection ECU
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Occupant Detection ECU)
NG
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE (OPEN)
OK
4/11
8/6/12
5.
CHECK OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CIRCUIT (SHORT)
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1-9
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a

NG
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE (SHORT)
OK
6.
CHECK OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CIRCUIT (SHORT TO B+)
5/11
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
9 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a

NG
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE (SHORT TO B+)
OK
6/11
8/6/12
7.
CHECK OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CIRCUIT (SHORT TO GROUND)

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
9 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
8.

NG
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE (SHORT TO
OK
GROUND)
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE (OPEN)
(a) Disconnect the front seat wire RH from the No. 2 floor
7/11
8/6/12
wire.
HINT:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G2-2 - G2-3
Always
Below 1

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
No. 2 Floor Wire
*5
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Front Seat Wire RH)
NG
OK
8/11
8/6/12
9.
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE (SHORT)
wire.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G2-2 - G2-3
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
No. 2 Floor Wire
*a
10.

NG
OK
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE (SHORT TO B+)
9/11
8/6/12
wire.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G2-2 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
G2-3 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
No. 2 Floor Wire
*a
11.

NG
OK
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE (SHORT TO GROUND)
10/11
8/6/12
wire.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G2-2 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
G2-3 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
No. 2 Floor Wire
*a

NG
OK
11/11
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1655: Seat Belt Buckle Switch (RH) (2013
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001NZY05LX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1655: Seat Belt Buckle Switch (RH) (2013
FR-S)
DTC
B1655
Seat Belt Buckle Switch (RH)
DESCRIPTION
The seat belt buckle switch RH circuit consists of the occupant detection ECU, airbag ECU assembly and
front seat inner belt assembly RH.
DTC B1655 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the seat belt buckle switch RH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1655
The airbag ECU assembly receives a line short circuit

signal, an open circuit signal, a short circuit to ground
signal or a short circuit to B+ signal in the seat belt buckle
switch RH circuit.
Front seat inner belt assembly RH malfunction
Occupant detection ECU malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
Front seat
assembly RH
Front seat
inner belt
assembly RH
(Seat belt
buckle switch
RH)
Airbag ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001NZY05LX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/9
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
If DTC B1650 has been stored, check the errors with respect to that DTC first.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK DTC (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM)
(a) Check for DTCs of the occupant classification system
Result :
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs are not output
DTC B1760, B1761,B1771 or B1795 is output.

(DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
A
2/9
8/6/12
2.
CHECK CONNECTORS

(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the occupant detection ECU and front
seat inner belt assembly RH.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the occupant detection ECU and front seat inner belt assembly
RH.
OK:
NG
OK
3.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH (SHORT TO B+)


table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
3/9
8/6/12
CONNECTION
4 - Body ground
8 - Body ground
CONDITION
Ignition switch
ON
Ignition switch
ON
Below 1 V
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
*1
Front Seat Inner Belt Assembly RH
*2
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*a

NG
OK
4.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH (OPEN)
(a) Using a service wire, connect terminals 1 and 2 of connector C.

NOTICE:
wire.
4/9
8/6/12

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4-8
Always
Below 1
(c) Disconnect the service wire from connector C.

*1
*2
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Front Seat Inner Belt Assembly RH)
NG
OK
5.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH (SHORT)
5/9
8/6/12

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4-8
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*a

NG
OK
6.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH (SHORT TO GROUND)

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
8 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
6/9
8/6/12
*1
*2
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*a

NG
OK
7.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the occupant detection ECU and front seat inner belt assembly RH.
(c) Clear the DTCs stored in the occupant detection ECU
(d) Clear the DTCs stored in the airbag ECU assembly
.
.

(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
Codes other than DTC B1655 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check.
NG
CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH
OK
7/9
8/6/12
8.
CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH
CAUTION:
(b) Replace the front seat inner belt assembly RH with a known good one
HINT:
Perform the following inspection using known good parts from another vehicle if possible.

(d) Clear the DTCs stored in the occupant detection ECU
(e) Clear the DTCs stored in the airbag ECU assembly
.
.

(h) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:

(k) Restore the front seat inner belt assembly RH that was installed for testing to its original
location
.
9.
NG
CHECK FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY RH
OK

LH
CHECK FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY RH
(b) Replace the front seat assembly RH with a new one

8/9
8/6/12
(d) Connect the connectors to the occupant detection ECU and front seat inner belt assembly RH.
(e) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
(f) Clear the DTCs stored in the occupant detection ECU
(g) Clear the DTCs stored in the airbag ECU assembly
.
.

(i) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for at least 60 seconds.
(j) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
NG
OK
END (FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY RH WAS

DEFECTIVE)
9/9
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1660: P Seat Airbag Active Mode Indicator
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001W2808SX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1660: P Seat Airbag Active Mode
Indicator (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1660
P Seat Airbag Active Mode Indicator
DESCRIPTION
The passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and clock assembly
(passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator).
The passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator indicates the operation condition of the front passenger airbag
and front seat belt pretensioner RH.
DTC B1660 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1660
The airbag ECU assembly receives a line short circuit signal,

an open circuit signal, a short circuit to ground signal or a
short circuit to B+ signal in the passenger airbag ON/OFF
indicator circuit.
Clock assembly malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
Instrument
panel wire
Clock
assembly
(Passenger
airbag
ON/OFF
indicator)
Airbag ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001W2808SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/16
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
Perform the simulation method by selecting check mode (Signal Check) using the Techstream
.
After selecting check mode (Signal Check), perform the simulation method by wiggling each
connector of the airbag system or driving the vehicle on a city road or rough road
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR CONDITION
2/16
8/6/12

(b) Check the passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator operation.
Result:
ON/OFF INDICATOR ILLUMINATION
PROCEED TO
Always ON
OFF
HINT:
Refer to the normal condition of the passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator
CHECK CONNECTORS
2.
CHECK CONNECTORS

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly and clock
assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the airbag ECU assembly and clock assembly.
OK:
NG
3/16
8/6/12
OK
3.
CHECK PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR
(a) Connect the connector to the clock assembly.

(d) Check the passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator operation.
OK:
The passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator does not come on.
NG
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
CAUTION:
(c) Connect the connector to the airbag ECU assembly.


4/16
8/6/12
(h) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
5.
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
OK
CAUTION:
(c) Disconnect the connector from the clock assembly.

5/16
8/6/12
(d) Using a service wire, connect terminals 23 (PAON) and 17 (PAOFF) of connector B.
NOTICE:
wire.
(e) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
D18-3 (PAON) - D18-5 (P-AB)
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
(f) Disconnect the service wire from connector B.

*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*4
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
OK
6.

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
D18-3 (PAON) - D18-5 (PAB)

CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
1 M or higher
6/16
8/6/12
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
OK
7.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
D18-3 (PAON) - Body ground
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1 V
7/16
8/6/12
D18-5 (P-AB) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
OK
8.

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
D18-3 (PAON) - Body

ground
D18-5 (P-AB) - Body
ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher
*1
Clock Assembly
8/16
8/6/12
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a
9.

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
OK
CHECK CONNECTORS

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly and clock
assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the airbag ECU assembly and clock assembly.
OK:
NG
OK
9/16
8/6/12
10.
(a) Using a service wire, connect terminals 23 (PAON) and 17

(PAOFF) of connector B.
NOTICE:
TESTER CONNECTION
D18-3 (PAON) - D18-5 (P-AB)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*4
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
10/16
8/6/12
OK
11.

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D18-3 (PAON) - D18-5 (PAB)
Always
1 M or higher
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
OK
12.
11/16
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D18-3 (PAON) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
D18-5 (P-AB) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
OK
12/16
8/6/12
13.

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D18-3 (PAON) - Body

ground
Always
1 M or higher
D18-5 (P-AB) - Body

ground
Always
1 M or higher
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
OK
14.
CHECK CLOCK ASSEMBLY (SOURCE VOLTAGE)
13/16
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
D18-10 (LAPB) - Body ground
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V

CAUTION:
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

(to Clock Assembly)
NG
REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OR BATTERY
OK
15.
CHECK PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR
14/16
8/6/12
(a) Connect the connector to the clock assembly.

(d) Check the indicator according to the conditions in the
table below.
OK:
TERMINAL CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D27-23 (PAON) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
"ON" comes on
D27-17 (PAOFF) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
"OFF" comes on

(f) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery
terminal.
CAUTION:
Wait at least 90 seconds after disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal to disable the
SRS system.
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

NG
OK
16.
CHECK DTC
15/16
8/6/12

(c) Clear the DTCs stored in memory

(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for at least 60 seconds.
(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
Clock Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
OK
16/16
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1675,B16F8: Rear Floor Airbag Sensor (2
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000038D4014X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1675,B16F8: Rear Floor Airbag Sensor
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1675
Rear Floor Airbag Sensor
DTC
B16F8
Rear Floor Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
The No. 2 airbag sensor assembly circuit is composed of the airbag ECU assembly and No. 2 airbag
sensor assembly.
The No. 2 airbag sensor assembly detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU
assembly to determine if the airbag should be deployed.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly circuit.
DTC
CODE
B1675
B16F8
No. 2 airbag sensor assembly malfunction.

Airbag ECU assembly malfunction.
Improper installation of No. 2 airbag sensor
assembly.
TROUBLE AREA
No. 2 airbag sensor

assembly
Airbag ECU assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1675,B16F8: Rear Floor Airbag Sensor (2
CAUTION:
(c) Replace the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly with a new one.

(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTCs B1675 and B16F8 are not output.
HINT:
Codes other than DTC B1675, B16F8 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check.
*1
No. 2 Airbag Sensor Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
END (NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY WAS

DEFECTIVE)
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1678,B1679: Lost Communication with Re
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000038BD014X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1678,B1679: Lost Communication with
Rear Floor Airbag Sensor LH (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1678
Lost Communication with Rear Floor Airbag Sensor LH
DTC
B1679
Rear Floor Airbag Sensor LH Initialization Incomplete
DESCRIPTION
The No. 2 airbag sensor assembly circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and No. 2 airbag
sensor assembly.
The No. 2 airbag sensor assembly detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly circuit.
DTC
CODE
B1678
B1679

circuit to B+ signal in the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly circuit.
No. 2 airbag sensor assembly malfunction.
TROUBLE AREA
Floor
wire
No. 2
airbag
sensor
assembly
Airbag
ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038BD014X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/7
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly and No. 2 airbag
sensor assembly.
OK:
HINT:
2/7
8/6/12
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the airbag ECU assembly and No. 2 airbag sensor assembly.
(e) Check that the terminals of connectors are not damaged.
OK:
The connectors are not deformed or damaged.
NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
OK
2.
CHECK FLOOR WIRE (OPEN)
(a) Using a service wire, connect terminals 11 (BBL2+) and

12 (BBL2-) of connector B.
NOTICE:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H16-1 (BBL2-) - H16-2 (BBL2+)
Always
Below 1

3/7
8/6/12
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Floor Wire
*4
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to No. 2 Airbag Sensor Assembly)
NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
OK
3.
CHECK FLOOR WIRE (SHORT)

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
H16-1 (BBL2-) - H16-2

(BBL2+)
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Floor Wire
*a

NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
4/7
8/6/12
OK
4.
CHECK FLOOR WIRE (SHORT TO B+)

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H16-1 (BBL2-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
H16-2 (BBL2+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Floor Wire
*a
5/7
8/6/12
NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
OK
5.
CHECK FLOOR WIRE (SHORT TO GROUND)

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
H16-1 (BBL2-) - Body

ground
H16-2 (BBL2+) - Body
ground
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Floor Wire
*a

NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
OK
6.
CHECK NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
6/7
8/6/12
(a) Connect the connectors to the No. 2 airbag sensor

assembly and airbag ECU assembly.
(b) Replace the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly with a new one.

(g) Check for DTCs
:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
HINT:
Codes other than DTCs B1678 and B1679 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this
check.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
END (NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY WAS

DEFECTIVE)
7/7
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1690,B16F9: Side Airbag Sensor RH (201
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NXE012X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1690,B16F9: Side Airbag Sensor RH
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1690
Side Airbag Sensor RH
DTC
B16F9
Door Side Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
assembly, side airbag sensor assembly RH, side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly RH and rear airbag sensor
RH and No. 2 airbag sensor assembly.
The side airbag sensor assembly RH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the side airbag sensor assembly RH.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Side airbag sensor assembly RH malfunction

B1690
Side airbag sensor

assembly RH
Airbag ECU assembly
Improper installation of side airbag sensor

assembly RH
B16F9
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY RH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NXE012X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Interchange the side airbag sensor assembly RH with LH and connect the connectors.

(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1695 or B16FA is output.
DTCs B1690, B1695, B16F9 and B16FA are not output.
HINT:
Codes other than DTCs B1690, B1695, B16F9 and B16FA may be output at this time, but they are not

CAUTION:
(k) Return the side airbag sensor assembly RH and LH to their original positions and connect the
connectors.
2/3
8/6/12
*1
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly LH
*2
Rear Airbag Sensor RH
REPLACE SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY RH
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1695,B16FA: Side Airbag Sensor LH (201
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003NXD012X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1695,B16FA: Side Airbag Sensor LH (2013
FR-S)
DTC
B1695
Side Airbag Sensor LH
DTC
B16FA
Door Side Airbag Sensor LH Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
The side airbag sensor assembly LH detects impacts to the vehicle and sends signals to the airbag ECU
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the side airbag sensor assembly LH.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA
Side airbag sensor assembly LH malfunction

B1695
Side airbag sensor

assembly LH
Airbag ECU assembly
Improper installation of side airbag sensor

assembly LH
B16FA
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY LH
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003NXD012X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/3
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Interchange the side airbag sensor assembly LH with RH and connect the connectors.

(h) Check for DTCs
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1695 or B16FA is output.
DTCs B1690, B1695, B16F9 and B16FA are not output.
HINT:
Codes other than DTCs B1690, B1695, B16F9 and B16FA may be output at this time, but they are not

CAUTION:
(k) Return the side airbag sensor assembly LH and RH to their original positions and connect the
connectors.
2/3
8/6/12
*1
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly RH
*2
Rear Airbag Sensor LH
REPLACE SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY LH
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B16F1: Passenger Side Belt Warning Indica
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000589F000X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B16F1: Passenger Side Belt Warning
Indicator Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B16F1
Passenger Side Belt Warning Indicator Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The seat belt buckle switch RH signal circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and combination meter
assembly.
DTC B16F1 is stored when a malfunction is detected for the seat belt buckle switch RH signal circuit.
DTC
NO.
B16F1
The airbag ECU assembly receives a line short circuit signal,

an open circuit signal, a short circuit to ground signal or a
short circuit to B+ signal in the seat belt buckle switch RH
signal circuit.
Combination meter assembly malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
Instrument
panel wire
Combination
meter
assembly
Airbag ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1/7
8/6/12
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly and combination
meter assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the airbag ECU assembly and combination meter assembly.
(e) Check that the terminals of connectors are not damaged.
OK:
The connectors are not deformed or damaged.
NG
OK
2.

2/7
8/6/12
table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
D27-15 (PBE) - D7-38

(PBKL)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a
*b

NG
OK
3.
3/7
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
D27-15 (PBE) - Body ground
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

NG
OK
4.
4/7
8/6/12

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D27-15 (PBE) - Body

ground
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

NG
OK
5.
CHECK PASSENGER SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT CONDITION
(a) Connect the connectors to the combination meter

assembly.

5/7
8/6/12
(c) Check the passenger seat belt warning light operation after the ignition switch is turned to ON.
OK:
Blinks for 6 seconds and then goes off
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
OK
6.
CHECK DTC
CAUTION:
(c) Connect the connector to the airbag ECU assembly.


(h) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC B16F1 is not output.
6/7
8/6/12
HINT:
Codes other than DTC B16F1 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
OK
7/7
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1800-B1803: Short in D Squib Circuit (201
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFI0HWX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1800-B1803: Short in D Squib Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1800
Short in D Squib Circuit
DTC
B1801
Open in D Squib Circuit
DTC
B1802
Short in D Squib Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1803
Short in D Squib Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The driver side squib circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly, spiral cable sub-assembly and
horn button assembly.
The airbag ECU assembly uses this circuit to deploy the airbag when deployment conditions are
met.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the driver side squib circuit.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA

B1800
B1801
B1802
signal in the driver side squib circuit during primary

check.
Spiral cable sub-assembly malfunction
Driver side squib malfunction
The airbag ECU assembly receives an open circuit signal
in the driver side squib circuit.
The airbag ECU assembly receives a short circuit to
ground signal in the driver side squib circuit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFI0HWX.html?sisuffix=ff&
Instrument panel
wire
Spiral cable subassembly
Horn button
assembly (Driver
side squib)
Airbag ECU
assembly
1/11
8/6/12
The airbag ECU assembly receives a short circuit to B+

signal in the driver side squib circuit.
B1803
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/11
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the horn button assembly, spiral cable
sub-assembly and airbag ECU assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the horn button assembly, spiral cable sub-assembly and
OK:
(f) Check that the spiral cable sub-assembly connector (on the horn button assembly side) is not
damaged.
OK:
The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged.
(g) Check that the short springs for the instrument panel wire and spiral cable sub-assembly with
the activation prevention mechanism are not deformed or damaged.
OK:
The short springs are not deformed or damaged.
*1
Horn Button Assembly
*2
Spiral Cable Sub-assembly
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
*4
3/11
8/6/12
NG
OK
2.
CHECK HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY (DRIVER SIDE SQUIB)
(a) Connect the instrument panel wire to the airbag ECU

assembly and spiral cable sub-assembly.
(b) Connect SST (resistance 2.1 ) to connector E (orange connector).

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the horn button assembly (driver side squib) for measurement, as
this may lead to a serious injury due to airbag deployment.
NOTICE:
Do not forcibly insert SST into the terminals of the connector when connecting it.
Insert SST straight into the terminals of the connector.
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC B1800, B1801, B1802 or B1803 is not output.
HINT:
4/11
8/6/12

CAUTION:
(j) Disconnect SST from connector E.

*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
*b
3.

(to Horn Button Assembly)
Color: Orange
NG
CHECK DRIVER SIDE SQUIB CIRCUIT
OK
REPLACE HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
CHECK DRIVER SIDE SQUIB CIRCUIT
(a) Disconnect the instrument panel wire from the airbag ECU
assembly.
(b) Check for a short to B+ in the circuit.

(1) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
5/11
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
z7-2 (D+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
z7-1 (D-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
(c) Check for an open in the circuit.

TESTER CONNECTION
z7-2 (D+) - z7-1 (D-)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
(d) Check for a short to ground in the circuit.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher
(e) Check for a short in the circuit.

(1) Release the activation prevention mechanism built into connector B
TESTER CONNECTION
z7-2 (D+) - z7-1 (D-)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 M or higher
(3) Restore the released activation prevention mechanism of connector B to the original
condition.
6/11
8/6/12
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly

*a
*b
Color: Orange
NG
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the horn button assembly

and airbag ECU assembly.


(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
7/11
8/6/12
5.
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
OK
(a) Disconnect the instrument panel wire from the spiral

cable sub-assembly.
(1) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery
terminal.
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D52-1 (D-) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
Below 1 V
D52-2 (D+) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
Below 1 V

(5) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery
terminal.
CAUTION:
SRS system.

the table below.
8/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D52-1 (D-) - D52-2 (D+)
Always
Below 1

the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D52-1 (D-) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
D52-2 (D+) - Body

ground
Always
1 M or higher

(1) Release the activation prevention mechanism built into
connector B
.
the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D52-1 (D-) - D52-2 (D+)
Always
1 M or higher
(3) Restore the released activation prevention mechanism

of connector B to the original condition.
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
*4
*a

(to Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)
NG
OK
9/11
8/6/12
6.
CHECK SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Check for a short to B+ in the circuit.

terminal.
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
z7-2 (D+) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
Below 1 V
z7-1 (D-) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
Below 1 V

terminal.
CAUTION:
SRS system.
(b) Check for an open in the circuit.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
z7-2 (D+) - z7-1 (D-)
Always
Below 1
(c) Check for a short to ground in the circuit.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
10/11
8/6/12
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher
(d) Check for a short in the circuit.

(1) Release the activation prevention mechanism built into connector D
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
z7-2 (D+) - z7-1 (D-)
Always
1 M or higher
(3) Restore the released activation prevention mechanism of connector D to the original
condition.
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
*4
*a
*b

Color: Orange
NG
REPLACE SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
OK
11/11
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1805-B1808: Short in P Squib Circuit (201
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFJ0INX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1805-B1808: Short in P Squib Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1805
Short in P Squib Circuit
DTC
B1806
Open in P Squib Circuit
DTC
B1807
Short in P Squib Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1808
Short in P Squib Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The front passenger side squib circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and instrument panel
passenger airbag assembly.
The airbag ECU assembly uses this circuit to deploy the airbag when deployment conditions are met.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front passenger side squib circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1805
The airbag ECU assembly receives a line short

circuit signal in the front passenger side squib
circuit during primary check.
Front passenger side squib malfunction
B1806
The airbag ECU assembly receives an open

circuit.
B1807
The airbag ECU assembly receives a short

circuit to ground signal in the front passenger
side squib circuit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFJ0INX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
TROUBLE AREA
Instrument panel wire

Instrument panel
passenger airbag
assembly (Front
passenger side squib)
Airbag ECU assembly
1/7
8/6/12

circuit to B+ signal in the front passenger side
squib circuit.
B1808
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/7
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the instrument panel passenger airbag
assembly and airbag ECU assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly and airbag
ECU assembly.
OK:
(f) Check that the short spring for the instrument panel wire with the activation prevention
mechanism is not deformed or damaged.
OK:
The short spring is not deformed or damaged.
*1
Instrument Panel Passenger Airbag Assembly
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
NG
OK
3/7
8/6/12
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (FRONT PASSENGER SIDE

SQUIB)
2.
(b) Connect SST (resistance 2.1 ) to connector C.

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly (front passenger
side squib) for measurement, as this may lead to a serious injury due to airbag deployment.
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:

CAUTION:
4/7
8/6/12
(j) Disconnect SST from connector C.

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
3.

(to Instrument Panel Passenger Airbag Assembly)
NG
OK
REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER

AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
assembly.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D30-2 (P+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
D30-1 (P-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
5/7
8/6/12

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
D30-2 (P+) - D30-1 (P-)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D30-2 (P+) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
D30-1 (P-) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
D30-2 (P+) - D30-1 (P-)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
*a

6/7
8/6/12
NG
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the instrument panel

passenger airbag assembly and airbag ECU assembly.


(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
OK
7/7
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1810-B1813: Short in D Squib (Dual Stage
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFI0HXX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1810-B1813: Short in D Squib (Dual
Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1810
Short in D Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit
DTC
B1811
Open in D Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit
DTC
B1812
Short in D Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1813
Short in D Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The driver side squib 2nd step circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly, spiral cable subassembly and horn button assembly.
The airbag ECU assembly uses this circuit to deploy the airbag when deployment conditions are
met.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the driver side squib 2nd step circuit.
DTC
NO.
TROUBLE AREA

B1810
B1811
B1812
signal in the driver side squib 2nd step circuit during

primary check.
Driver side squib 2nd step malfunction
The airbag ECU assembly receives an open circuit
signal in the driver side squib 2nd step circuit.
ground signal in the driver side squib 2nd step circuit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFI0HXX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
Instrument panel
wire
Spiral cable subassembly
Horn button
assembly (Driver
side squib 2nd
step)
Airbag ECU
assembly
1/11
8/6/12
The airbag ECU assembly receives a short circuit to B+

signal in the driver side squib 2nd step circuit.
B1813
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/11
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the horn button assembly, spiral cable
sub-assembly and airbag ECU assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the horn button assembly, spiral cable sub-assembly and
OK:
(f) Check that the spiral cable sub-assembly connector (on the horn button assembly side) is not
damaged.
OK:
(g) Check that the short springs for the instrument panel wire and spiral cable sub-assembly with
the activation prevention mechanism are not deformed or damaged.
OK:
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
*4
3/11
8/6/12
NG
OK
2.
CHECK HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY (DRIVER SIDE SQUIB 2ND STEP)
(a) Connect the instrument panel wire to the airbag ECU

assembly and spiral cable sub-assembly.
(b) Connect SST (resistance 2.1 ) to connector E (black connector).

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the horn button assembly (driver side squib 2nd step) for
measurement, as this may lead to a serious injury due to airbag deployment.
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
4/11
8/6/12

CAUTION:

*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
*b
3.

Color: Black
NG
CHECK DRIVER SIDE SQUIB 2ND STEP
OK
REPLACE HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
CIRCUIT
CHECK DRIVER SIDE SQUIB 2ND STEP CIRCUIT
assembly.

5/11
8/6/12

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
z6-1 (D2+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
z6-2 (D2-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
z6-1 (D2+) - z6-2 (D2-)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
z6-1 (D2+) - z6-2 (D2-)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 M or higher
condition.
6/11
8/6/12
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly

*a
*b
Color: Black
NG
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the horn button assembly



(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
7/11
8/6/12
5.
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
OK
(a) Disconnect the instrument panel wire from spiral cable

sub-assembly.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D52-3 (D2+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
D52-4 (D2-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:
8/11
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D52-3 (D2+) - D52-4 (D2-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D52-3 (D2+) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
D52-4 (D2-) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D52-3 (D2+) - D52-4 (D2-)
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
*4
*a

(to Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)
NG
OK
9/11
8/6/12
6.
CHECK SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

terminal.
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
z6-1 (D2+) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
Below 1 V
z6-2 (D2-) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
Below 1 V

terminal.
CAUTION:
SRS system.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
z6-1 (D2+) - z6-2 (D2-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
10/11
8/6/12
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
z6-1 (D2+) - z6-2 (D2-)
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
*3
Airbag ECU Assembly
*4
*a
*b

Color: Black
NG
REPLACE SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
OK
11/11
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1815-B1818: Short in P Squib (Dual Stage
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFJ0IOX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1815-B1818: Short in P Squib (Dual Stage
- 2nd Step) Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1815
Short in P Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit
DTC
B1816
Open in P Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit
DTC
B1817
Short in P Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1818
Short in P Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The front passenger side squib 2nd step circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and instrument
panel passenger airbag assembly.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front passenger side squib 2nd step circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1815

2nd step circuit during primary check.
Front passenger side squib 2nd step
malfunction
B1816
The airbag ECU assembly receives an open

2nd step circuit.
malfunction
B1817

circuit to ground signal in the front passenger
side squib 2nd step circuit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFJ0IOX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
TROUBLE AREA
Instrument panel wire

Instrument panel
passenger airbag assembly
(Front passenger side
squib 2nd step)
Airbag ECU assembly
1/8
8/6/12

malfunction
B1818

circuit to B+ signal in the front passenger side
squib 2nd step circuit.
malfunction
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
2/8
8/6/12
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS

(b) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery
terminal.
CAUTION:
SRS system.
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the

instrument panel passenger airbag assembly and airbag
ECU assembly.
OK:
HINT:
If the connectors are not connected securely, reconnect the
connectors and proceed to the next inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the instrument panel

(e) Check that the terminals of the connectors are not
damaged.
OK:
(f) Check that the short spring for the instrument panel wire
with the activation prevention mechanism is not deformed
or damaged.
OK:
*1 Instrument Panel Passenger Airbag Assembly
*2 Airbag ECU Assembly
*3 Instrument Panel Wire
NG
OK
3/8
8/6/12
CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (FRONT PASSENGER SIDE

SQUIB 2ND STEP)
2.

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly (front passenger
side squib 2nd step) for measurement, as this may lead to a serious injury due to airbag
deployment.
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:

4/8
8/6/12
CAUTION:

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
3.

NG
CHECK FRONT PASSENGER SIDE SQUIB 2ND
OK
REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER
STEP CIRCUIT
AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
CHECK FRONT PASSENGER SIDE SQUIB 2ND STEP CIRCUIT
assembly.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
5/8
8/6/12
D30-4 (P2+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
D30-3 (P2-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
D30-4 (P2+) - D30-3 (P2-)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D30-4 (P2+) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
D30-3 (P2-) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
D30-4 (P2+) - D30-3 (P2-)
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3

6/8
8/6/12
*a
NG
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the instrument panel



(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
7/8
8/6/12
OK
8/8
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1820-B1823: Short in Side Squib (RH) Cir
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001NZQ08IX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1820-B1823: Short in Side Squib (RH)
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1820
Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit
DTC
B1821
Open in Side Squib (RH) Circuit
DTC
B1822
Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1823
Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The front side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and front seat airbag assembly RH.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front side squib RH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1820

signal in the front side squib RH circuit during
primary check.
Front side squib RH malfunction
B1821

signal in the front side squib RH circuit.
B1822

ground signal in the front side squib RH circuit.
TROUBLE AREA
No. 2 floor wire

Front seat assembly
RH (Front seat wire
RH)
Front seat airbag
assembly RH (Front
side squib RH)
Airbag ECU assembly

B+ signal in the front side squib RH circuit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001NZQ08IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/11
8/6/12
B1823

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/11
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the front seat airbag assembly RH and
airbag ECU assembly. Also check that the connectors that link the No. 2 floor wire and front seat
wire RH are properly connected.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the front seat airbag assembly RH and airbag ECU assembly.
Also disconnect the No. 2 floor wire from the front seat wire RH.
OK:
(f) Check that the front seat wire RH connector (on the front seat airbag assembly RH side) is not
damaged.
OK:
(g) Check that the short springs for the No. 2 floor wire and the front seat wire RH with the
activation prevention mechanism are not deformed or damaged.
OK:
*1
Front Seat Airbag Assembly RH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
No. 2 Floor Wire
3/11
8/6/12
NG
OK
2.
CHECK FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY RH (FRONT SIDE SQUIB RH)
(a) Connect the No. 2 floor wire to the front seat wire RH
(b) Connect SST (resistance 2.1 ) to connector E.

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the front seat airbag assembly RH (front side squib RH) for
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
4/11
8/6/12

CAUTION:

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
3.

(to Front Seat Airbag Assembly RH)
NG
CHECK FRONT SIDE SQUIB RH CIRCUIT
OK
REPLACE FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY RH
CHECK FRONT SIDE SQUIB RH CIRCUIT
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 floor wire from the airbag ECU
assembly.

5/11
8/6/12
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
c1-1 (SFR-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
c1-2 (SFR+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
c1-1 (SFR-) - c1-2 (SFR+)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
c1-1 (SFR-) - c1-2 (SFR+)
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
6/11
8/6/12
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly

*a
NG
CHECK NO. 2 FLOOR WIRE
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the front seat airbag

assembly RH and airbag ECU assembly.


(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
7/11
8/6/12
5.
NG
OK
wire.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Gc1-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
Gc1-2 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

NOTICE:

8/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Gc1-1 - Gc1-2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Gc1-1 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
Gc1-2 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Gc1-1 - Gc1-2
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
No. 2 Floor Wire
*a

NG
OK
6.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH
9/11
8/6/12

terminal.
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
c1-1 (SFR-) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
c1-2 (SFR+) - Body
Ignition switch
ground
ON
Below 1 V
Below 1 V

terminal.
NOTICE:
SRS system.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
c1-1 (SFR-) - c1-2 (SFR+)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher

.
10/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
c1-1 (SFR-) - c1-2 (SFR+)
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
No. 2 Floor Wire
*a

NG
OK
11/11
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1825-B1828: Short in Side Squib (LH) Circ
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001O0208HX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1825-B1828: Short in Side Squib (LH)
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1825
Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit
DTC
B1826
Open in Side Squib (LH) Circuit
DTC
B1827
Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1828
Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The front side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and front seat airbag assembly LH.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front side squib LH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1825

signal in the front side squib LH circuit during
primary check.
Front side squib LH malfunction
B1826

signal in the front side squib LH circuit.
B1827

ground signal in the front side squib LH circuit.
TROUBLE AREA
Floor wire
Front seat assembly
LH (Front seat wire
LH)
Front seat airbag
assembly LH (Front
side squib LH)
Airbag ECU assembly

B+ signal in the front side squib LH circuit.
1/11
8/6/12
B1828

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/11
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the front seat airbag assembly LH and
airbag ECU assembly. Also check that the connectors that link the floor wire and front seat wire
LH are properly connected.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the front seat airbag assembly LH and airbag ECU assembly.
Also disconnect the floor wire from the front seat wire LH.
OK:
(f) Check that the front seat wire LH connector (on the front seat airbag assembly LH side) is not
damaged.
OK:
(g) Check that the short springs for the floor wire and the front seat wire LH with the activation
prevention mechanism are not deformed or damaged.
OK:
*1
Front Seat Airbag Assembly LH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire LH
*4
Floor Wire
3/11
8/6/12
NG
OK
2.
CHECK FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY LH (FRONT SIDE SQUIB LH)
(a) Connect the floor wire to the front seat wire LH and
(b) Connect SST (resistance 2.1 ) to connector E.

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the front seat airbag assembly LH (front side squib LH) for
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
4/11
8/6/12

CAUTION:

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
3.

(to Front Seat Airbag Assembly LH)
NG
CHECK FLOOR WIRE
OK
REPLACE FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY LH
CHECK FLOOR WIRE
(a) Disconnect the floor wire from the airbag ECU assembly.

5/11
8/6/12
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
b1-1 (SFL-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
b1-2 (SFL+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
b1-1 (SFL-) - b1-2 (SFL+)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
b1-1 (SFL-) - b1-2 (SFL+)
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
6/11
8/6/12
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly

*a
NG
CHECK FLOOR WIRE
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the front seat airbag

assembly LH and airbag ECU assembly.


(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
7/11
8/6/12
5.
NG
OK
CHECK FLOOR WIRE
(a) Disconnect the front seat wire LH from the floor wire.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Hb1-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
Hb1-2 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

8/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Hb1-1 - Hb1-2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Hb1-1 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
Hb1-2 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Hb1-1 - Hb1-2
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire LH
*4
Floor Wire
*a

(to Front Seat Wire LH)
NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
OK
6.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE LH
9/11
8/6/12

terminal.
table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
b1-1 (SFL-) - Body

ground
Ignition switch
ON
b1-2 (SFL+) - Body
Ignition switch
ground
ON
Below 1 V
Below 1 V

terminal.
CAUTION:
SRS system.

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
b1-1 (SFL-) - b1-2 (SFL+)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
1 M or higher
Always
1 M or higher

.
10/11
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
b1-1 (SFL-) - b1-2 (SFL+)
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Front Seat Wire LH
*4
Floor Wire
*a

NG
REPLACE FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY LH
OK
11/11
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1830-B1833: Short in Curtain Shield Airba
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001O0307EX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1830-B1833: Short in Curtain Shield
Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1830
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit
DTC
B1831
Open in Curtain Shield Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit
DTC
B1832
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1833
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and curtain shield airbag
assembly RH.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1830

circuit signal in the curtain shield squib RH circuit
during primary check.
Curtain shield squib RH malfunction
B1831

signal in the curtain shield squib RH circuit.
B1832

ground signal in the curtain shield squib RH circuit.
TROUBLE AREA
No. 2 floor wire

Curtain shield airbag
assembly RH (Curtain
shield squib RH)
Airbag ECU assembly

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001O0307EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/8
8/6/12
B+ signal in the curtain shield squib RH circuit.

B1833
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/8
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the curtain shield airbag assembly RH and
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the curtain shield airbag assembly RH and airbag ECU assembly.
OK:
(f) Check that the No. 2 floor wire connector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly RH side) is not
damaged.
OK:
The lock button is not disengaged, and the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged.
(g) Check that the short spring for the No. 2 floor wire with the activation prevention mechanism is
not deformed or damaged.
OK:
*1
Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly RH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
No. 2 Floor Wire
NG
3/8
8/6/12
OK
2.
CHECK CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY RH (CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB RH)

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the curtain shield airbag assembly RH (curtain shield squib RH) for
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:

4/8
8/6/12
CAUTION:

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
3.

(to Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly RH)
NG
OK
REPLACE CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

RH
assembly.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
5/8
8/6/12
G11-1 (ICR+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
G11-2 (ICR-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G11-1 (ICR+) - G11-2 (ICR-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G11-1 (ICR+) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
G11-2 (ICR-) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G11-1 (ICR+) - G11-2 (ICR-)
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
No. 2 Floor Wire

6/8
8/6/12
*a
(to Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly RH)
NG
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the curtain shield airbag



(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
7/8
8/6/12
OK
8/8
8/6/12
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1835-B1838: Short in Curtain Shield
Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1835
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit
DTC
B1836
Open in Curtain Shield Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit
DTC
B1837
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1838
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The curtain shield squib LH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and curtain shield airbag assembly
LH.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the curtain shield squib LH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1835

circuit signal in the curtain shield squib LH circuit
during primary check.
Curtain shield squib LH malfunction
B1836

signal in the curtain shield squib LH circuit.
B1837

ground signal in the curtain shield squib LH circuit.
TROUBLE AREA
Floor wire
Curtain shield airbag
assembly LH (Curtain
shield squib LH)
Airbag ECU assembly

1/8
8/6/12
B+ signal in the curtain shield squib LH circuit.

B1838
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/8
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the curtain shield airbag assembly LH and
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the curtain shield airbag assembly LH and airbag ECU assembly.
OK:
(f) Check that the floor wire connector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly LH side) is not
damaged.
OK:
(g) Check that the short spring for the floor wire with the activation prevention mechanism is not
deformed or damaged.
OK:
*1
Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly LH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Floor Wire
NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
3/8
8/6/12
OK
2.
CHECK CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY LH (CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB LH)

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the curtain shield airbag assembly LH (curtain shield squib LH) for
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:

4/8
8/6/12
CAUTION:

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
3.

(to Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly LH)
NG
CHECK FLOOR WIRE
OK
REPLACE CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

LH
CHECK FLOOR WIRE

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
5/8
8/6/12
H30-1 (ICL+) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
H30-2 (ICL-) - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H30-1 (ICL+) - H30-2 (ICL-)
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H30-1 (ICL+) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
H30-2 (ICL-) - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H30-1 (ICL+) - H30-2 (ICL-)
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Floor Wire
6/8
8/6/12
*a
(to Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly LH)
NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the curtain shield airbag



(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
NG
7/8
8/6/12
OK
8/8
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1900-B1903: Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circ
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1900-B1903: Short in P/T Squib (RH)
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1900
Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit
DTC
B1901
Open in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit
DTC
B1902
Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1903
Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The front pretensioner squib RH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and front seat outer belt
assembly RH.
The airbag ECU assembly uses this circuit to deploy the seat belt pretensioner when deployment
conditions are met.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front pretensioner squib RH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1900

circuit signal in the front pretensioner squib RH
Front pretensioner squib RH malfunction
B1901

signal in the front pretensioner squib RH circuit.
B1902
The airbag ECU assembly receives a short circuit

to ground signal in the front pretensioner squib
RH circuit.
TROUBLE AREA
No. 2 floor wire

Front seat outer belt
assembly RH (Front
pretensioner squib RH)
Airbag ECU assembly
1/8
8/6/12

to B+ signal in the front pretensioner squib RH
circuit.
B1903
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/8
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the front seat outer belt assembly RH
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the front seat outer belt assembly RH and airbag ECU
assembly.
OK:
(f) Check that the No. 2 floor wire connector (on the front seat outer belt assembly RH side) is not
damaged.
OK:
(g) Check that the short spring for the No. 2 floor wire with the activation prevention mechanism is
not deformed or damaged.
OK:
*1
Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly RH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
No. 2 Floor Wire
NG
3/8
8/6/12
OK
2.
CHECK FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (FRONT PRETENSIONER SQUIB RH)

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the front seat outer belt assembly RH (front pretensioner squib RH)
for measurement, as this may lead to a serious injury due to pretensioner deployment.
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
4/8
8/6/12

CAUTION:

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
3.

(to Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly RH)
NG
OK
REPLACE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

RH
assembly.

Standard Voltage:
5/8
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G17-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
G17-2 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G17-1 - G17-2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G17-1 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
G17-2 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
G17-1 - G17-2
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
6/8
8/6/12
*3
No. 2 Floor Wire

*a
(to Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly RH)
NG
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the front seat outer belt



(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
7/8
8/6/12
NG
OK
8/8
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1905-B1908: Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circu
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001O0609CX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: B1905-B1908: Short in P/T Squib (LH)
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1905
Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit
DTC
B1906
Open in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit
DTC
B1907
Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit (to Ground)
DTC
B1908
Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit (to +B)
DESCRIPTION
The front pretensioner squib LH circuit consists of the airbag ECU assembly and front seat outer belt
assembly LH.
The airbag ECU assembly uses this circuit to deploy the seat belt pretensioner when deployment
conditions are met.
These DTCs are stored when a malfunction is detected in the front pretensioner squib LH circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1905

circuit signal in the front pretensioner squib LH
Front pretensioner squib LH malfunction
B1906

signal in the front pretensioner squib LH circuit.
B1907

to ground signal in the front pretensioner squib
LH circuit.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001O0609CX.html?sisuffix=ff&
TROUBLE AREA
Floor wire
Front seat outer belt
assembly LH (Front
pretensioner squib LH)
Airbag ECU assembly
1/8
8/6/12

to B+ signal in the front pretensioner squib LH
circuit.
B1908
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS
2/8
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the front seat outer belt assembly LH and
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the front seat outer belt assembly LH and airbag ECU
assembly.
OK:
(f) Check that the floor wire connector (on the front seat outer belt assembly LH side) is not
damaged.
OK:
(g) Check that the short spring for the floor wire with the activation prevention mechanism is not
deformed or damaged.
OK:
*1
Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly LH
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*3
Floor Wire
NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
3/8
8/6/12
OK
2.
CHECK FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (FRONT PRETENSIONER SQUIB LH)

CAUTION:
Never connect the tester to the front seat outer belt assembly LH (front pretensioner squib LH)
for measurement, as this may lead to a serious injury due to pretensioner deployment.
NOTICE:
SST: 09843-18061


(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
4/8
8/6/12

CAUTION:

*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
*a
3.

(to Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly LH)
NG
CHECK FLOOR WIRE
OK
REPLACE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

LH
CHECK FLOOR WIRE

Standard Voltage:
5/8
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H22-1 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
H22-2 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

CAUTION:

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H22-1 - H22-2
Always
Below 1

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H22-1 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
H22-2 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
H22-1 - H22-2
Always
1 M or higher
condition.
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
6/8
8/6/12
*3
Floor Wire
*a
(to Front Seat Outer Belt Assembly LH)
NG
REPLACE FLOOR WIRE
OK
4.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the front seat outer belt



(f) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
*1
*2
Airbag ECU Assembly
7/8
8/6/12
NG
OK
8/8
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: CHECK MODE PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFF0BYX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: CHECK MODE PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)

1. CHECK MODE (SIGNAL CHECK): DTC CHECK
(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / SRS Airbag / Utility / Signal Check, and proceed with
checking using the Techstream.
NOTICE:
Select Signal Check screen on the Techstream to clear the output DTCs (both current and
history).
HINT:
DTCs can be detected more sensitively in check mode than in normal diagnosis mode.
Perform check mode inspection when a malfunction in a squib circuit is suspected even after the
normal system code is output through normal diagnosis mode inspection.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFF0BYX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFH0BDX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
time.
NOTICE:
1. DATA LIST FOR AIRBAG ECU ASSEMBLY

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / SRS Airbag / Data List.
SRS Airbag
TESTER DISPLAY
Passenger Classification
Passenger Classification/
NG, OFF, CRS, ON or Fail
NORMAL
CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
OFF/CRS/ON
Unset/Set
LR/DP
ON/OFF
Passenger Buckle SW/

Right side Buckle SW
Unset: The seat belt is not

fastened
Set: The seat belt is fastened
NG: Data is not determined
Display Type Information

Status of Passenger
Airbag
Number of DTC
Display Type Information/

LR or DP
Status of Passenger Airbag/
ON or OFF
Number of DTC/
Min.: 0, Max.: 255
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFH0BDX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFD0FVX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. FUNCTION OF SRS WARNING LIGHT
(a) Primary check
(1) Turn the ignition switch off. Wait for at least 2 seconds, then turn the ignition switch to ON. The
SRS warning light comes on for approximately 6 seconds and the diagnosis of the airbag
system (including the seat belt pretensioners) is performed.
HINT:
If malfunctions are detected during the primary check, the SRS warning light remains on even after
the primary check period of approximately 6 seconds.
(b) Constant check

(1) After the primary check, the airbag ECU assembly constantly monitors the airbag system for
malfunctions.
HINT:
If malfunctions are detected during the constant check, the airbag ECU assembly functions as
follows:
The SRS warning light comes on.

The SRS warning light goes off, and then comes on. This indicates a source voltage drop. The SRS
warning light goes off 10 seconds after the source voltage returns to normal.
(c) Review
(1) When the airbag system is normal:
The SRS warning light comes on only during the primary check period of approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON.
(2) When the airbag system is malfunctioning:
The SRS warning light remains on even after the primary check period.
The SRS warning light goes off after the primary check, but comes on again during the
constant check.
The SRS warning light does not come on when turning the ignition switch from off to
ON.
HINT:
The airbag ECU assembly keeps the SRS warning light on if airbags have been deployed.
2. SRS WARNING LIGHT CHECK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFD0FVX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/11
8/6/12
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and check that the SRS
warning light comes on for approximately 6 seconds
(primary check).
(b) Check that the SRS warning light goes off approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to ON (constant check).
HINT:
When any of the following symptoms occur, refer to Problem Symptoms Table
The SRS warning light comes on occasionally after the primary check period.
The SRS warning light comes on, but a DTC is not output.
The ignition switch is turned from off to ON, but the SRS warning light does not come on.
3. FUNCTION OF PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR

(a) Initial check
(2) The passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator comes on for approximately 6 seconds, then goes off
for approximately 2 seconds.
(3) Approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON, the passenger airbag
ON/OFF indicator will indicate ON/OFF depending on the conditions listed below.
Indicator Operation
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CONDITION
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF

INDICATOR
ON INDICATOR
SRS WARNING
LIGHT
OFF INDICATOR
Vacant
OFF
OFF
OFF
Adult is seated.
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Child is seated.
Child restraint system is installed.
Front passenger occupant classification
failure
HINT:
The passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator illuminates based on the timing chart below in order to
check the indicator light circuit.
When the occupant classification system has trouble, both the SRS warning light and passenger
airbag ON/OFF indicator ("OFF") come on. In this case, check the DTCs in the airbag system first.
2/11
8/6/12
4. PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR CHECK
(b) Check that the passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator ("ON" and "OFF") comes on for approximately 6
seconds, then goes off for approximately 2 seconds.
HINT:
Refer to the indicator operation table in the preceding step regarding the passenger airbag ON/OFF
indicator when the ignition switch is turned to ON and approximately 6 seconds elapse.
5. FUNCTION OF SRS CONNECTORS

(a) The SRS connectors are located as shown in the illustration.
3/11
8/6/12
4/11
8/6/12
5/11
8/6/12
CONNECTOR TYPE
APPLICATION
Terminal Twin-lock Mechanism
Connectors 2, 4, 6, 9, 13, 21
Half Connection Prevention Mechanism
Connectors 6, 10
Activation Prevention Mechanism
Connectors 2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 11, 25, 27, 29, 31
Connector Lock Mechanism (1)
Connectors 8, 12, 30, 32
6/11
8/6/12
Connector Position Assurance Mechanism
Connectors 14, 16, 18, 20, 21, 24
Connector Lock Mechanism (2)
Connector A
Improper Connection Prevention Lock Mechanism
Connector A
(b) Terminal twin-lock mechanism
(1) This mechanism is designed to increase the ability of the terminal to remain connected and
prevent it from accidentally being disconnected.
(2) The connector has a two-piece construction consisting of the housing and spacer to securely
lock the terminal using both the lance (primary lock) and spacer (secondary lock).
(c) Half connection prevention mechanism
(1) This mechanism is designed to prevent the connector from being connected only halfway.
(2) If the connector is not completely connected, the connector is disconnected due to the spring
force so that no continuity exists.
(d) Activation prevention mechanism
7/11
8/6/12
(1) The activation prevention mechanism is designed to create a short circuit automatically
between the positive and negative terminals of an airbag power source connector when
disconnected.
(2) The short spring plate contained in the connector creates a closed circuit on the airbag side (no
potential difference can occur between both terminals), preventing accidental airbag
deployment when servicing.
(e) Connector lock mechanism (1)
(1) This mechanism is designed to prevent the connector from accidentally being disconnected.
(2) Locking the connector lock button engages the locking button claw to the groove on the other
side connector to connect the connector securely.
(f) Connector Position Assurance (CPA) mechanism
8/11
8/6/12
(1) This mechanism is designed to detect when the connector is connected only halfway.
(2) The CPA and female connector slide to the male connector side at the same time and the
primary lock is completed when the female connector is engaged with the male connector.
From this point, only the CPA slides to the male connector side and secondary lock is completed
when the CPA retainer is engaged with the female connector. When the CPA and female
connector ends are aligned, they are completely engaged.
(g) Connector lock mechanism (2)
(1) This mechanism is designed to prevent the connector from accidentally being disconnected.
(2) Sliding the connector all the way into the holder and locking the lance completes the primary
lock.
(3) Engaging the retainer to the holder as shown in the illustration completes the secondary lock,
preventing the connector from accidentally being disconnected.
(h) Improper connection prevention lock mechanism
9/11
8/6/12
(1) This mechanism is designed to prevent the connector from being connected only halfway.
(2) When the holder is connected to the airbag ECU assembly, the unlock rib unlocks the
temporary hold lock, allowing the lever to be pushed in by rotating around the axis A.
(3) Locking the lever to the holder locks the holder securely.
6. ACTIVATION PREVENTION MECHANISM

(a) Function of activation prevention mechanism
(1) An activation prevention mechanism is built into the connector (on the airbag ECU assembly
side) of the airbag system squib circuit to prevent accidental airbag activation.
(2) This mechanism closes the circuit when the connector is disconnected by bringing the short
spring into contact with the terminals and insulating the circuit from external power sources to
prevent accidental airbag activation.
(b) Releasing of activation prevention mechanism
(1) To release the activation prevention mechanism, insert a piece of paper with the same
thickness as the male terminal (approximately 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)) between the terminals and
short spring to break the connection.
(2) Refer to the following illustrations concerning connectors utilizing the activation prevention
mechanism and its release method.
CAUTION:
Never release the activation prevention mechanism on the squib connector even when
inspecting with the squib disconnected.
NOTICE:
Do not release the activation prevention mechanism unless specially directed by the
troubleshooting procedure.
To prevent the terminal and short spring from being damaged, always use a piece of paper with
the same thickness as the male terminal.
10/11
8/6/12
11/11
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (201
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XF70C2X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013
FR-S)

If a trouble code is displayed during the DTC check, check the trouble areas listed for the code in the
table below (refer to the appropriate page).
HINT:
When the SRS warning light remains on and the DTC is output (or the normal system code is
output), this may be due to a source voltage drop. This malfunction is not stored in memory by the
airbag ECU assembly. If the power source voltage returns to normal, the SRS warning light will
automatically go off.
When 2 or more codes are indicated, the code with the lower number appears first.
If a code is not listed on the display chart, the airbag ECU assembly may have failed.
In the case of any malfunction concerning an open circuit, short to ground, or short to B+ due to a
squib, other trouble codes may not be detected. In this case, repair the malfunction currently
indicated and then perform malfunction diagnosis again.
Mark in the check mode column:
*1: DTC does not apply to check mode.
*2: DTC applies to check mode.
Airbag System
DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
CHECK MODE
B1000
Airbag ECU Assembly Malfunction
*1
B1610
Front Airbag Sensor RH Malfunction
*1
B1612
Front Airbag Sensor RH Lost Communication
*1
B1613
Front Airbag Sensor RH Initialization
*1
B1615
Front Airbag Sensor LH Malfunction
*1
B1617
Front Airbag Sensor LH Lost Communication
*1
B1618
Front Airbag Sensor LH Initialization
*1
B161A
Lost Communication with Front Satellite Sensor Bus
*1
B1620
Side Airbag Sensor RH Circuit Malfunction
*1
B1622
Side Airbag Sensor RH Lost Communication
*1
B1623
Side Airbag Sensor RH Initialization
*1
B1625
Side Airbag Sensor LH Circuit Malfunction
*1
B1627
Side Airbag Sensor LH Lost Communication
*1
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XF70C2X.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE PAGE
1/4
8/6/12
B1628
Side Airbag Sensor LH Initialization
*1
B1630
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor RH Malfunction
*1
B1632
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor RH Lost Communication
*1
B1633
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor RH Initialization
*1
B1635
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor LH Malfunction
*1
B1637
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor LH Lost Communication
*1
B1638
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor LH Initialization
*1
B1642
Side Satellite Sensor Bus Lost Communication (RH)
*1
B1647
Side Satellite Sensor Bus Lost Communication (LH)
*1
B1650
Occupant Classification System Malfunction
*1
B1655
Seat Belt Buckle Switch (RH)
*1
B1660
P Seat Airbag Active Mode Indicator
*1
B1675
Rear Floor Airbag Sensor
*1
B1678
Lost Communication with Rear Floor Airbag Sensor LH
*1
B1679
Rear Floor Airbag Sensor LH Initialization Incomplete
*1
B1690
Side Airbag Sensor RH
*1
B1692
Lost Communication with Side Airbag Sensor RH
*1
B1693
Side Airbag Sensor RH Initialization Incomplete
*1
B1695
Side Airbag Sensor LH
*1
B1697
Lost Communication with Side Airbag Sensor LH
*1
B1698
Side Airbag Sensor LH Initialization Incomplete
*1
B16F1
Passenger Side Belt Warning Indicator Circuit
*1
B16F2
Front Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
*1
B16F3
Front Airbag Sensor LH Mismatch
*1
B16F4
Side Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
*1
B16F5
Side Airbag Sensor LH Mismatch
*1
B16F6
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
*1
B16F7
Side No. 2 Airbag Sensor LH Mismatch
*1
B16F8
Rear Floor Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
*1
B16F9
Door Side Airbag Sensor RH Mismatch
*1
B16FA
Door Side Airbag Sensor LH Mismatch
*1
B1800
Short in D Squib Circuit
*2
2/4
8/6/12
B1801
Open in D Squib Circuit
*2
B1802
Short in D Squib Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1803
Short in D Squib Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1805
Short in P Squib Circuit
*2
B1806
Open in P Squib Circuit
*2
B1807
Short in P Squib Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1808
Short in P Squib Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1810
Short in D Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit
*2
B1811
Open in D Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit
*2
B1812
Short in D Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1813
Short in D Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1815
Short in P Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit
*2
B1816
Open in P Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit
*2
B1817
Short in P Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1818
Short in P Squib (Dual Stage - 2nd Step) Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1820
Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit
*2
B1821
Open in Side Squib (RH) Circuit
*2
B1822
Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1823
Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1825
Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit
*2
B1826
Open in Side Squib (LH) Circuit
*2
B1827
Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1828
Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1830
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit
*2
B1831
Open in Curtain Shield Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit
*2
B1832
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1833
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (RH) Squib Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1835
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit
*2
B1836
Open in Curtain Shield Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit
*2
B1837
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1838
Short in Curtain Shield Airbag (LH) Squib Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1900
Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit
*2
3/4
8/6/12
B1901
Open in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit
*2
B1902
Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1903
Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit (to +B)
*2
B1905
Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit
*2
B1906
Open in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit
*2
B1907
Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit (to Ground)
*2
B1908
Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit (to +B)
*2
U0073
Control Module Communication Bus OFF
*1
4/4
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFE0G0X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. DTC CHECK (USING TECHSTREAM)
(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for approximately 60 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / SRS Airbag / Trouble Codes.
(f) Check for DTCs by following the prompts on the Techstream screen.
HINT:
2. DTC CLEAR (USING TECHSTREAM)

(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait for approximately 60 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / SRS Airbag / Trouble Codes.
(f) Clear the DTCs by following the prompts on the Techstream screen.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFE0G0X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTI
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XF60F7X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH


HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the airbag system.
1.
NEXT
2.
(a) Confirm problem symptoms
NEXT
3.
HINT:
Refer to Bus Check for the CAN communication system
.
The airbag ECU assembly is connected to the CAN communication system. Therefore, before
starting troubleshooting, make sure to check that there is no trouble in the CAN communication
system.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN communication DTC is not output.
CAN communication DTC is output.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XF60F7X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/4
8/6/12
4.
SRS WARNING LIGHT CHECK
(a) Proceed to Diagnosis System
NEXT
5.
CHECK FOR DTC*
(a) Proceed to DTC Check / Clear
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is output.
DTC is not output.
Go to step 7
6.
(a) Proceed to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart
NEXT
7.
.
Go to step 9
SYMPTOM SIMULATION
2/4
8/6/12
(a) Proceed to How to Proceed with Troubleshooting
NEXT
8.
(a) Proceed to Problem Symptoms Table
NEXT
9.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION*
NEXT
10.
IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM
NEXT
11.
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
NEXT
12.
CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
3/4
8/6/12
4/4
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003XTA014X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003XTA014X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/5
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
2/5
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
3/5
8/6/12
ILLUSTRATION
4/5
8/6/12
5/5
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000KT10FZX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
HINT:
In the airbag system, the following parts listed below are collectively referred to as the airbag
sensors.
Airbag ECU assembly

Front airbag sensors
Side airbag sensor assemblies
Side No. 2 airbag sensor assemblies
Rear airbag sensors
No. 2 airbag sensor assembly
HINT:
The following parts listed below are collectively referred to as the SRS parts.

Instrument panel passenger airbag assembly
Curtain shield airbag assemblies
Front seat airbag assemblies
Front seat outer belt assemblies
1. PRECAUTION FOR HANDLING SRS SYSTEM

(a) Failure to carry out service operations in the correct sequence could cause the SRS to
unexpectedly deploy during servicing, possibly leading to a serious accident. Furthermore, if a
mistake is made when servicing the SRS, it is possible that the SRS may fail to operate when
required. Before servicing (including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement), be
sure to read the following items carefully, then follow the procedures exactly as indicated in the
repair manual.
2. PRECAUTION FOR DISCONNECTING CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

(a) As SRS malfunctions are difficult to confirm, the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) become the most
important source of information when troubleshooting. When troubleshooting the SRS, always
check for DTCs before disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
NOTICE:
.
(b) When the cable is disconnected from the negative (- ) battery terminal, the memory of various
systems will be cleared. Because of this, be sure to make a record of the contents memorized in
each system before starting work. When work is finished, adjust each system to its previous state.
3. GENERAL PRECAUTION
(a) Use a voltmeter/ohmmeter with high impedance (minimum = 10 k) for troubleshooting electrical
circuits.
(b) Information labels are attached to the SRS parts. Follow the instructions on the labels.
(c) Never disassemble or attempt to repair any of the SRS parts.
(d) If any of the SRS parts are dropped, or if any cracks, dents or other defects are found, replace
them with new parts.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000KT10FZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
(e) Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, use new parts.
(f) Do not expose any of the SRS parts directly to high temperatures or flames.
(g) If the vehicle has been involved in a minor collision where the SRS does not deploy, the SRS parts
should be inspected before further use of the vehicle.
(h) Do not apply grease, detergent, oil or water to the SRS parts. If applied, immediately wipe it off
with a dry cloth.
(i) When deploying or storing the SRS parts, avoid places with a high temperature (ambient
temperature of 93C (199F) or higher for an airbag and 80C (176F) or higher for a
pretensioner) and high humidity, and keep them away from electrical noise.
(j) Do not stack or place anything on top of the SRS parts.
(k) When disposing of the vehicle or an SRS part by itself, deploy it using SST before disposal. Deploy
the SRS parts in a safe place away from electrical noise.
HINT:
Instrument panel passenger airbag assembly
Curtain shield airbag assemblies
Front seat airbag assemblies
Front seat outer belt assemblies
(l) Never inspect the resistance of the SRS parts.
CAUTION:
Never measure the resistance of the SRS parts because current from the tester may cause the
SRS parts to deploy.
4. PRECAUTION FOR DISPOSAL OF SRS PARTS (NOT DEPLOYED)

(a) Before performing pre-disposal deployment of any SRS parts, review and closely follow all
applicable environmental and hazardous material regulations. Pre-disposal deployment may be
considered hazardous material treatment.
(b) Never dispose of any SRS parts that are not deployed.
(c) Deploy the SRS parts outdoors in a safe and level place where it will not disturb nearby residents.
(d) As the SRS parts produce a loud sound when deployed, be sure to inform nearby residents before
deployment.
(e) When deploying the SRS parts, always use SST and keep people at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away.
(f) The SRS parts may be accidentally deployed by static electricity. To prevent this, be sure to touch a
grounded metal surface with your bare hands to discharge any static electricity before handling
the SRS parts.
(g) Do not face the airbag deployment side down when deploying an airbag.
5. PRECAUTION FOR DISPOSAL OF SRS PARTS (DEPLOYED)

(a) As the SRS parts are very hot after being deployed, allow at least 30 minutes for them to cool
down sufficiently before disposal.
(b) Do not apply water etc. to any deployed SRS parts.
(c) Use gloves and safety glasses when handling any deployed SRS parts.
(d) Seal the deployed SRS parts in a thick clear plastic bag when disposing them.
2/4
8/6/12
(e) Always wash your hands with water after disposing of deployed SRS parts.
6. PRECAUTION FOR HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY, INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG

ASSEMBLY, CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY AND FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
(a) Keep the airbag deployment side facing upward even when the airbag is temporarily removed
during an operation.
CAUTION:
Always place a removed or new airbag with the deployment surface facing upward. Placing the
airbag with the deployment surface facing downward could cause a serious accident if the
airbag deploys.
7. PRECAUTION FOR FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (PRETENSIONER)

(a) Do not touch the area around the retractor even when the pretensioner is temporarily removed
during an operation.
CAUTION:
If the retractor unexpectedly operates and the belt is retracted during an operation, it could
cause a serious accident.
8. PRECAUTION FOR SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Do not replace the spiral cable sub-assembly with the battery connected and the ignition switch
ON.
(b) Do not rotate the spiral cable sub-assembly without the steering wheel with the battery
connected and the ignition switch ON.
(c) Ensure that the steering wheel is installed and aligned straight when inspecting the steering
sensor.
(d) When rotating the spiral cable sub-assembly, make sure to push on the interlock to release the
interlock mechanism.
(e) Removing the steering sensor from the spiral cable sub-assembly without using a lock pin may
result in a misaligned center position of the steering sensor. Therefore, make sure to use the lock
pin provided with a new spiral cable sub-assembly or steering sensor when removing the steering
sensor from the spiral cable sub-assembly.
(f) Be sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position during installation and when removing and
installing the steering wheel
CAUTION:
If the steering wheel is turned without the spiral cable installed in the neutral position, the
cable may break.
9. PRECAUTION FOR AIRBAG SENSORS

(a) Perform a diagnostic system check.
(b) When the SRS parts are deployed (including when only an airbag or pretensioner is deployed) due
to a collision, be sure to replace all sensors in the damaged areas (anywhere in need of repair)
and Airbag ECU assembly.
(c) Visually check the airbag sensors in undamaged areas for defects.
Cracks on the sensor housing
Dents on the sensor housing
Chips on the sensor housing
3/4
8/6/12

Damage to the serial number
OK:
If any of the defects is found or an airbag sensor has detected a major collision, replace the
airbag sensor with a new one.
10. PRECAUTION FOR WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

(a) All wire harnesses except unexposed harnesses in the engine room are colored yellow.
(b) As special connectors are used, be careful when handling them.
11. WHEN SERVICING DAMAGED VEHICLE

(a) Before using an electric welder on the vehicle, remove any SRS parts around the area being
repaired.
CAUTION:
Make sure to remove any SRS parts as necessary to prevent them from accidentally deploying.
(b) Before repairs, remove the airbag sensor assemblies if impacts are likely to be applied to the
sensor during repairs.
(c) Never expose an airbag sensor directly to high temperatures.
(d) As the SRS parts are very hot after being deployed, ensure that all wire harnesses and connectors
around deployed SRS parts are not damaged.
12. CONDITIONS WHEN INSPECTION OF SRS PARTS IS NECESSARY

(a) When the vehicle is damaged in a collision even when the SRS parts are not deployed.
(b) When an SRS system DTC is output.
4/4
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFA09MX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Airbag System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
The SRS warning light goes off after the primary check, but then comes
on.
SRS Warning Light

Remains ON
When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the SRS warning light
sometimes comes on after approximately 6 seconds.
SRS Warning Light

Remains ON
The SRS warning light always comes on even when a DTC is not output.
SRS Warning Light

Remains ON
When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the SRS warning light does
not come on.
SRS Warning Light

does not Come ON
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFA09MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SRS Warning Light does not Come ON (201
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000YE30EQX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SRS Warning Light does not Come ON
(2013 FR-S)
SRS Warning Light does not Come ON
DESCRIPTION
The SRS warning light is located on the combination meter assembly.
When the SRS is normal, the SRS warning light comes on for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned from off to ON, and then goes off automatically.
If there is a malfunction in the SRS, the SRS warning light comes on to inform the driver of a problem.
The SRS is equipped with a voltage-increase circuit (DC-DC converter) in the airbag ECU assembly in case
the source voltage drops.
When the battery voltage drops, the voltage-increase circuit (DC-DC converter) functions to increase the
voltage of the SRS to normal voltage.
A malfunction in this circuit is not stored in the airbag ECU assembly. The SRS warning light automatically
goes off when the source voltage returns to normal.
The signal to illuminate the SRS warning light is transmitted from the airbag ECU assembly to the
combination meter assembly through the CAN communication system.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YE30EQX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
NG
INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM AND BATTERY
OK
2/5
8/6/12
2.
CHECK CONNECTOR

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connector is properly connected to the combination meter assembly.
OK:
The connector is properly connected.
HINT:
If the connector is not connected securely, reconnect the connector and proceed to the next
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assembly.

(e) Check that the terminal of the connector is not damaged.
OK:
The terminal is not deformed or damaged.
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE CONNECTOR
OK
3.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)

Standard Voltage:
3/5
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
*a
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS
OK
4.
CHECK SRS WARNING LIGHT
CAUTION:
(b) Connect the connector to the combination meter assembly.

(c) Disconnect the connector from the airbag ECU assembly.
(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(f) Check the SRS warning light condition.
OK:
After the primary check period, the SRS warning light goes off for approximately 10 seconds and
turns back on.
4/5
8/6/12
HINT:
The primary check period is approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON.
NG
OK
5/5
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SRS Warning Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S)
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000YE20F6X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SRS Warning Light Remains ON (2013 FRS)
SRS Warning Light Remains ON
DESCRIPTION
The SRS warning light is located on the combination meter assembly.
When the SRS is normal, the SRS warning light comes on for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned from off to ON, and then goes off automatically.
If there is a malfunction in the SRS, the SRS warning light comes on to inform the driver of a problem.
The SRS is equipped with a voltage-increase circuit (DC-DC converter) in the airbag ECU assembly in case
the source voltage drops.
When the battery voltage drops, the voltage-increase circuit (DC-DC converter) functions to increase the
voltage of the SRS to normal voltage. In addition, when the voltage drops, the SRS warning light will
illuminate.
A malfunction in this circuit is not stored in the airbag ECU assembly. The SRS warning light automatically
goes off when the source voltage returns to normal.
The signal to illuminate the SRS warning light is transmitted from the airbag ECU assembly to the
combination meter assembly through the CAN communication system.
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000YE20F6X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/10
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK SRS WARNING LIGHT OPERATION
(a) Check the SRS warning light operation approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to ON.
Result:
SRS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATION
PROCEED TO
Remains on
Goes off and then comes on again
2/10
8/6/12
2.

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
NG
OK
3.
CHECK CONNECTOR

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connector is properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connector from the airbag ECU assembly.

OK:
NG
OK
3/10
8/6/12
4.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS (AIRBAG ECU ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)

(c) Operate all components of the electrical system (defogger, wipers, headlights, heater blower,
etc.).
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
8 to 16 V

(f) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
*a

NG
OK
4/10
8/6/12
5.

(b) Check the SRS warning light condition.
OK:
turns back on.
HINT:
6.
NG
OK
HINT:
Refer to Bus Check for the CAN communication system
The airbag ECU assembly is connected to the CAN communication system. Therefore, before
starting troubleshooting, make sure to check that there is no trouble in the CAN communication
system.
Result:
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
DTC is output
5/10
8/6/12
7.

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
NG
OK
8.
CHECK CONNECTOR

CAUTION:
(c) Check that the connector is properly connected to the airbag ECU assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(d) Disconnect the connector from the airbag ECU assembly.

OK:
NG
OK
9.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS (AIRBAG ECU ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)
6/10
8/6/12

(c) Operate all components of the electrical system (defogger, wipers, headlights, heater blower,
etc.).
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
8 to 16 V

(f) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
*a

NG
OK
10.
CHECK CONNECTOR
7/10
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(b) Check that the connector is properly connected to the combination meter assembly.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
(c) Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assembly.

(d) Check that the terminal of the connector is not damaged.
OK:
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE CONNECTOR
OK
11.
CHECK WIRE HARNESS (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
8/10
8/6/12

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
*a
NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS
OK
12.
CAUTION:
(b) Connect the connector to the combination meter assembly.

(e) Check the SRS warning light condition.
OK:
turns back on.
HINT:
NG
9/10
8/6/12
OK
10/10
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFC0BZX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL
(a) Deceleration sensors used for the airbag system are installed on various parts on the vehicle and
calculate the deceleration rate of each part during a collision.
(b) Depending on the situation, the airbag ECU assembly sends a deployment signal to each airbag
based on the information from each sensor.
2. DEPLOYMENT CONDITION
(a) FRONTAL COLLISION
(1) Frontal collision signals are produced based on the information from the airbag ECU assembly
and front airbag sensors.
(b) SIDE COLLISION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFC0BZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
(1) Side collision signals are produced based on the information from the airbag ECU assembly,
side airbag sensor assembly, side No. 2 airbag sensor assembly, rear airbag sensor and No. 2
airbag sensor assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFC0BZX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XFG0BTX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XFG0BTX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
Communication Table
TRANSMITTING ECU
RECEIVING ECU
SIGNAL
COMMUNICATION
METHOD
(TRANSMITTER)
ECM
Crash detection signal
SRS warning light ON

demand signal
Airbag ECU Assembly

Combination
Meter Assembly
Passenger seat
occupant detection
signal
Diagnosis signal (DTC)
Engine speed signal
Accelerator opening
ECM
CAN
angle signal
Shift position signal
Test mode signal
Skid Control ECU (Brake

Actuator Assembly)
Combination Meter
Airbag ECU
Assembly
Vehicle speed signal

Stop signal
Driver seat buckle switch
2/3
8/6/12
Assembly
signal
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000XF90AYX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. AIRBAG ECU ASSEMBLY
TERMINAL
NO.
TERMINAL
SYMBOL
DESTINATION
D27-1
P2-
Instrument panel passenger airbag assembly (Front passenger side

squib 2nd step)
D27-2
P2+

squib 2nd step)
D27-3
P+

squib)
D27-4
P-

squib)
D27-5
D+
Horn button assembly (Driver side squib)
D27-6
D-
Horn button assembly (Driver side squib)
D27-7
D2-
Horn button assembly (Driver side squib 2nd step)
D27-8
D2+
Horn button assembly (Driver side squib 2nd step)
D27-13
CANH
D27-15
PBE
D27-17
PAOFF
D27-21
IG
D27-22
CANL
D27-23
PAON
Clock assembly (Passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator)
D27-25
GND
Ground
D27-26
GND
Ground

Clock assembly (Passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator)
A/B MAIN fuse
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XF90AYX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
D27-27
-SR
D27-28
-SL
D27-29
+SR
D27-30
+SL
H17-1
PL-
Front seat outer belt assembly LH (Front pretensioner squib LH)
H17-2
PL+
Front seat outer belt assembly LH (Front pretensioner squib LH)
H17-6
ICL-
Curtain shield airbag assembly LH (Curtain shield squib LH)
H17-7
ICL+
Curtain shield airbag assembly LH (Curtain shield squib LH)
H17-8
BBL+
H17-9
SFL+
Front seat airbag assembly LH (Front side squib LH)
H17-10
SFL-
Front seat airbag assembly LH (Front side squib LH)
H17-11
BBL2+
H17-12
BBL2-
H17-15
BBL-
G1-4
PR+
Front seat outer belt assembly RH (Front pretensioner squib RH)
G1-5
PR-
Front seat outer belt assembly RH (Front pretensioner squib RH)
G1-6
SFR-
Front seat airbag assembly RH (Front side squib RH)
G1-7
SFR+
Front seat airbag assembly RH (Front side squib RH)
G1-8
BBR+
G1-9
ICR+
Curtain shield airbag assembly RH (Curtain shield squib RH)
G1-10
ICR-
Curtain shield airbag assembly RH (Curtain shield squib RH)
G1-11
BBR-
G1-12
SVC
Front seat assembly RH (Occupant detection ECU)
G1-13
SGD
Front seat assembly RH (Occupant detection ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000XF90AYX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: U0073: Control Module Communication Bus
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003VCK008X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: AIRBAG SYSTEM: U0073: Control Module Communication Bus
OFF (2013 FR-S)
DTC
U0073
DESCRIPTION
These DTCs are stored when the self-diagnosis of the airbag ECU assembly determines that the CAN
communication system is malfunctioning.
DTC CODE
U0073

TROUBLE AREA
CAN communication System
PROCEDURE
1.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC U0073 is not output
DTC U0073 is output
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VCK008X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 F
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWU063X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWU063X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003VVI025X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the ignition switch is off.
(b) Check that the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
(c) Install the airbag sensor assembly with the new bolt and
2 new nuts.
*1
Waterproof Sheet
NOTICE:
If the airbag sensor assembly has been dropped, or there
are any cracks, dents or other defects in the case or
connector, replace it with a new one.
When installing the airbag sensor assembly, be careful
that the SRS wiring does not interfere with or is not
pinched between other parts.
When the ignition switch is first turned on (IG) after the
airbag sensor assembly has been replaced, make sure
that no one is in the vehicle.
(d) Connect the connectors to the airbag sensor assembly as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
When connecting any airbag connector, take care not to damage the airbag wire harness.
(e) Check that the waterproof sheet is properly set.

(f) Check that there is no looseness in the installation parts of the airbag sensor assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VVI025X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VVI025X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTI
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VPT09IX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE

INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the airbag sensor
assembly.
1. INSPECT AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)

2. INSPECT AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag not
Deployed)
(b) Visually check for defects with the airbag sensor assembly installed on the vehicle.
Peeling of the label
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the airbag sensor assembly with a new one.
3. INSPECT AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag is
Deployed)
(a) Replace the airbag sensor assembly.
HINT:
The airbag sensor assembly should be replaced after any of the airbags has deployed, as it has been
subjected to an impact.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPT09IX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003VVJ025X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
4. REMOVE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
(c) Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor

assembly as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
When disconnecting any airbag connector, take care not
to damage the airbag wire harness.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VVJ025X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(d) Remove the bolt, 2 nuts and airbag sensor assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003VVJ025X.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 F
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UXF06DX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXF06DX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UXC09ZX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
CAUTION:
Before performing pre-disposal deployment of any SRS part, review and closely follow all
applicable environmental and hazardous material regulations. Pre-disposal deployment may
be considered hazardous material treatment.
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
An airbag or pretensioner may be activated by static electricity. To prevent this, be sure to touch a
metal surface with your bare hands to discharge static electricity before performing this procedure.
Never dispose of a curtain shield airbag assembly with an undeployed airbag.
The airbag produces an exploding sound when it is deployed, so perform the operation outdoors
and where it will not create a nuisance to nearby residents.
When deploying the airbag, always use the specified SST (SRS Airbag Deployment Tool). Perform
the operation in a place away from electrical noise.
When deploying the airbag, perform the operation at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from the curtain
shield airbag assembly.
The curtain shield airbag assembly becomes extremely hot when the airbag is deployed, so do not
touch it for at least 30 minutes after deployment.
Use gloves and safety glasses when handling a curtain shield airbag assembly with a deployed
airbag.
Do not apply water etc. to a curtain shield airbag assembly with a deployed airbag.
HINT:
When scrapping a vehicle equipped with an SRS or disposing of the curtain shield airbag assembly, be
sure to deploy the airbag first in accordance with the procedure described below. If any abnormality
occurs with the airbag deployment, contact the Service Dept. of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
2. DISPOSE OF CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (When Installed in Vehicle)

NOTICE:
When disposing of the curtain shield airbag assembly, never use the customer's vehicle to deploy
the airbag.
Be sure to observe the following procedure when deploying the airbag.
HINT:
Prepare a battery as the power source to deploy the airbag.
(a) Refer to Precaution
CAUTION:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXC09ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
(c) Remove the rid cover
(d) Disconnect the curtain shield airbag assembly connector.
(1) Using a screwdriver with the tip wrapped with

protective tape, release the airbag connector lock and
disconnect the curtain shield airbag connector.
*1
Protective Tape
*2
Airbag Connector
*3
Airbag Connector Lock
NOTICE:
When disconnecting the airbag connector, take care not
(e) Install SST.

SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18020
CAUTION:
Check that there is no looseness in the curtain shield airbag assembly.
(1) Connect the clip and terminal of SST.

(2) After connecting the following SST to each other,
connect them to the curtain shield airbag assembly.
*a
Connect the clip and terminal
NOTICE:
To avoid damaging the SST connector or wire harness,
do not lock the secondary lock of the twin lock.
(3) Move SST at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from the rear
side window.
*1
Battery
*a
10 m (32.8 ft.) or more
2/6
8/6/12
(4) Maintaining sufficient clearance for the SST wire harness in the rear side window, close all
doors and windows of the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Take care not to damage the SST wire harness.
(5) Connect the clip of SST to the positive (+) battery terminal.
(6) Connect the terminal of SST to the negative (-) battery terminal to deploy the curtain shield
airbag assembly.
(f) Deploy the airbag.
(1) Check that no one is inside the vehicle or within a 10 m (32.8 ft.) radius of the vehicle.
(3) Connect the terminal of SST to the negative (-) battery terminal to deploy the curtain shield
airbag assembly.
CAUTION:
Before deployment, make sure that no one is near the vehicle.
airbag.
3. DISPOSE OF CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (When not Installed in Vehicle)

NOTICE:
HINT:
(a) Remove the curtain shield airbag assembly
CAUTION:
Before removing the curtain shield airbag assembly, wait at least 90 seconds after turning the
ignition switch off and disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
When storing the curtain shield airbag assembly, keep the airbag deployment side facing upward.
(b) Cut off the deployment section of the curtain shield

airbag assembly.
(c) Using braided wire, tie down the curtain shield airbag assembly to an unneeded tire.
3/6
8/6/12
*1
Stripped Wire Section
*a
Wire Diameter
Wire:
Stripped wire section
1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ) or more
CAUTION:
If the wire is too thin or an alternative object is used to tie down the curtain shield airbag
assembly, it may snap when the airbag is deployed. Always use a wire for vehicle use with an
area of at least 1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ).
HINT:
To calculate the area of the stripped wire section:
Area = 3.14 x (Diameter) 2 / 4
(1) Position the curtain shield airbag assembly inside the

tire as shown in the illustration.
*a
Width
*b
Inner Diameter
Minimum tire size:

Width
185 mm (7.28 in.)
Inner diam eter
360 mm (1.18 ft.)
CAUTION:
Make sure that the wires are tight. If there is slack in
the wires, the curtain shield airbag assembly may break
loose when the airbag is deployed.
NOTICE:
The tire may be damaged by the airbag deployment, so
use an unneeded tire.
4/6
8/6/12
(d) Install SST.

SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18020
NOTICE:
To avoid damaging the SST connector or wire harness, do not lock the secondary lock of the
twin lock. Also, secure some slack for the SST wire harness inside the tire.
(1) Connect the clip and terminal of

SST.
*a
(2) After connecting the following SST to each other, connect them to the curtain shield airbag
assembly.
(e) Place the tires.
CAUTION:
Do not face the deployment side of the curtain shield airbag assembly toward the ground.
(1) Place at least 2 tires under the tire to which the

curtain shield airbag assembly is tied.
*1
Tires (2 or more)
NOTICE:
Do not place the SST connector under the tire because it
could be damaged.
The tires and wheel may be damaged by the airbag
deployment, so use unneeded tires and wheel.
(2) Place at least 2 tires onto the tire to which the curtain shield airbag assembly is tied. The top
tire should have a wheel installed.
(3) Tie the tires together with the 2 wires.

CAUTION:
5/6
8/6/12
Make sure that the wires are tight. Looseness in the

wires results in the tires breaking loose when the
airbag is deployed.

*1
Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly
*2
Battery
*a
10 m (32.8 ft.) or more

(1) Move SST at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from the airbag
tied down to the tire.
(2) Check that no one is within a 10 m (32.8 ft.) radius of
the tire to which the curtain shield airbag assembly is
tied.
(3) Connect the clip of SST to the positive (+) battery
terminal.
(4) Connect the terminal of SST to the negative (-) battery
terminal to deploy the curtain shield airbag assembly.
CAUTION:
Before deployment, make sure that no one is near the
airbag.
(g) Dispose of the curtain shield airbag assembly.

CAUTION:
airbag.
(1) Remove the curtain shield airbag assembly from the tire.
(2) Place the curtain shield airbag assembly in a plastic bag, tie it tightly, and dispose of it
according to local regulations.
6/6
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 F
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UXD08UX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
(c) Engage the 9 guides and install the curtain shield airbag assembly with the 9 bolts in the
sequence shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
When installing the curtain shield airbag assembly, have assistants hold it to prevent it from
bending.
Do not twist the curtain shield airbag assembly when installing it.
HINT:
Install the bolts and guides in order, from the rear.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXD08UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 F
(d) Connect the curtain shield airbag connector.

*1
Airbag Connector
*2
NOTICE:
When connecting any airbag connector, take care not to
damage the airbag wire harness.
(e) Push in the lock to install the curtain shield airbag connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXD08UX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTI
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UXH09EX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE

CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the curtain shield airbag
assemblies.
1. INSPECT CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)
(b) Visually check for defects with the curtain shield airbag assemblies installed on the vehicle.
HINT:
The defects are as follows:
Cuts on each pillar garnish or the roof headlining assembly around the curtain shield airbag
assemblies
Small cracks on each pillar garnish or the roof headlining assembly around the curtain shield airbag
assemblies
Significant discoloration on each pillar garnish or the roof headlining assembly around the curtain
shield airbag assemblies
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace each pillar garnish or the roof headlining assembly with a
new one.
2. INSPECT CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and
Airbag not Deployed)
(b) Visually check for defects with the curtain shield airbag assemblies removed from the vehicle.
HINT:
Cuts
Small cracks
Significant discoloration
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the curtain shield airbag assembly with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXH09EX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UXG08MX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.
3. REMOVE CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
When storing the curtain shield airbag assembly, keep the airbag deployment side facing
upward.

CAUTION:
(c) Using a screwdriver with the tip wrapped with protective

tape, release the airbag connector lock and disconnect
the curtain shield airbag connector.
*1
Protective Tape
*2
Airbag Connector
*3
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXG08MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(d) Remove the 9 bolts and disengage the 9 guides to remove the curtain shield airbag assembly.
NOTICE:
When removing the curtain shield airbag assembly, have assistants hold it to prevent it from
bending.
HINT:
Remove the bolts and guides in order, from the front.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXG08MX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWY05ZX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWY05ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWW08RX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
(c) Before connecting the connector, check that the position of the white housing lock is correct as
*a
Incorrect
*b
Correct
(d) Connect the connector to the front airbag sensor.

NOTICE:
(1) Be sure to engage the connectors until they are locked (when locking, make sure that a click
sound can be heard).
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWW08RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
*1
White Housing Lock
*a
Connection is Completed
*2
-
Yellow CPA
-
HINT:
When engaged, the white housing lock will slide. Be sure not to hold the white housing lock and part
(A), as it may result in an insecure fit.
(e) Engage the 2 hooks and install the front airbag sensor with the 2 new bolts.
NOTICE:
If the front airbag sensor has been dropped, or there are any cracks, dents or other defects in the
case or connector, replace it with a new one.
When installing the front airbag sensor, be careful that the SRS wiring does not interfere with or is
not pinched between other parts.
(f) Check that there is no looseness in the installation parts of the front airbag sensor.

2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VPU08KX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013
FR-S)
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the front airbag
sensors.
1. INSPECT FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)

2. INSPECT FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag not
Deployed)
(b) Visually check the front airbag sensors for defects if the front bumper of the vehicle or the area
around the bumper is damaged.
HINT:

OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the front airbag sensor with a new one.
3. INSPECT FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag is
Deployed)
(a) When airbags have deployed as the result of a collision, be sure to replace all front airbag sensors
in the damaged areas (anywhere in need of repair).
(b) Visually check the front airbag sensors in undamaged areas for defects.
HINT:

OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPU08KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)

If any of the defects is found or a front airbag sensor has detected a major collision, replace the
front airbag sensor with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPU08KX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWZ08RX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
3. REMOVE FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWZ08RX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(c) Remove the 2 bolts and disengage the 2 hooks.
(d) Disconnect the connector to remove the front airbag sensor.

NOTICE:
When disconnecting any airbag connector, take care not to damage the airbag wire harness.
(1) Push down the white housing lock and slide the yellow CPA. (At this time, the connector cannot
be disconnected yet.)
*1
White Housing Lock
*a
Connector Lock is Released
*2
-
Yellow CPA
-
(2) Push down the white housing lock again and disconnect the connector.
NOTICE:
Do not push down the part (A) shown in the illustration when disconnecting.
(e) After disconnecting the connector, check that the position of the white housing lock is correct as
2/3
8/6/12
*a
Incorrect
*b
Correct
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (201
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UX906GX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UX906GX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: DISPOSAL (2013 F
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UX60A3X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: DISPOSAL (2013 FRS)
DISPOSAL
CAUTION:
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
metal surface with bare hands to discharge static electricity before performing this procedure.
Never dispose of an instrument panel passenger airbag assembly with an undeployed airbag.
When deploying the airbag, perform the operation at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from the
instrument panel passenger airbag assembly.
The instrument panel passenger airbag assembly becomes extremely hot when the airbag is
deployed, so do not touch it for at least 30 minutes after deployment.
Use gloves and safety glasses when handling an instrument panel passenger airbag assembly
with a deployed airbag.
Do not apply water etc. to an instrument panel passenger airbag assembly with a deployed
airbag.
HINT:
When scrapping a vehicle equipped with an SRS or disposing of the instrument panel passenger
airbag assembly, be sure to deploy the airbag first in accordance with the procedure described
below. If any abnormality occurs with the airbag deployment, contact the Service Dept. of TOYOTA
MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
2. DISPOSE OF INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (When Installed in

Vehicle)
NOTICE:
When disposing of the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly, never use the customer's
vehicle to deploy the airbag.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UX60A3X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/6/12
CAUTION:
(c) Remove the lower instrument panel sub-assembly
(d) Disconnect the No. 2 instrument panel wire.

NOTICE:
(1) Slide the slider to release the lock, and then

*1
Slider
(e) Install SST.

SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18030
CAUTION:
Check that there is no looseness in the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly and
instrument panel safety pad.

SST.
*a
(2) After connecting the following SST to each other, connect them to the instrument panel
2/7
8/6/12

(3) Connect the SST connector to the No. 2 instrument panel wire.
NOTICE:
twin lock.
side window of the vehicle.
*1
Battery
*a
10 m (32.8 ft.) or more
(5) Maintaining sufficient clearance for the SST wire harness in the front side window, close all
NOTICE:

(3) Connect the terminal of SST to the negative (-) battery terminal to deploy the instrument panel
CAUTION:
airbag.
3. DISPOSE OF INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (When not Installed in

Vehicle)
NOTICE:
HINT:
(a) Remove the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly
CAUTION:
3/7
8/6/12
Before removing the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly, wait at least 90 seconds after
turning the ignition switch off and disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
When storing the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly, keep the airbag deployment side
facing upward.
(b) Install SST.
SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18030
NOTICE:

SST.
*a
(2) After connecting the following SST to each other, connect them to the instrument panel
(c) Using braided wire, tie down the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly to an unneeded
tire.
*1
*a
Wire Diameter
Wire:
1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ) or more
CAUTION:
If the wire is too thin or an alternative object is used to tie down the instrument panel
passenger airbag assembly, it may snap when the airbag is deployed. Always use a wire for
vehicle use with an area of at least 1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ).
4/7
8/6/12

vehicle use with an area of at least 1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ).
HINT:
(1) Position the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly inside the tire with the airbag
deployment side facing inside.
Minimum tire size:
Width
185 mm (7.28 in.)
Inner diam eter
360 mm (1.18 ft.)
*a
Inner Diameter
*b
Width
CAUTION:
Make sure that the wires are tight. If there is slack in the wires, the instrument panel passenger
airbag assembly may break loose when the airbag is deployed.
Always tie down the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly with the airbag deployment side
facing inside the tire as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
The tire may be damaged by the airbag deployment, so use an unneeded tire.
(d) Place the tires.
(1) Place at least 2 tires under the tire to which the

instrument panel passenger airbag assembly is tied.
*1
Tires (2 or more)
5/7
8/6/12
NOTICE:
could be damaged.
(2) Place at least 2 tires onto the tire to which the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly is
tied. The top tire should have a wheel installed.

CAUTION:
airbag is deployed.
(e) Deploy the airbag.

*1 Instrument Panel Passenger Airbag Assembly
*2 Battery
*a
10 m (32.8 ft.) or more

the tire to which the instrument panel passenger
airbag assembly is tied.
terminal.
terminal to deploy the instrument panel passenger
airbag assembly.
CAUTION:
airbag.
(f) Dispose of the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly.

6/7
8/6/12
CAUTION:
airbag.
(1) Remove the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly from the tire.
(2) Place the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly in a plastic bag, tie it tightly, and
dispose of it according to local regulations.
7/7
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (201
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UX709MX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
If the hooks are not engaged in the correct order, the deployment part of the instrument panel
passenger airbag assembly may be damaged.
(a) Engage the 5 hooks as shown in the illustration to

temporarily install the instrument panel passenger airbag
assembly.
(b) Push the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly to engage the 5 hooks.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UX709MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPE
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UXB09DX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE

CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the instrument panel
1. INSPECT INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in
Collision)
(b) Visually check for defects with the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly installed on the
vehicle.
HINT:
Cuts on the instrument panel sub-assembly around the instrument panel passenger airbag
assembly
Small cracks on the instrument panel sub-assembly around the instrument panel passenger airbag
assembly
Significant discoloration on the instrument panel sub-assembly around the instrument panel
passenger airbag assembly
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the instrument panel sub-assembly with a new one.
2. INSPECT INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in

Collision and Airbag not Deployed)
(b) Visually check for defects with the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly removed from the
vehicle.
HINT:
Cuts
Small cracks
Significant discoloration
Deformation or cracks on the instrument panel sub-assembly or instrument panel reinforcement
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly, instrument
panel sub-assembly or instrument panel reinforcement with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXB09DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPE
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXB09DX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 F
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UXA09JX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FRS)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.
3. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
When storing the instrument panel passenger airbag assembly, keep the airbag deployment
side facing upward.
(a) Lean the instrument panel safety pad assembly and

disengage the 5 hooks.
(b) Disengage the 5 hooks to remove the instrument panel

passenger airbag assembly from the upper instrument
panel sub-assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UXA09JX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004N2600QX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004N2600QX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UX00DAX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
CAUTION:
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
Never dispose of a front seat airbag assembly with an undeployed airbag.
When deploying the airbag, perform the operation at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from the front seat
airbag assembly.
The front seat airbag assembly becomes extremely hot when the airbag is deployed, so do not
Use gloves and safety glasses when handling a front seat airbag assembly with a deployed
airbag.
Do not apply water etc. to a front seat airbag assembly with a deployed airbag.
HINT:
When scrapping a vehicle equipped with an SRS or disposing of the front seat airbag assembly, be
sure to deploy the airbag first in accordance with the procedure described below. If any abnormality
occurs with the airbag deployment, contact the Service Dept. of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
2. DISPOSE OF FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (When Installed in Vehicle)

NOTICE:
When disposing of the front seat airbag assembly, never use the customer's vehicle to deploy the
airbag.
HINT:
CAUTION:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UX00DAX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/7
8/6/12
(c) Disconnect the connector from the front seat airbag assembly under the front seat assembly.
NOTICE:
(1) Slide the slider to release the lock, and then

disconnect the yellow airbag connector as shown in
the illustration.
*a
Slider
(d) Install SST.

SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18040
CAUTION:
Check that there is no looseness in the front seat assembly.

SST.
*a
(2) Connect the SST connector to the front seat airbag assembly connector.
NOTICE:
twin lock.
side window.
*1
Battery
*a
10 m (32.8 ft.) or more
(4) Maintaining sufficient clearance for the SST wire harness in the front side window, close all
2/7
8/6/12

NOTICE:

(3) Connect the terminal of SST to the negative (-) battery terminal to deploy the front seat airbag
assembly.
CAUTION:
airbag.
3. DISPOSE OF FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (When not Installed in Vehicle)

SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18040
NOTICE:
HINT:
(a) Remove the front seat airbag assembly
CAUTION:
Before removing the front seat assembly, wait at least 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch
off and disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
When storing the front seat airbag assembly, keep the airbag deployment side facing upward.
(b) Using braided wire, tie down the front seat airbag assembly to an unneeded tire.
*1
3/7
8/6/12
*a
Wire Diameter
Wire:
1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ) or more
CAUTION:
If the wire is too thin or an alternative object is used to tie down the front seat airbag
HINT:
(1) Install the 2 nuts to the front seat airbag

assembly.
(2) Wind the wires around the stud bolts of the front seat
airbag assembly as shown in the illustration.
(3) Position the front seat airbag assembly inside the tire.
*a
Width
*b
Inner Diameter
Minimum tire size:

Width
185 mm (7.28 in.)
Inner diam eter
4/7
8/6/12
360 mm (1.18 ft.)

CAUTION:
Make sure that the wires are tight. If there is slack in the
wires, the front seat airbag assembly may break loose
when the airbag is deployed.
Face the front seat airbag assembly deployment surface
toward the inside the tire to evenly distribute the force of
deployment.
NOTICE:
The tire may be damaged by the airbag deployment, so
use an unneeded tire.
(c) Install SST.

SST: 09082-18010
SST: 09082-18040
NOTICE:

SST.
*a
(2) After connecting the following SST to each other, connect them to the front seat airbag
assembly.
(d) Place the tires.
(1) Place at least 2 tires under the tire to which the front
seat airbag assembly is tied.
*1
Tires (2 or more)
NOTICE:
could be damaged.
5/7
8/6/12
(2) Place at least 2 tires onto the tire to which the front seat airbag assembly is tied. The top tire
should have a wheel installed.

CAUTION:
airbag is deployed.

*1
Front Seat Airbag Assembly
*2
Battery
*a
10 m (32.8 ft.) or more

the tire to which the front seat airbag assembly is
tied.
terminal.
terminal to deploy the front seat airbag assembly.
CAUTION:
airbag.
(f) Dispose of the front seat airbag assembly.

CAUTION:
airbag.
(1) Remove the front seat airbag assembly from the tire.
(2) Place the front seat airbag assembly in a plastic bag, tie it tightly, and dispose of it according
to local regulations.
6/7
8/6/12
7/7
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004N2500QX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
The nuts must not be reused.
Make sure that the separate type front seatback spring assembly is not deformed. If it is, replace
it with a new one.
(a) Install the front seat airbag assembly with 2 new nuts.

1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECT
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VPS0CKX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: ON-VEHICLE
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the front seat airbag
assemblies.
1. INSPECT FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)
(b) Visually check for defects with the front seat airbag assemblies installed on the vehicle.
HINT:
Cuts on the front seatback assembly around the front seat airbag assemblies
Small cracks on the front seatback assembly around the front seat airbag assemblies
Significant discoloration on the front seatback assembly around the front seat airbag assemblies
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the separate type front seatback pad or separate type front
seatback cover with a new one.
2. INSPECT FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag
not Deployed)
(b) Visually check for defects with the front seat airbag assemblies removed from the vehicle.
HINT:
Make sure that there are no scratches, broken or frayed threads on the surface of the front seat
airbag assemblies base fabric
Marks from being dropped
Deformation on the installation part of the front seat airbag assemblies
Cracks or other damage to the wire harness or connector
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the front seat airbag assembly with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPS0CKX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004N2700RX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Wear protective gloves. Sharp areas on the parts may may injure your hands.
If the side airbag was deployed, replace the front seat airbag assembly, separate type front
seatback spring assembly, separate type front seatback cover and separate type front seatback
pad with the necessary parts in accordance with the extent of the collision damage.
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the LH and RH sides.

8. REMOVE FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 clamps.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the front seat airbag assembly.
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION:
The nuts must not be reused.

Make sure that the separate type front seatback spring
assembly is not deformed. If it is, replace it with a new
one.
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: B1771: Seat Belt Buckl
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010V6088X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: B1771: Seat Belt
Buckle SW (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1771
Seat Belt Buckle SW
DESCRIPTION
The passenger side buckle switch circuit consists of the occupant detection ECU and front seat inner belt
assembly RH.
DTC B1771 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the passenger side buckle switch circuit.
DTC
NO.
B1771
The occupant detection ECU receives a line short circuit

signal, an open circuit signal, a short circuit to ground
signal or a short circuit to B+ signal in the passenger side
buckle switch circuit.
Passenger side buckle switch malfunction
TROUBLE AREA
Front seat
inner belt
assembly RH
(Passenger
side buckle
switch)
Front seat
assembly RH
HINT:
When DTC B1650 is detected as a result of troubleshooting for the airbag system, check the DTCs
stored in the occupant detection ECU. When DTC B1771 is output, perform troubleshooting for the
DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
1/7
8/6/12
NOTICE:
.
HINT:
If troubleshooting (wire harness inspection) is difficult to perform, remove the front passenger
seat installation bolts to see under the seat cushion.
In the above case, lift and hold the seat so that it does not fall down. Hold the seat only as
necessary because holding the seat for a long period of time may cause seat rail deformation.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK CONNECTORS

(c) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the occupant detection ECU and front
seat inner belt assembly RH.
OK:
HINT:
inspection.
2/7
8/6/12
(d) Disconnect the connectors from the occupant detection ECU and front seat inner belt assembly
RH.
OK:
NG
OK
2.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH (SHORT TO B+)

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V
8 - Body ground
Ignition switch ON
Below 1 V

*1
3/7
8/6/12
*2
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*a

NG
OK
3.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH (OPEN)
(a) Using a service wire, connect terminals 1 and 2 of

connector C.
NOTICE:
TESTER CONNECTION
4-8
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
(c) Disconnect the service wire from connector C.

4/7
8/6/12
*1
*2
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*4
Service Wire
*a
*b

(to Front Seat Inner Belt Assembly RH)
NG
OK
4.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH (SHORT)

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
4-8
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 M or higher
*1
*2
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*a

NG
OK
5/7
8/6/12
5.
CHECK FRONT SEAT WIRE RH (SHORT TO GROUND)

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
8 - Body ground
Always
1 M or higher
*1
*2
*3
Front Seat Wire RH
*a

NG
OK
6.
CHECK DTC
(a) Connect the connectors to the occupant detection ECU and front seat inner belt assembly RH.
(c) Clear the DTCs stored in the occupant detection ECU
(d) Clear the DTCs stored in the airbag ECU assembly
.
.

(g) Check for DTCs
OK:
6/7
8/6/12
HINT:
7.
NG
CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY RH
OK
CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY RH
(b) Replace the front seat inner belt assembly RH
HINT:
Perform the inspection using parts from a normal vehicle if possible.

(d) Clear the DTCs stored in the occupant detection ECU
(e) Clear the DTCs stored in the airbag ECU assembly
.
.

(g) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(h) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
NG
OK
END (FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

WAS DEFECTIVE)
7/7
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: B1795: ECU Fault Stat
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010VH03WX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: B1795: ECU Fault
Status (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1795
ECU Fault Status
DESCRIPTION
DTC B1795 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the occupant detection ECU.
DTC NO.
B1795
TROUBLE AREA
Front seat assembly RH
HINT:
When DTC B1650 is detected as a result of troubleshooting for the airbag system, check the DTCs
stored in the occupant detection ECU. When DTC B1795 is output, perform troubleshooting for the
DTC.
NOTICE:
.
PROCEDURE
1.

(c) Replace the front seat assembly RH
NEXT
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010VH03WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE T
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010VM07KX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE
TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Occupant Detection / Data List.
Occupant Detection
TESTER DISPLAY
Passenger Detection
Status of Passenger Side Buckle
SW
Number of Present DTC
Passenger detection status/

ON / OFF
Passenger side buckle switch/
Set / Unset / NG
Number of present DTC
recorded/
NORMAL
CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
ON/OFF
Set/Unset
Min.: 0, Max.: 255
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010VM07KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010VJ07PX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM

(2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. FUNCTION OF PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR
(a) Initial check
(2) The passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator comes on for approximately 6 seconds, then goes off
for approximately 2 seconds.
(3) Approximately 8 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON, the passenger airbag
ON/OFF indicator will indicate ON/OFF depending on the conditions listed below.
Indicator Operation
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CONDITION
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR
SRS WARNING LIGHT
ON INDICATOR
OFF INDICATOR
Vacant
OFF
ON
OFF*1
Occupied
ON
OFF
OFF*1
Child restraint system is installed.
OFF
ON
OFF*1
Occupant classification system failure
OFF
ON
ON
Undetermined
OFF
ON
ON*1
*1: When the passenger side buckle switch has a malfunction, the SRS warning light is
illuminated.
HINT:
The passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator illuminates based on the timing chart below in order to
check the indicator light circuit.
When the occupant classification system has trouble, both the SRS warning light and passenger
airbag ON/OFF indicator ("OFF") come on. In this case, check the DTCs in the airbag system first.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010VJ07PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (
2. CHECK PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR
(b) Check that the passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator ("ON" and "OFF") comes on for approximately 6
HINT:
Refer to the indicator operation table in the preceding step regarding the passenger airbag ON/OFF
indicator when the ignition switch is turned to ON and approximately 6 seconds elapse.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010VJ07PX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBL
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010V2031X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE

CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)

If a trouble code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for the code in the table below
(proceed to the page listed for that DTC).
HINT:
When DTC B1650 is detected as a result of troubleshooting for the airbag system, perform
troubleshooting for the occupant classification system as shown in the chart below.
Occupant Classification System

DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
PASSENGER AIRBAG (OFF INDICATOR)
B1760
Occupant Classification Sensor Circuit
ON
B1761
Occupant Classification Sensor Soaked
ON
B1771
Seat Belt Buckle SW
ON
B1795
ECU Fault Status
ON
SEE PAGE
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010VK07LX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR
(2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. DTC CHECK
(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Occupant Detection / Trouble Codes.
(f) Check for DTCs by following the prompts on the Techstream screen.
HINT:
2. DTC CLEAR
(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Occupant Detection / Trouble Codes.
(f) Clear the DTCs by following the prompts on the Techstream screen.
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010VK07LX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (20
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000039SE01YX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART

(2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
1. FAIL SAFE FUNCTION
(a) The following chart shows the status of the controls when the system is normal and
malfunctioning.
The passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator ("ON" and "OFF") comes on for approximately 6
Approximately 8 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON, the passenger airbag
ON/OFF indicator will indicate ON or OFF depending on the conditions listed below.
CONDITION
ON
OFF
FRONT
FRONT SEAT
INDICATOR INDICATOR PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG
AIRBAG
RH
CURTAIN
SHIELD
AIRBAG RH
FRONT SEAT
BELT
PRETENSIONER
RH
Occupied
ON
OFF
Child restraint
system is
installed.
OFF
ON
Vacant
OFF
ON
Failure
OFF
ON
Undetermined
OFF
ON
: Deployable
X: Not deployable
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000039SE01YX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (20
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010V303KX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION

(2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010V303KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (20
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010V303KX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 F
6.4 L
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010V007MX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013

FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. PRECAUTION FOR OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM REPLACEMENT
(a) The occupant sensing control unit of the occupant sensing system (passenger seat only) and the
occupant sensor are secured to the seat cushion frame and therefore, never remove the occupant
sensing control unit or occupant sensor from the seat cushion frame.
(b) Do not replace the seat cushion pad by itself. Make sure to replace it in a unit of the seat cushion
pad and frame assembly. In the production line, the seat cushion pad and cushion frame are
adjusted as a set and therefore, the occupant sensing system may not work properly if these
were paired with a cushion or frame from another vehicle or different set.
(c) If the seat cushion cover is removed, make sure to replace the hang wire on the seat cushion side
with a new wire.
(d) Do not connect the battery to the opposite terminal. Ignoring this may damage the occupant
sensing system instantaneously.
(e) Do not disconnect the battery cable while the engine is running. Ignoring this may damage the
electronic components such as in the occupant sensing control unit because of the large negative
surge yielded in the alternator.
(f) Before disconnecting the connector between each sensor and control unit, always turn off the
ignition switch first and then wait at least 60 seconds. Ignoring this may damage the occupant
sensing control unit.
(g) All of the parts associated with the occupant sensing system are precision components. Do not
drop them.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010V007MX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010V505QX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS

TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Occupant Classification System
SYMPTOM
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE
PAGE
Front seat
assembly RH
The front passenger seat condition differs from the indication by the
passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator (DTC is not output).
Front seat inner

belt assembly RH
Harness or
connector
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTIO
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010VI03WX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

(2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL
(a) In the occupant classification system, the occupant detection ECU determines the state of the
occupant based on the signal from the occupant detection sensor. If the system determines that
the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger airbag is disabled.
(b) This system determines the physique of the occupant of the passenger seat and outputs the
result of this determination to the airbag ECU assembly. This determination is performed by the
occupant detection ECU in response to signals from the occupant detection sensor and the
passenger buckle switch.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010VI03WX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010VL04XX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM

(2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010VL04XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000010V404WX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU

(2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. OCCUPANT DETECTION ECU
TERMINAL WIRING
TERMINAL
NO.
COLOR DESCRIPTION
(SYMBOL)
G2-2 G2-3
G2-1 Body
ground
CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Y-G - Y
Airbag ECU
assembly
communication
line
Ignition
switch ON
Pulse
generation
GBody
ground
Power source
Ignition
switch ON
11 to 14 V
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000010V404WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWQ05UX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWQ05UX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWO08DX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL REAR AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
*a
Correct
*b
Incorrect
(d) Connect the connector to the rear airbag sensor assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWO08DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
*1
White housing lock
*a
Slide
NOTICE:
HINT:
(e) Insert the pin (stopper) into the body hole and install the rear airbag sensor assembly to the
vehicle body with the new nut.
NOTICE:
If the rear airbag sensor assembly has been dropped, or there are any cracks, dents or other
defects in the case or connector, replace it with a new one.
When installing the rear airbag sensor assembly, be careful that the SRS wiring does not interfere
with or is not pinched between other parts.
Make sure that the pin (stopper) is securely inserted into the body hole.
Tighten the nut while holding the rear airbag sensor assembly because the rear airbag sensor
assembly pin (stopper) is easily damaged.
(f) Check that there is no looseness in the installation parts of the rear airbag sensor assembly.

2/3
8/6/12

3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VPW08YX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FRS)
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the rear airbag sensor
assemblies.
1. INSPECT REAR AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)
2. INSPECT REAR AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag
not Deployed)
(b) Visually check the rear airbag sensor assemblies for defects if a quarter panel of the vehicle or the
area around a quarter panel is damaged.
HINT:

OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the rear airbag sensor assembly with a new one.
3. INSPECT REAR AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag is
Deployed)
(a) When airbags have deployed as the result of a collision, be sure to replace all rear airbag sensor
assemblies in the damaged areas (anywhere in need of repair).
(b) Visually check the rear airbag sensor assemblies in undamaged areas for defects.
HINT:

OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPW08YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)

If any of the defects is found or a rear airbag sensor assembly has detected a major collision,
replace the rear airbag sensor assembly with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPW08YX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWR08CX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR AIRBAG SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:

HINT:

7. REMOVE REAR AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWR08CX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
(c) Remove the nut and separate the rear airbag sensor assembly from the vehicle body.
NOTICE:
Loosen the nut while holding the rear airbag sensor assembly because the rear airbag sensor
*1
White Housing Lock
*2
Yellow CPA
*a
Slide
*b
Push
(d) Disconnect the connector to remove the rear airbag sensor assembly.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
(e) After disconnecting the connector, check that the position of the white housing lock is correct as
2/3
8/6/12
*a
Correct
*b
Incorrect
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000038MV00TX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038MV00TX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000038MU00ZX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
(c) Connect the connector to the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly.

NOTICE:
When connecting airbag connector, take care not to damage the airbag wire harness.
(d) Insert the pin (stopper) into the rear floor hole and install the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly to the
rear floor panel with the new nut.
NOTICE:
If the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly has been dropped, or there are any cracks, dents or other
defects in the case or connector, replace it with a new one.
When installing the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly, be careful that the SRS wiring does not
Tighten the nut while holding the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly because the No. 2 airbag sensor
(e) Check that there is no looseness in the installation parts of the rear floor airbag sensor.

5. CHECK SRS WARNING LIGHT

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038MU00ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038MU00ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (20
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000038MX00XX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
(2013 FR-S)
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the rear floor side
airbag sensor.
1. CHECK NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)
2. CHECK NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag
not Deployed)
(b) Visually check for defects with the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly installed on the vehicle.
HINT:

OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly with a new one.
3. CHECK NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag is
Deployed)
(a) When front seat airbags or curtain shield airbags have deployed as the result of a collision, be
sure to replace No. 2 airbag sensor assembly.
(b) Visually check the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly in undamaged areas for defects.
HINT:

OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038MX00XX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (20
If any of the defects is found, replace the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038MX00XX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM0000038MW00ZX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
4. REMOVE NO. 2 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
(c) Remove the bolt.

NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038MW00ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: REAR FLOOR AIRBAG SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
Loosen the bolt while holding the No. 2 airbag sensor

assembly because the No. 2 airbag sensor assembly pin
(stopper) is easily damaged.
*1
Outer Housing
(d) Slide the outer housing to release the lock, and then disconnect the connector to remove the No.
2 airbag sensor assembly.
NOTICE:
When disconnecting airbag connector, take care not to damage the airbag wire harness.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM0000038MW00ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Front Side): COMPONENTS (2013
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWM06SX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Front Side): COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWM06SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Front Side): INSTALLATION (2013
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWK094X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Front Side): INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL DOOR SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
(c) Connect the connector to the door side airbag sensor.

NOTICE:
(1) Be sure to engage the connectors until they are

locked (when locking, make sure that a click sound can
be heard).
(d) Insert the pin (stopper) into the door hole and install the door side airbag sensor to the front door
panel with the mew nut.
NOTICE:
If the door side airbag sensor has been dropped, or there are any cracks, dents or other defects
in the case or connector, replace it with a new one.
When installing the door side airbag sensor, be careful that the SRS wiring does not interfere with
or is not pinched between other parts.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWK094X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Front Side): INSTALLATION (2013
Tighten the nut while holding the door side airbag sensor because the door side airbag sensor pin
(e) Check that there is no looseness in the installation parts of the door side airbag sensor.

2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Front Side): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWN092X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Front Side): REMOVAL (2013 FRS)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:

6. REMOVE DOOR SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWN092X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Front Side): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(c) Remove the nut and separate the door side airbag sensor
from the front door panel.
NOTICE:
Loosen the bolt while holding the door side airbag
sensor because the door side airbag sensor pin
(d) Slide the outer housing to release the lock, and then disconnect the connector to remove the door
side airbag sensor.
NOTICE:
*1
Outer Housing
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): COMPONENTS (2013 F
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWM06TX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWM06TX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): INSTALLATION (2013
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWK095X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
1. INSTALL NO. 2 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
*a
Correct
*b
Incorrect
(d) Connect the connector to the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly.
NOTICE:
1/3
8/6/12
HINT:
*1
White housing lock
*a
Slide
(e) Insert the pin (stopper) into the body hole and install the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly to
the vehicle body with the new nut.
NOTICE:
If the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly has been dropped, or there are any cracks, dents or
other defects in the case or connector, replace it with a new one.
When installing the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly, be careful that the SRS wiring does not
Tighten the nut while holding the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly because the No. 2 side airbag
sensor assembly pin (stopper) is easily damaged.
(f) Check that there is no looseness in the installation parts of the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly.
2. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the guide and install the front seat outer belt
2/3
8/6/12
assembly with the 2 bolts.

Bolt B - Torque: 30 Nm (306 kgfcm, 22ftlbf)
(b) Connect the pretensioner connector.

*1
*2
(c) Push in the lock to install the pretensioner connector.

3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): ON-VEHICLE INSPECTI
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000VPV0ADX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): ON-VEHICLE
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the No. 2 side airbag
sensor assemblies.
1. INSPECT NO. 2 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)
2. INSPECT NO. 2 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and
Airbag not Deployed)
(b) Visually check the No. 2 side airbag sensor assemblies for defects if a center pillar of the vehicle or
the area around a center pillar is damaged.
HINT:

OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly with a new one.
3. INSPECT NO. 2 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and
Airbag is Deployed)
(a) When airbags have deployed as the result of a collision, be sure to replace all No. 2 side airbag
sensor assemblies in the damaged areas (anywhere in need of repair).
(b) Visually check the No. 2 side airbag sensor assemblies in undamaged areas for defects.
HINT:

OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPV0ADX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): ON-VEHICLE INSPECTI

If any of the defects is found or a No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly has detected a major
collision, replace the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly with a new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000VPV0ADX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWN093X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR (for Rear Side): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:

HINT:

7. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
1/3
8/6/12
(c) Using a screwdriver with the tip wrapped with protective

tape, release the pretensioner connector lock and
disconnect the pretensioner connector.
*1
Protective Tape
*2
*3
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and disengage the guide to remove

front seat outer belt assembly.
8. REMOVE NO. 2 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the nut and separate the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly from the vehicle body.
NOTICE:
Loosen the nut while holding the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly because the No. 2 side
airbag sensor assembly pin (stopper) is easily damaged.
2/3
8/6/12
*1
White Housing Lock
*2
Yellow CPA
*a
Slide
*b
Push
(b) Disconnect the connector to remove the No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
(c) After disconnecting the connector, check that the position of the white housing lock is correct as
*a
Correct
*b
Incorrect
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWC05SX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWC05SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWC05SX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWB08EX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not remove the steering sensor from the spiral cable sub-assembly.
As the spiral cable sub-assembly may break, do not rotate the spiral cable sub-assembly more
than the specified amount.
(a) Remove the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly from the vehicle
(b) Visually check for defects with the spiral cable sub-assembly.
Scratches
Small cracks
Dents
Chips
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the spiral cable sub-assembly with a new one.
(c) Check the spiral cable sub-assembly.
*a
*c

(Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)
Color: Black
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWB08EX.html?sisuffix=ff
*b
-
Color: Orange
-
1/3
8/6/12
(1) Set the spiral cable sub-assembly to the center position
(2) Measure the resistance between each terminal of the spiral cable sub-assembly according to
the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D51-1 - z4-3
Always
3 or less
D51-2 - z4-4
Always
3 or less
D51-2 - z5-6
Always
3 or less
D51-8 - z4-2
Always
3 or less
D51-8 - z5-1
Always
3 or less
D51-10 - z5-3
Always
3 or less
D51-11 - z5-4
Always
3 or less
D51-12 - z5-5
Always
3 or less
D52-1 - z7-2
Always
Below 1
D52-2 - z7-1
Always
Below 1
D52-3 - z6-1
Always
Below 1
D52-4 - z6-2
Always
Below 1
(3) After setting the spiral cable sub-assembly to the center position, rotate the spiral cable subassembly 2.5 times clockwise, and measure the resistance as shown in the table below. Then
rotate the spiral cable sub-assembly 5 times counterclockwise, and measure the resistance as
shown in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D51-1 - z4-3
Always
3 or less
D51-2 - z4-4
Always
3 or less
D51-2 - z5-6
Always
3 or less
D51-8 - z4-2
Always
3 or less
D51-8 - z5-1
Always
3 or less
D51-10 - z5-3
Always
3 or less
D51-11 - z5-4
Always
3 or less
D51-12 - z5-5
Always
3 or less
D52-1 - z6-2
Always
Below 1
D52-2 - z6-1
Always
Below 1
D52-3 - z7-1
Always
Below 1
2/3
8/6/12
D52-4 - z7-2
Always
Below 1
(4) After setting the spiral cable sub-assembly to the center position, rotate the spiral cable subassembly 2.5 times clockwise. Then while rotating the spiral cable sub-assembly 5 times
counterclockwise, measure the resistance as shown in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D51-1 - z4-3
Always
3 or less
D51-2 - z4-4
Always
3 or less
D51-2 - z5-6
Always
3 or less
D51-8 - z4-2
Always
3 or less
D51-8 - z5-1
Always
3 or less
D51-10 - z5-3
Always
3 or less
D51-11 - z5-4
Always
3 or less
D51-12 - z5-5
Always
3 or less
D52-1 - z6-2
Always
Below 1
D52-2 - z6-1
Always
Below 1
D52-3 - z7-1
Always
Below 1
D52-4 - z7-2
Always
Below 1
If the result is not as specified, replace the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly.
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWA096X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Align the 2 pins and 2 guides, and engage the 6 claws to
install the spiral cable sub-assembly to the steering
sensor.
*1
Guide
*2
Pin
NOTICE:
Do not rotate the steering sensor until the spiral cable
has been attached to it.
2. ALIGN FRONT WHEELS TO FACE STRAIGHT AHEAD

3. INSTALL SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable sub-assembly with the battery connected and the ignition switch on
(IG).
Do not rotate the spiral cable sub-assembly without the steering wheel with the battery
connected and the ignition switch on (IG).
sensor.
CAUTION:
(c) Check that the front wheels are facing straight ahead.
(d) Set the turn signal switch to the neutral position.
NOTICE:
If it is not in the neutral position, the turn signal switch pin may snap.
(e) Engage the 3 claws to install the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly.
(f) Connect the each connector.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWA096X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12

10. INSTALL INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL
NOTICE:
Do not adjust the spiral cable sub-assembly with the battery connected and the ignition switch
on (IG).

CAUTION:
(c) Check if the spiral cable sub-assembly is centered.

*1
Matching Mark
*2
Colored Part
HINT:
When the spiral cable is attached in a central position, it will
align with the matching mark, allowing the colored area
indicated in the illustration to be checked.
(d) If the spiral cable sub-assembly is not centered, center it.

NOTICE:
Do not turn the spiral cable sub-assembly using the airbag wire harness.
(1) Rotate the spiral cable sub-assembly counterclockwise

slowly by hand until it stops.
2/3
8/6/12
(2) Rotate the spiral cable sub-assembly clockwise

approximately 2.5 turns to the position where the
matching mark is matched.
*1
Matching Mark
*2
Colored Part
HINT:
The spiral cable sub-assembly will rotate approximately
2.5 turns to both the left and right from the center.
When centering is not possible, there may be an open
circuit in the spiral cable. Replace the spiral cable and
steering sensor with new ones.
13. PERFORM MEMORIZATION

HINT:
Perform VSC sensor neutral memorization
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UWD095X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SPIRAL CABLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL

7. INSPECT SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the colored part as shown in the illustration.
Colored Part
If the colored part shown in the illustration cannot be confirmed, it is possible that the spiral cable
sub-assembly is broken. Replace the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly with a new one.

10. REMOVE SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable sub-assembly with the battery connected and turn the ignition
switch to ON.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UWD095X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/3
8/6/12
Do not rotate the spiral cable sub-assembly without the steering wheel with the battery
connected and turn the ignition switch to ON.
sensor.
(c) Check that the front wheels are facing straight ahead.
(d) Slide the slider to release the lock, and then disconnect
the yellow airbag connector from the spiral cable with
sensor sub-assembly.
*1
Slider
NOTICE:
(e) Disconnect the other connector from the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly.
(f) Disengage the 3 claws to remove the spiral cable with

sensor sub-assembly.
11. REMOVE SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

NOTICE:
Remove the spiral cable sub-assembly from the steering sensor only when replacing it or the
steering sensor.
Do not rotate the center section of the steering sensor, as it may deviate from the steering sensor
neutral point.
When replacing the steering sensor:
(a) Disengage the 6 claws, 2 pins and 2 guides to remove

the spiral cable sub-assembly from the steering sensor.
2/3
8/6/12
NOTICE:
Do not damage the guide and claw.
*1
Guide
*2
Pin
3/3
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UW406AX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UW406AX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 N
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UW509ZX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
CAUTION:
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
Never dispose of a horn button assembly with an undeployed airbag.
When deploying the airbag, perform the operation at least 10 m (32.8 ft.) away from the horn
button assembly.
The horn button assembly becomes extremely hot when the airbag is deployed, so do not touch it
for at least 30 minutes after deployment.
Use gloves and safety glasses when handling a horn button assembly with a deployed airbag.
Do not apply water etc. to a horn button assembly with a deployed airbag.
HINT:
When scrapping a vehicle equipped with an SRS or disposing of the horn button assembly, be sure to
deploy the airbag first in accordance with the procedure described below. If any abnormality occurs
with the airbag deployment, contact the Service Dept. of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.
2. DISPOSE OF HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY (When not Installed in Vehicle)

NOTICE:
HINT:
(a) Remove the horn button assembly
CAUTION:
Before removing the horn button assembly, wait at least 90 seconds after turning the ignition
switch off and disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
When storing the horn button assembly, keep the airbag deployment side facing upward.
(b) Using braided wire, tie down the horn button assembly to an unneeded wheel.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UW509ZX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/6
8/6/12
*1
*a
Wire Diameter
Wire:
1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ) or more
CAUTION:
If the wire harness is too thin or an alternative object is used to tie down the horn button
HINT:
(1) Wind 3 wires at least 2 times each around each of the

snap pins.
*a
2 times or more
CAUTION:
Tightly wind the wires around the snap pins without any
slack.
wires, the horn button assembly may break loose when
the airbag is deployed.
(2) Face the airbag deployment side of the horn button

2/6
8/6/12
assembly upward on top of an unneeded tire and

wheel set. Separately tie the each sides of the horn
button assembly to the wheel through the hub nut
holes. Position the SST connector so that it hangs
downward through the hub hole of the wheel.
Minimum tire size:
Width
185 mm (7.28 in.)
Inner diam eter
360 mm (1.18 ft.)
CAUTION:
wires, the horn button assembly may break loose when
the airbag is deployed.
Always tie down the horn button assembly with the
airbag deployment side facing upward.
NOTICE:
The tire and wheel may be damaged by the airbag
deployment, so use unneeded tire and wheel.
(c) Install SST.

SST.
SST: 09082-18010
*a
CAUTION:
Place the wheel on level ground.
(2) Connect the SST connector.

NOTICE:
twin lock. Also, secure some slack for the SST wire harness inside the disc wheel.
tied down to the wheel.
*a
10 m (32.8 ft.) or more
3/6
8/6/12
(d) Cover the horn button assembly (Using a cardboard box).
(1) Cover the horn button assembly with a cardboard

box.
*1
Weight
(2) Place weights on the cardboard box in 4 places totaling at least 190 N (19 kg, 42.7 lb).
Minimum cardboard box size:
Must exceed the following dimensions
X
460 mm (1.51 ft.)
Y
650 mm (2.13 ft.)
NOTICE:
When dimension Y of the cardboard box exceeds the diameter of the wheel and tire to which the
horn button assembly is tied, X should be the following size.
X = 460 mm (1.51 ft.) + width of tire
If a cardboard box smaller than the specified size is used, it may be broken by the shock from the
airbag deployment.
(e) Cover the horn button assembly (Using tires).
(1) Place at least 3 tires without wheels onto the wheel

and tire to which the horn button assembly is tied.
*1
Tires (3 or more)
*a
Inner Diameter
*b
Width
(2) Place a wheel and tire on top.

Minimum tire size:
Width
4/6
8/6/12
185 mm (7.28 in.)

Inner diam eter
360 mm (1.18 ft.)
CAUTION:
Do not use tires with wheels except for on the top and bottom.
NOTICE:
The tires may be damaged by the airbag deployment, so use unneeded tires.
Do not place the SST connector under the tire because it could be damaged.

CAUTION:
airbag is deployed.

(1) Check that no one is within a 10 m (32.8 ft.) radius of the wheel to which the horn button
assembly is tied.

terminal.
*A
Using a Cardboard Box
*B
Using Tires
*1
Battery
*2
*a
10 m (32.8 ft.) or more
(3) Connect the terminal of SST to the negative (-) battery terminal to deploy the horn button
assembly.
CAUTION:
Before deployment, make sure that no one is near the airbag.
5/6
8/6/12
Before deployment, make sure that no one is near the airbag.
(g) Dispose of the horn button assembly.

CAUTION:
The horn button assembly becomes extremely hot when the airbag is deployed, so do not touch it
for at least 30 minutes after deployment.
Use gloves and safety glasses when handling a horn button assembly with a deployed airbag.
Do not apply water etc. to a horn button assembly with a deployed airbag.
(1) Remove the horn button assembly from the wheel.
(2) Place the horn button assembly in a plastic bag, tie it tightly and dispose of it according to local
regulations.
6/6
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UW609OX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
(c) Connect the 2 airbag connectors to the horn button

assembly.
*1
Airbag Connector
*2
Horn Connector
*3
NOTICE:
Be sure to only connect the connectors to each
corresponding color.
(d) Push in the 2 locks to install the 2 airbag connectors.
(e) Connect the horn connector to the horn button assembly.
(f) Push the horn button assembly to engage the 3 pins

carefully.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the pins are securely inserted into the
steering holes.
Make sure to engage the 2 upper pins first.
Make sure that the horn button assembly is securely
installed.

3. INSPECT HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UW609OX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
(a) Make sure that the horn sounds.

If the horn does not sound, inspect the horn system
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UW609OX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UW909DX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION:
Be sure to correctly follow the removal and installation procedures for the horn button
assembly.
1. INSPECT HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle not Involved in Collision)

(b) Visually check for defects with the horn button assembly installed on the vehicle.
HINT:
Cuts on the surface or in the grooves

Small cracks on the surface or in the grooves
Significant discoloration on the surface or in the grooves
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the horn button assembly with a new one.
2. INSPECT HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY (for Vehicle Involved in Collision and Airbag not
Deployed)
(b) Visually check for defects with the horn button assembly removed from the vehicle.
HINT:
Cuts on the surface or in the grooves

Small cracks on the surface or in the grooves
Significant discoloration on the surface or in the grooves
Deformation of the steering wheel assembly
Deformation of the horn button sub-assembly of the horn button assembly
Interference or uneven clearance between the horn button assembly and steering wheel
assembly when the new horn button assembly is installed on the steering wheel assembly
OK:
If any of the defects is found, replace the horn button assembly or steering wheel assembly with a
new one.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UW909DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000UW809KX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
3. REMOVE HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
When storing the horn button assembly, keep the airbag deployment side facing upward.

CAUTION:
(c) Using a screwdriver, push in the 3 torsion springs to

disengage the 3 pins.
*1
Torsion Spring
NOTICE:
Do not drop the horn button assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UW809KX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: STEERING PAD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
(d) Pull out the horn button assembly from the steering wheel assembly and support the horn button
assembly with one hand.
NOTICE:
When removing the horn button assembly, do not pull the airbag wire harness.
(e) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective

tape, release the 2 airbag connector locks.
*1
Protective Tape
*2
Airbag Connector
*3
Horn Connector
*4
(f) Disconnect the 2 airbag connectors to remove the horn button assembly.
NOTICE:
(g) Disconnect the horn connector from the horn button assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000UW809KX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TELLTALE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WZK005X
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TELLTALE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WZK005X.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TELLTALE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 G
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WZJ00HX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TELLTALE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
(a) Apply battery voltage to the connector and check the LED
OK:
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
LED illuminates (AIRBAG ON)
LED illuminates (AIRBAG OFF)
*a

(Clock Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the clock
assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WZJ00HX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TELLTALE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WZI00BX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TELLTALE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLOCK ASSEMBLY (PASSENGER AIRBAG ON-OFF INDICATOR)
(a) Attach the 4 claws to install the clock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WZI00BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TELLTALE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003WZL00BX
Title: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TELLTALE LIGHT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CLOCK ASSEMBLY (PASSENGER AIRBAG ON-OFF INDICATOR)
(a) Detach the 4 claws and remove the clock assembly.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003WZL00BX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1401: M Check NG (2013 FR-S)
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCI01UX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1401: M Check NG (2013
FR-S)
DTC
B1401
M Check NG
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code if the main body ECU (network gateway
ECU) reference code and the reference code from the combination meter do not match.
DTC
CODE
B1401
TROUBLE AREA
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) reference code and reference
code from the combination meter assembly do not match.
Combination
meter assembly
NOTICE:
If the combination meter assembly is replaced, refer to Registration
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
Check DTCs B1407 and B1408 first.
NG
GO TO DTC CHART
OK
2.
REGISTER RECOGNITION CODES (ECU CODE REGISTRATION)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCI01UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1401: M Check NG (2013 FR-S)
(a) Register the recognition codes (ECU code registration)
OK:
The ECU code can be registered.
3.
NG
CHECK FOR DTC
OK
END
NG
GO TO DTC CHART
OK
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCI01UX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1402: Immobiliser Key Check
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCN01XX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1402: Immobiliser Key
Check NG (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1402
Immobiliser Key Check NG
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code if an improper key (a key not registered in
the main body ECU (network gateway ECU)) is inserted into the ignition key cylinder.
DTC
CODE
B1402
TROUBLE AREA
When an improper key (a key not registered in the main body ECU
(network gateway ECU)) is inserted into the ignition key cylinder.
Key
Main body ECU
(network
gateway ECU)
NOTICE:
If the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) is replaced, refer to Registration
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC B1410 and B1411 are not output.
HINT:
NG
GO TO DTC CHART
OK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCN01XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
2.
REGISTER KEY
(a) Reregister the key
OK:
The key code can be registered.
3.
NG
REGISTER KEY
OK
END
REGISTER KEY
(a) Using an unregistered key, register the key code
OK:
NG
OK
END
GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCN01XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1405: SCU Check NG (2013 F
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCJ028X
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1405: SCU Check NG (2013
FR-S)
DTC
B1405
SCU Check NG
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code if the main body ECU (network
gateway ECU) reference code and the reference code from the transponder key ECU assembly do
not match.
DTC
CODE
B1405
TROUBLE AREA
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) reference code and reference
code from the transponder key ECU assembly do not match.
Transponder key
ECU assembly
NOTICE:
If the transponder key ECU assembly is replaced, refer to Registration
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
NG
GO TO DTC CHART
OK
2.
OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCJ028X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1405: SCU Check NG (2013 F
The ECU code can be registered.
3.
NG
CHECK DTC
OK
END
NG
GO TO DTC CHART
OK
REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSEMBLY
CHECK DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCJ028X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1406: SCU EEPROM NG (2013
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCN01ZX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1406: SCU EEPROM NG
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1406
SCU EEPROM NG
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code when an internal malfunction is detected in
the transponder key ECU assembly or when the ROM in the transponder key ECU assembly cannot be
accessed.
DTC
CODE
B1406
TROUBLE AREA
Internal malfunction in the transponder key ECU assembly when the ROM in
the transponder key ECU assembly cannot be accessed.
Transponder key
ECU assembly
NOTICE:
If the transponder key ECU assembly is replaced, refer to Registration
PROCEDURE
1.
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
NG
OK
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCN01ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1406: SCU EEPROM NG (2013
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCN01ZX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1407: M Communication Circui
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002X2F03MX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1407: M Communication
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1407
M Communication Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code if a communication problem is detected
between the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) and the combination meter assembly.
DTC
CODE
B1407
TROUBLE AREA
When there is a problem in communication between the main body ECU

(network gateway ECU) and the combination meter assembly.
Combination
meter assembly
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
Other than DTC B1407 are not output
Other than DTC B1407 are output
HINT:
If any DTCs other than the ones for the engine immobiliser system are stored, check these DTCs first.
GO TO DTC CHART
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002X2F03MX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1408: Meter EEPROM Circuit (
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000TUG07SX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1408: Meter EEPROM Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1408
Meter EEPROM Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code when an internal malfunction is detected in
the combination meter assembly.
DTC CODE
B1408
TROUBLE AREA
Internal malfunction in the combination meter assembly.
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1.
NEXT
2.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
NG
OK
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000000TUG07SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1409: SCU Communication Cir
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002X2G031X
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1409: SCU Communication
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1409
SCU Communication Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code if a communication problem is detected
between the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) and the transponder key ECU assembly.
DTC
CODE
B1409
When there is a problem in communication between the main body

ECU (network gateway ECU) and the transponder key ECU assembly.
TROUBLE AREA
Harness or
connector
Main body
ECU (network
gateway ECU)
Transponder
key ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002X2G031X.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/6
8/6/12
NOTICE:
If the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) or transponder key ECU assembly is replaced, refer
to Registration
.
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK BATTERY, BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the A73 and D6 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
(b) Disconnect the 3A, 3B and 3C instrument panel junction block assembly connectors.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3A-27 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
3C-19 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3B-18 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
2/6
8/6/12
*a

NG

CONNECTOR
OK
2.
assembly.
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
MB-1 (BECU) - 3A-27
Always
Below 1
MB-32 (BMPX) - 3C-19
Always
Below 1
3/6
8/6/12
MB-11 (GND) - 3B-18
Always
Below 1
NG

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK
3.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSEMBLY - BATTERY,

BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the A64 transponder key ECU assembly connector.

Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
A64-1 (+B) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
11 to 14 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
Always
NG
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1

CONNECTOR
OK
4.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU - TRANSPONDER KEY ECU
ASSEMBLY)
Standard Voltage:
4/6
8/6/12
TESTER CONNECTION
A73-17 (UART) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
A73-17 (UART) - A64-3 (UART)
Always
Below 1
A73-17 (UART) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
5.
(a) Replace the transponder key ECU assembly with a new one
HINT:
Do not register the transponder key ECU assembly.
Once the transponder key ECU assembly is registered to a vehicle, it cannot be used in other
vehicle.
NEXT
6.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
HINT:
If DTC P1409 is output, reinstall the transponder key ECU assembly and then replace the main
If DTC P1409 is not output, register the transponder key ECU assembly.
5/6
8/6/12
NG
REPAIR MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY

ECU)
OK
END (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSEMBLY WAS

DEFECTIVE)
6/6
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1410: Transponder Communic
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002X2F03LX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1410: Transponder
Communication Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1410
Transponder Communication Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code if a communication problem is
detected between the key and the main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
DTC
CODE
B1410
When there is a problem in communication between the key and

the main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
TROUBLE AREA
Key
Transponder key
amplifier
Main body ECU
(network gateway
ECU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002X2F03LX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/8
8/6/12
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Using Techstream, check that the DTC is stored with all the registered keys
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC B1410 is stored with all the keys.
DTC B1410 is not stored with some of the keys.
NG
REPLACE KEY THAT STORED DTC
OK
2/8
8/6/12
2.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY, BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the A73 and D6 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connectors.
(b) Disconnect the 3A, 3B and 3C instrument panel junction block assembly connectors.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3A-27 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
3C-19 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3B-18 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
*a

NG
3/8
8/6/12
CONNECTOR
OK
3.
assembly.
*a
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
MB-1 (BECU) - 3A-27
Always
Below 1
MB-32 (BMPX) - 3C-19
Always
Below 1
MB-11 (GND) - 3B-18
Always
Below 1
NG

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4/8
8/6/12
OK
4.
INSPECT TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER (POWER SOURCE)
(a) Install the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) to the instrument panel junction block
assembly.
(b) Install the instrument panel junction block assembly
(c) Reconnect the 3A, 3B and 3C instrument panel junction block assembly connectors.
(d) Disconnect the D54 transponder key amplifier connector.
(e) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
D54-1 (VC5) - Body ground
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4.5 to 5.5 V
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
*a

(Transponder Key Amplifier)
(TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER - BODY

GROUND)
5/8
8/6/12
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER - INSTRUMENT

PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK)
5.
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D54-1 (VC5) - A73-8 (VC5)
Always
Below 1
D54-1 (VC5) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
6.
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
GATEWAY ECU)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER - BODY GROUND)
TESTER CONNECTION
D54-7 (AGND) - Body ground
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
NG
OK
(TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER - INSTRUMENT

6/8
8/6/12
7.

TESTER CONNECTION
D54-7 (AGND) - A73-16 (AGND)
8.
CONDITION
Always
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Below 1
NG
OK

GATEWAY ECU)
CONNECTOR

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
D54-5 (TXCT) - A73-15 (TXCT)
Always
Below 1
D54-4 (CODE) - A73-5 (CODE)
Always
Below 1
D54-5 (TXCT) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
D54-4 (CODE) - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
NG

CONNECTOR
7/8
8/6/12
OK
9.
(a) Temporarily replace the transponder key amplifier with a new or known good one
NEXT
10.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.

(b) Turn the ignition switch off or ACC.
(c) Check for DTCs
OK:
11.
NG
CHECK FOR DTC
OK
END (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER WAS

DEFECTIVE)
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Replace the keys in which the DTC B1410 is stored, and perform the registration.
(b) Check for DTCs
OK:
NG

GATEWAY ECU)
OK
END (KEY WAS DEFECTIVE)
8/8
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1411: Immobiliser Antenna Cir
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCJ02BX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1411: Immobiliser Antenna
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1411
Immobiliser Antenna Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) stores this code if a malfunction is detected in the antenna
coil inside the transponder key amplifier.
DTC
CODE
B1411
TROUBLE AREA
Transponder key amplifier

gateway ECU)
Malfunction in the antenna coil inside the

transponder key amplifier.
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Key is removed from ignition key cylinder.

(b) Key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.
(d) Check for DTCs
OK:
2.
NG
OK
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCJ02BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1411: Immobiliser Antenna Cir
(a) Temporarily replace the transponder key amplifier with a new or known good one
NEXT
3.
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.

(c) Check for DTCs
OK:
NG

GATEWAY ECU)
OK
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCJ02BX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004F7J00MX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1571: Immobiliser Key
Check NG (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1571
DESCRIPTION
The ECM stores this code if the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) reference code and the reference
code from the ECM do not match.
DTC
CODE
B1571
TROUBLE AREA
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) reference code and
reference code from the ECM do not match.
ECM
Main body ECU
(network gateway
ECU)
NOTICE:
If the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) or ECM is replaced, refer to Registration
PROCEDURE
1.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (NUMBER OF REGISTRATION KEY)
(a) Connect Techstream to DLC3.

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
Number of Registration
Key
Number of registered key/ min. 0,

max. 8
NORMAL CONDITION
Number of registered
key
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004F7J00MX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
-
1/3
8/6/12
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
The registered number of the key is 0.
he registered number of the key is 1 or more.
REGISTER ECU COMMUNICATION ID
2.
REGISTER KEY
(a) Register the key
OK:
3.
NG
CHECK FOR DTC
OK
END
(a) Register the ECU communication ID
OK:
The ECU communication ID can be registered.
4.
NG
CHECK FOR DTC
OK
END
CHECK FOR DTC
(a) Check for DTCs
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
2/3
8/6/12
DTC B1571 is output
Other than DTC B1571 are output
GO TO DTC CHART
5.
REPLACE ECM
(a) Temporarily replace the ECM with a new or known good one
NEXT
6.
OK:
The ECU communication ID can be registered.
NG

GATEWAY ECU)
OK
END
3/3
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1576: Key Write Malfunction t
6.4 C
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002X2F03JX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1576: Key Write Malfunction
to EFI ECU (2013 FR-S)
DTC
B1576
Key Write Malfunction to EFI ECU
DESCRIPTION
The ECM stores this code when an internal malfunction is detected in the ECM, or when the ROM in the
ECM cannot be accessed when registering a key.
DTC
CODE
B1576
Internal malfunction in the ECM.

When the ROM in the ECM cannot be accessed when registering a
key.
TROUBLE
AREA
ECM
NOTICE:
If the ECM is replaced, refer to Registration
PROCEDURE
1.
OK:
The ECU Communication ID can be registered.
2.
NG
OK
END
OK:
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002X2F03JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: B1576: Key Write Malfunction t
3.
NG
OK
END
OK:
NG
REPLACE ECM
OK
END
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002X2F03JX.html?sisuffix=ff&l
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (201
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCS01SX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST
(2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
time.
NOTICE:

(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical or Powertrain / Main Body or Engine / Data List.
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
Number of
Registration Key
IG SW
Number of registered key / 0 to 8
Ignition switch ON signal / OFF or ON
NORMAL CONDITION
Number of registered
key
OFF: Ignition switch
ACC or off
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
-

ACC SW
Key Unlock
Warning SW
Ignition switch ACC signal / OFF or ON
Unlock warning switch signal / OFF or ON
Battery Power
Supply Control
Voltage
Battery power supply control voltage / 0 to

21.4 V
Battery Power
Battery power supply backup voltage / 0 to
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCS01SX.html?sisuffix=ff&
ON: Ignition switch

ACC or ON
OFF: No key in ignition
key cylinder
ON: Key inserted in
ignition key cylinder
11 to 14 V
1/3
8/6/12
Supply Back Up
Voltage
21.4 V
IG Power Supply
IG power supply voltage / 0 to 21.4 V
Voltage
ACC Voltage
Immobiliser
Light
Immobiliser
Power Supply
ACC voltage / 0 to 21.4 V
11 to 14 V
11 to 14 V
11 to 14 V
OFF: Security indicator

light OFF
Security indicator light status / OFF or ON
ON: Security indicator

light ON
OFF: Power not
supplied to engine
immobiliser system

engine immobiliser system power supply
output status / OFF or ON
ON: Power supplied to

engine immobilizer
system
Engine
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL
CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
NOTE
Status of immobiliser fuel cut / ON or OFF

History
Status of immobiliser fuel cut history / ON

or OFF
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Security Indicator
Security indicator light
ON/OFF
2/3
8/6/12
3/3
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
6.4 S
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCA025X
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
CHART (2013 FR-S)

DTC CODE
B1401*1
B1402
DETECTION ITEM
SEE PAGE
M Check NG
B1405*2
SCU Check NG
B1406*2
SCU EEPROM NG
B1407*1
M Communication Circuit
B1408*1
Meter EEPROM Circuit
B1409*2
SCU Communication Circuit
B1410
Transponder Communication Circuit
B1411
Immobiliser Antenna Circuit
*1: w/o Transponder Key ECU Assembly

*2: w/ Transponder Key ECU Assembly
ECM
DTC CODE
DETECTION ITEM
B1571
B1572
Immobiliser System Communication Malfunction
B1576
Key Write Malfunction to EFI ECU
B1577
Immobiliser System EEPROM Malfunction
B1578
Immobiliser System Data Mismatch Key
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCA025X.html?sisuffix=ff&
SEE PAGE
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCQ01VX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013
FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK FOR MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU) DTC
(e) Check for DTCs.
2. CHECK FOR ECM DTC

(e) Check for DTCs.
3. CLEAR MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU) DTC

(e) Clear the DTCs.
4. CLEAR ECM DTC

(e) Clear the DTCs.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCQ01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROU
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TC902BX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
Use these procedures to troubleshoot the engine immobiliser system.
1.
NEXT
2.
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
HINT:
A simple method to determine whether the battery is depleted is to operate the horn.
NEXT
3.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
CAN DTC is output
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TC902BX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/4
8/6/12
4.
CHECK FOR DTC*
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
SFI system DTC is output
Engine immobiliser system DTC is not output
(b) Based on the DTCs output above, proceed to each diagnostic procedure.
HINT:
If any DTCs other than the ones for the engine immobiliser system are stored, check these DTCs first.
GO TO SFI SYSTEM
PROCEED TO DTC CHART
5.
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
2/4
8/6/12
Go to step 7
6.

.
.
NEXT
7.
NEXT
8.
CHECK FOR DTC*
(a) Clear the DTCs
(b) Check for DTCs
HINT:
Before checking for DTCs, perform the "DTC Output Confirmation Operation" of each diagnostic
procedure
Result
RESULT
PROCEED TO
DTC is not output
Engine immobiliser system DTC is output
3/4
8/6/12
END
4/4
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 R
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004G5H00DX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004G5H00DX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004G5H00DX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (
6.4 T
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001WOZ01YX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Engine Immobiliser System
SYMPTOM
Security indicator light does not blink
SUSPECTED AREA
SEE PAGE
Proceed to "Security Indicator Light does not Blink"
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001WOZ01YX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: REGISTRATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 M
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM00000120Y027X
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: REGISTRATION (2013 FR-S)
REGISTRATION
1. DESCRIPTION OF CODE REGISTRATION
(a) The key has 2 codes: the key code (immobiliser code) and the wireless code. Both of these codes
need to be registered. For the wireless code registration procedures, refer to Wireless Door Lock
Control System
Key code registration is necessary when the main body ECU (network gateway ECU), combination
meter assembly*1 or transponder key ECU assembly*2 or key is replaced with a new one.
2. KEY REGISTRATION PROCEDURES WHEN ADDING OR REPLACING KEY OR WHEN KEY IS

LOST
HINT:
The following procedures require the use of the Techstream:
New key code registration
Key code re-registration
Additional key code registration
Key code erasure
A maximum of 6 key codes can be registered.
CUSTOMER
REQUEST/CONDITION
Registering
additional key
REGISTRATION
PROCEDURE
CONDITION
Customer must
bring at least 1
registered key.
Replacing a
Customer must
key
bring at least 1
Making a
registered key.
lost key
unusable
All keys are lost
PROCEDURE
1. Register additional keys as necessary

(additional key code registration).
REFER TO
PROCEDURE
"C"
1. Using the remaining key, clear the key

PROCEDURE
codes of all registered keys except for the one
"D"
remaining (key code erasure).
2. Register additional keys as necessary
(additional key code registration).
PROCEDURE
"C"
1. Reset all keys (all keys code erasure (key

code reset)).
PROCEDURE
"E"
2. Register all keys new key code registration.
PROCEDURE
"A"
3. PART REPLACEMENT AND KEY REGISTRATION PROCEDURES

1/11
8/6/12
(a) The following table shows ECU replacement and key registration procedures for cases in which an
ECU has been determined to be malfunctioning during troubleshooting of the engine immobiliser
system.
HINT:
The following procedures require the use of the Techstream:
New key code registration
Key code re-registration
Additional key code registration
Key code erasure
A maximum of 6 key codes can be registered.
MALFUNCTIONING ECU
REGISTRATION
PROCEDURE
CONDITION
PROCEDURE
1. Replace main body

ECU (network gateway
ECU).
Customer must bring
ECU)
all registered keys.*3
PROCEDURE
"B"
3. Register ECU
communication ID.
PROCEDURE
"G"
Customer must bring
meter assembly.
at least 1 registered
key.
2. Register recognition
codes (ECU code
registration).
1. Replace transponder
Transponder key ECU assembly*2
Customer must bring
key ECU assembly.
key.
codes (ECU code
registration).
ECM
*4
2. Reregister all keys.
1. Replace combination
Combination meter assembly*1
REFER TO
*5
PROCEDURE
"F"
*6
PROCEDURE
"F"
Customer must bring

1. Replace ECM.
*7
key.
2. Register ECU
PROCEDURE
communication ID.
"G"

ECU).
ECU) and combination meter
assembly*1
Customer must bring

meter assembly.
*4
*5
PROCEDURE
"A"
2/11
8/6/12
4. Register ECU
communication ID.
PROCEDURE
"G"

ECU).
ECU) and transponder key ECU
assembly*2
Customer must bring

key ECU assembly.
4. Register ECU
communication ID.
*4
*6
PROCEDURE
"A"
PROCEDURE
"G"
*4
ECU).
ECU) and ECM
Customer must bring

2. Replace ECM.
4. Register ECU
communication ID.
Combination meter assembly and

ECM*1
Customer must bring

key.
PROCEDURE
"G"
2. Replace ECM.
*7
codes (ECU code
registration).
key ECU assembly.
ECM*2
"B"
*5
Transponder key ECU assembly and
PROCEDURE
meter assembly.
4. Register ECU
communication ID.
Customer must bring

key.
*7
2. Replace ECM.
codes (ECU code
registration).
4. Register ECU
PROCEDURE
"F"
PROCEDURE
"G"
*6
*7
PROCEDURE
"F"
PROCEDURE
communication ID.
"G"

*4
ECU).
meter assembly.
*5
3/11
8/6/12
ECU), combination meter assembly and Customer must bring

ECM*1
3. Replace ECM.
*7
PROCEDURE
"A"
5. Register ECU
communication ID.
PROCEDURE
"G"

ECU).

ECU), transponder key ECU assembly
and ECM*2
Customer must bring

*4
key ECU assembly.
*6
3. Replace ECM.
*7
PROCEDURE
"A"
5. Register ECU
PROCEDURE
communication ID.
"G"

*3: If none of the registered keys are available, the main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
cannot authenticate users, and it will be necessary to replace the combination meter
assembly*1 or transponder key ECU assembly*2 with new ones. However, if there is at least
one registered key available, erasing the key code before replacing the main body ECU
(network gateway ECU) will make it unnecessary to replace the combination meter
assembly*1 or transponder key ECU assembly*2. After replacing with a new combination
meter assembly*1 or transponder key ECU assembly*2, register all keys as new key codes,
and carry out ECU communication ID registration.
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
4. KEY REGISTRATION (PROCEDURE "A")

(a) New key code registration:
NOTICE:
Make sure that no key codes are registered in the main body ECU (network gateway ECU), and
combination meter assembly*1 or transponder key ECU assembly*2.

HINT:
In this mode, a maximum of 6 key codes can be registered.
New key codes must be registered with the battery connected. Register with the ignition switch
ON.
When the main body ECU (network gateway ECU), and combination meter assembly*1 or
4/11
8/6/12
transponder key ECU assembly*2 are replaced with new ones, key codes must be registered in
the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) and combination meter assembly*1 or transponder
key ECU assembly*2.
In the chart below, the numbers in the "Procedure" column (1, 2, 3, etc.) indicate the step
numbers. Perform the steps in numerical order.
Automatic Key Code Registration (New Registration)
PROCESS
PROCEDURE
2. Connect Techstream to DLC3.
4. Turn Techstream on.
5. Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Utility / Key
1. Start of
Registration
registration
HINT:
After completing the above operation, proceed to the next step in accordance
with the prompts on the Techstream screen.
2. Verification of
unregistered key
1. Following the instructions on the Techstream, insert the key to be

registered into the ignition key cylinder.
2. Perform operation according to prompts on Techstream screen.
3. End of registration Finish new key code registration.

HINT:
A brief outline of a new key code registration procedure is shown above. For detailed information,
refer to the Techstream screen.
Follow the instruction on the Techstream screen to end new key code registration mode.
5. KEY REGISTRATION (PROCEDURE "B")

(a) Key code re-registration:
NOTICE:
If none of the registered keys are available, the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) cannot
authenticate users, and it will be necessary to replace the combination meter assembly*1 or
transponder key ECU assembly*2 with new ones. However, if there is at least one registered
key available, erasing the key code before replacing the main body ECU (network gateway
ECU) will make it unnecessary to replace the combination meter assembly*1 or transponder
key ECU assembly*2. After replacing with a new combination meter assembly*1 or transponder
key ECU assembly*2, register all keys as new key codes, and carry out ECU communication ID
registration.

HINT:
Carry out this work when replacing only the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) with a new
5/11
8/6/12
one.
Registration mode will end if any step is not completed within the specified time.
Key Code Re-registration
PROCESS
PROCEDURE
1. Prepare all keys registered to the vehicle.
1. Start of
registration
Registration
HINT:
2. Confirmation of
Follow the instructions on the Techstream screen, insert in order each key
registered key*1
registered to the vehicle into the ignition cylinder and then remove it.
3. Verification of
Follow the instructions on the Techstream screen, insert in order each key to be
unregistered key*2
registered into the ignition cylinder and then remove it.
4. End of
registration
Finish key code re-registration.
*1: If none of the registered keys are available, the main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
cannot authenticate users, and it will be necessary to replace the combination meter
assembly*3 or transponder key ECU assembly*4 with new ones. However, if there is at least
one registered key available, erasing the key code before replacing the main body ECU
(network gateway ECU) will make it unnecessary to replace the combination meter
assembly*3 or transponder key ECU assembly*4. After replacing with a new combination
meter assembly*3 or transponder key ECU assembly*4, register all keys as new key codes,
and carry out ECU communication ID registration.
*2: Insert and remove all keys including the keys used in "Confirmation of registered key" into
and from the ignition key cylinder.
HINT:
A brief outline of key code re-registration procedure is shown above. For detailed information, refer
to the Techstream screen.
6. KEY REGISTRATION (PROCEDURE "C")

(a) Additional registration:
HINT:
6/11
8/6/12
In this mode, a maximum of 6 key codes can be registered.

Registration mode will end if any step is not completed within the specified time.
When the ignition cylinder or the key cylinder set is replaced, remove the transmitter module from
the original key. Then install this transmitter module to a new key and use the new key. If
necessary, use this key to register other keys.
Additional Registration
PROCESS
PROCEDURE
Registration
1. Start of
registration
HINT:
1. Following the instructions on the Techstream, insert the key

2. Confirmation of
registered key
3. Verification of
unregistered key

3. Perform operation according to prompts on Techstream screen
1. Following the instructions on the Techstream, insert the key to be
4. End of registration Finish key code registration.

HINT:
A brief outline of additional key code registration procedure is shown above. For detailed
information, refer to the Techstream screen.
7. KEY REGISTRATION (PROCEDURE "D")

(a) Key code erasure:
HINT:
Performing this procedure will erase all key codes except for the key, which is used for erasing the
key codes. In order to use a key whose code has been erased, a new key code must be
registered.
This procedure will be canceled if each step is not completed within the specified time.
Key Code Erasure
7/11
8/6/12
PROCESS
PROCEDURE
Code Erasure
1. Start of erasure
HINT:

2. Confirmation of
registered key
3. End of erasure
Finish key code erasure.
HINT:
A brief outline of key code erasure procedure is shown above. For detailed information, refer to the
Techstream screen.
8. KEY REGISTRATION (PROCEDURE "E")

(a) All key code erasure:
HINT:
To perform this procedure, at least 1 key should be registered to the main body ECU (network
gateway ECU).
This procedure can be performed using either a registered or unregistered key.
All Key Code Erasure
PROCESS
PROCEDURE
3. Insert the previous registered key or unregistered key into ignition key
cylinder.
5. Using TIS, confirm that user and vehicle match.
1. Start of
erasure
7. Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Utility / Key Reset
HINT:
After completing the above operation, proceed to the next step in accordance with
8/11
8/6/12
the prompts on the Techstream screen.
2. Erasure of
ID code
3. End of
erasure

2. Wait for 15 minutes.
Finish all key code erasure.
HINT:
A brief outline of all key code erasure procedure is shown above. For detailed information, refer to
the Techstream screen.
9. KEY REGISTRATION (PROCEDURE "F")

(a) ECU code registration (Procedure "F"):
NOTICE:
The ECU code should be registered when the combination meter assembly*1 or transponder
key ECU assembly*2 is replaced with a new one in order to match the ECU code.

HINT:
This procedure will be canceled if each step is not completed within the specified time.
ECU code registration
PROCESS
PROCEDURE
5. Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Utility / ECU
1. Start of
registration
Communication ID Registration
HINT:
2. Confirmation of
registered key
3. Registration of
ECU code

Perform operation according to prompts on Techstream screen.
4. End of
9/11
8/6/12
registration
Finish ECU code registration.
HINT:
A brief outline of ECU code registration procedure is shown above. For detailed information, refer to
the Techstream screen.
10. KEY REGISTRATION (PROCEDURE "G")

(a) ECU communication ID registration (When the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) is replaced
with a new one, or when the ECM is replaced with other than a new one.):
NOTICE:
The ECU communication ID should be registered when the main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
is replaced with a new one, or when the ECM is replaced with other than a new one, in order to
match the ECU communication IDs.
If registration of the main body ECU (network gateway ECU), combination meter assembly*1 or
transponder key ECU assembly*2 is not completed, then this work will not be possible. Therefore,
prior to carrying out ECU communications code registration, carry out main body ECU (network
gateway ECU), combination meter assembly*1 or transponder key ECU assembly*2 registration.
The engine cannot be started unless the ECU communication IDs match.
After registration, turning the ignition switch to START may not start the engine on the first try. If
so, turn the ignition switch to START again.
Using the Techstream, clear DTC B1572 (code for ECM immobiliser communication error) after the
engine is started.
HINT:
If both the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) and ECM have been replaced with new items at the
same time, then proceed as in "(b) When the ECM is replaced with a new one".
(1) Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of the

DLC3.
SST: 09843-18040
*1
DLC3
(2) Turn the ignition switch to ON and leave the vehicle as is for 30 minutes.
HINT:
(3) After leaving the vehicle as-is for at least 30 minutes, turn the ignition switch off and
disconnect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of DLC3.
10/11
8/6/12

(5) Check that the engine starts and stays on for more than 5 sec.
(b) ECU communication ID registration (When the ECM is replaced with a new one):
NOTICE:
The ECU communication ID should be registered when the ECM is replaced with a new one in
order to match the ECU communication IDs.
ECU Communication ID Registration

PROCEDURE
1. Start
2. Insert an already registered key into the ignition key cylinder.
4. Check that the engine starts and stays on for more than 5 sec.
5. End
11/11
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: Security Indicator Light Does n
6.4 J
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000000W12067X
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: Security Indicator Light Does
not Blink (2013 FR-S)
Security Indicator Light Does not Blink
DESCRIPTION
When the engine immobiliser system is set, the security indicator light blinks continuously, but
does not illuminate if the engine immobiliser system is not set.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
If the combination meter assembly and main body ECU (network gateway ECU) is replaced, refer
to Registration
PROCEDURE
1.
CHECK FOR DTC
1/6
8/6/12
(a) Check for DTCs
OK:
DTC is not output.
NG
GO TO DTC CHART
OK
2.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (SECURITY INDICATOR)
(a) Check that the security indicator light illuminates when operating it with the Active Test
Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
TEST PART
CONTROL RANGE
DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Security Indicator
Security indicator light
ON/OFF
OK:
Security indicator light can be turned on and off using the Techstream.
NG

(INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY)
OK
3.
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (IG SW, KEY UNLOCK WARNING SW)

Main Body
TESTER DISPLAY
NORMAL CONDITION
DIAGNOSTIC
2/6
8/6/12
NOTE
IG SW
Key Unlock
Warning SW
Ignition switch ON signal / OFF or OFF: Ignition switch ACC or off

ON
Un-lock warning switch signal /
OFF or ON
OFF: No key in ignition key

cylinder
ON: Key inserted in ignition key

cylinder
OK:
On the Techstream screen, the display changes between ON and OFF according to the chart above.
Result
4.
RESULT
PROCEED TO
OK
NG (IG SW)
NG (Key Unlock Warning SW)
GO TO LIGHTING SYSTEM (IG Signal Circuit)
INSPECT UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH

ASSEMBLY

ECU)
INSPECT UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the un-lock warning switch assembly
(b) Inspect the un-lock warning switch assembly
NG
REPLACE UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH

ASSEMBLY
OK
5.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY - MAIN

BODY ECU)
3/6
8/6/12
(a) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway

ECU) connector.
(b) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
D53-1 (UN+) - Body

ground
Always
11 to 14 V
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
D53-2 (UN-) - D5-22
(KSW)
D53-2 (UN-) - Body
ground
Always
Below 1
Always
10 k or higher
*a
6.

(to Un-lock Warning Switch Assembly)
NG
OK
CONNECTOR
GATEWAY ECU)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY)

TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
4/6
8/6/12
3B-22 - D7-18 (IND)
Always
Below 1
3B-18 - Body ground
Always
Below 1
Always
Below 1
3B-22 - Body ground
Always
10 k or higher
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
3C-19 - Body ground
Always
11 to 14 V
Always
11 to 14 V
NG

CONNECTOR
OK
7.
assembly.
5/6
8/6/12
*a
(Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly )
TESTER CONNECTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED CONDITION
MB-11 (GND) - 3B-18
Always
Below 1
MB-27 (IND) - 3B-22
Always
Below 1
MB-32 (BMPX) - 3C-19
Always
Below 1
NG

BLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK
8.
(a) Replace the combination meter assembly with a new one
(b) When the immobiliser is set, check that the security indicator light blinks.
OK:
Security indicator light blinks.
NG

GATEWAY ECU)
OK
END (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY WAS

DEFECTIVE)
6/6
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 F
6.4 D
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCO01VX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013
FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) The engine immobiliser system is a system that prevents the engine from starting when the key ID
and the codes registered in the main body ECU (network gateway computer) do not match.

COMPONENT
Main body
ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
OUTLINE
Checks the key ID received from the transponder key amplifier assembly to assess
whether it matches the registered key ID. At the same time, data is exchanged with the
combination meter assembly*1 or transponder key ECU assembly*2 to check whether
the ID (meter ID) registered in the combination meter assembly*1 or transponder key
ECU*2 matches the ID (meter ID) registered in the main body ECU (network gateway
ECU). Based upon this request from the ECM, the results of the verification and the
registered ID (engine ID) are encrypted and sent to the ECM.
Combination
Based upon the request from the main body ECU (network gateway ECU), the registered
meter
ID is encrypted, and sent to the main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
assembly*1
Transponder
Based upon the request from the main body ECU (network gateway ECU), the registered
key ECU
ID is encrypted, and sent to the main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
assembly*2
Transponder Receives the key ID from the antenna coil, and outputs the key ID boosted in the
key amplifier amplifier to the main body ECU (network gateway ECU).
ECM
At engine start, the ECM communicates with the main body ECU (network gateway ECU),
and receives the verification results of the key ID and meter ID and the encrypted main
body ECU (network gateway ECU) ID (engine ID). If any of the IDs do not match, then
the engine will be prevented from starting.
Un-lock
warning
switch
assembly
Detects whether the key is in the ignition key cylinder and outputs the results to the
main body ECU (network gateway ECU).

3. SYSTEM FUNCTION
(a) When the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) detects that the un-lock warning switch
assembly is on, it applies power to the transponder key amplifier assembly, and magnetizes the
area around the antenna coil. The transponder chip inside the key grip uses the electromotive
force generated by this magnetism to output a key ID signal. The transponder key amplifier
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCO01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 F
assembly receives the key ID code signal, and this is boosted by the amplifier and sent to the main
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) checks whether the key ID received from the
transponder key amplifier assembly matches the registered key ID. Simultaneously, the main body
ECU (network gateway ECU) communicates with the combination meter assembly*1 or
transponder key ECU assembly*2, and checks that the ID (meter ID) registered in the combination
meter assembly*1 or transponder key ECU assembly*2 matches.
At engine start, the ECM communicates with the main body ECU (network gateway ECU), and
checks the results of the verification with the key and the combination meter assembly*1 or
transponder key ECU assembly*2. Furthermore, this checks that the ID (engine ID) registered in
the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) and the ID (engine ID) registered in the ECM match,
and if either of the IDs do not match, then the engine will be prevented from starting.
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCO01VX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000001TCR01XX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCR01XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000001TCR01XX.html?sisuffix=ff&
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
6.4 U
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000002X2W01JX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FRS)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER

(b) Measure the resistance and voltage, and check for pulses according to the value(s) in the table
below.
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
INPUT/OUTPUT
D54-7 (AGND) - Body

ground
WIRING
COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
GR - Body
ground
Ground
Always
Below 1
(c) Reconnect the D54 transponder key amplifier connector.

(d) Measure the voltage and check for pulses according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
(SYMBOL)
INPUT/OUTPUT WIRING
COLOR
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
4.5 to 5.5 V
D54-1 (VC5) D54-7 (AGND)
Input
R - GR
Transponder key
amplifier power
supply
D54-4 (CODE) D54-7 (AGND)
Output
LG - GR
Demodulated signal
of key code data

cylinder Key
inserted
Below 1 V
Pulse
generation
Output
W-G GR
Key code output

signal

cylinder Key
inserted
Below 1 V
Pulse
generation
D54-5 (TXCT) D54-7 (AGND)
GATEWAY ECU)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000002X2W01JX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/5
8/6/12
assembly.
2/5
8/6/12
TERMINAL NO.
INPUT/OUTPUT
(SYMBOL)
MB-1 (BECU) Body ground
Input
Input
MB-9 (ACC) Body ground
Input
D5-22 (KSW) Body ground
TERMINAL
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
None Body
Battery power
ground
MB-8 (IG) - Body

ground
MB-11 (GND) Body ground
WIRING
None Body
ground
None Body
ground
supply
Ignition switch
power supply
ACC power
supply
CONDITION
CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch ON
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ACC
11 to 14 V
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Always
Below 1
Always
11 to 14 V

cylinder (off)
Below 1 V
None -
Body
ground
None -
Input
Input
Body
ground
BR - Body
ground
Ground
Battery power
supply
Unlock warning
switch input
Key inserted ignition

key cylinder (on)
D6-1 (GND) Body ground

A73-4 (GND) Body ground
SPECIFIED
B - Body
ground
B-Y - Body
ground
11 to 14 V
Ground
Always
Below 1
Ground
Always
Below 1
assembly.
(f) Measure the resistance and voltage, and check for pulses according to the value(s) in the table
below.
TERMINAL NO.
INPUT/OUTPUT WIRING
(SYMBOL)
A73-5 (CODE) Body ground
A73-9 (IMO) Body ground
Input
Input / output
TERMINAL
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
LG -
Demodulated
Below 1 V
Body
ground
signal of key code

data
cylinder Key
inserted
Pulse
generation
Ignition switch off
Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON
Pulse
generation
Y - Body
ground
EFI communication
CONDITION
3/5
8/6/12
A73-8 (VC5) -
R - Body
Output
Body ground
ground
W -
A73-15 (TXCT) -
Body ground
Input / output
Body ground*
4.5 to 5.5 V
Below 1 V
cylinder Key
Pulse
inserted
generation
Always
Below 1

cylinder Key
Below 1 V
Pulse
inserted
generation
signal
Transponder key
Body
ground
A73-17 (UART) -
Ignition switch ON
supply
ground
GR -
A73-16 (AGND) -
amplifier power
Key code output
Body
Input
Body ground
Transponder key
SB Body
amplifier ground
Transponder key
ground
ECU communication
*: w/ Transponder Key ECU Assembly
3. CHECK TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the A64 transponder key ECU assembly connector.

TERMINAL NO.
INPUT/OUTPUT
WIRING
TERMINAL
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
L-R - Body
Battery power
ground
supply
(SYMBOL)
A64-1 (+B) - Body
ground
A64-5 (GND) - Body
ground
Input
B-Y - Body
ground
Ground
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Always
11 to 14 V
Always
Below 1
(c) Reconnect the A64 transponder key ECU assembly connector.

(d) Measure the voltage and check for pulses according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO.
INPUT/OUTPUT WIRING
TERMINAL
CONDITION
SPECIFIED
4/5
8/6/12
(SYMBOL)
A64-3 (UART) A64-5 (GND)
COLOR
Input/Output
SB - B-Y
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
Main body ECU
communication
cylinder Key inserted
Below 1 V
Pulse
generation
4. CHECK ECM
(a) Measure the resistance and voltage, and check for pulses according to the value(s) in the table
below.
TERMINAL NO.
INPUT/OUTPUT
(SYMBOL)
WIRING
TERMINAL
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
CONDITION
Ignition
A33-1 (+B2) - A36-4
Input
(E01)
V - B-L
Battery power
supply
switch off
Ignition
switch ON
A33-2 (BATT) - A364 (E01)
Input
W - B-L
Battery power
supply
Always
Ignition
A34-6 (+B) - A36-4

(E01)
Input
V - B-L
Battery power
switch off
supply
Ignition
switch ON
Ignition
A35-25 (IMO) - A364 (E01)
A36-4 (E01) - Body

ground
Input/Output
Y - B-L
B-L - Body
ground
SPECIFIED
CONDITION
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
11 to 14 V
Below 1 V
Main body ECU
switch off
communication
Ignition
switch ON
Pulse
generation
Ground
Always
Below 1
5/5
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003YO000SX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YO000SX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YO000SX.html?sisuffix=ff
2/2
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003YNY00WX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(b) Attach the 2 claws to install the transponder key amplifier.

https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YNY00WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000003YO100WX
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective tape, detach the 2 claws and remove the
transponder key amplifier.
*1
Protective Tape
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000003YO100WX.html?sisuffix=ff
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
6.4 K
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Doc ID: RM000004IP2004X
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/document/rm/RM20S0U/xhtml/RM000004IP2004X.html?sisuffix=ff&l
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSEMBLY
(b) Install the transponder key ECU assembly with the 2 nuts.
3. REGISTER ECU CODE

(a) Register the ECU code
1/1
8/6/12
THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
6.4 A
From: 201203
Model Year: 2013
Model: FR-S
Title: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TRANSPONDER KEY ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSEMBLY

(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the transponder key ECU
assembly.
1/1

2013 Scion FR-S Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Scion FR-S Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: COMPONENTS (2013 ...

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM000001PZR01CX

Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)

AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: INSTALLATION (2013...

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM000001PZQ01TX

Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

2. INSTALL AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

(b) Place the amplifier antenna cord in the amplifier antenna

(c) Install the amplifier antenna assembly with the nut.

Amplifier Antenna Cord

3. INSTALL ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM000001PZS01UX

Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)

2. REMOVE ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the connector.

(b) Remove the nut.

(c) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the amplifier antenna

4. REMOVE NO. 3 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)

AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCA...

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM0000012A606KX

AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCA...

AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DI...

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM0000012AB0ADX

AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DI...

AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: COMPONENTS (201...

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM000001PZ301FX

Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)

AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSPECTION (2013 ...

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM0000020Q204DX

Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)

If the result is not as specified, replace the speaker.

Component without harness connected

AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSTALLATION (201...

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM000001PZ201QX

Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)

1. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

(b) Connect the connector.

2. INSTALL FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

5. INSPECT POWER WINDOW OPERATION

AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)

Last Modified: 8-1-2012

Model Year: 2013

Doc ID: RM000001PZ401QX

Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)

1. REMOVE DOOR ARMREST COVER

(a) Disconnect the connector.